This is a modern-English version of The Legends and Myths of Hawaii: The fables and folk-lore of a strange people, originally written by Kalakaua, David, King of Hawaii.
It has been thoroughly updated, including changes to sentence structure, words, spelling,
and grammar—to ensure clarity for contemporary readers, while preserving the original spirit and nuance. If
you click on a paragraph, you will see the original text that we modified, and you can toggle between the two versions.
Scroll to the bottom of this page and you will find a free ePUB download link for this book.


Kalakaua
Kalākaua


OF
HAWAII.
OF A
STRANGE PEOPLE.
CHARLES L. WEBSTER & COMPANY.
1888.
Copyright, 1887,
Copyright, 1887,
By CHARLES L. WEBSTER & CO.
By CHARLES L. WEBSTER & CO.
H. J. HEWITT, PRINTER AND ELECTROTYPER, 37 ROSE ST., N. Y. [5]
H. J. HEWITT, PRINTER AND ELECTROTYPER, 37 ROSE ST., N.Y. [__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]
PREFACE.
For material in the compilation of many of the legends embraced in this volume obligation is acknowledged to H. R. H. Liliuokalani; General John Owen Dominis; His Excellency Walter M. Gibson; Professor W. D. Alexander; Mrs. E. Beckley, Government Librarian; Mr. W. James Smith, Secretary of the National Board of Education; and especially to Hon. Abram Fornander, the learned author of “An Account of the Polynesian Race, its Origin and Migrations.”
For the material included in the collection of many of the legends in this volume, we acknowledge the contributions of H. R. H. Liliuokalani; General John Owen Dominis; His Excellency Walter M. Gibson; Professor W. D. Alexander; Mrs. E. Beckley, Government Librarian; Mr. W. James Smith, Secretary of the National Board of Education; and especially Hon. Abram Fornander, the knowledgeable author of “An Account of the Polynesian Race, its Origin and Migrations.”
The legends, in the order of their publication, beginning with the first and ending with “The Destruction of the Temples,” may be regarded, so far as they refer to the prominent political events with which they are associated, as in a measure historic. Those following have been selected as the most striking and characteristic of what remains of the fabulous folk-lore of the Hawaiian group. [6]
The legends, listed by their publication order, starting with the first one and ending with “The Destruction of the Temples,” can be seen as somewhat historical, especially in relation to the major political events they are linked to. The following legends have been chosen for being the most vivid and representative of the rich folklore from the Hawaiian group. [__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]
[7]
[__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]
CONTENTS.
PAGE | ||||||||
Preface. | 5 | |||||||
Hawaiian Legends: Introduction. | 9–65 | |||||||
Hina, the Helen of Hawaii. | 67–94 | |||||||
The Royal Hunchback. | 95–113 | |||||||
The Triple Marriage of Laa-mai-kahiki. | 115–135 | |||||||
The Apotheosis of Pele. | 137–154 | |||||||
Hua, King of Hana. | 155–173 | |||||||
The Iron Knife. | 175–205 | |||||||
The Sacred Spear-Point. | 207–225 | |||||||
Kelea, the Surf-Rider of Maui. | 227–246 | |||||||
Umi, the Peasant Prince of Hawaii. | 247–315 | |||||||
Lono and Kaikilani. | 317–331 | |||||||
The Adventures of Iwikauikaua. | 333–349 | |||||||
The Prophecies of Keaulumoku. | 351–367 | |||||||
The Cannibals of Halemanu. | 369–380 | |||||||
Kaiana, the Last of the Hawaiian Knights. | 381–408 | |||||||
Kaala, the Flower of Lanai. | 409–427 | |||||||
The Destruction of the Temples. | 429–446 | |||||||
The Tomb of Puupehe. | 447–452 | |||||||
The Story of Laieikawai. | 453–480 | |||||||
Lohiau, the Lover of a Goddess. | 481–497 | |||||||
Kahavari, Chief of Puna. | 499–507 | |||||||
Kahalaopuna, the Princess of Manoa. | 509–522 | |||||||
Appendix. | 523–530 |
[11]
[__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]
The Legends and Myths of Hawaii.
HAWAIIAN LEGENDS: INTRODUCTION.
Physical Characteristics of the Hawaiian Islands—Historic Outlines—The Tabu—Ancient Religion—Ancient Government—Ancient Arts, Habits and Customs—The Hawaii of To-day.
Physical Characteristics of the Hawaiian Islands—Historic Overviews—The Taboo—Ancient Religion—Ancient Government—Ancient Arts, Habits, and Customs—Hawaii Today.
GENERAL RETROSPECT.
The legends following are of a group of sunny islands lying almost midway between Asia and America—a cluster of volcanic craters and coral-reefs, where the mountains are mantled in perpetual green and look down upon valleys of eternal spring; where for two-thirds of the year the trade-winds, sweeping down from the northwest coast of America and softened in their passage southward, dally with the stately cocoas and spreading palms, and mingle their cooling breath with the ever-living fragrance of fruit and blossom. Deeply embosomed in the silent wastes of the broad Pacific, with no habitable land nearer than two thousand miles, these islands greet the eye of the approaching mariner like a shadowy paradise, suddenly lifted from the blue depths by the malicious spirits of the world of waters, either to lure him to his destruction or disappear as he drops his anchor by the enchanted shore.
The following legends are about a group of sunny islands located almost halfway between Asia and America—a cluster of volcanic craters and coral reefs, where the mountains are covered in lush greenery and overlook valleys that experience endless spring. For two-thirds of the year, the trade winds, coming down from the northwest coast of America and softened as they travel south, playfully blow through the towering coconut trees and sprawling palms, mixing their refreshing breeze with the ever-present scent of fruits and flowers. Nestled deep in the quiet expanse of the vast Pacific, with no land in sight for at least two thousand miles, these islands welcome the gaze of approaching sailors like a hidden paradise, suddenly rising from the blue depths by the mischievous spirits of the ocean, either to entice him to his doom or vanish as he drops anchor on the enchanted shore.

Mahiole, or Feathered War-Helmet.
Mahiole, or Feathered War Helmet.
The legends are of a little archipelago which was unknown to the civilized world until the closing years of the last century, and of a people who for many centuries exchanged no word or product with the rest of mankind; who had lost all knowledge, save the little retained by the dreamiest of legends, of the great world beyond their island home; whose origin may be traced to the ancient Cushites of Arabia, and whose legends repeat the story of the Jewish genesis; who developed and passed through [12]an age of chivalry somewhat more barbarous, perhaps, but scarcely less affluent in deeds of enterprise and valor than that which characterized the contemporaneous races of the continental world; whose chiefs and priests claimed kinship with the gods, and step by step told back their lineage not only to him who rode the floods, but to the sinning pair whose re-entrance to the forfeited joys of Paradise was prevented by the large, white bird of Kane; who fought without shields and went to their death without fear; whose implements of war and industry were of wood, stone and bone, yet who erected great temples to their gods, and constructed barges and canoes which they navigated by the stars; who peopled the elements with spirits, reverenced the priesthood, bowed to the revelations of their prophets, and submitted without complaint to the oppressions of the tabu; who observed the rite of circumcision, built places of refuge after the manner of the ancient Israelites, and held sacred the religious legends of the priests and chronological meles of the chiefs.
The legends tell of a little archipelago that remained unknown to the civilized world until the end of the last century, and of a people who, for many centuries, had no contact or trade with the rest of humanity; who had lost all knowledge, except for bits preserved in their dreamy legends, about the vast world beyond their island home; whose origins can be traced back to the ancient Cushites of Arabia, and whose stories echo the tale of the Jewish creation; who went through [__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__] an age of chivalry that was perhaps more barbaric, but hardly less rich in acts of adventure and bravery than that of their contemporaries on the mainland; whose leaders and priests claimed to be related to the gods and traced their lineage back not only to the one who rode the waves but also to the sinful couple whose return to the lost joys of Paradise was blocked by the great, white bird of Kane; who fought without shields and faced death fearlessly; whose tools for war and everyday life were made of wood, stone, and bone, yet who built magnificent temples for their gods and made barges and canoes that they navigated by the stars; who filled the elements with spirits, respected their priests, heeded the revelations of their prophets, and accepted without complaint the burdens of the tabu; who practiced circumcision, built places of refuge like the ancient Israelites, and held sacred the religious legends of their priests and the chronological meles of their chiefs.
As the mind reverts to the past of the Hawaiian group, and dwells for a moment upon the shadowy history of its people, mighty forms rise and disappear—men of the stature of eight or nine feet, crowned with helmets of feathers and bearing spears thirty feet in length. Such men were Kiha, and Liloa, and Umi, and Lono, all kings of Hawaii during the fifteenth and sixteenth centuries; and little less in bulk and none the less in valor was the great Kamehameha, who conquered and consolidated the several islands under one government, and died as late as 1819. And beside Umi, whose life was a romance, stands his humble [14]friend Maukaleoleo, who, with his feet upon the ground, could reach the cocoanuts of standing trees; and back of him in the past is seen Kana, the son of Hina, whose height was measured by paces.
As the mind drifts back to the history of the Hawaiian Islands and reflects for a moment on the mysterious past of its people, impressive figures emerge and fade away—men standing eight or nine feet tall, wearing feathered helmets and carrying spears that are thirty feet long. These men were Kiha, Liloa, Umi, and Lono, all kings of Hawaii during the fifteenth and sixteenth centuries; and almost as large and equally brave was the great Kamehameha, who unified the various islands under one government and died as recently as 1819. Next to Umi, whose life was like a storybook, is his modest friend Maukaleoleo, who could reach the coconuts from standing trees with his feet on the ground; and further back in history is Kana, the son of Hina, whose height was measured by his strides.
GROUP OF ANCIENT WEAPONS.
ANCIENT WEAPONS COLLECTION.

War-Club.
War Club.

Pahoa, or Wooden Dagger.
Pahoa, or Wooden Dagger.

Shark’s-Teeth Knife.
Shark Tooth Knife.

Flint-edged Knife.
Flint knife.

Stone Battle-Axe.
Stone Battle Axe.

Stone Battle-Axe.
Stone Battle Axe.

Ihe, or Javelin, 6 to 8 feet long.
Ihe, or Javelin, is 6 to 8 feet long.

Spear, 16 to 20 feet long.
Spear, 16 to 20 feet long.
And, glancing still farther backward through the centuries, we behold adventurous chiefs, in barges and double canoes a hundred feet in length, making the journey between the Hawaiian and more southern groups, guided only by the sun and stars. Later we see battles, with dusky thousands in line. The warriors are naked to the loins, and are armed with spears, slings, clubs, battle-axes, javelins and knives of wood or ivory. They have neither bows nor shields. They either catch with their hands or ward with their own the weapons that are thrown. Their chiefs, towering above them in stature, have thrown off their gaudy feather cloaks and helmets, and, with spear and stone halberd, are at the front of battle. The opposing forces are so disposed as to present a right and left wing and centre, the king or principal chief commanding the latter in person. In the rear of each hostile line are a large number of women with calabashes of food and water with which to refresh their battling fathers, husbands and brothers. While the battle rages their wails, cries and prayers are incessant, and when defeat menaces their friends they here and there take part in the combat. The augurs have been consulted, sacrifices and promises to the gods have been made, and, as the warring lines approach, the war-gods of the opposing chiefs, newly decorated and attended by long-haired priests, are borne to the front. War-cries and shouts of defiance follow. The priests retire, and the slingers open the battle. Spears are thrown, and soon the struggle is hand-to-hand all over the field. They fight in groups and squads around their chiefs and leaders, who range the field in search of enemies worthy of their weapons. No quarter is given or expected. The first prisoners taken are reserved as offerings to the gods, and are regarded as the most precious of sacrifices. Finally the leading chief of one of the opposing armies falls. A desperate struggle over his body ensues, and his dispirited followers begin to give ground and are soon in retreat. Some escape to a stronghold in the neighboring mountains, and a few, perhaps, to a temple of refuge; but the most of them are overtaken and slain. The prisoners who are spared become the [15]slaves of their captors, and the victory is celebrated with feasting and bountiful sacrifices to the gods.
And, looking further back through the centuries, we see adventurous chiefs in barges and double canoes that are a hundred feet long, making the journey between the Hawaiian islands and the southern groups, guided only by the sun and stars. Later, we witness battles, with dusky thousands lined up. The warriors are bare from the waist down and are armed with spears, slings, clubs, battle-axes, javelins, and wooden or ivory knives. They have no bows or shields. They either catch the thrown weapons with their hands or deflect them themselves. Their chiefs, towering above the rest, have removed their colorful feather cloaks and helmets and, wielding spears and stone halberds, are at the front of the battle. The opposing forces are arranged to form right and left wings and a center, with the king or main chief leading the latter in person. Behind each opposing line is a large group of women carrying calabashes of food and water to refresh their battling fathers, husbands, and brothers. As the battle rages on, their wails, cries, and prayers are constant, and when defeat threatens their loved ones, they occasionally join in the fight. The soothsayers have been consulted, sacrifices and promises to the gods have been made, and as the warring lines get closer, the war-gods of the opposing chiefs, newly decorated and accompanied by long-haired priests, are brought to the front. War cries and shouts of defiance follow. The priests retreat, and the slingers begin the battle. Spears are thrown, and soon it becomes a hand-to-hand struggle all over the field. They fight in groups and squads around their chiefs and leaders, who roam the field looking for worthy enemies. No mercy is given or expected. The first prisoners taken are saved as offerings to the gods and are viewed as the most valuable sacrifices. Eventually, the leading chief of one of the opposing armies falls. A desperate struggle for his body ensues, and his demoralized followers begin to lose ground and soon retreat. Some escape to a stronghold in the nearby mountains, and a few, perhaps, to a refuge temple; but most are caught and killed. The spared prisoners become the [__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]slaves of their captors, and the victory is celebrated with feasting and abundant sacrifices to the gods.
This is a representative battle of the past, either for the supremacy of rival chiefs or in repelling invasion from a neighboring island. But here and there we catch glimpses of actual conflicts indicative of the warlike spirit and chivalry of the early Hawaiians. Far back in the past we see the beautiful Hina abducted from her Hawaiian husband by a prince of Molokai, and kept a prisoner in the fortress of Haupu until her sons grow to manhood, when she is rescued at the end of an assault which leaves the last of her defenders dead. Later we see the eight hundred helmeted chiefs of the king of Hawaii, all of noble blood, hurling themselves to destruction against the spears of the armies of Maui on the plains of Wailuku. And then, less than a generation after, Kamehameha is seen in the last battle of the conquest, when, at the head of sixteen thousand warriors, he sweeps the Oahuan army over the precipice of Nuuanu and becomes the master of the archipelago. Finally we behold Kekuaokalani, the last defender in arms of the Hawaiian gods and temples, trampling upon the edict of the king against the worship of his fathers, and dying, with his faithful wife Manono, on the field of Kuamoo.
This is a classic battle from the past, either for the dominance of rival leaders or to fend off invasion from a nearby island. Here and there, we get glimpses of actual conflicts that showcase the warrior spirit and honor of the early Hawaiians. Long ago, we see the beautiful Hina taken from her Hawaiian husband by a prince of Molokai, held captive in the fortress of Haupu until her sons grow up, and she is rescued after a battle that leaves the last of her defenders dead. Later, we witness the eight hundred helmeted chiefs of the king of Hawaii, all of noble lineage, charging to their deaths against the spears of the Maui armies on the fields of Wailuku. Then, less than a generation later, we see Kamehameha in the final battle of his conquest, leading sixteen thousand warriors as they drive the Oahuan army over the cliffs of Nuuanu, making him the ruler of the islands. Ultimately, we see Kekuaokalani, the last defender of the Hawaiian gods and temples, ignoring the king’s decree against the worship of his ancestors, and dying alongside his loyal wife Manono on the battlefield of Kuamoo.
In the midst of these scenes of blood the eye rests with relief upon numerous episodes of love, friendship and self-sacrifice touching with a softening color the ruddy canvas of the past. We see Kanipahu, the exiled king of Hawaii, delving like a common laborer on a neighboring island, and refusing to accept anew the sceptre in his old age because his back had become crooked with toil and he could no longer look over the heads of his subjects as became a Hawaiian king. We see Umi, a rustic youth of royal mien and mighty proportions, boldly leap the palace-walls of the great Liloa, push aside the spears of the guards, enter the royal mansion, seat himself in the lap of the king, and through the exhibition of a forgotten token of love receive instant recognition as his son. And now Lono, the royal great-grandson of Umi, rises before us, and we see him lured from self-exile by the voice of his queen, reaching him in secret from without the walls of the sovereign court of Oahu, to return to Hawaii and triumph over his enemies. These and many other romantic incidents present themselves in connection with the [16]early Hawaiian kings and princes, and are offered in the succeeding pages with every detail of interest afforded by available tradition.
In the middle of these bloody scenes, the eye finds relief in many moments of love, friendship, and self-sacrifice, adding a softer tone to the harsh history. We see Kanipahu, the exiled king of Hawaii, working like a common laborer on a nearby island, refusing to take up the crown again in his old age because his back has become bent from hard work, preventing him from looking over the heads of his subjects as a Hawaiian king should. We see Umi, a country youth with a royal appearance and impressive size, boldly leap over the walls of the great Liloa's palace, push aside the guards' spears, enter the royal residence, sit in the king's lap, and, by showing a forgotten token of love, is instantly recognized as his son. And now Lono, the royal great-grandson of Umi, stands before us, drawn back from self-exile by the voice of his queen, calling to him in secret from outside the walls of the royal court of Oahu, urging him to return to Hawaii and triumph over his enemies. These and many other romantic stories are related to the [__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]early Hawaiian kings and princes, and are presented in the following pages with all the details of interest provided by available tradition.
PHYSICAL CHARACTERISTICS.
A few general remarks concerning the physical characteristics of the Hawaiian Islands would seem to be appropriate in presenting a collection of legends dealing alike with the history and folk-lore of their people. The islands occupy a place in a great waste of the Pacific between the nineteenth and twenty-third degrees of north latitude, and the one hundred and fifty-fourth and one hundred and sixty-first degrees of longitude west from Greenwich. They are two thousand one hundred miles southwest from San Francisco, and about the same distance from Tahiti.
A few general comments about the physical characteristics of the Hawaiian Islands seem fitting when presenting a collection of legends related to both the history and folklore of their people. The islands are located in a vast area of the Pacific, between the nineteenth and twenty-third degrees of north latitude, and the one hundred and fifty-fourth and one hundred and sixty-first degrees of longitude west of Greenwich. They are two thousand one hundred miles southwest of San Francisco and about the same distance from Tahiti.
The group consists of ten islands, including two that are little more than barren rocks. The farthest are about three hundred miles from each other, measuring from their extreme boundaries, and their aggregate area is a little more than six thousand one hundred square miles. Of the eight principal islands all are habitable, although the small islands of Niihau and Kahoolawe are used almost exclusively as cattle-ranges.
The group has ten islands, including two that are barely more than barren rocks. The farthest ones are about three hundred miles apart at their furthest points, and their total area is just over six thousand one hundred square miles. Of the eight main islands, all are livable, although the small islands of Niihau and Kahoolawe are mostly used as cattle ranches.
The most of the shores of the several islands are fringed with coral, but their origin seems to be indisputably shown in the numerous craters of extinct volcanoes scattered throughout the group, and in the mighty fires still blazing from the mountain-heights of Hawaii.
Most of the shores of the various islands are lined with coral, but their origin is clearly indicated by the many craters of dormant volcanoes found throughout the group, and by the powerful eruptions still occurring from the high peaks of Hawaii.
By far the larger part of the area of the islands is mountainous; but from the interior elevations, some of them reaching altitudes of from ten to fourteen thousand feet, flow many small streams of sweet water, widening into fertile valleys as they reach the coast, while here and there between them alluvial plateaus have been left by the upland wash.
Most of the islands are mountainous; however, from the higher areas, some of which rise between ten and fourteen thousand feet, many small streams of fresh water flow, expanding into fertile valleys as they reach the coast. In certain spots, alluvial plateaus remain from the wash of the uplands.
With rare exceptions the mountain-sides are covered with vegetation, some of sturdy growth, capable of being wrought into building materials and canoes, while lower down the ohia, the palm, the banana, and the bread-fruit stand clothed in perpetual green, with groves of stately cocoas between them and the sea.
With rare exceptions, the mountain slopes are covered in vegetation, some of which is strong enough to be made into building materials and canoes. Lower down, the ohia, palm trees, bananas, and breadfruit thrive in constant green, with tall cocoa trees positioned between them and the sea.
Once the fragrant sandal-wood was abundant in the mountains, but it became an article of commerce with the natives in [17]their early intercourse with the white races, and is now rarely seen. Once the valleys and plateaus were covered with growing taro and potatoes; now the cane and rice of the foreigner have usurped the places of both, and in the few shaded spots that have been left him the forgiving and revengeless Hawaiian sadly chants his wild songs of the past.
Once, fragrant sandalwood was plentiful in the mountains, but it became a commercial item for the locals during their early interactions with white settlers, and now it’s rarely found. The valleys and plateaus used to be filled with growing taro and potatoes; now, the cane and rice brought by outsiders have taken their places. In the few shaded areas that remain, the forgiving and peaceful Hawaiians sadly sing their wild songs of the past.
Neither within the memory of men nor the reach of their legends, which extend back more than a thousand years, has there been an active volcano in the group beyond the large island of Hawaii, which embraces two-thirds of the solid area of the archipelago. The mighty crater of Haleakala, more than thirty miles in circumference, on the island of Maui, has slept in peace among the clouds for ages, and hundreds of lesser and lower craters, many of them covered with vegetation, are found scattered among the mountains and foot-hills of the group; but their fires have long been extinct, and the scoria and ashes buried at their bases tell the story of their activity far back in the past.
Neither in the memory of people nor in their legends, which go back over a thousand years, has there been an active volcano in the group beyond the large island of Hawaii, which makes up two-thirds of the land area of the archipelago. The impressive crater of Haleakala, over thirty miles around, on the island of Maui, has peacefully rested among the clouds for ages, and hundreds of smaller craters, many covered in greenery, are scattered among the mountains and foothills of the group; but their fires have been long extinguished, and the debris and ashes buried at their bases tell the story of their past activity.
It must have been a sight too grand for human eyes to witness when all these dead volcanic peaks, aglow with sulphurous flames, lit up the moonless midnights of the eight Hawaiian seas with their combined bombardment of the heavens!
It must have been a sight too incredible for human eyes to see when all these dead volcanic peaks, glowing with sulfurous flames, illuminated the moonless midnights of the eight Hawaiian seas with their collective bombardment of the sky!
On the island of Hawaii alone have the fires of nature remained unextinguished. At intervals during the past thousand years or more have Mauna Kea, Mauna Hualalai and Mauna Loa sent their devastating streams of lava to the sea, and to-day the awful, restless and ever-burning caldron of Kilauea, nearly a mile in circumference, is the grandest conflagration that lights up the earth. Within its lurid depths, in fiery grottoes and chambers of burning crystal, dwell Pele and her companions, and offerings are still thrown to them by superstitious natives. Do they yet believe in these deities after more than sixty years of Christian teaching? after their temples have been leveled and their gods have been destroyed? after their tabus have been broken and their priesthood has been dethroned and dishonored? The only answer is, “The offerings are still made.”
On the island of Hawaii, the fires of nature have remained unquenchable. Over the past thousand years or more, Mauna Kea, Mauna Hualalai, and Mauna Loa have unleashed their destructive lava flows into the sea, and today, the terrifying, restless, and ever-burning caldron of Kilauea, nearly a mile wide, is the greatest fire that illuminates the earth. Within its glowing depths, in fiery caves and chambers of burning crystal, reside Pele and her companions, and offerings are still made to them by superstitious locals. Do they still believe in these deities after more than sixty years of Christian teachings? After their temples have been destroyed and their gods have been toppled? After their tabus have been broken and their priesthood has been overthrown and dishonored? The only response is, “The offerings are still made.”
Although the channel and ocean coasts of the islands are generally bold, rocky and precipitous, there are numerous bays and indentations partially sheltered by reefs and headlands, and many stretches of smooth and yellow beach, where the waves, touched by the kona, or the trade-wind’s breath, chase each other [18]high up among the cocoa’s roots and branches of the humble hau-tree clinging to the sands. The harbor of Honolulu, on the island of Oahu, is the only one, however, where passengers and freights of ocean crafts may be received or landed without the aid of lighters.
Although the coastlines of the islands are typically bold, rocky, and steep, there are many bays and inlets that are partially sheltered by reefs and headlands, along with several stretches of smooth, yellow sand where the waves, influenced by the kona, or the trade winds, roll high among the roots and branches of the humble hau tree clinging to the shoreline. However, the harbor of Honolulu, on the island of Oahu, is the only one where passengers and cargo from ocean vessels can be directly received or unloaded without the need for lighters. [__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]
The most of the useful and ornamental growths of the tropics now flourish on the islands. The indigenous plants, however, are confined to the banana, plantain, cocoanut, breadfruit, ohia, sugar-cane, arrow-root, yam, sweet potato, taro, strawberry, raspberry and ohelo. The lime, orange, mango, tamarind, papaia, guava, and every other edible product, aside from those named as indigenous, are importations of the past century.
Most of the useful and decorative plants from the tropics now thrive on the islands. The native plants, however, are limited to banana, plantain, coconut, breadfruit, ohia, sugarcane, arrowroot, yam, sweet potato, taro, strawberry, raspberry, and ohelo. Lime, orange, mango, tamarind, papaya, guava, and all other edible products, besides those mentioned as native, are imports from the last century.
The only domestic animals of the ancient Hawaiians were dogs, swine and fowls, and the most formidable four-legged creatures found in their fields and forests were mice and lizards. Wild geese, including a species peculiar to the islands, ducks, snipe and plover were abundant in their seasons, but seem to have been sparely eaten; and owls, bats, and a few varieties of birds of simple song and not over-brilliant plumage made up about the sum total of animal life on the islands a hundred years ago. But the native could well afford to be content with this limited provision, since it did not include snakes, mosquitoes, centipedes, tarantulas, or scorpions.
The only domestic animals of the ancient Hawaiians were dogs, pigs, and chickens, and the most significant four-legged creatures in their fields and forests were mice and lizards. Wild geese, including a species unique to the islands, ducks, snipe, and plover were plentiful in their seasons, but they don’t seem to have been eaten very much; and owls, bats, and a few types of plain songbirds with dull colors made up nearly all the animal life on the islands a hundred years ago. However, the locals could be content with this limited selection since it didn’t include snakes, mosquitoes, centipedes, tarantulas, or scorpions.
To what processes of creation or isolation do the Hawaiian Islands owe their existence? Were they raised from the depths of the ocean by volcanic action, as plainly suggested by their formation? or are they a part of a great sunken continent which speculation, sustained by misty tradition, claims once occupied the Polynesian seas? Hawaiian meles mention islands no longer to be found, and the facility with which communication was maintained between the Hawaiian and more southern groups previous to the twelfth century renders plausible the assumption that this intercourse was abruptly terminated six or seven centuries ago by the disappearance of a number of intervening atolls or islands which had served as guides to early Polynesian navigators. The gigantic ruins of temples and other structures found on Easter and one or two other islands of the equatorial Pacific are almost unanswerable arguments in favor of the theory of a sunken Polynesian continent; but the question will probably never be removed beyond the field of surmise. [19]
What processes of creation or isolation led to the existence of the Hawaiian Islands? Were they formed from the ocean depths through volcanic activity, as their appearance suggests? Or are they part of a vast submerged continent, as some theories, backed by vague traditions, propose once existed in the Polynesian seas? Hawaiian meles refer to islands that can no longer be found, and the ease of communication between the Hawaiian Islands and southern groups before the twelfth century makes it likely that this exchange abruptly ended six or seven centuries ago due to the disappearance of several intervening atolls or islands that served as markers for early Polynesian navigators. The massive ruins of temples and other structures found on Easter Island and a couple of other equatorial Pacific islands provide strong evidence for the theory of a sunken Polynesian continent; however, the question will likely remain in the realm of speculation. [__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]
HISTORIC OUTLINES.
The source and early history of the Hawaiian people, and, in fact, of the Polynesian race, of which they are a part, are involved in doubt. They have generally been regarded as an offshoot of the great Malayan family; but more recent as well as more thorough investigation, particularly by Judge Fornander, the learned and conscientious historian, with reasonable conclusiveness shows the Polynesian and Malayan races to be of distinct and widely different origin.
The origins and early history of the Hawaiian people, and indeed the entire Polynesian race, are unclear. They have typically been seen as a branch of the larger Malayan family; however, recent and more thorough research, especially by Judge Fornander, the knowledgeable and dedicated historian, reasonably suggests that the Polynesian and Malayan races come from different and distinct origins.
Accepting this conclusion, we trace the strictly Polynesian tribes to an Aryan beginning, somewhere in Asia Minor or Arabia. There, in the remote past, it is assumed, they were brought in close contact with early Cushite and Chaldeo-Arabian civilizations. Subsequently drifting into India, they to some extent amalgamated with the Dravidian races, and, following the channels of the great Chaldean commerce of that period, at length found a home in the Asiatic archipelago from Sumatra to Luzon and Timor.
Accepting this conclusion, we trace the strictly Polynesian tribes to an Aryan origin, somewhere in Asia Minor or Arabia. There, in the distant past, it's assumed they came into close contact with early Cushite and Chaldeo-Arabian civilizations. Later, as they moved into India, they somewhat merged with the Dravidian races and, following the routes of the extensive Chaldean trade of that time, eventually settled in the Asian archipelago from Sumatra to Luzon and Timor.
The exact time of their settlement on the large coast islands of southern Asia cannot be definitely determined, but their legends and genealogies leave little room to doubt that it was contemporaneous with the Malay and Hindoo invasions of Sumatra, Java, and other islands of the archipelago, during the first and second centuries of the Christian era, that the Polynesians were pushed out—not at once in a body, but by families and communities covering a period of years—to the smaller and more remote islands of the Pacific.
The exact timing of their settlement on the large coastal islands of southern Asia isn't clearly established, but their stories and family histories strongly suggest that it coincided with the Malay and Hindu invasions of Sumatra, Java, and other islands in the archipelago during the first and second centuries AD. The Polynesians were gradually pushed out—not all at once, but by families and communities over a span of years—into the smaller and more isolated islands of the Pacific.
Their first general rendezvous was in the Fiji group, where they left their impress upon the native Papuans. Expelled from, or voluntarily leaving, the Fijis, after a sojourn there of several generations, the Polynesians scattered over the Pacific, occupying by stages the several groups of islands where they are now found. Moving by the way of the Samoan and Society Islands, the migratory wave did not reach the Hawaiian group until about the middle of the sixth century.
Their first general meeting spot was in the Fiji Islands, where they made an impact on the local Papuans. After being expelled or choosing to leave the Fijis, following several generations there, the Polynesians spread out across the Pacific, gradually settling in the various island groups where they are found today. Traveling through the Samoan and Society Islands, this wave of migration didn't reach the Hawaiian Islands until around the middle of the sixth century.
Nanaula, a distinguished chief, was the first to arrive from the southern islands. It is not known whether he discovered the group by being blown northward by adverse winds, or in deliberately adventuring far out upon the ocean in search of new [20]lands. In either event, he brought with him his gods, priests, prophets and astrologers, and a considerable body of followers and retainers. He was also provided with dogs, swine and fowls, and the seeds and germs of useful plants for propagation. It is probable that he found the group without human inhabitants.
Nanaula, a respected chief, was the first to arrive from the southern islands. It’s unclear whether he stumbled upon the group after being blown north by strong winds or if he intentionally set out into the ocean searching for new [__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]lands. In either case, he brought along his gods, priests, prophets, and astrologers, as well as a significant number of followers and supporters. He was also equipped with dogs, pigs, and chickens, along with seeds and plants for cultivation. It's likely that he found the group uninhabited.
During that period—probably during the life of Nanaula—other chiefs of less importance arrived with their families and followers either from Tahiti or Samoa. They came in barges and large double canoes capable of accommodating from fifty to one hundred persons each. They brought with them not only their priests and gods, but the earliest of Polynesian traditions. It is thought that none of the pioneers of the time of Nanaula ever returned to the southern islands, nor did others immediately follow the first migratory wave that peopled the Hawaiian group.
During that time—likely during Nanaula's lifetime—other less significant chiefs arrived with their families and followers from either Tahiti or Samoa. They traveled in barges and large double canoes that could hold between fifty to one hundred people each. They brought along their priests and gods, as well as some of the earliest Polynesian traditions. It's believed that none of the pioneers from Nanaula's era ever returned to the southern islands, nor did others come right after the first wave of migration that populated the Hawaiian Islands.
For thirteen or fourteen generations the first occupants of the Hawaiian Islands lived sequestered from the rest of the world, multiplying and spreading throughout the group. They erected temples to their gods, maintained their ancient religion, and yielded obedience to their chiefs. The traditions of the period are so meagre as to leave the impression that it was one of uninterrupted peace, little having been preserved beyond the genealogies of the governing chiefs.
For thirteen or fourteen generations, the first inhabitants of the Hawaiian Islands lived cut off from the rest of the world, growing in number and spreading across the islands. They built temples to their gods, practiced their ancient religion, and followed their chiefs. The records from this time are so limited that it gives the impression of a time of continuous peace, with little preserved beyond the family trees of the ruling chiefs.
But late in the tenth or early in the beginning of the eleventh century the Hawaiians were aroused from their dream of more than four centuries by the arrival of a party of adventurers from the southern islands, probably from the Society group. It was under the leadership of Nanamaoa. He was a warlike chief, and succeeded in establishing his family in power on Hawaii, Maui and Oahu. But stronger leaders were soon to follow from the south. Among the first was the high-priest Paao, from Samoa. He arrived during the reign of Kapawa, the grandson of Nanamaoa, or immediately after his death. The people were in an unsettled condition politically, and Paao, grasping the situation, either sent or returned in person to Samoa for Pili, a distinguished chief of that island. Arriving with a large following, Pili assumed the sovereignty of the island of Hawaii and founded a new dynasty. Paao became his high-priest, and somewhat disturbed the religious practices of the people by the introduction [21]of new rites and two or three new gods. However, his religion did not seem to differ greatly from that of the native priests, and from him the last of the priesthood, seven hundred years after, claimed lineage and right of place.
But late in the tenth or early in the eleventh century, the Hawaiians were jolted from their sleep of over four centuries by a group of adventurers from the southern islands, likely from the Society group. They were led by Nanamaoa, a fierce chief who managed to establish his family’s rule over Hawaii, Maui, and Oahu. However, more powerful leaders were soon to arrive from the south. Among the first was the high-priest Paao from Samoa. He came during the reign of Kapawa, the grandson of Nanamaoa, or right after his death. The people were politically unsettled, and Paao, recognizing the situation, either sent for or returned personally to Samoa for Pili, a notable chief from that island. After arriving with a large group, Pili took control of the island of Hawaii and established a new dynasty. Paao became his high-priest and somewhat disrupted the local religious practices by introducing new rituals and a couple of new gods. Nonetheless, his religion didn’t seem to differ much from that of the native priests, and from him, the last of the priesthood claimed descent and a rightful place seven hundred years later.
The intercourse thus established between the Hawaiian and southern groups by Nanamaoa, Paao and Pili continued for about one hundred and fifty years, or until the middle or close of the twelfth century. During that period several other warlike families from the south established themselves in the partial or complete sovereignty of Oahu, Maui and Kauai, and expeditions were frequent between the group and other distant islands of Polynesia. It was a season of unusual activity, and the legends of the time are filled with stories of love, conquest and perilous voyages to and from the southern islands.
The connection established between the Hawaiian and southern groups by Nanamaoa, Paao, and Pili lasted for about one hundred and fifty years, or until the middle or end of the twelfth century. During that time, several other warrior families from the south took control, either partially or completely, of Oahu, Maui, and Kauai, and there were frequent expeditions between the islands and other distant islands of Polynesia. It was a time of remarkable activity, and the legends from that era are filled with tales of love, conquest, and dangerous voyages to and from the southern islands.
In that age, when distant voyages were frequent, the Polynesians were bold and intelligent navigators. In addition to large double canoes capable of withstanding the severest weather, they possessed capacious barges, with planks corded and calked upon strong frames. They were decked over and carried ample sail. Their navigators had some knowledge of the stars; knew the prominent planets and gave them names; were acquainted with the limits of the ecliptic and situation of the equator. With these helps, and keenly watchful of the winds and currents, of ocean drifts and flights of birds, they seldom failed to reach their destination, however distant.
In that era, when long sea voyages were common, the Polynesians were brave and skilled navigators. They had large double canoes that could handle the harshest weather and also had spacious barges, built with strong frames, with planks securely fastened and sealed. These vessels were covered and equipped with plenty of sails. Their navigators understood the stars; they recognized the main planets and named them; they knew the boundaries of the ecliptic and the position of the equator. With this knowledge, and by carefully observing the winds, currents, ocean movements, and the flight paths of birds, they rarely failed to reach their destination, no matter how far away it was.
Near the close of the twelfth century all communication between the Hawaiian and southern groups suddenly ceased. Tradition offers no explanation of the cause, and conjecture can find no better reason for it than the possible disappearance at that time of a number of island landmarks which had theretofore served as guides to the mariner. The beginning of this period of isolation found the entire group, with the exception, perhaps, of Molokai and a portion of Oahu, in the possession of the southern chiefs or their descendants.
Near the end of the twelfth century, all communication between the Hawaiian and southern groups abruptly stopped. Traditions don’t explain why this happened, and speculation can only suggest that it might be due to the possible disappearance around that time of several island landmarks that had previously guided sailors. At the start of this period of isolation, the entire group, except perhaps for Molokai and part of Oahu, was under the control of the southern chiefs or their descendants.
It has been observed that the first discovery and occupation of the islands by Polynesians from the Society and Samoan groups occurred in the sixth century, and that more than four hundred years later a second migratory tide from the same and possibly other southern islands reached the coasts of Hawaii, continuing for more than a century and a half, and completely [22]changing the political, and to some extent the social, condition of the people. Although nearly five centuries elapsed between the first and second migratory influxes from the south, during which the inhabitants of the group held no communication with the rest of the world, it is a curious fact that the Pili, Paumakua, and other chiefly families of the second influx traced back their lineage to the ancestors of the chiefs of the first migration, and made good their claim to the relationship by the recital of legends and genealogies common to both.
It has been noted that the initial discovery and settlement of the islands by Polynesians from the Society and Samoan groups happened in the sixth century, and that over four hundred years later, a second wave of migration from these and possibly other southern islands arrived on the shores of Hawaii. This migration continued for more than a century and a half, thoroughly [__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]changing the political, and to some extent, the social, landscape of the people. Even though almost five centuries passed between the first and second waves of migration from the south, during which the islanders had no contact with the outside world, it's interesting to note that the Pili, Paumakua, and other chiefly families from the second migration traced their ancestry back to the ancestors of the chiefs from the first migration, substantiating their claims of relatedness through shared legends and genealogies.

Princess Liliuokalani.
Princess Liliuokalani.
At the close of the second migratory period, which concluded their intercourse with the world beyond them for more than six hundred years, or from A.D. 1175 to 1778, the people of the group had very generally transferred their allegiance to the newly-arrived chiefs. The notable exceptions were the Maweke and Kamauaua families of Oahu and Molokai, both of the ancient Nanaula line. Although they were gradually crowded from their possessions by their more energetic invaders, the high descent of the prominent native chiefs was recognized, and by intermarriage their blood was allowed to mingle with the royal currents which have flowed down the centuries since they ceased to rule.
At the end of the second migration period, which marked their separation from the outside world for over six hundred years, from CE 1175 to 1778, the majority of the people in the group had generally shifted their loyalty to the new chiefs who had arrived. The notable exceptions were the Maweke and Kamauaua families of Oahu and Molokai, both from the ancient Nanaula line. Even though they were gradually pushed out of their lands by more assertive newcomers, the noble heritage of the leading native chiefs was acknowledged, and through intermarriage, their bloodlines were allowed to blend with the royal lineage that has continued through the centuries since they lost power.
A mere outline of the political history of the islands from the twelfth century to the nineteenth is all that will be given here. The legends following will supply much that will be omitted to avoid repetition.
A brief overview of the political history of the islands from the twelfth century to the nineteenth will be provided here. The legends that follow will fill in many details that will be left out to prevent repetition.
Until the final conquest of the group by Kamehameha I. at the close of the last century, the five principal islands of the archipelago—Hawaii, Maui, Oahu, Kauai and Molokai—were each governed, as a rule, by one or more independent chiefs. The smaller islands of Lanai and Kahoolawe were usually subject to Maui, while Niihau always shared the political fate of Kauai.
Until the final takeover of the group by Kamehameha I at the end of the last century, the five main islands of the archipelago—Hawaii, Maui, Oahu, Kauai, and Molokai—were typically ruled by one or more independent chiefs. The smaller islands of Lanai and Kahoolawe were usually under the authority of Maui, while Niihau always shared the political status of Kauai.
On each island, however, were descendants of distinguished ancient chiefs and heroes, who were recognized as of superior or royal blood, and with them originated the supreme chiefs, kings, or mois of the several islands, whose lines continued in authority, with interruptions of insurrection and royal feuds, until the consolidation of the group by Kamehameha. No one was recognized as a tabu chief unless his genealogical record showed him to be of noble blood, and intermarriage between the ruling families, [23]as well as between the lesser chiefs of the several islands, in time united the entire aristocracy of the group by ties of blood, and gave to all of royal strain a common and distinguished ancestry. The nobility and hereditary priesthood claimed to be of a stock different from that of the common people, and their superior stature and intelligence seemed to favor the assumption. To keep pure the blood of the chiefly classes, far back in the past a college of heraldry was established, before which all chiefs were required to recite their genealogies and make good their claims to noble descent.
On each island, however, there were descendants of notable ancient chiefs and heroes, acknowledged as having superior or royal lineage. From them came the supreme chiefs, kings, or mois of the various islands, whose rule persisted through periods of rebellion and royal conflict until the unification of the group by Kamehameha. No one was recognized as a tabu chief unless their family history indicated noble blood, and intermarriage among the ruling families, [__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__] as well as between the lesser chiefs of the different islands, eventually united the entire aristocracy of the group through familial ties, giving all of royal descent a common and distinguished ancestry. The nobility and hereditary priesthood claimed to be from a lineage distinct from that of the common people, and their taller stature and greater intelligence seemed to support this claim. To preserve the purity of the chiefly bloodline, a heraldry college was established long ago, where all chiefs had to present their genealogies and validate their claims to noble descent.
The legends of the group abound in stories of romantic and sanguinary internal conflicts, and political and predatory wars between the islands; but down to the time of Kamehameha but a single attempt had been made to subjugate the entire archipelago. This bold scheme was entertained by a king of the island of Hawaii who reigned during the latter part of the thirteenth century. He succeeded in overrunning Maui, Oahu and Molokai, but was defeated and taken prisoner on Kauai.
The group's legends are filled with tales of romantic and bloody internal conflicts, as well as political and aggressive wars between the islands. However, until the time of Kamehameha, there had only been one attempt to conquer the entire archipelago. This daring plan was proposed by a king from the island of Hawaii who ruled during the late thirteenth century. He managed to seize Maui, Oahu, and Molokai, but was ultimately defeated and captured on Kauai.
Without further reference to the intervening years from the twelfth century to the eighteenth—a long period of wars, festivals, tournaments, and royal and priestly pageantry—we will now glance at the condition of the islands at the time of their discovery by Captain Cook, a little more than a century ago. It was estimated that the islands then contained a population of four hundred thousand souls. This estimate has been considered large. But when it is noted that fifteen years later there were between thirty and forty thousand warriors under arms in the group at the same time, with large reserves ready for service, the conclusion is irresistible that the population could scarcely have been less. Kamehameha invaded Oahu with sixteen thousand warriors, principally drawn from the island of Hawaii. He was opposed by eight or ten thousand spears, while as many more awaited his arrival on Kauai. According to the figures of the Rev. Mr. Ellis, who travelled around the island of Hawaii in 1821 and numbered the dwellings and congregations addressed by him in the several coast districts through which he passed, the number of people on that island alone could not have been less than one hundred and fifteen thousand.
Without going into the years from the twelfth century to the eighteenth—a long time filled with wars, festivals, tournaments, and grand displays by royalty and clergy—we will now take a look at the state of the islands when Captain Cook discovered them a little over a century ago. It was estimated that the islands had a population of four hundred thousand people at that time. This estimate has been thought to be high. However, considering that fifteen years later there were between thirty and forty thousand warriors actively engaged in the group, with many more ready to fight, it’s clear that the population was likely not less than that. Kamehameha invaded Oahu with sixteen thousand warriors, mostly from the island of Hawaii. He faced eight to ten thousand warriors, with an equal number waiting for him on Kauai. According to Rev. Mr. Ellis, who traveled around the island of Hawaii in 1821 and counted the homes and gatherings he visited in the coast districts, the population on that island alone must have been at least one hundred and fifteen thousand.
At the time of the arrival of Captain Cook, Kalaniopuu, of the ancient line of Pili, was king of the large island of Hawaii, [24]and also maintained possession of a portion of the island of Maui. Kahekili, “the thunderer,” as his name implied, was moi of Maui, and the principal wife of Kalaniopuu was his sister. Kahahana, who was also related to Kahekili, was the king of Oahu and claimed possession of Molokai and Lanai. Kamakahelei was the nominal queen of Kauai and Niihau, and her husband was a younger brother to Kahekili, while she was related to the royal family of Hawaii. Thus, it will be seen, the reigning families of the several islands of the group were all related to each other, as well by marriage as by blood. So had it been for many generations. But their wars with each other were none the less vindictive because of their kinship, or attended with less of barbarity in their hours of triumph.
At the time Captain Cook arrived, Kalaniopuu, from the ancient line of Pili, was king of the large island of Hawaii, [__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__] and also controlled part of the island of Maui. Kahekili, known as “the thunderer,” was the king of Maui, and his principal wife was his sister, Kalaniopuu. Kahahana, who was also related to Kahekili, was the king of Oahu and claimed Molokai and Lanai. Kamakahelei was the nominal queen of Kauai and Niihau, and her husband was a younger brother of Kahekili, while she was connected to the royal family of Hawaii. As you can see, the ruling families of the different islands were all related by both marriage and blood. This had been the case for many generations. However, their wars with each other were just as fierce despite their kinship, and their triumphs were marked by just as much brutality.
At that time Kahekili was plotting for the downfall of Kahahana and the seizure of Oahu and Molokai, and the queen of Kauai was disposed to assist him in these enterprises. The occupation of the Hana district of Maui by the kings of Hawaii had been the cause of many stubborn conflicts between the chivalry of the two islands, and when Captain Cook first landed on Hawaii he found the king of that island absent on another warlike expedition to Maui, intent upon avenging his defeat of two years before, when his famous brigade of eight hundred nobles was hewn in pieces.
At that time, Kahekili was scheming to take down Kahahana and seize Oahu and Molokai, and the queen of Kauai was willing to help him in these plans. The king of Hawaii's control over the Hana district of Maui had led to many fierce battles between the warriors of the two islands, and when Captain Cook first arrived on Hawaii, he found the king of that island away on another military campaign to Maui, determined to avenge his defeat from two years earlier, when his renowned force of eight hundred nobles was slaughtered.
Connected with the court of Kalaniopuu at that time was a silent and taciturn chief, who had thus far attracted but little attention as a military leader. He was a man of gigantic mould, and his courage and prowess in arms were undoubted; yet he seldom smiled or engaged in the manly sports so attractive to others, and his friends were the few who discerned in him a slumbering greatness which subsequently gave him a name and fame second to no other in Hawaiian history. He was the reputed and accepted son of Keoua, the half-brother of Kalaniopuu, although it was believed by many that his real father was Kahekili, moi of Maui. But, however this may have been, he was of royal blood, and was destined to become not only the king of Hawaii, but the conqueror and sovereign of the group. This chief was Kamehameha.
Connected with the court of Kalaniopuu at that time was a quiet and reserved chief, who had so far drawn little attention as a military leader. He was a man of enormous stature, and his bravery and skills in battle were unquestionable; yet he rarely smiled or took part in the athletic competitions that others found appealing, and his friends were the few who recognized in him a dormant greatness that later earned him a reputation and legacy unmatched in Hawaiian history. He was widely regarded and accepted as the son of Keoua, the half-brother of Kalaniopuu, although many believed his true father was Kahekili, moi of Maui. Regardless of the truth, he was of royal lineage and was destined to become not only the king of Hawaii, but also the conqueror and ruler of the islands. This chief was Kamehameha.
Such, in brief, was the political condition of the islands when Captain Cook arrived. He was an officer in the English navy, and, with the war-ships Resolution and Discovery, was on a voyage [25]in search of a northwest passage eastward from Behring’s Straits. Leaving the Society group in December, 1777, on the 18th of the following month he sighted Oahu and Kauai. Landing on the latter island and Niihau, he was received as a god by the natives, and his ships were provided with everything they required. Without then visiting the other islands of the group, he left for the northwest coast of America on the 2d of February, 1778, and in November of that year returned to the islands, first sighting the shores of Molokai and Maui. Communicating with the wondering natives of the latter island, he sailed around the coasts of Hawaii, and on the 17th of January dropped his anchors in Kealakeakua Bay. He was hailed as a reincarnation of their god Lono by the people, and the priests conducted him to their temples and accorded him divine honors. Returning from his campaign in Maui, the king visited and treated him as a god, and his ships were bountifully supplied with pigs, fowls, vegetables and fruits. The ships left the bay on the 4th of February, but, meeting with a storm, returned on the 8th for repairs. Petty bickerings soon after occurred between the natives and white sailors, and on the 13th one of the ships’ boats was stolen by a chief and broken up for its nails and other iron fastenings. Cook demanded its restoration, and, while endeavoring to take the king on board the Resolution as a prisoner, was set upon by the natives and slain. Fire was opened by the ships, and many natives, including four or five chiefs, were killed. The body of Cook was borne off by the natives, but the most of the bones were subsequently returned at the request of Captain King, and the vessels soon after left the island.
Such, in short, was the political situation of the islands when Captain Cook arrived. He was an officer in the British navy, and, with the warships Resolution and Discovery, was on a voyage [__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__] searching for a northwest passage eastward from Bering’s Straits. Leaving the Society Islands in December 1777, he sighted Oahu and Kauai on the 18th of the following month. Landing on Niihau and Kauai, he was treated as a god by the locals, and his ships were supplied with everything they needed. Without visiting the other islands in the group, he left for the northwest coast of America on February 2, 1778, and returned to the islands in November of that year, first sighting the shores of Molokai and Maui. Interacting with the amazed natives of Maui, he sailed around the coasts of Hawaii, and on January 17, he anchored in Kealakeakua Bay. The people hailed him as a reincarnation of their god Lono, and the priests brought him to their temples, treating him with divine honors. After returning from his mission in Maui, the king visited him and treated him as a god, and his ships were generously supplied with pigs, chickens, vegetables, and fruits. The ships left the bay on February 4, but after encountering a storm, they returned on the 8th for repairs. Soon after, minor conflicts broke out between the natives and the white sailors, and on the 13th, a chief stole one of the ship's boats and dismantled it for its nails and other iron parts. Cook demanded its return, and while trying to take the king on board the Resolution as a prisoner, he was attacked by the natives and killed. The ships opened fire, resulting in many natives, including four or five chiefs, being killed. The natives took Cook's body, but most of the bones were later returned at Captain King's request, and the ships soon left the island.
If Captain Cook was not the first of European navigators to discover the Hawaiian Islands, he was at least the first to chart and make their existence known to the world. It has been pretty satisfactorily established that Juan Gaetano, the captain of a Spanish galleon sailing from the Mexican coast to the Spice Islands, discovered the group as early as 1555. But he did not make his discovery known at the time, and the existence of an old manuscript chart in the archives of the Spanish government is all that remains to attest his claim to it.
If Captain Cook wasn't the first European navigator to find the Hawaiian Islands, he was definitely the first to map them and let the world know they existed. It's been fairly well established that Juan Gaetano, the captain of a Spanish galleon traveling from the Mexican coast to the Spice Islands, discovered the islands as early as 1555. However, he didn't announce his discovery at the time, and the only evidence of his claim is an old manuscript map kept in the archives of the Spanish government.
Native traditions mention the landing of small parties of white men on two or three occasions during the latter part of the sixteenth century; but if the faces and ships of other races [26]were seen by the Hawaiians in the time of Gaetano, their descendants had certainly lost all knowledge of both two hundred or more years later, for Cook was welcomed as a supernatural being by the awe-stricken islanders, and his ships were described by them as floating islands. A simple iron nail was to them a priceless jewel, and every act and word betrayed an utter ignorance of everything pertaining to the white races.
Native traditions note that small groups of white men landed on a couple of occasions during the late sixteenth century; however, if the Hawaiians had seen the faces and ships of other races [__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__] during Gaetano's time, their descendants had definitely lost all memory of it over two hundred years later. Cook was greeted as a supernatural being by the amazed islanders, and they described his ships as floating islands. A simple iron nail was like a priceless jewel to them, and every action and word revealed their complete ignorance of anything related to white people.
Kalaniopuu, the king of Hawaii, died in 1782, and Kamehameha, through the assistance of three or four prominent chiefs, succeeded, after a struggle of more than ten years, in securing to himself the supreme authority over that island. This done, encouraged by the prophets, assisted by his chiefs, and sustained by an unwavering faith in his destiny, he conquered Maui, Oahu, Kauai and their dependencies, and in 1795 was recognized as the sole master of the group.
Kalaniopuu, the king of Hawaii, died in 1782, and Kamehameha, with the help of three or four key chiefs, managed to gain complete control over the island after more than ten years of struggle. With this achievement, motivated by the prophets, supported by his chiefs, and driven by a strong belief in his destiny, he went on to conquer Maui, Oahu, Kauai, and their surrounding areas, and by 1795 was acknowledged as the sole ruler of the island chain.
Although of royal stock, the strain of Kamehameha from the old line of kings was less direct than that of his cousin, Kiwalao, from whom he wrested the Hawaiian sceptre; but his military genius rallied around him the warlike chiefs who were dissatisfied with the division of lands by the son and successor of Kalaniopuu, and in the end his triumph was complete. To farther ennoble his succession he married the daughter of his royal cousin, and thus gave to his children an undoubted lineage of supreme dignity.
Though he came from royal heritage, Kamehameha's claim to the throne was less direct than that of his cousin, Kiwalao, whom he defeated to take control of Hawaii. However, his military brilliance attracted the fierce chiefs who were unhappy with the land division made by Kalaniopuu's son and successor, and ultimately, he was completely victorious. To further legitimize his rule, he married his royal cousin's daughter, ensuring that his children had a clear and prestigious lineage.
The existence of the Hawaiian Islands became generally known to the world soon after the final departure of the Resolution and Discovery, but it was not until 1786 that vessels began to visit the group. The first to arrive after the death of Captain Cook were the English ships King George and Queen Charlotte, and the same year a French exploring squadron touched at Maui. In 1787 several trading vessels visited the group, and the natives began to barter provisions and sandal-wood for fire-arms and other weapons of metal.
The Hawaiian Islands became known to the world soon after the final departure of the Resolution and Discovery, but it wasn't until 1786 that ships started arriving in the area. The first to come after Captain Cook's death were the English ships King George and Queen Charlotte, and that same year, a French exploration squadron made a stop at Maui. In 1787, several trading vessels came to the islands, and the locals began to trade food and sandalwood for firearms and other metal weapons.
In 1792, and again in 1793, Captain Vancouver, of an English exploring squadron, touched and remained for some time at the islands. He landed sheep, goats and horned cattle, and distributed a quantity of fruit and garden seeds. His memory is gratefully cherished by the natives, for his mission was one of peace and broad benevolence. Thenceforward trading-vessels in considerable numbers visited the group, and during the concluding wars of Kamehameha the rival chiefs had secured the [27]assistance of small parties of white men, and to some extent had learned the use of muskets and small cannon, readily purchased and paid for in sandal-wood, which was then quite abundant on most of the timbered mountains of the islands. The harbor of Honolulu was first discovered and entered by two American vessels in 1794, and it soon became a favorite resort for the war, trading and whaling vessels of all nations.
In 1792 and again in 1793, Captain Vancouver, leading an English exploration squadron, stopped at the islands and stayed for a while. He brought sheep, goats, and cattle, and distributed various fruits and garden seeds. The locals remember him fondly because his mission was one of peace and goodwill. From that point on, a significant number of trading ships started visiting the group, and during the final wars of Kamehameha, rival chiefs had the support of small groups of white men, learning to use muskets and small cannons, which they could easily buy with sandalwood, then plentiful in the timbered mountains of the islands. The harbor of Honolulu was first discovered and entered by two American ships in 1794, and it quickly became a popular spot for warships, trading vessels, and whaling ships from all over.
In the midst of these new and trying conditions Kamehameha managed the affairs of his kingdom with distinguished prudence and sagacity. He admonished his people to endure with patience the aggressions of the whites, and to retain, as far as possible, their simple habits. With his little empire united and peaceful, Kamehameha died on the 8th of May, 1819, at the age of about eighty; and his bones were so secretly disposed of that they have not yet been found.
In the midst of these new and challenging circumstances, Kamehameha managed the affairs of his kingdom with remarkable wisdom and insight. He urged his people to endure the aggressions from the whites with patience and to hold on to their simple way of life as much as possible. With his small empire united and peaceful, Kamehameha died on May 8, 1819, at around eighty years old; his bones were hidden so well that they have not yet been discovered.
Liholiho, the elder of his sons by Keopuolani, the daughter of his cousin Kiwalao, succeeded his warlike father with the title of Kamehameha II. Some knowledge of the Christian religion had reached the natives through their white visitors, but the old chief died in the faith of his fathers.
Liholiho, the oldest son of Keopuolani, who was the daughter of his cousin Kiwalao, took over from his warrior father with the title of Kamehameha II. Some knowledge of Christianity had come to the locals through their white visitors, but the old chief died believing in the traditions of his ancestors.
The death of Kamehameha was immediately followed by an event for which history affords no parallel. In October, 1819—six months before the first Christian missionaries arrived on the islands—Liholiho, under the inspiration of Kaahumanu, one of the widows of his father, suddenly, and in the presence of a large concourse of horrified natives, broke the most sacred of the tabus of his religion by partaking of food from vessels from which women were feasting, and the same day decreed the destruction of every temple and idol in the kingdom. He was sustained by the high-priest Hewahewa, who was the first to apply the torch; and within a few weeks idols, temples, altars, and a priesthood which had held prince and subject in awe for centuries were swept away, leaving the people absolutely without a religion.
The death of Kamehameha was quickly followed by an event unlike any in history. In October 1819—six months before the first Christian missionaries arrived on the islands—Liholiho, encouraged by Kaahumanu, one of his father's widows, suddenly and in front of a large crowd of shocked locals, broke the most sacred rule of his religion by eating food from vessels that women were using. On that same day, he ordered the destruction of every temple and idol in the kingdom. He was supported by the high priest Hewahewa, who was the first to set fire to the idols; within a few weeks, idols, temples, altars, and a priesthood that had held power over both prince and subject for centuries were destroyed, leaving the people completely without a religion.
But all did not peacefully submit to this royal edict against their gods. In the twilight of that misty period looms up a grand defender of the faith of Keawe and Umi and the altars of the Hawaiian gods. This champion was Kekuaokalani, a nephew, perhaps a son, of the first Kamehameha, and a cousin, perhaps a half-brother, of Liholiho. In his veins coursed the royal blood of Hawaii, and his bearing was that of a king. He [28]was above six and one-half feet in height, with limbs well proportioned and features strikingly handsome and commanding. He was of the priesthood, and, through the bestowal of some tabu or prerogative, claimed to be second in authority to Hewahewa, who traced his lineage back to Paao, the high-priest of Pili. His wife, Manono, was scarcely less distinguished for her courage, beauty and chiefly strain.
But not everyone accepted this royal decree against their gods without resistance. In the fading light of that unclear time, a great defender of the faith of Keawe and Umi and the Hawaiian altars emerged. This champion was Kekuaokalani, a nephew, possibly a son, of the first Kamehameha, and a cousin, maybe a half-brother, of Liholiho. He carried the royal blood of Hawaii, and he had the presence of a king. He [__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]stood over six and a half feet tall, with well-proportioned limbs and strikingly handsome, commanding features. He was part of the priesthood and, through some bestowed tabu or privilege, claimed to be second in authority to Hewahewa, who traced his lineage back to Paao, the high priest of Pili. His wife, Manono, was equally distinguished for her bravery, beauty, and noble lineage.
The apostasy of Hewahewa left Kekuaokalani at the head of the priesthood—at least so he seems to have assumed—and the royal order to demolish the temples was answered by him with an appeal to the people to arm and join him in defence of their gods. He raised the standard of revolt on the island of Hawaii, and was soon at the head of a considerable army. A large force was sent against him, and every effort was made to induce him to lay down his arms. But he scorned all terms, refused all concessions.
The betrayal of Hewahewa put Kekuaokalani in charge of the priesthood—at least that's how he acted—and when he received the royal order to tear down the temples, he responded by calling on the people to pick up arms and join him in defending their gods. He initiated a revolt on the island of Hawaii and quickly gathered a significant army. A large force was dispatched against him, and there were numerous attempts to persuade him to surrender. But he rejected all offers and refused to back down.
A battle was fought at Kuamoo, at first favorable to the defenders of the gods; but the fire-arms of the whites in the service of the king turned the tide of war against them, and they were defeated and scattered. Kekuaokalani was killed on the field, and Manono, his brave and faithful wife, fighting by his side, fell dead upon the body of her husband with a musket-ball through her temples. A rude monument of stones still marks the spot where they fell; and it is told in whispers that the kona, passing through the shrouding vines, attunes them to saddest tones of lamentation over the last defenders in arms of the Hawaiian gods.
A battle took place at Kuamoo, initially favoring the defenders of the gods; however, the firearms of the white soldiers serving the king changed the outcome of the war against them, leading to their defeat and scattering. Kekuaokalani was killed in action, and Manono, his brave and loyal wife, fighting alongside him, fell dead on his body from a gunshot wound to her head. A simple monument made of stones still marks the spot where they died; and it's whispered that the kona, moving through the overgrown vines, plays the saddest tunes of mourning for the last fighters of the Hawaiian gods.
Four or five months before the death of Kekuaokalani, Kalaimoku, the prime minister of Liholiho, and his brother Boki, were baptized under the formula of the Roman Catholic Church by the chaplain of a French corvette on a passing visit to the islands. They scarcely knew the meaning of the ceremony, and it is safe to say that, at the time of the destruction of their temples and the repudiation of their gods, the Hawaiian people knew little or nothing of any other religion. The abolition of the tabu, which had made them slaves to their chiefs and priests, and held their fathers in bondage for centuries, was hailed with so great a joy by the native masses that they did not hesitate when called upon to consign the priesthood and their gods to the grave of the tabu. [29]
Four or five months before Kekuaokalani's death, Kalaimoku, the prime minister of Liholiho, and his brother Boki were baptized according to the Roman Catholic Church by the chaplain of a French warship that was visiting the islands. They barely understood the meaning of the ceremony, and it’s safe to say that at the time their temples were destroyed and their gods were rejected, the Hawaiian people knew very little, if anything, about other religions. The end of the tabu, which had made them subservient to their chiefs and priests, keeping their ancestors in bondage for centuries, was celebrated with such enthusiasm by the native people that they readily agreed to bury the priesthood and their gods along with the tabu. [__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]
On the 30th of March, 1820—some months after this strange religious revolution—the first party of Christian missionaries arrived at the islands from Massachusetts. They were well received. They found a people without a religion, and their work was easy. Other missionary parties followed from time to time, and found the field alike profitable to the cause in which they labored and to themselves individually. They acquired substantial possessions in their new home, controlled the government for the fifty or more years following, and their children are to-day among the most prosperous residents of the group. This is not said with a view to undervalue the services of the early missionaries to Hawaii, but to show that all missionary fields have not been financially unfruitful to zealous and provident workers.
On March 30, 1820—several months after this unusual religious shift—the first group of Christian missionaries arrived in the islands from Massachusetts. They were welcomed warmly. They discovered a population without a religion, making their mission straightforward. Other missionary groups came at various times and found the work equally rewarding for both their cause and themselves. They gained significant assets in their new home, controlled the government for the following fifty years or more, and their descendants are now some of the most successful residents of the area. This isn't meant to downplay the contributions of the early missionaries to Hawaii, but rather to illustrate that not all missionary endeavors have been financially unrewarding for dedicated and resourceful workers.
And now let it be remarked with emphasis that the value of missionary labors in the Hawaiian group should not be measured by the small number of natives who to-day may be called Christians, but rather by the counsel and assistance of these thrifty religious teachers in securing and maintaining the independence of the islands, and by degrees establishing a mild and beneficent constitutional government, under which taxation is as light and life and property are as secure as in any other part of the civilized world. They were politicians as well as religious instructors, and practical examples of the value of Christian discipline when prudently applied to the acquisition of the needful and inviting things of life, and the establishment of a civil system capable of protecting the possessor in his acquired rights.
And now it should be emphasized that the value of missionary work in Hawaii shouldn't be judged by the small number of natives who are now considered Christians, but rather by the guidance and support of these dedicated teachers in securing and maintaining the islands' independence, and gradually establishing a fair and beneficial constitutional government, where taxes are low and life and property are as secure as in any other part of the civilized world. They were not just religious leaders but also politicians, demonstrating the importance of Christian principles when applied wisely to achieving the necessary resources and creating a civil system that protects people's rights to what they have earned.
In 1824 Liholiho and his queen died while on a visit to England, and their remains were sent back to the islands in an English man-of war. Kauikeaouli, a youth of ten years, and brother of the deceased king, was accepted as the rightful heir to the throne under the title of Kamehameha III., and Kaahumanu, one of the wives of Kamehameha I., acted as regent and prime minister.
In 1824, Liholiho and his queen died during a visit to England, and their bodies were returned to the islands on a British warship. Kauikeaouli, a ten-year-old and brother of the late king, was recognized as the rightful heir to the throne with the title Kamehameha III, while Kaahumanu, one of Kamehameha I's wives, served as regent and prime minister.
In 1827, and ten years later, Roman Catholic missionaries arrived, and were sent away by order of the government; but in 1839 the priests of that denomination were finally landed under the guns of a French frigate and allowed to remain. Meantime churches, schools and printing-presses had been established, the Hawaiian had become a written language, and the laws and decrees of the government were promulgated in printed form. [30]
In 1827, and ten years later, Roman Catholic missionaries came, but the government ordered them to leave. However, in 1839, the priests of that faith were finally brought in under the protection of a French frigate and allowed to stay. In the meantime, churches, schools, and printing presses were set up, the Hawaiian language became a written language, and the laws and decrees of the government were published in printed form. [__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]
In 1840 the first written constitution was given to the people, guaranteeing to them a representative government. In February, 1843, Lord Paulet, of the English navy, took formal possession of the islands, but in the July following their sovereignty was restored through the action of Admiral Thomas. In November of the same year France and England mutually agreed to refrain from seizure or occupation of the islands, or any portion of them, and the United States, while declining to become a party to the agreement, promptly acknowledged the independence of the group.
In 1840, the first written constitution was provided to the people, ensuring them a representative government. In February 1843, Lord Paulet of the British Navy took formal control of the islands, but in July, their sovereignty was restored thanks to Admiral Thomas. In November of that same year, France and England agreed not to seize or occupy the islands or any part of them, and while the United States chose not to join the agreement, it quickly recognized the group’s independence.

Princess Kauilani.
Princess Ka'iulani.
Kamehameha III. died in 1854 and was succeeded by Kamehameha IV. The latter reigned until 1863, when he died and was succeeded by Prince Lot, with the title of Kamehameha V. In 1864 Lot abrogated the constitution of 1840 and granted a new one. He reigned until 1872, and died without naming a successor, and the Legislative Assembly elected Lunalilo to the throne. He was of the Kamehameha family, and with his death, in 1873, the Kamehameha dynasty came to an end. He, too, failed to designate a successor, and as but two of the accepted descendants of the first Kamehameha remained—one a sister of Kamehameha V. and the other a female cousin of that sovereign—David Kalakaua was elected to the throne by the Legislative Assembly in 1874, receiving all but five votes of that body, which were cast for the queen-dowager Emma, widow of Kamehameha IV.
Kamehameha III died in 1854 and was succeeded by Kamehameha IV. The latter ruled until 1863, when he passed away and was succeeded by Prince Lot, who took the title Kamehameha V. In 1864, Lot abolished the constitution of 1840 and established a new one. He reigned until 1872 and died without naming a successor, prompting the Legislative Assembly to elect Lunalilo as king. He was from the Kamehameha family, and with his death in 1873, the Kamehameha dynasty came to an end. He also did not designate a successor, and since only two accepted descendants of the first Kamehameha remained—one was a sister of Kamehameha V and the other a female cousin of that king—David Kalakaua was elected to the throne by the Legislative Assembly in 1874, receiving all but five votes, which were cast for the queen-dowager Emma, the widow of Kamehameha IV.
Provision having been made for the event by a previous Legislative Assembly, King Kalakaua, with his queen, Kapiolani, was formally crowned on the 12th of February, 1883, in the presence of the representatives of many of the nations of the Old World and the New. Since the coronation the last of the Kamehamehas has passed away, including the queen-dowager Emma, and King Kalakaua remains the most direct representative in the kingdom of the ancient sovereigns of Hawaii. He draws his strain from Liloa through the great I family of Hawaii, who joined their fortunes with the first Kamehameha in the conquest of the group. His queen, Kapiolani, is a granddaughter of the last independent sovereign of Kauai, and is thus allied in blood with the early rulers of the group. She is childless, and the Princess Liliuokalani, the elder of the two sisters of the king, has been named as his successor. She is the wife of His Excellency [31]John O. Dominis, an American by birth and present governor of the islands of Oahu and Maui. The only direct heir in the families of the king and his two sisters is the Princess Kaiulani, daughter of the Princess Likelike,1 wife of Mr. Cleghorn, a merchant of Honolulu.
Provision having been made for the event by a previous Legislative Assembly, King Kalakaua, along with his queen, Kapiolani, was officially crowned on February 12, 1883, in front of representatives from many nations across the Old World and the New. Since the coronation, the last of the Kamehamehas have passed away, including the queen dowager Emma, and King Kalakaua remains the most direct representative in the kingdom of the ancient sovereigns of Hawaii. His lineage traces back to Liloa through the great I family of Hawaii, who aligned their fortunes with the first Kamehameha during the conquest of the islands. His queen, Kapiolani, is the granddaughter of the last independent sovereign of Kauai, placing her in blood relation to the early rulers of the islands. She is childless, and Princess Liliuokalani, the elder of the king's two sisters, has been designated as his successor. She is married to His Excellency [__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__] John O. Dominis, an American by birth and the current governor of the islands of Oahu and Maui. The only direct heir within the families of the king and his two sisters is Princess Kaiulani, the daughter of Princess Likelike, 1 wife of Mr. Cleghorn, a merchant from Honolulu.
Following is a list of the sovereigns of Hawaii, with the dates and durations of their several governments, from the eleventh to the nineteenth century. It embraces only the rulers of the island of Hawaii, who eventually became the masters of the group. Until the reign of Kalaniopuu, which began in 1754, the dates are merely approximate:
Following is a list of the rulers of Hawaii, along with the dates and lengths of their various governments, from the eleventh to the nineteenth century. It includes only the leaders of the island of Hawaii, who later became the rulers of the entire group. Until the reign of Kalaniopuu, which started in 1754, the dates are just estimates:
Pilikaeae, | from A.D. 1095 to 1120 |
Kukohau, | from __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ A.D. __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__ 1120 to 1145 |
Kaniuhi, | from 1145 to 1170 |
Kanipahu, | from A.D. 1170 to 1195 |
Kalapana (including the usurpation of Kamaiole), | from 1195 to 1220 |
Kahaimoelea, | from 1220 to 1260 |
Kalaunuiohua, | from 1260 to 1300 |
Kuaiwa, | from A.D. 1300 to 1340 |
Kahoukapu, | from A.D. 1340 to 1380 |
Kauholanuimahu, | from __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ A.D. __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__ 1380 to 1415 |
Kiha, | from 1415 to 1455 |
Liloa, | from __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ 1455 to 1485 |
Hakau, | from A.D. 1485 to 1490 |
Umi, | from A.D. 1490 to 1525 |
Kealiiokaloa, | from __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__ A.D. __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_2__ 1525 to 1535 |
Keawenui, | from A.D. 1535 to 1565 |
Kaikilani and Lonoikamakahiki, | from A.D. 1565 to 1595 |
Keakealanikane, | from 1595 to 1625 |
Keakamahana, | from A.D. 1625 to 1655 |
Keakealaniwahine, | from A.D. 1655 to 1685 |
Keawe and sister, | from A.D. 1685 to 1720 |
Alapanui, | from A.D. 1720 to 1754 |
Kalaniopuu, | from A.D. 1754 to 1782 |
Kamehameha I, | from 1782 to 1819 |
Kamehameha II.—Liholiho, | from A.D. 1819 to 1824 |
Kaahumanu regency, | from __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ 1824 to 1833 |
Kamehameha III.—Kauikeaouli, | from A.D. 1833 to 1854 |
Kamehameha IV, | from A.D. 1854 to 1863 |
Kamehameha V.—Lot, | from 1863 to 1872 |
Lunalilo, | from 1872 to 1873 |
Kalakaua, | from A.D. 1874 to —— |
[32]
[__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]
Having thus briefly sketched the outlines of the prominent political events of the islands, the ancient religion of the Hawaiians will next be referred to; and as the tabu was no less a religious than a secular prerogative, it may properly be considered in connection with the priesthood. A knowledge of the power, scope and sanctity of the tabu is essential to a proper understanding of the relations existing in the past between the people and their political and religious rulers, and this great governing force will now claim our attention.
Having briefly outlined the major political events of the islands, we will next discuss the ancient religion of the Hawaiians. Since the tabu was both a religious and a secular authority, it makes sense to consider it in relation to the priesthood. Understanding the power, scope, and sanctity of the tabu is crucial for grasping the historical relationship between the people and their political and religious leaders, and this significant governing force will now take center stage.
THE TABU.
Strictly speaking, the ancient tabu, or kapu, was a prerogative adhering exclusively to political and ecclesiastical rank. It was a command either to do or not to do, and the meaning of it was, “Obey or die.” It was common to the Polynesian tribes, and was a protection to the lives, property and dignity of the priesthood and nobility.
Strictly speaking, the ancient tabu, or kapu, was a privilege that only those with political and religious authority had. It was a command to either take action or refrain from it, and its message was, “Obey or face serious consequences.” This concept was shared among Polynesian tribes and served to protect the lives, property, and dignity of the priests and nobles.
The religious tabus were well understood by the people, as were also the personal or perpetual tabus of the ruling families; but the incidental tabus were oppressive, irksome and dangerous to the masses, as they were liable to be thoughtlessly violated, and death was the usual penalty.
The religious tabus were clearly understood by the people, as were the personal or ongoing tabus of the ruling families; however, the incidental tabus were burdensome, annoying, and risky for the masses, since they could be easily and carelessly broken, with death often being the consequence.
Everything pertaining to the priesthood and temples was sacred, or tabu, and pigs designed for sacrifice, and running at large with the temple mark upon them, could not be molested. It was a violation of perpetual tabu to cross the shadow of the king, to stand in his presence without permission, or to approach him except upon the knees. This did not apply to the higher grades of chiefs, who themselves possessed tabu rights.
Everything related to the priesthood and temples was sacred, or tabu, and pigs meant for sacrifice, roaming freely with the temple mark on them, couldn’t be disturbed. It was a serious violation of tabu to step into the king's shadow, to be in his presence without permission, or to approach him unless on your knees. This rule didn’t apply to the higher-ranking chiefs, who had their own tabu rights.

The Puloulou, or Tabu Mark.
The Puloulou, or Taboo Mark.
Favorite paths, springs, streams and bathing-places were at intervals tabued to the exclusive use of the kings and temples, and squid, turtle, and two or three species of birds could be eaten only by the priests and tabu nobility.
Favorite paths, springs, streams, and bathing spots were periodically reserved for the exclusive use of the kings and temples, and squid, turtle, and a few species of birds could only be eaten by the priests and the restricted nobility.
Yellow was the tabu color of royalty, and red of the priesthood, and mantles of the feathers of the oo and mamo could be worn only by kings and princes. Feather capes of mingled red and yellow distinguished the lesser nobility. [33]
Yellow was the tabu color of royalty, and red was for the priesthood. Only kings and princes could wear mantles made from the feathers of the oo and mamo. Feather capes that were a mix of red and yellow were worn by the lesser nobility. [__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]
Women were tabued from eating plantains, bananas, and cocoanuts; also the flesh of swine and certain fish, among them the kumu, moano, ulua, honu, ea, hahalua and naia; and men and women were allowed under no circumstances to partake of food together. Hence, when Liholiho, in 1819, openly violated this fundamental tabu by eating with his queen, he defied the gods of his fathers and struck at the very foundation of the religious faith of his people.
Women were prohibited from eating plantains, bananas, and coconuts; also the meat of pigs and certain fish, including the kumu, moano, ulua, honu, ea, hahalua, and naia; and men and women were never allowed to eat food together under any circumstances. Therefore, when Liholiho, in 1819, openly broke this fundamental taboo by eating with his queen, he defied the gods of his ancestors and attacked the very foundation of his people's religious beliefs.
The general tabus declared by the supreme chief or king were proclaimed by heralds, while the puloulou—a staff surmounted by a crown of white or black kapa—placed at the entrance of temples, royal residences and the mansions of tabu chiefs, or beside springs, groves, paths, or bathing-places, was a standing notification against trespass. General tabus were declared either to propitiate the gods or in celebration of important events. They were either common or strict, and frequently embraced an entire district and continued from one to ten days.
The general tabus set by the supreme chief or king were announced by heralds, while the puloulou—a staff topped with a crown of white or black kapa—was placed at the entrance of temples, royal residences, and the homes of tabu chiefs, or next to springs, groves, paths, or bathing spots, serving as a permanent warning against trespassing. General tabus were declared either to appease the gods or to celebrate significant events. They could be either common or strict, often covering an entire district and lasting from one to ten days.
During the continuance of a common tabu the masses were merely required to abstain from their usual occupations and attend the services at the heiaus, or temples; but during a strict tabu every fire and every light was extinguished, no canoe was shoved from the shore, no bathing was permitted, the pigs and fowls were muzzled or placed under calabashes that they might utter no noise, the people conversed in whispers, and the priests and their assistants were alone allowed to be seen without their places of abode. It was a season of deathly silence, and was thought to be especially grateful to the gods.
During a common tabu, people were just expected to stop their usual activities and go to the services at the heiaus, or temples; but during a strict tabu, all fires and lights were put out, no canoes were taken out on the water, bathing was not allowed, pigs and chickens were muzzled or kept under containers so they wouldn’t make any noise, people spoke in whispers, and only the priests and their helpers were permitted to be seen outside their homes. It was a time of complete silence and was believed to be particularly pleasing to the gods.
Some of the royal tabus, centuries back in the past, were frivolous and despotic, such as regulating the wearing of beards and compelling all sails to be lowered on passing certain coast points; but, however capricious or oppressive, the tabu was seldom violated, and its maintenance was deemed a necessary protection to the governing classes.
Some of the royal tabus, centuries ago, were unnecessary and tyrannical, like controlling who could wear beards and forcing all sails to be lowered when passing certain coastal points; yet, no matter how arbitrary or harsh, the tabu was rarely broken, and keeping it in place was seen as vital for protecting the ruling classes.
ANCIENT HAWAIIAN RELIGION.
The ancient religion of the Hawaiians, of which the tabu formed an essential feature, was a theocracy of curious structure. It was a system of idolatrous forms and sacrifices engrafted without consistency upon the Jewish story of the creation, the fall of man, the revolt of Lucifer, the Deluge, and the repopulation of the earth. [34]
The ancient religion of the Hawaiians, where the tabu was a key element, was a theocracy with a unique structure. It was a mix of idol worship and sacrifices that were inconsistently tied to the Jewish stories of creation, the fall of man, Lucifer's rebellion, the flood, and the repopulation of the earth. [__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]
The legends of the Hawaiians were preserved with marvellous integrity. Their historians were the priests, who at intervals met in council and recited and compared their genealogical meles, in order that nothing might be either changed or lost. How did the Hawaiian priesthood become possessed of the story of the Hebrew genesis? It was old to them when the Resolution and Discovery dropped their anchors in Kealakeakua Bay; old to them when one or more chance parties of Spanish sailors in the sixteenth century may have looked in upon them for a moment while on their way to the Spice Islands; and it was probably old to them when the Hawaiians found their present home in the sixth century, and when the Polynesians left the coast of Asia four hundred years earlier.
The legends of the Hawaiians were preserved with amazing accuracy. Their historians were the priests, who periodically gathered in council to recite and compare their genealogical meles, ensuring that nothing was changed or lost. How did the Hawaiian priests come to know the story of the Hebrew creation? It was already ancient to them when the Resolution and Discovery anchored in Kealakeakua Bay; it was old to them when Spanish sailors may have briefly interacted with them in the sixteenth century on their way to the Spice Islands; and it was likely old to them when the Hawaiians settled in their current home in the sixth century, which was four hundred years after the Polynesians left the coast of Asia.

Ancient Gods.
Old Gods.
One theory is that the story was acquired through Israelitish contact with the ancestors of the Polynesians while the latter [35]were drifting eastward from the land of their nativity. But the more reasonable assumption seems to be that the Hawaiian theogony, so strangely perpetuated, is an independent and perhaps original version of a series of creation legends common in the remote past to the Cushite, Semite and Aryan tribes, and was handed down quite as accurately as the Jewish version before it became fixed in written characters. In fact, in some respects the Hawaiian seems to be more complete than the Jewish version.
One theory is that the story was picked up through contact between the Israelites and the ancestors of the Polynesians while the latter were drifting eastward from their homeland. However, a more reasonable assumption is that the Hawaiian creation myth, which has been preserved so uniquely, is an independent and possibly original version of a set of creation legends that were once common among the Cushite, Semite, and Aryan tribes. It was passed down just as accurately as the Jewish version before it was recorded in writing. In fact, in some ways, the Hawaiian version seems to be more complete than the Jewish one.
From the beginning, according to Hawaiian story, a trinity of gods existed, who were the sole and all-pervading intelligences of chaos, or night—a condition represented by the Hawaiian word Po. These gods were:
From the beginning, according to Hawaiian legend, there was a trinity of gods who were the only and all-encompassing forces of chaos, or night—a state represented by the Hawaiian word Po. These gods were:
Kane, the originator;
Kane, the creator;
Ku, the architect and builder; and
Ku, the designer and creator; and
Lono, the executor and director of the elements.
Lono, the executor and manager of the elements.
By the united will of Hikapoloa, or the trinity, light was brought into chaos. They next created the heavens, three in number, as their dwelling-places, and then the earth, sun, moon and stars. From their spittle they next created a host of angels to minister to their wants.
By the combined power of Hikapoloa, or the trinity, light emerged from chaos. They then formed the heavens, three in total, as their homes, followed by the earth, sun, moon, and stars. From their saliva, they created a multitude of angels to serve their needs.
Finally, man was created. His body was formed of red earth mingled with the spittle of Kane, and his head of whitish clay brought by Lono from the four quarters of the earth. The meaning of Adam is red, and it will be remarked that the Hawaiian Adam was made of earth of that color. He was made in the image of Kane, who breathed into his nostrils, and he became alive. Afterwards, from one of his ribs, taken from his side while he slept, a woman was created. The man was called Kumu-honua, and the woman Ke-ola-ku-honua.
Finally, man was created. His body was formed from red earth mixed with the saliva of Kane, and his head was made from whitish clay brought by Lono from all corners of the earth. The name Adam means red, and it’s notable that the Hawaiian Adam was made of that colored earth. He was created in the image of Kane, who breathed into his nostrils, and he became alive. Later, from one of his ribs taken from his side while he slept, a woman was created. The man was named Kumu-honua, and the woman Ke-ola-ku-honua.
The newly-created pair were placed in a beautiful paradise called Paliuli. Three rivers of “the waters of life” ran through it, on the banks of which grew every inviting fruit, including the “tabued bread-fruit tree” and “sacred apple-tree,” with which are connected the fall and expulsion of the man and woman from their earthly paradise. The three rivers had their source in a beautiful lake, fed by “the living waters of Kane.” The waters were filled with fish which fire could not destroy, and on being sprinkled with them the dead were restored to life. Legends relate instances in which these waters were procured, [36]through the favor of the gods, for the restoration to life of distinguished mortals.
The newly created pair were placed in a beautiful paradise called Paliuli. Three rivers of “the waters of life” flowed through it, along the banks of which grew every tempting fruit, including the “tabued bread-fruit tree” and the “sacred apple-tree,” which are linked to the fall and expulsion of the man and woman from their earthly paradise. The three rivers originated from a beautiful lake, fed by “the living waters of Kane.” These waters were filled with fish that fire could not destroy, and when sprinkled with them, the dead were brought back to life. Legends recount instances where these waters were obtained, [__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__] through the favor of the gods, for the revival of notable individuals.
As a specimen of the chants perpetuating these traditions and embellishing the plainer prose recitals, the following extract relating to the creation is given:
As an example of the songs that keep these traditions alive and add flair to the simpler prose narratives, the following excerpt about creation is provided:
“Kane of the great Night,
"Kane of the great Night,"
Ku and Lono of the great Night,
Ku and Lono of the great Night,
Hika-po-loa the king.
Hika-po-loa the king.
The tabued Night that is set apart,
The forbidden Night that is set apart,
The poisonous Night,
The toxic Night,
The barren, desolate Night,
The empty, desolate night,
The continual darkness of midnight,
The endless darkness of midnight,
The Night, the reviler.
The Night, the critic.
O Kane, O Ku-ka-pao,
O Kane, O Ku-ka-pao,
And great Lono dwelling in the water,
And great Lono living in the water,
Brought forth are Heaven and Earth,
Brought forth are Heaven and Earth,
Quickened, increased, moving,
Accelerated, enhanced, in motion,
Raised up into Continents.
Lifted into Continents.
Kane, Lord of Night, Lord the Father,
Kane, Lord of Night, Lord the Father,
Ku-ka-pao, in the hot heavens,
Ku-ka-pao, in the blazing skies,
Great Lono with the flashing eyes,
Great Lono with the sparkling eyes,
Lightning-like has the Lord
The Lord is lightning-fast.
Established in truth, O Kane, master-worker;
Established in truth, O Kane, master-worker;
The Lord creator of mankind:
The Lord, creator of humanity:
Start, work, bring forth the chief Kumu-honua,
Start, work, bring forth the main Kumu-honua,
And Ola-ku-honua, the woman;
And Ola-ku-honua, the woman;
Dwelling together are they two.
They are living together.
Dwelling in marriage (is she) with the husband, the brother.”
Dwelling in marriage with her husband, the brother.
Among the angels created was Kanaloa, the Hawaiian Lucifer, who incited a rebellion in heaven, with the results, strangely enough, related in immortal song by Milton. When man was created, Kanaloa demanded his adoration. This was refused by Kane, as angels and man were alike the creations of Deity, whereupon Kanaloa ambitiously resolved to create a man of his own who would worship him. Kane allowed him to proceed with his seditious work. He made a man in the exact image of Kumu-honua, but could not give it life. He breathed into its nostrils, but it would not rise; he called to it, but it would not speak. This exasperated him, and he determined to destroy the man made by the gods. He therefore crept into Paliuli in the form of a moo, or lizard, and, through some deception not definitely stated by tradition, Kumu-honua and his mate committed [37]some offence for which they were driven from paradise by the “large, white bird of Kane.”
Among the angels created was Kanaloa, the Hawaiian Lucifer, who sparked a rebellion in heaven, with the outcomes, interestingly enough, recounted in immortal song by Milton. When man was created, Kanaloa demanded his worship. This was refused by Kane, as both angels and humans were creations of the Divine, prompting Kanaloa to greedily decide to create a man of his own who would worship him. Kane allowed him to continue with his rebellious plan. He created a man in the exact likeness of Kumu-honua, but couldn't give it life. He breathed into its nostrils, but it wouldn’t rise; he called to it, but it wouldn’t respond. This frustrated him, and he decided to destroy the man made by the gods. He then sneaked into Paliuli disguised as a moo, or lizard, and, through some deception not clearly stated by tradition, Kumu-honua and his partner committed [__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]some offense that led to them being expelled from paradise by the “large, white bird of Kane.”
Kumu-honua had three sons, the second of whom was slain by the first. The name of the Hawaiian Cain is Laka. Ka Pili was the youngest son, and thirteen generations are named between him and the Deluge, whereas the Hebrew version records but ten on the corresponding line of Seth.
Kumu-honua had three sons, the second of whom was killed by the first. The name of the Hawaiian Cain is Laka. Ka Pili was the youngest son, and there are thirteen generations named between him and the Deluge, while the Hebrew version mentions only ten on the equivalent line of Seth.
The Hawaiian Noah is called Nuu. At the command of the gods he constructed an ark, and entered it with his wife and three sons, and a male and female of every breathing thing. The waters came and covered the earth. When they subsided the gods entered the ark, which was resting on a mountain overlooking a beautiful valley, and commanded Nuu to go forth with all of life that the ark contained. In gratitude for his deliverance Nuu offered a sacrifice to the moon, mistaking it for Kane. Descending on a rainbow, that deity reproved his thoughtlessness, but left the bow as a perpetual token of his forgiveness.
The Hawaiian Noah is called Nuu. At the command of the gods, he built an ark and entered it with his wife, three sons, and a male and female of every living creature. The waters rose and covered the earth. When they receded, the gods came down to the ark, which was resting on a mountain overlooking a beautiful valley, and told Nuu to release all the life in the ark. In gratitude for his rescue, Nuu made a sacrifice to the moon, thinking it was Kane. Coming down on a rainbow, that deity scolded him for his mistake but left the rainbow as a lasting symbol of his forgiveness.
Continuing the genealogical record, ten generations are given between Nuu and Ku Pule, who “removed to a southern country,” taking with him as a wife his slave-woman Ahu. So was it with Abraham. Ku Pule established the practice of circumcision, and was the grandfather of Kini-lau-a-mano, whose twelve children became the founders of twelve tribes, from one of which—the Menehune—the Hawaiians are made to descend.
Continuing the family history, there are ten generations listed between Nuu and Ku Pule, who “moved to a southern country,” bringing along his slave-wife Ahu. It was similar with Abraham. Ku Pule started the tradition of circumcision and was the grandfather of Kini-lau-a-mano, whose twelve children became the founders of twelve tribes, one of which—the Menehune—the Hawaiians are said to descend from.
A story similar to that of Joseph is also given, and mention is made of the subsequent return of the Menehune people to the land set apart for their occupation by Kane. Two brothers led them over deserts and through waters, and after many tribulations they reached their destination.
A story similar to that of Joseph is also told, and it mentions the later return of the Menehune people to the land designated for them by Kane. Two brothers guided them over deserts and through waters, and after many hardships, they arrived at their destination.
This would seem to imply that the Menehune people were one of the tribes of Israel; yet it is more probable that they had their origin in some one of the other twelveships into which the early Asiatic tribes were in many instances divided, and that the stories of Joseph and the Exodus became a part of their folk-lore through contact with other races.
This suggests that the Menehune people were one of the tribes of Israel; however, it's more likely that they originated from one of the other twelve ships into which the early Asian tribes were often divided, and the stories of Joseph and the Exodus became part of their folklore through interactions with other cultures.
The genealogical line from the Hawaiian Adam to the grandson of Ku Pule—that is, until the time of Jacob—has been brought down through three distinct traditional channels. The agreement of the several versions is remarkable, but the one brought to the islands by the high-priest Paao in the eleventh [38]century, and retained by his ecclesiastical successors, is regarded as the most authentic. It was an heirloom of the priesthood, and was never communicated beyond the walls of the temples.
The family lineage from the Hawaiian Adam to the grandson of Ku Pule—up until Jacob—has been passed down through three different traditional sources. The consistency among these versions is impressive, but the one brought to the islands by the high priest Paao in the 11th century, and maintained by his religious successors, is considered the most authentic. It was a treasured heirloom of the priesthood and was never shared outside the temple walls.
With the settlement of the Menehune people in the land set apart for them by Kane, the Hawaiian legends cease to remind us of the later history of the Hebrews. There the similarity of historic incident abruptly ends, and, with an uncertain stride of twelve or thirteen generations, the chiefly line is brought down to Wakea and his wife Papa, mythical rulers of superhuman attributes, who must have existed before the Polynesians left the Asiatic coast, although in some legends they are connected not only with the first settlement of the Hawaiian archipelago, but with the creation of its islands.
With the settlement of the Menehune people in the land designated for them by Kane, the Hawaiian legends stop reminding us of the later history of the Hebrews. There, the similarity of historical events suddenly ends, and, with an uncertain span of twelve or thirteen generations, the chiefly line trails down to Wakea and his wife Papa, legendary rulers with superhuman qualities, who must have existed before the Polynesians departed from the Asian coast, although in some legends they are linked not only with the first settlement of the Hawaiian archipelago but also with the creation of its islands.
A few of the many legends relating to the creation and first settlement of the islands will be noted. One of them in substance is that Hawaii-loa, a distinguished chief, and fourth in generation from Kini-lau-a-mano, sailed westward, and, guided by the Pleiades, discovered the Hawaiian group. He gave to the largest island his own name, and to the others the names of his children.
A few of the many legends about the creation and initial settlement of the islands will be mentioned. One of them essentially states that Hawaii-loa, a renowned chief and fourth in line from Kini-lau-a-mano, sailed westward and, guided by the Pleiades, discovered the Hawaiian Islands. He named the largest island after himself and gave the other islands the names of his children.
Another tradition refers to Papa, the wife of Wakea, as a tabued descendant of Hawaii-loa, and superior in caste to her husband. Mutual jealousies embittered their lives and led to strange events. Wakea found favor with the beautiful Hina, and the island of Molokai was born of their embrace. In retaliation Papa smiled upon the warrior Lua, and the fruit of their meeting was the fair island of Oahu. Hence the old names of Molokai-Hina and Oahu-a-Lua.
Another tradition refers to Papa, the wife of Wakea, as a tabooed descendant of Hawaii-loa, and of a higher status than her husband. Their mutual jealousy soured their lives and led to strange happenings. Wakea won the affection of the beautiful Hina, and together they created the island of Molokai. In revenge, Papa favored the warrior Lua, and their union produced the lovely island of Oahu. Thus, the old names Molokai-Hina and Oahu-a-Lua emerged.
Quite as fanciful a legend relates that an immense bird laid an egg on the waters of the ocean. It was hatched by the warm winds of the tropics, and the Hawaiian group came into being. Shortly after a man and woman, with a pair each of dogs, hogs and fowls, came in a canoe from Kahiki, landed on the eastern coast of Hawaii, and became the progenitors of the Hawaiian people.
A similarly imaginative legend tells that a giant bird laid an egg on the ocean. The warm tropical winds hatched it, and the Hawaiian Islands were formed. Soon after, a man and woman, along with a pair of dogs, pigs, and chickens, traveled in a canoe from Kahiki, landed on the eastern coast of Hawaii, and became the ancestors of the Hawaiian people.
Fifty-six generations are mentioned from Wakea to the present ruling family. The legends of the twenty-nine generations covering the period between Wakea and Maweke—which brings the record down to the eleventh century, when the second migratory influx from the southern islands occurred—abound in [39]wars, rebellions and popular movements, in which giants, demi-gods, and even the gods themselves took part; and it was doubtless during that period that the idolatrous forms and practices of the Hawaiian religion, as it existed a century ago, were engrafted upon an older and simpler creed confined to the worship of the godhead.
Fifty-six generations are noted from Wakea to the current ruling family. The legends of the twenty-nine generations between Wakea and Maweke—which brings the record to the eleventh century, when the second wave of migration from the southern islands happened—are filled with [__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]wars, uprisings, and social movements that involved giants, demi-gods, and even the gods themselves. It was likely during this time that the idolatrous forms and practices of the Hawaiian religion, as it existed a century ago, were merged with an older and simpler belief system focused on the worship of the godhead.
When the high-priest Paao arrived with Pili he introduced some new gods while recognizing the old, strengthened and enlarged the scope of the tabu, and established an hereditary priesthood independent of, and second only in authority to, the supreme political head. Different grades of priests also came into existence, such as seers, prophets, astrologers and kahunas of various function, including the power of healing and destroying. In fact, the priesthood embraced ten distinct grades or colleges, each possessing and exercising powers peculiar to it, and the mastery of all of them was one of the qualifications of the high-priesthood. The tutelar deity of the entire body was Uli.
When the high priest Paao arrived with Pili, he introduced some new gods while also honoring the old ones, expanded the rules of the tabu, and established a hereditary priesthood that was independent and only second in authority to the supreme political leader. Different types of priests also emerged, such as seers, prophets, astrologers, and kahunas with various roles, including the ability to heal and destroy. In fact, the priesthood consisted of ten distinct ranks or colleges, each with its own unique powers, and mastering all of them was required for becoming a high priest. The protective deity of the entire group was Uli.
The form of the heiau, or temple, was changed by Paao and his successors, and the masses mingled less freely in the ceremonies of sacrifice and other forms of worship. The high-priesthood became more mysterious and exclusive, and assumed prerogatives above the reach of royalty. The old Hawaiian trinity—Kane, Ku and Lono—remained the supreme gods of the pantheon, but Kanaloa, the spirit of evil, was accorded beneficent attributes and exalted among them.
The design of the heiau, or temple, changed under Paao and his successors, and ordinary people participated less in the rituals of sacrifice and other forms of worship. The high priesthood became more mysterious and exclusive, gaining powers beyond what royalty could reach. The old Hawaiian trinity—Kane, Ku, and Lono—remained the top gods of the pantheon, but Kanaloa, the spirit of evil, was also given positive qualities and elevated among them.
The regions of Po, or death, were presided over by Milu, a wicked king who once ruled on earth, while the spirits of favorite chiefs were conveyed by the divine messenger Kuahairo to the presence of Kaono-hio-kala, whose beatific abode was somewhere in the heavens. Another belief was that the ruler of Po was Manua, and that Milu did not follow Akea, the first king of Hawaii, to that place, but dwelt in a region far westward and beneath the sea. Although significant of darkness, Po was not without light. Like Tartarus, it could be visited by favored mortals, and the dead were sometimes brought back from it to earth.
The areas of Po, or death, were ruled by Milu, a malevolent king who once governed on earth. The spirits of favored chiefs were delivered by the divine messenger Kuahairo to the presence of Kaono-hio-kala, whose blissful home was somewhere in the heavens. Another belief held that the ruler of Po was Manua, and that Milu did not accompany Akea, the first king of Hawaii, to that place, but instead resided in a region far to the west and beneath the sea. Although Po signifies darkness, it was not entirely without light. Like Tartarus, it could be accessed by favored mortals, and the dead were sometimes brought back from it to the earth.
Pele, the dreadful goddess of the volcanoes, with her malignant relatives, was added to the Hawaiian deities during the second influx from the south, and temples were erected to her worship all over the volcanic districts of Hawaii. At that period [40]were also introduced Laamaomao, the god of the winds, the poison goddesses Kalaipahoa and Kapo, and many other deities.
Pele, the fearsome goddess of volcanoes, along with her harmful relatives, was included among the Hawaiian gods during the second wave of immigrants from the south, and temples were built for her worship throughout the volcanic regions of Hawaii. During that time, [__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__] were also introduced Laamaomao, the god of winds, the poison goddesses Kalaipahoa and Kapo, and many other deities.
But the worship of the Hawaiians was not confined to Kane, Ku, Lono and Pele. Heiaus were erected to the war-gods of the kings, and great sacrifices were frequently made to them, generally of human beings, preceding, during, and following campaigns and battles. Humbler temples were also maintained to fish, shark, lizard and other gods, where sacrifices of fish and fruits were offered.
But the worship of the Hawaiians wasn't limited to Kane, Ku, Lono, and Pele. Heiaus were built for the war gods of the kings, and large sacrifices, often involving human beings, were frequently made before, during, and after campaigns and battles. Simpler temples were also kept for fish, shark, lizard, and other gods, where sacrifices of fish and fruits were offered.
To the superstitious masses the land abounded in gnomes and fairies, and the waters in nymphs and monsters, whose caprices are themes of a bountiful store of folk-lore. With almost every stream, gorge and headland is connected some supernatural story, and the bards and musicians of old earned an easy support by keeping alive these legends of the people. To some supernatural powers were given, and malignant and beneficent spirits assumed human forms and flitted among the palms in the guise of birds.
To the superstitious crowds, the land was full of gnomes and fairies, and the waters were teeming with nymphs and monsters, whose whims are the subjects of a rich collection of folklore. Almost every stream, gorge, and headland had a supernatural story linked to it, and the bards and musicians of old made a simple living by keeping these legends alive. Some believed in supernatural powers, and evil and good spirits took on human forms and moved among the palms disguised as birds.

Ku-Kaili-Moku, the War-God of Kamehameha I.
Ku-Kaili-Moku, the War God of Kamehameha I.
The people made their own household gods, and destroyed them when they failed to contribute to their success. For example, at Ninole, on the southeast coast of Hawaii, is a small beach called Kaloa, the stones of which, it was thought, propagated by contact with each other. From the large stones the people made gods to preside over their games. When a stone was selected for a god it was taken to the heiau, where certain ceremonies were performed over it. It was then dressed and taken to witness some game or pastime. If the owner was successful it was accepted as a god; if unsuccessful more than once or twice, it was thrown away or wrought into an axe or adze. Sometimes a stone of each sex was selected, wrapped in kapa, and laid away. In time a small pebble was found with them. It increased in size, and was finally taken to the heiau and formally made into a god. Such is the story that is still told.
The people created their own household gods and got rid of them when they didn't help them succeed. For instance, at Ninole on the southeast coast of Hawaii, there's a small beach called Kaloa, where it was believed that the stones enhanced each other's power through contact. The people formed gods from larger stones to oversee their games. When a stone was chosen to be a god, it was taken to the heiau, where specific ceremonies were performed. It was then dressed up and brought to witness a game or activity. If the owner won, it was accepted as a god; if the owner lost more than once or twice, it was discarded or turned into a tool like an axe or adze. Sometimes, a stone of each gender was chosen, wrapped in kapa, and put away. Eventually, a small pebble was found with them. It grew larger and was eventually brought to the heiau and officially made into a god. This is the story that is still passed down.
The people believed that the spirits of the departed continued to hover around their earthly homes, and the shades of their ancestors [41]were appealed to in prayer. The owl and a bird called the alae were regarded as gods, and scores of other deities, controlling the elements or presiding over the several industries and amusements of the masses, were recognized and placated with sacrifices when in unfavorable moods. They had a god of the winds, of the husbandman, the warrior, the canoe-maker, the hula dancer, the distiller, the orator, the doctor and the sorcerer, and many gods of the sailor and the fisherman.
The people believed that the spirits of the dead continued to linger around their homes, and they prayed to the spirits of their ancestors [__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]. The owl and a bird called the alae were considered gods, and many other deities, who controlled natural elements or oversaw various trades and entertainment for the community, were acknowledged and appeased with sacrifices when they were in a bad mood. They had gods for the winds, farming, warriors, canoe-making, hula dancing, distilling, oratory, medicine, and sorcery, as well as numerous gods for sailors and fishermen.
The services of the high-priest did not extend to these popular deities on any of the islands of the group. The heiaus over which he presided were dedicated either to the higher gods of the pantheon or to the war-god of the king or supreme chief. He was next to the king in authority, and always of distinguished blood. Surrounded by seers, prophets and assistants, and claiming to hold direct intercourse with the gods, he was consulted on all matters of state consequence, and the auguries of the temple were always accepted with respect and confidence. The high-priest sometimes had charge of the war-god of the king, and in such cases went with it to the field of battle.
The high priest's responsibilities didn’t include the popular gods on any of the islands in the group. The heiaus he oversaw were dedicated either to the high-ranking deities of the pantheon or to the war god of the king or supreme chief. He was second in authority only to the king and always came from a prestigious lineage. Surrounded by seers, prophets, and aides, and claiming to communicate directly with the gods, he was consulted on all significant state matters, and the omens from the temple were always regarded with respect and trust. The high priest sometimes was in charge of the king’s war god and, in those cases, accompanied it to the battlefield.
Hua, one of the ancient kings of Maui, defied the priesthood and slew his high-priest. As a warning to ruling chiefs, the story of the consequences of Hua’s madness has come down with great conciseness through the chroniclers of the priesthood. Hua’s kingdom became a desolation. Wherever he traveled all vegetation perished, and he finally died of famine on Hawaii, and his bones were left to whiten in the sun.
Hua, one of the ancient kings of Maui, challenged the priesthood and killed his high priest. To serve as a warning to other chiefs, the story of Hua’s madness has been passed down clearly by the priests' chroniclers. Hua’s kingdom fell into ruin. Wherever he went, all plant life died, and he ultimately starved to death in Hawaii, with his bones left to bleach in the sun.
There were several classes of priests, or kahunas, beside those who were connected with the temples. They were seers, doctors and dealers in enchantment, and subsisted by preying upon the people through their superstitions. All physical illness was attributed either to the anger of the gods, witchcraft, or the prayers of a malignant kahuna. The afflicted person usually sent for a kahuna, whose first business was to discover the cause of the malady through incantation. This ascertained, an effort was made to counteract the spells or prayers which were wearing away the life of the patient, and sometimes with so great success that the affliction was transferred to the party whose malice had invoked it.
There were several types of priests, or kahunas, besides those associated with the temples. They were seers, doctors, and practitioners of magic, and they made a living by exploiting people's superstitions. Any physical illness was blamed on the anger of the gods, witchcraft, or the prayers of a malevolent kahuna. The sick person would typically call for a kahuna, whose first task was to discover the cause of the illness through incantation. Once identified, efforts were made to counteract the spells or prayers that were draining the patient’s life, sometimes with such great success that the affliction was transferred to the one whose malice caused it.
The belief that one person might be prayed to death by another was universal with the ancient Hawaiians, and not a few [42]of the race would turn pale to-day if told that one of priestly strain was earnestly praying for his death. In praying a person to death it was essential that the kahuna should possess something closely connected with the person of the victim—a lock of his hair, a tooth, a nail-paring, or a small quantity of his spittle, for example; hence the office of spittoon-bearer to the ancient kings was entrusted only to chiefs of some rank, who might be expected to guard with care the royal expectoration.
The belief that one person could pray another to death was widespread among the ancient Hawaiians, and not a few [__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]of that culture would turn pale today if they heard that someone of priestly descent was seriously praying for their death. To pray someone to death, it was crucial for the kahuna to have something closely linked to the victim—like a lock of hair, a tooth, a nail clipping, or a small amount of their saliva; therefore, the role of spittoon-bearer for the ancient kings was given only to chiefs of some status, who could be trusted to carefully protect the royal saliva.
The belief was general that the spirits of the dead might be seen and conversed with by the kilos, or sorcerers, and the spirits of the living, it was claimed, were sometimes invoked from their slumbering tabernacles by priests of exceptional sanctity. The spirit of the dead was called unihipili, while the disembodied and visible spirit of a living person was known as kahoaka.
The common belief was that the dead could be seen and communicated with by the kilos, or sorcerers, and it was said that the spirits of the living were sometimes called forth from their resting places by exceptionally holy priests. The spirit of the dead was referred to as unihipili, while the disembodied and visible spirit of a living person was called kahoaka.
Of all the deities Pele was held in greatest dread on the island of Hawaii, where volcanic irruptions were frequent. With her five brothers and eight sisters—all representing different elemental forces—she dwelt in state in the fiery abysses of the volcanoes, moving from one to another at her pleasure, and visiting with inundations of lava such districts as neglected to cast into the craters proper offerings of meats and fruits, or angered her in other respects. One of her forms was that of a beautiful woman, in which she sometimes sought human society, and numerous legends of her affairs of love have been preserved. She was regarded as the special friend of Kamehameha I., and the suffocation of a portion of the army of Keoua, near the crater of Kilauea, in 1791, was credited directly to her.
Of all the gods, Pele was feared the most on the island of Hawaii, where volcanic eruptions were common. Along with her five brothers and eight sisters—each representing different elemental forces—she lived in the fiery depths of the volcanoes, moving from one to another whenever she wanted and covering areas that failed to offer proper sacrifices of food and fruit, or that upset her in other ways, with flows of lava. One of her appearances was as a beautiful woman, and she sometimes engaged with humans, leading to many legends about her romantic exploits. She was seen as a close ally of Kamehameha I., and the suffocation of part of Keoua's army near the Kilauea crater in 1791 was directly attributed to her.
The last public recognition of the powers of Pele occurred as late as 1882 on the island of Hawaii. The village of Hilo was threatened. A broad stream of lava from Mauna Loa, after a devastating journey of twenty-five miles or more, reached a point in its downward course within a mile or two of the bay of Hilo. Its movement was slow, like that of all lava-streams some distance from their source, but its steadily approaching line of fire rendered it almost certain that the village, and perhaps the harbor, of Hilo would be destroyed within a very few days. Trenches were digged, walls were raised, and prayers were offered, but all to no purpose. Downward moved the awful avalanche of fire.
The last public acknowledgment of the powers of Pele took place as recently as 1882 on the island of Hawaii. The village of Hilo was in danger. A wide stream of lava from Mauna Loa, after a devastating journey of over twenty-five miles, came within a mile or two of Hilo Bay. Its movement was slow, like that of all lava flows some distance from their source, but the steadily approaching line of fire made it almost certain that the village, and perhaps the harbor, of Hilo would be destroyed within just a few days. Trenches were dug, walls were built, and prayers were offered, but it was all in vain. Downward moved the terrifying avalanche of fire.
Ruth, a surviving sister of the fourth and fifth Kamehamehas, [43]was then living in Honolulu. She was a proud, stern old chiefess, who thought too little of the whites to attempt to acquire their language. The danger threatening Hilo was reported to her. “I will save the fish-ponds of Hilo,” said the old chiefess. “Pele will not refuse to listen to the prayer of a Kamehameha.” She chartered a steamer, left Honolulu for Hilo with a large number of attendants, and the next day stood facing the still moving flow of lava. Ascending an elevation immediately back of the village, she caused to be erected there a rude altar, before which she made her supplications to Pele, with offerings fed to the front of the advancing lava. This done, she descended the hill with confidence and returned to Honolulu.
Ruth, a surviving sister of the fourth and fifth Kamehamehas, [__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]was living in Honolulu at the time. She was a proud, stern old chiefess who thought too little of white people to bother learning their language. She was informed about the danger threatening Hilo. “I will save the fish ponds of Hilo,” said the old chiefess. “Pele will not refuse to listen to the prayer of a Kamehameha.” She chartered a steamer, left Honolulu for Hilo with many attendants, and the next day faced the still-flowing lava. Climbing to a rise just behind the village, she had a simple altar built there, where she prayed to Pele, making offerings in front of the advancing lava. Once that was done, she confidently descended the hill and returned to Honolulu.
The stream of fire ceased to move, and to-day its glistening front stands like a wall around Hilo. “A remarkable coincidence,” explained the whites. “The work of Pele,” whispered the natives, although the last of the temples of that goddess had been destroyed sixty years before. Without discussing the cause—a natural one beyond a doubt—it may be remarked that the result has been something of a renewal with the natives of faith in the discarded gods of their fathers.
The stream of lava stopped moving, and today its shiny front stands like a wall around Hilo. “What a strange coincidence,” the white people said. “The work of Pele,” the locals whispered, even though the last temple of that goddess had been destroyed sixty years ago. Without discussing the cause—which is certainly a natural one—it’s worth noting that this has led to a revival among the natives in their belief in the gods of their ancestors.
All of the minor gods of the Hawaiians seem to have been independent and self-controlling. It is not claimed that they derived their powers from, were directed by, or were responsible to the supreme godhead. Hence the mythology of the Polynesians, strong though it be in individual powers and personations of the forces and achievements of nature, presents itself to us in a fragmentary form, like an incongruous patchwork of two or more half-developed or half-forgotten religious systems.
All of the minor Hawaiian gods appear to have been independent and self-governing. It's not stated that they got their powers from, were guided by, or were accountable to the supreme deity. Therefore, the mythology of the Polynesians, while powerful in its individual deities and representations of nature's forces and accomplishments, comes across as fragmented, resembling a mismatched collection of two or more incomplete or forgotten religious systems.

Kalaipahoa, Poison War-Goddess of Molokai.
Kalaipahoa, Poison War Goddess of Molokai.
One of the most noted of the independent deities of the group was Kalaipahoa, the poison-goddess of Molokai. Some centuries back she came to the islands, with two or three of her sisters, from an unknown land, and left her mark in many localities. She entered a grove of trees on the island of Molokai, and left in them a poison so intense that birds fell dead in flying over their branches. The king of the island [44]was advised by his high-priest to have a god hewn from one of the poisoned trees. Hundreds of his subjects perished in the undertaking, but the image was finally finished and presented to the king, wrapped in many folds of kapa. It came down the generations an object of fear, and was finally seized by the first Kamehameha, and at his death divided among his principal chiefs.
One of the most well-known independent deities in the group was Kalaipahoa, the poison goddess of Molokai. Centuries ago, she arrived in the islands with a couple of her sisters from an unknown land and left her mark in many places. She entered a grove of trees on Molokai and left such a potent poison in them that birds fell dead while flying over their branches. The king of the island [__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__] was advised by his high priest to carve a god from one of the poisoned trees. Hundreds of his subjects died during the process, but the statue was finally completed and presented to the king, wrapped in many layers of kapa. It passed down through generations as an object of fear and was eventually seized by the first Kamehameha, who divided it among his main chiefs when he died.
Kuula was the principal god of the fishermen on all the islands of the group. Rude temples were erected to him on the shores of favorite fishing-grounds, and the first fish of every catch was his due. His wife was Hina, and she was appealed to when her husband withheld his favors. Laeapua and Kaneapua were gods worshipped by the fishermen of Lanai, and other fish-gods were elsewhere recognized.
Kuula was the main god for fishermen across all the islands. Simple temples were built for him along the shores of popular fishing spots, and the first fish caught in every haul was dedicated to him. His wife was Hina, and people turned to her when her husband didn’t provide his blessings. Laeapua and Kaneapua were gods honored by the fishermen of Lanai, and other fish gods were recognized in different areas.
There were a number of shark and lizard gods. They were powerful and malignant, and greatly feared by the classes who frequented the sea. Heiaus were erected to them on promontories overlooking the ocean, and the offerings to them of fish and fruits were always liberal. They assumed the forms of gigantic sharks and lizards, and not unfrequently lashed the waters into fury and destroyed canoes. Moaalii was the great shark-god of Molokai and Oahu. Apukohai and Uhumakaikai were the evil gods infesting the waters of Kauai. Lonoakihi was the eel-god of all the islands, and Ukanipo was the shark-god of Hawaii.
There were several shark and lizard gods. They were powerful and malicious, and the people who spent time at sea greatly feared them. Heiaus were built on cliffs overlooking the ocean, and the offerings of fish and fruits to them were always generous. They took on the forms of enormous sharks and lizards, and often whipped the waters into rage, destroying canoes. Moaalii was the main shark god of Molokai and Oahu. Apukohai and Uhumakaikai were the malevolent gods that plagued the waters of Kauai. Lonoakihi was the eel god of all the islands, and Ukanipo was the shark god of Hawaii.
Among the celebrated war-gods of the kings of the group was that of Kamehameha I. It was called Kaili, or Ku-kaili-moku, and accompanied the great chief in all of his important battles. It had been the war-god of the Hawaiian kings for many generations, and was given in charge of Kamehameha by his royal uncle, Kalauiopuu. It was a small wooden image, roughly carved, and adorned with a head-dress of yellow feathers. It is said that at times, in the heat of battle, it uttered cries which were heard above the clash of arms. It is not known what became of the image after the death of Kamehameha.
Among the famous war gods of the kings in the group was that of Kamehameha I. It was called Kaili, or Ku-kaili-moku, and accompanied the great chief in all of his important battles. It had been the war god of the Hawaiian kings for many generations and was given to Kamehameha by his royal uncle, Kalauiopuu. It was a small wooden statue, roughly carved, and decorated with a headpiece made of yellow feathers. It is said that sometimes, in the heat of battle, it would emit cries that could be heard above the sound of clashing weapons. It is unknown what happened to the statue after Kamehameha's death.
The public heiaus, or temples, of the Hawaiians were usually walled enclosures of from one to five acres, and generally irregular in form. The walls were frequently ten feet in thickness and twenty feet in height, and the material used, was unhewn [45]stone, without mortar or cement. They narrowed slightly from the base upward, and were sometimes capped with hewn slabs of coral or other rock not too firm in texture to be worked with tools of stone.
The public heiaus, or temples, of the Hawaiians were typically walled areas ranging from one to five acres and were usually irregular in shape. The walls were often ten feet thick and twenty feet high, made from uncut [__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]stone, without any mortar or cement. They tapered slightly from the base to the top and were sometimes topped with cut slabs of coral or other softer rocks that could be shaped with stone tools.
Within this enclosure was an inner stone or wooden temple of small dimensions, called the luakina, or house of sacrifice, and in front of the entrance to it stood the lele, or altar, consisting of a raised platform of stone. The inner temple was sacred to the priests. Within it stood the anu, a small wicker enclosure, from which issued the oracles of the kaulas, or prophets, and around the walls were ranged charms and gods of especial sanctity. Beside the entrance to this sacred apartment were images of the principal gods, and the outer and inner walls were surmounted by lines of stone and wooden idols.
Inside this enclosure was a small inner temple made of stone or wood, called the luakina, or house of sacrifice, and in front of its entrance stood the lele, or altar, which was a raised stone platform. The inner temple was reserved for the priests. Inside, there was the anu, a small wicker enclosure, from which the oracles of the kaulas, or prophets, spoke, and along the walls were charms and particularly sacred gods. Next to the entrance of this sacred space were images of the main gods, and the outer and inner walls were topped with rows of stone and wooden idols.
The enclosure contained other buildings for the accommodation of the high-priest and his assistants; also a house for the governing chief or king, some distance removed from the domiciles of the priest. It was used temporarily by him when on a visit of consultation to the temple, or as a place of refuge in a time of danger. On each side of the entrance to the outer enclosure was a tabu staff, or elevated cross, and near it was a small walled structure in which were slain the victims for the altar.
The enclosure included additional buildings for the high priest and his assistants, as well as a separate house for the governing chief or king, located some distance from the priests' quarters. This house was used temporarily when he visited the temple for consultations or as a safe place during emergencies. On either side of the entrance to the outer enclosure stood a tabu staff, or raised cross, and nearby was a small walled structure where the victims for the altar were sacrificed.
When an augury was required by the king he frequently visited the heiau in person and propounded his questions to the kaulas. If the answers from the anu were vague and unsatisfactory, other methods of divination were resorted to, such as the opening of pigs and fowls, the shapes of the clouds, the flights of birds, etc. After prayers by the priest the animals were killed, and auguries were gathered from the manner in which they expired, the appearance of the intestines—which were supposed to be the seat of thought—and other signs. Sometimes the spleens of swine were removed, if auguries of war were required, and held above the heads of the priests while prayers were offered.
When the king needed an augury, he often went to the heiau himself and asked his questions to the kaulas. If the answers from the anu were unclear and unsatisfactory, they used other divination methods, like examining the innards of pigs and birds, the shapes of clouds, and the flight patterns of birds. After the priest prayed, the animals were slaughtered, and omens were interpreted based on how they died, the condition of their intestines—believed to be the center of thought—and other signs. Sometimes, if war omens were needed, they would remove the spleens from pigs and hold them above the heads of the priests while prayers were offered.
Before engaging in war or any other important enterprise attended by doubt or danger, human and other sacrifices were made, of which there were fifteen different kinds, and the first prisoners taken in battle were reserved for the altar. The priests named the number of men required for sacrifice, and the king [46]provided them, sometimes from prisoners and malefactors, and sometimes from promiscuous drafts along the highways. The victims were slain with clubs without the temple walls, and their bodies, with other offerings, were laid upon the altar to decay. When the king or other high chief made a special offering of an enemy, the left eye of the victim, after the body had been brought to the altar, was removed and handed to him by the officiating priest. After making a semblance of eating it the chief tossed it upon the altar.
Before going to war or undertaking any significant venture filled with uncertainty or risk, sacrifices of humans and others were made, which included fifteen types. The first prisoners captured in battle were set aside for the altar. The priests would specify how many men were needed for the sacrifice, and the king [__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__] provided them, sometimes choosing from prisoners and wrongdoers, and other times from random selections along the roads. The victims were killed with clubs outside the temple, and their bodies, along with other offerings, were placed on the altar to rot. When the king or another high leader made a special offering of an enemy, the left eye of the victim was removed after the body was brought to the altar and handed to him by the officiating priest. After pretending to eat it, the chief threw it onto the altar.
During the construction of heiaus human sacrifices were usually offered as the work progressed, and when completed they were dedicated with great pomp and solemnity, and the altars were sometimes heaped with human bodies. In dedicating ordinary temples the kaiopokeo prayer was employed; but in consecrating heiaus of the first class the kuawili invocation was recited, a prayer continuing from sunrise to sunset. Oil and holy water were sprinkled upon the altars and sacred vessels, and the services were under the direction of the high-priest, and generally in the presence of the governing chief.
During the construction of heiaus, human sacrifices were typically offered as the work progressed. Once completed, they were dedicated with great ceremony, and the altars were sometimes filled with human bodies. For dedicating regular temples, the kaiopokeo prayer was used; however, for consecrating first-class heiaus, the kuawili invocation was recited, a prayer that lasted from sunrise to sunset. Oil and holy water were sprinkled on the altars and sacred vessels, and the ceremonies were overseen by the high priest, typically in the presence of the ruling chief.
The ordinary services in the temples consisted of offerings of fruits and meats, and of chants, prayers and responses, in which the people sometimes joined. Women did not participate in the ceremonies of the temples, but the exclusion found ample compensation in their exemption from sacrifice when human bodies were required.
The regular services in the temples involved offerings of fruits and meats, along with chants, prayers, and responses that the people sometimes joined in on. Women didn't take part in the temple ceremonies, but their exclusion was more than compensated by their exemption from sacrifices when human bodies were needed.
Temples of refuge, called puhonuas, were maintained on Hawaii, and possibly on Lanai and Oahu in the remote past; but concerning the latter there is some doubt. One of the puhonuas on Hawaii was at Honaunau, near the sacred burial-place of Hale-o-Keawe, and the other at Waipio, connected with the great heiau of Paa-kalani. Their gates were always open, and priests guarded their entrances. Any one who entered their enclosures for protection, whether chief or slave, whether escaping criminal or warrior in retreat, was safe from molestation, even though the king pursued. These places of refuge, with the right of circumcision, which existed until after the death of the first Kamehameha, suggest a Polynesian contact with the descendants of Abraham far back in the past, if not a kinship with one of the scattered tribes of Israel.
Temples of refuge, known as puhonuas, were found in Hawaii, and possibly on Lanai and Oahu in ancient times; however, there is some uncertainty about the latter. One of the puhonuas in Hawaii was located at Honaunau, near the sacred burial site of Hale-o-Keawe, and the other at Waipio, linked to the great heiau of Paa-kalani. Their gates were always open, and priests watched over their entrances. Anyone who entered these areas for protection—whether chief or slave, escaping criminal or retreating warrior—was safe from harm, even if the king was in pursuit. These places of refuge, along with the right of circumcision, which lasted until after the death of the first Kamehameha, hint at a possible Polynesian connection with the descendants of Abraham long ago, if not a relationship with one of the dispersed tribes of Israel.
In further evidence of the wanderings of the early Polynesians [47]in western and southern Asia, and of their intercourse with the continental races, it may be mentioned that a disposition toward phallic worship, attested by tradition and existing symbols, followed them far out into the Pacific; and that connected with their story of the creation, so closely resembling the Hebrew version, is the Buddhist claim of previous creations which either ran their course or were destroyed by an offended godhead. Nor is Hawaiian tradition content with the mere advancement of the theory of successive creations. It makes specific reference to a creation next preceding that of their Ku-mu-honua, or Adam, and gives the names of the man and woman created and destroyed. They were Wela-ahi-lani and Owe.
In further evidence of the travels of the early Polynesians [__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__] in western and southern Asia, and their interactions with the continental races, it should be noted that a tendency toward phallic worship, supported by tradition and existing symbols, followed them deep into the Pacific; and that connected to their creation story, which closely resembles the Hebrew version, is the Buddhist idea of previous creations that either ran their course or were destroyed by an offended deity. Hawaiian tradition also goes beyond just suggesting successive creations. It specifically refers to a creation right before their Ku-mu-honua, or Adam, and names the man and woman who were created and then destroyed. They were Wela-ahi-lani and Owe.
It has been mentioned that the birds pueo and alae were sacred and sometimes worshipped. Among the sacred fish were the aku and opelu. How they became so is told in a legend relating to the high-priest Paao, who migrated to the islands in the eleventh century and induced Pili to follow him. Before visiting Hawaii, Paao lived near his brother, probably on the island of Samoa. Both were priests and well skilled in sorcery and divination. The name of the brother was Lonopele. Both were affluent and greatly respected. Lonopele’s lands were near the sea and produced the choicest varieties of fruits. One season, when the fruits were ripening, Lonopele discovered that some one was surreptitiously gathering them in the night-time, and accused one of the sons of Paao of stealing them. Indignant at the charge, and discerning no better way of disproving it, Paao killed and opened his son, and showed his brother that there was no fruit in the stomach of the boy.
It’s been said that the birds pueo and alae were sacred and sometimes worshipped. Among the sacred fish were aku and opelu. The story of how they became sacred is told in a legend about the high priest Paao, who migrated to the islands in the eleventh century and convinced Pili to follow him. Before coming to Hawaii, Paao lived near his brother, likely on the island of Samoa. Both were priests and were skilled in sorcery and divination. The brother’s name was Lonopele. Both of them were wealthy and highly respected. Lonopele owned lands near the sea that produced the finest fruits. One season, when the fruits were ripening, Lonopele noticed that someone was secretly gathering them at night and accused one of Paao's sons of stealing them. Furious at the accusation, and seeing no other way to prove his son’s innocence, Paao killed and opened his son, showing his brother that there was no fruit in the boy’s stomach.
Grieved at the death of his son, and holding his brother accountable for it, Paao concluded to emigrate to some other land, and built strong canoes for that purpose. About the time they were completed a son of Lonopele chanced to be in the neighborhood, and Paao, remembering the death of his own son, ordered the boy to be killed. He was missed, and search was made for him, and his body was finally found near Paao’s canoes. Lonopele charged his brother with the murder. Paao did not deny it, and Lonopele ordered him to leave the island. To avoid further trouble Paao set sail at once with a party consisting of thirty-eight persons. One tradition says Pili was of the [48]party; but he must have left Samoa some years later, as Paao sent or went for him after reaching Hawaii.
Grieved by the death of his son and blaming his brother for it, Paao decided to move to another land and built sturdy canoes for that purpose. Just as they were finished, a son of Lonopele happened to be nearby, and Paao, recalling his son's death, ordered the boy to be killed. When he went missing, a search ensued, and his body was eventually found near Paao’s canoes. Lonopele accused his brother of murder. Paao did not deny it, and Lonopele ordered him to leave the island. To avoid further conflict, Paao immediately set sail with a group of thirty-eight people. One tradition suggests Pili was part of the [__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]group; however, he must have left Samoa a few years later since Paao sought him out after arriving in Hawaii.

General Dominis, Consort of the Heir-Apparent.
General Dominis, Partner of the Heir-Apparent.
As the canoes were moving from the shore several prophets, standing on the cliffs above, expressed a desire to join the party. “Very well,” was the answer of Paao; “if you are prophets, as you say, leap from the cliffs and I will take you aboard.” Several leaped into the sea and were dashed against the rocks and drowned. Finally Makuakaumana, a prophet of genuine inspiration, who was to have accompanied the expedition, reached the shore and discovered the canoes of Paao far out on the ocean. Raising his voice, he hailed Paao and asked that a canoe might be sent back for him. “Not so,” returned the priest in a loud voice, which the favoring winds bore to the belated prophet. “To return would be an omen of evil. There is room for you, but if you would go with us you must fly to our canoes.” And, flying, the prophet reached the canoes in safety.
As the canoes were leaving the shore, several prophets standing on the cliffs above wanted to join the group. “Alright,” replied Paao, “if you are truly prophets, jump from the cliffs and I’ll bring you aboard.” Several jumped into the sea but crashed against the rocks and drowned. Finally, Makuakaumana, an inspired prophet who was supposed to join the expedition, arrived at the shore and saw Paao's canoes far out in the ocean. Raising his voice, he called out to Paao, asking for a canoe to be sent back for him. “No way,” answered the priest loudly, his voice carried by the favorable winds to the late prophet. “Going back would be a bad omen. There’s room for you, but if you want to come with us, you’ll have to fly to our canoes.” And the prophet flew to the canoes safely.
Observing the canoes of Paao as they were disappearing in the distance, Lonopele sent a violent storm to destroy them; but the strong fish Aku assisted in propelling the canoes against the storm, and the mighty fish Opelu swam around them and broke the waves with his body. The malignant brother then sent the great bird Kihahakaiwainapali to vomit over the canoes and sink them; but they were hastily covered with mats, and thus escaped destruction. After a long voyage Paao landed in Puna, on the coast of Hawaii. Thenceforth the aku and opelu were held sacred by Paao and his descendants.
Watching the canoes of Paao fade into the distance, Lonopele unleashed a fierce storm to destroy them; however, the strong fish Aku helped propel the canoes against the storm, and the powerful fish Opelu swam around them, breaking the waves with its body. The spiteful brother then sent the great bird Kihahakaiwainapali to vomit over the canoes and sink them; but they were quickly covered with mats and thus avoided destruction. After a long journey, Paao arrived in Puna, on the coast of Hawaii. From that point on, the aku and opelu were regarded as sacred by Paao and his descendants.
Following is a list of the supreme and principal elemental, industrial and tutelar deities of the Hawaiian group:
Following is a list of the primary and chief elemental, industrial, and guardian gods of the Hawaiian group:
- The Godhead.
- Kane, the organizer.
- Ku, the architect and builder.
- Lono, the executor.
- Kanaloa, the Lucifer, or fallen angel.
- Rulers in the realms of Po, or death.
- Akea, the first Hawaiian king, who, after life, founded the island-kingdom of Kapapahaunaumoku, in the realms of Po, or death.
- Milu, the successor of Akea, or who, according to another belief, accompanied Akea to Po, and became the perpetual ruler of a kingdom on its western confines.
- Manua, referred to in some legends as the supreme sovereign of Po. With him abide the spirits of distinguished chiefs and priests, who wander among beautiful streams and groves of kou trees, and subsist upon lizards and butterflies.
- Minor Celestial Deities.
- Kaonohiokala (the eyeball of the sun), a celestial god, with an abode somewhere in the heavens, and to whose presence the departed spirits of chiefs were conducted.
- Kuahairo, the messenger who conducted the souls of distinguished chiefs to Kaonohiokala.
- Olopue, a god of Maui, who bore the spirits of noted chiefs to the celestial paradise. Kamehameha sought to secure possession of a very sacred image of this god, inherited by Kahekili, moi of Maui.
- The Volcanic Deities.
- Pele, the ruling goddess of the volcanoes, with her sisters,
- Hiiaka-wawahi-lani, the heaven-rending cloud-holder;
- Makoie-nawahi-waa, the fire-eyed canoe-breaker;
- Hiiaka-noho-lani, the heaven-dwelling cloud-holder;
- Hiiaka-kaalawa-maka, the quick-glancing cloud-holder;
- Hiiaka-hoi-ke-poli-a-pele, the cloud-holder kissing the bosom of Pele;
- Hiiaka-ka-pu-enaena, the red-hot mountain lifting clouds;
- Hiiaka-kaleiia, the wreath encircled cloud-holder;
- Hiiaka-opio, the young cloud-holder; and their brothers,
- Kamo-hoalii, or King Moho, the king of vapor or steam;
- Kapohoikahiola, god of explosions;
- Keuakepo, god of the night-rain, or rain of fire;
- Kane-kahili, the husband of thunder, or thundering god;
- Keoahi-kamakaua, the fire-thrusting child of war.
- [The last two were hunchbacks.]
- Akuapaao, the war-god of Paao, taken from the temple of Manini by Umi.
- Ku-kaili-moku, the war-god of Kamehameha I., bequeathed to him by Kalaniopuu.
- Deities of the Elements.
- Laamaomao, god of the winds, the Hawaiian Æolus, whose home was on Molokai.
- Hinakuluiau, a goddess of the rain.
- Hinakealii and
- Hookuipaele, sisters of Hinakuluiau.
- Mooaleo, a powerful gnome of Lanai, conquered by Kaululaau, a prince of Maui.
- Kuula, a god of the fishermen.
- Hina, wife of Kuula.
- Laeapua and
- Kaneapua, gods of the fishermen of Lanai.
- Hinahele and her daughter
- Aiaiakuula, goddesses of the fishermen of Hawaii.
- Ukanipo, the great shark-god of Hawaii.
- Moaalii, the principal shark-god of Molokai and Oahu.
- Lonoakiki, the great eel-god of all the group.
- Apukohai and
- Uhumakaikai, evil shark or fish-gods of Kauai.
- Gods of the Arts and Industries.
- Akua-ula, the god of inspiration.
- Haulili, a god of speech, special to Kauai.
- Koleamoku, the deified chief who first learned the use of herbs and the art of healing from the gods. He was a patron of the kahunas.
- Olonopuha and
- Makanuiailone, deified disciples of Koleamoku.
- Kaanahua, the second son of the high-priest Luahoomoe, and
- Kukaoo, gods of the husbandman.
- Lakakane, god of the hula and similar sports.
- Mokualii, god of the canoe-makers.
- Hai, god of kapa making.
- Ulaulakeahi, god of distillation.
- Kalaipahoa, a goddess who entered and poisoned trees.
- Kapo and
- Pua, sisters of Kalaipahoa, with like functions.
- Kama, a powerful tutelar god of all the islands.
- Laauli, the god who made inviolable laws.
- Kuahana, the god who killed men wantonly.
- Leleioio, the god who inflicted bodily pain.
- Lelehookaahaa, wife of Leleioio.
- Lie, a goddess of the mountains, who braided leis.
- Maikahulipu, the god who assisted in righting upset canoes.
- Pohakaa, a god living in precipitous places, and who rolled down stones, to the fright and injury of passers.
- Keoloewa, a god worshipped in the heiaus of Maui.
- Kiha, a goddess of Maui, held in great reverence.
- Uli, the god of the sorcerers.
- Pekuku, a powerful god of Hawaii.
- Lonoikeaualii, a god worshipped in the heiaus of Oahu.
- Kauakahi, a god of Maui and Molokai.
- Hiaka, a mountain god of Kauai.
- Kapo and
- Kapua, and several others, messengers of the gods.
- Ouli, the god appealed to by the kahunas in praying people to death.
- Maliu, any deified deceased chief.
- Akua noho, gods possessing the spirits of departed mortals, of which there were many.
- Kiha-wahine and
- Kalo, noted deities of the class of akua-noho.
- Mahulu, a name common to three gods in the temples of Lono.
- Manu, the names of two gods at the outer gates of heiaus dedicated to Lono.
- Puea, the god worshipped in the darkness.
- Kaluanuunohonionio, one of the principal gods of the luakina, or sacrificial house of the temple.
- Kanenuiakea, a general name for a class of thirteen gods connected with the larger heiaus.
[51]
[__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]
ANCIENT HAWAIIAN GOVERNMENT.
Previous to the eleventh century the several habitable islands of the Hawaiian group were governed by one or more independent chiefs, as already stated. After the migratory influx of that period, however, and the settlement on the islands of a number of warlike southern chiefs and their followers, the independent chiefs began to unite for mutual protection. This involved the necessity of a supreme head, which was usually found in the chief conceded to be the most powerful; and thus alii-nuis, mois and kings sprang into existence. So far as tradition extends, however, certain lines, such as the Maweke, Pili and Paumakua families, were always considered to be of supreme blood. They came to the islands as chiefs of distinguished lineage, and so remained.
Before the eleventh century, the various habitable islands of the Hawaiian group were ruled by one or more independent chiefs, as already mentioned. However, after a wave of migration during that time, when several warlike southern chiefs and their followers settled on the islands, the independent chiefs started to band together for mutual protection. This created the need for a supreme leader, which was typically the chief recognized as the most powerful; thus, alii-nuis, mois, and kings came into being. As far as tradition goes, certain bloodlines, such as the Maweke, Pili, and Paumakua families, were always regarded as having a supreme heritage. They arrived on the islands as chiefs of notable lineage and continued to hold that status.
Gradually the powers of the mois and ruling chiefs were enlarged, until at length they claimed almost everything. Then the chiefs held their possessions in fief to the moi, and forfeited them by rebellion. In time the king became absolute master of the most of the soil over which he ruled, and assumed tabu rights which rendered his person sacred and his prerogatives more secure. All he acquired by conquest was his, and by partitioning the lands among his titled friends he secured the support necessary to his maintenance in power. Certain lands were inalienable both in chiefly families and the priesthood; they were made so by early sovereign decrees, which continued to be respected; but with each succeeding king important land changes usually occurred.
Slowly, the powers of the mois and ruling chiefs expanded until they claimed nearly everything. The chiefs held their lands in fief to the moi and lost them if they rebelled. Over time, the king became the absolute master of most of the land he ruled and claimed tabu rights, which made him sacred and his powers more secure. Everything he gained through conquest became his, and by distributing the lands among his titled allies, he ensured the support necessary to stay in power. Some lands were inalienable within chiefly families and the priesthood, established by early royal decrees that continued to be honored, but with each new king, significant land changes often took place.
Although the king maintained fish-ponds and cultivated lands of his own, he was largely supported by his subject chiefs. They were expected to contribute to him whatever was demanded either of food, raiment, houses, canoes, weapons or labor, and in turn they took such portions of the products of their tenants as their necessities required. The ili was the smallest political division; next above it was the ahapuaa, which paid a nominal or special tax of one hog monthly to the king; next the okana, embracing several ahapuaas; and finally the moku, or district, or island.
Although the king had his own fish ponds and cultivated land, he mostly relied on support from his subject chiefs. They were expected to provide him with whatever he demanded, whether it was food, clothing, houses, canoes, weapons, or labor. In return, they took whatever portion of their tenants' products they needed. The ili was the smallest political division; just above it was the ahapuaa, which paid a nominal or special tax of one pig each month to the king; next was the okana, which included several ahapuaas; and finally, the moku, or district, or island.
The laboring classes possessed no realty of their own, nor could they anywhere escape the claim or jurisdiction of a chief [52]or landlord. They owed military and other personal service to their respective chiefs, and the chiefs owed theirs to the king. If required, all were expected to respond to a call to the field, fully armed and prepared for battle.
The working class had no property of their own and couldn’t escape the authority of a chief [__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__] or landlord. They were obligated to provide military and other personal service to their chiefs, who in turn owed service to the king. When needed, everyone was expected to answer a call to battle, fully armed and ready to fight.
Caste rules of dress, ornamentation and social forms were rigidly enforced. The entire people were divided into four general classes: first, the alii, or chiefly families, of various grades and prerogatives; second, the kahunas, embracing priests, prophets, doctors, diviners and astrologers; third, the kanaka-wale, or free private citizens; and, fourth, the kauwa-maoli, or slaves, either captured in war or born of slave parents.
Caste rules about clothing, jewelry, and social behavior were strictly enforced. The entire population was divided into four main classes: first, the alii, or chief families, with different ranks and privileges; second, the kahunas, which included priests, prophets, doctors, diviners, and astrologers; third, the kanaka-wale, or free citizens; and fourth, the kauwa-maoli, or slaves, either taken in war or born to slave parents.
The laws were few and simple, and the most of them referred to the rights and prerogatives of the king, priesthood and nobility. Property disputes of the masses were settled by their chiefs, and other grievances were in most instances left to private redress, which frequently and very naturally resulted in prolonged and fatal family feuds, in the end requiring chiefly and sometimes royal intervention.
The laws were few and straightforward, mostly concerning the rights and privileges of the king, clergy, and nobility. Property disputes among regular people were resolved by their leaders, and other complaints were often handled privately, which often led to long and deadly family feuds that ultimately needed the involvement of chiefs and sometimes even the king.
This, in brief and very general terms, was the prevailing character of the government and land tenure throughout the several islands of the group until after the death of Kamehameha I. in 1819, and the relinquishment by the crown of its ancient and sovereign rights in the soil.
This, in short and very general terms, was the main way the government and land ownership worked across the different islands of the group until after the death of Kamehameha I in 1819, and the crown giving up its ancient and sovereign rights to the land.

Meeting Place of an Ancient Secret Society.
Meeting Place of an Ancient Secret Society.
(FROM A PAINTING IN THE ROYAL PALACE.)
(FROM A PAINTING IN THE ROYAL PALACE.)
The leading chiefs and high-priesthood claimed a lineage distinct from that of the masses, and traced their ancestry back to Kumuhonua, the Polynesian Adam. The iku-pau, a sacred class of the supreme priesthood, assumed to be the direct descendants from the godhead, while the iku-nuu were a collateral branch of the sacred and royal strain, and possessed only temporal powers. It was thus that one of the families of the Hawaiian priesthood, in charge of the verbal genealogical records, exalted itself in sanctity above the political rulers.
The top chiefs and high priests claimed a lineage that set them apart from the common people, tracing their ancestry back to Kumuhonua, the Polynesian Adam. The iku-pau, a sacred class of the highest priesthood, were believed to be the direct descendants of the divine, while the iku-nuu were a side branch of the sacred and royal lineage, having only temporary authority. This allowed one of the families of the Hawaiian priesthood, responsible for the oral genealogical records, to elevate itself in sanctity above the political leaders.
Proud of their lineage, to guard against imposture and keep their blood uncorrupted, the chiefs allowed their claims to family distinction to be passed upon by a college of heraldry, established by an early moi of Maui. Reciting their genealogies before the college, composed of aliis of accepted rank, and receiving the recognition of the council, chiefs were then regarded as members of the grade of aha-alii, or chiefs of admitted and irrevocable rank. [53]
Proud of their heritage, to protect against fraud and keep their bloodline pure, the chiefs had their claims to family status confirmed by a heraldry college, set up by an early moi of Maui. By presenting their family trees to the college, made up of aliis of recognized rank, and earning the council's approval, chiefs were then acknowledged as part of the grade of aha-alii, or chiefs of established and permanent rank. [__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]
The chiefs inherited their titles and tabu privileges quite as frequently through the rank of one parent as of the other. As Hawaiian women of distinction usually had more than one husband, and the chiefs were seldom content with a single wife, the difficulty of determining the rights and ranks of their children was by no means easy; but the averment of the mother was generally accepted as conclusive and sufficient evidence in that regard.
The chiefs inherited their titles and tabu privileges often through either parent's lineage. Since Hawaiian women of high status typically had multiple husbands and chiefs rarely settled for just one wife, figuring out the rights and ranks of their children was quite complicated. However, the mother's statement was usually taken as final and enough proof on this matter.
For political purposes marriage alliances were common between the royal and chiefly families of the several islands, and thus in time the superior nobility of the entire group became connected by ties of blood. The political or principal wife of a king or distinguished chief was usually of a rank equal to that of her husband, and their marriage was proclaimed by heralds and celebrated with befitting ceremonies. Other wives were taken by simple agreement, and without ceremony or public announcement. Very much in the same manner the masses entered into their marriage unions. With the latter, however, polygamy was not common. When husband and wife separated, as they frequently did, each was at liberty to select another partner. The political wife of a chief was called wahine-hoao; the others, haia-wahine, or concubine.
For political reasons, marriage alliances were common among the royal and chief families of the various islands, and over time, the upper nobility of the entire group became connected by blood. The political or main wife of a king or prominent chief usually held a rank equal to that of her husband, and their marriage was announced by heralds and celebrated with appropriate ceremonies. Other wives were taken through simple agreement, without any ceremony or public announcement. Similarly, the masses formed their marriage unions. However, polygamy was not typical among them. When husbands and wives separated, as they often did, each was free to choose another partner. The political wife of a chief was called wahine-hoao; the others were referred to as haia-wahine, or concubines.
In the royal families, to subserve purposes of state, father and daughter, brother and sister, and uncle and niece frequently united as man and wife. The children of such unions were esteemed of the highest rank, and, strange to say, no mental or physical deterioration seemed to result from these incestuous relations, for all through the past the mois and nobles of the group were noted for their gigantic proportions.
In royal families, to serve state interests, fathers and daughters, brothers and sisters, and uncles and nieces often came together as husband and wife. The children of these unions were considered of the highest rank, and oddly enough, there was no apparent mental or physical decline from these incestuous relationships, since throughout history the kings and nobles of this group were known for their impressive stature.
There were five or more grades of chiefs connected with the royal lines. First in order, and the most sacred, was the alii-niaupio (the offspring of a prince with his own sister); next, the alii-pio (the offspring of a prince with his own niece); next, the alii-naha (the offspring of a prince or king with his own daughter); next, the alii-wohi (the offspring of either of the foregoing with another chiefly branch); and next, the lo-alii (chiefs of royal blood). Any of these might be either male or female.
There were five or more ranks of chiefs associated with the royal lineage. First in line, and the most revered, was the alii-niaupio (the child of a prince with his own sister); next was the alii-pio (the child of a prince with his own niece); then came the alii-naha (the child of a prince or king with his own daughter); after that was the alii-wohi (the child of either of the previous two categories with another chiefly branch); and finally, there were the lo-alii (chiefs of royal descent). Any of these could be male or female.
To these grades of chiefs distinct personal tabus or prerogatives were attached, such as the tabu-moe, tabu-wela, tabu-hoano and tabu-wohi. These tabus could be given or bequeathed to others [54]by their possessors, but could not be multiplied by transmission. The meles, or ancestral chants of a family, passed in succession to the legal representatives, and became exclusively theirs; but the government, tabus and household gods of the king were subject to his disposal as he willed, either at his death or before it. The child of a tabu chief, born of a mother of lower rank, could not, according to custom, assume the tabu privileges of his father, although in some instances in the past they were made to inure to such offspring, notably in the case of Umi, King of Hawaii.
To these ranks of chiefs were attached specific personal tabus or rights, such as the tabu-moe, tabu-wela, tabu-hoano, and tabu-wohi. These tabus could be given or passed down to others [__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__] by their owners, but they couldn't be multiplied through transfer. The meles, or ancestral chants of a family, passed down to the legal representatives and became exclusively theirs; however, the government, tabus, and household gods of the king were at his discretion to manage as he wished, either upon his death or beforehand. A child of a tabu chief, born to a mother of lower status, couldn't, according to custom, take on the tabu privileges of his father, even though in some historical cases they were granted to such offspring, most notably in the case of Umi, King of Hawaii.
Before an alii-niaupio, clothed with the supreme function of the tabu-moe, all, with the exception of tabu chiefs, were compelled to prostrate themselves. When he appeared or was approached his rank was announced by an attendant, and all not exempt from the homage were required to drop with their faces to the earth. The exemptions were the alii-pio, the alii-naha, the alii-wohi and the lo-alii. They, and they alone, were permitted to stand in the presence of a niaupio chief. An alii-pio was also a sacred chief, so much so that he conversed with others only in the night-time, and on chiefesses of that rank the sun was not allowed to shine.
Before a alii-niaupio, who held the highest authority of the tabu-moe, everyone, except for tabu chiefs, had to bow down. When he appeared or was approached, an attendant would announce his rank, and anyone not exempt from this respect had to lie face down on the ground. The exemptions were the alii-pio, the alii-naha, the alii-wohi, and the lo-alii. Only they were allowed to stand in front of a niaupio chief. An alii-pio was also a sacred chief, to such an extent that he only spoke with others at night, and the sun was not permitted to shine on chiefesses of that rank.
The kings lived in affluence in large mansions of wood or stone, in the midst of walled grounds adorned with fruit and shade trees and other attractive forms of vegetation. The grounds also contained many other smaller buildings for the accommodation of guests, retainers, attendants, servants and guards. They were attended by their high-priests, civil and military advisers, and a retinue of favorite chiefs, and spent their time, when not employed in war or affairs of state, in indolent and dignified repose.
The kings lived in luxury in large wooden or stone mansions, surrounded by walled estates filled with fruit and shade trees and other beautiful plants. The grounds also included many smaller buildings for guests, retainers, attendants, servants, and guards. They were accompanied by high priests, civil and military advisors, and a group of favored chiefs, spending their time, when not engaged in war or state matters, in leisurely and dignified relaxation.
The personal attendants of an ancient Hawaiian king were all of noble blood, and each had his specified duty. They were known as kahu-alii, or guardians of the person of the king. They consisted of the iwikuamoo, or rubber of the person; the ipukuha, or spittoon-bearer; the paakahili, or kahili-bearer; the kiaipoo, or sleep-watcher; and the aipuupuu, or steward. Other inferior chiefs, called puuku, with messengers, spies, executioners, prophets, astrologers, poets, historians, musicians and dancers, were among his retainers. Connected with the palace was an apartment used as a heiau, or chapel, which was sometimes in charge of the high-priest. [55]
The personal attendants of an ancient Hawaiian king were all of noble lineage, and each had their specific role. They were called kahu-alii, meaning guardians of the king's person. Their ranks included the iwikuamoo, or person rubber; the ipukuha, or spittoon-bearer; the paakahili, or kahili-bearer; the kiaipoo, or sleep-watcher; and the aipuupuu, or steward. Other lower-ranking chiefs, known as puuku, along with messengers, spies, executioners, prophets, astrologers, poets, historians, musicians, and dancers, were also part of his retinue. Connected to the palace was a room that served as a heiau, or chapel, which was sometimes overseen by the high-priest. [__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]
During festival seasons brilliant feasts, tournaments and hula and musical entertainments were given in the royal grounds, and the court was splendid in displays of flowers, feathers and other gaudy trappings. The king not unfrequently took part in the manly games and exercises of the chiefs, and sometimes complimented the hula dancers and musicians by joining in their performances.
During festival seasons, there were amazing feasts, tournaments, and hula and musical performances held in the royal grounds, and the court was stunning with displays of flowers, feathers, and other flashy decorations. The king often participated in the athletic games and activities of the chiefs, and sometimes praised the hula dancers and musicians by joining in their performances.
To render the kings and higher nobility still more exclusive, they had a court language which was understood only by themselves, and which was changed in part from time to time as its expressions found interpretation beyond the royal circle. Some portions of this court language have been preserved.
To make the kings and higher nobility even more exclusive, they had a court language that only they understood, and this language would change from time to time as its terms were understood outside the royal circle. Some parts of this court language have been preserved.
ARTS, HABITS AND CUSTOMS.
All implements of war or industry known to the early Hawaiians were made either of wood, stone, or bone, as the islands are destitute of metals; but with these rude helps they laid up hewn-stone walls, felled trees, made canoes and barges, manufactured cloths and cordage, fashioned weapons, constructed dwellings and temples, roads and fish-ponds, and tilled the soil. They had axes, adzes and hammers of stone, spades of wood, knives of flint and ivory, needles of thorn and bone, and spears and daggers of hardened wood. They wove mats for sails and other purposes, and from the inner bark of the paper mulberry-tree beat out a fine, thin cloth called kapa, which they ornamented with colors and figures.
All tools of war or industry known to the early Hawaiians were made from wood, stone, or bone, as the islands lacked metals; but with these basic materials, they built stone walls, chopped down trees, made canoes and boats, produced cloth and rope, crafted weapons, constructed homes and temples, roads and fish ponds, and farmed the land. They used stone axes, adzes, and hammers, wooden spades, knives made from flint and ivory, needles from thorns and bone, and spears and daggers made from hardened wood. They wove mats for sails and other uses, and from the inner bark of the paper mulberry tree, they beat out a fine, thin cloth called kapa, which they decorated with colors and designs.
Their food was the flesh of swine, dogs and fowls; fish, and almost everything living in the sea; taro, sweet potatoes and yams, and fruits, berries and edible sea-weed of various kinds. Poi, the favorite food of all classes, was a slightly fermented paste made of cooked and pounded taro, a large bulbous root, in taste resembling an Indian turnip. They made a stupefying beverage by chewing the awa root, and from the sweet root of the ti plant fermented an intoxicating drink. The soft parts of the sugar-cane were eaten, but, with the exception of the manufacture of a beer called uiuia, no other use seems to have been made of it. Their food, wrapped in ti leaves, was usually cooked in heated and covered pits in the earth. Their household vessels were shells, gourd calabashes of various shapes and sizes, and platters and other containers made of wood. [56]
Their food included pork, dogs, poultry, fish, and nearly everything from the sea; taro, sweet potatoes, yams, and various fruits, berries, and edible seaweed. Poi, the favorite dish among all social classes, was a slightly fermented paste made from cooked and mashed taro, a large round root that tastes like an Indian turnip. They created a strong drink by chewing the awa root, and from the sweet root of the ti plant, they made an intoxicating beverage. The soft parts of the sugarcane were consumed, but other than making a beer called uiuia, there didn't seem to be any other uses for it. Their food, wrapped in ti leaves, was typically cooked in heated and covered pits in the ground. They used shells, gourd vessels of different shapes and sizes, and platters and other containers made from wood for household purposes. [__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]
The dress of the ancient Hawaiian was scant, simple and cool. The principal, and generally the only, garment of the male was the maro, a narrow cloth fastened around the loins. To this was sometimes added, among the masses, a kihei, or cloth thrown loosely over the shoulders. The females wore a pau, or skirt of invariably five thicknesses of kapa, fastened around the waist and extending to the knees. When the weather was cool a short mantle was sometimes added. Ordinarily the heads of both sexes were without coverings, and in rare instances they wore kamaas, or sandals of ti or pandanus leaves.
The clothing of ancient Hawaiians was minimal, straightforward, and lightweight. The main, and usually the only, piece of clothing for men was the maro, a narrow cloth worn around the waist. Sometimes, a kihei, or cloth draped loosely over the shoulders, was added, especially among the common people. Women wore a pau, a skirt made of five layers of kapa, secured around the waist and reaching the knees. When it was cooler, a short cloak was occasionally worn. Typically, both men and women did not cover their heads, and on rare occasions, they wore kamaas, or sandals made from ti or pandanus leaves.
With the maro, which was common to the males of all ranks, the king on state occasions wore the royal mamo, a mantle reaching to the ankles, and made of the yellow feathers of a little sea-bird called the mamo. When it is mentioned that but a single yellow feather is found under each wing of the mamo, and that tens of thousands, perhaps, entered into the fabrication of a single mantle, some idea of the value of such a garment may be gathered. A few of these royal cloaks are still in existence, one of which was worn by King Kalakaua during the ceremonies of his late coronation. Pure yellow was the royal color. The shorter capes or mantles of the chiefs were of yellow feathers mixed with red. The color of the priests and gods was red.
With the maro, which was worn by males of all ranks, the king on official occasions donned the royal mamo, a long mantle that reached his ankles, made from the yellow feathers of a small seabird called the mamo. Notably, each mamo has only one yellow feather under each wing, and it took tens of thousands of these feathers to make a single mantle, highlighting the value of such a garment. A few of these royal cloaks still exist, including one worn by King Kalakaua during his recent coronation. Pure yellow was the royal color. The shorter capes or mantles of the chiefs were made of yellow feathers mixed with red. Red was the color associated with the priests and gods.

Palaoa, a Talisman worn around the Neck.
Palaoa, a necklace pendant.
The ornaments of the nobility consisted of head-dresses of feathers, palaoas, or charms of bone suspended from the neck, and necklaces and bracelets of shells, teeth and other materials. Many of them were tattooed on the face, thighs and breast, but the practice was not universal. Flowers were in general use as ornaments, and at feasts, festivals and other gatherings garlands of fragrant leaves and blossoms crowned the heads and encircled the necks of all. This is among the beautiful customs still retained by the Hawaiians. [57]
The nobility's decorations included feather headdresses, palaoas, or bone charms hanging from the neck, along with necklaces and bracelets made from shells, teeth, and other materials. Many had tattoos on their faces, thighs, and chests, though this wasn’t a widespread practice. Flowers were commonly used as decorations, and during feasts, festivals, and other gatherings, garlands of fragrant leaves and blossoms adorned the heads and wrapped around the necks of everyone. This is one of the beautiful traditions still maintained by the Hawaiians. [__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]
The dwellings of the masses were constructed of upright posts planted in the ground, with cross-beams and rafters, and roofs and sides of woven twigs and branches thatched with leaves. The houses of the nobility were larger, stronger and more pretentious, and were frequently surrounded by broad verandas. It was a custom to locate dwellings so that the main entrance would face the east, the home of Kane. The opposite entrance looked toward Kahiki, the land from which Wakea came.
The homes of the common people were made with vertical posts set in the ground, along with cross-beams and rafters, and roofs and walls made of woven twigs and branches covered with leaves. The houses of the wealthy were bigger, sturdier, and more extravagant, often featuring wide porches. It was a tradition to position homes so that the main entrance faced east, where Kane resides. The other entrance faced Kahiki, the land where Wakea originated.
The homes of well-conditioned Hawaiians consisted of no less than six separate dwellings or apartments: 1st, the heiau, or idol-house; 2d, the mua, or eating-house of the males, which females were not allowed to enter; 3d, the hale-noa, or house of the women, which men could not enter; 4th, the hale-aina, or eating-house of the wife; 5th, the kua, or wife’s working-house; and 6th, the hale-pea, or retiring-house or nursery of the wife. The poorer classes followed these regulations so far as their means would admit, but screens usually took the place of separate dwellings or definite apartments.
The homes of well-off Hawaiians had at least six separate buildings or areas: 1st, the heiau, or temple; 2nd, the mua, or men's eating area, which women were not allowed to enter; 3rd, the hale-noa, or women's house, which men couldn’t enter; 4th, the hale-aina, or the wife’s eating area; 5th, the kua, or the wife's work area; and 6th, the hale-pea, or the wife's private space or nursery. The poorer families tried to follow these guidelines as much as they could, but typically used screens instead of separate buildings or distinct areas.
When war was declared or invasion threatened, messengers, called lunapais, were despatched by the king to his subject chiefs, who promptly responded in warriors, canoes, or whatever else was demanded. A regular line-of-battle consisted of a centre and right and left wings, and marked military genius was sometimes displayed in the handling of armies. Sea-battles, where hundreds, sometimes thousands, of war-canoes met in hostile shock, were common, and usually resulted in great loss of life. Truces and terms of peace were ordinarily respected, but few prisoners were spared except for sacrifice.
When war was declared or invasion threatened, the king sent messengers, known as lunapais, to his subject chiefs, who quickly responded with warriors, canoes, or whatever else was needed. A typical battle formation had a center and right and left wings, and impressive military strategy was sometimes shown in how armies were managed. Sea battles, where hundreds or even thousands of war canoes clashed, were common and usually led to significant loss of life. Truces and peace terms were generally honored, but few prisoners were spared except for sacrifice.
The weapons of the islanders were spears about twenty feet in length, javelins, war-clubs, stone axes, rude halberds, knives, daggers and slings. The slings were made either of cocoa fibre or human hair. The stones thrown were sometimes a pound or more in weight, and were delivered with great force and accuracy. The spears were sometimes thrown, while the javelins were reserved for closer encounter. Shields were unknown. Hostile missiles were either dodged, caught in the hands, or dexterously warded. The chiefs frequently wore feather helmets in battle, but the person was without protection.
The islanders used weapons like twenty-foot-long spears, javelins, war clubs, stone axes, crude halberds, knives, daggers, and slings. The slings were made from either cocoa fiber or human hair. The stones they hurled could weigh a pound or more and were thrown with great force and accuracy. They sometimes threw the spears, while the javelins were saved for hand-to-hand combat. They didn’t have shields. Attacks were either avoided, caught with their hands, or skillfully blocked. The chiefs often wore feather helmets in battle, but otherwise, the fighters had no protection.

Surf Board.
Surfboard.
The athletic sports and games of the people were numerous. [58]The muscular pastimes consisted in part of contests in running, jumping, boxing, wrestling, swimming, diving, canoe-racing and surf-riding. Rolling round stone disks and throwing darts along a prepared channel was a favorite sport; but the most exciting was the holua contest, in which two or more might engage. On long, light and narrow sledges the contestants, lying prone, dashed down long and steep declivities, the victory being with the one who first reached the bottom. The goddess Pele enjoyed the game, and frequently engaged in it. But she was a dangerous contestant. On being beaten by Kahavari, a chief of Puna, she drove him from the district with a stream of lava. Sham battles and spear and stone throwing were also popular exercises.
The athletic sports and games of the people were many. [__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]The physical activities included contests in running, jumping, boxing, wrestling, swimming, diving, canoe racing, and surf riding. Rolling stone disks and throwing darts down a prepared channel was a favorite pastime; but the most thrilling was the holua contest, where two or more participants competed. Contestants, lying face down on long, light, and narrow sledges, raced down steep hills, with the winner being the one who reached the bottom first. The goddess Pele loved the game and often took part. However, she was a fierce competitor. After being defeated by Kahavari, a chief from Puna, she drove him out of the area with a stream of lava. Mock battles and throwing spears and stones were also popular activities.
Among the in-door games were konane, kilu, puhenehene, punipiki, and hiua. Konane resembled the English game of draughts. Puhenehene consisted of the adroit hiding by one of the players of a small object under one of several mats in the midst of the party of contestants, and the designation of its place of concealment by the others. Kilu was a game somewhat similar, accompanied by singing. Punipiki was something like the game of “fox and geese,” and hiua was played on a board with four squares. These were the most ancient of Hawaiian household games.
Among the indoor games were konane, kilu, puhenehene, punipiki, and hiua. Konane resembled the English game of checkers. Puhenehene involved one player skillfully hiding a small object under one of several mats while the other players attempted to guess its location. Kilu was a similar game, often accompanied by singing. Punipiki was reminiscent of the game “fox and geese,” and hiua was played on a board with four squares. These were the oldest known Hawaiian household games.

Pahu, or Drum.
Pahu, or Drum.
The musical instruments of the islanders were few and simple. They consisted of pahus, or drums, of various sizes; the ohe, a bamboo flute; the hokio, a rude clarionet; a nasal flageolet, and a reed instrument played by the aid of the voice. To these were added, on special occasions, castanets and dry gourds containing pebbles, which were used to mark the time of chants and other music. They had many varieties of dances, or hulas, all of which were more or less graceful, and a few of which were coarse and licentious. Bands of hula dancers, male and female, were among [59]the retainers of the mois and prominent chiefs, and their services were required on every festive occasion.
The musical instruments of the islanders were limited and straightforward. They included pahus, or drums, in various sizes; the ohe, a bamboo flute; the hokio, a basic clarinet; a nasal flageolet, and a reed instrument played using the voice. For special occasions, they also added castanets and dry gourds filled with pebbles, which were used to keep time during chants and other music. They had many types of dances, or hulas, all of which were fairly graceful, though some were crude and inappropriate. Groups of hula dancers, both male and female, were part of the [__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]retinue of the mois and prominent chiefs, and their performances were needed at every festive event.
The mourning customs of the people were peculiar. For days they wailed and feasted together over a dead relative or friend, frequently knocking out one or more teeth, shaving portions of their heads and beards, and tearing their flesh and clothes. But their wildest displays of grief were on the death of their kings and governing chiefs. During a royal mourning season, which sometimes continued for weeks, the people indulged in an unrestrained saturnalia of recklessness and license. Every law was openly violated, every conceivable crime committed. The excuse was—and the authorities were compelled to accept it—that grief had temporarily unseated the popular reason, and they were not responsible for their misdemeanors.
The mourning customs of the people were unusual. For days, they cried and celebrated together after the loss of a relative or friend, often knocking out one or more teeth, shaving parts of their heads and beards, and tearing at their skin and clothes. But their most intense displays of grief occurred when their kings and leaders died. During a royal mourning period, which could last for weeks, the people engaged in wild, uncontrolled behavior. Every law was openly broken, and every imaginable crime was committed. The reasoning was—and the authorities had to accept it—that grief had temporarily clouded their judgment, and they weren’t accountable for their actions.
The masses buried their dead or deposited the bodies in caves, but the bones of the kings were otherwise disposed of. There were royal burial-places—one at Honaunau, on the island of Hawaii, and another, called Iao, on Maui—and the tombs of many of the ancient mois and ruling chiefs were in one or the other of those sacred spots; but they probably contained but few royal bones. In the fear that the bones of the mois and distinguished chiefs might fall into the hands of their enemies and be used for fish-hooks, arrow-points for shooting mice, and other debasing purposes, they were usually destroyed or hidden. Some were weighted and thrown into the sea, and others, after the flesh had been removed from them and burned, were secreted in mountain caves. The hearts of the kings of the island of Hawaii were frequently thrown into the crater of Kilauea as an offering to Pele. The bones of the first Kamehameha were so well secreted in some cave in Kona that they have not yet been found, and the bones of Kualii, a celebrated Oahuan king of the seventeenth century, were reduced to powder, mingled with poi, and at the funeral feast fed to a hundred unsuspecting chiefs.
The common people buried their dead or placed the bodies in caves, but the remains of the kings were treated differently. There were royal burial sites—one at Honaunau on the island of Hawaii, and another called Iao on Maui—and the tombs of many ancient mois and ruling chiefs were located in one of those sacred places; but they likely held very few royal bones. To prevent the bones of the mois and notable chiefs from being captured by enemies and used for degrading purposes like fish-hooks or arrowheads for hunting mice, they were usually destroyed or hidden. Some were weighted down and thrown into the sea, while others, after the flesh had been removed and burned, were tucked away in mountain caves. The hearts of the kings of Hawaii were often tossed into the Kilauea crater as an offering to Pele. The bones of the first Kamehameha were so well hidden in some cave in Kona that they have yet to be discovered, and the bones of Kualii, a famous Oahuan king from the seventeenth century, were turned into powder, mixed with poi, and served at a funeral feast to a hundred unsuspecting chiefs.
GROUP OF NATIVE IMPLEMENTS.
GROUP OF NATIVE TOOLS.

Hand Kahili.
Handheld Kahili.

Kahili, or Royal Feather Standard.
Kahili, or Royal Feather Flag.

Mauele, or Native Palanquin.
Mauele, or Native Palanquin.

Paddle.
Paddle.

Gourds.
Gourds.

Spittoons.
Spit cups.

Kepie, or Sledge used in the Game of Holua.
Kepie, or Sledge, used in the game of Holua.
The ancient Hawaiians divided the year into twelve months of thirty days each. The days of the month were named, not numbered. As this gave but three hundred and sixty days to their year, they added and gave to their god Lono in feasting and festivity the number of days required to complete the sidereal year, which was regulated by the rising of the Pleiades. The new [61]year began with the winter solstice. They also reckoned by lunar months in the regulation of their monthly feasts. The year was divided into two seasons—the rainy and the dry—and the day into three general parts, morning, noon and night. The first, middle and after parts of the night were also designated.
The ancient Hawaiians split the year into twelve months of thirty days each. Instead of numbering the days of the month, they named them. Since this resulted in only three hundred and sixty days in a year, they added extra days, which they celebrated with feasting and festivities dedicated to their god Lono, to make up for the full length of the sidereal year, based on the rising of the Pleiades. The new [__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]year started with the winter solstice. They also used lunar months to plan their monthly celebrations. The year was split into two seasons—the rainy season and the dry season—and the day was divided into three main parts: morning, noon, and night. Within the night, they also identified the early, middle, and later parts.
As elsewhere mentioned, they had names for the five principal planets, which they called “the wandering stars,” and for a number of heavenly groups and constellations. It was this knowledge of the heavens that enabled them to navigate the ocean in their frail canoes.
As mentioned elsewhere, they had names for the five main planets, which they referred to as "the wandering stars," and for several groups of stars and constellations. This understanding of the night sky allowed them to navigate the ocean in their fragile canoes.
In counting, the Hawaiians reckoned by fours and their multiples. Their highest expressed number was four hundred thousand. More than that was indefinite.
In counting, the Hawaiians counted by fours and their multiples. Their highest defined number was four hundred thousand. Anything beyond that was uncertain.
After what has been written it would seem scarcely necessary to mention that the Hawaiians were not cannibals. Their legends refer to two or three instances of cannibalism on the islands, but the man-eaters were natives of some other group and did not long survive.
After what has been said, it hardly seems necessary to mention that the Hawaiians were not cannibals. Their legends talk about two or three cases of cannibalism on the islands, but the people who practiced it came from another group and didn’t last long.
THE HAWAII OF TO-DAY.
With this somewhat extended reference to the past of the Hawaiian Islands and their people, it is deemed that a brief allusion to their present political, social, industrial and commercial condition will not be out of place. The legends presented leave the simple but warlike islanders standing naked but not ashamed in the light of civilization suddenly flashed upon them from across the seas. In the darkness behind them are legends and spears; in the light before them are history and law. Let us see what the years since have done for them.
With this somewhat extended reference to the past of the Hawaiian Islands and their people, it's considered appropriate to briefly mention their current political, social, industrial, and commercial situation. The legends shared depict the simple yet fierce islanders standing exposed but unashamed in the illuminating light of civilization that suddenly emerged from across the ocean. Behind them lie their legends and spears; ahead are history and law. Let's see what the years since have done for them.
The Hawaiian government of to-day is a mild constitutional monarchy, the ruling family claiming descent from the most ancient and respected of the chiefly blood of Hawaii. The departments of the government are legislative, executive and judicial.
The Hawaiian government today is a gentle constitutional monarchy, with the ruling family claiming descent from the oldest and most respected chiefly lineage of Hawaii. The government has three branches: legislative, executive, and judicial.
The Legislative Assembly, which meets every two years, consists of representatives chosen by the people, nobles named by the sovereign, and crown ministers. They act in a single body, choosing their presiding officer by ballot, and their proceedings are held jointly in the English and Hawaiian languages, and in both are their laws and proceedings published. As the elective franchise is confined to native and naturalized citizens, the most [62]of the representatives chosen by the people are natives, all of whom are more or less educated, and many of whom are graceful and eloquent debaters. White representatives of accepted sympathy with the natives are occasionally elected, and a majority of the nobles and ministers are white men. The English common law is the basis of their statutes, and their civil and criminal codes are not unlike our own. The Legislature fixes tax, excise and customs charges, and provides by appropriation for all public expenditure. The representatives are paid small salaries, and the Legislature is formally convened and prorogued by the king in person.
The Legislative Assembly meets every two years and is made up of representatives elected by the people, nobles appointed by the king, and crown ministers. They operate as a single group and elect their leader through a vote. Their discussions are conducted in both English and Hawaiian, and their laws and proceedings are published in both languages. Since the right to vote is limited to native and naturalized citizens, most of the representatives elected by the people are natives, who are generally educated and many of whom are articulate and skilled debaters. Occasionally, white representatives who are sympathetic to the natives are elected, and most of the nobles and ministers are white men. The foundation of their laws is based on English common law, and their civil and criminal codes are similar to our own. The Legislature sets taxes, excise duties, and customs fees and allocates funds for all public spending. The representatives receive small salaries, and the king formally opens and closes the Legislature in person.
Although the present sovereign was elected by the Legislature, for the reason heretofore mentioned, the naming of a successor is left to the occupant of the throne. The king is provided at public expense with a palace and royal guard, and appropriations of money amounting to perhaps forty thousand dollars yearly. He has also some additional income from what are known as crown lands. The two sisters of the king and the daughter of one of them receive from the treasury an aggregate of fifteen thousand five hundred dollars yearly. The king entertains liberally, is generous with his friends and attendants, and probably finds his income no more than sufficient to meet his wants from year to year. His advisers are four Ministers of State and a Privy Council. The Ministry is composed of a Minister of Foreign Affairs, who ranks as premier, Minister of Finance, Minister of Interior, and Attorney-General. The Privy Council is composed of thirty or forty leading citizens appointed by the Crown. In certain matters they have original and exclusive powers. They are convened in council from time to time, but receive no compensation. The most of the Privy Councillors are white men, and embrace almost every nationality. The majority of the ministers of state are usually white men of ability, and their salaries are six thousand dollars per annum each.
Although the current ruler was elected by the Legislature, as previously mentioned, the choice of a successor is left to the person on the throne. The king is supported by public funds with a palace and a royal guard, along with annual financial support of around forty thousand dollars. He also gets some extra income from what are known as crown lands. The two sisters of the king and the daughter of one of them receive a total of fifteen thousand five hundred dollars from the treasury every year. The king hosts guests generously, is kind to his friends and staff, and likely finds his income just enough to cover his expenses each year. His advisors include four Ministers of State and a Privy Council. The Ministry consists of a Minister of Foreign Affairs, who serves as premier, a Minister of Finance, a Minister of Interior, and an Attorney-General. The Privy Council includes thirty or forty prominent citizens appointed by the Crown. In certain areas, they have original and exclusive powers. They meet for council occasionally but do not receive any pay. Most of the Privy Councillors are white men from various nationalities. The majority of the state ministers are typically capable white men, each earning six thousand dollars per year.
The judiciary is composed of a Supreme Court of three members, one of whom is chief-justice and chancellor, Circuit Courts holden in different districts, and minor magistrates’ courts in localities where they are required. The Supreme and Circuit judges are all white men, and but few magistrates are natives. The salaries of the superior judges are respectable, and the most of them are men of ability. The laws, as a rule, are intelligently [63]administered and promptly executed, and life and property are amply protected.
The judiciary consists of a Supreme Court made up of three members, one of whom serves as the chief justice and chancellor. There are also Circuit Courts held in various districts and local magistrate courts where needed. The Supreme and Circuit judges are all white men, and very few magistrates are locals. The salaries for the higher judges are good, and most of them are capable individuals. Generally, the laws are applied wisely [__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__] and enforced quickly, ensuring adequate protection for life and property.
Public schools are numerous throughout the islands, and are largely attended by native children. A considerable proportion of the adult natives are able to read and write their own language, and a number of native newspapers and periodicals are sustained. The English press of Honolulu—the only point of publication—is respectable in ability and enterprise.
Public schools are widespread across the islands and mainly serve local children. A significant number of adult locals can read and write in their own language, and several native newspapers and magazines are published. The English-language press in Honolulu—the only place where publications are made—is reputable in skill and innovation.
Leprosy was brought to the islands by the Chinese about forty years ago, and has become a dangerous and loathsome scourge. Lepers are seldom encountered, however, as they are removed, whenever discovered, to the island of Molokai, where they are humanely cared for by the government. It is a cureless but painless affliction, and is doubtless contagious under certain conditions. Nine-tenths or more of the lepers are either natives or Chinese, and the whole number amounts to perhaps twelve hundred. It is not thought that the malady is increasing, and it is hoped that a careful segregation of the afflicted will in time eradicate the disease from the group.
Leprosy was brought to the islands by the Chinese about forty years ago and has become a dangerous and repulsive problem. Lepers are rarely seen, though, as they are taken to the island of Molokai whenever they are discovered, where the government provides humane care. It is a painless but incurable disease and is likely contagious under certain conditions. More than nine-tenths of the lepers are either natives or Chinese, and the total number is around twelve hundred. It's not believed that the disease is increasing, and it's hoped that careful segregation of those affected will eventually eliminate the disease from the islands.
The commerce of the islands is largely in the hands of foreigners, and the sugar plantations are almost exclusively under their control. There are but few native merchants, the large dealers being Americans, Germans, English and French, while the smaller traders are generally Portuguese and Chinese. There are native lawyers, clerks, mechanics, magistrates and police-men; but the most of the race who are compelled to labor for their support find employment as farm and plantation laborers, stevedores, sailors, coachmen, boatmen, fishermen, gardeners, fruit-pedlars, waiters, soldiers and house-servants, in all of which capacities they are generally industrious, cheerful and honest.
The islands' trade is mostly controlled by foreigners, and the sugar plantations are nearly all in their hands. There are only a few local merchants; the big traders are Americans, Germans, English, and French, while the smaller ones are usually Portuguese and Chinese. There are local lawyers, clerks, mechanics, magistrates, and policemen, but most people from the local community who need to work for a living typically find jobs as farm and plantation workers, stevedores, sailors, drivers, boatmen, fishermen, gardeners, fruit vendors, waiters, soldiers, and housekeepers, in which roles they are generally hardworking, cheerful, and honest.
The products of the islands for export are sugar, molasses, rice, bananas, fungus, hides and wool, of an aggregate approximate value of eight million dollars annually. The principal product, however, is sugar, amounting to perhaps one hundred thousand tons yearly. Nine-tenths of the exports of the group find a market in the United States, and four-fifths or more of the imports in value are from the great Republic. The receipts and expenditures of the government are a little less than one million five hundred thousand dollars annually, derived principally from customs duties and direct taxation. [64]
The islands export sugar, molasses, rice, bananas, mushrooms, hides, and wool, with a total approximate value of about eight million dollars each year. The main product is sugar, which totals around one hundred thousand tons annually. Ninety percent of the group's exports go to the United States, and more than eighty percent of the imports in value come from that great Republic. The government's income and expenses are just under one million five hundred thousand dollars a year, mainly from customs duties and direct taxes. [__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]
The population of the islands is a little more than eighty thousand, of which about forty-five thousand are natives. The Americans, English, Germans, Norwegians and French number perhaps ten thousand, and Chinese, Japanese and Portuguese from the Azores constitute the most of the remainder.
The population of the islands is just over eighty thousand, with around forty-five thousand being natives. There are about ten thousand Americans, English, Germans, Norwegians, and French, while the majority of the rest are Chinese, Japanese, and Portuguese from the Azores.
The postal facilities of the islands are ample and reliable. Inter-island steamers, of which there are many, convey the mails throughout the group at regular intervals, and the San Franciscan and Australian steamers afford a punctual and trustworthy service with the rest of the world. The islands have a postal money-order system reaching within and beyond their boundaries, and are connected with the Universal Postal Union.
The postal services on the islands are extensive and dependable. There are many inter-island steamers that transport mail throughout the group regularly, and the steamers from San Francisco and Australia provide a timely and reliable connection to the rest of the world. The islands have a postal money-order system that operates both within and outside their borders, and they are linked to the Universal Postal Union.
Over twenty thousand of the inhabitants of the group are centred in Honolulu, the capital of the kingdom, and its beautiful and dreamy suburb of Waikiki. The business portions of the city, with their macadamized and lighted streets, and blocks of brick and stone buildings, have a thrifty and permanent appearance, while the eastern suburbs, approaching the hills with a gentle ascent, abound in charming residences embowered in palms. Small mountain streams run through the city and afford an abundant supply of sweet water, which is further augmented by a number of flowing artesian wells. With a temperature ranging from seventy to ninety degrees, Honolulu, with its substantial churches and public buildings, its air of affluence and dreamy quiet, is a delightful place of residence to those who enjoy the heat and languor of the tropics.
Over twenty thousand residents of the area are concentrated in Honolulu, the capital of the kingdom, along with its beautiful and serene suburb, Waikiki. The business district of the city, with its paved and lit streets, along with blocks of brick and stone buildings, has a thriving and permanent vibe, while the eastern suburbs, gently rising toward the hills, are filled with lovely homes surrounded by palm trees. Small mountain streams flow through the city, providing a plentiful supply of fresh water, which is further supplemented by several flowing artesian wells. With temperatures ranging from seventy to ninety degrees, Honolulu, with its impressive churches and public buildings, and its atmosphere of wealth and peacefulness, is a charming place to live for those who appreciate the warmth and relaxation of the tropics.
In the midst of these evidences of prosperity and advancement it is but too apparent that the natives are steadily decreasing in numbers and gradually losing their hold upon the fair land of their fathers. Within a century they have dwindled from four hundred thousand healthy and happy children of nature, without care and without want, to a little more than a tenth of that number of landless, hopeless victims to the greed and vices of civilization. They are slowly sinking under the restraints and burdens of their surroundings, and will in time succumb to social and political conditions foreign to their natures and poisonous to their blood. Year by year their footprints will grow more dim along the sands of their reef-sheltered shores, and fainter and fainter will come their simple songs from the shadows of the palms, until finally their voices will be heard no more for ever. [65]And then, if not before—and no human effort can shape it otherwise—the Hawaiian Islands, with the echoes of their songs and the sweets of their green fields, will pass into the political, as they are now firmly within the commercial, system of the great American Republic.
In the midst of this evidence of prosperity and progress, it's clear that the native population is steadily declining and slowly losing their connection to the beautiful land of their ancestors. In just a century, they’ve gone from four hundred thousand healthy and happy children of nature, living carefree and without want, to just over a tenth of that number—landless and hopeless victims of the greed and vices of civilization. They are gradually succumbing to the pressures and burdens of their environment, and will eventually fall prey to social and political conditions that are foreign to their natures and harmful to their well-being. Year by year, their footprints will fade along the shores protected by reefs, and their simple songs will grow quieter from the shadows of the palm trees, until finally their voices will vanish forever. [__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__] And then, if not before—and no human effort can change this—the Hawaiian Islands, along with the echoes of their songs and the sweetness of their green fields, will become fully integrated into the political system of the great American Republic, just as they are already deeply entrenched in the commercial system.
February, 1887. [67]
February 1887. [__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]
Hina, the Hawaii's Helen.
[68]
[__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]
CHARACTERS.
- Hakalanileo, a chief of Hawaii.
- Hina, wife of Hakalanileo.
- Uli, a sorceress, mother of Hina.
-
Niheu and Hina's sons. Kana, - Kamauaua, King of Molokai.
-
Keoloewa and sons of Kamauaua. Kaupeepee, - Nuakea, wife of Keoloewa.
- Hey, brother of Nuakea.
[69]
[__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]
HINA, THE HELEN OF HAWAII.
Hina, the Helen of Hawaii.
A STORY OF HAWAIIAN CHIVALRY IN THE TWELFTH CENTURY.
A STORY OF HAWAIIAN CHIVALRY IN THE TWELFTH CENTURY.
I.
The story of the Iliad is a dramatic record of the love and hate, wrong and revenge, courage and custom, passion and superstition, of mythical Greece, and embraces in a single brilliant recital events which the historic bards of other lands, lacking the genius of Homer, have sent down the centuries in fragments. Human nature has been substantially the same in all ages, differing only in the ardor of its passions and appetites, as affected by the zone of its habitat and its peculiar physical surroundings. Hence almost every nation, barbarous and civilized, has had its Helen and its Troy, its Paris and its Agamemnon, its Hector and its demi-gods; and Hawaii is not an exception. The wrath of no dusky Achilles is made the thesis of the story of the Hawaiian abduction, but in other respects the Greek and Polynesian legends closely resemble each other in their general outlines.
The story of the Iliad is a powerful account of the love and hate, wrongs and revenge, bravery and traditions, passion and beliefs, of mythical Greece. It weaves together a vivid narrative of events that other historical bards from different lands, who lack Homer’s brilliance, have passed down through the ages in pieces. Human nature has been pretty much the same throughout history, changing only in the intensity of its passions and desires, influenced by its environment and unique physical surroundings. As a result, nearly every nation, whether primitive or advanced, has had its own version of Helen and Troy, Paris and Agamemnon, Hector and demigods; Hawaii is no exception. The anger of no dark-skinned Achilles is the main theme of the Hawaiian abduction story, but in many other ways, the Greek and Polynesian legends share similar general outlines.
The story of Hina, the Hawaiian Helen, and Kaupeepee, the Paris of the legend, takes us back to the twelfth century, near the close of the second and final era of migration from Tahiti, Samoa, and perhaps other islands of Polynesia—a period which added very considerably to the population of the group, and gave to it many new chiefs, a number of new customs, and a few new gods. That the tale may be better understood by the reader who may not be conversant with the legendary history of the Hawaiian Islands, it will be necessary to refer briefly to the political and social condition of the group at that time.
The story of Hina, the Hawaiian Helen, and Kaupeepee, the Paris of the legend, takes us back to the 12th century, towards the end of the second and final wave of migration from Tahiti, Samoa, and possibly other Polynesian islands. This period significantly increased the group’s population and introduced many new chiefs, various customs, and a few new gods. To help the reader who might not be familiar with the legendary history of the Hawaiian Islands better understand the tale, it’s important to briefly discuss the political and social conditions of the group at that time.
Notwithstanding the many sharply drawn and wonderfully-preserved historic legends of the Hawaiians, the early settlement of the little archipelago is shrouded in mystery. The best testimony, however, warrants the assumption that the islands were first discovered and occupied by a people who had drifted from southern Asia to the islands of the Pacific in the first or second [70]century of the Christian era, and, by migratory stages from the Fijis to Samoa and thence to Tahiti, had reached the Hawaiian group in about A.D. 550. The first discovery was doubtless the result of accident; but those who made it were able to find their way back to the place from which they started—either Tahiti or Samoa—and in due time return with augmented numbers, bearing with them to their new home pigs, fowls, dogs, and the seeds of such fruits and vegetables as they had found to be wanting there.
Despite the many vibrant and well-preserved legends of the Hawaiians, the early settlement of the small archipelago remains a mystery. The best evidence suggests that the islands were first discovered and settled by people who drifted from southern Asia to the Pacific islands in the first or second [__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__] century of the Christian era. Through a series of migrations from the Fiji Islands to Samoa and then to Tahiti, they reached the Hawaiian group around CE 550. The initial discovery was likely accidental, but those who found it managed to navigate back to their original home—either Tahiti or Samoa—and eventually returned with more people, bringing with them pigs, chickens, dogs, and the seeds of fruits and vegetables they needed.
The little colony grew and prospered, and for nearly five hundred years had no communication with, or knowledge of, the world beyond. At the end of that time their geographical traditions had grown so faint that they spoke only of Kahiki, a place very far away, from which their ancestors came. First landing on the large island of Hawaii, they had spread over the eight habitable divisions of the group. The people were ruled by district chiefs, in fief to a supreme head on some of the islands, and on others independent, and the lines dividing the masses from the nobility were less strictly drawn than during the centuries succeeding. Wars were frequent between neighboring chiefs, and popular increase was slow; but the tabus of the chiefs and priests were not oppressive, and the people claimed and exercised a degree of personal independence unknown to them after the eleventh century.
The small colony grew and thrived, and for almost five hundred years had no contact with or knowledge of the world outside. By the end of that time, their geographical traditions had faded so much that they only referred to Kahiki, a place very far away, from which their ancestors came. They first landed on the large island of Hawaii and spread across the eight habitable divisions of the group. The people were governed by district chiefs, who were subjects of a supreme leader on some islands while being independent on others, and the distinctions between the common people and the nobility were less rigid than in the centuries that followed. Wars were common between neighboring chiefs, and population growth was slow; however, the tabus imposed by the chiefs and priests were not overly burdensome, and the people enjoyed a level of personal freedom that they did not experience after the eleventh century.
In about A.D. 1025, or perhaps a little earlier, the people of the group were suddenly aroused from their long dream of six centuries by the arrival of a large party of adventurers from Tahiti. Their chief was Nanamaoa. Their language resembled that of the Hawaiians, and their customs and religions were not greatly at variance. They were therefore received with kindness, and in a few years their influence began to be felt throughout the group. They landed at Kohala, Hawaii, and Nanamaoa soon succeeded in establishing himself there as an influential chief. His sons secured possessions on Maui and Oahu, and on the latter island one of them—Nanakaoko—instituted the sacred place called Kukaniloko, in the district of Ewa, where it was the desire of future chiefs that their sons should be born. Even Kamehameha I., as late as 1797, sought to remove his queen thither before the birth of Liholiho, but the illness of the royal mother prevented. This became the sacred birth-place of princes, [71]as Iao, in Wailuku valley, on the island of Maui, became their tabu spot of interment.
Around CE 1025, or maybe a bit earlier, the people of the group were suddenly awakened from their long slumber of six centuries by a large group of adventurers from Tahiti. Their leader was Nanamaoa. Their language was similar to that of the Hawaiians, and their customs and beliefs weren't very different either. Because of this, they were welcomed warmly, and within a few years, their influence started to spread throughout the group. They landed at Kohala, Hawaii, and Nanamaoa quickly established himself as a powerful chief there. His sons gained land on Maui and Oahu, and on Oahu, one of them—Nanakaoko—set up the sacred site called Kukaniloko in the Ewa district, where future chiefs wished their sons to be born. Even Kamehameha I., as late as 1797, aimed to take his queen there before the birth of Liholiho, but the royal mother fell ill. This site became the sacred birthplace of princes, [__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]just as Iao in Wailuku valley on Maui became their burial ground.
It was at Kukaniloko that Kapawa, the son of Nanakaoko, was born. His principal seat of power was probably on Hawaii, although he retained possessions on Maui and Oahu. It was during his life that the celebrated chief and priest Paao made his appearance in the group. He came from one of the southern islands with a small party, bringing with him new gods and new modes of worship, and to him the subsequent high-priests of Hawaii traced their sacerdotal line, even down to Hevaheva, who in 1819 was the first to apply the torch to the temples in which his ancestors had so long worshipped. Paao was a statesman and warrior as well as a priest, but he preferred spiritual to temporal authority; and when Kapawa died and was buried at Iao, leaving his possessions without a competent ruler and his subjects in a state bordering upon anarchy, Paao did not assume the chieftaincy, as he manifestly might have done, but despatched messengers—if, indeed, he did not go himself—to the land of his birth, to invite to Hawaii a chief capable of restoring order.
It was at Kukaniloko that Kapawa, the son of Nanakaoko, was born. His main base of power was likely on Hawaii, although he also had land on Maui and Oahu. During his lifetime, the famous chief and priest Paao arrived in the group. He came from one of the southern islands with a small group, bringing new gods and ways of worship. The later high priests of Hawaii traced their lineage back to him, all the way to Hevaheva, who in 1819 was the first to set fire to the temples where his ancestors had worshipped for so long. Paao was a statesman and warrior, as well as a priest, but he preferred spiritual authority over political power. When Kapawa died and was buried at Iao, leaving his possessions without a capable ruler and his people on the brink of chaos, Paao didn't take the chieftaincy for himself, even though he clearly had the ability to do so. Instead, he sent messengers—if he didn’t go himself—to his homeland to invite a chief who could restore order to Hawaii.
Such a leader was found in Pilikaekae, of Samoa, who migrated to Hawaii with a goodly number of retainers, and was promptly established in the vacant sovereignty, while Paao continued in the position of high-priest. Pili extended his authority over the six districts of Hawaii; but beyond Kohala and the northern part of the island the recognition of his sovereignty was merely nominal, and internal wars and revolts were frequent.
Such a leader was found in Pilikaekae from Samoa, who moved to Hawaii with a good number of followers and was quickly appointed as the ruler, while Paao remained in the role of high priest. Pili expanded his rule over the six districts of Hawaii; however, outside of Kohala and the northern part of the island, his authority was largely symbolic, and internal conflicts and uprisings were common.
The next arrivals of note from the southern islands were the two Paumakua families, one of which settled in Oahu and Kauai and the other in Hawaii and Maui. Whether, as averred by conflicting traditions, they arrived contemporaneously or two or three generations apart, is a question in nowise pertinent to our story. The legend is connected with the Hawaii branch alone, and the order of their coming need not, therefore, be here discussed.
The next notable arrivals from the southern islands were the two Paumakua families, one of which settled in Oahu and Kauai and the other in Hawaii and Maui. Whether, as claimed by conflicting traditions, they arrived at the same time or two or three generations apart, is not relevant to our story. The legend is only connected with the Hawaii branch, so we don’t need to discuss the order of their arrival here.
The Paumakua family, which became so influential in Hawaii and Maui, arrived during the early part of the reign of Pili, in about A.D. 1090. A large party accompanied the family, and they brought with them their gods, priests, astrologers and prophets. They first landed and secured possessions in Maui; [72]but the sons and other relatives of Paumakua were brave and ambitious, and soon by conquest and marriage secured an almost sovereign footing both in Maui and Hawaii.
The Paumakua family, which became really influential in Hawaii and Maui, arrived early in the reign of Pili, around A.D. 1090. They came with a large group, bringing their gods, priests, astrologers, and prophets. They first landed and took ownership in Maui; [__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__] but Paumakua's sons and other relatives were brave and ambitious, and soon they gained almost sovereign status in both Maui and Hawaii through conquest and marriage.

Type of Ancient King in State.
Type of Ancient King in State.
One of the nephews of Paumakua, Hakalanileo, who was the son of Kuheailani, as an entering wedge to further acquisitions became in some manner possessed of a strip of land along the coast in the district of Hilo, Hawaii. It was a large estate, and the owner availed himself of every opportunity to extend its boundaries and increase the number of his dependents. His wife was the beautiful Hina of Hawaiian song and daughter of the seeress Uli, who had migrated from Tahiti with some one of the several expeditions of that period—possibly with the Paumakua family, although tradition does not so state.
One of Paumakua's nephews, Hakalanileo, who was the son of Kuheailani, managed to acquire a strip of land along the coast in the Hilo district of Hawaii as a way to expand his holdings. It was a large estate, and he took every chance to increase its boundaries and the number of people dependent on him. His wife was the beautiful Hina, celebrated in Hawaiian songs, and she was the daughter of the seeress Uli, who had migrated from Tahiti with one of the many expeditions of that time—possibly with the Paumakua family, although tradition doesn’t confirm this.
At that time Kamauaua, a powerful chief of the ancient native line of Nanaula, held sway over the island of Molokai. He proudly traced back his ancestry to the first migration in the sixth century, and regarded with aversion and well-founded alarm the new migratory tide which for years past had been casting upon the shores of the islands a flood of alien adventurers, whose warlike and aggressive chiefs were steadily possessing themselves of the fairest portions of the group. He had sought to form a league of native chiefs against these dangerous encroachments; but the wily invaders, with new gods to awe the masses and new customs and new traditions to charm the native nobility, had, through intermarriage and strategy rather than force, become the virtual rulers of Hawaii, Maui, Oahu, and Kauai, and he had abandoned all hope of seeing them supplanted. Molokai alone remained exclusively under native control, and its resolute old chief had from their infancy instilled into his sons a hatred of the southern spoilers and a resolution to resist their aggressions to the bitter end.
At that time, Kamauaua, a powerful chief from the ancient native line of Nanaula, ruled over the island of Molokai. He proudly traced his ancestry back to the first migration in the sixth century and looked with disdain and genuine concern at the new wave of migrants that had been flooding the shores of the islands for years, bringing in a host of foreign adventurers whose warlike and aggressive leaders were steadily taking over the most beautiful parts of the islands. He tried to unite native chiefs against these dangerous invasions, but the cunning newcomers, with their new gods to intimidate the masses and fresh customs and traditions to entice the native nobility, had, through intermarriage and strategy rather than outright violence, become the de facto rulers of Hawaii, Maui, Oahu, and Kauai, leaving him without hope of seeing them replaced. Molokai alone remained entirely under native control, and its determined old chief had instilled in his sons from a young age a strong dislike of the southern invaders and a resolve to resist their encroachments to the end.
The eldest of the sons of Kamauaua was Kaupeepee. He was a warlike youth, well skilled in arms and mighty in strength and courage, and so profound was his detestation of the alien chiefs that he resolved to devote his life to such warfare as he might be able to make upon them and their subjects. With this view he relinquished his right of succession to his first brother, Keoloewa, and, gathering around him a band of warriors partaking of his desperation and courage, established a stronghold on the promontory of Haupu, on the north side of the island, between [73]Pelekunu and Waikolo. At that point, and for some miles on each side of it, the mountains hug the ocean so closely as to leave nothing between them and the surf-beaten shores but a succession of steep, narrow and rugged promontories jutting out into the sea, and separated from each other by gorge-like and gloomy little valleys gashing the hills and, like dragons, for ever swallowing and ejecting the waves that venture too near their rocky jaws.
The eldest son of Kamauaua was Kaupeepee. He was a fierce young man, skilled in combat and strong in both his physical abilities and his bravery. His hatred for the foreign chiefs was so intense that he decided to dedicate his life to fighting against them and their people. With this goal in mind, he gave up his claim to the throne for his older brother, Keoloewa, and gathered a group of warriors who shared his determination and courage. They established a stronghold on the Haupu promontory, located on the north side of the island, between [__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]Pelekunu and Waikolo. At that location, and for several miles on either side, the mountains come very close to the ocean, leaving only steep, narrow, and rugged cliffs that jut out into the sea, separated by dark, valley-like gorges that carve through the hills, constantly swallowing and spitting out the waves that come too close to their rocky edges.
One of the most rugged of these promontories was Haupu. It was a natural fortress, precipitously fronting the sea with a height of five hundred feet or more, and flanked on the right and left by almost perpendicular declivities rising from narrow gulches choked with vegetation and sweetening the sea with rivulets of fresh water dashing down from the mountains seamed by their sources. It was connected with the range of mountains back of it by a narrow and rising ridge, which at a point something less than a mile inland, where opposite branches of the two flanking gulches approached each other closely, was contracted to a neck of not more than fifty paces in width. The summit of the point abutting the ocean was a comparatively level plateau, or rather series of three connecting terraces, embracing in all an area of nearly a hundred acres. Surrounded on three sides by almost perpendicular walls, and accessible on the fourth only by a narrow and easily-defended ridge extending to the mountains, little engineering skill was required to render the place well-nigh impregnable.
One of the most rugged of these cliffs was Haupu. It was a natural fortress, rising steeply above the sea at over five hundred feet, with nearly vertical slopes on both sides that rose from narrow valleys filled with vegetation, while fresh water streams cascaded down from the mountains. It connected to the mountain range behind it via a narrow, rising ridge, which, less than a mile inland, where the two flanking valleys came close together, narrowed to a neck of no more than fifty paces wide. The point facing the ocean featured a relatively flat plateau, or rather a series of three interconnected terraces, covering nearly a hundred acres. Surrounded on three sides by nearly vertical cliffs and only accessible on the fourth by a narrow, easily-defended ridge leading to the mountains, little engineering skill was needed to make the place almost impregnable.
Setting himself earnestly to the task, Kaupeepee soon transformed the promontory of Haupu into one of the strongest fortresses in all the group. He surrounded the plateau with massive stone walls overlooking the declivities, and across the narrow neck leading to the mountains raised a rocky barrier ten feet in thickness and twenty feet in height, around which aggression from without was rendered impracticable by the excavation of precipices leading to, and in vertical line with, the ends of the wall. Instead of a gate, a subterranean passage-way led under the wall, the inside entrance being covered in times of danger with a huge flat stone resting on rollers.
Focusing intently on the task, Kaupeepee quickly turned the promontory of Haupu into one of the strongest fortresses in the entire area. He surrounded the plateau with massive stone walls that overlooked the slopes, and across the narrow land bridge that led to the mountains, he built a rocky barrier ten feet thick and twenty feet high. This made any outside aggression nearly impossible, thanks to the deep cliffs that aligned perfectly with the ends of the wall. Instead of a gate, there was a secret underground passage that went beneath the wall, with the inside entrance being sealed in times of danger by a large flat stone that rested on rollers.
Although the passage was rough and in unfavorable weather attended with danger, canoes could enter the mouths of both gulches and be hauled up beyond the reach of the waves, and beyond [74]the reach of enemies as well; for above the entrances, and completely commanding them, frowned the broad battlements of Haupu, from which might be hurled hundreds of tons of rocks and other destructive missiles. With ingenuity and great labor narrow foot-paths were cut leading from the middle terrace to both gulches, some distance above their openings, and affording a means of entering and leaving the fortress by water. These paths connected with the terrace through narrow passage-ways under the walls, and a single arm could defend them against a host.
Although the journey was tough and the weather was bad, making it dangerous, canoes could still enter both gulches and be pulled up out of the waves and away from enemies. Above the entrances, the strong walls of Haupu loomed, allowing defenders to launch hundreds of tons of rocks and other harmful projectiles. With skill and hard work, narrow footpaths were created linking the middle terrace to both gulches, some distance above their openings, providing a way to come in and out of the fortress by water. These paths connected to the terrace through narrow passageways underneath the walls, and one person could defend them against many attackers.
Within the walls buildings were erected capable of accommodating in an emergency two or three thousand warriors, and on the lower terrace, occupied by Kaupeepee and his household, including his confidential friends and captains, a small heiau overlooked the sea, with a priest and two or three assistants in charge. Mountain-paths led from the fortress to Kalaupapa and other productive parts of the island; and as fish could be taken in abundance, and Kaupeepee and many of his followers controlled taro and other lands in the valleys beyond, it was seldom that the stronghold was short of food, even when foraging expeditions to the neighboring islands failed.
Within the walls, buildings were constructed that could shelter two or three thousand warriors in case of an emergency. On the lower terrace, where Kaupeepee and his household, along with his close friends and captains, stayed, a small heiau looked out over the sea, attended by a priest and a couple of assistants. Mountain paths connected the fortress to Kalaupapa and other fertile areas of the island. With plenty of fish available and Kaupeepee, along with many of his followers, managing taro and other lands in the valleys beyond, the stronghold rarely ran out of food, even when foraging trips to nearby islands were unsuccessful.
The services of the courageous alone were accepted by Kaupeepee, and it was a wild and daring warfare that the little band waged for years against the alien chiefs and their subjects. They could put afloat a hundred war-canoes, and their operations, although usually confined to Oahu, Maui, and Hawaii, sometimes in a spirit of bravado extended to Kauai. Leaving their retreat, they hovered near the coast selected for pillage until after dark, and then landed and mercilessly used the torch and spear. This part of their work was quickly done, when they filled their canoes with the choicest plunder they could find or of which they were most in need, and before daylight made sail for Haupu. Women were sometimes the booty coveted by the buccaneers, and during their raids many a screaming beauty was seized and borne to their stronghold on Molokai, where in most instances she was so kindly treated that she soon lost all desire to be liberated. Occasionally they were followed, if the winds were unfavorable to their retreat, by hastily-equipped fleets of canoes. If they allowed themselves to be overtaken it was for the amusement of driving back their pursuers; but as a rule they escaped without [75]pursuit or punishment, leaving their victims in ignorance alike of the source and motive of the assault.
The services of the brave alone were accepted by Kaupeepee, and it was a wild and daring fight that the small group waged for years against the foreign chiefs and their people. They could launch a hundred war canoes, and their activities, while usually limited to Oahu, Maui, and Hawaii, sometimes extended to Kauai out of sheer boldness. Leaving their hideout, they lingered near the coast chosen for looting until after dark, then landed and ruthlessly used fire and spears. This part of their mission was done quickly, as they filled their canoes with the best loot they could find or desperately needed, and before dawn set sail for Haupu. Women were sometimes the prizes sought by the pirates, and during their raids, many a screaming beauty was captured and taken to their stronghold on Molokai, where in most cases she was treated so well that she soon lost any desire to escape. Occasionally, they were pursued, if the winds made their getaway difficult, by hastily assembled fleets of canoes. If they allowed themselves to be caught, it was merely for the fun of sending their pursuers back; but as a rule, they evaded pursuit or punishment, leaving their victims unaware of the source and reason for the attack.
A prominent chief of Oahu, whose territory had been ravaged by Kaupeepee, traced the retiring fleet of the plunderers to the coast of Molokai, when it suddenly disappeared. He landed and paid his respects to the venerable Kamauaua, then at Kalaupapa, and craved his assistance in discovering and punishing the spoilers, who must have found shelter somewhere on the island. The old chief smiled grimly as he replied: “It is not necessary to search for your enemies. You will find them at Haupu, near the ocean. They are probably waiting for you. They do not disturb me or my people. If they have wronged you, land and punish them. You have my permission.”
A well-known chief of Oahu, whose land had been devastated by Kaupeepee, tracked the fleeing pirates to the coast of Molokai, where they suddenly vanished. He went ashore to pay his respects to the respected Kamauaua, who was then at Kalaupapa, and asked for his help in finding and punishing the raiders, who must have taken refuge somewhere on the island. The old chief smiled wryly as he replied, “You don’t need to look for your enemies. You’ll find them at Haupu, close to the ocean. They’re probably waiting for you. They don’t bother me or my people. If they’ve harmed you, land and deal with them. You have my permission.”
The Oahu chief offered his thanks and departed. He made a partial reconnoissance of Haupu, ascertained that it was defended by but a few hundred warriors, and shortly after returned with a large fleet of canoes to capture and retain possession of the place. Arriving off the entrance to the gulches, and discovering a number of war-canoes drawn up on their steep banks, he opened the campaign by ordering their seizure. Sixty canoes filled with warriors rode the surf into the gulches, where they were met by avalanches of rocks from the walls of the fortress, which dashed the most of them in pieces. The chief was startled and horrified, and, believing the gods were raining rocks down upon his fleet, he rescued such of his warriors as were able to reach him from the wrecked canoes, and hastily departed for Oahu, not again to return.
The Oahu chief expressed his gratitude and left. He did a quick survey of Haupu and found it was only defended by a few hundred warriors. Soon after, he returned with a large fleet of canoes to capture and take control of the place. When he arrived at the entrance to the gulches and noticed several war canoes pulled up on the steep banks, he began the attack by ordering their capture. Sixty canoes filled with warriors surged into the gulches, only to be met by avalanches of rocks from the fortress walls, which shattered most of them. The chief was taken aback and horrified, believing the gods were hurling rocks down on his fleet. He rescued the warriors who could reach him from the wrecked canoes and quickly left for Oahu, never to come back.
It is said that Kamauaua watched this assault upon Haupu from the hills back of the fortress, and, in token of his pleasure at the result, sent to Kaupeepee a feather cloak, and gave him the privilege of taking fish for his warriors from one of the largest of the royal ponds on the island. He also quietly presented him with a barge, than which there were few larger in the group. It would accommodate more than a hundred warriors and their equipments, and was intended for long and rough voyages.
It’s said that Kamauaua observed the attack on Haupu from the hills behind the fortress, and to show his approval of the outcome, he sent Kaupeepee a feather cloak and allowed him to fish for his warriors in one of the largest royal ponds on the island. He also discreetly gifted him a barge, one of the biggest in the group. It could hold over a hundred warriors and their gear and was meant for long and challenging journeys.
These barges were constructed of planks strongly corded together over a frame, and calked and pitched. They were sometimes ten or more feet in width, and were partially or wholly decked over, with a depth of hold of six or eight feet. It was in vessels of this class, and in large double canoes of equal or [76]greater burden, that distant voyages were made to and from the Hawaiian Islands during the migratory periods of the past, while the single and double canoes of smaller dimensions, hollowed from the trunks of single trees, were used in warfare, fishing, and in general inter-island communication. After the final suspension of intercourse, in the twelfth century, between the Hawaiian and Society Islands—the possible result of the disappearance of a guiding line of small islands and atolls dotting the ocean at intervals between the two groups—the barges referred to gradually went out of use with the abandonment of voyages to distant lands, and were almost unknown to the Hawaiians as early as one or two centuries ago. Their spread of sail was very considerable, but oars were also used, and the mariner shaped his course by the sun and stars, and was guided to land by the flights of birds, drifting wood, and currents of which he knew the direction.
These barges were built from planks tightly bound together over a frame and sealed with caulking and pitch. They were sometimes ten feet wide or more, and were partially or fully decked, with a hold depth of six to eight feet. It was in vessels like these, along with large double canoes of equal or [__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]greater capacity, that long journeys to and from the Hawaiian Islands were made during past migration periods. Meanwhile, smaller single and double canoes, carved from single tree trunks, were used for warfare, fishing, and general inter-island communication. After the final end of contact in the twelfth century between the Hawaiian and Society Islands—likely due to the disappearance of a guiding line of small islands and atolls scattered across the ocean between the two groups—the barges gradually fell out of use as long-distance voyages ceased, and were nearly unknown to the Hawaiians as early as one or two centuries ago. They had a significant sail area, but oars were also utilized, and the navigator charted his course by the sun and stars, using the flights of birds, drifting wood, and currents he was familiar with to find land.
Some of the double canoes with which the barges were supplanted were scarcely less capacious and seaworthy than the barges themselves. They were hollowed from the trunks of gigantic pines that had drifted to the islands from the northern coast of America, and when one was found years sometimes elapsed before wind and current provided a proper mate. One of the single-trunk double canoes of Kamehameha I. was one hundred and eight feet in length, and both single and double canoes of from fifty to eighty feet in length were quite common during his reign, when the native forests abounded in growths much larger than can now be found. But the native trees never furnished bodies for the larger sizes of canoes. They were the gifts of the waves, and were not unfrequently credited to the favor of the gods.
Some of the double canoes that replaced the barges were almost as spacious and seaworthy as the barges themselves. They were carved from the trunks of massive pines that had washed up on the islands from the northern coast of America, and it could take years to find a matching canoe after one was discovered, waiting for the right wind and current. One of Kamehameha I's single-trunk double canoes was one hundred and eight feet long, and both single and double canoes ranging from fifty to eighty feet in length were quite common during his reign, when the native forests were filled with larger trees than what can be found today. However, the local trees never produced the larger canoes. Those were gifts from the sea and were often believed to be blessings from the gods.
Kaupeepee was delighted with the present of the barge. It gave him one of the largest vessels in all the eight Hawaiian seas, and rendered him especially formidable in sea-encounters. He painted the sails red and the hull to the water-line, and from the masthead flung a saucy pennon to the breeze, surmounted by a kahili, which might have been mistaken for Von Tromp’s broom had it been seen a few centuries later in northern seas. He provided a large crew of oarsmen, and made a more secure landing for it in one of the openings near the fortress.
Kaupeepee was thrilled with the gift of the barge. It gave him one of the largest vessels in all the eight Hawaiian seas, making him especially tough in sea battles. He painted the sails red and the hull up to the waterline, and from the masthead, he let a cheeky pennon flutter in the breeze, topped with a kahili, which could have been mistaken for Von Tromp’s broom if it had been seen a few centuries later in northern seas. He assembled a large crew of oarsmen and created a safer landing for it in one of the openings near the fortress.
With this substantial addition to his fleet Kaupeepee enlarged [77]the scope of his depredations, and his red sails were known and feared on the neighboring coasts of Oahu and Maui. Haupu was filled with the spoil of his expeditions, and the return of a successful raiding party was usually celebrated with a season of feasting, singing, dancing, and other boisterous merriment. Nor were the gods forgotten. Frequent festivals were given to Kane, Ku, and Lono; and Moaalii, the shark-god of Molokai—the god of the fisherman and mariner—was always the earliest to be remembered. A huge image of this deity overlooked the ocean from the north wall of the heiau of Haupu, and leis of fresh flowers adorned its shoulders whenever a dangerous expedition departed or returned. On one occasion this god had guided Kaupeepee to Haupu during a dark and rainy night, and on another had capsized a number of Oahuan war-canoes that had adroitly separated him from his fleet in Pailolo channel.
With this significant addition to his fleet, Kaupeepee expanded the range of his raids, and his red sails became well-known and feared along the nearby coasts of Oahu and Maui. Haupu was filled with the treasures from his expeditions, and the return of a successful raiding party was typically marked by a time of feasting, singing, dancing, and other lively celebrations. The gods were not overlooked either. Frequent festivals were held in honor of Kane, Ku, and Lono; and Moaalii, the shark god of Molokai—the deity of fishermen and sailors—was always the first to be acknowledged. A large statue of this god watched over the ocean from the north wall of the heiau of Haupu, and leis of fresh flowers decorated its shoulders whenever a risky expedition set out or returned. On one occasion, this god had guided Kaupeepee to Haupu during a dark and rainy night, and on another, he had overturned a number of Oahuan war canoes that had skillfully separated him from his fleet in the Pailolo channel.
At that period the islands were generally ruled by virtually independent district chiefs. They recognized a supreme head, or alii-nui, but were absolute lords of their several territories, and wars between them were frequent; but they were wars of plunder rather than of conquest, and sometimes continued in a desultory way until both parties were impoverished, when their chiefs and priests met and arranged terms of peace. But Kaupeepee was inspired by a motive higher than that of mere plunder. He hated the southern chiefs and their successors, and his assaults were confined exclusively to the territories over which they ruled. His sole aim was to inflict injury upon them, and the spoils of his expeditions were distributed among his followers. Brave, generous and sagacious, he was almost worshipped by his people, and treason, with them, was a thing unthought of.
During that time, the islands were mostly governed by nearly independent district chiefs. They acknowledged a supreme leader, or alii-nui, but had complete control over their own territories. Conflicts between them were common, but they were more about raiding than conquering, and sometimes dragged on in a haphazard manner until both sides were drained of resources. At that point, their chiefs and priests would meet to negotiate peace. However, Kaupeepee was driven by a motive that went beyond mere raiding. He despised the southern chiefs and their heirs, and his attacks were focused only on the areas they controlled. His main goal was to harm them, and the loot from his campaigns was shared among his followers. Brave, generous, and wise, he was practically revered by his people, and the idea of betrayal was unheard of among them.
It was indeed a wild and reckless life that Kaupeepee and his daring associates led; but it lacked neither excitement abroad nor amusement at home. On the upper terrace a kahua channel had been cut, along which they rolled the maika and threw the blunted dart. They played konane, puhenehene, and punipeki, and at surf-riding possessed experts of both sexes who might have travelled far without finding their equals. The people of the island were friendly with the dashing buccaneers, and the fairest damsels became their wives, some of them living with their husbands at Haupu, and others with their relatives in the valleys. [78]
It was definitely a wild and reckless life that Kaupeepee and his bold friends led; but it had plenty of excitement outside and fun at home. On the upper terrace, a kahua channel had been cut, where they rolled the maika and threw the blunted dart. They played konane, puhenehene, and punipeki, and for surf-riding, they had skilled experts of both genders who could have traveled far without finding anyone as good. The islanders were friendly with the adventurous buccaneers, and the most beautiful young women became their wives, some living with their husbands at Haupu, while others stayed with their families in the valleys. [__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]
II.
We will now return to Hina—or Hooho, as she was sometimes called—the beautiful wife of Hakalanileo, nephew of Paumakua, of Hawaii. Hakalanileo had acquired his possessions in Hilo partly through the influence of his own family, and partly through his marriage with the sister of a consequential district chief. Later in life he had seen and become enamored of Hina, the daughter of Uli, and prevailed upon her to become his wife. The marriage was not acceptable to Uli. The position and family connections of Hakalanileo were sufficiently inviting, but Uli, who dealt in sorcery and magic, saw disaster in the proposed union and advised her daughter against it. After much persuasion, however, her consent was obtained; but she gave it with this injunction:
We will now return to Hina—or Hooho, as she was sometimes called—who was the beautiful wife of Hakalanileo, nephew of Paumakua, from Hawaii. Hakalanileo gained his possessions in Hilo partly due to his family's influence and partly through marrying the sister of an important district chief. Later in life, he saw and fell in love with Hina, the daughter of Uli, and convinced her to marry him. However, the marriage was not approved by Uli. While the position and family connections of Hakalanileo were appealing, Uli, who practiced sorcery and magic, foresaw trouble in the proposed union and advised her daughter against it. After a lot of persuasion, Uli reluctantly agreed; but she gave her consent with this warning:
“Since you will have it so, take her, Hakalanileo; but guard her well, for I can see that some day the winds will snatch her from you, and you will behold her not again for many years.”
“Since that’s how you want it, take her, Hakalanileo; but take good care of her, because I can see that one day the winds will take her from you, and you won’t see her again for many years.”
“Be it even as you say,” replied Hakalanileo, “I will take the hazard. We do not well to reject a treasure because, perchance, it may be stolen. Hina shall be my wife.”
"Even if that's the case," Hakalanileo replied, "I'm willing to take the risk. It's not wise to turn away a treasure just because it might be taken from us. Hina will be my wife."
And thus it was that Hina became the wife of the nephew of Paumakua—Hina, the most beautiful maiden in all Hawaii; Hina, whose eyes were like stars, and whose hair fell in waves below the fringes of her pau; Hina, whose name has come down to us through the centuries garlanded with song. And for years she lived happily with Hakalanileo, who loved her above all others—lived with him until she became the mother of two sons, Kana and Niheu; and then the winds snatched her away from her husband, just as Uli had predicted six years before. But the winds that bore her hence filled the sails of the great barge of Kaupeepee.
And so Hina became the wife of Paumakua's nephew—Hina, the most beautiful woman in all of Hawaii; Hina, whose eyes sparkled like stars, and whose hair flowed in waves beneath the edges of her pau; Hina, whose name has been passed down to us through the centuries adorned with song. For years, she lived happily with Hakalanileo, who loved her more than anyone else—she lived with him until she became the mother of two sons, Kana and Niheu; and then the winds took her away from her husband, just as Uli had predicted six years earlier. But the winds that carried her away filled the sails of the great barge of Kaupeepee.
The chief of Haupu had heard of her great beauty, and resolved to see with his own eyes what the bards had exalted in song. Travelling overland from Puna in disguise, he reached her home in Hilo, and saw that the poets had done her no more than justice. She was beautiful indeed, and the wife of one to whose blood he had vowed undying enmity. Returning to Puna, where his barge lay in waiting for him, he hovered around the coast of Hilo for some days, watching for an opportunity to seize the woman whose charms had enraptured him. [79]
The chief of Haupu had heard about her incredible beauty and decided to see for himself what the artists had praised in their songs. Disguised, he traveled from Puna and arrived at her home in Hilo, and he saw that the poets had been completely right. She was truly beautiful and the wife of a man whose lineage he had sworn to hate forever. After returning to Puna, where his boat was waiting for him, he spent several days circling the coast of Hilo, looking for a chance to capture the woman whose beauty had captivated him. [__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]
At last it came. After sunset, when the moon was shining, Hina repaired to the beach with her women to bathe. A signal was given—it is thought by the first wife of Hakalanileo—and not long after a light but heavily-manned canoe dashed through the surf and shot in among the bathers. The women screamed and started for the shore. Suddenly a man leaped from the canoe into the water. There was a brief struggle, a stifled scream, a sharp word of command, and a moment later Kaupeepee was again in the canoe with the nude and frantic Hina in his arms.
At last it arrived. After sunset, when the moon was shining, Hina went to the beach with her friends to take a bath. A signal was given—it’s believed by the first wife of Hakalanileo—and soon after, a light yet heavily-manned canoe rushed through the waves and headed straight for the bathers. The women screamed and ran towards the shore. Suddenly, a man jumped from the canoe into the water. There was a quick struggle, a muffled scream, a sharp order, and a moment later, Kaupeepee was back in the canoe with the naked and panicking Hina in his arms.
The boatmen knew their business—knew the necessity of quick work—and without a word the canoe was turned and driven through the surf like an arrow. The barge, with a man at every oar and the sails ready to hoist, was lying a short distance out at sea. A speck of light guided the boatmen, and the barge was soon reached. All were hastily transferred to it. The sails were spread, the men bent to their oars, the canoe was taken in tow; and, while the alarm-drum was sounding and fires were appearing on shore, Hina, wrapped in folds of soft kapa, sat sobbing in one of the apartments of the barge, and was being swiftly borne by wind and oar toward the fortress of Haupu.
The boatmen were experts at their job—aware of how important it was to work quickly—and without saying a word, they turned the canoe and shot through the surf like an arrow. The barge, with a man at each oar and the sails ready to go, was floating a short distance out at sea. A small light guided the boatmen, and they quickly reached the barge. Everyone was hastily moved over to it. The sails were unfurled, the men rowed hard, and the canoe was towed behind; meanwhile, the alarm drum was beating and fires were popping up on the shore. Hina, wrapped in layers of soft kapa, sat crying in one of the barge's compartments as she was swiftly carried by wind and oars toward the fortress of Haupu.
The return to Haupu occupied a little more than two days. During that time Hina had mourned continually and partaken of no food. Kaupeepee had treated her with respect and kindness; but she was bewildered with the shock of her abduction, and begged to be either killed or returned to her children.
The return to Haupu took just over two days. During that time, Hina mourned non-stop and didn’t eat anything. Kaupeepee treated her with respect and kindness, but she was overwhelmed by the trauma of her abduction and begged to either be killed or taken back to her children.
The party landed a little before daylight. The sea was rough, but the moon shone brightly, and the passage into the mouth of one of the gulches was made without accident. In the arms of Kaupeepee Hina was borne up the rock-hewn path to the fortress, and placed in apartments on the lower terrace provided with every comfort and luxury known to the nobility of the islands at that period. They had been especially prepared for her reception, and women were in attendance to wait upon her and see that she wanted for nothing, except her liberty. The large private room of the three communicating apartments—the one designed for her personal occupation—was a model of barbaric taste and comfort, and to its adornment many of the exposed districts of Oahu and Maui had unwillingly contributed. Its walls were tapestried with finely-woven and brilliantly-colored [80]mattings, dropping from festoons of shells and underlapping a carpet of hardier material covering the level ground-floor. The beams of the ceiling were also studded with shells and gaudily stained. On one side of the room was a slightly-raised platform, thickly strewn with dry sea-grass and covered with many folds of kapa. This was the kapa-moe, or sleeping-couch. Opposite was a kapa-covered lounge extending along the entire side of the room. In the middle of the apartment were spread several thicknesses of mats, which served alike for eating and lounging purposes. Light was admitted through two small openings immediately under the eaves, and from the door when its heavy curtains were looped aside. On a row of shelves in a corner of the room were carved calabashes and other curious drinking-vessels, as well as numerous ornaments of shells, ivory and feathers; and in huge calabashes under them were stores of female attire of every description then in use. In fact, nothing seemed to be wanting, and, in spite of her grief, Hina could scarcely repress a feeling of delight as she was shown into the apartment and the kukui torches displayed its luxurious appointments.
The party arrived just before dawn. The sea was choppy, but the moon was shining brightly, and they made it into one of the gulches without any issues. Kaupeepee carefully carried Hina up the rocky path to the fortress and placed her in a room on the lower terrace that was equipped with all the comforts and luxuries known to the nobility of the islands at that time. It had been specially prepared for her arrival, with women on hand to look after her every need, except her freedom. The large private room among the three adjoining ones—set aside for her use—was a perfect blend of exotic style and comfort, with contributions from various regions of Oahu and Maui in its decor. The walls were draped with finely woven, brightly colored [__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]mattings, hanging from strings of shells and covering a tough carpet on the flat ground floor. The ceiling beams were also adorned with shells and brightly painted. One side of the room featured a slightly raised platform thickly covered with dry seaweed and numerous layers of kapa, serving as the kapa-moe, or sleeping-couch. Opposite this was a lounge covered in kapa that stretched the entire length of the room. In the middle of the apartment lay several layers of mats, used for both dining and relaxing. Light streamed in through two small openings beneath the eaves and from the door when its heavy curtains were pulled aside. In one corner, shelves displayed carved calabashes and other unique drinking vessels, along with various ornaments made from shells, ivory, and feathers. Below these, large calabashes held a collection of women’s clothing of all types that were in style. It truly seemed that nothing was lacking, and despite her sadness, Hina could barely contain a sense of joy as she was ushered into the room and the kukui torches illuminated its lavish furnishings.
Declining food, Hina dismissed her attendants, and, throwing herself on the kapa-moe, was soon folded in the soft mantle of sleep and carried back in dreams to the home from which she had been ravished. The room was dark, and she slept for many hours. Awaking, she could not for a moment recollect where she was; but gradually the events of the preceding three days came to her, and she appreciated that she was a prisoner in the hands of Kaupeepee, of whose name and exploits she was not ignorant, and that repining would secure her neither liberation nor kind treatment. Therefore, with a sagacity to be expected of the daughter of Uli, and not without a certain feeling of pride as she reflected that her beauty had inspired Kaupeepee to abduct her, she admitted her attendants, attired herself becomingly, partook heartily of a breakfast of fish, poi, potatoes and fruits, and then sent word to Kaupeepee that she would be pleased to see him.
Feeling hungry, Hina dismissed her attendants and, throwing herself onto the kapa-moe, quickly fell into a deep sleep, drifting back in her dreams to the home she had been taken from. The room was dark, and she slept for many hours. When she woke up, she couldn’t remember where she was for a moment; but slowly, the events of the last three days came back to her, and she realized she was a prisoner of Kaupeepee, whose name and deeds she knew well, and that lamenting her situation wouldn’t earn her freedom or kindness. So, with the wisdom expected of Uli's daughter, and feeling a sense of pride at the thought that her beauty had led Kaupeepee to abduct her, she called for her attendants, dressed herself nicely, enjoyed a hearty breakfast of fish, poi, potatoes, and fruits, and then sent word to Kaupeepee that she would be happy to see him.
Kaupeepee expected a storm of tears and reproaches as he entered the room, but was agreeably disappointed. Hina rose, bowed, and waited for him to speak.
Kaupeepee expected a flood of tears and accusations when he walked into the room, but he was pleasantly surprised. Hina stood up, bowed, and waited for him to say something.
“What can I do for you?” inquired Kaupeepee in a kindly [81]tone, while a just perceptible smile of triumph swept across his handsome face.
“What can I do for you?” asked Kaupeepee in a friendly tone, while a slight smile of triumph spread across his handsome face. [__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]
“Liberate me,” replied Hina promptly.
"Set me free," replied Hina promptly.
“You are free to go anywhere within the walls of Haupu,” returned Kaupeepee, moving his arms around as if they embraced the whole world.
“You can go anywhere within the walls of Haupu,” Kaupeepee replied, gesturing with his arms as if he were embracing the entire world.
“Return me to my children,” said Hina; and at thought of them her eyes flashed with earnestness.
“Take me back to my kids,” said Hina; and at the thought of them, her eyes lit up with determination.
“Impossible!” was the firm reply.
"Not happening!" was the firm reply.
“Then kill me!” exclaimed Hina.
“Then kill me!” shouted Hina.
“Did you ever see me before I had the pleasure of embracing you in the water on the coast of Hilo?” inquired the chief, evasively.
“Have you ever seen me before I had the pleasure of holding you in the water on the coast of Hilo?” the chief asked, avoiding a direct answer.
“No,” replied Hina, curtly.
“No,” Hina replied tersely.
“Well, I saw you before that time,” continued Kaupeepee—“saw you in your house; saw you among the palms; saw you by the waters. I made a journey overland from Puna to see you—to see the wife of my enemy, the most beautiful woman in Hawaii.”
“Well, I saw you before that time,” continued Kaupeepee—“saw you in your house; saw you among the palms; saw you by the waters. I traveled overland from Puna to see you—to see the wife of my enemy, the most beautiful woman in Hawaii.”
Hina was but a woman, and of a race and time when the promptings of the heart were not fettered by rigid rules of propriety. Kaupeepee was the handsome and distinguished son of a king, and his words of praise were not unpleasant to her. She therefore bent her eyes to the floor and remained silent while he added:
Hina was just a woman, living in a time when feelings weren’t restricted by strict social rules. Kaupeepee was the attractive and esteemed son of a king, and she didn’t mind his compliments. So, she looked down at the floor and stayed quiet while he continued:
“Hina would think little of the man who would risk his life to possess himself of such a woman, and then kill or cast her off as not worth the keeping. You are like no other woman; I am like no other man. Such companionship has the approval of the gods, and you will leave Haupu only when its walls shall have been battered down and Kaupeepee lies dead among the ruins!”
“Hina would think very little of a man who would gamble with his life to claim a woman like you, only to either kill her or abandon her as if she isn’t worth keeping. You are unlike any other woman; I am unlike any other man. Such a partnership has the blessings of the gods, and you will only leave Haupu when its walls have crumbled and Kaupeepee lies dead among the ruins!”
To this terrible declaration Hina could offer no reply. The fierceness of this prince of the old line of Nanaula, this enemy of her people, this scourge of the southern chiefs, alike charmed and frightened her, and with her hands to her face she sank upon the lounge of kapa beside which she had been standing.
To this shocking declaration, Hina had no response. The intensity of this prince from the old line of Nanaula, this adversary of her people, this terror of the southern chiefs, both fascinated and scared her. With her hands covering her face, she collapsed onto the lounge of kapa beside which she had been standing.
The chief regarded her for a moment, perhaps with a feeling of pity; then, placing his hand upon her shoulder, he softly said: [82]
The chief looked at her for a moment, maybe feeling a bit sorry for her; then, putting his hand on her shoulder, he gently said: [__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]
“You will not be unhappy in Haupu.”
“You won’t be unhappy in Haupu.”
“Will the bird sing that is covered with a calabash?” replied Hina, raising her eyes. “I am your prisoner.”
“Will the bird sing that’s covered with a calabash?” replied Hina, looking up. “I am your prisoner.”
“Not more my prisoner than I am yours,” rejoined the chief, gallantly. “Therefore, as fellow-prisoners, let us make the best of walls that shut out no sunshine, and of gates that are a bar only against intrusion.”
“I'm not more your prisoner than you are mine,” the chief replied confidently. “So, as fellow prisoners, let’s make the best of these walls that block out no sunlight, and of gates that only keep intruders out.”
“How brave, and yet how gentle!” mused Hina, as Kaupeepee, feeling that he had said enough, turned and left the room. “How strangely pleasant are his words and voice! No one ever spoke so to me before. I could have listened longer.”
“How brave, and yet how gentle!” thought Hina as Kaupeepee, sensing he had said enough, turned and left the room. “How strangely pleasant are his words and voice! No one has ever spoken to me like that before. I could have listened longer.”
After that Hina harkened for the footsteps of Kaupeepee, and lived to forget that she was a prisoner in the fortress of Haupu. His love gently wooed her thoughts from the past and made sweet the bondage which he shared with her.
After that, Hina listened for Kaupeepee's footsteps and managed to forget that she was a prisoner in the fortress of Haupu. His love softly drew her thoughts away from the past and made the confinement they shared feel sweet.
III.
The sudden disappearance of Hina created a profound excitement among the people of that part of the coast of Hilo from which she had been abducted. The women who had been permitted to escape ran screaming to the house of Hakalanileo with their tale of woe, and soon for miles around the country was in arms. When questioned, all they could tell was that a canoe filled with armed men suddenly dashed through the surf, and their mistress was seized and borne out to sea. This was all they knew.
The sudden disappearance of Hina sparked intense excitement among the people along that part of the Hilo coast where she had been taken. The women who managed to escape ran screaming to Hakalanileo’s house with their heartbreaking story, and soon the surrounding area was on high alert. When asked what happened, all they could say was that a canoe filled with armed men suddenly rushed through the waves, and their mistress was grabbed and carried out to sea. That was all they knew.
Canoes were suddenly equipped and sent in pursuit, but they returned before morning with the report that nothing had been seen of the abductors. Messengers were despatched to the coast settlements of Hamakua, Hilo and Puna, but they brought no intelligence of the missing woman. Uli was consulted, but her divinations failed, for the reason, as she informed the unhappy husband, that the powers that had warned her against the marriage of her daughter and foreshadowed the result could not be prevailed upon to impart any information that would interfere with the fulfilment of the prophecy. Uli, therefore, sat down in gloom to await the developments of time, and Hakalanileo started on a systematic search through the group for his lost wife. [83]
Canoes were quickly outfitted and sent out to search, but they returned before morning with no sightings of the kidnappers. Messengers were sent to the coastal towns of Hamakua, Hilo, and Puna, but they had no news about the missing woman. Uli was consulted, but her divinations were unsuccessful. She told the distraught husband that the powers that had warned her against her daughter's marriage and predicted the outcome would not share any information that would go against the prophecy. So, Uli sat in sadness waiting for time to reveal what would happen, while Hakalanileo began a thorough search throughout the islands for his lost wife. [__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]
After visiting every district and almost every village on Hawaii, he proceeded with a small party of attendants to Maui, and thence to Molokai, Oahu, Kauai and Niihau, and back to Lanai and Kahoolawe; but no trace of Hina could be discovered. He was well received by the various chiefs, and assistance was freely offered and sometimes accepted; but all search was in vain, and he returned disheartened to Hawaii after an absence of more than two years.
After visiting every district and almost every village in Hawaii, he continued with a small group of attendants to Maui, then to Molokai, Oahu, Kauai, and Niihau, and back to Lanai and Kahoolawe; but no sign of Hina could be found. He was warmly welcomed by the different chiefs, and help was readily offered and occasionally accepted; but the search was fruitless, and he returned disheartened to Hawaii after being away for more than two years.
But his first search was not his last. During the fifteen years that followed he made frequent voyages to the different islands on the same errand, and always with the same result. He offered sacrifices in the temples, made pledges to the gods, and consulted every kaula of note of whom he had knowledge; but his offerings and promises failed to secure the assistance of the unseen powers, and the kilos and astrologers could gather nothing of importance to him from their observations.
But his first quest wasn't his last. Over the next fifteen years, he frequently traveled to different islands for the same purpose, and he always met with the same outcome. He made sacrifices in the temples, pledged to the gods, and consulted every well-known kaula he could find; however, his offerings and promises didn't manage to win the support of the unseen forces, and the kilos and astrologers couldn't find anything significant for him in their observations.
Meantime Kana and Niheu, the sons of Hina, grew to manhood and prepared to continue the search for their mother, which Hakalanileo had at last abandoned as hopeless. Again and again had their grandmother told them the story of the abduction of Hina, and as often had they vowed to devote their lives to a solution of the mystery of her fate. It was vouchsafed to Uli to see that her daughter lived, but beyond that her charms and incantations were fruitless. But when the beards of her grandsons began to grow she felt that the time was approaching when Hina’s hiding-place would be discovered, and she inspired them to become proficient in the use of arms and the arts of war. And to their assistance she brought the instruction of supernatural powers.
Meanwhile, Kana and Niheu, Hina's sons, grew into adulthood and got ready to continue their search for their mother, a quest that Hakalanileo had finally given up as futile. Time and time again, their grandmother shared the story of Hina's abduction, and each time they vowed to dedicate their lives to uncovering the mystery of her fate. Uli was granted the knowledge that her daughter was alive, but beyond that, her spells and rituals yielded no results. As her grandsons began to grow facial hair, she sensed that the time was nearing when Hina’s hiding place would be found, and she encouraged them to become skilled in weaponry and warfare. To assist them, she provided guidance from supernatural powers.
Niheu became endowed not only with great personal strength and courage, but with unerring instincts of strategy and all the accomplishments of a successful military leader. To Kana were given powers of a different nature. He could contract his body to the compass of an insect, and expand or extend it almost indefinitely; but he was permitted to do neither except in cases of imminent personal peril, as the faculty was rarely imparted to mortals, and in this instance was accorded by Kanaloa without the knowledge of the powers to which that deity was subject.
Niheu was granted not only great personal strength and bravery, but also an instinctive knack for strategy and all the skills of a successful military leader. Kana, on the other hand, received powers of a different kind. He could shrink his body to the size of an insect and stretch or expand it almost without limits; however, he was only allowed to do this in situations of immediate personal danger, as this ability was rarely given to humans, and in this case was bestowed by Kanaloa without the knowledge of the powers that controlled that deity.
Finally, after a season of long and patient inquiry, it was developed to Uli that her daughter was secreted in the fortress of [84]Haupu and could be recovered only by force, as she had long been the wife of Kaupeepee and would not be surrendered peacefully. Hakalanileo regarded the development with distrust; for while at Kalaupapa, on the island of Molokai, less than three years before, word was brought to him from Kaupeepee, offering to open the fortress of Haupu to his inspection. Hence, when his sons set about raising a large force to attack that stronghold, he gave them every assistance in his power, but declined to accompany the expedition.
Finally, after a long and patient investigation, Uli realized that her daughter was hidden away in the fortress of [__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]Haupu and could only be rescued by force, as she had been married to Kaupeepee for some time and wouldn’t be given up willingly. Hakalanileo viewed this news with skepticism; less than three years earlier, while at Kalaupapa on the island of Molokai, he had received a message from Kaupeepee, offering to let him inspect the fortress of Haupu. So, when his sons started gathering a large force to attack the stronghold, he provided them with all the support he could, but chose not to join the expedition.
Before noting with greater detail the warlike preparations of Hina’s sons, let us refer briefly to the changes which the years leading them to manhood had brought to others connected with the events of this legend. Hina had been a not unhappy captive at Haupu for nearly seventeen years, during which Kaupeepee had continued his desultory assaults upon the usurping chiefs of the neighboring islands. His name had become known throughout the entire group, and several combined attacks upon Haupu had been repulsed—the last by land, led by a distinguished Maui chief, with a slaughter so great that the adjoining gulches were choked with the slain. The venerable Kamauaua had passed away, leaving the government of Molokai to his son, Keoloewa, who had married Nuakea, daughter of the powerful chief, Keaunui, of Oahu, and sister of Lakona, of the strain of Maweke. Moi, another of Nuakea’s brothers, had joined Kaupeepee at Haupu, and became not only his steadfast friend and adviser, but his kaula, or prophet, as well.
Before detailing the war preparations of Hina’s sons, let’s briefly look at the changes that the years leading them into manhood had brought to others involved in this legend. Hina had been a relatively content captive at Haupu for nearly seventeen years, during which Kaupeepee had continued his sporadic attacks on the usurping chiefs of the neighboring islands. His name had become well-known throughout the entire group, and several coordinated assaults on Haupu had been fought off—the last one on land, led by a notable chief from Maui, resulting in such heavy casualties that the nearby gullies were filled with the dead. The respected Kamauaua had passed away, leaving the governance of Molokai to his son, Keoloewa, who had married Nuakea, the daughter of the powerful chief, Keaunui, of Oahu, and sister of Lakona, of the Maweke lineage. Moi, another of Nuakea’s brothers, had joined Kaupeepee at Haupu and became not only his loyal friend and advisor but also his kaula, or prophet.
Paumakua had died at a very old age, and was buried at Iao, leaving his titles, meles and possessions to his son, Haho; but the change did not seem to affect the holdings of Hakalanileo in Hilo, although it brought to his sons some support in their subsequent war with Kaupeepee. Haho was a haughty but warlike chief, and refused to recognize the titles of many of the native nobles; and, to permanently degrade them, he founded the Aha-alii, or college of chiefs, which embraced the blue-blooded of the entire group, and remained in vogue as late as the beginning of the present century. To be recognized by this college of heraldry, it was necessary for every chief to name his descent from an ancestor of unquestioned nobility; and when his rank was thus formally established, no circumstance of war or peace could deprive him of it. There were gradations of rank and [85]tabu within the Aha-alii, and all received the respect to which their rank entitled them, without regard to their worldly condition. No chief could claim a higher grade than the source from which he sprang; nor could he achieve it, although through marriage with a chiefess of higher rank he might advance his children to the grade of the mother. The Aha-alii had a language which was not understood by the common people, and which was changed whenever it became known to the makaainana, and it was their right on all occasions to wear the insignia of their rank, the feather wreath (lei-hulu), the feather cape (aha-ula), and the ivory clasp (palaoa); and their canoes might be painted red and bear a pennon. The royal color was yellow.
Paumakua passed away at a very old age and was buried at Iao, leaving his titles, meles, and possessions to his son, Haho. However, the change didn't seem to impact Hakalanileo's holdings in Hilo, although it provided some support to his sons in their later conflict with Kaupeepee. Haho was a proud but battle-ready chief who refused to acknowledge the titles of many local nobles. To permanently diminish their status, he established the Aha-alii, or college of chiefs, which included the blue-blooded members of the entire group and remained influential until the early 2000s. For a chief to be recognized by this college of heraldry, he had to trace his lineage back to an ancestor of unquestioned nobility. Once his rank was formally established, no circumstance, whether in war or peace, could take it away from him. There were different levels of rank and [__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]tabu within the Aha-alii, and everyone received the respect their rank afforded them, regardless of their material situation. No chief could claim a higher rank than their lineage allowed; even if they married a higher-ranking chiefess, their children could only inherit the status of their mother. The Aha-alii had its own language that was not understood by the common people and it was changed whenever it became known to the makaainana. It was their right on all occasions to wear symbols of their rank, such as the feather wreath (lei-hulu), feather cape (aha-ula), and ivory clasp (palaoa); their canoes could be painted red and carry a pennon. The royal color was yellow.
Although Kaupeepee was of the undoubted blood of Nanaula, and would not have been denied admission to the Aha-alii, he treated with contempt the institution of nobility founded by Haho, declaring that the blood of the founder himself was ennobled only through the thefts of his low-born grandfather. This was doubtless correct; but Kaupeepee’s hatred of the southern invaders would not allow him to be just, even to their ancestors.
Although Kaupeepee was definitely of the Nanaula bloodline and could have easily been accepted into the Aha-alii, he dismissed the noble institution created by Haho, claiming that the blood of the founder was only elevated due to the thievery of his low-born grandfather. This was probably true; however, Kaupeepee’s hatred for the southern invaders prevented him from being fair, even to their ancestors.
Such was the condition of affairs when the sons of Hina began to prepare for their expedition against Haupu. They sent emissaries to Oahu and Maui, and were promised substantial co-operation by the leading chiefs of those islands, the most of whom had suffered from the raids of the scourge of Molokai. They collected a mighty fleet of canoes and a force of six thousand warriors. As many more were promised from Oahu and Maui, which, were Keoloewa’s permission obtained, would be landed at Molokai to operate in conjunction with the army from Hawaii.
The situation was like this when the sons of Hina started getting ready for their campaign against Haupu. They sent messengers to Oahu and Maui and received strong support from the top chiefs of those islands, most of whom had been affected by the raids from the threat of Molokai. They gathered a huge fleet of canoes and a force of six thousand fighters. Many more were promised from Oahu and Maui, who, if they got Keoloewa's permission, would land at Molokai to work alongside the army from Hawaii.
As an attack on Haupu from the sea side was not considered practicable, even with the overwhelming force that was being organized against it, messengers were despatched to Molokai to prevail upon Keoloewa to permit a portion of the united armies to land on the south side of the island and assault the fortress from the mountain. His sympathies were with his brother, and he hesitated; but when he learned of the formidable force organizing for the reduction of Haupu, he appreciated that he was unable to successfully oppose the movement, and, with the assurance that his subjects would be neither disturbed nor despoiled [86]of their property during the conflict, and that the invading armies would be withdrawn from the island at the end of the campaign against Haupu, he consented to the landing. Had he known the real motive of the assault he would have advised his brother to surrender his fair prisoner and save both from possible ruin; but, conceiving that Kaupeepee’s depredations had become unendurable, and that the chiefs of the great islands had at length united to crush him, for his own safety he felt compelled to leave him to his fate.
As an attack on Haupu from the sea wasn’t seen as feasible, even with the overwhelming force being gathered against it, messengers were sent to Molokai to convince Keoloewa to allow part of the united armies to land on the south side of the island and attack the fortress from the mountain. He sympathized with his brother and hesitated, but when he found out about the strong force assembling to take down Haupu, he realized he couldn’t effectively oppose the movement. With the assurance that his people wouldn’t be disturbed or have their property taken during the conflict, and that the invading armies would leave the island after the campaign against Haupu, he agreed to the landing. If he had known the real reason for the attack, he would have advised his brother to surrender his fair prisoner to avoid possible disaster for both of them; however, believing that Kaupeepee’s raids had become unbearable and that the chiefs of the major islands had finally united to defeat him, he felt he had no choice but to leave his brother to his fate. [__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]
This resolution accorded with the advice of Kaupeepee. Many days before his faithful kaula had told him of the approaching invasion, of the combination of chiefs against him, and the doubtful result of the struggle; and before the messengers reached his brother he had gone to and advised him to offer no opposition to the landing of his enemies on the island. “Opposition would be useless,” argued Kaupeepee, “for my enemies are coming in great force. I have slain them and blasted their lands, and single-handed will meet the consequences. Do not embroil yourself with me, but save to our blood the possessions of our fathers.”
This decision matched Kaupeepee's advice. Many days before, his loyal kaula had warned him about the upcoming invasion, the alliance of chiefs against him, and the uncertain outcome of the battle; and before the messengers got to his brother, he had gone to him and suggested that he shouldn’t resist the enemies landing on the island. “Resisting would be pointless,” Kaupeepee argued, “because my enemies are coming in overwhelming numbers. I've defeated them and destroyed their lands, and I'll face the consequences alone. Don’t get dragged into this with me; instead, protect our inheritance from our ancestors.”
“Perhaps you are right,” said Keoloewa; “but why not abandon Haupu and save yourself, if you are not able to hold it?”
“Maybe you’re right,” said Keoloewa; “but why not give up Haupu and save yourself if you can’t keep it?”
“Never!” exclaimed Kaupeepee. “For more than twenty years its walls have stood between me and my enemies, and I will not desert them now. I have a thousand brave men who will triumph or die with me. Should Haupu be taken, go and count the corpses around its walls, and you will not blush to see how a son of Kamauaua died!”
“Never!” shouted Kaupeepee. “For over twenty years, its walls have protected me from my enemies, and I won’t abandon them now. I have a thousand fearless men who will either win or die with me. If Haupu falls, go and count the bodies around its walls, and you won’t be ashamed to see how a son of Kamauaua fought!”
“So let the will of the gods be done!” replied the brother. “But we may not meet again.”
“So let the will of the gods be done!” replied the brother. “But we might not see each other again.”
“True,” returned Kaupeepee, with a strange smile—“true, my good brother, for my sepulchre at Haupu needs ornamenting before the mourners come.”
“True,” replied Kaupeepee, with a strange smile—“true, my dear brother, because my tomb at Haupu needs decoration before the mourners arrive.”
“In my name take anything required for your defence,” said Keoloewa, still holding the hand of his brother, as if reluctant to part with him; “my heart, if not my arm, will be with you!”
“In my name, take whatever you need to defend yourself,” said Keoloewa, still holding his brother's hand, as if he didn’t want to let go; “my heart, if not my arm, will be with you!”
“We shall be well prepared,” were the words of Kaupeepee at parting; and before he reached the top of the pali on his return to Haupu, the messengers from Hawaii landed at Kalaupapa. [87]
“We will be well prepared,” said Kaupeepee as they parted; and before he got to the top of the pali on his way back to Haupu, the messengers from Hawaii arrived at Kalaupapa. [__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]
With this concession from Keoloewa the arrangements for the campaign were speedily made. The main body of the united forces was to concentrate at Kaunakakai, on the north side of the island, and move under the supreme leadership of Niheu, while a large detachment, embracing the best seamen of the several quotas, was to blockade the sea-entrances to Haupu, destroy the canoes of the fortress to prevent escape or succor, and co-operate generally with the land forces. This dangerous service was entrusted to the command of Kana.
With this concession from Keoloewa, the preparations for the campaign were quickly arranged. The main group of the united forces was set to gather at Kaunakakai, on the north side of the island, and move under the overall leadership of Niheu. Meanwhile, a large team, including the best sailors from the different groups, was assigned to block the sea entrances to Haupu, destroy the canoes of the fortress to prevent escape or support, and work together with the land forces. This risky task was given to Kana to lead.
At the appointed time the Hawaiian army set sail for Molokai in a fleet of over twelve hundred canoes, many of them double, and carrying a large supply of provisions. The assistance of the gods had been invoked with many sacrifices, and the omens had been favorable. In one of the large double canoes was Uli. Her form was bent with age, and her hair, white as foam, covered her shoulders like a mantle. In youth she was noted for her stateliness and beauty; but age and care had destroyed all traces of her early comeliness, and her wrinkled face, and black eyes glistening through the rifts of her long, white hair, gave her the appearance of one who dealt with things to be feared. She was surrounded with charms and images, and before her, on a stone-bordered hearth of earth, burned a continual fire, into which she at intervals threw gums and oily mixtures, emitting clouds of incense. Her canoe followed that of the sons of Hina, with their priest and war-god, and red pennon at the masthead; and as the fleet swept out into the ocean, with thousands of oars in the waves and thousands of spears in the air, Uli rose to her feet and began a wild war-chant, which was taken up by the following hosts and borne far over the waters.
At the scheduled time, the Hawaiian army set off for Molokai in a fleet of over twelve hundred canoes, many of which were double-hulled, carrying a substantial supply of provisions. They called upon the gods for help through numerous sacrifices, and the signs had been promising. In one of the large double canoes sat Uli. Her body was hunched with age, and her hair, white as foam, draped over her shoulders like a cloak. In her youth, she was known for her grace and beauty; however, the passage of time and worry had erased all traces of her former attractiveness. Her wrinkled face and black eyes shone through the strands of her long, white hair, giving her a look of someone who dealt with the ominous. She was surrounded by charms and images, and before her, on a stone-bordered hearth made of earth, a constant fire burned, into which she occasionally tossed resins and oily mixtures that sent up clouds of incense. Her canoe trailed behind that of the sons of Hina, along with their priest and war-god, and a red pennant fluttered at the masthead; as the fleet glided into the ocean, with thousands of oars striking the water and thousands of spears raised in the air, Uli rose to her feet and began a fierce war chant, which was picked up by the other warriors and carried far across the waters.
The day following a number of expeditions left various openings on the coasts of Oahu and Maui—none of them approaching the Hawaiian army in strength, but together adding an aggregate of nine hundred canoes of all sizes and about four thousand warriors to the invading force. All of them reached the landing at Kaunakakai on the day appointed for their arrival, and Niheu found himself in command of ten thousand warriors and over two thousand canoes. No such number of spears was ever before seen massed on Molokai; but the people had been assured that they would not be injured either in person or property so long as they remained peaceful, and the terms of the [88]agreement with Keoloewa were faithfully observed. Among the invaders the people found many friends and relatives, for intercourse between the islands at that time was free and frequent; and although their sympathies were with Kaupeepee, they soon came to regard the projected capture of Haupu as a great game of konane, played by agreement between two champions, during which the spectators were to remain silent and make no suggestions.
The day after several expeditions, various landings were made on the coasts of Oahu and Maui—none strong enough to challenge the Hawaiian army, but together they brought a total of nine hundred canoes of all sizes and about four thousand warriors to the invading force. All of them arrived at the landing at Kaunakakai on the day they were scheduled to, and Niheu found himself in command of ten thousand warriors and over two thousand canoes. Such a number of spears had never been seen assembled on Molokai before; however, the people had been assured that they would not be harmed in person or property as long as they remained peaceful, and the terms of the [__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__] agreement with Keoloewa were faithfully kept. Among the invaders, the people encountered many friends and relatives, as communication between the islands was open and frequent at that time; and although their loyalties lay with Kaupeepee, they soon saw the planned capture of Haupu as an exciting game of konane, played as a contest between two champions, with spectators expected to remain silent and offer no suggestions.
The tents of the chiefs, around which were encamped their respective followers, extended along the shore for more than two miles, while the beach for a greater distance was fringed with canoes, many of the larger painted red and bearing gaudy pennons of stout kapa. As plundering had been forbidden, provisions of dried fish, potatoes, cocoanuts, taro, and live pigs and fowls had been brought in considerable quantities in extra canoes; but as the duration of the campaign could only be surmised, rolls of kapa and matting, shell wreaths, ivory, feather capes, calabashes, mechanical tools, ornaments, and extra arms were also brought, to be fairly exchanged from time to time for such supplies as might be wanted.
The chiefs' tents, surrounded by their followers, stretched along the shore for over two miles, while the beach was lined with canoes, many of them larger ones painted red and adorned with colorful pennants made of strong kapa. Because plundering was not allowed, they had brought in a good amount of supplies like dried fish, potatoes, coconuts, taro, and live pigs and chickens in extra canoes. However, since the length of the campaign was uncertain, they also brought rolls of kapa and matting, shell necklaces, ivory, feather capes, bowls, tools, decorations, and spare weapons to trade from time to time for any supplies they might need.
IV.
Everything being in readiness for an advance upon the stronghold of Kaupeepee, a war-council of the assembled chiefs was called. Among them were several who were well informed concerning the approaches to Haupu, and the main features of the campaign were arranged without discussion. Signals and other means of communication between the two divisions having been agreed upon, the next morning a detachment of two thousand men, occupying five hundred canoes, under the command of Kana, moved around the island to blockade the entrances to Haupu, and immediately after the main army, leaving a strong reserve to guard the canoes and look after supplies, broke camp and took up its line of march across the island to the mountains back of the fortress. The trails were rough, but at sunrise the next morning the land division, stretched along the summit of the hills two miles back of Haupu, looked down and saw the fleet of Kana drawn like a broad, black line around the ocean entrances to the doomed stronghold. [89]
Everything was ready for an advance on the stronghold of Kaupeepee, so a war council of the gathered chiefs was called. Among them were several who were knowledgeable about the routes to Haupu, and the main aspects of the campaign were arranged without discussion. They agreed on signals and other communication methods between the two divisions. The next morning, a group of two thousand men in five hundred canoes, led by Kana, moved around the island to block the entrances to Haupu. Shortly after, the main army, leaving a strong reserve to guard the canoes and handle supplies, broke camp and started its march across the island toward the mountains behind the fortress. The trails were rough, but at sunrise the next morning, the land division, spread along the ridge of the hills two miles behind Haupu, looked down and saw Kana's fleet lined up like a broad, black line around the ocean entrances to the doomed stronghold. [__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]
Meantime Kaupeepee had not been idle. Every movement of the enemy had been watched; and when word came to him that the shores of Kaunakakai were so crowded with warriors that the number could not be told, he grimly answered: “Then will our spears be less likely to miss!”
Meantime, Kaupeepee had been busy. He had kept an eye on every move the enemy made; and when he received word that the shores of Kaunakakai were so packed with warriors that their numbers couldn't even be counted, he replied grimly, "Then our spears are less likely to miss!"
The walls of the fortress had been strengthened and replenished with missiles; large quantities of provisions had been secured, and sheds of ample space were finally erected for the collection of rain-water, should communication be interrupted with the streams in the gulches below. Before the enemy had reached positions completely cutting off retreat from the fortress, Kaupeepee had called his warriors together and thus addressed them:
The fortress walls had been reinforced and stocked with missiles; a large supply of food had been secured, and spacious sheds were finally built to collect rainwater, in case communication with the streams in the nearby valleys was cut off. Before the enemy reached positions that completely blocked any escape from the fortress, Kaupeepee gathered his warriors and spoke to them:
“Warriors and friends!—for all, indeed, are warriors and friends in Haupu!—for years you have shared in the dangers of Kaupeepee and have never disobeyed him. Listen now to his words, and heed them well. A mighty army is about to surround Haupu by land and sea. It already blackens the shores of Kaunakakai, and will soon be thundering at our gates. The fight will be long and desperate, and may end in defeat and death to the most or all of us. I cannot order, cannot even ask you to face such peril for my sake. The gates are open. Let all leave with my good-will whose lives are precious to them. Let your acts answer at once, for the enemy is approaching and no time can be lost!”
"Warriors and friends!—because everyone here is both a warrior and a friend in Haupu!—for years, you’ve faced the dangers of Kaupeepee and have always obeyed him. Pay attention to his words and take them seriously. A huge army is about to surround Haupu by land and sea. It’s already darkening the shores of Kaunakakai and will soon be pounding at our gates. The battle will be long and fierce, and it might lead to defeat and death for many or even all of us. I can't order you, nor can I even ask you to face such danger for my sake. The gates are open. Anyone whose life is precious to them can leave with my blessing. Let your actions speak right away, because the enemy is coming and there’s no time to waste!"
For a moment not a warrior of the thousand present moved. All stood staring at their chief and wondering that he should doubt. Then a confused hum of voices, rising louder and louder, swelled into a united shout of “Close the gates!” and Kaupeepee was answered. And a braver answer was never given than that which came from the stout hearts and unblanched lips of the thousand fearless defenders of Haupu. The gates were closed, with not a single warrior missing, and the fortress was soon environed with its enemies.
For a moment, not one of the thousand warriors present moved. They all stood staring at their leader, wondering why he had any doubts. Then, a confused murmur of voices grew louder and transformed into a unified shout of “Close the gates!” and Kaupeepee had his answer. There was never a braver response than that which came from the brave hearts and determined lips of the thousand fearless defenders of Haupu. The gates were closed, with not a single warrior left behind, and soon the fortress was surrounded by its enemies.
Halting his army on the summit of the mountains overlooking Haupu, Niheu despatched a messenger to the fortress with a signal of peace, to ascertain with certainty whether Hina was a prisoner there, and, if so, to demand the surrender of the captive. The messenger returned in safety, bearing this message from Kaupeepee: “Hina is within the walls of Haupu. Come with arms in your hands and take her!” [90]
Halting his army at the top of the mountains overlooking Haupu, Niheu sent a messenger to the fortress with a signal of peace to find out for sure if Hina was a prisoner there, and if she was, to demand her release. The messenger returned safely with this message from Kaupeepee: “Hina is inside the walls of Haupu. Come with your weapons and take her!” [__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]
Communication was established with the fleet in front of Haupu, and Kana was advised to enter the gulches in force the next morning, destroy the canoes of the fortress, and maintain a footing there, if possible, while a strong division of the land forces would move down and draw attention to the rear defences by taking a position within attacking distance.
Communication was set up with the fleet near Haupu, and Kana was told to enter the gulches with full force the next morning, destroy the canoes of the fortress, and hold that position if possible, while a strong unit of the ground forces would move down and divert attention from the rear defenses by taking a position within striking distance.
In pursuance of this plan, early next morning Niheu despatched a formidable force down the mountain in the rear of Haupu, with orders to menace but not to assault the defences. Arriving near the walls, a little skirmishing ensued, when the detachment took a position beyond the reach of the slingers, and began the construction of a stone wall across the ridge.
In line with this plan, early the next morning, Niheu sent a strong group down the mountain behind Haupu, with orders to threaten but not attack the defenses. When they arrived near the walls, a bit of fighting broke out, after which the group took a position out of the slingers' range and started building a stone wall across the ridge.
Meantime Kana’s fleet of canoes, which had been hovering nearer and nearer the walls of Haupu since daylight, with a wild battle-cry from the warriors crowding them suddenly dashed through the surf, and partially succeeded in effecting a landing in one of the gulches flanking the fortress. So rapid had been the movement, and so thoroughly had the attention of the besieged been engrossed with the diversion from the mountains, that a division of the assaulting party managed to reach the canoes of the fortress, and another to secure a lodgment among the rocks on the opposite side of the gulch, before meeting with serious opposition. The score or two of warriors left to guard the canoes of the fortress were quickly overpowered and slaughtered, and then the work of destruction began. With loose rocks and heavy stone hammers the canoes were being hastily broken in pieces, including the great war-barge of Kaupeepee, when from the walls above the destroyers was precipitated a bewildering and murderous avalanche of rocks of all sizes and heavy sections of tree-trunks. As the missiles rolled and bounded down the steep declivity, sweeping it at almost the same moment for two hundred yards or more in length, the ground trembled as with an earthquake, and the gorge was filled with a dense cloud of dust.
Meanwhile, Kana’s fleet of canoes, which had been getting closer to the walls of Haupu since daybreak, suddenly surged through the surf, accompanied by the fierce battle cries of the warriors crowding them. They managed to partially land in one of the gulches next to the fortress. The movement was so quick and the attention of those inside the fortress was so focused on the diversion from the mountains that part of the attacking group reached the fortress’s canoes, while another group secured a position among the rocks on the other side of the gulch before encountering serious resistance. The small number of warriors left to guard the fortress canoes were swiftly overwhelmed and killed, and then the destruction began. Using loose rocks and heavy stone hammers, they hastily smashed the canoes, including Kaupeepee's large war-barge, when suddenly an overwhelming avalanche of rocks of all sizes and heavy tree trunks came crashing down from above. As the projectiles rolled and tumbled down the steep slope, covering more than two hundred yards in length almost simultaneously, the ground shook like an earthquake, filling the gorge with a thick cloud of dust.
The thunder of the avalanche ceased, and in the awful silence that succeeded Kaupeepee, at the head of two hundred warriors, dashed down the narrow path leading from the middle terrace to finish the dreadful work with spear, knife and battle-axe. The sight was appalling, even to the chief of Haupu. The gulch was choked with the bodies of the dying and the dead. Panic-stricken, [91]those posted on the opposite hillside had abandoned their only place of safety, and perished in large numbers in attempting to reach their canoes. The few left alive and able to retreat were wildly struggling to escape seaward from the gulch in such canoes of their wrecked fleet as would still float, or by plunging desperately into the surf.
The noise of the avalanche stopped, and in the terrible silence that followed, Kaupeepee, at the front of two hundred warriors, raced down the narrow path from the middle terrace to finish the horrifying task with spears, knives, and battle-axes. The scene was shocking, even for the chief of Haupu. The gulch was filled with the bodies of the dying and the dead. In a state of panic, [__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__] those positioned on the opposite hillside had left their only safe spot and were killed in large numbers while trying to reach their canoes. The few who were still alive and able to escape were desperately trying to get out to sea from the gulch in whatever canoes of their destroyed fleet could still float, or by jumping into the surf.
With exultant shouts Kaupeepee and his warriors sprang over their dead and dying enemies and swept down upon the unarmed and escaping remnant of the invaders. Although a considerable reserve of canoes came to their rescue from without, protected from assault from above by the presence of Kaupeepee and his party, the most of the fugitives would have been cut off but for the extraordinary efforts of Kana, who led the attacking party, but miraculously escaped unhurt. In the surf, in the deep entrance to the gulch, everywhere he moved around with his head and shoulders above the water. He assisted the canoes through the breakers, rescued exhausted and drowning swimmers, and from the bottom of the ocean reached down and gathered huge rocks, which he hurled at intervals at Kaupeepee’s warriors to keep them in check. These wonderful exploits awed the attacking party, and greater still was their astonishment when they saw the strange being finally walk through the deep waters, erect and with his head and breast exposed, and step into a canoe quite half a mile from the shore. Turning to his warriors, with these words Kaupeepee answered their looks of inquiry: “He is Kana. I have heard of him. I am glad he escaped.”
With triumphant shouts, Kaupeepee and his warriors charged over their dead and wounded enemies and rushed down on the unarmed and fleeing survivors of the invaders. Even though a significant number of canoes came to their aid from outside, there's no doubt that most of the fugitives would have been trapped if it weren't for the exceptional efforts of Kana, who led the attacking group and somehow emerged unscathed. In the surf, at the deep entrance to the gulch, he moved around with his head and shoulders above the water. He helped the canoes through the waves, rescued tired and drowning swimmers, and from the ocean floor, he reached down and grabbed large rocks, which he periodically threw at Kaupeepee’s warriors to keep them at bay. These incredible feats amazed the attacking group, and their astonishment grew when they saw the unusual figure finally walk through the deep water, standing tall with his head and chest exposed, and step into a canoe nearly half a mile from the shore. Turning to his warriors, Kaupeepee replied to their puzzled looks: “He is Kana. I've heard of him. I’m glad he made it.”
Kana returned with his shattered fleet and still worsely shattered army to Kaunakakai. As the most of his canoes had been destroyed, Kaupeepee was unable to follow the retreating enemy to sea, but, hearing the shouts of conflict above, at once mounted with his warriors to the fortress, to assist in repelling an attack on the rear wall which had been hastily begun to save, if possible, the sea party from destruction. With Kaupeepee at the front the assault was quickly repulsed, the enemy retiring in confusion behind the lines of defence from which the advance had been made.
Kana returned with his broken fleet and an even more broken army to Kaunakakai. Since most of his canoes had been destroyed, Kaupeepee couldn't follow the retreating enemy to the sea. However, hearing the sounds of battle above, he quickly mounted with his warriors to the fortress to help fend off an attack on the rear wall, which had been hastily initiated to try to save the sea party from destruction. With Kaupeepee leading the charge, the attack was quickly pushed back, and the enemy retreated in confusion behind the lines of defense from which they had advanced.
The wounded in the gulch were despatched, six of the least injured being reserved for sacrifice, and the night following the fortress of Haupu was ablaze with savage joy. As the first-fruits of the victories of the day, the six wounded prisoners were slain [92]with clubs and laid upon the altar of the heiau as offerings to the gods, and chants of defiance were sent through the night air to the discomfited enemy beyond the walls.
The wounded in the ravine were dealt with, with six of the least injured kept for sacrifice, and the night afterward, the fortress of Haupu blazed with wild celebration. As the first rewards of the day's victories, the six wounded prisoners were killed [__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]with clubs and placed on the altar of the heiau as offerings to the gods, while chants of defiance echoed through the night air to the defeated enemy beyond the walls.
These disasters did not dishearten Niheu. The canoes of the fortress had been destroyed, and that was something of a compensation for the loss of nearly two thousand of his best warriors and a considerable part of his fleet. Plans for further assaults from the sea were abandoned, and a regular siege, with a final entrance by the rear wall, was suggested and in the end agreed to by the chiefs in council.
These disasters didn’t discourage Niheu. The fortress’s canoes were destroyed, which somewhat made up for the loss of almost two thousand of his best warriors and a significant part of his fleet. Plans for more attacks from the sea were called off, and a standard siege, culminating in an entry through the back wall, was proposed and ultimately accepted by the chiefs in council.
Lines of pickets were accordingly stationed along the summits of the mountains flanking the fortress, in order to prevent the entrance into it of reinforcements or supplies, and the main body of the attacking force was moved down and placed in positions within slinging distance of the rear wall. This was not done without loss, for the wall was manned with expert slingers; but in less than a week the besiegers had advanced their main line of wooden defences within a hundred paces of the rear bulwark of the fortress and were daily gaining ground.
Lines of guards were set up along the tops of the mountains next to the fortress to block any reinforcements or supplies from getting in. The main part of the attacking force was moved down and positioned within slinging distance of the back wall. This came at a cost, as the wall was defended by skilled slingers; however, in less than a week, the besiegers had moved their main line of wooden defenses to within a hundred paces of the fortress's rear wall and were steadily making progress.
This movable line of assault and defence was a device as ingenious as it was effective. Timbers twenty feet in length, or corresponding with the height of the wall, were firmly corded together side by side until they stretched across the narrow summit leading to the fortress. To the top of each fourth or fifth timber was lashed a movable brace thirty feet in length, and then the wooden wall was raised into the air nearly erect, and securely held in that position by its line of supporting braces. It was a formidable-looking structure. Against it the missiles of the besieged fell harmless, and behind it the besiegers worked in safety.
This movable line of attack and defense was both clever and effective. Long wooden beams, twenty feet in length, matching the height of the wall, were tightly bound together side by side until they spanned the narrow top leading to the fortress. A movable brace, thirty feet long, was tied to the top of every fourth or fifth beam, and then the wooden wall was lifted nearly upright and securely held in place by a series of supporting braces. It was an intimidating structure. The projectiles from the defenders fell uselessly against it, while those attacking worked safely behind it.
Section by section and foot by foot this moving line of timber was advanced, until the warriors on the wall could almost touch it with their spears. Several desperate sorties, to destroy or prostrate it, had been made, but nothing beyond the cutting of a few of the lower fastenings had been achieved; and the defenders of Haupu, with tightened grasp of their weapons, grimly awaited the final assault, which they felt would not long be delayed. Day after day, night after night, they watched; but the wooden wall did not move, and they could only guess at what was going on behind it. [93]
Section by section and foot by foot, this moving line of timber was pushed forward, until the warriors on the wall could nearly touch it with their spears. Several desperate attempts to destroy or knock it down had been made, but they only managed to cut a few of the lower fastenings; and the defenders of Haupu, with a firm grip on their weapons, grimly awaited the final attack, which they knew wouldn't be long in coming. Day after day, night after night, they kept watch; but the wooden wall remained still, and they could only speculate about what was happening behind it. [__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]
Finally a night of inky darkness came—a night “as dark as the farthest confines of Po”—bringing with it a storm of wind and rain. In the midst of the storm the wooden wall began to move, but so noiselessly that the advance was not perceived by the fortress sentinels. Midnight came and went; the storm continued, and nearer and nearer to the wall of stone was crowded the wall of timber. Just as coming day began to streak the east the bases of the two walls came together, the backward inclination of both leaving them a few feet apart at their tops. Hundreds of men then laid hold of the braces, and in a moment the wooden wall was shoved over and stayed against the other.
Finally, a night of deep darkness arrived—a night “as dark as the farthest corners of Po”—bringing a storm of wind and rain. In the middle of the storm, the wooden wall started to move so quietly that the fortress guards didn’t notice. Midnight came and went; the storm raged on, and the wooden wall inched closer to the stone wall. Just as dawn began to light up the east, the bases of the two walls clashed, their backward angle leaving a gap of a few feet at the top. Hundreds of men then grabbed the braces, and in an instant, the wooden wall was pushed over and leaned against the other.
The alarm was given within, and warriors from all parts of the enclosure sprang toward the menaced wall. But the movement of their enemies was not less prompt. Up the braces they swarmed in such numbers that the few who had succeeded in reaching the top of the wall from within were hurled from it, and after them poured a cataract of spears against which the opposing force was powerless. The huge stone was rolled back, the gate was opened, and soon the upper terrace was cleared and five thousand warriors, led by Niheu in person, were sweeping down to complete their work of slaughter.
The alarm sounded from inside, and fighters from all corners of the enclosure rushed to the threatened wall. But their enemies were just as quick to respond. They swarmed up the braces in such numbers that the few who had managed to reach the top from the inside were thrown off, followed by a flood of spears that left the opposing force helpless. The massive stone was rolled back, the gate swung open, and soon the upper terrace was cleared, with five thousand warriors, led by Niheu himself, charging down to finish their deadly mission.
But their victory was not to be cheaply purchased. They had slain two or three hundred on the wall and around the gate, but thrice as many more, under the desperate leadership of Kaupeepee, were stretched like a wall across the middle terrace, with a resolution to contest every pace of the ground with their lives. They might have escaped, perhaps, down the paths leading from that terrace to the gulches; but they preferred to die, as they had for years lived, in defence of Haupu.
But their victory didn't come easy. They had killed two or three hundred on the wall and around the gate, but three times as many more, under the desperate leadership of Kaupeepee, were lined up like a wall across the middle terrace, determined to fight for every inch of ground with their lives. They might have escaped, maybe, down the paths from that terrace to the ravines; but they chose to die, just as they had lived for years, defending Haupu.
Down the terrace swept the victorious horde in the gray dawn of the morning. Niheu vainly tried to hold his warriors in check, for he knew the main body of the fortress force was still before him, and would have advanced with prudence; but the voices of the leaders were drowned in the battle-shouts of the surging throng, which in a few minutes struck Kaupeepee’s wall of spears and battle-axes, and rolled back like a storm-wave broken against the front of Haupu. But the check was only momentary, for immediately behind the shattered column was a forest of advancing spears, and with a wild tumult of shouts and [94]clashing weapons the entire force was precipitated upon Kaupeepee’s thin but resolute lines of defence.
Down the terrace charged the victorious crowd in the gray morning light. Niheu struggled to hold his warriors back, knowing that the main fortress force was still in front of him and would have moved forward cautiously; but the leaders' voices were drowned out by the battle cries of the surging mass, which within minutes collided with Kaupeepee’s wall of spears and battle-axes and recoiled like a storm wave breaking against the front of Haupu. However, the setback was only temporary, as right behind the shattered column was a forest of advancing spears, and with a wild uproar of shouts and clashing weapons, the entire force surged forward against Kaupeepee’s thin but determined lines of defense.
The slaughter was frightful; but the unequal conflict could have but one result. Kaupeepee and the fifty or less of his followers left standing were crowded, fighting step by step, into the lower terrace, and thence to the heiau, and finally to the temple as a last place of defence. There the struggle was brief. The roof of the temple was fired, and as Kaupeepee and the last of his devoted band sprang from the blazing building to die at the throats of their enemies they were struck down with their javelins in the air. A spear penetrated the breast of Kaupeepee. As a last act he poised his ihe to hurl at a helmeted chief who had just struggled to the front. The chief was Niheu. By his dress or face, which bore a resemblance to the features of Hina, Kaupeepee must have recognized him. He looked, but his arm did not move. “Not for your sake, but for hers!” exclaimed the dying warrior, dropping his weapon to the earth and falling lifeless beside it.
The slaughter was horrific, but the uneven battle could only end in one way. Kaupeepee and the fewer than fifty followers who were still standing were pushed back step by step into the lower terrace, then to the heiau, and finally to the temple as their last stand. There, the fight was short. The roof of the temple was set on fire, and as Kaupeepee and the last of his loyal band jumped from the burning building to take down their enemies, they were struck down with javelins in mid-air. A spear pierced Kaupeepee's chest. In a final act, he raised his ihe to throw at a helmeted chief who had just pushed his way to the front. The chief was Niheu. By his clothes or his face, which resembled features of Hina, Kaupeepee must have recognized him. He looked, but his arm did not move. “Not for your sake, but for hers!” cried the dying warrior, dropping his weapon to the ground and collapsing lifeless beside it.
Not one of the defenders of Haupu escaped, but more than one-half of Niheu’s army perished in the various assaults upon the fortress. Hina was found uninjured, and, while there was great joy to her in the embrace of her sons and aged mother, she wept over the death of Kaupeepee, who with his love had made light her long imprisonment.
Not a single defender of Haupu got away, but over half of Niheu’s army died in the different attacks on the fortress. Hina was found unharmed, and while she felt immense joy in the embrace of her sons and elderly mother, she cried for the death of Kaupeepee, who had lightened her long imprisonment with his love.
The body of Kaupeepee was given to Keoloewa for interment, as were also the remains of Moi, who was among the last to fall. The walls of Haupu were levelled, never to be raised again, and Hina returned to her husband in Hilo, after a separation of nearly eighteen years, thus bringing to a close one of the most romantic legends of early Hawaiian chivalry. [95]
The body of Kaupeepee was handed over to Keoloewa for burial, along with the remains of Moi, who was one of the last to die. The walls of Haupu were destroyed, never to be rebuilt, and Hina went back to her husband in Hilo after nearly eighteen years apart, marking the end of one of the most romantic legends of early Hawaiian honor. [__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]
The Royal Hunchback.
[96]
[__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]
CHARACTERS.
- Kanipahu, king of Hawaii.
- Kalapana, son of Kanipahu.
- Kamaole, a usurper of the throne, chief of Kau.
- Iola, sister of Kamaiole.
- Makea, daughter of Iola.
- Waikuku Beach, a military chief, abductor of Iola.
- Nanoa, a chief in the royal household.
[97]
[__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]
THE ROYAL HUNCHBACK.
THE ROYAL HUNCHBACK.
THE LEGEND OF KANIPAHU, THE GRANDSON OF PILI.
THE LEGEND OF KANIPAHU, THE GRANDSON OF PILI.
I.
About the period of A.D. 1160 Kanipahu was the nominal sovereign of the island of Hawaii. He was the grandson of Pili, who near the close of the previous century came from Samoa, at the solicitation of the high-priest Paao, to assume the moiship left vacant by the death of Kapawa, whose grandfather was probably the first of the southern chiefs who came to the Hawaiian group during the important migratory movements of the eleventh and twelfth centuries.
About the period of CE 1160, Kanipahu was the official ruler of the island of Hawaii. He was the grandson of Pili, who, near the end of the previous century, came from Samoa at the request of the high priest Paao to take on the moiship that was left empty after the death of Kapawa, whose grandfather was likely the first of the southern chiefs to arrive in the Hawaiian archipelago during the significant migrations of the eleventh and twelfth centuries.
Although the sovereignty of the entire island was claimed by the Pili family, disturbances were frequent in the time of Kanipahu, and a few of the native chiefs of the old stock of Nanaula, which held sway in the group for nearly six centuries, refused to yield allegiance to the new dynasty. To strengthen his power and placate the native chiefs and people, Kanipahu took to wife Hualani, the fifth in descent from Maweke, of the Nanaula line, and subsequently Alaikaua, who was probably of the same native strain.
Although the Pili family claimed sovereignty over the entire island, there were frequent disturbances during Kanipahu's time. Some of the native chiefs from the old Nanaula lineage, which had dominated the group for nearly six centuries, refused to show loyalty to the new dynasty. To strengthen his power and gain the support of the native chiefs and people, Kanipahu married Hualani, who was the fifth descendant of Maweke from the Nanaula line, and later Alaikaua, who was likely of the same native heritage.
The makaainana, or common people, however, seem to have been better satisfied with their new rulers than were their former chiefs who had been supplanted in authority, and it was therefore with difficulty that they could be aroused to a resistance to political conditions which imposed upon them no hardships which they had not borne under their old rulers, and no responsibilities with which they were not already familiar. And, besides, the new-comers from the south had introduced new laws, new customs and new products of the soil, as well as new gods and new forms of worship. They had brought with them the kaeke, or sacred drum, and puloulou, or inviolable tabu staff, crowned with balls of white or black kapa. They had also instituted the title of moi, or supreme sovereign, whereas the several islands before had been ruled by scores of independent chiefs, [98]each claiming and holding as large a district as he was able to defend. They had established the Aha-alii, or college of chiefs, through which the rank of every noble might find recognition, and be perpetuated in his family. They had constructed grander heiaus, or temples, and shut the populace from the observance of many of their religious ceremonies. The tabus of the chiefs and priests had been enlarged and rendered more strict, and the priesthood had become more powerful and independent. The persons of the mois and high chiefs had become more sacred, and they exercised their functions with increased display and ostentation.
The makaainana, or common people, seem to have been more content with their new rulers than the previous chiefs who had lost their power. Consequently, it was hard to motivate them to resist political conditions that didn’t impose any hardships beyond what they had already experienced under their old rulers, and they didn’t face any new responsibilities. Additionally, the newcomers from the south brought new laws, customs, crops, as well as new gods and forms of worship. They introduced the kaeke, or sacred drum, and the puloulou, or inviolable tabu staff, topped with balls of white or black kapa. They also established the title of moi, or supreme ruler, whereas before, the various islands were governed by many independent chiefs, [__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]each claiming a territory as large as they could defend. They created the Aha-alii, or council of chiefs, to recognize and ensure the legacy of every noble in their family. They built grander heiaus, or temples, and restricted the public from participating in many of their religious ceremonies. The tabus of the chiefs and priests became broader and more stringent, and the priesthood gained more power and independence. The persons of the mois and high chiefs became more sacred, and they carried out their duties with increased showiness and flair.
These additional exactions on the part of the new rulers, however, were partially if not wholly compensated for to the laboring masses by the protection brought to them through the political change against the oppressions of their petty chiefs and land-owners; and it is therefore probable that, on the whole, their social and industrial condition was quite as tolerable under the new as under the old or native régime.
These extra demands from the new rulers, however, were partially if not completely offset for the working class by the protection they received from the political change against the abuses of their minor chiefs and landowners; and it’s likely that, overall, their social and economic situation was just as bearable under the new regime as it was under the old one.
Kanipahu resided principally in Kohala, where his grandfather had taken up his abode, and constructed mansions consistent with his sovereign state. And it was there that the high-priest Paao, who brought Pili to the group, established himself and family, after first landing in Puna and erecting to his god the temple of Wahaula, the ruins of which are still seen near the village of Kahawalea. After the arrival of Pili it is probable that Paao removed with him to the more populous district of Kohala, and there remained as his high-priest and adviser. At Puuepa he erected the large heiau of Mookini, the stones for which were passed from hand-to-hand from Niulii, a distance of nine miles—a circumstance indicating the presence of a large population on Hawaii at that time. As it was one of the largest temples in the group—its walls, enclosing an irregular parallelogram, having an aggregate length of 817 feet, with a height of 20 feet, and a breadth of 8 feet at the top—a vast amount of labor must have been required to transport the material over so long and rough a road, with no appliance more effective than human muscle. But the walls are so well built that they are standing to-day, and from a secret crypt in the wall of the south side of the heiau were taken but a few years ago, and are still preserved, two finely-polished stone disks of a [99]diameter of eight or ten inches, which it is not improbable were the two strange idols which tradition says Paao brought with him over the great waters from Upolu, and which were hidden by some faithful kahu or servant of the heiau when the ancient worship of the people was abolished by the second Kamehameha in 1819.
Kanipahu mainly lived in Kohala, where his grandfather had settled and built mansions fit for his royal status. It was there that the high priest Paao, who brought Pili to the group, established himself and his family after first landing in Puna and constructing the temple of Wahaula for his god, the ruins of which can still be seen near the village of Kahawalea. After Pili arrived, it's likely that Paao moved with him to the busier area of Kohala, where he remained as his high priest and advisor. At Puuepa, he built the large heiau of Mookini, with stones passed hand-to-hand from Niulii, a distance of nine miles—showing there was a large population on Hawaii at that time. As one of the largest temples in the group, its walls formed an irregular parallelogram, measuring a total of 817 feet long, 20 feet high, and 8 feet wide at the top; a massive effort must have been made to move the materials over such a long and rough path, relying only on human strength. Nevertheless, the walls are so well built that they still stand today, and from a secret crypt in the wall of the south side of the heiau, two finely polished stone disks, around eight or ten inches in diameter, were taken just a few years ago and are still kept safe. It’s likely these were the two unusual idols that tradition claims Paao brought with him across the ocean from Upolu, which were hidden by a devoted kahu, or servant of the heiau, when the ancient worship was abolished by King Kamehameha II in 1819.
Kanipahu was a just and considerate sovereign, and sought by every peaceful means to harmonize the conflicting interests of the chiefs and strengthen and consolidate his power. To this end, as already stated, he allied himself by marriage to the Nanaula line of chiefs, and attached to his person and household a number of prominent nobles of native lineage. The result was that for some years he ruled in peace, and race jealousies were gradually wearing away, when a circumstance occurred which suddenly terminated the reign of Kanipahu and drove him into exile.
Kanipahu was a fair and thoughtful ruler who tried by all peaceful means to balance the competing interests of the chiefs and boost his power. To achieve this, as mentioned earlier, he formed a marriage alliance with the Nanaula line of chiefs and surrounded himself with several prominent nobles of native descent. As a result, he ruled in peace for several years, and the racial tensions began to fade, when an event occurred that abruptly ended Kanipahu's reign and forced him into exile.
It was a sultry afternoon, near the time of the annual feast of Lono, perhaps in 1172, that Kanipahu, after having despatched the business of the day, was reclining on a couch of mats in the cool shade of a palm-grove within the walled enclosure of the palace grounds—if, indeed, two large wooden and thatched buildings, each a hundred or more feet in length by forty in breadth, with eight or ten smaller houses among the banana growths in the rear, may be called a palace. The grounds were thickly studded with shade and fruit trees, embracing almost every variety of value found on the island. Here and there were shaded walks and vine-wreathed nooks in which rude seats had been constructed; and as the sentinels lounged lazily at the entrance, and the kahus of the king languidly administered to his wants, the scene was a picture of royal power and barbaric comfort peculiar to the Polynesian islands, but scarcely less imposing than the forms and architectural environments of the jarls and princes of northern and central Europe at that period. Each of the personal attendants of the king was of the lesser nobility, and his office was one of honor. Over the head of the drowsing sovereign the paakahili, or kahili-bearer, at brief intervals waved his tuft of painted plumes, while at a respectful distance stood the spittoon-bearer (ipakuha) and head steward (aipuupuu).
It was a hot afternoon, around the time of the annual feast of Lono, probably in 1172, when Kanipahu, after finishing his tasks for the day, was lounging on a mat in the cool shade of a palm grove within the walled area of the palace grounds—if you could call two large wooden and thatched buildings, each over a hundred feet long and forty feet wide, along with eight or ten smaller houses among the banana trees in the back, a palace. The grounds were filled with shade and fruit trees, representing nearly every valuable variety found on the island. There were shaded pathways and vine-covered corners where simple seats had been set up; while the guards relaxed lazily at the entrance, and the king's kahus attended to his needs, the scene looked like a blend of royal authority and primitive luxury unique to the Polynesian islands, yet just as impressive as the residences and surroundings of the jarls and princes of northern and central Europe at that time. Each of the king's personal attendants was from the lesser nobility, and their role was considered honorable. Above the drowsing king, the paakahili, or kahili-bearer, occasionally waved his tuft of painted feathers, while at a respectful distance stood the spittoon-bearer (ipakuha) and head steward (aipuupuu).
The king was suddenly aroused by a tumult at the outer [100]gate. There was a sound of angry voices mingled with a clashing of spears, and immediately after a tall chief, clad in maro, feather cape and helmet, and bearing a stout ihe, or javelin, strode toward the royal mansion, followed by a number of excited chiefs and their retainers. Reaching the palace, the chief turned and faced his clamoring pursuers with a look of defiance. To shed blood there was an offence which no one was bold or reckless enough to commit, and, after one of the number had first been despatched to the king to ascertain his pleasure, the entire party of chiefs repaired to the royal presence, leaving their weapons behind in the hands of the guards who had hurried toward the scene of disturbance.
The king was abruptly awakened by a commotion at the outer [__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__] gate. Angry voices were mixed with the sounds of clashing spears, and right after, a tall chief, wearing a maro, feather cape, and helmet, and holding a sturdy ihe, or javelin, marched toward the royal mansion, followed by a group of anxious chiefs and their followers. When he reached the palace, the chief turned to face his shouting pursuers with a defiant look. Shedding blood was an offense no one was daring or reckless enough to commit, and after one of them was sent to the king to see what he wanted, the whole group of chiefs went to meet him, leaving their weapons in the hands of the guards who had rushed to the scene.

Type of Scenery—on the Road to Kilauea, Hawaii.
Type of Scenery—on the Road to Kilauea, Hawaii.
Bowing low before the king, who had risen to a sitting posture on his couch, the chiefs waited for him to break the silence. Slowly scanning his auditors, all but one of whom he knew and trusted, Kanipahu finally fixed his eyes upon the face of the stranger and quietly said:
Bowing low before the king, who had sat up on his couch, the chiefs waited for him to speak. Slowly looking over the people in front of him, all but one of whom he knew and trusted, Kanipahu finally focused on the face of the stranger and quietly said:
“Your face is strange to me. Who are you, and what brings you here?”
“Your face looks unfamiliar to me. Who are you, and what brings you here?”
“Great chief, I am Kamaiole, a chief of Kau,” was the reply, “and I came to Kohala in search of my sister, Iola, who was stolen and brought here about the close of the last season of rain.”
“Great chief, I am Kamaiole, a chief of Kau,” was the reply, “and I came to Kohala in search of my sister, Iola, who was taken and brought here around the end of last rainy season.”
“Have you found her?” inquired the king.
“Have you found her?” the king asked.
“I have found her,” replied Kamaiole, bowing his head.
“I found her,” Kamaiole replied, bowing his head.
“Who took your sister away from Kau?” resumed the king.
“Who took your sister away from Kau?” the king asked again.
“That man,” said Kamaiole, pointing to one of the chiefs present; “at least, so I presume, since he was seen in Kau about the time of her disappearance, and I found her in his possession here.”
“That man,” said Kamaiole, pointing to one of the chiefs present, “I assume he’s the one because he was seen in Kau around the time she went missing, and I found her with him here.”
The chief designated was a large and well-favored young man, with a palm-tree tattooed upon each of his muscular thighs, and wearing a number of gaudy ornaments around his neck. He was an alii koa, or military chief, without possessions and in the service of the king, to whom he was distantly related. Turning toward him, Kanipahu said:
The designated chief was a tall and attractive young man, with a palm tree tattooed on each of his strong thighs, and wearing several flashy ornaments around his neck. He was an alii koa, or military chief, without any belongings and serving the king, to whom he was distantly related. Turning to him, Kanipahu said:
“Speak, Waikuku, and answer the words of the chief of Kau.”
“Speak, Waikuku, and respond to the words of the chief of Kau.”
Glancing savagely at Kamaiole, Waikuku bowed to the king and replied:
Glancing angrily at Kamaiole, Waikuku bowed to the king and replied:
“It is true that Iola came with me from Kau, where I went [101]to visit the brother of my mother; but she came willingly, although I admit without the consent of Kamaiole.”
“It’s true that Iola came with me from Kau, where I went [__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]to visit my mother’s brother; but she came willingly, even though I admit it was without Kamaiole’s consent.”
“Waikuku is of the blood of noble chiefs,” said the king in a tone of conciliation; “why not permit your sister, since it is her will, to remain with him in peace?”
“Waikuku comes from noble chiefs,” said the king in a conciliatory tone; “why not allow your sister, since it is her wish, to stay with him in peace?”
“She may remain,” was Kamaiole’s grim reply.
“She can stay,” was Kamaiole’s grim reply.
“And well may she remain!” exclaimed Waikuku bitterly. “Iola is dead! To-day, even a few breaths past, her brutal brother found and with his own hand killed her!”
“And she may as well stay gone!” Waikuku shouted bitterly. “Iola is dead! Just a little while ago, her cruel brother found her and killed her with his own hands!”
“Killed her?” repeated the king.
“Killed her?” the king asked.
“Yes, killed her,” continued Waikuku; “and but that her cowardly murderer sought the protection of the royal enclosure, my spear would have tasted his blood!”
“Yes, I killed her,” Waikuku continued. “If her cowardly murderer hadn't sought refuge in the royal enclosure, my spear would have tasted his blood!”
“Speak, and give good reason for this murder of the wife of Waikuku,” said the king, sternly addressing Kamaiole, “or, by great Lono! I will downward command your face!”
“Speak, and explain why you killed Waikuku’s wife,” the king said sternly to Kamaiole, “or, by great Lono! I will make you face the consequences!”
When a prisoner of war or malefactor was brought before an ancient Hawaiian king, if his order was “Downward the face!” the prisoner was taken away and slain at once by one of the royal executioners; but if it was “Upward the face!” his life was spared, either for complete pardon, slavery or sacrifice to the gods.
When a prisoner of war or criminal was brought before an ancient Hawaiian king, if he ordered “Face down!”, the prisoner was immediately taken away and killed by one of the royal executioners; but if he said “Face up!”, the prisoner’s life was spared, either resulting in a full pardon, enslavement, or sacrifice to the gods.
Giving little regard to the threat of the king, but burning with wrath at the insulting language of Waikuku, Kamaiole proudly answered:
Giving little thought to the king's threat, but seething with anger at Waikuku's insulting words, Kamaiole responded proudly:
“I am of the aha-alii of Hawaii. My war-canoes are red, and pennons float at their mast-tips. The blood of Nanaula is in my veins, and my ancestors were of the alii-nui—were kings here generations before Pili landed at Kohala or the Paumakuas blasted the shores of Hilo. With a rank befitting it was my purpose to mate my sister. But she secretly became the wife of a marauding puuku—possibly by force, probably by the charm of lies and the glitter of shells—and I followed and slew her, that her blood and mine might not be degraded by being mingled with that of Waikuku!”
“I am from the aha-alii of Hawaii. My war canoes are red, and flags wave from their masts. The blood of Nanaula runs through my veins, and my ancestors were of the alii-nui—they were kings here long before Pili landed at Kohala or the Paumakuas shaped the shores of Hilo. It was my intention, given my rank, to marry my sister. But she secretly became the wife of a raiding puuku—perhaps by force, likely by the deception of lies and the allure of shells—and I tracked her down and killed him, so that her blood and mine would not be tainted by mixing with that of Waikuku!”
“Puuku!” hissed Waikuku, enraged at the low rank contemptuously given him by Kamaiole, and making a hostile menace toward the speaker.
“Puuku!” hissed Waikuku, furious at the disrespectful low rank given to him by Kamaiole, and making a threatening gesture toward the speaker.
Kamaiole regarded Waikuku for a moment with a look of disdain, and then continued:
Kamaiole looked at Waikuku with a hint of disdain for a moment, before continuing:
“The occupation of this Waikuku—this woman-stealer—is [102]that of war, I have been informed. He boasted that his spear would have tasted the blood of Kamaiole had he not sought the protection of the royal grounds. I came here through no fear of his arm or the spears of his friends, but to explain to the king why I had shed blood within sight of the royal hale. But since he talks so bravely of blood and spears, I challenge him to make good his words with me beyond the palace walls. The matter is solely between us. I am prepared to answer to him in words of combat for what I have done to-day. Or if, as I suspect, he lacks the courage to give his warlike training a test so public, I will ward a spear with such of his friends, one by one, as may feel disposed to make his grievance theirs.”
“The role of this Waikuku—this woman-stealer—is [__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]that of a warrior, I've been told. He bragged that his spear would have tasted the blood of Kamaiole if he hadn't sought refuge within the royal grounds. I came here not out of fear of his strength or the spears of his friends, but to explain to the king why I shed blood in view of the royal hale. But since he talks so boldly about blood and spears, I challenge him to back up his words beyond the palace walls. The issue is just between us. I'm ready to face him in verbal combat for what I did today. Or if, as I suspect, he doesn't have the guts to put his warrior skills to such a public test, I'll take on any of his friends one by one who feel like making his grievance their own.”
The chiefs looked at each other in amazement at the broad challenge of Kamaiole, and the king seemed to be scarcely less astounded. But the proposal could not be deemed either unfair or unusual, since, according to the usage of the time, Kamaiole was answerable to Waikuku for the death of Iola.
The chiefs exchanged incredulous glances at Kamaiole's bold challenge, and the king appeared just as surprised. However, the proposal couldn't be considered unfair or out of the ordinary, since, according to the customs of the time, Kamaiole was accountable to Waikuku for Iola's death.
The stinging remarks of the dauntless Kau chief left to Waikuku no pretext or excuse for declining the challenge, and the king somewhat reluctantly consented to a settlement of the matter by the arbitrament of single combat, with such weapons as might be mutually agreed upon.
The sharp comments from the fearless Kau chief gave Waikuku no reason or excuse to back down from the challenge, and the king, somewhat hesitantly, agreed to resolve the issue through a fight, using weapons that they could both agree on.
Among the members of the royal household who witnessed this remarkable interview with the king was a chief of the old native line called Nanoa. Admiring the cool courage of Kamaiole, and feeling for him something of a sympathy of lineage, he proffered to stand his friend and adviser in the forthcoming encounter; and the arrangements finally made were that the hostile parties were to meet just at sunset in a grove immediately back of the palace enclosure. They were to be armed each with two spears and a javelin. The spears were first to be used when the combatants approached within twenty paces of each other. These being thrown without ending the battle, the parties were to advance to close encounter with their javelins, with the discretion of either throwing or retaining them in hand. No other weapons were to be used, and the conditions of the meeting were such that the king, who proposed to be present, did not deem it probable that there would be loss of life, especially as he had resolved to put an end to the combat with the first wound received by either. [103]
Among the members of the royal household who witnessed this remarkable interview with the king was a chief from the old bloodline named Nanoa. Admiring Kamaiole's calm bravery and feeling a sense of kinship, he offered to be his friend and adviser in the upcoming confrontation. The final arrangements were that the opposing parties would meet at sunset in a grove just behind the palace grounds. Each party was to be armed with two spears and a javelin. The spears would be used first when the fighters were within twenty paces of each other. If that didn’t end the battle, they would move in for close combat with their javelins, having the choice of throwing them or keeping them in hand. No other weapons were allowed, and the meeting was arranged in a way that the king, planning to be present, didn't think it likely there would be any loss of life, especially since he had decided to end the fight with the first wound suffered by either side. [__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]
Promptly at the time appointed the principals were on the ground. The attendants of Kamaiole were nowhere to be seen. By his orders they had quietly left the village two hours before, and the only friend at his side was Nanoa. He had thrown aside his cloak and helmet, and stood stern and motionless at the place assigned him, with a spear in his right hand, and another, with a javelin, at his feet. With limbs and shoulders bare, and beard and hair black as midnight veiling his neck, Kamaiole leaned upon his spear a picture of barbaric strength and courage.
Promptly at the appointed time, the main characters were on site. The attendants of Kamaiole were nowhere to be found. By his orders, they had quietly left the village two hours earlier, and the only friend at his side was Nanoa. He had taken off his cloak and helmet, standing firm and still in the designated spot, with a spear in his right hand and another one with a javelin at his feet. With his limbs and shoulders bare, and his beard and hair as black as midnight draping over his neck, Kamaiole leaned on his spear, embodying raw strength and courage.
Thirty paces in front of Kamaiole stood Waikuku, similarly armed and clad, but less calm than his adversary. Around him were a score or more of high chiefs, some rallying and others advising him; but he remained gloomily silent, nervously awaiting the arrival of the king and the word for action.
Thirty paces ahead of Kamaiole stood Waikuku, similarly armed and dressed, but less composed than his opponent. Around him were twenty or more high chiefs, some encouraging him and others offering advice; yet he remained quietly anxious, nervously waiting for the king to arrive and the signal to act.
In a few minutes Kanipahu, accompanied by a number of armed attendants, arrived and took a seat prepared for him at a point about equally distant from the two combatants. It being announced that everything was in readiness, the king signaled the word to be given, and the hostile chiefs, advancing five paces each, were in a moment balancing their long spears for flight. The spear of Waikuku first shot through the air in a line direct for his adversary’s breast; but the latter adroitly turned it from its course with a touch from his own weapon, which he in turn launched at Waikuku without effect. The second spears were thrown to the injury of neither, when they grasped their javelins and slowly and warily began to advance. It was an exciting moment. As each had gripped his weapon with both hands, it was apparent that neither ihe would be thrown, and a hand-to-hand struggle was inevitable.
In a few minutes, Kanipahu arrived with several armed attendants and took a seat that had been set up for him, positioned about equally distant from the two fighters. Once it was announced that everything was ready, the king signaled for the signal to be given. The rival chiefs stepped forward five paces each and immediately prepared their long spears for action. Waikuku's spear was the first to fly through the air, aimed straight at his opponent's chest; however, the other chief skillfully deflected it with a flick of his own weapon and then threw it at Waikuku, but without success. Their second throws caused no harm to either of them, so they gripped their javelins and cautiously began to advance. It was an intense moment. With both hands gripping their weapons, it was clear that neither spear would be thrown, and a hand-to-hand struggle was unavoidable.
The king drew nearer to obtain a better view of the closing conflict, and the spectators eagerly watched every movement of the advancing chiefs. Approaching within striking distance—the javelins being about six feet in length—a few feints were made, and Waikuku ventured a desperate thrust at the breast of his opponent. The movement was evidently expected, perhaps invited, for like a flash the point of the ihe was thrown into the air, and the next moment Waikuku received a thrust through the side. He fell, javelin in hand, and Kamaiole was lifting his weapon to strike his prostrate enemy to the heart when “Stop!” came the command of the king. [104]
The king moved closer to get a better view of the final battle, and the spectators eagerly watched every move the advancing leaders made. Coming within striking distance—with the javelins about six feet long—there were a few feints, and Waikuku made a daring stab at his opponent's chest. The move was clearly anticipated, maybe even invited, because in an instant, the tip of the ihe was launched into the air, and the next moment, Waikuku was hit through the side. He fell, javelin in hand, and Kamaiole was raising his weapon to strike his fallen enemy in the heart when the king commanded, “Stop!” [__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]
Heedless of the royal order, or too greatly excited to be able to restrain his hand, Kamaiole savagely drove his javelin into the breast of Waikuku, inflicting a death-wound.
Disregarding the royal order, or too overwhelmed with excitement to control himself, Kamaiole violently plunged his javelin into Waikuku's chest, delivering a fatal blow.
“Downward the face!” thundered the king, exasperated at Kamaiole’s apparent defiance of his order.
“Lower your face!” roared the king, frustrated by Kamaiole’s clear disregard for his command.
The chiefs began to move forward to seize or slay the offender. Knowing that his death had been decreed, Kamaiole recklessly poised his ihe, red with the life-blood of Waikuku, and with a wild cry of “Yes, downward the face!” hurled it at the heart of Kanipahu.
The chiefs started to advance to capture or kill the offender. Knowing that his death was certain, Kamaiole recklessly aimed his ihe, stained with the blood of Waikuku, and with a wild shout of "Yes, aim for the heart!" he threw it at Kanipahu's heart.
With exclamations of rage and horror the spectators sprang toward Kamaiole, the most of them dropping their unwieldy spears and grasping their pahoas, or daggers of ivory or hardened wood, as they advanced.
With shouts of anger and fear, the spectators rushed toward Kamaiole, most of them dropping their heavy spears and grabbing their pahoas, or daggers made of ivory or hardened wood, as they moved forward.
For an instant Kamaiole hesitated whether to defend himself to the death with the javelin of the dying chief, or take the almost equally desperate chances of escape by breaking through the lines of his encircling enemies. He chose the latter, and, grasping the javelin, started toward the king, with the view of drawing his assailants in that direction. This object being accomplished, he suddenly turned to the right, and charged and made an opening through the throng at a point that seemed to be the weakest. As he flew past the yielding line he miraculously escaped the spear and knife thrusts aimed at him, and succeeded in putting himself beyond the reach of spear and sling before real pursuit was made.
For a moment, Kamaiole hesitated, wondering whether to fight to the death with the dying chief's javelin or take the equally risky chance of escaping by breaking through the ring of enemies surrounding him. He chose the latter. Grabbing the javelin, he moved toward the king to draw his attackers in that direction. Once he accomplished that, he suddenly turned to the right and charged through the crowd at what seemed to be the weakest point. As he darted past the parting line, he miraculously avoided the spear and knife thrusts aimed at him, managing to get out of reach of spear and sling before they could really pursue him.
The javelin hurled at the king was received in the shoulder of a faithful attendant who had opportunely thrown himself in front of his royal master; and so rapid and confusing were the movements following that Kanipahu had scarcely recovered from his consternation at the bold assault upon his life before he learned that Kamaiole had escaped. Giving orders for a vigorous pursuit of the fugitive, the king walked to the body of Waikuku, and, discovering that life was extinct, directed its respectful removal, and then proceeded sadly to the royal mansion.
The javelin thrown at the king struck a loyal attendant who had quickly jumped in front of his royal master; and the actions that followed were so fast and chaotic that Kanipahu barely processed the shock of the attack on his life before he found out that Kamaiole had gotten away. Issuing orders for a strong chase after the runaway, the king walked over to Waikuku's body, confirmed that he was dead, ordered a proper removal, and then sadly made his way back to the royal mansion.
Kamaiole was not overtaken. He was strong and fleet of foot, and, as darkness soon intervened in his favor, he was able to elude his pursuers. He reached the coast in safety, and, boarding a canoe awaiting him in charge of his attendants, set sail for Kau. This provision for a hasty flight from Kohala renders it [105]certain that Kamaiole meditated desperate work on landing there, and the relation of his subsequent exploits has shown how successfully he performed it.
Kamaiole wasn’t caught. He was strong and fast, and as darkness soon fell in his favor, he managed to escape his pursuers. He safely reached the coast and, after getting into a canoe waiting for him with his attendants, set sail for Kau. This plan for a quick getaway from Kohala makes it [__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]clear that Kamaiole was planning something bold upon landing there, and the account of his later actions shows just how successfully he carried it out.
II.
Kamaiole supposed he had killed his sister, and Waikuku, who had seen her just before his unfortunate encounter, thought she had but a few minutes to live; but the wounds inflicted did not prove fatal, and Iola finally recovered and became the mother of a daughter to her dead husband. Tradition attributes her recovery to the especial prayers of the high-priest, but careful nursing and a good constitution were probably the saving means, assisted by the fortunate escape of the vital organs from serious injury.
Kamaiole thought he had killed his sister, and Waikuku, who had seen her just before his unfortunate encounter, believed she only had a few minutes to live; however, the wounds she suffered did not turn out to be fatal. Iola eventually recovered and had a daughter with her deceased husband. Tradition says her recovery was due to the special prayers of the high priest, but it was likely the result of attentive care and her strong health, along with the lucky fact that her vital organs weren't seriously injured.
Returning to Kau, Kamaiole began to prepare for war at once, not doubting that Kanipahu, defied and assaulted at the very gates of the royal mansion, would feel it his duty to bring him to submission. Sending emissaries through the several districts, he appealed to the native chiefs and people to join him in a revolt against Kanipahu, for the purpose of transferring the sovereignty of the island to a ruler of the old Nanaula line, and restoring to them the simple worship of their fathers and the possessions of which they had been despoiled by the southern invaders.
Returning to Kau, Kamaiole immediately started preparing for war, confident that Kanipahu, who was challenged and attacked right at the gates of the royal palace, would feel obligated to bring him to submission. He sent messengers throughout the various districts, urging the native chiefs and people to join him in revolting against Kanipahu to shift the island's sovereignty to a ruler from the old Nanaula line and to restore their ancestors' simple worship and the possessions that had been taken from them by the southern invaders.
The appeal was not without effect. Substantial aid was promised in Kona, Kau, Puna and Hilo, and in less than three months Kamaiole found himself at the head of an army large enough not only to protect him at Kau, which was doubtless the original purpose of the movement, but to carry the war into Kohala and effect a general revolution.
The appeal had an impact. Significant support was promised in Kona, Kau, Puna, and Hilo, and in less than three months, Kamaiole found himself leading an army big enough not only to protect him in Kau, which was likely the main goal of the movement, but also to launch an offensive in Kohala and bring about a full-scale revolution.
Whatever may have been the plans of Kanipahu concerning the rebellious Kau chief, he certainly seemed to be in no haste to put them in execution, for when Kamaiole arrived in Kohala at the head of his forces he was but feebly opposed. Tradition fails to account for the apathy of Kanipahu in the face of the supreme danger confronting him. All we are told is that, finding it impossible to raise an army strong enough to suppress the formidable revolt, he left his sons with a trusted friend in the valley of Waimanu, in the district of Hamakua, and sought refuge for [106]himself on the island of Molokai. Iola, fearing to meet her brother, or that he might learn that she still lived, also found an asylum with the young sons of Kanipahu in the secluded valley of Waimanu.
Whatever Kanipahu's plans were for the rebellious Kau chief, he definitely didn't seem in a rush to act on them. When Kamaiole arrived in Kohala with his forces, the resistance he faced was weak. Tradition doesn't explain Kanipahu's indifference in the face of the serious threat he was up against. We only know that, unable to gather a large enough army to crush the significant revolt, he left his sons with a trusted friend in the Waimanu Valley in Hamakua and sought refuge for [__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]himself on the island of Molokai. Iola, afraid to confront her brother or that he might discover she was still alive, also found shelter with Kanipahu's young sons in the quiet Waimanu Valley.
Thus Kamaiole assumed the sovereignty of Hawaii almost without opposition, and Kanipahu lived quietly and unknown at Kalae, on the small island of Molokai. He dressed and comported himself as a simple commoner, performing his own work, bearing his own burdens, and accepting all the hardships to which the poor and untitled were subject. He won the love of his neighbors for his kindness, and on two occasions took up arms to assist them in repelling plundering raids from Maui; and so well did he use his weapons that his humble friends were astonished, and thought he must have been trained in the arts of war, even if he was not of chiefly blood. It is well known that the chiefs, as a class, were physically larger than the masses, so much so that they claimed, and still claim, a descent distinct from that of the common people. Kanipahu was nearer seven than six feet in height, and his size was suggestive of rank; but he habitually stooped his head and shoulders, that his height might be subject to less remark, and labored more industriously than any of his neighbors in order to convince them that he was reared to toil. And in the end, as the years came and went, toil became a comfort to him, for it occupied his thoughts and gave him dreamless and refreshing slumber.
Thus, Kamaiole took control of Hawaii almost without any resistance, while Kanipahu lived quietly and unnoticed at Kalae, on the small island of Molokai. He dressed and carried himself like a regular person, doing his own work, handling his own burdens, and facing all the hardships that the poor and unnamed had to endure. He earned the affection of his neighbors through his kindness, and on two occasions, he took up arms to help them defend against raids from Maui; he was so skilled with his weapons that his humble friends were amazed and thought he must have been trained in the ways of war, even if he didn’t have noble blood. It's well known that chiefs, as a group, were generally larger than common people, so much so that they claimed, and still claim, a lineage separate from that of the ordinary folks. Kanipahu stood closer to seven feet than six, and his size hinted at his potential rank; however, he often hunched his head and shoulders so that his height wouldn't draw too much attention, and he worked harder than any of his neighbors to prove he was meant for labor. As the years passed, work became comforting to him, as it kept his mind occupied and allowed him to sleep soundly and refreshingly.
Let us now pass over a period of eighteen years from the accession of Kamaiole to the sovereignty of Hawaii. Kanipahu was still a laborer on the island of Molokai, and his sons had grown to manhood in the secluded valley of Waimanu, their rank and family ties known only to a few who could be trusted. One of these sons was Kalapana, and he had married Makea, the daughter of Iola. Her father was the dead Waikuku, and her uncle was Kamaiole, the moi of Hawaii.
Let’s now jump ahead eighteen years from when Kamaiole became the ruler of Hawaii. Kanipahu was still working as a laborer on the island of Molokai, and his sons had grown up in the quiet valley of Waimanu, their social status and family connections known only to a few trusted people. One of these sons was Kalapana, and he had married Makea, the daughter of Iola. Her father was the late Waikuku, and her uncle was Kamaiole, the moi of Hawaii.
Kamaiole’s reign had been eighteen years of almost continual domestic turmoil and popular dissatisfaction. He was cruel, selfish and arrogant; but he was also a cool and sagacious soldier, and his craft and courage had thus far enabled him to thwart the organization of discontent and enforce obedience to his authority. He had even succeeded in securing the allegiance of every prominent chief in the six districts of Hawaii—a political condition [107]such as had never before been achieved by any of his predecessors.
Kamaiole's rule lasted eighteen years, marked by almost constant internal conflict and widespread unhappiness. He was ruthless, self-centered, and conceited; however, he was also a calm and wise soldier, and his skill and bravery had so far allowed him to suppress unrest and enforce loyalty to his rule. He even managed to gain the loyalty of every influential chief in the six districts of Hawaii—a political situation [__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]that had never been accomplished by any of his predecessors.
Wide-spread changes in feudatory tenures were the principal causes of internal trouble. Under the Pili dynasty the land boundaries of the native chiefs had been greatly shifted and narrowed to make room for the chiefs of the new régime. In attempting to restore the old feudal boundaries as far as possible, and adjust the new, Kamaiole had not only stirred up bitter strifes among the nobles, but had unwittingly disturbed the vassalage of the masses and thereby rendered all classes restless and distrustful.
Widespread changes in landholdings were the main cause of internal conflict. Under the Pili dynasty, the land boundaries of the local chiefs had been significantly shifted and reduced to accommodate the chiefs of the new regime. In trying to restore the old feudal boundaries as much as possible and adjust to the new ones, Kamaiole not only ignited fierce rivalries among the nobles but also unintentionally disrupted the loyalty of the common people, leading to unease and mistrust across all social classes.
Finally the discontent became so general among the makaainana that they appealed to the head of the Paao family, the high-priest of the kingdom, for advice and assistance. They declared that they would no longer submit to the tyranny of Kamaiole and the exactions of his favored chiefs, and demanded a new ruler. Tradition ascribes this movement almost wholly to the laboring people, but it is more than probable that the priesthood took an early if not the initiatory part in it, since the high-priest seems to have known that Kanipahu was still living, and at once despatched a messenger to Molokai, informing the exiled king that the people were ripe for rebellion, and advising him to repair to Hawaii at once and place himself at the head of the discontented thousands who would rejoice at his coming. Fearful of treachery, Kanipahu declined to make any promises to the messenger, and, in disguise, the high-priest himself proceeded to Kalae and urged the old chief to return and reassert his authority on Hawaii.
Finally, the discontent grew so widespread among the makaainana that they sought help from the head of the Paao family, the high priest of the kingdom. They announced that they would no longer tolerate the tyranny of Kamaiole and the demands of his favored chiefs, and they called for a new ruler. Tradition attributes this movement largely to the laboring people, but it's likely that the priesthood played an early, if not primary, role in it, as the high priest seemed to know that Kanipahu was still alive. He immediately sent a messenger to Molokai, informing the exiled king that the people were ready to rebel and advising him to come to Hawaii at once to lead the dissatisfied thousands who would welcome him. Afraid of betrayal, Kanipahu refused to make any promises to the messenger. Disguised, the high priest himself went to Kalae and urged the old chief to return and reclaim his authority in Hawaii.
Kanipahu was profoundly moved at the words of the high-priest, and no longer doubted the sincerity and good faith of the tempting offer; but he declined to accept it, and, when urged for the reasons, rose sadly to his feet and said:
Kanipahu was deeply touched by the high priest's words and no longer doubted the sincerity and good faith of the tempting offer; however, he chose to decline it. When pressed for his reasons, he stood up with a heavy heart and said:
“Look at these hands, hardened and crooked with toil; look at this face, begrimed and wrinkled with exposure to the sun and rain; behold my bent head, and the unsightly hump that old age and stooping labor have placed upon my shoulders! Is this the figure of a king? No! The oo better becomes the hand of Kanipahu now than the staff of sovereignty. Here have I contentedly dwelt for many years, and here it is my will to peacefully die.” [108]
“Look at these hands, calloused and twisted from hard work; look at this face, dirty and wrinkled from being out in the sun and rain; see my lowered head and the ugly hump that age and years of labor have put on my shoulders! Is this the body of a king? No! The oo is a better fit for Kanipahu's hand than the scepter of power. I've lived here happily for many years, and it's where I want to die peacefully.” [__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]
“Then are we without hope,” replied the priest, in a tone of unfeigned sadness.
“Then we have no hope,” replied the priest, in a tone of genuine sadness.
“No, not without hope,” returned Kanipahu. “My sons are in the valley of Waimanu. I have heard from them many times. They are worthy of their blood. Seek out Kalapana. He is brave, manly, sagacious. Tell him that upon his shoulders Kanipahu, his father, places the burden of the war against Kamaiole, and in advance bequeaths to him all his valor may win, even the sovereignty of Hawaii.”
“No, not without hope,” Kanipahu replied. “My sons are in the valley of Waimanu. I’ve heard from them many times. They are worthy of our bloodline. Look for Kalapana. He is brave, strong, and wise. Tell him that Kanipahu, his father, places the responsibility of the war against Kamaiole on his shoulders, and in advance passes onto him all the honor he may gain, even the throne of Hawaii.”
“You are right, great chief!” said the priest. “We are not without hope. Kalapana shall answer for his father, and from every heiau in Hawaii shall prayers be spoken for his success.”
“You're right, great chief!” said the priest. “We still have hope. Kalapana will stand in for his father, and prayers for his success will be spoken from every heiau in Hawaii.”
The priest received the directions necessary to enable him to communicate with the sons of Kanipahu, and secretly returned to Hawaii to fan the smouldering fires of rebellion and prepare for the coming struggle.
The priest got the instructions he needed to talk to the sons of Kanipahu and quietly went back to Hawaii to stir up the remaining sparks of rebellion and get ready for the upcoming fight.
Although the high-priesthood had become too firmly established in the Paao family to be changed by Kamaiole, he could not disguise his dislike for the innovations made by the southern line upon the simpler worship of his fathers, and neither confidence nor cordiality existed between the political and religious authorities. The rebellion against Kamaiole was therefore secretly but earnestly assisted by the entire priesthood, and when Kalapana raised the standard of revolt the people flocked to his support by thousands.
Although the high priesthood had become too well established in the Paao family to be changed by Kamaiole, he couldn't hide his dislike for the changes brought by the southern line to the simpler worship of his ancestors, and there was no trust or friendliness between the political and religious leaders. The rebellion against Kamaiole was therefore quietly but wholeheartedly supported by the entire priesthood, and when Kalapana raised the flag of revolt, thousands of people rallied to his side.
The rebellion was organized with extraordinary rapidity, and when Kalapana suddenly made his appearance in Kohala at the head of a large army, Kamaiole was in no condition to meet him. He hurriedly despatched his lunapais, or war-messengers, to the chiefs of Kohala, Kona, Hamakua and Hilo, commanding their prompt assistance, and summoned the priests and diviners of the heiau of Mookini to make unusual sacrifices to the gods and to bring him at once the auguries of the uprising. But the chiefs responded with no alacrity to his call, and the diviners informed him that triumph to his arms was possible only in Kona. Kamaiole therefore abandoned Kohala, and, with such force as he was able to assemble, fell back into North Kona, where the quotas of warriors from the neighboring districts were ordered to join him.
The rebellion was organized with amazing speed, and when Kalapana suddenly showed up in Kohala leading a large army, Kamaiole was not ready to face him. He quickly sent his war messengers to the chiefs of Kohala, Kona, Hamakua, and Hilo, demanding their immediate help, and called upon the priests and diviners of the Mookini temple to make special sacrifices to the gods and to get him the signs of the uprising right away. However, the chiefs did not respond quickly to his request, and the diviners told him that victory for his forces would only be possible in Kona. Thus, Kamaiole gave up on Kohala and, with whatever troops he could gather, retreated to North Kona, where he ordered the warrior groups from nearby areas to join him.
Amidst great popular enthusiasm Kalapana marched into [109]Northern Kohala without opposition, and took possession of the royal mansion from which his father had been driven into exile eighteen years before. Kanipahu had not overestimated the capacity of his son. By instinct he was a soldier, and from the moment that he appeared at the head of his army the chiefs who had been rallied to his support by the priesthood saw that the quiet and dreamy recluse of Waimanu was made to command; and their enthusiasm in his cause, which was soon shared by the people, made easy his way to victory.
Amid great public enthusiasm, Kalapana marched into [__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]Northern Kohala without facing any opposition and took over the royal mansion from which his father had been exiled eighteen years earlier. Kanipahu had accurately assessed his son's abilities. Instinctively a soldier, the moment he appeared at the front of his army, the chiefs who had rallied to support him through the priesthood recognized that the quiet and dreamy recluse of Waimanu was born to lead. Their excitement for his cause, soon shared by the people, paved his way to victory.
Learning that Kamaiole had fallen back into Kona, Kalapana resolved to follow him without delay, and, if possible, bring him to battle before reinforcements could reach him from the south. The auguries were more than favorable. They were not even ambiguous. They expressly declared that Kamaiole would be killed in Kona. It was, therefore, with confidence and enthusiasm that Kalapana and his steadily increasing army started on their march for the adjoining district of Kona.
Learning that Kamaiole had retreated to Kona, Kalapana decided to pursue him without hesitation, and, if possible, confront him before reinforcements could arrive from the south. The signs were more than promising. They were crystal clear. They clearly stated that Kamaiole would be defeated in Kona. Therefore, with confidence and excitement, Kalapana and his growing army set out for the neighboring district of Kona.
Meantime Kamaiole was not inactive. He had succeeded in gathering a force of eight thousand men, and, learning that Kalapana was advancing from Kohala, resolved to give him battle at a place called Anaehoomalu, not far from the northern line of Kona. The point was selected for its strategical advantages, and there Kamaiole, doubtful of the result—for he could see that the tide had set in against him—determined to end the struggle.
Meantime, Kamaiole was busy. He had managed to gather a force of eight thousand men and, learning that Kalapana was coming from Kohala, decided to confront him at a place called Anaehoomalu, not far from the northern boundary of Kona. This location was chosen for its strategic benefits, and there, Kamaiole, uncertain about the outcome—since he could tell that things were starting to go against him—decided to end the fight.
There was but a two days’ march between the hostile camps, and Kalapana pushed forward with cautious haste. The priests and kaulas had promised him success, and the most influential chiefs of Hamakua and Kohala were at his side. He had brought with him from Waimanu, where it had been secreted for eighteen years, the war-god of Pili, which had been redecorated, and was borne in front of him in charge of the high-priest. And with him, to share his fate, went his young wife, Makea, to care for him if wounded, to fight by his side, perhaps, should the tide of battle turn against him; for at that time, and later, the more courageous of the wives and daughters of the chiefs not unfrequently, in emergencies, took an active part in the field.
There was only a two-day march between the opposing camps, and Kalapana moved forward with careful urgency. The priests and kaulas had assured him of victory, and the most powerful chiefs from Hamakua and Kohala were by his side. He had brought with him the war-god of Pili from Waimanu, where it had been hidden for eighteen years. It had been redecorated and was carried in front of him by the high priest. Accompanying him, to share his fate, was his young wife, Makea, ready to care for him if he was injured and to fight beside him if the battle turned against him; at that time, and later on, the more courageous wives and daughters of the chiefs often took an active role in combat during emergencies.
On the morning of the third day after Kalapana’s departure from Kohala the two armies confronted each other, and Kalapana immediately organized his forces for battle. Kamaiole saw that he was outnumbered, and resolved to await the attack behind [110]his defences. In the face of the great odds against him in numbers he was by no means hopeful; and, besides, the auguries were unsatisfactory, and three times the night before he had heard the scream of the alae, the bird of evil omen. But no feeling of fear affected him. Filled with gloomy courage, he cheered his warriors with promises of victory, and, armed with a javelin and heavy laau-palau, or rude halberd, placed himself at the most exposed point of his defences and awaited the attack.
On the morning of the third day after Kalapana left Kohala, the two armies faced off, and Kalapana quickly got his forces ready for battle. Kamaiole noticed he was outnumbered and decided to hold his ground behind [__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]his defenses. Given the overwhelming odds against him, he wasn't feeling very hopeful; plus, the omens were grim, and three times the night before he had heard the scream of the alae, a bird associated with bad luck. However, he didn’t let fear get to him. Filled with a dark sense of courage, he motivated his warriors with promises of victory and, armed with a javelin and a heavy laau-palau, or crude halberd, took his stand at the most vulnerable spot of his defenses and prepared for the attack.
The battle opened, and with a wild rush a heavy division of Kalapana’s forces, armed with spears, clubs, and stone axes, was hurled against the rough stone wall, four or five feet in height, behind which the enemy found partial protection. The wall was leveled in places, and desperate hand-to-hand conflicts followed, but the assault was finally repulsed. Rallied and reinforced, a second charge was made, but with no better success. The loss of life was great, and the result began to look doubtful.
The battle began, and in a chaotic rush, a large division of Kalapana’s forces, armed with spears, clubs, and stone axes, charged at the rough stone wall, which was four or five feet high, where the enemy found some cover. The wall was knocked down in spots, leading to desperate hand-to-hand fighting, but the attack was ultimately pushed back. After regrouping and getting reinforcements, they launched a second charge, but it didn’t go any better. The casualties were heavy, and the outcome started to seem uncertain.
But Kalapana was not discouraged by these costly failures. Withdrawing and strengthening the attacking division, and announcing that he would lead the next assault in person, he ordered an attack in the rear of the enemy by his entire reserve. This involved a rapid march of two or three miles, and the passage of a deep ravine which Kamaiole relied upon as a complete defence of his right flank. While this movement was being executed Kalapana kept the enemy employed with heavy lines of skirmishers and frequent menaces of more decided assault.
But Kalapana wasn’t discouraged by these expensive setbacks. He pulled back and reinforced the attacking division, announcing that he would personally lead the next assault. He ordered a rear attack on the enemy with his entire reserve. This required a fast march of two or three miles and crossing a deep ravine that Kamaiole counted on as full protection for his right flank. While this was happening, Kalapana kept the enemy busy with strong skirmish lines and regular threats of a more serious attack.
For more than an hour this desultory fighting continued, Kalapana impatiently watching for the appearance of his flanking column on the hill above the enemy. At length he discovered the first of its advancing spears, and a few minutes later the entire body came into view and began to pour down the slope. The final assault in front was then ordered, Kalapana taking command in person.
For over an hour, the aimless fighting went on, with Kalapana anxiously awaiting the arrival of his flanking group on the hill above the enemy. Finally, he spotted the first of their advancing spears, and a few minutes later, the whole unit came into view and started moving down the slope. The final attack in front was then ordered, with Kalapana taking charge himself.
The sudden attack in the rear carried consternation to Kamaiole’s warriors; but their undaunted leader coolly and resolutely prepared for the worst. Hastily taking from the front defences such spears as could be spared, he summoned the entire reserve, and with the united force sprang like a lion to meet the attack from the hill. It came like an avalanche and could not be stayed. The struggle was desperate. As his warriors fell on every side of him, Kamaiole moved like a tower of destruction [111]through the conflict. He seemed to bear a charmed life, and men fell like grass before the sweep of his laau-palau.
The sudden attack from behind shocked Kamaiole’s warriors; but their fearless leader calmly and resolutely prepared for the worst. Quickly taking what spears he could from the front defenses, he called up the entire reserve, and with their combined strength, they charged like a lion to confront the assault from the hill. It came crashing down like an avalanche and couldn’t be stopped. The battle was fierce. As his warriors fell around him, Kamaiole stood tall, a force of destruction [__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__] in the midst of the fight. He seemed to have a charmed life, and men fell like grass before the sweep of his laau-palau.
Suddenly an old man of large mould, with head bent and long, white hair and beard sweeping his breast and stooping shoulders, stepped in front of Kamaiole, and with a heavy spear-pointed club calmly but dexterously warded a blow of the terrible laau-palau aimed at his head, and, answering quick as thought, felled the royal warrior to the earth like a forest tree. Around and over the body of the fallen chief a desperate struggle ensued. But it was of short duration. Under the command of Kalapana the front defences had been carried, and such of the royal army as had escaped slaughter were soon wildly leaping over the walls and retreating in confusion in all directions.
Suddenly, a large old man with a bent head, long white hair, and a beard sweeping down to his chest and stooping shoulders stepped in front of Kamaiole. With a heavy, spear-pointed club, he calmly but skillfully blocked a blow from the fearsome laau-palau aimed at his head, and, thinking quickly, knocked the royal warrior to the ground like a fallen tree. A fierce struggle broke out around and over the fallen chief's body. But it didn't last long. Under Kalapana's command, the front defenses were breached, and those members of the royal army who had escaped the slaughter soon found themselves jumping over the walls in a panic and retreating in all directions.
Pressing toward the rear at the head of his victorious warriors, Kalapana was attracted to the fierce hand-to-hand conflict taking place over the body of Kamaiole. Without stopping to inquire the cause, he promptly plunged into the thickest of the combat, backed by a few resolute followers, and speedily relieved the old white-haired warrior from a struggle which was taxing his strength to the utmost. This was the last stand made by the enemy in a body; what remained of the battle was a merciless massacre of the wounded, and the capture and retention alive of a few prisoners for sacrifice.
Pressing toward the back at the front of his victorious warriors, Kalapana was drawn to the intense hand-to-hand fighting happening over the body of Kamaiole. Without pausing to ask what was going on, he immediately jumped into the heart of the battle, supported by a few determined followers, and quickly helped the old white-haired warrior out of a struggle that was pushing him to his limits. This was the enemy's last stand as a group; what followed was a brutal slaughter of the wounded and the capture of a few prisoners to be kept alive for sacrifice.
Resting for a moment and taking a survey of the field, Kalapana’s eyes fell upon the old warrior. With one foot upon the breast of Kamaiole, he was leaning upon his war-club and scanning the face of Kalapana. His ponderous weapon still dripped with gore, and his wrinkled face was splashed with the blood of his enemies.
Resting for a moment and looking over the field, Kalapana noticed the old warrior. With one foot on Kamaiole's chest, he leaned on his war club, studying Kalapana's face. His heavy weapon was still dripping with blood, and his wrinkled face was splattered with the blood of his enemies.
“Where is Kamaiole?” suddenly inquired Kalapana, grasping his weapon, as if his work of death had not yet been finished. “Where is Kamaiole?” he repeated to those around him. “Who has seen him?”
“Where is Kamaiole?” Kalapana suddenly asked, gripping his weapon, as if his task of killing wasn’t done yet. “Where is Kamaiole?” he repeated to those nearby. “Who has seen him?”
“Here is Kamaiole,” replied the old warrior, pointing with bloody finger to the face of the dying king.
“Here is Kamaiole,” replied the old warrior, pointing with a bloodied finger at the face of the dying king.
Kalapana abruptly turned, and for a moment gazed in silence upon the face of his fallen enemy. Although wounded to the death, Kamaiole was still living, and his eyes showed that he was conscious of what was transpiring around him.
Kalapana suddenly turned and silently stared at the face of his fallen enemy. Even though Kamaiole was mortally wounded, he was still alive, and his eyes revealed that he was aware of what was happening around him.
“By whose hand did he fall?” inquired Kalapana. [112]
“Who was responsible for his fall?” Kalapana asked. [__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]
“By mine,” briefly answered the old man.
"By mine," the old man replied shortly.
“And who are you?” continued Kalapana, with something of a feeling of awe, “who have thus come unsummoned, in the guise of a god from our sacred temples, to strike for the son of Kanipahu?”
“And who are you?” Kalapana asked, feeling a bit of awe. “Who have come here uninvited, looking like a god from our sacred temples, to fight for the son of Kanipahu?”
The old man slowly raised his head, and, brushing back the white hairs from his face, was about to speak, when the high-priest, with kahus bearing the war-god of Kalapana, approached to greet his victorious chief. Recognizing the venerable warrior, the astounded high-priest dropped on his knees before him, exclaiming, “Kanipahu! Kanipahu!”
The old man slowly lifted his head and, pushing back the white hairs from his face, was about to speak when the high priest, with kahus carrying the war god of Kalapana, came over to greet his victorious chief. Recognizing the elderly warrior, the amazed high priest fell to his knees in front of him, exclaiming, “Kanipahu! Kanipahu!”
Almost in a dream, Kalapana, making himself known, embraced his father, whom he had not seen for eighteen years, and then respectfully chided him for coming secretly from Molokai and joining the army as a common warrior, when his rank and abilities entitled him to supreme command.
Almost as if in a dream, Kalapana revealed himself and embraced his father, whom he hadn't seen in eighteen years. He then respectfully scolded him for coming from Molokai in secret and joining the army as a common soldier, when his status and skills deserved a position of supreme command.
The old chief smiled sadly as he replied:
The old chief smiled with a touch of sadness as he answered:
“The purpose of my coming has been accomplished. With my own hand I have answered in blood to the treachery of Kamaiole, and paid him for the hump he has placed upon my shoulders. I shall return to Molokai, and there the old hunchback will spend his few remaining days in peace.”
“The reason I came here has been fulfilled. I’ve personally avenged the betrayal of Kamaiole in blood, and I've settled the score for the burden he placed on me. I will go back to Molokai, where the old hunchback will live out his last days in peace.”
These words were heard and doubtless understood by Kamaiole, for he closed his eyes, and a smile of defiance played for a moment about his lips.
These words were heard and surely understood by Kamaiole, as he closed his eyes and a smirk of defiance briefly crossed his lips.
Just then Makea joined her husband, and was overjoyed to find him victorious and unhurt. With the first lull of battle she had started in search of him with a calabash of water, and to reach him had been compelled to pick her way through ghastly heaps of dead. At the sound of her voice, sweetly replacing the din of battle, Kamaiole opened his eyes and fixed his gaze upon her face. Finally his lips moved as if he would speak. Instinctively she approached the dying chief, and, kneeling, poured into his open mouth a few swallows of water.
Just then, Makea joined her husband and was thrilled to see him safe and victorious. As soon as there was a break in the fighting, she had set off to find him with a calabash of water, having to carefully navigate through horrific piles of the dead to reach him. At the sound of her voice, which was a sweet relief from the chaos of battle, Kamaiole opened his eyes and stared at her. Finally, his lips moved as if he wanted to say something. Without thinking, she leaned closer to the dying chief and knelt down to pour a few sips of water into his open mouth.
Kalapana turned and smiled at Makea’s humanity, unusual on barbarous battle-fields. A grateful look came into the eyes of Kamaiole, and with a questioning glance he faintly syllabled “Iola!” the name of his sister, and the mother of Makea, whom she closely resembled. Kalapana caught the word, and, understanding its meaning, in a tone not far from kind replied: [113]
Kalapana turned and smiled at Makea's compassion, which was rare on cruel battlefields. A thankful expression appeared in Kamaiole's eyes, and with a curious look, he softly whispered "Iola!" the name of his sister and Makea's mother, whom she looked just like. Kalapana heard the word and, understanding its significance, responded in a tone that was almost kind: [__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]
“No, not Iola, your sister, whom you failed to kill, but Makea, her daughter, who is Kalapana’s wife.”
“No, not Iola, your sister, whom you didn’t manage to kill, but Makea, her daughter, who is Kalapana’s wife.”
Kamaiole convulsively raised his head and arms—whether in a spirit of rage or conciliation will never be known—and then dropped back dead.
Kamaiole suddenly lifted his head and arms—whether out of anger or a desire to make peace will never be known—and then fell back lifeless.
The remainder of the story may be briefly told. In disregard of all persuasion, Kanipahu returned at once to Molokai, where he lived and died in obscurity, earning his own living and assuming no rank.
The rest of the story can be summed up quickly. Ignoring all advice, Kanipahu went back to Molokai, where he lived and died in obscurity, making a living for himself and taking no title.
Kalapana was anointed king of Hawaii on his return to Kohala, and a hundred prisoners were sacrificed to the gods at Mookini. His reign was conciliatory and peaceful, and with Makea, whose full name was Makeamalamaihanae, he became the ancestor of Kamehameha the Great. [115]
Kalapana was crowned king of Hawaii when he returned to Kohala, and a hundred prisoners were sacrificed to the gods at Mookini. His rule was diplomatic and peaceful, and with Makea, whose full name was Makeamalamaihanae, he became the ancestor of Kamehameha the Great. [__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]
The Triple Marriage of Laa-mai-kahiki.
[116]
[__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]
CHARACTERS.
- Mulielealii, chief of western Oahu.
-
Kumuhonua, sons of Mulielealii. Olopana, and Moikeha, - Laa-mai-kahiki, adopted son of Moikeha.
- Luukia, wife of Olopana.
- Laamaomao, god of the winds.
- Mookini, a high-priest.
- Kamahualele, an astrologer and poet.
- Puna, the principal chief of Kauai.
- Hooipo, daughter of Puna.
- Kila, son of Moikeha and Hooipo.
-
Hoakanui, the three brides of Laa. Waolena, Hand, -
Ahukini-a-Laa, the three kids of Laa. Kukona-a-Laa, and Lauli-a-Laa,
[117]
[__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]
THE TRIPLE MARRIAGE OF LAA-MAI-KAHIKI.
THE TRIPLE MARRIAGE OF LAA-MAI-KAHIKI.
THE LEGENDS OF MOIKEHA AND THE ARGONAUTS OF THE ELEVENTH AND TWELFTH CENTURIES.
THE LEGENDS OF MOIKEHA AND THE ARGONAUTS OF THE ELEVENTH AND TWELFTH CENTURIES.
I.
Tradition abounds in bold outlines, here and there interspersed with curious details, of the many prominent expeditions to the Hawaiian Islands, from the beginning of the eleventh to the latter part of the twelfth centuries, of adventurous Tahitian, Samoan and Georgian chiefs. Learning of the existence and approximate location of the group, and perhaps guided to an extent by intervening islands and atolls that have since disappeared, they came with large fleets of barges and double canoes, bearing their families and attendants, their priests, astrologers and musicians, and by degrees possessed themselves or their immediate descendants with the fairest portions of the little archipelago. For a century or more bitter feuds and frequent wars followed; but in the end the invaders and the invaded, both of the same Polynesian race, became assimilated through concession, intermarriage and fundamental identity of religious cult, and thenceforth in a united and homogeneous stream flowed down the years. The genealogies of the prominent chiefs and priests were alone preserved; and while, in after-generations, some of them traced their lines of rank to the native stock of Nanaula, and others to the chiefs of the second migratory influx from the south, the ruling families of the entire group had become so united in blood by intermarriage that it was difficult to find a chief of distinction who could not trace his lineage back to both.
Tradition is rich with vivid stories, sprinkled with interesting details, about the many significant journeys to the Hawaiian Islands from the early 1100s to the late 1200s, led by adventurous chiefs from Tahiti, Samoa, and Georgia. Upon discovering the existence and approximate location of the islands, and possibly guided by nearby islands and atolls that are now gone, they arrived with large fleets of canoes and double-hulled vessels, bringing their families, assistants, priests, astrologers, and musicians. Over time, they claimed the most beautiful parts of the small archipelago for themselves and their descendants. For more than a century, intense rivalries and frequent battles ensued; however, in the end, the newcomers and the locals, both from the same Polynesian background, blended through compromises, intermarriage, and a shared religious culture, leading to a united and cohesive society over the years. Only the genealogies of the prominent chiefs and priests were preserved; while later generations traced their lineage to the native stock of Nanaula or to the chiefs of the second wave of migration from the south, the ruling families across the entire group had become so interconnected through marriage that it was hard to find a notable chief who couldn’t trace his ancestry back to both.
But during the migratory period referred to, especially marked by the coming of Nanamaoa, Pili, Paao and the Oahu and Maui Paumakuas, the Hawaiian group was not the only scene of foreign adventure among the central islands of the Pacific. The native chiefs of Hawaii, whose ancestors had reached the group more [118]than five hundred years before, were quite as adventurous and skilled in navigation as their southern invaders; and thus while the latter, continually augmented in numbers by fresh arrivals, were steadily possessing themselves of the lands and governing forces of the Hawaiian Islands, a few resolute chiefs of the old line, either in a spirit of retaliation or because the way had been pointed out, boldly spread their sails for the abandoned homes of their aggressors, and by conquest or other means acquired lands and influence in the distant islands of the south.
But during the migration period mentioned, especially marked by the arrival of Nanamaoa, Pili, Paao, and the Oahu and Maui Paumakuas, the Hawaiian Islands weren't the only place experiencing foreign adventures among the central Pacific islands. The native chiefs of Hawaii, whose ancestors had arrived in the group more [__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__] than five hundred years earlier, were just as adventurous and skilled in navigation as their southern invaders. While the latter, continuously growing in numbers due to new arrivals, steadily took over the lands and governing powers of the Hawaiian Islands, a few determined chiefs from the old lineage, either out of retaliation or because a path had been shown to them, boldly set their sails for the abandoned homes of their aggressors, and through conquest or other means, gained lands and influence in the distant southern islands.

The Pali, near Honolulu.
The Pali, close to Honolulu.
The mooolelo about to be related embraces the romantic story of one of these expeditions of native Hawaiian chiefs to the southern islands, and presents an interesting picture of the manners, customs and aspirations of the mid-Pacific Argonauts of that period.
The mooolelo about to be shared tells the romantic story of one of these journeys by Hawaiian chiefs to the southern islands and offers an intriguing glimpse into the culture, traditions, and dreams of the mid-Pacific adventurers of that time.
Somewhere about the year A.D. 1040 Maweke, a native chief of the line of Nanaula—the first of the family that is brought prominently to view in the chronology of the second influx—was the alii-nui, or nominal sovereign, of the island of Oahu. He had three sons—Mulielealii, Keaunui and Kalehenui. On the death of Maweke, the eldest son, Mulielealii, acceded to the title of alii-nui, occupying the western side of the island. Kalehenui was given possessions at Koolau, and Keaunui was established in the district of Ewa. The latter became the ancestor of a line of powerful chiefs in that district, and is credited with having cut or opened the navigable channel near the Puuloa salt-works, by which the estuary now known as Pearl River, not far from Honolulu, was rendered accessible to navigation. No further reference need here be made to this branch of the family beyond the remark that Keaunui became the father of Lakona, and also of Nuakea, the wife of Keoloewa, King of Molokai, and of the prophet Moi, who fell with Kaupeepee in defence of the fortress of Haupu, as related in the legend of “Hina, the Helen of Hawaii.”
Somewhere around the year CE 1040, Maweke, a native chief from the Nanaula lineage—the first prominent family noted in the history of the second wave of migrants—was the alii-nui, or nominal ruler, of the island of Oahu. He had three sons: Mulielealii, Keaunui, and Kalehenui. After Maweke's death, the eldest son, Mulielealii, took on the title of alii-nui, governing the western part of the island. Kalehenui received lands at Koolau, while Keaunui was situated in the Ewa district. The latter became the ancestor of a powerful line of chiefs in that area and is credited with creating the navigable channel near the Puuloa saltworks, which made the estuary now known as Pearl River, located close to Honolulu, accessible for navigation. There’s no further need to discuss this branch of the family except to note that Keaunui became the father of Lakona, and also of Nuakea, who was the wife of Keoloewa, King of Molokai, and of the prophet Moi, who died alongside Kaupeepee in defense of the fortress of Haupu, as mentioned in the legend of “Hina, the Helen of Hawaii.”
Mulielealii had three sons—Kumuhonua, Olopana and Moikeha—and one daughter, named Hainakolo. As the eldest son and successor of his father, Kumuhonua in time acceded to the patrimonial estates and titles; but the younger brothers, not content, as they grew to manhood, with the small allotments which must necessarily have been accorded them, concluded to seek for ampler and more inviting possessions elsewhere. [119]
Mulielealii had three sons—Kumuhonua, Olopana, and Moikeha—and one daughter named Hainakolo. As the oldest son and the heir to his father, Kumuhonua eventually inherited the family estates and titles. However, his younger brothers, not satisfied with the small portions they were given, decided to look for larger and more appealing possessions elsewhere as they grew into adulthood. [__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]
The Paumakua family occupied a large part of the eastern side of the island, and, although they were of the stock of the second influx, their relations with the native chiefs and people seem to have been peaceful and satisfactory. Paumakua, who first appeared in native annals two generations before the time of Olopana and his brothers, either as an immigrant from one of the southern islands or the son or grandson of a chief of recent arrival, was one of the most restless and dashing of the prominent leaders of that period. The legends of the time glow with stories of his marvellous exploits and adventures in foreign lands, and the friendly feeling entertained for his immediate successors was doubtless due in a great measure to the respect established for them through his rank and prowess.
The Paumakua family took up a large part of the eastern side of the island, and even though they were part of the second wave of settlers, their relationships with the local chiefs and people seemed to be peaceful and positive. Paumakua, who is first mentioned in local history two generations before Olopana and his brothers, either came from one of the southern islands or was the son or grandson of a recently arrived chief. He was one of the most ambitious and daring leaders of that time. The legends from that period are filled with stories of his amazing feats and adventures in distant lands, and the friendly feelings towards his immediate successors were likely largely due to the respect earned through his status and achievements.
It is claimed by tradition that Paumakua visited all the foreign lands then known to the Hawaiians, and brought back with him many things that were strange. From one of his voyages he returned with two white priests, Keakea and Maliu, from whom several ecclesiastical families subsequently claimed descent and authority. At another time he brought back Malela, a noted prophet and sorcerer, and three other persons of a strange race, one of whom was a woman. Tradition somewhat minutely describes them as “foreigners of large stature, bright, staring, roguish eyes, and reddish faces.”
Tradition says that Paumakua traveled to all the foreign lands known to the Hawaiians and returned with many unusual things. On one of his trips, he came back with two white priests, Keakea and Maliu, from whom several church families later claimed descent and authority. On another voyage, he brought back Malela, a well-known prophet and sorcerer, along with three other people from a strange race, one of whom was a woman. Tradition describes them in detail as “foreigners of large stature, with bright, wide-eyed, mischievous expressions and reddish faces.”
As the voyages of this adventurous chief were sometimes of many months’ duration, and he is said to have prosecuted his researches in almost every direction, it is not impossible that the foreigners with “roguish eyes and reddish faces” were aborigines of North America. But, leaving this to conjecture, tradition permits no doubt that Paumakua was a skilful and fearless explorer, and through his enterprise acquired renown for himself and respect for his descendants, one of whom is about to be presented to the reader.
As the journeys of this adventurous leader often lasted many months, and he was known to explore almost every direction, it's possible that the foreigners with "sly eyes and reddish faces" were Native Americans. But, putting that aside, tradition clearly shows that Paumakua was a skilled and brave explorer, and through his efforts, he gained fame for himself and respect for his descendants, one of whom is about to be introduced to the reader.
As already stated, the younger sons of Mulielealii, Olopana and Moikeha, not content with their prospects in Oahu, resolved to seek fame and fortune elsewhere. Both were unmarried, but, through some circumstance or for some purpose not mentioned by tradition, Moikeha had adopted a young son of Ahukai, the great-grandson and successor of Paumakua. The name of the boy was Laa, or Laa-mai-kahiki, to which it was subsequently extended. The child-chief could not have been without political [120]prospects, for he is referred to in the chants as “Chief of Kapaahu and Lord of Nualaka.” Although the custom was common then, as now, among Hawaiians of every rank and condition, of exchanging and adopting children, the adoption of so promising a scion of the Paumakua line by a grandson of Maweke must have been the result of some extraordinary compact, all reference to which has disappeared from tradition.
As mentioned earlier, the younger sons of Mulielealii, Olopana and Moikeha, weren’t satisfied with their futures in Oahu and decided to seek fame and fortune elsewhere. Both were single, but for some unknown reason, Moikeha had taken in a young son of Ahukai, the great-grandson and successor of Paumakua. The boy's name was Laa, or Laa-mai-kahiki, which would later be extended. The child-chief had significant political prospects, as he’s referred to in the chants as “Chief of Kapaahu and Lord of Nualaka.” Although it was common at the time, as it is now, for Hawaiians of all ranks to exchange and adopt children, the adoption of such a promising descendant of the Paumakua line by a grandson of Maweke must have resulted from some unusual agreement, the details of which have vanished from tradition.
Taking leave of their relatives on Oahu, Olopana and Moikeha, with a considerable number of attendants, embarked for the island of Hawaii, and established themselves at once in the beautiful valley of Waipio, in the district of Hamakua. What chief, if any, they found in possession there is not stated; but it was not long before the valley was ruled by Olopana, with Moikeha as his principal captain and adviser. The young chief Laa accompanied his foster-father to Waipio, and there Moikeha began to instruct him in the manly accomplishments for which in after-years he became distinguished.
Taking leave of their relatives on Oahu, Olopana and Moikeha, along with a sizable group of followers, set out for the island of Hawaii and quickly settled in the beautiful Waipio Valley in the Hamakua district. It's not mentioned who the chief was, if there was one, when they arrived, but it wasn't long before Olopana ruled the valley, with Moikeha as his main captain and advisor. The young chief Laa went with his foster-father to Waipio, where Moikeha began teaching him the skills that he would later be known for.
To strengthen his rule and protect himself against the encroachments of neighboring chiefs, Olopana married Luukia, granddaughter of Hikapaloa, chief of Kohala, and a descendant of the ancient line of Nanaula, to which Olopana himself belonged by lineage still more direct. He urged his brother to follow his example and connect himself by marriage with some one of the ruling families of Hamakua. Such an alliance could have been readily made by Moikeha, for his strain was undoubted, and in manly beauty and courtly graces he had scarcely a peer in all the group; but he declared that he had a wife in his spear and an heir in Laa, and would not create a jealousy in the family by adding to either.
To strengthen his rule and protect himself from the ambitions of neighboring chiefs, Olopana married Luukia, the granddaughter of Hikapaloa, chief of Kohala, and a descendant of the ancient Nanaula line, to which Olopana himself belonged by an even more direct connection. He urged his brother to take his lead and marry into one of the ruling families of Hamakua. Moikeha could have easily made such an alliance, as his lineage was undisputed, and he possessed remarkable manly beauty and grace that made him stand out among their peers; however, he insisted that he was devoted to his spear and had an heir in Laa, and he didn't want to stir jealousy in the family by adding to either.
But the brothers did not remain long in Waipio. A terrible hurricane, followed by storms and floods, completely devastated the valley, compelling the inhabitants to abandon their homes and seek refuge elsewhere. Moikeha had never been satisfied with Waipio, and in the midst of the ruin around them found little difficulty in persuading his brother to make a bold push for the misty and far-off land of Kahiki. Preparations for the journey were immediately made, and in five large double canoes the brothers, with Laa and a considerable body of attendants, set sail for the islands of the south. They knew the general direction, and the sun and stars guided them in their course. [121]
But the brothers didn't stay long in Waipio. A terrible hurricane, followed by storms and floods, completely destroyed the valley, forcing the residents to leave their homes and find shelter elsewhere. Moikeha had never been happy in Waipio, and amidst the devastation around them, he had no trouble convincing his brother to take a bold journey to the misty and distant land of Kahiki. They quickly made preparations for the trip, and in five large double canoes, the brothers, along with Laa and a significant group of attendants, set sail for the southern islands. They knew the general direction, using the sun and stars to navigate their path. [__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]
A prosperous wind wafted them to the Society group, and they finally landed on the island of Raiatea, and forcibly took, or in some other manner secured, possession of the district of Moaula. Olopana was accepted as sovereign of the district, and soon became a ruler of opulence and distinction. Moikeha, still his chief adviser, built a sumptuous residence and heiau for himself, called Lanikeha, or “the heavenly resting-place,” and became noted for his hospitality.
A favorable breeze carried them to the Society group, and they finally arrived at the island of Raiatea, where they took control of the district of Moaula, either by force or through other means. Olopana was recognized as the leader of the district, quickly becoming a wealthy and distinguished ruler. Moikeha, still his main advisor, built an extravagant home and a heiau for himself, named Lanikeha, or “the heavenly resting-place,” and became well-known for his hospitality.
For some time—perhaps for four or five years—the brothers dwelt together in harmony, and then misunderstanding and trouble came between them—it need scarcely be said, through a woman—which drove Moikeha again to the sea and separated them for ever. A meddlesome native chief named Mua, who was jealous of the popularity of Moikeha and desirous of supplanting him in the favor of Olopana, called the attention of Luukia on several occasions to Moikeha’s affluent style of living, and intimated that his purpose was to thereby secure the friendship of influential chiefs, and in the end wrest the sovereignty of the district from his brother. Alarmed at last, she bore the tale to her husband, and at length succeeded in arousing his suspicions. A coldness toward Moikeha very naturally followed. Olopana could not help but note his brother’s increasing popularity, and one day took occasion to rebuke him for his extravagance and love of display, suggesting, at the same time, that a more modest style of living would comport better with his position. Moikeha, who had never harbored a thought that was not loyal to his brother, was profoundly grieved at these words of suspicion, and resolved to leave Raiatea at once and return to the Hawaiian Islands. Feeling that he had gone too far in thus indirectly accusing his brother of meditated treachery, Olopana endeavored to persuade him to remain; but Moikeha’s resolution could not be shaken, and he set about preparing at once for his return to the Hawaiian group.
For a while—maybe four or five years—the brothers lived together in peace, but then misunderstandings and trouble arose between them—it’s hardly surprising, it was because of a woman—which drove Moikeha back to the sea and separated them forever. A meddling local chief named Mua, who was jealous of Moikeha’s popularity and wanted to take his place in Olopana's favor, pointed out multiple times to Luukia Moikeha's wealthy lifestyle, suggesting that he was trying to win over influential chiefs and ultimately take control of the area from his brother. Eventually alarmed, she relayed the story to her husband, managing to stir his suspicions. Naturally, this led to a growing coldness toward Moikeha. Olopana couldn’t ignore his brother’s rising fame and one day confronted him about his extravagance and love for show, suggesting that a simpler lifestyle would be more fitting for his position. Moikeha, who had always been loyal to his brother, was deeply hurt by these accusations and decided to leave Raiatea and return to Hawaii. Realizing he had gone too far in indirectly accusing his brother of plotting against him, Olopana tried to convince him to stay; however, Moikeha’s resolution was firm, and he immediately began preparing for his trip back to the Hawaiian Islands.
The number of canoes manned and provisioned for the voyage is not stated; but tradition avers that the fleet was equipped under the superintendence of Moikeha’s famous prophet and astrologer, Kamahualele; and, with the priest Mookini, Laamaomao, the director of the winds, and a large party of chiefs and retainers, the expedition set sail for Hawaii, the young chief Laa being left behind with Olopana. [122]
The number of canoes ready and supplied for the journey isn't mentioned; however, it's said that the fleet was organized under the guidance of Moikeha’s renowned prophet and astrologer, Kamahualele. Along with the priest Mookini, Laamaomao, who controlled the winds, and a sizable group of chiefs and followers, the expedition departed for Hawaii, leaving the young chief Laa behind with Olopana. [__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]
It was one of the most imposing fleets that had ever sailed out of the harbor of Opoa. The large double canoe bearing Moikeha and his priests, gods, astrologer, principal navigator, wind director and personal attendants, was the same in which he had sailed for Kahiki. The kaulua was nearly a hundred feet in length, and afforded ample accommodations for the forty or more persons assigned to it. It was painted red, and at the masthead floated the pennon of a Polynesian alii.
It was one of the most impressive fleets that had ever left the harbor of Opoa. The large double canoe carrying Moikeha and his priests, gods, astrologer, chief navigator, wind guide, and personal attendants was the same one he had used to sail to Kahiki. The kaulua was nearly a hundred feet long and had plenty of space for the forty or so people on board. It was painted red, and at the top of the mast flew the flag of a Polynesian alii.
Moikeha embarked with a number of distinguished companions, but the most noted was Laamaomao—a name signifying, perhaps, the sacred bluish green or wind clouds. He was the director of the winds, which were stored in his ipu, or calabash, and went forth at his bidding. He bore a close resemblance to the Æolus of the Greeks. After accompanying Moikeha to the Hawaiian Islands he took up his abode near a place called Hale-a-Lono, a well-known eminence of Kaluakoi, on the island of Molokai, and was subsequently deified and worshipped as an aumakua, or god of the winds.
Moikeha set out with several distinguished companions, but the most notable was Laamaomao—a name that possibly means the sacred bluish-green or wind clouds. He was the master of the winds, which were kept in his ipu, or calabash, and released at his command. He closely resembled the Greek god Æolus. After traveling with Moikeha to the Hawaiian Islands, he settled near a place called Hale-a-Lono, a well-known hill in Kaluakoi on the island of Molokai, and was later deified and worshipped as an aumakua, or god of the winds.
With musicians and drummers to enliven the spirits of the voyagers, and favoring winds from the ipu of Laamaomao, the journey seems to have been prosperous, and no incident of note occurred until the island of Hawaii was sighted. As the green hills of Kau came to view songs and shouts of joy went up from the canoes. A voyage of over twenty-five hundred miles in open boats had tested the patience of the party, and land at last was a joyous sight to them all. Many leaped into the water and swam beside the canoes. Mookini, the high-priest, burned incense before the gods, at the same time addressing them a prayer of thanksgiving, and Kamahualele, the astrologer and poet, recited an inspiring chant in further celebration of the occasion. The chant has been preserved by tradition.
With musicians and drummers to lift the spirits of the travelers, and favorable winds from the ipu of Laamaomao, the journey seemed to go well, and nothing significant happened until the island of Hawaii came into view. As the green hills of Kau appeared, songs and shouts of joy erupted from the canoes. A voyage of over twenty-five hundred miles in open boats had tested the party's patience, and land at last was a joyful sight for everyone. Many jumped into the water and swam alongside the canoes. Mookini, the high priest, burned incense before the gods, while offering a prayer of thanksgiving, and Kamahualele, the astrologer and poet, recited an inspiring chant to further celebrate the occasion. The chant has been preserved through tradition.
Some of the early poetic accounts of the first appearance of the islands of Hawaii above the surface of the ocean mention Hawaii, the largest of the group, as suddenly rising from the great deep and becoming a part of a row or cluster of islands “stretching to the farthest ends of Kahiki,” from which it is conjectured that, centuries back in the past, islands now no longer existing marked the way at intervals between the Society and Hawaiian groups. The other islands of the Hawaiian cluster are referred to as natural births, their parents being demi-gods [123]or distinguished chiefs. Thus, in the language of an old chant:
Some of the early poems about the first appearance of the islands of Hawaii above the ocean mention Hawaii, the largest island in the group, as suddenly emerging from the deep and joining a row of islands “stretching to the farthest ends of Kahiki.” It’s believed that, centuries ago, islands that no longer exist marked the way between the Society and Hawaiian groups. The other islands in the Hawaiian cluster are described as natural births, with demi-gods or notable chiefs as their parents. So, in the words of an old chant:
“Rising up is Hawaii-nui-akea!
“Rising up is Hawaiʻi-nui-ākea!”
Rising up out of the night (Po)!
Rising up out of the night!
Appeared has the island, the land,
The island appeared, the land,
The string of islands of Nuuamea,
The string of islands of Nuuamea,
The cluster of islands stretching to the farthest ends of Kahiki.
The group of islands reaching out to the distant corners of Kahiki.
To Kuluwaiea of Haumea, the husband,
To Kuluwaiea of Haumea, the husband,
To Hina-nui-a-lana, the wife,
To Hina-nui-a-lana, the wife,
Was born Molokai, a god, a priest,
Was born in Molokai, a god, a priest,
The first morning light from Nuuamea.
The first morning light from Nuuamea.
Up stands Akuhinialaa,
Up stands Akuhinialaa,
The chief from the foreign land;
The chief from the foreign land;
From the gills of the fish
From the gills of the fish
From the overwhelming billows of Halehale-kalani,
From the massive waves of Halehale-kalani,
Born is Oahu, the wohi,
Born in Oahu, the wohi,
The wohi of Akuhinialaa,
The wohi of Akuhinialaa,
And of Laamealaakona the wife.”
"And Laamealaakona's wife."
Kamahualele began by repeating an ancient story of the origin of the several islands of the group, and concluded his chant with these hopeful words:
Kamahualele started by recounting an old tale about how the various islands of the group came to be, and wrapped up his chant with these optimistic words:
“O Haumea Manukahikele.
“O Haumea Manukahikele."
O Moikeha, the chief who is to reside,
O Moikeha, the chief who is going to live,
My chief will reside on Hawaii—a!
My boss will be living in Hawaii—wow!
Life, life, O buoyant life!
Life, life, oh vibrant life!
Live shall the chief and priest,
Live shall the chief and priest,
Live shall the seer and the slave,
Live shall the seer and the slave,
Dwell on Hawaii and be at rest,
Dwell on Hawaii and find peace,
And attain old age on Kauai.
And grow old in Kauai.
O Kauai is the island—a!
O Kauai is the island!
O Moikeha is the chief!”
“O Moikeha is the boss!”
Thus sang the poet, with his face toward the verdant slopes of Kau, while the canoes of the fleet gathered around him, that all might hear the words of one who read the fate of mortals in the stars.
Thus sang the poet, facing the green slopes of Kau, while the canoes of the fleet gathered around him, so that everyone could hear the words of someone who read the fate of mortals in the stars.
II.
The prediction of Kamahualele, inspired by a sudden view of the coast of Hawaii, was verified. A landing was made in the [124]district of Kau, the most southerly point of the island. There securing supplies of provisions and water, the next landing was effected at Cape Kumukahi, in the district of Puna; but a recent eruption from the crater of Kilauea, or a subterranean channel connected with it, had devastated a wide strip of country near the coast, and after a brief stay sail was made for Kohala. Landing in that district, Moikeha and his party were well received by Kaniuhi, the alii-nui and grandson of Pili, and permission to offer sacrifices in behalf of the expedition in the great heiau of Mookini was accorded the high-priest of Moikeha, whose name, by singular coincidence, was identical with that of the temple, erected by the high-priest Paao more than two generations before.
The prediction of Kamahualele, inspired by a sudden view of the coast of Hawaii, came true. They landed in the [__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__] district of Kau, the southernmost point of the island. There, they gathered supplies of food and water before making their next landing at Cape Kumukahi, in the district of Puna. However, a recent eruption from the Kilauea crater, or a connected underground channel, had devastated a large area near the coast, and after a short stay, they set sail for Kohala. When they arrived in that district, Moikeha and his group were warmly welcomed by Kaniuhi, the alii-nui and grandson of Pili, who granted permission for the high priest of Moikeha to offer sacrifices for the expedition at the great heiau of Mookini. Coincidentally, the high priest's name was the same as that of the temple, which had been built by the high priest Paao more than two generations earlier.
Leaving Kohala, Moikeha next touched at Hanuaula, on the island of Maui; but, without stopping to exchange courtesies with Haho, the noted moi of that division of the island, he sailed immediately for Oahu. His purpose was to visit his royal father, Mulielealii, whose residence was at Ewa; but his priest and seer so strongly protested against the visit, declaring it to be contrary to the will of the gods, that he directed his course around the northern side of the island, touching at Makapuu and Makaaoa, and then sailing directly for the island of Kauai.
Leaving Kohala, Moikeha next arrived at Hanuaula on the island of Maui; however, without stopping to greet Haho, the well-known ruler of that region, he sailed straight to Oahu. His intention was to visit his royal father, Mulielealii, who lived in Ewa; but his priest and seer strongly advised against the visit, stating it went against the will of the gods. As a result, he changed his route to sail around the northern side of the island, stopping at Makapuu and Makaaoa, and then heading directly for the island of Kauai.
On the evening of the second day after leaving Oahu, Moikeha anchored his canoes in a roadstead not far from Kapaa, Kauai, where Puna, the governing alii of the island, held his court, surrounded by the chiefs of his family and a large number of retainers. Puna was one of the most popular rulers in the group, and, strict as he may have been in the exercise of his prerogatives, was always merciful in dealing with offences thoughtlessly or ignorantly committed. He would pardon the humble laborer who might inadvertently cross his shadow or violate a tabu, but never the chief who deliberately trespassed upon his privileges or withheld a courtesy due to his rank. His disposition was naturally warlike, but as the condition of the island was peaceful, and military force was seldom required except in repelling occasional plundering raids from the other islands, he kept alive the martial spirit of his chiefs and subjects by frequent sham fights, marine drills, and the encouragement of athletic games and friendly contests at arms, in which he himself sometimes took part. Feasting and dancing usually followed these [125]warlike pastimes, and the result was that the court of Puna became somewhat noted for the chivalry of its chiefs and the splendor of its entertainments.
On the evening of the second day after leaving Oahu, Moikeha anchored his canoes in a bay not far from Kapaa, Kauai, where Puna, the ruling chief of the island, held his court, surrounded by his family chiefs and many attendants. Puna was one of the most popular leaders among them, and although he could be strict in exercising his power, he was always lenient when handling offenses committed unintentionally or out of ignorance. He would forgive a humble worker who might accidentally cross his shadow or break a taboo, but he never forgave a chief who deliberately trespassed on his rights or failed to show him the respect his rank deserved. His nature was naturally combative, but since the island was peaceful and military force was rarely needed except to fend off occasional raids from other islands, he maintained the fighting spirit of his chiefs and subjects by organizing frequent mock battles, marine drills, and promoting athletic games and friendly contests, in which he sometimes participated himself. Feasting and dancing usually followed these martial activities, leading to Puna's court becoming known for the chivalry of its chiefs and the grandeur of its celebrations.
Puna had but one child, a daughter named Hooipo. Tradition describes her as having been, like the most of royal daughters painted by the poets, a very comely maiden. She was therefore the pride and glory of the court, and as she grew to a marriageable age her favor was sought by a number of aspiring chiefs whose rank entitled them to consideration; but, flattered by the contest for her smiles, and naturally vain of a face which the unruffled waters told her was attractive, she evinced no haste in making choice of a husband.
Puna had only one child, a daughter named Hooipo. Tradition portrays her as being, like most royal daughters described by poets, a very beautiful young woman. She was the pride and joy of the court, and as she reached the age for marriage, she caught the attention of several ambitious chiefs whose status made them worthy candidates. However, with all the attention and compliments she received, and feeling confident about her good looks, she showed no urgency in choosing a husband.
This tardiness or indecision was but very gently rebuked by Puna. Although one tradition gives him two daughters, Hooipo was doubtless his only child, and he was therefore indisposed to hasten an event which would probably lead to their separation. But, as time passed, the suitors of the young chiefess became so persistent, and the rivalry for her assumed so bitter and warlike an aspect, that Puna deemed it prudent for her to restore harmony among the rivals by making a choice at once. But for no one of them did she seem to entertain a decided preference, and therefore suggested that, since a choice must be made, she was willing to leave it to the arbitrament of such manly contest between the rivals as might comport with their dignity and the character of the prize at stake. Puna eagerly accepted the suggestion, as it opened the way to a selection without incurring the enmity of all but the one chosen.
Puna lightly chided the young chiefess for her delay and indecision. While one story claims he had two daughters, Hooipo was certainly his only child, so he was reluctant to rush into a situation that would likely lead to her separation. However, as time went on, the suitors for the young chiefess became increasingly aggressive, and the competition for her turned quite fierce and hostile. Puna thought it was wise for her to choose someone quickly to help restore peace among the rivals. Yet, she didn’t seem to favor any of them specifically, so she proposed that, since a decision needed to be made, she was open to letting the rivals decide through a contest that would uphold their dignity and reflect the value of her hand in marriage. Puna gladly accepted this idea because it allowed for a choice without creating animosity with everyone except the one who was selected.
But what should be the nature of the contest? Each of the rival chiefs was probably noted for his skill in some especial accomplishment, and the difficulty was in naming a trial that would seem to be just to all. Unable to decide the matter himself, Puna appealed to the high-priest, and the next day announced that his palaoa—a talisman consisting of a whale’s tooth, carved and sanctified—would be sent by a trusty messenger to the little island of Kaula; that four days thereafter the rival chiefs should, each in his own canoe, start at the same time and place from Kauai, and the one who returned with the palaoa, which the messenger would be instructed to give to the first of the contesting chiefs to land and claim it on the rocks of Kaula, should be the husband of Hooipo, and the others must remain his friends. [126]The size of the canoes was left to the discretion of the several contestants, but as no more than four assistants would be allowed to each, very large canoes, of course, would not be used. Any means of speed might be employed, including oars, paddles and sails.
But what should the contest be like? Each of the rival chiefs was probably known for his unique skills, and the challenge was figuring out a fair trial for everyone. Unable to resolve this on his own, Puna turned to the high priest, and the next day he announced that his palaoa—a carved and blessed whale’s tooth—would be sent by a reliable messenger to the small island of Kaula. Four days later, the rival chiefs would each set off in their own canoe at the same time and place from Kauai, and whoever returned with the palaoa, which the messenger would give to the first chief who landed and claimed it on the rocks of Kaula, would win Hooipo’s hand, while the others would remain his friends. [__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]The size of the canoes was left up to each contestant, but since only four assistants were allowed per canoe, they obviously wouldn’t be using very large ones. They could use any means of speed, including oars, paddles, and sails.
The contest was admitted to be as fair as any that could be devised, and the rival chiefs declared themselves satisfied with it, and began to prepare for the race by securing suitable canoes and skilful and stalwart assistants. It promised to be an exciting contest, and the whole of Kapaa was on tiptoe to witness the start.
The contest was considered as fair as any that could be created, and the rival leaders expressed their satisfaction with it, beginning to get ready for the race by finding the right canoes and capable, strong helpers. It was set to be an exciting competition, and everyone in Kapaa was eager to see the start.
After a few days of preparation the messenger of Puna was despatched with the palaoa to Kaula, with instructions to place it in the hands of the first of the contesting chiefs to claim it on that island. The messenger had been gone two days, and had probably reached his destination, as the distance to be travelled was but little more than a hundred miles, and the rival chiefs had everything in readiness to bend their sails for Kaula, when Moikeha, as already stated, anchored his fleet in the evening off Kapaa.
After a few days of getting ready, the messenger from Puna was sent out with the palaoa to Kaula, instructed to give it to the first of the competing chiefs who claimed it on that island. The messenger had been gone for two days and had likely reached his destination since the distance was just over a hundred miles. The rival chiefs had everything set to set sail for Kaula when Moikeha, as mentioned earlier, anchored his fleet in the evening off Kapaa.
Early next morning, with his double canoe flying the standard of his rank and otherwise becomingly dressed, Moikeha went ashore, where he was cordially received by the chiefs of the district, and in due time escorted to the sovereign mansion and presented to Puna. Without referring to his family connections, he simply announced that he was a chief from the distant land of Kahiki, and was traveling through the Hawaiian group on a tour of observation and pleasure. He wore a maro fringed with shells, a kihei or mantle of finely-woven and decorated cloth, and on his head a lei-alii of brilliant feathers, while from his neck was suspended by a cord of plaited hair a curious ornament of mother-of-pearl set in ivory. He was a handsome representative of savage manhood, and his bearing was dignified, correct and courtly.
Early the next morning, with his double canoe displaying the flag of his rank and dressed appropriately, Moikeha went ashore, where the local chiefs warmly welcomed him. He was soon escorted to the royal residence and presented to Puna. Without mentioning his family background, he simply stated that he was a chief from the distant land of Kahiki, traveling through the Hawaiian islands for exploration and enjoyment. He wore a maro trimmed with shells, a kihei or mantle made of finely-woven and decorated fabric, and a lei-alii of vibrant feathers on his head. Around his neck hung a unique mother-of-pearl ornament set in ivory, suspended by a cord of braided hair. He was a striking example of noble manhood, and his demeanor was dignified, composed, and graceful.
During his audience with Puna, Moikeha met Hooipo—most likely by accident, but he was so charmed by her bright eyes that he did not leave the mansion until he found occasion to exchange a few pleasant words with her. They seemed to be mutually pleased with each other, and Moikeha accepted the invitation of the chief to consider himself his guest until the next [127]day, at the same time allowing him to send fresh provisions to his people, whose canoes had been drawn up on the beach.
During his meeting with Puna, Moikeha ran into Hooipo—probably by chance, but he was so captivated by her bright eyes that he didn’t leave the mansion until he found a moment to exchange a few friendly words with her. They both seemed to enjoy each other’s company, and Moikeha accepted the chief's invitation to stay as his guest until the next [__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__] day, while also allowing him to send fresh supplies to his people, whose canoes were pulled up on the beach.
A brilliant entertainment of feasting, music and dancing in honor of the distinguished stranger followed in the evening, during which Moikeha was favored with the companionship of Hooipo, and learned of the contest about to take place between the rival chiefs of Kauai to determine to whom she should be given in marriage.
A fantastic evening of feasting, music, and dancing took place in honor of the distinguished guest. During this time, Moikeha enjoyed the company of Hooipo and learned about the contest that was about to happen between the rival chiefs of Kauai to decide who would win her hand in marriage.
Hilarity and feasting were the order of the next day and evening, for on the morning following the contesting chiefs were to start for Kaula under the eye of Puna. Their well-equipped canoes were on the beach, and their crews, drilled to work sail and oar together, were in readiness.
Hilarity and feasting filled the following day and evening, because on the morning after the contesting chiefs were set to leave for Kaula under Puna's supervision. Their well-equipped canoes were on the beach, and their crews, trained to work the sails and oars in unison, were ready.
Morning came, and with it a large concourse of people to witness the departure of the chiefs. The canoes and their attending crews were examined, and many wagers laid on the result of the race. Finally the contesting chiefs made their appearance, followed shortly after by Puna and the most of his household, including Hooipo, who was conveyed to the beach in a manele borne on the shoulders of four stout attendants. She was attired in an embroidered pau—a short skirt of five thicknesses of thin kapa cloth reaching to the knees—and a cape or short mantle trimmed with feathers. Her hair was braided in a single strand at the back; her head and neck were adorned with leis of flowers and feathers, and her limbs were ornamented with circlets of shells and tinted seeds.
Morning arrived, bringing a large crowd of people to see the chiefs off. The canoes and their crews were inspected, and many bets were placed on the outcome of the race. Eventually, the competing chiefs showed up, followed shortly by Puna and most of his household, including Hooipo, who was brought to the beach in a manele carried by four strong attendants. She wore an embroidered pau—a short skirt made of five layers of thin kapa cloth that reached her knees—and a feather-trimmed cape or short mantle. Her hair was braided in a single strand at the back; her head and neck were decorated with leis made of flowers and feathers, and her arms were adorned with rings of shells and colored seeds.
Everything being in readiness, the contending chiefs, eight in number, appeared before the alii-nui, and, bowing low, proceeded in turn to recite their kuauhaus, or genealogies, as they had been called upon to do, to show in a formal manner that all their strains were noble. As each concluded he again bowed, giving Hooipo a smile and look of confidence, and stepped back to await the signal of departure.
Everything being ready, the eight competing chiefs appeared before the alii-nui, bowed deeply, and took turns reciting their kuauhaus, or genealogies, as they were asked to do, to formally demonstrate that all their lineages were noble. Once each had finished, he bowed again, giving Hooipo a smile and a confident look, and stepped back to wait for the signal to leave.
The last of them had given his pedigree, the terms of the contest had again been announced in form by a herald, and Puna was about to order the simultaneous launching of the canoes, when Moikeha, whose presence had not before been observed by the chiefs, suddenly presented himself before the alii-nui, and, bowing first to him and then courteously to the chiefs, said: [128]
The last of them had given his background, the rules of the contest were announced again by a herald, and Puna was about to signal the simultaneous launch of the canoes, when Moikeha, whose presence had not been noticed by the chiefs before, suddenly appeared before the alii-nui, bowing first to him and then politely to the chiefs, and said: [__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]
“Great chief, as this trial seems to be free to all of noble blood, I accept the terms, and ask permission to present myself as a contestant for the prize.”
“Great chief, since this trial is open to anyone of noble blood, I accept the terms and would like to put myself forward as a contestant for the prize.”
The chiefs exchanged glances of surprise, and a pleased expression lighted up the face of Hooipo, who until that moment had manifested but little interest in what was transpiring around her.
The chiefs exchanged surprised looks, and a pleased smile appeared on Hooipo's face, who until that moment had shown little interest in what was happening around her.
Puna hesitated a moment, and then graciously replied:
Puna paused for a moment and then replied kindly:
“Noble stranger, if your rank is level with the conditions, and the chiefs now ready for departure urge no objection, my consent will not be withheld.”
“Noble stranger, if your status matches the circumstances, and the leaders preparing to leave have no objections, I will not hold back my agreement.”
A hurried consultation among the chiefs showed that some of them objected; but as the stranger, with no knowledge of the coast and apparently no canoe or crew in readiness, did not seem to be a competitor to be feared, it was finally agreed that, should he be able to establish his rank, which a few of them doubted, he might be admitted to the contest.
A quick discussion among the leaders revealed that some of them were against it; however, since the stranger was unfamiliar with the coastline and clearly didn't have a canoe or crew ready, he didn’t appear to be a serious threat. Eventually, they agreed that if he could prove his status, which a few of them were skeptical about, he could join the competition.
This resolution having been communicated, Moikeha gracefully bowed his thanks, and then began to recite his genealogy. Curious to learn the strain of the courtly stranger, the chiefs pressed around him, eagerly listening to every word. He began with Wakea, away back in the past, when his ancestors were residents of other lands referred to in Hawaiian story. Giving the record of thirteen generations, he brought the connection down to Nanamaoa, the pioneer of the first migratory influx to the Hawaiian group seven hundred years before. Thence, generation by generation, naming father, mother and heir, he traced down a line of sixteen successors to Maweke. Pausing a moment, while a look of surprise and wonder was exchanged by the listening chiefs, Moikeha continued:
This resolution being shared, Moikeha graciously bowed to express his thanks and then started to recount his family history. Intrigued to discover the lineage of the distinguished stranger, the chiefs gathered around him, eagerly hanging on to every word. He began with Wakea, going way back to when his ancestors lived in other lands mentioned in Hawaiian legends. After detailing thirteen generations, he connected it to Nanamaoa, the leader of the first wave of migration to the Hawaiian Islands seven hundred years ago. From there, he traced a line of sixteen successors down to Maweke, naming each father, mother, and heir. After a moment’s pause, during which the listening chiefs exchanged looks of surprise and awe, Moikeha continued:
“Maweke the husband,
"Maweke the husband,"
“Naiolaukea the wife;
“Naiolaukea the wife;
“Mulielealii the husband,
“Mulielealii the husband,
“Wehelani the wife;
"Wehelani the wife;"
“Moikeha the husband,
“Moikeha the husband,
“Hooipo the wife.”
"Hooipo, my wife."
Applause followed this announcement by the stranger that he was the son of Mulielealii, the alii-nui of Oahu, and the jesting and good-natured manner in which he concluded the kuauhau by predicting his success in the coming contest, and marriage [129]with Hooipo, made him no enemies among the competing chiefs. Hooipo was now sure that she could make a choice without the trouble and excitement of a race to Kaula; but the canoes were ready, and all she could do was to hope and pray that Moikeha would bring back the palaoa.
Applause erupted after the stranger announced that he was the son of Mulielealii, the chief of Oahu. He playfully wrapped up his speech by predicting his victory in the upcoming contest and his marriage to Hooipo, which won him no enemies among the rival chiefs. Hooipo now felt confident that she could choose without the stress and excitement of a race to Kaula; however, the canoes were prepared, and all she could do was hope and pray that Moikeha would return with the whale tooth.
But what were Moikeha’s preparations for the race? When asked by Puna, he pointed to a small canoe with an outrigger drawn up on the beach, and a single long-haired man of strange aspect standing motionless beside it with a paddle in his hand. Puna shook his head doubtingly, and Hooipo looked disappointed. Others who noted the stranger’s slim preparations for the race imagined that he was treating the contest as a jest; but he announced himself in readiness, and the signal for departure was given.
But what were Moikeha's preparations for the race? When Puna asked, he pointed to a small canoe with an outrigger pulled up on the beach and a lone long-haired man with a strange look standing still next to it, holding a paddle. Puna shook his head in doubt, and Hooipo looked disappointed. Others who saw the stranger's slim setup for the race thought he was taking the contest lightly; however, he declared that he was ready, and the signal to start was given.
The chiefs sprang toward the beach, and in a few minutes had launched their canoes and passed through the heavy surf, when with strong and steady pulling the race began in earnest for the open sea. Moikeha alone seemed to be in no haste. He took formal leave of Puna, and, noting Hooipo’s look of impatience, smilingly said to her as he turned toward the beach: “I will bring back the palaoa!” The assurance contented her. The other canoes were beyond the surf, but she believed him and was happy.
The chiefs rushed toward the beach, and within minutes, they had launched their canoes and navigated through the rough surf. With strong and steady strokes, the race for the open sea began in earnest. Moikeha, however, didn’t seem to be in a hurry. He formally said goodbye to Puna, and noticing Hooipo’s impatient expression, he smiled at her as he turned toward the beach and said, “I’ll bring back the palaoa!” His assurance made her feel better. The other canoes were already past the surf, but she trusted him and felt happy.
Satisfying himself that the sail was ready for use and everything required for the voyage aboard, Moikeha and his assistant shoved their canoe into the water, and with a few vigorous strokes of their paddles dashed through the surf. The passage was so adroitly made as to attract the attention of the many who witnessed it from the shore. For a few minutes the canoe remained almost motionless, except as it was tossed from wave to wave. Then the sail was spread. This movement was unaccountable to those on shore, for the little wind stirring was directly from the west, to which point the canoe was bearing for an offing to round the southern capes of the island. But if the witnesses were surprised at the spreading of a sail under such circumstances, they were little less than astounded when they saw the sail fill with wind and the canoe suddenly speed out to sea as if driven by a hurricane.
Satisfied that the sail was ready and everything needed for the voyage was on board, Moikeha and his assistant pushed their canoe into the water and with a few powerful strokes of their paddles dashed through the surf. The way they navigated caught the attention of many watching from the shore. For a few minutes, the canoe remained almost still, except for being tossed from wave to wave. Then the sail was raised. This action was puzzling to those on shore, as the light wind was coming directly from the west, while the canoe was heading out to round the southern points of the island. But if the onlookers were surprised by the sail being raised under those conditions, they were absolutely astonished when the sail filled with wind and the canoe shot out to sea as if caught in a hurricane.
Moikeha’s long-haired companion was Laamaomao, god of the winds, who had accompanied him from Raiatea. Behind the [130]sail sat the friendly deity, from whose exhaustless ipu of imprisoned winds a gale was sent forth which carried the canoe to Kaula before daylight the next morning. Effecting a landing soon after sunrise, Puna’s messenger was found, and at once delivered to Moikeha the palaoa, which he had been instructed to surrender to the chief first demanding it. Content in the possession of the talisman, Moikeha and his companion remained on the island for refreshment until past midday, and then started on their return to Kauai, favored by the same winds that had borne them to Kaula, but proceeding with less haste. Toward night the eight other chiefs landed within a few hours of each other, and great was their astonishment on learning that the palaoa had been delivered to a chief claiming it early that morning.
Moikeha’s long-haired companion was Laamaomao, the god of the winds, who had come with him from Raiatea. Behind the [__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]sail, the friendly deity sat, from whose endless ipu of contained winds a strong breeze was released, carrying the canoe to Kaula before dawn the next morning. After landing shortly after sunrise, Puna’s messenger was found and immediately handed the palaoa he was instructed to give to the chief who first requested it. Satisfied with the talisman, Moikeha and his companion stayed on the island to refresh themselves until after midday, then began their return to Kauai, aided by the same winds that had brought them to Kaula, but moving at a slower pace. By evening, the eight other chiefs arrived within a few hours of each other, and they were greatly surprised to learn that the palaoa had been given to a chief who had claimed it earlier that morning.
“He must have had wings,” said one of them.
“He must have had wings,” one of them said.
“He was surely helped by the gods,” suggested another, who had been the first to land after Moikeha. “But for that the palaoa would have been mine, as you all know. But who can struggle with the gods? Let us not incur their anger by complaint.”
“He definitely had the gods on his side,” suggested another, who had been the first to land after Moikeha. “Otherwise, the palaoa would have been mine, as you all know. But who can fight against the gods? Let's not provoke their anger by complaining.”
As it was easy for the others to reconcile themselves to Moikeha’s success, good-humor was soon restored, and the next morning, in company with the messenger, they all re-embarked for Kauai. On the evening of the same day Moikeha landed at Kapaa, and hastened to place in the hands of Puna the talisman which made him the husband of Hooipo. Now assured of the rank of the victor, Puna was gratified at his success, and Hooipo made no disguise of her joy. Tradition says she fell in love with the handsome stranger on first beholding him; but be that as it may, when he returned from Kaula with the palaoa she was frank enough to confess that his success had made her happy.
As it was easy for the others to accept Moikeha's success, good spirits were soon restored, and the next morning, along with the messenger, they all got back on the boat to Kauai. That same evening, Moikeha landed at Kapaa and quickly handed Puna the talisman that made him Hooipo's husband. Now confident of his victory, Puna was pleased with his success, and Hooipo openly showed her happiness. Tradition says she fell in love with the handsome stranger the first time she saw him; however, when he returned from Kaula with the palaoa, she was honest enough to admit that his success made her happy.
In the course of a few days all of the defeated chiefs returned to Kapaa, and Moikeha invited them to a feast, over which they forgot their rivalry and renewed the pledges of friendship embraced in the terms and made a condition of the contest. They sought by many ingenious ways to draw from Moikeha the secret of his success; but he failed to enlighten them, and they were compelled to content themselves with the belief that he had been assisted by some supernatural power, possibly by Apukohai, the great fish-god of Kauai, who sometimes seized canoes and bore them onward with almost incredible velocity. [131]
In just a few days, all the defeated chiefs came back to Kapaa, and Moikeha invited them to a feast where they put aside their rivalry and reaffirmed the promises of friendship that were part of the contest's terms. They tried many clever ways to get Moikeha to reveal the secret of his success, but he kept it to himself, leaving them to believe that he must have been helped by some supernatural force, perhaps by Apukohai, the powerful fish-god of Kauai, who sometimes would take canoes and move them forward with incredible speed. [__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]
In due time Hooipo became the wife of Moikeha, who, on the death of Puna, succeeded him as the alii-nui of Kauai, where he remained to the end of his life. He was blessed with a number of sons, through one of whom, it may be mentioned, the sovereignty of the island was continued in the family after Moikeha was laid under the black kapa.
In time, Hooipo became the wife of Moikeha, who succeeded Puna as the alii-nui of Kauai after Puna's death, and he stayed there until he passed away. He was blessed with several sons, and through one of them, the island's royal lineage continued in the family after Moikeha was placed under the black kapa.
III.
Tradition next refers to Moikeha about twenty-five years after his marriage with Hooipo. The death of Puna had left him the sovereignty of Kauai, and his principal residence was at Waialua. He had seven sons, and his court, like that of his predecessor, was noted for the distinguished chiefs, priests, prophets and poets connected with it.
Tradition now talks about Moikeha about twenty-five years after he married Hooipo. After Puna's death, he became the ruler of Kauai, and his main home was in Waialua. He had seven sons, and his court, similar to that of his predecessor, was known for the remarkable chiefs, priests, prophets, and poets associated with it.
As the life of Moikeha was drawing to a close a strong desire possessed him to see once more his foster-son Laa, whom, on his departure from Raiatea, he had left with his brother Olopana, whose presumptive heir and successor the young chief had become. In preparation for a journey thither he ordered a number of large double canoes to be repaired and put in order for the open sea, and had some time before despatched a large party of hunters to the cliffs along the coast for the feathers of the mamo, from which to fabricate a royal mantle for the ward of his youth.
As Moikeha's life was coming to an end, he felt a strong urge to see his foster-son Laa one more time. When he left Raiatea, he had entrusted Laa to his brother Olopana, and now the young chief had become the presumed heir and successor. To prepare for the journey, he ordered a number of large double canoes to be repaired and made ready for the open sea. Some time earlier, he had sent a large group of hunters to the cliffs along the coast to collect the feathers of the mamo to make a royal mantle for his young ward.
As but a single small yellow feather of the kind used in a royal mantle is found under each wing of the mamo, the task of securing the many thousands required was by no means a brief or easy service; but in time the feathers were gathered and the cloak was completed. As the choicest feathers alone were used, the garment was one of the most brilliant and elaborate ever made on Kauai, and represented the labor of a hundred persons for a year.
As just one small yellow feather, the kind used in a royal cloak, is found under each wing of the mamo, getting the thousands needed was definitely not a quick or easy job; however, eventually, the feathers were collected and the cloak was finished. Since only the finest feathers were used, the garment turned out to be one of the most stunning and intricate ever made on Kauai, reflecting the effort of a hundred people over the course of a year.
But when everything was in readiness for his departure for the south, Moikeha concluded that he was too old and feeble to undertake the voyage. In this conclusion he was sustained by the auguries of the prophets and the persuasion of his sons. [132]His third son was Kila. He was distinguished for his capacity and courage, and especially for his skill as a navigator, and it was finally decided that he should make the journey to Raiatea as the messenger of Moikeha, and invite Laa to revisit the Hawaiian group, assuring him of the feeble health of his foster-father and of his anxiety to embrace him before death separated them for ever.
But when everything was set for his departure to the south, Moikeha decided he was too old and weak to take the trip. This decision was supported by the prophecies of the seers and the encouragement of his sons. [__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]His third son was Kila. He was known for his abilities and bravery, especially for his navigational skills, and it was ultimately agreed that he would travel to Raiatea as Moikeha's messenger, inviting Laa to come back to the Hawaiian islands, assuring him of the poor health of his foster-father and his desire to see him before death separated them forever.
Kila was delighted with the mission. For several years intercourse between the Hawaiian and southern groups had been almost completely suspended, but from boyhood his dreams had been of visits to the far-off and misty shores of Kahiki, of which he had heard Moikeha speak; and now that an opportunity was presented for gratifying his appetite for adventure in unknown seas, his joy was boundless, and so vigorously did he push the work of preparation that in a few days the canoes were equipped and provisioned for the voyage. The provisions consisted, in long voyages of that period, of dried fish, dried bananas and plantains, cocoanuts, yams and potatoes, with poi and paiai, fresh fruits and cooked fowls and pigs, for early consumption. Large calabashes of fresh water were also provided, but frequent baths largely diminished the craving for that necessity.
Kila was thrilled about the mission. For several years, interactions between the Hawaiian and southern groups had nearly come to a halt, but ever since he was a boy, he had dreamed of visiting the distant and foggy shores of Kahiki, as he had heard Moikeha describe. Now that an opportunity had come up to satisfy his desire for adventure in uncharted waters, his excitement was limitless. He worked so hard on the preparations that within just a few days, the canoes were ready and stocked for the journey. The supplies included, for long voyages of that time, dried fish, dried bananas and plantains, coconuts, yams, and potatoes, along with poi and paiai, fresh fruits, and cooked chickens and pigs for immediate consumption. Large gourds of fresh water were also included, but frequent baths significantly reduced the need for that resource.
Sacrifices were offered, the auguries were pronounced favorable, and the fleet of double canoes set sail for the south. Kila was accompanied by three of his brothers, and, more important still, by the venerable Kamahualele, the friend and astrologer of Moikeha, who had borne him company from Raiatea more than a quarter of a century before, and chanted his inspired visions of the future off the coast of Kau. He went as Kila’s chief navigator and especial counsellor.
Sacrifices were made, the omens were interpreted positively, and the fleet of double canoes headed south. Kila was joined by three of his brothers and, even more significantly, by the esteemed Kamahualele, the friend and astrologer of Moikeha, who had traveled with him from Raiatea over twenty-five years earlier and had shared his prophetic visions of the future off the coast of Kau. He served as Kila’s main navigator and trusted advisor.
The fleet passed through the group and took its final departure from the most southern point of the island of Hawaii. Wind and weather were both favorable, and without a mishap of consequence the expedition arrived in due time at Raiatea, first touching for guidance at some of the other islands of the southern group.
The fleet moved through the group and set off for good from the southernmost point of Hawaii. The wind and weather were both on their side, and without any significant issues, the expedition arrived on time at Raiatea, first stopping at some of the other islands in the southern group for directions.
Kila landed at Opoa through the sacred entrance of Avamoa. His flag and state were recognized by Olopana, who was still living, and the sons of Moikeha and their personal attendants were ceremoniously conducted to the royal mansion, where Kila made known the purpose of his visit. Olopana was greatly interested in the story of Moikeha’s successful establishment on [133]Kauai, but refrained from referring to the circumstances which led to their separation many years before. He was also informed of the death of his father, Mulielealii, and the succession of his brother Kumuhonua to the rank and authority of alii-nui of Oahu.
Kila arrived at Opoa through the sacred entrance of Avamoa. His flag and status were recognized by Olopana, who was still alive, and the sons of Moikeha and their personal attendants were formally escorted to the royal mansion, where Kila explained the purpose of his visit. Olopana was very interested in the story of Moikeha’s successful establishment on [__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]Kauai, but he avoided mentioning the circumstances that led to their separation many years earlier. He was also informed about the death of his father, Mulielealii, and that his brother Kumuhonua had taken over the rank and authority of alii-nui of Oahu.
With the affectionate greetings of Moikeha, Kila presented to Laa the brilliant mamo, or royal mantle, of which he was made the bearer, and expressed the hope that he would comfort the few remaining days of his foster-father by returning with him on a visit to Kauai. Olopana strongly objected to the proposed journey, urging his advanced years and the probability of his early death; but when assured by Laa of his speedy return he reluctantly consented, and after a round of hospitable feasts and entertainments, in his own double canoes, and attended by his priest, astrologer, master of ceremonies, musicians, and a number of knightly and noble friends, Laa accompanied Kila and his party back to Hawaii.
With warm greetings from Moikeha, Kila presented Laa with the beautiful mamo, or royal mantle, which he was chosen to carry. He hoped to bring comfort to his foster-father in his last days by returning to Kauai with him. Olopana strongly opposed the trip, citing his old age and the likelihood of his imminent death. However, when Laa assured him he would return quickly, he reluctantly agreed. After a series of generous feasts and celebrations, in his own double canoes, and accompanied by his priest, astrologer, master of ceremonies, musicians, and several noble friends, Laa traveled back to Hawaii with Kila and his party.
The voyage was made in good time, and as the combined fleet, with canoes of royal yellow and pennons flying, coursed through the group to Kauai, stopping at several points to exchange courtesies with the ruling chiefs, it attracted unusual attention; and when Laa landed at Waialua, on the island of Oahu, to greet his relatives, and the people learned that the son of Ahukai had returned from the distant land of Kahiki rich in honors and possessions, they strewed his path with flowers and welcomed him as if he were a god.
The journey went smoothly, and as the fleet, with canoes in royal yellow and flags waving, made its way through the group to Kauai, stopping at various points to exchange greetings with the local chiefs, it caught a lot of attention. When Laa landed at Waialua on the island of Oahu to meet his relatives, the people found out that the son of Ahukai had come back from the faraway land of Kahiki, filled with honors and wealth. They showered his path with flowers and welcomed him like he was a god.
Proceeding to Kauai, after a brief stay at Waialua, Laa was affectionately received by Moikeha, his foster-father, who had left him a child in Kahiki, and for a month or more the Kauaian court blazed nightly with feasts and festivals given in his honor.
Proceeding to Kauai, after a short stay at Waialua, Laa was warmly welcomed by Moikeha, his foster-father, who had left him as a child in Kahiki, and for over a month, the Kauaian court sparkled every night with feasts and celebrations held in his honor.
Returning to Oahu, Laa took up his residence for a time at Kualoa. A large mansion was constructed for him, with ample accommodations for his friends and retainers, and the chiefs of the island esteemed it an honor to share his friendship and accept his hospitality.
Returning to Oahu, Laa settled for a while in Kualoa. A big mansion was built for him, with plenty of space for his friends and attendants, and the island's chiefs considered it a privilege to be his friends and enjoy his hospitality.
There was no jealousy of Laa, for it was known that he would soon return to Raiatea, there to permanently remain as the heir and successor of Olopana. In his veins ran the noblest blood of Oahu. He was the son of the great-grandson of the great Paumakua in direct and unchallenged descent, and the adopted [134]heir of the grandson of Maweke, the proud descendant of the Nanaula dynasty of kings.
There was no jealousy towards Laa, since everyone knew he would soon go back to Raiatea, where he would permanently stay as Olopana's heir and successor. He carried the finest bloodline of Oahu. He was the son of the great-grandson of the legendary Paumakua in a direct and undisputed lineage, and the adopted [__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__] heir of Maweke's grandson, who was a proud descendant of the Nanaula dynasty of kings.
It was not deemed well that the line of Paumakua, through so distinguished a representative as Laa, should be perpetuated solely on a foreign soil. From a suggestion the matter came to be seriously discussed by the leading chiefs, and finally Laa was approached on the subject. Being a young man, the patriotic proposal of the chiefs very naturally accorded with his tastes, and, without great persuasion, he expressed a willingness to comply with what seemed to be a general request.
It wasn’t considered right for the lineage of Paumakua, represented by someone as notable as Laa, to continue only on foreign land. After a suggestion, the leading chiefs seriously discussed the issue, and eventually, they brought it up with Laa. As a young man, Laa naturally resonated with the chiefs’ patriotic proposal, and, with little encouragement, he agreed to what appeared to be a collective request.
But the approval of Laa did not quite settle the delicate question, as the chiefs at once observed on casting around for a suitable wife for so desirable a husband. The most of them had daughters or sisters of eligible rank and age. But which one of them should they select? Whose family should be so honored? They were willing to leave the choice to Laa, but, sagaciously anticipating the result, he declined to make the selection.
But Laa's approval didn't fully resolve the sensitive issue, as the chiefs immediately began looking for a suitable wife for such a desirable husband. Most of them had daughters or sisters of the right rank and age. But which one should they choose? Which family would be honored? They were willing to let Laa make the decision, but wisely sensing the outcome, he chose to pass on the selection.
As usual in momentous cases of doubt, the high-priest was consulted, and the matter was settled in a manner quite satisfactory to Laa. It was agreed that he should marry three wives, all on the same day, and the maidens selected were Hoakanui, daughter of Lonokaehu, of Kualoa; Waolena, daughter of a chief of Kaalaea; and Mano, daughter of a chief of Kaneohe. All were noted for their beauty and distinguished blood.
As is typical in significant situations of uncertainty, the high priest was consulted, and the issue was resolved in a way that pleased Laa. It was decided that he would marry three wives, all on the same day, and the chosen maidens were Hoakanui, daughter of Lonokaehu from Kualoa; Waolena, daughter of a chief from Kaalaea; and Mano, daughter of a chief from Kaneohe. All three were known for their beauty and noble lineage.
The three brides were brought to the mansion of Laa, at Kualoa, on the day fixed for the triple marriage, and the event was celebrated with splendor and enthusiasm. The hoao, or marriage agreement, was made public by a herald, as was then the custom among the nobility; the brides, attired becomingly and decked with garlands, were delivered in form to the bride-groom, and in the evening a feast was served on the grounds to more than a thousand guests, with hula, mele, and other festive accompaniments, including mele-inoas, or songs of personal application to the new wives and their husband.
The three brides were taken to Laa's mansion in Kualoa on the day set for the triple wedding, and the celebration was filled with grandeur and excitement. The hoao, or marriage agreement, was publicly announced by a herald, as was customary among the nobility; the brides, dressed elegantly and adorned with garlands, were formally presented to the groom. In the evening, a feast was held on the grounds for over a thousand guests, complete with hula, mele, and other festive elements, including mele-inoas, or songs specifically dedicated to the new wives and their husband.
This triple marriage is one of the most thoroughly-established incidents of remote Hawaiian tradition. After his marriage Laa remained a year at Kualoa, and then began to prepare for his return to Raiatea. He looked forward to his departure with mingled feelings of regret and satisfaction, for his brief married life had been singularly as well as most bountifully blessed. On [135]the same day he had been presented with a son by each of his three wives, and an ancient chant thus refers to the event:
This triple marriage is one of the most well-established events in ancient Hawaiian tradition. After his wedding, Laa stayed a year at Kualoa before starting to prepare for his return to Raiatea. He anticipated his departure with mixed emotions of regret and happiness, as his short married life had been both unique and richly rewarding. On [__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]the same day, he was blessed with a son from each of his three wives, and an old chant describes the occasion this way:
“O Ahukai, O Laa-a, O Laa,
“O Ahukai, O Laa-a, O Laa,
O Laa from Kahiki, the chief;
O Laa from Kahiki, the chief;
O Ahukini-a-Laa,
O Ahukini-a-Laa,
O Kukona-a-Laa,
O Kukona-a-Laa,
O Lauli-a-Laa, the father
O Lauli-a-Laa, the dad
The triple canoe of Laa-mai-kahiki,
The triple canoe of Laa-mai-kahiki,
The sacred first-born children of Laa,
The sacred first-born kids of Laa,
Who were born on the same one day.”
Who were born on the same day.
Moikeha died soon after, and Laa bade farewell to the Hawaiian Islands and returned to Raiatea just in time to receive the dying blessing of Olopana. As he had promised, he left his three wives and their sons in Oahu, where they were well cared for. The names of the children, as mentioned in the chant quoted, were Ahukini-a-Laa, Kukona-a-Laa, and Lauli-a-Laa, from whom it was in after-generations the pride and glory of the governing families of Oahu and Kauai to trace their lineage. From Ahukini-a-Laa Queen Kapiolani, wife of Kalakaua, the present sovereign of the islands, is recorded in descent through a line of Kauaian chiefs and kings.
Moikeha passed away shortly after, and Laa said goodbye to the Hawaiian Islands and returned to Raiatea just in time to receive the final blessing from Olopana. True to his word, he left his three wives and their sons in Oahu, where they were well taken care of. The names of the children, as noted in the chant, were Ahukini-a-Laa, Kukona-a-Laa, and Lauli-a-Laa, from whom the governing families of Oahu and Kauai have proudly traced their ancestry through generations. Queen Kapiolani, the wife of Kalakaua, the current ruler of the islands, is recorded as a descendant of Ahukini-a-Laa through a lineage of Kauaian chiefs and kings.
Kila, after his return from Raiatea, established himself in the valley of Waipio, on the island of Hawaii, and became prosperous in the possessions abandoned by his uncle Olopana a generation before. He was the ancestor of several prominent Hawaiian families, who traced their descent to him as late as during the reign of Kamehameha I.
Kila, after coming back from Raiatea, settled in the valley of Waipio on the island of Hawaii and became successful with the belongings left behind by his uncle Olopana a generation earlier. He was the ancestor of several notable Hawaiian families, who could trace their lineage back to him even during the reign of Kamehameha I.
With the return of Laa to Raiatea all communication between the Hawaiian and southern groups seems to have abruptly terminated, and for a period of about six hundred years, or until the arrival of Captain Cook in 1778, the Hawaiians learned nothing of the great world beyond their little archipelago, and knew that lands existed elsewhere only through the mysterious mooolelos of their priests, and a folk-lore consisting of broken chains of fables and tales of the past in which the supernatural had finally become the dominant feature. [137]
With Laa's return to Raiatea, all communication between the Hawaiian and southern groups seems to have suddenly stopped. For about six hundred years, until Captain Cook arrived in 1778, the Hawaiians learned nothing about the larger world beyond their small archipelago. They only knew that other lands existed through the mysterious mooolelos told by their priests and a folklore made up of fragmented stories and tales from the past, where the supernatural had ultimately taken center stage. [__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]
The Elevation of Pele.
[138]
[__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]
CHARACTERS.
- Pelé, goddess of the volcanoes.
-
Moho, Pele's brothers. Kamakauá and Kanehekili, - Kalana, a chief from the southern islands.
- Kamaunui, wife of Kalana.
- Hina, daughter of Kalana and Kamaunui.
- Olopana, chief of Oahu and husband of Hina.
- Kahikiula, brother of Olopana.
- Kamapua'a, the monster son of Hina.
[139]
[__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]
THE APOTHEOSIS OF PELE.
PELE'S ULTIMATE TRANSFORMATION.
THE ADVENTURES OF THE GODDESS WITH KAMAPUAA.
THE ADVENTURES OF THE GODDESS WITH KAMAPUAA.
I.
In the pantheon of ancient Hawaiian worship—or, rather, of the worship of the group from the twelfth century to the nineteenth—the deity most feared and respected, especially on the island of Hawaii, was the goddess Pele. She was the queen of fire and goddess of volcanoes, and her favorite residence was the vast and ever-seething crater of Kilauea, beneath whose molten flood, in halls of burning adamant and grottoes of fire, she consumed the offerings of her worshippers and devised destruction to those who long neglected her or failed to respect her prerogatives.
In the world of ancient Hawaiian worship—from the twelfth century to the nineteenth— the most feared and respected deity, especially on the island of Hawaii, was the goddess Pele. She was the queen of fire and the goddess of volcanoes, and her favorite home was the expansive and constantly bubbling crater of Kilauea, where she consumed the offerings of her worshippers in halls of burning stone and fiery grottoes. She also brought destruction to those who neglected her or failed to honor her authority.
Her assistants and companions, as related by tradition, were her five brothers and eight sisters, all of them clothed with especial functions, and all but little less merciless and exacting than Pele herself. The first in authority under Pele was Moho, king of steam. The others were charged, respectively, with the duties of creating explosions, thunders and rains of fire, moving and keeping the clouds in place, breaking canoes, fighting with spears of flame, hurling red-hot masses of lava, and doing whatever else the goddess commanded.
Her assistants and companions, according to tradition, were her five brothers and eight sisters, each with specific roles, and almost as ruthless and demanding as Pele herself. The first in command under Pele was Moho, the king of steam. The others were responsible for creating explosions, thunder, and fiery rains, managing and positioning the clouds, breaking canoes, battling with flames, launching hot lava, and carrying out whatever else the goddess ordered.
As the family claimed tribute of the entire island of Hawaii, to receive it they frequently visited the active and extinct craters of other districts, and earthquakes heralded their departure from Kilauea. The temples of Pele were numerous, particularly in the neighborhood of old lava-flows, and their priests were always well sustained. The crater of Kilauea was especially sacred to the goddess, and the earth around it could not be safely disturbed. An offering was first made of a part of everything eaten there, and fruits, pigs, fowls, fish, and sometimes human beings, were thrown into the crater to appease the wrath of the goddess and avert a threatened overflow.
As the family took tribute from the entire island of Hawaii, they often visited both the active and dormant craters in other areas to collect it, with earthquakes signaling their departure from Kilauea. There were many temples dedicated to Pele, especially near old lava flows, and their priests were always well supported. The crater of Kilauea was particularly holy to the goddess, and the ground around it couldn't be disturbed without consequence. An offering was made of a portion of everything eaten there, and fruits, pigs, birds, fish, and sometimes even humans were thrown into the crater to calm the goddess's anger and prevent a potential lava overflow.
The Pele family was neither connected with, nor controlled [140]by, the supreme gods of Hawaiian worship, nor was it a part either of the ancient or later theocracy of the group, as brought down by the priesthood of Hika-paloa, the godhead and trinity of original creation. It was an indigenous and independent development of the twelfth century, until which period the family was unknown on Hawaii; and the strong hold it secured and for centuries maintained in the native heart was due partly to a popular faith in, and worship of, the spirits of departed chiefs and ancestors, and partly to the continued and ever-visible evidences of the power and malignity of the volcanic deities. And so, indeed, was it with the many other deities of Hawaiian adoration. While Kane was deemed the creator and undoubted superior of them all, they were seldom restrained in the exercise of their several functions, and individual appeals to them through their priests were necessary to secure their favor or placate their wrath.
The Pele family was not connected to or controlled by the supreme gods of Hawaiian worship, nor was it part of the ancient or later theocracy led by the priesthood of Hika-paloa, the deity and trinity of original creation. It was an independent and indigenous development of the twelfth century, and until that time, the family was unknown in Hawaii. The stronghold it established and maintained in the hearts of the locals for centuries was partly due to a widespread belief in and worship of the spirits of deceased chiefs and ancestors, and partly because of the ongoing and visible evidence of the power and danger of the volcanic gods. This was also true for many other deities worshipped in Hawaii. While Kane was considered the creator and the unquestionable top god, the others were rarely restricted in their roles, and individual requests to them through their priests were necessary to gain their favor or calm their anger.

Type of Scenery—on the Island of Kauai.
Type of Scenery—on the Island of Kauai.
With this brief reference to the worship and attributes of the terrible goddess and her family, the story of their mortal lives will now be told, and a plain relation given of the strange events which led to their apotheosis. Every tradition refers to them as deities at the time of their arrival at Hawaii and occupation of Kilauea, and all abound in marvellous tales of their exploits, the most wonderful being connected with the Oahuan warrior Kamapuaa, one of the lovers of Pele, who was transformed by the bards into a supernatural monster—a being half-man and half-hog—with powers almost equal to those of Pele herself. A careful analysis, however, of the various mooolelos of Pele and her family renders it plain that they came to the group as simple human beings, and as human beings lived and died, as did also Kamapuaa, and that superstition subsequently elevated their mortal deeds to the realms of supernatural achievement.
With this brief mention of the worship and qualities of the fearsome goddess and her family, we will now share the story of their mortal lives, along with a straightforward account of the unusual events that led to their deification. Every tradition describes them as gods when they arrived in Hawaii and settled at Kilauea, and there are countless incredible stories of their adventures, the most remarkable involving the Oahuan warrior Kamapuaa, one of Pele's lovers, who was transformed by the storytellers into a supernatural creature—a being half-man and half-hog—with powers nearly equal to those of Pele herself. However, a careful examination of the various mooolelos of Pele and her family makes it clear that they came to the islands as ordinary humans and lived and died as humans did, just like Kamapuaa, and that later superstition elevated their earthly actions to the level of supernatural deeds.
The Pele family came to Hawaii during the reign of Kamiole, the usurper, from one of the southern islands—probably Samoa—in about the year A.D. 1175. It was of chiefly blood, and also of priestly lineage, and, to escape the penalties of defeat, had, at the close of a long and disastrous war, fled northward and found a home on Hawaii. The head of the family had fallen in battle, and Moho, the eldest of the sons, assumed the direction of what remained of the once powerful household.
The Pele family arrived in Hawaii during the rule of Kamiole, the usurper, from one of the southern islands—most likely Samoa—around A.D. 1175. They came from a noble and priestly background, and to avoid the consequences of their defeat, they fled north after a long and devastating war, finding refuge in Hawaii. The family head had died in battle, and Moho, the eldest son, took charge of what was left of their once-mighty household.
The fugitives first landed at Honuapo, in the district of Kau, [141]but, finding no lands there available, coasted along to the southern shores of Puna, and finally located in the valleys back of Keauhou, among the foothills of Mauna Loa, including the crater of Kilauea. A few miles to the westward an overflow had reached the sea the year before, and as the volcano was still active, and earthquakes were of frequent occurrence in the neighborhood, the valleys had been deserted, and the new-comers who boldly settled there were soon spoken of as being under the especial protection of the gods, since they seemed to fear neither earthquakes nor threatened inundations of fire. Under the circumstances almost everything they did was credited to supernatural agencies, and it was not long before Pele, Moho and Kamakaua—the three most influential members of the little community—were regarded as kahunas of unusual sanctity and power.
The fugitives first arrived at Honuapo, in the Kau district, [__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]but, finding no available land there, they moved along the southern shores of Puna and eventually settled in the valleys behind Keauhou, among the foothills of Mauna Loa, including the Kilauea crater. A few miles to the west, lava from the previous year had flowed into the sea, and since the volcano was still active and earthquakes frequently shook the area, the valleys had been abandoned. The newcomers who confidently took up residence there were soon said to be under the special protection of the gods, as they appeared to fear neither earthquakes nor the threat of fire flows. Given the circumstances, nearly everything they did was attributed to supernatural forces, and it wasn't long before Pele, Moho, and Kamakaua—the three most influential members of the small community—were seen as kahunas of remarkable sanctity and power.
The Pele family proper consisted, at that time, of Pele, her two brothers, Moho and Kamakaua, and a younger sister named Ulolu, who was after her apotheosis known as Hiiaka-ika-pali-opele. With them, however, were a number of relatives—principally females, whose protectors had perished in the struggle preceding their departure from Samoa—and about thirty attendants. The brothers were large, stalwart men, who had distinguished themselves in arms in their native land, and their attendants were warriors of tried courage and capacity. From these companions and assistants were created the three additional brothers and seven sisters of Pele mentioned in the meles of the bards. One of the former—Kanehekili—is said to have been a hunchback, as was also Kamakaua, but the fighting qualities of neither seem to have been impaired by the deformity.
The Pele family at that time included Pele, her two brothers, Moho and Kamakaua, and a younger sister named Ulolu, who, after her transformation, was known as Hiiaka-ika-pali-opele. Along with them were several relatives—mostly women, whose protectors had died in the conflict before they left Samoa—and about thirty attendants. The brothers were big, strong men who had made a name for themselves in battle in their homeland, and their attendants were warriors known for their bravery and skill. From these companions and helpers came the three additional brothers and seven sisters of Pele mentioned in the meles of the bards. One of the brothers—Kanehekili—was said to be a hunchback, as was Kamakaua, but neither of their fighting abilities seemed to be affected by their deformities.
Pele was as courageous as she was personally attractive. She had taken an active part in the wars of her father, and with her own hand had slain a chief who attempted to abduct her. Her brothers were devoted to her, and her bright eyes and queenly presence commanded the respect and homage of all who approached her.
Pele was as brave as she was beautiful. She had played an active role in her father's wars and had personally killed a chief who tried to kidnap her. Her brothers were loyal to her, and her bright eyes and regal presence earned the respect and admiration of everyone who came near her.
And now, cultivating their lands in the valleys back of Keauhou, and living contentedly and without fear of molestation, we will leave the little colony for a time and refer to another important character in the story we are telling—Kamapuaa, the traditional monster of Oahu, whose deeds so aggrandize the [142]folk-lore of that island. In some meles he is depicted as a hog with a human head, and in others as a being with a human form and head of a hog; but in all he is described as a monster of prodigious bulk and malicious and predatory propensities.
And now, as they cultivate their lands in the valleys behind Keauhou and live peacefully without fear of disturbance, we’ll pause from the little colony for a moment to discuss another important character in our story—Kamapuaa, the legendary monster of Oahu, whose exploits greatly enrich the [__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]folklore of that island. In some meles, he's portrayed as a pig with a human head, while in others, he's depicted as a creature with a human body and a pig's head; but in all accounts, he is described as a massive monster with malicious and predatory traits.
II.
Glancing back a half-century or more before the landing of the Pele family in Puna, we note the arrival in the group of a number of independent parties of immigrants or adventurers from the southern islands. Among them were the chiefs Kalana and Huma. They came with considerable of a following, including the beautiful Kamaunui and a few of her relatives. The party landed on the island of Maui, and, after some wandering and change of locations, finally settled in Waihee, a spot noted for its beauty and natural advantages. Huma loved the fair Kamaunui. He had whispered soft words to her on their long journey from Kahiki, and fed her with the choicest food to be found among the stores of his great double canoe; but she loved Kalana better, and, when she became his wife, Huma abruptly left Waihee, returning, it is supposed, to his native land.
Looking back over fifty years or more before the Pele family landed in Puna, we see a group of independent immigrants and adventurers arriving from the southern islands. Among them were the chiefs Kalana and Huma. They came with quite a few followers, including the beautiful Kamaunui and some of her relatives. The group landed on the island of Maui, and after some wandering and changing locations, they finally settled in Waihee, a place known for its beauty and natural advantages. Huma was in love with the lovely Kamaunui. He had whispered sweet words to her during their long journey from Kahiki and fed her the best food from the stores of his large double canoe; however, she loved Kalana more, and when she became his wife, Huma abruptly left Waihee, presumably returning to his homeland.
The only child of this marriage was Hina, who on reaching womanhood became the wife of Olopana, a chief of the island of Oahu. Although of the same name, he was in nowise related to the Olopana who was the brother of Moikeha and grandson of Maweke. This chief had arrived from the south a few years before his marriage with Hina, and, with his younger brother, Kahikiula, settled in Koolau, or on the Koolau side of the island of Oahu, where he had acquired very considerable possessions. By what chance he met Hina, or through what influence he won her, tradition does not mention, but as his wife she went with him to Oahu, and there remained.
The only child of this marriage was Hina, who, upon reaching adulthood, became the wife of Olopana, a chief from the island of Oahu. Although they shared the same name, he was not related to the Olopana who was the brother of Moikeha and the grandson of Maweke. This chief had come from the south a few years before marrying Hina, and along with his younger brother, Kahikiula, settled in Koolau, or on the Koolau side of the island of Oahu, where he had acquired significant wealth. The details of how he met Hina or what attracted her to him are not specified in tradition, but as his wife, she went with him to Oahu, where she stayed.
Hina was fair, and Kahikiula, unlike his brother, was young and handsome. They were happy in the society of each other, and were therefore much together. She went with him to the hills for wild fruits and berries, and he followed her to the sea-shore to gather shells and limpets. The jealousy of Olopana was at last aroused, and when Hina presented him with a son he charged Kahikiula with its paternity and refused to accept the child as his own. This estranged the brothers and made the lot of Hina miserable. [143]
Hina was beautiful, and Kahikiula, unlike his brother, was young and charming. They enjoyed each other's company and spent a lot of time together. She accompanied him to the hills to pick wild fruits and berries, and he went with her to the beach to collect shells and limpets. Eventually, Olopana grew jealous, and when Hina gave birth to a son, he accused Kahikiula of being the father and refused to recognize the child as his own. This created tension between the brothers and made Hina's life difficult. [__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]
From its birth Olopana disliked the child, and in his resentment named it Kamapuaa, signifying a hog-child, or child of a hog. As the infant showed no marked physical characteristics of that animal, it is probable that Olopana fastened upon it the graceless appellation in a spirit of retaliation. But, whatever may have prompted its bestowal, the child certainly bore the name through life, thus giving to the bards who chanted the story of his acts the cue and pretext for shaping him into the monster depicted by tradition.
From the moment it was born, Olopana disliked the child and, out of resentment, named it Kamapuaa, which means hog-child or child of a hog. Since the infant didn't show any noticeable physical traits of that animal, it's likely that Olopana gave it that unflattering name as an act of revenge. Whatever the reason for the name, the child definitely carried it throughout life, providing the storytellers with the basis and justification to portray him as the monster described in tradition.
Having no love for Kamapuaa, Olopana took little interest in his growth from year to year to the mighty manhood which he finally attained, and which excited the admiration of all others. The more Kamapuaa was praised the greater dislike did Olopana feel for him, and at length the presence of the young giant became so obnoxious to him that he ordered him, under penalty of death, to leave the district.
Having no affection for Kamapuaa, Olopana barely paid attention to his growth from year to year into the impressive manhood he eventually achieved, which earned him admiration from everyone else. The more Kamapuaa was praised, the stronger Olopana's dislike for him grew, and eventually, the presence of the young giant became so intolerable to him that he ordered him to leave the area, threatening death if he refused.
Failing to understand the cause of this unnatural hatred, the anger of Kamapuaa was at last aroused, and he strode away from the home of his youth with his heart filled with bitterness and vows of vengeance. As he left, Kahikiula presented him with a long and finely-finished spear tipped with bone, and his mother threw over his broad shoulders the feather cape of a chief, and hung around his neck a palaoa, or talisman carved from the tooth of some great animal of the sea.
Failing to grasp the reason behind this unnatural hatred, Kamapuaa's anger finally boiled over, and he walked away from his childhood home, filled with bitterness and promises of revenge. As he left, Kahikiula gave him a long, well-crafted spear tipped with bone, and his mother draped a chief's feather cape over his broad shoulders and hung a palaoa, a talisman carved from the tooth of a large sea creature, around his neck.
Kamapuaa knew of a large cavern in the hills some miles distant from Koolau, the name by which will be designated the place of his birth, and thither he repaired and took up his residence. He led a wild, predatory life, and was soon joined by others as reckless as himself, until the party numbered fifty or sixty in all. Made bolder by this following, Kamapuaa began to harass the estates of Olopana. He stole his pigs, fowls and fruits, and whatever else his little band required, and delighted in breaking his nets, cutting adrift his canoes and robbing his fish-ponds. In a spirit of youthful bravado he had his body, from his loins upward, tattooed in black, shaved his head and beard to the resemblance of bristles, and hung from his shoulders a short mantle of tanned hog-skin, the hair being left to be worn on the outer side. In this guise his name did not seem to be altogether inappropriate, and he was pleased at the terror his appearance inspired. [144]
Kamapuaa knew of a large cave in the hills a few miles away from Koolau, the name for the place where he was born, so he went there and made it his home. He led a wild, carefree life and was soon joined by others who were just as reckless as he was, until their group grew to around fifty or sixty people. Feeling emboldened by this crew, Kamapuaa started to raid Olopana's lands. He stole his pigs, chickens, fruits, and whatever else his little gang needed, and he took pleasure in breaking Olopana's nets, cutting loose his canoes, and robbing his fish ponds. In a spirit of youthful daring, he had his body tattooed in black from the waist up, shaved his head and beard to look like bristles, and wore a short cloak made of tanned hog skin, with the hair on the outside. In this outfit, his name seemed fitting, and he took pride in the fear he inspired with his appearance. [__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]
Becoming still bolder, Kamapuaa resolved to inaugurate a more vigorous warfare upon Olopana, and began to cut down his cocoanut-trees and destroy his growing crops. This brought the matter to a crisis, as such acts were always regarded as a declaration of war. The depredations of Kamapuaa were invariably committed at night, and it was some time before the real aggressors were discovered. Koolau was filled with stories of the marauding exploits of a lawless band, led by a monster half-man and half-hog, and the kahunas were called upon to ascertain the character of the spoilers, and, if found to be supernatural, placate them with sacrifices.
Becoming even bolder, Kamapuaa decided to launch a more intense attack on Olopana, starting by cutting down his coconut trees and ruining his crops. This escalated the situation since such actions were always seen as a declaration of war. Kamapuaa’s raids happened mostly at night, and it took a while to figure out who was really behind them. Koolau was filled with tales about the lawless gang led by a half-man, half-hog creature, and the kahunas were called in to determine the nature of the attackers and, if they turned out to be supernatural, to appease them with sacrifices.
While the kilos were plying their arts the mystery was suddenly solved in a more practical manner. Detected one night in destroying the walls of one of Olopana’s fish-ponds, Kamapuaa and a number of his party were secretly followed to their hiding-place in the hills. This information was brought to Olopana, and he promptly equipped a small force of warriors to follow and capture or destroy the plundering band, which, he was enraged beyond all measure in learning, was under the leadership of his outcast son or nephew, Kamapuaa.
While the kilos were working their magic, the mystery was suddenly resolved in a more straightforward way. One night, while destroying the walls of one of Olopana’s fish ponds, Kamapuaa and some of his crew were secretly tracked to their hideout in the hills. This information was reported to Olopana, and he quickly gathered a small group of warriors to pursue and capture or eliminate the thieving gang, which, to his absolute fury, turned out to be led by his outcast son or nephew, Kamapuaa.
But the task of capturing or destroying Kamapuaa and his band was by no means an easy one. Of the party first sent to attack them in their mountain stronghold all were killed with the exception of a single warrior, and he was allowed to return to tell the tale of the slaughter and take to Olopana the defiance of Kamapuaa.
But capturing or destroying Kamapuaa and his group was far from easy. In the first party sent to attack them in their mountain hideout, everyone was killed except for one warrior, who was permitted to return and report the massacre and bring Olopana the news of Kamapuaa's defiance.
This satisfied the chief that Kamapuaa’s purpose was rebellion as well as pillage, and a force of six hundred warriors was organized and sent against the outlaws. This forced Kamapuaa to change his tactics, and, leaving their retreat, in which they might have been surrounded and brought to submission by famine, the rebels retired farther back into the mountains, where they for months defied the whole force of Olopana. Frequent skirmishes occurred and many lives were lost, but every attempt to surround and capture the desperate band was frustrated by the dash and sagacity of their leader.
This made the chief realize that Kamapuaa’s goal was not just looting, but also rebellion. A group of six hundred warriors was assembled and sent after the outlaws. This forced Kamapuaa to change his strategy, and instead of staying in a position where they could have been trapped and starved into submission, the rebels retreated farther into the mountains, where for months they resisted the entire force of Olopana. Frequent skirmishes took place, and many lives were lost, but every attempt to surround and capture the desperate group was thwarted by the bravery and cleverness of their leader.
Once, when closely pursued and pressed against the verge of a narrow gorge, the rebels crossed the chasm and escaped to the other side by some means unknown to their pursuers, and the story was told and believed that Kamapuaa, taking the form [145]of a gigantic hog, had spanned the gorge and given his followers speedy passage over his back to the other side, when he leaped across at a single bound and escaped with them. The spot marking this marvellous achievement is still pointed out at Hauula, and the tracks of the monster in the solid rock are shown.
Once, when they were being chased and cornered at the edge of a narrow gorge, the rebels crossed the gap and managed to escape to the other side by some means unknown to their pursuers. The story circulated and was believed that Kamapuaa, who transformed into a gigantic hog, had spanned the gorge and allowed his followers to quickly cross over his back to the other side when he leaped across in a single bound and escaped with them. The location marking this incredible feat is still pointed out at Hauula, and the tracks of the creature in the solid rock can be seen.
It is difficult to say just how long this desultory fighting continued, but in the end the rebels were surrounded and nearly destroyed, and Kamapuaa was captured unhurt and delivered over to Olopana, to the great joy and relief of the people of Koolau. Olopana had erected a heiau at Kaneohe, where Lonoaohi officiated as high-priest, and thither he resolved to take his rebellious son or nephew, and offer him as a sacrifice to the gods. Hina pleaded for the life of Kamapuaa, but Olopana could not be moved. Satisfied that he would listen to no appeals for mercy, she determined to save her son, even at the sacrifice of her husband, and to that end secured the assistance of the high-priest, through whose treachery to Olopana the life of Kamapuaa was saved.
It’s hard to say exactly how long this aimless fighting went on, but eventually the rebels were surrounded and almost wiped out. Kamapuaa was captured unharmed and handed over to Olopana, which brought great joy and relief to the people of Koolau. Olopana had built a heiau at Kaneohe, where Lonoaohi served as the high priest, and decided to take his rebellious son or nephew there to offer him as a sacrifice to the gods. Hina begged for Kamapuaa's life, but Olopana wouldn’t budge. Knowing he wouldn’t listen to any pleas for mercy, she resolved to save her son, even if it meant sacrificing her husband, and to achieve this, she enlisted the help of the high priest, who betrayed Olopana and saved Kamapuaa's life.
On the day fixed for the sacrifice Kamapuaa, carefully bound and strongly guarded, was taken to the heiau, followed by Olopana, who was anxious to witness the ghastly ceremonies, and with his own eyes see that his troublesome enemy was duly slain and his body laid upon the altar. In offering human sacrifices the victim was taken without the walls of the heiau and slain with clubs by the assistants of the high-priest. The body was then brought in and placed upon the altar in front of the entrance to the inner court, or sanctuary, when the left eye was removed by the officiating priest, and handed, if he was present, to the chief who had ordered the sacrifice. This being done, the offering was then ceremoniously made, and the body was left upon the altar for the elements to deal with.
On the day set for the sacrifice, Kamapuaa, tightly bound and heavily guarded, was brought to the heiau, followed by Olopana, who was eager to watch the gruesome rituals and see for himself that his troublesome enemy was properly killed and his body placed on the altar. For human sacrifices, the victim was taken outside the walls of the heiau and clubbed to death by the assistants of the high priest. The body was then brought inside and laid on the altar at the entrance to the inner court or sanctuary, where the officiating priest removed the left eye and handed it, if he was there, to the chief who had ordered the sacrifice. Once this was done, the offering was made in a ceremonial manner, and the body was left on the altar for the elements to take their course.
Standing, with three or four attendants, at the door of his tabued retreat, within forty or fifty paces of the altar, Olopana saw his victim preliminarily led to the place of sacrifice, and a few minutes after motioned for the ceremonies to begin. Kamapuaa was taken without the walls of the temple to be slain. He was in charge of three assistant priests, one of them leading him by a stout cord around his neck, another keeping closely behind him, and the third walking silently at his side with the [146]club of execution in his hand. Passing beyond the outer wall, the party entered a small walled enclosure adjoining, and the executioner raised his club and brought it down upon the head of his victim. Kamapuaa smiled, but did not move. Twice, thrice with mighty sweep the club descended upon the head of Kamapuaa, but scarcely bent the bristly hairs upon his crown.
Standing with three or four attendants at the door of his forbidden retreat, about forty or fifty steps away from the altar, Olopana watched as his victim was led to the place of sacrifice. A few minutes later, he signaled for the ceremonies to start. Kamapuaa was taken outside the temple walls to be killed. He was being handled by three assistant priests: one led him with a sturdy cord around his neck, another followed closely behind, and the third walked silently beside him, holding the executioner's club. After passing the outer wall, the group entered a small walled area next to it, where the executioner raised his club and struck it down on Kamapuaa's head. Kamapuaa smiled but didn’t flinch. The club came down upon his head again and again with powerful force, yet it barely disturbed the bristly hairs on his crown.
With a semblance of wonder the executioner, whose tender blows would have scarcely maimed a mouse, dropped his club and said:
With a sense of wonder, the executioner, whose gentle strikes could barely harm a mouse, dropped his club and said:
“Three times have I tried and failed to slay him! The gods refuse the sacrifice!”
“Three times I’ve tried and failed to kill him! The gods refuse the sacrifice!”
“It is so, it is so, it is so!” chimed his companions. “The gods indeed refuse the sacrifice! We have seen it!”
“It’s true, it’s true, it’s true!” chimed his friends. “The gods really reject the sacrifice! We’ve seen it!”
Therefore, instead of slaying Kamapuaa, the assistants, as they had been secretly instructed to do by the high-priest, removed the cords from his limbs, smeared his hair, face and body with the fresh blood of a fowl, and on their shoulders bore him back and placed him upon the altar as if dead.
Therefore, instead of killing Kamapuaa, the assistants, as they had been secretly instructed to do by the high priest, took off the cords from his limbs, smeared his hair, face, and body with the fresh blood of a chicken, and carried him back on their shoulders to place him on the altar as if he were dead.
The high-priest approached the apparently lifeless body, and bent for a moment over the face, as if to remove the left eye; then placing on a wooden tray the eye of a large hog, which had been procured for that purpose, he sent an assistant with it to Olopana, at the same time retiring within the inner court, and leaving by the side of Kamapuaa, and near his right hand, as if by accident, the sharp ivory pahoa, or dagger, with which he had, to all appearance, been operating.
The high priest walked over to the seemingly lifeless body and leaned down for a moment, almost as if he were going to take out the left eye. Then, he placed the eye of a large hog, which had been obtained for this purpose, on a wooden tray and sent an assistant with it to Olopana. At the same time, he moved into the inner court, leaving the sharp ivory pahoa, or dagger, by the side of Kamapuaa, near his right hand, almost as if it had been left there by chance.
Giving but a single glance at the eye presented to him by the assistant of the high-priest, Olopana passed it to an attendant without the customary semblance of eating it, and approached the altar alone. Kamapuaa did not breathe. His face was streaked with blood, his eyelids were closed, and not a single muscle moved to indicate life.
Giving just a quick glance at the eye presented to him by the high priest's assistant, Olopana handed it to an attendant without pretending to eat it and walked to the altar alone. Kamapuaa was completely still. His face was smeared with blood, his eyelids were shut, and not a single muscle twitched to show he was alive.
Olopana looked at the hated face for a moment, and then turned to leave the heiau, not caring to witness the ceremonies of the formal offering. As he did so Kamapuaa clutched the dagger beside his hand, and, springing from the altar, drove the blade into the back of Olopana. Again and again he applied the weapon until the chief, with a groan of anguish, fell dead at the feet of his slayer.
Olopana glanced at the face he despised for a moment and then turned to leave the heiau, not wanting to watch the formal offering ceremonies. As he did this, Kamapuaa grabbed the dagger next to him, lunged from the altar, and plunged the blade into Olopana's back. He stabbed him repeatedly until the chief, groaning in pain, collapsed dead at his killer's feet.
Horrified at what they beheld, the attendants of Olopana [147]sprang toward their fallen chief. But their movements, whatever their import, did not disturb Kamapuaa. He had been accustomed to meeting and accepting odds in battle, and when he had secured possession of the ihe and huge axe of stone conveniently placed for his use behind the altar, he boldly approached and invited an encounter.
Horrified at what they saw, Olopana's attendants [__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__] rushed toward their fallen leader. But their movements, no matter their meaning, didn't bother Kamapuaa. He was used to facing challenges in battle, and once he grabbed the ihe and the large stone axe that was conveniently placed for him behind the altar, he confidently stepped forward and called for a fight.
But the challenge was not accepted. The attendants of the chief did not ordinarily lack courage, but they were unnerved at the sight of a victim, slain, mutilated and laid upon the altar by the priest, coming to life and springing to his feet full-armed before his enemies.
But the challenge was not accepted. The chief's attendants usually had courage, but they were rattled by the sight of a victim, killed, mutilated, and laid on the altar by the priest, suddenly coming to life and jumping to his feet fully armed before his enemies.
Appearing upon the scene, the high-priest expressed great surprise and horror at what had occurred, and his assistants wildly clamored at the sacrilege; but no hand was laid upon Kamapuaa, and the friends of Olopana finally left the heiau, taking his body with them.
When the high priest arrived, he was really shocked and horrified by what had happened, and his helpers frantically shouted about the desecration; but no one touched Kamapuaa, and Olopana's friends eventually left the heiau, taking his body with them.
This tragedy in the heiau of Kawaewae created a profound excitement in the district. Had Kamapuaa been at all popular with the masses the death of Olopana at his hands would have occasioned but little indignation; but as many beside the dead chief had suffered through his plundering visitations, and hundreds of lives had been sacrificed in his pursuit and final capture, the people rose almost in a body to hunt him down and destroy him.
This tragedy at the heiau of Kawaewae sparked a huge reaction in the area. If Kamapuaa had been popular with the people, the death of Olopana at his hands would have only caused minor anger. However, since many besides the dead chief had suffered due to his ruthless raids, and countless lives had been lost in the chase and capture of him, the people united to hunt him down and eliminate him.
Hina attempted to save her son from the wrath of his enemies, but her influence was insufficient to protect him, and he again sought refuge in the mountains; but his following was small, and he finally crossed the island, and, with a party of forty or fifty reckless and adventurous spirits, set sail for the windward islands in a fleet of eight or ten canoes which he in some manner obtained from the people of Ewa.
Hina tried to save her son from his enemies' anger, but her influence wasn’t enough to protect him, so he went to the mountains again for safety. However, his support was limited, and he eventually made his way across the island. With a group of about forty or fifty daring adventurers, he set off for the windward islands in a fleet of eight or ten canoes that he somehow got from the people of Ewa.
III.
More than one tradition avers that Kamapuaa traveled to foreign lands after leaving Oahu, even to the lands where the sky and sea were supposed to meet; but he made no such journey at that time. He spent some months in sight-seeing among the islands southeast of Oahu, and pretty nearly circumnavigated them all. Sometimes, for the lack of better occupation, [148]he and his companions engaged in the petty wars of the districts visited by them; but they generally led a roving, careless life, maintaining peaceful relations with all, and plundering only when every other means of securing supplies failed.
More than one tradition claims that Kamapuaa traveled to distant lands after leaving Oahu, even to the places where the sky and sea were said to meet; however, he didn't make that journey at that time. He spent several months exploring the islands southeast of Oahu, nearly circling them all. Sometimes, out of lack of a better activity, [__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]he and his companions became involved in the minor conflicts of the areas they visited; but they mostly lived a carefree, wandering lifestyle, keeping friendly relations with everyone and resorting to plundering only when they had no other way to find supplies.
And thus they journeyed from island to island until they reached Hawaii. Kamiole, the usurper, had but just been defeated and slain by Kalapana, the son of Kanipahu, the hunchback, and Kohala, where Kamapuaa first landed, was still suffering from the effects of the war. He therefore proceeded southward along the coast, touching at several points in Kona; then rounding the southern cape of the island, he sailed along the shores of Kau to Honuapo, where he landed and spent several weeks.
And so they traveled from island to island until they arrived in Hawaii. Kamiole, the usurper, had just been defeated and killed by Kalapana, the son of Kanipahu, the hunchback, and Kohala, where Kamapuaa first arrived, was still reeling from the aftermath of the war. He then continued south along the coast, stopping at several spots in Kona; after rounding the southern tip of the island, he sailed along the shores of Kau to Honuapo, where he landed and stayed for several weeks.
It was while he was there that Kamapuaa first learned of the Pele family in the adjoining district of Puna, and became acquainted with the many stories of enchantment and sorcery connected with the little colony. Pele was described to him as a woman of unusual personal beauty, and the lands occupied by the family and its retainers were said to be secure against lava inundations from Kilauea through the especial favor and protection of the gods.
It was while he was there that Kamapuaa first heard about the Pele family in the nearby district of Puna and got to know the many stories of magic and witchcraft associated with the small community. Pele was described to him as a woman of extraordinary beauty, and the lands occupied by her family and their followers were said to be safe from lava flows from Kilauea due to the special favor and protection of the gods.
These strange stories interested Kamapuaa, and he resolved to satisfy himself of their truth by visiting the mysterious colony. He accordingly set sail with his companions for Puna, and, landing at Keauhou, took up his abode near the sea-shore, not far from the lands occupied by Pele and her relatives.
These intriguing stories caught Kamapuaa's attention, and he decided to find out if they were true by visiting the mysterious colony. So, he set sail with his friends for Puna and, after landing at Keauhou, made his home near the shore, not far from the lands inhabited by Pele and her family.
As the colonists seemed to pay but little attention to the new-comers, at the expiration of three or four days Kamapuaa concluded to open a way to an acquaintance with them by visiting their settlement in person, and with a few of his companions appeared one morning before the comfortable hale of Pele and her family.
As the colonists didn't seem to notice the newcomers much, after about three or four days Kamapuaa decided to introduce himself by visiting their settlement in person. One morning, he showed up with a few of his companions in front of the cozy hale of Pele and her family.
Moho received the strangers courteously, inquired the purpose of their visit to Keauhou and from what part of the country they came, and hospitably invited them to a breakfast of meat, potatoes, poi and fruits. The invitation was not declined, and during the repast Moho learned from Kamapuaa that he was the chief of the party, and that the visit of himself and companions to Puna had no especial object beyond that of observation and pleasure. [149]
Moho greeted the strangers warmly, asked what brought them to Keauhou and where they were from, and generously invited them to join him for breakfast that included meat, potatoes, poi, and fruits. They accepted the invitation, and during the meal, Moho found out from Kamapuaa that he was the leader of the group and that their visit to Puna was simply for sightseeing and enjoyment. [__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]
The tattooed body and bristly hair and beard of Kamapuaa imparted to his otherwise handsome person a strangely ferocious and forbidding appearance, and at the mention of his name and place of nativity Moho at once recognized in him, from report, the monster of Oahu, who had ravaged the estates of Olopana and finally assassinated that chief in the heiau of Kawaewae. His presence, therefore, in that part of Puna, was considerably less welcome than the words of Moho implied; but no act of the latter indicated a suspicion that the ulterior purposes of his visitors were possibly otherwise than peaceful, and when they took their departure for the beach it was with mutual assurances of friendship.
The tattooed body and bristly hair and beard of Kamapuaa gave him a strangely fierce and intimidating look, despite his otherwise handsome features. When Moho heard his name and where he was from, he immediately recognized him as the monster of Oahu, known for destroying the lands of Olopana and ultimately killing that chief in the heiau of Kawaewae. His presence in that area of Puna was definitely not as welcome as Moho's words suggested; however, nothing in Moho's actions showed any doubt that the true intentions of his visitors were anything but peaceful. When they left for the beach, it was with mutual promises of friendship.
But Kamapuaa did not take his leave that morning until he saw Pele. He found a pretext for prolonging his visit until she finally appeared, and when Moho made them known to each other Kamapuaa comported himself with a grace and gallantry never before observed in him by his companions. He admitted to himself that the reports of Pele’s beauty had not been exaggerated, and wondered how it happened that she had remained for years unmarried.
But Kamapuaa didn't leave that morning until he saw Pele. He came up with a reason to extend his visit until she finally showed up, and when Moho introduced them, Kamapuaa carried himself with a charm and elegance his friends had never seen before. He acknowledged to himself that the stories about Pele’s beauty were true, and he wondered why she had stayed unmarried all these years.
The thought then came to Kamapuaa—perhaps not for the first time—that he would marry Pele himself and settle permanently in Puna. The idea of marriage had seldom occurred to him, but after he saw Pele he could think of little else. He greatly admired her appearance, and could see no reason why she should not be equally well pleased with his. No mirror, save the uncertain reflection of the waters, had ever shown him his hideously-tattooed face and bristly hair and beard, and the hog-skin still worn over his stained shoulders was regarded by him as a manly and warlike covering, well calculated to impress with favor a woman of Pele’s courage and accomplishments.
The idea suddenly struck Kamapuaa—maybe for the first time—that he would actually marry Pele and make Puna his permanent home. He had rarely thought about marriage before, but after seeing Pele, he couldn’t think of anything else. He was really impressed by her looks and couldn’t see why she wouldn’t be just as pleased with his appearance. He’d only ever seen his poorly tattooed face and scruffy hair and beard reflected in the unpredictable waters, and he believed that the hog-skin he still wore over his stained shoulders was a tough, masculine choice, likely to impress someone as brave and accomplished as Pele.
But Kamapuaa did not urge his suit at once. He visited Moho almost every day for half a month or more, and endeavored to render himself agreeable to Pele by sending her baskets of choice wild fruits, fish from the sea which women were allowed to eat, and strings of beautiful and curious shells gathered from the shores and caverns of the coast. He saw her occasionally, and observed that she avoided him; but he attributed her seeming repugnance to him to a coyishness common to her sex, and drew from it no augury unfavorable to his suit. [150]
But Kamapuaa didn't press his case right away. He visited Moho almost every day for over two weeks, trying to win over Pele by sending her baskets of delicious wild fruits, fish from the sea that women were allowed to eat, and strings of beautiful and interesting shells collected from the shores and caves along the coast. He saw her from time to time and noticed that she avoided him; however, he attributed her apparent dislike to a shyness typical of her gender and didn't take it as a bad sign for his pursuit. [__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]
The companions of Kamapuaa soon discovered the attraction that was keeping him so long in the neighborhood of Keauhou, where food was becoming the reverse of abundant, and urged him to return to Honuapo; but he silenced their clamors with promises of good lands and lives of ease in the valleys back of them, and they hopefully struggled on with their unsatisfactory fare.
The friends of Kamapuaa quickly figured out what was keeping him near Keauhou, where food was running low, and they urged him to go back to Honuapo. But he quieted their concerns with promises of great land and easy lives in the valleys behind them, and they continued to push through with their unsatisfactory meals.
Kamapuaa finally made a proposal of marriage to Pele; but she refused to entertain it, and was promptly and heartily sustained by her brothers. But a simple refusal did not satisfy Kamapuaa. He urged that his blood was noble, and that the proposed union was in every way fitting and proper, and would prove mutually beneficial. Enraged at his presumption and persistency, Pele boldly expressed her contempt for him and aversion to his presence. In return Kamapuaa threatened to seize her by force and desolate the colony. Tradition asserts that she thereupon defied his power, and denounced him to his face as “a hog and the son of a hog.”
Kamapuaa finally proposed to marry Pele, but she refused and was strongly supported by her brothers. However, a simple no did not satisfy Kamapuaa. He insisted that he came from noble blood and that their union would be suitable and beneficial for both of them. Furious at his arrogance and insistence, Pele boldly showed her disdain for him and her dislike of his presence. In response, Kamapuaa threatened to take her by force and destroy the colony. Tradition says she then stood up to him and called him “a hog and the son of a hog.”
But, whatever may have been the precise language used on the occasion by Pele, it was sufficiently definite and insulting not only to destroy the last hope of Kamapuaa, but to arouse in his heart the bitterest feelings of revenge, and he retired in wrath to the beach to plan and speedily execute a terrible scheme of retaliation.
But whatever exact words Pele used at the time, they were clear and insulting enough to crush Kamapuaa's last hope and fill him with intense feelings of revenge. He angrily retreated to the beach to plan and quickly carry out a dreadful scheme of retaliation.
Without referring to his final interview with Pele and her brothers, Kamapuaa informed his companions that he was at last ready to move—not to Honuapo, however, but to the cultivated valleys immediately back of them, occupied by a family of foreign interlopers and their adherents, who recognized the authority neither of Kalapana nor the governing chief of Puna, and might therefore be dispossessed without incurring the reproach or hostility of any power competent to punish. The project pleased them, but they doubted their ability to drive from their lands so large a number, the most of whom were doubtless skilled in the use of arms.
Without mentioning his last talk with Pele and her brothers, Kamapuaa told his friends that he was finally ready to move—not to Honuapo, but to the cultivated valleys just behind them, which were occupied by a family of foreign newcomers and their followers, who didn't recognize the authority of Kalapana or the ruling chief of Puna. This meant they could be forced out without facing any backlash or hostility from a power that could punish them. They liked the plan, but they were unsure if they could drive off such a large number of people, most of whom were probably experienced with weapons.
But Kamapuaa promised to make the way clear to an easy victory. He said he had carefully noted the number of the settlers, and observed the places where the most of them lodged. His plan was to suddenly fall upon them in the night and massacre all the male adherents of the family. This done, they [151]would be masters of the situation, and able to treat on their own terms with the few who remained. It was proposed to include the governing family in the slaughter, but Kamapuaa opposed the suggestion, declaring that one of the brothers of Pele was a priest of great sanctity, whose death by violence would kindle the wrath of the gods; and his counsel prevailed.
But Kamapuaa promised to make the path clear for an easy victory. He said he had carefully counted the number of settlers and noticed where most of them were staying. His plan was to strike suddenly at night and kill all the male supporters of the family. Once that was done, they [__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]would be in control of the situation and could negotiate on their own terms with the few who remained. It was suggested to include the ruling family in the massacre, but Kamapuaa opposed this idea, stating that one of Pele's brothers was a highly respected priest, and his violent death would anger the gods; his advice was accepted.
Several days elapsed without any movement being made. Kamapuaa was waiting, not only for a relaxation of the vigilance which his incautious threats may have inspired, but for the dark of the waning moon. Finally the blow was struck. Under the favoring cover of darkness Kamapuaa and his companions left the beach and secreted themselves near the scattered huts of the settlers, and at a signal, some time past midnight, rose and massacred every man within reach of their weapons. But few escaped. The screams of the women, who had been spared, rang through the valleys as they fled toward the mansion of Pele and her brothers for protection, and the band of murderers returned satisfied to the beach.
Several days went by without any action. Kamapuaa was waiting, not just for a break in the vigilance that his reckless threats might have caused, but for the darkness of the waning moon. Finally, the time came. Under the cover of night, Kamapuaa and his friends left the beach and hid near the scattered huts of the settlers. At a signal, sometime past midnight, they rose up and killed every man within reach of their weapons. Only a few managed to escape. The screams of the women, who had been spared, echoed through the valleys as they fled to the mansion of Pele and her brothers for safety, while the group of killers returned content to the beach.
It was the purpose of Kamapuaa to surround the home of the surviving family the next day, and capture Pele by force, as he had threatened, or otherwise bring her and her haughty relatives to terms. But, after what had occurred, Moho readily understood the plans of the assassins, and early next morning abandoned the family cluster of houses, which could not be successfully defended, and sought refuge in a cavern in the hills, about three miles up the valley, accompanied by the entire family and the few others who had escaped the massacre of the night before. There was water in the cavern, and as the fugitives took with them a considerable quantity of provisions, and the opening to the retreat was small and easily defended, they hoped to be able, even if discovered and besieged, to protect themselves until the arrival of relief or the abandonment of the siege as hopeless by their enemies.
Kamapuaa planned to surround the home of the surviving family the next day and capture Pele by force, as he had threatened, or otherwise force her and her proud relatives to compromise. However, after what had happened, Moho quickly grasped the assassins' plans, and early the next morning, he fled from the family’s cluster of houses, which couldn’t be adequately defended, and sought safety in a cave in the hills, about three miles up the valley, taking the entire family along with the few others who had escaped the massacre the night before. The cave had water, and since the fugitives brought a good amount of supplies with them, and the entrance to their hideout was small and easy to defend, they believed they could protect themselves, even if discovered and surrounded, until help arrived or their enemies gave up the siege as futile.
The cavern was of volcanic formation and had never been fully explored. It embraced a number of large connecting chambers, with ragged avenues leading back into and up the hill. The only light came through the front entrance, into which, from the inside, were hastily rolled heavy boulders of lava, found here and there detached, leaving openings through which spears and javelins could be thrust. A tiny rivulet of water trickled in somewhere [152]from the darkness, and, after filling a shallow basin in the floor of one of the chambers, ran out through the opening. As air came in from the back of the cavern, it must have been connected with the surface through some one or more of the dark avenues referred to; but not a glimmer of light, so far as the occupants had been able to penetrate the depths, indicated the possibility of an escape in that direction should the cavern be rendered untenable by assault. The party numbered, in all, seven men and eighteen women and children, and they had taken to their retreat a goodly supply of arms and provisions enough to sustain them for some weeks. Thus prepared they gloomily awaited their fate.
The cave was formed by volcanic activity and had never been fully explored. It contained several large connected chambers, with rough paths leading deeper into the hill. The only light came from the front entrance, where they had hastily rolled heavy lava boulders from inside, creating openings through which spears and javelins could be thrust. A small stream of water trickled in from somewhere in the darkness, and after filling a shallow basin in one of the chambers, it flowed out through the opening. Since air came in from the back of the cave, it must have been connected to the surface through some of the dark paths, but there was no sign of light indicating a possible escape in that direction if the cave became unsafe due to an attack. The group consisted of seven men and eighteen women and children, and they had brought a good amount of weapons and enough supplies to last them for several weeks. Prepared as they were, they waited gloomily for their fate.
But they had fled to the hills not a moment too soon, for early in the day Kamapuaa and his companions appeared and surrounded the deserted habitations of the family. Discovering that his victims had escaped, Kamapuaa promptly divided his followers into small parties, and despatched them to the hills in search of the fugitives or of traces of their flight. He also joined in the search, but went unattended.
But they had escaped to the hills just in time, because early in the day, Kamapuaa and his crew showed up and surrounded the abandoned homes of the family. Realizing that his victims had gotten away, Kamapuaa quickly split his followers into small groups and sent them to the hills to look for the runaways or any signs of their escape. He also joined the search but went alone.
In the course of the day all returned to the deserted huts, where they had taken up their quarters, and reported that no traces of the missing colonists had been discovered, and the general opinion was that they had escaped across the mountains. Kamapuaa waited until all the rest had told the stories of their fruitless wanderings, when he announced that he had found what they had lacked the sagacity to discover. He informed them that the fugitives were secreted in a cavern some distance up one of the valleys, where they could be surrounded and captured without difficulty; but he did not mention that he had made the discovery by shrewdly following a dog into the hills, and watching the animal until it stopped in front of the entrance to the cavern. He was willing that his companions should believe that his success was due to some inspiration or prescience of his own.
Throughout the day, everyone returned to the empty huts where they had set up camp and reported that no signs of the missing colonists had been found. The general belief was that they had escaped over the mountains. Kamapuaa waited until everyone else had shared their stories of unsuccessful searches, then he announced that he had discovered what they had failed to find. He informed them that the fugitives were hiding in a cave some distance up one of the valleys and that they could be surrounded and captured easily. However, he didn’t mention that he had figured this out by cleverly following a dog into the hills and watching it until it stopped at the cave's entrance. He was content for his companions to think that his success came from his own insight or intuition.
A guard was immediately detailed to watch the cavern and see that no one escaped, and the next day the place was surrounded and formally besieged. Following these preparations, visible to Moho and his handful of warriors, Kamapuaa approached the entrance sufficiently near to be heard within, and demanded the surrender of the party, promising that the lives of all would be spared. [153]
A guard was quickly assigned to keep an eye on the cave and make sure no one got out, and the next day the area was surrounded and officially besieged. After these preparations, evident to Moho and his small group of warriors, Kamapuaa got close enough to the entrance to be heard inside and demanded that the group surrender, promising that everyone would be spared. [__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]
The demand was refused with words of insult and defiance, and Kamapuaa ordered an assault upon the entrance. Several attempts were made to force the protecting rocks from the opening, but their interstices bristled with spear-points, and, after a number of the assailants had been wounded, that plan of attack was abandoned as impracticable.
The demand was rejected with insults and defiance, and Kamapuaa commanded an attack on the entrance. Several attempts were made to break through the protective rocks at the opening, but the gaps were lined with spear points, and after several attackers were injured, that strategy was given up as unfeasible.
A large quantity of dry wood, leaves and grass was then heaped in front of the entrance and fired, in the hope of suffocating the inmates with the heat and smoke of the conflagration; but the draught of air through the cavern kept the smoke from entering, and, although the heat for a time became oppressive immediately around the opening, the connecting chambers were but slightly affected by it. The fire was allowed to die out, and Kamapuaa, on too closely approaching the entrance to note its effects, was made keenly aware of the failure of the project by receiving a sharp spear-thrust in the arm.
A large pile of dry wood, leaves, and grass was then stacked in front of the entrance and set on fire, hoping to suffocate those inside with the heat and smoke from the blaze. However, the airflow through the cave kept the smoke from getting in, and while the heat became uncomfortable near the opening, the connected chambers were only slightly affected. The fire was allowed to go out, and Kamapuaa, getting too close to the entrance to see how it worked, was quickly reminded of the project’s failure when he received a sharp spear thrust in the arm.
As fire and assault had proved unavailing, and a long siege did not accord with his purposes, Kamapuaa next endeavored to effect a breach through the top of the cavern in the rear of the entrance. As this necessitated the removal of an overlying mass of ten or fifteen feet of soil and rocks, the undertaking involved a very considerable amount of hard labor. But the plan met with general favor, and, with oos and other implements obtained from the valleys below, the besiegers entered upon the task of excavating through into the cavern.
Since fire and attacks had proven ineffective, and a long siege didn’t align with his goals, Kamapuaa decided to try breaking through the top of the cave at the back of the entrance. This required removing about ten to fifteen feet of soil and rocks, which meant a lot of hard work. However, the idea was well-received, and with oos and other tools brought from the valleys below, the besiegers began the task of digging into the cave.
For several days the work progressed almost uninterruptedly, and a large pit had been lowered to a depth of eight or ten feet, when the earth began to tremble violently, and a few minutes after the air was filled with sulphurous smoke and ashes. But this was not the most appalling sight beheld by Kamapuaa and his companions. Looking up the valley, which at that point was little more than a narrow gorge, they saw a flood of lava, full a hundred feet in width, bursting from the hillside and pouring down the ravine, its high-advancing crest aflame with burning timber, and sweeping before it a thundering avalanche of half-molten boulders.
For several days, the work went on almost non-stop, and a large pit had been dug to a depth of eight or ten feet when the ground started shaking violently. A few minutes later, the air was filled with sulfurous smoke and ash. But this wasn’t the most terrifying sight that Kamapuaa and his companions witnessed. Looking up the valley, which at that point was barely more than a narrow gorge, they saw a river of lava, nearly a hundred feet wide, bursting out from the hillside and rushing down the ravine, its advancing crest ablaze with burning trees and accompanied by a deafening avalanche of half-molten boulders.
With exclamations of dismay they started in full flight down the valley, closely followed by the devouring flood. On, on they sped, past the deserted huts of their victims, past the sandy foothills, past the cocoa-trees that fringed the beach. Turning at [154]the water’s edge, they beheld the awful stream spreading its mantle of death over the broadening valley, and speeding to the sea in broken volumes. Leaping into their canoes, they plunged through the surf and paddled out to sea. Setting sail for Honuapo, Kamapuaa saw, as they left the coast, that the upper part of the valley from which they had fled was filled with lava, and knew that the cavern in which Pele and her companions had sought refuge from his wrath had been deeply buried by the flood.
With shouts of fear, they took off down the valley, closely followed by the rushing flood. They raced on, past the abandoned huts of their victims, past the sandy foothills, and past the cocoa trees lining the beach. Turning at [__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]the water’s edge, they saw the terrifying torrent spreading its deadly grip over the widening valley and rushing to the sea in chaotic waves. Hopping into their canoes, they plunged through the surf and paddled out to sea. As they set sail for Honuapo, Kamapuaa noticed that the upper part of the valley they had escaped was filled with lava and realized that the cave where Pele and her companions had taken refuge from his fury had been completely buried by the flood.

Bird’s-eye View of the Crater of Kilauea.
Bird’s-eye View of the Crater of Kilauea.
When the news of the eruption reached Honuapo, the people, who had heard so many strange stories of Pele and her family, did not believe that they had perished. On the contrary, they declared that the eruption had been invoked by Pele to drive Kamapuaa from the district, and that if she had permitted her lands to be destroyed it was with the view of taking up her residence in the crater of Kilauea. This opinion soon crystalized into a belief which spread throughout the island of Hawaii, and another generation saw temples erected to Pele, the goddess of fire, and priests sanctified to her service. All but three of her brothers and sisters were the creations of her early priests, and their attributes gradually grew and took form as they floated down the stream of tradition.
When the news of the eruption reached Honuapo, the people, who had heard so many strange tales about Pele and her family, didn’t think they had died. Instead, they said that Pele had caused the eruption to drive Kamapuaa out of the area, and that if she allowed her lands to be destroyed, it was to move to the crater of Kilauea. This idea quickly turned into a belief that spread across the island of Hawaii, and in the next generation, temples were built for Pele, the goddess of fire, and priests were dedicated to her service. All but three of her brothers and sisters were created by her early priests, and their characteristics gradually developed as they were passed down through tradition.
Many adventures are related of Kamapuaa after his flight from Keauhou, but the most or all of them are the dreams of the poets of after-generations; and further reference here to this most striking of the early heroes of the group may be properly concluded with the remark that, shortly after his experiences with the Pele family, he immigrated with a considerable following to one of the southern islands, where he married, distinguished himself in arms, and finally died without revisiting the Hawaiian archipelago. [155]
Many stories are told about Kamapuaa after he escaped from Keauhou, but most of them are likely just the dreams of later poets. It's fitting to wrap up our discussion of this remarkable early hero by noting that, soon after his encounters with the Pele family, he moved with a large group to one of the southern islands, where he got married, made a name for himself in battle, and ultimately died without returning to the Hawaiian Islands. [__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]
Hua, King of Hana.
[156]
[__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]
CHARACTERS.
- Hua, king of Hana, Maui.
- Luuana, a priest of the king’s household.
- Luahoomoe, the supreme high-priest.
-
Kaakakai and sons of Luahoomoe. Kaanahua, - Oluolu, wife of Kaakakai.
-
Kaakoa, and Oluolu's friends. Mamulu, his wife, - Naula-a-Maihea, a high-priest of Oahu.
[157]
[__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]
HUA, KING OF HANA.
Hua, King of Hana.
THE LEGEND OF THE GREAT FAMINE OF THE TWELFTH CENTURY.
THE LEGEND OF THE GREAT FAMINE OF THE TWELFTH CENTURY.
I.
With the reign of Hua, an ancient king of Hana, or eastern Maui, is connected a legendary recital of one of the most terrible visitations of the wrath of the gods anywhere brought down by Hawaiian tradition. It is more than probable that the extent of the calamities following Hua’s defiant and barbarous treatment of his high-priest and prophet was greatly colored and exaggerated in turn by the pious historians who received and passed the moooelo down the centuries; but the details of the story have been preserved with harrowing conciseness, and for more than six hundred years were recited as a solemn warning against wanton trespass upon the prerogatives of the priesthood or disregard of the power and sanctity of the gods.
With the rule of Hua, an ancient king of Hana, or eastern Maui, is linked a legendary tale of one of the most dreadful punishments inflicted by the gods as told in Hawaiian tradition. It's likely that the scale of the disasters that followed Hua’s defiant and brutal treatment of his high priest and prophet was significantly embellished and exaggerated by the devout historians who transmitted the moooelo through the centuries; however, the details of the story have been preserved with chilling clarity, and for over six hundred years, were recited as a serious warning against reckless violations of the priesthood's authority or neglect of the power and sanctity of the gods.
In some of the genealogies Hua is represented as having been the great-grandfather of Paumakua, of Maui. This record, if accepted, would remove him altogether from the Hawaiian group, since Paumakua himself was undoubtedly an immigrant from Tahiti or some other of the southern islands. As he was contemporaneous with the distinguished priest and prophet Naula, who is said to have accompanied Laa-mai-kahiki from Raiatea, he must have appeared two or three generations later than Paumakua, and probably belonged to a collateral branch of the great Hua family from which Paumakua drew his strain.
In some genealogies, Hua is shown as the great-grandfather of Paumakua from Maui. If this record is accepted, it would completely separate him from the Hawaiian group, since Paumakua himself was definitely an immigrant from Tahiti or another southern island. Since he was around the same time as the famous priest and prophet Naula, who is said to have come with Laa-mai-kahiki from Raiatea, he must have appeared two or three generations after Paumakua and likely belonged to a side branch of the main Hua family that Paumakua descended from.
It may therefore be assumed that as early as A.D. 1170 Hua was the alii-nui, or virtual sovereign, of eastern Maui. He is referred to as the king of Maui, but it is hardly probable that his sway extended over the western division of the island, as it was not until the reign of Piilani, nearly three centuries later, that the people of Maui became finally united under one government. Previous to that time, except at intervals of temporary conquest or occupation, eastern and western Maui were ruled by distinct and frequently hostile lines of kings. Hence the sovereignty of [158]Hua could scarcely have reached beyond the districts of Koolau, Hana, Kipahulu and Kaupo, while the remainder of the island must have recognized the authority either of Palena, the grandson of Paumakua, or of Hanalaa, the distinguished son and successor of Palena, since the later mois of Maui traced their genealogies uninterruptedly through this branch of the Paumakua family.
It can be assumed that as early as C.E. 1170, Hua was the alii-nui, or effective ruler, of eastern Maui. He's called the king of Maui, but it's unlikely that his authority extended to the western part of the island. It wasn't until the reign of Piilani, nearly three centuries later, that the people of Maui were finally united under one government. Before then, except for periods of temporary conquest or occupation, eastern and western Maui were governed by separate and often hostile lines of kings. Therefore, Hua's rule likely didn't go beyond the areas of Koolau, Hana, Kipahulu, and Kaupo, while the rest of the island would have recognized the authority of either Palena, the grandson of Paumakua, or Hanalaa, the notable son and successor of Palena, since the later mois of Maui traced their lineages directly through this branch of the Paumakua family.
But, from whatever source Hua may have derived his rank and authority, he was a reckless, independent and warlike chief. Having access to the largest and finest timber in the group, his war-canoes were abundant and formidable, and when not engaged in harassing his neighboring frontiers he was employed in plundering expeditions to the coasts of Hawaii and Molokai. Tradition makes him the aggressor in the earliest remembered war between Maui and Hawaii. Although the name of the war (Kanuioohio) has been preserved, it probably did not reach beyond the limit of a powerful marauding excursion to the coast of Hilo, Hawaii, resulting in the defeat of the chiefs of that district by Hua, but in nothing more than a temporary seizure and occupation of their lands; for at that time Kanipahu was the moi of Hawaii, and would scarcely have permitted a permanent hostile lodgment in Hilo, whose chiefs acknowledged his suzerainty and were therefore entitled to his protection.
But no matter where Hua got his rank and authority, he was a reckless, independent, and warlike chief. With access to the best timber in the area, he had plenty of powerful war canoes, and when he wasn't busy attacking his neighbors, he was off on plundering missions to the coasts of Hawaii and Molokai. Tradition says he was the aggressor in the earliest remembered war between Maui and Hawaii. Although the war's name (Kanuioohio) has survived, it likely only involved a major raid to the coast of Hilo, Hawaii, where Hua defeated the local chiefs, resulting in nothing more than a temporary taking and occupation of their lands. At that time, Kanipahu was the moi of Hawaii, and he would hardly have allowed a permanent hostile presence in Hilo, whose chiefs recognized his authority and were therefore entitled to his protection.
The high-priest of Hua was Luahoomoe. He claimed to be an iku-pau—that is, a direct descendant from Kane—and as such was strict in claiming respect for his person and sacred prerogatives. He did not approve of many of Hua’s marauding acts, advising him instead to lead his people in happier and more peaceful pursuits, and not provoke either the retaliation of his enemies or the anger of the gods. This opposition to his aggressive methods exasperated Hua, and a feeling of suspicion and ill-will gradually grew up between him and the priesthood. He began to attribute his occasional failures in arms to deliberately-neglected prayers and sacrifices by Luahoomoe, and on one occasion, after having returned from an unsuccessful expedition to Molokai, he placed his tabu on a spring of water set apart for the use of the heiau, and on another wantonly speared a puaa-hiwa, or black tabued hog, sacred to sacrifice. When expostulated with for thus inviting the wrath of the gods, he threatened the high-priest with similar treatment. [159]
The high priest of Hua was Luahoomoe. He claimed to be an iku-pau—a direct descendant of Kane—and insisted on being treated with respect for his position and sacred rights. He disapproved of many of Hua’s aggressive actions, advising him instead to lead his people toward happier and more peaceful activities, without provoking the retaliation of their enemies or the anger of the gods. This disagreement with Hua's methods frustrated him, leading to growing suspicion and animosity between him and the priesthood. Hua started to believe that his occasional military failures were due to intentionally neglected prayers and sacrifices by Luahoomoe. On one occasion, after returning from an unsuccessful mission to Molokai, he put his tabu on a spring of water designated for the heiau, and at another time, he carelessly speared a puaa-hiwa, or black tabued hog, which was sacred for sacrifice. When confronted about provoking the gods' wrath, he threatened the high priest with the same treatment. [__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]
Hua resided principally at Hana, where he constructed one of the largest royal mansions in the group, and all the leisure spared from his warlike pastimes was given to revelry. He had a hundred hula dancers, exclusive of musicians and drummers, and his monthly feasts were prolonged into days and nights of debauchery and unbridled license. Drunk with awa, an intoxicating drink made from a plant of that name, he kept the whole of Hana in an uproar during his frequent seasons of pleasure, and the attractive wives and daughters of his subjects were not unfrequently seized and given to his favorite companions.
Hua mainly lived in Hana, where he built one of the largest royal mansions in the area, and all the free time he had from his warrior activities went into partying. He had a hundred hula dancers, not including musicians and drummers, and his monthly feasts turned into days and nights of indulgence and excess. Soused with awa, an intoxicating drink made from a plant of the same name, he kept all of Hana in chaos during his frequent bouts of pleasure, and the beautiful wives and daughters of his subjects were often taken and given to his favorite friends.
The annual festival of Lono was approaching—an event marking the winter solstice, and which was always celebrated impressively on every island of the group. It was an occasion not only for manifesting respect for the nearest and most popular deity of the godhead, but for celebrating, as well, the ending of the old year and the beginning of the new. The ancient Hawaiians divided the year into twelve months of thirty days each. Each month and day of the month was named. They had two modes of measuring time—the lunar and sidereal. The lunar month began on the first day that the new moon appeared in the west, and regulated their monthly feasts and tabu days. Their sidereal month of thirty days marked one of the twelve divisions of the year; but as their two seasons of the year—the Hooilo (rainy) and Kau (dry)—were measured by the Pleiades, and their twelve months of thirty days each did not complete the sidereal year, they intercalated five days at the end of the year measured by months, in order to square that method of reckoning with the movements of the stars. This annual intercalation was made about the 20th of their month of Welehu (December), at the expiration of which the first day of the first month (Makalii) of the new year commenced. This was their Makahiki, or new-year day. The five intercalated days were a season of tabu, and dedicated to a grand yearly festival to Lono.
The annual festival of Lono was coming up—an event that celebrates the winter solstice, and is always held impressively on every island in the group. It’s a time not only for showing respect to the closest and most popular deity, but also for celebrating the end of the old year and the start of the new one. The ancient Hawaiians divided the year into twelve months of thirty days each. Each month and each day had specific names. They had two ways of measuring time—the lunar and sidereal. The lunar month began on the first day when the new moon appeared in the west, guiding their monthly feasts and tabu days. Their sidereal month of thirty days marked one of the twelve divisions of the year, but since their two seasons—the Hooilo (rainy) and Kau (dry)—were measured by the Pleiades, and their twelve months didn’t cover the entire sidereal year, they added five extra days at the end of the year measured by months to align their calendar with the movements of the stars. This annual addition took place around the 20th of their month of Welehu (December), after which the first day of the first month (Makalii) of the new year began. This was their Makahiki, or new-year day. The five extra days were a time of tabu and dedicated to a grand annual festival for Lono.
In preparation for this festival Hua had called for unusually large contributions from the people, and, in anticipation of another hostile expedition to Hawaii, had ordered quotas of warriors, canoes and provisions from his subject chiefs, to be reported at Hana immediately after the beginning of the new year. These exactions caused very general dissatisfaction, and the priesthood assisted in promoting rather than allaying the popular [160]discontent. All this was reported to Hua, and he resolved to liberate himself at once and for the future from what he conceived to be an officious and unwarranted intermeddling of the priesthood with the affairs of state, by deposing or taking the life of Luahoomoe. In this desperate resolution he was sustained by Luuana, a priest who had charge of the heiau or chapel of the royal mansion, and who expected to succeed Luahoomoe as high-priest.
In preparation for this festival, Hua had demanded unusually large contributions from the people and, anticipating another aggressive campaign to Hawaii, ordered his subject chiefs to provide quotas of warriors, canoes, and provisions to be reported at Hana immediately after the start of the new year. These demands caused widespread dissatisfaction, and the priesthood helped to stir up rather than calm the people's discontent. All this was reported to Hua, and he decided to free himself immediately and in the future from what he saw as the intrusive and unwarranted interference of the priesthood in state affairs by deposing or killing Luahoomoe. In this desperate resolution, he was supported by Luuana, a priest responsible for the heiau or chapel of the royal mansion, who expected to take over as high priest after Luahoomoe.
Hua sought in every way for a pretext for deposing or slaying Luahoomoe; but the priest was old in years, exemplary in his conduct, and moved among the people without reproach. Finally, at the instigation of Luuana, who assumed that the advice was a divine inspiration, Hua created a bungling and absurd pretence for an assault upon Luahoomoe. The dishonesty of the scheme was exposed, but it resulted, nevertheless, in the death of the unoffending priest.
Hua looked for any reason to remove or kill Luahoomoe, but the priest was old, had a good reputation, and was respected by the people. Eventually, encouraged by Luuana, who believed the idea was a divine calling, Hua came up with a clumsy and ridiculous excuse to attack Luahoomoe. Although the dishonesty of the plan was revealed, it still led to the death of the innocent priest.
As tradition tells the story, Hua found occasion in a public manner to order some uwau, or uau, to be brought to him from the mountains. The uau is a water bird, and seldom found in the uplands. As neither its flesh for eating nor its feathers for decorating could have reasonably been required, the object of despatching snarers in quest of it must have been a subject of comment; but kings then, as later, did not always deign to give reasons for their acts, and preparations were at once made by the household servants and retainers of the king to proceed upon the hunt.
As the story goes, Hua publicly ordered some uwau or uau to be brought to him from the mountains. The uau is a water bird, and it's rarely found in the highlands. Since he didn't really need its meat or feathers, people must have speculated about why he wanted it; however, kings back then, just like now, didn’t always feel the need to explain their decisions. Nonetheless, the king's household servants and retainers quickly got ready to go on the hunt.
“Be careful that the birds come from the mountains,” said Hua, addressing the trusted hoalii in charge of the hunting party—“only from the mountains,” he repeated; “I will have none from the sea.”
“Make sure the birds come from the mountains,” said Hua, speaking to the trusted hoalii in charge of the hunting party—“only from the mountains,” he repeated; “I don’t want any from the sea.”
“But can they be found in the mountains?” ventured the hoalii, looking inquiringly toward Luahoomoe, who was standing near and watching a flight of birds which seemed to be strangely confused and ominous of evil.
“But can they be found in the mountains?” asked the hoalii, looking curiously at Luahoomoe, who was nearby, watching a flock of birds that appeared strangely confused and seemed to signify trouble.
“Do you inquire of me?” said the priest, after a pause, and finding that the king did not answer.
“Are you asking me?” the priest said after a pause, noticing that the king didn't respond.
“I inquire of any one who thinks he knows,” returned the hoalii.
“I ask anyone who thinks they know,” replied the hoalii.
“Then the birds you seek will not be found in the mountains at this season of the year,” returned the priest, “and you must set your snares by the sea-shore.” [161]
“Then you won’t find the birds you’re looking for in the mountains at this time of year,” the priest replied, “so you have to set your traps by the shore.” [__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]
“Is it so that you would attempt to countermand my orders?” exclaimed Hua, in apparent anger. “I order my servants to go to the mountains for the uau, and you tell them to set their snares by the sea-shore!”
“Are you really trying to go against my orders?” Hua exclaimed, seemingly angry. “I tell my servants to go to the mountains for the uau, and you’re telling them to set their traps by the beach!”
“I humbly ask the king to remember that I have given no orders,” calmly replied the priest.
“I kindly ask the king to remember that I haven’t given any orders,” the priest replied calmly.
“But you have dared to interfere with mine!” retorted the king. “Now listen. My men shall go to the mountains in search of the birds I require. If they find them there I will have you slain as a false prophet and misleader of the people!”
“But you’ve dared to interfere with me!” the king shot back. “Now listen up. My men will head to the mountains to look for the birds I need. If they find them there, I will have you killed as a false prophet and a deceiver of the people!”
With this savage threat the king walked away with his hoalii, while the priest stood in silence with his face bowed to the earth. He knew the import of Hua’s words. They meant death to him and the destruction of his family. The bloody purpose of the king had been told to him at the sacrificial altar, had been seen by him in the clouds, had been whispered to him from the anu of the sanctuary.
With this brutal threat, the king walked away with his hoalii, while the priest stood in silence, his face lowered to the ground. He understood the significance of Hua’s words. They meant death for him and ruin for his family. The king's violent intentions had been revealed to him at the sacrificial altar, had been visible to him in the clouds, and had been whispered to him from the anu of the sanctuary.
“Since the gods so will it, I must submit to the sacrifice,” was the pious resolution of the priest; “but woe to the hand that strikes, to the eyes that witness the blow, to the land that drinks the blood of the son of Laamakua!”
“Since the gods want it this way, I have to accept the sacrifice,” was the devout determination of the priest; “but woe to the hand that delivers the strike, to the eyes that see the blow, to the land that drinks the blood of the son of Laamakua!”
Luahoomoe had two sons, Kaakakai and Kaanahua. Both were connected with the priesthood, and Kaakakai had been instructed in all the mysteries of the order in anticipation of his succession, on the death of his father, to the position of high-priest. They were young men of intelligence, and their lives had been blameless. Knowing that they would not be spared, Luahoomoe advised them to leave Hana at once and secrete themselves in the mountains, and suggested Hanaula, an elevated spur of the mighty crater of Haleakala, as the place where they would be most likely to escape observation.
Luahoomoe had two sons, Kaakakai and Kaanahua. Both were involved in the priesthood, and Kaakakai had been trained in all the secrets of the order in preparation for taking over as high-priest after his father's death. They were smart young men, and their lives had been exemplary. Knowing they wouldn't be safe, Luahoomoe urged them to leave Hana immediately and hide in the mountains, suggesting Hanaula, a high part of the huge Haleakala crater, as the best place to avoid being seen.
But a few weeks before Kaakakai had become the husband of the beautiful Oluolu, the daughter of a distinguished chief who had lost his life in Hua’s first expedition against Hilo. Twice had she sought the heiau for protection against the emissaries of Hua, who had been ordered to seize and bring her to the royal mansion, and in both instances Luahoomoe had given her the shelter of the sacred enclosure. It was there that Kaakakai first met her, and, charmed no less by her beauty than her abhorrence of the lascivious intents of the king, he soon persuaded her to [162]become his wife. But, even as his wife, Kaakakai did not deem her secure from the evil designs of the king, and had found an asylum for her in the humble home of a distant relative in a secluded valley four or five miles back of Hana, where he frequently visited her and cheered her with assurances of his love.
But a few weeks before Kaakakai became the husband of the beautiful Oluolu, the daughter of a distinguished chief who had lost his life in Hua’s first expedition against Hilo. She had sought the heiau twice for protection from the emissaries of Hua, who had been sent to capture her and bring her to the royal mansion, and each time, Luahoomoe had offered her shelter in the sacred enclosure. It was there that Kaakakai first met her, and, captivated not only by her beauty but also by her disdain for the king's lewd intentions, he quickly convinced her to [__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]become his wife. Even after marrying her, Kaakakai still felt she wasn't safe from the king's malicious plans, so he arranged for her to stay with a distant relative in a quiet valley four or five miles behind Hana, where he often visited her and reassured her of his love.
As the danger was imminent, Luahoomoe urged his sons to leave Hana without delay, promising Kaakakai that he would visit Oluolu the next day, and apprise her of her husband’s flight and the place to which he had fled for concealment. But the old priest did not live to fulfil his promise, and Oluolu was left in ignorance of the fate of her husband.
As the danger approached, Luahoomoe urged his sons to leave Hana immediately, promising Kaakakai that he would visit Oluolu the next day and inform her about her husband’s escape and the location where he had hidden. But the old priest did not survive to keep his promise, and Oluolu was left unaware of her husband’s fate.
Early next morning the bird-hunters returned, bringing with them a large number of birds, including the uau and ulili, all of which, they averred, had been caught in the mountains, when in reality they had been snared on the sea-shore.
Early the next morning, the bird hunters came back with a lot of birds, including the uau and ulili. They claimed these birds had been caught in the mountains, but in reality, they had been trapped at the beach.
Hua summoned the high-priest, and, pointing to the birds, said: “All these birds were snared in the mountains. You are therefore condemned to die as a false prophet who has been abandoned by his gods, and a deceiver of the people, who are entitled to the protection of their king.”
Hua called in the high priest and, pointing to the birds, said: “All these birds were caught in the mountains. You are therefore sentenced to death as a false prophet who has been forsaken by his gods, and a deceiver of the people, who deserve the protection of their king.”
Taking one of the birds in his hand, the priest calmly replied: “These birds did not come from the mountains; they are rank with the odor of the sea.”
Taking one of the birds in his hand, the priest calmly replied: "These birds didn’t come from the mountains; they smell strongly of the sea."
But the hoalii of the king steadfastly maintained that the birds had been snared in the mountains, and Hua declared the assurance of the hunters to be sufficient to outweigh the flimsy testimony of the priest.
But the hoalii of the king firmly insisted that the birds had been caught in the mountains, and Hua claimed that the hunters' confidence was enough to outweigh the weak evidence of the priest.
Luahoomoe saw that he was doomed, and that the hunters had been schooled to sustain the lying assertion of the hoalii; yet he resolved to disconcert them all and make good his position, no matter what might be the result. He therefore asked permission to open a few of the birds, and the king sullenly granted it.
Luahoomoe realized he was in trouble and that the hunters had been trained to uphold the false claims of the hoalii; still, he decided to throw them off and defend his stance, regardless of the outcome. He then requested permission to examine a few of the birds, which the king grudgingly allowed.
“Select them yourself,” said the priest to the hoalii, and the latter took from the heap and handed to him three birds. The priest opened them, and the crops of all were found to be filled with small fish and bits of sea-weed.
“Choose them yourself,” said the priest to the hoalii, and the latter picked three birds from the pile and handed them to him. The priest opened them up, and he found that their crops were all stuffed with small fish and pieces of seaweed.
“Behold my witness!” exclaimed the priest, pointing to the eviscerated birds, and turning toward the hoalii with a look of triumph. [163]
“Look at my proof!” shouted the priest, gesturing to the gutted birds and facing the hoalii with a triumphant expression. [__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]
Confounded and enraged at the development, Hua seized a javelin, and without a word savagely drove it into the breast of Luahoomoe, killing him on the spot. A shudder ran through the witnesses as the venerable victim fell to the earth, for violence to a high-priest was a crime almost beyond comprehension; but the king coolly handed the bloody weapon to an attendant, and, with a remorseless glance at the dying priest, leisurely walked away.
Confused and furious about what had just happened, Hua grabbed a javelin and, without saying anything, violently plunged it into Luahoomoe's chest, killing him instantly. A chill went through those watching as the respected victim collapsed to the ground, as harming a high priest was nearly unimaginable; however, the king calmly handed the bloody weapon to an aide and, with a cold look at the dying priest, casually walked away.
Sending for Luuana, he immediately elevated him to the dignity of high-priest, and ordered the body of Luahoomoe to be laid upon the altar of the heiau. The house of the dead priest was then burned, in accordance with ancient custom, and the king’s executioners were despatched with attendants in search of the sons of Luahoomoe.
Sending for Luuana, he quickly promoted him to the position of high priest and ordered that Luahoomoe's body be placed on the altar of the heiau. The deceased priest’s house was then burned, following ancient tradition, and the king's executioners were sent out with assistants to find the sons of Luahoomoe.
Proud of his newly-acquired honors, Luuana made preparations for extensive sacrifices, and then proceeded to the heiau with the body of Luahoomoe. As he approached the gate of the outer enclosure, the tall pea, or wooden cross indicative of the sanctity of the place, fell to the ground, and on reaching the inner court the earth began to quake, groans issued from the carved images of the gods, and the altar sank into the earth, leaving an opening from which issued fire and smoke. The attendants dropped the body of the priest and fled from the heiau in dismay, followed by the no less frightened Luuana.
Proud of his newly-acquired honors, Luuana made preparations for significant sacrifices, and then headed to the heiau with Luahoomoe's body. As he got close to the gate of the outer enclosure, the tall pea, a wooden cross that marked the holiness of the place, fell to the ground. When he reached the inner court, the earth started to shake, groans came from the carved images of the gods, and the altar sunk into the earth, creating an opening from which fire and smoke erupted. The attendants dropped the priest's body and hurried out of the heiau in panic, with a similarly terrified Luuana following them.
The priests of the temple, who knew nothing of the death of Luahoomoe until they beheld his body about to be offered in sacrifice, stood for a moment awe-stricken at what was transpiring around them. They had been taught that the heiau was the only place of safety for them in a time of danger, and after the flight of Luuana and his attendants they tenderly conveyed the body of the high-priest to a hut within the enclosure to prepare it for burial.
The temple priests, unaware of Luahoomoe's death until they saw his body about to be sacrificed, stood frozen in shock at what was happening around them. They had been taught that the heiau was their only safe haven in times of danger, and after Luuana and his attendants had fled, they gently took the body of the high priest to a hut within the enclosure to get it ready for burial.
Luuana repaired in haste to the halealii to report to the king what had occurred at the heiau. But his story excited but little surprise in Hua, for events quite as overwhelming were occurring all around them. The earth was affected with a slight but continuous tremor; a hot and almost suffocating wind had set in from the southward; strange murmurs were heard in the air; the skies were crimson, and drops of blood fell from the clouds; and finally reports came from all parts of Hana that the streams, wells and springs were no longer yielding water, and a general flight of the people to the mountains had commenced. [164]
Luuana rushed to the halealii to tell the king what had happened at the heiau. However, his story caused only slight surprise in Hua, as equally shocking events were happening all around them. The ground was shaking with a slight but constant tremor; a hot and nearly suffocating wind was blowing in from the south; strange sounds filled the air; the skies were red, and drops of blood fell from the clouds; and finally, reports came in from all over Hana that the streams, wells, and springs were drying up, prompting people to flee to the mountains. [__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]
Such chiefs as could be found were hastily called together in council. Hua was completely subdued, and admitted that he had angered the gods by killing Luahoomoe. But what was to be done? Perhaps the sons of the martyred priest might be appealed to. But where were they? No one knew. It was suggested that a hundred human sacrifices be offered, but Luuana declined to appear again at the heiau, and resigned his office of high-priest. Another was appointed, and the sacrifices were ceremoniously offered. The mu had no difficulty in obtaining victims, for the people were desperate and offered themselves by scores. But the drought continued, and the general suffering increased from day to day. All other signs of the displeasure of the gods had passed away.
The chiefs that could be found were quickly brought together for a meeting. Hua was totally humbled and admitted that he had upset the gods by killing Luahoomoe. But what could they do? Maybe they could appeal to the sons of the murdered priest. But where were they? No one knew. Someone suggested that they offer a hundred human sacrifices, but Luuana refused to return to the heiau and stepped down from his position as high priest. Another was appointed, and the sacrifices were performed with ceremony. The mu had no trouble finding victims since people were desperate and volunteered in large numbers. But the drought persisted, and the general suffering grew worse every day. All other signs of the gods’ anger had disappeared.
Other sacrifices were offered in great profusion, and an imu-loa was constructed, where human bodies were baked and in that form presented to the gods. But the springs and streams, remained dry, and the clouds dropped no rain.
Other sacrifices were offered in large numbers, and an imu-loa was built, where human bodies were cooked and then presented to the gods. But the springs and streams stayed dry, and the clouds brought no rain.
The gods were redecorated, and the erection of a new heiau was commenced, but the people remaining in the district were too few and too weak to complete it; and a strict tabu was declared for a season of ten days, but the people were too desperate to observe it, and no attempt was made to punish those who disregarded it. Many drowned themselves, insane from thirst, and such as could procure the poisonous mixture died from the effects of koheoheo administered by their own hands.
The gods were given a makeover, and the building of a new heiau began, but the people left in the area were too few and too weak to finish it. A strict tabu was announced for ten days, but the people were too desperate to follow it, and no effort was made to punish those who broke it. Many drowned themselves, driven insane by thirst, and those who could get the poisonous mixture died from the effects of koheoheo taken by their own hands.
The drought extended to the mountains, and the people fled beyond; but wherever they went the streams became dry and the rains ceased. The pestilence became known in western Maui, and the famishing refugees were driven back in attempting to enter that district.
The drought spread to the mountains, and people escaped further away; but no matter where they went, the streams dried up and the rains stopped. The disease started to appear in western Maui, and the starving refugees were turned away when they tried to enter that area.
After vainly attempting to stay the dreadful scourge, and seeing his kingdom nearly depopulated, Hua secretly embarked with a few of his attendants for Hawaii. He landed in the district of Kona; but the drought followed him. Wherever he went the fresh waters sank into the earth and the clouds yielded no rain. And so he journeyed on from place to place, carrying famine and misery with him, until in the course of his wanderings, occupying more than three years, he rendered almost one-half of the island of Hawaii a desolation. Finally he died, as the gods had decreed, of thirst and starvation—one legend says [165]in a temple of Kohala—and his bones were left to dry in the sun; and the saying of “rattling are the bones of Hua in the sun,” or “dry are the bones of Hua in the sun,” has come down to the present as a significant reference to the fate of one high in power who defied the gods and persecuted the priesthood.
After unsuccessfully trying to stop the terrible plague and seeing his kingdom nearly emptied, Hua secretly set off for Hawaii with a few of his attendants. He landed in the Kona area, but the drought followed him. Everywhere he went, the fresh waters disappeared into the ground, and the clouds refused to bring rain. He traveled from place to place, bringing famine and misery with him, until, over the course of more than three years, he turned almost half of the island of Hawaii into a wasteland. Eventually, he died, as the gods had decided, from thirst and starvation—one legend says [__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]in a temple in Kohala—and his bones were left to dry in the sun. The saying “the bones of Hua rattle in the sun” or “the bones of Hua are dry in the sun” has endured as a notable reference to the fate of someone powerful who defied the gods and persecuted the priesthood.
But rainless skies and drought did not mark alone the footsteps of Hua and his attendants. Wherever the despairing people of the district went the same affliction followed. Some of them sailed to Hawaii, others to Molokai and Oahu, and a few to Kauai; but nowhere could they find relief. Everywhere the drought kept pace with them, and famine and suffering were the result throughout the entire group. The diviners had discovered the cause of the scourge, but neither prayers nor sacrifices could avert or ameliorate it. And so it continued for nearly three and a half years.
But rainless skies and drought didn’t just follow Hua and his attendants. Wherever the desperate people in the area went, the same suffering followed them. Some traveled to Hawaii, others to Molokai and Oahu, and a few to Kauai; but they couldn’t find relief anywhere. The drought continued alongside them, and famine and hardship spread throughout the entire region. The diviners had figured out the reason for their suffering, but neither prayers nor sacrifices could change or lessen it. And so it went on for almost three and a half years.
II.
During all the long years of famine and death what had befallen Oluolu, the young wife of Kaakakai, left in the secluded valley back of Hana? She saw the blight that suddenly fell upon the land; saw the springs and streams go dry around her humble home; saw the leaves of the banana wither and the grass turn yellow in the valley; saw famishing men, women and children madly searching for water, and tearing down cocoanuts for the little milk they afforded; and then by degrees she learned of all that had transpired and was still transpiring in Hana, including the sad story of the death of Luahoomoe and the flight of Kaakakai. But whither had he fled? No one could tell her; but, wherever he might be, she knew that, if alive, he would some day return to her, and therefore struggled on as best she could to live.
During all the long years of famine and death, what happened to Oluolu, the young wife of Kaakakai, left in the secluded valley behind Hana? She witnessed the devastation that suddenly struck the land; saw the springs and streams dry up around her simple home; saw the leaves of the banana plants wither and the grass turn yellow in the valley; saw starving men, women, and children frantically searching for water and breaking open coconuts for the little milk they contained; and gradually she learned about everything that had happened and was still happening in Hana, including the tragic story of Luahoomoe’s death and Kaakakai’s escape. But where had he gone? No one could tell her; but wherever he was, she knew that if he was alive, he would one day return to her, and so she struggled to survive as best as she could.
Her home was with Kaakao, whose wife was Mamulu. They had been blessed with three sons, all of whom had perished in Hua’s useless wars, and now in their old age they were occupying a little kuleana, so far up the narrow valley winding into the hills that no land for cultivation was found above them. They had small patches of taro and potatoes, a score or two of cocoanut-trees of old growth, and plantains and bananas enough for their use. In the hills back of them were ohias and other wild [166]fruits, and, with pigs and fowls in abundance, there was never any lack of food in the house of Kaakao.
Her home was with Kaakao, whose wife was Mamulu. They had been blessed with three sons, all of whom had died in Hua’s pointless wars, and now in their old age they lived in a small kuleana, so far up the narrow valley winding into the hills that there was no land for farming above them. They had small patches of taro and potatoes, a couple dozen coconut trees of old growth, and enough plantains and bananas for their needs. In the hills behind them were ohias and other wild [__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]fruits, and with plenty of pigs and fowls, there was never any shortage of food in Kaakao’s home.
But when the drought came, accompanied by the scorching south wind, Kaakao shared the fate of his neighbors. His pigs and fowls scattered in search of water, and did not return. The ripening plantains and bananas, together with a few bulbs of taro, were hastily gathered, and the food supply stored in the house was adequate to the wants of the occupants for some weeks to come; but fresh water was nowhere to be found, and the cocoanuts were stripped from the trees and laid away to meet, as far as possible, the terrible emergency.
But when the drought hit, along with the blazing south wind, Kaakao faced the same struggles as his neighbors. His pigs and chickens scattered in search of water and didn't come back. The ripening plantains and bananas, along with a few bulbs of taro, were quickly gathered, and the food supply stored in the house was enough for the residents for several weeks; however, fresh water was nowhere to be found, and the coconuts were taken from the trees and saved to help deal with the dire situation as best as possible.
Thus passed nearly half a month, during which time harrowing reports from the valleys below reached the kuleana through parties vainly searching everywhere among the hills for water. Then Kaakao saw that his supply of cocoanut-milk was nearly exhausted, and resolved to visit the sea-shore, where he knew of a spring in times past dripping from the rocks almost on a level with the waves. “Surely,” he thought, “that spring cannot be dry, with all the water around it.” And, swinging two water-calabashes over his shoulders, he started for the sea-shore. But he never returned. In passing to the coast he was seized, among others, and offered as a sacrifice in the heiau.
Thus passed nearly half a month, during which time disturbing reports from the valleys below reached the kuleana through groups desperately searching everywhere among the hills for water. Then Kaakao noticed that his supply of coconut milk was nearly gone and decided to head to the shore, where he remembered a spring that used to drip from the rocks almost at sea level. “Surely,” he thought, “that spring can’t be dry with all the water around it.” So, swinging two water calabashes over his shoulders, he set off for the shore. But he never came back. While heading to the coast, he was captured, along with others, and offered as a sacrifice in the heiau.
For two days his return was awaited at the kuleana. Then Mamulu solemnly said: “Kaakao is dead. We have no more water and but little food. Why suffer longer? Let us drink koheoheo and die.”
For two days, everyone at the kuleana waited for him to come back. Then Mamulu said with a heavy heart: “Kaakao is dead. We have no more water and barely any food. Why should we keep suffering? Let’s drink koheoheo and just end it.”
“Not to-day, my good friend Mamulu,” replied Oluolu, soothingly. “We will talk of it to-morrow. Last night in my dreams a whisper told me not to despair. Let us wait.”
“Not today, my good friend Mamulu,” replied Oluolu, calmly. “We'll talk about it tomorrow. Last night in my dreams, a whisper told me not to lose hope. Let’s wait.”
The next morning Oluolu rose at daylight. The last of the cocoanut-milk was gone, and the mouths of both were dry and feverish. There was a strangely cheerful light in Oluolu’s eyes as she bent over the suffering but patient Mamulu, and, holding up a calabash, said: “I shall soon return with this filled with water!—think of it, Mamulu!—filled with pure, fresh water!”
The next morning, Oluolu got up at dawn. The last of the coconut milk was gone, and both of their mouths were dry and feverish. There was a strangely cheerful light in Oluolu’s eyes as she leaned over the suffering but patient Mamulu and, holding up a calabash, said, “I’ll be back soon with this filled with water!—just think about it, Mamulu!—filled with pure, fresh water!”
“Poor child!” replied Mamulu, not doubting that her mind was wandering. “But where will you go for it?”
“Poor thing!” replied Mamulu, not believing that she was fully present. “But where will you go for it?”
“Only a short walk—right up the valley!” returned Oluolu. “You know the little cavern among the rocks. The mouth is [167]almost closed, but I can find it. The water is in the back part of the ana. It is running water, but it disappears in the darkness. Perhaps it comes from Po; but no matter—it is sweet and good. Luahoomoe came to me last night, with his long, white hair smeared with blood, and told me he had sent the water there. It is for us alone. If others know of it or taste it, it will disappear. So we must be careful, Mamulu, very careful.”
“Just a quick walk—right up the valley!” Oluolu replied. “You know the little cave among the rocks. The entrance is almost blocked, but I can still find it. The water is at the back of the ana. It’s flowing water, but it vanishes into the darkness. It might come from Po; but it doesn't matter—it’s sweet and refreshing. Luahoomoe came to me last night, with his long, white hair stained with blood, and told me he had sent the water there. It’s just for us. If others find out about it or taste it, it will vanish. So we have to be careful, Mamulu, very careful.”
Leaving the woman almost in a daze at the words thus spoken in rapid and excited sentences, Oluolu left the hut and started up the narrow valley. A walk of three or four minutes brought her to the entrance of an abrupt and chasm-like ravine gashing the hills on the right. To its almost precipitous sides clung overhanging masses of ragged volcanic rock, from the crevices of which a sturdy vegetation had taken root, and in time past gloomily shaded the narrow channel; but the interlacing branches of the trees were almost leafless, and all around were seen the footprints of death and desolation. Not a breath of wind cooled the sultry air, and no sound of living creature broke the silence of the heated hills. The mouth of the ravine was partially choked with huge boulders washed down by the freshets of centuries, and the ground was strewn with dead leaves and broken branches.
Leaving the woman almost stunned by the rapid and excited words she had just heard, Oluolu left the hut and headed up the narrow valley. A walk of three or four minutes brought her to the entrance of a steep, chasm-like ravine cutting through the hills on the right. The nearly vertical sides were lined with overhanging masses of jagged volcanic rock, from the cracks of which resilient vegetation had taken root, once casting gloomy shadows over the narrow channel; but the intertwining branches of the trees were mostly bare, and all around were the signs of death and desolation. Not a breath of wind cooled the stifling air, and no sounds of living creatures broke the silence of the sweltering hills. The mouth of the ravine was partially blocked by huge boulders washed down by centuries of floods, and the ground was littered with dead leaves and broken branches.
Casting her eyes around in every direction, to be sure that she was not observed, Oluolu quickly found a way over the boulders and ascended the ravine. Proceeding upward thirty or forty yards, and climbing a rocky bench, over which in seasons of rain had poured a little cascade, she stopped in front of an overhanging mass of vitreous rock, and the next moment disappeared in a stooping posture through a low opening almost concealed by decrepitations from above. The opening led to a cavern forty or fifty feet in depth, with an irregular width almost as great. The floor descended from the entrance, and was smooth and apparently water-worn. Two or three steps forward enabled her to stand upright; but all beyond was darkness, and for a moment she remained undecided which way to proceed. She heard a sound like that of a bare and cautious footstep on the smooth floor. She was startled, but suffering had made her desperate, and she listened again. The same sound continued, but it was mellowed into the soft murmur of waters somewhere back in the darkness, and with a swelling heart she groped her [168]way toward the silvery voice, sweeter to her than the strains of the ohe or the songs of birds.
Casting her eyes around in every direction to ensure she wasn’t seen, Oluolu quickly navigated over the boulders and climbed up the ravine. After moving upward for about thirty or forty yards and climbing over a rocky ledge where a small waterfall had flowed during the rainy season, she paused in front of a hanging mass of shiny rock. In the next moment, she bent down and slipped through a low opening that was almost hidden by debris from above. The opening led to a cavern that was about forty or fifty feet deep and nearly as wide. The floor sloped down from the entrance and was smooth, likely worn by water. After taking a couple of steps forward, she could stand upright, but everything beyond was shrouded in darkness, and for a moment, she hesitated about which way to go. She heard a sound that resembled a careful footstep on the smooth floor. Startled, but driven to desperation by her suffering, she listened again. The same sound persisted, but it faded into the gentle murmur of water somewhere deep in the darkness. With her heart racing, she felt her way toward the silvery voice, which was sweeter to her than the strains of the ohe or the songs of birds.
Closer and closer she approached, every step making more distinct the joyful music, until at last she felt the spatter of cool water upon her bare feet. Stretching out her hand, it came in contact with a little stream gushing from the back wall of the cavern, and instantly disappearing where it fell upon a layer of loose gravel washed down from the entrance. She hastily drank from her palm, and found that the water was cool and sweet. Then she held the mouth of the calabash under the stream, and, after wetting her head and drinking until prudence counseled her to stop, refilled the vessel, cautiously emerged from the opening, and hastened back to the hut.
She got closer and closer, each step making the joyful music clearer, until she finally felt the splash of cool water on her bare feet. Reaching out, she touched a small stream flowing from the back wall of the cave, which quickly disappeared when it hit a layer of loose gravel washed down from the entrance. She hurriedly drank from her palm and found the water cool and sweet. Then she held the mouth of her calabash under the stream, wet her head, and drank until she felt it was time to stop before refilling the vessel. Cautiously, she left the opening and hurried back to the hut.
Hesitating without the door, to satisfy herself that no one had arrived during her absence, Oluolu noiselessly entered, and, stealing to the kapa-moe upon which Mamulu was half-deliriously dreaming, poured a quantity of water upon her head, and, as she opened her eyes with a bewildered stare, dropped a swallow into her parched and open mouth.
Hesitating outside the door to make sure no one had come while she was gone, Oluolu quietly stepped inside and, sneaking up to the kapa-moe where Mamulu was half-deliriously dreaming, poured some water over her head. As Mamulu opened her eyes with a confused look, Oluolu dropped a swallow into her dry, open mouth.
Half-rising, Mamulu dreamily felt of her dripping hair, and then stared vacantly at Oluolu, who stood smilingly beside her with the calabash in her hand. In a moment she recalled all that had occurred before she dropped into the troubled sleep from which she had been so strangely aroused.
Half-rising, Mamulu dreamily touched her dripping hair, then stared blankly at Oluolu, who stood next to her with a smile and a calabash in her hand. In a moment, she remembered everything that had happened before she fell into the troubled sleep from which she had been so strangely awakened.
“Then it is not a dream!” she murmured, clasping her wasted hands upon her breast. “The gods have sent us water!” And she reached for the calabash.
“Then it’s not a dream!” she whispered, pressing her frail hands against her chest. “The gods have given us water!” And she reached for the gourd.
“No,” said Oluolu kindly, withdrawing the vessel. “We have plenty, but you are weak and would drink too much. Now lie down, with this roll of kapa under your head, and while I am giving you a swallow at a time I will tell you all about the water and how I found it.”
“No,” said Oluolu gently, pulling back the container. “We have enough, but you’re weak and would drink too much. Now lie down with this roll of kapa under your head, and while I give you a sip at a time, I’ll tell you all about the water and how I found it.”
And so, slowly feeding Mamulu with the precious fluid, and at the same time bathing her head and throat, Oluolu related to her everything that had occurred.
And so, while gently giving Mamulu the precious liquid and simultaneously bathing her head and neck, Oluolu told her everything that had happened.
“But will the stream continue?” anxiously inquired Mamulu. “Would it not be well to fill all the calabashes in the house, and all we can procure, and so keep them, that we may not be left without water should the stream disappear?”
“But will the stream keep flowing?” Mamulu asked anxiously. “Wouldn’t it be smart to fill all the calabashes in the house, and get as many as we can, so we have enough stored in case the stream dries up?”
“I think it would not be well to anger the gods by doubting [169]them,” replied Oluolu. “The water was sent, not to prolong our sufferings, but to save our lives; and I am sure it will continue so long as we guard the secret and allow no others to use it.”
“I don’t think it’s a good idea to anger the gods by doubting them,” replied Oluolu. “The water was given to us, not to extend our suffering, but to save our lives; and I’m sure it will keep flowing as long as we protect the secret and don’t let anyone else use it.”
Oluolu’s faith was rewarded. Without any diminution in volume the little stream continued to flow and sink in the darkness of the cavern until the wrath of the gods was appeased and the rains finally came again. But Oluolu and her companion could not subsist on water alone. The parched earth produced no food; but they did not despair. Every day they cautiously watered a little patch of mountain taro in the ravine above the cavern, and at intervals of four or five days went to the sea-shore and returned with fish, crabs, limpets and edible sea-weed.
Oluolu’s faith was rewarded. Without any decrease in volume, the little stream continued to flow and disappear into the darkness of the cavern until the gods' anger was calmed and the rains finally returned. But Oluolu and her companion couldn't survive on water alone. The dry land produced no food; however, they didn’t lose hope. Every day, they carefully watered a small patch of mountain taro in the ravine above the cavern, and every four or five days, they went to the shore and came back with fish, crabs, limpets, and edible seaweed.
And so they managed to live without suffering, while the valleys became almost depopulated, and all others in Hana were stricken with famine. They seldom saw a human face in their journeys to and from the sea, and never in the valley where they lived, and the few they met avoided them, fearful, no doubt, that the miserable means of subsistence to which they resorted might become known to others.
And so they managed to live without suffering, while the valleys became almost empty, and everyone else in Hana was hit by famine. They rarely saw another person on their trips to and from the sea, and never in the valley where they lived. The few people they did meet avoided them, likely afraid that the desperate ways they survived might be discovered by others.
III.
It was near the end of the terrible scourge that the district of Ewa, on the island of Oahu, became its victim. It followed the appearance there of a Hana chief and a few of his retainers, who had been driven from Molokai. At that time there lived at Waimalu, in the district of Ewa, the celebrated priest and prophet Naula-a-Maihea. No one in the Hawaiian priesthood of the past was ever more feared or respected. It was thought by some that he had visited the shadowy realms of Milu, and from Paliuli had brought back the waters of life. He must have been well on in years, for, as already mentioned, he is credited with having been the priest of Laa-mai-kahiki on the romantic journey of that prince from the southern islands.
It was near the end of the terrible outbreak that the district of Ewa, on the island of Oahu, became a victim. This happened after a Hana chief and a few of his followers, who had been expelled from Molokai, arrived there. At that time, the famous priest and prophet Naula-a-Maihea lived in Waimalu, in the district of Ewa. No one in the Hawaiian priesthood of the past was more feared or respected than he was. Some believed that he had visited the shadowy realms of Milu, and from Paliuli, had brought back the waters of life. He must have been quite old, as he is credited with having been the priest of Laa-mai-kahiki during the romantic journey of that prince from the southern islands.
In evidence of the great sanctity of Naula, tradition relates that his canoe was upset during a journey from Waianae, Oahu, to Kauai. He was swallowed by a whale, in whose stomach he remained without inconvenience until the monster crossed the channel and vomited him up alive on the beach at Waialua, [170]Kauai, the precise place of his destination. At another time, when crossing to Hawaii, and beset with adverse winds, two huge black sharks, sent by Mooalii, the shark-god of Molokai, towed him to Kohala so swiftly that the sea-birds could scarcely keep him company.
In proof of Naula's great sanctity, tradition says that his canoe capsized while he was traveling from Waianae, Oahu, to Kauai. He was swallowed by a whale, and he stayed in its stomach with no discomfort until the creature crossed the channel and spat him out alive on the beach at Waialua, [__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]Kauai, exactly where he was trying to go. On another occasion, while crossing to Hawaii during rough winds, two massive black sharks, sent by Mooalii, the shark-god of Molokai, pulled him to Kohala so quickly that the sea-birds could barely keep up with him.
He built a heiau at Waimalu, the foundations of which may still be traced, and in the inner temple of the enclosure it is asserted that Lono conversed with him freely; and at his bidding the spirits of the living (kahaoka) as well as the shades of the dead (unihipili) made their appearance; for it was believed by the ancient Hawaiians that the spirits or souls of the living sometimes separated themselves from the body during slumber or while in a condition of trance, and became visible in distant places to priests of especial sanctity.
He built a heiau at Waimalu, and the foundations can still be seen today. Inside the temple enclosure, it's said that Lono spoke with him openly; at his request, the spirits of the living (kahaoka) and the shades of the dead (unihipili) showed themselves. The ancient Hawaiians believed that the spirits or souls of the living could sometimes detach from the body while sleeping or in a trance and appear in distant places to specially sacred priests.
Consulting with the gods, Naula discovered the cause of the drought, and, becoming alarmed at the threatened destruction of the entire population of the group, undertook to stay the ravages of the spreading scourge. With a vision enlarged and intensified by sacrifice and prayer, he ascended the highest peak of the Waianae Mountains. Far as the eye could reach the skies were cloudless. He first looked toward Kaala, but discerned no sign of rain around its wooded summits. He turned toward Kauai, but not a cloud could be seen above the mountains of that island. Cloudless, also, were the mountains of Molokai. Finally, casting his eyes in the direction of Maui, he saw a small, dark spot like a rain-cloud hanging above the peak of Hanaula. “It may disappear,” he thought; “I will wait.” Midday came. He looked again, and the spot was still there. The sun grew red in the west. Again he looked and found that the cloud had neither disappeared nor moved. “Surely the sons of Luahoomoe are there,” he said to himself. “I will go to them; they will listen to me, and the waters will come again.”
Consulting with the gods, Naula learned the reason for the drought and, alarmed by the threat of total destruction for the entire population, took action to stop the devastation caused by the spreading scourge. With a vision heightened by sacrifice and prayer, he climbed to the highest peak of the Waianae Mountains. As far as he could see, the skies were clear. He first looked toward Kaala but saw no signs of rain around its forested summits. He then turned to Kauai, but there wasn’t a cloud in sight above the mountains of that island. The mountains of Molokai were also cloudless. Finally, glancing in the direction of Maui, he spotted a small, dark patch like a rain cloud hovering over the peak of Hanaula. “It might disappear,” he thought; “I’ll wait.” Midday arrived. He looked again, and the patch was still there. The sun turned red in the west. He checked once more and found that the cloud hadn’t vanished or shifted. “Surely, the sons of Luahoomoe are there,” he said to himself. “I’ll go to them; they will listen to me, and the waters will return.”
Naula descended from the mountain, and the same night embarked alone in a canoe for Maui. He spread no sail, used no paddle, but all night his waa skimmed the waves with the speed of the wind, and at sunrise the next morning he landed at Makena, above which, a few miles inland, towered the peak of Hanaula, with the dark spot still hanging over it.
Naula came down from the mountain and that same night set off alone in a canoe for Maui. He didn’t spread a sail or use a paddle, but all night long his waa glided across the waves as fast as the wind, and at sunrise the next morning, he arrived at Makena, where, just a few miles inland, the peak of Hanaula rose up, still with the dark spot hovering above it.
There, indeed, were the sons of Luahoomoe. Nurtured by the rains that had fallen alone on the peak of Hanaula, there [171]they had remained unseen for three and a half years, waiting for the wrath of the gods to be appeased and for a summons to descend. A strange light accompanied the canoe of Naula in the darkness. From their elevated retreat they noted it far out upon the ocean, and watched it growing brighter as it approached, until it went out on the beach at Makena. They knew it to be the signal of their deliverance, and hastened down the mountain to meet the messenger of the gods. One account says they met Naula at Kula; but the meeting occurred not far from the Makena landing, where the priest, inspired with a knowledge of their coming, awaited their arrival. As they approached, the venerable kahuna, his white hair and beard falling to his waist and a tabu staff in his hand, advanced to meet them. They bowed respectfully, and, returning the salutation, Naula said:
There were indeed the sons of Luahoomoe. Nurtured by the rains that had fallen solely on the peak of Hanaula, there [__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__] they had remained hidden for three and a half years, waiting for the anger of the gods to calm down and for a call to come down to them. A strange light followed Naula's canoe in the darkness. From their high retreat, they spotted it far out in the ocean and watched as it grew brighter while it approached, finally going out on the beach at Makena. They recognized it as the signal of their rescue and hurried down the mountain to greet the messenger of the gods. One account says they met Naula at Kula; however, the meeting actually happened not far from the Makena landing, where the priest, realizing they were coming, was waiting for them. As they got closer, the elderly kahuna, with his white hair and beard reaching his waist and a tabu staff in his hand, came forward to meet them. They bowed respectfully, and in response to their greeting, Naula said:
“I know you to be the sons of Luahoomoe, whose death by the hands of Hua, King of Hana, has been avenged by the gods upon the people of all the islands of Hawaii. The earth is still parched, and thousands are seeking in vain for food and water. Hua is dead; his bones lie unburied in the sun. Scattered or dead are the people of Hana; their lands are yellow, and their springs and streams yield nothing but dust and ashes. Great was the crime of Hua, and great has been the punishment. I am Naula-a-Maihea, the high-priest of Oahu, and have come to ask, with you, that the gods may be merciful and no longer scourge the people.”
“I know you are the sons of Luahoomoe, whose death at the hands of Hua, King of Hana, has been avenged by the gods on the people of all the Hawaiian islands. The land is still dry, and thousands are desperately searching for food and water. Hua is dead; his bones lie exposed in the sun. The people of Hana are scattered or dead; their lands are parched, and their springs and streams produce nothing but dust and ashes. Hua committed a great crime, and the punishment has been severe. I am Naula-a-Maihea, the high priest of Oahu, and I have come to ask, along with you, that the gods show mercy and no longer punish the people.”
At the mention of his name the sons of Luahoomoe bowed low before the aged prophet of whose sanctity report had years before apprised them, and then Kaakakai replied:
At the mention of his name, the sons of Luahoomoe bowed deeply before the old prophet, whose holiness they had heard about years ago, and then Kaakakai responded:
“Great priest, willingly will we add our voices to your supplication to the gods, whose vengeance has indeed been terrible. But since our retreat was revealed to you and nothing seems to be hidden from your understanding, let me ask if you know aught of the fate of Oluolu. She was my wife, and I left her in a little valley in the mountains back of Hana. I loved her greatly, and am grieved with the fear that she is dead.”
“Great priest, we’re happy to join you in asking the gods for help, whose wrath has truly been severe. Since you seem to know everything and our retreat was disclosed to you, can I ask if you know anything about Oluolu's fate? She was my wife, and I left her in a small valley in the mountains behind Hana. I loved her deeply and am heartbroken with worry that she might be dead.”
Without replying the priest seated himself upon the ground, and, unbinding the kihei from his shoulders, threw it over his head, shutting the light from his face. While one hand pressed the mantle closely to his breast, the other held to his forehead what seemed to be a talisman of stone suspended by a short [172]cord from his neck. He remained motionless in that position for some minutes; then throwing off the kihei and rising to his feet, he turned to Kaakakai and said:
Without saying a word, the priest sat down on the ground and, untying the kihei from his shoulders, draped it over his head, blocking the light from his face. One hand pressed the mantle tightly against his chest, while the other held a talisman made of stone that hung from a short [__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]cord around his neck. He stayed still in that position for several minutes; then, pushing aside the kihei and standing up, he turned to Kaakakai and said:
“I was not wrong in my thought. The presence here of the sons of Luahoomoe has sanctified the spot to communion with the spirits of the air. Oluolu, alone with a woman much her elder, still lives where you left her and hopefully awaits the coming of Kaakakai—for such I now know to be your name. The spirit of Luahoomoe has nourished and protected her.”
“I was right in my thinking. The presence of the sons of Luahoomoe has made this place a connection to the spirits of the air. Oluolu, alone with a woman much older than her, is still living where you left her and is hopefully waiting for the arrival of Kaakakai—for that is your name, as I now know. The spirit of Luahoomoe has taken care of and protected her.”
“Great Naula, most favored of the gods!” exclaimed Kaakakai, grasping the hand of the priest. “You have made my heart glad! Now ask of me what you will!”
“Great Naula, most favored of the gods!” shouted Kaakakai, holding the priest's hand. “You have made me so happy! Now ask me anything you want!”
On the very spot from which the priest had risen they proceeded to erect a rude altar of stones. When it was completed Naula brought from his canoe a combined image of the godhead—the Oie of the early priesthood—and a small enclosed calabash of holy water—ka-wai-kapu-a-Kane. Removing the kapa covering, the image was placed beside the altar, and while the priest recited the solemn kaiokopeo, or prayer of consecration, Kaakakai intoned the invocation and continued at intervals to sprinkle the altar with holy water.
On the exact spot where the priest had stood, they started to build a rough altar out of stones. Once it was done, Naula brought from his canoe a combined figure of the divine— the Oie of the early priesthood—and a small, enclosed calabash of holy water—ka-wai-kapu-a-Kane. After taking off the kapa covering, the figure was placed next to the altar. While the priest recited the solemn kaiokopeo, or prayer of consecration, Kaakakai chanted the invocation and intermittently sprinkled the altar with holy water.
The dedication ceremonies were at length concluded; but what was there to offer as a sacrifice? The hills were bare and parched. Far as the eye could reach the lands were deserted, and no living thing beside themselves was visible. Suddenly there appeared among the leafless shrubbery near them a large black hog sacred to sacrifice. The brothers exchanged looks of wonder, but the priest did not seem to be greatly surprised. The animal was immediately seized, killed and placed upon the altar, and sacrificial prayers were devoutly offered.
The dedication ceremonies finally came to an end, but what could they offer as a sacrifice? The hills were dry and barren. As far as the eye could see, the land was empty, and there was no sign of life except for the two of them. Then, out of the leafless bushes nearby, a large black hog appeared, which was considered sacred for sacrifice. The brothers exchanged surprised glances, but the priest didn’t seem too shocked. The animal was quickly captured, killed, and placed on the altar, and they offered their sacrificial prayers with reverence.
In the midst of these services a wind set in from the south. Black clouds began to gather, from which the answering voice of thunder came, and then a gentle rain began to fall upon the sere and hungry earth. Raising his face into the baptism, Naula with emotion exclaimed:
In the middle of these services, a wind picked up from the south. Dark clouds started to form, and the rumble of thunder followed, then a light rain began to fall on the dry, thirsty ground. Lifting his face into the rain, Naula exclaimed with feeling:
“The sacrifice is accepted! The gods are merciful, and the people are saved!”
“The sacrifice is accepted! The gods are merciful, and the people are saved!”
And the rains continued, not there alone but all over the islands, until the grass grew green again and the banana put forth its shoots. Everywhere the rejoicing was great. The [173]people returned to their deserted lands, and the valleys of Hana, even, blossomed as before. But Hua and his family had perished from the earth, and a new dynasty came into being to claim the sovereignty of eastern Maui.
And the rain kept falling, not just there but throughout the islands, until the grass turned green again and the banana trees started to sprout. Everywhere, there was great joy. The [__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]people returned to their abandoned lands, and the valleys of Hana bloomed like they used to. But Hua and his family were gone from the earth, and a new dynasty emerged to take over the rule of eastern Maui.
The sons of the martyred Luahoomoe returned at once to Hana, and in the arms of Kaakakai the brave and faithful Oluolu recited the story of her sufferings and deliverance. With largely-augmented possessions Kaakakai became the high-priest under the new régime, and for generations his descendants continued to be among the most influential of the families of eastern Maui. Kaanahua became the god of the husbandman.
The sons of the martyred Luahoomoe immediately returned to Hana, and in the arms of Kaakakai, the brave and loyal Oluolu shared the tale of her pain and rescue. With greatly increased wealth, Kaakakai became the high priest under the new regime, and for generations, his descendants remained among the most influential families in eastern Maui. Kaanahua became the god of farmers.
The political events immediately following the death of Hua are but vaguely referred to by tradition, and the few particulars known doubtless owe their preservation to the care taken by the priesthood—to which class the historians of the past usually belonged—to bring down, with all its terrible details, the fate of Hua, as a warning to succeeding sovereigns who might be disposed to trespass upon the sacred domain of the spiritual rulers who, in a measure, divided the allegiance of their subjects. [175]
The political events right after Hua's death are only vaguely mentioned in tradition, and the few details that are known likely survive because the priesthood—who were typically the historians of the past—made an effort to pass down the full, grim details of Hua's fate as a warning to future rulers who might consider overstepping the sacred authority of the spiritual leaders, who, to some extent, shared the loyalty of their followers. [__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]
The Iron Knife.
[176]
[__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]
CHARACTERS.
- Kalaunuiohua, king of Hawaii.
- Kamaluohua, king of Maui.
- Huapou Lei Lei, alii-nui of Oahu.
- Kahokuohua, king of Molokai.
- Kukona, king of Kauai.
- Kaheka, queen of Hawaii.
- Kuaiwa, son of the king of Hawaii.
- Kapapa, daughter of the king of Hawaii.
- Waahia, a renowned prophetess.
- Kuala Lumpur, adopted son of Waahia.
- Wakalana, an influential chief of Maui.
-
Kaluiki of the birds, men, Hakoa and Hika, shipwrecked travelers. Neleike and women, Malaea, - Manokalanipo, son of the king of Kauai.
[177]
[__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]
THE IRON KNIFE.
THE IRON KNIFE.
A LEGEND OF THE FIRST WAR FOR THE CONQUEST OF THE GROUP.
A LEGEND OF THE FIRST WAR FOR THE CONQUEST OF THE GROUP.
I.
Two or three attempts to consolidate under one general government the several islands of the Hawaiian group were made by ambitious and war-like chiefs previous to the final accomplishment of the project, at the close of the last century, by Kamehameha I.; but all these early schemes of conquest and aggrandizement proved unsuccessful, and were especially unfortunate in affording excuses for retaliatory raids and invasions, sometimes extending, with more or less persistency and bitterness, to generations thereafter.
Two or three attempts to unify the various islands of the Hawaiian group under one central government were made by ambitious and warlike chiefs before Kamehameha I. finally succeeded at the end of the last century. However, all these early plans for conquest and expansion failed and ultimately led to retaliatory raids and invasions, which sometimes continued, with varying intensity and resentment, for generations afterward.
The most disastrous of these ambitious ventures was the first, and connected with it were a number of strange and dramatic incidents, giving to the story of the enterprise something more than a historic interest. It occurred in about A.D. 1260, and the bold warrior who attempted it was Kalaunuiohua, king of the island of Hawaii. He was the grandson of Kalapana, who reconquered the kingdom from Kamaiole, the usurper, as related in the story of “The Royal Hunchback.”
The most disastrous of these ambitious ventures was the first, and it involved a number of strange and dramatic incidents that added more than just historical interest to the tale of the enterprise. It happened around A.D. 1260, and the brave warrior who attempted it was Kalaunuiohua, the king of the island of Hawaii. He was the grandson of Kalapana, who reclaimed the kingdom from Kamaiole, the usurper, as described in the story of “The Royal Hunchback.”
At that time Kamaluohua, the seventh in descent from Paumakua, was the moi of Maui, or rather of the western and greater part of the island. Huapouleilei, the eighth in line from Maweke, was the alii-nui of Oahu, his possessions embracing the districts of Ewa, Waianae and Waialua, while the Koolau and Kona divisions were ruled, respectively, by Moku-a-Loe and Kahuoi. The moi of Molokai was Kahokuohua, the fourth in descent in the old Nanaula line from Keoloewa, the brother of Kaupeepee, the abductor of Hina and desperate defender of the fortress of Haupu, as told in the legend of “Hina, the Hawaiian Helen.” Kukona was the sovereign of Kauai. He was the great-grandson of Ahukini-a-Laa, one of the three sons of the three wives of Laa-mai-kahiki, as mentioned in the story of “The Triple Marriage of Laa-mai-kahiki.” [178]
At that time, Kamaluohua, the seventh descendant of Paumakua, was the moi of Maui, specifically the western and larger part of the island. Huapouleilei, the eighth in line from Maweke, was the alii-nui of Oahu, with his lands including the districts of Ewa, Waianae, and Waialua, while the Koolau and Kona areas were governed by Moku-a-Loe and Kahuoi, respectively. The moi of Molokai was Kahokuohua, the fourth in descent from the old Nanaula line, which traced back to Keoloewa, the brother of Kaupeepee, who kidnapped Hina and was a fierce protector of the Haupu fortress, as recounted in the legend of “Hina, the Hawaiian Helen.” Kukona was the ruler of Kauai. He was the great-grandson of Ahukini-a-Laa, one of the three sons from the three wives of Laa-mai-kahiki, as mentioned in the tale of “The Triple Marriage of Laa-mai-kahiki.” [__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]
The contemporary rulers of the several islands are thus referred to for the reason that they all appear as prominent actors in the several legends from which have been gathered the historic features of the story about to be related, and also for the purpose of keeping partially in view the conspicuous and succeeding representatives of the sovereign families of the group.
The current rulers of the various islands are mentioned here because they are significant figures in the legends that have shaped the historical aspects of the story that will be told, as well as to keep in mind the notable and successive members of the royal families of the group.
Kalaunuiohua—or, as he will be called hereafter, Kalaunui—inherited something of the military spirit of his warlike grandfather, and is referred to by tradition as an ambitious and aggressive sovereign, courageous in enterprise, but lacking in judgment and discretion. This estimate of his character is abundantly sustained by the record of his acts.
Kalaunuiohua—or, as he will be called from now on, Kalaunui—had some of the military spirit of his warrior grandfather. Tradition describes him as an ambitious and aggressive ruler, brave in action but lacking in judgment and discretion. This view of his character is clearly supported by the record of his actions.
Waipio had been made the focus of sovereign authority by Kahaimoelea, the royal father of Kalaunui, and continued to be the most attractive and consequential point in the kingdom. The royal grounds and edifices had been enlarged and improved from time to time, until barbaric taste and skill seemed to be able to add nothing more to their grandeur or beauty. Not far from the royal mansion was the great heiau of Pakaalani, partially built by Kalapana, and completed by his successor. Its tabus were the most sacred on Hawaii, and a descendant of Paao officiated there as high-priest. It was connected with the palace enclosure by a sacred stone pavement, which it was death for any but royal and privileged feet to touch, and on its walls were over a hundred gods.
Waipio had become the center of royal power thanks to Kahaimoelea, the father of Kalaunui, and it remained the most appealing and significant place in the kingdom. The royal grounds and buildings had been expanded and enhanced over time, to the point where no additional improvements seemed possible. Close to the royal house was the large heiau of Pakaalani, partially constructed by Kalapana and finished by his successor. Its tabus were the most revered in Hawaii, and a descendant of Paao served as the high priest there. A sacred stone pathway connected it to the palace area, and it was forbidden for anyone except royalty and those with special privilege to walk on it, while its walls were adorned with over a hundred gods.
Kalaunui was proud of his ancestry, which carried back his lineage both to Pili and Maweke, and united in his veins the foremost blood of the pioneers of the fifth and eleventh centuries. He had two children—a son named Kuaiwa, and a daughter, Kapapa, whose full name was Kapapalimulimu. At the time of which we are writing she was fifteen, and her brother was three or four years older. Both had been carefully reared. The son had been instructed in all the manly accomplishments of the time, and from her infancy the daughter had been guarded with the most jealous watchfulness. She had grown almost to womanhood without betrothal, for the reason that a husband suited to her rank and personally deserving of her beauty could with difficulty be found in the kingdom.
Kalaunui was proud of his heritage, tracing his lineage back to Pili and Maweke, which connected him to the prominent bloodlines of the pioneers from the fifth and eleventh centuries. He had two children—a son named Kuaiwa and a daughter named Kapapa, whose full name was Kapapalimulimu. At the time we’re discussing, she was fifteen, and her brother was three or four years older. Both had been raised with great care. The son had learned all the skills expected of men at that time, while the daughter had been watched over closely since childhood. She had nearly reached adulthood without being engaged because it was hard to find a husband worthy of her status and deserving of her beauty in the kingdom.
Among the number of the king’s retainers of various grades of rank—beginning with the wohi, or chief counsellor of royal [179]blood next to the throne, and ending with the kahu-alii and puuku, or personal and other attendants at the palace—was the young chief Kualu. He was large, muscular and handsome, with a bearing indicative of good blood, and through his courage and capacity at arms had been raised to the military position of pukaua, or captain, and placed in charge of the palace guard—an office which gave him, if he did not before possess it, the privilege of an aialo, or the right to eat food in the presence of the king.
Among the king’s various retainers—starting with the wohi, the chief advisor of royal blood right next to the throne, and finishing with the kahu-alii and puuku, the personal and other attendants at the palace—was the young chief Kualu. He was tall, muscular, and handsome, with a demeanor that showed his noble lineage. Because of his bravery and skill in battle, he had been promoted to the military rank of pukaua, or captain, and appointed to lead the palace guard—an role that granted him, if he didn't already have it, the privilege of an aialo, or the right to eat food in the king's presence.
Kualu was a chief without possessions. His grandfather, a chief of the old line of Nanaula, had been killed in the battle which restored Kalapana to the throne of his fathers, and on the sudden death of his father, twenty years before, he had been adopted by Waahia, a kaula, or prophetess, renowned in tradition for her foresight and influence. He was recognized by the Aha-alii, or college of chiefs of established lineage, as of noble blood, but belonged to that class of chiefs who, lacking the influence of family and estates, were compelled to rely upon their own efforts for advancement.
Kualu was a chief without any possessions. His grandfather, a chief from the old line of Nanaula, had been killed in the battle that restored Kalapana to his rightful throne. When Kualu's father died unexpectedly twenty years ago, Kualu was adopted by Waahia, a kaula, or prophetess, who was well-known in tradition for her insight and influence. The Aha-alii, or college of established lineage chiefs, recognized him as of noble blood, but he belonged to a class of chiefs who, without the support of family and wealth, had to depend on their own efforts to get ahead.
Although it is claimed that Waahia was of chiefly lineage, nothing is positively known, even of her parents. She first appeared in Waipio more than a generation before, and, through an almost undeviating verification of her prophecies, in time became noted and feared by the people, not only as a favored devotee of Uli, the god of the sorcerers, but as a medium through whom the unipihili, or spirits of the dead, communicated. She lived alone in a hut in a retired part of the valley of Waipio, and it is said that a large pueo, or owl, which, with the white alae, was sacred and sometimes worshipped, came nightly and perched upon the roof of her lonely habitation.
Although it's said that Waahia came from a noble family, nothing is definitely known about her parents. She first appeared in Waipio over a generation ago and, through a nearly consistent validation of her prophecies, eventually became recognized and feared by the people, not only as a devoted follower of Uli, the god of sorcerers, but also as a medium through whom the unipihili, or spirits of the dead, communicated. She lived alone in a hut in a secluded area of the Waipio valley, and it’s said that a large pueo, or owl, which, along with the white alae, was sacred and sometimes worshipped, would come each night and perch on the roof of her solitary home.
Of course a kaula of her sanctity wanted for nothing. The people were only too happy to leave at her door anything of which she might stand in need, and the best of everything in the valley came unbidden to her board. Of her abundance she gave to the needy, and, while she seldom spoke to any one, her looks and acts were kind to all. The priesthood recognized her power, and the king and chiefs consulted her in matters of moment when the kilos of the temple were in doubt.
Of course, a kaula of her purity wanted for nothing. People were more than happy to leave at her door anything she might need, and the best of everything in the valley came to her without being asked. She shared her abundance with those in need, and although she rarely spoke to anyone, her expressions and actions were kind to all. The priesthood acknowledged her influence, and the king and chiefs sought her advice on important matters when the kilos of the temple were uncertain.
She had reared Kualu with the greatest care, and saw him grow to a manhood of which she was proud. She loved him as if he had been her own child, and he repaid her affection by [180]heeding her advice in all things, and by kindness comforting her declining years. She had schooled him in a lore which but few possessed, and the most skilful had instructed him in the martial and courtly accomplishments consistent with his chiefly rank. At the age of twenty he became attached to the household of the king, and in time was advanced, as already stated, to the high grade of captain of the palace guard. Although his abilities had commended him to advancement, his early favor with the king was doubtless due to some extent to the influence of his foster-mother.
She raised Kualu with great care and watched him grow into a man she was proud of. She loved him as if he were her own child, and he returned her affection by [__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]listening to her advice in everything and comforting her in her old age with kindness. She taught him knowledge that few had, and the most skilled instructors taught him the martial and courtly skills fitting for his rank as a chief. By the age of twenty, he joined the king's household, and eventually, as mentioned before, he was promoted to captain of the palace guard. While his skills earned him this promotion, his early favor with the king was likely influenced to some degree by his foster mother.
Kualu’s intimate connection with the royal household brought him into frequent companionship with Kuaiwa and his sister, and as the latter grew to womanhood a romantic attachment sprang up between her and the handsome captain of the guard. It was romantic only because it was to every appearance hopeless, for there was a wide gulf between Kualu and the daughter of the proudest moi in all the group, and for whom there seemed to be no fitting mate.
Kualu's close connection with the royal family led to him spending a lot of time with Kuaiwa and his sister. As she matured into a woman, a romantic bond developed between her and the attractive captain of the guard. This romance was only romantic because it seemed completely hopeless; there was a huge gap between Kualu and the daughter of the most esteemed moi in the entire region, for whom there appeared to be no suitable match.
The home of Kualu was within the palace enclosure; yet he frequently visited Waahia in her lonely retreat, to cheer her with words of affection and see that she wanted for nothing. It was during one of these visits, not long before the beginning of the leading events of this legend, that the kaula abruptly said to him:
The home of Kualu was inside the palace walls; still, he often went to see Waahia in her secluded spot, to lift her spirits with kind words and make sure she had everything she needed. It was during one of these visits, not long before the key events of this story began, that the kaula suddenly said to him:
“Kualu, I can see that you are thinking much of Kapapa.”
“Kualu, I can see that you’re thinking a lot about Kapapa.”
“We sometimes meet,” replied Kualu, evasively.
“We occasionally meet,” Kualu replied, steering clear of the question.
“It is not well for you to try to gather berries from the clouds,” returned the kaula, kindly. “A niapio of the highest rank alone can reach that fruit.”
“It’s not a good idea to try to gather berries from the clouds,” replied the kaula, kindly. “Only a niapio of the highest rank can reach that fruit.”
“The flying spear brings down what the hand cannot reach,” was Kualu’s significant answer.
“The flying spear takes down what the hand can’t reach,” was Kualu’s significant reply.
Waahia smiled at the dauntless spirit of her ward, and after a long pause, during which she sat thoughtfully, with her eyes fixed upon the ground, said:
Waahia smiled at the fearless spirit of her ward, and after a long pause, during which she sat thoughtfully, staring at the ground, said:
“Your hopes are bold, but the gods are great. Come to me to-morrow.”
“Your hopes are high, but the gods are powerful. Come to me tomorrow.”
The next day Kualu was made joyful by the words of Waahia. She told him that she had been given a view of something of his future, and that the auguries promised so much that she could not discourage even the most audacious of his aspirations; but [181]that coming events affecting his life were so mingled with wars, and strange faces of a race she had never seen except in dreams, that she could then advise no definite course of action.
The next day, Kualu felt joyful because of Waahia’s words. She told him she had glimpsed something about his future, and that the signs were so promising that she couldn't bring herself to discourage even his wildest dreams; but [__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]the events that were coming in his life were so intertwined with wars and unfamiliar faces of a race she had only seen in her dreams that she couldn’t advise any specific course of action at that time.
With these vague words of encouragement Kualu returned to the palace, and authoritatively learned, what had for some time been rumored, that preparations were to be speedily made for an invasion of Maui, and possibly of the other islands of the group. Having brought all the districts of Hawaii under his control, Kalaunui entertained the ambitious design of uniting the several islands of the archipelago under one government. In this grand scheme of conquest and consolidation he was sustained by the leading chiefs of Hawaii, hungering for foreign possessions, and large quotas of canoes and warriors were promised.
With these vague words of encouragement, Kualu returned to the palace and learned with authority what had been rumored for some time: preparations were being quickly made for an invasion of Maui, and possibly the other islands in the group. Having brought all the districts of Hawaii under his control, Kalaunui had the ambitious plan of uniting the various islands of the archipelago under one government. In this grand scheme of conquest and consolidation, he was supported by the leading chiefs of Hawaii, who were eager for foreign possessions, and large numbers of canoes and warriors were promised.
A general plan of action having been adopted, a fleet of two thousand canoes of all sizes and an army of twelve thousand warriors were speedily collected. Sacrifices were made at the great temple of Pakaalani; the favor of the gods was invoked, and the auguries were satisfactory. The king was to lead the expedition in person, and the chivalry of the kingdom rallied to his support. His double canoe, nearly forty paces in length, was gorgeous in royal colors and trappings, and more than a hundred others bore at their mast-heads the ensigns of distinguished chiefs. No such warlike display had been seen by the generation witnessing it, and the confidence and enthusiasm of the king and his commanding officers were fully shared by the people.
A general plan of action was set in motion, quickly gathering a fleet of two thousand canoes of all sizes and an army of twelve thousand warriors. Sacrifices were offered at the grand temple of Pakaalani; they sought the gods' favor, and the omens looked positive. The king was going to lead the expedition himself, and the kingdom's knights rallied to support him. His double canoe, nearly forty paces long, was lavishly decorated in royal colors and adornments, while over a hundred others displayed the flags of prominent chiefs at their masts. No one in the current generation had ever witnessed such a show of military might, and both the king and his commanding officers were filled with confidence and enthusiasm, which resonated with the people as well.
Leaving the government in the hands of his young son Kuaiwa, with Kaheka, the queen-mother, as principal adviser, Kalaunui ordered the warriors to their canoes, and with his aids and personal attendants repaired to the beach to superintend the departure of the expedition in person. In charge of his high-priest, his newly-decorated war-god had been taken aboard, and the king was about to follow, when Waahia, whose foster-son was one of the leaders in the enterprise, approached the royal kaulua. She was clad in a pau and short mantle, and her long, white hair fell below her shoulders. Her form was bent, and she carried a staff for support.
Leaving the government in the hands of his young son Kuaiwa, with Kaheka, the queen-mother, as his main adviser, Kalaunui ordered the warriors to their canoes, and with his aides and personal attendants went to the beach to oversee the departure of the expedition himself. His high-priest had taken the newly-decorated war-god aboard, and just as the king was about to follow, Waahia, whose foster-son was one of the leaders in the mission, approached the royal kaulua. She was wearing a pau and a short mantle, and her long, white hair fell below her shoulders. Her body was hunched, and she used a staff for support.
At the sight of the venerable figure, familiar to every one in Waipio, the king turned and said:
At the sight of the respected figure, known to everyone in Waipio, the king turned and said:
“I am glad you are here. Encouragement comes from the temple. What says Waahia?” [182]
“I’m glad you’re here. The temple offers us encouragement. What does Waahia say?” [__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]
“Good in the beginning! bad in the end!” was the blunt response of the prophetess.
“Good at first! terrible in the end!” was the straightforward reply of the prophetess.
“I am instructed by your cheering assurances,” adroitly returned the king, observing that her words had been overheard. “The true meaning is that it would be bad to abruptly end a good beginning.” Saying which, with something of a scowl he hastily stepped into his kaulua and gave the signal for departure.
“I appreciate your encouraging words,” the king replied quickly, noticing that others had heard her. “What I really mean is that it’s not wise to cut off a good start so suddenly.” With a slight frown, he quickly got into his kaulua and signaled for everyone to leave.
Without replying, Waahia, fully believing that disaster would overtake the expedition in the end, and anxious to be near Kualu when it came, entered one of the many canoes set apart for the women and other camp-followers of the invading army, and with the fleet set sail for Maui.
Without responding, Waahia, convinced that disaster would eventually strike the expedition, and eager to be close to Kualu when it happened, got into one of the many canoes reserved for the women and other camp followers of the invading army, and swiftly set sail for Maui.
II.
While the Hawaiian army, cheered by chants of battle and beating of war-drums, is buffeting the waves on its way to Maui, let us glance again at the moi of that island and the political condition of his possessions. While Kamaluohua was the nominal sovereign of the island, the extreme eastern portion of it continued to be governed by independent chiefs. The principal chief of the windward side was Wakalana, whose residence was at Wailuku. He was a cousin of the moi, and their relations were exceedingly friendly.
While the Hawaiian army, fueled by battle chants and the pounding of war drums, navigates the waves on its way to Maui, let's take another look at the moi of that island and the political situation of his territory. Although Kamaluohua was the official ruler of the island, the far eastern part was still controlled by independent chiefs. The main chief on the windward side was Wakalana, who lived in Wailuku. He was a cousin of the moi, and they had a very friendly relationship.
Two years before a remarkable event had occurred at Wailuku. It was the second appearance in the group of a vessel bearing people of a strange race, described by tradition as “white, with bright, shining eyes.” Mention is made of other white people who were brought to the islands on one or more occasions by the argonauts of earlier generations, notably by Paumakua, of Oahu, who near the close of the eleventh century returned from one of his exploring voyages with three white persons of an unknown race; but this was the second time that a vessel of a people other than Polynesian had been seen in Hawaiian waters. The first made a landing near Makapu Point, on the island of Oahu, more than a hundred years before. Tradition has preserved the name of the vessel (Ulupana) and of the captain (Mololano) and his wife (Malaea); but as it is not mentioned that they remained in the country, it is probable that they soon re-embarked. [183]
Two years before, something remarkable happened in Wailuku. It was the second time a ship with people from a strange race appeared in the area, described by tradition as “white, with bright, shining eyes.” There are mentions of other white people who were brought to the islands on one or more occasions by the explorers of earlier generations, especially by Paumakua from Oahu, who around the end of the eleventh century returned from one of his exploring journeys with three white individuals of an unknown race; but this was the second time a ship of a people other than Polynesian had been seen in Hawaiian waters. The first ship landed near Makapu Point on the island of Oahu more than a hundred years earlier. Tradition has kept the names of the ship (Ulupana) and the captain (Mololano) and his wife (Malaea); but since there’s no mention of them staying in the country, it’s likely they left soon after. [__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]
The second arrival is more distinctly marked by tradition. It was a Japanese vessel that had been dismantled by a typhoon, driven toward the North American coast until it encountered the northwest trade-winds, and then helplessly blown southward to the coast of Maui. It was late in the afternoon that word had been brought to Wakalana that a strange vessel was approaching the coast. As it was high out of water and drifting broadside before the wind, it appeared to be of great size, and little disposition was shown by the people to go out in their canoes to meet the mysterious monster. Wakalana hastened to the beach, and, after watching the vessel intently for some time, saw that it was drifting slowly toward the rocky coast to the westward. Seaman enough to know that certain destruction awaited it in that direction, Wakalana hastily manned a stout canoe and started out to sea in pursuit. The waters were rough and his progress was slow, but he succeeded in reaching the vessel a few minutes after it struck the cliffs and was dashed in pieces. Seizing whatever they could find to assist them in floating, those on board leaped into the sea. It was hazardous to approach the wreck too nearly, but Wakalana succeeded in rescuing from the waves and returning to Wailuku with five persons, but not before he saw the last fragment of the wreck disappear in the abyss of raging waters.
The second arrival was clearly defined by tradition. It was a Japanese ship that had been wrecked by a typhoon, pushed toward the North American coast until it hit the northwest trade winds, and then helplessly blown south to the coast of Maui. Late in the afternoon, word reached Wakalana that a strange ship was approaching the shore. Since it was high out of the water and drifting sideways in the wind, it seemed huge, and the locals showed little interest in going out in their canoes to meet the mysterious vessel. Wakalana hurried to the beach and, after watching the ship closely for some time, noticed it was slowly drifting toward the rocky coast to the west. Knowing well that certain destruction awaited it in that direction, Wakalana quickly manned a sturdy canoe and set out to sea in pursuit. The waters were rough, and his progress was slow, but he managed to reach the ship just moments after it struck the cliffs and was broken apart. Grabbing anything they could find that might help them float, those on board jumped into the sea. It was dangerous to get too close to the wreck, but Wakalana succeeded in rescuing five people from the waves and bringing them back to Wailuku, not before witnessing the last piece of the ship vanish into the depths of the raging waters.
There is nothing in the names preserved, either of the vessel or its rescued passengers, to indicate their nationality. The name of the vessel is given as Mamala, which in the Hawaiian might mean a wreck or fragment. The name of the captain was Kaluikia-Manu; the four others were called Neleike, Malaea, Haakoa and Hika—all names of Hawaiian construction. Two of them—Neleike and Malaea—were women, the former being the sister of the captain.
There’s nothing in the names recorded, either of the ship or its rescued passengers, to show their nationality. The name of the ship is Mamala, which in Hawaiian might mean a wreck or fragment. The captain's name was Kaluikia-Manu; the other four were Neleike, Malaea, Haakoa, and Hika—all names typical of Hawaiian culture. Two of them—Neleike and Malaea—were women, with the former being the captain's sister.
They landed almost without clothing, and the only novelties upon their persons were the rings and bracelets of the women, and a sword in the belt of the captain, with which he had thoughtlessly leaped into the sea from the sinking vessel. They were half-famished and weak, and by gestures expressed their gratitude to Wakalana for his gallantry in rescuing them, and asked for food and water. Both were provided in abundance, and two houses were set apart for their occupation. They attracted great attention, and people came from all parts of the [184]island to see the white strangers. It was noted with astonishment by the natives that these men and women ate from the same vessels, and that nothing was especially tabu to either sex; but Wakalana explained that their gods doubtless permitted such freedom, and they should therefore not be rebuked for their apparent disregard of Hawaiian custom.
They arrived almost naked, and the only things they had were the rings and bracelets on the women and a sword in the captain's belt, which he had thoughtlessly jumped into the sea with from the sinking ship. They were starving and weak, and showed their gratitude to Wakalana for saving them with gestures, asking for food and water. Both were provided in abundance, and two houses were set up for them to stay in. They drew a lot of attention, and people came from all over the [__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]island to see the white strangers. The natives were amazed to see that these men and women ate from the same dishes and that nothing was particularly tabu for either gender; however, Wakalana explained that their gods likely allowed such freedom, so they shouldn’t be scolded for ignoring Hawaiian customs.
The comfort of the strangers was made the especial care of Wakalana, and they soon became not only reconciled but apparently content with their situation. But the kindness of the chief, however commendable, was not altogether unselfish. He was charmed with the bright eyes and fair face of Neleike, the sister of the captain. He found a pleasure that was new to him in teaching her to speak his language, and almost the first use she made of oia was to say “yes” with it when he asked her to become his wife. Her marriage was followed by that of Malaea to a native chief, and of her brother and his two male companions to native women of good family. And here, as well as anywhere, it may be mentioned that, through her son Alooia, Neleike became the progenitor of a family which for generations showed the marks of her blood, and that the descendants of the others were plentiful thereafter, not only on Maui but in the neighborhood of Waimalo, on the island of Oahu.
The comfort of the strangers was given special attention by Wakalana, and they quickly became not just reconciled but seemingly satisfied with their situation. However, the chief's kindness, though praiseworthy, was not entirely selfless. He was captivated by the bright eyes and fair face of Neleike, the captain's sister. He found a new joy in teaching her to speak his language, and almost the first thing she did with oia was to say “yes” when he asked her to be his wife. Her marriage was followed by Malaea's union with a native chief, and her brother and his two male friends also married native women from good families. It’s worth mentioning here that through her son Alooia, Neleike became the ancestor of a family that carried her bloodline for generations, and the descendants of the others thrived afterwards, not only on Maui but also in the vicinity of Waimalo on the island of Oahu.
The object of the rescued Japanese which attracted most attention was the sword accidentally preserved by the captain. No such terrible knife had ever before been seen or dreamed of by the natives. They had pahoas, or daggers of wood or ivory, and knives of sharply broken flint and sharks’ teeth; they had stone adzes, axes, hatchets and hammers, with which they could fell trees, hollow canoes from tree-trunks, build houses, manufacture implements of war and industry, and hew stone of softer composition; they had spears and javelins with points of seasoned wood hard enough to splinter a bone; but iron and other metals had for ages been practically unknown to their race, and the long, sharp sword of the captain, harder than bone or seasoned wood, and from its polished surface throwing defiantly back the bright rays of the sun, engaged their ceaseless wonder and admiration. As an ornament they regarded it with longing, and when they learned that it was a weapon of war they felt that the arm that wielded it in battle must be unconquerable.
The object that captivated the rescued Japanese the most was the sword that the captain had accidentally kept. They had never seen or even imagined such a terrible weapon. They possessed pahoas, or daggers made from wood or ivory, along with knives crafted from sharp flint and sharks’ teeth. They had stone tools like adzes, axes, hatchets, and hammers that allowed them to chop down trees, carve canoes from trunks, build houses, create weapons for war and tools for daily tasks, and shape softer stones. They had spears and javelins with points made from seasoned wood that could break bones; however, iron and other metals had been virtually unknown to them for ages. The captain's long, sharp sword, which was tougher than bone or seasoned wood and reflected the bright rays of the sun with its polished surface, left them in constant awe and admiration. They viewed it as a beautiful ornament, and when they discovered it was a weapon of war, they believed that anyone wielding it in battle must be unbeatable.
The captain did not see fit to disabuse the minds of the superstitious [185]natives in their disposition to attribute a power of almost unlimited slaughter to the simple weapon. On the contrary, he rarely exhibited it except to distinguished chiefs, and in a few months it began to be mentioned as a sacred gift of the gods and pledge of victory to him who possessed it. Nor was the knowledge of the existence of a talisman so wonderful long confined to the windward side of Maui. The fame of the terrible weapon spread from Hana to Kaanapali, and thence to the other islands of the group; and if but few of the many who came to learn the truth of the report were favored with a view of the sword, all saw, at least, the strange people who were pointed out as the bearers of it from an unknown land, and the story of its powers was readily accepted. But he who possessed it did not come as a conqueror, and, as he showed no disposition to use it offensively, the weapon ceased to be regarded with alarm.
The captain didn’t feel the need to correct the superstitious [__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]natives who believed that the simple weapon had nearly unlimited power to kill. Instead, he only showed it to respected chiefs, and within a few months, it started to be viewed as a sacred gift from the gods and a sign of victory for whoever owned it. The knowledge of this impressive talisman quickly spread beyond the windward side of Maui. The legend of the fearsome weapon traveled from Hana to Kaanapali and then to the other islands; while not everyone who came to discover the truth was able to see the sword, they at least encountered the unusual people identified as its bearers from a distant land, and the tales of its power were easily believed. However, the one who owned it didn’t arrive as a conqueror, and since he showed no intention of using it aggressively, the weapon was no longer seen as a threat.
And now we will return to Kalaunui and his army of conquest, last seen on their way to Maui in a fleet of two thousand canoes. Sailing to the western division of the island, which was reached in two days, Kalaunui effected a landing of his army at Lahaina. Kamaluohua, the moi of the island, had learned of the projected invasion some days before, and made every preparation possible to meet and repel it. Lunapais, or war-messengers, had been despatched to the several district chiefs, and an army of seven or eight thousand warriors of all arms had been hastily collected. Wakalana had gone to the general defence with a force of eight hundred men, including Kaluiki, the Japanese captain, upon whose presence great reliance was placed by the warriors of Wailuku, if not by Wakalana himself.
And now we return to Kalaunui and his conquering army, last seen heading to Maui in a fleet of two thousand canoes. They sailed to the western part of the island, which they reached in two days, and Kalaunui landed his army at Lahaina. Kamaluohua, the ruler of the island, had learned about the planned invasion days earlier and made every possible preparation to confront and push it back. War messengers had been sent to the various district chiefs, and an army of seven to eight thousand warriors from all divisions had been quickly assembled. Wakalana had gone to defend with a force of eight hundred men, including Kaluiki, the Japanese captain, whose presence the warriors of Wailuku, if not Wakalana himself, relied on heavily.
Unable to land at Lahaina, which was in possession of the enemy, Kamaluohua marched his forces across the mountains, and a sanguinary battle was fought in the neighborhood of the village. But the Mauians, greatly outnumbered, were defeated and driven back to the hills, and their king was taken prisoner. Throughout the battle Kualu was especially conspicuous for his might and courage. Armed with a huge stone axe, everything human seemed to fall before him, and where he led the bravest alone followed, for he sought the very heart of danger.
Unable to land at Lahaina, which was controlled by the enemy, Kamaluohua marched his troops over the mountains, and a fierce battle broke out near the village. However, the Mauians, heavily outnumbered, were defeated and pushed back to the hills, and their king was captured. Throughout the fight, Kualu stood out for his strength and bravery. Armed with a massive stone axe, it seemed like nothing could stand in his way, and wherever he went, the fiercest warriors followed him, as he charged straight into danger.
The conflict was drawing to a close. The moi, gallantly fighting, had been taken prisoner, and his decimated battalions were steadily giving way, when Kualu encountered a body of [186]two or three hundred men resolutely defending themselves behind a low stone wall. Several ineffectual attempts to dislodge them had been made, and they were sending forth shouts of victory and defiance. Something had inspired them with unusual courage and confidence. Did Kualu divine what it was? Perhaps he did, for, hastily rallying to his support a force of sturdy warriors, he fought his way over the wall, and a determined hand-to-hand struggle followed. Meantime a flanking party of spearsmen had made a circuit around the wall and were menacing its defenders in the rear. Observing the peril of the situation, and that an effort was being made to cut off their retreat to the hills, the Mauians began to fall back. As they did so Kualu was seen to dash forward and precipitate himself, almost unsupported, upon a score or two of warriors who had apparently rallied to the assistance of some chief in distress. Regardless of danger, he hewed his way through the battling throng until he stood face to face with Kaluiki, the white captain, in whose hand was the shining blade which had so nerved the arms of the warriors of Wailuku. With a blow of his battle-axe he struck the sword from the upraised hand of the strange warrior. As it fell to the earth he placed his foot upon it, and yielded no ground until the tide of battle swept around and past him, forcing to retreat the last to present a hostile front of the army of the captive king of Maui.
The conflict was coming to an end. The moi, bravely fighting, had been captured, and his depleted battalions were steadily giving way when Kualu encountered a group of [__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__] two or three hundred men fiercely defending themselves behind a low stone wall. Several unsuccessful attempts had been made to dislodge them, and they were shouting in victory and defiance. Something had inspired them with unusual courage and confidence. Did Kualu sense what it was? Perhaps he did, because he quickly rallied a group of strong warriors to support him and fought his way over the wall, leading to a fierce hand-to-hand struggle. Meanwhile, a team of spearmen had circled around the wall and were threatening the defenders from behind. Seeing the danger of the situation and the effort to cut off their escape to the hills, the Mauians began to retreat. As they did, Kualu was seen charging forward, almost alone, into a group of warriors who seemed to have rallied to help a chief in trouble. Ignoring the danger, he fought his way through the battle until he stood face to face with Kaluiki, the white captain, who held the shining sword that had inspired the warriors of Wailuku. With a swing of his battle-axe, he knocked the sword from the raised hand of the strange warrior. As it fell to the ground, he stepped on it and gave no ground until the tide of battle swept around and past him, forcing the last of the army of the captive king of Maui to retreat.
Left alone for a moment by the wild pursuit of the flying enemy, Kualu hurriedly stooped and thrust the sword into the earth, pressing it downward until the hilt was covered; then, placing a large rock upon the spot, he left the field, numbering, as he went, his paces to the wall behind which the Mauians had sought protection.
Left alone for a moment by the frantic chase after the fleeing enemy, Kualu quickly bent down and drove the sword into the ground, pushing it down until the hilt was buried; then, placing a big rock on top of it, he left the area, counting his steps to the wall where the Mauians had taken shelter.
The victory was complete. The moi was a prisoner, and such of his army as had not escaped to the hills lay dead on the field. The country was given over to pillage, and at sunset twenty prisoners were slain and sacrificed in a heiau near the village. The sacrifices were made to his war-god, and Kalaunui witnessed the solemn ceremonies of the offering.
The victory was total. The moi was captured, and those of his army who hadn't fled to the hills lay dead on the battlefield. The land was open to looting, and at sunset, twenty prisoners were killed and offered in a heiau close to the village. The sacrifices were made to his war-god, and Kalaunui observed the solemn rituals of the offering.
The night was spent in the wildest revelry by the victorious warriors, in the midst of which Kualu sought his foster-mother, who, with the women and non-combatants of the invading army, was encamped near the canoes on the beach. He hastily recited [187]to her the events of the day, and concluded with the information that he had captured the long, bright knife of the strange chief of Wailuku, and, believing it to be of great value, had hidden it in the earth. At this intelligence the eyes of Waahia flashed with satisfaction.
The night was filled with wild partying by the victorious warriors, during which Kualu looked for his foster mother, who was camped with the women and non-combatants of the invading army near the canoes on the beach. He quickly told her about the events of the day and ended by sharing that he had captured the long, shiny knife of the strange chief of Wailuku, and thinking it was valuable, he had buried it in the ground. At this news, Waahia's eyes sparkled with satisfaction.
“You have done well,” said the kaula, rising to her feet. “I have seen that long knife in my dreams. It will have much to do with your future. But it will be unsafe in your possession. Give it to me. Give it to me at once,” she repeated, “for should Kalaunui by any chance learn that it was taken in battle, he will claim it.”
“You’ve done well,” said the kaula, getting up. “I’ve seen that long knife in my dreams. It will play a big role in your future. But it won’t be safe for you to keep it. Hand it over to me. Give it to me right now,” she insisted, “because if Kalaunui finds out it was taken in battle, he’ll demand it back.”
“But I am sure no one saw me hide it,” replied Kualu.
“But I’m pretty sure no one saw me hide it,” replied Kualu.
“You talk like a boy,” returned Waahia. “You must be sure of nothing of which there is a possibility of doubt. But no matter. It is not too dark to find the spot to-night. Let us go to it at once.”
“You talk like a kid,” Waahia replied. “You should be sure of nothing that could be questionable. But whatever. It’s not too dark to find the place tonight. Let’s head there right away.”
Excited by her words, Kualu now became no less anxious than the kaula that the sword should be placed in her keeping, and in an indirect way, to avoid observation, they repaired to the battle-field. Their only light was that of the stars, and after reaching the wall it was some time before Kualu was able to identify the exact place to which he had extended the line of his hasty measurement. The ground was strewn with the naked bodies of the slain, and occasional groans came from a few whose struggles with death were not quite over. But no emotion, either of dread or pity, disturbed the visitors.
Excited by her words, Kualu now felt just as anxious as the kaula about getting the sword into her care, and to avoid drawing attention, they made their way to the battlefield. The only light they had came from the stars, and after they reached the wall, it took Kualu a while to identify the exact spot where he had quickly measured. The ground was scattered with the bodies of the fallen, and occasional groans came from a few who were still fighting for their lives. But neither fear nor pity affected the visitors.
Satisfied at length that he had found the desired place in the wall, Kualu took a careful bearing, and then stepped briskly toward the north, closely followed by Waahia. Measuring a hundred paces or more, he suddenly stopped, and with alarm discovered what seemed to be the form of a man crouching beside the rock marking the spot where the sword had been buried. Grasping his pahoa—the only weapon he had brought with him—Kualu sprang forward and placed his hand upon the object. It was cold and motionless; and the young warrior smiled as the thought came to him that some one of the many who had fallen under his axe that day had possibly crawled to the spot to guard his treasure in death. He lifted the body aside, removed the stone, and the next moment pulled from the earth and handed to Waahia the iron blade. She grasped it eagerly, and, with a [188]hasty glance at its bright blade glistening in the starlight, wrapped it securely in a piece of kapa and placed it under her mantle.
Satisfied at last that he had found the right spot in the wall, Kualu took a careful look at his surroundings and then walked quickly toward the north, closely followed by Waahia. After measuring out a hundred steps or more, he suddenly stopped and, alarmed, noticed what looked like a man crouching beside the rock that marked the place where the sword had been buried. Grasping his pahoa—the only weapon he had brought with him—Kualu rushed forward and laid his hand on the object. It was cold and motionless; the young warrior smiled at the thought that someone among those who had fallen to his axe that day might have crawled to this spot to protect his treasure in death. He moved the body aside, removed the stone, and in the next moment pulled the iron blade from the earth and handed it to Waahia. She grabbed it eagerly, and with a [__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]quick glance at its shiny blade gleaming in the starlight, wrapped it snugly in a piece of kapa and tucked it under her mantle.
Without attracting especial notice they returned to the beach. When importuned by Kualu to tell him something definite of his future, Waahia revealed to him much that would happen; but all had not yet been given to her, and she admonished him to keep his lips closed and patiently await the development of the will of the gods. “I can see victories to come,” said the kaula, “but in the end defeat and disaster.”
Without drawing special attention, they went back to the beach. When Kualu urged Waahia to share more information about his future, she revealed many things that would happen; however, she hadn’t received everything yet and advised him to keep quiet and patiently wait for the unfolding of the gods' will. “I can see victories ahead,” said the kaula, “but in the end, there will be defeat and disaster.”
“But if disaster is to come to us in the end,” suggested Kualu, “why should it not mean defeat and death to me?”
“But if disaster is going to come to us in the end,” Kualu suggested, “why shouldn't it mean defeat and death for me?”
“I can give no reason why it should not; but the gods seldom explain their acts to mortals, and I am content in seeing your star shining above the ruin of Kalaunui.”
“I can't think of a reason why it shouldn't; but the gods rarely explain their actions to humans, and I'm happy to see your star shining above the ruins of Kalaunui.”
So spoke the kaula, and, cheered by her words, Kualu sought his tent of mats, and on a hard couch of kapa dreamed of a long, bright knife, and of battles in which he hewed down armies with it.
So said the kaula, and encouraged by her words, Kualu went to his tent made of mats, and on a hard bed of kapa dreamed of a long, shining knife, and of battles where he defeated armies with it.
Taking his royal captive with him, the second day after the battle Kalaunui set sail with his army for the island of Molokai, of which Kahokuohua was the alii-nui, or governing chief. No force adequate to cope with the invading army could be rallied; but the chivalrous descendant of the ancient kings of Hawaii was not a ruler to allow his subjects to be plundered without resistance, and, hastily gathering an army of four or five thousand warriors, he gave the invaders battle at Kalaupapa. But he was defeated and taken prisoner, and after ravaging the country for miles around, and destroying every captured canoe of which he could make no use, Kalaunui sailed for the conquest of Oahu with the two royal captives in his train.
Taking his royal captive with him, the second day after the battle, Kalaunui set sail with his army for the island of Molokai, where Kahokuohua was the alii-nui, or governing chief. No force strong enough to confront the invading army could be assembled; however, the brave descendant of the ancient kings of Hawaii was not a ruler to let his people be plundered without a fight. He quickly gathered an army of four or five thousand warriors and confronted the invaders at Kalaupapa. Unfortunately, he was defeated and taken prisoner. After plundering the land for miles and destroying every captured canoe he couldn't use, Kalaunui sailed off to conquer Oahu with the two royal captives in tow.
Waahia still accompanied the expedition. But the iron knife was not with her. The king had from some source learned that its glitter had been seen on the battle-field at Lahaina, and she had hidden it in a cleft of the black rocks of the pali encircling Kalaupapa.
Waahia still joined the expedition. But the iron knife was no longer with her. The king had discovered that its shine had been spotted on the battlefield at Lahaina, and she had hidden it in a crack of the black rocks of the pali surrounding Kalaupapa.
As already stated, Oahu was at that time governed by a number of practically independent chiefs. The most powerful of these, and possibly recognized alii-nui of the island, was Huapouleilei, chief of the Ewa and Waianae districts, to which division Kalaunui directed his fleet. Landing his forces at [189]Waianae, a sanguinary battle was fought near that place, resulting in the defeat of the Oahuans and the capture of Huapouleilei.
As mentioned before, Oahu was managed at that time by several nearly independent chiefs. The most powerful among them, and likely the recognized alii-nui of the island, was Huapouleilei, chief of the Ewa and Waianae districts, where Kalaunui sent his fleet. After landing his forces at [__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]Waianae, a brutal battle took place near that area, leading to the defeat of the Oahuans and the capture of Huapouleilei.
Elated with his successes, and deeming himself invincible, Kalaunui next prepared for a descent upon Kauai and the conquest of the entire group. But his plans for so formidable an undertaking were faulty. He took no steps to consolidate his conquests or maintain possession of the lands subdued by his arms. He left behind him no friend or stronghold on the conquered islands, blindly trusting, no doubt, that in the persons of his royal prisoners he retained, for the time being, a sufficiently firm hold upon their lands and subjects.
Elated with his successes and feeling invincible, Kalaunui next prepared to attack Kauai and conquer the entire group. However, his plans for such a major undertaking were flawed. He took no steps to solidify his conquests or maintain control over the lands he had conquered. He left behind no allies or strongholds on the conquered islands, blindly trusting that, with his royal prisoners, he had a strong enough hold on their lands and subjects for the time being.
Before embarking for Kauai elaborate sacrifices were offered, and every device known to the priesthood was exhausted to secure a continuance of the favor of the gods. The moi of that island was Kukona, the fourth in descent from the great Laa-mai-kahiki. Kalaunui recognized that the defensive resources of Kauai were not to be despised, but he as greatly underrated the military abilities of Kukona as he overrated his own, and therefore did not doubt the result.
Before heading to Kauai, elaborate sacrifices were made, and every strategy known to the priests was used to ensure the gods' continued favor. The moi of that island was Kukona, the fourth in descent from the great Laa-mai-kahiki. Kalaunui understood that Kauai's defensive capabilities were significant, but he greatly underestimated Kukona's military skills while overestimating his own, so he had no doubt about the outcome.
Waahia saw disaster approaching, but knew that Kalaunui would not listen to her voice of warning, and therefore remained silent when the kilos, anxious to please the king, shaped their inauspicious auguries into promises of victory. Her greatest solicitude was for Kualu. He had been entrusted with an important command, and could find no honorable pretext for declining to accept the hazard of the final struggle on Kauai. Waahia, therefore, did not advise him to remain, for she had seen his star shining above the clouds of defeat. She had sought frequent and earnest counsel of the mysterious intelligences of the earth and air. She had seen their answers in the smoke of burning incense, and within the circle of blood at midnight, when the moon was dark, had heard their whispers. Hence it was with confidence that she said to Kualu, on the evening before the departure of the fleet for Kauai:
Waahia sensed disaster coming, but she knew Kalaunui wouldn’t heed her warnings, so she stayed silent as the kilos, eager to please the king, turned their ominous predictions into promises of victory. Her biggest concern was for Kualu. He had been given an important command and couldn’t find a respectable reason to back out of the final battle on Kauai. So, Waahia didn’t tell him to stay, as she had seen his fate shining bright above the clouds of defeat. She had sought deep and frequent counsel from the mysterious forces of nature. She perceived their answers in the smoke of burning incense and, within the circle of blood at midnight when the moon was dark, had heard their whispers. With this confidence, she spoke to Kualu the evening before the fleet set off for Kauai:
“Yes, you must go. I can be of no service to you where the air will be filled with spears and the canoes will be painted red with blood. I will return to Hawaii. You will be defeated. Kukona is a brave and skilful warrior, and the army of Kalaunui. will be rent in pieces and thrown into the sea. The slaughter [190]will be great, but circumstances will open a way and you will escape.”
“Yes, you have to go. I can’t help you in a place where the air is thick with spears and the canoes are painted red with blood. I’ll be going back to Hawaii. You will be defeated. Kukona is a brave and skilled warrior, and Kalaunui's army will be torn apart and thrown into the sea. The slaughter [__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]will be immense, but somehow you’ll find a way to escape.”
“And should I escape, where will I find you?” inquired Kualu.
“And if I escape, where will I find you?” Kualu asked.
“Among the owls in the old hut in Waipio,” replied the kaula.
“Among the owls in the old hut in Waipio,” replied the kaula.
“And the long knife?”
"And the survival knife?"
“The long knife is where I alone can find it,” answered Waahia. “Leave the secret to me; it will be of service to us yet.”
“The long knife is where I can find it on my own,” answered Waahia. “Keep the secret to yourself; it will help us later.”
Early next morning the army of Kalaunui set sail for Kauai, and with it, as prisoners, the mois of Maui and Molokai and the alii-nui of Oahu. At the same time Waahia embarked for Hawaii, taking with her the war-god of the king. Traditions differ concerning the circumstances under which the god was delivered to the prophetess. One asserts that she refused to hold her peace or leave the expedition without it; another that the king, annoyed by her ill-omened words and presence, purchased her departure with it; and a third that it was given to her in deference to her declaration that, if taken to Kauai, it would not return except at the head of a conquering army that would make a tributary kingdom of Hawaii. Certain it is, however, that Waahia returned to Hawaii from Oahu with the war-god of the king. It was the sacred Akuapaao, or war-god of Paao, and was held in great reverence by the priesthood. Borne over the waters by unseen forces, the canoe of Waahia was stranded on the beach at Koholalele, on the island of Hawaii. Not far off was the old heiau of Manini, and thither the god was conveyed, and placed in the custody of the high-priest of the temple, with the injunction that it was never to be removed from the inner court, or sanctuary, unless the kingdom was in peril. Six generations after it was taken from the heiau by the giant Maukaleoleo, and carried at the head of the victorious army of Umi, as mentioned in the legend of “Umi, the Peasant Prince of Hawaii.”
Early the next morning, Kalaunui's army set sail for Kauai, taking with them prisoners, including the kings of Maui and Molokai and the chief of Oahu. At the same time, Waahia set off for Hawaii, bringing along the king's war-god. There are different traditions about how the god was given to the prophetess. One says she insisted on taking it and wouldn't leave without it; another claims the king, annoyed by her ominous presence and words, bought her departure with it; and a third states it was given to her out of respect for her claim that if taken to Kauai, it wouldn’t return unless leading a conquering army that would make Hawaii a tributary kingdom. What’s certain is that Waahia returned to Hawaii from Oahu with the king's war-god. It was the sacred Akuapaao, or war-god of Paao, which the priests held in high regard. Carried over the waters by unseen forces, Waahia's canoe was stranded on the beach at Koholalele on the island of Hawaii. Not far away was the old heiau of Manini, where the god was taken and placed under the care of the temple's high priest, with the instruction that it was never to be moved from the inner court or sanctuary unless the kingdom was in danger. Six generations later, it was taken from the heiau by the giant Maukaleoleo and carried at the head of Umi's victorious army, as told in the legend of "Umi, the Peasant Prince of Hawaii."
Five hundred canoes had been added to the fleet of Kalaunui, and the imposing squadron seemed to stretch half across the wide channel separating the two islands. A landing was made at Koloa, and the entire army disembarked without opposition. The district seemed to be deserted, and not a hostile spear was visible. And so continued the peaceful aspect until daylight the next morning, when Kukona, supported by every prominent chief of [191]Kauai, suddenly precipitated upon the invaders from the surrounding hills an army of ten thousand warriors. Nor this alone. Along the westward coast was seen approaching a fleet of nearly a thousand war-canoes, with the manifest design of capturing or destroying the canoes of the Hawaiians and cutting off their retreat by sea. Hastily forming his lines to meet the avalanche from the hills, Kalaunui despatched Kualu to the beach with a force of three thousand warriors to protect the canoes.
Five hundred canoes had been added to Kalaunui's fleet, and the impressive squadron seemed to stretch halfway across the wide channel separating the two islands. They landed at Koloa, and the entire army got off without any resistance. The area looked deserted, and not a single hostile spear was in sight. This peaceful scene continued until daylight the next morning when Kukona, backed by every prominent chief of [__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]Kauai, suddenly launched an army of ten thousand warriors on the invaders from the surrounding hills. But that wasn’t all. Approaching along the western coast was a fleet of nearly a thousand war canoes, clearly aiming to capture or destroy the Hawaiians' canoes and cut off their escape by sea. Quickly organizing his troops to face the onslaught from the hills, Kalaunui sent Kualu to the beach with a force of three thousand warriors to protect the canoes.
The attacks by land and sea were almost simultaneous, and the battle was one of the most stubborn and sanguinary ever fought in the group. As predicted by Waahia, the air was filled with spears and the canoes were painted red with blood. Standing in the water to their hips, Kualu and his warriors met their enemies as they attempted to land, and a struggle of the wildest description followed. Canoes were upset; men were hauled into them and killed, and out of them and drowned, and for a distance of three or four hundred yards in the surf along the beach raged a desperate conflict, dreadful even to savage eyes. In their fury they fought in, above and under the water, and hundreds fiercely grappled and without a wound sank to their deaths together. Neither would yield, and in the end resistance ceased, and Kualu saw the beach strewn with dead, a thousand tenantless canoes idly playing with the surf, and less than as many hundreds of warriors left as he had led thousands into the fight. He had saved the fleet, but the sacrifice of life had been terrible.
The attacks by land and sea happened almost at the same time, and the battle was one of the most intense and bloody ever fought in the group. As Waahia had predicted, the air was filled with spears, and the canoes were splattered with blood. Standing in the water up to their hips, Kualu and his warriors confronted their enemies as they tried to land, and a wild struggle broke out. Canoes were capsized; men were pulled into them and killed, and others were dragged out and drowned, and for three or four hundred yards along the beach, a desperate fight raged, horrific even to savage eyes. In their fury, they fought in, above, and under the water, with hundreds wrestling fiercely and sinking to their deaths without a wound. Neither side would give in, and finally, the fighting stopped. Kualu looked around at the beach covered with dead bodies, a thousand empty canoes bobbing in the surf, and far fewer warriors left than the thousands he had led into battle. He had saved the fleet, but the loss of life had been horrific.
Despatching a messenger to the king, and speedily reorganizing the remnant of his force, Kualu was about to leave the beach for service where he might most be needed, when he discovered, with horror, that the Hawaiian army had been defeated, and in scattered fragments was seeking flight in all directions. Harassed by pursuit, a thousand or more were fighting and struggling to reach the beach. Satisfied that the battle was lost, to facilitate the escape of the fugitives Kualu ordered a large number of canoes to be hastily equipped and launched, and then started back to assist in covering the retreat. But his men refused to follow him. Knowing the danger of delay, all but a few of them leaped into canoes and paddled out to sea. As he could do nothing more, he selected a canoe suitable to the four persons who were to occupy it, and with his three remaining companions passed through the surf and headed for Oahu. [192]
Sending a messenger to the king and quickly reorganizing the remnants of his troops, Kualu was about to leave the beach for where he might be most needed when he realized, with horror, that the Hawaiian army had been defeated and was fleeing in scattered groups in all directions. Pursued relentlessly, around a thousand soldiers were fighting and struggling to reach the beach. Knowing the battle was lost, Kualu ordered many canoes to be quickly readied and launched to help the escaping soldiers. He then turned back to help cover the retreat. However, his men refused to follow him. Understanding the peril of waiting, all but a few jumped into canoes and paddled out to sea. With nothing more he could do, Kualu chose a canoe that could hold four people, and with his three remaining companions, they made their way through the surf and headed for Oahu. [__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]
Kualu did not escape a moment too soon. He had scarcely stemmed the surf before the fugitives, abandoning all defence, made a precipitate dash for the canoes, closely followed by their pursuers. In their haste they shoved out in canoes some of which were overburdened and others but half-manned. A number of the former foundered in the surf, and such of the latter as succeeded in passing the breakers were overtaken by the canoes sent in pursuit. Nor did but few escape of the two or three hundred who preceded Kualu in his flight. Some of them embarked in double canoes which they were unable to manage, and others were either without sails or short of paddles. The result was that less than a hundred of the fugitives escaped capture, and of that number probably not more than twenty or thirty succeeded in reaching the other islands of the group, for the sea was rough and but few of them were skilled in navigation. Among these were Kualu and his companions.
Kualu didn't get away a moment too soon. He had barely cleared the waves when the fugitives, giving up all defenses, made a hasty dash for the canoes, closely followed by their pursuers. In their rush, they launched canoes, some of which were overloaded and others only half-manned. Several of the overloaded ones capsized in the surf, and those that managed to get past the breakers were caught by the chasing canoes. Very few of the two or three hundred who fled before Kualu managed to escape. Some boarded double canoes they couldn't control, while others were missing sails or lacked paddles. As a result, fewer than a hundred of the fugitives got away, and from that group, probably only twenty or thirty managed to reach the other islands, as the sea was rough and very few were experienced navigators. Among them were Kualu and his companions.
Almost from the beginning the sudden attack of Kukona from the hills had been a slaughter. The withdrawal of three thousand spears for the protection of his canoes had weakened the lines of Kalaunui at an exposed point, and, breaking through them, the Kauaians so vigorously followed up the advantage that no effort could save the Hawaiians from defeat. They fought bravely and with desperation; but the breaking of their lines had left them without any definite plan of action, and defeat was inevitable. Kalaunui’s courage was conspicuous, but after an hour’s hopeless struggle he saw his brave battalions melting to the earth and giving way at all points. Recognizing that the battle was lost, and that what was left of his army would soon be in wild retreat, he attempted to cut his way through to the beach, but was intercepted and taken prisoner. Learning his rank, he was taken by his captors to Kukona, and a few minutes later the royal chiefs of Maui, Molokai and Oahu, with their arms corded behind their backs, appeared on the scene. Deserted by their guards, they had been found in a hut not far from the beach and brought to the victorious moi.
Almost from the start, the sudden attack by Kukona from the hills had been a massacre. Pulling back three thousand fighters to protect his canoes had weakened Kalaunui's lines at a vulnerable spot, and as the Kauaians broke through, they aggressively pursued their advantage, leaving the Hawaiians unable to avoid defeat. They fought bravely and desperately, but the collapse of their lines left them without a clear plan of action, making defeat unavoidable. Kalaunui’s bravery stood out, but after an hour of futile struggle, he watched as his courageous troops dwindled and faltered at every turn. Realizing that the battle was lost and that what remained of his army would soon flee in chaos, he tried to make his way to the beach but was intercepted and captured. When his captors learned his rank, they took him to Kukona, and a few minutes later, the royal chiefs of Maui, Molokai, and Oahu, with their hands tied behind their backs, appeared on the scene. They had been abandoned by their guards, found in a hut not far from the beach, and brought to the victorious moi.
It was a historic group, that meeting on the battle-field of Koloa of the five principal sovereigns of the archipelago. Had Kukona been ambitious the means were at his command to become the supreme head of the island group; but he thought only of the future peace of Kauai, and promptly dismissed from [193]his mind all dreams of broader fields of empire, well knowing that, were he able to seize the mastery of the group, he could not hope to long maintain it.
It was a historic gathering, that meeting on the battlefield of Koloa of the five main rulers of the archipelago. If Kukona had been ambitious, he had the means to become the supreme leader of the island group; however, he only thought about the future peace of Kauai and quickly dismissed from [__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]his mind any dreams of expanding his empire, fully aware that if he were to gain control over the group, he couldn't expect to hold it for long.
Not a word of jeering or of triumph passed between Kalaunui and the captive chiefs as they stood before Kukona, for the aha alii of the period—the chiefs of accepted rank—commanded the respect, not only of the untitled, but of each other, even in bondage and in death. Kukona had met the alii-nui of Oahu in his own dominions some years before, and recognized him at once, but the kings of Maui and Molokai were strangers to him. Being informed of their rank and the circumstances of their captivity, he ordered them to be liberated at once, and with his own hands removed the cords from the arms of his royal friend from Oahu.
Not a word of mockery or victory was exchanged between Kalaunui and the captive chiefs as they stood before Kukona, because the aha alii of the time—the chiefs of acknowledged status—commanded respect, not just from the untitled, but from each other, even in captivity and in death. Kukona had met the alii-nui of Oahu in his own territory a few years earlier, and recognized him immediately, but the kings of Maui and Molokai were unfamiliar to him. After learning about their status and the details of their capture, he ordered their release right away, and with his own hands, he removed the ropes from the arms of his royal friend from Oahu.
The rescued princes were at once returned with befitting escorts to their own possessions, but Kalaunui was retained as a prisoner of war. But few of the invading army escaped. The victory was celebrated with elaborate sacrifices and general rejoicing throughout the island. The captured arms and canoes were divided among the assisting chiefs, and peace reigned again on Kauai.
The rescued princes were promptly returned home with proper escorts, but Kalaunui was kept as a prisoner of war. Only a few members of the invading army managed to escape. The victory was celebrated with elaborate sacrifices and widespread joy across the island. The captured weapons and canoes were distributed among the allied chiefs, and peace returned to Kauai.
Kukona had secured the lasting friendship of the chiefs of Oahu, Maui and Molokai, and therefore did not fear the retaliation of Hawaii. But, as a guarantee of peace, he kept Kalaunui a prisoner, rightly surmising that, if the ruling powers of Hawaii really valued the life of the captive king, they would not imperil it by attempting his release by force, and if they did not greatly value it he would be left to his fate or the chances of peaceful negotiation.
Kukona had built a strong friendship with the leaders of Oahu, Maui, and Molokai, so he wasn't worried about retaliation from Hawaii. However, to ensure peace, he kept Kalaunui as a prisoner, correctly guessing that if the rulers of Hawaii truly cared about the life of the captive king, they wouldn't risk it by trying to free him by force. And if they didn't care much about him, he would be left to face his fate or the possibility of peaceful negotiations.
III.
Escaping from Koloa, Kualu and his companions made sail for Hawaii, stopping for supplies at such intermediate points as they deemed safe on the coasts of Oahu, Molokai and Maui, and on the evening of the sixth day arrived at Waipio. They were the first to bring to Hawaii the news of the defeat of Kalaunui on Kauai, and when the people learned that the army had been destroyed the land was filled with wailing.
Escaping from Koloa, Kualu and his friends set sail for Hawaii, stopping for supplies at safe spots along the coasts of Oahu, Molokai, and Maui. On the evening of the sixth day, they arrived at Waipio. They were the first to deliver the news of the defeat of Kalaunui on Kauai, and when the people heard that the army had been wiped out, the land was filled with cries of mourning.
Appearing at once before Kaheka and her son, Kualu recited to them the story of the dreadful battle, but was unable [194]to tell them definitely of the fate of Kalaunui. The grief of the queen was great, and found strange and unreasonable expression in charging Kualu with cowardice and ordering him from the palace. In vain he protested against the ungenerous treatment. She had never liked him, especially since discovering that he had secured something more than the good-will of Kapapa, and it seemed monstrous to her that he should have survived Kalaunui and the scores of gallant chiefs who fell with him. She cruelly intimated that it was more than probable that, with the force sent to protect the fleet, he had embarked in the canoes without striking a blow, thus treacherously depriving the defeated army of its sole means of escape.
Kualu appeared before Kaheka and her son and told them the story of the terrible battle, but he couldn't say for sure what happened to Kalaunui. The queen's grief was immense, and she expressed it in an odd and unreasonable way by accusing Kualu of cowardice and kicking him out of the palace. He protested against this unfair treatment in vain. She had never liked him, especially after finding out he had gained more than just Kapapa's goodwill, and it seemed outrageous to her that he had survived while so many brave chiefs had fallen with Kalaunui. She cruelly suggested that it was likely he had boarded the canoes with the force sent to protect the fleet without fighting at all, thus betraying the defeated army and taking away their only chance of escape.
Had these monstrous charges been made by a man Kualu would have answered them with blows; but, as they were the foolish and inconsiderate ravings of a woman, without venturing further reply he took his leave, and with a heart filled with stifled rage and anguish strode from the palace.
Had these outrageous accusations been made by a man, Kualu would have responded with punches; but since they were the silly and thoughtless outbursts of a woman, he chose not to engage further and took his leave, his heart filled with suppressed anger and pain as he walked away from the palace.
Proceeding up the valley, Kualu entered the hut of Waahia. He found the kaula alone, as usual. She knew he was coming, but was none the less rejoiced to meet him. With a word or two of greeting he sat down in silence. The cruel words of Kaheka still stuck like thorns in his throat. Waahia regarded him intently for a time, and then said:
Proceeding up the valley, Kualu entered Waahia's hut. He found the kaula alone, as usual. She knew he was coming but was still glad to see him. After exchanging a few greetings, he sat down in silence. The harsh words of Kaheka still felt like thorns in his throat. Waahia looked at him closely for a moment and then said:
“I know it all. Kalaunui’s army has been destroyed. You escaped in a canoe with three others.”
“I know everything. Kalaunui’s army has been wiped out. You got away in a canoe with three other people.”
“And Kalaunui?” questioned Kualu, not a little amazed at the correctness of her information.
“And Kalaunui?” Kualu asked, somewhat amazed at how accurate her information was.
“Is a prisoner,” replied the kaula.
“Is a prisoner,” replied the kaula.
“Thank the gods for that!” exclaimed the chief vehemently. “He must be liberated, for he can tell her that in escaping I acted neither with cowardice nor treachery!”
“Thank the gods for that!” the chief exclaimed passionately. “He must be freed, because he can tell her that in escaping, I acted neither out of cowardice nor betrayal!”
“Tell whom?” inquired the kaula.
"Tell who?" inquired the kaula.
“Kaheka,” answered Kualu. “She charges me with cowardice and desertion.”
“Kaheka,” Kualu replied. “She accuses me of being a coward and of abandoning her.”
“Then Kaheka accuses you of what I know to be false!” said Waahia.
“Then Kaheka is accusing you of something I know isn't true!” said Waahia.
“Yes,” returned the chief; “but the witnesses to my fidelity are few and humble, and the words of the king can alone relieve me in the eyes of the aha alii of the disgrace with which the charges of Kaheka will cover me.” [195]
“Yeah,” replied the chief; “but the witnesses to my loyalty are few and modest, and only the king’s words can clear my name in the eyes of the aha alii from the shame that Kaheka’s accusations will bring upon me.” [__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]
“True,” replied the kaula, encouragingly; “but the disgrace will not be lasting, for the king will return to do you justice.”
“True,” replied the kaula, encouragingly; “but the disgrace won’t last long, because the king will come back to make things right for you.”
“When will he return?” eagerly inquired the chief.
“When will he be back?” the chief asked eagerly.
“I cannot tell,” answered Waahia; “but I know that his rule is not yet at an end in Hawaii, and you must be patient.”
“I can’t say,” Waahia replied, “but I know that his rule isn’t over yet in Hawaii, and you need to be patient.”
And Kualu promised to be patient, and for a few days bore the neglect and frowns of his former friends, and the sneers and covert insults of his enemies. But when the heartless accusations of Kaheka, passing from tongue to tongue with the news of the dreadful slaughter, became generally known, and almost as generally believed, notwithstanding the statements of his three companions to the contrary, Kualu’s indignation could no longer be restrained, and he challenged to combat and slew on the spot a chief who, in the presence of a party of friends, repeated the charges to his face. Great excitement followed, and in his desperation and wrath Kualu invited the friends of his fallen defamer, one and all, to test his courage then or thereafter.
And Kualu promised to be patient, enduring the neglect and frowns from his former friends, as well as the sneers and hidden insults from his enemies for a few days. But when the cruel accusations from Kaheka, spreading from one person to another along with the news of the horrific massacre, became widely known and almost universally believed, despite the statements from his three companions denying them, Kualu's anger could no longer be contained. He challenged to a fight and killed the chief on the spot who repeated the charges to his face in front of a group of friends. This caused a huge stir, and in his desperation and fury, Kualu invited all of his defamer's friends to test his courage then or at any time afterwards.
As the life of Kualu was now in constant and undoubted peril, Waahia advised him to leave Hawaii for a time, and together they set sail for Molokai, and took up their residence at Kalaupapa. But before leaving Waipio the kaula called upon the high-priest, by whom she was held in great respect, and told him where she might be found on Molokai, should her services be required.
As Kualu's life was now in constant and undeniable danger, Waahia suggested that he leave Hawaii for a while. They sailed together to Molokai and settled at Kalaupapa. However, before departing Waipio, the kaula visited the high priest, who held her in high regard, and informed him where she could be found on Molokai if her services were needed.
“And they will be required,” said Waahia, significantly. “Kalaunui is not dead, and when you shall have failed in all your efforts to liberate him, tell Kaheka to think better of Kualu and send for me.”
“And they'll be required,” said Waahia, emphasizing his point. “Kalaunui isn't dead, and when you've failed in all your attempts to free him, tell Kaheka to reconsider Kualu and reach out to me.”
“How know you that Kalaunui still lives?” inquired the priest.
“How do you know that Kalaunui is still alive?” the priest asked.
“Should the high-priest of Pakaalani ask me that question?” replied Waahia. “Where are his seers? Where are the kilos of the temple, who in the heavens saw victory for Kalaunui where I beheld defeat? Have they not been consulted?”
“Should the high priest of Pakaalani ask me that question?” replied Waahia. “Where are his seers? Where are the kilos of the temple, who in the heavens saw victory for Kalaunui while I saw defeat? Have they not been consulted?”
“All do not see with the eyes of Waahia,” returned the priest, evasively.
“All don't see through the eyes of Waahia,” the priest replied, dodging the question.
Flattered by this recognition of her superiority, the kaula said, as she turned to depart: “You will know more to-morrow!” And an hour after, accompanied by Kualu, she left Waipio for Molokai.
Flattered by this recognition of her superiority, the kaula said, as she turned to leave: “You’ll find out more tomorrow!” An hour later, with Kualu by her side, she left Waipio for Molokai.
The priest was not deceived by Waahia, for the day after [196]authentic intelligence was received from Maui to the effect that Kalaunui’s campaign had been a failure in Kauai, and the king was a prisoner in the hands of Kukona. The leading chiefs were called together in council, and several projects for the liberation of the king were advanced and discussed. Kaheka was in favor of raising a powerful army at once, and bringing her royal husband back by force; but when it was considered by cooler heads that Kukona was undoubtedly well prepared for war, and had secured the friendship, and in an emergency could command the support, of the chiefs of Maui, Oahu and Molokai, the suggestion was dismissed as dangerous and impracticable.
The priest wasn’t fooled by Waahia, because the day after [__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]they received reliable news from Maui that Kalaunui’s campaign had failed in Kauai, and the king was a prisoner of Kukona. The leading chiefs were called together for a council, and several plans for freeing the king were proposed and discussed. Kaheka was in favor of quickly raising a strong army to bring her royal husband back by force; however, after considering the thoughts of those with cooler heads, it was clear that Kukona was well-prepared for battle and had the support of the chiefs from Maui, Oahu, and Molokai if needed, so the idea was dismissed as risky and unworkable.
Under the circumstances it was finally resolved to attempt the liberation of Kalaunui through negotiation; and to this end messengers were despatched to Kauai with offers of a large number of canoes, spears and other war materials in exchange for the royal prisoner. But the surrender of Kalaunui’s fleet, and the capture of thousands of spears and other arms, had given Kukona a great abundance of both, and he declined the offer.
Given the situation, it was finally decided to try to free Kalaunui through negotiation. To this end, messengers were sent to Kauai with offers of a lot of canoes, spears, and other war supplies in exchange for the royal prisoner. However, the surrender of Kalaunui’s fleet and the capture of thousands of spears and other weapons had given Kukona plenty of both, and he turned down the offer.
Failing in this, after a lapse of some months messengers were again sent to Kukona with a proffer of twenty full-sized mamos, or royal feather cloaks, a canoe-load of ivory and whalebone, and a thousand stone lipis, or axes, of a superior kind peculiar to Hawaii. The messengers were courteously received and listened to, but the offer was not accepted.
Failing in this, after some months had passed, messengers were once again sent to Kukona with a proposal of twenty full-sized mamos, or royal feather cloaks, a canoe-load of ivory and whalebone, and a thousand stone lipis, or superior axes unique to Hawaii. The messengers were welcomed politely and their words were heard, but the offer was not accepted.
War was again urged by Kaheka, but the chiefs refused to embark in an undertaking so hazardous, and without their support she could do nothing. And so for more than two years Kalaunui remained in captivity, when a third attempt to ransom him was made. Kaheka despatched to Kauai two ambassadors of high rank, offering her daughter Kapapa in marriage either to Kukona or his son, Manokalanipo, and promising perpetual peace between the islands. This offer was also declined, and Kukona refused to name to the ambassadors the terms upon which he would treat for the liberation of their king.
Kaheka pushed for war again, but the chiefs wouldn't get involved in such a risky venture, and without their backing, she couldn’t do anything. So for more than two years, Kalaunui stayed in captivity until a third attempt was made to ransom him. Kaheka sent two high-ranking ambassadors to Kauai, offering her daughter Kapapa in marriage to either Kukona or his son, Manokalanipo, and promising lasting peace between the islands. This offer was also turned down, and Kukona refused to tell the ambassadors the terms he would accept for the release of their king.
It now became a question either of war or the abandonment of Kalaunui to his fate. In this dilemma the priests and kaulas were consulted, but their predictions were vague and their counsels unsatisfactory. Remembering the words of Waahia, the high-priest sought the presence of Kaheka, and advised her to send for the old prophetess, who was living with her foster-son at [197]Kalaupapa. This, after some persuasion, she consented to do, and, despatching a chief of high rank to Molokai, with the admission that she had accused Kualu unjustly, the kaula was induced to return with the messenger to Waipio. But Kualu did not accompany her. She was suspicious of Kaheka, and advised him to remain at Kalaupapa.
It became a matter of either going to war or leaving Kalaunui to his fate. In this tough situation, the priests and kaulas were consulted, but their predictions were unclear and their advice unsatisfactory. Remembering what Waahia had said, the high priest went to see Kaheka and suggested she call for the old prophetess, who was living with her foster son at [__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]Kalaupapa. After some persuasion, she agreed and sent a high-ranking chief to Molokai, admitting that she had wrongly accused Kualu. The kaula was then persuaded to come back with the messenger to Waipio. However, Kualu did not go with her. She was wary of Kaheka and advised him to stay at Kalaupapa.
Arriving at Waipio, the kaula, feeling that the game was now in her own hands, informed the high-priest that she would communicate with the leading chiefs of the kingdom convened in council. The chiefs were accordingly assembled, and Waahia appeared before them. Kaheka was present, as the kaula desired.
Arriving at Waipio, the kaula, feeling that the power was now in her hands, told the high priest that she would speak with the top chiefs of the kingdom gathered in council. The chiefs were then assembled, and Waahia stood before them. Kaheka was there, as the kaula wanted.
With a staff in her hand, capped with the head of an owl, and her long, white hair falling to her waist, there was something weird and awe-inspiring in the appearance of the venerable prophetess as she entered the council-room and bowed low before Kaheka and the assembled chiefs. It was not her privilege to break the silence without permission, and when it had been formally accorded she raised her eyes, and, without especially addressing any one, said:
With a staff in her hand topped with an owl's head, and her long, white hair flowing down to her waist, there was something strange and impressive about the appearance of the wise prophetess as she walked into the council room and bowed deeply before Kaheka and the gathered chiefs. She wasn’t allowed to speak until given permission, and when it was formally granted, she lifted her gaze and, without specifically addressing anyone, said:
“Why have I been sent for?”
"Why did they call me?"
No one could answer, not even Kaheka.
No one could respond, not even Kaheka.
At length an old chief, after conferring with those around him, replied:
At last, an old chief, after talking with those around him, replied:
“You have been sent for on the word of the high-priest, and with the hope that you might be able to point out a way for the return of Kalaunui to Hawaii. Can you do so?”
“You have been called on the authority of the high priest, and with the hope that you might be able to suggest a way for Kalaunui to return to Hawaii. Can you do that?”
“I can speak of no way,” answered the kaula.
“I can’t think of any way,” replied the kaula.
“Then you can do nothing?” returned the chief.
“Then you can’t do anything?” replied the chief.
“My words were that I could speak of no way, nor can I,” said the kaula; “yet, keeping my own counsel, I might possibly be able to accomplish what you all desire.”
“My words were that I could speak of no way, nor can I,” said the kaula; “yet, if I keep my own counsel, I might be able to achieve what you all want.”
“And will you undertake to do so?” inquired Kaheka.
“And will you take on that task?” Kaheka asked.
“Yes, on one condition,” was the prompt reply.
“Yes, but only on one condition,” was the quick response.
“Well, what do you ask for attempting to save the life of your king?” returned the queen, in a tone of rebuke.
“Well, what do you expect for trying to save your king’s life?” the queen replied, sounding critical.
Waahia did not like the spirit of the inquiry, and a scowl darkened her wrinkled face as she replied:
Waahia didn't like the vibe of the inquiry, and a frown settled on her wrinkled face as she responded:
“I might ask that, if the gods willed that I should fail, Kaheka would not charge me with treachery!”
“I hope that if the gods intended for me to fail, Kaheka wouldn’t accuse me of betrayal!”
This reference to the treatment of Kualu created a feeling of [198]uneasiness among the chiefs; but, without inviting remark or explanation, the kaula continued:
This reference to how Kualu was treated made the chiefs feel uneasy; however, without prompting any comments or explanations, the kaula continued:
“What I require is a pledge from every chief here that, should I succeed in liberating Kalaunui, the terms of the release, whatever they may be, will be complied with.”
“What I need is a promise from every leader here that, if I succeed in freeing Kalaunui, the terms of the release, no matter what they are, will be followed.”
The chiefs hesitated, as it was not impossible that the sovereignty of the island might be offered to Kukona by the prophetess, and they could not pledge themselves to a sacrifice involving their own ruin. Waahia relieved their apprehensions, however, by assuring them that the pledge would not be considered binding if the terms affected either the sovereignty of the island or the lives, possessions or prerogatives of its chiefs. With this assurance the members of the council, after briefly discussing the possibilities of the obligation, consented to accept it. Thereupon the pledge was carefully repeated thrice by the chiefs, and each in turn solemnly invoked upon himself, should he fail to keep and observe it in its fulness, the wrath of Hikapoloa, the divine trinity, and the swift and especial vengeance of Kuahana, the slayer of men.
The chiefs were hesitant because it was possible that the prophetess might offer the island's sovereignty to Kukona, and they couldn't risk agreeing to a sacrifice that could lead to their downfall. However, Waahia eased their concerns by assuring them that the pledge wouldn’t be considered binding if the terms impacted the island's sovereignty or the lives, possessions, or rights of its chiefs. With this reassurance, the members of the council briefly discussed the implications of the obligation and agreed to accept it. Then, the chiefs carefully repeated the pledge three times, and each one, in turn, solemnly invoked upon himself, should he fail to uphold it in its entirety, the wrath of Hikapoloa, the divine trinity, and the swift and specific vengeance of Kuahana, the slayer of men.
“Are you satisfied now?” inquired Kaheka.
“Are you satisfied now?” Kaheka asked.
“I am satisfied,” replied the kaula.
“I’m satisfied,” replied the kaula.
“Do you require assistance?” This inquiry came from more than one.
“Do you need help?” This question came from more than one person.
“Only of the gods!” was the impressive answer of Waahia, as she left the council and slowly wended her way up the valley.
“Only of the gods!” was the powerful response from Waahia, as she left the council and gradually made her way up the valley.
All night long strange lights flashed at intervals through the weather-rent openings in the kaula’s hut. Shadowy forms were seen to move noiselessly around it; owls came and went as the lights vanished and reappeared; and, just as the sun began to paint the east, Waahia proceeded to the beach, and with a single sturdy assistant of supernatural aspect embarked in a canoe which seemed to be equipped and provisioned for a long voyage. This was the ghostly narration of two or three of the nearest neighbors of the prophetess, and the truth of the story was not doubted, even when it reached the palace. Doubtless the plain facts were that Waahia spent the most of the night in preparing for the voyage, and set sail early in the morning with an assistant known to be trustworthy and familiar with the sea.
All night, strange lights flashed intermittently through the weather-worn openings in the kaula’s hut. Shadowy figures silently moved around it; owls came and went as the lights disappeared and reappeared; and just as the sun began to brighten the east, Waahia headed to the beach, accompanied by a single robust assistant with a supernatural vibe, and they set off in a canoe that looked ready and stocked for a long journey. This was the eerie account from a couple of the prophetess's closest neighbors, and no one doubted its truth, even when it reached the palace. The plain facts were likely that Waahia spent most of the night preparing for the trip and set sail early in the morning with a reliable assistant who was well-acquainted with the sea.
Waahia proceeded very leisurely to Kauai. The annual feast of Lono was approaching, and as she desired to arrive there during [199]the festival, which would not be for some days, she spent the intervening time in visiting many sacred spots and noted temples on Maui, Oahu, Molokai and Lanai. Perhaps to commune with the honored dead, she made a pilgrimage to the sacred valley of Iao, on the island of Maui, where were buried many of the distinguished kings and chiefs of the group. She stopped at Kalaupapa, on Molokai, to confer with Kualu, and while there paid a visit to the home, near Kaluakoi, of Laamaomao, the wind-god, who came from the south with Moikeha more than a century before; and in the same valley visited the dreaded spot where, in the reign of Kamauaua, the father of Kaupeepee, the abductor of Hina, near the close of the eleventh century, sprang up in a night the poisoned grove of Kalaipahoa, or, according to another tradition, where that goddess, belonging to a family of southern deities, visited the group with two of her sisters, and entered and poisoned a small grove of trees of natural growth.
Waahia made her way to Kauai at a relaxed pace. The annual feast of Lono was coming up, and since she wanted to get there in time for the festival, which was still days away, she took the opportunity to visit many sacred sites and notable temples on Maui, Oahu, Molokai, and Lanai. Possibly to connect with the revered ancestors, she traveled to the sacred valley of Iao on Maui, where many esteemed kings and chiefs from the islands are buried. She stopped at Kalaupapa on Molokai to meet with Kualu, and while she was there, she visited the home of Laamaomao, the wind-god, located near Kaluakoi. Laamaomao had arrived from the south with Moikeha over a century ago. In the same valley, she also went to the infamous site where, during the reign of Kamauaua, the father of Kaupeepee, the kidnapper of Hina, a poisoned grove of Kalaipahoa emerged overnight near the end of the eleventh century. According to another tale, this was the place where a goddess from a southern deity family, along with two of her sisters, came to the islands and poisoned a small grove of naturally growing trees.
From one of these poisonous trees the famous idol of Kalaipahoa was made. So poisonous was the wood that many died in cutting down the tree and carving the image, for all perished whose flesh was touched by the chips; but the workmen finally covered their bodies with kapa, including masks for their faces and wraps for their hands, and thus succeeded in completing the dangerous task without farther loss of life. But a single image was made. It remained with the ruling family of Molokai until the subjugation of the group by Kamehameha I., when it came into his possession, and at his death, in 1819, was divided among a few of the principal chiefs. Two fragments of the image, it is said, are still preserved, but they are carefully guarded and never exhibited to eyes sceptical or profane. Long before Waahia visited the spot the last vestige of the grove had disappeared, but for many acres around where the terrible trees once stood the earth was black and bare. Within the dreaded area no living thing was seen, and birds fell dead in flying over it. But the kaula entered it and returned unharmed, to the amazement of more than one witness.
From one of these toxic trees, the famous idol of Kalaipahoa was created. The wood was so poisonous that many died while cutting down the tree and carving the image; anyone whose skin came into contact with the wood chips perished. However, the workers managed to protect themselves by covering their bodies with kapa, including masks for their faces and wraps for their hands, and they ultimately completed the perilous task without further loss of life. Only one image was made. It remained with the ruling family of Molokai until Kamehameha I. conquered the islands, at which point it came into his possession. After his death in 1819, it was divided among several principal chiefs. It’s said that two fragments of the image are still preserved, but they are kept under strict guard and never shown to anyone considered skeptical or irreverent. Long before Waahia arrived at the site, the last remnants of the grove had vanished, but the ground for many acres where the ominous trees had stood was still black and bare. No living creatures were seen in the cursed area, and birds fell dead while flying over it. However, the kaula entered the area and returned unharmed, astonishing many witnesses.
Waahia next visited the heiau of Kaumolu, which was then a puhonua, or place of refuge, and in another temple near the coast offered sacrifices to the shark-god Mooalii. By reputation she was generally known to the priesthood of the group, and was nowhere regarded as an intruder in places sacred to worship. [200]
Waahia next visited the heiau of Kaumolu, which was then a puhonua, or a place of refuge, and in another temple near the coast offered sacrifices to the shark-god Mooalii. She was well-known among the local priests and was not seen as an outsider in the sacred places of worship. [__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]
Stopping at Ewa, on the island of Oahu, she saw for the first time the hallowed enclosure of Kukaniloko, the creation of Nanakaoko, son of Nanamaoa, the earliest arrival from the south of the migratory stream of the eleventh century. Chiefs born there were endowed with especial prerogatives and distinctions, and the beating of a sacred drum called hawea gave notice without of the birth of a tabu chief.
Stopping at Ewa on the island of Oahu, she saw for the first time the sacred area of Kukaniloko, created by Nanakaoko, the son of Nanamaoa, who was among the first to arrive from the south during the migratory wave of the eleventh century. Chiefs born there were granted unique privileges and honors, and the sound of a sacred drum called hawea signaled the birth of a tabu chief.
IV.
The winter solstice, which marked the end of the Hawaiian year, was at hand, to be followed by the usual five days’ feast of Lono, and Waahia so timed her voyage as to arrive on Kauai the day before the festival began. She quietly landed at Koloa, and as far as possible avoided observation by taking up her residence in a small hut secured by her companion well back in the neighboring hills.
The winter solstice, marking the end of the Hawaiian year, was approaching, followed by the usual five days of celebration for Lono. Waahia planned her voyage to arrive on Kauai the day before the festival started. She landed quietly at Koloa and tried to stay out of sight by settling in a small hut that her companion had secured deep in the nearby hills.
These annual festivals of Lono were seasons of universal merriment and rejoicing. The god was crowned and ornamented with leis of flowers and feathers, and unstinted offerings of pigs, fowls and fruits were laid upon the altars of the temples consecrated to his worship. Chiefs and people alike gave themselves unreservedly over to feasting, dancing, singing and the indulgence of almost every appetite and caprice, and the Saturnalias of the old Romans gave to the masses scarcely more license than the festivals of Lono. Every instrument of music known to the people—and they possessed but four or five of the simplest kinds—was brought into requisition, and for five days there was almost an uninterrupted tumult of revelry. Lakakane, the hula god, was decorated and brought out, and every variety of the dance was given—some of them to the time of vocal recitations and others to the noisier accompaniment of pipes, drums and rattling calabashes. In the midst of these enjoyments long-bearded bards appeared before the king and distinguished chiefs, and while some of them recited wild historic tales of the past, others chanted the mele-inoas and sang of the personal exploits of their titled listeners. Awa and other intoxicating drinks were freely indulged in by those who craved them, and the festivals were usually followed by a week or more of general languor and worthlessness.
These annual festivals of Lono were times of widespread joy and celebration. The god was crowned and adorned with leis of flowers and feathers, and generous offerings of pigs, chickens, and fruits were placed on the altars of the temples dedicated to him. Both chiefs and common people fully embraced feasting, dancing, singing, and indulging in nearly every desire and whim, and the excesses of the old Romans during their Saturnalia provided the masses with hardly more freedom than the festivals of Lono. Every known musical instrument—limited to just four or five simple types—was used, and for five days, there was almost non-stop revelry. Lakakane, the hula god, was dressed up and featured, showcasing every kind of dance—some accompanied by spoken recitations and others supported by the louder sounds of flutes, drums, and rattling calabashes. Amidst the festivities, long-bearded poets performed for the king and notable chiefs, with some recounting wild historical tales while others chanted the mele-inoas and sang about the personal achievements of their noble audience. Awa and other intoxicating beverages were freely consumed by those who wanted them, and the celebrations typically left everyone feeling a week or more of complete lethargy and uselessness afterward.
It was the third day of the festival at Koloa. The gates of the [201]enclosure had been thrown open, and thousands of people thronged around the royal mansion in a grove near which large quantities of refreshments were spread on the ground in huge wooden trays and calabashes. The feast was free to all, and Kukona lounged on a pile of kapa in the deep shade of the trees in front of the palace, happy in witnessing the enjoyment of his subjects. Around him were standing a number of chiefs of high rank. A kahili of bright feathers was occasionally and unobtrusively waved above his head by the paakahili, and the iwikuamoo, aipuupuu and other of his personal attendants, all of the lesser nobility, stood in readiness to respond to his slightest wishes. A guard of inferior chiefs kept the crowd from pressing too closely the distinguished group, but from time to time, as permission was granted, select bands of dancers and musicians and chanters of ability were allowed to approach and entertain the royal party with specimens of their skill and erudition.
It was the third day of the festival at Koloa. The gates of the [__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__] enclosure had been thrown open, and thousands of people gathered around the royal mansion in a grove where large amounts of refreshments were spread out on the ground in huge wooden trays and calabashes. The feast was free for everyone, and Kukona lounged on a pile of kapa in the deep shade of the trees in front of the palace, happy to see his subjects enjoying themselves. Surrounding him were several high-ranking chiefs. A kahili made of bright feathers was occasionally waved unobtrusively above his head by the paakahili, while the iwikuamoo, aipuupuu, and other personal attendants, all of lesser nobility, stood ready to respond to his slightest wishes. A guard of lower-ranking chiefs kept the crowd from getting too close to the distinguished group, but from time to time, as permission was given, select groups of dancers, musicians, and skilled chanters were allowed to approach and entertain the royal party with their talents.
A company of dancers had just retired, when Waahia, with a staff in her hand, and wearing a short mantle, indicating that she claimed privileges of dress which were not accorded to women generally, asked permission to be admitted to the presence of the king. Her strange appearance excited the curiosity of Kukona, and she was allowed to approach. Kneeling and touching her forehead to the ground, she rose and asked if it was the pleasure of the king to hear her. As these ceremonies, due to supreme authority, were usually waived on such occasions, it was surmised that the woman must be a stranger in Kauai. She was told to speak. A moooelo, or historic chant, was expected; but in a full, sharp voice she chanted these words:
A group of dancers had just finished performing when Waahia, holding a staff and wearing a short cloak that indicated she had privileges not usually granted to women, asked to be admitted to the king’s presence. Her unusual appearance caught Kukona's curiosity, and she was allowed to come closer. Kneeling and touching her forehead to the ground, she stood up and asked if the king would like to hear her. Since these formalities are usually skipped in such situations, it was assumed she must be a stranger to Kauai. She was told to speak. A moooelo, or historical chant, was expected; but with a clear, sharp voice, she chanted these words:
“O the long knife of the stranger,
“O the long knife of the stranger,
Of the stranger from other lands,
Of the outsider from different places,
Of the stranger with sparkling eyes,
Of the stranger with bright, sparkling eyes,
Of the stranger with a white face!
Of the stranger with a pale face!
O long knife of Lono, the gift of Lono;
O long knife of Lono, the gift of Lono;
It flashes like fire in the sun;
It sparkles like flames in the sunlight;
Its edge is sharper than stone,
Its edge is sharper than stone,
Sharper than the hard stone of Hualalai;
Sharper than the tough stone of Hualalai;
The spear touches it and breaks,
The spear touches it and breaks,
The strong warrior sees it and dies!
The tough warrior sees it and dies!
Where is the long knife of the stranger?
Where's the stranger's big knife?
Where is the sacred gift of Lono? [202]
Where is the sacred gift of Lono? [__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]
It came to Wailuku and is lost,
It came to Wailuku and is lost,
It was seen at Lahaina and cannot be found.
It was spotted in Lahaina and can't be found.
He is more than a chief who finds it,
He is more than just a leader who discovers it,
He is a chief of chiefs who possesses it.
He is the leader of leaders who has it.
Maui cannot spoil his fields,
Maui can't ruin his fields,
Hawaii cannot break his nets;
Hawaii can't break his nets;
His canoes are safe from Kauai;
His canoes are safe from Kauai;
The chiefs of Oahu will not oppose him,
The leaders of Oahu won’t stand against him,
The chiefs of Molokai will bend at his feet.
The leaders of Molokai will kneel before him.
O long knife of the stranger,
O long knife of the stranger,
O bright knife of Lono!
O bright knife of Lono!
Who has seen it? Who has found it?
Who has seen it? Who has found it?
Has it been hidden away in the earth?
Has it been buried in the ground?
Has the great sea swallowed it?
Has the vast ocean consumed it?
Does the kilo see it among the stars?
Does the kilo see it among the stars?
Can the kaula find it in the bowels of the black hog?
Can the kaula find it in the guts of the black pig?
Will a voice from the anu answer?
Will a voice from the anu answer?
Will the priests of Lono speak?
Will the priests of Lono talk?
The kilo is silent, the kaula is dumb.
The kilo is silent, the kaula is mute.
O long knife of the stranger,
O long knife of the stranger,
O bright knife of Lono,
O bright knife of Lono,
It is lost, it is lost, it is lost!”
It’s gone, it’s gone, it’s gone!
At the conclusion of the chant, which was listened to with attention, the kaula bowed and disappeared in the crowd. Kukona had heard of the long knife, and Waahia’s description of its powers interested him greatly. He despatched a messenger to the high-priest, ordering that the diviners at once be put to the task of discovering the hiding-place of the sacred weapon.
At the end of the chant, which everyone listened to intently, the kaula bowed and vanished into the crowd. Kukona had heard about the long knife, and Waahia’s description of its powers intrigued him a lot. He sent a messenger to the high priest, instructing that the diviners immediately start searching for the hidden location of the sacred weapon.
On the following afternoon Waahia appeared before the king and his chiefs, and with the same ceremonies repeated her chant of the day before. The high-priest was summoned, and informed the king that his diviners had as yet discovered no trace of the long knife.
On the next afternoon, Waahia stood before the king and his chiefs, and with the same rituals, she repeated her chant from the previous day. The high priest was called in and told the king that his diviners had not yet found any sign of the long knife.
The third day Waahia appeared and repeated her chant before the king, and silently withdrew, as before. Again the high-priest was summoned, but was able to offer no assurance that the long knife would be found by the kahunas. They had resorted to every means of inspiration and magic known to them, but could discover no clue to the mystery.
The third day, Waahia came back and recited her chant in front of the king before quietly leaving, just like before. Once again, the high priest was called, but he couldn't guarantee that the long knife would be found by the kahunas. They had tried every method of inspiration and magic they knew, but they couldn't find any clues to the mystery.
“Who is this woman who for three successive days has told us of the lost knife?” inquired Kukona, addressing the chiefs surrounding him. [203]
“Who is this woman who has told us about the lost knife for three days in a row?” Kukona asked, addressing the chiefs around him. [__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]
No one seemed to be able to answer. Finally the master of ceremonies stepped forward and replied:
No one seemed to know the answer. Finally, the master of ceremonies stepped up and said:
“The woman, I think, is Waahia, the noted prophetess of Hawaii. I saw her fifteen years ago in Waipio, and am quite sure that I remember her face.”
“The woman, I think, is Waahia, the famous prophetess of Hawaii. I saw her fifteen years ago in Waipio, and I’m pretty sure I remember her face.”
The name, if not the face, of the distinguished seeress was known to the king and many others present, and the high-priest, anxious to explain the failure of his magicians, bowed and said:
The name, if not the appearance, of the well-known seeress was recognized by the king and many others there, and the high priest, eager to justify the inadequacy of his magicians, bowed and said:
“The master of ceremonies has doubtless spoken truly. The woman must be Waahia. Her powers are great, and a secret in her keeping is beyond the reach of the kaulas.”
“The master of ceremonies has definitely spoken the truth. The woman must be Waahia. Her powers are immense, and a secret in her possession is beyond the reach of the kaulas.”
Accepting this explanation of the high-priest, Kukona ordered the prophetess to be found and respectfully conducted to the royal mansion; but after a fruitless search of two days it was reported that she had probably left the valley, and therefore could not be found.
Accepting the high priest's explanation, Kukona ordered that the prophetess be located and respectfully brought to the royal mansion. However, after a fruitless search lasting two days, it was reported that she had likely left the valley and could not be found.
Irritated at what seemed to be the inefficiency or neglect of his kaulas and chiefs, Kukona was about to attach a death-penalty to further failure when Waahia suddenly entered the royal enclosure and approached the palace. Her appearance was most welcome to the attending chiefs, and she was ushered at once into the presence of the king. So delighted was Kukona at the unexpected visit that he rose unconsciously to his feet and greeted the prophetess. This breach of courtly form amazed the attendants of the king, and suggested to them that the strange visitor must be of supreme rank; but before any explanation could be gathered they were ordered to retire, even to the paakahili, and Kukona was left alone with the kaula.
Irritated by what seemed like the inefficiency or negligence of his kaulas and chiefs, Kukona was about to impose a death penalty for any further failures when Waahia suddenly entered the royal area and approached the palace. Her arrival was very welcome to the attending chiefs, and she was immediately brought into the presence of the king. Kukona was so delighted by the unexpected visit that he unconsciously stood up to greet the prophetess. This break from royal protocol shocked the king's attendants, leading them to think that the unusual visitor must hold a very high rank; but before any explanation could be made, they were ordered to leave, even to the paakahili, and Kukona was left alone with the kaula.
The king motioned his visitor to a lounge of kapa, for she seemed to be old and feeble, and he had a favor to ask. Seating herself, as requested, the king approached, and, in a voice that could not well be overheard, said:
The king gestured for his guest to take a seat on the kapa, as she looked elderly and frail, and he had a favor to ask. Once she settled in as he requested, the king moved closer and, speaking softly so he wouldn't be overheard, said:
“Are you Waahia, the prophetess of Hawaii?”
“Are you Waahia, the prophetess of Hawaii?”
“I am Waahia,” answered the kaula.
“I’m Waahia,” answered the kaula.
“You have chanted of the long knife of the stranger, of the bright knife of Lono, of the lost knife of Wailuku,” resumed Kukona. “Our diviners can give me no information concerning it.”
“You’ve talked about the stranger’s long knife, Lono’s bright knife, and the lost knife of Wailuku,” Kukona continued. “Our diviners can’t provide any information about it.”
Waahia smiled significantly, but made no reply, and the king continued: [204]
Waahia smiled meaningfully, but didn’t say anything, and the king went on: [__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]
“They say you have tabued the secret, and others, therefore, cannot share it. Is it so?”
“They say you’ve kept the secret to yourself, and therefore, others can’t share it. Is that true?”
“Perhaps,” was the brief reply.
“Maybe,” was the brief reply.
“Then you can find the sacred knife?” eagerly suggested Kukona.
“Then you can find the sacred knife?” Kukona eagerly suggested.
“I can find it,” was the kaula’s emphatic answer.
“I can find it,” was the kaula’s firm answer.
“Then find and bring it to Kukona, and for the service claim what you will,” was the prompt proposal of the king.
“Then find it and bring it to Kukona, and for your service, claim whatever you want,” was the king's quick suggestion.
With the way thus broadly opened, Waahia announced that the price of the knife must be the liberation of Kalaunui, and was astonished at the promptness with which the terms were accepted. It was manifest to Waahia that he either placed a very high value upon the talisman, or had kept his royal prisoner about as long as he cared to detain him or the peace of his kingdom required. In either event his unhesitating acceptance of the main consideration warranted Waahia in at once naming one or two other conditions, which were just as promptly agreed to by the king. One of these conditions was that Kalaunui should agree, as the only consideration for his release to be known to him, that his daughter Kapapa should be given in marriage to the chief Kualu, not only as a fitting union, but as a measure of atonement for the unjust and disgraceful charges made against that worthy young chief by Kaheka, and that Kukona and Kalaunui should mutually pledge themselves to the fulfilment of the compact. The other condition was that, on the delivery of the knife to Kukona, he was to release the captive king at once, and return him to Hawaii in company with three high chiefs of Kauai, who were to remain in Waipio until after the consummation of the marriage of Kapapa and Kualu.
With the path now clear, Waahia declared that the price of the knife had to be the freedom of Kalaunui, and was surprised at how quickly the terms were agreed to. It was clear to Waahia that he either valued the talisman very highly or had kept his royal prisoner for as long as he wanted to or as the peace of his kingdom required. In either case, his immediate acceptance of the primary condition led Waahia to promptly name one or two additional terms, which were also quickly agreed to by the king. One of these conditions was that Kalaunui would agree, as the only requirement for his release, that his daughter Kapapa would be married to the chief Kualu, not only as a suitable match but also as a way to make up for the unjust and disgraceful accusations made against that honorable young chief by Kaheka. Additionally, Kukona and Kalaunui were to mutually agree to fulfill this pact. The other condition was that, upon delivering the knife to Kukona, he would immediately release the captive king and return him to Hawaii along with three high chiefs of Kauai, who would stay in Waipio until after Kapapa and Kualu's marriage was completed.
Kalaunui was communicated with. For nearly three years he had been confined and closely but respectfully guarded within a square of high stone walls enclosing a single hut. Utterly unable to account for Kukona’s interest in Kualu, he nevertheless accepted the terms submitted to him for his release, and Waahia started at once for Kalaupapa, promising to be back within six days. For the voyage she accepted a canoe larger and more commodious than her own, and the services of five additional rowers.
Kalaunui was contacted. For nearly three years, he had been held and carefully but respectfully watched within a square of high stone walls surrounding a single hut. Completely unable to understand Kukona’s interest in Kualu, he nevertheless agreed to the conditions laid out for his release, and Waahia immediately set off for Kalaupapa, promising to return within six days. For the journey, she chose a canoe that was larger and more comfortable than her own, along with the help of five extra rowers.
Arriving at Kalaupapa on the morning of the third day from Koloa, Waahia startled Kualu by informing him that Kalaunui [205]was about to be released, and that in twelve days he must return without further notice to Waipio, where he would be relieved of all disgrace by the king, and become the husband of Kapapa. Coming from Waahia, he believed the words as if they had been flashed from the heavens, and asked for no confirmation as the kaula abruptly left him and proceeded alone toward the hills.
Arriving at Kalaupapa on the morning of the third day from Koloa, Waahia surprised Kualu by telling him that Kalaunui [__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__] was about to be freed, and that in twelve days he needed to return without further notice to Waipio, where the king would lift all his shame and he would marry Kapapa. Since the news came from Waahia, he believed it as if it had come straight from the heavens, and didn’t seek any confirmation as the kaula quickly left him and made his way alone toward the hills.
A few hours later Waahia re-embarked for Kauai, taking with her, securely wrapped in a number of kapa folds, the sword of Kaluiki. She reached Koloa within the time promised, and, proceeding to the palace, delivered to the king, in person and alone, the glittering blade which rumor had clothed with extraordinary sanctity and power.
A few hours later, Waahia boarded the boat again for Kauai, securely wrapped in several layers of kapa, the sword of Kaluiki. She arrived in Koloa on time and, going to the palace, personally and alone handed the king the dazzling blade that everyone said was filled with incredible holiness and power.
Kalaunui renewed his pledge to Kukona, and the next morning embarked for Hawaii in a large double canoe, accompanied by three of the leading chiefs of Kauai and their attendants. Stepping into the kaulua as it was about to be shoved into the surf, Kalaunui caught sight of Waahia, for the first time for years, as she stood leaning upon her staff near the water. Kualu’s part in the agreement with Kukona was explained at once by Waahia’s presence in Koloa; but what was Kualu to Kukona? and, if nothing, what influences had the kaula been able to bring to effect his release upon such conditions? No matter. Kalaunui was too happy in his liberation to quarrel with the means through which it had been secured, and he turned with a look of gratitude toward the prophetess as the canoe shot out into the breakers.
Kalaunui renewed his commitment to Kukona, and the next morning set off for Hawaii in a large double canoe, accompanied by three of Kauai's top chiefs and their attendants. As he stepped into the kaulua just before it was pushed into the surf, Kalaunui saw Waahia for the first time in years, standing by the water with her staff. Kualu’s role in the agreement with Kukona was instantly clear due to Waahia’s presence in Koloa; but what was Kualu’s significance to Kukona? And if he was nothing, how had the kaula managed to secure his release under these terms? It didn’t matter. Kalaunui was too joyful about his freedom to argue about how it was achieved, so he turned to the prophetess with a look of gratitude as the canoe surged into the waves.
The return of their captive king was joyously celebrated by the people of Hawaii, and a few days after Kapapa became the willing wife of Kualu. The union was distasteful to Kaheka, but she was powerless to prevent it. The agreement was faithfully fulfilled by Kalaunui, and he spent the remainder of his days in peace, leaving the kingdom to his only son, Kuaiwa, between whom and Kualu a lasting friendship was established.
The people of Hawaii joyfully celebrated the return of their captive king, and just a few days later, Kapapa became the willing wife of Kualu. Kaheka found the union unappealing, but she couldn't stop it. Kalaunui faithfully honored the agreement and spent the rest of his days in peace, leaving the kingdom to his only son, Kuaiwa, who established a lasting friendship with Kualu.
Kualu, with Kapapa, became the head of an influential family, one of his direct descendants having been the wife of Makaoku, a son of Kiha and brother of Liloa, one of the most noted of the kings of Hawaii.
Kualu, along with Kapapa, became the head of a powerful family, with one of his direct descendants being the wife of Makaoku, a son of Kiha and brother of Liloa, one of the most famous kings of Hawaii.
The sword of Kaluiki, the ransom of a king, remained for some generations with the descendants of Kukona; but what became of it in the end tradition fails to tell. [207]
The sword of Kaluiki, the king's ransom, stayed with Kukona's descendants for several generations, but tradition leaves us in the dark about what ultimately happened to it. [__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]
The Holy Spearhead.
[208]
[__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]
CHARACTERS.
-
Kakae and joint month of Maui. Kakaalaneo, - Kahekili, son of Kakae.
- Kaululaau, son of Kakaalaneo.
- Waolani, a high-priest of Maui.
- Kalona-iki, king of Oahu.
- Laiea-a-Ewa, sister of the queen of Oahu.
- Kamakaua, a companion of Kaululaau.
- Kauholanui-mahu, king of Hawaii.
- Neula, queen of Hawaii.
- Noakua, a chief of Kohala, Hawaii.
- Pelé, goddess of Kilauea.
- Keuakepo, brother of Pele.
- Mooaleo, a gnome-god of Molokai.
- Pueoalii, a winged demon of Oahu.
[209]
[__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]
THE SACRED SPEAR-POINT.
THE HOLY SPEARHEAD.
THE ADVENTURES OF KAULULAAU, PRINCE OF MAUI.
THE ADVENTURES OF KAULULAAU, PRINCE OF MAUI.
I.
Kaululaau was one of the sons of Kakaalaneo, brother of, and joint ruler with, Kakae in the government of Maui. The latter was the legitimate heir to the moiship, but, as he was weak-minded, Kakaalaneo ruled jointly with him and was the real sovereign of the little kingdom. The court of the brothers was at Lele (now Lahaina), and was one of the most distinguished in the group.
Kaululaau was one of the sons of Kakaalaneo, who was the brother of Kakae and shared ruling power over Maui. Kakae was the rightful heir to the throne, but since he was not very intelligent, Kakaalaneo took charge alongside him and was the true leader of their small kingdom. The court of the brothers was located in Lele (now Lahaina) and was one of the most prominent in the region.
The mother of Kaululaau was Kanikaniaula, of the family of Kamauaua, king of Molokai, through his son Haili, who was the brother or half-brother of Keoloewa and Kaupeepee. The latter, it will be remembered, was the abductor of the celebrated Hina, of Hawaii, and the family was of the old strain of Maweke.
The mother of Kaululaau was Kanikaniaula, from the family of Kamauaua, the king of Molokai, through his son Haili, who was the brother or half-brother of Keoloewa and Kaupeepee. The latter, as you may recall, was the one who kidnapped the famous Hina of Hawaii, and the family came from the ancient lineage of Maweke.
Kaululaau was probably born somewhere between the years 1390 and 1400. He had a half-sister, whose name was Wao, and a half-brother, Kaihiwalua, who was the father of Luaia, who became the husband of a daughter of Piliwale, moi of Oahu, and brother of Lo-Lale. He doubtless had other brothers and sisters, since his father was blessed with two or more wives, but the legends fail to refer to them.
Kaululaau was likely born around the years 1390 to 1400. He had a half-sister named Wao and a half-brother named Kaihiwalua, who was the father of Luaia, who married a daughter of Piliwale, moi of Oahu, and brother of Lo-Lale. He probably had other siblings, since his father had two or more wives, but the legends don’t mention them.
Kahekili, son of Kakae, and who became his successor in the moiship, was of near the age of his cousin, Kaululaau, and the two princes grew to manhood together. They were instructed by the same teachers, schooled in the same arts and chiefly accomplishments, and chanted the same genealogical meles. Yet in disposition and personal appearance they were widely different.
Kahekili, son of Kakae, who later became his successor in the moiship, was about the same age as his cousin, Kaululaau, and the two princes grew up together. They were taught by the same instructors, trained in the same skills and noble accomplishments, and sang the same genealogical meles. However, in personality and physical appearance, they were very different.
From his youth Kahekili was staid, sober and thoughtful. Bred to the knowledge that he would succeed his father as moi of the island, he began early in life to prepare himself for the proper exercise of supreme authority, and at the age of twenty was noted for his intelligence, dignity and royal bearing. He had been told by a prophet that one of his name would be the last independent [210]king of Maui, and the information rendered him solicitous for his future and drove many a smile from his lips. Yet, with all his austerity and circumspection, he was kind-hearted and affectionate, and his pastimes were such as comported with his dignity. In height he was somewhat below the chiefly medium, and his features were rugged and of a Papuan cast; but all knew that he was royal in heart and thought, and the respect due to him was not withheld.
From a young age, Kahekili was serious, thoughtful, and composed. Knowing he was destined to succeed his father as moi of the island, he started preparing himself early for the responsibilities of leadership. By the time he was twenty, he was recognized for his intelligence, dignity, and royal presence. A prophet had told him that someone with his name would be the last independent [__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__] king of Maui, which made him anxious about his future and often left him without a smile. Despite his seriousness and caution, he was kind and caring, and his hobbies were fitting for someone of his status. He was slightly shorter than most chiefs, with rugged features that had a Papuan appearance; however, everyone acknowledged his royal spirit and intellect, and he received the respect he deserved.
Kaululaau was unlike his royal cousin in almost every respect. He was noted alike for his intelligence, his manly beauty and his rollicking spirit of mischief and merriment. He did not covet the sceptre. He thought more of a wild debauch, with music, dancing and a calabash of awa, than the right to command “downward” or “upward the face”; and since Kahekili was the designated successor of his father, he claimed the right, as a favored and tabu subject of the realm, to enjoy himself in such manner as best accorded with his tastes. As he could not make laws, he found a pleasure in breaking them. He was neither wantonly cruel nor malignant, but recklessly wild and mischievous, and neither the reproofs of his father nor the mild persuasions of his cousin were sufficient to restrain him. His bantering reply to the latter was: “When you become king I will act with more propriety. Two mois can afford one wild prince.”
Kaululaau was different from his royal cousin in almost every way. He was known for his intelligence, good looks, and his lively sense of fun and mischief. He didn’t want the throne. He preferred a wild party with music, dancing, and a bowl of awa over the chance to lead people. Since Kahekili was set to be his father’s successor, he believed that as a favored and tabu subject, he had the right to enjoy himself however he liked. Since he couldn't make laws, he took pleasure in breaking them. He wasn’t cruel or malicious, just recklessly wild and mischievous, and neither his father's scoldings nor his cousin's gentle nudges could rein him in. His teasing response to the latter was: “When you become king, I’ll behave properly. Two mois can handle one wild prince.”
He had a congenial following of companions and retainers, who assisted him in his schemes of mischief. With feasting and hula dancing he would keep the village in an uproar for a dozen consecutive nights. He would send canoes adrift, open the gates of fish-ponds, remove the supports of houses, and paint swine black to deceive the sacrificial priests. He devised an instrument to imitate the death-warning notes of the alae, and frightened people by sounding it near their doors; and to others he caused information to be conveyed that they were being prayed to death.
He had a friendly group of friends and helpers who joined him in his mischievous plans. With feasting and hula dancing, he kept the village lively for twelve straight nights. He would set canoes adrift, open fish-pond gates, take down house supports, and paint pigs black to trick the sacrificial priests. He created a device to mimic the warning calls of the alae birds and scared people by making the sounds outside their doors; to others, he spread the rumor that they were being prayed to death.
Notwithstanding these misdemeanors, Kaululaau was popular with the people, since the chiefs or members of the royal household were usually the victims of his mischievous freaks. He was encouraged in his disposition to qualify himself for the priesthood, under the instruction of the eminent high-priest and prophet, Waolani, and had made substantial advances in the calling, when he was banished to the island of Lanai by his royal father for an offence which could neither be overlooked nor forgiven. [211]
Despite these misdeeds, Kaululaau was well-liked by the people, as the chiefs or members of the royal family were often the targets of his playful antics. He was encouraged in his ambition to prepare for the priesthood, under the guidance of the renowned high priest and prophet, Waolani, and had made significant progress in his religious duties when he was exiled to the island of Lanai by his royal father for an offense that could not be overlooked or forgiven. [__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]
At that time Lanai was infested with a number of gnomes, monsters and evil spirits, among them the gigantic moo, Mooaleo. They ravaged fields, uprooted cocoanut-trees, destroyed the walls of fish-ponds, and otherwise frightened and discomfited the inhabitants of the island. That his residence there might be made endurable, Kaululaau was instructed by the kaulas and sorcerers of the court in many charms, spells, prayers and incantations with which to resist the powers of the supernatural monsters. When informed of these exorcising agencies by Kaululaau, his friend, the venerable high-priest, Waolani, told him that they would avail him nothing against the more powerful and malignant of the demons of Lanai.
At that time, Lanai was overrun with gnomes, monsters, and evil spirits, including the giant moo, Mooaleo. They devastated fields, uprooted coconut trees, destroyed the walls of fish ponds, and generally scared and unsettled the island's inhabitants. To make his home there bearable, Kaululaau was taught by the kaulas and sorcerers of the court various charms, spells, prayers, and incantations to fight back against the supernatural monsters. When Kaululaau shared these exorcisms with his friend, the respected high priest Waolani, he cautioned that they wouldn’t be effective against the more powerful and malevolent demons of Lanai.
Disheartened at the declaration, Kaululaau was about to leave the heiau to embark for Lanai, when Waolani, after some hesitation, stayed his departure, and, entering the inner temple, soon returned with a small roll of kapa in his hand. Slowly uncording and removing many folds of cloth, an ivory spear-point a span in length was finally brought to view. Holding it before the prince, he said:
Disheartened by the announcement, Kaululaau was about to leave the heiau to head for Lanai when Waolani, after a moment of hesitation, stopped him from leaving. He entered the inner temple and soon came back with a small roll of kapa in his hand. Slowly untying and unfolding several layers of cloth, he finally revealed an ivory spear-point about a foot long. Holding it out in front of the prince, he said:
“Take this. It will serve you in any way you may require. Its powers are greater than those of any god inhabiting the earth. It has been dipped in the waters of Po, and many generations ago was left by Lono upon one of his altars for the protection of a temple menaced by a mighty fish-god who found a retreat beneath it in a great cavern connected with the sea. Draw a line with it and nothing can pass the mark. Affix it to a spear and throw it, and it will reach the object, no matter how far distant. Much more will it do, but let what I have said suffice.”
“Take this. It will help you in whatever way you need. Its powers are greater than those of any god on earth. It has been dipped in the waters of Po, and long ago was left by Lono on one of his altars to protect a temple threatened by a powerful fish-god that found refuge beneath it in a vast cavern linked to the sea. Draw a line with it, and nothing can cross that mark. Attach it to a spear and throw it, and it will hit the target, no matter how far away. It can do much more, but let what I’ve said be enough.”
The prince eagerly reached to possess the treasure, but the priest withdrew it and continued:
The prince quickly reached for the treasure, but the priest pulled it away and continued:
“I give it to you on condition that it pass from you to no other hands than mine, and that if I am no longer living when you return to Maui—as you some day will—you will secretly deposit it with my bones. Swear to this in the name of Lono.”
"I’m giving it to you on the condition that it only passes from you to me, and if I’m no longer alive when you return to Maui— which you will someday—you’ll secretly bury it with my remains. Swear this in the name of Lono."
Kaululaau solemnly pronounced the required oath. The priest then handed him the talisman, wrapped in the kapa from which it had been taken, and he left the temple, and immediately embarked with a number of his attendants for Lanai.
Kaululaau seriously took the required oath. The priest then gave him the talisman, wrapped in the kapa from which it had been taken, and he left the temple, immediately setting off with several of his attendants for Lanai.
Reaching Lanai, he established his household on the south side of the island. Learning his name and rank, the people [212]treated him with great respect—for Lanai was then a dependency of Maui—assisted in the construction of the houses necessary for his accommodation, and provided him with fish, poi, fruits and potatoes in great abundance. In return for this devotion he set about ridding the island of the supernatural pests with which it had been for years afflicted.
Reaching Lanai, he set up his home on the south side of the island. Once the locals learned his name and status, they [__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]treated him with great respect—since Lanai was then part of Maui—helped build the houses he needed, and supplied him with plenty of fish, poi, fruits, and potatoes. In return for their support, he started to eliminate the supernatural pests that had plagued the island for years.
In the legend of “Kelea, the Surf-rider of Maui,” will be found some reference to the battles of Kaululaau with the evil spirits and monsters of Lanai. His most stubborn conflict was with the gnome god Mooaleo. He imprisoned the demon within the earth by drawing a line around him with the sacred spear-point, and subsequently released and drove him into the sea.
In the legend of “Kelea, the Surf-rider of Maui,” there are references to the battles of Kaululaau against the evil spirits and monsters of Lanai. His toughest fight was with the gnome god Mooaleo. He trapped the demon in the earth by marking a circle around him with a sacred spear-point, and then he released him and sent him into the sea.
More than a year was spent by Kaululaau in quieting and expelling from the island the malicious monsters that troubled it, but he succeeded in the end in completely relieving the people from their vexatious visitations. This added immeasurably to his popularity, and the choicest of the products of land and sea were laid at his feet.
Kaululaau spent over a year getting rid of the malicious monsters that troubled the island, but he eventually succeeded in freeing the people from their annoying visitations. This greatly increased his popularity, and the best offerings from both land and sea were presented to him.
His triumph over the demons of Lanai was soon known on the other islands of the group, and when it reached the ears of Kakaalaneo he despatched a messenger to his son, offering his forgiveness and recalling him from exile. The service he had rendered was important, and his royal father was anxious to recognize it by restoring him to favor.
His victory over the demons of Lanai quickly spread to the other islands, and when Kakaalaneo heard about it, he sent a messenger to his son, offering his forgiveness and calling him back from exile. The help he had provided was significant, and his royal father was eager to acknowledge it by welcoming him back into favor.
But Kaululaau showed no haste in availing himself of his father’s magnanimity. Far from the restraints of the court, he had become attached to the independent life he had found in exile, and could think of no comforts or enjoyments unattainable on Lanai. The women there were as handsome as elsewhere, the bananas were as sweet, the cocoanuts were as large, the awa was as stimulating, and the fisheries were as varied and abundant in product. He had congenial companionship, and bands of musicians and dancers at his call. The best of the earth and the love of the people were his, and the apapani sang in the grove that shaded his door. What more could he ask, what more expect should he return to Maui? His exile had ceased to be a punishment, and his father’s message of recall was scarcely deemed a favor.
But Kaululaau showed no rush in taking advantage of his father’s generosity. Far from the restrictions of the court, he had grown fond of the independent life he found in exile and could think of no comforts or pleasures he couldn't have on Lanai. The women there were as beautiful as anywhere else, the bananas were as sweet, the coconuts were as big, the awa was as invigorating, and the fishing was just as varied and plentiful. He had great company, and groups of musicians and dancers were always available. The best of the world and the love of the people were his, and the apapani sang in the grove that shaded his door. What more could he want, what more could he expect if he returned to Maui? His exile had stopped feeling like a punishment, and his father’s call to come back was hardly seen as a favor.
However, Kaululaau returned a respectful answer by his father’s messenger, thanking Kakaalaneo for his clemency, and [213]announcing that he would return to Maui some time in the near future, after having visited some of the other islands of the group; and three months later he began to prepare for a trip to Hawaii. He procured a large double canoe, which he painted a royal yellow, and had fabricated a number of cloaks and capes of the feathers of the oo and mamo. At the prow of his canoe he mounted a carved image of Lono, and at the top of one of the masts a place was reserved for the proud tabu standard of an aha alii. This done, with a proper retinue he set sail for Hawaii.
However, Kaululaau replied respectfully through his father's messenger, thanking Kakaalaneo for his mercy, and [__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__] announced that he would return to Maui in the near future after visiting some of the other islands in the group; and three months later he started preparing for a trip to Hawaii. He got a large double canoe, which he painted royal yellow, and had made several cloaks and capes from the feathers of the oo and mamo. At the front of his canoe, he mounted a carved image of Lono, and at the top of one of the masts, he reserved a spot for the proud tabu standard of an aha alii. With everything ready, he set sail for Hawaii accompanied by a proper entourage.
II.
On his visit to Hawaii, Kaululaau was accompanied by a number of companions of his own disposition and temperament. Among them was Kamakaua, a young Maui chief, who had followed him into exile and was thoroughly devoted to his interests. He was brave, courtly and intelligent, and in personal appearance somewhat resembled the prince. The crew and most of the attendants of the prince had been selected by Kamakaua, including the chief navigator and astrologer; and however competent they may have been in their respective stations, it was discovered during the voyage that they were no less efficient as musicians and dancers. Hence there was no lack of amusement as the huge double canoe breasted the waves of Alenuihaha Channel, and on the morning of the third day stood off the village of Waipio, in the district of Hamakua, Hawaii.
On his visit to Hawaii, Kaululaau was accompanied by several companions who shared his character and temperament. Among them was Kamakaua, a young chief from Maui, who had followed him into exile and was completely dedicated to his cause. He was brave, courteous, and intelligent, and physically resembled the prince somewhat. The crew and most of the attendants for the prince had been chosen by Kamakaua, including the chief navigator and astrologer; and no matter how skilled they were in their roles, it became clear during the voyage that they were equally talented as musicians and dancers. As a result, there was plenty of entertainment as the large double canoe navigated the waves of Alenuihaha Channel, and on the morning of the third day, they arrived off the village of Waipio in the Hamakua district of Hawaii.
At that time Kauholanui-mahu, father of the noted Kiha, was king of Hawaii. His wife was Neula, a chiefess of Maui, who had inherited very considerable possessions in the neighborhood of Honuaula, on that island. As the climate of the locality was salubrious, and the neighboring waters abounded abundantly in fish, the royal couple made frequent and sometimes lengthy visits thither. These visits were usually made without the knowledge of Kakaalaneo, and the unexplained attachment of the Hawaiian king to the comparatively small inheritance of his wife on a neighboring island began to be regarded with suspicion, and had become a theme for speculation and inquiry at the court of Lahaina.
At that time, Kauholanui-mahu, the father of the well-known Kiha, was the king of Hawaii. His wife, Neula, was a chiefess from Maui, who had inherited significant property near Honuaula on that island. Since the area's climate was pleasant and the surrounding waters were rich in fish, the royal couple often took trips there, sometimes for extended periods. They usually made these trips without Kakaalaneo's knowledge, and this unexplained attachment of the Hawaiian king to his wife's relatively small inheritance on the nearby island began to raise suspicions. It became a topic of speculation and inquiry at the court of Lahaina.
At the time of the visit of Kaululaau to Waipio, Kauholanui [214]had been absent for some months on Maui, leaving Neula in charge of the government of Hawaii. Attributing the absence of the king to deliberate neglect, Neula had become greatly dissatisfied, and whispers of coming trouble were rife throughout the island. All this was doubtless known to Kaululaau, and, as the royal residence was at Waipio, it was upon the beach below it that he landed with his party and drew up his double canoe.
At the time Kaululaau visited Waipio, Kauholanui [__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]had been away for several months on Maui, leaving Neula in charge of the Hawaiian government. Feeling that the king’s absence was a sign of negligence, Neula grew increasingly unhappy, and rumors of impending trouble spread across the island. Kaululaau surely knew all of this, and since the royal residence was in Waipio, he landed with his party on the beach below and anchored his double canoe.
The presence and state of the strangers were soon heralded to the queen, and she promptly despatched messengers, courteously inviting the prince and his personal retainers to become her guests at the royal hale, at the same time giving orders for the accommodation of the humbler of his attendants and followers, as was the hospitable custom of the time.
The arrival and condition of the strangers were quickly reported to the queen, and she immediately sent messengers to politely invite the prince and his personal attendants to be her guests at the royal hale, while also arranging accommodations for the less well-off members of his entourage, as was the friendly custom of the time.
Accepting the invitation, Kaululaau and four of his chiefly companions were provided with quarters within the palace enclosure, and their food was served from the royal table. In the afternoon Kaululaau was accorded an audience with the queen, during which he presented his friends, including Kamakaua.
Accepting the invitation, Kaululaau and four of his noble companions were given accommodations within the palace grounds, and their meals were served from the royal table. In the afternoon, Kaululaau had a meeting with the queen, during which he introduced his friends, including Kamakaua.
The prince whiled away nearly a month at Waipio, and many formal entertainments were given in his honor. Neula was unusually agreeable, and was soon on terms of friendly intimacy both with the prince and Kamakaua. This was exactly what Kaululaau desired, since it enabled him to devise and assist in the execution of a scheme for bringing the king back from Maui and keeping him thereafter within his own kingdom.
The prince spent almost a month in Waipio, and there were many formal events held in his honor. Neula was particularly charming and quickly became friendly with both the prince and Kamakaua. This was exactly what Kaululaau wanted, as it allowed him to come up with and help carry out a plan to bring the king back from Maui and keep him in his own kingdom from then on.
Under the instructions of Kaululaau, Kamakaua assumed to be greatly smitten with the charms of the queen. As she was a comely woman, and somewhat vain of her personal appearance, the conquest of the handsome chief gratified her; but his attentions developed the fact that he had a rival in Noakua, a chief of Kohala. This discovery simplified the plans of the prince, and relieved Kamakaua of a dangerous duty in the end. In pressing his suit he found a pretext for informing the queen that the continued absence of the king was due to the fact that he had taken another wife, with whom he was living at Honuaula, and that he had ceased to care either for his kingdom or his family.
Under Kaululaau's guidance, Kamakaua pretended to be deeply infatuated with the queen's beauty. Since she was an attractive woman who took pride in her looks, winning over the handsome chief pleased her. However, his attention revealed that he had a rival in Noakua, a chief from Kohala. This discovery made the prince's plans easier and spared Kamakaua from a risky responsibility in the end. While pursuing her, he found a way to tell the queen that the king's ongoing absence was because he had taken another wife, who he was living with in Honuaula, and that he no longer cared for his kingdom or his family.
While Kamakaua was pouring this poison into the ears of Neula, Kaululaau, who had made the acquaintance of Noakua, was planting in the mind of that chief the seeds of sedition. He flattered him with the opinion that he was made to rule, and by [215]degrees developed to him a plan through which, with the favor of the queen, he could seize the government, unite the principal chiefs in his support, and prevent Kauholanui from returning to Hawaii.
While Kamakaua was whispering this poison into Neula's ears, Kaululaau, who had met Noakua, was planting the seeds of rebellion in the chief's mind. He flattered him by suggesting that he was meant to lead, and gradually laid out a plan for him to seize power with the queen's support, rally the main chiefs behind him, and stop Kauholanui from coming back to Hawaii.
The ambition of Noakua, and anger of the queen at the presumed neglect and infidelity of her husband, soon harmonized them in a plot against the absent king. Preparations for the revolt began to be observed, when Kaululaau, not wishing to be openly identified with the dangerous movement, quietly embarked with his party for Hilo, where he remained to watch the progress of the struggle which he had been instrumental in originating.
The ambition of Noakua and the queen's anger at her husband's supposed neglect and infidelity soon united them in a plot against the absent king. Signs of preparations for the revolt began to appear when Kaululaau, not wanting to be openly linked to the risky movement, quietly set off with his group for Hilo, where he stayed to monitor the progress of the conflict he had played a key role in starting.
The prince had been in Hilo but a few days when a lunapai arrived from Waipio, summoning the chief of the district to repair thither with eight hundred warriors, and announcing the assumption of the sovereignty of the island by Neula. Similar notifications were sent to the chiefs of the other districts of the kingdom, and soon all was excitement from Kau to Kohala.
The prince had only been in Hilo for a few days when a lunapai arrived from Waipio, calling the chief of the district to come with eight hundred warriors and announcing that Neula had taken control of the island. Similar messages were sent to the chiefs of other districts in the kingdom, and soon everyone was buzzing with excitement from Kau to Kohala.
Hearing of the revolt, Kauholanui, who had been engaged in constructing a fish-pond at Keoneoio, in the neighborhood of Honuaula, left Maui at once with less than a hundred spears, and, landing in Kona, whose chief could be relied upon, he started overland for Waipio. The revolution was unpopular, and with great unanimity the chiefs and people rallied to the standard of the king. The struggle was brief. A battle was fought near Waimea, resulting in the defeat of the rebel army and the death of Noakua.
Hearing about the revolt, Kauholanui, who had been building a fish pond at Keoneoio near Honuaula, immediately left Maui with fewer than a hundred spears. He landed in Kona, where the chief was trustworthy, and headed overland to Waipio. The revolution wasn't popular, and with strong agreement, the chiefs and people gathered to support the king. The fight was short. A battle took place near Waimea, leading to the defeat of the rebel army and the death of Noakua.
This ended the revolt. As a punishment to Neula the king took another wife. But the object of Kaululaau was accomplished, for Kauholanui never again visited Maui, although the queen spent much of her time thereafter at Honuaula, where her favorite guest and friend was Kamakaua.
This ended the rebellion. As a punishment to Neula, the king married another wife. But Kaululaau achieved his goal, as Kauholanui never visited Maui again, even though the queen spent much of her time afterward at Honuaula, where her favorite guest and friend was Kamakaua.
Leaving Hilo, Kaululaau and his party leisurely drifted along the coasts of Puna until they reached the borders of Kau, when they landed at Keauhou to spend a few days in fishing and surf-riding.
Leaving Hilo, Kaululaau and his group casually floated along the coasts of Puna until they reached the boundaries of Kau, where they landed at Keauhou to spend a few days fishing and riding the waves.
Weary of the sport, Kaululaau left the bathers in the surf, one afternoon, and threw himself under the shade of a hala tree near the shore. Watching the clouds and the sea-birds circling in the heavens above him, he fell asleep, and when he awoke his eyes fell upon a beautiful woman sitting upon a rock not more than a [216]hundred paces distant, and silently watching the swimmers as they came riding in on the crests of the rollers. Her skirts were a pau spangled with crystals, and over her shoulders hung a short mantle of the colors of a rainbow. Her long hair was held back by a lei of flowers, and her wrists and ankles were adorned with circlets of tiny shells of pink and white.
Tired of the activity, Kaululaau left the bathers in the surf one afternoon and threw himself under the shade of a hala tree near the shore. As he watched the clouds and the seabirds circling overhead, he fell asleep. When he woke up, his eyes landed on a beautiful woman sitting on a rock not more than a [__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__] hundred paces away, silently watching the swimmers ride in on the waves. Her skirt was a pau covered in crystals, and over her shoulders was a short mantle in rainbow colors. Her long hair was pulled back with a lei of flowers, and her wrists and ankles were decorated with circles of tiny pink and white shells.
The appearance of the woman dazzled him, and after gazing for some time, and rubbing his eyes to be sure that he was not dreaming, he rose to his feet and approached the radiant being. Advancing within four or five paces of the woman, apparently unobserved, he stopped, and with a cough attracted her attention. Turning her face toward him, he greeted her courteously, and requested permission to approach nearer and converse with her. Her appearance indicated that she was a person of rank, and he did not feel like trespassing uninvited upon her privacy. She did not deign to make any reply to his request, but, after scanning him from head to foot, turned her face toward the sea again with a contemptuous toss of the head.
The woman's appearance dazzled him, and after staring for a while and rubbing his eyes to make sure he wasn't dreaming, he got up and walked toward her. He got within four or five paces of her, clearly unnoticed, then stopped and cleared his throat to get her attention. When she turned to look at him, he greeted her politely and asked if he could come closer and talk with her. She looked like someone of high status, so he didn’t want to intrude on her privacy. She didn’t respond to his request, but after checking him out from head to toe, she turned back to the sea with a dismissive toss of her head.
He hesitated for a moment, and then turned and strode rapidly down to the beach, where his double canoe had been safely drawn up on the sands. “In the guise of a bather,” thought the prince, “she evidently mistakes me for a servant. I will approach her in the garb to which my rank entitles me, and see what effect that will have.”
He paused for a moment, then turned and quickly walked down to the beach, where his double canoe was safely pulled up on the sand. “Disguised as a beachgoer,” thought the prince, “she clearly thinks I'm just a servant. I’ll go to her dressed in a way that reflects my status and see how she reacts.”
Entering the canoe, he girded his loins with a gaudy maro, hung round his neck a palaoa, and threw over his shoulders a royal mantle of yellow feathers. Then, crowning his head with a brilliant feather helmet, he selected a spear of the length of six paces and stepped from the canoe. As he did so he stumbled. “This means that I have forgotten or omitted something of importance,” said the prince to himself, stopping and in detail scanning his equipments. At that moment a lizard ran across his path and entered a hole in the earth. This brought to mind his battle with the gigantic gnome on Lanai, and with a smile he re-entered the canoe. Taking from a calabash, where it had been for months secreted, the charmed spear-point of Lono, he affixed it firmly to the point of a javelin, and, thus equipped, again sought the presence of the fascinating being by whom he had been repulsed.
Entering the canoe, he tied a bright maro around his waist, hung a palaoa around his neck, and draped a royal cloak made of yellow feathers over his shoulders. Then, after placing a stunning feather helmet on his head, he picked a spear that was six paces long and stepped out of the canoe. As he did this, he tripped. “This means I’ve forgotten or left out something important,” the prince thought to himself, pausing to carefully check his gear. At that moment, a lizard dashed across his path and disappeared into a hole in the ground. This reminded him of his battle with the giant gnome on Lanai, and with a smile, he got back into the canoe. From a calabash, where it had been hidden for months, he took the enchanted spear-point of Lono and securely attached it to the end of a javelin, and, properly equipped, he set out again to face the captivating being who had previously turned him away.
Advancing as before, he once more craved permission to [217]approach near enough to drink in the beauty of her eyes. But she seemed to be in no mood to consent. Scanning him in his changed apparel, with an air of indifference she said:
Advancing as before, he again asked for permission to [__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]come close enough to appreciate the beauty of her eyes. But she didn’t seem interested in agreeing. Looking him over in his new clothes, she said with an air of indifference:
“You need not have taken the trouble to bedeck yourself with royal feathers. I knew you before, as I know you now, to be Kaululaau, son of Kakaalaneo, moi of Maui. I do not desire your company.”
"You didn’t have to go through the trouble of dressing up in royal feathers. I knew you before, and I still know you now, as Kaululaau, son of Kakaalaneo, moi of Maui. I don’t want your company."
“Since you know who I am, I must claim the right to insist upon my request, unless you can show, indeed, that you are of equal or better rank.” Saying this, the prince took a step forward.
“Since you know who I am, I have to insist on my request, unless you can prove that you are of equal or higher status.” With that, the prince took a step forward.
“Then come,” replied the woman, “since you are rude enough to attempt it. Sit at my feet and tell me of your love, and I will search the caves for squid and beat the kapa for you.”
“Then come,” the woman replied, “since you’re bold enough to try. Sit at my feet and tell me about your love, and I’ll look for squid in the caves and beat the kapa for you.”
The prince advanced joyfully, and was about to seat himself at the feet of the lovely being, when with a cry of pain he sprang back. The rock he had touched was as hot as if it had just been thrown from the crater of a volcano.
The prince moved forward happily and was just about to sit down at the feet of the beautiful being when, with a cry of pain, he jumped back. The rock he had touched was as hot as if it had just come from a volcano.
“Come,” said the woman tauntingly; “do you not see that I am waiting for you?”
“Come on,” the woman said playfully; “don’t you see that I’m waiting for you?”
Again the prince advanced, but the earth for two or three paces around her was glimmering with heat, and he hastily withdrew to where the ground and rocks were cool. He was now satisfied that he was dealing with some one wielding supernatural powers, and resolved to test the efficacy of the charmed point of his javelin.
Again the prince moved forward, but the ground for a few steps around her was sparkling from the heat, so he quickly stepped back to the cooler ground and rocks. He was now convinced he was facing someone with supernatural powers and decided to test the effectiveness of the enchanted tip of his javelin.
“Why do you not come?” continued the woman in a tone of mingled defiance and reproach.
“Why aren’t you coming?” the woman continued, her tone a mix of defiance and criticism.
“Because the earth where you are sitting is too warm for my feet,” replied the prince, innocently. “Come where I am standing, and I will sit beside you.” And with the point of his javelin he marked upon the ground the boundaries of a space around him.
“Because the ground where you’re sitting is too hot for my feet,” the prince replied, innocently. “Come to where I am standing, and I’ll sit next to you.” And with the tip of his javelin, he drew a boundary on the ground around him.
“Retire some paces, and I will do so,” replied the woman, confidently. The prince withdrew, as requested, and she quietly removed to the spot where he had been standing.
“Take a few steps back, and I will do that,” the woman replied confidently. The prince stepped back as she asked, and she calmly moved to the place where he had been standing.
“Now come,” said the woman, reseating herself; “perhaps you will find it cooler here.”
“Come on,” said the woman, sitting back down; “maybe you’ll find it cooler here.”
“I hope so,” returned the prince, as he began cautiously to advance. He crossed the line marked by the point of his javelin, [218]and felt no heat. He took three more steps forward, and the earth was still cool. Another step, which brought him within two paces of the enchantress, convinced him that her powers were impotent within the boundaries of the line he had drawn, and with a sudden leap forward he caught her in his arms.
“I hope so,” the prince replied, carefully moving forward. He stepped over the line marked by the tip of his javelin, [__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__] and felt no heat. He took three more steps, and the ground remained cool. Another step, bringing him within two paces of the enchantress, convinced him that her powers were ineffective within the limits of the line he had drawn, and with a sudden leap, he grabbed her in his arms.
Astounded at the failure of her powers, and humiliated at her defeat, the woman struggled to free herself from the embrace of the prince; but within the charmed circle she possessed but the strength of a simple woman, and was compelled to yield to the supreme indignities of superior force.
Astounded by the failure of her abilities and embarrassed by her defeat, the woman tried to break free from the prince’s grip. But within the enchanted circle, she only had the strength of an ordinary woman and had to give in to the overwhelming power of someone stronger.
Exasperated beyond measure, she at length succeeded in eluding his grasp and springing beyond the fatal line. The prince followed, but she was now herself, and he could neither overtake nor restrain her. Retreating some distance up the hill, she suddenly stopped and awaited his approach. She permitted him to advance within forty or fifty paces of her, when in the space of a breath she abandoned her captivating disguise and stood forth in the form of Pele, the dreadful goddess of Kilauea. Her eyes were bright as the midday sun, and her hair was like a flame of fire.
Frustrated beyond belief, she finally managed to escape his hold and sprang past the dangerous boundary. The prince chased after her, but she was now in control, and he couldn't catch or stop her. After retreating a bit up the hill, she suddenly halted and waited for him to catch up. She allowed him to come within forty or fifty steps of her before, in the blink of an eye, she dropped her enchanting disguise and revealed herself as Pele, the fearsome goddess of Kilauea. Her eyes shone like the midday sun, and her hair blazed like fire.
The prince stopped in dismay. The goddess raised her hand, and at her feet burst forth a stream of molten lava, rolling fiercely down upon the prince, as if to engulf him. He started to escape by flight, but the stream widened and increased in speed as it followed. Fearful that it would overtake him before he could reach the sea, he thought of his javelin, and with the point hastily drew a line in front of the advancing flood. Continuing his flight and looking back, he discovered, to his great relief, that the stream had stopped abruptly at the line he had drawn, and could not pass it. Passing into a ravine, the angry flow sought to reach the sea through its channel, and thus cut off the retreat of the prince; but he crossed the depression, marking a line as he went, and the fiery avalanche was stayed at the limit.
The prince froze in shock. The goddess raised her hand, and at her feet a stream of molten lava surged forth, racing fiercely toward him as if to swallow him whole. He tried to escape by running, but the flow widened and sped up in pursuit. Terrified it would catch him before he could make it to the sea, he thought of his javelin and quickly drew a line in front of the approaching flood with its tip. As he continued to flee and glanced back, he was greatly relieved to see that the stream had abruptly stopped at the line he had drawn and couldn’t cross it. Moving into a ravine, the furious flow aimed to reach the sea through its channel, blocking the prince’s escape; but he crossed the dip, marking another line as he went, and the fiery torrent was halted at that boundary.
Observing that she was thwarted by some power whose element seemed to be of the earth, Pele summoned her brother Keuakepo from Kilauea, and a shower of fire and ashes descended upon Kaululaau and his companions. Leaping into the sea to avoid the fire, they dragged the double canoe from its moorings, and, swimming and pushing it through the breakers, escaped from the coast with but little injury. [219]
Noticing that she was blocked by some force that seemed to be tied to the earth, Pele called her brother Keuakepo from Kilauea, and a rain of fire and ashes fell on Kaululaau and his friends. To escape the flames, they jumped into the sea, pulled the double canoe from its moorings, and swam, pushing it through the waves, managing to get away from the shore with only minor injuries. [__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]
III.
Having embroiled himself with the divine and political powers of Hawaii, Kaululaau rounded the southern point of La Lae and set sail for Molokai. He spent a month on that island with the royal relatives of his mother, by whom he was appropriately received and entertained. He visited the home of Laamaomao, the wind-god, the poisoned grove of Kalaipahoa, and the demolished fortress on the promontory of Haupu, where the gallant Kaupeepee, of whose blood he was, met his dramatic death. He then set sail for Oahu.
Having gotten involved with the divine and political powers of Hawaii, Kaululaau rounded the southern point of La Lae and sailed for Molokai. He spent a month on that island with his mother's royal relatives, who welcomed and entertained him well. He visited the home of Laamaomao, the wind god, the poisoned grove of Kalaipahoa, and the ruined fortress on the promontory of Haupu, where the brave Kaupeepee, his ancestor, met his dramatic end. He then set off for Oahu.
The island of Oahu was at that period one of the most prosperous in the group. It was under the government of Kalona-iki, one of the two sons of Mailikukahi, who during his reign had instituted a code of laws giving better protection to the poor, making theft punishable with death, and claiming as the wards of the government the first-born male children of all families, without regard to rank or condition.
The island of Oahu was one of the most prosperous in the group at that time. It was governed by Kalona-iki, one of the two sons of Mailikukahi, who during his rule had established a set of laws that better protected the poor, made theft punishable by death, and claimed the first-born male children from all families as wards of the government, regardless of their rank or status.
Kalona continued the peaceful and intelligent policy of his father, and his court was noted alike for the brilliancy of its chiefs and the beauty of its women. His principal place of residence was Waikiki, although he had sumptuous temporary resorts at Ewa and Waialua.
Kalona carried on his father’s peaceful and wise approach, and his court was known for both the brilliance of its leaders and the beauty of its women. His main residence was in Waikiki, though he also had luxurious temporary retreats in Ewa and Waialua.
Kaululaau first touched at Waialua, but, learning that the king was at Waikiki, he ordered his canoe to proceed around to the south side of the island in charge of his chief navigator, while he and Kamakaua concluded to make the journey overland. Dispensing with all insignia of rank, and habited like simple commoners, the prince and his companion started unattended for Waikiki. Both were armed with javelins, but the one borne by Kaululaau was tipped with the charmed point of Lono.
Kaululaau first landed at Waialua, but after finding out that the king was at Waikiki, he ordered his canoe to head around to the south side of the island with his chief navigator in charge, while he and Kamakaua decided to travel overland. Ditching all signs of rank and dressed like ordinary people, the prince and his companion set out for Waikiki without anyone with them. They were both armed with javelins, but Kaululaau’s javelin had the enchanted tip of Lono.
Proceeding along the foot of the Kaala range of mountains, in the afternoon they sat down to rest in the shade of a hala tree. In a ravine below them five or six men were working, and scattered along its banks were a number of huts. Soon a tumult of screams reached them, and men, women and children were seen running hither and thither in a state of great excitement.
As they walked along the base of the Kaala mountain range, they took a break in the shade of a hala tree in the afternoon. In a valley below, five or six men were hard at work, and several huts were spread out along the banks. Suddenly, they heard a loud commotion of screams, and saw men, women, and children running around in a frenzy of excitement.
The travelers sprang to their feet, and as they did so a gigantic bird swept immediately over their heads and winged its way [220]toward the hills. It passed so closely that the branches of the hala tree were swayed by the motion of its mighty pinions, and its outspread wings seemed to measure scarcely less than twenty long steps from tip to tip.
The travelers jumped to their feet, and as they did, a massive bird flew right over their heads and headed toward the hills. It passed so closely that the branches of the hala tree were moved by the force of its powerful wings, and its spread wings seemed to cover almost twenty full steps from tip to tip. [__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]
While watching the monster with amazement, a woman approached, and to the questions of the prince replied, between wails of anguish, that the great bird—the Pueoalii, as she called it—had just killed her only child in front of her hut, with a stab to the heart resembling the cut of a knife. She hurriedly gave the additional information that for many years past the same bird had at intervals visited different districts of the island, killing children, pigs and fowls, and that the priests had declared it to be a pueo, or owl, sacred to the gods, and which could not, therefore, be molested with safety, even if harm to it were possible from human hands.
While watching the monster in awe, a woman came up and told the prince, through her sobs, that the great bird—the Pueoalii, as she called it—had just killed her only child right in front of her hut with a stab to the heart that looked like a knife cut. She quickly added that for many years, this same bird had periodically visited different areas of the island, killing children, pigs, and chickens. The priests had declared it to be a pueo, or owl, sacred to the gods, and that it couldn’t be harmed safely, even if it were possible for humans to do so.
Better learned in the inspiration and purposes of such visitations—since he had been instructed by the eminent high-priest Waolani—and having had many conflicts with malignant spirits, he doubted that the monster he had just seen was of the sacred pueo family, and requested that he be shown the dead child. Proceeding to the hut and inspecting the wound, he observed that the fatal cut was upward, and not downward, as it would have been had it been made by the beak of an owl. This confirmed him in the correctness of his first impression, and, requesting Kamakaua to follow him, he started toward the hills in the direction taken by the bird.
Better understanding the reasons and significance behind such visitations—since he had been taught by the esteemed high priest Waolani—and having faced many battles with evil spirits, he was skeptical that the creature he had just seen belonged to the sacred pueo family. He asked to see the dead child. As he approached the hut and examined the wound, he noticed that the fatal cut was upward, not downward, as it would have been if it had been made by an owl's beak. This reinforced his initial impression, and after asking Kamakaua to follow him, he headed toward the hills in the direction the bird had taken.
They could still see it in the distance, like a dark cloud against the mountain. After following it for some time the bird swooped down to commit some fresh depredation, and then rose and alighted upon a rocky ridge with precipitous face sweeping down from the main summit of Kaala.
They could still see it in the distance, like a dark cloud against the mountain. After tracking it for a while, the bird swooped down to catch something fresh and then flew back up to land on a rocky ridge with a steep drop from the main summit of Kaala.
“Why go farther?” said Kamakaua. “We cannot reach the bird, and, if we could, our spears would be like straws to such a monster.”
“Why go any further?” said Kamakaua. “We can’t reach the bird, and even if we could, our spears would be like straws against such a monster.”
As if by a strong hand, the javelin in the grasp of the prince forcibly turned and pointed toward the bird. Smiling at the augury, Kaululaau replied:
As if by a strong hand, the javelin in the prince's grip suddenly turned and pointed toward the bird. Smiling at the omen, Kaululaau replied:
“Look you carefully back and see if we are followed.”
“Take a careful look behind you and check if we’re being followed.”
Kamakaua turned his face in compliance, and as he did so the prince poised his javelin and hurled it in the direction of the bird. [221]In twenty paces the point did not droop; in forty it did not fall to the ground; in a hundred a new energy seized it, and like a flash of light it sped out of sight. A moment later the prince saw the bird sink and disappear.
Kamakaua turned his face in agreement, and as he did, the prince readied his javelin and threw it towards the bird. [__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]In twenty steps the tip didn’t drop; in forty it remained in the air; in a hundred it gained new speed, and like a flash of light, it sped out of sight. A moment later, the prince watched the bird drop and vanish.
“I can see no one,” said Kamakaua, after carefully scanning the ground over which they had passed. “Nor can I now see the bird,” he continued, looking toward the ridge. “Where can it be?”
“I can’t see anyone,” said Kamakaua, after carefully checking the ground they had walked over. “I also can’t see the bird now,” he continued, looking toward the ridge. “Where could it be?”
“At the foot of the cliff,” replied the prince, “with the point of my javelin in his heart.”
“At the foot of the cliff,” replied the prince, “with the tip of my spear in his heart.”
Having been with the prince on Molokai, Kamakaua received the strange information without question or great wonder, and, hastening to the base of the precipice, they found the monster dead, with the javelin buried in its breast. Removing the weapon, they cut off the head and one of the feet of the bird, pulled from its wings four of the longest feathers, and with them returned to the hala tree under which they had found shelter from the sun. The burden taxed their strength to the utmost. The weight of the head, which was borne by the prince, was scarcely less than that of his own body, while the feathers were seven paces in length, and the claws two paces between their extreme points.
Having been with the prince on Molokai, Kamakaua took the bizarre news without hesitation or much surprise. Rushing to the base of the cliff, they found the beast dead, with the spear lodged in its chest. They removed the weapon, chopped off the creature's head and one of its feet, took four of the longest feathers from its wings, and headed back to the hala tree where they had sought refuge from the sun. The load pushed their strength to its limits. The weight of the head, carried by the prince, was almost as heavy as his own body, while the feathers measured seven paces long, and the claws stretched two paces from tip to tip.
Great excitement followed the spreading of the news that Pueoalii had been killed by strangers. The sufferers through its visitations were disposed to commend the act, and others condemned it as an insult to the gods, which would probably bring broadcast calamity upon the whole island. To placate the anger of the gods it was proposed to sacrifice the strangers at the nearest heiau, and, respectfully wrapping the head of the bird in kapa, Kaululaau and his companion were conducted with their trophies to the sacred temple of Kukaniloko, which was not far distant. They were accompanied by a crowd which constantly swelled in numbers as they proceeded, and on arriving at the heiau they were surrounded by four or five hundred men and women, many of them armed and clamoring for their blood.
Great excitement followed the news that Pueoalii had been killed by outsiders. Those who had suffered from its attacks were inclined to praise the act, while others condemned it as an insult to the gods, which would likely bring widespread disaster to the whole island. To calm the gods' anger, it was suggested to sacrifice the outsiders at the nearest heiau. Respectfully wrapping the bird's head in kapa, Kaululaau and his friend were taken, along with their trophies, to the sacred temple of Kukaniloko, which was not far away. They were followed by a crowd that grew in number as they walked, and upon arriving at the heiau, they were surrounded by four or five hundred men and women, many of whom were armed and demanding their blood.
Kaululaau was in nowise alarmed, but rather enjoyed the situation. The high-priest of the temple appeared and the matter was laid before him. Looking at the foot and mighty feathers of the bird, he turned to the strangers and said:
Kaululaau was not at all worried; in fact, he found the situation amusing. The high priest of the temple showed up, and the issue was presented to him. Glancing at the foot and impressive feathers of the bird, he turned to the outsiders and said:
“You have slain a creature sacred to the gods, and my thought is that you should be sacrificed to avert their wrath.” [222]
“You've killed a creature that was sacred to the gods, and I believe you should be sacrificed to prevent their anger.” [__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]
“Be careful in your judgment, priest,” replied the prince. “How know you that the bird was sacred?”
“Be careful with your judgment, priest,” replied the prince. “How do you know the bird was sacred?”
“For years it has been so regarded,” returned the priest. “How know you that it was not?”
“For years, people have thought so,” replied the priest. “How do you know it wasn’t?”
“Does it become the high-priest of Kukaniloko to ask such a question?” said the prince. “But I will reply to it when you answer this: With the javelin now in my hand I killed the bird at a distance farther than from where we stand to yonder hills. Could it have been done by human hand without the especial favor of the gods. If not, then how have the gods been angered?”
“Is it appropriate for the high priest of Kukaniloko to ask such a question?” said the prince. “But I’ll answer it once you respond to this: With the javelin in my hand, I killed the bird from a distance greater than from where we stand to those hills over there. Could a human have done that without the special favor of the gods? If not, then how have the gods been angered?”
The priest was confounded, and when the prince proposed to submit the question of his guilt to the king, the suggestion was accepted. It now being near nightfall, Kaululaau and his companion were removed within the enclosure of the temple for safe-keeping, and, knowing that they would be deprived of their weapons, the prince removed the charmed point from his javelin and secreted it in the folds of his maro.
The priest was bewildered, and when the prince suggested taking the issue of his guilt to the king, the idea was agreed upon. As night approached, Kaululaau and his companion were taken inside the temple enclosure for safekeeping. Knowing they would be stripped of their weapons, the prince took the magical tip off his javelin and hid it in the folds of his maro.
Early next morning the high-priest and his two prisoners, who were kept under no marked restraint, accompanied by a large concourse of people carrying the head, foot and feathers of Pueoalii, started for Waikiki. Every one seemed to know that the great bird had been killed, and many stood by the wayside to see the feathers that had been torn from its wings, and catch a glimpse of its destroyer.
Early the next morning, the high priest and his two prisoners, not heavily restrained, along with a large crowd of people carrying the head, foot, and feathers of Pueoalii, set off for Waikiki. Everyone seemed to know that the great bird had been killed, and many stood by the roadside to see the feathers ripped from its wings and catch a glimpse of its killer.
Near the middle of the day the great gathering arrived at Waikiki. As many carried spears, it resembled an army in its march, and messengers were despatched by the king to ascertain its meaning. Halting near the shores of the harbor, and not far from the royal mansion, to report the arrival of the prisoners and learn the pleasure of the king, the prince observed his double canoe drawn up on the beach, and requested permission to approach it, that he might secure the counsel of his master, Kaululaau, son of the moi of Maui.
Around midday, the large group arrived at Waikiki. Since many were carrying spears, it looked like an army marching. The king sent messengers to find out what it meant. Stopping near the shore of the harbor, not far from the royal house, to report the arrival of the prisoners and to understand the king's wishes, the prince noticed his double canoe pulled up on the beach. He asked for permission to go to it so he could get advice from his master, Kaululaau, the son of the moi of Maui.
The favor could not well be denied, and, under guard of two inferior priests of Kukaniloko, the prince was conducted to the canoe. As but three or four of the crew were present, and their attention was wholly absorbed in the gathering around the royal hale, the prince stepped, unobserved by them, into the canoe, and passed quickly into his private quarters—a close [223]wicker-work apartment eight or ten feet in length by the breadth of both canoes, and with a height of six feet or more from their bottoms to the top screen.
The favor couldn’t be refused, so two junior priests from Kukaniloko escorted the prince to the canoe. Since only three or four crew members were around, and they were completely focused on the gathering at the royal hale, the prince quietly stepped into the canoe without them noticing, and quickly made his way to his private quarters—a snug [__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]wicker-work space about eight or ten feet long, the width of both canoes, and over six feet tall from the bottom to the top screen.
Hurriedly investing himself with his regalia of rank, including helmet, feather mantle and spear, he stepped into view and sounded a blast upon a shell. Soon a number of his attendants made their appearance, and, with such following as befitted a prince, he started for the royal mansion. The guards who escorted him to the canoe did not recognize him as he left it, and after passing the crowd surrounding the palace his name and rank were announced to the king. He was promptly met and courteously welcomed at the door by Kalona, and informed that messengers of greeting and invitation would have been despatched to him had his presence at Waikiki been known.
Hastily putting on his rank's regalia, which included his helmet, feather cloak, and spear, he stepped into view and blew a horn made from a shell. Soon, several of his attendants appeared, and with an entourage fitting for a prince, he made his way to the royal mansion. The guards who escorted him to the canoe didn't recognize him when he got off, and after passing the crowd around the palace, his name and title were announced to the king. He was promptly met and warmly welcomed at the door by Kalona, who informed him that messengers of greeting and invitation would have been sent to him if they had known he was at Waikiki.
Kaululaau then apprised the king that he had but just arrived overland from Waialua, while his double canoe had been sent around to meet him at Waikiki, and that it was his purpose to spend some days on Oahu. The hospitalities of the royal hale were then tendered and accepted, after which the king explained to his distinguished guest the cause of the large gathering around the palace, and invited him to an inspection of the head, feathers and claws of the mighty Pueoalii, and to listen to the story of the slayer of the sacred bird, should he deem it of sufficient interest.
Kaululaau then informed the king that he had just arrived overland from Waialua, while his double canoe was sent around to meet him at Waikiki, and that he planned to spend a few days on Oahu. The royal hale extended their hospitality, which was accepted. After that, the king explained to his distinguished guest the reason for the large crowd around the palace and invited him to check out the head, feathers, and claws of the mighty Pueoalii, and to listen to the story of the slayer of the sacred bird, if he found it interesting enough.
Kaululaau accompanied the king to a large dancing pavilion within the royal enclosure, to which had been conveyed the severed parts of the gigantic bird. After the claws and feathers had been examined with awe and amazement, the king ordered the slayer of the bird to be brought before him. The high-priest of Kukaniloko bowed and turned to execute the order, when the guards placed over the prince came from the beach with the information that their prisoner had escaped.
Kaululaau went with the king to a big dance pavilion inside the royal grounds, where the cut-up parts of the huge bird had been brought. After everyone looked at the claws and feathers in awe and wonder, the king ordered that the person who killed the bird be brought to him. The high priest of Kukaniloko bowed and was about to carry out the order when the guards assigned to the prince returned from the beach with news that their prisoner had escaped.
The priest was savage in his disappointment. “Either find him or take his place upon the altar!” he hissed to the unfortunate guards, and then led Kamakaua before the king, with the explanation that the other prisoner had managed to elude the vigilance of his guards, but would doubtless soon be found.
The priest was furious in his disappointment. “Either find him or take his place on the altar!” he snapped at the unlucky guards, and then brought Kamakaua before the king, explaining that the other prisoner had managed to escape the watchfulness of his guards, but would surely be found soon.
Kamakaua discovered the prince at the side of the king, and could hardly restrain a smile. When questioned he denied that [224]he killed the great bird, but admitted that he assisted in removing the head, feathers and one of the feet.
Kamakaua found the prince next to the king and could barely hold back a smile. When asked, he denied that [__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__] he had killed the great bird but confessed that he helped remove the head, feathers, and one of the feet.
“This is trifling,” said the king, turning to the priest with a scowl. “Where is the other prisoner?”
“This is trivial,” said the king, turning to the priest with a frown. “Where is the other prisoner?”
“He is here, great king!” exclaimed Kaululaau, bowing before Kalona, to the astonishment but great relief of the priest. “Favored by the gods, I slew the malignant monster your priests call by the sacred name of Pueoalii. Their skill should have instructed them differently. Will the king favor me by ordering the kapa covering to be removed from the head?”
“He’s here, great king!” Kaululaau said, bowing before Kalona, much to the astonishment and great relief of the priest. “Blessed by the gods, I defeated the wicked monster your priests refer to as Pueoalii. Their expertise should have taught them better. Will the king grant me the favor of having the kapa covering removed from my head?”
The order was given, and the uncovered head was raised beak upward before the king.
The order was given, and the uncovered head was lifted up, facing the king.
In a moment it was observed that the head was not of a pueo, or owl; nor did it bear resemblance in form to that of any bird known. It was narrow between the eyes, which in color were those of a shark, and its long and pointed beak, both of the upper and under jaws, turned sharply upward.
In an instant, it was noticed that the head wasn’t that of a pueo or an owl; nor did it resemble the shape of any known bird. It was narrow between the eyes, which were the color of a shark's, and its long, pointed beak, both upper and lower jaws, curved sharply upward.
“It is not a pueo!” was the general exclamation.
“It’s not a pueo!” was the general shout.
“Are you satisfied, priest?” inquired the prince.
“Are you satisfied, priest?” the prince asked.
“I think it is not a pueo,” responded the priest, reluctantly.
“I don't think it's a pueo,” replied the priest, hesitantly.
“You think it is not a pueo!” exclaimed the king, indignantly. “Do you not know it? What pueo ever had such eyes and such a beak?”
“You think it’s not a pueo!” the king exclaimed, indignantly. “Don’t you know it? What pueo has ever had eyes and a beak like this?”
The priest hung his head in confusion, and the prince, having completely discomfited him, now came kindly to his relief by remarking:
The priest lowered his head in confusion, and the prince, having totally thrown him off balance, now kindly offered his support by saying:
“The mistake might well have been made, for on the wing and at a distance the bird much resembled a pueo.”
“The mistake could easily have happened because from the air and far away, the bird looked a lot like a pueo.”
“You are kind to say so, prince,” said the king; “but the priests and kaulas have been greatly at fault. For years the bird has preyed upon the people, and no one has dared to molest it. Since you killed it, knowing that it was not sacred, perhaps you may be able to tell me something of its unnatural birth and appetites.”
“You're nice to say that, prince,” replied the king; “but the priests and kaulas have really messed up. For years, the bird has been terrorizing the people, and no one has dared to touch it. Now that you've killed it, knowing it wasn't sacred, maybe you can tell me something about its strange origins and habits.”
Thus appealed to, Kaululaau modestly replied:
Thus appealed to, Kaululaau modestly replied:
“If I may rely upon what seemed to be a dream last night, the bird was possessed by the spirit of Hilo-a-Lakapu, one of the chiefs of Hawaii who invaded Oahu during the reign of your royal father. He was slain at Waimano, and his head was placed upon a pole near Honouliuli for the birds to feed upon. He was [225]of akua blood, and through a bird-god relative his spirit was given possession of the monster which the gods enabled me to slay.”
“If I can trust what felt like a dream last night, the bird was possessed by the spirit of Hilo-a-Lakapu, one of the chiefs of Hawaii who invaded Oahu during your royal father's reign. He was killed at Waimano, and his head was placed on a pole near Honouliuli for the birds to feed on. He was [__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]of akua blood, and through a bird-god relative, his spirit took control of the monster that the gods allowed me to defeat.”
The spirit of Hilo had been brought in with the head of the dead bird, and with the utterance of these words by the prince the eyes rolled, the ponderous jaws opened and closed, and with a noise like the scream of an alae the malignant spirit took its departure.
The spirit of Hilo was brought in with the head of the dead bird, and when the prince spoke these words, the eyes rolled, the heavy jaws opened and closed, and with a sound like the scream of an alae, the evil spirit left.
The truth of the dream of Kaululaau thus being verified, the king publicly thanked him for ridding the island of the monstrous scourge, and ordered especial honors to be paid him by all classes so long as it might be his pleasure to remain in the kingdom. In return the prince presented to the king the head, claws and feathers of the bird, the latter to be made into a mammoth kahili, and then made Kamakaua known to him, together with such other chiefs in his train as were entitled to royal recognition.
The truth of Kaululaau's dream was confirmed, and the king publicly thanked him for freeing the island from the terrible threat. He ordered that all classes show him special honors for as long as he wanted to stay in the kingdom. In return, the prince gave the king the head, claws, and feathers of the bird, which would be turned into a grand kahili, and then introduced Kamakaua to him, along with other chiefs in his group who deserved royal recognition.
Kaululaau became at once the hero of the court as well as the idol of the people. He remained more than a month on Oahu, enjoying the unstinted hospitality of the king and his district chiefs. He was a favorite with the fairest women of the court; but he gave his heart to the beautiful Laiea-a-Ewa, sister of the wife of Kalona, and with her returned to Maui.
Kaululaau quickly became the hero of the court and the people’s idol. He stayed on Oahu for over a month, enjoying the generous hospitality of the king and his district chiefs. He was popular with the most beautiful women at court; however, his heart belonged to the stunning Laiea-a-Ewa, the sister of Kalona's wife, and he returned to Maui with her.
Landing at Lahaina after his long absence, he was joyfully welcomed home by his royal father, who had heard of his adventures and fully forgiven the faults of his youth. With grief he learned that his friend the high-priest, Waolani, had died some months before. Remembering his oath, he found the burial place of the priest, and with his remains secretly deposited the sacred spear-point of Lono, which had served him so effectively. He devoutly kissed the relic before he hid it for ever from view, and afterwards knelt and thanked Lono and the priest for its use.
Landing in Lahaina after a long absence, he was joyfully welcomed home by his royal father, who had heard about his adventures and completely forgiven the mistakes of his youth. With sadness, he learned that his friend, the high priest Waolani, had died a few months earlier. Remembering his promise, he found the priest's burial site and secretly placed the sacred spearhead of Lono, which had served him so well, with the remains. He reverently kissed the relic before hiding it away forever, and then knelt to thank Lono and the priest for its use.
Lands were given him in Kauaula, where he resided until the end of his days. Laiea was his only wife, and they were blessed with six children, whose names alone are mentioned by tradition. [227]
Lands were granted to him in Kauaula, where he lived until he passed away. Laiea was his only wife, and they were blessed with six children, whose names are only remembered in tradition. [__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]
Kelea, the Surf Rider of Maui.
[228]
[__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]
CHARACTERS.
- Kawao, king of Maui.
- Kelea, sister of Kawao.
- Piliwale, alii-nui of Oahu.
- Paakanilea, wife of Piliwale.
- Lo-Lale, brother of Piliwale.
- Kalamakua, a chief of Ewa, cousin of Lo-Lale.
[229]
[__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]
KELEA, THE SURF-RIDER OF MAUI.
Kelea, the surfer from Maui.
THE LEGEND OF LO-LALE, THE ECCENTRIC PRINCE OF OAHU.
THE LEGEND OF LO-LALE, THE UNUSUAL PRINCE OF OAHU.
I.
Kelea, of whom in the past the bards of Oahu and Maui loved to sing, was the beautiful but capricious sister of Kawao, king of Maui, who in about A.D. 1445, at the age of twenty-five, succeeded to the sovereignty of that island. Their royal father was Kahekili I., the son of Kakae, who, with his brother, Kakaalaneo, was the joint ruler of the little realm from about 1380 to 1415. Kakae was the rightful heir to the moiship, and, as such, his son Kahekili succeeded him; but as an accident in his youth had somewhat impaired his mental faculties, Kakaalaneo became, through the expressed will of the dying Kamaloohua, the joint ruler and virtual sovereign of the kingdom. He had sons and daughters of his own; but he loved his weak-minded brother, and respected the line of legitimate succession, and when the black kapa covered him, Kahekili became king of Maui and Lanai; for during that period the latter island was under the protection of the mois of Maui, while Molokai still maintained its independence.
Kelea, who was celebrated by the bards of Oahu and Maui in the past, was the stunning but unpredictable sister of Kawao, the king of Maui, who around CE 1445, at just twenty-five, took over the rule of that island. Their royal father was Kahekili I., the son of Kakae, who, along with his brother Kakaalaneo, jointly ruled the small kingdom from about 1380 to 1415. Kakae was the rightful heir to the throne, and his son Kahekili succeeded him; however, an accident in his youth had affected Kahekili's mental abilities, which allowed Kakaalaneo, as per the wishes of the dying Kamaloohua, to become the co-ruler and effective sovereign of the kingdom. Kakaalaneo had his own sons and daughters, but he cared for his mentally challenged brother and honored the line of legitimate succession. When Kahekili passed away, he became the king of Maui and Lanai; at that time, Lanai was under the protection of the kings of Maui, while Molokai remained independent.
Kakaalaneo was noted for his business energy and strict sense of justice. The court of the brothers was established at Lahaina—then known as Lele—and was one of the most respected in all the group. It was Kakaalaneo who introduced the bread-fruit there from Hawaii, and won the love of the people by continuous acts of mercy and benevolence. For some disrespect shown to his royal brother, whose mental weakness doubtless subjected him to unkind remarks, he banished his son Kaululaau to Lanai, which island, tradition avers, was at that time infested by powerful and malignant spirits. They killed pigs and fowls, uprooted cocoanut-trees and blighted taro patches, and a gigantic and mischievous gnome amused himself by gliding like a huge mole under the huts of his victims and almost upsetting them.
Kakaalaneo was known for his business drive and strong sense of justice. The brothers' court was set up in Lahaina—then called Lele—and was one of the most respected in the entire area. It was Kakaalaneo who brought the breadfruit from Hawaii there, winning the people's affection through his consistent acts of kindness and generosity. Due to some disrespect shown to his royal brother, who was clearly vulnerable to harsh comments because of his mental weakness, he exiled his son Kaululaau to Lanai. According to tradition, that island was then believed to be home to powerful and evil spirits. They would kill pigs and chickens, uproot coconut trees, and ruin taro fields, while a huge and playful spirit entertained itself by burrowing under the huts of its victims, nearly toppling them.
The priests tried in vain to quiet these malicious spirits. No [230]sooner were they exorcised away from one locality than they appeared in another, and if they gave the taro patches a rest it was only to tear the unripe bananas from their stems, or rend the walls and embankments of artificial ponds, that their stores of fishes might escape to the sea. Aware of these grievances, Kaululaau took with him to Lanai a talisman of rare powers. It was the gift of his friend, the high-priest of his father, and consisted of a spear-point that had been dipped in the waters of Po, the land of death, and many generations before left by Lono on one of his altars.
The priests struggled to calm these evil spirits. No sooner were they driven out of one area than they showed up in another. If they gave the taro patches a break, it was only to snatch the unripe bananas from their stems or tear apart the walls and banks of artificial ponds to let the fish escape to the sea. Understanding these issues, Kaululaau brought a powerful talisman with him to Lanai. It was a gift from his father’s high priest and consisted of a spear point that had been soaked in the waters of Po, the land of the dead, and left by Lono on one of his altars many generations ago.
Crowning a long spear with this sacred point, Kaululaau attacked the disturbing spirits, and in a short time succeeded either in bringing them to submission or driving them from the island. The gnome Mooaleo was the most difficult to vanquish. It avoided the prince, and for some time managed to keep beyond the influence of the charmed spear-point; but the monster was finally caught within the boundaries of a circular line scratched with the talisman upon the surface of the earth beneath which it was burrowing, and thereby brought to terms. It could not pass the line, no matter how far below the surface it essayed to do so. Heaving the earth in its strength and wrath, it chafed against the charmed restraint that held it captive, and finally plunged downward within the vertical walls of its prison. But there was no path of escape in that direction. It soon encountered a lake of fire, and was compelled to return to the surface, where it humbled itself before the prince, and promised, if liberated, to quit the island for ever. Kaululaau obliterated sixty paces of the line of imprisonment, to enable Mooaleo to pass to the sea, into which the hideous being plunged and disappeared, never to be seen again in Lanai.
Crowning a long spear with this sacred point, Kaululaau confronted the disturbing spirits, and soon succeeded either in making them submit or driving them off the island. The gnome Mooaleo was the hardest to defeat. It evaded the prince and for a while managed to stay out of reach of the enchanted spear-point; but the monster was eventually trapped within a circular line drawn with the talisman on the ground beneath where it was hiding, and thus was forced to give in. It couldn't cross the line, no matter how far below the surface it tried to go. With its strength and fury, it threw itself against the enchanted barrier that held it captive and ultimately dove down within the vertical walls of its prison. But there was no escape that way. It soon found itself in a lake of fire, and had to return to the surface, where it surrendered to the prince, promising that if freed, it would leave the island forever. Kaululaau erased sixty paces of the line that held it captive, allowing Mooaleo to reach the sea, into which the monstrous being plunged and vanished, never to be seen again in Lanai.
In consideration of the great service of the exiled prince in restoring quiet and security to the island, his father permitted him to return to Maui, where he connected himself with the priesthood, and became noted for his supernatural powers. The charmed spear-point is referred to in later legends, and is thought to be still secreted with the bones of a high-priest in a mountain cave on the island of Maui, not far from the sacred burial-place of Iao.
In acknowledgment of the exiled prince's significant contributions to restoring peace and safety to the island, his father allowed him to go back to Maui, where he joined the priesthood and became famous for his supernatural abilities. The enchanted spear tip is mentioned in later legends and is believed to be hidden with the bones of a high priest in a mountain cave on the island of Maui, not far from the sacred burial site of Iao.
But we have been straying two generations back of our story. The legendary accounts of the ruling families of the principal [231]islands of the group are so threaded with romantic or fabulous incidents that, in referring to any of the prominent actors in the past, it is difficult to restrain the pen in its willingness to wander into the enchanted by-ways in which the meles of the period abound.
But we've been wandering two generations back in our story. The legendary tales of the ruling families of the main [__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__] islands are so filled with romantic or outrageous incidents that, when mentioning any of the key figures from the past, it's hard to keep the writing from drifting into the magical side streets where the meles of that time are plentiful.
Having alluded to the immediate ancestors of Kelea, the sister of the young moi of Maui, we will now resume the thread of our legend by referring somewhat more particularly to the princess herself. Brought up in the royal court at Lahaina, with a brother only to divide the affections of her father, Kelea was humored, petted and spoiled as a child, and courted and flattered beyond measure as she grew to womanhood. The meles describe her as a maiden of uncommon beauty; but she was wayward, volatile and capricious, as might have been expected of one so schooled and favored, and no consideration of policy or persuasion of passion could move her to accept any one of the many high chiefs who sought her in marriage. She loved the water—possibly because she could see her fair face mirrored in it—and became the most graceful and daring surf-swimmer in the kingdom. Frequently, when the waters of Auau Channel surged wildly under the breath of the south wind, or kona, Kelea, laughing at the fears of her brother, would plunge into the sea with her onini, or surf-board, and so audaciously ride the waves that those who watched and applauded her were half-inclined to believe that she was the friend of some water-god, and could not be drowned.
Having mentioned Kelea's immediate ancestors, the sister of the young moi of Maui, we will now focus on the princess herself. Raised in the royal court at Lahaina, with only a brother to share their father's affection, Kelea was indulged, adored, and spoiled as a child, and as she grew into womanhood, she was pursued and flattered to an extreme. The meles describe her as a maiden of extraordinary beauty; however, she was also headstrong, unpredictable, and whimsical, which was to be expected from someone so pampered and cherished. No amount of political strategy or romantic persuasion could convince her to marry any of the many high chiefs who sought her hand. She had a passion for the water—perhaps because she could see her beautiful reflection in it—and became the most graceful and daring surf-swimmer in the kingdom. Often, when the waters of Auau Channel roared fiercely under the south wind, or kona, Kelea would laugh at her brother's fears and dive into the ocean with her onini, or surfboard, riding the waves so daringly that those who watched and cheered her on were almost convinced she was a friend of a water-god and couldn't be drowned.
No sport was to her so enticing as a battle with the waves, and when her brother spoke to her of marriage she gaily answered that the surf-board was her husband, and she would never embrace any other. The brother frowned at the answer, for he had hoped, by uniting his sister to the principal chief of Hana, to more thoroughly incorporate in his kingdom that portion of the island, then ruled by independent chiefs; but by other means during his reign, it may be remarked, the union of the two divisions was effected.
No sport excited her quite like battling the waves, and when her brother brought up marriage, she cheerfully replied that her surfboard was her husband and she would never take another. The brother frowned at her response because he had hoped that by marrying his sister to the main chief of Hana, he could better integrate that part of the island, which was then ruled by independent chiefs, into his kingdom; however, it should be noted that the union of the two divisions was eventually achieved by other means during his reign.
“Do not frown, Kawao,” said Kelea, coaxingly; “a smile better becomes your handsome face. I may marry some day, just to please you; but remember what the voice said in the anu at the last feast of Lono.”
“Don’t frown, Kawao,” Kelea said gently; “a smile looks better on your handsome face. I might get married someday, just to make you happy; but remember what the voice said in the anu at the last feast of Lono.”
“Yes, I remember,” replied Kawao; “but I have sometimes [232]believed that when the kilo declared that in riding the surf Kelea would find a husband, he was simply repeating an augury imparted to him by Kelea herself.”
“Yes, I remember,” replied Kawao; “but I have sometimes [__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]thought that when the kilo said that riding the waves would help Kelea find a husband, he was just echoing a prediction that Kelea had shared with him.”
“You will anger the gods by speaking so lightly of their words,” returned Kelea, reproachfully; and Kawao smiled as the princess took her leave with a dignity quite unusual with her.
“You will anger the gods by speaking so casually about their words,” Kelea replied, reproachfully; and Kawao smiled as the princess left with a dignity that was quite uncommon for her.
Kawao loved his sister and was proud of her beauty; and while he was anxious to see her suitably married, and felt no little annoyance at the importunities of her suitors, he nevertheless recognized her right, as the daughter of a king, to a voice in the selection of a husband.
Kawao loved his sister and was proud of her beauty; and while he was eager to see her married off well and felt quite annoyed by the advances of her suitors, he still acknowledged her right, as the daughter of a king, to have a say in choosing her husband.
But the voice from the anu was prophetic, whatever may have inspired it; for while Kelea continued to ride the waves at Lahaina, a husband, of the family of Kalona-iki, of Oahu, was in search of her, and to that island we now request the reader to follow us.
But the voice from the anu was prophetic, no matter what inspired it; while Kelea kept riding the waves at Lahaina, a husband from the Kalona-iki family in Oahu was searching for her, and we now invite the reader to follow us to that island.
There lived at that time at Lihue, in the district of Ewa, on the island of Oahu, a chief named Lo-Lale, son of Kalona-iki, and brother of Piliwale, the alii-nui, or nominal sovereign, of the island, whose court was established at Waialua. Kalona-iki had married Kikinui, and thus infused into the royal family the native and aristocratic blood of Maweke, of the ancient line of Nanaula.
There was a chief named Lo-Lale living at that time in Lihue, in the Ewa district on the island of Oahu. He was the son of Kalona-iki and the brother of Piliwale, the alii-nui, or the nominal ruler of the island, whose court was based in Waialua. Kalona-iki had married Kikinui, which brought the native and aristocratic lineage of Maweke from the ancient Nanaula line into the royal family.
Lo-Lale was an amiable and handsome prince, but for some cause had reached the age of thirty-five without marrying. The reason was traced to the death by drowning, some years before, of a chiefess of great beauty whom he was about to marry, and to whom he was greatly attached. As he was of a gentle and poetic nature, his disinclination to marriage may not be unreasonably attributed to that event, especially when supported by the relation that thereafter he abhorred the sea, and was content to remain at Lihue, beyond the sound of its ceaseless surges.
Lo-Lale was a friendly and attractive prince, but for some reason, he had reached the age of thirty-five without getting married. The cause was linked to the tragic drowning of a beautiful chiefess he was about to marry, whom he loved deeply, several years earlier. Being gentle and poetic by nature, it’s understandable that his reluctance to marry stemmed from that tragedy, especially since he later developed a strong dislike for the sea and preferred to stay in Lihue, away from the noise of its endless waves.
Piliwale had passed his fiftieth year, and, having but two daughters and no son, was more than ever desirous that his brother should marry, that the family authority might be strengthened and the line of Kalona perpetuated. And the friendly neighboring chiefs were equally anxious that Lo-Lale should become the head of a family, and, to inspire him with a disposition to marry, described with enthusiasm the beauty of many maidens [233]of distinguished rank whom they had met on the other islands of the group.
Piliwale had turned fifty, and since he had only two daughters and no son, he was more eager than ever for his brother to get married, so that the family's authority could be strengthened and the Kalona lineage continued. The friendly neighboring chiefs also wanted Lo-Lale to start a family, and to encourage him to marry, they excitedly talked about the beauty of many noble maidens they had encountered on the other islands in the group. [__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]
To these importunities Lo-Lale finally yielded; and as a suitable wife for so high a chief could not be found on Oahu, or, at least, one who would be personally acceptable to him, it was necessary to seek for her among the royal families of the other islands. Accordingly, a large koa canoe was fitted out at Waialua, and with trusty messengers of rank despatched to the windward islands in search of a wife for Lo-Lale. The messengers were instructed to quietly visit the several royal courts, and report upon the beauty, rank and eligibility of such marriageable chiefesses of distinguished families as they might be able to discover.
To these requests, Lo-Lale finally agreed; since a suitable wife for such a high chief couldn't be found on Oahu, or at least one who would be personally acceptable to him, it became necessary to look among the royal families of the other islands. So, a large koa canoe was prepared at Waialua, and trustworthy messengers of rank were sent to the windward islands in search of a wife for Lo-Lale. The messengers were instructed to quietly visit the various royal courts and report on the beauty, rank, and eligibility of any marriageable chiefesses from distinguished families they could find.
Among the chiefs selected for the delicate mission, and the one upon whose judgment the most reliance was placed, was Lo-Lale’s cousin, Kalamakua, a noble of high rank, whose lands were on the coast of the Ewa district. He was bold, dashing and adventurous, and readily consented to assist in finding a wife for his royal and romantic relative.
Among the chiefs chosen for the important mission, and the one whose judgment was most trusted, was Lo-Lale’s cousin, Kalamakua, a high-ranking noble with lands along the coast of the Ewa district. He was brave, daring, and adventurous, and he quickly agreed to help find a wife for his royal and romantic relative.
Lo-Lale was at Waialua when the messengers embarked. He took an encouraging interest in the expedition, and when banteringly asked by his cousin if age would be any objection in a bride of unexceptionable birth, replied that he had promised to take a wife solely to please his royal brother, and any age under eighty would answer. But he did not mean it.
Lo-Lale was at Waialua when the messengers set off. He showed a keen interest in the mission, and when his cousin jokingly asked if age would be a problem for a bride of perfect lineage, he replied that he had promised to marry just to make his royal brother happy, and that any age under eighty would be fine. But he didn't really mean it.
“Not so,” replied Piliwale, more than half in earnest. “I will not become the uncle of a family of monsters. The bride must be as worthy in person as in blood.”
“Not really,” replied Piliwale, mostly serious. “I won’t be the uncle of a family of monsters. The bride has to be just as good in character as she is by birth.”
“Do you hear, Kalamakua?” said Lo-Lale, addressing his cousin, who was standing beside the canoe, ready for departure; “do you hear the words of Piliwale? She must be not only young but beautiful. If you bring or give promise to any other, she shall not live at Lihue!”
“Do you hear, Kalamakua?” said Lo-Lale, talking to his cousin, who was standing next to the canoe, ready to leave; “do you hear what Piliwale says? She must not only be young but also beautiful. If you bring or promise any other, she won’t live at Lihue!”
“Do not fear,” replied the cousin, gaily. “Whomsoever she may be, we will keep her in the family; for if you refuse her, or she you, I will marry her myself!”
“Don’t worry,” the cousin said cheerfully. “Whoever she is, we’ll keep her in the family; because if you turn her down, or she turns you down, I’ll marry her myself!”
“Fairly spoken!” exclaimed the king; “and I will see that he keeps his promise, Lo-Lale.”
“Sounds good!” exclaimed the king; “and I will make sure he keeps his promise, Lo-Lale.”
Although the object of the voyage was known to but few, hundreds gathered at the beach to witness the departure, for the canoe was decorated, and the embarking chiefs appeared in [234]feather capes and other ornaments of their rank. Turning to the high-priest, who was present, Piliwale asked him if he had observed the auguries.
Although only a few knew the purpose of the voyage, hundreds gathered on the beach to watch as the canoe was decorated and the departing chiefs appeared in [__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]feather capes and other ornaments signifying their status. Turning to the high priest who was there, Piliwale asked him if he had noticed the omens.
“I have,” replied the priest. “They are more than favorable.” Then turning his face northward, he continued: “There is peace in the clouds, and the listless winging of yonder bird betokens favoring winds.”
“I have,” replied the priest. “They are more than favorable.” Then turning his face northward, he continued: “There is peace in the clouds, and the lazy flying of that bird over there suggests favorable winds.”
Amid a chorus of alohas! the canoe dashed through the breakers and out into the open sea, holding a course in the direction of Molokai. Reaching that island early the next day, the party landed at Kalaupapa. The alii-nui received them well, but inquiry led to nothing satisfactory, and, proceeding around the island, the party next landed on Lanai. It is probable that they were driven there by unfavorable winds, as Lanai was a dependency of Maui at that time, and none but subject chiefs resided on the island. However, they remained there but one day, and the next proceeded to Hana, Maui, with the intention of crossing over to Hawaii and visiting the court of Kiha at Waipio. Inquiring for the moi, they learned that Kawao had removed his court from Lahaina, for the season, to Hamakuapoko, to enjoy the cool breezes of that locality and indulge in the pleasures of surf-bathing. They were further informed that a large number of chiefs had accompanied the moi to that attractive resort, and that Kelea, sister of the king, and the most beautiful woman on the island as well as the most daring and accomplished surf-swimmer, was also there as one of the greatest ornaments of the court.
Amid a chorus of alohas! the canoe sped through the waves and out into the open sea, heading towards Molokai. They arrived at the island early the next day and landed at Kalaupapa. The alii-nui welcomed them, but their inquiries didn’t lead to any helpful answers, so they continued around the island and landed on Lanai next. It’s likely that they were pushed there by bad winds since Lanai was a part of Maui at the time, and only subject chiefs lived there. However, they stayed only one day and then moved on to Hana, Maui, planning to cross over to Hawaii and visit Kiha's court at Waipio. While asking about the moi, they learned that Kawao had moved his court from Lahaina for the season to Hamakuapoko to enjoy the cool breezes and the pleasures of surfing. They were also told that many chiefs had followed the moi to that popular spot, and that Kelea, the king’s sister and the most beautiful woman on the island, as well as the bravest and most skilled surf swimmer, was also there as one of the highlights of the court.
This was agreeable information, and the party re-embarked and arrived the next morning off Hamakuapoko, just as the fair Kelea and her attendants had gone down to the beach to indulge in a buffet with the surf. Swimming out beyond the breakers, and oblivious of everything but her own enjoyment, Kelea suddenly found herself within a few yards of the canoe of the Oahuan chiefs. Presuming that it contained her own people, she swam still closer, when she discovered, to her amazement, that all the faces in the canoe were strange to her. Perceiving her embarrassment, Kalamakua rose to his feet, and, addressing her in a courtly and respectful manner, invited her to a seat in the canoe, offering to ride the surf with it to the beach—an exciting and sometimes dangerous sport, in which great skill and coolness are required. [235]
This was good news, and the group got back on the boat and arrived the next morning off Hamakuapoko, just as the beautiful Kelea and her friends had gone down to the beach to enjoy a buffet with the waves. While swimming out past the breakers, completely focused on her own fun, Kelea suddenly found herself just a few yards away from the canoe of the Oahuan chiefs. Thinking it held her own people, she swam even closer, only to be shocked to realize that all the faces in the canoe were unfamiliar to her. Noticing her discomfort, Kalamakua stood up and, speaking to her in a polite and respectful way, invited her to sit in the canoe, offering to surf with it to the beach—an exciting and sometimes risky activity that requires a lot of skill and calmness. [__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]
The language of the chief was so gentle and suggestive of the manners of the court that the invitation was accepted, and the canoe mounted one of the great waves successively following two of lighter bulk and force, and was adroitly and safely beached. The achievement was greeted with applause on the shore, and when the proposal was made to repeat the performance Kelea willingly retained her seat. Again the canoe successfully rode the breakers ashore, and then, through her attendants, Kalamakua discovered that the fair and dashing swimmer was none other than Kelea, the sister of the moi of Maui.
The chief spoke so kindly and elegantly that the invitation was accepted, and the canoe skillfully navigated one of the big waves after two smaller ones, landing safely on the shore. The landing was met with cheers, and when someone suggested doing it again, Kelea happily stayed seated. Once more, the canoe expertly rode the waves to the beach, and through her attendants, Kalamakua realized that the beautiful and skilled swimmer was none other than Kelea, the sister of the moi of Maui.
With increased respect Kalamakua again invited his distinguished guest to join in the pleasure and excitement of a third ride over the breakers. She consented, and the canoe was once more pulled out beyond the surf, where it remained for a moment, awaiting a high, combing roller on which to be borne to the landing. One passed and was missed, and before another came a squall, or what was called a mumuku, suddenly struck the canoe, rendering it utterly unmanageable and driving it out upon the broad ocean.
With renewed respect, Kalamakua invited his distinguished guest to enjoy the thrill of a third ride over the waves. She agreed, and the canoe was once again pulled out past the surf, where it waited for a moment, anticipating a large wave to take it to shore. One wave came and was missed, and before another arrived, a squall, or what was known as a mumuku, suddenly hit the canoe, making it completely unmanageable and pushing it out into the open ocean.
When the canoe started Kelea would have leaped into the sea had she not been restrained; but Kalamakua spoke so kindly to her—assuring her that they would safely ride out the storm and return to Hamakuapoko—that she became calmer, and consented to curl down beside him in the boat to escape the fury of the winds. Her shapely limbs and shoulders were bare, and her hair, braided and bound loosely back, was still wet, and grew chilling in the wind where it fell. Kalamakua took from a covered calabash a handsome kihei, or mantle, and wrapped it around her shoulders, and then seated her in the shelter of his own burly form. She smiled her thanks for these delicate attentions, and the chief was compelled to admit to himself that the reports of her great beauty had not been exaggerated. He could recall no maiden on Oahu who was her equal in grace and comeliness, and felt that, could she be secured for his eccentric cousin, his search would be at an end. He even grew indignant at the thought that she might not prove acceptable, but smiled the next moment at his promise to marry the girl himself should she be refused by his cousin.
When the canoe started, Kelea would have jumped into the sea if she hadn't been held back; but Kalamakua spoke so kindly to her—reassuring her that they would safely ride out the storm and return to Hamakuapoko—that she calmed down and agreed to curl up beside him in the boat to escape the fierce winds. Her shapely arms and shoulders were bare, and her hair, braided and loosely tied back, was still wet and chilled by the wind. Kalamakua took a beautiful kihei, or mantle, from a covered calabash and wrapped it around her shoulders, then sat her in the shelter of his sturdy form. She smiled her thanks for his thoughtful gestures, and the chief had to admit to himself that the stories of her stunning beauty were not exaggerated. He couldn't recall any maiden on Oahu who matched her grace and charm, and he felt that if she could be secured for his unusual cousin, his search would finally be over. He even felt a surge of indignation at the thought that she might not be accepted, but quickly smiled at his own promise to marry the girl himself if his cousin turned her down.
But the fierce mumuku afforded him but little time to indulge such dreams. The sea surged in fury, and like a cockleshell the [236]canoe was tossed from one huge wave to another. The spray was almost blinding, and, while Kalamakua kept the little craft squarely before the wind as a measure of first importance, his companions were earnestly employed in alternately baling and trimming as emergency suggested.
But the fierce mumuku gave him very little time to entertain such dreams. The sea raged in fury, and like a tiny shell, the [__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__] canoe was tossed from one massive wave to another. The spray was nearly blinding, and while Kalamakua kept the little craft facing the wind as a top priority, his companions were busy alternating between bailing water and adjusting the sail as needed.
On, on sped the canoe, farther and farther out into the open sea, tossed like a feather by the crested waves and pelted by the driving spray. The scene was fearful. The southern skies had grown black with wrath, and long streamers sent from the clouds shot northward as if to surround and cut off the retreat of the flying craft. All crouched in the bottom of the boat, intent only on keeping it before the wind and preventing it from filling. A frailer craft would have been stove to pieces; but it was hewn from the trunk of a sound koa tree, and gallantly rode out the storm.
On and on sped the canoe, farther and farther into the open sea, tossed like a feather by the towering waves and hit by the driving spray. The scene was terrifying. The southern skies had turned dark with anger, and long streaks from the clouds shot northward as if to surround and cut off the retreat of the fleeing boat. Everyone huddled in the bottom of the boat, focused only on keeping it facing the wind and preventing it from filling with water. A weaker craft would have been smashed to pieces; but it was carved from the trunk of a solid koa tree and bravely weathered the storm.
But when the wind ceased and the skies cleared, late in the afternoon, the canoe was far out at sea and beyond the sight of land. It was turned and headed back; but as there was no wind to assist the paddles, and the waters were still rough and restless, slow progress toward land was made; and when the sun went down Kalamakua was undecided which way to proceed, as he was not certain that the storm had not carried them so far from the coast of Maui that some point on Molokai or Oahu might be more speedily and safely reached than the place from which they started. Their supply of poi had been lost during the gale by the breaking of the vessel containing it; but they had still left a small quantity of dried fish, raw potatoes and bananas, and a calabash of water, and ate their evening meal as cheerfully as if their supplies were exhaustless and the green hills of Waialua smiled upon them in the distance. Such was the Hawaiian of the past; such is the Hawaiian of to-day. His joys and griefs are centred in the present, and he broods but little over the past, and borrows no trouble from the future.
But when the wind stopped and the skies cleared late in the afternoon, the canoe was far out at sea and out of sight of land. It turned around and headed back, but since there was no wind to help with the paddles and the waters were still rough and restless, their progress toward land was slow. By the time the sun went down, Kalamakua wasn't sure which way to go, as he couldn’t tell if the storm had pushed them so far from the coast of Maui that reaching some point on Molokai or Oahu might be quicker and safer than going back to where they started. They had lost their supply of poi during the storm when the container broke, but they still had a small amount of dried fish, raw potatoes, bananas, and a calabash of water, and they ate their evening meal as happily as if their supplies were endless and the green hills of Waialua were smiling at them from a distance. Such was the Hawaiian of the past; such is the Hawaiian of today. His joys and sorrows are focused on the present, and he doesn’t dwell much on the past or worry about the future.
The stars came out, and a light wind began to steal down upon them from the northwest. It was quite chilly, and felt like the breath of the returning trade-winds, which start from the frozen shores of northwestern America, and gradually grow warmer as they sweep down through the tropic seas. These winds, continuing, with intervals of cessation, eight or nine months in the year, are what give life, beauty and an endurable climate to the Hawaiian group. [237]
The stars appeared, and a light breeze began to blow down on them from the northwest. It was pretty chilly, feeling like the breath of the returning trade winds, which start from the icy shores of northwestern America and gradually warm up as they move down through the tropical seas. These winds, which blow with breaks for eight or nine months a year, provide life, beauty, and a comfortable climate to the Hawaiian Islands. [__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]
As the breeze freshened sails were raised, and then the course to be taken remained to be determined. Kalamakua expressed his doubts to Kelea, as if inviting a suggestion from her; but she was unable to offer any advice, declaring that she had not noticed the course of the wind that had driven them so far out upon the ocean.
As the breeze picked up, they raised the sails, but they still needed to figure out their course. Kalamakua shared his doubts with Kelea, almost asking her for a suggestion; however, she couldn't provide any guidance, stating that she hadn't paid attention to the direction of the wind that had taken them so far out into the ocean.
“And I am equally in doubt,” said the chief. “We may have been blown farther toward the rising of the sun than the headlands of Hana. If so, the course we are now sailing would take us to Hawaii, if not, indeed, beyond, while in following the evening star we might even pass Oahu. I therefore suggest a course between these two directions, which will certainly bring us to land some time to-morrow.”
“And I'm just as uncertain,” said the chief. “We might have been pushed further toward the east than the headlands of Hana. If that’s the case, the path we’re on could lead us to Hawaii, or even beyond, and while heading for the evening star, we might even miss Oahu. So, I propose a route that splits the difference between these two directions, which will definitely bring us to land sometime tomorrow.”
“Then, since we are all in doubt,” replied Kelea, “and the winds are blowing landward, why not trust to the gods and follow them?”
“Then, since we're all uncertain,” Kelea said, “and the winds are blowing toward the land, why not trust the gods and follow their guidance?”
“Your words are an inspiration,” returned the chief, delighted that she had suggested a course that would enable him to make Oahu direct; for, as may be suspected, he was an accomplished navigator, and was really in little or no doubt concerning the direction of the several islands mentioned. “You have spoken wisely,” he continued, as if yielding entirely to her judgment; “we will follow the winds that are now cooling the shores of Hamakuapoko.”
“Your words are inspiring,” replied the chief, pleased that she had proposed a route that would allow him to head directly to Oahu; after all, he was a skilled navigator and had no real doubt about the direction of the islands she mentioned. “You’ve made a wise point,” he continued, seeming to fully trust her judgment; “we will follow the winds currently cooling the shores of Hamakuapoko.”
Thus adroitly was Kelea made a consenting party to her own abduction. Kalamakua took the helm, slightly changing the course of the canoe, and his companions made themselves comfortable for the evening. Their wet rolls of kapa had been dried during the afternoon, and there was room enough to spare to arrange a couch for Kelea in the bottom of the boat. But she was too much excited over the strange events of the day to sleep, or even attempt to rest, and therefore sat near Kalamakua in the stern of the canoe until past midnight, watching the stars and listening to the story, with which he knew she must sooner or later become acquainted, of his romantic expedition in search of a wife for his cousin.
Kelea was cleverly made a willing participant in her own abduction. Kalamakua took control of the canoe, adjusting its course slightly, while his companions settled in for the evening. Their wet rolls of kapa had dried during the afternoon, and there was enough space to set up a bed for Kelea in the bottom of the boat. However, she was too excited about the strange events of the day to sleep or even try to rest, so she sat near Kalamakua at the back of the canoe until past midnight, gazing at the stars and listening to the story he knew she would eventually hear about his adventurous quest to find a wife for his cousin.
It is needless to say that Kalea was surprised and interested in the relation; and when Kalamakua referred to the high rank of his cousin, to his handsome person and large estates at Lihue, and begged her to regard with favor the proposal of marriage [238]which he then made to her in behalf of Lo-Lale, she frankly replied that, if her royal brother did not object, she would give the proffer consideration.
It goes without saying that Kalea was surprised and intrigued by the relationship; and when Kalamakua mentioned the high status of his cousin, his good looks, and his large properties in Lihue, and urged her to consider the marriage proposal [__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]that he was presenting on behalf of Lo-Lale, she openly responded that, if her royal brother had no objections, she would think about the offer.
As Kalamakua had concluded not to take the hazard of securing the consent of her brother, who doubtless had some other matrimonial project in view for her, he construed her answer into a modestly expressed willingness to become the wife of Lo-Lale, and the more resolutely bent his course toward Oahu. He watched the Pleiades—the great guide of the early Polynesian navigators—as they swept up into the heavens, and, bearing still farther to the northward to escape Molokai, announced that he would keep the steering-oar for the night, and advised his companions, now that the breeze was steady and the sea smoother, to betake themselves to rest. And Kelea at last curled down upon her couch of kapa, and Kalamakua was left alone with his thoughts to watch the wind and stars.
As Kalamakua decided not to risk getting his brother's consent, who likely had some other marriage plans for her, he interpreted her response as a modest agreement to marry Lo-Lale, and he became more determined to head toward Oahu. He observed the Pleiades—the main guide for early Polynesian navigators—as they rose into the sky, and, steering farther north to avoid Molokai, he announced that he would take the helm for the night. He suggested that his companions, now that the breeze was steady and the sea calmer, should get some rest. Finally, Kelea settled down on her kapa mat, leaving Kalamakua alone with his thoughts to watch the wind and stars.
Although a long and steady run had been made during the night, no land was visible the next morning. Kelea scanned the horizon uneasily, and, without speaking, looked at Kalamakua for an explanation.
Although they had run steadily through the night, there was no land in sight the next morning. Kelea anxiously scanned the horizon and, without saying a word, glanced at Kalamakua for an explanation.
“Before the sun goes down we shall see land,” said the chief.
“Before the sun sets, we'll see land,” said the chief.
“What land?” inquired Kelea.
“What land?” Kelea asked.
“Oahu,” was the reply, but the chief was not greeted with the look of surprise expected.
“Oahu,” was the reply, but the chief wasn’t met with the surprised reaction that was expected.
“I am not disappointed,” returned the princess, quite indifferently. “You seem to have been sailing by the wandering stars last night, for before daylight I looked up and saw by Kao that your course was directly toward the place of sunset.”
“I’m not disappointed,” replied the princess, somewhat indifferently. “It seems you were sailing by the wandering stars last night, because before daylight, I looked up and saw by Kao that your course was headed straight toward the sunset.”
Five of the planets—Mercury, Mars, Venus, Jupiter and Saturn—were known to the ancient Hawaiians, and designated as na hoku aea, or wandering stars. The fixed stars were also grouped by them into constellations, and Kao was their name for Antares.
Five of the planets—Mercury, Mars, Venus, Jupiter, and Saturn—were known to the ancient Hawaiians and called na hoku aea, or wandering stars. They also grouped fixed stars into constellations, and Kao was their name for Antares.
With a look of genuine surprise Kalamakua replied:
With a genuinely surprised look, Kalamakua replied:
“I did not know before that so correct a knowledge of navigation was among the many accomplishments of the sister of Kawao.”
“I didn't realize before that such a deep understanding of navigation was one of the many skills of Kawao's sister.”
“It required no great knowledge of the skies to discover last night that we were not bearing southward, and needs still less [239]now to observe that we are sailing directly west,” Kelea quietly remarked.
“It didn’t take much knowledge of the skies to realize last night that we weren’t heading south, and it takes even less now to see that we are sailing straight west,” Kelea quietly remarked.
“I will not attempt to deceive one who seems to be able to instruct me in journeying over the blue waters,” said Kalamakua, politely. “Your judgment is correct. We are sailing nearly westward, and the first land sighted will probably be the headlands of Kaawa.”
“I won’t try to mislead someone who looks like they can teach me about traveling over the blue waters,” Kalamakua said politely. “You’re right. We’re sailing almost west, and the first land we see will likely be the headlands of Kaawa.”
“You have acted treacherously,” resumed the princess, after a pause, as if suddenly struck with the propriety of protesting against the abduction.
“You have acted dishonestly,” the princess continued after a pause, as if suddenly realizing she needed to protest against the kidnapping.
“Possibly,” was the brief reply.
"Maybe," was the brief reply.
“Yes,” she continued, after another pause, “you have acted treacherously, and my brother will make war upon Oahu unless I am immediately returned to Hamakuapoko.”
“Yes,” she continued, after another pause, “you have acted dishonestly, and my brother will declare war on Oahu unless I am taken back to Hamakuapoko right away.”
“He will find work for his spears,” was the irritating response.
"He'll find a use for his spears," was the annoying reply.
“Is it a habit with the chiefs of Oahu to steal their wives?” inquired Kelea, tauntingly.
“Is it a habit for the chiefs of Oahu to steal their wives?” Kelea asked playfully.
“No,” Kalamakua promptly replied; “but I would not eat from the same calabash with the chief who would throw back into the face of the generous winds the gift of the rarest flower that ever blossomed on Hawaiian soil!”
“No,” Kalamakua quickly responded; “but I would never share a bowl with the chief who would reject the generous winds’ gift of the rarest flower that has ever bloomed on Hawaiian soil!”
The pretty compliment of the chief moved Kelea to silence; yet he observed that there was a sparkle of pleasure in her eyes, and that the novelty and romance of the situation were not altogether distasteful to her.
The nice compliment from the chief left Kelea speechless; still, he noticed a sparkle of happiness in her eyes, and the newness and excitement of the situation weren't completely off-putting to her.
Land was sighted late in the afternoon. It was Kaoio Point, on the western side of Oahu. Rounding it, they landed at Mahana, where they procured food and water and passed the night, and the next day had an easy voyage to Waialua.
Land was spotted late in the afternoon. It was Kaoio Point, on the western side of Oahu. After rounding it, they landed at Mahana, where they got food and water and spent the night. The next day, they had a smooth journey to Waialua.
Landing, Kalamakua at once communicated with Piliwale, giving the high rank of Kelea, as well as the strange circumstances under which she had been brought to Waialua. Queen Paakanilea promptly despatched attendants to the beach with appropriate apparel, and in due time the distinguished visitor was received at the royal mansion in a manner consistent with her rank.
Landing, Kalamakua immediately reached out to Piliwale, sharing the high status of Kelea, along with the unusual circumstances that had brought her to Waialua. Queen Paakanilea quickly sent attendants to the beach with suitable clothing, and soon the esteemed guest was welcomed at the royal residence in a way that matched her rank.
The next day a message brought Lo-Lale from Lihue. He was dressed in his richest trappings, and brought with him, as an offering to Kelea, a rare necklace of shells and curiously-carved mother-of-pearl. He was conducted to the princess by Kalamakua. [240]They seemed to be mutually pleased with each other. In fact, Lo-Lale was completely charmed by the fair stranger, and in his enthusiasm offered to divide his estates with his cousin as an evidence of his gratitude.
The next day, a message brought Lo-Lale from Lihue. He was dressed in his finest clothes and brought a rare necklace made of shells and intricately carved mother-of-pearl as a gift for Kelea. Kalamakua escorted him to the princess. [__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]They appeared to be happy with each other. In fact, Lo-Lale was completely enchanted by the beautiful stranger, and in his excitement, he offered to share his lands with his cousin as a token of his gratitude.
Kalamakua had himself become very much interested in Kelea, and secretly hoped that his cousin might find something in her blood or bearing to object to, in which case he felt that she might be induced to regard his own suit with favor; but Lo-Lale declared her to be a model of perfection, and wooed her with so much earnestness that she finally consented to become his wife without waiting to hear from her brother.
Kalamakua had become quite interested in Kelea and secretly hoped that his cousin would find something in her heritage or demeanor to criticize, thinking that would make her more open to his own proposal. However, Lo-Lale insisted that she was a flawless example of womanhood and pursued her so passionately that she eventually agreed to marry him without waiting to hear from her brother.
Her rank was quite equal to that of Lo-Lale, and the king was so greatly pleased with the union that he added considerably to the estates of his brother at Lihue, and the nuptials were celebrated with games, feasting, dancing and the commencement of a new heiau near Waialua, which was in time completed and dedicated to Lono, with a large image of Laamaomao, the Hawaiian Æolus, at the inner entrance, in poetic commemoration of the winds that drove Kelea away from the coast of Maui.
Her rank was comparable to that of Lo-Lale, and the king was so pleased with the union that he significantly increased his brother's estates at Lihue. The wedding was celebrated with games, feasting, dancing, and the start of a new heiau near Waialua, which was eventually completed and dedicated to Lono, featuring a large image of Laamaomao, the Hawaiian Æolus, at the inner entrance, in poetic remembrance of the winds that carried Kelea away from the coast of Maui.
At the conclusion of the festivities at Waialua, Kelea was borne all the way to Lihue in a richly-mounted manele, or native palanquin with four bearers. There were three hundred attendants in her train, exclusive of thirty-six chiefs as a guard of honor, wearing feather capes and helmets, and armed with javelins festooned with leis of flowers and tinted feathers. It was a right royal procession, and its entrance into Lihue was the beginning of another round of festivities continuing for many days. Portions of the mele recited by Lo-Lale in welcome of his wife to Lihue are still remembered and repeated, and the occasion was a popular theme of song and comment for a generation or more among the people of that district.
At the end of the celebrations in Waialua, Kelea was carried all the way to Lihue in an elaborately decorated manele, a native palanquin with four bearers. There were three hundred attendants accompanying her, not counting thirty-six chiefs serving as an honor guard, dressed in feather capes and helmets, and armed with javelins decorated with leis made of flowers and colorful feathers. It was a truly royal procession, and its arrival in Lihue marked the start of another round of festivities that lasted for many days. Parts of the mele recited by Lo-Lale to welcome his wife to Lihue are still remembered and sung, and the event became a popular topic of song and discussion for a generation or more among the people in that area.
And thus Kelea, the beautiful sister of the moi of Maui, became the wife of Lo-Lale, brother of Piliwale, king of Oahu.
And so Kelea, the beautiful sister of the moi of Maui, became the wife of Lo-Lale, brother of Piliwale, king of Oahu.
II.
It is now in order to return to Hamakuapoko, to note what transpired there on the sudden disappearance of Kelea before the strong breath of the mumuku. The king was profoundly grieved, and summoned the attendants of his sister to learn the particulars [241]of the misfortune. To all of them it was manifest that the canoe had been blown out to sea in spite of the efforts of its occupants, and, as the gale continued to increase in violence during the day, it was feared that the entire party had perished. As to the strangers, no one seemed to know anything of them or of the island from which they came. They did not seem to belong to the makaainana, or common people, and one of them, it was believed from his bearing, was a high chief.
It’s time to return to Hamakuapoko and discuss what happened with Kelea’s sudden disappearance due to the strong wind from the mumuku. The king was deeply saddened and called for his sister's attendants to get details about the unfortunate event. It was clear to everyone that the canoe had been swept out to sea despite the crew’s efforts, and as the storm grew fiercer throughout the day, there was a real fear that the whole group had lost their lives. As for the strangers, no one seemed to know anything about them or the island they came from. They didn’t appear to belong to the makaainana, or common folk, and one of them, based on his demeanor, was thought to be a high chief.
This was all the information the wailing attendants were able to give. One man, who had noticed the canoe as it came and went through the surf, thought it was from Hawaii, while another was equally certain that it was from Oahu; but as the general structure of canoes on the several islands of the group differed but little, their descriptions of the craft furnished no real clue to the mystery.
This was all the information the crying attendants could provide. One man, who saw the canoe as it came through the waves, thought it was from Hawaii, while another was sure it was from Oahu. However, since the overall design of canoes across the different islands was quite similar, their descriptions of the boat didn’t really help solve the mystery.
With the cessation of the storm, late in the afternoon, came a hope to Kawao that the missing canoe had safely ridden out the gale, and would seek the nearest land favored by the changing winds. He therefore summoned the high-priest, and instructed him to put his diviners and magicians to the task of discovering what had become of the princess Kelea. Pigs and fowls were slain, prayers were said in the heiau, and late in the evening information came through supernatural agencies that Kelea was still living. But this was not satisfactory to the king. He demanded something more specific, and a kaula of great sanctity was prepared and placed in the anu, a wicker enclosure within the inner court, and in due time, in answer to the questions of the high-priest, announced that the canoe containing the princess was sailing in safety toward Oahu.
As the storm finally passed in the late afternoon, Kawao felt hopeful that the missing canoe had weathered the gale and would now head toward the nearest land, aided by the shifting winds. He called for the high priest and instructed him to have his diviners and magicians figure out what had happened to Princess Kelea. Pigs and chickens were sacrificed, prayers were offered in the heiau, and late in the evening, information came through supernatural means that Kelea was still alive. However, this wasn't enough for the king. He demanded more specific details, so a highly sacred kaula was prepared and placed in the anu, a wicker enclosure in the inner court. Eventually, in response to the high priest's inquiries, it revealed that the canoe carrying the princess was safely sailing toward Oahu.
The words of the kaula were repeated to the king, and the next day he despatched a well-manned canoe, in charge of one of his plumed halumanus, or military aids, to find and bring back the lost Kelea. Owing to unfavorable winds or bad management the canoe did not reach Makapuu Point, Oahu, until the fourth day. Proceeding along the northeastern coast of the island, and landing wherever practicable to make inquiries, the easy-going messenger did not arrive at Waialua until two days after the departure of Kelea for Lihue.
The king was told the words of the kaula, and the next day he sent a well-staffed canoe, led by one of his feathered halumanus, or military aides, to find and bring back the lost Kelea. Due to poor winds or mismanagement, the canoe didn't arrive at Makapuu Point, Oahu, until the fourth day. As it moved along the northeastern coast of the island, stopping wherever possible to ask questions, the laid-back messenger didn't reach Waialua until two days after Kelea had left for Lihue.
Learning that the princess had become the wife of Lo-Lale, the disappointed halumanu did not deem it necessary to communicate [242]with her, but briefly paid his respects to the king, to whom he made known the nature of his errand to Oahu, and his resolution to return at once to Maui and acquaint his royal master with the result of his mission.
Learning that the princess had married Lo-Lale, the disappointed halumanu felt it unnecessary to communicate [__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__] with her, but he briefly paid his respects to the king. He informed him about the purpose of his visit to Oahu and his decision to head back to Maui immediately to update his royal master on the outcome of his mission.
Appreciating that, in his anxiety to see his brother properly mated, he had countenanced a proceeding sufficiently discourteous to the moi of Maui to warrant a hostile response, Piliwale treated the halumanu with marked kindness and consideration, and insisted upon sending an escort with him back to Maui, including the bearer of a friendly explanatory message from himself to Kawao. For this delicate service no one could be found so competent as the courtly Kalamakua, who was well versed in the genealogy of the Kalona family, and would be able to satisfactorily, if not quite truthfully, explain why it was that the canoe containing the princess, when driven out to sea, was headed for Oahu instead of Maui when the storm abated.
Realizing that in his eagerness to see his brother happily married he had allowed something quite rude to the people of Maui, which could lead to a hostile reaction, Piliwale treated the halumanu with great kindness and consideration. He insisted on sending an escort back to Maui with him, which included someone to deliver a friendly explanatory message to Kawao from himself. For this delicate task, no one was more suitable than the graceful Kalamakua, who was well-versed in the genealogy of the Kalona family and would be able to explain, although not entirely truthfully, why the canoe carrying the princess, when pushed out to sea, was headed for Oahu instead of Maui once the storm passed.
Kalamakua was accordingly despatched on the mission. Being a much better sailor than the halumanu, he found no difficulty either in parting company with him off the coast of eastern Maui or in reaching Hamakuapoko three or four hours in advance of the party he was courteously escorting thither. This enabled the wily Oahuan to secure an audience with the king, and deliver his message and explanation in full, before the halumanu could land and give his version of the story.
Kalamakua was sent on the mission. Being a much better sailor than the halumanu, he had no trouble separating from him off the coast of eastern Maui and reaching Hamakuapoko three or four hours ahead of the group he was politely escorting. This allowed the clever Oahuan to meet with the king and present his message and explanation completely before the halumanu could arrive and share his side of the story.
Kalamakua’s explanation of the impossibility, after the storm, of reaching in safety any land other than Oahu or Molokai, seemed to be satisfactory; and when he dwelt upon the well-known high rank of Lo-Lale, as recognized by the aha-alii, and referred to his manly bearing, his amiable disposition and the amplitude of his estates, Kawao answered sadly:
Kalamakua’s explanation of how impossible it was, after the storm, to safely reach any land other than Oahu or Molokai seemed convincing. And when he highlighted the well-known high status of Lo-Lale, as acknowledged by the aha-alii, and talked about his strong character, friendly nature, and the vastness of his estates, Kawao responded sadly:
“Then so let it be. It is perhaps the will of the gods. I would have had it otherwise; but be to Kelea and her husband, and to my royal brother the king of Oahu, my messenger of peace.”
“Then let it be. It might be the will of the gods. I would have preferred it differently; but let it be for Kelea and her husband, and for my royal brother, the king of Oahu, my messenger of peace.”
Thanking the moi for his kindly words, Kalamakua took his leave. As he was about to re-embark in the afternoon for Oahu, the discomfited halumanu, having but just then landed, passed him on the beach. Knowing that he had been outwitted, in his wrath he reached for the handle of his knife. But he did not draw it. Kalamakua stopped and promptly answered the challenge; [243]but the halumanu passed on, and with a smile he stepped into his canoe, and a few minutes later was on his way to Oahu with Kawao’s welcome messages of peace.
Thanking the moi for his kind words, Kalamakua took his leave. As he was about to set off again in the afternoon for Oahu, the disgruntled halumanu, who had just arrived, walked by him on the beach. Realizing he had been outsmarted, he angrily reached for the handle of his knife. But he didn't pull it out. Kalamakua paused and confidently responded to the challenge; [__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]but the halumanu continued on, and with a smile, he got into his canoe, and a few minutes later was headed to Oahu with Kawao’s heartfelt messages of peace.
As the years came and went in their quiet home at Lihue, Lo-Lale lost none of his affection for Kelea. No wars distracted the group. Liloa, the son of Kiha and father of Umi, had become the peaceful sovereign of Hawaii; Kahakuma, the ancestor of some of the most distinguished families of the islands, held gentle and intelligent sway in Kauai; Kawao still ruled in Maui, and Piliwale in Oahu.
As the years rolled by in their peaceful home at Lihue, Lo-Lale never lost his love for Kelea. There were no wars to disrupt their lives. Liloa, the son of Kiha and father of Umi, had become the calm ruler of Hawaii; Kahakuma, the ancestor of some of the most prominent families of the islands, had a gentle and wise influence in Kauai; Kawao continued to rule in Maui, and Piliwale in Oahu.
To gratify his wife, Lo-Lale surrounded her with every comfort. The choicest fruits of the island were at her command, and every day fresh fish and other delicacies of the sea were brought to her from the neighboring coasts. In short, everything not tabu to the sex was provided without stint. Summer-houses were constructed for her in the cool recesses of the Waianae Mountains, and a manele, with relays of stout bearers, was always at her service for the briefest journeys. The people of the district were proud of her rank and beauty, and at seasons of hookupu, or gift-making, she was fairly deluged with rare and valuable offerings.
To please his wife, Lo-Lale surrounded her with every comfort. The best fruits from the island were available to her, and every day, fresh fish and other seafood delicacies were brought to her from the nearby shores. In short, everything not tabu for her was provided generously. Summer houses were built for her in the cool areas of the Waianae Mountains, and a manele, with strong bearers, was always ready for her even for the shortest trips. The people of the area took pride in her status and beauty, and during times of hookupu, or gift-giving, she was overwhelmed with rare and valuable gifts.
Yet, with all this affluence of comfort and affection, Kelea became more and more restless and unhappy. Nor did the presence of her children, of whom she had three, seem to render her more contented. She longed for the sea; for the bounding surf which had been the sport of her girlhood; for the white-maned steeds of ocean, which she had so often mounted and fearlessly ridden to the shore; for the thunder of the breakers against the cliffs; for the murmur of the reef-bound wavelets timidly crawling up the beach to kiss and cool her feet; and the more she yearned for her old-time pleasures, the greater became her dissatisfaction with the tamer life and surroundings of Lihue.
Yet, despite all this wealth of comfort and love, Kelea grew increasingly restless and unhappy. The presence of her three children didn’t make her feel any more satisfied. She longed for the sea; for the crashing waves that had been the joy of her youth; for the wild ocean horses she had often ridden fearlessly to the shore; for the roar of the waves crashing against the cliffs; for the gentle, shy waves of the reef that would creep up the beach to touch and cool her feet; and the more she yearned for her past delights, the more she became dissatisfied with the quieter life and surroundings of Lihue.
Knowing her love for the sea, Lo-Lale made occasional excursions with her to the coast, frequently remaining there for days together. Sometimes they visited the east and sometimes the south side of the island; but the place which seemed to please her above all others was Ewa, where Kalamakua made his home. He, too, loved the sea, and during her visits there afforded her every opportunity to indulge her passion for it. Together they had charming sails around the Puuloa (Pearl River) [244]lagoon, and gallant rides over the surf at the entrance. There, and there only, did she seem to recover her spirits; there only did she seem to be happy.
Knowing her love for the sea, Lo-Lale occasionally took trips with her to the coast, often staying there for days at a time. Sometimes they explored the east side and sometimes the south side of the island, but the place she seemed to love most was Ewa, where Kalamakua lived. He also loved the sea, and during her visits, he gave her every chance to indulge her passion for it. Together, they enjoyed beautiful sails around the Puuloa (Pearl River) [__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__] lagoon and adventurous rides over the waves at the entrance. It was there, and only there, that she seemed to lift her spirits; it was there that she seemed truly happy.
This did not escape the notice of Lo-Lale, and a great grief filled his heart as he sometimes thought, in noting her brightened look in the presence of Kalamakua, that it was less the charms of the surf than of his cousin’s handsome face that made the waters of Ewa so attractive to Kelea.
This didn't go unnoticed by Lo-Lale, and he felt a deep sadness in his heart as he sometimes observed her glowing expression when she was with Kalamakua, realizing that it was more his cousin's good looks than the beauty of the surf that made the waters of Ewa so appealing to Kelea.
Life at Lihue finally became so irksome to her, and even the continued kindness of Lo-Lale so unwelcome, that she announced her determination to leave the home of her husband for ever. This resolution was not altogether unexpected by Lo-Lale, for he had not been blind to her growing restlessness and was prepared for the worst; and as the prerogatives of her high rank gave her the undoubted privilege of separation if she desired it, he reluctantly consented to the divorcement. When asked where it was her purpose to go, she answered: “Probably to Maui, to rejoin my brother.”
Life in Lihue became so frustrating for her, and even Lo-Lale's ongoing kindness felt so unwelcome, that she declared her decision to leave her husband's home forever. Lo-Lale wasn't completely surprised by her choice; he had noticed her increasing restlessness and was ready for the worst. Since her high status gave her the clear right to separate if she wanted, he reluctantly agreed to the divorce. When asked where she planned to go, she replied, “Probably to Maui, to reunite with my brother.”
“More probably not beyond Ewa,” was Lo-Lale’s significant reply. “But, no matter where you may go,” he continued, with dignity, “take your departure from Lihue in a manner consistent with your rank. You were received here as became the sister of a king and the wife of the son of Kalona-iki. So would I have you depart. I reproach you with nothing, myself with nothing; therefore let us part in peace.”
“Most likely not past Ewa,” was Lo-Lale’s meaningful response. “But, no matter where you decide to go,” he continued with a sense of dignity, “leave Lihue in a way that reflects your status. You were welcomed here as the sister of a king and the wife of the son of Kalona-iki. That’s how I want you to leave. I blame you for nothing, and I blame myself for nothing; let’s part in peace.”
“We part in peace,” was Kelea’s only answer, and the next morning she quietly took her departure with four or five attendants. A chant expressive of Lo-Lale’s grief at the separation was long after recited, but these lines are all of it that have been preserved:
“We part in peace,” was Kelea’s only response, and the next morning she quietly left with four or five attendants. A chant reflecting Lo-Lale’s sorrow over the separation was recited for a long time after, but these lines are all that have been preserved:
“Farewell, my partner on the lowland plains,
“Goodbye, my companion on the lowland plains,
On the waters of Pohakeo,
On the waters of Pohakeo,
Above Kanehoa,
Above Kanehoa,
On the dark mountain spur of Mauna-una!
On the dark mountain ridge of Mauna-una!
O Lihue, she is gone!
Oh Lihue, she's gone!
Sniff the sweet scent of the grass,
Sniff the sweet smell of the grass,
The sweet scent of the wild vines
The sweet smell of the wild vines
That are twisted by Waikoloa,
Twisted by Waikoloa,
By the winds of Waiopua,
By the winds of Waiopua,
My flower!
My flower!
As if a mote were in my eye, [245]
As if there were something in my eye, [__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]
The pupil of my eye is troubled;
The pupil of my eye is troubled;
Dimness covers my eyes. Woe is me!”
Dimness covers my eyes. Woe is me!
Leaving Lihue, Kelea descended to Ewa, and, skirting the head of the lagoon by way of Halawa, on the afternoon of the second day arrived at the entrance, immediately opposite Puualoa. There she found a large number of nobles and retainers of Kalamakua, the high chief of the district, amusing themselves in the surf. As she had not seen the salt water for some months, Kelea could not resist the temptation to indulge in her old pastime, and, borrowing a surf-board from one of the bathers, plunged into the sea, and soon joined the party of surf-riders beyond the breakers.
Leaving Lihue, Kelea made her way down to Ewa, and after skirting the head of the lagoon via Halawa, she arrived at the entrance on the afternoon of the second day, right across from Puualoa. There, she found many nobles and retainers of Kalamakua, the high chief of the area, enjoying themselves in the surf. Since she hadn’t seen the ocean in months, Kelea couldn’t resist the urge to dive back into her favorite activity. She borrowed a surfboard from one of the bathers, jumped into the water, and soon joined the group of surfers past the breaking waves.
Soon a huge roller made its appearance, and all mounted it and started for the shore. The race was exciting, for the most expert swimmers in the district were among the contestants; but in grace, daring and skill Kelea very plainly excelled them all, and was loudly cheered as she touched the shore. Kalamakua was reposing in the shade, not far away, and, hearing the tumult of voices, inquired the cause. He was told that a beautiful woman from Lihue had beaten all the chiefs at surf-riding, and the people could not restrain their enthusiasm. Satisfied that there was but one Lihue woman who could perform such a feat, and that she must be Kelea, the wife of his cousin Lo-Lale, he proceeded to the beach just as a second trial had resulted in a triumph to the fair contestant quite as emphatic as the first. As she touched the shore Kalamakua threw his kihei (mantle) over her shoulders and respectfully greeted her. Kelea then informed him that she had formally separated from her husband and was about to embark for Maui.
Soon a big roller showed up, and everyone jumped on it and started heading for the shore. The race was thrilling, as the most skilled swimmers in the area were competing; but in grace, daring, and skill, Kelea clearly outshone them all, and she was cheered loudly as she reached the shore. Kalamakua was resting in the shade nearby and, hearing the noise of the crowd, asked what was happening. He was told that a beautiful woman from Lihue had beaten all the chiefs at surf riding, and the people couldn’t contain their excitement. Knowing there was only one woman from Lihue who could achieve such a feat, and that it must be Kelea, the wife of his cousin Lo-Lale, he made his way to the beach just as a second round resulted in another overwhelming victory for her. As she touched the shore, Kalamakua threw his kihei (mantle) over her shoulders and greeted her respectfully. Kelea then informed him that she had formally separated from her husband and was about to leave for Maui.
“If that is the case,” said Kalamakua, gently taking her by the arm, as if to restrain her, “you will go no farther than Ewa. When I went in search of a wife for Lo-Lale, I promised that if he objected to the woman I brought or recommended, or she to him, I would take her myself, if she so willed. You have objected to him. Is Kalamakua better to your liking?”
“If that’s how it is,” said Kalamakua, gently taking her by the arm as if to hold her back, “you won’t go any farther than Ewa. When I looked for a wife for Lo-Lale, I promised that if he didn’t like the woman I brought or recommended, or she didn’t like him, I would take her myself, if she wanted. You’ve expressed your objection to him. Do you prefer Kalamakua instead?”
“I will remain at Ewa,” was the satisfactory answer.
“I'll stay at Ewa,” was the satisfactory response.
“Yes, and you should have gone there instead of to Lihue, when you landed at Waialua years ago,” continued Kalamakua, earnestly.
“Yes, and you should have gone there instead of to Lihue when you landed at Waialua years ago,” Kalamakua continued, earnestly.
“My thought is the same,” was Kelea’s frank avowal; and she [246]beckoned to her attendants, and told Kalamakua that she was ready to follow him.
“My thoughts are the same,” Kelea openly admitted; and she [__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]signaled to her attendants and informed Kalamakua that she was ready to go with him.
Did he expect her at the beach that morning? Tradition offers no direct answer to the question, but significantly mentions that Kalamakua spent one or two days at Lihue not long before, that houses were in readiness for her at Ewa, and that she was borne thither on a manele, escorted by the principal chiefs and nobles of the district.
Did he expect her at the beach that morning? Tradition doesn’t give a clear answer to that, but it’s worth noting that Kalamakua spent a day or two in Lihue not long before, that homes were prepared for her in Ewa, and that she was taken there on a manele, accompanied by the main chiefs and nobles of the area.
Learning, not long after, that Kelea had become the wife of Kalamakua, the gentle-hearted Lo-Lale sent to her a present of fruits and a message of peace and forgiveness; but it was his request that they might never meet again, and he spent the remainder of his days in Lihue, caring for the welfare of his people and dreaming in the shadows of the hills of Kaala.
Learning soon after that Kelea had married Kalamakua, the kind-hearted Lo-Lale sent her a gift of fruits along with a message of peace and forgiveness. However, he asked that they never meet again, and he spent the rest of his days in Lihue, looking after his people's well-being and dreaming in the shadows of the hills of Kaala.
But little more need here be told. Kelea and Kalamakua lived happily together, and were blessed with a daughter, Laielohelohe, who inherited her mother’s beauty, and became the wife of her cousin Piilani, son and successor of Kawao, moi of Maui; but it was not until after the betrothal of the cousins, which was agreed to in their childhood, that Kawao fully forgave his volatile sister for marrying a prince of Oahu without his consent.
But not much more needs to be said here. Kelea and Kalamakua were happy together and had a daughter, Laielohelohe, who inherited her mother's beauty. She became the wife of her cousin Piilani, the son and successor of Kawao, the king of Maui. However, it wasn't until after the cousins' betrothal, which was arranged during their childhood, that Kawao completely forgave his unpredictable sister for marrying a prince of Oahu without his approval.
Piikea, one of the daughters of Piilani and Laielohelohe, became in after-time the wife of the great Umi, of Hawaii, and through her great-grandson, I, the ancestress of Kalakaua, the present sovereign of the group. Lono-a-Pii, another of their children, succeeded his father as moi of Maui.
Piikea, one of the daughters of Piilani and Laielohelohe, later became the wife of the great Umi from Hawaii, and through her great-grandson, I, she is the ancestress of Kalakaua, the current sovereign of the group. Lono-a-Pii, another of their children, took over as moi of Maui after his father.
As a further example of the manner in which the blood of the reigning families of the several islands of the group was commingled in the early periods of their history, it may be mentioned that Kaholi, a son of Lo-Lale and Kelea, was united in marriage to Kohipa, one of the two daughters of Piliwale; while the other, Kukaniloko, who followed her father as sovereign of Oahu, became the wife of Luaia, grandson of Kakaalaneo, the joint ruler of Maui during the reign of the unfortunate Kakae. [247]
As another example of how the royal bloodlines of the islands mixed in their early history, it’s worth noting that Kaholi, the son of Lo-Lale and Kelea, married Kohipa, one of Piliwale's two daughters. The other daughter, Kukaniloko, who succeeded her father as the ruler of Oahu, married Luaia, the grandson of Kakaalaneo, who co-ruled Maui during the time of the ill-fated Kakae. [__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]
Umi, the Peasant Prince of Hawaii.
[248]
[__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]
CHARACTERS.
- Kiha, king of Hawaii.
- Ika, chief of a band of demi-demons.
- Puapua-lenalena, a demon dog.
- Liloa, afterwards king of Hawaii.
- Pineapple, wife of Liloa.
- Haka, son and successor of Liloa.
- Kapukini, daughter of Liloa.
- Akahia-kuleana, a peasant girl loved by Liloa.
- Umi, son of Akahia-kuleana.
- Maakao, husband of Akahia-kuleana.
- Kukulani, wife of Hakau.
- Kulamea, the betrothed of Umi.
- Maukaleoleo, the giant friend of Umi.
- Laeanui, the high-priest of Hawaii.
- Kaoleioko, a warrior-priest.
-
Nuna and priests of Waipio. Kalohe, -
Omaukamau, brother of Kulamea, and lieutenants of Umi. Piimaiwaa,
[249]
[__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]
UMI, THE PEASANT PRINCE OF HAWAII.
UMI, THE PEASANT PRINCE OF HAWAII.
THE HISTORIC LEGENDS OF LILOA, HAKAU, AND THE “KIHA-PU.”
THE HISTORIC LEGENDS OF LILOA, HAKAU, AND THE "KIHA-PU."
I.
Nowhere on the island of Hawaii do the palms grow taller than in the valleys of Waipio, and nowhere is the foliage greener, for every month in the year they are refreshed with rains, and almost hourly cooled in the shadows of passing clouds.
Nowhere on the island of Hawaii do the palms grow taller than in the valleys of Waipio, and nowhere is the foliage greener, because every month of the year they are rejuvenated by rain, and almost every hour they are cooled by the shadows of passing clouds.
And sweet are the waters that sing through the valleys of Waipio. They are fed by the tears of the trade-winds gathered in the shaded gorges of the mountains where they find their source, and are speeded to the ocean by hurrying and impatient cascades through black channels fretted with bowlders and fringed with everlasting green.
And sweet are the waters that flow through the valleys of Waipio. They are fed by the tears of the trade winds collected in the shaded gorges of the mountains where they originate, and rush to the ocean through fast-moving cascades along dark channels filled with boulders and lined with lush greenery.
Tradition says the waters of Waipio, after their first descent from the hills, at one time crawled quite sluggishly to the sea; but a great fish—larger than the island of Kaula—whose home was in the depths off the coast of Hamakua, required more fresh water than was furnished by the principal stream of the valley, and Kane, who was friendly with the monster, increased the volume of the little river by creating new springs at its sources, and accelerating the flow by raising the bed in places and providing additional riffles and cascades. The great fish no longer frequents that part of the coast of Hamakua, but the cascades and riffles remain, with the broad finger-marks of Kane upon the rocks hurled into the gorge to create them.
Tradition says that the waters of Waipio, after they first flowed down from the hills, once moved quite slowly to the sea; but a giant fish—bigger than the island of Kaula—made its home in the depths off the coast of Hamakua and needed more fresh water than what the main stream of the valley provided. Kane, who was friendly with the creature, increased the river's flow by creating new springs at its sources and speeding up the flow by raising the riverbed in spots and adding more riffles and cascades. The giant fish no longer visits that part of the Hamakua coast, but the cascades and riffles are still there, along with the broad finger-marks of Kane on the rocks that were tossed into the gorge to make them.
Although but thinly populated now, Waipio was for many generations in the past a place of great political and social importance, and the tabus of its great temple were the most sacred in all Hawaii. For two hundred years or more it was the residence [250]of the kings of that island, and was the scene of royal pageants, priestly power and knightly adventure, as well as of many sanguinary battles.
Although it's not very populated now, Waipio was for many generations in the past a place of significant political and social importance, and the tabus of its great temple were the most sacred in all of Hawaii. For over two hundred years, it was the home [__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__] of the island's kings and hosted royal ceremonies, priestly authority, and noble quests, along with many bloody battles.
Waipio valley was first occupied as a royal residence by Kahaimoelea, near the middle or close of the thirteenth century, and so continued until after the death of Liloa, about the end of the fifteenth century. For some reason not clearly stated the successor of Liloa removed his court from Waipio to the opposite coast of the island. Although the glory of the old capital departed with its abandonment as the royal residence, the tabus of its great temple of Paakalani continued to command supreme respect until as late as 1791, when the heiau was destroyed, with all its sacred symbols and royal associations, by the confederated forces of Maui and Kauai in their war with Kamehameha I.
Waipio Valley was first used as a royal residence by Kahaimoelea around the middle or late thirteenth century, and it stayed that way until after the death of Liloa, around the end of the fifteenth century. For reasons not clearly explained, Liloa's successor moved the court from Waipio to the other side of the island. Even though the glory of the old capital faded with its abandonment as the royal residence, the taboos of its great temple, Paakalani, continued to be held in high regard until as recently as 1791, when the heiau was destroyed, along with all its sacred symbols and royal connections, by the united forces of Maui and Kauai in their battle against Kamehameha I.
Although the story about to be related opens in the reign of Liloa, which closed with his death in about 1485, it is pertinent to refer, as briefly as the strange circumstances of the time will permit, to the father of that sovereign—the great Kiha—concerning whose career many curious traditions survive. The reign of Kiha was long and peaceful. He was endowed not only with marked abilities as a ruler, but with unusual physical strength and skill in the use of arms. In addition to these natural advantages and accomplishments, which gave him the respect and fear of his subjects, it was popularly believed that he possessed supernatural resources, and could call to his aid, in an emergency, weird forces in opposition to which mere human endeavor would be weak and fruitless. Under the circumstances, it is not strange that the chiefs of the neighboring islands deemed it prudent to court his friendship, and that no great wars distracted the kingdom during his reign.
Although the story about to be told begins during the reign of Liloa, which ended with his death around 1485, it's important to briefly mention his father—the great Kiha—about whom many fascinating traditions remain. Kiha's reign was long and peaceful. He had not only strong leadership skills but also exceptional physical strength and expertise in combat. Along with these natural talents, which earned him respect and fear from his subjects, people believed he had supernatural powers and could summon strange forces in times of need, making human efforts seem weak and pointless. Given this, it's no surprise that the chiefs of neighboring islands sought his friendship and that there were no major wars during his reign.
Among the means at the command of Kiha for summoning to his assistance the invisible forces subject to his call, the most potential was a curious war-trumpet, the notes of which, when blown by Kiha, could be heard a distance of ten miles, even from Waipio to Waimea. According to the character of the blast, its voice was either a summons to unseen powers, a rallying-cry to the people, or a dreadful challenge to battle. This trumpet was a large sea-shell. It was a native of foreign waters, and another like it could not be found in the Hawaiian group. It was ornamented with rows of the teeth of distinguished chiefs [251]slain in battle, and could be so blown as to bring forth the dying groans or battle cries of all of them in dreadful diapason.
Among the tools Kiha used to call upon the invisible forces at his command, the most powerful was a unique war trumpet. When Kiha blew into it, its sound could reach up to ten miles, from Waipio to Waimea. Depending on how it was played, it could either summon unseen powers, rally the people, or issue a terrifying challenge for battle. This trumpet was made from a large sea shell, unique to foreign waters, and no other like it could be found in the Hawaiian Islands. It was decorated with rows of teeth from notable chiefs who had been killed in battle, and when blown, it could mimic the dying groans or battle cries of all of them in a chilling harmony. [__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]
Many legends are related of the manner in which Kiha became possessed of this marvellous shell, but the most probable explanation is that it was brought from some one of the Samoan or Society Islands three or four centuries before, and had been retained in the reigning family of Hawaii as a charm against certain evils. In the hands of the crafty Kiha, however, it developed new powers and became an object of awe in the royal household. Whatever may have been the beneficent or diabolic virtues of this shell-clarion of Kiha—of the Kiha-pu, as it is called—its existence, at least, was a reality, since it is to-day one of the attractions of the Royal Hawaiian Museum of Honolulu, brought down by the Kamehameha branch of the Kiha line. When vigorously blown it still responds in sonorous voice, suggestive of the roar of breakers around the jutting cliffs of Hamakua; but Lono no longer heeds the mandate of its call, and brown-armed warriors come no more at its bidding. Of the many strange stories still retained of the Kiha-pu, one is here given, nearly in the language in which it has come down in Hawaiian chant and song. a story of the kiha-pu.
Many legends describe how Kiha came to possess this amazing shell, but the most likely explanation is that it was brought from one of the Samoan or Society Islands three or four centuries ago and had been kept in Hawaii’s ruling family as a charm against certain dangers. In the hands of the clever Kiha, however, it took on new powers and became an object of reverence in the royal household. Whatever beneficial or harmful qualities the shell-clarion of Kiha—known as the Kiha-pu—may have had, its existence is a fact, as it is still one of the highlights of the Royal Hawaiian Museum of Honolulu, passed down by the Kamehameha branch of the Kiha line. When blown forcefully, it still produces a resonant sound, reminiscent of the crashing waves against the cliffs of Hamakua; but Lono no longer responds to its call, and brown-armed warriors no longer arrive at its command. Among the many strange stories about the Kiha-pu that are still shared, one is presented here, nearly in the original language of Hawaiian chant and song. a story of the kiha-pu.
For a period of eight years, during the reign of Kiha, the Kiha-pu was missing from the cabinet of royal charms and treasures. A new temple was to be dedicated to Lono, not far from Waipio, and feathers of the mamo, oo and other birds were required to weave into royal mantles and redecorate Kaili and other gods of the king’s household. But one of the Kahu alii, constituting the five classes of guardians of the royal person, was permitted to touch the Kiha-pu, nor did any other know of its depository in the king’s chamber. His name was Hiolo. He was the son of a distinguished chief, and his office was that of ipukuha, or spittoon-bearer—a position of peculiar responsibility, which could be filled only by persons of noble blood and undoubted attachment to their sovereign.
For eight years, during Kiha's reign, the Kiha-pu was absent from the royal charms and treasures cabinet. A new temple was set to be dedicated to Lono, not far from Waipio, and feathers from the mamo, oo, and other birds were needed to weave into royal cloaks and redecorate Kaili and the other gods in the king's household. However, only one of the Kahu alii, part of the five classes of guardians for the royal family, was allowed to touch the Kiha-pu, and no one else knew where it was kept in the king's chamber. His name was Hiolo. He was the son of a prominent chief, and his role was that of ipukuha, or spittoon-bearer—a position of special responsibility, which could only be held by people of noble lineage and unwavering loyalty to their king.
Desirous of hastily assembling and despatching to the neighboring sea-shores and mountains a large party of feather-hunters, the king, reclining in the shade of the palms in front of the [252]royal mansion, commanded Hiolo to bring to him the Kiha-pu, that he might with a single blast summon his subjects throughout the valleys of Waipio. Hiolo proceeded to the chamber of the king, and a few minutes after returned pale and speechless, and threw himself at the feet of Kiha, tearing his hair, lacerating his flesh with his nails, and exhibiting other evidences of extreme agony and desperation.
Eager to quickly gather and send a large group of feather hunters to the nearby coast and mountains, the king, lounging in the shade of the palms in front of the [__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]royal mansion, ordered Hiolo to bring him the Kiha-pu so that he could call his subjects across the valleys of Waipio with a single blast. Hiolo went to the king’s chamber and returned a few minutes later, pale and speechless, collapsing at Kiha's feet, tearing his hair, scratching his flesh with his nails, and showing other signs of severe pain and despair.
Nothing ever startled a sovereign of the line of Pili. Under all circumstances he acted with apparent deliberation. It was a natural trait, strengthened by example and education.
Nothing ever surprised a ruler from the Pili lineage. In every situation, he acted with obvious thoughtfulness. This was a natural quality, enhanced by his upbringing and the examples set for him.
Kiha calmly regarded his ipukuha for a moment, and then said:
Kiha calmly looked at his ipukuha for a moment, and then said:
“What spirit of evil possesses you? Rise, Hiolo, and speak!”
“What evil spirit is haunting you? Get up, Hiolo, and speak!”
Hiolo rose to his feet, and, with a look of despair, exclaimed:
Hiolo stood up, and with a look of despair, said:
“It is no fault of mine; but tear out the tongue that tells you the Kiha-pu is gone!”
“It’s not my fault; just tear out the tongue that tells you the Kiha-pu is gone!”
Without replying, the king, with a terrible scowl upon his face, rose and strode into his chamber. Parting the curtains of kapa which secluded the back portion of the apartment, he stepped to an elaborately carved and ornamented ipu, a container shaped and hollowed from the trunk of a koa tree. He found the vessel open, and beside it on the matted floor the several folds of kapa in which the Kiha-pu had been wrapped; but instead of the sacred trumpet he discovered at the bottom of the ipu a hideously-carved head and face of stone. The shell had been adroitly abstracted, but the image that had been left in its place saved the life of Hiolo, for by it Kiha discerned that the theft and substitution had been achieved through supernatural agencies.
Without answering, the king, with a fierce scowl on his face, got up and walked into his room. Pulling back the curtains of kapa that hid the back part of the space, he approached an intricately carved and decorated ipu, a container made from the trunk of a koa tree. He found the vessel open, and on the matted floor were the several folds of kapa that had wrapped the Kiha-pu; but instead of the sacred trumpet, he discovered a hideously carved stone head and face at the bottom of the ipu. The shell had been skillfully taken away, but the image left in its place saved Hiolo's life, for Kiha realized that the theft and substitution had been carried out through supernatural means.
The loss of the Kiha-pu was a great grief to the king. But he did not deem it prudent to admit that he no longer possessed the sacred talisman, and therefore announced to Hiolo that the trumpet had been found. Under the pretence that it had been carelessly misplaced by Hiolo, Kiha declared that he would be its sole guardian thereafter.
The loss of the Kiha-pu deeply saddened the king. However, he didn't think it wise to admit that he no longer had the sacred talisman, so he told Hiolo that the trumpet had been found. Pretending that it had been carelessly left behind by Hiolo, Kiha declared that he would be the only one to guard it from then on.
There was great joy at the court when it was learned from the lips of the king that the Kiha-pu had been found; yet it was observed that it was not used to summon the feather-hunters, and after the sun went down that evening many thought they faintly heard the music of its voice coming in [253]from the sea. And the king detected the familiar sound, and, fearful that others might hear it as well, called together his poets and hula dancers, and permitted their boisterous merriment far into the night.
There was a lot of joy at the court when the king announced that the Kiha-pu had been found; however, it was noted that it wasn't used to call the feather-hunters. After the sun set that evening, many believed they could barely hear the music of its voice coming in [__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]from the sea. The king recognized the familiar sound and, worried that others might hear it too, gathered his poets and hula dancers, allowing their loud celebrations to continue late into the night.
Early in the evening, while the palace grounds were a scene of revelry, the king repaired alone to the great temple of Paakalani, not far from the royal mansion, to consult with the high-priest and put in motion the weird forces of the heiau for the recovery of the Kiha-pu. He took with him the image left in the ipu, as a possible means of assistance, and enjoined a solemn secrecy upon every kahuna taken into the confidence of the high-priest.
Early in the evening, while the palace grounds were filled with celebration, the king went alone to the great temple of Paakalani, close to the royal mansion, to consult with the high priest and activate the mysterious forces of the heiau for the recovery of the Kiha-pu. He brought with him the image left in the ipu, as a potential aid, and insisted on strict secrecy from every kahuna involved in the high priest's confidence.
The most noted kilos, seers and prophets of the temple were ordered to apply their arts, and a kaula, inspired by incantation, was questioned from within the anu of the inner sanctuary. The clouds were noted, the flights of birds observed, and the dreams of drugged priests interpreted, but nothing satisfactory was developed. Prayers were offered to the gods, sacrifices were laid upon the altar, and the vitals of freshly-slain pigs and fowls were carefully examined; but the only information obtained was that the Kiha-pu had been stolen by the chief of a band of demi-demons, or human beings controlled by evil spirits; that it was no longer on the island of Hawaii, but somewhere on the ocean beyond the eight Hawaiian seas; that it would one day be recovered by a being without hands and wearing neither mantle nor maro, but not until a cocoa-tree, planted in the next full of the moon, should yield its first fruit, to be eaten by the king.
The most notable kilos, seers, and prophets of the temple were instructed to use their skills, and a kaula, inspired by incantation, was questioned from within the anu of the inner sanctuary. The clouds were observed, bird flights were noted, and the dreams of drugged priests were interpreted, but nothing useful emerged. Prayers were offered to the gods, sacrifices were made on the altar, and the guts of freshly slaughtered pigs and birds were carefully examined; but the only information gathered was that the Kiha-pu had been taken by the leader of a group of demi-demons, or humans possessed by evil spirits; that it was no longer on the island of Hawaii, but somewhere in the ocean beyond the eight Hawaiian seas; that it would eventually be recovered by a being without hands and wearing neither a mantle nor maro, but not until a cocoa tree, planted during the next full moon, should bear its first fruit, to be eaten by the king.
So far as concerned the theft of the Kiha-pu, the seers of the temple had spoken correctly. For some months a dense forest in the mountains back of Waipio, interspersed with marshes and patches of rank undergrowth, had been inhabited by a small band of wild-looking men, who boldly helped themselves to the pigs, fowls and fruits of the neighboring farmers, and held noisy festivals almost nightly within the gloomy recesses of their mountain retreat. They were said to be only half-human, and capable of assuming other than their natural forms. They had occasionally visited Waipio in parties of from two to five, and entertained the people by telling fortunes and exhibiting strange feats of posturing and legerdemain. In the guise of an old [254]woman the chief of the band had entered the royal mansion and stolen the Kiha-pu, leaving in its place the hideous stone image mentioned; then, as if the object of their stay near Waipio had been attained, the entire band embarked the evening of the next day in stolen canoes for Kauai. When safely off the coast of Hamakua the demon-chief had defiantly wound a blast from the Kiha-pu, which the king had sought to drown in the tumult of the hula.
As for the theft of the Kiha-pu, the temple seers were right. For several months, a dense forest in the mountains behind Waipio, filled with marshes and thick underbrush, had been home to a small group of wild-looking men who boldly took pigs, chickens, and fruits from local farmers. They held loud parties almost every night in their mountain hideout. People said they were only half-human and could change into other forms. They had occasionally come to Waipio in groups of two to five, entertaining everyone by telling fortunes and performing strange tricks. Disguised as an old [__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]woman, the leader of the group entered the royal mansion and stole the Kiha-pu, leaving behind the ugly stone image mentioned earlier. Then, as if they had achieved their goal near Waipio, the whole group set off the next evening in stolen canoes for Kauai. Once safely away from the coast of Hamakua, the demon-leader defiantly blew a blast from the Kiha-pu, which the king had tried to drown out with the noise of the hula.

Type of Scenery.
Scenery Type.
Kiha departed gloomily from the temple. The loss of the sacred trumpet afflicted him sorely. It had long been an heirloom in the royal family of Hawaii, and its powers had been increased during his reign. In obedience to the revelation of a kaula of great sanctity, he had secretly deposited it in a cave near the summit of Mauna Kea and retired to a valley below. Near the middle of the following night a sound unearthly and terrible came echoing down the mountain-side, followed by a hurricane which uprooted trees and tore great rocks from their fastenings and hurled them into the gorges below. The earth trembled as if a volcano was about to burst forth, and a ruddy light hung about the summit. The sound ceased, the wind fell to a whisper, and Kiha rose to his feet in the darkness and said: “It is well. The great Lono has kept faith. He has blown the sacred trumpet, and henceforth it will have the voice of a god!” The next morning he repaired to the cave, and found the shell, not where he had left it, but on the top of a huge rock with which the entrance had been for ever closed. He raised the trumpet to his lips, and such sound as his heart desired came forth at the bidding of his breath. He breathed a simple call to his subjects, and it was heard the distance of a day’s journey. He gave a battle-blast, and his ears were stunned with the mingled cries and groans of conflict. He ventured an appeal to the unseen, and to a weird music around him rose gnomes, fairies and grinning monsters. He returned elated to the palace, and more and more, as its strange voices were heard, did the Kiha-pu become an object of awe and wonder.
Kiha left the temple feeling sad. The loss of the sacred trumpet weighed heavily on him. It had been a treasured heirloom in the royal family of Hawaii for a long time, and its powers had grown during his rule. Following the guidance of a highly revered kaula, he had secretly placed it in a cave near the peak of Mauna Kea and moved to a valley below. In the middle of the following night, an otherworldly and terrifying sound echoed down the mountainside, followed by a storm that uprooted trees and tore massive rocks from their places, hurling them into the gorges below. The ground shook as if a volcano were about to erupt, and a reddish light lingered around the summit. The sound stopped, the wind softened to a whisper, and Kiha stood up in the darkness and said, “It’s okay. The great Lono has kept his promise. He has sounded the sacred trumpet, and from now on it will carry the voice of a god!” The next morning, he went back to the cave and found the shell not where he had left it, but on top of a large rock that had permanently blocked the entrance. He lifted the trumpet to his lips, and the sound that came forth was exactly what his heart desired. He made a simple call to his people, and it could be heard a day's journey away. He gave a battle blast, and his ears were filled with the mix of cries and groans of battle. He made an appeal to the unseen, and from the eerie music around him, gnomes, fairies, and grinning monsters emerged. He returned to the palace feeling uplifted, and as the strange voices were heard more frequently, the Kiha-pu became an object of awe and wonder.
Although he took every possible precaution to keep from the people all knowledge of the loss of the Kiha-pu, the king had little faith in the assurances of the seers of the great temple that it would in time be recovered. The conditions of its recovery [255]were too vague, distant and unsatisfactory to be entitled to serious consideration. However, within a few days, with his own hands he planted a cocoa-tree near the door of his chamber, and had a strong fence placed around it. He visited the spot daily and saw that the ground was kept moist, and in due time a healthy shoot came forth to reward his watchfulness. The members of the royal household wondered at the interest taken by the king in a simple cocoa sprout; but when it was intimated that he was making a new experiment in planting, his care of the little tree ceased to attract remark.
Although he did everything he could to keep the news of the loss of the Kiha-pu from the people, the king didn't really believe the assurances from the seers of the big temple that it would eventually be found. The conditions for its recovery [__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__] were too vague, far-off, and unsatisfying to take seriously. However, within a few days, he planted a cocoa tree near his room and had a sturdy fence built around it. He visited the spot every day to make sure the soil was kept moist, and in time, a healthy shoot emerged as a reward for his attention. The members of the royal household were surprised by the king's interest in a simple cocoa sprout; but once it was suggested that he was trying out something new with planting, his care for the little tree stopped attracting attention.
And now, while the king is anxiously watching the growth of his cocoa-tree, and carefully guarding it from accident and blight, let us follow the travels of the Kiha-pu. Instead of sailing for Kauai through the island channels, the band of demi-demons took a northwest course, intending to reach their destination without touching at any intermediate point. The powers of the Kiha-pu were known to them, and their chief amused himself and his graceless companions by testing its virtues. When off the coast of Maui a blast of the trumpet brought near Ukanipo, a terrible shark-god, sent by Kuula, the powerful but exacting god of the fishermen of that island. On a jutting headland could be seen a heiau dedicated to him and his wife, Hina. Hundreds of sharks followed in the train of Ukanipo. They surrounded the canoes and lashed the sea into foam. Separating, they formed a great circle around the little fleet, and, swiftly approaching, drove a school of flying-fish across the canoes, many striking the sails and falling into the open boats and thus providing an opportune supply of favorite food.
And now, while the king is anxiously watching the growth of his cocoa tree and carefully protecting it from accidents and disease, let’s follow the journey of the Kiha-pu. Instead of sailing for Kauai through the island channels, the group of demi-demons took a northwest route, planning to reach their destination without stopping at any intermediate points. They knew the powers of the Kiha-pu, and their leader entertained himself and his reckless companions by testing its abilities. When they were off the coast of Maui, a blast of the trumpet summoned Ukanipo, a fierce shark god sent by Kuula, the powerful but demanding god of the fishermen on that island. On a jutting headland, a heiau dedicated to him and his wife, Hina, could be seen. Hundreds of sharks followed Ukanipo. They surrounded the canoes and whipped the sea into foam. Separating, they formed a large circle around the small fleet, and, quickly approaching, pushed a school of flying fish across the canoes, many slamming into the sails and falling into the open boats, thus providing a timely supply of their favorite food.
Sighting Molokai, they thought of landing to replenish their water-calabashes; but as the coast was rugged and the wind unfavorable, a blast of the trumpet was blown to Kuluiau, the goddess of rain. Instantly there was a commotion in the heavens. Black clouds began to gather around them, and they had barely time to arrange their kapa sheds and funnels before the rain poured down in torrents and filled their calabashes to overflowing.
Spotting Molokai, they considered landing to refill their water containers; however, since the coast was rough and the wind was against them, they sounded a trumpet to Kuluiau, the goddess of rain. Immediately, there was a stir in the sky. Dark clouds started to form around them, and they barely had time to set up their kapa shelters and funnels before the rain came pouring down in buckets, filling their containers to the brim.
Believing the Kiha-pu would bring them anything they desired, and returning thanks for nothing received, when off the northern coast of Molokai, near Kaulapapa, they sounded a call to Laamaomao, god of the winds, who since the days of Moikeha, more than two centuries before, had occupied a cave on that island. [256]Enraged at an appeal for favoring winds from such a source, Laamaomao opened the mouth of the ipu in which he kept the winds imprisoned, and turned it toward the sea. A few minutes after a hot, fierce hurricane struck the canoes of the miscreants, upsetting two of them and tearing their sails in tatters. The chief had sufficient presence of mind to call through the trumpet for Maikahulipu, the god who assists in righting upset canoes, and the foundered boats were soon restored to their proper positions and partially freed from water. But there was no abatement in the violence of the wind. For more than a day and a night the canoes were driven before it almost with the speed of a shark, until finally their drenched and wearied occupants heard before them through the darkness the sound of breakers against a rock-bound shore. The danger was imminent, for paddles were useless. Raising the trumpet to his lips, the chief called for Uhumakaikai, a powerful fish-god. No response came, and the cliffs frowned before him as he hastily trumpeted for Apukohai, another fish-god of Kauai, whose acts were usually cruel and malicious. The spray of shattered waves against the rocks began to wet the canoes, when they were seized by a force unseen, drawn away from the cliffs, swept around a northward point, and flung by the waves upon a sandy beach not far from Koloa.
Believing that the Kiha-pu would grant them anything they wanted and giving thanks for nothing they received, they called out to Laamaomao, the god of the winds, while off the northern coast of Molokai, near Kaulapapa. [__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__] Laamaomao, furious at such a request from that group, opened the mouth of the ipu, where he kept the winds trapped, and directed it toward the sea. Moments later, a hot, raging hurricane hit the canoes of the offenders, capsizing two of them and shredding their sails. The chief, keeping his wits about him, called through the trumpet for Maikahulipu, the god who helps to right overturned canoes, and soon the sunken boats were restored to their correct positions and partially drained of water. However, the violence of the wind showed no signs of letting up. For more than a day and a night, the canoes raced forward almost as fast as a shark, until their soaked and exhausted occupants finally heard the sound of waves crashing against a rocky shore up ahead. The situation was dire, as paddles were useless. Raising the trumpet to his lips, the chief called for Uhumakaikai, a powerful fish-god. But there was no reply, and the cliffs loomed ominously as he quickly called for Apukohai, another fish-god from Kauai, known for his cruel and vindictive nature. As the spray from the crashing waves began to splash onto the canoes, they were suddenly pulled away from the cliffs by an unseen force, swept around a northern point, and hurled by the waves onto a sandy beach not far from Koloa.
Thus escaping with their lives, the party traveled overland and joined a band of congenial spirits in the mountains back of Waimea, where they remained until they were driven from the island for their misdemeanors. Leaving Kauai, they crossed the channel, and, after moving from place to place for some years, finally took up their abode in a secluded spot near Waolani, on the island of Oahu.
Thus escaping with their lives, the group traveled overland and joined a friendly bunch in the mountains behind Waimea, where they stayed until they were forced off the island for their misdeeds. Leaving Kauai, they crossed the channel, and after moving around for a few years, they eventually settled in a hidden spot near Waolani, on the island of Oahu.
In the possession of the Kiha-pu, Ika, the chief of the band, who claimed it as his individual property, became cruel and dictatorial to his companions. He esteemed himself little less than a god, and demanded a full half of all the earnings and pilferings of his associates. As the Kiha-pu was the cause of this exaction, one of the friends of Ika, not daring to destroy or purloin the shell, resolved to despoil it of its magic powers. To this end, with great offerings of pigs and fowls, he consulted a priest of Lono at Waianae, and was told that a tabu mark, placed somewhere on the shell with the approval of Lono, would accomplish [257]what was desired. As the priest alone could place the mark upon the shell, he consented to visit Waolani, and remain in the neighborhood until the trumpet could be brought to him. Everything having been arranged, one evening Ika, without great persuasion, was made drunk with awa, when the shell was stolen and conveyed to the priest, who, with a point of flint, hastily scratched near the outer rim a pea mark, or tabu cross, meantime burning incense and chanting a low prayer to Lono.
In the possession of the Kiha-pu, Ika, the leader of the group, who considered it his personal property, became harsh and authoritarian toward his friends. He regarded himself as almost god-like and demanded half of all the profits and stolen goods from his companions. Since the Kiha-pu was the source of this demand, one of Ika’s friends, not wanting to destroy or steal the shell, decided to strip it of its magical powers. To do this, he made significant offerings of pigs and chickens and consulted a priest of Lono in Waianae. The priest told him that a tabu mark, placed on the shell with Lono's approval, would achieve what he wanted. Since only the priest could place the mark on the shell, he agreed to go to Waolani and stay nearby until the shell could be brought to him. Once everything was set, one evening, Ika was easily made drunk with awa, and during this time, the shell was stolen and taken to the priest. Using a flint point, he quickly scratched a pea mark, or tabu cross, near the outer rim, while burning incense and softly chanting a prayer to Lono.
“Can its powers be restored?” inquired the friend of Ika, as the tabued trumpet was returned to him.
“Can its powers be restored?” asked Ika's friend as the tabued trumpet was handed back to him.
“Not while the tabu mark remains,” replied the priest; “not until—but no matter; its magic voices are silent now.”
“Not while the tabu mark is still here,” the priest replied; “not until—but it doesn’t matter; its magical voices are quiet now.”
Before Ika awoke from his drunken stupor the Kiha-pu had been restored to its usual place of deposit.
Before Ika woke up from his drunken haze, the Kiha-pu had been returned to its usual storage spot.
The next morning Ika partook of more awa, threw over his shoulders a cape of red—a color sacred to the gods—suspended the Kiha-pu from his neck with a cord of human hair, and went proudly forth to receive the homage of his companions. But they refused to accord him the honors to which he imagined he was entitled, and in his wrath he raised the trumpet to his lips to blast them with a proclamation of his superiority. A natural and monotonous sound issued from the shell. He regarded it for a moment with amazement, then replaced it to his lips and poured his breath into it with the full force of his lungs; but its many voices were silent; its thunder-tones had been hushed.
The next morning, Ika drank more awa, threw a red cape over his shoulders—a color sacred to the gods—hung the Kiha-pu around his neck with a cord made of human hair, and walked out proudly to receive the admiration of his companions. But they refused to give him the respect he thought he deserved, and in his anger, he raised the trumpet to his lips to proclaim his superiority. A natural and monotonous sound came from the shell. He stared at it in amazement for a moment, then put it back to his lips and blew with all his strength, but its many voices remained silent; its thunderous tones had been quieted.
He hastily re-entered his hut to escape the comments of his companions, and discovered, after repeated trials, that the Kiha-pu had lost its magic powers, and in his hands was nothing more than a simple shell. Not doubting that it had been deprived of its virtues through supernatural agencies, Ika visited a renowned kilo, or wizard, living near Waialua, taking with him the Kiha-pu, which was enclosed in a pouch of kapa, that it might not be observed. The age of the kilo was a hundred and twenty-four years, and he was totally blind, subsisting upon the bounty of those who sought his counsel. Finding his hut after some difficulty, Ika presented him with a roll of kapa which he had brought with him from Waolani, and a pig which he had stolen in the valley below, and implored him to ascertain, if possible, the cause of the disenchantment of the Kiha-pu. Taking the trumpet from Ika, the kilo passed his wrinkled hands over it for [258]some minutes, and then retired with it behind a screen of mats, leaving his visitor under the eye of an old crone, who had admitted him without a word and seated herself beside the opening.
He quickly went back into his hut to avoid his friends' comments and discovered, after trying a few times, that the Kiha-pu had lost its magic powers and was just an ordinary shell in his hands. Believing that it had been stripped of its abilities by supernatural means, Ika went to see a famous kilo, or wizard, living near Waialua, bringing the Kiha-pu with him in a kapa pouch to keep it hidden. The kilo was one hundred and twenty-four years old and completely blind, living off the generosity of those who came to him for advice. After some effort in finding his hut, Ika gave the kilo a roll of kapa he had brought from Waolani and a pig he had taken from the valley below, and he begged him to find out, if possible, why the Kiha-pu had been disenchanting. The kilo took the trumpet from Ika and ran his aged hands over it for [__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__] a few minutes, then went behind a screen of mats with it, leaving Ika with an old woman who had let him in silently and sat down by the entrance.
It was a long time before the kilo reappeared, and it was then to inform Ika that little could be learned concerning the Kiha-pu. He had employed every means known to his art, and finally appealed to Uli, the supreme god of sorcery, when the reluctant answer came that the Kiha-pu had been silenced by a power greater than his. “I dare not inquire further,” said the kilo, returning the trumpet.
It took a long time for the kilo to come back, and when it did, it informed Ika that there wasn’t much to learn about the Kiha-pu. He had used every method he knew, and in the end, he turned to Uli, the top god of sorcery, when the hesitant reply came that the Kiha-pu had been quieted by a force stronger than his own. “I can’t ask any more questions,” said the kilo, handing back the trumpet.
“Will its voices ever return to it? Will your cowardice allow you to answer that question?” inquired Ika, in a sneering tone.
“Will its voices ever come back? Will your cowardice let you answer that question?” Ika asked, in a mocking tone.
“Yes,” replied the kilo, with an effort restraining his wrath and speaking calmly—“yes; its voices will be heard again in Hawaii, among the hills that have sent back their echoes.”
“Yes,” replied the kilo, making an effort to control his anger and speak calmly—“yes; its voices will be heard again in Hawaii, among the hills that have sent back their echoes.”
Ika would have questioned the kilo farther, but the old woman rose and pointed toward the door, and with a look of disappointment he replaced the shell in its pouch of kapa and sullenly left the hut.
Ika would have asked the kilo more questions, but the old woman stood up and pointed to the door, and with a disappointed look, he put the shell back in its pouch of kapa and left the hut sullenly.
Returning to Waolani, Ika abandoned his lofty pretensions and mingled again with his companions on terms of comparative equality. This restored him to their friendship, and, remembering the words of the kilo, he prevailed upon a majority of them to accompany him to Hawaii. Stealing boats at Waikiki, the party set sail for Hawaii, and the fourth day landed at Kawaihae, in the district of Kohala. There they abandoned their canoes, or exchanged them for food, and in parties of four or five proceeded across the island by way of Waimea, and soon after took possession of their old quarters in the mountains back of Waipio, after an absence of eight years.
Returning to Waolani, Ika let go of his high-minded ideas and reconnected with his friends on a more equal level. This got him back into their good graces, and remembering the words of the kilo, he convinced most of them to join him on a trip to Hawaii. After stealing boats at Waikiki, the group set sail for Hawaii and landed at Kawaihae in the Kohala district on the fourth day. There, they either left their canoes behind or traded them for food, and in groups of four or five, they made their way across the island through Waimea, eventually reclaiming their old spots in the mountains just behind Waipio after being away for eight years.
In all these years what had become of the cocoa-tree planted by Kiha, with the coming of the first-fruits of which the magic trumpet was to be restored by a being without hands and wearing neither mantle nor maro? For seven years he had watched and nurtured its growth, staying it against wind and storm, and guarding its every leaf and stem. It was a vigorous and shapely tree, and its leaves were above the touch of a battle-spear in the hands of the king. But no signs of fruit appeared, and the heart of Kiha was troubled with the thought that the tree might be barren, and that the gods had mocked him. The seventh year of [259]its growth had come and was going, when one morning he descried among its branches three young cocoanuts, scarcely less in size than his clenched fist. He thought it strange that he had not seen them before, and then wondered that he had seen them at all, for they were closely hidden among the leaves. But there they were, to his great joy, and he watched them day by day until they attained an age and size at which they might be eaten. He then sent for the high-priest, and, pointing to the fruit, said:
In all these years, what happened to the cocoa tree that Kiha planted, the one that was supposed to restore the magic trumpet with the first fruits, brought by a being without hands and wearing no cloak or maro? For seven years, he had watched over and cared for its growth, protecting it from wind and storms, and guarding every leaf and stem. It was a strong and well-shaped tree, with leaves out of reach of a battle spear wielded by the king. But no signs of fruit appeared, and Kiha was troubled, fearing the tree might be barren and the gods were mocking him. The seventh year of [__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__] its growth was coming to a close when one morning he noticed three young coconuts among its branches, nearly the size of his clenched fist. He found it odd that he hadn't seen them before and wondered why he saw them at all, as they were well hidden among the leaves. But there they were, much to his delight, and he watched them daily until they were ripe enough to be eaten. He then called for the high priest and, pointing to the fruit, said:
“Behold the fruit of the tree planted by the hands of Kiha. At the rising of the sun to-morrow I shall eat of it. Will the gods fulfil their promise?”
“Look at the fruit of the tree that Kiha planted. Tomorrow at sunrise, I will eat it. Will the gods keep their promise?”
“O chief!” replied the priest, “I do not see the means; but you planted the tree; the fruit is fit for food; eat of it to-morrow, if you will. The gods are all-powerful!”
“O chief!” replied the priest, “I don’t see how; but you planted the tree, and the fruit is good to eat. You can have some tomorrow, if you want. The gods are all-powerful!”
At daylight the next morning the fruit was taken from the tree, and the king drank the milk of the three cocoanuts, and ate of the meat of all, first giving thanks to the gods. He then threw himself upon his kapa-moe until the sun was well up in the heavens, when he rose and went forth to meet his chief adviser, as was his daily custom, and learn from his spies and other confidential officers what of importance had transpired since the day before. The only information that seemed to interest him was that a lawless band of strange men—apparently the same who infested the neighborhood some years before—had reoccupied the marshy forest in the mountains back of Waipio, and would doubtless become a scourge to the planters in the upper part of the valley.
At daylight the next morning, the fruit was picked from the tree, and the king drank the milk from the three coconuts and ate the meat from all of them, first giving thanks to the gods. He then collapsed onto his kapa-moe until the sun was high in the sky. When he finally got up, he went to meet his chief adviser, as was his daily routine, to find out from his spies and other trusted officials what important events had occurred since the previous day. The only news that seemed to catch his attention was that a gang of unruly strangers—seemingly the same ones who had caused trouble in the area a few years earlier—had moved back into the marshy forest in the mountains behind Waipio and would likely become a problem for the planters in the upper part of the valley.
“It was through such a band that I was robbed of the Kiha-pu,” thought the king. “It may be that the very same have returned and brought back with them the sacred trumpet. The ways of the gods are mysterious.”
“It was through such a group that I was robbed of the Kiha-pu,” thought the king. “It’s possible that the same ones have returned and brought back the sacred trumpet with them. The ways of the gods are mysterious.”
Communicating the thought to no one, Kiha despatched a discreet messenger to reconnoitre the camp of the marauders, and in the afternoon secretly visited the temple of Paakalani, where he learned through the kaulas that the Kiha-pu was somewhere on the island of Hawaii.
Communicating his thoughts to no one, Kiha sent a discreet messenger to scout the marauders' camp, and in the afternoon, he secretly visited the temple of Paakalani, where he learned through the kaulas that the Kiha-pu was somewhere on the island of Hawaii.
The sun was sinking in the west when the messenger returned, with the information that the chief of the demon band was Ika, who, with many of his followers, had been seen in and around Waipio many years before. [260]
The sun was setting in the west when the messenger came back, bringing news that the leader of the demon group was Ika, who, along with many of his followers, had been spotted in and around Waipio many years ago. [__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]
These tidings had scarcely reached the ears of the king when a tumult was discovered at the main gate of the palace enclosure, and a few minutes after an old man, with his arms bound behind his back, and followed by a strange-looking dog, was being dragged by a crowd of officers and others toward the royal mansion, in front of which Kiha was sitting, surrounded by a number of distinguished chiefs and titled retainers. The man was well advanced in years, and was clad in a maro and kihei, or short mantle of kapa, while from his neck was suspended an ivory charm rudely carved into the form of a dog’s foot. He was above the average height, and around his stooped shoulders hung a tangled mass of grizzled hair. His beard was unshorn, and from beneath his shaggy brows peered a pair of small and malignant-looking eyes. He glowered savagely at his captors, and resented anything that seemed like unnecessary force in urging him along. The dog was a large, misshapen brute, with human-looking ears and a bluish coat of bristling hair. It had a long, swinish tail, and one of its eyes was white and the other green. The animal followed closely and sullenly at its master’s heels, uttering an occasional low growl when too roughly jostled by the crowd.
These news had barely reached the king when a commotion was discovered at the main gate of the palace, and a few minutes later, an old man with his arms tied behind his back, followed by an unusual-looking dog, was being dragged by a crowd of officers and others toward the royal mansion, where Kiha was sitting, surrounded by several distinguished chiefs and titled retainers. The man was quite old, wearing a maro and kihei, or short mantle made of kapa, and an ivory charm, crudely carved into the shape of a dog’s paw, hung around his neck. He was taller than average, and a tangled mass of grizzled hair hung around his stooped shoulders. His beard was untrimmed, and beneath his shaggy brows, a pair of small, sinister-looking eyes peered out. He glared fiercely at his captors, clearly resentful of any unnecessary force used to push him along. The dog was a large, misshapen creature, with human-like ears and a bluish coat of coarse hair. It had a long, pig-like tail and one eye was white while the other was green. The animal followed closely and sullenly at its master’s heels, letting out occasional low growls when jostled too roughly by the crowd.
When within a hundred paces of the mansion the officers halted with their prisoner, and an attendant was despatched by the king to ascertain the cause of the excitement. Learning that the officers were desirous of bringing before him a man suspected of pilfering from the royal estates, the king consented to listen to the accusation in person, and ordered the prisoner to appear in his presence. Approaching, the old man prostrated himself at the feet of Kiha, and the dog, giving voice to a dismal howl, crouched upon the earth, laid his nose between his paws, and bent his green eye upon the king. Kiha regarded both for a moment with an amused expression; but there was something demoniac in the appearance of the dog, and after catching a glimpse of it he could scarcely remove his gaze from the green eye that glared upon him.
When they were about a hundred paces from the mansion, the officers stopped with their prisoner, and a servant was sent by the king to find out what was going on. After learning that the officers wanted to present a man suspected of stealing from the royal estates, the king agreed to hear the accusation himself and ordered the prisoner to come before him. As the old man approached, he bowed deeply at Kiha's feet, and the dog let out a mournful howl, crouching on the ground, resting his nose between his paws, and fixing his green eye on the king. Kiha looked at both of them for a moment with an amused expression, but there was something sinister about the dog's appearance, and after catching a glimpse of it, he found it hard to look away from the glaring green eye.
Commanding one of the officers to speak for himself and the rest, that the matter might be briefly determined, the king was informed that the prisoner was a native of the island of Kauai, and some months before had landed with his dog in the district of Kau; that he was an awa thief and had trained his fiendish-looking [261]dog to do his pilfering; that the animal possessed the intelligence of a kahuna and the instincts of a demon, and could almost steal the mantle from a man’s shoulders without detection; that the prisoner had been driven for his thefts from Kau to Kona, and thence to Hamakua; that he had been living for some months past at Kikaha, where his dog, Puapua-lenalena, as he was called, had become noted for his thefts; that awa had been missed by the luna of one of the king’s estates in the upper part of the valley; that the night before a watch had been placed, and the demon dog had been detected in the act of leaving the royal plantation with a quantity of awa in his mouth; that the animal had been followed to the hut of his master, who was found asleep under the influence of awa, which the dog had doubtless ground with his teeth into an intoxicating drink, since on being aroused the man denied that he had either stolen or chewed it; and, finally, after some resistance, the prisoner had been brought to Waipio, followed by his dog, and was now before the king for examination and sentence.
Commanding one of the officers to speak for himself and the others, so the matter could be resolved quickly, the king was informed that the prisoner was from the island of Kauai and had landed with his dog in the Kau district a few months ago. He was a thief who stole awa and had trained his sinister-looking [__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__] dog to help him steal. The dog had the intelligence of a kahuna and the instincts of a demon, able to lift a man's cloak right off his shoulders without being noticed. The prisoner had been chased from Kau to Kona and then to Hamakua due to his thefts. He had been living for several months in Kikaha, where his dog, known as Puapua-lenalena, became infamous for his stealing. The luna of one of the king's estates in the upper part of the valley reported that awa had gone missing. The night before, they had set a watch, and the demon dog was caught trying to leave the royal plantation with a bunch of awa in his mouth. The dog was tracked back to his owner's hut, where the man was found asleep, likely under the influence of awa, which the dog had probably gnawed into an intoxicating drink. When awakened, the man denied having stolen or chewed it. Finally, after some resistance, the prisoner was taken to Waipio, followed by his dog, and now stood before the king for questioning and a verdict.
After the officer had concluded his account of the misdemeanors of the prisoner, by permission of the king the old man rose to his feet, and was about to speak in his own defence when Kiha, turning his gaze with an effort from the green eye of the dog, abruptly inquired:
After the officer finished his explanation of the prisoner's wrongdoings, the old man stood up with the king's permission and was about to defend himself when Kiha, forcing himself to look away from the dog's green eye, suddenly asked:
“What manner of animal is this, and how came he in your possession?”
“What kind of animal is this, and how did you get him?”
“O king!” replied the prisoner, “the dog was given to me by my uncle, a distinguished kaula of Kauai, and it is believed that he was cast up from the sea.”
“O king!” replied the prisoner, “the dog was given to me by my uncle, a renowned kaula of Kauai, and it is thought that he came ashore from the sea.”
“Enough!” exclaimed the king, with a gesture of impatience. “Take them both to the temple of Paakalani,” he continued, addressing a chief with a yellow cape and helmet, “and there await my coming.”
“Enough!” shouted the king, waving his hand in frustration. “Take them both to the temple of Paakalani,” he said to a chief wearing a yellow cape and helmet, “and wait for me there.”
The prisoner and his green-eyed companion were removed to the temple, and in the dusk of the evening Kiha proceeded thither alone. Entering the royal retreat with which the heiau enclosure was provided, he sent for the high-priest, and soon after for the prisoner and his dog. They were conducted to the apartment, and the door was closed, a kukui torch held at another opening throwing a glare of light into the room.
The prisoner and his green-eyed friend were taken to the temple, and in the evening twilight, Kiha went there alone. Once inside the royal retreat within the heiau enclosure, he called for the high priest and soon after for the prisoner and his dog. They were brought to the room, and the door was shut, with a kukui torch shining a bright light into the space.
The king sat for a few breaths in silence, while the priest was [262]scanning the prisoner and his strange companion. Finally, pointing to the dog, Kiha turned to the priest and said:
The king sat in silence for a moment, while the priest was [__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]looking over the prisoner and his unusual companion. Finally, pointing to the dog, Kiha turned to the priest and said:
“A wonderful animal—a being without hands, and wearing neither mantle nor maro!”
“A remarkable animal— a creature without hands, and not wearing a coat or maro!”
“True,” returned the priest, recalling the promise of the gods; “and should he be the messenger, his services must not be slighted.”
“True,” replied the priest, remembering the promise of the gods; “and if he is the messenger, his help must not be overlooked.”
“Listen,” said the king, addressing the prisoner. “I have faith that this animal can do me a service. In a marshy forest in the mountains back of Waipio a band of conjuring outlaws have lately found a retreat. A magic shell of great power, stolen from me many years ago, is now in the possession of some one of them—probably of Ika, their chief. Can you prompt this animal to recover the Kiha-pu?”
“Listen,” said the king, talking to the prisoner. “I believe this animal can help me. In a swampy forest in the mountains behind Waipio, a group of conjuring outlaws has recently found a hideout. A powerful magic shell, stolen from me many years ago, is now in the hands of one of them—probably Ika, their leader. Can you get this animal to retrieve the Kiha-pu?”
“Perhaps,” replied the prisoner.
“Maybe,” replied the prisoner.
“Then do so,” returned the king, “and I will not only give you the life you have forfeited, but will see that you are provided henceforth with all the awa you have an appetite to consume.”
“Then go ahead,” the king replied, “and I won’t just give you back the life you’ve lost, but I’ll also make sure you have all the awa you want to drink from now on.”
With these words of the king the dog rose to his feet, uttered a growling sound which seemed to be half-human, and approached the door.
With the king's words, the dog got up, made a growling noise that sounded partly human, and walked over to the door.
“No instructions are required,” said the old man; “he understands, and is ready to start upon his errand.”
“No instructions are needed,” said the old man; “he gets it and is ready to begin his task.”
“Then send him forth at once,” returned the king; “the night is dark and will favor him.”
“Then send him out right away,” the king replied; “the night is dark and will help him.”
The door was opened, and like a flash the dog sprang from the room, leaped the closed gate of the outer wall, and in the darkness dashed up the valley toward the mountains.
The door swung open, and in an instant, the dog shot out of the room, jumped over the closed gate of the outer wall, and raced up the valley toward the mountains in the dark.
“I will await his return here,” said the king, looking inquiringly toward the prisoner.
“I'll wait for his return here,” said the king, looking questioningly at the prisoner.
“He will be back a little beyond the middle of the night,” replied the old man.
“He'll be back just after midnight,” replied the old man.
“With the Kiha-pu?” inquired the king.
"With the Kiha-pu?" asked the king.
“Either with or without it,” was the answer.
“Either with it or without it,” was the answer.
Leaving the prisoner in the custody of the high-priest and his attendants, Kiha walked out into the starlight. His face was feverish, and the kiss of the trade-winds was cool. The heiau of Paakalani was a puhonua, or sacred place of refuge—one of the two on the island of Hawaii—and he wondered whether, under any circumstances, he could properly demand the life of the prisoner [263]were he to claim the protection of the temple. Had he voluntarily sought refuge in the puhonua, there would have been no doubt; but as he was forcibly taken there by royal order, his right to exemption from seizure was a question of doubt.
Leaving the prisoner in the care of the high priest and his attendants, Kiha stepped out into the starlight. His face was flushed, and the kiss of the trade winds was refreshing. The heiau of Paakalani was a puhonua, a sacred place of refuge—one of the two on the island of Hawaii—and he wondered whether, under any circumstances, he could rightly demand the life of the prisoner [__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__] if he claimed the protection of the temple. If the prisoner had willingly sought refuge in the puhonua, there would have been no doubt; but since he was taken there by royal order, his right to protection from seizure was uncertain.
Dismissing the subject with the reflection that the life or death of the prisoner was of little consequence, Kiha strolled toward the inner temple and reverently bowed before an image of Lono near the entrance. Remains of recent sacrifices still smelt rank upon the altar, and scores of gods of almost every grade and function looked grimly down upon him from the walls. Dim lights were seen in some of the quarters of the priests constructed against the outer wall of the enclosure, and a torch was burning at the main entrance.
Dismissing the issue with the thought that the life or death of the prisoner didn't matter much, Kiha walked toward the inner temple and respectfully bowed before a statue of Lono near the entrance. The remnants of recent sacrifices still had a strong stench on the altar, and a variety of gods, each with different roles, looked down on him sternly from the walls. Faint lights flickered in some of the rooms of the priests built against the outer wall of the area, and a torch was lit at the main entrance.
As the evening wore on the silence of the heiau was broken only by the hooting of the sacred owls from the walls of the inner temple, and Kiha threw himself at the foot of a pepper-tree, and was soon wafted out into the boundless sea of dreams.
As the evening went on, the silence of the heiau was only interrupted by the hooting of the sacred owls from the inner temple walls. Kiha threw himself at the base of a pepper tree and quickly drifted off into a vast sea of dreams.
After leaping the gate of the heiau the dog started up the valley with the speed of the wind. As he swept past the thatched huts in his course, those who caught sight of him for an instant were sure that they beheld a demon, and the dogs that pursued speedily returned, to crouch whiningly behind their masters.
After jumping over the gate of the heiau, the dog raced up the valley like the wind. As he zoomed past the thatched huts, anyone who caught a glimpse of him briefly was convinced they saw a demon, and the dogs that chased after him quickly turned back, cowering and whining behind their owners.
Reaching the upper end of the valley, the dog followed an ascending trail through a steep ravine coming down from the northward, and in a short time, considering the distance traveled, stood snuffing the air at the verge of the forest within which the outlaws had found a temporary refuge. Distant lights were seen flickering through occasional openings among the trees and tangled undergrowth, and at intervals strange voices, as if of song and merriment, were heard.
Reaching the top of the valley, the dog followed a rising trail through a steep ravine coming down from the north. Before long, given the distance covered, it was sniffing the air at the edge of the forest where the outlaws had found temporary shelter. Distant lights flickered through occasional gaps in the trees and thick underbrush, and every now and then, strange voices, sounding like singing and laughter, could be heard.
For some time the dog remained motionless, and then stealthily crept into the forest. What form he assumed, how he learned of the hiding-place of the Kiha-pu, and through what means he escaped discovery, are details which tradition has left to conjecture. It is told only that he succeeded in finding in the unguarded hut of Ika, seizing in his mouth, and escaping undiscovered from the forest with, the sacred trumpet.
For a while, the dog stayed still, and then quietly sneaked into the forest. How he changed his shape, how he found out about the hiding place of the Kiha-pu, and how he managed to avoid being discovered are details that tradition has left open to speculation. It's only said that he managed to find the unguarded hut of Ika, grab the sacred trumpet in his mouth, and sneak away from the forest without being noticed.
So adroitly had the theft been committed that it seemed that the dog would surely escape without detection; but in plunging down the steep ravine through which he had finally ascended to [264]the forest, he dropped the Kiha-pu, breaking from the rim a piece embracing the small pea or tabu mark of silence placed upon it by the kaula of Waianae. In an instant the liberated voices of the trumpet poured forth in a blast which echoed through the hills and started the night-birds to screaming.
So skillfully had the theft been carried out that it seemed the dog would definitely escape without being noticed; but as he jumped down the steep ravine that he had finally climbed to [__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__] the forest, he dropped the Kiha-pu, breaking off a piece that held the small pea or tabu mark of silence put on it by the kaula of Waianae. In an instant, the freed sounds of the trumpet burst out in a blast that echoed through the hills and sent the night-birds into a frenzy of screaming.
The sound was heard by the reveling demi-demons of the forest, and, ascertaining that the shell had been stolen, they poured down the mountain-side in pursuit of the plunderer. Their speed was something more than human, and the darkness did not seem to impede their steps. From time to time the voice of the trumpet came back to them; but it grew fainter and fainter in the distance, until they finally abandoned the chase as hopeless, Ika himself suggesting that the Kiha-pu, with its voices in some manner restored to it, had taken wings and escaped.
The sound reached the partying half-demons of the forest, and realizing the shell had been stolen, they rushed down the mountainside after the thief. Their speed was beyond human, and the darkness didn’t seem to slow them down. Occasionally, the trumpet's sound drifted back to them, but it grew fainter and fainter until they gave up the chase as impossible, with Ika suggesting that the Kiha-pu, somehow having its voices restored, had taken flight and gotten away.
The king slept under the pepper-tree until past the middle of the night, when the hooting of an owl almost at his ear awoke him, and he rose and re-entered the royal retreat, where he found the high-priest with a number of his attendants, and the prisoner intently listening at the half-open door.
The king slept under the pepper tree until well past midnight, when the hooting of an owl right next to him woke him up. He got up and went back into the royal quarters, where he found the high priest along with several of his attendants, and the prisoner was listening intently at the half-open door.
Kiha was about to inquire the time of the night—for he had neglected to look at the stars before entering—when a noise was heard at the outer gate. The prisoner stepped forward and threw back the door, and the next moment the dog sprang into the room, laid the Kiha-pu at the feet of the king, and then dropped dead beside it.
Kiha was about to ask what time it was—since he hadn't checked the stars before coming in—when a noise came from the outer gate. The prisoner moved forward, opened the door, and the next moment the dog dashed into the room, dropped the Kiha-pu at the king's feet, and then collapsed beside it.
The overjoyed king raised and placed the trumpet to his lips, and with a swelling heart roused the people of Waipio with a blast such as they had not heard for more than eight years. Liberating the prisoner, who was grief-stricken at the death of his dog, Kiha ordered that he henceforth be fed from the royal table.
The thrilled king lifted the trumpet to his lips and, feeling overwhelmed with joy, sounded a blast that the people of Waipio hadn’t heard in over eight years. He freed the prisoner, who was heartbroken over the loss of his dog, and Kiha commanded that he be provided meals from the royal table from then on.
Winding another blast upon the trumpet, the king returned to the palace, around which were congregated hundreds of excited people. Among them were chiefs in yellow capes and helmets, and warriors armed with spear and battle-axe. Summoning his alii-koa, or principal military leader, a brief council was held, followed by the sending forth of the plumed aids of the king, and the speedy concentration within the palace grounds of a picked body of three or four hundred warriors armed with short javelins and knives for close encounter.
Blowing another blast on the trumpet, the king went back to the palace, where hundreds of excited people had gathered. Among them were chiefs in yellow capes and helmets, and warriors armed with spears and battle-axes. He called his alii-koa, or main military leader, held a quick council, and then sent out the king's feathered aides. Soon after, a select group of three or four hundred warriors equipped with short javelins and knives for close combat quickly assembled within the palace grounds.
The little army moved rapidly but noiselessly up the valley, [265]and at early daylight surrounded and attacked the camp of the demon band. A desperate hand-to-hand conflict ensued; but the miscreants were overpowered, and all slain with the exception of Ika and two others, who were reserved alive for the altar.
The small army moved quickly but quietly up the valley, [__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]and at dawn, they surrounded and attacked the camp of the demon group. A fierce hand-to-hand battle broke out; but the villains were defeated, and everyone was killed except for Ika and two others, who were kept alive for the altar.
On the evening following, in the midst of great rejoicing, the Kiha-pu was rededicated to Lono, and Ika and his companions were slain without the walls and sacrificed, with a host of other offerings, in the temple of Paakalani.
On the following evening, during a time of great celebration, the Kiha-pu was rededicated to Lono. Ika and his companions were killed outside the walls and offered as sacrifices, along with many other offerings, in the temple of Paakalani.
II.
The reign of Liloa was as peaceful as that of Kiha, his distinguished father. He did not lack ability, either as a civil or military leader, however his pleasant and mirthful ways may have impressed to the contrary. He was fond of good living, fine apparel and comely women; yet he held the sceptre firmly, and was prompt to punish wrong-doing in his chiefs or infringement of any of his prerogatives. Nevertheless, his heart was kind, and he frequently forgave the humble who had crossed his shadow, and the thoughtless who had violated the spirit of a royal tabu.
The reign of Liloa was as peaceful as that of his esteemed father, Kiha. He was quite capable, both as a civil leader and a military commander, even if his cheerful and lighthearted nature might suggest otherwise. He enjoyed fine food, stylish clothing, and attractive women; yet he ruled with authority and was quick to punish any misdeeds by his chiefs or violations of his rights. Still, he had a kind heart and often forgave the humble who had crossed him and the careless who had broken the spirit of a royal tabu.
As he was distracted neither by domestic disturbance nor wars with neighboring kings, Liloa made frequent visits to the several districts of the island, sometimes with an imposing retinue of chiefs and retainers, but quite as often with no more than two or three trusty attendants. Sometimes he traveled incognito, visiting suspected district chiefs to observe their methods of government, and, when occasion for rebuke occurred, to their great confusion making himself known to them.
As he was not distracted by household issues or conflicts with neighboring kings, Liloa often visited different districts of the island, sometimes accompanied by a large group of chiefs and attendants, but just as frequently with only two or three trusted companions. Occasionally, he traveled incognito, checking in on district chiefs to see how they managed their areas, and when he needed to give them criticism, he would reveal his identity, much to their surprise.
Near the close of the year 1460, before the annual festival of Lono, which inaugurated the beginning of a new year, Liloa went with a large and brilliant party, in gaily-decked double canoes carrying the royal colors, from Waipio to Koholalele, in Hamakua, to assist in the reconsecration of the old temple of Manini, the restoration and enlargement of which had just been completed. He took with him his high-priest, Laeanui, a band of musicians and dancers, and his chief navigator and astrologer, and the heiau was consecrated with unusual display. Laeanui recited the kuawili—the long prayer of consecration—and twenty-four human victims were laid upon the altar.
Near the end of 1460, just before the annual festival of Lono, which marks the start of a new year, Liloa set out with a large and lively group in beautifully decorated double canoes bearing the royal colors. They traveled from Waipio to Koholalele in Hamakua to help reconsecrate the old temple of Manini, which had just been restored and expanded. He brought along his high priest, Laeanui, a group of musicians and dancers, as well as his chief navigator and astrologer. The heiau was consecrated with great fanfare. Laeanui recited the kuawili—the lengthy consecration prayer—and twenty-four human sacrifices were placed on the altar.
Ordering the party to return in the double canoes without [266]him, Liloa resolved to make the journey overland to Waipio with a single attendant; and it is quite probable that it was something more than accident that prompted the royal traveler to deviate from the shortest path to Waipio, and tarry for some hours in a pleasant grove of palms near Kealakaha, where dwelt with her old father one of the most beautiful maidens in all Hamakua.
Ordering the group to head back in the double canoes without him, Liloa decided to make the trip overland to Waipio with just one companion. It's likely that it was more than just coincidence that led the royal traveler to take a longer route to Waipio and spend several hours in a lovely grove of palms near Kealakaha, where one of the most beautiful girls in all Hamakua lived with her elderly father.
The name of the girl was Akahia-kuleana. She was tall and slender, and her dark hair, which rippled down in wavelets, shrouded her bare shoulders like a veil. Her eyes were soft, and her voice was like the music of a mountain rivulet, and when her bosom was bedecked with leis of fragrant blossoms it seemed that they must have grown there, so much did she appear to be a part of them.
The girl's name was Akahia-kuleana. She was tall and slim, and her dark hair flowed in waves, covering her bare shoulders like a veil. Her eyes were gentle, and her voice sounded like the music of a mountain stream. When her chest was adorned with leis of fragrant flowers, it looked like they had grown there, making her feel like a part of them.
Although in humble life, Akahia was really of royal blood, since six generations back her paternal ancestor was Kalahuamoku, a half-brother to Kalapana, from whom Liloa drew his strain. She knew the rank of her royal visitor, and felt honored that he should praise her beauty; and when he kissed her lips at parting he left with her his maro and the ivory clasp of his necklace, at the same time whispering words in her ear which in a generation later transferred the sceptre of Hawaii from the direct line to humbler but worthier hands.
Although she lived a simple life, Akahia was truly of royal lineage, as her lineage traced back six generations to her paternal ancestor Kalahuamoku, a half-brother of Kalapana, from whom Liloa descended. She recognized the status of her royal visitor and felt honored when he complimented her beauty; and when he kissed her goodbye, he left her his maro and the ivory clasp of his necklace, while quietly whispering words in her ear that, a generation later, transferred the crown of Hawaii from the direct line to more modest but deserving hands.
Before the trade-winds came and went again the gentle Akahia, unwedded, became a mother. At first her father frowned upon the child; but it was a strong and healthy boy, who looked as if he might some day wield with uncommon vigor a laau-palau if not a battle-axe, and he soon became reconciled to the presence of the little intruder. In those days, it is proper to mention, such events occasioned but little comment, and entailed upon the mother neither social ostracism nor especial reproach.
Before the trade winds came and went, the gentle Akahia, unmarried, became a mother. At first, her father frowned upon the child; however, it was a strong and healthy boy who seemed like he could one day wield a laau-palau, if not a battle-axe, and he soon accepted the presence of the little intruder. Back then, it's worth noting, such events attracted little attention and didn’t lead to social ostracism or special shame for the mother.
The child was named Umi, and, to give it a stronger protector than herself, Akahia became the wife of her cousin Maakao, a strong, rough man, who had always shown great affection for her, and who felt honored in becoming the husband of one who might have taken her choice among many.
The child was named Umi, and to provide her with a stronger protector than herself, Akahia married her cousin Maakao, a strong, rugged man who had always shown her great affection and felt honored to become the husband of someone who could have chosen from many.
The father of Akahia cultivated a kalo patch larger than his necessities really required, and was abundantly supplied with pigs, poultry, yams, bananas, cocoanuts and breadfruit, which he was at all times enabled to exchange for fish, crabs, limpets and other products of the sea. [267]
The father of Akahia farmed a kalo patch that was bigger than he actually needed, and he was well-stocked with pigs, chickens, yams, bananas, coconuts, and breadfruit, which he could always trade for fish, crabs, limpets, and other seafood. [__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]
All land titles at that time vested either in the sovereign or the chiefs subject to him, and the producer was frequently required to return to his landlord a full third or half of all his labor yielded. Sometimes the land-owner was more liberal with his tenants; but quite as often he took to the extent of his need or greed, with no one to challenge the injustice of his demands.
All land titles at that time belonged either to the sovereign or to the chiefs under him, and producers often had to give back a full third or half of everything they produced to their landlord. Sometimes the landowner was more generous with his tenants, but just as often, he took as much as he needed or wanted, without anyone challenging the unfairness of his demands.
But the bit of land occupied by the father of Akahia was part of a large tract reserved for the benefit of the king, and because of the alii blood with which he was credited, but of which he made no boast, the rent he returned was merely nominal.
But the piece of land that Akahia's father occupied was part of a large area set aside for the king's benefit, and due to the noble lineage he was associated with, although he never bragged about it, the rent he paid was just symbolic.
When Umi was about ten years of age the father of Akahia died, leaving his little estate to his daughter. She had two brothers living, both older than herself. But the cultivation of the soil was not congenial to them, and, as there had been no wars of moment in Hawaii for nearly two generations, one of them, who had been a dreamer from his youth, had been inducted into the service of the gods by the high-priest Laeanui, to whom Liloa had given in perpetuity the possession of Kekaha, in the district of Kona, and was otherwise influential; while the second brother, on reaching manhood, had gone with spear and sling to Maui, and risen to distinction in the military service of the moi of that island.
When Umi was about ten years old, Akahia's father passed away, leaving his small estate to his daughter. She had two older brothers. However, farming didn't suit them, and since there hadn't been significant wars in Hawaii for nearly two generations, one of them, who had always been a dreamer, was initiated into the service of the gods by the high priest Laeanui, to whom Liloa had given the rights to Kekaha in the Kona district, and who was otherwise influential. The second brother, upon becoming an adult, had traveled to Maui with a spear and sling and achieved recognition in the military service of the island's moi.
So Akahia and her husband continued to occupy unmolested the old plantation. But the agents who collected the revenues of the king were less liberal with Maakao than they had been with the father of his wife, and he was compelled to make the same rent returns as other royal tenants. Nor this alone. A portion of their land had been given to another, embracing a little grove of hawane or cocoa-trees, some of which, it was averred, had been planted by the stewards of Pili nearly four centuries before, and their depleted stocks of pigs and fowls ceased to be the envy of their neighbors.
So Akahia and her husband continued to live peacefully on the old plantation. However, the agents who collected the king's taxes were not as generous with Maakao as they had been with his wife's father, and he was forced to pay the same rent as other royal tenants. But that wasn't all. A portion of their land had been given to someone else, including a small grove of hawane or cocoa trees, some of which were said to have been planted by the stewards of Pili nearly four centuries ago, and their dwindling numbers of pigs and chickens were no longer the envy of their neighbors.
This harsh dealing with Akahia and her husband, it is needless to say, was done without the knowledge of the king; but they feared to complain, lest they might be despoiled of the little left them, and deemed it prudent to suffer in silence rather than arouse the wrath of an agent of whose powers they knew not the extent.
This harsh treatment of Akahia and her husband, needless to say, was done without the king's knowledge; however, they were afraid to speak up, fearing they might lose what little they had left. They thought it was wiser to endure in silence rather than provoke the anger of an agent whose power they didn't fully understand.
There were other little mouths to feed besides Umi’s, and, as the years came and went with their scant harvests, Maakao became [268]more and more discontented; but, with a hope in her heart of which Maakao knew nothing, Akahia toiled on without complaint. Year by year she saw Umi developing into manhood, and noted that in thought, habit and bearing he was different from others.
There were other little mouths to feed besides Umi’s, and as the years went by with their meager harvests, Maakao became more and more unhappy; but with a hope in her heart that Maakao knew nothing about, Akahia kept working hard without complaining. Year after year, she watched Umi grow into a man and noticed that in his thoughts, habits, and demeanor, he was different from others.
Umi loved his mother and was not unkind to Maakao; but he spent much of his time by the sea-shore where the great waves thundered against the cliffs, and in the hills where, among the ohia and sandal trees, the trade-winds whispered to him of the unknown. He would climb to the crown of the tallest cocoa-tree because there was danger in it, and buffet the fiercest waves in his frail canoe; but neither threat nor persuasion could ever induce him to delve in the slime of the kalo patch or plant a row of yams. He would bring fish from the sea and fruits from the mountains, but could not be prevailed upon to till the soil. He fashioned spears of cunning workmanship, and from the teeth of sharks made knives of double edge, but to the implements of husbandry he gave but little note.
Umi loved his mother and was nice to Maakao; however, he spent most of his time by the shore where the huge waves crashed against the cliffs, and in the hills where, among the ohia and sandalwood trees, the trade winds whispered to him about the unknown. He would climb to the top of the tallest cocoa tree because it was dangerous, and brave the strongest waves in his fragile canoe; but neither danger nor persuasion could ever convince him to dig in the mud of the kalo patch or plant a row of yams. He would catch fish from the sea and gather fruits from the mountains, but could not be persuaded to farm the land. He crafted beautifully designed spears, and made sharp knives from shark teeth, but paid little attention to farming tools.
At the age of sixteen Umi had reached almost the proportions of a man. His limbs were strong, his features manly and handsome, his eyes clear and full of expression, and in athletic sports and the use of arms he had no equal among his companions. His habits brought around him but few friends, yet his kindness to all left no pretext for enmity; and while some said he absented himself from home in a spirit of idleness, others shook their heads and ventured the opinion that he visited the recesses of the wooded hills alone to converse with the kini-akua and learn wisdom from the gods. And his strange conduct, it may well be imagined, was made the subject of frequent discussion in the neighborhood, for Maakao complained continually of his idleness, and but for the intercessions of the mother, who alone was able to account for his peculiarities, would have closed his doors against him.
At sixteen, Umi had grown nearly to the size of an adult man. His limbs were strong, his features were manly and handsome, his eyes were bright and expressive, and he excelled in sports and handling weapons among his peers. His lifestyle drew only a few friends, but his kindness to everyone left no room for hostility; while some claimed he stayed away from home out of laziness, others speculated that he wandered into the woods alone to talk to the kini-akua and gain wisdom from the gods. His unusual behavior was often a topic of discussion in the community, as Maakao frequently complained about his lack of productivity, and if it weren't for his mother's intervention—who could explain his oddities—he would have shut him out completely.
But Umi had a few friends to extol his goodness and defend him against unkind insinuation, and among them were Piimaiwaa and Omaukamau, youths of about his own age, and Kulamea, the younger and only sister of the latter. From childhood these friends had been his frequent companions, and as he grew to manhood, strong-limbed, resolute and gentle, they learned to regard him with a love prepared for any sacrifice. [269]
But Umi had a few friends who praised his kindness and defended him against cruel gossip. Among them were Piimaiwaa and Omaukamau, guys around his age, and Kulamea, the younger sister of the latter. Since they were kids, these friends had been his constant companions, and as he grew into a strong, determined, and kind man, they came to love him deeply and would do anything for him. [__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]
Kulamea was a bright-eyed, dusky little fairy, who often accompanied Umi and her brother in their rambles. They petted her until she became an exacting little tyrant, and then Umi, at her command, made toys for her, climbed the tallest cocoa-trees, and scaled the steepest cliffs in search of flowers and berries that she liked; and, in return for these kindnesses, what, at the age of fifteen, could Kulamea do but love almost to idolatry the brave and gentle companion who had developed into a splendid manhood? And what could Umi do at twenty but return in kind the devotion of one now ripening into a charming womanhood, whose childish friendship was the brightest sunshine that had ever flecked the landscape of his dreamy life?
Kulamea was a bright-eyed, dusky little fairy who often tagged along with Umi and her brother during their adventures. They spoiled her until she became a demanding little tyrant, and then Umi would, at her request, make toys for her, climb the tallest cocoa trees, and scale the steepest cliffs to find her favorite flowers and berries. In return for these kindnesses, what could Kulamea do at fifteen but love, almost to obsession, the brave and gentle companion who had grown into a remarkable man? And what could Umi do at twenty but reciprocate the affection of someone who was now blossoming into a lovely woman, whose childhood friendship was the brightest light that had ever graced the landscape of his dreamy life?
With a feeling of uneasiness Akahia watched Umi’s growing love for Kulamea, and when at twenty he would have married her, much to the gratification of Maakao, she kindly but firmly said to her son: “Be not in haste to fetter your free limbs. Be patient, as I have been for twenty years. Kulamea is worthy—but wait.”
With a sense of discomfort, Akahia observed Umi's deepening affection for Kulamea. When Umi turned twenty and was ready to marry her, much to Maakao's delight, she gently but firmly advised her son: “Don’t rush to tie yourself down. Be patient, as I have been for twenty years. Kulamea is deserving—but wait.”
“Why wait?” exclaimed Maakao, suddenly appearing. He had been listening without the door. “Why should he wait?” he continued; “he has all his life been idle, and it is time that he should have a house of his own.”
“Why wait?” Maakao suddenly burst in. He had been listening at the door. “Why should he wait?” he continued; “he has spent his whole life being lazy, and it’s time he got his own place.”
“You have spoken well!” replied Umi, drawing himself up to his full height, and looking scornfully down upon the husband of his mother—“you have spoken well, Maakao! It is time, indeed, that I stopped this dreaming! I will never eat food again under your roof. Now get you to your kalo patch; you will find occupation there befitting you! I will seek other means of living!”
“You've said it perfectly!” Umi replied, standing tall and looking down scornfully at his mother’s husband. “You’ve said it perfectly, Maakao! It’s definitely time for me to stop this daydreaming! I won’t eat another meal under your roof. Now go to your kalo patch; you’ll find something to occupy yourself there! I’ll find another way to make a living!”
With these scornful words Umi strode haughtily from the house. Enraged at the insult, Maakao seized a laau-palau, or large kalo-knife, and sprang after him. Umi turned and reached for his pahoa. Maakao raised his weapon to strike, but it dropped to the earth as if a paralysis had seized his arm as Akahia sprang before him, exclaiming: “Do not dare to strike! He is not your son; he is your chief! Down on your knees before him!”
With those scornful words, Umi walked out of the house with pride. Furious at the insult, Maakao grabbed a large kalo knife and jumped after him. Umi turned and reached for his dagger. Maakao lifted his weapon to strike, but it fell to the ground as if his arm had gone numb when Akahia jumped in front of him, shouting: “Don’t even think about hitting him! He’s not your son; he’s your chief! Get down on your knees before him!”
To the dismay of Maakao and profound astonishment of Umi, Akahia then revealed the secret of Umi’s birth, and, taking from their hiding-place the keepsakes left with her by Liloa, said, as she handed them to her son: [270]
To the shock of Maakao and the deep surprise of Umi, Akahia then revealed the secret of Umi's birth and, pulling from their hiding place the mementos left with her by Liloa, said as she handed them to her son: [__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]
“Your father is king of Hawaii. Go to him in person and place these mementoes before him. Tell him Akahia-kuleana returns them to him by the hands of his and her son, who is worthy of him, and he will own you to be the child of his love. He is noble and will hold sacred his royal pledge. This should have been done long ago, but I could not bring my heart to part with you. Go, and may the gods be your protection and your guide!”
“Your father is the king of Hawaii. Go see him in person and present these keepsakes to him. Tell him that Akahia-kuleana is returning them by the hands of his and her son, who deserves him, and he will acknowledge you as his beloved child. He is honorable and will honor his royal promise. This should have happened a long time ago, but I couldn't bring myself to let you go. Go, and may the gods protect and guide you!”
The strange revelation was soon known throughout the neighborhood, and Umi prepared for his journey to Waipio. How should he appear before Liloa, whose will was law and whose frown was death? In what guise should he seek the presence of his royal father?
The strange news quickly spread through the neighborhood, and Umi got ready for his journey to Waipio. How should he present himself to Liloa, whose wishes were law and whose disapproval was deadly? In what form should he approach his royal father?
“As an alii-kapu!” answered Akahia, proudly. Then from an ipu she brought forth a plumed helmet and cape of the feathers of the oo, which she had secretly fabricated with her own hands, and placed them upon the head and shoulders of her son.
“As a alii-kapu!” answered Akahia, proudly. Then from an ipu she brought forth a feathered helmet and cape made from the feathers of the oo, which she had secretly crafted with her own hands, and placed them on her son’s head and shoulders.
To Kulamea alone was the news of what had befallen Umi unwelcome. She would have been more than content to share with him the common lot; but now that he was about to be recognized as the son of the great Liloa, she felt that they were soon to part for ever. Other alliances would be found for him, and he would forget the humble playmate of his youth, who loved him, not because his father was a king, but because they had grown up together and neither of them could help it. So when, two days after, Umi started overland for Waipio, accompanied by his two trusty friends, Piimaiwaa and Omaukamau, Kulamea secreted herself to avoid the agony of a parting farewell from Umi; but he found her, nevertheless, and made her happy by kissing and telling her that, whatever might be his future, she should share it; and she believed him, for he had never deceived her.
To Kulamea, the news of what had happened to Umi was unwelcome. She would have been more than happy to share in their common fate; but now that he was about to be recognized as the son of the great Liloa, she felt that they would soon part forever. Other alliances would be arranged for him, and he would forget the humble playmate of his youth, who loved him not because his father was a king, but simply because they had grown up together and it was inevitable. So when, two days later, Umi set out overland for Waipio, accompanied by his two loyal friends, Piimaiwaa and Omaukamau, Kulamea hid herself to avoid the pain of saying goodbye to Umi; but he found her anyway and made her happy by kissing her and telling her that, no matter what the future held, she would share it with him; and she believed him, because he had never lied to her.
Umi and his companions arrived in Waipio valley at nightfall. There they remained during the night, and the next morning crossed the little stream of Wailoa, near which was the royal mansion. There Umi left his companions and proceeded alone to the palace enclosure. His head was adorned with a helmet surmounted with white and scarlet plumes, and from his broad shoulders hung a cape of yellow feathers, such as an alii alone was [271]permitted to wear, while around his loins was fastened the maro left with Akahia by the king, and the ivory clasp ornamented a necklace of rare and beautiful shells. In his hand he bore an ihe, or javelin, of unusual weight and exquisite finish, and many eyes followed him as he approached the palace; for, although a stranger, it was manifest from his dress and bearing that he did not belong to the makaainana, or common people.
Umi and his companions arrived in Waipio Valley at sunset. They stayed there overnight, and the next morning, they crossed the small stream of Wailoa, close to the royal mansion. Umi left his companions behind and went alone to the palace grounds. He wore a helmet decorated with white and red feathers, and from his broad shoulders hung a cape made of yellow feathers, which only a chief was allowed to wear. Around his waist, he had the loincloth left by Akahia from the king, and the ivory clasp embellished a necklace of rare and beautiful shells. In his hand, he carried a javelin that was unusually heavy and finely crafted, and many eyes watched him as he approached the palace; for, even though he was a stranger, it was clear from his clothing and demeanor that he did not belong to the common people.
His mother had instructed him to seek the presence of the king in the most direct manner that occasion presented, and without asking the permission or assistance of any one, fearing, no doubt, that, to gain admission to the royal hale, he might exhibit and in some manner lose possession of the sole evidences of his paternity, and thus receive the punishment of an impostor. He therefore passed by, without seeking to enter, the gate of the enclosure, around which were lounging a score or more of sentinels and retainers, and, proceeding to the rear of the mansion, leaped over the high wall immediately back and within a hundred paces of the private apartments of the king.
His mother had told him to approach the king as directly as the situation allowed, without asking anyone for permission or help, fearing that if he sought entry to the royal area, he might somehow reveal and lose the only proof of his identity, and thus face the consequences of being seen as an impostor. So, he walked past the entrance gate, where a group of guards and attendants were hanging around, and went to the back of the mansion, where he climbed over the tall wall just a short distance from the king's private quarters.
Having thus violated a rule of royal etiquette, the penalty of which was death, unless mitigated by satisfactory explanation, Umi grasped his ihe firmly, determined, should he be opposed, to fight his way to the royal presence. It was a desperate resolution, but he had faith in himself, and was without fear.
Having broken a rule of royal etiquette, which could lead to death unless he provided a good explanation, Umi gripped his ihe tightly, ready to fight his way to the royal presence if anyone stood in his way. It was a risky decision, but he believed in himself and felt no fear.
His movements had been watched as he passed the gate of the enclosure without a word, and as he sprang over the wall he found a number of uplifted spears between him and the entrances to the mansion. Nerving himself for the worst, he strode past the interposing weapons, strongly hurling their points aside when too closely presented, and in a moment stood at the back entrance of the palace, through which no one but of the royal household was permitted to enter.
His movements had been observed as he went through the gate of the enclosure without saying a word, and as he jumped over the wall, he found several raised spears between him and the entrances to the mansion. Bracing himself for the worst, he walked past the obstructing weapons, forcefully pushing their tips aside when they were thrust too close, and in a moment stood at the back entrance of the palace, where only members of the royal household were allowed to enter.
This audacity saved him from more determined opposition, since it seemed incredible that any one not possessing the confidence of the king would take such double hazard of his life. Stepping within the entrance, Umi turned, and, with a half-amused smile at the baffled guard now clamoring around the door, struck the handle of his javelin firmly into the ground, and walked unarmed into the presence of the king.
This bold move kept him safe from stronger opposition, as it seemed unbelievable that anyone without the king's confidence would risk their life like that. As he stepped inside, Umi turned around and, with a half-amused smile at the confused guard crowding the door, firmly planted the handle of his javelin in the ground and walked unarmed into the king's presence.
As Umi entered unannounced, the king had just finished his morning repast, and was lounging on a couch of many folds of [272]kapa, unattended except by his spittoon-bearer and two half-grown boys with kahilis.
As Umi walked in unexpectedly, the king had just finished his breakfast and was relaxing on a couch covered with many layers of [__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]kapa, with only his spittoon-bearer and two teenage boys holding kahilis nearby.
Astounded at the intrusion, the king rose to a sitting posture, and, with a frown upon his face, was about to speak, when Umi stepped to the couch and boldly seated himself in the lap of Liloa.
Astounded by the interruption, the king sat up, and with a frown on his face, was about to speak when Umi walked over to the couch and confidently sat in Liloa's lap.
Although past sixty, the king still retained a goodly share of his earlier vigor, and, throwing Umi from his knees, angrily exclaimed:
Although he was over sixty, the king still had a good amount of his earlier energy, and, pushing Umi off his knees, he angrily shouted:
“Audacious slave! how dare you!”
“Bold slave! How dare you!”
Umi rose to his feet, and, standing proudly before the king with folded arms, replied:
Umi stood up and, with his arms crossed, replied confidently to the king:
“The son of Liloa dare do anything!”
“The son of Liloa can do anything!”
For a moment the king did not speak. He looked into the face of the undaunted young stranger, and noted that it was noble; and then his thoughts went back to Kealakaha, and to the fair young girl of better than common blood whom he had met there many years before while journeying to Waipio after consecrating the temple of Manini, and finally, almost as in a dream, to the pledge he had given and the tokens he had left with her. When all this came back to him he cast his eyes over the comely youth, and beheld his maro around the loins of Umi, and the ivory clasp of his necklace upon his breast. He could scarcely doubt, yet, as if he had recollected nothing, seen nothing, he calmly but kindly said:
For a moment, the king was silent. He looked at the fearless young stranger and noticed that he had a noble face; then his thoughts drifted back to Kealakaha, and the beautiful young girl of noble blood he had met there many years ago while traveling to Waipio after consecrating the temple of Manini. Finally, almost as if in a dream, he remembered the promise he had made and the tokens he had left with her. As all this came back to him, he examined the handsome youth and noticed the maro around Umi's waist and the ivory clasp of his necklace on his chest. He could hardly doubt it, yet, as if he hadn't recalled anything or seen anything, he calmly but kindly said:
“Young man, you claim to be my son. If so, tell me of your mother, and of the errand that brings you here.”
“Young man, you say you’re my son. If that’s true, tell me about your mother and why you’ve come here.”
Umi bowed and answered: “My mother, O king, is Akahia-kuleana, of Kealakaha, and my years were twenty at the last ripening of the ohias. For the first time, four days ago, she told me I was the son of the king of Hawaii, and to take to him this maro and this ivory clasp, and he would not disown me. You are Liloa, the honored sovereign of Hawaii. I am Umi, the humble son of Akahia-kuleana. From the hands of my mother I have brought to you this maro and this ornament of bone. If I am your son, seat me beside you on the kapa; if not, order my body to the heiau as a sacrifice to the gods.”
Umi bowed and said, “My mother, O king, is Akahia-kuleana, from Kealakaha, and I’m twenty years old, which is when the ohias fully bloom. For the first time, four days ago, she told me that I am the son of the king of Hawaii, and that I should bring you this maro and this ivory clasp, and you would not deny me. You are Liloa, the respected ruler of Hawaii. I am Umi, the modest son of Akahia-kuleana. From my mother, I have brought you this maro and this bone ornament. If I am truly your son, seat me beside you on the kapa; if not, send my body to the heiau as an offering to the gods.”
There was a struggle in the breast of the king, and his eyes were bent upon the bold youth with an expression of pride and tenderness as he said: [273]
There was a conflict in the king's heart, and he looked at the brave young man with a mix of pride and affection as he said: [__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]
“How did you gain admission here alone and unannounced?”
“How did you manage to get in here all by yourself and without any notice?”
“By leaping over the wall of the pahale and beating down the spears of your guards,” replied Umi modestly.
“By jumping over the wall of the pahale and knocking down the spears of your guards,” replied Umi modestly.
“It was a dangerous undertaking,” suggested the king, feigning a frown which wrinkled into a smile upon his lips; “had you no fear?”
“It was a risky venture,” the king suggested, pretending to frown but quickly breaking into a smile; “weren’t you scared?”
“I am still young and have not yet learned to fear,” returned Umi, with an air of self-reproach.
“I’m still young and haven’t learned to be afraid yet,” Umi replied, feeling a bit ashamed.
“Such words could come alone from a heart ennobled by the blood of Pilikaeae! You are indeed the son of Liloa!” exclaimed the king, with emotion, stretching forth his hand and seating Umi beside him. “Not these tokens alone but your face and bearing show it.” And he put his arms around the neck of his son and kissed him, and ordered a repast, which they ate together, while Umi related to his royal father the simple events of his humble life.
“Those words could only come from a heart elevated by the blood of Pilikaeae! You truly are the son of Liloa!” the king exclaimed, filled with emotion, reaching out his hand and sitting Umi beside him. “Not just these tokens, but your face and demeanor reveal it.” He wrapped his arms around his son's neck and kissed him, then ordered a meal, which they shared while Umi told his royal father the straightforward stories of his humble life.
As the strange entrance of Umi into the royal mansion had attracted much attention, many of the privileged retainers and officers of the court soon gathered in and around the palace; and the rank and possible purposes of the visitor were undergoing an earnest discussion—especially after it was learned that he was breakfasting with the king—when Hakau, the only recognized son of Liloa and heir-presumptive to the throne, suddenly appeared and sought the presence of his royal father.
As the unusual arrival of Umi at the royal mansion drew a lot of attention, many of the privileged retainers and court officials quickly gathered in and around the palace. They were seriously discussing the visitor's status and potential intentions—especially after it was revealed that he was having breakfast with the king—when Hakau, the only acknowledged son of Liloa and next in line for the throne, suddenly appeared and requested to see his royal father.
There was a dark scowl on the face of Hakau on entering the room and observing a stranger in close conversation with the king and eating from the same vessels, nor did it disappear when Liloa presented Umi to him as his own son and Hakau’s half-brother. Umi rose and frankly offered his brother the hand of friendship and affection; but the grasp and recognition of Hakau were cold, and when he was invited to sit down and partake of meat with his newly-found brother he excused himself with the falsehood that he had just risen from his morning meal. After a few words with the king, during which he closely scrutinized Umi’s handsome face and manly form, Hakau withdrew, leaving no token in word or look of any feeling of joy at the meeting.
Hakau entered the room with a dark scowl on his face upon seeing a stranger in close conversation with the king and sharing food from the same dishes. His expression didn’t change when Liloa introduced Umi as his son and Hakau’s half-brother. Umi stood up and warmly offered his brother his hand in friendship, but Hakau's grip and acknowledgment were cold. When he was invited to sit and share a meal with his newfound brother, he declined, claiming he had just finished his breakfast. After exchanging a few words with the king, while closely examining Umi's handsome face and strong build, Hakau left without showing any sign of happiness about their meeting.
Although the kings of the Hawaiian group at that time usually had from two to six wives—either marriages of the heart or alliances with the families of neighboring kings to strengthen their [274]dynasties—tradition has given to Liloa but one recognized wife. She was Pinea, a Maui chiefess of family distinction, who gave to Liloa a son and one daughter—Hakau and Kapukini. Hakau had reached his thirtieth year and had married the daughter of the chief and high-priest Pae. They had one child, a daughter, who had been given the name of her grandmother, Pinea. Kapukini had not quite reached womanhood, and was the idol of the court.
Although the kings of the Hawaiian islands at that time typically had between two to six wives—either for love or as political alliances with the families of neighboring kings to strengthen their [__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__] dynasties—tradition recognizes Liloa as having only one wife. She was Pinea, a chiefess from Maui with a distinguished lineage, who bore Liloa a son and a daughter—Hakau and Kapukini. Hakau had turned thirty and married the daughter of the chief and high priest Pae. They had a daughter, named after her grandmother, Pinea. Kapukini had not yet reached womanhood and was adored at court.
Hakau was a large, well-visaged man, but was haughty, selfish and cruel. Having been, until the sudden appearance of Umi at the court, the only recognized son of Liloa, his caprices had been humored until his heartlessness and tyranny had become almost a by-word in Hamakua. But the truth seems to be that he was naturally vicious and barbarous, and tradition speaks of no greater tyrant among all the rulers of Hawaii. Heedless of the rights of property, without return he took from others whatever he coveted, and in an insanity of pride and criminal envy caused to be secretly slain or disfigured such as were reputed to surpass him in personal beauty. Without giving note or credence to the many tales of barbarism with which tradition has connected his name, it is doubtless true that his cruelty and contempt for the rights of his subjects rendered him an unfit successor of the gentle and sagacious Liloa, under whose reign the humblest were protected, and peace and prosperity prevailed throughout the six districts of the island.
Hakau was a large, good-looking man, but he was arrogant, selfish, and cruel. Before Umi showed up at the court, he was the only recognized son of Liloa, and his whims were indulged until his heartlessness and tyranny became almost legendary in Hamakua. The reality seems to be that he was inherently vicious and brutal, and history notes that he was the worst tyrant among all the rulers of Hawaii. Ignoring the rights of others, he took what he wanted without giving anything in return and, driven by pride and jealousy, had those who were deemed more attractive than him secretly killed or disfigured. Without addressing the many stories of his brutality that have become associated with his name, it’s clear that his cruelty and disregard for his subjects' rights made him an unworthy successor to the kind and wise Liloa, under whom even the lowliest were protected and peace and prosperity flourished across the six districts of the island.
No further explanation of Hakau’s freezing reception of Umi is required. He was envious of his handsome face and noble bearing, and hated him because of the love with which his father manifestly regarded him. But Hakau’s feelings in the matter were not consulted, and the day following Umi was conducted to the temple of Paakalani in great pomp, where, to the solemn music of chant and sacred drum, the officiating priest with the newly-found son of the king went through the form of oki-ka-piko—a ceremony attending the birth of the children of royalty—and Umi was formally and publicly recognized as his son by the king of Hawaii.
No further explanation of Hakau’s cold reception of Umi is needed. He was jealous of Umi’s good looks and noble demeanor, and he resented him because of the affection his father clearly showed towards him. However, Hakau’s feelings didn’t matter, and the day after, Umi was taken to the temple of Paakalani with great ceremony, where, to the solemn sounds of chanting and sacred drums, the officiating priest performed the oki-ka-piko ceremony, which celebrates the birth of royal children, and Umi was officially recognized as the king of Hawaii's son in front of everyone.
Hakau was compelled, with great bitterness of heart, to witness this ceremony, but was too discreet to openly manifest his displeasure. Returning to the palace, Umi was formally presented to the royal household, and heralds proclaimed his rank and investiture of the tabus to which he was entitled. [275]
Hakau was forced, with a lot of resentment, to watch this ceremony but was too tactful to show his anger openly. When he returned to the palace, Umi was officially introduced to the royal family, and heralds announced his rank and the tabus he was entitled to. [__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]
Although the mother of Hakau, Pinea received him kindly, and Kapukini was more than delighted with her new and handsome brother. She clung to his hand, and artlessly declared that Hakau was cross with her and that she had prayed to the gods to send her another brother, just such a one as Umi, and they had done so.
Although Hakau's mother, Pinea, welcomed him warmly, Kapukini was thrilled to have a new and handsome brother. She held onto his hand and innocently said that Hakau was upset with her and that she had prayed to the gods to send her another brother, just like Umi, and they had answered her prayers.
Soon after a great feast was given by the king in honor of the new heir, and all the leading chiefs in the kingdom were invited to come and pay their respects to him. Twelve hundred chiefs were present, and the feasting and rejoicing continued for three days, interspersed with games and athletic sports, in which Umi shone with great splendor. In feats of strength and the skilful handling of arms he had few equals in all that great and distinguished gathering, and in conversations with the old he exhibited so much wisdom and prudence of speech that they wondered who had been his tutors; and when they learned that he had been taught by no one and that the greater part of his young life had been passed in solitude, some of them thought the gods must have instructed him, and all admitted that he was a worthy son of Liloa and an honor to the royal line.
Soon after, the king hosted a grand feast to celebrate the arrival of the new heir, inviting all the top chiefs in the kingdom to come and pay their respects. Twelve hundred chiefs attended, and the celebration lasted for three days, filled with feasting and merriment, along with games and sports where Umi stood out brilliantly. In strength contests and skilled weapon handling, he had few rivals in that impressive assembly, and in discussions with the elders, he showed such wisdom and careful speech that they were curious about his teachers. When they found out that he had no formal tutors and had spent most of his youth in solitude, some speculated that the gods must have guided him, and everyone agreed that he was a worthy son of Liloa and a true honor to the royal lineage.
Umi was thus firmly established at the court of his royal father, and adequate revenues were set apart for his proper maintenance and that of a retinue befitting his high rank. His friends Piimaiwaa and Omaukamau, who were overjoyed at his good fortune, entered his service as his personal and confidential friends, and thenceforth became identified with his career, always appearing as the most faithful and self-sacrificing of his adherents.
Umi was now firmly established at his royal father's court, with enough funds set aside for his proper upkeep and for a retinue suitable for his high status. His friends Piimaiwaa and Omaukamau, who were thrilled about his good fortune, joined him as his personal and trusted friends, and from that point on, they became closely associated with his journey, always showing themselves as the most loyal and dedicated of his supporters.
In a week after his arrival at Waipio, Umi sent Omaukamau back to their old home with news of his recognition by the king. He also bore an order enlarging the area of Maakao and Akahia’s possessions, and relieving them from rent and all other tenant charges. Nor did he forget Kulamea. He sent her a little present in token of his love, and word that, although it could not safely be so then, some day in the future she should be nearer to him, even though he might become the king of Hawaii. The token was dear to her, and dearer still his words, for she knew the heart of Umi and did not doubt; and thenceforth she lived and patiently waited for him, keeping her own secret, and firmly saying “no” to the many who sought her in marriage.
A week after his arrival in Waipio, Umi sent Omaukamau back to their old home with news that the king had recognized him. He also delivered an order that expanded Maakao and Akahia’s possessions and freed them from rent and all other tenant charges. He didn’t forget about Kulamea either. He sent her a small gift to show his love, along with a promise that, although it wasn’t safe to do so then, one day in the future they would be closer, even if he became the king of Hawaii. The gift was special to her, and even more so were his words, because she understood Umi’s heart and had no doubts. From that point on, she lived patiently waiting for him, keeping her secret, and firmly saying “no” to all the suitors who sought her hand in marriage.
Umi’s affability and intelligence soon made him a great favorite [276]at the court and steadily endeared him to his father. But in proportion as he grew in the favor of others Hakau’s hatred for him increased, and but for the fear of his father would have manifested itself in open hostility; but Liloa, who was growing old and feeble through a cureless malady, had not yet designated his successor, and Hakau deemed it prudent to make no outward showing of the intense envy and dislike of his brother which he was secretly nursing, and which he resolved should be gratified when the reins of government passed into his hands.
Umi’s charm and smarts quickly made him a favorite [__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__] at the court, winning over his father more and more. However, as he gained favor with others, Hakau’s resentment toward him grew. If it weren't for the fear of their father, Hakau would have shown his hostility openly. But Liloa, who was becoming old and frail due to an incurable illness, had yet to name a successor. Hakau thought it wise to hide his deep envy and dislike for his brother, which he planned to act on once he took control of the government.
In a little less than two years after the recognition of Umi the black kapa covered Liloa. When he felt the end approaching he called his two sons before him, and publicly gave the charge of the government and title of moi to Hakau, and the custody of the gods and temples to Umi. “You are to be the ruler of Hawaii,” he said to Hakau, “and Umi is to be your counselor.”
In just under two years after Umi was recognized, the black kapa covered Liloa. As he sensed the end was near, he summoned his two sons to him and officially entrusted the government and the title of moi to Hakau, while Umi received the responsibility for the gods and temples. “You will be the ruler of Hawaii,” he said to Hakau, “and Umi will be your advisor.”
There was grief all over the kingdom when the death of Liloa became known, for he was greatly beloved; and, that his bones might never be desecrated, the high-priest Pae, whose daughter Hakau had married, secretly conveyed them to the Kona coast, and consigned them to the deep waters off Kekaha.
There was sorrow throughout the kingdom when news of Liloa's death spread, as he was deeply loved; and to ensure that his remains would never be disrespected, the high priest Pae, whose daughter Hakau had married, secretly took them to the Kona coast and placed them in the deep waters off Kekaha.
This was in accordance with the custom of the time—in fact, with the custom of earlier and later years, for the resting-place of the bones of Kamehameha I., who died in 1819, is unknown. A story survives that the remains of this eminent chief were entombed in the sea, but the more popular belief is that they were secretly conveyed to a cave or other place prepared for them in the hills back of Kailua, on the island of Hawaii, and there hidden for ever from mortal gaze. In connection with this belief it is stated that just before daylight on the morning following the night of the death of Kamehameha, one of his nearest friends, while the guard had been removed to afford the opportunity, took the bones of his beloved chief upon his shoulders, and, alone and unseen, conveyed them to their secret sepulchre. Returning, he encountered two natives who were preparing for the labors of the day. Fearing that he had been followed, he inquired whether they had observed any one passing toward the hills that morning. They declared that they had seen no one. Had they answered differently he would have slain them both on the spot, that their secret might have died with them. [277]
This followed the customs of the time—and really, those of earlier and later periods, since the final resting place of Kamehameha I., who passed away in 1819, remains a mystery. There's a tale that suggests his remains were buried at sea, but the more widely accepted belief is that they were secretly taken to a cave or another designated spot in the hills behind Kailua, on the island of Hawaii, and hidden away from human sight forever. According to this belief, just before sunrise on the morning after Kamehameha's death, one of his closest friends, while the guard was away, took the bones of his beloved chief on his shoulders, and, alone and unnoticed, carried them to their hidden burial site. On his way back, he ran into two locals who were getting ready for their day. Worried he might have been followed, he asked if they had seen anyone heading toward the hills that morning. They replied that they hadn't seen anyone. If they had answered differently, he would have killed them both right there, so the secret would die with them. [__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]
The name of this chief was Hoolulu. He has been dead for many years; and although he left children, to one of whom the secret may have been imparted, in accordance with native custom in such matters, it is now believed that all knowledge of the depository of the remains of the first Kamehameha is lost. In 1853, when the necessity of hiding the bones of distinguished chiefs was no longer recognized, Kamehameha III. visited Kailua and almost prevailed upon Hoolulu to point out the spot. They even started toward the hills for that purpose, but, as quite a number of persons were observed to be following, Hoolulu declined to proceed, and could never after be induced to divulge anything.
The chief's name was Hoolulu. He has been dead for many years, and even though he had children, to whom the secret may have been passed down according to native traditions, it’s now believed that all knowledge about where the remains of the first Kamehameha are hidden is lost. In 1853, when there was no longer a need to hide the bones of important chiefs, Kamehameha III visited Kailua and almost convinced Hoolulu to reveal the location. They even started heading toward the hills for that reason, but when they noticed that a lot of people were following them, Hoolulu decided not to continue and could never be persuaded to share anything afterward.
So fearful were the ancient chiefs of Hawaii that some indignity might be offered to their remains after death—for instance, that charmed fish-hooks or arrow-points for shooting mice might be made from their bones—that they were invariably hidden by their surviving friends, sometimes in the depths of the ocean, and quite as frequently, perhaps, in the dark recesses of volcanic caverns, with which the islands abound.
The ancient chiefs of Hawaii were so afraid that their remains might be disrespected after death—like having their bones made into enchanted fishhooks or arrowheads for hunting mice—that their friends always hid them. Sometimes they would be concealed deep in the ocean, and just as often, they were placed in the dark depths of the volcanic caves that are common on the islands.
Immediately after Kamehameha I. had breathed his last his friend Kalaimoku assembled the principal chiefs around the body to consider what should be done with it. In his great admiration for the dead chief one of them solemnly said: “This is my thought: we will eat him raw!” But the body was left to Liholiho, son and successor of the dead king who, with his queen, Kamamalu, died while on a visit to England in 1824.
Immediately after Kamehameha I had passed away, his friend Kalaimoku gathered the main chiefs around his body to decide what to do next. In a moment of deep admiration for the deceased leader, one of them seriously proposed, “Here’s my idea: we will eat him raw!” However, the body was entrusted to Liholiho, the son and successor of the late king, who, along with his queen, Kamamalu, died while visiting England in 1824.
The bones of no Hawaiian chief were ever more securely hidden than were those of the distinguished alii-nui Kualii, who ruled with a strong arm the turbulent factions of the island of Oahu some two centuries back. After the flesh had been stripped from the bones they were given in charge of a trusty friend to be secreted, and most effectually did he accomplish the delicate task assigned him. He had them pulverized to a fine powder, which he mixed with the poi to be served at the funeral feast to be given to the principal chiefs the day following. At the close of the repast, when asked if he had secreted the bones of the dead chief to his satisfaction, he grimly replied: “Hidden, indeed, are the bones of Kualii! They have been deposited in a hundred living sepulchres. You have eaten them!”
The bones of no Hawaiian chief were ever more securely hidden than those of the distinguished alii-nui Kualii, who ruled firmly over the turbulent factions of Oahu about two centuries ago. After the flesh was stripped from the bones, they were entrusted to a loyal friend to be hidden, and he managed this delicate task remarkably well. He ground them into a fine powder, which he mixed with the poi to be served at the funeral feast for the principal chiefs the next day. At the end of the meal, when asked if he had successfully hidden the bones of the dead chief, he grimly replied, “Indeed, the bones of Kualii are hidden! They have been placed in a hundred living tombs. You have eaten them!”
But we are wandering somewhat from our story. The day [278]after the death of Liloa, Hakau was ceremoniously invested with supreme authority, while the high-priest Laeanui gave formal recognition to Umi as guardian of the gods and temples. Both events were celebrated with display and sacrifice; but it is said that the scream of the alae, a sacred bird of evil omen, was heard around the palace all through the night that Hakau first slept there as king, and that as Umi entered the temple of Paakalani to assume the guardianship of the gods the head of the great image of Lono, near the door of the inner temple, nodded approvingly.
But we're getting a bit off track from our story. The day [__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__] after Liloa's death, Hakau was formally given supreme authority, while the high priest Laeanui officially recognized Umi as the guardian of the gods and temples. Both events were celebrated with displays and sacrifices; however, it was said that the scream of the alae, a sacred bird associated with bad omens, was heard around the palace throughout the night that Hakau first slept there as king. Additionally, as Umi entered the temple of Paakalani to take on the guardianship of the gods, the head of the great statue of Lono, near the door of the inner temple, nodded in approval.
Independently of Umi’s position as prime minister or royal adviser, his authority as guardian of the gods and temples was second only to that of the king, and Hakau chafed under a bequest that had clothed his brother with a power little less than his own and placed him so near the throne. The consequence was that he seldom invited him to his councils, and secretly sought to cast discredit upon his acts as the nominal head of the priesthood. But Umi bore himself so nobly that Hakau’s venom brought no poison to him, and the petty persecutions to which he was subjected not only failed to injure him, but actually added to his popularity with those who had felt the barbarity of his brother, whose first acts on coming to power were to dismiss, disrate and impoverish many of the old and faithful servants and counselors of his father, and surround himself with a party of unscrupulous retainers as cruel and treacherous as himself.
Regardless of Umi’s role as prime minister or royal adviser, his authority as the guardian of the gods and temples was second only to the king's, and Hakau resented the legacy that granted his brother a power nearly equal to his own and placed him so close to the throne. As a result, he rarely invited him to his councils and secretly tried to undermine his actions as the nominal head of the priesthood. However, Umi conducted himself with such dignity that Hakau’s spite had no effect on him, and the minor harassment he endured not only failed to harm him but actually increased his popularity among those who had experienced the cruelty of his brother. Hakau’s early actions when he took power included firing, discrediting, and impoverishing many of their father’s loyal servants and advisors, surrounding himself with a group of unscrupulous followers as cruel and deceitful as he was.
Enraged that his secret and cowardly slanders of Umi failed to bring him into disrespect, Hakau’s hostility began to assume a more open and brutal form. He publicly reviled his brother for his low birth, and assumed not only that Liloa was not his father, but that his mother was a woman without any distinction of blood.
Enraged that his secret and cowardly insults about Umi didn't make him look bad, Hakau’s anger started to show itself in a more obvious and brutal way. He openly mocked his brother for his humble origins and claimed not only that Liloa wasn’t his father, but also that his mother was an ordinary woman with no notable lineage.
Unable to bear these taunts, and not deeming it prudent to precipitate an open rupture with his brother, Umi quietly left Waipio with his two friends Piimaiwaa and Omaukamau, and, traveling through Hamakua without stopping at Kealakaha, where dwelt his mother and Kulamea, proceeded at once to Waipunalei, near Laupahoehoe, in the district of Hilo, where he concluded to remain for a time and await the development of events.
Unable to handle these insults and thinking it unwise to have a direct falling out with his brother, Umi quietly left Waipio with his two friends Piimaiwaa and Omaukamau. They traveled through Hamakua without stopping at Kealakaha, where his mother and Kulamea lived, and went straight to Waipunalei, near Laupahoehoe, in the Hilo district, where he decided to stay for a while and see how things turned out.
To support themselves Umi and his two friends devoted a portion of their time to fishing, bird-catching and the making of [279]canoes, spears and other weapons; and although the rank of Umi was studiously concealed, his intelligence, skilful use of arms and general bearing could not fail to attract attention and excite the curiosity of his humble associates. Not unfrequently strangers would prostrate themselves before him, so profoundly were they impressed with his appearance, but he declined to accept their homage and smilingly assured them that he was born and reared, like themselves, in humble life. As a further precaution against recognition, he carefully avoided the prominent chiefs of the district, deeming it probable that some of them had seen him in Waipio, or even witnessed the ceremonies attending his acceptance as the son of Liloa.
To support themselves, Umi and his two friends spent part of their time fishing, catching birds, and making [__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__] canoes, spears, and other weapons. Even though Umi's status was kept a secret, his intelligence, skill with weapons, and overall presence couldn't help but draw attention and spark curiosity among his humble friends. It wasn't uncommon for strangers to bow down before him, so impressed were they by his appearance, but he refused to accept their admiration and kindly assured them that he was born and raised, just like them, in a humble life. As an extra measure to avoid being recognized, he steered clear of the prominent chiefs in the area, thinking it likely that some had seen him in Waipio or even witnessed the ceremonies when he was acknowledged as the son of Liloa.
III.
It was not destined that Umi should remain long unknown among the hills of Hilo. His sudden disappearance and continued absence from the court had excited apprehensions of foul dealing, and Hakau himself, who had thus far failed in his efforts to discover the retreat of Umi, began to fear that he was somewhere secretly planning a deep scheme of retaliation. But Umi had as yet marked out for himself no definite plan of action. He smarted under the persecutions of Hakau, and did not doubt that, sooner or later, he would triumph over them and be restored to the rights and privileges bequeathed to him by his royal father; but exactly when and how all this was to be accomplished were problems which he expected the future to assist him in solving.
Umi wasn’t meant to stay hidden among the hills of Hilo for long. His sudden disappearance and ongoing absence from the court had raised fears of foul play, and Hakau, who had so far failed to find Umi’s hiding place, began to worry that he was secretly plotting a scheme for revenge. But Umi hadn’t yet figured out a clear plan of action for himself. He was suffering under Hakau's persecution and had no doubt that, eventually, he would overcome it and regain the rights and privileges that his royal father had left for him; but when and how all of this would happen were questions he hoped the future would help him answer.
And he was not disappointed. The future for which he had patiently waited was near at hand, and he was about to become the central figure of a struggle which would test to their utmost his courage and ability. One day, while strolling alone in the hills back of Waipunalei, there suddenly appeared before him a man of stupendous proportions. Umi regarded the object for a moment with amazement, and was about to speak when the monster dropped on his knees before him. In that position he was a head and shoulders above Umi, and the spear in his hand was of the measure in length of ten full steps. Although more than eleven feet in height, he was well proportioned, and the expression of his face was intelligent and gentle. He was young [280]in years, yet his hair fell to his shoulders and was streaked with gray.
And he wasn’t disappointed. The future he had patiently waited for was just around the corner, and he was about to become the main focus of a struggle that would push his courage and skills to their limits. One day, while wandering alone in the hills behind Waipunalei, he suddenly encountered a man of enormous size. Umi looked at him in amazement for a moment, and was about to speak when the giant dropped to his knees in front of him. In that position, he towered over Umi, and the spear in his hand was as long as ten full steps. Although he was more than eleven feet tall, he was well-built, and the look on his face was both intelligent and gentle. He was young [__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]in years, yet his hair fell to his shoulders and was streaked with gray.
“Who are you, and why do you kneel to me?” said Umi, looking up into the face of the giant with a feeling of awe. “If I had your limbs I would kneel alone to the gods.”
“Who are you, and why are you kneeling to me?” said Umi, looking up into the face of the giant with a sense of wonder. “If I had your strength, I would only kneel to the gods.”
“I am Maukaleoleo, of Kona, and the most unfortunate of men,” replied the monster in a ponderous but not unpleasant tone. “My mother was Nuuheli; but she is now dead, and, having grown to the height of the trees, I live in the mountains among them, for men seem to fear and hate me, and women and children scream with fright at my approach.”
“I am Maukaleoleo from Kona, and I'm the most unfortunate man,” replied the monster in a heavy but not unpleasant voice. “My mother was Nuuheli, but she has passed away, and now that I've grown to the height of the trees, I live in the mountains among them, as people seem to fear and hate me, and women and children scream in terror when I come near.”
“And who was your father?” inquired Umi, kindly.
“And who was your dad?” Umi asked kindly.
“As he died when I was young,” returned the giant, “and that was more than thirty years ago, I know not, except that his name was Mano, and that he claimed lineage from Kahaukapu, the grandfather of the great Liloa, whose unworthy son now rules in Hawaii.”
“As he died when I was young,” the giant replied, “and that was over thirty years ago, I don’t know much else, except that his name was Mano, and he claimed to be descended from Kahaukapu, the grandfather of the great Liloa, whose unworthy son is now in charge in Hawaii.”
“Hist!” exclaimed Umi, reaching up and placing his hand gently upon the shoulder of the monster. “There is death in such words, even to a man of Maukaleoleo’s girth. The trees are listeners as well as myself.”
“Shh!” Umi said, reaching up and placing his hand gently on the monster's shoulder. “There's danger in those words, even for someone as big as Maukaleoleo. The trees are listening, just like I am.”
“The trees will say nothing,” was the reply, “for they often hear such words of Hakau. But why should I fear death? I was not born to be slain for speaking the truth. Listen, and then tell me why Maukaleoleo should fear anything that is human. When a boy a stranger met me one day on the cliffs overlooking the sea, where I was searching for the feathers of the oo. He was mighty in stature, and in fear I fell upon the ground and hid my face. He called me by name, and I looked up and saw that he held in his hand a small fish of the color of the skies at sunset. Handing the fish to me, he said: ‘Eat this, and to see your face all men will look toward the stars.’ I knew he was a god—Kanaloa, perhaps—and I feared to refuse. So I took the fish and ate it, and the stranger stepped over the cliffs with a smile on his face and disappeared. The fish was pleasant to the taste, and I could have eaten more. A strange sense of increasing strength seized me, and on my way home I lifted large rocks and felt that I could uproot trees. I said nothing to my mother of what had happened, but the next morning she looked at me with fright and wonder, for during the night I had grown [281]an arm’s length in height. Except upon my hands and knees I could no longer enter the door of the house where I was born, and everything with which I was familiar had a dwarfed and unnatural look. I was ashamed to meet my old associates, and only ventured from the house when it was too dark for me to be plainly seen. Larger and larger I grew, until at the age of fifteen I reached my present proportions, when my mother died, and I made my home in the mountains, where I have since spent the most of my time. What should one so treated by the gods fear from man?” And Maukaleoleo rose to his feet, towering like a cocoa-tree above his companion.
“The trees won’t say anything,” was the reply, “because they often hear words from Hakau. But why should I be afraid of death? I wasn’t born to be killed for speaking the truth. Listen, and then tell me why Maukaleoleo should be scared of anything human. When I was a boy, a stranger met me one day on the cliffs overlooking the sea while I was searching for the feathers of the oo. He was huge, and out of fear, I fell to the ground and hid my face. He called me by my name, and I looked up to see he was holding a small fish that resembled the sky at sunset. Handing me the fish, he said: ‘Eat this, and everyone will look toward the stars to see your face.’ I knew he was a god—perhaps Kanaloa—and I was afraid to refuse. So, I took the fish and ate it, and the stranger stepped off the cliffs with a smile on his face and vanished. The fish tasted good, and I could have eaten more. A strange feeling of growing strength overwhelmed me, and on my way home, I lifted heavy rocks and felt like I could uproot trees. I didn’t tell my mother what had happened, but the next morning she looked at me with fear and amazement, for during the night I had grown [__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__] an arm’s length taller. I could no longer fit through the door of the house where I was born, except on my hands and knees, and everything familiar looked small and odd. I was embarrassed to face my old friends, and only left the house when it was too dark for anyone to see me clearly. I kept growing, and by the age of fifteen, I reached my current size, when my mother passed away, and I moved to the mountains, where I have spent most of my time since. What should someone treated this way by the gods fear from man?” And Maukaleoleo stood up, towering like a coconut tree above his companion.
“A strange story, indeed! But if the trees, which are speechless, do not betray you, why should not I?” said Umi, curious to learn something farther of the strange being in whose veins possibly coursed the blood of kings.
“A strange story, indeed! But if the trees, which can't speak, don’t reveal your secrets, why should I?” said Umi, eager to learn more about the unusual being who might have royal blood running through their veins.
“Because,” answered the giant, slowly, “you are Umi, the son of Liloa, and Hakau is your enemy!”
“Because,” replied the giant, slowly, “you are Umi, the son of Liloa, and Hakau is your enemy!”
Umi listened to these words in amazement, and then frankly said:
Umi listened to these words in shock, and then honestly said:
“You are right. I am Umi, the son of Liloa, and Hakau is not my friend. And now that you know so much, you cannot but also know that it is prudent for me to remain at present unknown. Let me ask in return that you will not betray me.”
"You’re right. I’m Umi, the son of Liloa, and Hakau isn’t my friend. Now that you know this much, you have to understand that it’s smart for me to stay unknown for now. I ask you in return not to betray me."
“I know all, and you may fear nothing,” said Maukaleoleo. “Before the moon grows large again I shall be with you, spear in hand, on your way to Waipio. Meantime you may lose sight of me, but I shall be near you when my arm is needed. You have powerful friends. Be guided by them, and all will be well.”
“I know everything, and you have nothing to fear,” said Maukaleoleo. “Before the moon is full again, I will be with you, spear in hand, on your journey to Waipio. For now, you might not see me, but I’ll be close by when you need my help. You have strong allies. Follow their advice, and everything will be fine.”
Umi held up his hand, and Maukaleoleo folded it in his mighty palm as he dropped upon his knees and exclaimed:
Umi raised his hand, and Maukaleoleo clasped it in his strong palm as he knelt down and exclaimed:
“Umi, son of Liloa! here in the hills, among the listening leaves, let Maukaleoleo be the first to hail you moi of Hawaii!”
“Umi, son of Liloa! here in the hills, among the listening leaves, let Maukaleoleo be the first to greet you moi of Hawaii!”
Before Umi could rebuke the untimely utterance Maukaleoleo rose to his feet and with a low bow disappeared among the trees.
Before Umi could scold the inappropriate comment, Maukaleoleo stood up and, with a slight bow, vanished among the trees.
With whatever feeling of fear the makaainana, or laboring classes, of Waipunalei may have regarded Maukaleoleo, as he occasionally appeared among them like a moving tower, he was not without friends. He was well known to the priests and kaulas of the district, who believed that his huge proportions [282]were due to the special act of some god, and was always a welcome visitor at the home of Kaoleioku, a high-priest of great influence both in Hilo and Hamakua. It is therefore probable that this meeting with Umi was not entirely accidental, for the day following Kaoleioku despatched a messenger to Umi, who was found not without some difficulty, inviting him to a conference in a secluded spot near the head of a neighboring valley.
Despite any fear the makaainana, or working class, of Waipunalei might have felt towards Maukaleoleo, who sometimes appeared among them like a towering figure, he had friends. He was well-known to the priests and kaulas in the area, who believed his massive size was the result of a special blessing from a god. He was always a welcome guest at the home of Kaoleioku, a highly influential high priest in both Hilo and Hamakua. Thus, it’s likely that his meeting with Umi was not purely coincidental, as the day after, Kaoleioku sent a messenger to Umi, who was found with some difficulty, inviting him to a meeting in a quiet spot near the head of a nearby valley.
The object of the meeting was not stated, and Umi’s first thought was that the emissaries of his brother were seeking to lure him to his death; but no danger ever appalled him, and, seizing his javelin and thrusting a pahoa into his girdle, he followed the messenger.
The purpose of the meeting wasn't clear, and Umi's first thought was that his brother's envoys were trying to trick him into a trap; but no amount of danger ever intimidated him, so he grabbed his spear and tucked a pahoa into his belt before following the messenger.
A brisk walk of an hour brought them to a small grass hut partially hidden among the trees and undergrowth of an almost dry ravine abruptly jutting into the valley. At that point the valley was too narrow to admit of cultivation, although a broken stone wall across the mouth of the ravine showed that at one time three or four uneven acres behind it had been tilled. The grass grew rank within the enclosure, and, in addition to several varieties of forest trees that had taken root since the ground had last been disturbed, a half-dozen or more cocoa-trees lifted their heads above the surrounding foliage, and the broad leaves of as many banana-stalks swayed lazily in the wind.
A quick walk of about an hour brought them to a small grass hut that's partly hidden among the trees and brush of a nearly dry ravine that suddenly jutted into the valley. At this point, the valley was too narrow for farming, even though a crumbling stone wall at the mouth of the ravine indicated that three or four uneven acres behind it had been cultivated at one time. The grass grew thick inside the enclosure, and along with several types of forest trees that had taken root since the ground was last disturbed, a handful of cocoa trees stood tall above the surrounding greenery, while the large leaves of several banana plants swayed gently in the breeze.
It was a lonesome-looking spot, and no sign of life in or around the hut was visible as the messenger stopped at a gap in the crumbling wall and awaited the approach of Umi. The chirp of the crickets in the grass seemed to be a note of warning, and the whistle of a solitary bird hidden among the leaves sounded like a scream to Umi in that deserted and otherwise silent nook; but he grasped his ihe firmly and beckoned the messenger to proceed. As he stepped over the broken wall he caught a glimpse of the ponderous form of Maukaleoleo through the branches of a sandal-tree on the side of the hill overlooking the hut. Under the eye of that mighty and friendly sentinel Umi dismissed all thought of treachery or danger.
It was a lonely-looking place, and there was no sign of life in or around the hut as the messenger stopped at a gap in the crumbling wall and waited for Umi to arrive. The chirping of the crickets in the grass felt like a warning, and the whistle of a lone bird hidden among the leaves sounded like a scream to Umi in that deserted and otherwise quiet spot; but he held his ihe firmly and signaled the messenger to go ahead. As he stepped over the broken wall, he caught sight of the massive form of Maukaleoleo through the branches of a sandalwood tree on the hillside overlooking the hut. Under the watchful eye of that powerful and friendly guardian, Umi brushed aside any thoughts of betrayal or danger.
Reaching the door of the hut, he was met by the high-priest Kaoleioku, who promptly extended his hand and invited him to enter, while the messenger withdrew from the enclosure and took a position where he commanded a view of the valley above and below the mouth of the ravine. [283]
Reaching the door of the hut, he was greeted by the high priest Kaoleioku, who immediately extended his hand and invited him inside, while the messenger stepped back from the area and positioned himself where he could see the valley above and below the entrance of the ravine. [__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]
There was no furniture in the hut beyond two or three rickety shelves, and on one side a raised platform of earth, which, with a kapa covering, might have been used either as a bed or seat. On entering the priest requested Umi to be seated, and then bowed low and said:
There was no furniture in the hut except for two or three wobbly shelves, and on one side, there was a raised platform made of earth, which, with a kapa covering, could have served as either a bed or a seat. Upon entering, the priest asked Umi to take a seat, then bowed deeply and said:
“I cannot doubt that I am standing before Umi, son of Liloa, and guardian of our sacred temples and our fathers’ gods.” To these words the priest silently awaited an answer.
“I have no doubt that I am standing before Umi, son of Liloa, and protector of our sacred temples and our ancestors’ gods.” The priest silently awaited a response to these words.
Umi did not reply at once; but after giving the face of the priest a searching glance, and recalling his meeting with Maukaleoleo the day before, and the vision through the branches of the sandal-tree, he frankly answered:
Umi didn’t respond immediately; after taking a careful look at the priest’s face and remembering his encounter with Maukaleoleo the day before, along with the view through the branches of the sandal tree, he replied honestly:
“I cannot deny it.”
"I can't deny it."
“No; you cannot, indeed!” returned the priest, fervently; “for so have the clouds told me, and so has it been whispered in my dreams. Word has come to me from Waipio that Hakau knows you are in Waipunalei, and his emissaries are already here with orders to assassinate you.”
“No, you definitely cannot!” the priest replied passionately. “The clouds have told me this, and I've heard it whispered in my dreams. I've received word from Waipio that Hakau knows you’re in Waipunalei, and his agents are already here with orders to kill you.”
“Then further disguise would be useless, further delay cowardly!” exclaimed Umi, rising from his seat and grasping his ihe. “His cruelty forces me at last to strike! The time for action has come, and, spear in hand, as befits a son of Liloa, I will face the royal murderer in Waipio, and the black kapa shall be his or mine!”
“Then hiding any longer would be pointless, and waiting is just cowardice!” Umi shouted, standing up and grabbing his spear. “His cruelty has finally pushed me to take action! The time has come, and with my spear in hand, as a true son of Liloa, I will confront the royal murderer in Waipio, and the dark cloth will belong to either him or me!”
“Spoken like a king and a son of a king!” returned the priest with enthusiasm, grasping Umi by the hand. “But you will not go alone. Come to me with your friends to-morrow—if possible to-night. Under my roof you will be safe, and there we will gather the spears that will make your journey to Waipio a triumphal march.”
“Spoken like a king and a son of a king!” the priest said excitedly, taking Umi's hand. “But you won't go alone. Come to me with your friends tomorrow—if you can, tonight. You’ll be safe under my roof, and there we will gather the spears that will make your journey to Waipio a triumphant march.”
“Thanks are the only payment I can now make to your friendship,” said Umi, in turn pressing the hand of the priest. “You may expect me and a few of my friends before another rising of the sun.”
“Thanks are the only payment I can give for your friendship,” said Umi, squeezing the priest's hand in return. “You can expect me and a few of my friends before the next sunrise.”
With a few hasty words of explanation Umi left the hut with his heart on fire, and the priest watched him with a smile until he passed the broken wall. There he was rejoined by the messenger, who silently preceded him down the valley.
With a few quick words of explanation, Umi left the hut with his heart racing, and the priest watched him with a smile until he passed the broken wall. There, he was met by the messenger, who quietly led the way down the valley.
As he started to return Umi looked toward the sandal-tree [284]above the hut. Maukaleoleo was no longer there, but he frequently discerned a mighty form moving down the valley along the wooded hillside, and knew that his great friend was not far away.
As he began to head back, Umi glanced at the sandal-tree [__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]above the hut. Maukaleoleo was gone, but he often saw a large figure moving down the valley along the wooded hillside, and he knew his great friend was close by.
The northeastern coast of the island of Hawaii presents an almost continuous succession of valleys, with intervening uplands rising gently for a few miles, and then more abruptly toward the snows of Mauna Kea and the clouds. The rains are abundant on that side of the island, and the fertile plateau, boldly fronting the sea with a line of cliffs from fifty to a hundred feet in height, is scored at intervals of one or two miles with deep and almost impassable gulches, whose waters reach the ocean either through rocky channels worn to the level of the waves, or in cascades leaping from the cliffs and streaking the coast from Hilo to Waipio with lines which seem to be of molten silver from the great crucible of Kilauea.
The northeastern coast of the island of Hawaii has a nearly continuous series of valleys, with hills that gently rise for a few miles and then steeply toward the snowy peaks of Mauna Kea and the clouds. This side of the island gets a lot of rain, and the fertile plateau, facing the sea with cliffs that range from fifty to a hundred feet high, is marked every mile or two by deep, nearly impassable gulches. The waters from these gulches reach the ocean either through rocky channels that have been worn down to the level of the waves or in waterfalls cascading from the cliffs, creating shimmering lines along the coast from Hilo to Waipio that look like molten silver from the volcanic activity of Kilauea.
In the time of Liloa, and later, this plateau was thickly populated, and, requiring no irrigation, was cultivated from the sea upward to the line of frost. A few kalo patches are still seen, and bananas grow, as of old, in secluded spots and along the banks of the ravines; but the broad acres are green with cane, and the whistle of the sugar-mill is heard above the roar of the surf that beats against the rock-bound front of Hamakua.
In Liloa's time, and afterward, this plateau was densely populated and, needing no irrigation, was farmed from the sea up to the frost line. A few patches of kalo can still be seen, and bananas grow, as they used to, in hidden places and along the edges of the ravines; but the wide fields are lush with sugarcane, and the sound of the sugar mill is heard above the crashing surf against the rocky coast of Hamakua.
In the first of these valleys south of Waipunalei was the estate of the high-priest Kaoleioku, which was thickly dotted with the huts of his tenants, and embraced some of the finest banana, cocoa and breadfruit groves in the district. For the accommodation of himself and family were two large mansions, constructed of heavy timbers and surrounded by a substantial stone wall. The priest was learned and hospitable, and his influence was second in the district only to that of the alii-okane.
In the first of the valleys south of Waipunalei was the estate of the high priest Kaoleioku, which was filled with the huts of his tenants and included some of the best banana, cocoa, and breadfruit groves in the area. For himself and his family, there were two large houses made of strong timber, surrounded by a solid stone wall. The priest was knowledgeable and welcoming, and his influence in the district was second only to that of the alii-okane.
Anticipating the arrival of Umi and his friends during the night, the priest had placed a watchman at the gate on retiring, with instructions to wake him should any one unknown to the sentinel apply for admission before morning. But Kaoleioku could not sleep, for his mind was filled with the shadows of coming events. He had discovered a son of [285]Liloa, the rightful guardian of the temples and his gods, secreted among the makaainani to escape the persecutions of his tyrannical and heartless brother; and as a reconciliation between them did not seem to be possible, he had resolved to urge Umi into open revolt at once, and to assist him to the full extent of his power in organizing a force to contest with Hakau the right to the sovereignty of Hawaii. This he was moved to do, not more because Hakau was a tyrant, than that he had sought to degrade the priesthood, of which Umi was the nominal head, and in the dedication of a temple in Waimea had sacrilegiously usurped the powers and privileges of the high-priest. Should the revolt prove unsuccessful, his life, he well knew, would be one of the forfeits of the failure; but the priest was a courageous man, and did not hesitate to accept the hazard of the perilous undertaking. Although reared in the priesthood, he could wield a spear with the best, and when in arms his fifty years sat lightly upon him.
Anticipating the arrival of Umi and his friends at night, the priest had stationed a watchman at the gate before going to bed, with orders to wake him if anyone unknown to the guard asked for entry before morning. However, Kaoleioku couldn't sleep because his mind was filled with the shadows of upcoming events. He had discovered a son of [__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]Liloa, the rightful guardian of the temples and his gods, hiding among the makaainani to escape the cruelty and oppression of his tyrannical brother. Since reconciliation between them didn’t seem possible, he decided to push Umi into open revolt immediately and support him as much as he could in organizing a force to challenge Hakau's claim to the throne of Hawaii. He felt compelled to act not only because Hakau was a tyrant, but also because he had attempted to undermine the priesthood, of which Umi was the nominal leader, and during the dedication of a temple in Waimea, he had sacrilegiously taken the powers and privileges of the high priest. If the revolt failed, he knew that his life would likely be a consequence of that failure, but the priest was brave and didn't hesitate to accept the risks of such a dangerous mission. Although he was raised in the priesthood, he could wield a spear as well as anyone, and even at fifty, he carried his age lightly when armed.
With his mind filled with the details of the dangerous labors before him, the priest tossed restlessly upon his couch of kapa until past midnight, when he rose and strolled out among the palms. Wearied with walking, he stretched himself upon the grass, and, fanned by the trade-winds and soothed by the stars which seemed to smile upon him through the branches of the trees, he followed his troubled thoughts into the land of dreams; and there a voice said to him thrice: “Let the spears of Hakau be sent beyond the call of the Kiha-pu, and the victory of Umi will be bloodless!”
With his mind filled with the details of the dangerous tasks ahead of him, the priest tossed and turned on his kapa couch until past midnight. Finally, he got up and wandered among the palm trees. Tired from walking, he laid down on the grass, feeling the gentle trade winds and comforted by the stars that seemed to smile at him through the tree branches. He let his restless thoughts drift into sleep, and there he heard a voice say to him three times: “Send the spears of Hakau beyond the call of the Kiha-pu, and Umi's victory will be without bloodshed!”
A voice beside the sleeper awoke him, and he was informed by the watchman that a considerable number of strangers were at the gate and desired admission. The priest rose to his feet, and, with the mysterious words of the dream still ringing in his ears, proceeded to the gate, where the tall form of Umi loomed up in the darkness. Giving him his hand with a warm word of welcome, the priest was about to conduct him within when he was startled at the sudden appearance at the gate of a party of armed and resolute-looking men—how many he was unable to distinguish.
A voice next to the sleeper woke him up, and the watchman let him know that a large group of strangers was at the gate and wanted to come in. The priest got up, and with the mysterious words of the dream still echoing in his mind, he walked to the gate, where Umi's tall figure stood out in the dark. After extending his hand with a warm welcome, the priest was about to take him inside when he was taken aback by the sudden appearance of a group of armed and determined-looking men at the gate—he couldn't tell how many there were.
The priest was about to speak when Umi laid his hand upon his shoulder and said in a low voice: “All trusty friends.” [286]
The priest was about to speak when Umi placed his hand on his shoulder and said in a quiet voice: “All faithful friends.” [__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]
“Then all are welcome,” replied the priest, and, giving an order to the watchman, he stepped aside with Umi, when two hundred warriors, appareled for battle, silently filed in double rank through the opening, following Omaukamau and Piimaiwaa to quarters evidently prepared for a much greater number.
“Then everyone is welcome,” replied the priest, and, giving a command to the guard, he stepped aside with Umi, as two hundred warriors, dressed for battle, quietly marched in double file through the opening, following Omaukamau and Piimaiwaa to accommodations clearly set up for a much larger group.
“Truly, a good beginning!” exclaimed the priest, with enthusiasm, as the last of the little army passed the gate.
“Seriously, what a great start!” the priest exclaimed excitedly as the last of the small army passed through the gate.
“A few that my good friends have been sounding since yesterday,” said Umi, modestly. “They do not know me yet as Umi, but are inspired with a hatred for Hakau. The number could have been greatly increased, but I feared your ability to accommodate more without warning.”
“A few that my good friends have been talking about since yesterday,” Umi said modestly. “They don’t know me yet as Umi, but they have a strong dislike for Hakau. The number could have been much higher, but I was worried about your ability to take in more without notice.”
“It was thoughtful; but ten times their number can be secreted within these walls. But come,” continued the priest, taking the arm of Umi and proceeding toward the larger mansion; “there is red in the east, and you must have rest and sleep. When you awake I will give you a dream to interpret. It relates to the business before us.”
“It was considerate; but ten times that number can be hidden within these walls. But come,” the priest said, taking Umi's arm and moving toward the larger mansion; “there's red in the east, and you need to rest and sleep. When you wake up, I’ll have a dream for you to interpret. It’s connected to the task ahead of us.”
“Tell me of the dream before I sleep, good Kaoleioku,” urged Umi, pleasantly, “and perhaps some god may whisper an answer to it in my slumbers.”
“Tell me about the dream before I go to sleep, good Kaoleioku,” urged Umi, cheerfully, “and maybe some god will whisper an answer to it in my dreams.”
“Well thought,” replied the priest; and he related his dream to Umi as he conducted him to a room in the large hale and pointed to a pile of soft kapa on a low platform.
“Well thought,” replied the priest; and he shared his dream with Umi as he led him to a room in the large hale and pointed to a stack of soft kapa on a low platform.
The priest bowed and retired, and Umi, who had rested but little for three days, threw himself upon the kapa-moe and slept soundly until the sun was high in the heavens.
The priest bowed and left, and Umi, who had barely rested for three days, collapsed onto the kapa-moe and slept soundly until the sun was high in the sky.
The young chief awoke greatly refreshed, and, after his morning bath, sought the presence of the priest, who since daylight had been busily engaged in despatching messengers to his friends in various parts of the district, and even to Puna and Hamakua, and arranging for supplies of arms, provisions and other warlike stores. Against the walls of the enclosure a number of long sheds had been hastily constructed, under which, screened from observation from without, men were repointing spears and ihes, and repairing slings, daggers and other weapons. In fact, the enclosure began to assume the appearance of a military camp rather than the peaceful habitation of a priest; and as Umi looked around him he appreciated for the first time that a step had been taken which could not be retraced, and that the lives [287]of himself and many of his friends could be saved alone by destroying Hakau, in whose heart lived no feeling of mercy. But, as the conflict had been forced upon him, he accepted it without fear or regret, and his courage would not permit him to doubt the result.
The young chief woke up feeling refreshed, and after his morning bath, he looked for the priest, who had been busy since sunrise sending messages to his friends in different parts of the area, even reaching out to Puna and Hamakua, and organizing supplies of weapons, food, and other military gear. Along the walls of the enclosure, several long sheds were hastily built, under which, hidden from outside view, men were sharpening spears and ihes, and fixing slings, daggers, and other tools of conflict. In fact, the place was starting to look more like a military camp than a peaceful refuge for a priest; and as Umi looked around, he realized for the first time that a point of no return had been reached, and that the lives [__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__] of himself and many of his friends could only be saved by destroying Hakau, who had no sense of mercy. But since the conflict had been forced upon him, he accepted it without fear or regret, and his courage wouldn't let him doubt the outcome.
Umi greeted and thanked the priest for the warlike preparations visible on all sides, and over their morning meal together were discussed the resources and details of the coming struggle. It was not believed that a sufficient force could be rallied in the district to make head against the battalions of the king in open fight, for news of the ripening rebellion was spreading in the neighborhood and would soon reach Waipio.
Umi greeted and thanked the priest for the preparations for war visible everywhere, and during their breakfast together, they discussed the resources and details of the upcoming conflict. It was thought that there wouldn’t be enough forces gathered in the area to stand up against the king’s battalions in an open battle, as news of the growing rebellion was spreading in the neighborhood and would soon reach Waipio.
“What we lack in spears must be made up in cunning,” said the priest, confidently. “The gods are with us, and the means of victory will be pointed out.”
“What we lack in spears we’ll make up for with cleverness,” said the priest confidently. “The gods are on our side, and the path to victory will be revealed.”
“Perhaps,” replied Umi, thoughtfully; “but sometimes the direction is vague and we are apt to mistake it. Olopana failed to interpret correctly the will of Kane, as sent to him through his high-priest, and was driven by the floods from Waipio, and compelled to return to Kahiki, the land of his fathers.”
“Maybe,” Umi replied, thinking it over; “but sometimes the guidance is unclear, and we tend to misunderstand it. Olopana didn’t correctly interpret the will of Kane, as delivered to him through his high priest, and was swept away by the floods from Waipio, forcing him to return to Kahiki, the land of his ancestors.”
“True,” returned the priest, not a little astonished at Umi’s knowledge of the ancient chiefs of Hawaii, “and we must not fall into the same error. The gods, perhaps, have already spoken. ‘Let the spears of Hakau be sent beyond the call of the Kiha-pu,’ are the words that have come to me, but I can find no interpretation of them. We must make sacrifice at once, and consult the kaulas.”
“True,” replied the priest, quite surprised by Umi’s knowledge of the ancient chiefs of Hawaii, “and we shouldn’t make the same mistake. The gods might have already spoken. ‘Let the spears of Hakau be sent beyond the call of the Kiha-pu,’ are the words I’ve received, but I can’t figure out what they mean. We need to make a sacrifice immediately and consult the kaulas.”
“That would be well,” said Umi; “yet it may be that a hint of their meaning, if nothing more, has been sent to me. I slept with the words this morning, you will remember, and now I recall that a whisper advised that we should take to our counsel Nunu and Kakohe, of Waipio.”
"That sounds good," said Umi; "but it's possible that I've received even a hint of their meaning. I slept with those words this morning, as you remember, and now I recall that a whisper suggested we should include Nunu and Kakohe from Waipio in our discussions."
“You have made the way clear!” exclaimed the priest, earnestly. “I know the men well. They are priests of influence and large learning. They were the advisers of Liloa, and are now the enemies of Hakau.”
“You’ve made everything clear!” the priest said earnestly. “I know the men well. They’re influential priests with extensive knowledge. They advised Liloa and are now the enemies of Hakau.”
“The same,” said Umi; “I have met them both.”
“The same,” said Umi; “I’ve met them both.”
“Then will we despatch a discreet messenger for them at once,” returned the priest, rising abruptly. “Every moment is precious, and their counsel may be the voice of the gods.”
“Then we'll send a discreet messenger for them right away,” the priest replied, getting up suddenly. “Every moment is valuable, and their advice might be the wisdom of the gods.”
And now, while the messenger is on his way to Waipio, it may [288]be in place to make some further mention of the two priests in search of whom he was sent, as they contributed in no small measure to Umi’s final success, and were thereafter rated among his confidential counsellors.
And now, while the messenger is on his way to Waipio, it may [__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]be a good time to say a bit more about the two priests he was sent to find, as they played a significant role in Umi’s final success and were later considered some of his trusted advisors.
Nunu and Kakohe were chiefs of distinction and belonged to the priesthood. They were both learned in the lore of the gods and the traditions of the people, and were so highly esteemed by Liloa that he frequently invited them to the royal mansion, and late in life spent one or more evenings with them in each month, when he listened to recitals of the traditions of his fathers, and mistier lines of demi-gods and heroes stretching backward in unbroken thread to the morning of creation. They were among the few who could recite the sacred genealogical mele of Kumuhonua, the Hawaiian Adam, and he loved to listen to the naming of the generations from the first man to Nuu, of the great flood, and thence to Wakea, and downward still nearly sixty generations to himself. Some differences existing between the genealogies of Hawaii and Maui, Liloa had sent them to the latter island to confer with its priests and historians, with the view of reconciling their disagreements. Their mission was successful, and what is known as the Ulu genealogy was the result of the learned conference.
Nunu and Kakohe were distinguished chiefs and part of the priesthood. They were well-versed in the lore of the gods and the traditions of the people, earning high regard from Liloa, who often invited them to his royal mansion. Later in life, he spent one or more evenings with them each month, during which he listened to stories of his ancestors and the epic lines of demigods and heroes stretching back to the dawn of creation. They were among the few who could recite the sacred genealogical mele of Kumuhonua, the Hawaiian Adam, and he enjoyed hearing the names of the generations from the first man to Nuu, of the great flood, and then to Wakea, and continuing down nearly sixty generations to himself. Due to some differences between the genealogies of Hawaii and Maui, Liloa had sent them to the latter island to consult with its priests and historians to resolve their discrepancies. Their mission was successful, and what is known as the Ulu genealogy resulted from their scholarly discussions.
These were among the friends of Liloa who, for the sake of the father and the honor of the royal line, had patiently and earnestly sought to divert Hakau from his barbarous practices. But he had scorned their kind offices, made light of their learning, and finally denied them admission to the palace. He hoped by his cruelty to drive them from Waipio; but in the prophetic flames they had read their future, and from within the sacred anu of the temple voices had come to them enjoining patience; so they sat down and waited.
These were some of Liloa's friends who, for the sake of their father and the honor of the royal family, had patiently and earnestly tried to persuade Hakau to stop his cruel actions. But he had dismissed their help, belittled their knowledge, and ultimately refused to let them into the palace. He hoped that by being cruel he could force them out of Waipio; however, they had seen their future in the prophetic flames and heard voices from within the sacred anu of the temple urging them to be patient, so they sat down and waited.
Arriving at Waipio, the messenger of Kaoleioku had but little difficulty in finding the two priests of whom he was in search. It was some hours after nightfall, but on inquiry he was directed to their humble dwelling on the south side of the stream, and soon stood at their door. It was dark within, and on making his presence known two men appeared at the opening. The messenger saluted them politely, and, observing but a single person, they cautiously stepped from the door and inquired of the visitor his business with them. [289]
Arriving at Waipio, Kaoleioku's messenger had little trouble finding the two priests he was looking for. It was a few hours after dark, but after asking around, he was pointed to their simple home on the south side of the stream, and soon he was at their door. It was dark inside, and when he announced himself, two men appeared at the entrance. The messenger greeted them politely, and noticing there was just one person, they carefully stepped outside and asked what he needed from them. [__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]
By their garb and bearing he knew them to be priests, but that was not enough; he could afford to make no mistake, so he dissembled and said:
By their clothing and demeanor, he recognized them as priests, but that wasn’t enough; he couldn’t afford to be wrong, so he pretended and said:
“I have probably been misinformed; this is not the house of Monana, the fisherman?”
“I might have been misled; this isn't the house of Monana, the fisherman?”
“My friend,” said Nunu, “your words do not mislead us. Whether for good or evil I know not, but you are in search of Kakohe and Nunu, and they are here. If you have business with them, speak; there are no listeners.”
“My friend,” said Nunu, “your words aren't deceiving us. I don't know if it's for good or bad, but you’re looking for Kakohe and Nunu, and they are here. If you have something to discuss with them, go ahead; there’s no one around to listen.”
The messenger answered by unfolding from a piece of kapa an ivory talisman carved from a whale’s tooth, which he handed to Nunu, with a request that he would examine it. Stepping to a fire still smouldering near the oven of the hut, the priest threw upon it a handful of dry bark, which in a moment burst into a flame and enabled him to inspect the palaoa. Returning and addressing a few words to his companion, the priest said to the messenger:
The messenger responded by unfolding a piece of kapa to reveal an ivory talisman carved from a whale’s tooth, which he handed to Nunu, asking him to take a look at it. Moving to a fire that was still smoldering near the hut's oven, the priest tossed a handful of dry bark onto it, which quickly ignited, allowing him to examine the palaoa. Returning and speaking briefly to his companion, the priest then said to the messenger:
“You are from Kaoleioku, of Waipunalei.”
"You're from Kaoleioku, Waipunalei."
“I am from Kaoleioku, of Waipunalei,” repeated the messenger, bowing.
“I am from Kaoleioku, of Waipunalei,” the messenger repeated, bowing.
“How long since?” inquired the priest.
“How long has it been?” the priest asked.
“Late this morning,” was the answer.
“Late this morning,” was the answer.
“You must have traveled swiftly, for the paths are rough and the distance is a long day’s journey,” suggested the priest, cautiously.
“You must have traveled quickly, because the roads are tough and the distance is a long day's journey,” the priest suggested carefully.
“My feet have known no rest,” was the brief reply.
“My feet have known no rest,” was the short reply.
“What news bring you of Kaoleioku?”
“What news do you have about Kaoleioku?”
“None.”
"None."
“Then why are you here with this palaoa?”
“Then why are you here with this whale?”
“Because so commanded by Kaoleioku.”
“Because Kaoleioku commanded it.”
“There are rumors of coming troubles on the borders of Hamakua. Has Kaoleioku sent you to tell us of them?”
“There are rumors about trouble brewing on the borders of Hamakua. Did Kaoleioku send you to inform us about it?”
“I am here to say nothing of Kaoleioku, but to say for him, and to say only, that he prays that Nunu and Kakohe will meet him under his own roof at Waipunalei without delay.”
“I’m here to say nothing about Kaoleioku, but to say for him, and to say only, that he hopes Nunu and Kakohe will meet him at his home in Waipunalei without delay.”
“And nothing more?”
“And that’s it?”
“Nothing more.”
"That's it."
“You are discreet.”
“You're discreet.”
“I am simply the bearer of a message; and now that I have delivered it, I am waiting for such answer as you may desire to send back with me to Kaoleioku.” [290]
“I’m just here to deliver a message; now that I’ve done that, I’m waiting for any response you want to send back with me to Kaoleioku.” [__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]
“When will you return?”
"When are you coming back?"
“To-night.”
"Tonight."
“Then tell Kaoleioku that his friends Nunu and Kakohe will be with him by this time to-morrow. Now come,” continued the priest, “there is meat in the mua, and you must eat, for there is a wearying journey before you.”
“Then tell Kaoleioku that his friends Nunu and Kakohe will be with him by this time tomorrow. Now come,” continued the priest, “there is food in the mua, and you must eat, because there is a tiring journey ahead of you.”
The messenger was led into an adjoining hut, where meat and poi were set before him, and half an hour after he was scaling the hills east of the valley of Waipio.
The messenger was taken into a nearby hut, where meat and poi were served to him, and half an hour later, he was climbing the hills east of Waipio Valley.
Although the messenger was silent, the priests felt assured that there was a gathering of spears in the neighborhood of Waipunalei, and that Kaoleioku was secretly inciting a revolt. They knew that Umi was somewhere among the hills of Hilo, and felt strong in hoping that at the proper time he would be found at the head of the movement.
Although the messenger didn’t say anything, the priests were confident that there was a group of spears nearby in Waipunalei, and that Kaoleioku was secretly stirring up a revolt. They knew that Umi was somewhere in the hills of Hilo and were hopeful that, when the time was right, he would lead the movement.
Hakau had very much underrated the power of the priesthood, and did not discover until too late that in seeking to persecute and degrade Umi, who had been given charge of the gods and temples by Liloa, he had provoked the hostility of a class which at that period of Hawaiian history no sovereign could safely defy. If the tabus of the moi were sacred, those of the high-priests were none the less inviolable, and the strongest chiefs in the group were those who held in greatest respect and enjoyed the largest friendship of the priesthood. Like the temporal rulers, the priests inherited their functions, and were as jealous of their prerogatives as royalty itself. It was through them that the civil as well as the religious traditions of the people had been brought down and perpetuated, and through their prayers and sacrifices only that the gods could be persuaded to accord success to important undertakings.
Hakau had seriously underestimated the power of the priesthood and didn’t realize until it was too late that by trying to persecute and undermine Umi, who had been entrusted with the gods and temples by Liloa, he had angered a group that no sovereign could safely challenge during that time in Hawaiian history. While the tabus of the moi were revered, those of the high priests were no less sacred, and the strongest chiefs were those who held the priesthood in the highest regard and enjoyed their friendship. Like the secular leaders, the priests inherited their roles and were just as protective of their privileges as royalty. They were the ones who had preserved both the civil and religious traditions of the people, and it was only through their prayers and sacrifices that the gods could be persuaded to grant success to significant endeavors.
In the veins of some of the priests ran royal blood, and from time to time they left their heiaus and became distinguished as warriors; but under no circumstances did they ever relinquish their sacred rights. They not unfrequently possessed large landed estates, the title to which remained inalienably in the family. Such, for example, was the Kekaha estate, in the district of Kona, Hawaii, which was the gift of Liloa to Laeanui, and which remained with the descendants of that eminent high-priest until the days of Kamehameha I.
In the veins of some priests flowed royal blood, and occasionally they left their heiaus to make a name for themselves as warriors; however, they never gave up their sacred rights. They often owned large estates, which stayed in the family forever. A notable example is the Kekaha estate in the Kona district of Hawaii, which was a gift from Liloa to Laeanui, and it remained with the descendants of that prominent high priest until the time of Kamehameha I.
Such a warrior-priest of goodly possessions was Kaoleioku, of [291]Waipunalei. He was the high-priest of the temple of Manini, at Koholalele, which was consecrated, as before related, in the time of Liloa. Although for some years he had seldom officiated, except on important occasions—preferring the quieter life of his estate at Waipunalei—he was greatly respected by the people of the district, and his influence proved a tower of strength to Umi.
Such a warrior-priest with valuable possessions was Kaoleioku, of [__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]Waipunalei. He was the high priest of the temple of Manini at Koholalele, which, as mentioned before, was dedicated during the time of Liloa. Even though he hadn’t officiated much over the years—only during important events, as he preferred the quieter life on his estate at Waipunalei—he was highly respected by the local people, and his influence was a great support for Umi.
IV.
True to the answer returned to Kaoleioku by his messenger, Nunu and Kakohe reached Waipunalei the following night; and when they saw the warlike preparations, and learned that Umi was present and that the acclaim of revolt was to be raised in his name, they wept for joy. It was past midnight, and their limbs were weary, but they could not sleep. At their request the door of Umi’s room was pointed out to them, and they went and sat down beside it. For an hour or more they did not speak. Then, when all was still within the walls, in a low tone they began the legendary chant of the kings of Hawaii. As they proceeded with a record which few on the island beside themselves could correctly repeat, their voices rose with their enthusiasm, and in a few minutes hundreds of half-naked men crept from their barrack lodgings and stood listening to the metric sentences of the learned historians. As they reached the name of Kiha, Umi stepped without the door. The priests recognized him and rose to their feet. Then, continuing the mele, they chanted the name of Kiha, of Liloa, of Hakau, and finally of Umi, represented as having wrested the sceptre from his unworthy brother, who was hated by his subjects and abandoned by the gods. With this they dropped on their knees before him and boldly saluted him as moi of Hawaii.
Sticking to the message conveyed to Kaoleioku by his messenger, Nunu and Kakohe arrived at Waipunalei the next night. When they saw the preparations for battle and found out that Umi was there, with plans to rally support for his cause, they were overwhelmed with joy. It was after midnight, and they were exhausted, but sleep eluded them. They asked to be shown the door to Umi’s room and sat down beside it. For over an hour, they remained silent. Then, when everything was quiet inside, they began to softly sing the legendary chant of Hawaii's kings. As they recounted a history that few others on the island could accurately share, their voices grew louder with enthusiasm, attracting hundreds of partly clothed men who emerged from their barracks to listen to the rhythmic verses of the knowledgeable historians. When they mentioned the name Kiha, Umi stepped out through the door. The priests recognized him and stood up. Continuing the chant, they named Kiha, Liloa, Hakau, and finally Umi, depicting him as the one who took the crown from his unworthy brother, who was despised by his people and forsaken by the gods. With this, they knelt before him and boldly hailed him as the king of Hawaii.
This acquainted many of the warriors present for the first time of Umi’s rank, and the wildest enthusiasm seized them. They asked to be led at once to Waipio, and were only quieted when Kaoleioku appeared and assured them that their patriotic wishes would soon be gratified.
This introduced many of the warriors present for the first time to Umi’s rank, and they were filled with wild enthusiasm. They asked to be taken immediately to Waipio and were only calmed down when Kaoleioku showed up and assured them that their patriotic desires would soon be fulfilled.
At first Kaoleioku deemed this early development of the purposes of the movement untimely, if not, indeed, unfortunate. Many preparations remained to be made. It had been a suggestion [292]of Umi that a part of the rebel forces should be sent to Waipio by water; but the canoes necessary for the expedition had not been secured, and not more than a thousand warriors had reported. Secrecy could no longer be maintained, and immediate and open action appeared to be now unavoidable. Yet it was through Nunu and Kakohe that his plans had been thwarted, and while he felt annoyed at what they had done, he retired, hoping they had acted advisedly in the matter.
At first, Kaoleioku thought that this early development of the movement’s goals was poorly timed, if not outright unfortunate. There was still a lot to prepare. Umi had suggested that part of the rebel forces be sent to Waipio by water; however, the canoes needed for the mission hadn’t been arranged, and only about a thousand warriors had shown up. Secrecy was no longer an option, and immediate, open action seemed inevitable. Still, it was Nunu and Kakohe who had disrupted his plans, and although he was frustrated by their actions, he stepped back, hoping they had made sound decisions.
The conduct of the priests was explained and approved the next morning. They urged immediate action. Hakau was not prepared for a sudden attack. For many years there had been no wars of consequence, and such of his supporters as the king could hastily summon to his assistance would be improperly armed and without discipline.
The priests' actions were discussed and accepted the following morning. They pushed for immediate action. Hakau wasn't ready for a surprise attack. For many years, there hadn't been any significant wars, and the few supporters the king could quickly gather for help would be poorly armed and undisciplined.
Their advice was for Umi to raise the standard of revolt at once. This news they would take to Waipio, with the further information that, although preparing for rebellion, Umi would not be strong enough to act for some time. Alarmed, Hakau would consult the high-priest Laeanui, who, notwithstanding their relations, was secretly his enemy, and a plan could be devised to induce the king to send his household guards and immediate followers to the mountains on some religious errand, when Umi, apprised of the situation by fires kindled at intervals on the hill-tops between Waipio and Waipunalei, could swoop down with a few hundred resolute warriors and seize the king and the capital, and thus with a bold stroke achieve a bloodless triumph.
Their advice was for Umi to start the revolt immediately. They would take this news to Waipio, along with the additional information that, even though Umi was getting ready for rebellion, he wouldn't have the strength to take action for a while. Worried, Hakau would consult the high priest Laeanui, who, despite their past relations, was secretly his enemy. A plan could be created to persuade the king to send his guards and close followers to the mountains for some religious duty. Meanwhile, Umi, alerted by fires lit at intervals on the hilltops between Waipio and Waipunalei, could descend with a few hundred determined warriors, capture the king and the capital, and achieve a bold and bloodless victory.
When the priests had developed this plan of action Kaoleioku rose to his feet and exclaimed with excitement:
When the priests had come up with this plan, Kaoleioku stood up and exclaimed with excitement:
“The gods have instructed you!”
"The gods told you!"
“You have spoken truly; the gods have indeed instructed our friends!” said Umi, impressively; “for was it not said in your dreams that the victory would be bloodless if the spears of Hakau were sent beyond the call of the Kiha-pu?”
“You're right; the gods have definitely guided our friends!” said Umi, seriously. “Wasn't it said in your dreams that the victory would be bloodless if Hakau's spears were sent beyond the call of the Kiha-pu?”
“The meaning is now plain,” returned the priest, reverentially. “The gods are with us, and we will be directed by them.”
“The meaning is clear now,” replied the priest respectfully. “The gods are with us, and we will be guided by them.”
All the details were then carefully arranged, and the two priests returned to Waipio. It was soon rumored that they brought news of Umi, and Hakau sent for them, as had been expected. Fear had somewhat humbled him, and he greeted them [293]with what seemed to be the greatest friendship and cordiality. He even chided them for absenting themselves so long from the royal mansion, where their visits, he assured them, would always be welcome. They assumed to be greatly gratified at his protestations of good-will, but secretly despised him for his shallow hypocrisy.
All the details were carefully arranged, and the two priests returned to Waipio. Soon, it was rumored that they had news about Umi, and as expected, Hakau summoned them. Fear had humbled him a bit, and he greeted them [__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]with what seemed like genuine friendship and warmth. He even scolded them for staying away from the royal mansion for so long, claiming their visits would always be welcome. They pretended to be pleased by his expressions of goodwill, but secretly, they looked down on him for his insincere hypocrisy.
When questioned by the king the priests frankly informed him that they had left Umi and Kaoleioku together no longer than the day before, and advised him to lose no time in despatching to the mountains all the men he could summon, to gather fresh feathers of rare birds with which to redecorate his god of war.
When the king asked, the priests honestly told him that they had left Umi and Kaoleioku together just the day before. They advised him to quickly send all the men he could gather to the mountains to collect fresh feathers from rare birds to redecorate his god of war.
Hakau was startled by this advice, for the ceremony of kauilaakua was never performed except in times of war or other imminent peril.
Hakau was taken aback by this advice, as the ceremony of kauilaakua was only conducted during times of war or other immediate danger.
“What!” he exclaimed, with assumed astonishment, “shall this be done because Umi lives, and you have seen him with the high-priest of Manini?”
“What!” he exclaimed, feigning surprise, “are we doing this just because Umi is alive and you've seen him with the high priest of Manini?”
“No; not because Umi lives,” replied Nunu quietly, “but because he is preparing for rebellion.”
“No; not because Umi is alive,” Nunu replied quietly, “but because he’s getting ready for a rebellion.”
“Rebellion!” repeated Hakau, angrily. “Does he expect to be able to maintain himself in Hilo?”
“Rebellion!” Hakau repeated, angrily. “Does he think he can stick around in Hilo?”
“His aims reach beyond Hilo,” ventured the priest.
“His goals go beyond Hilo,” the priest suggested.
“To Puna?”
"Going to Puna?"
“Beyond Puna.”
"Beyond Puna."
“To Kau?”
"Going to Kau?"
“Beyond Kau.”
"Past Kau."
“Then he must aim at the whole island,” exclaimed Hakau, savagely.
“Then he has to aim at the whole island,” Hakau shouted fiercely.
“At the whole island,” repeated the priest, maliciously.
“At the whole island,” the priest repeated, with a smirk.
“He shall have land enough to bury him, and no more!” hissed the king. “But you are croakers, both of you. Before considering your advice I shall consult Laeanui and the seers of Paakalani, and hear what the gods say of this wide-spread conspiracy, as your fears and cowardice tell the story.”
“He'll have enough land to be buried in, and nothing more!” hissed the king. “But you both are just being negative. Before I take your advice, I’ll talk to Laeanui and the seers of Paakalani, and see what the gods say about this widespread conspiracy, as your fears and cowardice suggest.”
Hakau abruptly dismissed the priests, and despatched a messenger for the high-priest Laeanui, but it was late in the afternoon before he could be found. He was old and venerable in appearance, and his hair, white as the snows of Mauna Kea, fell to his knees, covering his shoulders like a veil. [294]
Hakau quickly sent the priests away and sent a messenger to find the high priest Laeanui, but it was late in the afternoon before he could be located. He looked old and respected, with hair as white as the snows of Mauna Kea that fell to his knees, draping over his shoulders like a veil. [__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]
They had met but rarely since the death of Liloa, for the old priest seldom left the temple grounds, and Hakau as seldom visited them; and as the bearded and white-haired prophet entered the royal mansion, all bent respectfully before him, and a feeling of awe crept over the king as the priest stood silently and with folded arms before him.
They had hardly seen each other since Liloa's death, since the old priest rarely left the temple grounds, and Hakau rarely visited; and as the bearded, white-haired prophet entered the royal mansion, everyone bowed respectfully before him, and a sense of awe washed over the king as the priest stood silently with his arms crossed in front of him.
“My greeting to you, venerable servant of the gods!” said the king.
“Hello to you, esteemed servant of the gods!” said the king.
The priest bowed, but remained silent, and Hakau resumed abruptly:
The priest bowed but stayed silent, and Hakau suddenly continued:
“I have learned that Umi and a priest named Kaoleioku are plotting treason together in Hilo, near the borders of Hamakua. What know you of Kaoleioku?”
“I’ve learned that Umi and a priest named Kaoleioku are conspiring against us in Hilo, near the borders of Hamakua. What do you know about Kaoleioku?”
“A man to be feared if he is in earnest,” replied the priest curtly.
“A man to be feared if he is serious,” the priest replied curtly.
“Have auguries of the movement been invoked?” inquired the king.
“Have predictions about the movement been called upon?” the king asked.
With a gesture the priest replied in the negative.
With a wave of his hand, the priest shook his head.
“And why not?” continued Hakau, impetuously. “What are priests and temples for, if not to guard the kingdom against coming dangers?”
“And why not?” Hakau continued, impulsively. “What are priests and temples for, if not to protect the kingdom from future threats?”
“If it so please them, the gods answer when they are asked through sacrifice,” replied the priest; and then, with rising anger, he continued: “Your father respected the gods, and came to the temple when he would consult them, and his son must do the same.”
“If it pleases them, the gods respond when they’re asked through sacrifice,” the priest replied. Then, with growing anger, he added, “Your father respected the gods and came to the temple to consult them, and his son must do the same.”
“Well, then,” said Hakau, discovering that the priest neither loved nor feared him, “I will be at the temple to-night, some time after sunset, and have you there the best of your diviners.”
“Well, then,” said Hakau, realizing that the priest felt neither love nor fear for him, “I’ll be at the temple tonight, sometime after sunset, and I want you to have your best diviners there.”
“I shall await your coming,” replied Laeanui, briefly, as he bowed low and retired.
“I’ll wait for you to arrive,” Laeanui replied shortly, as he bowed low and stepped back.
“Although he gave me his daughter,” muttered Hakau, as Laeanui left the room, “he has no love for me, and I as little for him. But no matter; I must not quarrel with him now. Wait until I have dealt with Umi and his confederates, and then—” But he did not finish the sentence, for he suddenly recollected that the high-priesthood was an inherited position, like his own, and its bestowal was not a royal prerogative. There were bloody means of creating vacancies, however, and these flashed through the wicked brain of Hakau.
“Even though he gave me his daughter,” Hakau muttered as Laeanui left the room, “he doesn’t care about me, and I feel the same way about him. But it doesn’t matter; I can’t argue with him right now. I’ll wait until I handle Umi and his allies, and then—” But he didn’t finish the thought, as he suddenly remembered that the high-priesthood was something inherited, just like his own position, and giving it out wasn’t strictly a royal right. There were violent ways to create openings, though, and those ideas raced through Hakau's devious mind.

Small Temple on Kauai, 1793.
Small Temple in Kauai, 1793.
[295]
[__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]
The night that followed was dark, with a steady wind from the northwest and occasional showers. It was some time after sunset before the king entered the outer gate of the heiau of Paakalani. He was accompanied by four attendants, two of whom bore a muzzled pig and two fowls; the others were trusty friends. A kukui torch was kept burning in front of the house of the high-priest, another between the altar and inner court, and a third near the entrance of the royal retreat, with which that heiau, like many others, was provided. Toward the latter Hakau and his party proceeded, and were soon joined by Laeanui and a number of officiating priests and kilos.
The night that followed was dark, with a steady wind from the northwest and occasional showers. It was some time after sunset before the king entered the outer gate of the heiau of Paakalani. He was accompanied by four attendants, two of whom carried a muzzled pig and two chickens; the others were trusted friends. A kukui torch was kept burning in front of the high priest's house, another between the altar and inner court, and a third near the entrance of the royal retreat, which that heiau, like many others, was equipped with. Toward the latter, Hakau and his group proceeded and were soon joined by Laeanui and several officiating priests and kilos.
Entering the royal hale, a few words passed between the king and Laeanui, when the attendants of Hakau were relieved of their burdens and sent without the enclosure. The kaika, or large sacrificial drum, was then sounded with three measured strokes, and in a few minutes six officiating priests, three of them with knives in their hands and the others bearing torches, made their appearance. To them the pig and fowls were entrusted, and, preceded by the torch-bearers, the king and high-priest, followed by the attendants of the temple, with measured pace moved toward the altar.
Entering the royal hale, a brief exchange occurred between the king and Laeanui, while Hakau's attendants were relieved of their burdens and sent out of the enclosure. The kaika, or large sacrificial drum, was then struck three times in rhythm, and in a few minutes, six officiating priests appeared—three of them holding knives and the others carrying torches. The pig and chickens were handed over to them, and with the torchbearers leading the way, the king and high priest, followed by the temple attendants, moved steadily toward the altar.
Reaching the place of sacrifice, the high-priest uttered a prayer to the godhead, and separate supplications to Kane, Ku and Lono, intoned by the assisting priests, when the fowls were decapitated and their headless bodies placed upon the altar. The priest watched them until they were motionless, and then opened them and carefully examined the heart, liver and entrails of each.
Reaching the place of sacrifice, the high priest said a prayer to the divine, along with distinct requests to Kane, Ku, and Lono, which were recited by the assisting priests as the birds were beheaded and their headless bodies were placed on the altar. The priest observed them until they became still, and then opened them up to carefully examine the heart, liver, and intestines of each.
The king glanced anxiously at the priest, but the latter made no response. The pig was then ordered to be slain. The throat of the animal was cut and its bleeding body was also placed upon the altar. The flow of the blood was scrupulously noted, and, after the respirations had been counted and the animal ceased to breathe, the body was hastily opened. The spleen was removed and held above the head of the priest while another prayer was spoken, and then the other organs were separately examined.
The king looked nervously at the priest, but the priest said nothing. The pig was then commanded to be killed. Its throat was cut, and its bleeding body was placed on the altar. The flow of blood was carefully observed, and after the breaths were counted and the animal stopped breathing, the body was quickly opened. The spleen was taken out and raised above the priest's head while another prayer was recited, and then the other organs were examined one by one.
Completing the inspection, Laeanui stepped back from the altar.
Completing the inspection, Laeanui stepped back from the altar.
“Well,” said the king, impatiently, “what say the gods?”
“Well,” said the king, impatiently, “what do the gods say?”
“The gods are angry, and the portents are evil,” replied the priest. [296]
“The gods are upset, and the signs are bad,” replied the priest. [__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]
“Then promise them a hundred human sacrifices,” exclaimed Hakau. “If their favor is to be purchased with blood, I will drown the heiau with an ocean of it. But,” he continued, “I am not satisfied with these auguries. Let me hear from the anu.”
“Then promise them a hundred human sacrifices,” Hakau shouted. “If we need to buy their favor with blood, I’ll flood the heiau with an ocean of it. But,” he added, “I’m not convinced by these omens. I want to hear from the anu.”
Immediately behind the altar was the entrance to the inner court of the temple. Within, and about three paces back from the door, which was covered with a wide breadth of kapa, was placed the anu, a wicker enclosure four or five feet in diameter, in which stood the oracle. On each side of the entrance were carved images of Kane, Ku, Lono and other Hawaiian deities, while at intervals of three or four feet along the walls a score or more of gods of lesser potency stood guard above the sacred spot.
Right behind the altar was the entrance to the inner court of the temple. Inside, about three steps back from the door, which was covered with a wide strip of kapa, stood the anu, a wicker enclosure four or five feet in diameter, where the oracle was located. On each side of the entrance were carved images of Kane, Ku, Lono, and other Hawaiian deities, while every three or four feet along the walls, a score or more of less powerful gods stood watch over the sacred area.
To the last request of Hakau the priest replied: “The king shall hear from the anu.”
To Hakau's final request, the priest responded, “The king will hear from the anu.”
The lights were then extinguished, and all except the king and high-priest retired some distance from the altar, that no whisper of the oracle might reach them. Hakau was nervous as he stepped with the priest in front of the entrance to the inner temple. A prayer was uttered by the priest; the kapa screen was drawn aside by hands unseen, and the king stood looking into the intense darkness of the sanctum sanctorum of the temple.
The lights were then turned off, and everyone except the king and the high priest moved away from the altar, so that no whisper of the oracle could be heard. Hakau felt anxious as he stepped with the priest to the entrance of the inner temple. The priest said a prayer; the kapa screen was pulled aside by unseen hands, and the king stood gazing into the deep darkness of the temple's sanctum sanctorum.
“Speak!” said the priest, withdrawing behind the altar, and leaving the king alone before the anu.
“Speak!” said the priest, stepping back behind the altar and leaving the king alone in front of the anu.
“Speak!” repeated a hollow voice from within the sacred enclosure.
“Speak!” repeated an empty voice from inside the sacred enclosure.
For some minutes Hakau remained awed and silent; then, in a voice which scarcely seemed to be his own, he said:
For a few minutes, Hakau stayed amazed and quiet; then, in a voice that barely sounded like his own, he said:
“Great power, I hear that dangers threaten.”
“Great power, I hear that dangers are looming.”
“Dangers threaten!” came like an echo from within.
“Threats are looming!” echoed from within.
“How may they be averted?” inquired the king.
“How can we prevent that?” the king asked.
For a time there was no answer. Finally a voice from the anu replied:
For a moment, there was silence. Then, a voice from the anu responded:
“Do homage to Kane; make glad the war-god of Liloa!”
“Show respect to Kane; make the war-god of Liloa happy!”
“So do I promise,” answered the king; “but will that give me victory?”
“So I promise,” replied the king; “but will that ensure my victory?”
“Victory!” was repeated from the anu.
“Victory!” was repeated from the __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__.
Elated at what he had heard, Hakau continued:
Elated by what he had heard, Hakau continued:
“Now tell me, mighty spirit, whether Umi—” [297]
“Now tell me, powerful spirit, if Umi—” [__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]
“Nothing more!” interrupted the voice from within, as the kapa suddenly dropped before the entrance.
“Nothing more!” interrupted the voice from inside, as the kapa suddenly dropped before the entrance.
“Well, thanks for so much,” said Hakau, turning and joining the priest at the altar, and repeating to him, with some favorable additions, the words that he had heard. Darkness hid the smile upon the lips of Laeanui.
“Well, thanks a lot,” said Hakau, turning and joining the priest at the altar, and repeating to him, with some positive additions, the words he had heard. Darkness concealed the smile on Laeanui’s lips.
“The day after to-morrow we will hold here a festival to Kane, and the altar shall be heaped with offerings,” said the king. “To-morrow I will send my people to the mountains to gather feathers of sacred and royal colors, and Kaili, the neglected war-god of Liloa, shall be made glorious in new plumage and glad with abundant sacrifice.”
“The day after tomorrow we will have a festival here for Kane, and the altar will be filled with offerings,” said the king. “Tomorrow, I will send my people to the mountains to collect feathers in sacred and royal colors, and Kaili, the overlooked war-god of Liloa, will be adorned in new plumage and pleased with plenty of sacrifices.”
“It is well,” replied the priest.
"It’s good," said the priest.
“Now let the conspirators marshal their spears!” continued Hakau, confidently, “and we will make short work of them. They cannot be punished in the hills of Hilo. With a showing of weakness we will lure them to Waipio, and not one of them shall escape. We will cut off their retreat, and close in their faces the gates of the puhonui!”
“Now let the conspirators get their weapons ready!” Hakau continued confidently. “We’ll deal with them quickly. They can’t be punished in the hills of Hilo. By showing some weakness, we can draw them to Waipio, and not a single one of them will get away. We’ll cut off their escape and close the gates of the puhonui in front of them!”
As already mentioned, of the two puhonuis, or places of refuge, on Hawaii at that time, one was an adjunct of the heiau of Paakalani, at Waipio. In times of war their gates, with white flags to mark them, were always open, and those who succeeded in passing into the enclosure were safe from assault, even though pursued by the king himself.
As already mentioned, of the two puhonuis, or places of refuge, on Hawaii at that time, one was part of the heiau of Paakalani, at Waipio. During wartime, their gates were always open, marked by white flags, and anyone who managed to enter the enclosure was safe from attack, even if they were being chased by the king himself.
This savage proposal to close the gates of the puhonui was promptly resented by Laeanui. He would as soon have thought of tumbling the gods from their pedestals and consigning them to the flames.
This brutal suggestion to shut the gates of the puhonui was quickly met with anger by Laeanui. He would as soon have considered throwing the gods from their pedestals and burning them.
“You suggest what is impossible,” said the priest. “Since the days of Wakea the puhonui has been sacred. Its gates cannot be closed to the defenceless, and the gods have said that he who shuts them against the weak shall seek in vain their shelter from the arm of the strong.”
“You're asking for something that's impossible,” said the priest. “Since the days of Wakea, the puhonui has been sacred. Its gates can't be closed to those who are defenseless, and the gods have said that anyone who shuts them against the weak will futilely seek their protection from the power of the strong.”
“Well, then, keep them open!” retorted the king, sharply. “They will run swiftly who enter them!”
“Well, then, keep them open!” the king shot back sharply. “Those who enter will run fast!”
Torches were relighted, and the king and his attendants left the heiau. They had not passed beyond the outer wall before Nunu emerged from the inner court. His was the voice that had answered the king from the anu. Thus in the temple of [298]Paakalani was shaped the destruction of Hakau, and the priests whom he had insulted and defied opened broadly and surely the way to his death.
Torches were relit, and the king and his attendants exited the heiau. They hadn't made it past the outer wall when Nunu appeared from the inner court. He was the voice that had responded to the king from the anu. Thus, in the temple of [__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]Paakalani, the downfall of Hakau was being devised, and the priests he had insulted and disrespected confidently and openly paved the way for his demise.
The next morning an unusual commotion was observed in and around the royal mansion, and as party after party left the inclosure—some proceeding toward the sea-coast, and others up the valley and into the mountains beyond—the villagers wondered at the proceeding, and predicted that a strict tabu would soon follow, whatever might be the occasion. But when they learned that the war-god was to be redecorated, and an imposing religious festival was to follow the day after, they knew that trouble of some kind was anticipated by the king, and soon found a correct explanation of the movement in the rumors which they, too, had heard concerning Umi and his friends in Hilo and eastern Hamakua. The possibility of an uprising against Hakau gave them no uneasiness, however, for his cruelties had secured for him their hatred, while the name of Umi was to all classes a synonym of strength and gentleness.
The next morning, there was unusual commotion in and around the royal mansion. As group after group left the enclosure—some heading toward the coast, and others moving up the valley and into the mountains—the villagers were curious about what was happening and predicted that a strict tabu would soon follow, no matter the reason. But when they found out that the war-god was going to be redecorated and a big religious festival was scheduled for the next day, they realized the king was anticipating some kind of trouble. They soon learned the full story from the rumors they had heard about Umi and his friends in Hilo and eastern Hamakua. However, the possibility of a rebellion against Hakau didn't concern them; his cruelty had earned their hatred, while Umi’s name was known to everyone as a symbol of strength and kindness.
The king was not indifferent to the danger with which he was about to be confronted, and promptly despatched lunapais to the district chiefs of Kohala, Kona, and Hamakua, ordering them to report without delay at Waipio with two thousand warriors each, while the governor of Hilo was commanded by a special lunapai to march at once with a body of warriors to Waipunalei, with the view of precipitating the movement of Umi upon Waipio, where, it was not doubted, he would be overwhelmed and crushed.
The king was aware of the danger he was facing and quickly sent messengers to the district chiefs of Kohala, Kona, and Hamakua, instructing them to gather two thousand warriors each and report immediately to Waipio. At the same time, the governor of Hilo was ordered by a special messenger to march right away with a group of warriors to Waipunalei, aiming to prompt Umi's advance on Waipio, where he would definitely be outnumbered and defeated.
All these were proper precautions, but they were taken too late; for at the time the feather-hunters and lunapais were leaving on their respective missions, Umi, at the head of over two thousand well-armed and resolute warriors, had reached a point within a two hours’ march of Waipio, and was awaiting a signal to swoop down upon the valley.
All these were sensible precautions, but they came too late; by the time the feather-hunters and lunapais set out on their missions, Umi, leading more than two thousand well-armed and determined warriors, had reached a point just two hours' march from Waipio and was waiting for a signal to strike the valley.
And now let us return to Waipunalei, and note what had been occurring there during the preceding forty-eight hours. As soon as the priests left for Waipio, two days before, trusty and intelligent sentinels followed and took their respective stations, designated by Maukaleoleo, on the summits of seven different hill-tops discernible from each other from Waipunalei to Waipio. The first, coming eastward from Waipio, was three miles, [299]perhaps, from the temple of Paakalani; the last was a rocky pinnacle about four miles from Waipunalei. This was the station of Maukaleoleo.
And now let's return to Waipunalei and see what has been happening there over the last forty-eight hours. As soon as the priests left for Waipio two days ago, reliable and observant scouts followed and took their assigned positions, set by Maukaleoleo, on the peaks of seven different hills visible from each other from Waipunalei to Waipio. The first, coming east from Waipio, was about three miles, [__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]perhaps, from the temple of Paakalani; the last was a rocky peak about four miles from Waipunalei. This was where Maukaleoleo was stationed.
The sentinels were instructed to gather large heaps of dry grass and bark; to keep small fires smouldering and ready for use; to vigilantly watch the peaks in the direction of Waipio; to apply the torch the instant a signal-fire was seen, and keep the pile burning until it was plainly answered by the next station toward Waipunalei.
The sentinels were told to collect big piles of dry grass and bark; to keep small fires smoldering and ready for use; to watch the peaks in the direction of Waipio closely; to light the torch as soon as a signal fire was spotted, and to keep the pile burning until it was clearly answered by the next station toward Waipunalei.
All that day and through the following night armed men were arriving at the rendezvous at Kaoleioku’s, until something more than two thousand warriors had reported, and every spare moment of the next day was devoted to forming them into companies and battalions, giving them leaders and preparing them for a rapid march.
All day and into the next night, armed men kept arriving at the meeting point at Kaoleioku's, until more than two thousand warriors had gathered. Every free moment of the following day was spent organizing them into companies and battalions, assigning leaders to them, and preparing them for a quick march.
Many of the warriors were accompanied by their wives, daughters or sisters; for in those days, and later, women not unfrequently followed their fathers, brothers and husbands to battle, generally keeping in the rear to furnish them with food and water, but sometimes, in a close and desperate conflict, mingling bravely in the fight. In such cases they gave and received blows, and expected and were accorded no consideration because of their sex.
Many of the warriors were joined by their wives, daughters, or sisters. In those days, and even later, women often followed their fathers, brothers, and husbands into battle, usually staying back to provide them with food and water. However, in intense and desperate fights, they would courageously join the fray. In those situations, they both gave and took hits and expected no special treatment because of their gender.
Instances are given in Hawaiian tradition of the tide of battle being turned, on more than one occasion, by desperate women transformed from camp-followers into warriors; and as late as 1819 we behold Manona, wife of Kekuokalani, the last sturdy champion of the gods of his fathers, falling lifeless in battle upon the body of her dead husband at Kuamoo, while Kaahumanu and Kalakau, widows of the great Kamehameha, commanded the fleet of canoes operating with the land forces under Kalaimoku.
Instances in Hawaiian tradition show that the tide of battle has often turned thanks to desperate women who transformed from camp-followers into warriors. As late as 1819, we see Manona, the wife of Kekuokalani, the last strong champion of the gods of his ancestors, falling lifeless in battle on top of her dead husband at Kuamoo, while Kaahumanu and Kalakau, widows of the great Kamehameha, commanded the fleet of canoes working alongside the land forces led by Kalaimoku.
After the visit of the priests from Waipio the purpose of the revolt was no longer disguised, and whenever Umi made his appearance among the assembled and assembling warriors he was greeted with the wildest enthusiasm. His romantic history was known to them, and had been made the theme of song. His many triumphs at the festival given by Liloa in honor of his formal recognition were recited by those who had witnessed them, and his grand proportions and noble bearing stamped him [300]as of chiefly blood; and when his friends Piimaiwaa and Omaukamau spoke of the great learning displayed by him when questioned by the priests, and intimated that he had been instructed by the gods and was under their care, every doubt of success vanished, and the order for an advance upon Waipio was awaited with impatience.
After the priests from Waipio visited, the reason for the revolt was clear, and whenever Umi showed up among the gathered warriors, he was met with wild enthusiasm. His dramatic backstory was well-known, and it had become the subject of songs. Those who had witnessed his many victories at the festival hosted by Liloa in his honor recounted them, and his impressive stature and noble presence signaled his noble lineage. When his friends Piimaiwaa and Omaukamau talked about the great knowledge he demonstrated when questioned by the priests, suggesting that he had been taught by the gods and was under their protection, all doubts about success disappeared, and everyone eagerly awaited the command to advance on Waipio.
Maukaleoleo mysteriously came and went, but always at night, and seldom remaining longer than a few minutes. He was known to all within the enclosure, and allowed to pass unchallenged, as he could be mistaken for no one else. As he strode through the gateway, bearing a spear scarcely less than thirty feet in length, the sentinels regarded him with awe; and when they saw him converse with Umi and then silently depart, they shook their heads and said, “Perhaps he is Lono!”
Maukaleoleo appeared and disappeared mysteriously, always at night, and rarely stayed for more than a few minutes. Everyone inside the enclosure knew him and let him pass without question, as he was unmistakable. As he walked through the gateway, carrying a spear nearly thirty feet long, the guards looked at him in awe; and when they watched him talk to Umi and then leave quietly, they shook their heads and said, “Maybe he is Lono!”
The temple of Manini, dedicated by Liloa just before his meeting with the mother of Umi, and of which Kaoleioku was the high-priest, was a reconstruction and enlargement of an old heiau which was in existence certainly as early as the time of the warlike Kalaunuiohua, who reigned between the years 1260 and 1300. With a large army and proportionate fleet of canoes he invaded Maui, Molokai and Oahu, and, taking their captured sovereigns with him, made a descent upon Kauai. But his triumphs ended there. After an obstinate battle he was defeated and taken prisoner, but was subsequently released and permitted to return to his own kingdom.
The temple of Manini, built by Liloa right before he met Umi's mother, and where Kaoleioku was the high priest, was a rebuilt and enlarged version of an older heiau that had been around at least since the time of the warlike Kalaunuiohua, who ruled between 1260 and 1300. With a large army and a corresponding fleet of canoes, he invaded Maui, Molokai, and Oahu, and after capturing their kings, he launched an attack on Kauai. But his victories ended there. After a fierce battle, he was defeated and taken captive but was later released and allowed to return to his own kingdom.
It was during the reign of this sovereign that the prophetess Waahia lived. She accompanied him in his expeditions as far as Oahu, but refused to proceed with him to Kauai. She declared that the gods would bring calamity upon him if he invaded that island, and sought to persuade him to consolidate his conquests and return to Hawaii. But the warrior-king cared but little for priests or temples, and was in the habit of destroying both when they failed to subserve his purposes. Enraged at the unfavorable auguries of Waahia, and fearful that they might come to the ears of and demoralize his warriors, the king induced her to return to Hawaii. One tradition says she voluntarily abandoned Kalaunuiohua, while another relates that she consented to return only on condition that the war-god of the king be sent back with her. This god had been in the reigning family of Hawaii since the days of Paao, and had been sanctified by that father of the [301]priesthood. To distinguish it from other war-gods it was known as Akuapaao, and was held in great veneration. When asked for an explanation of the strange request, the prophetess boldly declared that, if the god was taken to Kauai, it would never return except at the head of a conquering army that would make of Hawaii a tributary kingdom.
It was during the reign of this king that the prophetess Waahia lived. She joined him on his expeditions to Oahu but refused to go with him to Kauai. She warned that the gods would bring disaster upon him if he invaded that island and tried to convince him to secure his gains and head back to Hawaii. However, the warrior king paid little attention to priests or temples and often destroyed both when they didn’t serve his interests. Furious over Waahia's bad omens and worried that they might spread to his warriors and lower their morale, the king persuaded her to return to Hawaii. One version of the story claims she willingly left Kalaunuiohua, while another states she agreed to go back only if the king's war-god was sent with her. This god had been part of the ruling family of Hawaii since the time of Paao and had been sacred to the father of the [__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__] priesthood. To set it apart from other war-gods, it was called Akuapaao and was greatly revered. When asked about her unusual request, the prophetess boldly stated that if the god was taken to Kauai, it would only return with a conquering army that would turn Hawaii into a tribute state.
“Then take it with you!” exclaimed the king, savagely, “and if I return to Hawaii alive I will burn you both together!”
“Then take it with you!” shouted the king fiercely, “and if I come back to Hawaii alive, I will burn you both together!”
“You will burn neither,” said Waahia. “When you return to Hawaii you will think better of the gods and their servants; and in generations to come, when angry spears shall be crossed in the hale of the kings of Hawaii, the hand will be stronger that places the fresh lei upon the shoulders of Akuapaao.”
“You won’t be punished,” said Waahia. “When you get back to Hawaii, you'll have a better opinion of the gods and their followers; and in future generations, when fierce battles happen in the hale of the kings of Hawaii, the hand will be more powerful that puts the fresh lei around the shoulders of Akuapaao.”
The prophetess prepared to embark. The god, wrapped in a fold of kapa, so that it might not be recognized, was brought to the beach and delivered to the departing seeress. The canoe, which was large enough to accommodate thirty persons, was shoved into the surf. It was provided with food and a calabash of water. Declining all assistance or companionship in her journey, Waahia stepped into the canoe with the image in her arms, and, after carefully depositing it in the bow of the boat, returned and seated herself near the stern. Half a dozen men were waiting for the word to launch the canoe from the sands upon which the stern was lightly resting. But the seeress raised no sail, touched no oar. For some minutes she sat, silent and motionless, with bent head and clasped hands, as if in prayer, while hundreds of curious eyes watched her in amazement, wondering what would become of her, even should the unmanned craft be successful in passing the breakers. Then she slowly rose to her feet, and the canoe began to glide toward the reef. Faster and faster it moved, until, mounting a retreating wave, it was borne swiftly out into the calmer waters; then, slightly turning in its course, it dashed southward with the speed of the wind, and was soon lost to the view of the awe-stricken beholders.
The prophetess got ready to set out. The god, wrapped in a piece of kapa to keep his identity hidden, was brought to the beach and handed over to the departing seeress. The canoe, big enough to hold thirty people, was pushed into the surf. It was stocked with food and a calabash of water. Rejecting any help or company on her journey, Waahia stepped into the canoe with the image in her arms, carefully placed it in the bow of the boat, and then returned to sit near the stern. A handful of men were waiting for the command to launch the canoe from the sandy beach where the stern was lightly resting. But the seeress raised no sail and touched no oar. For a few minutes, she sat in silence, motionless, with her head bowed and hands clasped, as if in prayer, while hundreds of curious eyes watched her in amazement, wondering what would happen to her, even if the unmanned canoe managed to get past the breakers. Then she slowly stood up, and the canoe began to glide toward the reef. It picked up speed, moving faster and faster, until it rode a retreating wave and was swiftly carried out into the calmer waters; then, slightly turning, it shot southward with the speed of the wind and soon disappeared from the sight of the astonished onlookers.
Waahia looked beneath the waves and smiled, for Ukanipo, the shark-god, with scores of assistants, was bearing her onward; and then from his ipu Laamaomao, the Hawaiian Æolus, let loose the imprisoned winds, and refreshing zephyrs cooled the face of the prophetess and accelerated the speed of the canoe, until it seemed to leap from wave to wave; and great sea-birds screamed [302]with fright as it dashed past and awoke them from their billowy slumbers, leaving behind it a long trail of troubled waters.
Waahia looked beneath the waves and smiled, for Ukanipo, the shark-god, along with numerous assistants, was guiding her forward; then from his ipu Laamaomao, the Hawaiian Æolus, he released the trapped winds, and refreshing breezes cooled the prophetess's face and sped up the canoe, making it seem to hop from wave to wave; and large sea-birds squawked [__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__] in fright as it rushed by, startling them from their gentle slumbers, leaving behind a long trail of disturbed waters.
Passing to the southward of the intervening islands, the canoe was borne with undiminished speed through the channel of Alenuihaha to the northeastern coast of Hawaii, and before sunset was beached at Koholalele. The prophetess knew the meaning of this. Near by was the old heiau of Manini, and thither, as she felt instructed, was taken and deposited the war-god Akuapaao, with the solemn injunction to the high-priest in charge that it was never to be removed from the inner court unless the life of the moi was in peril or the kingdom was invaded by a foreign foe.
Passing south of the intervening islands, the canoe sped through the Alenuihaha channel to the northeastern coast of Hawaii, and by sunset, it was pulled ashore at Koholalele. The prophetess understood what this meant. Nearby was the old heiau of Manini, and as she felt guided, the war-god Akuapaao was taken there and placed with the serious directive to the high priest in charge that it was never to be removed from the inner court unless the life of the moi was at risk or the kingdom was threatened by a foreign enemy.
The old heiau had given place to a more imposing structure during the reign of Liloa. Its outer walls had been enlarged, raised and repaired, and its inner belongings improved and redecorated; but its sacred relics had not been disturbed, and its many gods remained where they had been for generations.
The old heiau was replaced by a bigger and more impressive structure during Liloa's reign. Its outer walls were expanded, raised, and fixed up, while its interior was upgraded and redecorated; however, its sacred relics were left undisturbed, and its many gods stayed in their places as they had for generations.
Among the most sacred idols of the temple, even after the death of Liloa, was the Akuapaao. Its name indicated alike its age and sanctity; and while the legends connected with it had become vague and distorted in their transmission through a long line of priests, the prophecy of Waahia still clung to it, and it was especially reverenced by the few to whom was entrusted the secret of its functions.
Among the most sacred idols of the temple, even after Liloa’s death, was the Akuapaao. Its name reflected both its age and its sacredness; and while the legends associated with it had faded and become distorted through many generations of priests, the prophecy of Waahia still surrounded it, and it was especially honored by the few who were entrusted with the secret of its purpose.
Hakau had learned of this god from his royal father, and the same morning that his retainers were sent to the hills for feathers two priests were despatched to Koholalele, with orders to bring to Waipio, in the king’s name and without delay, the war-god Akuapaao. Should the priests of the temple refuse to surrender the idol, then the messengers were instructed to call upon the district chiefs for assistance, and take it by force, no matter at what cost of life.
Hakau had learned about this god from his royal father, and on the same morning that his retainers were sent to the hills for feathers, two priests were dispatched to Koholalele with orders to bring the war-god Akuapaao to Waipio in the king's name and without delay. If the priests of the temple refused to give up the idol, the messengers were instructed to ask the district chiefs for help and take it by force, regardless of the cost in lives.
But the king was too late, for at early daylight of the morning of the day before his messengers left Waipio, Maukaleoleo strode into the rebel headquarters with the Akuapaao in his arms. Kaoleioku had, of course, instructed the giant where and how to secure the image, for in years past he had been its custodian, and his orders continued to be obeyed by the priests of Manini. The idol, completely wrapped in kapa, was deposited in the private heiau of the high-priest, and Maukaleoleo left the enclosure [303]as quietly as he had entered it a few minutes before. The sentinels wondered, as usual, but bowed in silence as he came and went.
But the king was too late, because early in the morning before his messengers left Waipio, Maukaleoleo walked into the rebel headquarters carrying the Akuapaao. Kaoleioku had, of course, told the giant where and how to secure the image, since he had been its guardian in the past, and the priests of Manini still followed his orders. The idol, completely wrapped in kapa, was placed in the private heiau of the high priest, and Maukaleoleo left the enclosure [__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__] as quietly as he had entered a few minutes earlier. The sentinels were curious, as usual, but they bowed in silence as he came and went.
The priest rose with the sun, and learned that Maukaleoleo had already been a visitor that morning. He hastened to the heiau, and there found the Akuapaao. He was overjoyed. He removed the kapa covering from the idol, placed it upon a pedestal between the images of Ku and Lono, and then found Umi and brought him to the heiau. Entering, Kaoleioku closed the door and pointed to the Akuapaao. Umi bowed reverently before it.
The priest got up with the sunrise and learned that Maukaleoleo had already visited that morning. He rushed to the heiau and found the Akuapaao. He was filled with joy. He took off the kapa covering from the idol, set it on a pedestal between the images of Ku and Lono, and then went to get Umi and brought him to the heiau. Once inside, Kaoleioku closed the door and pointed to the Akuapaao. Umi bowed respectfully before it.
“Listen, O Umi!” said the priest; “listen, O son of Liloa! Behold the war-god of your fathers! It was sanctified by the touch of Paao, and for generations, in the inner chamber of Manini, has awaited your coming. From Waahia, the prophetess, have come down, through the chief priests of the heiau, these words: ‘When angry spears shall be crossed in the hale of the kings of Hawaii, the hand will be the stronger that places the fresh lei upon the shoulders of Akuapaao.’ The spears are about to be crossed; the god is here; let yours be the hand, and not Hakau’s, to place the lei-ai upon the shoulders of Akuapaao!”
“Listen, Umi!” said the priest; “listen, son of Liloa! Look at the war-god of your ancestors! It was made sacred by Paao’s touch, and for generations, it has been waiting for you in the inner chamber of Manini. From Waahia, the prophetess, these words have come down through the chief priests of the heiau: ‘When angry spears are crossed in the house of the kings of Hawaii, the hand will be stronger that places the fresh lei on the shoulders of Akuapaao.’ The spears are about to cross; the god is here; let it be your hand, not Hakau’s, that places the lei-ai on the shoulders of Akuapaao!”
The words of the prophecy came to Umi as a dream. Overwhelmed with their significance, he fell upon his knees and exclaimed:
The words of the prophecy came to Umi in a dream. Overwhelmed by their meaning, he dropped to his knees and exclaimed:
“God of my fathers! be you my guide until I prove unworthy of your protection!”
“God of my ancestors! Be my guide until I’m no longer deserving of your protection!”
“Your realm is yet small,” said the priest, “and is enclosed within these walls. Let us pay respect to the gods, that its boundaries may be enlarged.”
“Your territory is still small,” said the priest, “and is enclosed within these walls. Let’s pay our respects to the gods so that its boundaries can be expanded.”
Thereupon a strict tabu was ordered to all within the walls, to begin at midday and continue until the setting of the sun. The time was brief, but events were pressing, and it could not safely be extended.
Thereafter, a strict tabu was imposed on everyone inside the walls, starting at noon and lasting until sunset. The time was short, but circumstances were urgent, and it couldn't be safely prolonged.
The tabu, or kapu, as it is sometimes written, was strictly a prerogative of the high chiefs and priests of olden Hawaii. There were fixed tabus of custom, and declared tabus of limited duration by the temporal and spiritual rulers. The penalty for the violation of all tabus was death. It was tabu of custom for men and women to eat together, or for women to eat of the flesh of swine, fowls, turtle and many kinds of fish. Everything [304]belonging to the kings, priests and temples was tabu, or sacred, and springs, paths, fishing-grounds, water-courses, etc., were frequently thus kept from the use of the people. Declared general tabus, for the propitiation of the gods or the amelioration of a public evil, were either strict or common, according to the emergency. During the time of a common tabu the people were required to abstain from their usual avocations and attend at the heiau, where morning and evening prayers were offered. A strict tabu was more sacred. While it continued—generally one or two days—all, with the exception of the alii-nui and priests, were compelled to remain within doors. Every fire and every light was extinguished; no canoe was launched; all noises ceased; the pigs and dogs were muzzled, and fowls were placed under calabashes. These tabus were proclaimed by heralds, and their wanton violation was an unpardonable offence.
The tabu, or kapu, as it is sometimes spelled, was strictly reserved for the high chiefs and priests of ancient Hawaii. There were established tabus based on tradition and specific tabus declared for a limited time by the temporal and spiritual leaders. The penalty for breaking any tabus was death. It was tabu for men and women to eat together, and women were prohibited from consuming the flesh of pigs, birds, turtles, and many types of fish. Everything belonging to the kings, priests, and temples was considered tabu or sacred, and springs, paths, fishing areas, and water sources were often restricted from public use. General tabus that aimed to appease the gods or address a public issue were either strict or common, depending on the situation. During a common tabu, people were expected to stop their usual activities and gather at the heiau, where morning and evening prayers were offered. A strict tabu was even more sacred. While it lasted—usually one or two days—all, except for the alii-nui and priests, had to stay indoors. All fires and lights were put out; no canoes were launched; all noise came to a halt; pigs and dogs were muzzled, and chickens were covered with calabashes. These tabus were announced by heralds, and breaking them was seen as a serious crime.
In preparation for the tabu to be declared by Umi, flowers and feathers were brought, and leis of both were woven. Everything being in readiness, heralds proclaimed the tabu and its duration, with the further announcement that the occasion was the arrival of the mighty war-god Akuapaao and its coming decoration by Umi.
In preparation for the tabu to be declared by Umi, flowers and feathers were gathered, and leis of both were crafted. Everything was ready, and heralds announced the tabu and how long it would last, also sharing that the event was in honor of the mighty war-god Akuapaao and its upcoming decoration by Umi.
As the sun touched the mark of meridian, the gates of the enclosure were barred and guarded by the religious attendants of the priest; the fires were everywhere extinguished; the few animals within the walls were either muzzled or hidden; men, women and children suddenly disappeared within their dwellings or quarters, and mats were hung at the openings; Umi and the priest retired alone to the heiau and closed the door, and silence, disturbed only by low whispers and the muffled footfalls of the watching priests, reigned over the twenty-five hundred persons gathered within the enclosure.
As the sun reached its highest point, the gates of the area were locked and watched over by the religious attendants of the priest; the fires were completely put out; the few animals inside the walls were either muzzled or hidden away; men, women, and children quickly vanished into their homes or living spaces, and mats were hung at the entrances; Umi and the priest went alone to the heiau and shut the door, and silence, broken only by soft whispers and the quiet footsteps of the watching priests, filled the space where twenty-five hundred people had gathered.
In the heiau, or apartment of the gods, to which Umi and the high-priest retired, were a number of images and sacred relics. Near the centre of the room was a small altar, upon which had been deposited the leis provided for the decoration of Akuapaao. They sat down beside it, and for an hour or more nothing was heard but the whispered prayers of the priest, addressed in turn to the several gods before him. Then, rising and leading Umi by the hand to the Akuapaao, in a low voice he formally presented him to the god as the son of Liloa and rightful ruler of the Hawaiian [305]people. Another prayer was uttered, and then Umi, with the words, “Accept this, O Akuapaao, with the homage of Umi!” proceeded reverently to place around the head and neck of the image a number of fragrant leis of flowers and wreaths of brilliant feathers.
In the heiau, or the gods' chamber, where Umi and the high priest went, there were several images and sacred relics. Near the center of the room was a small altar that held the leis meant for decorating Akuapaao. They sat down next to it, and for over an hour, the only sound was the priest's whispered prayers directed at the various gods in front of him. Then, standing up and taking Umi by the hand, he quietly introduced him to Akuapaao, presenting him as the son of Liloa and the rightful leader of the Hawaiian [__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__] people. Another prayer was said, and then Umi, saying, “Accept this, O Akuapaao, with the homage of Umi!” reverently placed a number of fragrant leis of flowers and vibrant feather wreaths around the head and neck of the image.
The priest watched the act intently. As the last wreath of feathers, resembling a crown in appearance—the lei-hula-alii—was placed upon the head of the image, a sunbeam flashed through what seemed to be a small rent in the thatched roof, and for a moment haloed the heads of Umi and the god. The priest read the answer and smiled. He felt as assured of the favor of the gods as if it had been pledged in a voice of thunder, and Umi bent low in acknowledgment of the joyful revelation.
The priest observed the action closely. As the final wreath of feathers, looking like a crown—the lei-hula-alii—was positioned on the statue's head, a sunbeam broke through what appeared to be a small tear in the thatched roof, momentarily surrounding the heads of Umi and the god with light. The priest understood the answer and smiled. He felt as confident of the gods' approval as if it had been promised with a booming voice, and Umi bowed down in recognition of the joyful revelation.
The sun dropped behind the hills; twilight turned to bronze the gold of the valleys, and the tabu was at an end. It was proclaimed that the auguries were highly favorable, and the silence of the tabu was broken by wild strains of music and shouts of rejoicing.
The sun went down behind the hills; twilight turned the valleys' gold to bronze, and the tabu was over. It was announced that the omens were very good, and the silence of the tabu was shattered by wild music and cheers of celebration.
V.
As darkness settled upon the camp of the insurgents Umi felt that the hour for action was closely at hand. He therefore gave orders that preparations for instant departure be maintained throughout the night. The moon was waning, with a promise of rising some time before morning, and the night set in dark and cloudy, with occasional showers.
As darkness fell over the insurgents' camp, Umi sensed that the moment for action was approaching. He ordered that preparations for an immediate departure be kept ongoing throughout the night. The moon was fading, but it promised to rise sometime before morning, and the night was dark and cloudy with occasional rain showers.
About two hours before midnight Maukaleoleo suddenly and silently strode past the sentinels. Seeking Umi, he found him in council with his friends Omaukamau, Piimaiwaa and the high-priest. They were arranging the order of march by the four narrow paths at that time leading to Waipio.
About two hours before midnight, Maukaleoleo suddenly and quietly walked past the guards. Looking for Umi, he found him in a meeting with his friends Omaukamau, Piimaiwaa, and the high priest. They were organizing the order of march using the four narrow paths that were then leading to Waipio.
The giant stooped low and looked in upon the council through the doorway. He could scarcely distinguish the faces within by the light of the flambeau kept burning near the entrance. He did not attempt to enter, but stood silent and motionless, with his hands upon his knees, peering into the room as if to attract attention. Umi smiled as he recognized the huge object, and stepped to the door. The giant rose until his head [306]was above the ridge-pole, and then bowed like the bending of a tree before the wind.
The giant bent down and looked into the council through the doorway. He could barely make out the faces inside by the light of the torch burning near the entrance. He didn’t try to enter, but stood silently and still, with his hands on his knees, peering into the room as if to get their attention. Umi smiled as he recognized the enormous figure and walked over to the door. The giant rose until his head [__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]was above the roof beam, then bowed like a tree bending in the wind.
“Well, my good friend,” said Umi, “after thanking you for your last night’s work, let me ask what word you bring.”
“Well, my good friend,” Umi said, “after thanking you for what you did last night, let me ask what news you have.”
“None,” replied the giant. “There is no light yet, but I am impressed that it will be seen before morning.”
“None,” replied the giant. “There’s no light yet, but I’m confident it will be visible before morning.”
“And so am I, good Maukaleoleo,” returned the chief, “and your signal will find us prepared.”
“And so am I, good Maukaleoleo,” the chief replied, “and we will be ready when your signal comes.”
“That is what I came to learn,” answered the giant, bowing and turning to depart.
"That's what I learned," replied the giant, bowing as he turned to leave.
“But do not mistake for a signal the rising moon, which will soon set its torch upon the hill-tops,” suggested Umi, pleasantly.
“But don’t confuse the rising moon for a signal, which will soon light up the hilltops,” Umi said cheerfully.
“Unless the moon should rise in the west, which it has not done since the days of Maui, the mistake would scarcely be possible,” replied Maukaleoleo, with a smile upon his great face, and then, with a few long strides, disappearing in the darkness.
“Unless the moon rises in the west, which hasn’t happened since the days of Maui, the mistake would hardly be possible,” Maukaleoleo replied, smiling widely, and then he disappeared into the darkness with a few long strides.
It must have been at about the time of this interview that Hakau was leaving the heiau at Waipio, after having invoked the auguries of sacrifice and listened to the voice of Nunu from the darkness of the inner temple. The king had scarcely passed the gate of the temple leading to the sacred pavement of Liloa, which connected the heiau with the royal mansion, and which privileged feet alone could tread, when Nunu, after exchanging a few words with the high-priest, also left the enclosure, but neither over the sacred pavement nor toward the palace. Taking a path which did not seem to be new to him, from the facility with which he traveled it by the light of the stars, he crossed the valley and mounted the high ridge of hills enclosing it on the southeast. Ascending the ridge for some distance, and until the lights of the valley could no longer be seen, he proceeded slowly upward, at intervals striking together two stones and listening for a response. At length it came, like an echo of his own signal, and a few minutes’ walk brought him to a large heap of dry leaves and limbs, from behind which Kakohe rose and greeted him.
It must have been around the time of this interview that Hakau was leaving the heiau at Waipio after performing the rituals of sacrifice and listening to Nunu's voice from the darkness of the inner temple. The king had barely passed through the temple gate leading to the sacred pavement of Liloa, which connected the heiau to the royal mansion and was reserved for privileged feet, when Nunu, after exchanging a few words with the high priest, also left the area, but not over the sacred pavement or towards the palace. Taking a path that seemed familiar to him, judging by how easily he moved along it under the starlight, he crossed the valley and climbed the high ridge of hills surrounding it on the southeast. After ascending the ridge for a while, until the valley lights disappeared from view, he moved slowly upward, occasionally striking two stones together and listening for a reply. Eventually, he received a response, like an echo of his own signal, and a few minutes later, he arrived at a large pile of dry leaves and branches, from behind which Kakohe emerged to greet him.
“Fire it at once!” said Nunu. “I will explain all when the signal is answered.”
“Shoot it right away!” said Nunu. “I’ll explain everything once the signal is responded to.”
Behind a rock, a few paces away, a small fire was smouldering. Kakohe sprang and seized a burning brand, which he [307]applied to the heap, and in a moment the red flames reached heavenward, throwing a lurid light upon the surrounding hills.
Behind a rock, a short distance away, a small fire was smoldering. Kakohe leaped and grabbed a burning stick, which he [__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]used to ignite the pile, and in an instant, the red flames shot up into the sky, casting a harsh light on the nearby hills.
With their backs to the fire the two priests looked anxiously toward the south and east, and in a few minutes far in the distance gleamed an answering flame. Satisfied that their signal had been seen and responded to, they permitted the fire to die out, and then returned to the valley to await the important events of the morrow.
With their backs to the fire, the two priests anxiously looked toward the south and east, and after a few minutes, a distant flame gleamed in response. Confident that their signal had been seen and acknowledged, they let the fire go out and returned to the valley to wait for the important events of the next day.
Leaving the rendezvous of the rebels, Maukaleoleo slowly returned to his station, for even his mighty limbs at times grew weary, and the path leading up the mountain was obscure and narrow. Reaching the summit, he examined a small fire hidden among the rocks, and was about to stretch himself upon the ground, with his face turned eastward, when he discerned a strange, star-like speck upon the horizon. For a moment it paled, and then grew brighter and brighter. He stepped to a tree near a huge pile of combustibles, and, glancing along a horizontal limb that had been previously trimmed for the purpose, discovered that it pointed directly toward the light. All doubt at once disappeared. He knew it was the signal. Springing for a brand, the heap was lighted, and by its wild glare in the darkness Maukaleoleo rapidly descended to the valley. His fatigue had vanished, for the signal of Hakau’s death had been lighted by his own hands, and his great heart was in arms.
Leaving the rebels' meeting, Maukaleoleo slowly made his way back to his post, as even his powerful limbs got tired sometimes, and the path up the mountain was narrow and hard to see. When he reached the top, he spotted a small fire hidden among the rocks and was about to lie down with his face turned east when he noticed a strange, star-like light on the horizon. For a moment, it faded, then shone brighter and brighter. He stepped over to a tree next to a large pile of flammable materials and, following a horizontal branch that had been trimmed for this purpose, saw that it pointed directly at the light. Suddenly, all doubt disappeared. He knew it was the signal. Snatching a torch, he ignited the pile, and, illuminated by its wild light in the darkness, Maukaleoleo quickly descended into the valley. His fatigue vanished, for the signal of Hakau’s death had been lit by his own hands, and his great heart was ready for action.
The signal was at once discerned by the watchmen at Umi’s quarters, and in a few minutes all was quiet commotion within the walls. Torches were lighted, armed warriors sprang with alacrity into line, and half an hour after Umi, in feather mantle and helmet plumed with royal colors, and preceded by the war-god Akuapaao, borne upon a manele, or palanquin, resting upon the shoulders of kahunas, with Kaoleioku as high-priest, marched out of the enclosure, followed by two thousand well-armed and devoted supporters. His address to his warriors was brief. “The moments are precious,” said Umi, “and must not be wasted in words. Let our spears speak, and at sunset to-morrow we will eat meat in peace in Waipio!”
The signal was quickly noticed by the guards at Umi’s quarters, and within minutes, there was a buzz of activity inside the walls. Torches were lit, armed warriors quickly formed ranks, and half an hour later, Umi, wearing a feathered cloak and a helmet adorned with royal colors, and accompanied by the war-god Akuapaao, carried on a manele, or palanquin, supported by the shoulders of kahunas, with Kaoleioku as the high priest, marched out of the enclosure, followed by two thousand well-armed and loyal supporters. His speech to his warriors was short. “Time is precious,” Umi said, “and should not be wasted on words. Let our spears do the talking, and by sunset tomorrow, we will feast in peace in Waipio!”
As a measure of precaution, in case of disaster, a force sufficient to hold the premises of the high-priest was left within the walls. The advancing army was formed into three divisions, the right commanded by Omaukamau and the left by Piimaiwaa, [308]while Umi remained with the centre. Their orders were to move rapidly, but as quietly as possible, by three different routes, and form a junction at their intersection with the alanui, or great path, leading from the coast to the inland village of Waimea. This junction it was expected the left division, traveling a difficult mountain-path, would be able to reach two or three hours after sunrise.
As a precaution in case of disaster, a force strong enough to secure the high priest's premises was stationed within the walls. The advancing army was divided into three groups: the right led by Omaukamau, the left by Piimaiwaa, [__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__] and Umi in command of the center. Their orders were to move quickly but as quietly as possible along three different routes and meet up where they intersected with the alanui, or main road, that connected the coast to the inland village of Waimea. It was anticipated that the left division, taking a challenging mountain path, would arrive at this junction two or three hours after sunrise.
It was, perhaps, an hour short of midnight when the last of the little army left the enclosure, followed by two or three hundred women bearing food, water, extra weapons and a variety of camp necessaries. The warriors were full of enthusiasm, and when Maukaleoleo stepped in among them from the mountains like a protecting deity their shouts could scarcely be restrained. His appearance was most welcome to Umi, who thanked him warmly for what he had done, and expressed a desire that he would remain near him during the march, as his familiarity with the mountains and their paths would render his advice valuable.
It was maybe an hour before midnight when the last of the group left the enclosure, followed by two or three hundred women carrying food, water, extra weapons, and various camping supplies. The warriors were full of excitement, and when Maukaleoleo stepped in among them from the mountains like a protective deity, their cheers were almost uncontrollable. Umi welcomed him warmly, thanking him for everything he had done and expressing a wish for him to stay close during the march, as his knowledge of the mountains and their paths would make his advice really helpful.
“But I see another mighty friend has opportunely reported,” said Umi, pleasantly, as he pointed toward the east. “As the moon is about to look over the hills, the torches may soon be extinguished, for the paths will be plainer without them.”
“But I see another strong friend has conveniently reported,” said Umi, cheerfully, as he pointed toward the east. “As the moon is about to rise over the hills, the torches might soon be put out, because the paths will be clearer without them.”
The divisions separated, and, dispensing with their torches, soon swarmed the several paths leading to Waipio. Each division was preceded some distance in its march by a party of scouts, with instructions to let no one pass to their front, lest he might be a messenger of warning.
The groups split up, and, putting aside their torches, quickly moved along the different paths to Waipio. Each group was followed by a team of scouts, who were instructed to prevent anyone from moving ahead of them, in case that person was a messenger with a warning.
The paths were rough and in places almost choked with undergrowth, and the advance was exceedingly laborious; but no word of complaint was heard, and about the middle of the forenoon the left division, and the last to arrive, reached the Waimea trail at a point leaving the entire force but a short march to Waipio. A brief halt was ordered, and the food and water brought by the women were served to their relatives, and to others if any remained.
The paths were rough and in some spots nearly covered with bushes, making the journey really tough; but no one complained, and around mid-morning, the left group, which was the last to arrive, reached the Waimea trail, leaving the whole team just a short walk away from Waipio. A quick break was called, and the food and water brought by the women were distributed to their family members and to anyone else who was left.
Taking no thought of himself, Umi advised his attendants to eat if they could find food, declaring that he required nothing, and then threw himself under the shade of a tree for a few minutes of much-needed rest. A cool breeze fanned his heated face, on which the beard had as yet grown but lightly, and his heavy eyelids closed, dropping him gently into the land of shadows, [309]where he bathed in cool waters and partook of food that was delicious—more delicious, it seemed, because it was served by Kulamea.
Taking no thought for himself, Umi told his attendants to eat if they could find food, saying that he didn't need anything, and then lay down under a tree for a much-needed rest. A cool breeze brushed against his warm face, where his beard was still only lightly grown, and his heavy eyelids closed, gently easing him into a world of shadows, [__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__] where he swam in cool waters and enjoyed delicious food—more delicious, it seemed, because it was served by Kulamea.
Something awoke him—he scarcely knew what—and his eyes caught the form of a woman as it vanished behind the tree under which he was lying. He smiled, and, partially rising, discovered on the ground beside him a calabash of poi, reduced with water to the consistency of thick gruel. His mouth and throat were parched, and, without stopping to learn who had provided it, he raised the vessel to his lips and drained it to the bottom. It was a goodly draught, and refreshed him greatly.
Something woke him—he hardly knew what—and he saw a woman’s figure as it disappeared behind the tree he was lying under. He smiled and, partially getting up, noticed a calabash of poi on the ground next to him, thinned with water to the texture of thick porridge. His mouth and throat felt dry, and without bothering to find out who had given it to him, he lifted the vessel to his lips and drank it all. It was a hearty drink, and it refreshed him a lot.
Holding the empty calabash in his hand, he began to examine it, at first carelessly, and then with greater interest, for it was not a common vessel. Nor was it the first time that he had seen it. It was the calabash he had carved with images of birds and flowers for Kulamea before he went to Waipio to become the son of a king.
Holding the empty gourd in his hand, he started to look it over, initially without much attention, and then with more curiosity, because it wasn’t an ordinary container. It also wasn’t the first time he had seen it. It was the gourd he had carved with images of birds and flowers for Kulamea before he went to Waipio to become the son of a king.
He beckoned to Maukaleoleo, who was leaning against a tree a few paces distant, with his head among the branches. The giant smiled as he approached, as if divining the question Umi was about to ask.
He signaled to Maukaleoleo, who was leaning against a tree a short distance away, his head in the branches. The giant smiled as he came closer, as if anticipating the question Umi was about to ask.
“Did you see the person who left this calabash?” inquired Umi, exhibiting the vessel.
“Did you see who left this gourd?” Umi asked, holding up the vessel.
“I saw her,” replied the giant.
“I saw her,” said the giant.
“Then it was left by a woman?”
"Then it was left by a woman?"
“By a woman.”
“Written by a woman.”
“Did you observe her?”
“Did you see her?”
“As closely as I ever observe any woman.”
“As closely as I ever watch any woman.”
“What was her appearance?”
"What did she look like?"
“Ordinary men would describe her, I presume, as being young, graceful and attractive.”
"Regular guys would probably describe her as young, graceful, and good-looking."
“And you?”
"And you?"
“I would call her a plaything, as I would any other woman whose head did not touch my beard.”
“I would call her a toy, just like I would any other woman whose head didn’t touch my beard.”
“True,” said Umi, smiling as his fancy pictured a becoming mate for the giant; “you can know but little of women. But would you recognize the plaything who left this calabash, were you to see her again?”
“True,” said Umi, smiling as his imagination envisioned an attractive partner for the giant; “you probably know very little about women. But would you recognize the girl who left this calabash if you saw her again?”
The giant intimated that he would probably recognize her.
The giant suggested that he would likely recognize her.
“Then seek among the women of the camp, and, if found, [310]say to her for Umi that if she prizes the calabash he will return it to her, if she will claim it after the sun sets to-day and show that she is the rightful owner.”
“Then look among the women in the camp, and if you find her, [__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]tell her for Umi that if she values the calabash, he will give it back to her, but she has to claim it after the sun sets today and prove that she is the rightful owner.”
Maukaleoleo bowed and departed on his errand, and Umi hung the calabash at his girdle.
Maukaleoleo bowed and left to complete his task, and Umi secured the calabash at his waist.
Another advance was ordered, and in an hour or less the little army lay hidden along the brow of the ragged hills overlooking the valley of Waipio on the south and east and extending to the sea. A fleet messenger was despatched over the hills to a waterfall, the sound of which could be heard dropping into the valley from a great height in an unbroken cataract. He returned, bringing with him a strangely-marked piece of kapa which he had found suspended from a limb near the verge of the fall.
Another advance was ordered, and in an hour or less, the small army was hidden along the edge of the rugged hills overlooking the Waipio valley to the south and east, stretching out to the sea. A fast messenger was sent over the hills to a waterfall, the sound of which could be heard crashing down into the valley from a great height in a continuous flow. He returned, bringing back a strangely-patterned piece of kapa that he had found hanging from a branch near the edge of the waterfall.
It was the final signal of Nunu, and implied that the king’s attendants had been sent to the mountains and sea-shore, and the palace was defenceless. Preparations were made for an immediate descent into the valley. As the paths leading down were tortuous and narrow, the warriors were ordered to break ranks and make the descent as rapidly and as best they could, and promptly re-form on reaching the valley.
It was Nunu's final signal, indicating that the king's attendants had been sent to the mountains and the coast, leaving the palace unprotected. They got ready for an immediate descent into the valley. Since the paths down were winding and narrow, the warriors were instructed to break ranks and make their way down as quickly and efficiently as possible, then regroup once they reached the valley.
The word was given, and the advance began. First the summit bristled with spears, then down the hillsides swept a swarm of armed men. In their rapid descent they seemed to be hopelessly scattered, but they re-formed on reaching the valley, and in good order advanced toward the little stream, across which was the royal mansion, and not far from it the temple of Paakalani.
The signal was given, and the march started. First, the peak was lined with spears, then a swarm of armed men rushed down the hillsides. In their quick descent, they appeared to be hopelessly spread out, but they regrouped upon reaching the valley and steadily moved toward the small stream, where the royal mansion stood, and nearby was the temple of Paakalani.
The wildest excitement prevailed in the village. Some seized their arms, and others ran toward the hills, but no opposition was offered. At the head of the little army marched Umi, himself almost a giant, and by his side the mighty Maukaleoleo, naked but for the maro about his loins, and bearing a ponderous spear, the ivory point of which could be seen above the tree-tops.
The village was buzzing with excitement. Some grabbed their weapons, while others sprinted toward the hills, but no one resisted. Leading the small army was Umi, who was nearly a giant himself, and next to him was the powerful Maukaleoleo, who was only wearing a maro around his waist and carrying a heavy spear, the ivory tip clearly visible above the tree tops.
Plunging into and crossing the stream, detachments were despatched at a running pace to surround the royal enclosure and cut off all escape, especially to the puhonui, while with the main force Umi advanced to the great gate of the outer wall, which had been hastily closed and fastened, and demanded admission. No reply being made, although a confusion of voices could be heard from within Umi was about to order up a force to beat [311]down the gate when Maukaleoleo leaned his spear against the wall, and, laying hold of a rock which no two other men could lift, hurled it against the gate, and it was torn from its fastenings as if struck by a missile from Kilauea. He then seized the broken obstruction and flung it from the entrance as if it had been a screen of matting, and Umi and his followers poured into the enclosure. Driving before them a score or two of hastily-armed attendants of the king, they raised a wild battle-shout and rushed toward the palace.
Plunging into and crossing the stream, teams were sent out at a sprint to surround the royal area and block any escape, especially to the puhonui. Meanwhile, Umi led the main force to the large gate of the outer wall, which had been quickly closed and secured, and demanded entry. When there was no response, despite hearing a jumble of voices from inside, Umi was about to call for a force to break down the gate when Maukaleoleo leaned his spear against the wall, picked up a rock that no two other men could lift, and threw it against the gate. It was wrenched from its hinges as if hit by a projectile from Kilauea. He then grabbed the broken debris and tossed it aside like a mat, and Umi and his followers charged into the area. Driving out a dozen or so hastily armed attendants of the king, they let out a fierce battle cry and rushed toward the palace.
So secret had been the movement of the insurgents, and so rapid was their advance after reaching the valley, that Hakau was not made aware of their presence until they began to cross the stream near the royal mansion. The first information bewildered him. Recovering, he ordered the gates to be closed and barred, and every one to arm within the grounds. A messenger was sent to mount the walls and report the probable number of the assailants; but the most of them were in the stream at the moment of observation, and the king was relieved with the assurance that the force did not number more than one or two hundred.
The movement of the insurgents had been so secretive, and their advance so quick after they reached the valley, that Hakau only realized they were there when they began to cross the stream close to the royal mansion. The initial news shocked him. Regaining his composure, he ordered the gates to be closed and barred, and everyone on the grounds to arm themselves. A messenger was sent to climb the walls and report on the likely number of attackers; however, most of them were in the stream during the observation, and the king felt reassured knowing that the force consisted of no more than one or two hundred.
“Then we can beat them off until assistance comes,” said Hakau, confidently. “Hold the gates with your lives!” he shouted; then, hastily entering the mua, he took from the ipu in which it was deposited the Kiha-pu, the sacred war-trumpet of the Hawaiian kings, and sprang to the front of the palace. He placed the shell to his lips to sound a blast of alarm, which with the breath of Liloa was wont to swell throughout a radius of ten or twelve miles. Filling his lungs for a mighty effort, which he doubted not would bring to his assistance the villagers and feather-hunters despatched to the hills, he wound a blast through the shell. But no such voice ever issued before from the mysterious chambers of the Kiha-pu. Instead of a note of alarm swelling over the hills in wild and warlike cadence, they gave forth a dreadful discord of torture-wrung screams and groans, horrifying all within the walls, but scarcely audible beyond them.
“Then we can hold them off until help arrives,” Hakau said confidently. “Defend the gates at all costs!” he shouted. He quickly entered the mua, took out the Kiha-pu, the sacred war trumpet of the Hawaiian kings, and jumped to the front of the palace. He put the shell to his lips to sound an alarm that was known to carry for ten to twelve miles with the breath of Liloa. Taking a deep breath for a powerful blow, which he was sure would bring the villagers and feather hunters from the hills to assist, he blew into the shell. But no sound like that had ever come from the mysterious chambers of the Kiha-pu. Instead of a commanding blast of alarm echoing over the hills, it unleashed a horrifying cacophony of tortured screams and groans, shocking everyone within the walls, but barely audible outside.
Hakau dropped the shell to the earth as if his lips had been burned with its kiss, and with a feeling of desperation seized a javelin and grimly awaited the onset at the gate. His suspense was brief. The gate went down with a crash; and when he saw his handful of defenders retire before the incoming flood of warriors led by Umi, Hakau retreated to the mua with three or four [312]of his attendants, where he resolved to defend himself to the death.
Hakau dropped the shell to the ground as if his lips had been scorched by its kiss, and in a fit of desperation, grabbed a javelin and grimly prepared for the attack at the gate. His wait was short. The gate crashed down; and when he saw his small group of defenders fall back before the wave of warriors led by Umi, Hakau retreated to the mua with three or four [__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__] of his attendants, where he decided to fight to the death.
The door of the mua was scarcely barred before Umi reached it. A hundred warriors pressed forward, but he waved them back. He looked at Maukaleoleo, and the next moment the door was a mass of splinters. Umi resolutely stepped within, Kaoleioku, the warrior-priest, at his side. As he entered, with a hiss Hakau made a thrust at him with his javelin. Umi caught and wrenched the weapon from his grasp, and was about to strike when Kaoleioku stayed every uplifted hand by exclaiming:
The door of the mua had barely been secured before Umi got there. A hundred warriors pushed forward, but he signaled them to stop. He glanced at Maukaleoleo, and in the next moment, the door shattered into pieces. Umi confidently stepped inside, with Kaoleioku, the warrior-priest, beside him. As he entered, Hakau suddenly lunged at him with his javelin. Umi caught the weapon and yanked it from Hakau's hand, and just as he was about to strike, Kaoleioku halted him by shouting:
“Hold! Let this be a sacrifice, and not a murder! In the name of the gods I slay him!”
“Stop! Let this be a sacrifice, not a murder! I kill him in the name of the gods!”
With these words the high-priest drove his ihe through the heart of Hakau, and he fell dying at the feet of Umi.
With these words, the high priest plunged his ihe through the heart of Hakau, and he collapsed, dying at Umi's feet.
Hakau strove to speak, but his words were bitter and choked him.
Hakau tried to speak, but his words were bitter and stuck in his throat.
“Bear him with respect to a couch,” said Umi. “He is the son of a king, and so let him die.”
“Carry him gently to a couch,” Umi said. “He is the son of a king, so let him pass away.”
His orders were obeyed, and Hakau, the tyrant king of Hawaii, breathed his last as Umi turned and left the mua.
His orders were followed, and Hakau, the tyrant king of Hawaii, took his last breath as Umi turned and left the mua.
The palace was now in the possession of Umi, with its gods, its sacred emblems, its royal regalia and all the paraphernalia of supreme authority; but he appreciated that much remained to be done, and that, too, without delay. The feather-hunters would soon return from the hills and sea-shore; but they could be dealt with in detail as they arrived in small parties, and were, therefore, not greatly to be feared. The distant chiefs summoned by the lunapais of the dead king were the principal cause of anxiety. Some time during the next day they would begin to arrive with their quotas of warriors, and Umi was not quite confident that they would accept the situation peacefully.
The palace was now under Umi's control, along with its deities, sacred symbols, royal belongings, and all the symbols of ultimate power. However, he knew that there was still a lot to do, and it had to be done quickly. The feather hunters would soon be back from the hills and the seaside, but they could be managed as they came in small groups, so they weren't too much of a threat. The distant chiefs called by the lunapais of the deceased king were the main source of concern. They would start showing up with their groups of warriors sometime the next day, and Umi wasn't entirely sure they would accept the situation without conflict.
To be prepared for any emergency, he ordered his entire force to quarters within the palace grounds, despatched parties to procure supplies of food, received the allegiance of the attendants and guards found in and around the royal mansion, and sent out heralds to proclaim the death of Hakau by the will of the gods, and the assumption of sovereign authority by Umi, the son of Liloa.
To be ready for any emergency, he gathered his whole team within the palace grounds, sent groups to get food supplies, secured the loyalty of the staff and guards in and around the royal residence, and hired messengers to announce that Hakau had died by divine will, and that Umi, the son of Liloa, was now in charge.
The Kiha-pu was discovered near the door, where it had been [313]dropped by Hakau. No one dared to touch it. It was recognized by a chief who had seen it before, and who guarded it until Umi appeared. The chief pointed to the sacred shell, and with an exclamation of joy Umi raised it to his lips and sounded a vigorous blast, which swept over the valleys and echoed through the hills with its old-time voice of thunder.
The Kiha-pu was found near the door, where it had been [__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__] dropped by Hakau. No one was brave enough to touch it. A chief who recognized it from before kept watch over it until Umi arrived. The chief pointed to the sacred shell, and with a shout of joy, Umi brought it to his lips and blew a powerful blast, which rolled over the valleys and echoed through the hills with its ancient thunderous sound.
All within the walls were startled. Kaoleioku approached, and Umi raised the shell and repeated the sonorous blast. “It is not the breath of Umi,” said the priest, impressively; “it is the voice of the gods proclaiming their approval of the work of this day!”
All inside the walls were taken aback. Kaoleioku came closer, and Umi lifted the shell and echoed the powerful blast. “It’s not just Umi’s breath,” said the priest dramatically; “it’s the voice of the gods signaling their approval of today’s endeavors!”
The body of Hakau was removed to a small structure within the enclosure, where it was given in charge of his wife and mother, Kukukalani and Pinea, and their attendants, to be prepared for burial. And Kapukini, the sister of Hakau and half-sister of Umi, mourned with them; but her grief was not great, for Hakau had been unkind even to her.
The body of Hakau was taken to a small building inside the enclosure, where his wife and mother, Kukukalani and Pinea, along with their attendants, were in charge of preparing it for burial. Kapukini, Hakau's sister and Umi's half-sister, mourned with them; however, her sadness was not deep, as Hakau had been unkind to her as well.
Before nightfall the feather-hunters began to come in; but the situation was made known to them on reaching the valley, and such of them as were not deterred by fear proceeded to the palace and gave their adherence to Umi, thus relieving him of some slight cause of apprehension, and considerably augmenting the strength of his little army.
Before night fell, the feather-hunters started to arrive; however, once they reached the valley, they learned about the situation. Those who weren't scared moved on to the palace and pledged their support to Umi, easing some of his worries and significantly boosting the strength of his small army.
Umi’s promise to his warriors was made good, for that night they ate their meat in peace within the palace-walls at Waipio. All needed rest, but not one of them more than Umi himself. The night was dark, but the air was cool without, and after his evening meal Umi strolled out and threw himself down on a fold of kapa under the palms in front of the mansion. He was soon joined by Kaoleioku, his trusty lieutenants Omaukamau and Piimaiwaa, and several chiefs of distinction.
Umi kept his promise to his warriors, as that night they enjoyed their meal in peace within the palace walls at Waipio. Everyone needed rest, but none more than Umi himself. The night was dark, but the air was cool outside, and after his dinner, Umi stepped out and lay down on a fold of kapa under the palms in front of the mansion. He was soon joined by Kaoleioku, his loyal lieutenants Omaukamau and Piimaiwaa, and several notable chiefs.
The events of the day were being discussed, and the possibilities of the morrow, when Maukaleoleo loomed up in the darkness like the shadow of a palm, and requested permission to approach the group. It was granted, of course, for the giant had proven himself to be one of the stanchest and most valuable of Umi’s friends. But he was not alone. Behind him, and almost hidden by his burly form, walked Kulamea. She wore a pau of five folds, and over her shoulders a light kihei of ornamented kapa. Her black hair fell below her waist, and a woven band of blossoms encircled her head. [314]
The events of the day were being talked about, along with the prospects for tomorrow, when Maukaleoleo appeared in the darkness like the silhouette of a palm tree and asked if he could join the group. Permission was, of course, granted since the giant had proven to be one of Umi’s most loyal and valuable friends. But he wasn’t alone. Behind him, mostly obscured by his large frame, walked Kulamea. She wore a pau with five folds and a light kihei made of decorative kapa draped over her shoulders. Her black hair fell past her waist, and a woven crown of flowers adorned her head. [__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]
“By your instruction,” said the giant, bowing before Umi, “I sought out the woman who left with you beyond the hills to-day a curiously-carved calabash, and acquainted her with your wish that she should come to you and claim it. But she feared to do so, because you are now the king of Hawaii.”
“Following your instructions,” said the giant, bowing before Umi, “I found the woman who left with you beyond the hills today with a uniquely carved calabash and informed her of your wish for her to come to you and claim it. However, she was afraid to do so because you are now the king of Hawaii.”
“Were I the king of the eight Hawaiian seas she should not fear,” replied Umi. “Seek and say to her—”
“ If I were the king of the eight Hawaiian seas, she wouldn’t have to be afraid,” replied Umi. “Go and tell her—”
“Let Umi speak the words himself,” interrupted the giant; saying which, he advanced a few paces into a better light, and, stepping aside, Kulamea stood revealed before the group.
“Let Umi speak for himself,” interrupted the giant; saying this, he moved a few steps into better light, and, stepping aside, Kulamea was revealed before the group.
“Kulamea!” exclaimed Umi, rising.
“Kulamea!” Umi exclaimed, standing up.
“Kulamea!” repeated Omaukamau, in astonishment, for he did not know before that his sister was in Waipio. “What evil spirit prompted you to venture here at such a time as this?”
“Kulamea!” repeated Omaukamau, in shock, because he didn’t know his sister was in Waipio. “What evil spirit made you come here at a time like this?”
“Do not chide her, Omaukamau,” said Umi, placing his hand tenderly upon the shoulder of the fair playmate of his youth. “The triumph of to-day is as much to her as it is to her brave brother, and no one could be more welcome.”
“Don’t blame her, Omaukamau,” Umi said, putting his hand gently on the shoulder of his beautiful childhood friend. “Today’s victory belongs to her just as much as it does to her brave brother, and nobody could be more appreciated.”
Omaukamau was silent, and Kulamea sank on her knees before Umi. He raised her to her feet and kissed her; then, taking from his girdle and placing in her hands the calabash she had come to claim, he said:
Omaukamau was quiet, and Kulamea dropped to her knees in front of Umi. He lifted her to her feet and kissed her; then, taking the calabash she had come to get from his belt and putting it in her hands, he said:
“In the presence of all here Umi returns this calabash to Kulamea, his wife!” Then, leading her to her brother, he continued: “Give her attendants, and see that she is provided with all else that befits her station.” Omaukamau kissed his sister, and led her into the mansion.
“In front of everyone here, Umi gives this calabash back to Kulamea, his wife!” Then, guiding her to her brother, he added: “Give her attendants, and make sure she has everything else that suits her position.” Omaukamau kissed his sister and took her into the mansion.
During this scene Maukaleoleo stood looking down upon the group with folded arms and an amused expression upon his face.
During this scene, Maukaleoleo stood looking down at the group with his arms crossed and an amused expression on his face.
“Perhaps I should have asked your consent,” said Umi, smiling and looking up into the face of the giant.
“Maybe I should have asked for your permission,” Umi said, smiling and looking up at the giant's face.
“Umi is now in a condition to take from his subjects without asking,” pertinently replied the monster; “but in this instance there seems to be no other claimant, and the title is unquestioned.”
“Umi is now in a position to take from his subjects without asking,” the monster replied sharply; “but in this case, there doesn’t seem to be anyone else claiming it, and the title is clear.”
“And have I your approval as well?” inquired Umi, more seriously, addressing Kaoleioku.
“And do I have your approval too?” Umi asked, more seriously, turning to Kaoleioku.
“Better than mine,” replied the priest, warmly: “you have the approval of the gods; for in fulfilling your pledge to a simple and confiding woman you have kept faith with them.” [315]
“Better than mine,” replied the priest, warmly: “you have the approval of the gods; for by fulfilling your promise to a simple and trusting woman, you have stayed true to them.” [__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]
The rest of the prominent events leading to, and connected with, the accession of Umi to the moiship of Hawaii, will be very briefly referred to. As the district chiefs and their warriors arrived at Waipio in response to the call of the dead king, they accepted the changed conditions without protest, and promptly tendered their allegiance to Umi.
The remaining major events that led to, and are linked with, Umi becoming the ruler of Hawaii will be briefly mentioned. When the district chiefs and their warriors arrived at Waipio in response to the summons from the deceased king, they accepted the new situation without any objections and quickly pledged their loyalty to Umi.
The second day after his death Hakau’s remains were quietly and without display taken to the hills and entombed, and the day following Umi was publicly anointed king of Hawaii in the presence of nearly ten thousand warriors. The games and festivities of the occasion continued for ten days.
The second day after his death, Hakau's remains were quietly and discreetly taken to the hills and buried, and the day after that, Umi was publicly crowned king of Hawaii in front of nearly ten thousand warriors. The celebrations and festivities lasted for ten days.
The Akuapaao was placed in the temple of Paakalani, and at the death of the venerable Laeanui, which occurred shortly after, Kaoleioku, who was of the family of Paao, was created high priest.
The Akuapaao was set up in the temple of Paakalani, and shortly after the respected Laeanui passed away, Kaoleioku, who was from the Paao family, was appointed as high priest.
Omaukamau and Piimaiwaa became the confidential advisers of Umi, as well as his favorite military captains, and Maukaleoleo served in his many campaigns, his strength and prowess furnishing subjects for numerous strange stories still living in Hawaiian tradition.
Omaukamau and Piimaiwaa became Umi's trusted advisors and his favorite military leaders, while Maukaleoleo participated in his many campaigns. His strength and skill provided material for the many incredible stories that still exist in Hawaiian tradition.

Kapiolani
Kapiolani

[317]
[__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]
Lono and Kaikilani.
[318]
[__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]
CHARACTERS.
- Keawenui, king of Hawaii.
-
Kanaloa-kuaana, sons of Keawenui by various mothers. Lonoikamakahiki and Pupukea - Kukailani, nephew of Keawenui.
- Kaikilani, daughter of Kukailani.
- Kakuhihewa, king of Oahu.
- Lanahuimihaku, a chief of Oahu.
- Ohaikawiliula, a chiefess of Kauai.
- Heakekoa, a man of Molokai.
- Kaikinane, a woman of Molokai.
[319]
[__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]
LONO AND KAIKILANI.
Lono and Kaikilani.
A ROMANTIC EPISODE IN THE ROYAL ANNALS.
A ROMANTIC EPISODE IN THE ROYAL ANNALS.
I.
What a hustling and barbaric little world in themselves were the eight habitable islands of the Hawaiian archipelago before the white man came to rouse the simple but warlike islanders from the dream they had for centuries been living! Up to that time their national life had been a long romance, abundant in strife and deeds of chivalry, and scarcely less bountiful in episodes of love, friendship and self-sacrifice. Situated in mid-ocean, their knowledge of the great world, of which their island dots on the bosom of the Pacific formed but an infinitesimal portion, did not reach beyond a misty Kahiki, from which their fathers came some centuries before, and the bare names of other lands marking the migratory course of their ancestors thither.
What a bustling and primitive little world the eight habitable islands of the Hawaiian archipelago were before the white man arrived to awaken the simple yet fierce islanders from the dream they had lived for centuries! Until that point, their national life had been a long saga filled with conflict and heroic deeds, and just as rich in stories of love, friendship, and self-sacrifice. Located in the middle of the ocean, their understanding of the vast world—of which their tiny islands were just a tiny part—didn't extend beyond a foggy Kahiki, from which their ancestors had come many centuries earlier, along with the bare names of other lands that marked their forebears' journey there.
The Hawaiians were barbarous, certainly, since they slew their prisoners of war, and to their gods made sacrifice of their enemies; since no tie of consanguinity save that of mother and son was a bar to wedlock; since murder was scarcely a crime, and the will of the alii-nui on every island was the supreme law; since the masses were in physical bondage to their chiefs and in mental slavery to the priesthood. Yet, with all this, they were a brave, hospitable and unselfish people. The kings of the islands of Hawaii, Maui, Oahu and Kauai were in almost continual warfare with each other until brought under one government by Kamehameha I.; but the fear of foreign invasion never disturbed them, and the people, who feared their gods, reverenced their rulers and possessed an easy and unfailing means of sustenance and personal comfort, were content with a condition which had been theirs for generations and was hopeless of amelioration; for the high chiefs in authority claimed a lineage distinct from that of the masses, and between them frowned a gulf socially and politically impassable. [320]
The Hawaiians were certainly brutal; they killed their prisoners of war and sacrificed their enemies to their gods. There were few restrictions on marriage aside from the relationship between mother and son, murder was hardly considered a crime, and the will of the alii-nui on each island was the ultimate law. The common people were physically bound to their chiefs and mentally subservient to the priesthood. Yet despite all this, they were a brave, welcoming, and selfless people. The kings of the islands of Hawaii, Maui, Oahu, and Kauai were almost constantly at war with one another until Kamehameha I. united them under one government; however, they were never worried about foreign invasion. The people, who feared their gods, respected their rulers, and had easy access to food and comfort, were content with a way of life that had been theirs for generations and seemed unlikely to change. The high chiefs in power claimed a lineage that set them apart from the masses, and there was a deep social and political divide between them. [__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]
The Hawaiians were never cannibals. The most conspicuous of their barbarisms was the sacrifice of human beings to their gods; but did not the temples of early Gaul and Saxon flow with the blood of men? and did not one of the fathers of Israel sharpen his knife to slay the body of his son upon the altar of the God of Abraham? They knew but little of the arts as we know them now, and the useful and precious metals were all unknown to them; yet they made highways over the precipices, reared massive walls of stone around their temples, carried effective weapons into battle, and constructed capacious single and double canoes and barges, which they navigated by the light of the stars. They had no language either of letters or symbolism, but so accurately were their legends preserved and transmitted that the great chiefs were able to trace their ancestry back, generation by generation, to something like a kinship with the children of Jacob, and even beyond in the same manner to Noah, and thence to Adam. What wonder, then, that under their old kings the islands of Hawaii should have been the home of romance, and that the south wind should have sighed in numbers through the caves of Kona?
The Hawaiians were never cannibals. The most noticeable of their harsh practices was the sacrifice of people to their gods; but didn’t the temples of early Gaul and Saxon also spill the blood of men? And didn’t one of the fathers of Israel get ready to slay his son on the altar of the God of Abraham? They didn’t know much about the arts as we do today, and they were completely unaware of useful and precious metals; yet they built roads over cliffs, constructed massive stone walls around their temples, wielded effective weapons in battle, and crafted spacious single and double canoes and barges, which they navigated by the stars. They didn't have a written language or symbols, but their legends were passed down so accurately that the great chiefs could trace their ancestry back, generation by generation, to a kinship with the children of Jacob, and even further back to Noah, and then to Adam. What is surprising, then, that under their ancient kings, the islands of Hawaii became a land of romance, and that the south wind sighed melodically through the caves of Kona?
And now, borne by the soft breath of the tropics, let us be wafted to the island of Hawaii, and backward over a misty bridge of historic meles to the reign of Kealiiokoloa, a son of Umi and grandson of the famed Liloa. It was during his brief reign—extending, perhaps, from 1520 to 1530—that for a second time a white face was seen by the Hawaiians. A Spanish vessel from the Moluccas was driven upon the reefs of Keei, in the district of Kona, and completely destroyed. But two persons were saved from the wreck—the captain and his sister. They were first thought to be gods by the simple islanders; but as their first request was for food, which they ate with avidity, and their next for rest, which seemed to be as necessary to them as to other mortals, they were soon relieved of their celestial attributes and conducted to the king, who received them graciously and took them under his protection. The captain—named by the natives Kukanaloa—wedded a dusky maiden of good family, and the sister became the wife of a chief in whose veins ran royal blood.
And now, carried by the gentle breeze of the tropics, let's be taken to the island of Hawaii, and back over a foggy bridge of history to the reign of Kealiiokoloa, a son of Umi and grandson of the legendary Liloa. It was during his short reign—possibly from 1520 to 1530—that a white face was seen again by the Hawaiians. A Spanish ship from the Moluccas was driven onto the reefs of Keei, in the Kona district, and totally wrecked. Only two people were saved from the disaster—the captain and his sister. The simple islanders initially thought they were gods; but when their first request was for food, which they devoured hungrily, and their next request was for rest, which seemed just as needed by them as by any other humans, they were quickly stripped of their divine status and taken to the king, who welcomed them warmly and offered them his protection. The captain—known to the natives as Kukanaloa—married a local woman of good family, and the sister became the wife of a chief with royal lineage.
On the death of Kealiiokoloa his younger brother, Keawenui, assumed the sceptre in defiance of the right of Kukailani, his [321]nephew and son of the dead king, who was too young to assert his authority. This he was the better enabled to do in consequence of the sudden death of the king, possibly by poison, before his successor had been formally named. Keawenui’s usurpation, however, was resisted by the leading chiefs of the island, who refused to recognize his authority and rose in arms against him. But he inherited something of the martial prowess of his father, Umi, and, meeting the revolted chiefs before they had time to properly organize their forces, destroyed them in detail, and thereafter reigned in peace. Nor could it well have been otherwise, for the bones of the rebellious chiefs of Kohala, Hamakua, Hilo, Puna, Kau and Kona were among the trophies of his household, and Kukailani, lacking ambition, was content with the lot of idleness and luxury which the crafty uncle placed at his command.
On the death of Kealiiokoloa, his younger brother, Keawenui, took the throne despite the claim of Kukailani, his nephew and the son of the deceased king, who was too young to assert his power. Keawenui was able to do this because the king died suddenly, possibly from poison, before a successor had been officially chosen. However, Keawenui’s takeover faced resistance from the island's leading chiefs, who refused to acknowledge his rule and took up arms against him. But he inherited some of his father's martial skills, Umi, and, catching the rebels off guard before they could fully organize, he defeated them one by one and then ruled in peace. It couldn’t have been any other way, as the remains of the rebellious chiefs from Kohala, Hamakua, Hilo, Puna, Kau, and Kona became trophies in his household, while Kukailani, lacking ambition, was satisfied with the life of luxury and leisure that his cunning uncle provided for him.
And thus, while Keawenui continued in the moiship of Hawaii, Kukailani, the rightful ruler, grew to manhood around the court of his uncle. In due time the prince married, and among the children born to him was Kaikilani, the heroine of this little story. At the age of fifteen she was the most lovely of the maidens of Hawaii. Her face was fairer than any other in Hilo, to which place Keawenui had removed his court; and that is saying much, for the king was noted for his gallantries, and the handsomest women in the kingdom were among his retainers. If her complexion was a shade lighter than that of others, it was because of the Castilian blood that had come to her through her grandmother, the sister of Kukanaloa, and brighter eyes than hers never peered through the lattices of the Guadalquivir.
And so, while Keawenui continued in the leadership of Hawaii, Kukailani, the rightful ruler, grew up around the court of his uncle. Eventually, the prince got married, and one of his children was Kaikilani, the heroine of this story. At fifteen, she was the most beautiful of the maidens in Hawaii. Her face was fairer than anyone else in Hilo, where Keawenui had moved his court; and that’s saying a lot, since the king was known for his romantic interests, and the most attractive women in the kingdom were part of his entourage. If her complexion was a bit lighter than others, it was due to the Castilian blood she inherited from her grandmother, the sister of Kukanaloa, and no one had brighter eyes than hers looking through the lattices of the Guadalquivir.
Kaikilani became the wife of the king’s eldest son, Kanaloa-kuaana, and, in further atonement of the wrong he had done her father, on his death-bed Keawenui formally conferred upon her the moiship of Hawaii. Among the other sons left by Keawenui at his death was Lono. His full name was Lonoikamakahiki. His mother was Haokalani, in whose veins ran the best blood of Oahu.
Kaikilani became the wife of the king’s oldest son, Kanaloa-kuaana, and, as a further way to make up for the harm he had caused her father, on his deathbed Keawenui officially granted her the moiship of Hawaii. Among the other sons left by Keawenui at his death was Lono. His full name was Lonoikamakahiki. His mother was Haokalani, who was of the finest lineage from Oahu.
Early in life Lono exhibited remarkable intelligence, and as he grew to manhood, after the death of his father, in athletic and warlike exercises and other manly accomplishments he had not a peer in all Hawaii. So greatly was he admired by the people, and so manifestly was he born to rule, that his brother, the husband [322]and adviser of the queen, recommended that he be elevated to the moiship, in equal power and dignity with Kaikilani.
Early in life, Lono showed incredible intelligence, and as he matured, especially after his father's death, he excelled in athletic and martial skills, unmatched by anyone else in all of Hawaii. His popularity was immense, and it was clear he was destined to lead, so much so that his brother, who was married to the queen and served as her advisor, suggested that Lono be promoted to the moiship, sharing equal power and status with Kaikilani. [__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]
What followed could have occurred only in Hawaii. A day was appointed for a public trial of Lono’s abilities before the assembled chiefs of the kingdom. Although but twenty-three years of age, his knowledge of warfare, of government, of the unwritten laws of the island and the prerogatives of the tabu was found to be complete; and Kawaamaukele, the venerable high-priest of Hilo, whose white hairs swept his knees, and who had foretold Lono’s future when a boy, bore testimony to his thorough mastery of the legendary annals of the people and his zeal in the worship of the gods.
What happened next could only take place in Hawaii. A date was set for a public trial of Lono’s skills in front of the gathered chiefs of the kingdom. Even though he was only twenty-three, his understanding of warfare, governance, the unwritten laws of the island, and the privileges of the tabu was complete. Kawaamaukele, the elderly high priest of Hilo, whose long white hair touched his knees and who had predicted Lono’s future when he was a boy, testified to his deep knowledge of the legendary history of the people and his dedication to the worship of the gods.
So much for his mental acquirements. To test his physical accomplishments the chiefs most noted for their skill, strength and endurance were summoned from all parts of the kingdom. It was a tournament in which one man threw down the glove to every chief in Hawaii. The various contests continued for ten consecutive days, in the presence of thousands of people, and between the many trials of strength and skill were interspersed feasting, music and dancing. The scene was brilliant. More than a hundred distinguished chiefs, in yellow mantles and helmets, presented themselves to test the prowess of Lono in exercises in which they individually excelled. But the mighty grandson of Umi vanquished them all. He outran the fleetest, as well on the plain as in bringing a ball of snow from the top of Mauna Kea. On a level he leaped the length of two long war-spears, and in uli-maita, holua and other athletic games he found no rival. In a canoe contest he distanced twelve competitors, and then plunged into the sea with a pahoa in his hand, and slew and brought to the surface the body of a large shark. He caught in his hands twenty spears hurled at him in rapid succession by as many strong arms, and in the moku-moku, or wrestling contests, he broke the limbs of three of his adversaries.
So much for his mental skills. To test his physical abilities, the chiefs known for their skill, strength, and endurance were called from all over the kingdom. It was a tournament where one man challenged every chief in Hawaii. The various contests went on for ten straight days, with thousands of spectators, and between the many strength and skill challenges, there were feasting, music, and dancing. The scene was spectacular. More than a hundred distinguished chiefs, dressed in yellow capes and helmets, showed up to test Lono's prowess in activities where they individually excelled. But the mighty grandson of Umi defeated them all. He outran the fastest, both on flat ground and while retrieving a snowball from the top of Mauna Kea. He jumped the length of two long war spears on flat ground, and in uli-maita, holua, and other athletic games, he had no rival. In a canoe race, he left twelve competitors behind, then dove into the sea with a pahoa in his hand and killed and brought to the surface a large shark. He caught twenty spears thrown at him in quick succession by as many strong arms, and in the moku-moku, or wrestling matches, he broke the limbs of three of his opponents.
Among the witnesses of these contests was the still young and comely Kaikilani. It is true that she had frequently met the young hero, and regarded him with such favor as she might the brother of her husband; but now, at the end of his victories, he appeared to her almost as a god, with whom it would be an honor to share the sovereignty of the kingdom; and when, amidst the plaudits of thousands, she threw the royal mamo over [323]his shoulders with her own hands, and in doing so kissed his cheek, her husband saw that she loved Lono better than she had ever loved him. “The gods have decreed it,” said Kanaloa, in sorrow, but with no feeling of bitterness, “and so shall it be!”
Among the witnesses of these contests was the still young and beautiful Kaikilani. It’s true that she had often met the young hero and regarded him with the affection one might have for a brother-in-law; but now, at the end of his victories, he seemed to her almost like a god, with whom it would be an honor to share the rule of the kingdom. When, amidst the cheers of thousands, she draped the royal mamo over [__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]his shoulders with her own hands, and kissed his cheek while doing so, her husband realized that she loved Lono more than she had ever loved him. “The gods have decreed it,” said Kanaloa, sorrowfully but without bitterness, “and so shall it be!”
He consulted with the chiefs and high-priest, and at the conclusion of a feast the same evening, given in honor of Lono, he took his brother by the hand and led him to the apartment of the queen. As they entered, Kaikilani rose from a soft couch of kapa, and waited to hear the purpose of their visit; for it was near the middle of the night, and but a single kukui torch was burning in front of the door. The heart of Kanaloa fluttered in his throat, but he finally said, with apparent calmness:
He talked with the chiefs and the high priest, and at the end of a feast that evening, held in honor of Lono, he took his brother by the hand and led him to the queen's room. As they walked in, Kaikilani got up from a soft kapa couch and waited to hear why they had come; it was close to midnight, and only one kukui torch was lit by the door. Kanaloa's heart raced in his throat, but he managed to say, with a calm appearance:
“My good Kaikilani, what I am about to say is in sorrow to myself and in affection for you. Of all the sons of our father, Lono seems most to have the favor of the gods. Is it strange, then, that he should have yours as well? It is therefore deemed best by the gods, the chiefs and myself that you accept Lono as your husband, and share with him henceforth the government of Hawaii. Is it your will that this be done?”
“My dear Kaikilani, what I’m about to say brings me sadness for myself and love for you. Among all the sons of our father, Lono appears to have the most favor from the gods. Is it really surprising that he has yours too? So, it seems best to the gods, the chiefs, and me that you accept Lono as your husband and share the leadership of Hawaii with him from now on. Is that what you want?”
Kaikilani was almost dazed with the abrupt announcement; but she understood its full meaning, and, after gazing for a moment into the face of Lono and reading no objection there, she found the courage to answer:
Kaikilani was nearly stunned by the sudden announcement; however, she grasped its complete meaning, and after staring for a moment at Lono's face and seeing no disagreement there, she gathered the courage to respond:
“Since it is the will of the gods, it is also mine.”
“Since it's the will of the gods, it's also mine.”
“So shall it be made known by the heralds,” said Kanaloa, bowing to hide his grief, and leaving Lono and the queen together.
“So it will be announced by the messengers,” said Kanaloa, bowing to conceal his sorrow, and leaving Lono and the queen alone.
Thus it was that Lono, of whom tradition relates so many romantic stories, became the moi of Hawaii and the husband of the most attractive woman of her time, Queen Kaikilani.
Thus it was that Lono, of whom tradition tells so many romantic stories, became the moi of Hawaii and the husband of the most beautiful woman of her time, Queen Kaikilani.
II.
Peace and prosperity followed the elevation of Lono to the throne of Hawaii. His fame as an able and sagacious ruler soon spread to the other islands of the group, and his court as well as his person commanded the highest respect of his subjects. Weary of inaction, and having no desire to embroil the kingdom in a foreign war, he at length concluded to visit some of [324]the neighboring islands with his queen, and particularly Kauai, which he had once seen when a boy.
Peace and prosperity came after Lono became the king of Hawaii. His reputation as a smart and wise ruler quickly spread to the other islands, and both he and his court earned the utmost respect from his people. Tired of doing nothing and wanting to avoid getting the kingdom involved in a foreign conflict, he finally decided to visit some of [__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]the neighboring islands with his queen, especially Kauai, which he had visited when he was a boy.
Leaving the government in charge of his brother Kanaloa, Lono embarked on his journey of pleasure with a number of large double canoes and a brilliant retinue. He took with him poloulous, kahilis and other emblems of state, and the hokeo, or large calabash, containing the bones of the six rebellious chiefs slain by his royal father at the beginning of his reign.
Leaving the government in the hands of his brother Kanaloa, Lono set off on his journey of enjoyment with several large double canoes and an impressive entourage. He brought along poloulous, kahilis, and other symbols of authority, as well as the hokeo, or large calabash, which held the bones of the six rebellious chiefs killed by his royal father at the start of his reign.
The double canoe provided for Kaikilani and her personal attendants was fitted out in a manner becoming the rank of its royal occupant. It was eighty feet in length, and the two together were seven feet in width. Midway between stem and stern a continuous flooring covered both canoes, which was enclosed to a height of six feet, thus providing the queen with a room seven feet broad and twenty feet in length. The apartment was abundantly supplied with cloths and mats of brilliant colors, and the walls were decorated with festoons of shells and leis of flowers and feathers. In front of the entrance stood two kahilis, and behind a kapa screen was a carved image of Ku, surrounded by a number of charms and sacred relics. The canoes were brightly painted in alternate lines of black and yellow, while above their ornamented prows towered the carved and feathered forms of two gigantic birds with human heads. Forty oarsmen comprised the crew, and sails of mats were ready to lift into every favoring breeze.
The double canoe prepared for Kaikilani and her personal attendants was equipped in a way that matched her royal status. It was eighty feet long and seven feet wide across both canoes. In the middle, there was a continuous floor connecting the two canoes, which was enclosed up to six feet high, giving the queen a room that was seven feet wide and twenty feet long. This space was filled with colorful cloths and mats, and the walls were adorned with garlands of shells and leis made of flowers and feathers. In front of the entrance were two kahilis, and behind a kapa screen stood a carved figure of Ku, surrounded by various charms and sacred items. The canoes were vividly painted in alternating black and yellow stripes, and above their decorated prows loomed the carved and feathered shapes of two enormous birds with human heads. The crew consisted of forty oarsmen, and mat sails were ready to catch any favorable wind.
The double canoe of the king was smaller and less elaborately ornamented; and as it moved out of the harbor of Hilo, bearing the royal ensign and followed by the sumptuous barge of the queen and the humbler crafts of servants and retainers, the shores were lined with people, and hundred in canoes paddled after them to give them their parting alohas beyond the reef. The auguries had not been favorable. So said the high-priest, and so had the people whispered to each other. But, after preparing for the journey, Lono could not be persuaded to relinquish it. It was therefore with misgivings that he was seen to depart; and for many days thereafter sacrifices were offered for him in the temples, and a strict tabu was ordered for a period of three days, during which time no labor was performed and a solemn silence prevailed over all the land embraced in the dread edict. Swine were confined, fires were extinguished, [325]dogs were muzzled, fowls were hidden under calabashes, and the priests alone were seen and heard, and they but sparingly. Such was the strict tabu for the propitiation of the gods in case of emergency or peril, and death was the certain penalty of its violation.
The king's double canoe was smaller and less ornately decorated, and as it left the harbor of Hilo, flying the royal flag and followed by the luxurious barge of the queen and the simpler boats of servants and followers, the shores were filled with people, and hundreds in canoes paddled after them to bid them farewell beyond the reef. The signs had not been good. That's what the high priest said, and that's what the people murmured among themselves. But after getting ready for the journey, Lono couldn't be convinced to give it up. So, with a sense of unease, he was seen leaving; and for many days afterward, sacrifices were made for him in the temples, and a strict taboo was enforced for three days, during which no work was done, and a solemn silence covered the entire land under the feared decree. Pigs were confined, fires were put out, [__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]dogs were muzzled, and chickens were hidden under calabashes, with only the priests visible and heard, and they spoke only sparingly. This was the strict taboo meant to appease the gods in times of danger or crisis, and breaking it meant certain death.
The weather was fair, and the royal party first stopped at Lahaina. It had been Lono’s purpose to spend a week or more at the court of Kamalalawalu, but the moi was absent at the time, and the squadron left Maui the next day for Oahu. A fair wind wafted the party through Pailolo channel to the western point of Molokai. The sky was clear, and Lono began to discern the tops of the mountains of eastern Oahu, when one of his nephews threw his spear into and wounded a large shark which for some time had been slowly moving around the bows of the canoe. In an instant the weapon was thrown back with a violence which drove the point through the rim of the boat. Blood tinged the waves, but the shark disappeared.
The weather was nice, and the royal party first stopped at Lahaina. Lono intended to spend a week or more at the court of Kamalalawalu, but the moi was not there at the time, so the squadron left Maui the next day for Oahu. A gentle wind carried the party through the Pailolo channel to the western point of Molokai. The sky was clear, and Lono began to see the tops of the mountains of eastern Oahu when one of his nephews threw his spear and hit a large shark that had been slowly swimming around the front of the canoe. In an instant, the spear was thrown back with such force that it pierced the rim of the boat. Blood stained the waves, but the shark vanished.
Before Lono could recover from his astonishment a furious wind rose from the south and west, and the fleet was driven around to the north side of Molokai, and finally succeeded in effecting a landing at Kalaupapa. Two of the canoes were destroyed during the gale, and the thoughtless young chief who cast the spear was washed into the sea and devoured by a school of black sharks before assistance could reach him. Landing with his party, Lono learned from a priest the cause of the disaster that had overtaken him. It was the god Moaalii, who had taken his characteristic form of a shark and was guiding the fleet to Oahu, that had been wounded by Lono’s nephew.
Before Lono could recover from his shock, a fierce wind whipped up from the south and west, pushing the fleet around to the north side of Molokai. They eventually managed to land at Kalaupapa. Two of the canoes were wrecked in the storm, and the reckless young chief who threw the spear was swept into the sea and eaten by a group of black sharks before anyone could help him. When Lono and his group landed, a priest informed him about the disaster that had befallen them. It was the god Moaalii, who had transformed into a shark and was steering the fleet to Oahu, that had been injured by Lono’s nephew.
The weather continued boisterous for some days, and Lono and his party became the guests of the chiefs of Kalaupapa. It was not a very inviting spot, and to beguile the time Lono and Kaikilani amused themselves with the game of konane, played upon a checkered board and closely resembling the game of draughts. One day, when thus occupied in the shade of a palm near the foot of an abrupt hill, Lono heard a voice above them. He gave but little attention to it until the name of Kaikilani was pronounced. He listened without raising his head, and soon heard the voice repeat:
The weather remained stormy for several days, and Lono and his group were welcomed as guests by the chiefs of Kalaupapa. It wasn't the most attractive place, and to pass the time, Lono and Kaikilani entertained themselves with the game of konane, played on a checkered board and similar to checkers. One day, while they were playing in the shade of a palm tree at the base of a steep hill, Lono heard a voice from above them. He initially paid little attention until he heard the name Kaikilani mentioned. He listened without looking up and soon heard the voice say:
“Ho, Kaikilani! Your lover, Heakekoa, is waiting for you!”
“Hey, Kaikilani! Your boyfriend, Heakekoa, is waiting for you!”
Lono looked up, but could see no one above them. He inquired [326]the meaning of such words addressed to the wife of the moi of Hawaii; but the queen, seemingly confused, was either unable or unwilling to offer any explanation. Enraged at what he hastily conceived to be an evidence of her infidelity, Lono seized the konane board and struck her senseless and bleeding to the earth. Without waiting to learn the result of his barbarous blow, Lono strode to the beach, and, ordering his canoe launched, set sail at once for Oahu, without leaving any orders for the remainder of the fleet.
Lono looked up but saw no one above them. He asked [__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__] what those words meant when directed at the wife of the moi of Hawaii; but the queen, appearing confused, either couldn't or didn't want to provide an explanation. Furious at what he quickly thought was proof of her unfaithfulness, Lono grabbed the konane board and struck her, leaving her senseless and bleeding on the ground. Without bothering to check if she was okay after his brutal attack, Lono walked to the beach, ordered his canoe to be launched, and set sail for Oahu right away, leaving no instructions for the rest of the fleet.
As he shoved from the shore Kaikilani approached, and, holding out her blood-stained hands, pitifully implored him to remain or take her with him; but he waved her back in anger and resolutely put out to sea. She watched the canoe of her impetuous husband until it became a speck in the distance, and then with a despairing moan sank senseless upon the sands.
As he pushed off from the shore, Kaikilani came closer, holding out her bloody hands, pleading with him to stay or take her with him. But he angrily waved her away and set out to sea with determination. She watched her reckless husband’s canoe until it was just a tiny dot in the distance, and then, with a desperate cry, she collapsed unconscious onto the sand.
Kaikilani was tenderly borne to her domicile by her attendants, and for nine days struggled with a fever which threatened her life. During all that time she tasted neither fish nor poi, but in her delirium appealed continually to Lono, declaring that no one had called to her from the cliffs. On the tenth day her mind was clear and she partook of food, and then on her hands and knees a young woman crawled to the side of her kapa-moe, and, having permission to speak, said:
Kaikilani was gently carried home by her attendants, and for nine days she battled a fever that endangered her life. Throughout that period, she consumed neither fish nor poi, but in her delirium, she constantly called out to Lono, saying that no one had beckoned her from the cliffs. On the tenth day, her mind was clear, and she ate some food. Then, on her hands and knees, a young woman crawled to the side of her kapa-moe, and, after receiving permission to speak, said:
“O queen, I am the innocent cause of your misery, and my heart breaks for you. I am the daughter of the chief Keeokane, and he has sent me to you. Heakekoa loves me, and it was my name, Kaikinane, that he called from the cliffs, and not yours. It is better that confusion should come to me than shame and grief to the queen of Hawaii.”
“O queen, I am the innocent reason for your suffering, and my heart aches for you. I am the daughter of Chief Keeokane, and he has sent me to you. Heakekoa loves me, and it was my name, Kaikinane, that he called out from the cliffs, not yours. I would rather face confusion than bring shame and sorrow to the queen of Hawaii.”
Kaikilani admonished her attendants to remember the words of the girl, that they might be able, if necessary, to repeat them to Lono, and then dismissed her with presents and a promise to speak kindly of her to her father, who was greatly annoyed at the distress which the indiscretion of his daughter had brought to their distinguished guest.
Kaikilani urged her attendants to keep in mind the girl’s words, so they could share them with Lono if needed. Then, she sent her off with gifts and promised to speak well of her to her father, who was quite upset about the trouble his daughter's carelessness had caused their esteemed guest.
As soon as she had sufficiently recovered, Kaikilani, not knowing what had become of her husband, sorrowfully returned to Hawaii in the hope of finding him there and explaining away the cause of his anger. But the news of Lono’s assault upon her and his sudden departure from Molokai had preceded her, probably [327]through the return of some of the canoes of the fleet, and when she arrived at Kohala she found the kingdom in a state of rebellion.
As soon as she had recovered enough, Kaikilani, unsure of what had happened to her husband, sadly returned to Hawaii, hoping to find him and clarify why he was upset. But the news of Lono’s attack on her and his abrupt leave from Molokai had already reached her, probably [__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]through some of the returning canoes from the fleet, and when she arrived at Kohala, she found the kingdom in a state of rebellion.
With the avowed intent of slaying Lono, should he return to Hawaii, Kanaloa had assumed the regency, supported by the principal chiefs of the island, the relatives of the queen, and all the brothers of Lono with the exception of Pupuakea, a stalwart and warlike son of Keawenui by an humble mother unnamed in the royal annals, and who had large possessions in the district of Kau.
With the clear aim of killing Lono if he came back to Hawaii, Kanaloa took over as regent, backed by the main chiefs of the island, the queen's relatives, and all of Lono’s brothers except for Pupuakea, a strong and fierce son of Keawenui from an unnamed, lowly mother in the royal records, who owned extensive land in the Kau area.
But Kaikilani still loved her hot-headed but instinctively generous husband, and refused to give countenance to the revolt raised in her behalf. She therefore hastily left Kohala at night, and, so sailing as to escape the observation of the rebels, suddenly appeared off the coast of Kau and placed herself in communication with Pupuakea, the only chief of note that still adhered to the fortunes of Lono. He had succeeded in rallying to the support of his cause a very considerable force, but he knew that it would avail him little against the united armies of the opposition, and after a full consideration of the situation it was decided that Pupuakea should remain on the defensive until the return of Lono, of whom Kaikilani resolved to go at once in search.
But Kaikilani still loved her hot-headed but naturally generous husband and refused to support the uprising happening in her name. So she quickly left Kohala at night, sailing in a way to avoid being seen by the rebels. She suddenly appeared off the coast of Kau and made contact with Pupuakea, the only notable chief still loyal to Lono. He had managed to gather a significant force to support his cause, but he knew it wouldn’t be much use against the united armies of the opposition. After carefully considering the situation, they decided Pupuakea should stay on the defensive until Lono returned, and Kaikilani resolved to set out immediately to find him.
With this understanding Kaikilani, inspired by the hope of winning back her husband’s love, after a few preparations started on her errand; but not before she had made sacrifices to the gods and implored their assistance, and Pupuakea brought word to her from the temple that the auguries of her journey showed a line of dark clouds ending in sunshine. But what cared she for clouds, if the sunshine of Lono’s presence was to come at last? But where was Lono? Perhaps in the bottom of the sea; but, if alive, she resolved to find him, even though the search took her through all the group to the barren rocks of Kaula.
With this understanding, Kaikilani, filled with hope of winning back her husband’s love, began her journey after making some preparations. But first, she made sacrifices to the gods and asked for their help. Pupuakea brought her word from the temple that the signs for her journey showed a path from dark clouds to sunshine. But she didn’t care about the clouds if the sunshine of Lono’s presence was finally coming. But where was Lono? Maybe he was at the bottom of the sea; still, if he was alive, she was determined to find him, even if it meant searching through the islands all the way to the barren rocks of Kaula.
Rounding the capes of Kau and sailing nearly northward, Kaikilani first stopped at Lahaina; but a week spent there convinced her that Lono was not on the island of Maui. The moi treated her with great respect and kindness, and offered to assist in the search for her husband on the other islands; but she declined his services, and next visited Lanai. Causing a thorough search to be made of that island, and despatching a party to the windy wastes of Kahoolawe, the queen proceeded to Molokai, to [328]assure herself that Lono had not returned to Kalaupapa, and then set sail for Oahu. She first landed at Waikiki, on that island, but, learning that the king had established his court at Kailua, departed for that place the next day, and reached it without difficulty, for the captain of her crew was the distinguished old navigator, Kukupea, who for a wager, in the reign of Keawenui, had made the direct passage in a canoe between the Hawaiian bay of Kealakeakua and the island of Niihau without sighting intermediate land.
Rounding the capes of Kau and sailing almost straight north, Kaikilani first stopped at Lahaina. However, after a week there, she was convinced that Lono wasn’t on the island of Maui. The moi treated her with great respect and kindness and offered to help her search for her husband on the other islands, but she refused his help and went to Lanai next. She had a thorough search conducted on that island and sent a party to the windy shores of Kahoolawe. The queen then went to Molokai to [__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]make sure that Lono hadn’t returned to Kalaupapa, and then set sail for Oahu. She first landed at Waikiki on that island, but after learning that the king had moved his court to Kailua, she left for that place the next day and reached it easily, as the captain of her crew was the renowned old navigator, Kukupea. He had, as part of a wager during the reign of Keawenui, successfully made the direct journey in a canoe between the Hawaiian bay of Kealakeakua and the island of Niihau without spotting any land in between.
III.
Leaving Kaikilani entering the bay of Kailua, it will be in order to briefly refer to the adventures of Lono after his sudden departure from Kalaupapa. Half-crazed at what had occurred, to divert his thoughts from his cruelty he seized a paddle, and vigorously used it hour after hour until he was compelled to cease through exhaustion. The wind was fair, but, inspired by his example, twenty others plied the paddle ceaselessly in turns of ten, and in a few hours the royal canoe was hauled up on the beach of Kailua, on the northwestern coast of Oahu, where, as before stated, Kakuhihewa, the moi of the island, had temporarily established his court.
Leaving Kaikilani and entering the bay of Kailua, it's worth briefly mentioning Lono's adventures after he suddenly left Kalaupapa. Half-crazed by what had happened, he picked up a paddle to distract himself from his guilt, using it relentlessly for hours until he had to stop from exhaustion. The wind was in their favor, and, motivated by his example, twenty others took turns paddling in groups of ten. In just a few hours, the royal canoe was pulled up on the beach of Kailua, on the northwestern coast of Oahu, where, as previously mentioned, Kakuhihewa, the moi of the island, had set up his court for a time.
As Lono approached the shore his state attracted attention. A chief and priest, who had at one time been in the service of Lono’s father, recognized the sail and insignia of the craft, and informed the king that it must be that some one nearly connected with the royal family of Hawaii had come to visit him. This secured to Lono a cordial and royal welcome. Houses were set apart for his accommodation, and food in abundance was provided for him and his attendants. Although he scrupulously concealed his name and rank, and in that respect enjoined the closest secrecy upon his attendants under penalty of death, his commanding presence and personal equipment rendered it apparent that he was either one of the sons of Keawenui or a chief of the highest rank below the throne.
As Lono approached the shore, he drew attention. A chief and priest, who had once served Lono's father, recognized the sail and insignia of the vessel and informed the king that someone closely related to Hawaii’s royal family had come to visit him. This earned Lono a warm and royal welcome. Houses were designated for his stay, and plenty of food was provided for him and his attendants. Even though he carefully hid his name and identity, instructing his attendants to keep it a secret under the threat of death, his impressive presence and attire made it clear that he was either one of Keawenui's sons or a chief of the highest rank just below the throne.
Pleading fatigue, and courteously desiring to be left to himself until the day following, Lono partook of his evening meal, sent from the table of the king, alone and in silence, and at an early hour retired to rest. But the heat was oppressive, and [329]thoughts of Kaikilani disturbed his slumbers, and near midnight he strolled down to his canoe on the beach to catch the cool breeze of the sea. While there another double canoe arrived from Kauai, having on board a high chiefess, who was on her way to Hawaii and had touched at Kailua for fresh water.
Feeling exhausted and wanting some alone time until the next day, Lono ate his dinner, which was served from the king's table, by himself in silence, and went to bed early. However, the heat was stifling, and [__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__] thoughts of Kaikilani kept him awake. Around midnight, he walked down to his canoe on the beach to enjoy the cool sea breeze. While he was there, another double canoe arrived from Kauai, carrying a high chiefess who was on her way to Hawaii and had stopped at Kailua for fresh water.
To pass the time Lono engaged in conversation with the fair stranger, and so interested her that she repeated to him twice a new mele that had just been composed in honor of her name—Ohaikawiliula—and which was known only to a few of the highest chiefs of Kauai. Portions of the celebrated chant are still retained by old Hawaiians.
To pass the time, Lono chatted with the beautiful stranger, so much so that she shared with him twice a new mele that had just been created in honor of her name—Ohaikawiliula—and which was known only to a select few of the top chiefs of Kauai. Parts of the famous chant are still held onto by older Hawaiians.
The mele diverted his mind from bitter thoughts, and when he returned to his couch he enjoyed a refreshing sleep. At daylight the next morning the king, without disturbing his royal guest, repaired to the sea-shore for his customary bath just as the Kauai chiefess was preparing to depart. Making himself known to her, she recited to him until he was able to repeat the new mele, and then made sail for Hawaii. As she had arrived after midnight, and the mele was new, the king was pleased at the thought of being able to surprise Lono by reciting it to him; but his amazement was great and his discomfiture complete when, on meeting his guest after breakfast and bantering him to repeat the latest Kauaian mele, Lono recited in full the poem he had so quickly and correctly committed to memory the night before. This incident is related by tradition in evidence of Lono’s mental capacity.
The mele took his mind off negative thoughts, and when he returned to his bed, he had a refreshing sleep. At dawn the next morning, the king, not wanting to disturb his royal guest, went to the shore for his usual bath just as the Kauai chiefess was getting ready to leave. After introducing himself to her, she recited the mele until he was able to recite it back to her, and then set sail for Hawaii. Since she had arrived after midnight and the mele was new, the king was excited about surprising Lono by sharing it with him. However, he was completely shocked and embarrassed when, after breakfast, he teased Lono to repeat the latest Kauaian mele, and Lono recited the entire poem he had memorized so quickly and accurately the night before. This story is passed down as proof of Lono’s sharp mind.
Notwithstanding the mystery which surrounded him at the court of Oahu, Lono soon became a great favorite there. No one could throw a spear so far or so accurately, and in all games and exercises of strength or skill he found no equal. He was generous and fearless, and in his pastimes reckless of his life. Although he was beset with their smiles and blandishments, women seemed to have no charm for him, and he politely but firmly declined to avail himself of that feature of early Hawaiian hospitality which held a host to be remiss in courtesy if he failed to provide his guest with female companionship. He preferred the sturdier contests of men, and introduced to the Oahuans a number of new games of skill and muscle.
Despite the mystery that surrounded him at the court of Oahu, Lono quickly became a favorite there. No one could throw a spear as far or as accurately, and in all strength or skill competitions, he found no rival. He was generous and fearless, and in his leisure activities, he took reckless risks with his life. Although he was surrounded by their smiles and flattery, women seemed to hold no appeal for him, and he politely but firmly declined to partake in that aspect of early Hawaiian hospitality that expected a host to provide his guest with female companionship. He preferred the stronger contests of men and introduced the Oahuans to several new skill and strength games.
While the most of the chiefs were generous admirers of the accomplishments of their unknown visitor, a few were jealous of [330]his popularity, among them the grand counselor of the king, Lanahuimihaku, who on one occasion sneeringly referred to him as “a nameless chief.” To this taunt Lono, towering above his traducer with a menace of death in his face, replied that he would flay him alive if he ever met him beyond the protection of his king; and then he brought from his canoe the great calabash of bones, and, exhibiting the trophies of his father’s prowess, chanted the names of the slain. This apprised them all that he was indeed a son of Keawenui, but which one they did not know.
While most of the chiefs admired the achievements of their unknown visitor, a few were jealous of his popularity, including the king’s grand counselor, Lanahuimihaku, who once mockingly called him “a nameless chief.” In response to this insult, Lono, towering over his accuser with a deadly look on his face, threatened to flay him alive if they ever met outside the king’s protection. He then brought out a large calabash of bones from his canoe, and while showing off the trophies of his father’s victories, he chanted the names of the slain. This informed them all that he was indeed a son of Keawenui, although they did not know which one.
But Lono’s stay in Kailua was drawing to a close, for one day, while he was playing konane with the king within the enclosure of the palace grounds, Kaikilani’s canoe was being drawn up on the beach below. She saw, to her great joy, the canoe of her husband, and ascertained where he might be found. Proceeding alone toward the royal mansion, with a fluttering heart she approached the enclosure, and through an opening in the wall discerned the stalwart form of Lono. Stepping aside to avoid his gaze, she began to chant his mele inoa—the song of his own name. He was startled at hearing his name mentioned in a place where he supposed it to be unknown. He raised his head and listened, and, as the words of the mele floated to him, he recognized the voice of Kaikilani. Rising to his feet, with dignity he now addressed the king:
But Lono’s time in Kailua was coming to an end. One day, while he was playing konane with the king in the palace grounds, Kaikilani’s canoe was being pulled up on the beach below. She was overjoyed to see her husband’s canoe and figured out where he could be found. Heading alone toward the royal mansion, her heart racing, she approached the enclosure and, peering through an opening in the wall, spotted Lono’s strong figure. Trying not to catch his attention, she began to sing his mele inoa—the song of his name. He was surprised to hear his name mentioned in a place he thought was unfamiliar to him. He lifted his head and listened, and when he recognized Kaikilani’s voice singing the words of the mele, he stood up and respectfully addressed the king:
“My royal brother, disguise is no longer necessary or fitting. I am Lonoikamakahiki, son of Keawenui and moi of Hawaii, and the gods have sent to me Kaikilani, my wife. It is her voice that we now hear.”
“My royal brother, there's no need for disguise anymore. I am Lonoikamakahiki, son of Keawenui and moi of Hawaii, and the gods have sent me Kaikilani, my wife. It is her voice that we hear now.”
Then, turning and approaching the wall behind which Kaikilani was standing, Lono began to chant her name, coupled with words of tenderness and reconciliation; then, springing over the obstruction, he clasped his faithful wife in his arms, and the past was forgiven and forgotten.
Then, turning and walking up to the wall where Kaikilani was standing, Lono started to chant her name, saying words of love and making amends; then, jumping over the barrier, he embraced his devoted wife, and they let go of the past.
The rank of his guests now being known, Kakuhihewa was anxious to give them a befitting recognition; but, learning of the revolt in Hawaii and the peril of Pupuakea, Lono embarked for his kingdom at once. Reaching and passing Kohala, where he learned the rebels were in force, he landed at Kealakeakua, and immediately despatched a messenger to Pupuakea, in Kau, with information of his arrival in Puna. The brother responded promptly, and, leading his forces over a mountain path to avoid [331]the coast villages, joined Lono at Puuanahulu. Meantime, Lono’s name had brought thousands to his standard, and on the arrival of Pupuakea he boldly attacked and defeated the insurgents at Wailea. They were followed and again defeated at Kaunooa.
The rank of his guests now being known, Kakuhihewa was eager to give them a proper welcome; however, upon learning of the unrest in Hawaii and the danger to Pupuakea, Lono immediately set out for his kingdom. After passing Kohala, where he discovered the rebels were strong, he landed at Kealakeakua and quickly sent a messenger to Pupuakea in Kau to inform him of his arrival in Puna. His brother responded without delay, leading his troops over a mountain path to avoid the coast villages, and joined Lono at Puuanahulu. In the meantime, Lono’s reputation attracted thousands to his side, and when Pupuakea arrived, he courageously attacked and defeated the insurgents at Wailea. They were pursued and again defeated at Kaunooa.
Reinforcements reaching the rebels from Kohala, two other battles were fought in rapid succession, both resulting in their defeat. In these engagements two of Lono’s brothers were slain, and the body of one of them was offered as a sacrifice at the heiau of Puukohola.
Reinforcements reached the rebels from Kohala, and two other battles were fought in quick succession, both ending in their defeat. In these fights, two of Lono’s brothers were killed, and the body of one of them was offered as a sacrifice at the heiau of Puukohola.
The last of the rebels were defeated at Pololu, and the island returned to its allegiance to Lono and Kaikilani. Kanaloa-kuaana, who originated the revolt, also submitted, and was forgiven and restored to favor through the intercession of the queen.
The last of the rebels were defeated at Pololu, and the island returned to its allegiance to Lono and Kaikilani. Kanaloa-kuaana, who started the revolt, also submitted and was forgiven and restored to favor through the queen's intercession.
The legends relate many subsequent romantic adventures of Lono; but he and Kaikilani both lived to good old ages, and when they died were succeeded in the sovereignty of Hawaii by lineal blood. [333]
The legends describe many romantic adventures of Lono after that, but he and Kaikilani both lived to a ripe old age, and when they passed away, their successors in the leadership of Hawaii were of direct lineage. [__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]
The Adventures of Iwikauikaua.
[334]
[__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]
CHARACTERS.
- Kaikalani, queen of Hawaii.
- Makakaualii, brother of Kaikilani.
- Iwikauikaua, son of Makakaualii.
-
Kanaloa-kuaana and Hawaiian princes. Kanaloa-kakulehu, - Kealiiokalani, daughter of Kaikilani.
- Keakealanikane, son of Kanaloa-kuaana.
- Keakamahana, daughter of Kealiiokalani.
- Kaihikapu, king of southern Oahu.
- Kauakahi, daughter of Kaihikapu.
- Kauhiakama, moi of Maui.
- Kapukini, queen of Maui and sister of Iwikauikaua.
- Mahia, chief of Kahakuloa, Maui.
[335]
[__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]
THE ADVENTURES OF IWIKAUIKAUA.
The Adventures of Iwikauikaua.
A STORY OF ROYAL KNIGHT-ERRANTRY IN THE SIXTEENTH CENTURY.
A STORY OF ROYAL KNIGHT-ERRANTRY IN THE SIXTEENTH CENTURY.
I.
One of the most interesting characters distinctly observed among the misty forms and dimly outlined events of the remaining Hawaiian traditions of the sixteenth century is Iwikauikaua. In him the knight-errantry of the period found a distinguished exponent and representative, and his deeds add a bold tint to the glow of romance and chivalry lighting up the life and reign of the great Lono, and lend a lustre to the names and events with which they are associated. Of royal lineage, but without estates or following beyond his personal attendants, he sought his fortune with spear and battle-axe, and in the end became the husband of a queen and one of the ancestors of a long line of kings.
One of the most intriguing characters seen among the hazy figures and vaguely described events of the remaining Hawaiian traditions from the sixteenth century is Iwikauikaua. He represented the ideal of knighthood of the time, and his actions contribute a vibrant hue to the romance and chivalry that illuminate the life and reign of the great Lono, while also enhancing the significance of the names and events tied to him. Though of royal descent, he had no land or followers beyond his personal attendants; he pursued his fortune with a spear and battle-axe, ultimately becoming the husband of a queen and one of the ancestors of a long line of kings.
As he was the nephew of Queen Kaikilani—whose reign in Hawaii, including that of her husband, Lono, embraced, it may be presumed, the period between the years A.D. 1565 and 1595—and was a stout friend and supporter of the ruling family, a proper understanding of the rank, position and aspirations of Iwikauikaua necessitates a brief reference to the strange political events which surrounded his youth and conspired to shape his romantic career.
As the nephew of Queen Kaikilani—whose reign in Hawaii, together with her husband, Lono, likely spanned from A.D. 1565 to 1595—and a loyal friend and supporter of the royal family, understanding Iwikauikaua's status, position, and ambitions requires a brief mention of the unusual political events that influenced his youth and shaped his romantic life.
When Kealiiokoloa, the son of Umi, suddenly died, in about A.D. 1535, after a reign of perhaps not more than ten years, he left as his heir a young son named Kukailani. His right to the throne was unquestioned, but, as he had not been formally designated by his father as his successor, Keawenui, the younger brother of the dead king, assumed the sceptre, and maintained his claim to it by meeting in battle and slaying the six principal chiefs of the island who rebelled against the usurpation. [336]
When Kealiiokoloa, the son of Umi, suddenly passed away around CE 1535, after a reign of maybe no more than ten years, he left behind a young son named Kukailani as his heir. Kukailani's right to the throne was undisputed, but since his father hadn't officially named him as his successor, Keawenui, the younger brother of the deceased king, took the throne for himself. He held onto his claim by fighting and killing the six main chiefs of the island who opposed his takeover. [__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]
Kukailani seems to have possessed but little force or spirit, and was content during his life with such maintenance as his uncle was willing to provide. In due time he married, and became the father of Kaikilani and Makakaualii. The former became the wife of Kanaloa-kuaana, the eldest son of Keawenui, and subsequently the wife of his brother Lono, as related in the legend of “Lono and Kaikilani.” As if desirous of atoning for the injustice done to his nephew, Kukailani, on his death-bed Keawenui named as his successor Kaikilani, daughter of the deposed prince, and wife of Kanaloa-kuaana, his own son. Why Keawenui restored the sceptre to his brother’s family through Kaikilani instead of her brother, Makakaualii, finds ready explanation in the fact that Kaikilani was the wife of his eldest son, through which union both families would thereafter share in the sovereignty.
Kukailani seems to have had little energy or ambition and was satisfied during his life with whatever support his uncle was willing to give. Eventually, he got married and became the father of Kaikilani and Makakaualii. Kaikilani became the wife of Kanaloa-kuaana, the eldest son of Keawenui, and later the wife of his brother Lono, as told in the legend of “Lono and Kaikilani.” As if wanting to make up for the wrong done to his nephew, Kukailani, on his deathbed Keawenui named Kaikilani, the daughter of the deposed prince and wife of Kanaloa-kuaana, his own son, as his successor. The reason Keawenui returned the throne to his brother’s family through Kaikilani rather than her brother, Makakaualii, is clear: Kaikilani was married to his eldest son, which meant both families would later share in the power.
Makakaualii, whose claims to the moiship were thus overlooked or disregarded by Keawenui, was the father of our hero, Iwikauikaua. But, if wrong was done in the matter, it was never openly resented by either father or son, and Iwikauikaua always remained the steadfast friend of his royal aunt, Kaikilani.
Makakaualii, whose claims to the moiship were ignored or disregarded by Keawenui, was the father of our hero, Iwikauikaua. However, if there was any injustice in this situation, neither father nor son ever openly expressed their resentment, and Iwikauikaua always remained a loyal friend to his royal aunt, Kaikilani.
The position of Kukailani, on the death of his father, was such as could have been patiently borne only by one entirely destitute of ambition. Custom would have accorded him ample estates and a following consistent with his rank; but his crafty uncle did not deem it prudent to tempt him to rebellion by according him even the powers of a district chief. It was safer for him to remain at court, living upon the bounty and under the watchful eye of Keawenui. He was doubtless a high officer of the royal household, retaining the tabus and meles of his family, and receiving the respect due to his rank; but no lands were set apart for him, and he had no retainers beyond his personal attendants.
The situation for Kukailani after his father died was something that only a person completely lacking ambition could endure. Tradition would have granted him considerable land and a following appropriate to his status; however, his cunning uncle didn’t think it wise to provoke him into rebellion by giving him even the authority of a district chief. It was safer for him to stay at court, relying on the generosity and watchful oversight of Keawenui. He was certainly a high-ranking official in the royal household, keeping the tabus and meles of his family and receiving the respect that came with his status; but no land was designated for him, and he had no followers besides his personal attendants.
But Kukailani seemed to be content with his situation, and so utterly indifferent to the rights of his family that it does not appear that he ever demanded a more befitting recognition of the claims of the children born to him. Hence, like their father, Makakaualii and Kaikilani were compelled to live upon the bounty of the king until the latter was chosen to the succession.
But Kukailani seemed to be okay with his situation, and he was so indifferent to his family's rights that it doesn't seem like he ever asked for better recognition of the claims of his children. As a result, just like their father, Makakaualii and Kaikilani had to rely on the king's generosity until Kaikilani was chosen to succeed.
And this was also the inheritance of Iwikauikaua, the son of Makakaualii. He was a landless chief of royal blood, and circumstances [337]indicate that he was quite a youth when Keawenui died and Kaikilani assumed the sceptre. He grew to manhood around the court of his royal aunt, and was among the many who rejoiced when Lono became her husband and, with her, the joint ruler of Hawaii.
And this was also the inheritance of Iwikauikaua, the son of Makakaualii. He was a landless chief with royal blood, and circumstances [__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__] suggest that he was quite young when Keawenui died and Kaikilani took over leadership. He grew up in the court of his royal aunt and was among the many who celebrated when Lono became her husband and, together with her, the co-ruler of Hawaii.
In person he was handsome and imposing, and his accomplishments befitted his rank. Through Kaikilani the moiship had been restored to the Kealiiokoloa branch of the royal family, but the previous usurpation had left him without estates, and less near than was his due to the throne, and he chafed under his hard fortune and resolved to retrieve it—not by rebellion or trespass upon the rights of others, but through the channels of bold and legitimate endeavor. When a boy a kaula told him that he would die either a king or the husband of a queen, and he never forgot the prophecy. In fact, it seems to have taken possession of him and to have become the guiding star of his early life.
In person, he was attractive and commanding, and his achievements matched his status. Through Kaikilani, the kingship had been restored to the Kealiiokoloa branch of the royal family, but the earlier takeover had left him without lands and less close to the throne than he deserved. He was frustrated with his tough situation and decided to change it—not through rebellion or stepping on others' rights but through bold and legitimate efforts. As a boy, a seer told him that he would die either a king or the husband of a queen, and he never forgot that prediction. In fact, it seemed to have consumed him and became the guiding light of his early life.
Iwikauikaua makes his first appearance as a striking and consequential figure of Hawaiian tradition in the midst of the revolt of Kanaloa-kuaana and other chiefs of Hawaii against Lono. The revolt was organized during the absence of Lono and Kaikilani on a friendly visit to the other islands of the group, and embraced nearly every prominent chief in the kingdom. They had resolved to kill Lono should he return to the island, and the conspiracy seemed to be as formidable as time and determination could make it. With a single exception, all the brothers of Lono were arrayed against him, and his cause was considered almost hopeless.
Iwikauikaua makes his first appearance as a striking and significant figure in Hawaiian tradition during the revolt of Kanaloa-kuaana and other chiefs of Hawaii against Lono. This revolt was organized while Lono and Kaikilani were away on a friendly visit to the other islands, and it involved nearly every prominent chief in the kingdom. They had decided to kill Lono if he returned to the island, and the conspiracy seemed as strong as determination and time could make it. With one exception, all of Lono's brothers were united against him, and his cause was seen as almost hopeless.
The rebellion had its origin, avowedly, in a report that Lono had in a fit of jealousy killed Kaikilani on the island of Molokai; but other motives must have existed, for the return of Kaikilani with her husband to Hawaii did not put an end to the uprising, but rather stimulated the conspirators in their resolution to wrest the sovereignty of the island from Lono at all hazards.
The rebellion supposedly started because Lono, in a fit of jealousy, killed Kaikilani on the island of Molokai; however, there must have been other reasons, as Kaikilani's return to Hawaii with her husband didn't stop the uprising. Instead, it fueled the conspirators' determination to take control of the island from Lono at any cost.
The only brother of Lono who refused to join in the conspiracy was Pupuakea. He was the sturdy and warlike son of Keawenui by a mother whose name is not mentioned by tradition, and was endowed with lands in the district of Kau. Removing in early manhood to his estates in that district, he seldom [338]visited the court and took no part in its bickerings. As his mother was doubtless of an humble family, he was not considered the equal in rank of the other sons of Keawenui, and therefore preferred to reside where he would not be continually reminded of his inferiority. When the revolt against Lono was organized he was invited by Kanaloa-kuaana to give it his support; but no promises of lands were made to him, as to other distinguished chiefs, nor was he deemed to be of sufficient consequence to entitle him to a voice in the councils of the rebels. This slight of Pupuakea led to the defeat and ruin of the conspirators. The chief of whom they thought so little had developed into a leader of influence and ability in his distant home, and it was around him that was gathered the nucleus of the force which in the end gave victory to Lono.
The only brother of Lono who refused to join the conspiracy was Pupuakea. He was the strong and warrior-like son of Keawenui, born to a mother whose name isn't mentioned in history, and he was given lands in the Kau district. Moving to his estates there in his early adulthood, he rarely [__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__] visited the court and avoided its disputes. Since his mother likely came from a humble background, he wasn't seen as equal in rank to the other sons of Keawenui, so he chose to live where he wouldn't constantly be reminded of his lower status. When the rebellion against Lono was organized, Kanaloa-kuaana invited him to support it; however, unlike other prominent chiefs, no promises of land were made to him, nor was he considered important enough to have a say in the rebels’ discussions. This disregard for Pupuakea led to the defeat and downfall of the conspirators. The chief they underestimated had become an influential and capable leader in his distant home, and it was around him that the core of the force was gathered that ultimately secured victory for Lono.
When Kaikilani returned alone from Molokai, and found the kingdom on the verge of revolution, she secretly consulted with Pupuakea, as almost the only chief of consequence to be relied upon; and when she next returned with Lono, Pupuakea was at the head of a force large enough to overawe the rebels of Kau, but too small to venture beyond that district without support.
When Kaikilani came back alone from Molokai and discovered the kingdom on the brink of revolution, she secretly met with Pupuakea, as he was one of the few reliable chiefs left. When she returned again with Lono, Pupuakea was leading a force big enough to intimidate the rebels of Kau, but still too small to move beyond that area without backup.
The main rebel army was concentrated in the district of Kohala, which Lono avoided on his return from Oahu, landing at Kealakeakua, on the coast of Kona. It was early in the morning when the canoes of Lono, bearing a small party of attendants, were drawn up on the beach. No one was there to oppose him: but the rebels were in possession of all the machinery of the government, as well as five of the six divisions of the island, and the outlook would have been gloomy to any one less resolute and daring than Lono. He had less than a hundred followers, and, taking from his canoe the hokeo, or calabash, containing the bones of the six rebellious district chiefs slain by his father, placed it within a sanctuary of mats on the beach, and beside it raised the royal standard and kahilis. This done, he summoned the people to arms, started a courier to Pupuakea, and despatched lunapais to the neighboring chiefs, commanding them to march to his assistance at once.
The main rebel army was concentrated in the Kohala district, which Lono avoided on his return from Oahu, landing at Kealakeakua on the Kona coast. It was early morning when Lono’s canoes, carrying a small group of attendants, were pulled up on the beach. No one was there to challenge him, but the rebels controlled all the government machinery and five out of six divisions of the island. The situation would have seemed bleak to anyone less determined and bold than Lono. He had fewer than a hundred followers. After taking the hokeo, or calabash, with the bones of the six rebellious district chiefs killed by his father from his canoe, he placed it in a sanctuary of mats on the beach and raised the royal standard and kahilis beside it. Once that was done, he called the people to arms, sent a courier to Pupuakea, and dispatched lunapais to the nearby chiefs, ordering them to come to his aid immediately.
But the people were timid. The revolt was not popular, but the cause of Lono seemed to be hopeless, and the masses hesitated. The hesitation was brief, however. Late in the afternoon a force of five or six hundred warriors was observed approaching [339]from the northward. Lono hastily prepared for the best defence possible, and for retreat to his canoes should he be unable to hold his ground. Nearer and nearer came the threatening column. It was finally halted within two hundred paces of Lono’s position, when from the front rank emerged a tall young chief in feather cape and helmet. At the end of his spear was displayed a large ti leaf as a token of peace. Accompanied by two aids bearing weapons similarly bedecked, he boldly strode past the lines of Lono and asked for the king. He was conducted to his presence, and, observing Kaikilani beside her husband, was about to kneel when Lono stepped forward and grasped him by the hand, exclaiming:
But the people were scared. The revolt wasn’t popular, and Lono’s cause seemed hopeless, causing the masses to hesitate. However, this hesitation was brief. Late in the afternoon, a group of five or six hundred warriors was seen approaching [__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__] from the north. Lono quickly prepared for the best defense he could and for a retreat to his canoes if he couldn’t hold his ground. The threatening column came closer and closer, eventually stopping within two hundred paces of Lono’s position. From the front rank, a tall young chief in a feather cape and helmet emerged. At the end of his spear was a large ti leaf displayed as a token of peace. Accompanied by two aides with similarly adorned weapons, he boldly walked past Lono’s lines and asked for the king. He was taken to see him, and upon noticing Kaikilani beside her husband, he was about to kneel when Lono stepped forward and shook his hand, exclaiming:
“Welcome, Iwikauikaua, for I know you come as a friend!”
“Welcome, Iwikauikaua, because I know you’re here as a friend!”
“Yes, I come as a friend,” replied the chief, “and have with me a few brave warriors, whose services I now tender.”
“Yes, I come as a friend,” the chief replied, “and I have a few brave warriors with me, whose support I'm offering now.”
“But are you not afraid to be the friend of Lono at such a time as this?” inquired the king, glancing admiringly at the bold front of the young chief. “The whole island seems to be in arms against me.”
“But aren't you scared to be friends with Lono at a time like this?” the king asked, looking admiringly at the young chief's brave stance. “The whole island seems to be rising up against me.”
Lono knew he was exaggerating the danger, but desired to learn the worst.
Lono knew he was making the danger sound worse than it was, but he wanted to find out the worst of it.
“No, not the whole island,” promptly replied the chief. “Pupuakea will soon join us with three thousand spears or more, and it will not be long that Lono will lack warriors.”
“No, not the whole island,” the chief replied quickly. “Pupuakea will soon join us with three thousand spears or more, and it won’t be long before Lono is without warriors.”
“You are right,” returned the king, hopefully; “we will find spears and axes enough in the end to clear a way to Kohala.”
“You're right,” the king replied, hopefully; “we will find enough spears and axes in the end to make a path to Kohala.”
Kaikilani joined Lono in thanking her nephew for his timely assistance, and Iwikauikaua retired to find quarters for his followers and arouse others to the defence of the king.
Kaikilani joined Lono in thanking her nephew for his help when they needed it, and Iwikauikaua went off to find accommodations for his followers and rally others to support the king.
The appearance of the young chief with his few hundreds of warriors was indeed most opportune. It inspired the people with confidence in the success of Lono, and they began to rally to his support in large numbers; and, observing that the tide was turning in his favor, the neighboring chiefs came to his assistance with their followers, thus swelling his force within three days to as many thousands of warriors of all arms.
The arrival of the young chief along with a few hundred warriors was truly timely. It boosted the people's confidence in Lono's success, and they started to gather to support him in large numbers. Noticing that things were shifting in his favor, nearby chiefs came to help with their followers, increasing his force to several thousand warriors of all kinds in just three days.
Hastily organizing his little army, Lono boldly pushed on toward Kohala, steadily recruiting his ranks as he moved, and at Puuanahulu was joined by Pupuakea with nearly three thousand additional spears from Kau. Thus enabled to operate on the [340]offensive, he attacked and defeated the rebel army at Wailea, and again at Puako, or at some point not far north of that place.
Hurrying to gather his small army, Lono confidently moved toward Kohala, continually adding to his forces as he went. At Puuanahulu, he was joined by Pupuakea, who brought nearly three thousand additional warriors from Kau. Now ready to take the initiative, he launched attacks and defeated the rebel army at Wailea, and again at Puako, or at a location not far north of there.
After the second engagement the rebels retreated northward, and, receiving reinforcements from Kohala, made another stand at Puupa, where they were again defeated, but through some mishap Iwikauikaua was taken prisoner. They then fell back to Puukohola, near which place a large heiau was maintained at that time. There Kanaloa-kakulehu, one of the brothers of Lono, resolved to sacrifice the distinguished prisoner.
After the second battle, the rebels pulled back to the north and, after getting reinforcements from Kohala, made another stand at Puupa, where they were defeated again. However, due to some misfortune, Iwikauikaua was captured. They then retreated to Puukohola, near which there was a large heiau at that time. There, Kanaloa-kakulehu, one of Lono's brothers, decided to sacrifice the prominent prisoner.
Iwikauikaua received the announcement stoically. He was conducted to the altar within the heiau. The assistants were in readiness to take him beyond the walls for execution, and the priests were in attendance to offer the sacrifice in due form to Kanaloa-kakulehu’s god of war. Ascending the steps of the altar, the young chief turned to the high-priest and said:
Iwikauikaua took the news calmly. He was taken to the altar inside the heiau. The assistants were prepared to lead him beyond the walls for execution, and the priests were present to properly make the sacrifice to Kanaloa-kakulehu’s god of war. As he climbed the steps to the altar, the young chief turned to the high priest and said:
“I am ready, but it is not the will of the gods that I should be offered.”
“I’m ready, but it’s not in the gods’ plans for me to be offered.”
“What know you of the will of the gods?” answered the priest, sternly.
“What do you know about the will of the gods?” the priest replied, sternly.
“And what know you,” returned the chief, “since you have not inquired?”
“And what do you know,” replied the chief, “since you haven’t asked?”
Such questioning was not common at the altar, and for a moment the priest was disconcerted. Finally he said:
Such questioning was unusual at the altar, and for a moment, the priest was thrown off. Finally, he said:
“You say it is not the will of the gods. Make it so appear, and your life shall be spared; but if you fail your right eye shall see the left in my hand, and you will be slain with torture.”
“You say it’s not what the gods want. Make it look that way, and your life will be saved; but if you fail, your right eye will see the left in my hand, and you’ll be killed in agony.”
“So let it be!” exclaimed the chief; and, lifting his face upward, he addressed an audible prayer to Ku, Uli and Kama. As he proceeded with the solemn invocation not an unfavorable omen appeared. The winds died away and the birds in the neighboring trees remained silent. Concluding the prayer, he folded his arms and stepped down from the altar. By an unseen hand the cords that bound his limbs had been cut, and he approached the high-priest and bowed before him. This manifestation of the will of the gods could not be mistaken, and Iwikauikaua was conducted to a hut within the heiau, where he was advised to remain until he could leave the place in safety. No hostile hand could be laid upon him within the walls of the temple. There he was under the protection of the high-priest, and beyond the reach of the highest temporal authority. [341]
“So let it be!” the chief shouted, lifting his face to the sky as he offered a prayer to Ku, Uli, and Kama. As he continued with the solemn invocation, there were no bad omens to be seen. The winds calmed, and the birds in the nearby trees fell silent. When he finished the prayer, he crossed his arms and stepped down from the altar. By some unseen force, the cords that held his limbs were cut, and he walked over to the high-priest and bowed before him. This clear sign of the gods' will was unmistakable, and Iwikauikaua was taken to a hut within the heiau, where he was advised to stay until it was safe for him to leave. No one could harm him within the temple walls. There, he was under the protection of the high-priest, beyond the reach of the highest worldly authority. [__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]
But Iwikauikaua did not long require the protection of the heiau. At daylight the next morning Lono attacked the rebels at Puukohola, and after an obstinate battle defeated them, taking prisoner his brother Kanaloa-kakulehu, whom he promptly ordered to be sacrificed at the heiau. As he was brought to the altar for that purpose, his last moments were embittered by the farewell which Iwikauikaua waved to him with simulated grief as he left the enclosure to join the victorious army. Although Lono had directed the sacrifice of his brother in retaliation for the supposed death of Iwikauikaua, he did not countermand the order, as he might have done in time, when he found the latter had miraculously escaped.
But Iwikauikaua didn't need the protection of the heiau for long. At dawn the next morning, Lono attacked the rebels at Puukohola and, after a fierce battle, defeated them, capturing his brother Kanaloa-kakulehu, whom he quickly ordered to be sacrificed at the heiau. As he was taken to the altar for that purpose, his last moments were tainted by the farewell Iwikauikaua waved to him with feigned sorrow as he left the enclosure to join the victorious army. Although Lono had ordered the sacrifice of his brother in revenge for what he thought was Iwikauikaua's death, he didn't cancel the order, even though he could have done so when he learned that Iwikauikaua had miraculously escaped.
Several other battles were fought, in all of which Iwikauikaua took a distinguished part, and the island returned to its allegiance to Lono and Kaikilani. The services of Papuakea were rewarded with such additional lands of deceased rebel chiefs as he chose to accept, and Iwikauikaua was offered possessions either in Kona or Hamakua, or a military charge in the royal household. But in the end he decided to accept neither. They presented to him no opportunity for such advancement as the gods had promised, and which now, since their manifestation in his favor at Puukohola, seemed to be almost assured to him.
Several other battles were fought, where Iwikauikaua played a key role, and the island renewed its loyalty to Lono and Kaikilani. Papuakea was rewarded with extra lands from deceased rebel chiefs that he chose to accept, and Iwikauikaua was offered land either in Kona or Hamakua, or a military position in the royal household. But in the end, he chose not to accept any of these offers. They didn't provide him with the chance for the advancement that the gods had promised, which now, since their favorable sign at Puukohola, seemed almost guaranteed to him.
He had fixed his eye upon his pretty cousin Kealiiokalani, the daughter of Kaikilani. She stood close to the throne, and evinced a decided partiality for the dashing young chief. The gossip of the court was that the princess loved Iwikauikaua and would be more than content to become his wife. But royal marriages in all ages and in every clime have been less a suggestion of hearts than of state considerations; and so it was in this instance. Unknown to all but himself, it was the fair face of the princess that had prompted him to espouse the cause of Lono when it seemed to be almost hopeless, and his services certainly entitled him to almost any reward; but Keakealanikane, the son of Kaikilani by her first husband, Kanaloa-kuaana, had been named as successor to the moiship, and Kealiiokalani was selected to become his wife. Such marriages of close kinship were not uncommon among the chiefly families of ancient Hawaii, and the children born to them were accorded the very highest rank.
He had his eye on his pretty cousin Kealiiokalani, the daughter of Kaikilani. She stood close to the throne and clearly had a strong preference for the charming young chief. Court gossip suggested that the princess was in love with Iwikauikaua and would be very happy to marry him. However, royal marriages have always been more about political alliances than love; this situation was no different. Unbeknownst to anyone but himself, it was the beautiful face of the princess that had driven him to support Lono's cause when it seemed almost hopeless, and his efforts certainly deserved a significant reward. But Keakealanikane, Kaikilani’s son from her first husband, Kanaloa-kuaana, had been chosen as the heir to the moiship, and Kealiiokalani was designated to be his wife. Such close-knit marriages were common among the royal families of ancient Hawaii, and the children they produced were granted the highest status.
This arrangement for the succession left Iwikauikaua little to hope for on Hawaii, and he determined to seek his fortune [342]among the other islands of the group. Tempting inducements were held out to him to remain, but he declined them all. To the princess alone he whispered that her betrothal to Keakealanikane had rendered his departure advisable, and she grieved that circumstances had decreed their separation. Ambition doubtless first attracted him to his fair cousin; but her nature was gentle and loving, and he finally regarded her with a sincere and romantic attachment, which she seems to have fully reciprocated.
This arrangement for the succession left Iwikauikaua little to hope for on Hawaii, and he decided to seek his fortune [__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]among the other islands in the group. He was offered tempting reasons to stay, but he turned them all down. To the princess alone, he whispered that her engagement to Keakealanikane made his departure necessary, and she felt sad that circumstances had forced them apart. Ambition had likely drawn him to his beautiful cousin at first; however, her gentle and loving nature led him to develop a sincere and romantic attachment to her, which she seemed to fully share.
II.
In a large double canoe, painted red, and at its masthead flying the pennon of an aha-alii, Iwikauikaua, with a score or more of attendants, set sail from Kohala in quest of adventure. Passing Maui, he spent some time in visiting the small island of Lanai, where he was entertained in a princely manner by the leading chiefs. Proceeding thence to Molokai, he remained a week or more in the neighborhood of Kalaupapa, and then sailed for Oahu.
In a big double canoe painted red, with the flag of an aha-alii flying at the top, Iwikauikaua set off from Kohala with about twenty attendants, looking for adventure. After passing Maui, he spent some time visiting the small island of Lanai, where the top chiefs hosted him in a royal way. He then moved on to Molokai, where he stayed for over a week near Kalaupapa, before sailing to Oahu.
He landed at Waikiki, on that island, and was well received by Kaihikapu, one of the three principal chiefs of Oahu. His father was the noted Kakuhihewa, who had entertained Lono during his voluntary exile, and who at his death, a short time before, had divided the island among his three oldest sons, leaving the dignity of moi to Kanekapu. Harmony existed among the brothers, and all of them followed the example of their father in maintaining attractive petty courts and imposing establishments. The moi retained possession of the royal mansion at Kailua, which was two hundred and forty feet in length and ninety in breadth, and adorned with all the taste and skill of the period.
He arrived at Waikiki on the island and was warmly welcomed by Kaihikapu, one of the three main chiefs of Oahu. His father was the well-known Kakuhihewa, who had hosted Lono during his self-imposed exile, and who, shortly before his death, divided the island among his three oldest sons, granting the title of moi to Kanekapu. The brothers got along well and all followed their father’s example by maintaining lively courts and impressive establishments. The moi kept the royal house at Kailua, which measured two hundred and forty feet long and ninety feet wide, decorated with the finest taste and craftsmanship of the time.
Kaihikapu had a princely mansion at Ewa, but his court was at Waikiki at the time of the arrival of Iwikauikaua. The young chief, whose rank was at once recognized, was provided with quarters for himself and attendants near the court, and soon became a favorite with the nobility. The part he had taken in the battles of Lono, together with his miraculous escape at the temple of Puukohola, became the talk of the court, and he was treated as a hero.
Kaihikapu had a grand mansion in Ewa, but his court was in Waikiki when Iwikauikaua arrived. The young chief, whose status was immediately recognized, was given living quarters for himself and his attendants close to the court, quickly becoming a favorite among the nobility. His involvement in the battles of Lono, along with his miraculous escape at the temple of Puukohola, became the talk of the court, and he was celebrated as a hero.
In the pleasure of the courts of Oahu, Iwikauikaua spent a [343]number of years on the island, and finally became the husband of Kauakahi, daughter of Kaihikapu. It was not a love-match, at least so far as Iwikauikaua was concerned, for after his marriage he squandered the most of his time for some years in roaming from district to district and giving little heed to the future. At length he began to crave a more active life, and was about to seek it on some other island when the noted war of the Kawelos, of Kauai, gave employment to his spear.
In the courts of Oahu, Iwikauikaua spent a [__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]number of years on the island and eventually married Kauakahi, the daughter of Kaihikapu. It wasn't a romantic marriage, at least not for Iwikauikaua, because after tying the knot, he spent most of his time traveling from place to place without much thought for the future. Eventually, he started to yearn for a more active life and was about to look for it on another island when the famous war of the Kawelos from Kauai required him to use his spear.
Kawelo had been driven from Kauai by his cousin, and, finding refuge in Oahu, had been given lands in the Waianae Mountains by Kaihikapu. Instead of settling there in peace, he began to construct canoes and prepare for a return to Kauai with a force sufficient to maintain himself on that island. Kaihikapu was finally induced to assist him, and so substantially that he invaded Kauai, deposed and killed his cousin, and assumed the moiship. Iwikauikaua took part in the expedition, but became disgusted with the jealousies of the Kauai chiefs and returned to Oahu at the close of the war, without attempting to avail himself of the opportunities afforded by the rebellion.
Kawelo had been forced out of Kauai by his cousin and, seeking refuge in Oahu, was given land in the Waianae Mountains by Kaihikapu. Instead of living there peacefully, he started building canoes and preparing to return to Kauai with enough force to establish himself on the island. Kaihikapu was eventually convinced to help him significantly, which led to Kawelo invading Kauai, overthrowing and killing his cousin, and taking the moiship. Iwikauikaua joined the campaign but became frustrated with the rivalries among the Kauai chiefs and went back to Oahu after the war, without trying to take advantage of the chances created by the rebellion.
His marriage with Kauakahi promised him no advancement. His hair began to be tinged with gray, and the future presented to him no sign of the fulfilment of the prophecy of his youth. He consulted the kaulas, but they gave him no satisfaction. One of them told him, however, that his fortunes lay to the windward, and he provisioned a double canoe, and, with a competent crew and a few retainers, set sail in that direction without taking leave of any one. He stopped for a few days on Molokai, and a kaula there advised him to go to Maui. He accordingly set sail for that island, where resided two of his sisters, whom he had not seen for many years. One of them, Kapukini, was the wife of Kauhiakama, the moi of Maui; and the other, Pueopokii, of Kaaoao, a prominent chief of Kaupo.
His marriage to Kauakahi didn’t offer him any prospects for advancement. His hair started to gray, and the future showed no signs of the dreams he had in his youth coming true. He consulted the kaulas, but they didn’t provide him with any real answers. One of them, however, mentioned that his fortunes lay in the windward direction, so he equipped a double canoe, and with a capable crew and a few followers, set sail that way without saying goodbye to anyone. He stopped for a few days on Molokai, where a kaula advised him to head to Maui. He then sailed to that island, where two of his sisters lived, whom he hadn’t seen in many years. One of them, Kapukini, was married to Kauhiakama, the moi of Maui, and the other, Pueopokii, was married to Kaaoao, a well-known chief of Kaupo.
He landed at Lahaina, and made himself known to Kapukini. Their greeting was affectionate, and they had much to relate of their past lives. She was the only wife of Kauhiakama, and he was astounded to hear that the aged moi had started two days before with a hostile army for Oahu. The object of the invasion was not clear, but Iwikauikaua felt satisfied that it would end disastrously, and impatiently awaited the result. The only son of Kapukini had reached his manhood, and Iwikauikaua advised [344]his sister to prepare for his installation as moi, expressing the opinion that Kauhiakama would never return. His surmises proved to be correct. Within ten days a mere handful of the force with which the moi had embarked for Oahu returned, bringing news of the defeat and death of Kauhiakama.
He arrived in Lahaina and introduced himself to Kapukini. Their greeting was warm, and they had a lot to share about their past lives. She was the only wife of Kauhiakama, and he was shocked to learn that the old king had left two days earlier with a hostile army for Oahu. The purpose of the invasion was unclear, but Iwikauikaua was convinced it would end badly and he impatiently awaited the outcome. Kapukini's only son had reached adulthood, and Iwikauikaua advised his sister to get ready for his installation as king, sharing his belief that Kauhiakama would never come back. His guess turned out to be true. Within ten days, only a small fraction of the force that had set out with the king for Oahu returned, bringing news of Kauhiakama's defeat and death.
The moi had landed at Waikiki, where he was met and defeated by the united chiefs of Oahu. He was slain during the battle, and his body was taken to the heiau of Apuakehau, where it was treated with unusual indignity—so unusual, in fact, that Kahekili, the moi of Maui, many generations after remembered the act, and retaliated in kind upon the chiefs captured by him in his conquest of Oahu.
The moi had arrived at Waikiki, where he was confronted and defeated by the united chiefs of Oahu. He was killed during the battle, and his body was brought to the heiau of Apuakehau, where it was treated with extreme disrespect—so extreme, in fact, that Kahekili, the moi of Maui, many generations later recalled the act and took revenge on the chiefs he captured during his takeover of Oahu.
Kauhiakama had always been a rash and visionary leader, and his tragical end did not surprise Iwikauikaua. It was on his report that his warlike father, Kamalalawalu, had invaded Hawaii, and met defeat and death at the hands of Lono, and with equal thoughtlessness he had thrown a small invading force into the most thickly populated district of Oahu, and led it to slaughter.
Kauhiakama had always been an impulsive and visionary leader, and his tragic end didn't surprise Iwikauikaua. It was based on his report that his warlike father, Kamalalawalu, had invaded Hawaii, only to be defeated and killed by Lono. With the same recklessness, he had sent a small invading force into the most densely populated area of Oahu, leading them to slaughter.
But, whatever may have been the weaknesses of Kauhiakama, a lack of courage was certainly not one of them, and the news of his death, together with that of the indignity visited upon his remains, created a wild excitement among the chiefs of Maui. His son was installed as moi without opposition, and a general demand for revenge went up from the whole island. Large quotas of warriors were offered from every district, and the young moi was implored to baptize the beginning of his reign with the best blood of Oahu.
But no matter what weaknesses Kauhiakama had, a lack of courage definitely wasn't one of them. The news of his death, along with the disrespect shown to his remains, sparked intense excitement among the chiefs of Maui. His son was made the moi without any opposition, and there was a widespread demand for revenge across the island. Every district pledged large groups of warriors, and the young moi was urged to start his reign with a bold act against Oahu.
But Iwikauikaua advised the excited chiefs to act with discretion. No one more than himself felt like avenging the death of Kauhiakama, who was the husband of his sister; “but,” he said to them, “the chiefs of Oahu are united, and a war upon one of them means a conflict with the whole island. Their spears are as long and as many as ours, and their knives are as sharp; therefore let not the chiefs of Maui be hasty.”
But Iwikauikaua advised the excited chiefs to be cautious. No one felt the urge to avenge the death of Kauhiakama, who was his sister’s husband, more than he did; “but,” he said to them, “the chiefs of Oahu are united, and attacking one means going to war with the entire island. Their spears are just as long and numerous as ours, and their knives are just as sharp; so let the chiefs of Maui not be reckless.”
Many of the chiefs agreed with Iwikauikaua that an invasion of Oahu in revenge for the death of their moi would not be advisable, and the newly-anointed king was of the same opinion; but others, especially those who had lost friends or relatives in the late expedition, clamored for war, and not a few of them [345]intimated that the advice of Iwikauikaua was inspired either by friendship for the Oahuans or personal cowardice.
Many of the chiefs agreed with Iwikauikaua that invading Oahu to avenge the death of their moi wouldn't be a smart move, and the newly-crowned king felt the same way; however, others, particularly those who had lost friends or family in the recent campaign, were demanding war. Some of them [__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]suggested that Iwikauikaua's advice was motivated either by a loyalty to the Oahuans or his own fear.
These insinuations reached the ear of Iwikauikaua, and the manner in which he repelled them was bold and effective. Three hundred chiefs of the higher grades had gathered to take part in the installation of the new moi, and such of them as were entitled to a voice in the national councils were assembled to discuss the project of war and such other matters as they might be requested to consider. As a near relative of the royal family, Iwikauikaua had been invited to participate in the deliberations, but he had modestly refrained from urging his opinions, and had thus far spoken only when directly appealed to. Several remarks of a sneering character had been dropped within his hearing, and finally a chief from Wailuku, glancing insultingly toward him, declared that the chiefs of Maui were “not afraid to use their spears.”
These rumors reached Iwikauikaua, and he dealt with them in a bold and effective way. Three hundred high-ranking chiefs had gathered for the installation of the new moi, and those who had a say in the national councils came together to discuss the war plans and any other matters they were asked to consider. As a close relative of the royal family, Iwikauikaua was invited to join the discussions, but he modestly held back from sharing his views and had only spoken when directly asked. Several snide comments were made in his presence, and finally, a chief from Wailuku, looking at him with disdain, stated that the chiefs of Maui were “not afraid to use their spears.”
Iwikauikaua could no longer bear these taunts in silence. With a dark scowl upon his handsome face, he rose to his feet and impetuously replied:
Iwikauikaua could no longer endure these taunts in silence. With a dark frown on his handsome face, he got up and impulsively responded:
“Nor am I afraid to use mine, either in defence of the moi of Maui or in challenge to any chief here who presumes to doubt my courage! I scorn to defend myself with words! Without these walls, with spear and battle-axe, I am prepared to answer one and all!”
“I'm not afraid to use mine, whether it's to defend the moi of Maui or to challenge any chief here who thinks my courage is in question! I refuse to defend myself with words! Outside these walls, with spear and battle-axe, I'm ready to take on anyone!”
Several chiefs sprang to their feet, as if to accept the bold challenge, and confusion for a time prevailed; but order was restored when Mahia, the venerable chief of Kahakuloa, rose and, commanding silence, said:
Several chiefs jumped to their feet, ready to take on the bold challenge, and for a moment, things were chaotic; but order was restored when Mahia, the respected chief of Kahakuloa, stood up and, calling for silence, said:
“Chiefs of Maui, hear my words and be calm. We have invited Iwikauikaua to advise with us, and by insulting him we degrade ourselves. He is high in rank and distinguished for his courage. He was the friend of the great Lono, of Hawaii, and a leader in his battles. He is the brother of Kapukini, and our respect is his due. Some of you have spoken words which seem to hold his valor lightly, and he has answered, as I would have answered had the complaint been mine, by inviting you to test the courage you doubt with spear and battle-axe. No other answer could have been made by a brave man, and we should respect the nobility that prompted it. We should say to Iwikauikaua, whose body is scarred with the teeth of many battles: ‘We have spoken hastily; let us now be friends!’ ” [346]
“Leaders of Maui, listen to me and stay calm. We have invited Iwikauikaua to join us in discussion, and by disrespecting him, we dishonor ourselves. He is of high rank and known for his bravery. He was a close friend of the great Lono from Hawaii and a leader in his battles. He is the brother of Kapukini, and we owe him our respect. Some of you have spoken in ways that seem to underestimate his bravery, and he has responded, as I would have if it were my honor at stake, by challenging you to prove your doubts in combat with a spear and battle-axe. A brave man couldn't have replied any other way, and we should acknowledge the nobility that motivated his response. We should tell Iwikauikaua, whose body bears the scars from many battles: ‘We spoke too quickly; let’s be friends now!’ ” [__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]
The effects of the eloquent words of the old warrior were magical. Those who had offended made prompt retraction, and looks and expressions of courtesy and kindness came to Iwikauikaua from all parts of the council. By reputation he was known to many of the older chiefs, and when they recounted to the younger his chivalrous services in the wars of Hawaii he was overwhelmed with manifestations of respect and kindly feeling.
The impact of the old warrior's powerful words was incredible. Those who had wronged him quickly apologized, and looks and gestures of respect and kindness were directed at Iwikauikaua from all corners of the council. He was well-known to many of the older chiefs, and when they told the younger chiefs about his brave actions in the wars of Hawaii, he was flooded with signs of respect and goodwill.
The demand for an invasion of Oahu with a large force steadily abated with discussion and a better understanding of the danger and uncertainty of the project, and was entirely abandoned with the sudden appearance of a fleet of hostile canoes off the coast of Honuaula. It was a strong predatory expedition from Hawaii. Several villages had been plundered on the southern coast, and Wailuku was now threatened.
The push for an invasion of Oahu with a large army gradually decreased as people talked more and understood the risks and uncertainties of the plan better, and it was completely dropped when a fleet of enemy canoes suddenly showed up off the coast of Honuaula. This was a strong raiding mission from Hawaii. Several villages on the southern coast had already been looted, and Wailuku was now in danger.
Lono, the warlike king of Hawaii, had been dead for some years, and under the reign of Keakealanikane several of the more powerful of the district chiefs had assumed an attitude of comparative independence. The most noted of these were the I family, of Hilo, and the Mahi chiefs, of Kohala. Each could muster some thousands of warriors, and occasional plundering or retaliatory expeditions were undertaken to the other islands without the knowledge or countenance of the sovereign authority.
Lono, the warlike king of Hawaii, had been dead for a number of years, and during Keakealanikane’s rule, several of the more powerful district chiefs had taken on an attitude of relative independence. The most prominent among them were the I family from Hilo and the Mahi chiefs from Kohala. Each could gather thousands of warriors, and they occasionally launched plundering or retaliatory raids on the other islands without the knowledge or approval of the ruling authority.
The fleet discovered off the coast of Honuaula, and reported by runners to the moi, was from Kohala and under the command of one of the Mahi chiefs in person. As the young moi was unused to war, Iwikauikaua offered his services, and with fifty chiefs and two thousand warriors crossed the mountains and drove the plunderers from the coast. As it was surmised that other expeditions of a similar or more aggressive character might follow, the chiefs found employment for some time in repairing canoes, establishing signals, and placing their coast settlements in better conditions of defence.
The fleet discovered off the coast of Honuaula and reported by runners to the moi was from Kohala and was personally led by one of the Mahi chiefs. Since the young moi was inexperienced in warfare, Iwikauikaua offered his help, and with fifty chiefs and two thousand warriors, he crossed the mountains and drove the raiders away from the coast. Because it was believed that other similar or more aggressive expeditions might follow, the chiefs spent some time repairing canoes, setting up signals, and improving the defenses of their coastal settlements.
Returning to Lahaina, Iwikauikaua learned from a Hilo chief on a visit to relatives in Kauaula that Keakealanikane, king of Hawaii, had recently died, and that Kealiiokalani, his wife, could not long survive a cancerous ailment of the stomach with which she was afflicted. The mention of the name of that princess brought back a flood of tender and romantic memories, and Iwikauikaua resolved to revisit his native island. He was begged by the young moi to remain as his mahana and chief counsellor, [347]a position to which his rank entitled him; but he seemed to hear the voice of the dying princess calling to him from Hawaii, and with becoming state set sail at once for Hilo, where the royal court had been temporarily established.
Returning to Lahaina, Iwikauikaua learned from a Hilo chief visiting relatives in Kauaula that Keakealanikane, the king of Hawaii, had recently died and that his wife, Kealiiokalani, was not expected to survive long due to a stomach cancer she was suffering from. Hearing the name of that princess flooded Iwikauikaua with tender and romantic memories, prompting him to decide to revisit his native island. The young moi urged him to stay as his mahana and chief adviser, a position befitting his rank; however, he felt as if he could hear the dying princess's voice calling him from Hawaii, and with the appropriate dignity, he set sail immediately for Hilo, where the royal court had been temporarily established.
It was past midnight of the second day of his departure from Lahaina when Iwikauikaua reached Hilo. He landed quietly, making himself known to no one. He found the place still in mourning for the deceased moi, and learned that Keakamahana, the elder of the two daughters and only children of Kealiiokalani, had been formally installed as moi, or queen, the day before, with the royal mother as chief adviser or premier.
It was past midnight on the second day since he left Lahaina when Iwikauikaua arrived in Hilo. He landed quietly, not letting anyone know he was there. He discovered that the town was still mourning for the deceased moi, and learned that Keakamahana, the older of the two daughters and only children of Kealiiokalani, had been officially installed as moi, or queen, the day before, with the royal mother serving as chief adviser or premier.
Early next morning Iwikauikaua, clad in a feather cape and other insignia of rank, and accompanied by a number of attendants, proceeded to the royal mansion. Being a chief of unquestioned rank, he was admitted to the pahale, but, on applying for an audience with the queen or her first counsellor, was told that the former was still in mourning and could not be seen, and the latter was too ill to receive visitors; but a proffer was made to carry any message he desired to either.
Early the next morning, Iwikauikaua, wearing a feather cape and other symbols of his rank, along with several attendants, made his way to the royal mansion. As a chief of undeniable status, he was granted access to the pahale, but when he asked to speak with the queen or her main advisor, he was informed that the queen was still in mourning and unavailable, and the advisor was too ill to meet with anyone; however, they offered to pass on any message he wanted to send to either of them.
“Then take to Kealiiokalani the words that her cousin, Iwikauikaua, is at her door,” said the chief.
“Then tell Kealiiokalani that her cousin, Iwikauikaua, is at her door,” said the chief.
At the mention of his name the kahu in attendance, a venerable chief, regarded the visitor for a moment with amazement. He had fought by his side in the wars of Lono, and in his face recognized the dashing young chief who a generation before had been saved by the gods from sacrifice at Puukohola.
At the mention of his name, the kahu present, an esteemed chief, looked at the visitor in shock for a moment. He had fought alongside him in the wars of Lono and recognized the charming young chief who, a generation ago, had been rescued by the gods from being sacrificed at Puukohola.
“Iwikauikaua, indeed!” exclaimed the kahu, with emotion. “I know you well. Years ago our spears drank blood together, from the shores of Kona to the high lands of Pololu!”
“Iwikauikaua, for sure!” the kahu exclaimed, filled with emotion. “I know you well. Years ago, our spears drank blood together, from the shores of Kona to the highlands of Pololu!”
Iwikauikaua was pleased at the recognition, and, after exchanging a few pleasant words with the old kahu, the latter conveyed his brief message to Kealiiokalani. She was in her own apartment at the time, reclining on a soft couch of kapa, and surrounded by a group of silent and sad-eyed attendants. Near her sat Keakamahana, the fair young moi, who was doing all that affection could suggest to soothe and strengthen her suffering mother. Prayers had been said, offerings to the gods had been made, and renowned kahunas had resorted to the most potent herbs, charms and incantations known to them in behalf of the royal sufferer. But nothing could stay the dreadful malady that [348]was eating away her life, and all hope of her recovery had been abandoned. The cancerous gnawing was declared by the priests to be the work of an evil spirit, which prayer and sacrifice could not dislodge.
Iwikauikaua felt happy about the recognition, and after chatting briefly with the old kahu, he delivered his short message to Kealiiokalani. She was in her own room at the time, lying on a comfortable kapa couch, surrounded by a group of silent and sorrowful attendants. Next to her was Keakamahana, the lovely young moi, who was doing everything she could to comfort and support her ailing mother. Prayers had been offered, sacrifices had been made to the gods, and well-known kahunas had used the most powerful herbs, charms, and incantations they knew to help the royal patient. But nothing could stop the terrible illness that [__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]was draining her life away, and all hope of her recovery had been lost. The priests declared that the cancerous affliction was caused by an evil spirit that neither prayer nor sacrifice could drive away.
The kahu delivered the message of Iwikauikaua with some hesitation, for the condition of the patient had become more critical since the death of her husband. But when she heard the name of the visitor, and learned that he was without, her eyes assumed something of the brightness of her girlhood, and she ordered him to be admitted at once.
The kahu hesitated while delivering Iwikauikaua's message because the patient's condition had worsened since her husband's death. However, when she heard the visitor's name and found out he was outside, her eyes lit up with some of the brightness of her youth, and she commanded that he be allowed in immediately.
As Iwikauikaua entered he was silently conducted to the couch of Kealiiokalani. For a moment he gazed at her wan face; for a moment she glanced at the gray hairs which the years had brought to him since he said farewell to her in Kohala. He knelt beside the couch. He took her hand and held it to his heart, and the silence that followed best interpreted the thoughts of both.
As Iwikauikaua walked in, he was quietly guided to Kealiiokalani's couch. For a moment, he looked at her pale face; for a moment, she noticed the gray hairs that the years had given him since he said goodbye to her in Kohala. He knelt beside the couch, took her hand, and pressed it to his heart, and the silence that followed spoke volumes about their thoughts.
Rising, and learning to his embarrassment that the young woman whom he had scarcely noticed was Keakamahana, daughter of Kealiiokalani and queen of Hawaii, Iwikauikaua knelt respectfully before her, and gallantly kissed the hand with which she gave him welcome. A low order was given to an attendant by the mother, and in a moment she was alone with the queen and Iwikauikaua. Casting her eyes around and observing no others present, she beckoned them closer, and in broken sentences said:
Rising and realizing to his embarrassment that the young woman he had hardly noticed was Keakamahana, daughter of Kealiiokalani and queen of Hawaii, Iwikauikaua knelt respectfully before her and gallantly kissed the hand with which she welcomed him. The mother gave a quiet order to an attendant, and soon she was alone with the queen and Iwikauikaua. Looking around and seeing that no one else was present, she motioned for them to come closer and said in halting sentences:
“The black kapa will soon cover me. Listen, Iwikauikaua! Early in life it was in our hearts to be the husband and wife of each other. It was the fault of neither that we were denied that hope. It was not my fault that you left Hawaii. It was not your fault that I grieved when you went to other lands. But you have returned at last. The gods have directed you back to Hawaii. They will give to me in death what they refused to my youth. In Keakamahana I will be your wife!”
“The black kapa will soon cover me. Listen, Iwikauikaua! From a young age, it was meant to be that we would be husband and wife. Neither of us is to blame for not achieving that dream. It wasn’t my fault that you left Hawaii. It wasn’t your fault that I felt sorrow when you went to other places. But now you’ve returned at last. The gods have brought you back to Hawaii. They will grant me in death what they denied me in my youth. In Keakamahana, I will be your wife!”
She paused for a moment, her listeners bending over her in silence, and then continued:
She paused for a moment, her listeners leaning in silently, and then continued:
“Take him as your husband, Keakamahana. He is the gift of your mother. He is brave and noble, and you will need his counsel when I am gone.”
“Take him as your husband, Keakamahana. He is a gift from your mother. He is brave and noble, and you will need his advice when I am no longer here.”
Overcome by these words of affection, the chief knelt beside [349]the couch, and the eyes of Keakamahana were filled with tears.
Overwhelmed by these words of love, the chief knelt beside [__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]the couch, and Keakamahana's eyes were filled with tears.
“Do you promise?” inquired the mother.
“Do you promise?” the mother asked.
“I promise,” replied the queen, giving her hand to the kneeling chief.
“I promise,” replied the queen, extending her hand to the kneeling chief.
“I promise,” repeated Iwikauikaua, as he clasped and kissed the proffered pledge.
“I promise,” Iwikauikaua repeated as he held and kissed the offered pledge.
“I am content,” returned the sufferer, as a smile of happiness lighted up her face.
"I’m happy," replied the sufferer, as a smile of joy lit up her face.
The attendants were recalled, wondering what had occurred, and Iwikauikaua, almost bewildered, took his leave.
The attendants were called back, curious about what had happened, and Iwikauikaua, feeling somewhat confused, said his goodbyes.
Tradition plainly recites the brief remainder of the career of this distinguished chief. Kealiiokalani died a few days after the strange betrothal just noted, and Iwikauikaua became the husband of Queen Keakamahana, thus romantically fulfilling the aspiration and prophecy of his youth.
Tradition clearly tells the short remainder of this distinguished chief's life. Kealiiokalani passed away a few days after the unusual engagement just mentioned, and Iwikauikaua became the husband of Queen Keakamahana, thus romantically realizing the dream and prophecy of his youth.
Their daughter, Keakealani, succeeded her mother as queen of Hawaii, and one of her husbands was the son of Iwikauikaua by the wife left by him in Oahu.
Their daughter, Keakealani, succeeded her mother as queen of Hawaii, and one of her husbands was the son of Iwikauikaua by the wife he left behind in Oahu.
With this adventurous and erratic chief originated, it is claimed, the custom of burning kukui torches by daylight on state occasions, especially in connection with the obsequies of persons of royal lineage; and it was within the present generation that the exclusive right to the ceremonial was contested by the two royal families claiming the prerogative through descent from Iwikauikaua. Certain customs, like chants and meles, are matters of inheritance, and remain exclusively in the families with which they originate. [351]
With the arrival of this adventurous and unpredictable leader, it's said that the tradition of lighting kukui torches during the day on special occasions began, especially during the funerals of royal family members. In recent years, the exclusive right to this ceremony was challenged by two royal families that both claimed it through descent from Iwikauikaua. Some customs, like chants and meles, are passed down through generations and remain exclusive to the families they come from. [__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]
The Prophecies of Keaulumoku.
[352]
[__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]
CHARACTERS.
- Kahekili, moi of Maui.
- Kalaniopuu, king of Hawaii.
- Namahana, widow of Kamehamehanui.
- Keeaumoku, a royal chief of Hawaii.
- Kahanana, a warrior of Waihee.
- Mahihelelima, governor of Hana, Maui.
- Kaahumanu, daughter of Keeaumoku.
-
Kameeiamoku and brothers from Keeaumoku. Kamanawa, - Kiwalao, son of Kalaniopuu.
- Keaulumoku, the poet-prophet of Hawaii.
- Kamehameha I., the conqueror of the group.
- Keoua, half-brother of Kiwalao.
- Keawemauhili, a royal chief of Hawaii.
[353]
[__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]
THE PROPHECIES OF KEAULUMOKU.
THE PROPHECIES OF KEAULUMOKU.
THE CAREER OF KEEAUMOKU, THE PRINCE-SLAYER AND KING-MAKER.
THE CAREER OF KEEAUMOKU, THE PRINCE-SLAYER AND KING-MAKER.
I.
The days had just begun to lengthen after the summer solstice of 1765 when a great grief fell upon the royal court of the island of Maui. Kamehamehanui, the king, had died very suddenly at Wailuku, which had been his favorite place of residence, and his brother and successor, Kahekili, had removed his court to Lahaina. The bones of the dead king had been carefully secreted, the customary mourning excesses had been indulged in, and many new apportionments of lands had been made in accordance with the bequests of the deceased moi and the will of his successor.
The days had just started to get longer after the summer solstice of 1765 when a deep sorrow spread through the royal court of Maui. Kamehamehanui, the king, had unexpectedly died in Wailuku, his favorite place to live, and his brother and successor, Kahekili, moved the court to Lahaina. The bones of the deceased king had been carefully hidden, the usual mourning rituals had been observed, and many new land divisions had been established according to the wishes of the late moi and the will of his successor.
Kamehamehanui was an amiable sovereign, but his reign was not as successful as that of his father, Kekaulike. His right to the sceptre had been contested by his brother, Kauhia, and he was secured in it only through the efforts of Alapainui, the king of Hawaii. Subsequently Kalaniopuu, the successor of Alapainui, wrested from him the district of Hana and the celebrated fortress of Kauwiki, and retained possession of both at the time of Kamehamehanui’s death. The lands of the district might have been recaptured, perhaps, but the fortress commanding them was well-nigh impregnable, and Hana remained a dependency of Hawaii.
Kamehamehanui was a friendly king, but his reign wasn’t as successful as his father, Kekaulike’s. His claim to the throne was challenged by his brother, Kauhia, and he only secured it with the help of Alapainui, the king of Hawaii. Later, Kalaniopuu, who succeeded Alapainui, took the district of Hana and the famous fortress of Kauwiki from him, maintaining control of both at the time of Kamehamehanui’s death. The lands in the district might have been recaptured, but the fortress that overlooked them was nearly impossible to conquer, and Hana stayed under Hawaii’s influence.
Kamehamehanui’s political wife was his half-sister Namahana, with whom he had two children; but as both of them died in their infancy, his brother, Kahekili, succeeded him as moi of the island by common consent. After the death of his brother, Kahekili at once removed his court to Lahaina, where the customary period of mourning was concluded.
Kamehamehanui's political wife was his half-sister Namahana, and they had two children together; however, both of them died in infancy. As a result, his brother, Kahekili, was accepted by everyone as the new moi of the island. After his brother's death, Kahekili immediately moved his court to Lahaina, where he observed the usual mourning period.
It was while the members of the royal family were still in mourning at Lahaina that a distinguished stranger suddenly landed, with a number of personal attendants, and presented [354]himself at court. His double canoe bore the ensign of an alii, and his garb and bearing showed him to be of the higher nobility. His age was perhaps thirty years, although he looked somewhat older. He was over six feet in height, and well proportioned. His face was handsome, and his hair and beard were closely cropped. He was clad in a maro and short feather mantle, and around his head was bound a single fold of yellow kapa. By a cord of hair was suspended from his neck a palaoa, or carved whale’s tooth, and his left wrist was ornamented with a bracelet of curious shells. He was courageous, courtly, and in his best moods agreeable and captivating, and was a splendid representative of the rude chivalry of his time.
It was while the royal family was still mourning in Lahaina that a distinguished stranger suddenly arrived, accompanied by several personal attendants, and presented [__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]himself at court. His double canoe flew the flag of an alii, and his clothing and demeanor indicated he was of high nobility. He appeared to be around thirty years old, although he looked a bit older. He was over six feet tall and well-built. His face was handsome, and his hair and beard were neatly trimmed. He wore a maro and a short feather mantle, and around his head was a single band of yellow kapa. Hanging from his neck by a cord of hair was a palaoa, or carved whale’s tooth, and his left wrist was adorned with a bracelet made of unique shells. He was brave, gracious, and when in good spirits, charming and engaging, making him a remarkable embodiment of the rough chivalry of his time.
As he stepped ashore and proceeded to the royal mansion, way was respectfully made for him, even as a stranger of distinguished bearing, and his name secured him admission at once to the presence of Kahekili, who welcomed him to Lahaina, and set apart ample accommodations for himself and lodgings for his attendants.
As he stepped onto the shore and headed to the royal mansion, people respectfully made way for him, treating him like a distinguished stranger, and his name allowed him immediate access to Kahekili. Kahekili welcomed him to Lahaina and arranged spacious accommodations for him and his attendants.
Who was this stranger? He was no common chief who would have thus presumed to present himself at the court of the moi of Maui and expect the courtesy of royal entertainment. Two generations before Lonoikahaupu, who had peacefully inherited the sovereignty of the western side of the island of Kauai, while the noted Kualii, of Oahu, retained possession of the remainder, paid a royal visit of state to the windward islands of the group. His blood was of the best in the archipelago, and his equipment and retinue were brilliant and imposing. He embarked with a number of large double canoes, the royal kaulua being over eighty feet in length, and was attended by a company of skilled musicians and dancers. He also took with him his chief navigator, priest and astrologer, and a corps of personal attendants in keeping with his rank.
Who was this stranger? He wasn't just any chief who would boldly show up at the court of the moi of Maui and expect royal hospitality. Two generations before Lonoikahaupu, who had peacefully inherited rule over the western side of Kauai, while the well-known Kualii of Oahu held the rest, made an official visit to the windward islands of the group. He came from one of the best lineages in the archipelago, and his entourage was impressive and grand. He set sail with several large double canoes, the royal kaulua measuring over eighty feet long, accompanied by a group of talented musicians and dancers. He also brought along his chief navigator, priest, astrologer, and a personal staff fitting for his status.
In turn he visited Oahu, Maui and Molokai, where he was entertained with distinguished honors, and then set sail for Hawaii, of which Keawe was then king. Touching at Hilo, he found that the royal court had been temporarily established in Kau, and thither he proceeded, to pay his respects to Keawe and his beautiful but volatile wife and half-sister, Kalani-kauleleiaiwi. He was becomingly received and entertained by the royal couple, and spent some weeks in the enjoyment of the festivities [355]arranged for his amusement. The result was that the queen became enamored of the handsome Kauaian king, who was duly recognized at once as one of her husbands.
He then visited Oahu, Maui, and Molokai, where he was honored with great hospitality, and then set sail for Hawaii, where Keawe was king at the time. Stopping in Hilo, he discovered that the royal court had temporarily moved to Kau, so he went there to pay his respects to Keawe and his beautiful but unpredictable wife and half-sister, Kalani-kauleleiaiwi. He was warmly welcomed and hosted by the royal couple and spent several weeks enjoying the festivities [__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__] arranged for his entertainment. As a result, the queen fell in love with the handsome Kauaian king, who was immediately recognized as one of her husbands.
From this union a son was born, who was named Keawepoepoe, when the father returned to Kauai and there remained. This son grew to manhood, and by marriage with Kumaiku, of the royal line of Maui, became the father of the three distinguished chiefs who, with Keawe-a-Heulu, were the leading captains of Kamehameha in the conquest of the group at the close of the eighteenth century. One of these sons of Keawepoepoe was Keeaumoku, the Warwick of his time, the slayer and maker of kings.
From this union, a son was born and named Keawepoepoe, when the father returned to Kauai and stayed there. This son grew into a man, and by marrying Kumaiku, who came from Maui's royal line, he became the father of three notable chiefs who, along with Keawe-a-Heulu, were the main leaders for Kamehameha during the conquest of the islands at the end of the eighteenth century. One of these sons of Keawepoepoe was Keeaumoku, known as the Warwick of his time, the slayer and maker of kings.
Keeaumoku’s first effort in king-making occurred in 1754. On the death, in that year, of his uncle Alapainui, and the succession of his cousin Keaweopala to the Hawaiian throne, he became dissatisfied with his allotment of lands and raised the standard of revolt in Kekaha. Defeated, he fled in his canoes to Kau, where Kalaniopuu had for some years maintained himself in independence of Alapainui. Joining their forces, they marched northward, defeated and slew Keaweopala in Kona, and Kalaniopuu, who was the grandson of Keawe and had a valid claim to the sovereignty, was proclaimed moi of Hawaii.
Keeaumoku's first attempt at making a king happened in 1754. After the death of his uncle Alapainui that year and the rise of his cousin Keaweopala to the Hawaiian throne, he became unhappy with his share of land and initiated a rebellion in Kekaha. After being defeated, he escaped in his canoes to Kau, where Kalaniopuu had been independent of Alapainui for several years. They joined forces, marched north, defeated and killed Keaweopala in Kona, and Kalaniopuu, who was the grandson of Keawe and had a legitimate claim to the throne, was declared moi of Hawaii.
It is probable that Keeaumoku’s services were substantially rewarded by Kalaniopuu; but in his early years he was turbulent and hot-tempered, and in 1765 he found a pretext for hurling defiance at the king and fortifying himself in the northern part of Kohala. Kalaniopuu promptly placed himself at the head of an adequate force, took the fort by assault, and crushed the rebellion with a single blow. But Keeaumoku escaped over the pali alone, reached the beach, secured a canoe and paddled out to sea. Night coming on and the skies being clouded, he lost his way and nearly perished through thirst and hunger; but he finally reached Lanai, where he found friends, and not long after sailed for Maui in a well-equipped double canoe and a respectable retinue of attendants. He landed at Lahaina, and the reader need not be told that the distinguished stranger who so suddenly presented himself at the court of Kahekili, as already mentioned, was Keeaumoku.
It's likely that Keeaumoku's contributions were well-rewarded by Kalaniopuu; however, in his younger years, he was rebellious and quick to anger. In 1765, he found an excuse to challenge the king and set up a stronghold in the northern part of Kohala. Kalaniopuu quickly gathered a sufficient force, attacked the fort, and crushed the uprising in one swift move. Keeaumoku managed to escape over the pali alone, reached the beach, found a canoe, and paddled out to sea. As night fell and the skies became overcast, he lost his way and nearly died from thirst and hunger; but he eventually made it to Lanai, where he encountered friends. Not long after, he set sail for Maui in a well-equipped double canoe with a respectable group of attendants. He landed at Lahaina, and it should be clear to the reader that the notable stranger who suddenly appeared at the court of Kahekili was Keeaumoku.
The occupation of the district of Hana by the king of Hawaii was a source of irritation to Kahekili, and he welcomed Keeaumoku, [356]not more as an enemy of Kalaniopuu than as a chief who might be useful to him in the war which he then meditated for the recovery of the captured territory.
The king of Hawaii's takeover of the Hana district irritated Kahekili, and he saw Keeaumoku, [__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__] not just as an enemy of Kalaniopuu but also as a chief who could be helpful in the war he was planning to reclaim the lost territory.
But Keeaumoku was not content to subsist upon the favor of Kahekili. In his veins ran the blood of kings, and his pride rebelled against a life of dependence, however attractive it might be made for him. But he was without available lands or revenues, for his rebellion against Kalaniopuu had deprived him of both, notwithstanding his inalienable landed rights in South Kona, and he began to cast about for the means of raising himself again to the dignity of a landed chief.
But Keeaumoku was not satisfied to live off Kahekili's favor. He had the blood of kings running through his veins, and his pride refused to accept a life of dependence, no matter how appealing it might be. However, he had no land or income to rely on, as his defiance against Kalaniopuu had cost him both, even with his untransferable land rights in South Kona. He started looking for ways to elevate himself back to the status of a landowning chief.
His eyes soon fell upon the comely Namahana, widow of Kamehamehanui. To her belonged the fair and fertile lands of Waihee. But she was the inheritance of Kahekili, whose purpose it was to accept her as a wife at the end of her period of mourning. This must have been known to Keeaumoku, who was thoroughly acquainted with royal customs of his time; yet he paid such court to the sorrowing dowager, and so sweetly mingled his protestations of love with her sighs of grief, that she became his wife without consulting with the moi.
His eyes soon landed on the attractive Namahana, widow of Kamehamehanui. She owned the beautiful and fertile lands of Waihee. However, she was the inheritance of Kahekili, who intended to take her as his wife once her mourning period was over. Keeaumoku, who knew the royal customs of the time well, must have been aware of this; yet he paid such attention to the grieving widow, sweetly mixing his declarations of love with her sighs of sorrow, that she became his wife without discussing it with the moi.
Kahekili was naturally enraged at the union, and was about to manifest his displeasure in a manner dangerous to Keeaumoku, when Namahana retired with her new husband to her estates at Waihee. Kahekili’s first impulse was to follow and slay them both; but as Namahana was popular with the nobility, and Kahekili had not been in power long enough to be quite sure of the fealty of the chiefs, he discreetly concluded to leave to the future the punishment of the offending couple.
Kahekili was really angry about the marriage and was ready to take action against Keeaumoku, but then Namahana went away with her new husband to her lands at Waihee. Kahekili's first thought was to go after them and kill them both; however, since Namahana was well-liked among the nobles and Kahekili hadn't been in power long enough to fully trust the loyalty of the chiefs, he wisely decided to wait for another time to deal with the couple.
Taking up his residence at Waihee, Keeaumoku enlarged and beautified his grounds and buildings, and established a petty court of princely etiquette and appointments. He was fond of display, and soon attracted to Waihee many of the more accomplished young chiefs of the island. The mother and two of the brothers of Namahana attached themselves to the household, and a number of Molokai chiefs, despoiled of their lands by the king of Oahu, became his retainers. He had carefully trained bands of musicians and dancers, and his entertainments were frequent and bountiful.
Taking up residence at Waihee, Keeaumoku expanded and improved his grounds and buildings, creating a small court with royal etiquette and appointments. He enjoyed showing off and quickly attracted many of the more skilled young chiefs from the island to Waihee. Namahana's mother and two of her brothers joined his household, and several chiefs from Molokai, who had lost their lands to the king of Oahu, became his followers. He had carefully trained groups of musicians and dancers, and his gatherings were frequent and lavish.
In the midst of this semi-royal gayety and splendor Kahekili quietly crossed the mountains and temporarily established his [357]court at Wailuku, but a few miles from Waihee. He had heard of Keeaumoku’s royal style of living, and desired to learn from personal observation whether it was inspired by an innocent love of display or designs more ambitious. As Keeaumoku had rebelled against two successive Hawaiian sovereigns, and boldly seized the widow of a king in the very household of her royal claimant and protector, Kahekili had reason to regard him with suspicion, and a week’s stay at Wailuku, during which reserved courtesies had been exchanged between them, convinced him that Keeaumoku was a dangerous subject. But how was he to be dealt with? He had committed no act of treason, and an assault upon him would not be sustained by the chiefs.
In the midst of this semi-royal celebration and splendor, Kahekili quietly crossed the mountains and temporarily set up his [__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]court at Wailuku, just a few miles from Waihee. He had heard about Keeaumoku’s royal lifestyle and wanted to see for himself whether it was just an innocent love for show or something more ambitious. Since Keeaumoku had rebelled against two consecutive Hawaiian kings and boldly took the widow of a king right from the household of her royal claimant and protector, Kahekili had good reason to be suspicious of him. After a week at Wailuku, where they exchanged polite but reserved courtesies, Kahekili became convinced that Keeaumoku was a dangerous individual. But how should he handle him? He hadn’t committed any acts of treason, and any attack on him wouldn’t be supported by the chiefs.
In this dilemma Kahekili resorted to strategy. He induced Kahanana, a resolute warrior and subordinate land-holder of Waihee, to embroil Keeaumoku in a difficulty with his own people. To this end Kahanana complained—probably without cause—that he had been frequently neglected by the servants of Keeaumoku in the distribution of fish after fortunate catches, and urged his grievance with so good a showing of sincerity that many of his friends stood prepared to espouse his quarrel. This done, he armed himself for battle, and, the following night, killed three of Keeaumoku’s laborers. Being attacked in return, he was at once supported by a party of warriors secretly detailed for that purpose by Kahekili, and a general fight resulted, which lasted in a desultory way for three or four days. In the end, however, Keeaumoku and his party were overpowered and compelled to seek safety in flight.
In this situation, Kahekili used strategy. He got Kahanana, a determined warrior and a subordinate landholder of Waihee, to stir up trouble for Keeaumoku with his own people. To achieve this, Kahanana complained—likely without reason—that he had often been overlooked by Keeaumoku’s servants when it came to sharing the catch of fish, and he presented his case so convincingly that many of his friends were ready to take up his cause. Once that was done, he prepared for battle, and the next night, he killed three of Keeaumoku’s laborers. When he was attacked in return, he was immediately supported by a group of warriors secretly assigned for that purpose by Kahekili, and a general fight broke out, dragging on in a scattered way for three or four days. In the end, however, Keeaumoku and his group were overwhelmed and forced to flee for safety.
Keeaumoku and Namahana, with her mother and two brothers, and a considerable following of chiefs and retainers, escaped over the Eka mountains and embarked for Molokai. But Kahekili was not content with the escape of Keeaumoku from Maui. He resolved to destroy him, and soon after invaded Molokai with a large force. Keeaumoku and his allies met the invaders in war-canoes as they approached the shore. A desperate sea-fight followed, which was continued long into the night by torchlight; but Keeaumoku was again defeated, and with difficulty escaped to Hana with Namahana and her relatives.
Keeaumoku and Namahana, along with her mother and two brothers, and a sizable group of chiefs and followers, fled over the Eka mountains and set sail for Molokai. However, Kahekili was unhappy about Keeaumoku’s escape from Maui. He decided to eliminate him and soon launched an invasion of Molokai with a large army. Keeaumoku and his allies confronted the invaders in war-canoes as they neared the shore. A fierce sea battle ensued, continuing well into the night under torchlight; but Keeaumoku was defeated once more and narrowly escaped to Hana with Namahana and her family.
This placed Keeaumoku beyond the reach of Kahekili, for that district of Maui was still under Hawaiian control; but in escaping from one enemy he was compelled to throw himself upon [358]the mercy of another. He was hospitably received, however, by Mahihelelima, the governor of the district, and was so far forgiven by Kalaniopuu as to be permitted to remain under the protection of the fortress of Kauwiki, where for some time, in the shaded valleys at the base of Haleakala, he found a respite new to his turbulent life.
This put Keeaumoku out of Kahekili's reach, as that area of Maui was still under Hawaiian control. However, in escaping one enemy, he had to rely on the mercy of another. Fortunately, he was warmly welcomed by Mahihelelima, the governor of the area. Kalaniopuu also partially forgave him, allowing him to stay under the protection of the fortress of Kauwiki. There, in the shaded valleys at the base of Haleakala, he found a welcome break from his turbulent life for a while.
II.
In a secluded valley within sight of the fortress of Kauwiki, with a few devoted friends and attendants, Keeaumoku and his family lived unmolested and almost unnoticed for several years. It was a season of peace between Hawaii and Maui, and Keeaumoku spent his days in dreaming of wars to come, and political changes that would place him again in a position more consistent with his rank. He made spears and battle-axes, and laid them away; he constructed canoes and housed them near the neighboring beach.
In a hidden valley near the Kauwiki fortress, Keeaumoku and his family lived peacefully for several years with a few loyal friends and helpers. It was a time of calm between Hawaii and Maui, and Keeaumoku spent his days dreaming about future battles and political shifts that would restore him to a position more suited to his status. He crafted spears and battle-axes and stored them away; he built canoes and kept them close to the nearby beach.
He loved his wife, who was content to share his exile, and when, in 1768, a daughter was born to him, Keeaumoku felt that the gods were smiling upon him once more, and took courage. It is said that the child was born with a yellow feather in her hand—a symbol of royalty—and she was named Kaahumanu and tenderly cared for.
He loved his wife, who was happy to share in his exile, and when, in 1768, a daughter was born to him, Keeaumoku felt that the gods were smiling on him again, and he found hope. It is said that the child was born with a yellow feather in her hand—a symbol of royalty—and she was named Kaahumanu and lovingly cared for.
In 1775 Kalaniopuu, king of Hawaii, suddenly appeared in the district of Hana with a considerable force, and began to ravage the neighboring lands of Kaupo. Kahekili promptly met and repulsed him, however, and he returned to Hana and abandoned the campaign by re-embarking with his shattered army for Hawaii. Keeaumoku took no part in the brief struggle, and was disappointed that nothing decisive had been accomplished. The death of either of the two sovereigns engaged would have been to him a signal of deliverance. But he was not disheartened. He knew the war would soon be resumed on a grander scale, and found partial contentment in the hope that it would result in changes favorable to his fortunes.
In 1775, Kalaniopuu, the king of Hawaii, suddenly showed up in Hana with a large force and started attacking the nearby lands of Kaupo. However, Kahekili quickly confronted him and pushed him back, so Kalaniopuu returned to Hana and abandoned the campaign, re-embarking with his weakened army for Hawaii. Keeaumoku didn't participate in this short conflict and felt let down that nothing significant had been achieved. The death of either ruler would have signaled freedom for him. But he remained optimistic. He knew that the war would soon restart on a larger scale and found some comfort in the hope that it would lead to changes that would benefit him.
Exasperated at his defeat, Kalaniopuu spent nearly two years in preparing for a crushing invasion of Maui. In honor of his war-god, Kaili, he repaired and put in order two heiaus, and instructed [359]his high-priest, Holoae, to maintain continuous religious services, and exert his highest powers to accomplish the defeat and death of Kahekili. He landed with six heavy divisions of warriors on the southern coast of Maui, but was defeated with great slaughter in the neighborhood of Wailuku, and compelled to sue for peace. With him were the two brothers of Keeaumoku, Kameeiamoku and Kamanawa, who attended the young Prince Kiwalao in his visit of conciliation to Kahekili after the battle.
Frustrated by his defeat, Kalaniopuu took almost two years to prepare for a powerful invasion of Maui. In honor of his war-god, Kaili, he fixed and organized two heiaus, and instructed [__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]his high priest, Holoae, to carry out continuous religious services and use all his powers to ensure the defeat and death of Kahekili. He landed with six large divisions of warriors on the southern coast of Maui, but was defeated with heavy casualties near Wailuku and forced to seek peace. With him were the two brothers of Keeaumoku, Kameeiamoku and Kamanawa, who accompanied the young Prince Kiwalao during his visit to make amends with Kahekili after the battle.
Kalaniopuu returned to Hawaii with what remained of his army, and the next year again invaded Maui, and for several months carried on a desultory warfare with Kahekili in the several districts of the island. He was assisted by the governor of Hana, and was able for some time to maintain a foothold in Hamakualoa and elsewhere.
Kalaniopuu came back to Hawaii with the remnants of his army, and the following year he launched another invasion of Maui. For several months, he engaged in scattered battles with Kahekili in different areas of the island. He received support from the governor of Hana and managed to hold a position in Hamakualoa and other locations for a while.
Keeaumoku offered his services to neither side, but remained a quiet and almost unobserved spectator of the hostile movements which at intervals convulsed the island, and sometimes swept past the very door of his exile home in Hana. The proper time for him to act had not yet arrived, and years of solitude had schooled him to patience.
Keeaumoku didn’t offer his services to either side; instead, he stayed a quiet, almost unnoticed observer of the hostile actions that periodically shook the island and sometimes passed right by his exiled home in Hana. The right moment for him to take action hadn’t come yet, and years of solitude had taught him patience.
It was during this campaign that Captain Cook, the celebrated English explorer, arrived off the coast of Maui with the two vessels under his command, exhibiting faces that were new to the natives, and ships which seemed to be the ocean palaces of their gods. This was in November, 1778. In January of that year Cook had touched the group for the first time. He had landed at Kauai and Niihau, and had now returned from the Arctic seas to winter among the Hawaiian Islands.
It was during this campaign that Captain Cook, the famous English explorer, arrived off the coast of Maui with the two ships he was in charge of, showing faces that were new to the locals, and ships that looked like the ocean palaces of their gods. This was in November 1778. In January of that year, Cook had visited the group for the first time. He had landed on Kauai and Niihau, and had now returned from the Arctic seas to spend the winter among the Hawaiian Islands.
Abandoning the fruitless war, Kalaniopuu returned to Hawaii with his invading army. During the campaign of the year before he had been assisted to the extent of a battalion of warriors by Kahahana, king of Oahu. Among the followers of the Oahuan moi at that time was the celebrated poet and prophet Keaulumoku. He was a native of Naohaku, in the Hamakua district of Hawaii, and was distantly related to Kahekili, being a son of a cousin of Kekaulike, the father of Kahekili. From his youth he was dreamy and psychologic, and spent his time in roaming among the hills, watching the stars and listening to the music of the ocean. Some years before he had become attached to the court of Kahahana, and had followed that sovereign to Maui in [360]1777. He remained on the island after the return of Kahahana to Oahu, and the year following, when Kalaniopuu again invaded Maui, the poet was found among his household.
Abandoning the pointless war, Kalaniopuu returned to Hawaii with his invading army. In the campaign the previous year, he had received support from a battalion of warriors led by Kahahana, the king of Oahu. Among Kahahana's followers at that time was the famous poet and prophet Keaulumoku. He was originally from Naohaku, in the Hamakua district of Hawaii, and was distantly related to Kahekili, being a son of a cousin of Kekaulike, Kahekili’s father. From a young age, he was introspective and thoughtful, spending his time wandering the hills, gazing at the stars, and listening to the ocean's music. A few years earlier, he had become part of Kahahana's court and accompanied the king to Maui in [__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]1777. He stayed on the island after Kahahana returned to Oahu, and the following year, when Kalaniopuu invaded Maui again, the poet was found among his household.

Conveying the Body of Kalaniopuu to Honaunau.
Conveying the Body of Kalaniopuu to Honaunau.
(FROM A PAINTING IN THE ROYAL PALACE.)
(FROM A PAINTING IN THE ROYAL PALACE.)
Although but sixty-two years of age, in appearance Keaulumoku was much older. His eyes were bright, but his form was bent, and his white hair and beard swept his shoulders. When he sang all listened, and his wild utterances were treasured up and repeated as inspirations from the gods. He was known on all the islands of the group, and it was safe for him to travel anywhere. He had been a friend of Keeaumoku, many years before, on Hawaii, and when he learned, during the campaign of 1778, that the unfortunate chief was an exile in Hana and had ceased to be accounted among the leaders of the time, he resolved to visit and console him.
Although he was only sixty-two years old, Keaulumoku looked much older. His eyes were bright, but his body was stooped, and his white hair and beard fell to his shoulders. When he sang, everyone listened, and his passionate words were cherished and repeated as divine inspiration. He was known throughout all the islands in the group, and it was safe for him to travel anywhere. He had been friends with Keeaumoku many years earlier on Hawaii, and when he learned during the campaign of 1778 that the unfortunate chief was exiled in Hana and was no longer considered one of the leaders, he decided to visit and comfort him.
Without making his purpose known to any one, Keaulumoku crossed the mountains, and, the third day, stood before his friend in Hana. Their greeting was affectionate, and after eating they sat down and wailed over Keeaumoku’s misfortunes. Then Namahana came with stately grace to welcome the old poet, bringing with her Kaahumanu, who was then a bright-eyed child of ten. He kissed the hand of Namahana, advising her to be of good cheer, and, embracing the child and looking into her eyes, told her that his dreams that night should be of her. And so they were, for the next morning he solemnly sang in the shade of the palms that Kaahumanu would be loved by a chief of renown and become the wife of a king.
Without revealing his intentions to anyone, Keaulumoku crossed the mountains, and on the third day, he stood before his friend in Hana. Their reunion was warm, and after they ate, they sat down and mourned Keeaumoku’s troubles. Then Namahana arrived with dignified grace to welcome the old poet, bringing with her Kaahumanu, who was then a bright-eyed ten-year-old. He kissed Namahana’s hand, encouraging her to stay positive, and after embracing the child and looking into her eyes, he promised that his dreams that night would be about her. And they were, for the next morning he solemnly sang in the shade of the palm trees that Kaahumanu would be loved by a renowned chief and become the wife of a king.
“And what of her father?” inquired Keeaumoku. “Is he to rot with his spears in Hana?”
“And what about her father?” Keeaumoku asked. “Is he going to decay with his spears in Hana?”
“No,” replied the poet, promptly. “The great work of Keeaumoku’s life is still before him. He will become the slayer of princes and maker of kings.”
“No,” replied the poet without hesitation. “The great work of Keeaumoku’s life is still ahead of him. He will become the slayer of princes and the maker of kings.”
“One have I already helped to royal honors,” returned the chief, doubtingly, “and by his favor I am stifling here in Hana.”
"One person I've already helped to royal honors," the chief replied, uncertainly, "and thanks to his favor, I'm stuck here in Hana."
“Another and a greater is still to follow, in whose service Keeaumoku will die in peace,” answered the poet.
“Another and a greater one is still to come, in whose service Keeaumoku will die in peace,” replied the poet.
“Who is the coming hero?” inquired the chief.
“Who is the hero that’s coming?” asked the chief.
“You will not mistake him when you meet,” was the evasive reply.
“You won’t mistake him when you meet him,” was the vague response.
“And when will that be?” ventured Keeaumoku.
“And when will that be?” asked Keeaumoku.
No reply being made, the chief continued:
No reply was given, so the chief went on:
“Well, no matter when; I have learned to be patient!” [361]
“Well, whenever it is; I’ve learned to be patient!” [__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]
The predictions of the poet extended no farther; but his words cheered the heart of Keeaumoku, and when he left for Lahaina the next day, grateful eyes followed his footsteps far into the mountains.
The poet's predictions didn't go any further, but his words lifted Keeaumoku's spirits, and when he set off for Lahaina the next day, thankful eyes followed his path deep into the mountains.
Returning to Hawaii after his unsuccessful campaign of 1778, Kalaniopuu remained for a time in Kona, and after the death of Captain Cook, in February, 1779, removed his court to Kohala, taking with him the poet Keaulumoku. The next year, feeling his end approaching—for he was nearly eighty years of age—Kalaniopuu set his kingdom in order by proclaiming his son Kiwalao as his successor, and naming his nephew, Kamehameha, as the custodian of his war-god. He then put down the rebellion of Imakakaloa in Kau, and, after changing residences two or three times for his health, finally died at Kailikii, in January, 1782.
Returning to Hawaii after his unsuccessful campaign in 1778, Kalaniopuu stayed for a while in Kona. Following the death of Captain Cook in February 1779, he moved his court to Kohala, bringing the poet Keaulumoku with him. The next year, feeling his end approaching—since he was nearly eighty years old—Kalaniopuu arranged his kingdom by declaring his son Kiwalao as his successor and appointing his nephew, Kamehameha, as the guardian of his war god. He then suppressed the rebellion of Imakakaloa in Kau and, after moving his residence two or three times for his health, ultimately passed away at Kailikii in January 1782.
A few months before the death of Kalaniopuu, Kahekili, learning of the failing health of his old opponent, prepared for the recovery of the district of Hana, which had been for nearly forty years under Hawaiian rule. Marching into the district and investing the fortress of Kauwiki, he finally reduced it by cutting off its water-supply, and Eastern Maui again became a part of the dominions of the moi of Maui. This occurred about the time of the death of Kalaniopuu.
A few months before Kalaniopuu's death, Kahekili, hearing about the declining health of his longtime rival, got ready to reclaim the district of Hana, which had been under Hawaiian control for nearly forty years. He marched into the area and surrounded the fortress of Kauwiki, ultimately conquering it by cutting off its water supply, and Eastern Maui once again became part of the territory of the moi of Maui. This happened around the time Kalaniopuu died.
But what became of Keeaumoku and his family, whose home for years had been among the hills of Hana? Learning of the meditated invasion of the district, and unwilling to trust himself to the mercy of Kahekili, Keeaumoku fled with his family to the almost barren island of Kahoolawe, where he lived in seclusion until after the fall of Kauwiki and death of Kalaniopuu, when he boldly returned to Hawaii, quietly settled on his old and inalienable estates at Kapalilua, in South Kona, and awaited the development of events, which he plainly perceived were rapidly and irresistibly tending toward wide-spread revolution and disorder. For more than fifteen years he had heard the clash of arms only at a distance, and he yearned for the shouts of battle and the music of marching columns.
But what happened to Keeaumoku and his family, who had called the hills of Hana home for years? After learning about the planned invasion of the area and not wanting to rely on Kahekili's mercy, Keeaumoku fled with his family to the nearly barren island of Kahoolawe. They lived in seclusion there until after Kauwiki fell and Kalaniopuu died. Then, he boldly returned to Hawaii, quietly settled on his old, inalienable land at Kapalilua in South Kona, and waited for events to unfold. He could clearly see that things were rapidly heading toward widespread revolution and chaos. For more than fifteen years, he had only heard the sounds of battle from a distance, and he longed for the battle cries and the sounds of marching troops.
The mourning for Kalaniopuu continued for many weeks, and rumors unsatisfactory to the Kona chiefs were afloat concerning the new moi’s proposed division of the lands subject to royal apportionment. Preparations for the burial of the bones of the deceased king were finally completed. In double canoes, [362]one of them bearing the corpse of his royal father, Kiwalao set sail with a large party of chiefs, warriors and retainers for Honaunau. There it was his purpose to deposit the remains in the neighboring burial-place of Hale-a-Keawe, sacred to the ashes of Hawaiian kings, and then proceed with the redivision of such of the lands of the kingdom as were at his disposal.
The mourning for Kalaniopuu went on for several weeks, and there were rumors that the Kona chiefs found unsatisfactory about the new moi’s planned division of the lands meant for royal distribution. The preparations for burying the bones of the late king were finally finished. In double canoes, [__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__] one of which carried the body of his royal father, Kiwalao set out with a large group of chiefs, warriors, and followers to Honaunau. His goal was to place the remains in the nearby burial site of Hale-a-Keawe, which is sacred to the ashes of Hawaiian kings, and then move forward with the redivision of the lands of the kingdom that he controlled.
When off Honokua the second day, Keeaumoku came down from Kapalilua and boarded the fleet. His avowed purpose was to wail over the body of Kalaniopuu. His return to Hawaii had become generally known, and Kiwalao regarded with a curiosity not unmixed with suspicion the warring and impetuous chief, who had been first the friend and then the enemy of his father, and who had suddenly emerged at a critical moment full-armed from the obscurity of years.
When off Honokua on the second day, Keeaumoku came down from Kapalilua and joined the fleet. His declared goal was to mourn for the body of Kalaniopuu. His return to Hawaii had become widely known, and Kiwalao looked at the aggressive and hot-headed chief with a mix of curiosity and suspicion. Keeaumoku had once been a friend of his father and then an enemy, and now he had suddenly reappeared at a crucial time, fully armed after years of being in the shadows.
What was the object of Keeaumoku’s visit to the mourning fleet? Was he anxious, on the eve of stirring events, to behold the face of the young king, remembering the words of Keaulumoku, “You will know him when you meet”? Perhaps. But, whatever may have been his original purpose in visiting the fleet, when he left, in keeping with the turbulent instincts of his life, his thoughts were aglow with projects of rebellion.
What was the reason for Keeaumoku’s visit to the mourning fleet? Was he eager, just before significant events unfolded, to see the young king’s face, recalling Keaulumoku’s words, “You’ll recognize him when you meet”? Maybe. But whatever his initial reason for going to the fleet, when he left, true to his tumultuous nature, his mind was buzzing with plans for rebellion.
Hastening to Kehaha, where his brothers, Kameeiamoku and Kamanawa, with Kamehameha, Kekuhaupio and other chiefs, were in council, Keeaumoku informed them that the destination of Kiwalao was Kailua, which place he would proceed to occupy after depositing the royal remains at Honaunau. This information, he declared, was given to him by one of Kiwalao’s attendants.
Hurrying to Kehaha, where his brothers, Kameeiamoku and Kamanawa, along with Kamehameha, Kekuhaupio, and other chiefs, were meeting, Keeaumoku told them that Kiwalao was headed to Kailua, a place he intended to take over after bringing the royal remains to Honaunau. He explained that he got this information from one of Kiwalao's attendants.
Not doubting the truth of Keeaumoku’s story, and believing it to be the purpose of Kiwalao to occupy the entire district of Kona, which embraced lands not subject to royal disposal, the assembled chiefs moved with their followers and occupied quarters in the neighborhood of Honaunau.
Not questioning the truth of Keeaumoku’s story, and believing that Kiwalao intended to take control of the whole Kona district, which included lands not under royal authority, the gathered chiefs and their followers settled in the area near Honaunau.
Keeaumoku now became a leading spirit in the events which rapidly followed. The funeral cortege landed at Honaunau, the remains of the dead king were ceremoniously entombed at Hale-a-Keawe, and Kiwalao ascended a platform, and to the assembled chiefs proclaimed the will of his father. In the divisions of lands that followed the Kona chiefs were not consulted; nor does it appear that they were additionally provided for, and Keeaumoku [363]had little difficulty in persuading them that they had been treated with intended disrespect and hostility.
Keeaumoku became a key figure in the events that quickly unfolded. The funeral procession arrived at Honaunau, where the deceased king was formally laid to rest at Hale-a-Keawe. Kiwalao stepped up onto a platform and announced his father's wishes to the gathered chiefs. In the subsequent division of lands, the Kona chiefs were not consulted, nor does it seem they received any compensation, and Keeaumoku [__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]had little trouble convincing them that they had been treated with deliberate disrespect and hostility.
In an interview with Kiwalao, Kamehameha was coolly received, and the disaffected chiefs began to prepare for battle. They selected Kamehameha as their leader, and for some days there was a vigorous mustering of forces on both sides. An attack was finally made by the rebellious chiefs, and a battle of some magnitude ensued. Keeaumoku was again in his element. His voice was heard above the din of battle, and his famished weapons drank their fill of blood. Entangled with his spear, he fell upon the rocky ground. Several warriors rushed upon him. Two of them attacked him with daggers, while a third struck him in the back with a spear, exclaiming, “The spear has pierced the yellow-backed crab!”
In an interview with Kiwalao, Kamehameha received a cool response, and the discontented chiefs started gearing up for battle. They chose Kamehameha as their leader, and for several days, both sides gathered their forces vigorously. Finally, the rebellious chiefs launched an attack, resulting in a significant battle. Keeaumoku was once again in his element. His voice rose above the chaos of battle, and his thirsty weapons soaked up blood. Entangled with his spear, he fell onto the rocky ground. Several warriors charged at him. Two of them attacked with daggers, while a third stabbed him in the back with a spear, shouting, “The spear has pierced the yellow-backed crab!”
Kiwalao, not far distant, witnessed the encounter, and called to the assailants of Keeaumoku to secure his palaoa, or ivory neck ornament. The attention of Kamanawa was attracted to the struggle, and he sprang with a few followers to the assistance of his brother, driving back his assailants. At that moment Kiwalao was struck in the temple with a stone, and fell stunned to the ground. Observing the circumstance, Keeaumoku crawled to the fallen king, and, with a knife edged with sharks’ teeth, cut his throat.
Kiwalao, nearby, saw the fight and called to Keeaumoku's attackers to get his palaoa, or ivory neck ornament. Kamanawa noticed the struggle and jumped in with a few followers to help his brother, pushing back the attackers. Just then, Kiwalao was hit in the temple by a stone and collapsed to the ground, unconscious. Seeing this, Keeaumoku crawled over to the fallen king and, with a knife sharpened with sharks’ teeth, slit his throat.
With the death of Kiwalao the rout of his army became general. The victory made Kamehameha master of the districts of Kona, Kohala and Hamakua, while Keoua, the brother of Kiwalao, held possession of Kau and Puna, and Keawemauhili declared himself independent of both in Hilo.
With Kiwalao's death, his army fell apart. The victory turned Kamehameha into the ruler of the Kona, Kohala, and Hamakua districts, while Kiwalao's brother, Keoua, kept control of Kau and Puna, and Keawemauhili declared his independence in Hilo.
Keeaumoku’s brilliant part in this first of the battles of the period for the sovereignty of Hawaii established him at once in the favor of Kamehameha, and raised him high in the esteem of the distinguished chiefs whose valor ennobled the closing years of barbaric supremacy in the group.
Keeaumoku’s impressive role in the first battle for Hawaii’s sovereignty instantly won him Kamehameha’s favor and elevated him in the respect of the notable chiefs whose bravery defined the last years of barbaric dominance in the area.
III.
War soon occurred between Kamehameha and the independent chiefs of Hilo and Kau, but, as no marked advantages to either side resulted, Kamehameha established his court at Halaula, [364]in Kohala, and occupied himself in improving the condition of his people. During the campaign he had met with some reverses, but Keeaumoku’s faith in the final triumph of his great leader remained unshaken through every disaster. He thought he saw in him that captain, greater than Kalaniopuu, of whom the poet dreamed in Hana, and was soon after confirmed in the belief by the definite prophecy of Keaulumoku.
War soon broke out between Kamehameha and the independent chiefs of Hilo and Kau. However, since there were no clear advantages for either side, Kamehameha set up his court at Halaula, [__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]in Kohala, and focused on improving the lives of his people. During the campaign, he faced some setbacks, but Keeaumoku’s faith in his great leader’s eventual victory remained strong through all the hardships. He believed he saw in Kamehameha a leader greater than Kalaniopuu, the one the poet envisioned in Hana, and this belief was later reinforced by the clear prophecy of Keaulumoku.
Restlessly roaming from place to place, the old singer finally selected a temporary abode near Halaula, shortly after the removal of the court of Kamehameha to that village. There he was frequently visited by Keeaumoku, sometimes accompanied by Kaahumanu, who was budding into an attractive womanhood, and sometimes by Namahana, who regarded him with a reverence due to one whose utterances seemed to be inspired by the gods.
Restlessly moving around, the old singer finally chose a temporary home near Halaula, shortly after the court of Kamehameha moved to that village. There, he was often visited by Keeaumoku, sometimes joined by Kaahumanu, who was blossoming into an attractive woman, and at other times by Namahana, who looked at him with the respect reserved for someone whose words seemed inspired by the gods.
Since the death of Kalaniopuu the voice of Keaulumoku had been silent. He mourned over the distracted condition of the island, and sympathized with the people in their enforced warfare with each other. Vainly had he sought to penetrate the mists of desolation and disorder, and catch a glimpse of what was beyond. No light had come to him through the clouds; to his prayers no answering voice had whispered in his dreams.
Since Kalaniopuu's death, Keaulumoku's voice had fallen silent. He grieved over the chaotic state of the island and felt for the people in their forced battles against one another. He had tried unsuccessfully to see beyond the fog of despair and disorder, hoping to catch a glimpse of what lay ahead. No light had shone through the clouds for him; in response to his prayers, there had been no reassuring voice in his dreams.
But the curtain was raised for him at last, and, as the shades of the future trooped before him in awful pantomime, in a voice wild as the winds sweeping through the gorge of Nuuanu he chanted the prophetic mele of Hau-i-Kalani. After describing the horrors of the civil war then desolating the island, he concluded by predicting that Kamehameha would triumph over his enemies, and in the end be hailed as the greatest of Hawaiian conquerors.
But the curtain was finally lifted for him, and as the shadows of the future paraded before him in a terrifying display, he chanted the prophetic mele of Hau-i-Kalani in a voice as wild as the winds rushing through the Nuuanu gorge. After depicting the horrors of the civil war that was devastating the island, he ended by predicting that Kamehameha would overcome his enemies and ultimately be celebrated as the greatest of Hawaiian conquerors.
The chant created great enthusiasm among the followers of Kamehameha. Keeaumoku listened to it with rapt attention, and at its conclusion stooped over the old poet and said:
The chant generated a lot of excitement among Kamehameha's supporters. Keeaumoku listened intently, and when it finished, he leaned down to the old poet and said:
“I asked you a question in Hana, which you did not answer then. Is it answered now?”
“I asked you a question in Hana, and you didn’t answer it then. Is it answered now?”
Keaulumoku looked into the face of the chief for a moment as if to collect his thoughts, and then dreamily replied:
Keaulumoku looked into the chief's face for a moment, as if to gather his thoughts, and then replied in a thoughtful way:
“It is answered!”
"It's answered!"
“Such was my thought,” returned the chief. “I have some rare dainties from the sea. Come and eat with me to-night, and I will ask to be taught the mele you have just chanted.” [365]
“That's what I was thinking,” said the chief. “I have some special treats from the sea. Come and have dinner with me tonight, and I'll ask you to teach me the mele you just sang.” [__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]
Keaulumoku made no reply, and Keeaumoku walked slowly toward the palace, trying to remember the words of the poet which had so thrilled his listeners.
Keaulumoku didn't respond, and Keeaumoku slowly walked toward the palace, trying to recall the words of the poet that had so excited his audience.
What occurred between Keeaumoku and the old poet during their repast that evening will never be known; but certain it is that henceforth Keeaumoku never doubted the final success of Kamehameha, and when, in the summer of 1785, the latter retired discomfited from an invasion of Hilo, Keeaumoku smiled as he said to his chief: “Thus far you have only skirmished with your enemies; you will win when you fight battles!”
What happened between Keeaumoku and the old poet during their meal that evening will never be known; but it’s clear that from that point on, Keeaumoku never doubted Kamehameha's ultimate success. So, when Kamehameha returned defeated from an invasion of Hilo in the summer of 1785, Keeaumoku smiled and told his chief, “So far, you’ve only been skirmishing with your enemies; you’ll win when you engage in real battles!”
In 1784 Keaulumoku died. For months the old poet had lived alone in a hut near Kauhola. He avoided company and seldom spoke to any one. Feeling his end approaching, he one day announced that the evening following he would chant his last mele. Hundreds collected around his hut at the time appointed. They did not enter, but sat down, conversing in whispers, and respectfully waited.
In 1784, Keaulumoku passed away. For months, the old poet had been living alone in a hut near Kauhola. He kept to himself and rarely spoke to anyone. Sensing that his time was near, he announced one day that he would perform his last mele the following evening. Hundreds gathered around his hut at the scheduled time. They didn't go inside but sat down, whispering and respectfully waiting.
An hour passed, and another, but the old singer did not make his appearance. Finally the mat which served as a door was drawn aside, and Keaulumoku’s white head and bent form were seen in the opening. Seating himself within view of all, he began to chant a mele in tremulous tones. As he proceeded his voice became louder, and every word was breathlessly listened to. He spoke of the coming conquest of the group by Kamehameha, whom he designated as the son of Kahekili, and also as “the lone one.” He also predicted the early extinction of the Kamehameha dynasty, the domination of the white race, the destruction of the temples, and finally the gradual death of the Hawaiian people. Concluding his chant, the old seer raised his hands as if to bless his listeners, and fell back dead. A great wail went up from the people, and they tenderly bore the body of the dead poet to the heiau, where it was accorded the burial rites of a prophet.
An hour passed, and then another, but the old singer didn’t show up. Finally, the mat that served as a door was pulled aside, revealing Keaulumoku’s white head and hunched form in the opening. Taking a seat where everyone could see him, he began to chant a mele in shaky tones. As he continued, his voice grew louder, and everyone listened intently to every word. He spoke about the upcoming conquest of the islands by Kamehameha, whom he called the son of Kahekili, and also “the lone one.” He predicted the quick end of the Kamehameha dynasty, the rise of the white race, the destruction of the temples, and ultimately the gradual demise of the Hawaiian people. When he finished his chant, the old seer raised his hands as if to bless his listeners and then collapsed dead. A loud wail erupted from the crowd, and they gently carried the body of the deceased poet to the heiau, where he received the burial rites of a prophet.
Much of the last prophecy of Keaulumoku was preserved and repeated, and by conversing with the many who listened to it Keeaumoku managed to secure a satisfactory version of the final song of the dying poet.
Much of the last prophecy of Keaulumoku was kept and shared, and by talking to the many who heard it, Keeaumoku was able to get a solid version of the final song from the dying poet.
From the first of Kamehameha’s battles Keeaumoku had not doubted the triumph of that chief over all adversaries in the end, and eagerly grasped at every circumstance calculated [366]to strengthen the conviction. So believing, his way seemed to be clear.
From the start of Kamehameha’s battles, Keeaumoku never doubted that the chief would ultimately defeat all his enemies, and he eagerly focused on every situation that could [__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]reinforce his belief. With this conviction, his path seemed clear.
But what of Kaahumanu, whose promised lover was to be a chief of renown, and whose husband was to be a king? She was an attractive maiden of seventeen, and a few months after the death of Keaulumoku, and while Kamehameha was engaged in peaceful pursuits at Halaula, her father suddenly brought her to court. Fresh, sparkling and graceful, and related to the royal lines of Maui and Hawaii, she attracted the immediate attention of Kamehameha, and he disposed of the claims of her many suitors at once by making her his wife.
But what about Kaahumanu, whose future lover was supposed to be a well-known chief, and whose husband was going to be a king? She was a beautiful seventeen-year-old, and just a few months after Keaulumoku's death, while Kamehameha was focused on peaceful activities at Halaula, her father unexpectedly brought her to court. Fresh, vibrant, and graceful, and connected to the royal bloodlines of Maui and Hawaii, she drew Kamehameha's immediate attention, and he quickly dismissed the claims of her many suitors by marrying her.
There was little in the appearance of the great chief to please the eye of a girl of seventeen. His features were rugged and irregular, and he held in contempt the courtly graces which imparted a charm to the intercourse with each other of the nobility of the time. He was already the husband of two recognized wives; but Kaahumanu was ambitious, and, with admiration but no affection for him, she consented to become his wife.
There wasn't much about the great chief's appearance that would appeal to a seventeen-year-old girl. His features were rough and uneven, and he looked down on the refined manners that made interactions among the nobility more charming. He was already married to two acknowledged wives; however, Kaahumanu was ambitious and, while she admired him without being in love, she agreed to become his wife.
Keeaumoku was now persistent in inspiring Kamehameha with the thought of becoming the master of the group. He recited to him the prophetic chants of Keaulumoku, and brought to him the favoring auguries of the kaulas.
Keeaumoku was now determined to motivate Kamehameha with the idea of becoming the leader of the group. He recited to him the prophetic chants of Keaulumoku and presented the favorable signs from the kaulas.
An unsuccessful attempt to recover the district of Hana in 1786 was followed in 1790 by another invasion of Maui, when Kamehameha completely subjugated the island, and then turned his attention to Keoua, the independent chief of Kau, who had slain the chief of Hilo and assumed the sovereignty of the southern districts of Hawaii.
An unsuccessful attempt to reclaim the district of Hana in 1786 was followed by another invasion of Maui in 1790, when Kamehameha fully conquered the island and then focused on Keoua, the independent chief of Kau, who had killed the chief of Hilo and taken control of the southern districts of Hawaii.
The war with Keoua continued for more than a year, and every effort of Kamehameha to crush this last of his rivals on Hawaii was successfully resisted. For nine years Keoua had maintained himself against the power of Kamehameha, and still remained master of Kau and the most of Puna. Treachery was finally resorted to, and Keoua fell.
The war with Keoua lasted for over a year, and every attempt by Kamehameha to defeat this last rival in Hawaii was met with resistance. For nine years, Keoua held his own against Kamehameha's power and remained in control of Kau and most of Puna. In the end, treachery was used, and Keoua was slain.
The old temple of Puukohola had been partially rebuilt, and a noted seer had predicted that its completion would give to Kamehameha the undisputed sovereignty of Hawaii. The temple was hastily finished, and Keoua was invited to a conference with his opponent at Kawaihae, with the view, he was led to believe, of peacefully settling their differences. Nearing the [367]shore of the place of meeting, where he saw and exchanged greetings with Kamehameha, he was about to land when Keeaumoku met him in a canoe and treacherously assassinated him, and his body was taken to the newly-completed temple and sacrificed to the war-god of his betrayer.
The old Puukohola temple had been partially rebuilt, and a well-known seer had predicted that finishing it would give Kamehameha complete control over Hawaii. The temple was quickly completed, and Keoua was invited to a meeting with his rival at Kawaihae, under the impression that they would peacefully resolve their differences. As he approached the [__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]shore of the meeting place, where he greeted Kamehameha, he was about to land when Keeaumoku met him in a canoe and treacherously killed him. His body was taken to the newly-completed temple and sacrificed to the war god of his betrayer.
Keoua was a brave, noble, and magnanimous chief, and the apologists of Kamehameha have not succeeded in relieving him from the odium of Keeaumoku’s cowardly act. He was the half-brother of Kiwalao, and his death left Kamehameha the master of Hawaii.
Keoua was a brave, noble, and generous chief, and Kamehameha's supporters have not managed to clear him of the shame from Keeaumoku’s cowardly act. He was the half-brother of Kiwalao, and his death left Kamehameha in control of Hawaii.
Truly, as predicted by the seer, had Keeaumoku become the slayer of princes and the maker of kings. But his work was not yet completed. Kamehameha was the sovereign of Hawaii, but the conquest of the group was still before him. Every circumstance, however, conspired in his favor. Kahekili, the warlike king of Maui and conqueror of Oahu, died in 1794, and a rupture had occurred between his successor and Kaeo, the moi of Kauai.
Truly, as predicted by the seer, Keeaumoku had become the slayer of princes and the creator of kings. But his work was not yet finished. Kamehameha was the ruler of Hawaii, but he still had the conquest of the islands ahead of him. Every situation, however, worked in his favor. Kahekili, the warlike king of Maui and conqueror of Oahu, died in 1794, and a split had occurred between his successor and Kaeo, the moi of Kauai.
Everything being in readiness, early in 1795 Kamehameha invaded Oahu with a mighty army, defeated and subsequently captured and sacrificed to his war-god King Kalanikupule, and shortly after received the submission of the moi of Kauai—thus becoming the acknowledged master of, and for the first time in their history consolidating under one government, the several islands of the Hawaiian group.
Everything being ready, early in 1795, Kamehameha invaded Oahu with a powerful army, defeated, and then captured and sacrificed King Kalanikupule to his war god. Shortly after, he received the submission of the moi of Kauai—thus becoming the recognized leader of, and for the first time in their history consolidating under one government, the various islands of the Hawaiian group.
The prophecies of Keaulumoku have all been fulfilled. Keeaumoku, the slayer of princes and maker of kings, died peacefully as governor of the windward islands in 1804. Kaahumanu became the wife of a king, and died as chief counsellor of the islands in 1832. The temples of the Hawaiian gods were destroyed immediately after the death of Kamehameha, in 1819, and but a tenth of the number of natives found on the islands at the close of the last century are now left to sing of the achievements of their ancestors, who first made their home in the group when the Roman Empire was falling to pieces under the assaults of Northern barbarism. [369]
The prophecies of Keaulumoku have all come true. Keeaumoku, who killed princes and made kings, passed away peacefully as governor of the windward islands in 1804. Kaahumanu became the wife of a king and died as the chief advisor of the islands in 1832. The temples of the Hawaiian gods were destroyed right after Kamehameha's death in 1819, and only a fraction of the native population from the end of the last century remains to celebrate the achievements of their ancestors, who first settled the islands when the Roman Empire was falling apart due to Northern invasions. [__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]
The Cannibals of Halemanu.
[370]
[__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]
CHARACTERS.
- Kalo Aikanaka, or Kokoa, a cannibal chief.
- Karaoke, or Prayer, a lieutenant of Kokoa.
- Palau, daughter of Kokoa.
- Kaholekua, wife of Lotu.
- Napopo, brother of Kaholekua.
[371]
[__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]
THE CANNIBALS OF HALEMANU.
THE HALEMANU CANNIBALS.
A POPULAR LEGEND OF THE SEVENTEENTH CENTURY.
A WELL-KNOWN LEGEND FROM THE SEVENTEENTH CENTURY.
I.
Although barbarous to the extent to which a brave, warm-hearted and hospitable people were capable of becoming, every social, political and religious circumstance preserved by tradition tends to show that at no period of their history did the Polynesians proper—or the Hawaiian branch of the race, at least—practise cannibalism. In their migrations from the southern coasts of Asia to their final homes in the Pacific, stopping, as they did, at various groups of islands in their voluntary or compulsory journeyings, the Polynesians must have been brought in contact with cannibal tribes; but no example ever persuaded them into the habit of eating human flesh, or of regarding the appetite for it with a feeling other than that of aversion and disgust. In offering a human sacrifice it was customary for the officiating priest to remove the left eye of the victim after the lifeless body had been deposited upon the altar, and present it to the chief, who made a semblance of eating it. Even as learned and conscientious an inquirer as Judge Fornander has suggested that this custom was possibly the relic of a cannibal propensity existing among the Polynesian people far back in the past. The assumption is quite as reasonable that the rite was either a simple exhibition of bravado, or the expression of a desire on the part of the chief to thereby more strictly identify himself with the offering in the eyes of the gods.
Although they were somewhat barbaric in the way a brave, warm-hearted, and hospitable people could be, every social, political, and religious custom preserved by tradition suggests that at no time in their history did the Polynesians—especially the Hawaiian branch—practice cannibalism. During their migrations from the southern coasts of Asia to their final homes in the Pacific, stopping at various islands along the way, the Polynesians must have encountered cannibal tribes. However, they were never persuaded to adopt the practice of eating human flesh or to view it any differently than with aversion and disgust. In offering a human sacrifice, it was customary for the officiating priest to remove the left eye of the victim after the body had been placed on the altar and present it to the chief, who pretended to eat it. Even a knowledgeable and diligent researcher like Judge Fornander has suggested that this custom might be a leftover from a time when the Polynesians had cannibalistic tendencies. It is just as reasonable to assume that the ritual was either a display of bravado or a way for the chief to more closely align himself with the offering in the eyes of the gods.
Several traditions have come down the centuries referring to the existence of cannibal tribes or bands at one time or another in the Hawaiian archipelago, particularly on the islands of Oahu and Kauai, and harrowing stories of their exploits are a part of the folk-lore of the group. But in every instance the man-eaters are spoken of as foreigners, who came from a land unknown, maintained local footholds for brief seasons in mountain fastnesses, [372]and in the end were either exterminated or driven from the islands by the people for their barbarous practices. It is difficult to fix, even approximately, the period of the earlier of these occurrences, as they are mentioned in connection with ruling chiefs whose names do not appear in the chronological meles surviving the destruction of the ancient priesthood. Instead of being foreigners, it is not improbable that the cannibals referred to in some of the traditions were the remnants of a race of savages found on one or more of the islands of the group when the first of the Polynesians landed there. This, it may be presumed, was somewhere near the middle of the fifth century of the Christian era.
Several traditions have been passed down through the centuries referring to the existence of cannibal tribes or groups at various times in the Hawaiian archipelago, particularly on the islands of Oahu and Kauai. Harrowing stories of their exploits are part of the group's folklore. However, in every instance, the man-eaters are described as outsiders who came from an unknown land, establishing temporary footholds in the mountainous regions, [__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__] and were ultimately either exterminated or driven from the islands by the local people due to their barbaric practices. It is challenging to pinpoint, even roughly, the time of these earlier occurrences, as they are associated with ruling chiefs whose names do not appear in the chronological meles that survived the destruction of the ancient priesthood. Instead of being foreigners, it’s possible that the cannibals mentioned in some of the traditions were remnants of a savage race found on one or more of the islands when the first Polynesians arrived. This arrival is presumed to have occurred around the middle of the fifth century of the Christian era.
It has generally been assumed by native historians that the ancestors of the Hawaiian people found the entire group uninhabited at the time of their arrival there. The bird, the lizard and the mouse, with an insect life confined to few varieties, were the sole occupants of that ocean paradise, with its beautiful streams, its inviting hills, its sandal forests, its cocoa and ohia groves, its flowering plains, its smiling valleys of everlasting green. But the interval between the fifth century and the eleventh—between the first and second periods of Polynesian arrival—is a broad blank in the legendary annals of Hawaii, and the absence of any record of the circumstance cannot be satisfactorily accepted as evidence that, on arriving at the group from the southern islands, the Polynesians of the fifth century did not find it sparsely occupied by an inferior and less capable people, whom they either affiliated with or destroyed. In some of the meles vague references are made to such a people, and ruins of temples are still pointed out as the work of the Menehunes—a half-mythical race or tribe, either from whom the Hawaiians descended, or with whom they were in some manner connected in the remote past.
It’s generally believed by native historians that when the ancestors of the Hawaiian people arrived, they found the entire group uninhabited. Only birds, lizards, and mice, along with a limited variety of insects, occupied that ocean paradise, which featured beautiful streams, inviting hills, sandalwood forests, cocoa, and ohia groves, along with its flowering plains and lush green valleys. However, the period between the fifth and eleventh centuries—between the first and second waves of Polynesian arrivals—is largely a gap in Hawaii's legendary history, and the lack of any records from that time cannot convincingly support the idea that the Polynesians of the fifth century found the islands entirely unpopulated. They may have encountered a small group of less advanced people, whom they either integrated with or displaced. Some of the meles make vague references to such a group, and the ruins of temples are still attributed to the Menehunes—a semi-mythical tribe from whom the Hawaiians either descended or had some connection in the distant past.
To whatever period, however, many of these stories of cannibalism may refer, circumstances tend to show that the legends connected with the man-eaters of Halemanu are based upon events of comparatively recent centuries. The natives, who still relate fragments of these legends to those whom curiosity prompts to visit the cannibals’ retreat near the northern coast of Oahu, generally refer the adventures described to the early part or middle of the eighteenth century, and a half-caste of intelligence [373]informed the writer that his grandfather had personal knowledge of the cannibal band. Although the sharpness of the details preserved indicates that their beginning could not have been very many generations back, the occupation of Halemanu by Aikanaka and his savage followers could have occurred scarcely later than the latter part of the seventeenth century—probably during the reign of Kualii or his immediate successor, somewhere between the years 1660 and 1695. At that time Oahu was governed by a number of practically independent chiefs, whose nominal head was the governing alii-nui of the line of Kakuhihewa, of whom Kualii was the great-grandson.
To whatever time, many of these stories about cannibalism seem to be based on events from relatively recent centuries. The locals, who still share bits of these tales with those curious enough to visit the cannibals' retreat near the northern coast of Oahu, usually date the adventures described to the early or middle part of the eighteenth century. A knowledgeable mixed-race person [__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__] told the writer that his grandfather had firsthand knowledge of the cannibal group. Though the vividness of the details kept suggests that their origins weren't too many generations ago, the occupation of Halemanu by Aikanaka and his savage followers likely happened no later than the late seventeenth century—probably during the reign of Kualii or his immediate successor, between the years 1660 and 1695. At that time, Oahu was ruled by several mostly independent chiefs, with the nominal leader being the governing alii-nui from the line of Kakuhihewa, of whom Kualii was the great-grandson.
It will therefore be assumed that it was near the close of the seventeenth century that Kalo Aikanaka, with two or three hundred followers, including women and children, landed at Waialua, on the northern coast of Oahu, and temporarily established himself on the sea-shore not far from that place. Ten years before, more or less, he had arrived with a considerable party at Kauai from one of the southern islands—which one tradition does not mention. The strangers came in double canoes, and, as they were in a starving condition, it was thought that they had been blown thither by adverse winds while journeying to some other islands. They were hospitably received and cared for by the people of Kauai, and for their support were given lands near the foot of the mountains back of Waimea. In complexion they were somewhat darker than the Kauaians, but otherwise did not differ greatly from them either in dress, manners, modes of living or appearance. They knew how to weave mats, construct houses of timber and thatch, make spears and knives, and hollow out canoes of all dimensions. They were familiar with the cocoanut and its uses, and required no instruction in the cultivation of kalo or taro. They were expert fishermen, and handled their weapons with dexterity. Their language, however, was entirely different from that of the Kauaians; but they soon acquired a knowledge of the latter, and in a short time could scarcely be distinguished from the natives of the island.
It will therefore be assumed that it was around the end of the seventeenth century when Kalo Aikanaka, along with two or three hundred followers, including women and children, landed at Waialua on the northern coast of Oahu and temporarily set up camp on the beach not far from that spot. About ten years earlier, more or less, he had arrived with a sizeable group at Kauai from one of the southern islands—though tradition does not specify which one. The newcomers came in double canoes and, being in a starving condition, it seemed they had been blown there by unfavorable winds while trying to reach other islands. They were warmly welcomed and taken care of by the people of Kauai, who gave them land near the base of the mountains behind Waimea for their support. They had slightly darker skin than the Kauaians, but otherwise, they weren't very different in terms of clothing, behavior, lifestyle, or appearance. They knew how to weave mats, build houses from timber and thatch, make spears and knives, and carve canoes of various sizes. They were familiar with coconuts and their uses and didn’t need help learning to grow kalo or taro. They were skilled fishermen and handled their tools with skill. Their language, however, was completely different from that of the Kauaians; but they quickly learned the latter and soon could barely be distinguished from the island's natives.
Although known as Kalo Aikanaka by the natives, the real name of the chief of the strangers was Kokoa. The name of his principal lieutenant or adviser, which is given as Kaaokeewe by tradition, was Lotu, or Lotua. Kokoa was of chiefly proportions, and his muscular limbs were tattooed with rude representations of [374]birds, sharks and other fishes. His features were rather of the Papuan cast, but his hair was straight, and the expression of his face was not unpleasant. The appearance of Lotu, on the contrary, was savage and forbidding. His strength was prodigious, and he made but little disguise of his lawless instincts. The wife of Kokoa had died during the passage to Kauai, leaving with him a daughter of marriageable age named Palua. Tradition says she was very beautiful, and wore necklaces and anklets of pearls. Her eyes were bright, her teeth were white, and the ends of her braided hair touched her brown ankles as she walked. Lotu was married, but without children. He did not like them, and more than one, it is said, had been taken from the breast of Kaholekua and strangled.
Although the locals called him Kalo Aikanaka, the real name of the chief of the strangers was Kokoa. His main lieutenant or advisor, traditionally known as Kaaokeewe, was Lotu, or Lotua. Kokoa was large and muscular, his limbs covered in tattoos of birds, sharks, and other fish. His features resembled those of the Papuan people, but his hair was straight, and he had a pleasant expression. In contrast, Lotu looked fierce and intimidating. He was incredibly strong and didn’t try to hide his aggressive instincts. Kokoa's wife had died during the journey to Kauai, leaving him with a daughter of marriageable age named Palua. Tradition says she was very beautiful, adorned with pearl necklaces and anklets. Her eyes sparkled, her teeth were white, and her long braided hair brushed against her brown ankles as she walked. Lotu was married but had no children; he didn’t like them, and it’s said that he had more than one baby taken from Kaholekua's breast and suffocated.
The strangers brought with them two or three gods, and made others after their arrival. They knew nothing of the gods of the Kauaians, and preferred to worship their own. To this the natives did not object; but in the course of time they discovered that their tabu customs, even the most sacred, were not observed by the strangers. Their women were permitted to eat cocoanuts, bananas, and all kinds of flesh and fish, including the varieties of which native females were not allowed to partake. Fearing the wrath of the gods, the chief of the district visited Kokoa and requested him to put a stop to these pernicious practices among his people. He promised to do so, and for a time they ceased; but the offenders soon fell back into their old habit of indiscriminate eating, and the chief again visited Kokoa, prepared to put his previous request into the form of an order. The order was given, but not with the emphasis designed by the chief in making the visit, for he then met Palua for the first time, and found it difficult to speak harshly to the father of such a daughter. In fact, before he left the chief thought it well to leave the matter open for further explanation, and the next day returned to make it, and to ask Kokoa, as well, to give him the beautiful Palua for a wife. Father and daughter both consented, and within a few days Palua accompanied the chief home as his wife. There, at least, it was expected that Palua would respect the tabus she had violated before her coming, and the chief appointed a woman to instruct her thoroughly in the regulations applicable to her changed condition. She promised everything, but secretly complied with no requirement. The chief implored her to obey [375]the mandates of the gods, and sought to screen her acts from the eyes of others; but her misdemeanors became so flagrant that they at last came to the knowledge of the high-priest, and her life was demanded. Her husband would have returned Palua to her father, but the priest declared that her offences had been so wanton and persistent that the gods would be satisfied with nothing short of her death, and she was therefore strangled and thrown into the sea.
The strangers brought two or three gods with them and created more after they arrived. They knew nothing about the gods of the Kauaians and chose to worship their own. The locals didn’t mind this at first; however, over time, they noticed that their tabu customs, even the most sacred ones, were not being followed by the newcomers. Their women were allowed to eat coconuts, bananas, and all types of meat and fish, including those that the local women were forbidden to touch. Concerned about the anger of the gods, the district chief went to Kokoa and asked him to stop these harmful practices among his people. Kokoa agreed to help, and for a while, the behavior stopped; but soon the offenders returned to their old ways of eating freely, and the chief went back to Kokoa, ready to turn his previous request into a command. The order was given, but it lacked the forceful tone the chief intended, as he met Palua for the first time and found it hard to speak sternly to the father of such a daughter. In fact, before he left, the chief decided it would be best to keep the matter open for more discussion, and the next day he returned to explain further and to ask Kokoa for Palua's hand in marriage. Both father and daughter agreed, and soon Palua went home with the chief as his wife. There, it was expected that Palua would honor the tabus she had broken before arriving, and the chief assigned a woman to teach her the rules relevant to her new position. She promised to follow everything but secretly ignored all the requirements. The chief urged her to obey the commands of the gods and tried to hide her actions from others; however, her misbehavior became so blatant that eventually it reached the high priest, who demanded her life. Her husband would have returned Palua to her father, but the priest insisted that her offenses had been so reckless and continuous that nothing less than her death would appease the gods, so she was strangled and thrown into the sea.
Learning of the death of his daughter, Kokoa in his rage slew a near kinsman of the chief and made a feast of his body, to the great delight of his followers. They were cannibals, but the fact was not known to their neighbors, as they had thus far restrained their appetites for human flesh, and avoided all mention to others of their propensity for such food. Their relish for it, however, was revived by the feast provided by the wrath of Kokoa, and they were not sorry to leave the lands they had been for some time cultivating back of Waimea, and find a home in the neighboring mountains, where they could indulge their savage tastes without restraint.
Learning of his daughter Kokoa's death, he killed a close relative of the chief in his rage and served up his body at a feast, much to the enjoyment of his followers. They were cannibals, but their neighbors didn't know this since they had managed to control their cravings for human flesh and had never talked about their taste for such food. However, their appetite was reignited by the feast made possible by Kokoa's fury, and they were glad to leave the lands they had been farming near Waimea to settle in the nearby mountains, where they could indulge their savage desires freely.
Locating in a secluded valley in the mountains of Haupu, Kokoa and his people remained there for several years. They cultivated taro and other vegetables, and for their meat depended upon such natives as they were able to capture in out-of-the-way places and drag to their ovens. Suspected of cannibalism, they were finally detected in the act of roasting a victim. Great indignation and excitement followed this discovery, and the chief of the district called for warriors to assist him in exterminating the man-eaters. But Kokoa did not wait for a hostile visit. His spies informed him of what was occurring in the valleys below, and he hastily dropped down to the opposite coast, seized a number of canoes at night, and with his followers immediately set sail for Oahu. The party first landed at Kawailoa; but a Kauaian on a visit to that place recognized one of their canoes as the property of his brother, and was about to appeal to the local chief, when they suddenly re-embarked and coasted around the island to Waialua, where they found a convenient landing and concluded to remain. [376]
Hiding out in a remote valley in the Haupu mountains, Kokoa and his people stayed there for several years. They grew taro and other vegetables, and for meat, they relied on capturing natives from isolated areas and bringing them back to cook. Accused of cannibalism, they were caught in the act of roasting a victim. This discovery sparked great outrage and excitement, prompting the local chief to call for warriors to help eliminate the man-eaters. But Kokoa didn’t wait for a hostile confrontation. His spies told him what was happening in the valleys below, so he quickly moved to the opposite coast, seized several canoes at night, and set sail for Oahu with his followers. The group first landed at Kawailoa; however, a Kauaian visiting that area recognized one of their canoes as belonging to his brother and was about to inform the local chief when they suddenly got back on their canoes and sailed around the island to Waialua, where they found a good landing spot and decided to stay. [__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]
II.
We now come to the final exploits of Kokoa and his clan in Oahu. It is probable that they did not remain long in the immediate neighborhood of Waialua, where the people were numerous and unoccupied lands were scarce. Sending their scouts into the mountains in search of a safe and uninhabited retreat, one of exceptional advantages was found in the range east of Waialua, some eight or ten miles from the coast, and thither they removed. The spot selected has since been known as Halemanu. Before that time it was probably without any particular name. It is a crescent-shaped plateau of two or three hundred acres, completely surrounded by deep and almost precipitous ravines, with the exception of a narrow isthmus, scarcely wide enough for a carriage-way, connecting it with a broad area of timberless table-land stretching downward toward the sea.
We now come to the final adventures of Kokoa and his clan in Oahu. They likely didn’t stay long near Waialua, where the population was dense and vacant land was hard to find. Sending their scouts into the mountains to look for a safe, uninhabited place, they discovered an exceptional location in the range east of Waialua, about eight or ten miles from the coast, and they moved there. The spot they chose is now known as Halemanu. Before that, it probably didn’t have a specific name. It’s a crescent-shaped plateau of two or three hundred acres, completely surrounded by deep and nearly vertical ravines, except for a narrow isthmus, hardly wide enough for a carriage, connecting it to a large area of treeless table-land that slopes down toward the sea.
Nature could scarcely have devised a place better fitted for defence, and Kokoa resolved to permanently locate there. Near the middle of the plateau he erected a temple, with stone walls two hundred feet by sixty, and twenty feet in height. This structure was also designed as a citadel, to be used in emergencies. About fifty paces from the temple was the hale of the chief—a stone building of the dimensions of perhaps fifty feet by forty. It was divided into three rooms by wicker partitions, and roofed with stout poles and thatch. Between this building and the temple was a large excavated oven, with a capacity for roasting four or five human bodies at the same time, and a few paces to the westward was the great carving-platter of Kokoa. This was a slightly basin-shaped stone rising a foot or more above the surface, and having a superfice of perhaps six by four feet. A little hewing here and there transformed it into a convenient carving-table, from which hundreds of human bodies were apportioned to his followers by Kokoa, who reserved for himself the hearts and livers, as delicacies to which his rank entitled him. The lines of the buildings described may still be traced among the tall grass, and the oily-appearing surface of the carving-table, known as “Kalo’s ipukai” bears testimony to this day to the use made of it by the cannibals of Halemanu. The platter is now almost level with the surface of the ground, and its rim has been chipped down by relic-hunters, but time [377]and the spoliations of the curious have not materially changed its shape.
Nature could hardly have created a place better suited for defense, and Kokoa decided to settle there permanently. In the center of the plateau, he built a temple with stone walls measuring two hundred feet by sixty and rising twenty feet high. This structure also served as a citadel for emergencies. About fifty paces from the temple was the hale of the chief—a stone building roughly fifty feet by forty. It was divided into three rooms by wicker partitions and had a roof made of sturdy poles and thatch. Between this building and the temple was a large excavated oven capable of roasting four or five human bodies at once, and a few paces to the west was Kokoa's great carving-platter. This was a shallow, basin-shaped stone that rose about a foot above the ground, measuring approximately six by four feet. A little carving transformed it into a convenient carving table, from which Kokoa allocated portions of hundreds of human bodies to his followers, keeping the hearts and livers for himself as delicacies befitting his rank. The outlines of these buildings can still be seen among the tall grass, and the oily-looking surface of the carving table, known as “Kalo’s ipukai,” still bears witness to its use by the cannibals of Halemanu. The platter is now almost level with the ground, and its rim has been worn down by relic hunters, but time [__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__] and the actions of the curious have not significantly altered its shape.
Having provided the plateau with these conveniences and the huts necessary to accommodate his people, Kokoa next put the place in a condition for defence by cutting the tops of the exposed slopes leading to it into perpendicular declivities, and erecting a strong building covering the width and almost entire length of the narrow back-bone connecting it with the plain below. There was then no means of reaching the plateau except by a path zigzagging down the upper side to the timbered gulches beyond, or by the trail passing directly through the building occupying the apex of the isthmus.
Having equipped the plateau with these amenities and the huts needed for his people, Kokoa then fortified the area by cutting the tops of the exposed slopes into steep cliffs and building a strong structure that spanned the width and nearly the entire length of the narrow ridge connecting it to the plain below. At that point, there was no way to access the plateau except by a path that zigzagged down the upper side to the forested valleys beyond, or by the trail that went straight through the building at the peak of the isthmus.
Of this entrance Lotu, the savage lieutenant of Kokoa, was made the custodian. And there he sat in all weather, watching for passers, the most of whom, if acceptable, he found a pretext for slaying and sending to the great oven of his companions. His almost sleepless watchfulness was due less to a disposition to serve others than to his merciless instincts, which found gratification in blood-letting and torture. Tradition says there was a hideous humor in the manner in which he dealt with many of his victims. In allowing them to pass he inquired the objects of their visits either to the plateau or the gulches beyond. They informed him, perhaps, that they were in quest of hala leaves, of poles for huts, of wood for surf-boards, of small trees for spears, or of flints for cutting implements, as the case may have been. When they returned he examined their burdens closely, and if aught was found beyond the thing of which they were specifically in search—even though so trifling an object as a walking-staff, or a twig or flower gathered by the way—he denounced them as thieves and liars, and slew them on the spot.
Lotu, the brutal lieutenant of Kokoa, was put in charge of this entrance. He sat there in all kinds of weather, watching for anyone passing by. Most of them, if he found them acceptable, he found a reason to kill and send to the great oven with his companions. His nearly constant vigilance was driven less by a desire to help others and more by his ruthless instincts, which thrived on violence and torture. Legend says he had a dark sense of humor in how he treated many of his victims. He would let some pass but would ask them about their reasons for visiting either the plateau or the nearby gulches. They might tell him they were looking for hala leaves, poles for huts, wood for surfboards, small trees for spears, or flints for cutting tools, depending on their needs. Upon their return, he would closely inspect their loads, and if he found anything beyond what they were supposed to have—even something as small as a walking stick or a twig or flower picked up along the way—he would label them thieves and liars and kill them on the spot.
In this manner many hundreds of people were slain and eaten; but as no one ever returned to tell the story of what was transpiring at Halemanu, the cannibals remained for some time undisturbed. But if their real character was not known, their isolation and strange conduct gradually gained for them the reputation of being an evil-minded and dangerous community, and visitors became so scarce at length that Lotu found it necessary to drop down into the valleys occasionally in search of victims. Nor were these expeditions, which demanded great caution, always successful; and when they failed, Lotu sometimes [378]secretly killed and sent to the oven one of his own people, with faces mutilated beyond recognition. Among these were all of his own relatives and two of the three brothers of his wife. To escape the fate of the others, the surviving brother, whose name was Napopo, fled to Kauai.
In this way, many hundreds of people were killed and eaten; but since no one ever came back to tell the story of what was happening at Halemanu, the cannibals remained undisturbed for a while. Although their true nature wasn't known, their isolation and strange behavior slowly earned them a reputation as a sinister and dangerous community, causing visitors to become so rare that Lotu found it necessary to venture into the valleys occasionally in search of victims. These outings, requiring great caution, weren't always successful; and when they failed, Lotu sometimes secretly killed and sent one of his own people, with faces mutilated beyond recognition, to the oven. Among these were all of his own relatives and two of the three brothers of his wife. To escape the fate of the others, the surviving brother, named Napopo, fled to Kauai.
In physical strength Napopo was scarcely less formidable than Lotu; but he was young in years, and lacked both skill and confidence in his powers. To supply these deficiencies, and prepare himself for a successful encounter with Lotu, which he resolved to undertake in revenge for the death of his brothers, he sought the most expert wrestlers and boxers on Kauai, and learned from them the secrets of their prowess. He trained himself in running, swimming, leaping, climbing, and lifting and casting great rocks, until his muscles became like hard wood, and his equal in strength and agility could with difficulty be found on all the island. And he skilled himself, also, in the use of arms. He learned to catch and parry flying spears, and hurl them with incredible force and precision. From the sling he could throw a stone larger than a cocoanut, and the battle-axe he readily wielded with one hand few men were able to swing with two. Having thus accomplished himself, and still distrustful of his powers, he made the offer of a canoe nine paces in length to any one who in a trial should prove to be his master either in feats of strength or the handling of warlike weapons. Many contested for the prize, but Napopo found a superior in no one.
In terms of physical strength, Napopo was almost as impressive as Lotu; however, he was younger and lacked both skill and confidence in his abilities. To address these gaps and prepare himself for a successful confrontation with Lotu, which he was determined to pursue as revenge for his brothers' deaths, he sought out the best wrestlers and boxers on Kauai and learned the secrets of their prowess. He trained in running, swimming, jumping, climbing, and lifting and throwing large rocks until his muscles felt like hard wood, making it hard to find anyone on the island who matched his strength and agility. He also practiced with weapons, learning to block and throw spears with incredible force and accuracy. He could hurl a stone bigger than a coconut with a sling, and he could easily swing a battle-axe with one hand—something most men struggled to do with two. Having built his skills, yet still unsure of himself, he offered a canoe nine paces long to anyone who could outdo him in feats of strength or weapon handling. Many tried for the prize, but Napopo found no one superior to him.
During the contests a strong man, with large jaws and a thick neck, came forward and challenged Napopo to compete with him in lifting heavy burdens with the teeth. The bystanders were amused at the proposal, and Napopo was compelled by their remarks and laughter to accept it, although he regarded it as frivolous. Fastening around his middle a girdle of cords, he cast himself on the ground and said to the man: “Now with your teeth lift me to the level of your breast.” Stooping and seizing the girdle in his teeth, the man with a great effort lifted Napopo to the height demanded. The other was then girded in the same manner. He seemed to be confident of victory, and said to Napopo, as he threw himself at his feet: “You will do well if you raise me to the level of your knees.” Napopo made no reply, but bent and gathered the girdle well between his teeth, and raised the body to the height of his loins. “Higher!” exclaimed [379]the man, thinking the strength of his antagonist was even then taxed to its utmost; “my body is scarcely free from the ground!” He had scarcely uttered these words before Napopo rose erect, and with a quick motion threw him completely over his head. Bruised and half-stunned by the fall, the man struggled to his feet, and, with a look of wonder at Napopo, hurriedly left the place to escape the jeers of the shouting witnesses of his defeat.
During the contests, a strong man with a big jaw and thick neck stepped up and challenged Napopo to a contest of lifting heavy weights with their teeth. The crowd found the idea amusing, and Napopo was pressured by their comments and laughter to accept, even though he thought it was silly. He secured a belt made of cords around his waist, laid down on the ground, and said to the man, “Now lift me up to your chest level with your teeth.” Bending down, the man grabbed the belt with his teeth and, with a great effort, lifted Napopo to the requested height. The man was then strapped in the same way. He seemed confident that he would win and said to Napopo as he lowered himself to the ground, “You’ll do well if you lift me to your knees.” Napopo didn’t respond but bent down, took the belt firmly in his teeth, and raised the man to his waist level. “Higher!” shouted the man, thinking that Napopo was already pushing his limits; “I’m barely off the ground!” Just as he finished saying this, Napopo stood up straight and, in one quick motion, tossed him completely over his head. Bruised and half-dazed from the fall, the man scrambled to his feet and, with a look of disbelief at Napopo, hurried away to avoid the taunts from the crowd witnessing his defeat.
Now confident of his strength and satisfied with his skill, Napopo returned to Oahu in the canoe which so many had failed to win. Landing at Waialua, he by some means learned that his sister, Kaholekua, the wife of Lotu, had been killed by her husband. Arming himself with a spear and knife of sharks’ teeth, Napopo proceeded to Halemanu. Arriving at the house barring the entrance to the stronghold, he was met at the door by Lotu. Their recognition was cold. The eyes of Lotu gleamed with satisfaction. No longer intimidated, as in the past, Napopo paid back the look with a bearing of defiance.
Now confident in his strength and pleased with his skills, Napopo returned to Oahu in the canoe that so many had failed to master. When he landed at Waialua, he somehow found out that his sister, Kaholekua, the wife of Lotu, had been killed by her husband. Armed with a spear and a knife made from shark teeth, Napopo headed to Halemanu. When he arrived at the house blocking the entrance to the stronghold, Lotu met him at the door. Their recognition was tense. Lotu's eyes sparkled with satisfaction. No longer intimidated as he once was, Napopo returned the look with a stance of defiance.
“Leave your spear and enter,” said Lotu, curtly.
“Put down your spear and come in,” Lotu said sharply.
Napopo leaned his spear against the house and stepped within, observing, as he did so, that Lotu in his movements kept within reach of an axe and javelin lying near the door.
Napopo leaned his spear against the house and stepped inside, noticing that Lotu, in his movements, stayed close to an axe and javelin lying near the door.
“Where is Kaholekua?” inquired Napopo.
"Where's Kaholekua?" asked Napopo.
“There,” replied Lotu, sullenly, pointing toward a curtain of mats stretched across a corner of the room.
“There,” Lotu said glumly, pointing toward a curtain of mats hung up in a corner of the room.
Without a word Napopo stepped to the curtain and drew it aside. He expected to find his sister dead, if at all, but she was still living, although lying insensible from wounds which seemed to be mortal. With a heart swelling with rage and anguish, he closed the curtain and returned to the door. He could not trust himself to speak, and therefore silently stepped without, in the hope that Lotu would leave his weapons and follow him. To this end he stood for a few minutes near the entrance, as if overwhelmed with grief, when Lotu cautiously approached the door. Advancing a step farther, Napopo suddenly turned and seized him before he could reach his weapons, and a desperate bare-handed struggle followed. Both were giants, and the conflict was ferocious and deadly. From one side to the other of the narrow isthmus they battled, biting, tearing, pulling, breaking, with no decided advantage to either; but the endurance of Napopo was [380]greater than that of his older antagonist, and in the end he was able to inflict injury without receiving dangerous punishment in return. Both of them were covered with blood, and their maros had been rent away in the struggle, leaving them perfectly nude.
Without saying a word, Napopo stepped up to the curtain and pulled it aside. He expected to find his sister dead, if she was there at all, but she was still alive, though unconscious from wounds that looked like they could be fatal. With his heart filled with rage and sorrow, he closed the curtain and went back to the door. He couldn't trust himself to speak, so he quietly stepped outside, hoping that Lotu would drop his weapons and follow him. To encourage this, he lingered for a few minutes near the entrance, acting as if he was overwhelmed with grief, when Lotu cautiously approached the door. As he took a step closer, Napopo suddenly turned and grabbed him before he could reach for his weapons, and a frantic bare-handed fight broke out. Both were giants, and the battle was fierce and deadly. They struggled back and forth across the narrow isthmus, biting, tearing, pulling, and breaking, with no clear advantage for either side; however, Napopo's endurance was [__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__] greater than that of his older opponent, and in the end, he managed to inflict injuries without taking serious punishment in return. Both of them were drenched in blood, and their maros had been ripped away during the fight, leaving them completely exposed.
Although Napopo had in a measure overpowered his mighty adversary, he found it difficult to kill him with his naked hands. He could tear and disfigure his flesh, but was unable to strangle him or break his spine. He therefore resolved to drag him to the verge of the precipice, and hurl him over it into the rocky abyss below. Struggling and fighting, the edge of the gulf was reached, when Lotu suddenly fastened his arms around his antagonist, and with a howl of desperation plunged over the brink. Dropping downward to destruction together, Lotu’s head was caught in the fork of a tree near the bottom of the declivity and torn from the body, and Napopo, clasped in the embrace of the lifeless but rigid trunk, fell dead and mangled among the rocks of the ravine still farther down.
Although Napopo had somewhat overpowered his powerful opponent, he found it hard to kill him with his bare hands. He could tear and injure his flesh but couldn’t strangle him or break his spine. So, he decided to drag him to the edge of the cliff and throw him into the rocky abyss below. As they struggled and fought, they reached the edge of the gorge when Lotu suddenly wrapped his arms around his rival and, with a cry of desperation, plunged over the edge. Falling down to their doom together, Lotu’s head got caught in the fork of a tree near the bottom of the slope and was torn from his body, while Napopo, held tight in the grip of the lifeless but rigid trunk, fell dead and mangled among the rocks of the ravine even further down.
Recovering her consciousness during the battle, Kaholekua dragged herself from the house just in time to witness the descent of the desperate combatants over the precipice. Approaching the verge, she uttered a feeble wail of anguish and plunged headlong down the declivity, her mangled remains lodging within a few paces of those of her husband and brother.
Recovering her awareness during the fight, Kaholekua pulled herself out of the house just in time to see the desperate fighters tumble over the edge. As she approached the brink, she let out a weak cry of pain and jumped headfirst down the slope, her broken body coming to rest just a few feet away from her husband and brother.
The conclusion of these tragical scenes was observed by a party from the plateau above—one tradition says by Kokoa himself. However this may be, the cannibal chief concluded that Halemanu was no longer a desirable retreat, and a few days after crossed the mountains to Waianae with his remaining followers, and soon thereafter set sail with them for other lands. What became of the party is not known; but with their departure ends the latest and most vivid of the several legends of cannibalism in the Hawaiian archipelago. [381]
The conclusion of these tragic events was witnessed by a group from the plateau above—one story claims it was Kokoa himself. Regardless of the truth, the cannibal chief decided that Halemanu was no longer a safe place and a few days later crossed the mountains to Waianae with his remaining followers, and soon after set sail with them for other lands. What happened to the group is unknown; however, their departure marks the end of the latest and most vivid of the many legends of cannibalism in the Hawaiian archipelago. [__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]
Kaiana, the Last of the Hawaiian Knights.
[382]
[__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]
CHARACTERS.
- Kalaniopuu, king of Hawaii.
- Kolale, wife of Kalaniopuu.
- Kiwalao, son of Kalaniopuu, and his successor.
- Liliha, wife of Kiwalao.
- Keopuolani, daughter of Kiwalao.
- Keoua, half-brother of Kiwalao.
- Keawemauhili, uncle of Kiwalao.
- Kamehameha I., successor of Kiwalao.
-
Keeaumoku, brothers and leaders of Hawaii. Kameeiamoku and Kamanawa, - Kaahumanu, one of the wives of Kamehameha I.
- Kahekili, king of Maui.
- Kalanikupule, king of Oahu, son of Kahekili.
- Kaeo, king of Kauai.
- Kamakahelei, queen of Kauai.
- Imakakaloa, chief of Puna.
- Kalaimoku, a distinguished chief.
- Kakuhaupio, a counsellor of Kamehameha I.
- Kaiana, one of the captains of Kamehameha I.
- Kepupuohi, wife of Kaiana.
- Nahiolea, brother of Kaiana.
[383]
[__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]
KAIANA, THE LAST OF THE HAWAIIAN KNIGHTS.
KAIANA, THE LAST OF THE HAWAIIAN KNIGHTS.
KAMEHAMEHA, KAAHUMANU, CAPTAIN COOK, AND THE FINAL CONQUEST.
KAMEHAMEHA, KAAHUMANU, CAPTAIN COOK, AND THE FINAL CONQUEST.
I.
Among the distinguished Hawaiian chiefs connected with the final conquest and consolidation of the group by Kamehameha the Great, and standing in the gray dawn of the close of the eighteenth century, when the islands were rediscovered by Captain Cook and tradition began to give place to recorded history, was Kaiana-a-Ahaula. He was one of Kamehameha’s greatest captains, and the events of his life, which closed with his death in the last battle of the conquest, embrace one of the most interesting periods in Hawaiian history. After giving to the conqueror his best energies for years, and faithfully assisting in cementing the foundations of his greatness, he turned against him on the very eve of final triumph, and perished in attempting to destroy by a single blow the power he had helped to create.
Among the notable Hawaiian chiefs involved in the final takeover and unification of the islands by Kamehameha the Great, standing at the dawn of the late eighteenth century when Captain Cook rediscovered the islands and tradition began to shift into recorded history, was Kaiana-a-Ahaula. He was one of Kamehameha’s top captains, and the events of his life, which ended with his death in the last battle of the conquest, encompass one of the most fascinating periods in Hawaiian history. After dedicating his best efforts to the conqueror for years and playing a key role in building the foundations of his greatness, he turned against him just before the final victory and died trying to eliminate the very power he had helped establish.
What was it that caused Kaiana to turn his spear in hopeless desperation against his victorious chief, to whom the gods and their prophets had promised everything? Had not Pele destroyed his enemies with fire and smoke? and had not Keaulumoku, the inspired bard of Naohaku, chanted the fadeless glory of his triumphs? The war-god of Liloa—the fateful Kaili—led the van of his conquering columns, and Kalaipahoa, the poison god of Molokai, was among the deities of his household. The high-priest Hewahewa, who traced his sacerdotal line back to Paao, was his mediator in the temples, and every voice from the anu was a note of encouragement and promise of victory. The great chiefs of Hawaii were his friends, and his war-canoes cruised almost unopposed throughout the eight Hawaiian seas. Musket and cannon had been added to his weapons [384]of war, and white men had enlisted to some extent in his service. But, with all these advantages and assurances of success, Kaiana suddenly threw defiance in his face and became his open enemy.
What made Kaiana turn his spear in hopeless desperation against his victorious chief, to whom the gods and their prophets had promised everything? Hadn’t Pele defeated his enemies with fire and smoke? And hadn’t Keaulumoku, the inspired bard of Naohaku, sung the timeless glory of his victories? The war-god of Liloa—the fateful Kaili—led the charge of his conquering forces, and Kalaipahoa, the poison god of Molokai, was among the deities in his circle. The high-priest Hewahewa, who traced his priestly lineage back to Paao, acted as his mediator in the temples, and every voice from the anu was a note of encouragement and promise of victory. The great chiefs of Hawaii were his allies, and his war-canoes sailed nearly unchallenged across the eight Hawaiian seas. Muskets and cannons had been added to his arsenal of war, and some white men had even joined his ranks. But despite all these advantages and guarantees of success, Kaiana suddenly turned against him and became his open enemy.
By some the defection of Kaiana has been attributed to cold-blooded and unprovoked treachery; by others to an assumption by Kaiana that by blood Kamehameha was not entitled to the sovereignty of the group, and that his defeat in Oahu would dispose of his pretensions in that direction, and possibly open to himself a way to supreme power; and by still others to the jealousies of Kamehameha, which rendered the life of Kaiana no longer safe in his service. By these it is claimed that Kamehameha was jealous, not only of the growing military fame of Kaiana, but of a suspected regard of his favorite wife, Kaahumanu, for the handsome and distinguished chief. And this, indeed, as shown by native and other testimony, seems to have been the leading if not sole cause of the estrangement between Kamehameha and his great captain.
Some people attribute Kaiana's betrayal to cold, unprovoked treachery; others believe it stemmed from Kaiana's assumption that Kamehameha wasn't entitled to lead the group by blood, and that his defeat in Oahu would put an end to his claims and possibly open up a path for himself to ultimate power. Still, others point to Kamehameha's jealousy, which made Kaiana's life unsafe while in his service. They argue that Kamehameha was jealous not only of Kaiana's rising military reputation but also of a suspected affection from his favorite wife, Kaahumanu, for the handsome and distinguished chief. This, in fact, appears to be the main, if not the only, reason for the rift between Kamehameha and his great captain, as supported by both native and other testimonies.
In the council of chiefs on the island of Molokai, to which Kaiana was not invited, and which he had reason to believe had decreed his death, ambition was the crime which Kamehameha imputed to him, when in truth the real and unmentioned offence was his suspected intimacy with Kaahumanu. And so it will appear that women’s eyes in Hawaii, as elsewhere, have in all ages swayed the hearts and nerved the arms of the greatest, and not unfrequently changed the current of vital political events.
In the council of chiefs on the island of Molokai, where Kaiana wasn’t invited and had reason to think they had decided on his death, Kamehameha accused him of ambition. However, the actual, unspoken issue was his suspected closeness to Kaahumanu. It shows that women’s influence in Hawaii, just like everywhere else, has always shaped the hearts and strengthened the resolve of the greatest leaders, often altering the course of significant political events.
But, before bringing Kaiana full into the light, it is proper that some reference should be made to the great chief under whose banners he so stubbornly fought, and against whose authority he finally rebelled; and in doing so it will be interesting, perhaps, to glance briefly at certain prominent events connected with the rediscovery of the islands by Captain Cook, the assumption of the sovereign authority of Hawaii by Kamehameha, and the final consolidation of the several islands of the group under one central government.
But, before bringing Kaiana fully into the light, it's fitting to mention the great chief under whose command he fought so fiercely and against whose authority he ultimately rebelled. In doing so, it might be interesting to briefly look at some key events related to Captain Cook's rediscovery of the islands, Kamehameha's claim of sovereignty over Hawaii, and the eventual unification of the islands under a single central government.
Kamehameha was a man of tremendous physical and intellectual strength. In any land and in any age he would have been a leader. The impress of his mind remains with his crude and vigorous laws, and wherever he stepped is seen an imperishable track. He was so strong of limb that ordinary men were but [385]children in his grasp, and in council the wisest yielded to his judgment. He seems to have been born a man and to have had no boyhood. He was always sedate and thoughtful, and from his earliest years cared for no sport or pastime that was not manly. He had a harsh and rugged face, less given to smiles than frowns, but strongly marked with lines indicative of self-reliance and changeless purpose. He was barbarous, unforgiving and merciless to his enemies, but just, sagacious and considerate in dealing with his subjects. He was more feared and admired than loved and respected; but his strength of arm and force of character well fitted him for the supreme chieftaincy of the group, and he accomplished what no one else could have done in his day.
Kamehameha was a man of exceptional physical and mental strength. In any place and any time, he would have been a leader. The mark of his intelligence is evident in his straightforward and powerful laws, and wherever he walked, he left a lasting impression. He was so strong that ordinary men felt like [__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]children in his grip, and in discussions, even the wisest would defer to his judgment. He seemed to have been born a man, showing no signs of boyhood. He was always serious and reflective, and from a young age, he had no interest in any sport or leisure activity that wasn't masculine. His face was tough and rugged, more accustomed to frowns than smiles, etched with lines that showed his self-reliance and unwavering determination. He was brutal, unforgiving, and relentless toward his enemies, but fair, wise, and considerate with his people. He was more feared and admired than loved and respected; however, his physical strength and strong character made him well-suited for the highest leadership of the group, accomplishing what no one else could in his time.
Kamehameha was born at Kohala, Hawaii, in November, 1740. His father was Keoua, half-brother of Kalaniopuu, and nephew of Alapainui, who was at that time king of Hawaii. His mother was Kekuiapoiwa, a granddaughter of Kalanikauleleiaiwi, who was a sister of Keawe, the previous moi of the island. This sister was the mother of Alapainui by a chief of the Mahi family of Kohala. With another husband—Lonoikahaupu, a tabu chief of Kauai—she became the mother of Keawepoepoe, who was the father of Keeaumoku, Kameeiamoku and Kamanawa, who, with Keawe-a-Heulu, were the principal chiefs and supporters of Kamehameha in his conquest of the group. By a Kauai wife Lonoikahaupu became the grandfather of Kaumualii, the last independent sovereign of Kauai, and grandfather of Kapiolani, the present queen of the islands.
Kamehameha was born in Kohala, Hawaii, in November 1740. His father was Keoua, the half-brother of Kalaniopuu, and the nephew of Alapainui, who was the king of Hawaii at that time. His mother was Kekuiapoiwa, a granddaughter of Kalanikauleleiaiwi, who was the sister of Keawe, the previous moi of the island. This sister was the mother of Alapainui, fathered by a chief from the Mahi family of Kohala. With another husband, Lonoikahaupu, a tabu chief of Kauai, she became the mother of Keawepoepoe, who was the father of Keeaumoku, Kameeiamoku, and Kamanawa. Those three, along with Keawe-a-Heulu, were the main chiefs who supported Kamehameha during his conquest of the islands. Through a Kauai wife, Lonoikahaupu became the grandfather of Kaumualii, the last independent sovereign of Kauai, and the grandfather of Kapiolani, the current queen of the islands.
Keawe, the previous king of Hawaii, had four recognized wives, and two others whose names have not been preserved by tradition. One of them was the mother of Ahaula, who was the father of Kaiana. On the death of Keawe his two elder sons lost their lives in a struggle for the mastery, and Alapainui, the son of the sister of Keawe, and who through his father was chief of Kohala, assumed the moiship, and, after a few battles, peacefully maintained his claim to it. Having secured the sovereignty of the island, he invited to court the elder sons of his two deceased half-brothers, and there maintained them until one of them died and the other rose in rebellion against him. These two sons were Kalaniopuu, who was king of the island at the time of the arrival of Captain Cook in 1778, and Keoua, the [386]father of Kamehameha. The mother of these wards of Alapainui was Kamakaimoku, a chiefess of Oahu. Their fathers having been brothers, and Kamakaimoku being the mother of both, they bore to each other the mixed relationship of half-brother and cousin. She also became the wife of Alapainui, and by him the mother of Manoua, who was the grandmother of Kekuaokalani, the last distinguished champion of idolatry in 1819.
Keawe, the former king of Hawaii, had four officially recognized wives and two others whose names haven't been preserved by tradition. One of them was the mother of Ahaula, who was the father of Kaiana. After Keawe died, his two older sons lost their lives in a power struggle, and Alapainui, the son of Keawe's sister and who was, through his father, the chief of Kohala, took the throne. After some battles, he successfully maintained his claim peacefully. Once he secured control of the island, he invited the older sons of his two deceased half-brothers to his court and kept them there until one of them died and the other rebelled against him. These two sons were Kalaniopuu, who was king of the island when Captain Cook arrived in 1778, and Keoua, the father of Kamehameha. Their guardian, Alapainui, was Kamakaimoku, a chiefess from Oahu. Since their fathers were brothers and Kamakaimoku was their mother, they shared a mixed relationship as half-brother and cousin. She also became Alapainui's wife and gave birth to Manoua, who was the grandmother of Kekuaokalani, the last notable champion of idolatry in 1819.
To this record of the tangled relationships of the chiefly families of the group at that period may be added the intimations of tradition that Peleioholani, a chief of Kauai, was the actual father of Kalaniopuu, and that Kahekili, the moi of Maui, was the real father of Kamehameha; and in proof of the latter the acts and admissions of Kahekili are cited. But these scandals may very properly be dismissed as the offspring of the hatred and jealousies of later years.
To this account of the complicated relationships among the chief families of the group at that time, we can add the traditions suggesting that Peleioholani, a chief of Kauai, was the true father of Kalaniopuu, and that Kahekili, the moi of Maui, was actually the father of Kamehameha. To support the latter claim, the actions and admissions of Kahekili are referenced. However, these rumors can rightly be considered the result of the hatred and jealousy that developed in later years.
Kamehameha was born at Kohala while Alapainui was there with his court, superintending the collection of a mighty fleet for the invasion of Maui. It was a stormy night, and the first sounds that greeted the ears of the infant chief were the howling of the winds and the din of warlike preparations. On the night of its birth the child was stolen from its mother’s side and carried away by Naeole, the chief of Halawa, and for some days nothing was heard of it. The father searched and the mother wailed, but the infant could not be found. It was finally discovered, however, and Naeole, instead of being punished for the theft, was allowed to keep possession of the child until it was five years old, when it was taken to the court of Alapainui and there reared as became a prince. Tradition assigns no reason for the theft of the child, or for the retention of it for five years by the kidnapper; but, whatever may have been the reason, it is manifest that Naeole’s offence was considered neither flagrant nor unusual.
Kamehameha was born in Kohala while Alapainui was there with his court, overseeing the gathering of a massive fleet for the invasion of Maui. It was a stormy night, and the first sounds the infant chief heard were the howling winds and the noise of war preparations. On the night he was born, the child was taken from his mother's side by Naeole, the chief of Halawa, and for several days, there were no updates about him. His father searched and his mother cried out, but the baby was nowhere to be found. Eventually, he was discovered, but instead of being punished for the kidnapping, Naeole was allowed to keep the child until he turned five. At that point, he was brought to Alapainui’s court and raised there like a prince. Tradition doesn't explain why the child was taken or why Naeole kept him for five years, but it seems clear that Naeole's actions were not seen as particularly serious or unusual.
When Kamehameha reached the age of twelve or fourteen years, his father, Keoua, suddenly died, and a suspicion became current that he had been either poisoned or prayed to death through the instrumentality of Alapainui. This suspicion seems to have been shared by Kalaniopuu, and believing, or assuming to believe, that his own life was in danger, he withdrew from the court and attempted to take with him Kamehameha; but in this he was frustrated. A fight occurred at Piopio while the body of Keoua was lying there in state, and Kalaniopuu was driven to [387]his war-canoe, in which he escaped. This act placed him in open revolt against his royal uncle, and he prepared to sustain it. Forces were hastily gathered on both sides, and after a few battles, in which Kalaniopuu was generally unsuccessful, he retired to the district of Kau, and declared himself the independent sovereign of the southern portion of the island. For some reason Alapainui did not disturb his rebellious nephew farther, but spent the two remaining years of his life in Hilo and Waipio, the residence of many of the ancient mois.
When Kamehameha was around twelve or fourteen, his father, Keoua, died unexpectedly, and there was a growing suspicion that he had either been poisoned or killed through sorcery by Alapainui. Kalaniopuu seemed to share this suspicion, and thinking his own life was in danger, he tried to leave the court and take Kamehameha with him; however, he was unsuccessful in this effort. A fight broke out at Piopio while Keoua's body was lying in state, forcing Kalaniopuu to escape in his war canoe. This act put him in open rebellion against his royal uncle, and he prepared to defend his position. Both sides quickly gathered forces, and after a few battles, which Kalaniopuu generally lost, he retreated to the Kau district, declaring himself the independent ruler of the southern part of the island. For some reason, Alapainui did not pursue his rebellious nephew any further and spent the last two years of his life in Hilo and Waipio, areas where many of the ancient mois lived.
When Alapainui died he was succeeded by his son Keaweopala. Dissatisfied with his allotment of lands, Keeaumoku, a nephew of the dead king, rebelled against the new moi, but was defeated and compelled to seek safety with Kalaniopuu, whom he found already in the field, intent upon contesting the sovereignty of the island with Keaweopala. The two joined forces, and met and defeated the royal army in Kona. Keaweopala was slain in battle, and Kalaniopuu was declared moi of Hawaii. Young Kamehameha was taken to the court of his royal uncle, and educated in all the princely accomplishments of the period.
When Alapainui died, his son Keaweopala took over. Unhappy with his share of the land, Keeaumoku, the late king's nephew, rebelled against the new moi, but he was defeated and had to flee for safety to Kalaniopuu, who was already preparing to challenge Keaweopala's rule over the island. The two teamed up and confronted the royal army in Kona, defeating them. Keaweopala was killed in the battle, and Kalaniopuu was proclaimed moi of Hawaii. Young Kamehameha was taken to his royal uncle's court and trained in all the noble skills of the time.
Although it is probable that Kamehameha took part in some of the earlier wars of Kalaniopuu, he makes his first prominent appearance in tradition as a military leader in about 1775, in a battle on Maui, between Kalaniopuu and Kahekili, the moi of that island, or of the greater portion of it. Kalaniopuu was defeated, but the conduct of Kamehameha was notably cool and sagacious. It is reasonable to believe that he also took part in the disastrous campaign of the following year, when the army of Kalaniopuu was almost annihilated on the lowlands near Wailuku.
Although it's likely that Kamehameha participated in some of Kalaniopuu's earlier wars, he first becomes a notable military leader in around 1775 during a battle on Maui between Kalaniopuu and Kahekili, the moi of that island or most of it. Kalaniopuu was defeated, but Kamehameha's actions were impressively calm and wise. It's reasonable to believe that he also took part in the disastrous campaign the following year when Kalaniopuu's army was nearly wiped out in the lowlands near Wailuku.
This battle was one of the most sanguinary spoken of in Hawaiian tradition. Kalaniopuu invaded the island with six heavy divisions of warriors of all arms. The members of the royal family were formed into a life-guard called Keawe, while the nobles entitled to the privilege of eating at the same table with the king composed two distinct brigades, known as Alapa and Piipii. A landing was effected on the southern side of the island. The headquarters of Kahekili were at Wailuku, between which and the coast stretched a slightly elevated sandy plain.
This battle was one of the bloodiest mentioned in Hawaiian tradition. Kalaniopuu invaded the island with six large divisions of warriors from various backgrounds. Members of the royal family formed a bodyguard called Keawe, while the nobles who had the privilege of eating at the same table as the king made up two separate brigades, known as Alapa and Piipii. They landed on the southern side of the island. Kahekili's headquarters were at Wailuku, and between there and the coast was a slightly raised sandy plain.
The Alapa took the advance, and, without waiting for support, pushed boldly on toward Wailuku. This brigade was the [388]flower of the Hawaiian army. It was composed of eight hundred men, each one of whom was of noble blood. They were all large men of nearly equal stature, and their spears were of equal length. Marching shoulder to shoulder, with feather capes and plumed helmets, tradition describes their advance as a spectacle such as had never before been witnessed. But Kahekili was not appalled at the sight. He permitted them to approach within a mile or more of Wailuku, when he suddenly precipitated upon them a force of four or five thousand spears. The battle was a slaughter. The Alapa refused to yield or retreat, and of the eight hundred helmeted chiefs but two escaped to tell the tale of the slaughter of their comrades. But a single prisoner was taken, and he died of his wounds before he could be despatched in form and offered in sacrifice. It was historic ground. On the sandy plain many battles had before been fought, and near and above it was the sacred burial-place of Iao, where had been deposited the bones of many of the ancestors of the battling chiefs.
The Alapa took the lead and, without waiting for backup, boldly advanced toward Wailuku. This brigade was the [__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]cream of the Hawaiian army. It consisted of eight hundred men, each one of noble heritage. They were all tall men of nearly the same height, and their spears were the same length. Marching side by side, dressed in feather capes and plumed helmets, legends say their march was a sight never seen before. But Kahekili was not intimidated. He allowed them to come within a mile or so of Wailuku, then suddenly unleashed a force of four or five thousand spears against them. The battle was a massacre. The Alapa refused to give up or retreat, and of the eight hundred helmeted chiefs, only two escaped to tell the story of their fallen comrades. Only one prisoner was taken, and he died from his wounds before he could be formally executed and offered as a sacrifice. This was historic ground. Many battles had been fought on that sandy plain, and nearby lay the sacred burial place of Iao, where the bones of many ancestors of the battling chiefs were interred.
The next day a general battle was fought on the same ground, and Kalaniopuu was defeated. But he was not crushed. The loss of life had been great on both sides, and a temporary peace was established on the condition that the Hawaiian army should at once be withdrawn from Maui. The suspension of hostilities was secured partly through the instrumentality of the wife of Kalaniopuu, Kalola, who was the full sister of Kahekili.
The next day, a major battle took place on the same ground, and Kalaniopuu was defeated. However, he wasn’t defeated completely. There had been significant casualties on both sides, and a temporary peace was reached on the condition that the Hawaiian army would immediately withdraw from Maui. This pause in fighting was partly facilitated by Kalaniopuu's wife, Kalola, who was the full sister of Kahekili.
But this peace was of short duration. Scarcely a year elapsed before Kalaniopuu again invaded Maui, where he continued to hold a fortified possession in Hana, and began to ravage its coasts. Without decisive results, the campaign extended into months, Kalaniopuu maintaining a foothold in Hamakualoa, but being unable to extend his conquests greatly beyond it.
But this peace didn't last long. Just about a year later, Kalaniopuu invaded Maui again, where he kept a stronghold in Hana and started to raid the coasts. The campaign went on for months without clear results, with Kalaniopuu holding his ground in Hamakualoa, but he wasn't able to expand his conquests much beyond that.
II.
It was during the indecisive campaign just referred to that Captain Cook—having a few months before touched at Kauai and Niihau—returned to the Hawaiian group from the Arctic Ocean, and anchored off the coast of Maui, where he freely communicated with the wondering natives, and exchanged courtesies with Kalaniopuu and his principal chiefs, including Kamehameha. [389]
It was during the uncertain campaign mentioned earlier that Captain Cook—having visited Kauai and Niihau a few months prior—returned to the Hawaiian Islands from the Arctic Ocean and anchored off the coast of Maui, where he easily communicated with the amazed natives and exchanged greetings with Kalaniopuu and his top chiefs, including Kamehameha. [__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]
It is now admitted that the Hawaiian group was first discovered by Juan Gaetano, a Spanish navigator, in 1555, while on a voyage from the western coast of Mexico to the Moluccas, or Spice Islands; but the secret was kept from the world, and the first European to touch at the islands, to communicate with the natives and make his discovery known, was Captain Cook.
It’s now recognized that the Hawaiian Islands were first discovered by Juan Gaetano, a Spanish navigator, in 1555, during a journey from the western coast of Mexico to the Moluccas, or Spice Islands. However, this discovery was kept hidden from the world, and the first European to visit the islands, interact with the locals, and announce his discovery was Captain Cook.
In the hydrographic bureau of the naval department of the Spanish government exists an old manuscript chart pretty correctly locating the group and crediting Gaetano with the discovery. He named the islands Islas de Mesa, or Table Islands. It is probable that he made a landing on one of the islands with a few of his crew, since tradition refers to the sudden appearance of white men at about that period; but if he did land he left no record of the circumstance, and it is not shown that he ever returned to the group, or that any of his countrymen profited by the discovery. It has been claimed that Captain Cook was directed to the islands by an old Spanish chart of which he had in some manner become possessed; but his own evidence, as well as that of his officers, favors the assumption that the rediscovery of the islands by him was accidental.
In the hydrographic bureau of the naval department of the Spanish government, there is an old manuscript chart that accurately marks the location of the group and credits Gaetano with the discovery. He named the islands Islas de Mesa, or Table Islands. It's likely that he made landfall on one of the islands with a few crew members, as tradition speaks of the sudden appearance of white men around that time. However, if he did land, he left no record of it, and there’s no evidence that he returned to the group or that any of his countrymen benefited from the discovery. It has been claimed that Captain Cook was pointed to the islands by an old Spanish chart that he somehow obtained; however, both his own accounts and those of his officers suggest that his rediscovery of the islands was accidental.
Early in December, 1777, Captain Cook, with the British national ships Resolution and Discovery, left the Society group for the northwest coast of America. On inquiry the natives of Bolabola Island informed him that they knew of no lands north or northwest of them, and it is not probable that he expected to meet with any; but after a voyage of sixteen days he discovered Christmas Island, and on the 18th of January, 1778, sighted Oahu, of the Hawaiian group, and to the northward of it Kauai. He first landed at the latter island, where he was well received by the natives. He was believed to be their god Lono, whose return to the group had been promised, and divine honors were accorded him. His ships were provided with everything they required, and the fairest women of the island, including the daughter of the queen, were sent to greet and welcome him.
In early December 1777, Captain Cook, aboard the British ships Resolution and Discovery, left the Society Islands to head for the northwest coast of America. When he asked, the natives of Bolabola Island told him they were unaware of any lands to the north or northwest, and it’s likely he didn't expect to find any. However, after a sixteen-day journey, he discovered Christmas Island, and on January 18, 1778, he spotted Oahu, one of the Hawaiian Islands, with Kauai to the north of it. He first landed on Kauai, where the natives welcomed him warmly. They believed he was their god Lono, whose return had been foretold, and they honored him as divine. His ships were stocked with everything they needed, and the most beautiful women of the island, including the queen’s daughter, were sent to greet and welcome him.
He next visited Niihau, where he was received in the same hospitable manner, and on the 2d of February, without visiting the other islands of the group, proceeded on his voyage toward Behring’s Strait in search of a northwest passage to the Atlantic. The approach of winter putting an end to further explorations in the north, he returned to the islands, and on the 26th of November, [390]1778, sighted Maui, and the next day his ships were visited by hundreds of natives. The news of his previous visit to Kauai and Niihau had spread throughout the group, and he was treated with the greatest friendship and hospitality.
He next went to Niihau, where he was welcomed just as warmly, and on February 2nd, without visiting the other islands in the group, he continued his journey toward Bering Strait in search of a northwest passage to the Atlantic. As winter approached, further explorations in the north were no longer possible, so he returned to the islands, and on November 26th, [__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]1778, he spotted Maui, and the following day, his ships were visited by hundreds of locals. News of his earlier visit to Kauai and Niihau had spread throughout the islands, and he was treated with immense friendship and hospitality.
Three days later, when off the northwest coast of Maui, he was ceremoniously visited by Kalaniopuu, and six or eight chiefs, Kamehameha among them, accompanied him almost to Hawaii, when they left in their canoes, which had been taken in tow, and returned to Maui, to the great relief of their friends.
Three days later, off the northwest coast of Maui, he received an official visit from Kalaniopuu along with six or eight chiefs, including Kamehameha. They accompanied him almost to Hawaii, then left in their canoes, which were being towed, and returned to Maui, much to the relief of their friends.
Beating around the coasts of Hawaii, it was not until the 17th of January, 1779, that the vessels came to anchor in Kealakeakua Bay, on the western side of the island. They were at once crowded with natives, and the high-priest came aboard, recognized Cook as the god Lono, and threw over his shoulders the sacred mantle of red. In the afternoon Cook went ashore, and in a neighboring temple permitted himself to be publicly and ceremoniously worshipped. Meantime the vessels were abundantly and gratuitously supplied with pigs, poultry, fruits and vegetables, and the officers and crews were treated with the greatest kindness.
Beating around the coasts of Hawaii, it wasn't until January 17, 1779, that the ships dropped anchor in Kealakeakua Bay on the western side of the island. They were immediately surrounded by locals, and the high priest came on board, recognized Cook as the god Lono, and draped the sacred red mantle over his shoulders. In the afternoon, Cook went ashore and allowed himself to be publicly and ceremonially worshipped in a nearby temple. Meanwhile, the ships were generously supplied with pigs, poultry, fruits, and vegetables at no charge, and the officers and crews received the warmest hospitality.
On the 24th of January Kalaniopuu returned from Maui, and on the 26th paid the ships a formal visit. The visit was returned, and Cook, as before, was received on shore with divine honors, against which he offered no protest. He was placed among the gods in the temple, and sacrifices were offered to him as one of the Hawaiian Trinity.
On January 24th, Kalaniopuu came back from Maui, and on the 26th, he paid a formal visit to the ships. The visit was reciprocated, and Cook, just like before, was welcomed ashore with divine honors, which he didn't challenge. He was positioned among the gods in the temple, and sacrifices were made to him as part of the Hawaiian Trinity.
How were the devotion and kindness of the simple natives requited? By eating out the substance of the people, violating the tabus of the priests and trampling upon the edicts of the king. Cook became exacting, dictatorial and greedy, and from his conduct it almost seemed that he began to consider himself in reality the god for whom he was mistaken by the superstitious natives.
How were the devotion and kindness of the simple natives rewarded? By consuming the resources of the people, breaking the tabus set by the priests, and ignoring the commands of the king. Cook became demanding, authoritarian, and greedy, and from his behavior, it almost felt like he started to see himself as the god the superstitious natives believed him to be.
Under the circumstances, his departure for the leeward islands of the group, on the 4th of February, was regarded with satisfaction by the natives; but the vessels encountered a storm, and on the 11th returned to Kealakeakua Bay for repairs. Their reception was much less jubilant than before, and not a canoe went off to greet their return. However, Kalaniopuu visited the ships the next day, and permitted the natives to resume intercourse with them. [391]
Under the circumstances, his departure for the leeward islands of the group on February 4th was welcomed by the locals; however, the ships ran into a storm and returned to Kealakeakua Bay for repairs on the 11th. Their welcome was far less enthusiastic than before, and no canoes came out to greet them. However, Kalaniopuu visited the ships the next day and allowed the locals to resume interactions with them. [__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]
But it was plain that the feelings of the people had undergone a change. They found that the white strangers had appetites like themselves, and were just as subject to bodily ills. They also discovered that they were selfish, unjust and overbearing, and were not entitled to the consideration with which they had been treated. Petty bickerings began to occur, and finally a young chief named Palea was knocked down with a paddle by an English sailor while attempting to save his canoe from wanton damage.
But it was clear that the people's feelings had changed. They realized that the white strangers had appetites like theirs and were just as prone to illnesses. They also found that the strangers were selfish, unfair, and overbearing, and didn’t deserve the respect they had been given. Small arguments started to break out, and eventually, a young chief named Palea was hit with a paddle by an English sailor while trying to protect his canoe from unnecessary damage.
In retaliation Palea stole a boat from one of the ships. Cook demanded its restoration, but, as it had been hastily broken up for its iron nails and fastenings, Kalaniopuu could not, of course, return it. Thereupon Cook ordered a blockade of the harbor, resulting in the killing of a prominent chief who attempted to enter it, and then landed with an armed boat’s crew with the view of seizing and holding the king as security for the return of the missing boat.
In retaliation, Palea took a boat from one of the ships. Cook demanded its return, but since it had been quickly dismantled for its iron nails and fittings, Kalaniopuu obviously couldn't return it. As a result, Cook ordered a blockade of the harbor, leading to the death of a prominent chief who tried to enter it. He then landed with an armed crew to seize the king as security for the return of the missing boat.
Kalaniopuu was in the act of peacefully accompanying Cook to one of his vessels in the harbor, and had reached a point not far from the landing, when the brother of the chief who had been killed in attempting to enter the harbor angrily approached to demand an explanation. By this time a large crowd of natives had surrounded the king, and believing, no doubt, that the intentions of the chief were hostile, Cook drew a pistol and fired upon him, and the next moment shot and killed a native who had assaulted him with a stone. He also struck with his sword a chief named Kanaina. The latter seized and held him.
Kalaniopuu was calmly walking with Cook to one of his ships in the harbor and had almost reached the landing when the brother of the chief who was killed while trying to enter the harbor angrily came up to demand an explanation. By this time, a large crowd of locals had gathered around the king, and believing that the chief’s intentions were hostile, Cook drew a pistol and shot at him. In that moment, he also shot and killed a native who had attacked him with a stone. Additionally, he struck a chief named Kanaina with his sword. The latter seized and held him.
Believing Cook to be a god, it was not thought that he could be killed. Struggling to free himself, he must have received a wound from some quarter, for he sank to the earth with a groan. The groan was fatal to him. “He is not a god! he groans!” exclaimed the people, and without hesitation they slew him at once.
Believing Cook was a god, they thought he couldn't be killed. As he struggled to free himself, he must have been wounded from somewhere, because he collapsed to the ground with a groan. That groan was fatal for him. “He’s not a god! He groans!” shouted the crowd, and without hesitation, they killed him right away.
Fire was immediately opened upon the natives from the boat, and shortly after with cannon from the vessels in the harbor. Consternation seized the people huddled on the beach. Many were killed, and the most of the remainder fled to the hills, taking with them the body of Cook. A party of carpenters and sail-makers, at work some distance away, became involved in the struggle, but the most of them escaped to the ships through the kind offices of friendly chiefs. [392]
Gunfire erupted from the boat aimed at the natives, followed shortly by cannon fire from the ships in the harbor. Panic swept through the people gathered on the beach. Many were killed, and most of the others ran to the hills, carrying Cook's body with them. A group of carpenters and sail-makers who were working some distance away got caught up in the conflict, but most of them managed to reach the ships thanks to the help of friendly chiefs. [__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]
The bones of the unfortunate captain were stripped of their flesh, as was then the custom, and divided among a few prominent chiefs. Kamehameha, it is said, received the hair. A few days after, in response to the request of Captain King, such of the bones as could be recovered were brought on board the Resolution, by order of Kalaniopuu, and committed to the deep with military honors. The ships then left Kealakeakua Bay, and after touching at Oahu, Kauai and Niihau, finally sailed northward on the 15th of March, leaving behind them a train of evils which a full century of time has failed to eradicate.
The unfortunate captain's bones were stripped of flesh, as was the custom back then, and divided among a few prominent chiefs. Kamehameha reportedly received the hair. A few days later, at Captain King's request, the remaining bones that could be recovered were brought on board the Resolution, by order of Kalaniopuu, and laid to rest in the ocean with military honors. The ships then left Kealakeakua Bay, touching at Oahu, Kauai, and Niihau before finally sailing north on March 15th, leaving behind a legacy of problems that a full century hasn’t managed to erase.
III.
Abandoning his campaign in Maui, Kalaniopuu, who was nearly eighty years of age and quite feeble, removed his court to Kohala after the death of Captain Cook, and subsequently to Waipio, where he remained for some months. Desiring to settle the succession while he lived, he called his high chiefs together and proclaimed his son Kiwalao as his heir and successor in the government and the supervision of the tabus, and Kamehameha as the custodian of his war-god Kaili, to which duty the heiau of Moaula, in Waipio, was formally dedicated after extensive repairs. A temple was also consecrated to the same god in Hilo.
Abandoning his campaign in Maui, Kalaniopuu, who was almost eighty and quite weak, moved his court to Kohala after Captain Cook's death, and then to Waipio, where he stayed for several months. Wanting to secure the succession while he was still alive, he gathered his high chiefs and announced his son Kiwalao as his heir and successor in government and the management of the tabus, and Kamehameha as the keeper of his war-god Kaili. For this role, the heiau of Moaula in Waipio was officially dedicated after extensive repairs. A temple was also built for the same god in Hilo.
Shortly after Imakakaloa, who had raised the standard of revolt in Puna, was captured after a stubborn war and condemned to be sacrificed at the temple of Pakini. In the absence of Kalaniopuu the performance of the ceremonies devolved upon Kiwalao. First in order came the offerings of pigs and fruits, to be followed by the body of the rebel chief; but while Kiwalao was making the first of the offerings, Kamehameha seized the body of the chief, offered it in sacrifice and then dismissed the assembly.
Shortly after Imakakaloa, who had led the revolt in Puna, was captured after a fierce fight and sentenced to be sacrificed at the temple of Pakini. With Kalaniopuu absent, the responsibility for the ceremonies fell to Kiwalao. The first step was to present offerings of pigs and fruits, to be followed by the body of the rebel chief; however, while Kiwalao was making the initial offerings, Kamehameha took the chief's body, offered it as a sacrifice, and then sent everyone away.
As the sacrifice was to the war-god Kaili, of which he was the custodian, Kamehameha doubtless claimed and boldly assumed the right to conduct the ceremonies himself. But the daring act of insubordination created an intense excitement at the royal court, many regarding it as little less than rebellion, and Kalaniopuu advised Kamehameha to retire to Kohala for a season, as he could not answer for his safety in Waipio. He accepted the advice of his uncle, and, taking with him his wife [393]Kalola, his brother Kalaimamahu and the war-god Kaili, removed to his patrimonial estates at Halawa, in Kohala, where he remained until the death of Kalaniopuu, which shortly occurred.
As the sacrifice was for the war-god Kaili, of whom he was the protector, Kamehameha undoubtedly claimed and confidently took the right to perform the ceremonies himself. However, this bold act of defiance caused a huge stir at the royal court, with many seeing it as nearly an act of rebellion. Kalaniopuu advised Kamehameha to go to Kohala for a while, as he couldn't guarantee his safety in Waipio. He took his uncle's advice and, along with his wife [__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]Kalola, his brother Kalaimamahu, and the war-god Kaili, moved to his family estate in Halawa, Kohala, where he stayed until Kalaniopuu's death, which happened soon after.
Early in 1782 Kalaniopuu died, and his body was brought to Honaunau for interment in the sacred burial-place of Hale-a-Keawe. Fearful that the division of lands which usually followed the installation of a new moi would not be satisfactory, several prominent chiefs, among them Kamehameha, repaired to Honaunau to assist in the interment of the dead king and listen to the proclamation of Kiwalao. After the body had been deposited Kiwalao ascended a platform and informed the assembled chiefs that, by the will of his royal father, the sovereignty of Hawaii had been bequeathed to him, and the custody of the war-god Kaili to Kamehameha. No other chief was mentioned as having been provided for, and profound dissatisfaction followed.
Early in 1782, Kalaniopuu died, and his body was taken to Honaunau for burial in the sacred site of Hale-a-Keawe. Concerned that the division of lands that typically occurred after a new moi was installed wouldn’t be fair, several prominent chiefs, including Kamehameha, went to Honaunau to help with the burial of the deceased king and hear the announcement from Kiwalao. After the body was laid to rest, Kiwalao climbed a platform and told the gathered chiefs that, according to his royal father's will, he had been given the sovereignty of Hawaii, and the guardianship of the war-god Kaili was passed on to Kamehameha. No other chief was mentioned as being provided for, leading to deep dissatisfaction among the chiefs.
At an awa party in the evening Kiwalao declined to drink of the awa prepared by Kamehameha, as custom rendered it proper that he should do. By Kekuhaupio, the aged counsellor of Kamehameha, the bowl was struck from the hand of another to whom it had been passed untasted by Kiwalao, and Kamehameha and his friend abruptly left the house. An open rupture followed the division of lands soon after made, and Kamehameha was forced to take up arms against Kiwalao by the disaffected chiefs. He was made their leader, and around him rallied the chiefs of Kona, Kohala and Hamakua, while Kiwalao was generally sustained by the chiefs of Hilo, Puna and Kau.
At an awa party in the evening, Kiwalao chose not to drink the awa prepared by Kamehameha, as tradition suggested he should. Kekuhaupio, Kamehameha's elderly advisor, knocked the bowl from the hands of another person who had received it untouched from Kiwalao, prompting Kamehameha and his companion to leave the house abruptly. A major conflict erupted following the land division that took place shortly afterward, forcing Kamehameha to take up arms against Kiwalao, prompted by the discontented chiefs. He became their leader, with the chiefs of Kona, Kohala, and Hamakua gathering around him, while Kiwalao received support primarily from the chiefs of Hilo, Puna, and Kau.
After hasty preparations on both sides a battle was fought at Hauiki, in which Kiwalao was slain. The royal army was routed, and Keoua, the half-brother of Kiwalao, fled to Kau, where he declared himself king of Hawaii, while Keawemauhili, the uncle of the dead king, who was allowed to escape owing to his extremely high rank, retired to Hilo and set up an independent government of his own. After the death of Kiwalao, Keopuolani, his infant daughter, whose mother had fled with her to Kahekili, moi of Maui, was the only one whom Keawemauhili was willing to recognize, and three distinct factions began to struggle for the mastery of the island.
After quick preparations on both sides, a battle took place at Hauiki, where Kiwalao was killed. The royal army was defeated, and Keoua, Kiwalao's half-brother, fled to Kau, declaring himself king of Hawaii. Meanwhile, Keawemauhili, the uncle of the deceased king, was allowed to escape because of his very high status. He withdrew to Hilo and established his own independent government. Following Kiwalao's death, Keopuolani, his infant daughter, whose mother had escaped with her to Kahekili, moi of Maui, was the only one Keawemauhili was willing to recognize. This led to three distinct factions battling for control of the island.
While a desultory warfare was being carried on by the three rival chiefs of Hawaii, during which Kamehameha was steadily growing in strength, a new element of military and naval power [394]made its appearance in the group, and became an important factor in the political changes that speedily followed. In 1786 the first foreign vessels, after the departure of the Resolution and Discovery, touched at the islands, and during the year following American, English, French, Spanish and Portuguese merchant-men in considerable numbers visited the group, and the people began to supply themselves with knives, axes, cloths, beads and other articles of foreign manufacture, and the chiefs with swords, guns, powder and lead and other warlike materials. Payment for these articles was made to some extent in pigs, fowls, fruits and vegetables, but principally in sandal-wood, in which the mountainous districts of the islands abounded, and which found a ready market in China. Many deserting sailors entered the service of the chiefs of Oahu and Hawaii, and to a less extent of the other islands, and became the instructors of the natives in the use of fire-arms; and Kamehameha was especially fortunate in securing the services of Isaac Davis and John Young, who took an active part in the campaigns of the final conquest. Young married into a native family of consequence, and became the grandfather of the late queen-dowager Emma, widow of Kamehameha IV.
While a scattered conflict was happening among the three rival chiefs of Hawaii, Kamehameha was steadily gaining power. A new source of military and naval strength [__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__] appeared in the group, becoming a key player in the political changes that quickly followed. In 1786, the first foreign ships, after the departure of the Resolution and Discovery, arrived at the islands, and in the following year, American, English, French, Spanish, and Portuguese merchant vessels began visiting the area in significant numbers. The people started acquiring knives, axes, cloth, beads, and other foreign-made items, while the chiefs obtained swords, guns, powder, lead, and other military supplies. Payment for these items was mostly made with pigs, chickens, fruits, and vegetables, but primarily with sandalwood, which was plentiful in the mountainous regions of the islands and had a ready market in China. Many runaway sailors joined the service of the chiefs of Oahu and Hawaii, and to a lesser extent, the other islands, teaching the locals how to use firearms. Kamehameha was especially fortunate to secure the help of Isaac Davis and John Young, who played active roles in the campaigns for the final conquest. Young married into a prominent native family and became the grandfather of the late queen-dowager Emma, widow of Kamehameha IV.
In 1790 Kamehameha, during a temporary cessation of hostilities on Hawaii, invaded Maui with a large force. To the expedition Keawemauhili had been in some manner induced to contribute a battalion of warriors. In retaliation for this showing of friendship for Kamehameha, Keoua invaded Hilo, defeated and killed Keawemauhili, and assumed the sovereignty of that district. Nor did he stop there. During the absence of Kamehameha he overran the districts of Hamakua and Kohala, and was in the act of possessing himself of the whole island when Kamehameha abruptly left Maui, which he had completely subjugated, and returned to Hawaii.
In 1790, Kamehameha, during a temporary break in hostilities on Hawaii, invaded Maui with a large force. Keawemauhili had somehow been persuaded to send a battalion of warriors to help with the expedition. In retaliation for this display of friendship towards Kamehameha, Keoua invaded Hilo, defeated and killed Keawemauhili, and took control of that area. He didn’t stop there. While Kamehameha was away, he swept through the districts of Hamakua and Kohala, and was in the process of taking over the whole island when Kamehameha suddenly left Maui, which he had fully conquered, and returned to Hawaii.
Kaiana had been left to guard the district of Kona during the absence of Kamehameha, and that was the only division left unoccupied by Keoua. Kamehameha landed with his forces at Kawaihae, and Keoua fell back with his army to Paauhau. There and at Koapapa a two days’ battle was fought, when Keoua retreated to Hilo, and Kamehameha retired to Waipio to recruit his losses.
Kaiana was assigned to protect the Kona district while Kamehameha was away, and it was the only area that Keoua hadn’t taken over. Kamehameha arrived with his troops at Kawaihae, and Keoua withdrew his army to Paauhau. There, and at Koapapa, a two-day battle took place, after which Keoua fell back to Hilo, and Kamehameha went to Waipio to recover from his losses.
Stopping for a few days to divide the lands of the district [395]among his chiefs, Keoua started on his return to Kau. His path led by the crater of Kilauea. His army, marching in three divisions, encamped on the mountains, the central division finding quarters not far from the crater. Before morning an eruption occurred, and four hundred warriors were suffocated. This was considered a special visitation of the wrath of Pele, the goddess of the volcano, and she was thereafter deemed to be the friend of Kamehameha.
Stopping for a few days to divide the lands of the district [__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]among his chiefs, Keoua began his journey back to Kau. His route passed by the crater of Kilauea. His army, marching in three groups, set up camp in the mountains, with the central group finding shelter not far from the crater. Before morning, an eruption took place, and four hundred warriors were suffocated. This was seen as a special sign of the wrath of Pele, the goddess of the volcano, and from then on, she was considered to be an ally of Kamehameha.
For a year or more continuous efforts to crush the power of Keoua were made by Kamehameha. Kaiana operated against him in Kau, and Keeaumoku in Hilo, but he stubbornly and successfully resisted. Availing himself of this condition of affairs, Kahekili, moi of Maui, assisted by Kaeo, king of Kauai, invaded Hawaii, probably for the purpose of creating a diversion in favor of Keoua, but the combined armies were driven from the island by Kamehameha.
For over a year, Kamehameha made continuous efforts to defeat Keoua. Kaiana attacked him in Kau, and Keeaumoku in Hilo, but Keoua stubbornly and successfully resisted. Taking advantage of this situation, Kahekili, the king of Maui, with the help of Kaeo, the king of Kauai, invaded Hawaii, likely to create a diversion for Keoua. However, Kamehameha drove the combined armies off the island.
Keoua, however, remained unsubdued, and Kamehameha resolved at every sacrifice to crush him, as a preliminary step toward the conquest of the entire group, which at that time he began to meditate. Some time before he had sent the grandmother of Kaahumanu to Kauai to consult the prophets of that island, and word was brought back to him from the renowned Kapoukahi that if he would rebuild the heiau of Puukohola and dedicate it to his war-god, he would become the master of Hawaii. Some work had been done on the temple, and Kamehameha determined to complete it at once. He therefore ordered large relays of people from the surrounding districts to repair to Kawaihae and assist in the building of the heiau. Many thousands responded. With the exception of Keliimaikai, a brother of Kamehameha, who was left uncontaminated for the consecration, every chief took part in the labor, and the temple was soon completed, with sacrifices embracing a large number of human beings as the work progressed.
Keoua, however, would not be defeated, and Kamehameha was determined to do whatever it took to crush him as the first step toward conquering the whole group, which he was starting to plan. Earlier, he had sent his grandmother to Kauai to consult the island's prophets, and he received word from the famous Kapoukahi that if he rebuilt the heiau of Puukohola and dedicated it to his war-god, he would become the master of Hawaii. Some work had already started on the temple, and Kamehameha decided to finish it right away. He ordered large groups of people from nearby areas to go to Kawaihae and help build the heiau. Many thousands showed up. Except for Keliimaikai, Kamehameha's brother, who remained pure for the consecration, every chief took part in the work, and the temple was quickly finished, with sacrifices involving many human beings as the project progressed.
Thus was the temple of Puukohola completed, but, pending its formal consecration, Keawe-a-Heulu and Kamanawa, two of the principal counselors of Kamehameha, were despatched to Kau under a flag of truce, to invite Keoua to visit Kamehameha, with the view of arranging terms of peace. Keoua received the ambassadors kindly, and consented to the conference. His actions show that he suspected the motives of Kamehameha, but he resolutely [396]accepted the hazard of placing himself at the mercy of his enemies.
Thus, the temple of Puukohola was completed, but before it could be formally consecrated, Keawe-a-Heulu and Kamanawa, two of Kamehameha's main advisors, were sent to Kau under a flag of truce to invite Keoua to meet with Kamehameha in order to discuss peace terms. Keoua received the ambassadors warmly and agreed to the meeting. His actions indicated that he was suspicious of Kamehameha's intentions, but he bravely accepted the risk of putting himself at the mercy of his enemies.
Proceeding in state in a double canoe, Keoua arrived at the landing of Mailekini, in Kawaihae. Observing Kamehameha on the beach, Keoua called to him, and was invited to land. Several canoes were around him, and as he leaped ashore Keeaumoku, from one of them, treacherously drove a spear through his body, killing him at once. An attack was then made upon his attendants, and all but two of them were slain. As this, and many other events noted in this chapter, are briefly referred to in the legend of “The Prophecies of Keaulumoku,” it will be sufficient to mention that the body of Keoua was taken to the temple of Puukohola, and there sacrificed to Kaili with ample pomp and ceremony. The possessions of the unfortunate chief passed into the hands of Kamehameha, who at once became the acknowledged sovereign of the entire island. This was in 1792.
Arriving in style on a double canoe, Keoua reached the landing at Mailekini in Kawaihae. Spotting Kamehameha on the beach, Keoua called out to him and was invited to come ashore. Several canoes were nearby, and as he jumped onto the shore, Keeaumoku, from one of them, deceitfully impaled him with a spear, killing him instantly. An attack was then launched on his attendants, and only two of them survived. Since this and many other events mentioned in this chapter are briefly referenced in the legend of “The Prophecies of Keaulumoku,” it's enough to say that Keoua's body was taken to the temple of Puukohola and there sacrificed to Kaili with great respect and ceremony. The possessions of the unfortunate chief went to Kamehameha, who immediately became the recognized ruler of the entire island. This happened in 1792.
In Kamehameha’s previous campaign against Maui, from which he had been recalled by the successes of Keoua at home, that island, as already stated, had been completely subjugated. At the time of the invasion, Maui, Oahu, Molokai and Lanai were all in the possession of Kahekili, who had taken up his residence in Oahu, leaving his son Kalanikupule in charge of Maui. In a single mighty battle on the plains between East and West Maui, Kamehameha had destroyed the army of Kalanikupule, who had escaped to Oahu and joined his father, while the most of the chiefs of Maui had sought refuge on the other islands.
In Kamehameha's earlier campaign against Maui, from which he had been called back due to Keoua's successes at home, that island, as mentioned before, had been fully conquered. At the time of the invasion, Maui, Oahu, Molokai, and Lanai were all under the control of Kahekili, who had moved to Oahu, leaving his son Kalanikupule in charge of Maui. In a single huge battle on the plains between East and West Maui, Kamehameha had wiped out Kalanikupule's army, who escaped to Oahu to regroup with his father, while most of the chiefs from Maui sought safety on the other islands.
After this victory Kamehameha despatched a messenger to Kahekili, informing him of his intention to invade Oahu, and the old king returned to him this answer: “Tell Kamehameha to return to Hawaii, and when the black kapa covers the body of Kahekili the whole group shall be his.” This answer seems to have been hardly honest, however, for, soon after Kamehameha returned to Hawaii, Kahekili entered into a combination with Kaeo, king of Kauai, and made war upon Kamehameha in his own home, with the disastrous results to the confederates already mentioned.
After this victory, Kamehameha sent a messenger to Kahekili, letting him know about his plan to invade Oahu. The old king replied, “Tell Kamehameha to go back to Hawaii, and when the black kapa covers my body, the whole group will be his.” This response seemed pretty dishonest, though, because shortly after Kamehameha returned to Hawaii, Kahekili formed an alliance with Kaeo, the king of Kauai, and waged war against Kamehameha in his own territory, leading to the disastrous outcomes for the confederates that have already been mentioned.
In 1794 Kahekili died, leaving Kalanikupule as his successor, and a claimant to the sovereignty of Oahu, Maui, Molokai and [397]Lanai. Kaeo, the younger brother and ally of Kahekili, and who had become the king of Kauai by marrying Queen Kamakahelei, and had shared in the government of Maui after the withdrawal of the forces of Kamehameha, concluded to return temporarily to Kauai after the death of Kahekili. Taking with him a portion of his army, he first touched at Molokai to collect tribute, and then landed on Oahu for further supplies. Although his visit was friendly, he met with opposition from Kalanikupule, and a battle followed, in which Kaeo was slain.
In 1794, Kahekili passed away, leaving Kalanikupule as his successor and a claimant to the sovereignty of Oahu, Maui, Molokai, and [__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]Lanai. Kaeo, Kahekili's younger brother and ally, who had become king of Kauai by marrying Queen Kamakahelei and had been involved in the governance of Maui after Kamehameha's forces withdrew, decided to return temporarily to Kauai after Kahekili's death. Taking some of his army with him, he first stopped at Molokai to gather tribute and then landed on Oahu for more supplies. Even though his visit was meant to be friendly, he faced opposition from Kalanikupule, leading to a battle where Kaeo was killed.
The Oahu king was assisted by the seamen of two English vessels lying in the harbor of Honolulu, the Jackal and Prince Leboo. After the victory a feast was given on board the vessels, to which the king and a number of his chiefs were invited. Some of the boats of the vessels, returning from the shore with their crews, grounded on the reef. Perceiving this, Kalanikupule and his chiefs seized the vessels, killing their captains and a number of others. Elated with the possession of these vessels and their armaments, the king resolved to invade Hawaii. Embarking his army in canoes, he took passage in one of the vessels, on board of which had been stored the most of his guns and war materials.
The king of Oahu was helped by the crew of two English ships docked in Honolulu Harbor, the Jackal and Prince Leboo. After their victory, a feast was held on the ships, inviting the king and several of his chiefs. Some of the boats from the ships, returning from the shore with their crews, got stuck on the reef. Seeing this, Kalanikupule and his chiefs seized the ships, killing their captains and several others. Thrilled with their new ships and weapons, the king decided to invade Hawaii. He loaded his army into canoes and joined one of the ships, which carried most of his guns and war supplies.
The crews of the vessels had been retained to manage them, and Kalanikupule sailed out of the harbor in high glee. But he did not proceed far. After reaching deep water the foreigners sent him and his attendants back to Waikiki in a boat, and then sailed for Hawaii, where they delivered Kalanikupule’s war supplies to Kamehameha, who was even then preparing for a descent upon Oahu and the final conquest and consolidation of the group. This was in the latter part of 1794. The amount of war material delivered to Kamehameha was not large, but all of it proved of service to him.
The crews of the ships had been hired to operate them, and Kalanikupule set sail from the harbor feeling cheerful. But he didn't get far. Once they reached open water, the foreigners sent him and his attendants back to Waikiki in a boat, then continued on to Hawaii, where they handed over Kalanikupule's war supplies to Kamehameha, who was already getting ready to launch an attack on Oahu and finalize the conquest and unification of the islands. This was in late 1794. The amount of war supplies delivered to Kamehameha wasn't large, but all of it was useful to him.
IV.
With this somewhat extended reference to Kamehameha and the prominent chiefs of his time, which brings the tracings of public events down to the eve of the concluding struggle of the conquest, we will now return to Kaiana, through whose relations with Kamehameha some curious glimpses of the domestic life of [398]the latter are brought to view. We have thus far seen him as a warrior. We will now observe him as a husband, whose peace was disturbed by jealousies, and whose heart, stern in all things else, was not proof against the tender influences of love.
With this somewhat lengthy reference to Kamehameha and the key chiefs of his era, which connects the events of the past to the lead-up of the final conquest, we will now shift our focus back to Kaiana, who offers some intriguing insights into the personal life of [__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]Kamehameha through their relationship. So far, we've seen him as a warrior. Now, let's look at him as a husband, whose peace was disrupted by jealousy, and whose heart, tough in every other aspect, wasn't immune to the gentle effects of love.
At the close of his unsuccessful campaign against the chiefs of Hilo and Kau, in 1785, Kamehameha took up his residence at Kauhola, where he devoted himself for a time to more peaceful pursuits. To stimulate his people to industry he gave his personal attention to agriculture, and the piece of ground cultivated with his own hands is still pointed out. Continuous wars had impoverished his possessions, and he was anxious to restore to productiveness his neglected lands.
At the end of his failed campaign against the chiefs of Hilo and Kau in 1785, Kamehameha settled at Kauhola, where he focused for a while on more peaceful activities. To encourage his people to work harder, he personally tended to agriculture, and the plot of land he worked on with his own hands is still shown today. Ongoing wars had drained his resources, and he was eager to make his neglected lands productive again.
Up to this time Kamehameha had two recognized wives, Kalola and Peleuli. This Kalola was not the widow of Kalaniopuu, although bearing a similar name. She was a granddaughter of Keawe, king of Hawaii. Peleuli was the daughter of Kamanawa, brother of Keeaumoku, and one of his stanchest supporters.
Up to this point, Kamehameha had two recognized wives, Kalola and Peleuli. This Kalola was not the widow of Kalaniopuu, even though she had a similar name. She was a granddaughter of Keawe, the king of Hawaii. Peleuli was the daughter of Kamanawa, who was the brother of Keeaumoku and one of his strongest supporters.
For some months Kamehameha lived quietly at Kauhola. The inspired song of Keaulumoku, who had died the year before, predicting that he would become the sovereign of the group, still rang in his ears, and in the midst of their labors his people were encouraged in the practice of the manly games and pastimes which added to their strength, skill and endurance in war. Sham fights on land and sea, and swimming, diving, wrestling, running and leaping contests, were frequent; and during the annual feast of Lono, beginning with the winter solstice and continuing for five days, a tournament was given which brought to Kauhola the leading chiefs of Hamakua, Kohala and Kona. Among them was the famous Keeaumoku, who had charge of the district of Kona. He was accompanied by his family, of which his daughter, Kaahumanu, was the most attractive feature.
For several months, Kamehameha lived quietly at Kauhola. The powerful song of Keaulumoku, who had passed away the year before, still echoed in his mind as it foretold he would become the ruler of the islands. While they worked, his people were motivated to engage in the physical sports and activities that improved their strength, skill, and endurance for battle. Sham fights on land and at sea, along with swimming, diving, wrestling, running, and jumping contests, were common; and during the annual feast of Lono, which started with the winter solstice and lasted five days, there was a tournament that attracted the top chiefs from Hamakua, Kohala, and Kona. Among them was the renowned Keeaumoku, who oversaw the Kona district. He brought along his family, with his daughter, Kaahumanu, being the most captivating member of the group.
Twenty years before Keeaumoku, who was of the royal line, rebelled against Kalaniopuu, and was defeated and forced to find refuge on Maui, whose moi, Kamehamehanui, had died but a few days before, leaving the government to his brother Kahekili. Keeaumoku, whose fortunes were desperate, succeeded in captivating and marrying Namahana, the widow of the deceased king, very much to the chagrin and disappointment of Kahekili, whose claim to the dowager was sustained by the royal custom [399]of the time. A difficulty followed, and Keeaumoku and his wife took up their residence on the northern side of the island. But they were not permitted to remain there in peace. Through the hostility of Kahekili they were driven to Molokai, and thence to the district of Hana, in eastern Maui, which was then held by the king of Hawaii, and there, through the mercy of Kalaniopuu, they were allowed for some years to reside; and there, in 1768, Kaahumanu was born. On the death of Kalaniopuu, in 1782, Keeaumoku returned to Hawaii, and in the war for the succession espoused the cause of Kamehameha and became one of his chief counselors and captains.
Twenty years before, Keeaumoku, who was of royal blood, rebelled against Kalaniopuu and was defeated, forcing him to seek refuge on Maui. The island’s king, Kamehamehanui, had just died days earlier, leaving the throne to his brother Kahekili. In desperate circumstances, Keeaumoku managed to win the heart of and marry Namahana, the widow of the late king, much to Kahekili's frustration and disappointment, as the royal customs of the time supported his claim to the widow. Trouble arose, and Keeaumoku and his wife moved to the northern part of the island. However, they were not allowed to stay in peace. Because of Kahekili's hostility, they were pushed to Molokai, and then to Hana, in eastern Maui, which was under the control of the king of Hawaii. There, thanks to Kalaniopuu's kindness, they were allowed to live for several years, and Kaahumanu was born there in 1768. After Kalaniopuu died in 1782, Keeaumoku returned to Hawaii and, during the struggle for succession, supported Kamehameha, becoming one of his main advisors and captains.
Kaahumanu was one of the most attractive women of her time, and inherited something of the restless and independent spirit of her warlike father. She was in her eighteenth year when she made her appearance at the court of Kamehameha, during the festival of Lono, in 1785. The wives of Kamehameha were well along in years, Peleuli being the mother of a full-grown son, and Kaahumanu charmed the great chief with her freshness and independence. His warlike soul yielded to the fascination, and to win her smile he took part in the contests of the festival and overcame all competitors. He then proposed to make her his wife. Keeaumoku readily consented, but Kaahumanu could only be won by the promise that her children should become the political heirs of Kamehameha. This promise was given, and Kaahumanu became the wife of Kamehameha. It is probable that he intended to observe the compact at that time, but as Kaahumanu died childless he was in the end left to dispose of the succession through other and more distinguished channels.
Kaahumanu was one of the most beautiful women of her time, inheriting a bit of her warlike father's restless and independent spirit. She was eighteen when she first appeared at Kamehameha's court during the festival of Lono in 1785. Kamehameha’s wives were older, with Peleuli being the mother of an adult son, and Kaahumanu captivated the great chief with her youth and independence. His warrior spirit was drawn to her charm, and to earn her approval, he participated in the festival contests and defeated all challengers. He then proposed to make her his wife. Keeaumoku easily agreed, but Kaahumanu could only be convinced if her children were guaranteed to be Kamehameha's political heirs. This promise was made, and Kaahumanu became Kamehameha's wife. He intended to keep that promise, but since Kaahumanu died without children, he ultimately had to arrange the succession through other notable means.
Kaahumanu became the wife of Kamehameha’s heart. He loved her as well as he was capable of loving any woman, and she was the only one whose indiscretions were regarded by him with feelings of jealousy. His other wives were not restricted by him to his sole attentions, and even the blue-blooded Keopuolani, whom he subsequently married, and who became the mother of his heirs to the throne, had a joint husband in Hoapili.
Kaahumanu became the love of Kamehameha’s life. He loved her as much as he could love any woman, and she was the only one whose affairs made him feel jealous. His other wives were free to have relationships outside of his affection, and even the noble Keopuolani, whom he later married and who became the mother of his heirs, shared her husband with Hoapili.
But in the affections of Kaahumanu Kamehameha would brook no joint occupant or rival. She doubtless sought to avail herself of the privileges of the times, but Kamehameha objected [400]with a frown which would have meant death to another, and for years their relations were the reverse of harmonious.
But in Kaahumanu's affections, Kamehameha would not tolerate any competitors or rivals. She certainly tried to take advantage of the era's privileges, but Kamehameha objected [__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]with a glare that would have meant death to anyone else, and for years, their relationship was anything but harmonious.

The God “Kumauna,” Four Miles above Hilea, Hawaii.
The God “Kumauna,” four miles above Hilea, Hawaii.
(HUGE FACE DELINEATED IN THE CLIFF.)
(HUGE FACE DELINEATED IN THE CLIFF.)
Kaiana’s father was Ahaula, who was the son of Keawe, king of Hawaii, by a mother whose name is now unknown. The mother of Kaiana was Kaupekamoku, a granddaughter of Ahia, of the family of Hilo, from whom the present sovereign of the islands draws his strain. The birthplace of Kaiana is not recorded, but he was probably reared in the neighborhood of Hilo, and thoroughly instructed in all the chiefly accomplishments of the period. He grew to a splendid manhood. He was nearly six and a half feet in height, was well proportioned, and possessed a strikingly handsome face. This is the testimony of Captain Meares, with whom he made a voyage to China in 1787.
Kaiana’s father was Ahaula, the son of Keawe, king of Hawaii, and his mother’s name is now lost to history. Kaiana’s mother was Kaupekamoku, a granddaughter of Ahia, from the family of Hilo, who is also an ancestor of the current ruler of the islands. The exact location of Kaiana’s birth is not documented, but he likely grew up around Hilo and received a thorough education in all the noble skills of that time. He matured into a remarkable man, standing nearly six and a half feet tall, well-built, and with a strikingly handsome face. This is confirmed by Captain Meares, who traveled with him to China in 1787.
Kaiana was of high rank and boundless ambition, and in early manhood cast his fortunes with Kahekili, the warlike moi of Maui, to whom he was related. He was among the prominent chiefs who assisted Kahekili in his conquest of Oahu in 1783, and took a distinguished part in the decisive battle of Kaheiki. Kahahana, the unfortunate king of Oahu, escaped to the hills, where he remained secreted for nearly two years, when he was betrayed by the brother of his wife and slain by order of Kahekili.
Kaiana held a high status and had limitless ambition, and in his early adulthood, he aligned himself with Kahekili, the fierce king of Maui, to whom he was related. He was one of the notable chiefs who supported Kahekili in his conquest of Oahu in 1783 and played a key role in the pivotal battle of Kaheiki. Kahahana, the unfortunate king of Oahu, fled to the hills, where he hid for nearly two years, until he was betrayed by his wife's brother and killed on Kahekili's orders.
This cruel treatment of Kahahana, together with the rapacity of the invaders, created a revulsion of feeling among the Oahu chiefs, and a wide-spread conspiracy was organized by the father of Kahahana and others against Kahekili and the Maui chiefs to whom had been assigned lands in the several districts of the island. The plan was to rise in concert and kill them all in one night, including Kahekili. But the murderous project miscarried. By some means it became known to Kahekili, and he despatched messengers to the threatened chiefs, warning them of their danger. All but one of them were notified. The messenger failed to reach Hueu, who was at Waialua, and he was killed. But fearfully was his death avenged. Kahekili collected his forces for a war for blood. Men, women and children were butchered without mercy, and the native Oahu chiefs were almost extirpated. So great was the slaughter that one of the Maui chiefs built a house at Lapakea, the walls of which were laid up with the bones of the slain.
This brutal treatment of Kahahana, along with the greed of the invaders, caused a strong backlash among the Oahu chiefs, leading to a widespread conspiracy organized by Kahahana's father and others against Kahekili and the Maui chiefs who were given lands in various districts of the island. The plan was to rise up together and kill them all in one night, including Kahekili. However, the murderous scheme failed. Somehow, it reached Kahekili, and he sent messengers to warn the threatened chiefs about their danger. All but one of them were alerted. The messenger couldn't reach Hueu, who was in Waialua, and he was killed. But his death was avenged in a horrific way. Kahekili gathered his forces for bloodshed. Men, women, and children were slaughtered mercilessly, and the native Oahu chiefs were nearly annihilated. The slaughter was so immense that one of the Maui chiefs built a house at Lapakea with the walls made from the bones of the dead.
In this rebellion a number of Kahekili’s own chiefs turned [401]against him, among whom were Kaiana and Kaneoneo, the latter being the first husband of Kamakahelei, queen of Kauai. What incited the defection of Kaiana is not known, but he was probably dissatisfied with the lands apportioned to him by Kahekili, and hoped to profit by the restoration of the island to native rule.
In this rebellion, several of Kahekili’s own chiefs turned against him, including Kaiana and Kaneoneo, the latter being the first husband of Kamakahelei, queen of Kauai. The reason for Kaiana’s defection is unclear, but he was likely unhappy with the lands Kahekili had given him and aimed to gain from restoring native rule to the island.
Kaneoneo was killed, but Kaiana managed to escape to Kauai. Kaneoneo was of the royal line of Kauai, and, as already stated, the first husband of the queen of that island. How he came to be a supporter of Kahekili in his conquest of Oahu, or what prompted his subsequent espousal of the cause of the Oahu chiefs, are matters which tradition has left to conjecture.
Kaneoneo was killed, but Kaiana managed to escape to Kauai. Kaneoneo was from the royal family of Kauai and, as mentioned before, was the first husband of the queen of that island. How he ended up supporting Kahekili in his conquest of Oahu, or what led him to later support the Oahu chiefs, are things that tradition has left open to speculation.
Kamakahelei’s second husband, whom she had selected some years before while her first was living, as was then the custom, was the gallant Kaeo, or Kaeokulani, the younger brother of Kahekili. He was commended to her not more through his princely blood than his many accomplishments and graces of person, and she appears to have been greatly attached to him.
Kamakahelei’s second husband, whom she chose some years earlier while her first husband was still alive, as was the custom at the time, was the impressive Kaeo, or Kaeokulani, the younger brother of Kahekili. He was recommended to her not just because of his royal lineage but also due to his numerous talents and charming personality, and she seemed to have been very fond of him.
She had two daughters with Kaneoneo, both of whom were of marriageable age when she became the wife of Kaeo. She was the granddaughter, it may be mentioned, of Lonoikahaupu, a prince of Kauai, who in his younger years visited Hawaii, was accepted as the temporary husband of Kalani, the sister of Keawe, and through her became the grandfather of Keeaumoku and his two distinguished brothers. The daughters of the queen were Lelemahoalani and Kapuaamohu, the latter of whom, in marriage with Kaumualii, the last independent king of Kauai, became the grandmother of the present queen, Kapiolani.
She had two daughters with Kaneoneo, both of whom were of an age to marry when she became Kaeo's wife. It’s worth mentioning that she was the granddaughter of Lonoikahaupu, a prince of Kauai, who, in his youth, visited Hawaii and was accepted as the temporary husband of Kalani, the sister of Keawe, thus becoming the grandfather of Keeaumoku and his two notable brothers. The queen's daughters were Lelemahoalani and Kapuaamohu; the latter, through her marriage to Kaumualii, the last independent king of Kauai, became the grandmother of the current queen, Kapiolani.
Kaeo took no part in the conquest of Oahu by his brother, but remained at Kauai, assisting the queen in her government, while Kaneoneo found occupation first in aiding and then in opposing Kahekili. Escaping from Oahu after the defeat of the rebellious chiefs and death of Kaneoneo, Kaiana presented himself before the queen of Kauai, who was a distant relative, and Kaeo, who was of closer kinship, and related to them the story of Kahekili’s merciless operations on Oahu. He sought to create an active sympathy in favor of the unfortunate Oahuans, but Kaeo was too sagacious to place himself in hostility to his warlike brother, who had extended his sway over all the islands between Kauai and Hawaii. [402]
Kaeo didn’t get involved in his brother's conquest of Oahu but stayed at Kauai, helping the queen with her leadership. Meanwhile, Kaneoneo initially supported and then opposed Kahekili. After escaping from Oahu following the defeat of the rebellious chiefs and the death of Kaneoneo, Kaiana went to see the queen of Kauai, who was a distant relative, and Kaeo, who was more closely related. He told them about Kahekili’s brutal actions on Oahu. He aimed to rally support for the struggling people of Oahu, but Kaeo was too clever to put himself against his warlike brother, who had taken control over all the islands from Kauai to Hawaii. [__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]
However, Kaiana was kindly received at the court of Kauai, and given lands for his proper maintenance. But he could not remain quiet. While the clash of arms was heard on the other islands, he chafed under the restraints of his exile, and attempted to organize a force of warriors for a descent upon Oahu. Kaeo prevented the departure of the expedition, however, and a mutual feeling of suspicion and antagonism was soon developed between him and his reckless and restless cousin.
However, Kaiana was warmly welcomed at the court of Kauai and was granted lands for his proper upkeep. But he couldn't stay calm. While the sounds of battle echoed from the other islands, he grew frustrated by the limitations of his exile and tried to gather a group of warriors to launch an attack on Oahu. Kaeo, however, stopped the expedition from leaving, and soon a mutual sense of distrust and hostility developed between him and his impulsive and restless cousin.
As the avenues to advancement through the chances of war seemed to be temporarily closed to him, Kaiana donned his best attire, gave entertainments and began vigorously to play the courtier. He first sought to supplant Kaeo in the affections of the queen. Failing in that, he next paid court to her daughter Kapuaamohu. The latter was disposed to regard his suit with favor, but Kaeo, through the pretended advice of a kaula, objected to the alliance, and in a spirit of recklessness Kaiana embarked in the ship Nootka for China late in 1787. That vessel, in the course of trade, touched at Kauai just as the fortunes of Kaiana seemed to be the most desperate, and Captain Meares was easily prevailed upon to permit the handsome Hawaiian to accompany him to the Asiatic coast.
As the opportunities for advancement through war seemed temporarily closed off to him, Kaiana put on his best clothes, hosted gatherings, and started to play the social game. He initially tried to win the queen's affection over Kaeo. When that didn't work, he shifted his attention to her daughter, Kapuaamohu. She seemed inclined to accept his advances, but Kaeo, supposedly acting on the advice of a kaula, opposed the relationship. In a reckless move, Kaiana boarded the ship Nootka for China in late 1787. That ship, while trading, stopped at Kauai just when Kaiana’s situation appeared most hopeless, and Captain Meares was easily convinced to let the dashing Hawaiian accompany him to the Asian coast.
Arriving in Canton, Kaiana spent some months in studying the arts of war and mingling with the people of strange races, and in the latter part of 1788 returned in the Iphigenia to Kauai, bringing with him a very considerable supply of muskets, powder, lead and other munitions of war. As the manner in which he secured these supplies is not stated, we are constrained to believe that he must have taken with him to China a quantity of sandal-wood, which was readily marketable in that country.
When Kaiana arrived in Canton, he spent several months studying military tactics and interacting with people from different cultures. In late 1788, he returned to Kauai on the Iphigenia, bringing back a substantial supply of muskets, gunpowder, lead, and other war supplies. Since there’s no information on how he obtained these supplies, we can only assume that he must have taken a quantity of sandalwood to China, which was easy to sell there.
But Kaeo would not permit him to land on Kauai. The clouds had indicated approaching danger the day before, and Kaiana was told that he would be slain and sacrificed if his foot touched the shore. The vessel, therefore, sailed for Hawaii, where Kaiana landed and offered his services to Kamehameha. They were promptly accepted. His supply of arms and knowledge of other lands rendered him a valuable ally at the time, and Kamehameha gave him an important command and took him into his fullest confidence. This was early in 1789, and, in the succeeding wars with Keoua, Kaiana became an active leader, as already mentioned. The knives, hatchets, axes and swords [403]brought by him from China were found to be useful, but the fire-arms were generally of old patterns, and the most of them were soon rendered entirely unserviceable through the inability of the natives to keep them in repair.
But Kaeo wouldn’t let him land on Kauai. The clouds had signaled danger the day before, and Kaiana was warned that he would be killed and sacrificed if he set foot on the shore. So, the ship sailed for Hawaii, where Kaiana landed and offered his help to Kamehameha. Kamehameha accepted right away. His supply of weapons and knowledge of other places made him a valuable ally, and Kamehameha gave him an important leadership role and trusted him completely. This was early in 1789, and in the following battles with Keoua, Kaiana became an active leader, as mentioned earlier. The knives, hatchets, axes, and swords [__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]he brought from China were useful, but the firearms were mostly outdated, and most of them quickly became unusable because the natives couldn’t keep them in working order.
V.
Very soon after her marriage Kaahumanu was detected in flagrant flirtations with certain chiefs whose business brought them to the court of her husband, and Kamehameha set a close watch upon her actions. This led to bitter words between them, and in time it became a matter of gossip that Kamehameha was jealous of his young wife. The arrival of Kaiana added another to the list of Kaahumanu’s admirers, and in time another wrinkle to the stern face of her warrior-husband. Kaiana was one of the handsomest chiefs of his day, and Kaahumanu could not disguise her infatuation for him. But, whatever may have been the temptation, he was too discreet to awaken the jealousy of Kamehameha, and was not displeased when he was despatched with an army against Keoua in the distant district of Kau.
Very soon after her marriage, Kaahumanu was caught openly flirting with some chiefs who came to her husband's court, and Kamehameha kept a close eye on her behavior. This led to heated arguments between them, and over time, it became gossip that Kamehameha was jealous of his young wife. The arrival of Kaiana added another admirer to Kaahumanu’s list, which only deepened the frown on her warrior-husband's face. Kaiana was one of the most handsome chiefs of his time, and Kaahumanu couldn’t hide her crush on him. But despite the temptation, he was too careful to provoke Kamehameha's jealousy and was not unhappy when he was sent with an army to fight against Keoua in the far-off district of Kau.
After the death of Kalaniopuu, in 1782, and the defeat and death of Kiwalao, the widow of the former, whose name was Kalola, left for Maui, taking with her the widow and infant daughter of Kiwalao. Kahekili, brother of Kalola, provided for the family and gave them his protection. After the conquest of Oahu by Kahekili he removed his court to that island, taking with him his sister and her family. In 1785 they returned to Maui with Kalanikupule, the son of Kahekili, who had been appointed viceroy of the island, and there remained, principally at Olowalu, until 1790, when Kalanikupule was driven from Maui by Kamehameha, and they sought refuge at Kalamaula, on the island of Molokai.
After Kalaniopuu died in 1782, and after Kiwalao was defeated and killed, Kiwalao's widow, Kalola, headed to Maui, bringing along Kiwalao's widow and their infant daughter. Kalola's brother, Kahekili, took care of the family and offered them protection. After Kahekili conquered Oahu, he moved his court to that island, taking his sister and her family with him. In 1785, they returned to Maui with Kalanikupule, Kahekili's son, who had been made viceroy of the island. They stayed mainly in Olowalu until 1790, when Kalanikupule was forced out of Maui by Kamehameha, and they sought refuge in Kalamaula on the island of Molokai.
Seeing his way clear to the conquest of the group, and anxious to ally himself to the superior blood which came through Kalola and Kiwalao, Kamehameha despatched a messenger to Molokai, requesting Kalola not to return to Oahu, but to place herself and family under his protection. Following the messenger to Molokai, and learning that Kalola was ill and not expected to recover, Kamehameha paid her a visit in person, and received the [404]assurance of the dying dowager that, when she passed away, her daughter and granddaughter should be his.
Seeing his path clear to taking over the group and eager to connect himself with the superior lineage of Kalola and Kiwalao, Kamehameha sent a messenger to Molokai, asking Kalola not to return to Oahu but to stay with her family under his protection. After following the messenger to Molokai and finding out that Kalola was sick and not expected to recover, Kamehameha visited her personally. He received the [__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__] assurance from the dying dowager that when she passed away, her daughter and granddaughter would be his.
The granddaughter was Keopuolani, then a girl of fourteen. She subsequently became the wife of Kamehameha and the mother of the ruling princes of his dynasty. In recognition of her superior rank Kamehameha always approached her on his knees, even after she had become his wife and he the undisputed sovereign of the group. Such was the deference invariably paid to rank at that time and earlier.
The granddaughter was Keopuolani, a girl of fourteen at the time. She later became the wife of Kamehameha and the mother of the ruling princes of his dynasty. To acknowledge her higher status, Kamehameha always approached her on his knees, even after she became his wife and he was the undisputed ruler of the group. This showed the respect that was consistently given to rank back then and in earlier times.
Kalola did not live but a few days after her meeting with Kamehameha. At her death he manifested his sorrow by knocking out two of his front teeth, and then formally took charge of and removed to Hawaii her daughter and granddaughter, not only as a sacred legacy from Kalola, but as a token of reconciliation and alliance between himself and the elder branch of the Keawe dynasty.
Kalola lived only a few days after her meeting with Kamehameha. When she passed away, he showed his grief by knocking out two of his front teeth, and then he officially took in and relocated her daughter and granddaughter to Hawaii, not only as a sacred legacy from Kalola but also as a gesture of reconciliation and alliance between himself and the senior branch of the Keawe dynasty.
Kaahumanu well understood the meaning of this reconciliation, and it was with little pleasure that she welcomed Liliha and her daughter to Hawaii. She knew it was the purpose of Kamehameha to marry Keopuolani as soon as she reached a proper age; but she was childless and could urge no valid objection to the union. The thought of it, however, did not sweeten her temper or quicken her sense of propriety. She became more reckless, and her husband more and more suspicious, until they finally separated, when Kaahumanu returned to her father, where she remained for more than a year, and where, it is said, Kaiana frequently visited her.
Kaahumanu understood the meaning of this reconciliation well, and she welcomed Liliha and her daughter to Hawaii with little joy. She knew that Kamehameha planned to marry Keopuolani as soon as she was old enough, but since she was childless, she couldn’t present a valid objection to the marriage. Still, the thought of it didn’t improve her mood or sense of decency. She became more reckless, and her husband grew increasingly suspicious, leading to their separation. Kaahumanu returned to her father’s house, where she stayed for over a year, and it’s said that Kaiana visited her often.
Of these visits Kamehameha was apprised by Kepupuohi, the wife of Kaiana, of whom tradition makes but spare mention. She was jealous of her husband’s attentions to Kaahumanu, and it was through her that Kamehameha became aware of their secret meetings. His spies had overlooked what the jealous eyes of the wife had discovered, and it is intimated that they retaliated in kind upon the recreant couple. Be that as it may, Kamehameha sent for Kaahumanu, and through the offices of Captain Vancouver, whose vessel was at that time anchored in Kealakeakua Bay, a reconciliation was effected between them.
During these visits, Kamehameha was informed by Kepupuohi, the wife of Kaiana, who is mentioned only briefly in tradition. She was jealous of her husband’s attention to Kaahumanu, and it was through her that Kamehameha learned about their secret meetings. His spies missed what the jealous eyes of the wife had uncovered, and it's suggested that they got back at the unfaithful couple in return. Regardless, Kamehameha called for Kaahumanu, and with the help of Captain Vancouver, whose ship was anchored in Kealakeakua Bay at the time, a reconciliation was achieved between them.
But Kamehameha did not forgive Kaiana. His thoughts were bent upon the conquest of Oahu, and he needed his assistance in that important enterprise; but he determined to crush him whenever [405]he could do so without injury to himself. Kaiana felt the coldness of his chief, and had observed unmistakable evidences of his hatred; but he neglected no duty, and resolved that, if an open rupture could not be avoided, Kamehameha should not be in a position to urge a reason for it that would command the respect and approval of his supporting chiefs.
But Kamehameha didn’t forgive Kaiana. He was focused on conquering Oahu and needed Kaiana’s help for that important mission; however, he decided to crush him whenever he could do it without hurting himself. Kaiana felt the chill from his leader and noticed clear signs of his hatred, but he didn’t neglect any responsibilities. He resolved that if a public break was unavoidable, Kamehameha wouldn’t have a reason to justify it that would earn the respect and approval of his allied chiefs.
Summoning his district chiefs to muster their quotas of canoes and armed men, Kamehameha prepared for the conquest of Oahu and a final struggle for the mastery of the group. It is said that his army numbered sixteen thousand warriors, some of them armed with muskets, and that so great was the number of his canoes that they almost blackened the channels through which they passed.
Summoning his district chiefs to gather their quotas of canoes and armed men, Kamehameha got ready for the conquest of Oahu and a final struggle for control of the islands. It’s said that his army had sixteen thousand warriors, some equipped with muskets, and that the sheer number of his canoes nearly filled the channels they navigated.
The army embarked from Hawaii early in 1795, and, after touching at Lahaina for refreshments, landed for final preparation on Molokai, the fleet of canoes being distributed for miles along the coast. Kaiana had promptly responded to the call of his chief, and was there with a heavy quota of warriors and canoes.
The army set out from Hawaii in early 1795, and after a stop at Lahaina for supplies, landed on Molokai for final preparations, with canoes spread out for miles along the coast. Kaiana quickly answered his chief's call and arrived with a strong group of warriors and canoes.
A council of war was called at Kaunakakai to discuss the plans of the campaign, but Kaiana was not invited to participate in its proceedings. His exclusion from the council alarmed Kaiana, and he suspected that he was the principal subject of discussion. He left his quarters, and calling at the house of Namahana, the mother of Kaahumanu, learned from her that the council was discussing some private matter, the nature of which she did not know. He next visited Kalaimoku, after the adjournment of the council, and endeavored to ascertain what had been done, but the answers of the chief were evasive and unsatisfactory. He did not dare to tell Kaiana, who was allied to him in blood, that Kamehameha had charged Kaiana before the council with meditated treason, which implied his death, and that his advisers had prevailed upon him to allow the matter to rest until after the conquest of Oahu.
A war council was called at Kaunakakai to discuss campaign plans, but Kaiana wasn’t invited to join in. His exclusion from the council concerned him, and he feared he was the main topic of discussion. He left his quarters and went to visit Namahana, the mother of Kaahumanu, who told him that the council was discussing a private matter, though she didn’t know what it was. After the council ended, he then went to see Kalaimoku and tried to find out what had happened, but the chief's responses were vague and unsatisfactory. He didn’t dare tell Kaiana, who was related to him, that Kamehameha had accused Kaiana of plotting treason in the council, which could mean his death, and that his advisors had convinced him to let the matter be until after the conquest of Oahu.
On his way back to Hamiloloa, where his warriors were encamped, Kaiana again passed the house of Namahana. It was past sunset, and he was striding through the dying twilight, his thoughts a tumult of doubt and indignation, when from behind a clump of bushes he heard his name pronounced in a low tone. [406]He stopped and listened, and “Kaiana!” again came to him in a soft voice.
On his way back to Hamiloloa, where his warriors were camped, Kaiana passed by Namahana's house once more. It was after sunset, and he was walking through the fading twilight, his mind a mix of doubt and anger, when he heard someone call his name softly from behind a group of bushes. [__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]He paused and listened, and again he heard, “Kaiana!” in a gentle voice.
Fearful of treachery, he hesitated for a moment, then drew a knife from a scabbard hanging from his neck, and cautiously walked around the screening undergrowth.
Fearful of betrayal, he paused for a moment, then pulled out a knife from a sheath hanging around his neck and carefully made his way around the dense underbrush.
“Who calls?” inquired Kaiana, observing a crouching figure among the bushes.
“Who’s there?” Kaiana asked, noticing a hunched figure in the bushes.
“Your friend,” was the answer; and Kaahumanu rose and stood before him.
“Your friend,” was the answer; and Kaahumanu got up and stood in front of him.
What passed between them can only be conjectured; but Kaahumanu must have satisfied Kaiana of Kamehameha’s hostile purposes concerning him, for when he reached his quarters he promptly informed his brother Nahiolea of the danger awaiting both of them, and apprised him of his resolution to abandon Kamehameha on the passage to Oahu and join forces with Kalanikupule. “The movement is hazardous,” explained Kaiana, “but it will enable us, at least, to die like chiefs, with arms in our hands, instead of being slain like dogs.”
What happened between them can only be guessed; however, Kaahumanu must have convinced Kaiana about Kamehameha's malicious intentions towards him. When Kaiana returned to his quarters, he quickly informed his brother Nahiolea about the danger they both faced and told him of his decision to leave Kamehameha during the journey to Oahu and ally with Kalanikupule. “It's a risky move,” Kaiana explained, “but at least it allows us to die like chiefs, with weapons in our hands, instead of being killed like dogs.”
As the several divisions were preparing to embark for Oahu the next morning, Kaiana visited the squadron of canoes set apart for the accommodation of the wives and daughters of Kamehameha and his principal chiefs, and secretly informed his wife of his purpose to join Kalanikupule. She expressed surprise at the announcement, but declined to follow him, declaring that she preferred to cast her fortunes with Kamehameha. “But,” she continued, bitterly, “perhaps Kaahumanu would follow you, if asked to do so!” Kaiana made no reply to this cutting suggestion, but waved his wife a hasty farewell, and joined his embarking warriors.
As the various divisions got ready to leave for Oahu the next morning, Kaiana went to the fleet of canoes set aside for the wives and daughters of Kamehameha and his main chiefs, and quietly told his wife about his plan to join Kalanikupule. She was surprised by the news but refused to go with him, saying she preferred to stay loyal to Kamehameha. “But,” she added bitterly, “maybe Kaahumanu would go with you if you asked her!” Kaiana didn’t respond to her sharp remark, but quickly waved goodbye to his wife and joined his fellow warriors as they boarded.
The other divisions of the invading army were well out to sea before Kaiana’s sails were set, and he found no difficulty in making his way unobserved to Kailua, on the northern side of the island, while Kamehameha landed with the main body of his forces in the neighborhood of Honolulu, his canoes extending along the beach from Waialae to Waikiki.
The other parts of the invading army were already far out at sea by the time Kaiana set his sails, and he easily made his way unnoticed to Kailua, on the northern side of the island, while Kamehameha landed with the bulk of his forces near Honolulu, with his canoes lining the beach from Waialae to Waikiki.
Disembarking his warriors at Kailua, to the number of perhaps fifteen hundred, Kaiana offered his services to Kalanikupule, whose army was rapidly occupying positions in the valleys back of Honolulu. The moi received him with open arms, promising him the sovereignty of Maui should they succeed in destroying [407]Kamehameha; and the united armies, climbing over the Nuuanu and Kalihi passes, confronted the advancing lines of Kamehameha.
Disembarking his warriors at Kailua, numbering around fifteen hundred, Kaiana offered his help to Kalanikupule, whose army was quickly taking positions in the valleys behind Honolulu. The moi welcomed him warmly, promising him the rule of Maui if they managed to defeat [__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]Kamehameha; and the combined armies, moving over the Nuuanu and Kalihi passes, faced the advancing forces of Kamehameha.
Learning of the desertion of Kaiana and the warriors under his command, Kamehameha exhibited but little surprise. He did not doubt his ability to defeat the combined armies of his opponents, for the auguries had been favorable and he had faith in his gods; nor did he regret that through his defection Kaiana had at last placed himself in a position to be dealt with as an open enemy.
Learning about Kaiana’s desertion and that of the warriors he led, Kamehameha showed little surprise. He was confident in his ability to defeat the united armies of his foes, as the signs had been positive and he believed in his gods; nor did he regret that Kaiana’s defection had finally put him in a position to be treated as an open enemy.
With his war-god Kaili in the van, Kamehameha, at the head of a mighty force, marched up Nuuanu Valley, where, three miles back of Honolulu, behind a stone wall stretching from one hill to the other of the narrowing gorge, was entrenched the main body of the allied armies. And behind the wall stood Kaiana, grim, silent and desperate, with a musket in his hand, awaiting the approach of Kamehameha.
With his war-god Kaili leading the way, Kamehameha, at the forefront of a powerful army, marched up Nuuanu Valley, where, three miles behind Honolulu, behind a stone wall stretching from one hill to the other of the narrowing gorge, the main forces of the allied armies were entrenched. And behind the wall stood Kaiana, grim, silent, and desperate, holding a musket, waiting for Kamehameha to arrive.
Nearer and nearer advanced the attacking column, with shouts that were repaid by yells of defiance from behind the defences. A few volleys of musketry were exchanged by the hundred or more of warriors in possession of fire-arms on each side, but Kaiana took no part in the noisy conflict. He was watching for the approach of one whose life he longed for more than all the rest, and for which he was willing to exchange his own.
The attacking group moved closer and closer, shouting as they were met with screams of defiance from behind the defenses. A few bursts of gunfire were exchanged between the hundred or so warriors on each side with firearms, but Kaiana stayed out of the chaotic fight. He was waiting for the arrival of someone whose life meant more to him than anything else, and for whom he was willing to sacrifice his own.
But he watched in vain. A field-piece, under the direction of John Young, was brought to bear upon the wall, and Kaiana fell with the first shot, mortally wounded. After a few more shots the Hawaiians charged up the hill, their shouts drowning the roar of the breakers against the reef below. Kaiana drew himself up against the wall. His heart had been laid almost bare, and his eyes were growing dim. With an effort he raised his musket, fired it at random in the direction of the storming column, hoping the bullet might by chance find the heart of Kamehameha, and then fell dead.
But he watched in vain. A cannon, aimed by John Young, was fired at the wall, and Kaiana was hit with the first shot, fatally wounded. After a few more shots, the Hawaiians charged up the hill, their shouts drowning out the sound of the waves crashing against the reef below. Kaiana leaned against the wall. His heart felt almost exposed, and his vision was fading. With great effort, he raised his musket and fired it aimlessly at the advancing soldiers, hoping that by chance the bullet might find Kamehameha's heart, and then he collapsed dead.
The rout of the Oahuans and their allies was complete. They broke and fled in all directions. Some were driven over the pali, a precipice six or seven hundred feet in height at the head of the valley, and others escaped over the hills. Kalanikupule found refuge for a time in the mountains, but he was finally captured, [408]slain and offered as a sacrifice to Kamehameha’s war-god at Waikiki.
The defeat of the Oahuans and their allies was total. They scattered and ran in every direction. Some were pushed over the pali, a cliff six or seven hundred feet high at the valley's end, while others escaped into the hills. Kalanikupule managed to hide in the mountains for a while, but he was ultimately captured, [__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]killed, and offered as a sacrifice to Kamehameha’s war god at Waikiki.
This was the last battle of the conquest, and the victory gave to Kamehameha the sovereignty of the group, for the king of Kauai, recognizing his power, soon after yielded to him his peaceful allegiance. But it brought to a close the career of one of the most noted of modern Hawaiian chiefs—Kaiana-a-Ahaula—over whose death Kamehameha rejoiced, and Kaahumanu mourned in silence. Her love proved fatal to more than one, but he was the grandest and brightest of all who perished by the sweet poison of her smiles. [409]
This was the final battle of the conquest, and the victory gave Kamehameha control of the islands, as the king of Kauai, acknowledging his power, soon after pledged his peaceful loyalty to him. However, it marked the end of one of the most prominent modern Hawaiian chiefs—Kaiana-a-Ahaula—whose death brought Kamehameha joy, while Kaahumanu mourned quietly. Her affection proved deadly to more than one, but he was the most remarkable and radiant of all who fell victim to the sweet poison of her charm. [__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]
Kaala, the Flower of Lanai.
[410]
[__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]
CHARACTERS.
- Kamehameha I., king of Hawaii.
- Oponui, a chief of Lanai.
- Kaala, daughter of Oponui.
- Kalani, mother of Kaala.
- Kaaialii, a lieutenant of the king.
- Milou, the bone-breaker.
- Ua, a friend of Kaala.
- Papakua, a priest.
[411]
[__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]
KAALA, THE FLOWER OF LANAI.
Kaala, the Lanai flower.
A STORY OF THE SPOUTING CAVE OF PALIKAHOLO.
A STORY OF THE SPOUTING CAVE OF PALIKAHOLO.
I.
Beneath one of the boldest of the rocky bluffs against which dash the breakers of Kaumalapau Bay, on the little island of Lanai, is the Puhio-Kaala, or “Spouting Cave of Kaala.” The only entrance to it is through the vortex of a whirlpool, which marks the place where, at intervals, the receding waters rise in a column of foam above the surface. Within, the floor of the cave gradually rises from the opening beneath the waters until a landing is reached above the level of the tides, and to the right and left, farther than the eye can penetrate by the dim light struggling through the surging waves, stretch dank and shelly shores, where crabs, polypii, sting-rays and other noisome creatures of the deep find protection against their larger enemies.
Beneath one of the most striking rocky cliffs along the shores of Kaumalapau Bay, on the small island of Lanai, is the Puhio-Kaala, or “Spouting Cave of Kaala.” The only way in is through a whirlpool that shows where the water recedes, creating a column of foam above the surface. Inside, the cave’s floor gradually rises from the water until you reach a landing above the tide level, and on both sides, extending beyond what the faint light filtering through the waves can reveal, are damp and shelly shores where crabs, polyps, stingrays, and other unpleasant sea creatures find shelter from their larger predators.
This cavern was once a favorite resort of Mooalii, the great lizard-god; but as the emissaries of Ukanipo, the shark-god, annoyed him greatly and threatened to imprison him within it by piling a mountain of rocks against the opening, he abandoned it and found a home in a cave near Kaulapapa, in the neighboring island of Molokai, where many rude temples were erected to him by the fishermen.
This cave used to be a popular hangout for Mooalii, the great lizard-god. However, the messengers of Ukanipo, the shark-god, bothered him a lot and threatened to trap him inside by blocking the entrance with a pile of rocks. Because of this, he left and took up residence in a cave near Kaulapapa on the nearby island of Molokai, where fishermen built many simple temples for him.
Before the days of Kamehameha I. resolute divers frequently visited the Spouting Cave, and on one occasion fire, enclosed in a small calabash, was taken down through the whirlpool, with the view of making a light and exploring its mysterious chambers; but the fire was scattered and extinguished by an unseen hand, and those who brought it hastily retreated to escape a shower of rocks sent down upon them from the roof of the cavern. The existence of the cave is still known, and the whirlpool and spouting column marking the entrance to it are pointed out; but longer and longer have grown the intervals between the visits of divers to its sunless depths, until the present generation can [412]point to not more than one, perhaps, who has ventured to enter them.
Before the time of Kamehameha I, brave divers often explored the Spouting Cave. On one occasion, they brought a small calabash containing fire down through the whirlpool to light up and explore its mysterious chambers. However, the fire was somehow scattered and put out by an unseen force, prompting the divers to quickly retreat to avoid a rain of rocks that fell from the cave's roof. The cave is still known today, and the whirlpool along with the spouting column that marks its entrance is pointed out. However, the time between visits by divers to its dark depths has grown longer and longer, to the point where the current generation can [__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__] point to maybe just one person who has dared to enter.
Tradition has brought down the outlines of a number of supernatural and romantic stories connected with the Spouting Cave, but the nearest complete and most recent of these mookaaos is the legend of Kaala, the flower of Lanai, which is here given at considerably less length than native narration accords it.
Tradition has passed down several supernatural and romantic stories associated with the Spouting Cave, but the most complete and recent of these mookaaos is the legend of Kaala, the flower of Lanai, which is presented here in a much shorter version than how it is typically told by the locals.
It was during an interval of comparative quiet, if not of peace, in the stormy career of Kamehameha I., near the close of the last century, and after the battle of Maunalei, that he went with his court to the island of Lanai for a brief season of recreation. The visit was not made for the purpose of worshipping at the great heiau of Kaunola, which was then half in ruins, or at any of the lesser temples scattered here and there over the little island, and dedicated, in most instances, to fish-gods. He went to Kealia simply to enjoy a few days of rest away from the scenes of his many conflicts, and feast for a time upon the affluent fishing-grounds of that locality.
It was during a period of relative calm, if not peace, in the tumultuous life of Kamehameha I, near the end of the last century, and after the battle of Maunalei, that he traveled with his court to the island of Lanai for a short break. The visit wasn't for the purpose of worshipping at the impressive heiau of Kaunola, which was then partially in ruins, or at any of the smaller temples scattered around the island, most of which were dedicated to fish gods. He went to Kealia simply to enjoy a few days of relaxation away from the many battles he faced, and to indulge for a while in the rich fishing grounds of that area.
He made the journey with six double canoes, all striped with yellow, and his own bearing the royal ensign. He took with him his war-god, Kaili, and a small army of attendants, consisting of priests, kahunas, kahili and spittoon-bearers, stewards, cooks and other household servants, as well as a retinue of distinguished chiefs with their personal retainers in their own canoes, and a hundred warriors in the capacity of a royal guard.
He traveled with six double canoes, all striped with yellow, and his own carried the royal flag. He brought along his war god, Kaili, and a small army of attendants that included priests, kahunas, kahili, and spittoon bearers, as well as stewards, cooks, and other household staff. Along with them was a group of distinguished chiefs and their own retainers in separate canoes, plus a hundred warriors serving as his royal guard.
Landing, the victorious chief was received with enthusiasm by the five or six thousand people then inhabiting the island. He took up his residence in the largest of the several cottages provided for him and his personal attendants. Provisions were brought in abundance, and flowers and sweet-scented herbs and vines were contributed without stint. The chief and his titled attendants were garlanded with them. They were strewn in his path, cast at his door and thrown upon his dwelling, until their fragrance seemed to fill all the air.
Landing, the victorious chief was greeted with enthusiasm by the five or six thousand people living on the island at that time. He settled into the largest of the several cottages available for him and his personal attendants. Food was brought in abundance, and flowers, fragrant herbs, and vines were generously offered. The chief and his honored attendants were adorned with them. They were scattered in his path, thrown at his door, and laid on his house, until their fragrance seemed to fill the whole area.
Among the many who brought offerings of flowers was the beautiful Kaala, “the sweet-scented flower of Lanai,” as she was called. She was a girl of fifteen, and in grace and beauty had no peer on the island. She was the daughter of Oponui, a chief of one of the lower grades, and her admirers were counted by the hundreds. Of the many who sought her as a wife was Mailou, [413]“the bone-breaker.” He was a huge, muscular savage, capable of crushing almost any ordinary man in an angry embrace; and while Kaala hated, feared and took every occasion to avoid him, her father favored his suit, doubtless pleased at the thought of securing in a son-in-law a friend and champion so distinguished for his strength and ferocity.
Among the many people who brought flower offerings was the beautiful Kaala, known as “the sweet-scented flower of Lanai.” She was a fifteen-year-old girl and had no equal in grace and beauty on the island. She was the daughter of Oponui, a chief of a lower rank, and her admirers numbered in the hundreds. Among those who wanted to marry her was Mailou, [__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]“the bone-breaker.” He was a huge, muscular brute capable of crushing almost any ordinary man in an angry hug; and while Kaala hated and feared him, doing everything possible to avoid him, her father supported his proposal, likely pleased at the idea of gaining in-law a friend and protector known for his strength and aggression.
As Kaala scattered flowers before the chief her graceful movements and modesty were noted by Kaaialii, and when he saw her face he was enraptured with its beauty. Although young in years, he was one of Kamehameha’s most valued lieutenants, and had distinguished himself in many battles. He was of chiefly blood and bearing, with sinewy limbs and a handsome face, and when he stopped to look into the eyes of Kaala and tell her that she was beautiful, she thought the words, although they had been frequently spoken to her by others, had never sounded so sweetly to her before. He asked her for a simple flower, and she twined a lei for his neck. He asked her for a smile, and she looked up into his face and gave him her heart.
As Kaala scattered flowers in front of the chief, her graceful movements and modesty caught Kaaialii's attention, and when he saw her face, he was captivated by her beauty. Although he was young, he was one of Kamehameha’s most valued lieutenants and had made a name for himself in many battles. He came from noble blood and carried himself with authority, with strong limbs and a handsome face. When he paused to look into Kaala's eyes and told her she was beautiful, she felt that those words, though often said by others, had never sounded so sweet to her before. He asked her for a simple flower, and she made a lei for his neck. He asked her for a smile, and she looked up into his face and gave him her heart.
They saw each other the next day, and the next, and then Kaaialii went to his chief and said:
They met again the following day, and the day after that, and then Kaaialii approached his chief and said:
“I love the beautiful Kaala, daughter of Oponui. Your will is law. Give her to me for a wife.”
“I love the beautiful Kaala, daughter of Oponui. Your wish is law. Please give her to me as my wife.”
For a moment Kamehameha smiled without speaking, and then replied:
For a moment, Kamehameha smiled silently, then responded:
“The girl is not mine to give. We must be just. I will send for her father. Come to-morrow.”
“The girl isn’t mine to give away. We have to be fair. I’ll call her father. Come back tomorrow.”
Kaaialii had hoped for a different answer; but neither protest nor further explanation was admissible, and all he could do was to thank the king and retire.
Kaaialii had hoped for a different answer, but neither protest nor further explanation was allowed, and all he could do was thank the king and leave.
A messenger brought Oponui to the presence of Kamehameha. He was received kindly, and told that Kaaialii loved Kaala and desired to make her his wife. The information kindled the wrath of Oponui. He hated Kaaialii, but did not dare to exhibit his animosity before the king. He was in the battle of Maunalei, where he narrowly escaped death at the hands of Kaaialii, after his spear had found the heart of one of his dearest friends, and he felt that he would rather give his daughter to the sharks than to one who had sought his life and slain his friend. But he pretended to regard the proposal with favor, and, in answer to the king, expressed regret that he had promised his [414]daughter to Mailou, the bone-breaker. “However,” he continued, “in respect to the interest which it has pleased you, great chief, to take in the matter, I am content that the girl shall fall to the victor in a contest with bare hands between Mailou and Kaaialii.”
A messenger brought Oponui to meet Kamehameha. He was welcomed warmly and informed that Kaaialii loved Kaala and wanted to marry her. This news ignited Oponui's anger. He hated Kaaialii but didn’t dare show his hostility in front of the king. He had been in the battle of Maunalei, where he barely escaped death at Kaaialii's hands after Kaaialii’s spear killed one of his closest friends. He felt he would rather give his daughter to the sharks than to someone who tried to kill him and murdered his friend. However, he feigned approval of the proposal and told the king he was sorry he had already promised his [__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__] daughter to Mailou, the bone-breaker. “But,” he added, “because of the interest you, great chief, have shown in this matter, I agree that the girl should be given to the winner of a bare-knuckle fight between Mailou and Kaaialii.”
The proposal seemed to be fair, and, not doubting that Kaaialii would promptly accept it, the king gave it his approval, and the contest was fixed for the day following. Oponui received the announcement with satisfaction, not doubting that Mailou would crush Kaaialii in his rugged embrace as easily as he had broken the bones of many an adversary.
The proposal looked fair, and, confident that Kaaialii would quickly accept it, the king approved it, scheduling the contest for the next day. Oponui welcomed the news with satisfaction, believing that Mailou would easily overpower Kaaialii in his strong grip, just as he had broken the bones of many opponents.
News of the coming contest spread rapidly, and the next day thousands of persons assembled at Kealia to witness it. Kaala was in an agony of fear. The thought of becoming the wife of the bone-breaker almost distracted her, for it was said that he had had many wives, all of whom had disappeared one after another as he tired of them, and the whisper was that he had crushed and thrown them into the sea. And, besides, she loved Kaaialii, and deemed it scarcely possible that he should be able to meet and successfully combat the prodigious strength and ferocity of one who had never been subdued.
News of the upcoming contest spread quickly, and the next day thousands of people gathered at Kealia to watch it. Kaala was filled with fear. The idea of becoming the wife of the bone-breaker was almost overwhelming for her, as it was said he had had many wives, all of whom had disappeared one by one as he lost interest in them, with murmurs that he had crushed them and thrown them into the sea. On top of that, she loved Kaaialii and thought it was unlikely he could confront and successfully defeat the incredible strength and ferocity of someone who had never been conquered.
As Kaaialii was approaching the spot where the contest was to take place, in the presence of Kamehameha and his court and a large concourse of less distinguished spectators, Kaala sprang from the side of her father, and, seizing the young chief by the hand, exclaimed:
As Kaaialii was getting closer to the place where the competition was going to happen, with Kamehameha, his court, and a big crowd of less notable onlookers around, Kaala jumped away from her father, grabbed the young chief's hand, and shouted:
“You have indeed slain my people in war, but rescue me from the horrible embrace of the bone-breaker, and I will catch the squid and beat the kapa for you all my days!”
“You’ve really killed my people in battle, but save me from the terrible grip of the bone-breaker, and I’ll catch the squid and pound the kapa for you for the rest of my life!”
With a dark frown upon his face, Oponui tore the girl from her lover before he could reply. Kaaialii followed her with his eyes until she disappeared among the spectators, and then pressed forward through the crowd and stepped within the circle reserved for the combatants. Mailou was already there. He was indeed a muscular brute, with long arms, broad shoulders and mighty limbs tattooed with figures of sharks and birds of prey. He was naked to the loins, and, as Kaaialii approached, his fingers opened and closed, as if impatient to clutch and tear his adversary in pieces.
With a dark scowl on his face, Oponui yanked the girl away from her boyfriend before he could respond. Kaaialii watched her with his eyes until she disappeared among the crowd, and then pushed his way through the spectators and stepped into the circle set aside for the fighters. Mailou was already there. He was a muscular brute, with long arms, broad shoulders, and powerful limbs covered in tattoos of sharks and birds of prey. He was bare from the waist up, and as Kaaialii approached, his fingers opened and closed, as if eager to grab and tear his opponent apart.
Although less bulky than the bone-breaker, Kaaialii was large [415]and perfectly proportioned, with well-knit muscles and loins and shoulders suggestive of unusual strength. Nude, with the exception of a maro, he was a splendid specimen of vigorous manhood; but, in comparison with those of the bone-breaker, his limbs appeared to be frail and feminine, and a general expression of sympathy for the young chief was observed in the faces of the large assemblage as they turned from him to the sturdy giant he was about to encounter.
Although less muscular than the bone-breaker, Kaaialii was big [__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]and perfectly shaped, with strong muscles and a build that hinted at exceptional strength. Naked, except for a maro, he was a striking example of robust manhood; but, compared to the bone-breaker, his limbs seemed delicate and almost feminine. The crowd shared a general look of sympathy for the young chief as they shifted their attention from him to the powerful giant he was about to face.
The contest was to be one of strength, courage, agility and skill combined. Blows with the clenched fist, grappling, strangling, tearing, breaking and every other injury which it was possible to inflict were permitted. In hakoko (wrestling) and moko (boxing) contests certain rules were usually observed, in order that fatal injuries might be avoided; but in the combat between Kaaialii and Mailou no rule or custom was to govern. It was to be a savage struggle to the death.
The contest was meant to be a mix of strength, courage, agility, and skill. Strikes with a clenched fist, grappling, choking, tearing, breaking, and any injury that could be inflicted were allowed. In hakoko (wrestling) and moko (boxing) matches, there were usually some rules in place to prevent deadly injuries; however, in the fight between Kaaialii and Mailou, no rules or customs applied. It was going to be a brutal fight to the death.
Taunt and boasting are the usual prelude to personal conflicts among the uncivilized; nor was it deemed unworthy the Saxon knight to meet his adversary with insult and bravado. The object was not more to unnerve his opponent than to steel his own courage. With the bone-breaker, however, there was little fear or doubt concerning the result. He knew the measure of his own prodigious strength, and, with a malignant smile that laid bare his shark-like teeth, he glared with satisfaction upon his rival.
Taunts and bragging are the typical lead-up to personal fights among the uncivilized; it wasn't beneath a Saxon knight to face his enemy with insults and swagger. The goal was not only to unnerve his opponent but also to fortify his own courage. However, the bone-breaker had little fear or doubt about the outcome. He was aware of his own incredible strength, and with a malicious smile that revealed his sharp teeth, he glared with satisfaction at his rival.
“Ha! ha!” laughed the bone-breaker, taking a stride toward Kaaialii; “so you are the insane youth who has dared to meet Mailou in combat! Do you know who I am? I am the bone-breaker! In my hands the limbs of men are like tender cane. Come, and with one hand let me strangle you!”
“Ha! ha!” laughed the bone-breaker, stepping closer to Kaaialii; “so you are the crazy kid who has dared to face Mailou in a fight! Do you know who I am? I’m the bone-breaker! In my grip, a man's limbs are like soft cane. Come on, and let me strangle you with just one hand!”
“You will need both!” replied Kaaialii. “I know you. You are a breaker of the bones of women, not of men! You speak brave words, but have the heart of a coward. Let the word be given, and if you do not run from me to save your life, as I half-suspect you will, I will put my foot upon your broken neck before you find time to cry for mercy!”
“You’re going to need both!” Kaaialii replied. “I know you. You’re a coward who hurts women, not men! You talk a big game, but you’re really a coward at heart. Let’s make this clear: if you don’t run from me to save your own skin, as I suspect you will, I’ll step on your broken neck before you have a chance to beg for mercy!”
Before Mailou could retort the word was given, and with an exclamation of rage he sprang at the throat of Kaaialii. Feigning as if to meet the shock, the latter waited until the hands of Mailou were almost at his throat, when with a quick movement [416]he struck them up, swayed his body to the left, and with his right foot adroitly tripped his over-confident assailant. The momentum of Mailou was so great that he fell headlong to the earth. Springing upon him before he could rise, Kaaialii seized his right arm, and with a vigorous blow of the foot broke the bone below the elbow. Rising and finding his right arm useless, Mailou attempted to grapple his adversary with the left, but a well-delivered blow felled him again to the earth, and Kaaialii broke his left arm as he had broken the right. Regaining his feet, and unable to use either hand, with a wild howl of despair the bone-breaker rushed upon Kaaialii, with the view of dealing him a blow with his bent head; but the young chief again tripped him as he passed, and, seizing him by the hair as he fell, placed his knees against the back of his prostrate foe and broke his spine.
Before Mailou could respond, the command was given, and with a shout of anger, he lunged at Kaaialii's throat. Pretending to brace for the impact, Kaaialii waited until Mailou's hands were nearly at his neck, then with a swift move [__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__] he deflected them, leaned to the left, and deftly tripped his overconfident attacker with his right foot. Mailou's momentum was so strong that he crashed to the ground. Jumping on him before he could get up, Kaaialii grabbed his right arm and with a powerful kick, broke the bone below the elbow. Rising and realizing his right arm was useless, Mailou tried to grab Kaaialii with his left, but a well-placed hit knocked him down again, and Kaaialii broke his left arm just as he had the right. Getting back up, with neither hand usable, Mailou let out a wild scream of despair and charged at Kaaialii, trying to hit him with his bent head; however, the young chief tripped him again as he passed, grabbed him by the hair as he fell, pinned his knees against the back of his downed opponent, and broke his spine.
This, of course, ended the struggle, and Kaaialii was declared the victor, amidst the plaudits of the spectators and the congratulations of Kamehameha and the court. Breaking from her father, who was grievously disappointed at the unlooked-for result, and who sought to detain her, Kaala sprang through the crowd and threw herself into the arms of Kaaialii. Oponui would have protested, and asked that his daughter might be permitted to visit her mother before becoming the wife of Kaaialii; but the king put an end to his hopes by placing the hand of Kaala in that of the victorious chief, and saying to him:
This, of course, ended the struggle, and Kaaialii was declared the winner, amidst the cheers of the spectators and the congratulations of Kamehameha and the court. Breaking away from her father, who was deeply disappointed by the unexpected outcome and tried to hold her back, Kaala leaped through the crowd and threw herself into Kaaialii's arms. Oponui would have protested and asked that his daughter be allowed to visit her mother before marrying Kaaialii; but the king dashed his hopes by placing Kaala's hand in that of the victorious chief and saying to him:
“You have won her nobly. She is now your wife. Take her with you.”
“You’ve won her over the right way. She’s now your wife. Take her with you.”
Although silenced by the voice of the king, and compelled to submit to the conditions of a contest which he had himself proposed, Oponui’s hatred of Kaaialii knew no abatement, and all that day and the night following he sat alone by the sea-shore, devising a means by which Kaala and her husband might be separated. He finally settled upon a plan.
Although silenced by the king's command and forced to accept the terms of a contest he had suggested, Oponui's hatred for Kaaialii didn’t fade at all. He spent the entire day and the following night alone by the shore, trying to come up with a way to separate Kaala from her husband. Eventually, he came up with a plan.
The morning after her marriage Oponui visited Kaala, as if he had just returned from Mahana, where her mother was supposed to be then living. He greeted her with apparent affection, and was profuse in his expressions of friendship for Kaaialii. He embraced them both, and said: “I now see that you love each other; my prayer is that you may live long and happily together.” He then told Kaala that Kalani, her mother, was [417]lying dangerously ill at Mahana, and, believing that she would not recover, desired to see and bless her daughter before she died. Kaala believed the story, for her father wept when he told it, and moaned as if for the dead, and beat his breast; and, with many protestations of love, Kaaialii allowed her to depart with Oponui, with the promise from both of them that she would speedily return to the arms of her husband.
The morning after her marriage, Oponui visited Kaala, as if he had just come back from Mahana, where her mother was said to be living. He greeted her warmly and expressed a lot of friendship for Kaaialii. He hugged them both and said, “I can see that you love each other; I hope you both live a long and happy life together.” He then told Kaala that Kalani, her mother, was [__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__] seriously ill at Mahana and, believing she wouldn’t recover, wanted to see and bless her daughter before she passed away. Kaala believed the story because her father wept as he shared it, moaning as if for the dead, and beating his chest. With many declarations of love, Kaaialii let her go with Oponui, with both of them promising that she would return to her husband quickly.
With some misgivings, Kaaialii watched her from the top of the hill above Kealia until she descended into the valley of Palawai. There leaving the path that led to Mahana, they journeyed toward the bay of Kaumalapau. Satisfied that her father was for some purpose deceiving her, Kaala protested and was about to return, when he acknowledged that her mother was not ill at Mahana, as he had represented to Kaaialii in order to secure his consent to her departure, but at the sea-shore, where she had gathered crabs, shrimps, limpets and other delicacies, and prepared a feast in celebration of her marriage.
With some hesitation, Kaaialii watched her from the top of the hill above Kealia until she went down into the valley of Palawai. There, leaving the path that led to Mahana, they headed toward the bay of Kaumalapau. Unsatisfied and feeling that her father was misleading her, Kaala protested and was about to turn back when he admitted that her mother wasn’t actually sick at Mahana, as he had told Kaaialii to get his permission for her to leave, but was at the shore, where she had gathered crabs, shrimp, limpets, and other treats, and was preparing a feast to celebrate her marriage.
Reassured by the plausible story, and half-disposed to pardon the deception admitted by her father, Kaala proceeded with him to the sea-shore. She saw that her mother was not there, and heard no sound but the beating of the waves against the rocks. She looked up into the face of her father for an explanation; but his eyes were cold, and a cruel smile upon his lips told her better than words that she had been betrayed.
Reassured by the believable story, and somewhat inclined to forgive the deception her father admitted, Kaala went with him to the beach. She noticed that her mother wasn’t there and heard nothing but the sound of the waves crashing against the rocks. She glanced up at her father for an explanation, but his eyes were cold, and a cruel smile on his lips told her better than words that she had been betrayed.
“Where is my mother?” she inquired; and then bitterly added: “I do not see her fire by the shore. Must we search for her among the sharks?”
“Where is my mom?” she asked, and then bitterly added, “I don’t see her fire by the shore. Do we have to look for her among the sharks?”
Oponui no longer sought to disguise his real purpose. “Hear the truth!” he said, with a wild glare in his eyes that whitened the lips of Kaala. “The shark shall be your mate, but he will not harm you. You shall go to his home, but he will not devour you. Down among the gods of the sea I will leave you until Kaaialii, hated by me above all things that breathe, shall have left Lanai, and then I will bring you back to earth!”
Oponui no longer tried to hide his true intentions. “Listen to the truth!” he said, with a wild look in his eyes that made Kaala's lips go pale. “The shark will be your companion, but he won't harm you. You will go to his home, but he won't eat you. I will leave you down among the sea gods until Kaaialii, whom I hate more than anything that breathes, has left Lanai, and then I will bring you back to land!”
Terrified at these words, Kaala screamed and sought to fly; but her heartless father seized her by the hand and dragged her along the shore until they reached a bench of the rocky bluff overlooking the opening to the Spouting Cave. Oponui was among the few who had entered the cavern through its gate of circling waters, and he did not for a moment doubt that within [418]its gloomy walls, where he was about to place her, Kaala would remain securely hidden until such time as he might choose to restore her to the light.
Terrified by these words, Kaala screamed and tried to escape; but her unfeeling father grabbed her by the hand and dragged her along the shore until they got to a bench on the rocky cliff overlooking the entrance to the Spouting Cave. Oponui was one of the few who had entered the cave through its gate of swirling waters, and he had no doubt that within [__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]its dark walls, where he was about to put her, Kaala would stay safely hidden until he decided to bring her back to the light.
Standing upon the narrow ledge above the entrance to the cave, marked by alternate whirlpool and receding column, Kaala divined the barbarous purpose of her father, and implored him to give her body to the sharks at once rather than leave her living in the damp and darkness of the Spouting Cave, to be tortured by the slimy and venomous creatures of the sea.
Standing on the narrow ledge above the entrance to the cave, marked by swirling water and a receding column, Kaala understood her father's cruel intentions and begged him to offer her body to the sharks right away instead of leaving her alive in the damp and darkness of the Spouting Cave, to be tormented by the slimy and poisonous creatures of the sea.
Deaf to her entreaties, Oponui watched until the settling column went down into the throat of the whirlpool, when he gathered the frantic and struggling girl in his arms and sprang into the circling abyss. Sinking a fathom or more below the surface, and impelled by a strong current setting toward the mouth of the cave, he soon found and was swept through the entrance, and in a few moments stood upon a rocky beach in the dim twilight of the cavern, with the half-unconscious Kaala clinging to his neck.
Ignoring her pleas, Oponui watched until the swirling column vanished into the whirlpool, then he scooped up the panicking and flailing girl in his arms and jumped into the swirling darkness. Sinking down several feet below the surface and carried by a powerful current leading toward the cave's entrance, he quickly found himself pulled through it, and moments later stood on a rocky beach in the dim light of the cavern, with the almost unconscious Kaala clinging to him.
The only light penetrating the cave was the little refracted through the waters, and every object that was not too dark to be seen looked greenish and ghostly. Crabs, eels, sting-rays and other noisome creatures of the deep were crawling stealthily among the rocks, and the dull thunder of the battling waves was the only sound that could be distinguished.
The only light coming into the cave was the small amount refracted through the water, and everything that wasn’t too dark to see appeared greenish and eerie. Crabs, eels, stingrays, and other unpleasant creatures of the deep were creeping quietly among the rocks, and the dull roar of the crashing waves was the only sound that could be heard.
Disengaging her arms, he placed her upon the beach above the reach of the waters, and then sat down beside her to recover his breath and wait for a retreating current to bear him to the surface. Reviving, Kaala looked around her with horror, and piteously implored her father not to leave her in that dreadful place beneath the waters.
Disengaging her arms, he placed her on the beach, out of reach of the water, and then sat down next to her to catch his breath and wait for the receding tide to bring him back to the surface. As she regained consciousness, Kaala looked around her in horror and pleaded with her father not to leave her in that terrifying place under the water.
For some time he made no reply, and then it was to tell her harshly that she might return with him if she would promise to accept the love of the chief of Olowalu, in the valley of Palawai, and allow Kaaialii to see her in the embrace of another. This she refused to do, declaring that she would perish in the cave, or the attempt to leave it, rather than be liberated on such monstrous conditions.
For a while, he didn't respond, and when he finally did, he told her bluntly that she could come back with him if she promised to accept the love of the chief of Olowalu, in the valley of Palawai, and let Kaaialii see her with someone else. She refused, insisting that she would rather die in the cave or trying to escape it than be freed under such terrible conditions.
“Then here you will remain,” said Oponui, savagely, “until I return, or the chief of Olowalu comes to bear you off to his home in Maui!” Then, rising to his feet, he continued hastily, as he [419]noted a turn in the current at the opening: “You cannot escape without assistance. If you attempt it you will be dashed against the rocks and become the food of sharks.”
“Then you will stay here,” Oponui said fiercely, “until I come back, or the chief of Olowalu arrives to take you to his home in Maui!” Then, getting to his feet, he quickly added as he [__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__] noticed a change in the current at the opening: “You can't get away without help. If you try, you'll be thrown against the rocks and become shark food.”
With this warning Oponui turned and plunged into the water. Diving and passing with the current through the entrance, he was borne swiftly to the surface and to his full length up into the spouting column; but he coolly precipitated himself into the surrounding waters, and with a few strokes of the arms reached the shore.
With this warning, Oponui turned and leaped into the water. Diving and moving with the current through the entrance, he was quickly brought to the surface and extended fully into the spouting column; but he calmly threw himself into the surrounding waters, and with a few strokes of his arms, he reached the shore.
II.
Kaaialii watched the departure of Kaala and her father until they disappeared in the valley of Palawai, and then gloomily returned to his hut. His fears troubled him. He thought of his beautiful Kaala, and his heart ached for her warm embrace. Then he thought of the looks and words of Oponui, and recalled in both a suggestion of deceit. Thus harassed with his thoughts, he spent the day in roaming alone among the hills, and the following night in restless slumber, with dreams of death and torture. The portentous cry of an alae roused him from his kapa-moe before daylight, and until the sun rose he sat watching the stars. Then he climbed the hill overlooking the valley of Palawai to watch for the return of Kaala, and wonder what could have detained her so long. He watched until the sun was well up in the heavens, feeling neither thirst nor hunger, and at length saw a pau fluttering in the wind far down the valley.
Kaaialii watched as Kaala and her father left until they were out of sight in the valley of Palawai, and then he bleakly went back to his hut. His worries plagued him. He thought of his beautiful Kaala, and his heart longed for her warm embrace. Then he remembered the looks and words of Oponui, which hinted at deceit. Tormented by his thoughts, he spent the day wandering alone among the hills, and the following night tossing and turning, plagued by dreams of death and suffering. The ominous call of an alae woke him from his kapa-moe before dawn, and until the sun came up, he sat watching the stars. Then he climbed the hill overlooking the valley of Palawai to wait for Kaala’s return and wondered what could have delayed her. He watched until the sun was well into the sky, feeling neither thirst nor hunger, and finally spotted a pau fluttering in the wind far down the valley.
A woman was rapidly approaching, and his heart beat with joy, for he thought she was Kaala. Nearer and nearer she came, and Kaaialii, still hopeful, ran down to the path to meet her. Her step was light and her air graceful, and it was not until he had opened his arms to receive her that he saw that the girl was not Kaala. She was Ua, the friend of Kaala, and almost her equal in beauty. They had been reared together, and in their love for each other were like sisters. They loved the same flowers, the same wild songs of the birds, the same paths among the hills, and, now that Kaala loved Kaaialii, Ua loved him also.
A woman was quickly coming closer, and his heart raced with joy because he thought she was Kaala. She approached, and Kaaialii, still hopeful, ran down the path to meet her. She walked lightly and moved gracefully, and it wasn't until he opened his arms to embrace her that he realized the girl wasn't Kaala. She was Ua, Kaala's friend, and nearly her equal in beauty. They had grown up together and felt like sisters in their love for each other. They both adored the same flowers, cherished the same wild songs from the birds, enjoyed the same trails through the hills, and now that Kaala loved Kaaialii, Ua loved him too.
Recognizing Kaaialii as she approached, Ua stopped before him, and bent her eyes to the ground without speaking. [420]
Recognizing Kaaialii as she got closer, Ua stopped in front of him and looked down at the ground without saying a word. [__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]
“Where is Kaala?” inquired Kaaialii, raising the face of Ua and staring eagerly into it. “Have you seen her? Has any ill come to her? Speak!”
“Where is Kaala?” asked Kaaialii, lifting Ua’s face and looking intently into it. “Have you seen her? Is she in any danger? Tell me!”
“I have not seen her, and know of no ill that has befallen her,” replied the girl; “but I have come to tell you that Kaala has not yet reached the hut of Kalani, her mother; and as Oponui, with a dark look in his face, was seen to lead her through the forest of Kumoku, it is feared that she has been betrayed and will not be allowed to return to Kealia.”
“I haven’t seen her, and I don’t know of anything bad that has happened to her,” the girl replied. “But I came to tell you that Kaala hasn’t reached her mother Kalani’s hut yet. Since Oponui, looking upset, was seen leading her through the Kumoku forest, people are worried that she has been betrayed and won’t be allowed to come back to Kealia.”
“And that, too, has been my fear since the moment I lost sight of her in the valley of Palawai,” said Kaaialii. “I should not have trusted her father, for I knew him to be treacherous and unforgiving. May the wrath of the gods follow him if harm has come to her through his cruelty! But I will find her if she is on the island! The gods have given her to me, and in life or death she shall be mine!”
“And that has been my fear ever since the moment I lost sight of her in the valley of Palawai,” Kaaialii said. “I shouldn’t have trusted her father, since I knew he was deceitful and unforgiving. May the gods punish him if harm has come to her because of his cruelty! But I will find her if she’s on the island! The gods have given her to me, and whether in life or death, she will be mine!”
Terrified at the wild looks and words of Kaaialii, Ua clasped her hands in silence.
Terrified by Kaaialii's fierce looks and words, Ua clasped her hands in silence.
“Hark!” he continued, bending his ear toward the valley. “It seems that I hear her calling for me now!” And with an exclamation of rage and despair Kaaialii started at a swift pace down the path taken by Kaala the day before. As he hurried onward, he saw, at intervals, the footprints of Kaala in the dust, and every imprint seemed to increase his speed.
“Listen!” he continued, leaning his ear toward the valley. “I think I can hear her calling for me now!” With a shout of anger and despair, Kaaialii quickly started down the path that Kaala had taken the day before. As he rushed forward, he saw Kaala's footprints in the dust at intervals, and each one seemed to make him run faster.
Reaching the point where the Mahana path diverged from the somewhat broader ala of the valley, he followed it for some distance hoping that Ua had been misinformed, and that Kaala had really visited her mother and might be found with her; but when he looked for and failed to find the marks of her feet where in reason they should have been seen had she gone to Mahana with her father, he returned and continued his course down the valley.
Reaching the point where the Mahana path split from the wider ala of the valley, he followed it for a while, hoping that Ua had been wrong and that Kaala had actually visited her mother and might be with her; but when he looked for and couldn’t find her footprints where they should have been if she had gone to Mahana with her father, he turned back and continued his way down the valley.
Suddenly he stopped. The footprints for which he was watching had now disappeared from the Palawai path, and for a moment he stood looking irresolutely around, as if in doubt concerning the direction next to be pursued. In his uncertainty several plans of action presented themselves. One was, to see what information could be gathered from Kaala’s mother at Mahana, another to follow the Palawai valley to the sea, and a third to return to Kealia and consult a kaula. While these [421]various suggestions were being rapidly canvassed, and before any conclusion could be reached, the figure of a man was seen approaching from the valley below.
Suddenly, he stopped. The footprints he had been watching had disappeared from the Palawai path, and for a moment he stood there, looking around uncertainly, as if unsure which direction to take next. In his indecision, several options came to mind. One was to see what information he could gather from Kaala’s mother at Mahana, another was to follow the Palawai valley to the sea, and a third was to go back to Kealia and consult a kaula. While these [__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]various options were quickly considered, and before any decision could be made, a figure of a man was seen approaching from the valley below.
Kaaialii secreted himself behind a rock, where he could watch the path without being seen. The man drew nearer and nearer, until at last Kaaialii was enabled to distinguish the features of Oponui, of all men the one whom he most desired to meet. His muscles grew rigid with wrath, and his hot breath burned the rock behind which he was crouching. He buried his fingers in the earth to teach them patience, and clenched his teeth to keep down a struggling exclamation of vengeance. And so he waited until Oponui reached a curve in the path which brought him, in passing, within a few paces of the eyes that were savagely glaring upon him, and the next moment the two men stood facing each other.
Kaaialii hid behind a rock, where he could watch the path without being noticed. The man got closer and closer until Kaaialii could finally make out Oponui’s features, the very person he most wanted to see. His muscles tensed with anger, and his hot breath scorched the rock he was crouching behind. He buried his fingers in the earth to remind himself to be patient and clenched his teeth to suppress a cry for revenge. He waited until Oponui reached a bend in the path that brought him just a few steps from the eyes glaring at him, and in the next moment, the two men were facing each other.
Startled at the unexpected appearance of Kaaialii, Oponui betrayed his guilt at once by attempting to fly; but, with the cry of “Give me Kaala!” Kaaialii sprang forward and endeavored to seize him by the throat.
Startled by Kaaialii's sudden appearance, Oponui instantly revealed his guilt by trying to fly away; but with the shout of “Give me Kaala!” Kaaialii lunged forward and tried to grab him by the throat.
A momentary struggle followed; but Oponui was scarcely less powerful than his adversary, and, his shoulders being bare, he succeeded in breaking from the grasp of Kaaialii and seeking safety in flight toward Kealia.
A brief struggle ensued; however, Oponui was hardly less strong than his opponent, and with his shoulders exposed, he managed to break free from Kaaialii's hold and flee towards Kealia.
With a cry of disappointment, Kaaialii started in pursuit. Both were swift of foot, and the race was like that of a hungry shark following his prey. One was inspired by fear and the other with rage, and every muscle of the runners was strained. Leaving the valley path, Oponui struck for Kealia by a shorter course across the hills. He hoped the roughness of the route and his better knowledge of it would give him an advantage; but Kaaialii kept closely at his heels. On they sped, up and down hills, across ravines and along rocky ridges, until they reached Kealia, when Oponui suddenly turned to the left and made a dash for the temple and puhonua not far distant. Kaaialii divined his purpose, and with a last supreme effort sought to thwart it. Gaining ground with every step, he made a desperate grasp at the shoulder of Oponui just as the latter sprang through the entrance and dropped to the earth exhausted within the protecting walls of the puhonua. Kaaialii attempted to follow, but two priests promptly stepped into the portal and refused to allow him to pass. [422]
With a shout of frustration, Kaaialii took off in pursuit. Both were fast on their feet, and it was like a hungry shark chasing its prey. One was driven by fear, and the other by anger, with every muscle in the runners straining. Leaving the valley path, Oponui aimed for Kealia by a quicker route across the hills. He thought the roughness of the path and his better knowledge of it would give him an edge, but Kaaialii stayed right behind him. They raced on, up and down hills, across ravines, and along rocky ridges, until they reached Kealia, where Oponui suddenly veered left and dashed toward the nearby temple and puhonua. Kaaialii figured out his intent and made one last desperate effort to stop him. Gaining momentum with each step, he lunged for Oponui's shoulder just as Oponui jumped through the entrance and collapsed, exhausted, within the protective walls of the puhonua. Kaaialii tried to follow, but two priests stepped into the doorway and firmly denied him entry. [__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]
“Stand out of the way, or I will strangle you both!” exclaimed Kaaialii, fiercely, as he threw himself against the guards.
“Get out of the way, or I’ll strangle you both!” shouted Kaaialii angrily as he rushed at the guards.
“Are you insane?” said another long-haired priest, stepping forward with a tabu staff in his hand. “Do you not know that this is a puhonua, sacred to all who seek its protection? Would you bring down upon yourself the wrath of the gods by shedding blood within its walls?”
“Are you out of your mind?” said another priest with long hair, stepping forward with a tabu staff in his hand. “Don’t you realize that this is a puhonua, sacred to everyone who seeks its protection? Are you trying to provoke the wrath of the gods by spilling blood within its walls?”
“If I may not enter, then drive him forth!” replied Kaaialii, pointing toward Oponui, who was lying upon the ground a few paces within, intently regarding the proceedings at the gate.
“If I can’t go in, then make him leave!” Kaaialii replied, pointing at Oponui, who was lying on the ground a few steps inside, closely watching what was happening at the gate.
“That cannot be,” returned the priest. “Should he will to leave, the way will not be closed to him; otherwise he may remain in safety.”
“That can’t be,” replied the priest. “If he wants to leave, he can; otherwise, he can stay safe.”
“Coward!” cried Kaaialii, addressing Oponui in a taunting tone. “Is it thus that you seek protection from the anger of an unarmed man? A pau would better become you than a maro. You should twine leis and beat kapa with women, and think no more of the business of men. Come without the walls, if your trembling limbs will bear you, and I will serve you as I did your friend, the breaker of women’s bones. Come, and I will tear from your throat the tongue that lied to Kaala, and feed it to the dogs!”
“Coward!” shouted Kaaialii, addressing Oponui in a mocking tone. “Is this how you look for protection from the wrath of an unarmed man? A pau would suit you better than a maro. You should make leis and pound kapa with women, and forget about the affairs of men. Come outside the walls, if your shaking legs can manage it, and I’ll treat you the same way I did your friend, the breaker of women’s bones. Come, and I’ll rip the tongue out of your throat that lied to Kaala, and feed it to the dogs!”
A malignant smile wrinkled the face of Oponui, as he thought of Kaala in her hiding-place under the sea, but he made no reply.
A wicked smile spread across Oponui's face as he thought about Kaala hiding beneath the sea, but he said nothing.
“Do you fear me?” continued Kaaialii. “Then arm yourself with spear and battle-axe, and with bare hands I will meet and strangle you!”
“Are you afraid of me?” Kaaialii went on. “Then get ready with your spear and battle-axe, and I’ll confront you barehanded and strangle you!”
Oponui remained silent, and in a paroxysm of rage and disappointment Kaaialii threw himself upon the ground and cursed the tabu that barred him from his enemy.
Oponui stayed quiet, and in a fit of anger and disappointment, Kaaialii threw himself on the ground and cursed the tabu that kept him from his enemy.
His friends found and bore him to his hut, and Ua, with gentle arts and loving hands, sought to soothe and comfort him. But he would not be consoled. He talked and thought alone of Kaala, and, hastily partaking of food that he might retain his strength, started again in search of her. Pitying his distress, Ua followed him—not closely, but so that she might not lose sight of him altogether.
His friends found him and took him back to his hut, and Ua, with gentle care and loving hands, tried to soothe and comfort him. But he wouldn’t be consoled. He could only think about Kaala, and after quickly eating so he could keep his strength, he set out to look for her again. Feeling sorry for his pain, Ua followed him—not too closely, but enough to keep him in sight.
He traveled in every direction, stopping neither for food nor rest. Of every one he met he inquired for Kaala, and [423]called her name in the deep valleys and on the hill-tops. Wandering near the sacred spring at the head of the waters of Kealia, he met a white-haired priest bearing from the fountain a calabash of water for ceremonial use in one of the temples. The priest knew and feared him, for his looks were wild, and humbly offered him water.
He traveled in every direction, stopping for neither food nor rest. To everyone he encountered, he asked about Kaala, and [__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]called her name in the deep valleys and on the hilltops. While wandering near the sacred spring at the head of the waters of Kealia, he met a white-haired priest carrying a calabash of water from the fountain for a ceremonial purpose in one of the temples. The priest recognized and feared him, so he humbly offered him water.
“I ask not for food or water, old man,” said Kaaialii. “You are a priest—perhaps a kaula. Tell me where I can find Kaala, the daughter of Oponui, and I will pile your altars with sacrifices!”
“I’m not looking for food or water, old man,” said Kaaialii. “You’re a priest—maybe even a kaula. Just tell me where I can find Kaala, the daughter of Oponui, and I’ll load your altars with sacrifices!”
“Son of the long spear,” replied the priest, “I know you seek the sweet-smelling flower of Palawai. Her father alone knows of her hiding-place. But it is not here in the hills, nor is it in the valleys. Oponui loves and frequents the sea. He hunts for the squid in dark places, and dives for the great fish in deep waters. He knows of cliffs that are hollow, and of caves with entrances below the waves. He goes alone to the rocky shore, and sleeps with the fish-gods, who are his friends. He—”
“Son of the long spear,” the priest replied, “I know you’re looking for the sweet-smelling flower of Palawai. Only her father knows where she’s hidden. But it’s not here in the hills, and it’s also not in the valleys. Oponui loves the sea and often visits it. He hunts for squid in dark spots and dives for big fish in deep waters. He knows about hollow cliffs and caves with entrances under the waves. He goes to the rocky shore alone and sleeps with the fish-gods, who are his friends. He—”
“No more of him!” interrupted the chief, impatiently. “Tell me what has become of Kaala!”
“Enough about him!” interrupted the chief, impatiently. “Tell me what happened to Kaala!”
“Be patient, and you shall hear,” resumed the priest. “In one of the caverns of the sea, known to Oponui and others, has Kaala been hidden. So I see her now. The place is dark and her heart is full of terror. Hasten to her. Be vigilant, and you will find her; but sleep not, or she will be the food of the creatures of the sea.”
“Be patient, and you will hear,” the priest continued. “In one of the sea's caverns, known to Oponui and others, Kaala has been hidden. I see her now. The place is dark and her heart is filled with fear. Hurry to her. Stay alert, and you will find her; but do not sleep, or she will become food for the sea creatures.”
Thanking the priest, Kaaialii started toward the bay of Kaumalapau, followed by the faithful Ua, and did not rest until he stood upon the bluff of Palikaholo, overlooking the sea. Wildly the waves beat against the rocks. Looking around, he could discern no hiding-place along the shore, and the thunder of the breakers and the screams of the sea-gulls were the only sounds to be heard. In despair he raised his voice and wildly exclaimed:
Thanking the priest, Kaaialii made his way to the bay of Kaumalapau, followed by the loyal Ua, and didn’t stop until he stood on the cliff of Palikaholo, looking out over the sea. The waves crashed violently against the rocks. As he looked around, he saw no place to hide along the shore, and the roar of the waves and the cries of the seagulls were the only sounds he could hear. In despair, he raised his voice and passionately shouted:
“Kaala! O Kaala! where are you? Do you sleep with the fish-gods, and must I seek you in their homes among the sunken shores?”
“Kaala! O Kaala! where are you? Do you sleep with the fish gods, and must I look for you in their homes among the sunken shores?”
The bluff where he was standing overlooked and was immediately above the Spouting Cave, from the submerged entrance to which a column of water was rising above the surface and [424]breaking into spray. In the mist of the upheaval he thought he saw the shadowy face and form of Kaala, and in the tumult of the rushing waters fancied that he heard her voice calling him to come to her.
The cliff where he stood looked over and was right above the Spouting Cave, from which a column of water shot up above the surface and [__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]broke into spray. In the mist of the upheaval, he thought he saw the shadowy face and figure of Kaala, and in the noise of the rushing water, he imagined he heard her calling him to come to her.
“Kaala, I come!” he exclaimed, and with a wild leap sprang from the cliff to clasp the misty form of his bride.
“Kaala, I’m coming!” he shouted, and with a wild leap, he jumped from the cliff to embrace the misty figure of his bride.
He sank below the surface, and, as the column disappeared with him and he returned no more, Ua wailed upon the winds a requiem of love and grief in words like these:
He sank below the surface, and, as the column disappeared with him and he didn’t return, Ua wailed upon the winds a requiem of love and grief in words like these:
“Oh! dead is Kaaialii, the young chief of Hawaii,
“Oh! Kaaialii, the young chief of Hawaii, has died,
The chief of few years and many battles!
The leader of a few years and many battles!
His limbs were strong and his heart was gentle;
His limbs were strong and his heart was kind;
His face was like the sun, and he was without fear.
His face was bright like the sun, and he was fearless.
Dead is the slayer of the bone-breaker;
Dead is the killer of the bone-breaker;
Dead is the chief who crushed the bones of Mailou;
Dead is the chief who broke the bones of Mailou;
Dead is the lover of Kaala and the loved of Ua.
Dead is Kaala's lover and Ua's beloved.
For his love he plunged into the deep waters;
For his love, he dove into the deep waters;
For his love he gave his life. Who is like Kaaialii?
For his love, he gave his life. Who is like Kaaialii?
Kaala is hidden away, and I am lonely;
Kaala is tucked away, and I'm feeling lonely;
Kaaialii is dead, and the black kapa is over my heart:
Kaaialii is gone, and the black kapa is over my heart:
Now let the gods take the life of Ua!”
Now let the gods take Ua's life!”
With a last look at the spot where Kaaialii had disappeared, Ua hastened to Kealia, and at the feet of Kamehameha told of the rash act of the despairing husband of Kaala. The king was greatly grieved at the story of Ua, for he loved the young chief almost as if he had been his son. “It is useless to search for the body of Kaaialii,” he said, “for the sharks have eaten it.” Then, turning to one of his chiefs, he continued: “No pile can be raised over his bones. Send for Ualua, the poet, that a chant may be made in praise of Kaaialii.”
With one last look at the spot where Kaaialii had vanished, Ua hurried to Kealia, and at Kamehameha's feet, he recounted the reckless act of Kaala's desperate husband. The king was deeply saddened by Ua’s story, as he cared for the young chief almost like a son. “There’s no point in searching for Kaaialii’s body,” he said, “because the sharks have consumed it.” Then, turning to one of his chiefs, he added, “No memorial can be built over his remains. Send for Ualua, the poet, so a chant can be created in honor of Kaaialii.”
Approaching nearer, Papakua, a priest, requested permission to speak. It was granted, and he said:
Approaching closer, Papakua, a priest, asked for permission to speak. It was granted, and he said:
“Let me hope that my words may be of comfort. I have heard the story of Ua, and cannot believe that the young chief is dead. The spouting waters into which Kaaialii leaped mark the entrance to the cave of Palikaholo. Following downward the current, has he not been drawn into the cavern, where he has found Kaala, and may still be living? Such, at least, is my thought, great chief.”
“Let me hope that my words bring you comfort. I’ve heard the story about Ua, and I can’t believe that the young chief is dead. The waters where Kaaialii jumped mark the entrance to the cave of Palikaholo. If he followed the current down, could it be that he was pulled into the cave, where he might have found Kaala and could still be alive? At least, that’s what I think, great chief.”
“A wild thought, indeed!” replied the king; “yet there is [425]some comfort in it, and we will see how much of truth it may reveal.”
“A wild thought, for sure!” replied the king; “yet there is [__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]some comfort in it, and we will see how much truth it may reveal.”
Preparations were hastily made, and with four of his sturdiest oarsmen Kamehameha started around the shore for the Spouting Cave under the bluff of Palikaholo, preceded by Ua in a canoe with Keawe, her brother.
Preparations were rushed, and with four of his strongest rowers, Kamehameha set off along the shore to the Spouting Cave under the Palikaholo cliff, with Ua in a canoe ahead of him alongside her brother Keawe.
III.
When Kaaialii plunged into the sea he had little thought of anything but death. Grasping at the spouting column as he descended, it seemed to sink with him to the surface, and even below it, and in a moment he felt himself being propelled downward and toward the cliff by a strong current. Recklessly yielding to the action of the waters, he soon discerned an opening in the submerged base of the bluff, and without an effort was drawn swiftly into it. The force of the current subsided, and to his surprise his head rose above the surface and he was able to breathe. His feet touched a rocky bottom, and he rose and looked around with a feeling of bewilderment. His first thought was that he was dead and had reached the dark shores of Po, where Milu, prince of death, sits enthroned in a grove of kou trees; but he smote his breast, and by the smart knew that he was living, and had been borne by the waters into a cave beneath the cliff from which he had leaped to grasp the misty form of Kaala.
When Kaaialii jumped into the sea, he was only thinking about death. Grabbing at the swirling water as he went down, it felt like it was sinking with him, even beneath the surface, and in a moment, he realized he was being pushed down and towards the cliff by a strong current. Recklessly giving in to the force of the water, he soon noticed an opening at the submerged base of the bluff, and effortlessly, he was pulled into it. The power of the current decreased, and to his surprise, his head came above the surface, allowing him to breathe. His feet touched a rocky bottom, and he stood up, looking around in confusion. His first thought was that he was dead and had reached the dark shores of Po, where Milu, the prince of death, sits on a throne in a grove of kou trees; but he hit his chest, and the pain reminded him that he was alive and had been carried by the waters into a cave beneath the cliff he had jumped from to grab the misty form of Kaala.
Emerging from the water, Kaaialii found himself standing on the shore of a dimly-lighted cavern. The air was chilly, and slimy objects touched his feet, and others fell splashing into the water from the rocks. He wondered whether it would be possible for him to escape from the gloomy place, and began to watch the movements of the waters near the opening, when a low moan reached his ear.
Emerging from the water, Kaaialii found himself standing on the shore of a dimly lit cave. The air was cold, and slimy things brushed against his feet, while others splashed into the water from the rocks above. He wondered if he could escape from this gloomy place and started to observe the movements of the water near the opening when he heard a low moan.
It was the voice of Kaala. She was lying near him in the darkness on the slimy shore. Her limbs were bruised and lacerated with her fruitless attempts to leave the cave, and she no longer possessed the strength to repel the crabs and other loathsome creatures that were drinking her blood and feeding upon her quivering flesh.
It was Kaala's voice. She was lying next to him in the darkness on the slimy shore. Her limbs were bruised and cut from her unsuccessful attempts to escape the cave, and she no longer had the strength to fend off the crabs and other disgusting creatures that were drinking her blood and feeding on her trembling flesh.
“It is the wailing of the wind, or perhaps of some demon of [426]the sea who makes this horrible place his home,” thought Kaaialii.
“It’s the howling of the wind, or maybe some sea demon that makes this terrible place his home,” thought Kaaialii.
He feared neither death nor its ministers; yet something like a shudder possessed him as he held his breath and listened, but he heard nothing but the thunder of the breakers against the cavern walls.
He was not afraid of death or its messengers; still, he felt a shiver run through him as he held his breath and listened, but all he heard was the roar of the waves crashing against the cave walls.
“Who speaks?” he exclaimed, advancing a pace or two back into the darkness.
“Who’s there?” he shouted, stepping back a pace or two into the darkness.
A feeble moan, almost at his feet, was the response.
A weak moan, barely at his feet, was the reply.
Stooping and peering intently before him, he distinguished what seemed to be the outlines of a human form. Approaching and bending over it, he caught the murmur of his own name.
Bending down and looking closely ahead of him, he made out what looked like the shape of a person. As he got closer and leaned over, he heard a faint whisper of his own name.
“It is Kaala! Kaaialii is here!” he cried, as he tenderly folded her in his arms and bore her toward the opening. Seating himself in the dim light, he pushed back the hair from her cold face, and sought to revive her with caresses and words of endearment. She opened her eyes, and, nestling closer to his breast, whispered to the ear that was bent to her lips:
“It’s Kaala! Kaaialii is here!” he shouted, as he gently wrapped her in his arms and carried her toward the opening. Sitting down in the soft light, he brushed the hair away from her cold face and tried to revive her with kisses and sweet words. She opened her eyes, and, snuggling closer to his chest, whispered into his ear:
“I am dying, but I am happy, for you are here.”
“I’m dying, but I’m happy because you’re here.”
He sought to encourage her. He told her that he had come to save her; that the gods, who loved her and would not let her die, had told him where to find her; that he would take her to his home in Kohala, and always love her as he loved her then.
He aimed to uplift her. He told her that he had come to rescue her; that the gods, who cared for her and wouldn’t allow her to die, had guided him to her; that he would take her to his home in Kohala and always love her just as he did in that moment.
She made no response. There was a sad smile upon her cold lips. He placed his hand upon her heart, and found that it had ceased to beat. She was dead, but he still held the precious burden in his arms; and hour after hour he sat there on the gloomy shore of the cavern, seeing only the pallid face of Kaala, and feeling only that he was desolate.
She didn’t respond. A sad smile lingered on her cold lips. He placed his hand over her heart and realized it had stopped beating. She was dead, but he still held the precious weight in his arms; for hour after hour, he sat there on the dark shore of the cave, seeing only the pale face of Kaala and feeling completely alone.
At length he was aroused by the splashing of water within the cave. He looked up, and Ua, the gentle and unselfish friend of Kaala, stood before him, followed a moment after by Kamehameha. The method of entering and leaving the cave was known to Keawe, and he imparted the information to his sister. Ua first leaped into the whirlpool, and the dauntless Kamehameha did not hesitate in following.
At last, he was awakened by the sound of water splashing in the cave. He looked up, and Ua, the kind and selfless friend of Kaala, was standing in front of him, soon followed by Kamehameha. Keawe knew how to enter and exit the cave, and he shared this information with his sister. Ua jumped into the whirlpool first, and the fearless Kamehameha didn't hesitate to follow.
As the king approached, Kaaialii rose to his feet and stood sadly before him. He uttered no word, but with bent head pointed to the body of Kaala.
As the king walked up, Kaaialii got to his feet and stood there sadly in front of him. He didn’t say a word, but with his head down, he pointed at Kaala's body.
“I see,” said the king, softly; “the poor girl is dead. She [427]could have no better burial-place. Come, Kaaialii, let us leave it.”
“I understand,” said the king gently; “the poor girl has died. She [__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]couldn't have a better resting place. Come on, Kaaialii, let’s go.”
Kaaialii did not move. It was the first time that he had ever hesitated in obeying the orders of his chief.
Kaaialii stayed still. It was the first time he had ever hesitated to follow his chief's orders.
“What! would you remain here?” said the king. “Would you throw your life away for a girl? There are others as fair. Here is Ua; she shall be your wife, and I will give you the valley of Palawai. Come, let us leave here at once, lest some angry god close the entrance against us!”
“What! Are you really going to stay here?” said the king. “Are you going to risk your life for a girl? There are other beautiful women. Here’s Ua; she will be your wife, and I’ll give you the valley of Palawai. Come, let’s get out of here quickly, before some angry god seals off our escape!”
“Great chief,” replied Kaaialii, “you have always been kind and generous to me, and never more so than now. But hear me. My life and strength are gone. Kaala was my life, and she is dead. How can I live without her? You are my chief. You have asked me to leave this place and live. It is the first request of yours that I have ever disobeyed. It shall be the last!”
“Great chief,” replied Kaaialii, “you have always been kind and generous to me, and never more so than now. But listen to me. My life and strength are gone. Kaala was my life, and she is dead. How can I go on without her? You are my chief. You’ve asked me to leave this place and live. This is the first request of yours that I’ve ever disobeyed. It will be the last!”
Then seizing a stone, with a swift, strong blow he crushed in brow and brain, and fell dead upon the body of Kaala.
Then grabbing a stone, he delivered a swift, powerful blow that crushed his forehead and brain, and he collapsed dead onto the body of Kaala.
A wail of anguish went up from Ua. Kamehameha spoke not, moved not. Long he gazed upon the bodies before him; and his eye was moist and his strong lip quivered as, turning away at last, he said: “He loved her indeed!”
A cry of sorrow rose from Ua. Kamehameha didn’t speak or move. He looked at the bodies in front of him for a long time; his eyes were wet, and his firm lip trembled as he finally turned away and said, “He truly loved her!”
Wrapped in kapa, the bodies were laid side by side and left in the cavern; and there to-day may be seen the bones of Kaala, the flower of Lanai, and of Kaaialii, her knightly lover, by such as dare to seek the passage to them through the whirlpool of Palikaholo.
Wrapped in kapa, the bodies were laid side by side and left in the cave; and there today you can see the bones of Kaala, the flower of Lanai, and of Kaaialii, her noble lover, by those who dare to find the way to them through the whirlpool of Palikaholo.
Meles of the story of the tragedy were composed and chanted before Kamehameha and his court at Kealia, and since then the cavern has been known as Puhio-kaala, or “Spouting Cave of Kaala.” [429]
Meles about the tragedy were performed and sung for Kamehameha and his court at Kealia, and since then, the cave has been called Puhio-kaala, or “Spouting Cave of Kaala.” [__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]
The Destruction of the Temples.
[430]
[__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]
CHARACTERS.
- Liholiho (Kamehameha II.), king of the Hawaiian Islands.
-
Keopuolani, the queen-mother, widows of Kamehameha I. Kaʻahumanu, chief counselor, and Kalakaua, - Kalaimoku, prime minister.
- Kekuaokalani, the defender of the gods.
- Manono, wife of Kekuaokalani.
- Hewahewa, high-priest of Hawaii.
- Hoapili, guardian of the Princess Nahienaena.
- Naihe, counselor and orator.
- Kekuanaoa, treasurer of the king.
- Kapihe, commander of the national vessels.
- Laanui, a companion of the king.
[431]
[__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]
THE DESTRUCTION OF THE TEMPLES.
THE DESTRUCTION OF THE TEMPLES.
THE LAST GREAT DEFENDER OF THE HAWAIIAN GODS.
THE LAST GREAT DEFENDER OF THE HAWAIIAN GODS.
I.
On the 1st of October, 1819, a fleet of four canoes bearing the royal colors set sail from Kawaihae, in the district of Kohala, on the northwestern coast of Hawaii. The canoes were large and commodious, and were occupied by between sixty and seventy persons, a portion of whom were females. The most of the men were large, muscular and over six feet in height, while the dress and bearing of many of the women indicated that they were of the tabu and chiefly classes.
On October 1, 1819, a fleet of four canoes flying the royal colors set off from Kawaihae, located in the Kohala district on the northwestern coast of Hawaii. The canoes were big and spacious, carrying between sixty and seventy people, some of whom were women. Most of the men were tall, muscular, and over six feet tall, while the attire and demeanor of many of the women suggested that they belonged to the tabu and chiefly classes.
The costumes of a number of those of both sexes who seemed to be of rank were a strange admixture of native and foreign fabric and fashion. American and European manufactures were beginning to find a market in the islands, and the persons of many were adorned with rich cloths, jewelry and other tokens of civilization. Their weapons and utensils were largely of metal, and a squad of ten warriors armed with muskets, in one of the canoes, showed that the white man’s methods of warfare had received the early and earnest attention of the Hawaiian chiefs and leaders.
The outfits of several people, both men and women, who appeared to be of high rank, were an odd mix of local and foreign fabric and style. American and European goods were starting to gain popularity in the islands, and many individuals were dressed in luxurious fabrics, jewelry, and other signs of modern civilization. Their weapons and tools were mostly made of metal, and a group of ten warriors armed with muskets in one of the canoes demonstrated that the Hawaiian chiefs and leaders were seriously looking into the white man’s ways of warfare.
The canoe leading the little squadron was double, with covered apartments extending into and across the united decks of both, and the persons occupying it, with the exception of soldiers, sailors and servants, were distinguished alike for their gaudy trappings and a boisterous merriment infusing a feeling of jollity throughout the fleet. In this canoe was Liholiho, who, on the death of his distinguished father, Kamehameha I., something less than five months before, had become sole monarch of the Hawaiian group. In addition to two of his queens, he was accompanied by Kapihe, the commander of the royal vessels; Kekuanaoa, the royal treasurer, and a retinue of chiefly friends and personal attendants. [432]
The canoe at the front of the small squadron was double-hulled, featuring covered areas that stretched across the joined decks of both. The people on board, aside from the soldiers, sailors, and servants, stood out with their flashy decorations and a lively joy that spread a sense of fun throughout the fleet. In this canoe was Liholiho, who had become the sole ruler of the Hawaiian Islands less than five months after the death of his notable father, Kamehameha I. Along with two of his queens, he was accompanied by Kapihe, the commander of the royal ships; Kekuanaoa, the royal treasurer; and a group of noble friends and personal attendants. [__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]
On the 8th of the previous May his royal father had died at Kailua, leaving to Liholiho the kingdom his arms had won, with Kaahumanu as second in authority and guardian of the realm. The morning following the death of his father Liholiho left Kailua for Kohala to avoid defilement, and there remained for ten days, when he returned to Kailua and formally assumed the sceptre. At the end of the season of mourning, for superstitious reasons the young king again left for Kohala, and took up his residence for a time at Kawaihae. Remaining there until the 1st of October, on the advice of Kaahumanu he had started on his return to Kailua.
On May 8th of the previous year, his royal father passed away in Kailua, leaving the kingdom his father had conquered to Liholiho, with Kaahumanu as the second in command and guardian of the realm. The day after his father's death, Liholiho left Kailua for Kohala to avoid becoming unclean, and he stayed there for ten days before returning to Kailua to officially take up the throne. At the end of the mourning period, for superstitious reasons, the young king moved again to Kohala and stayed for a while in Kawaihae. He remained there until October 1st, and on Kaahumanu's advice, he began his journey back to Kailua.

Interior of an Ancient Temple.
Interior of an ancient temple.
During the brief residence of Liholiho at Kawaihae, Kaahumanu inaugurated a vigorous conspiracy against the priesthood, and resolved to persuade the young king to repudiate the religion and tabus of his fathers. In this scheme she was assisted by Keopuolani, the mother of Liholiho; Kalaimoku, the prime minister, and Hewahewa, the high-priest, who claimed descent from the renowned Paao.
During Liholiho's short stay at Kawaihae, Kaahumanu started an intense conspiracy against the priesthood and decided to convince the young king to reject the religion and taboos of his ancestors. She was supported in this plan by Keopuolani, Liholiho's mother; Kalaimoku, the prime minister; and Hewahewa, the high priest, who claimed to be descended from the famous Paao.
In the latter part of the reign of the first Kamehameha the gods and tabus of the priesthood began to lose something of their sanctity in the estimation of the masses. Although the first Christian missionaries to the islands did not arrive until nearly a year after the death of Kamehameha I., many trading and war vessels had touched at Hawaiian ports during the two preceding decades. No very clear idea of the Christian religion had been imparted to the natives by the sailors and traders with whom they had been brought in contact; but it could not have escaped their observation that the foreigner’s disregard of the tabu brought with it no punishment, and they very naturally began to question the divinity of a religious code limited in its scope to the Hawaiian people.
Towards the end of Kamehameha I's reign, the gods and tabus of the priesthood started to lose their significance for the common people. Although the first Christian missionaries didn't reach the islands until almost a year after Kamehameha I died, many trading and war ships had already visited Hawaiian ports in the two decades before that. The sailors and traders didn’t really communicate a clear understanding of Christianity to the natives, but it was obvious to them that the foreigners’ flouting of the tabu went unpunished, leading them to question the divinity of a religious system that only seemed to apply to Hawaiians.
The results of this growing scepticism were frequent violations of the tabu. To check this seditious tendency summary punishments were inflicted. A woman was put to death for entering the eating apartment of her husband, and Jarvis relates that three men were sacrificed at Kealakeakua, a short time before the death of Kamehameha—one of them for putting on the maro of a chief, another for eating a forbidden article, and the third for leaving a house that was tabu and entering one that was not. Kamehameha had learned something of the religion of the [433]foreigners, but not enough to impress him greatly in its favor; and when questioned concerning it during his last illness he replied that he should die in the faith of his fathers, although he thought it well that his successor should give the subject attention.
The results of this growing skepticism were frequent violations of the tabu. To address this rebellious attitude, harsh punishments were imposed. A woman was executed for entering her husband's dining area, and Jarvis notes that three men were sacrificed at Kealakeakua shortly before Kamehameha's death—one for wearing a chief's maro, another for consuming a forbidden item, and the third for leaving a tabu house and entering one that wasn’t. Kamehameha had learned some of the foreigners' religion, but he wasn’t significantly impressed by it; when asked about it during his final illness, he said he would die in the faith of his ancestors, although he thought it was important for his successor to look into it.
Different motives influenced the leaders in this conspiracy against the religion and tabus of the group. Kaahumanu, the favorite wife of Kamehameha I., but the mother of none of his children, was bold, ambitious and unscrupulous. Left second in authority under the young king, she chafed at the restraints imposed by the tabu upon her sex. Many of the most palatable foods were denied her by custom, and in her intercourse with foreigners acts of courtesy were chilled and hampered by numerous and irksome tabu interdictions. To enable her to eat and drink of whatever her appetites craved, and to do so in the presence of males, Kaahumanu was prepared to strike at the roots of a religious system which had maintained her ancestors in place and power, even though she had no definite knowledge of the new faith with which she hoped to supplant it.
Different motives drove the leaders in this conspiracy against the religion and taboos of the group. Kaahumanu, the favorite wife of Kamehameha I, but the mother of none of his children, was bold, ambitious, and ruthless. As second in authority under the young king, she resented the restrictions placed on her gender by the taboos. Many of the most enjoyable foods were denied to her by tradition, and her interactions with foreigners were often affected by various tedious taboo rules. To allow herself to eat and drink whatever she desired, and to do so in the presence of men, Kaahumanu was willing to challenge the foundations of a religious system that had kept her ancestors in power, even though she had no clear understanding of the new faith she hoped to replace it with.
Although the uncle of one of the wives of Liholiho—Kekauonohi—Kalaimoku was not of distinguished rank. He was a chief of decided ability, however, and had been by degrees advanced under the first Kamehameha, until he became the prime minister of the second. Not being a tabu chief by birth, he was easily persuaded by Kaahumanu to lend his assistance in depriving those of higher rank of their tabu prerogatives, and to this end he and his brother Boki were baptized by the Roman Catholic chaplain of the French corvette L’Uranie shortly after the assumption of the government by Liholiho. This was done while the young king was residing at Kawaihae, and without his knowledge.
Although the uncle of one of Liholiho's wives—Kekauonohi—Kalaimoku wasn't of high rank, he was a capable chief. He had gradually risen in position under the first Kamehameha and became the prime minister to the second. Since he wasn't a *tabu* chief by birth, Kaahumanu easily convinced him to help strip those of higher rank of their *tabu* privileges. To this end, he and his brother Boki were baptized by the Roman Catholic chaplain of the French corvette *L’Uranie* shortly after Liholiho took control of the government. This happened while the young king was staying at Kawaihae, and he was unaware of it.
Keopuolani, the political wife of Kamehameha I., and the mother of Liholiho, Kauikeaouli and Nahienaena, was the daughter of Kiwalao, and of supreme tabu rank. So well was this recognized that her distinguished husband, it is related, always approached her with his face to the earth. She lacked decision of character, however, and her adhesion to the conspiracy against the tabu was doubtless due to the influence over her of the crafty Kaahumanu.
Keopuolani, the political wife of Kamehameha I and the mother of Liholiho, Kauikeaouli, and Nahienaena, was the daughter of Kiwalao and held a high rank. This was so well acknowledged that her notable husband was said to always approach her with his face to the ground. However, she lacked decisiveness, and her participation in the conspiracy against the tabu was likely influenced by the clever Kaahumanu.
Whatever may have been the motives of others, the apostasy [434]of Hewahewa seems to have been the result of conviction. Being the high-priest of Hawaii, he had everything to lose and nothing to profit by the destruction of the religious system of which he was the supreme and honored head. Of an inquiring mind, the little knowledge he had gained of the new creed had convinced him of the inconsistency of his own, and when the time came to strike he acted boldly. His hand was the first to apply the torch to the temples. Had he hesitated the conspiracy would have failed, for the influence of the high-priest with the masses at that time was second only to that of the king.
Whatever the reasons for others, Hewahewa’s abandonment of faith seems to have come from genuine belief. As the high priest of Hawaii, he had everything to lose and nothing to gain by destroying the religious system he led with honor. With an inquisitive mind, the limited understanding he had of the new faith convinced him of the flaws in his own, and when it was time to take action, he did so decisively. His hand was the first to set fire to the temples. If he had hesitated, the conspiracy would have failed, as his influence with the people at that time was only second to that of the king.
Liholiho was strong only in his attachments. Born in 1797, when the group had been consolidated under one government and further wars were not apprehended, he had not been given that austere and solid training in civil and military life imparted to the princes of the previous generation. He was attracted by the vices rather than the virtues of the foreigners at intervals visiting the islands, and, realizing that his future was secure, had devoted almost exclusively to pleasure the ripening years of his youth. Light-hearted, affectionate and gentle, he had shown so little taste for public affairs at the age of twenty-two that his dying father, in bequeathing to him the sceptre, deemed it prudent to accompany it with the condition that, should he wield it unworthily, the supreme power should devolve upon Kaahumanu.
Liholiho was only strong in his connections. Born in 1797, during a time when the group had come together under one government and more wars were not expected, he didn’t receive the strict and solid training in civil and military life that the princes of the previous generation did. He was drawn more to the vices than the virtues of the foreigners who occasionally visited the islands, and knowing that his future was secure, he devoted nearly all of his youthful years to pleasure. Cheerful, loving, and gentle, he showed so little interest in public affairs at the age of twenty-two that his dying father, when passing on the scepter to him, wisely included the condition that if he used it poorly, the supreme power should go to Kaahumanu.
These were the prominent actors in the scheme for the destruction of the priesthood, and this the character of the young king who had been tarrying for some months at Kawaihae, and to whom a message had been sent by Kaahumanu, informing him that, on his return to Kailua, she would openly set the gods at defiance and declare against the tabu. This information did not greatly astonish Liholiho. He knew of the growing hostility to the tabu; had talked with Hewahewa on the subject; had learned that his mother had failed to respect it on late occasions, and had himself seen it violated without harm to the offender. Yet he feared the consequences of an open declaration against the priesthood. He remembered the fate of Hua, whose bones whitened in the sun. He knew that his arrival at Kailua would precipitate the crisis, and compel him either to renounce or defend the gods of his fathers; and after leaving Kawaihae, as we have seen, with a party occupying four canoes, he pursued his [435]way very leisurely toward Kailua, seemingly in no haste to reach his destination.
These were the key players in the plan to dismantle the priesthood, and this describes the young king who had been staying for some months at Kawaihae. A message had been sent to him by Kaahumanu, telling him that when he returned to Kailua, she would boldly defy the gods and go against the tabu. This news didn’t shock Liholiho much. He was aware of the growing resistance to the tabu; he had talked to Hewahewa about it; he learned that his mother had recently disrespected it, and he had witnessed it being broken without any consequences for the violator. Still, he worried about the fallout from a public challenge to the priesthood. He recalled the fate of Hua, whose bones lay bleaching in the sun. He realized that his arrival at Kailua would trigger the crisis, forcing him to either renounce or defend the gods of his ancestors. After leaving Kawaihae with a group in four canoes, he traveled toward Kailua at a slow pace, appearing in no rush to get there.
Moving southward, and passing the rocky point immediately north of Puako, sail was shortened in the royal fleet, and the canoes drifted slowly along the coast, taking just wind enough to hold their course. Carousings were heard in the royal quarters. Liholiho appeared, and, waving his hand to a group of men and women forward, a wild hula dance was soon in progress, to the accompaniment of drums and rattling calabashes. The king watched the dancers for some time with a vacant air, and then began to mark the drum-beats with his feet. The emphasis of the movement increased, until, dismissing his dignity, his voice finally rose above the rude music, and he began to dance with an enthusiasm which seemed to be almost frenzied. Others of the royal party joined in the revelry, and for half an hour or more the vessel was the scene of tumultuous merriment. Bottles and calabashes of intoxicating liquors were then passed from one to another of the companions of the king, and the hula was continued, followed by chants, meles and other methods of enjoyment. Drinking was frequent, and the humbler members of the party were sparingly supplied with gin, whiskey and other stimulants. Similar scenes were transpiring in the canoes following, and the debauch was the wildest ever witnessed on any one of the eight Hawaiian seas.
Heading south and passing the rocky point just north of Puako, the royal fleet trimmed the sails, and the canoes drifted slowly along the coast, catching just enough wind to stay on course. Loud celebrations could be heard in the royal quarters. Liholiho appeared and waved to a group of men and women at the front, soon starting a wild hula dance backed by drums and rattling calabashes. The king watched the dancers for a while with a blank stare, then began to keep time with his feet. The rhythm intensified until he let go of his royal demeanor and raised his voice above the music, dancing with a fervor that seemed almost crazy. Others in the royal party joined the fun, and for over half an hour, the ship was filled with chaotic joy. Bottles and calabashes of strong drinks were passed among the king's companions, and the hula continued, followed by chants, meles, and other forms of entertainment. Drinking occurred frequently, and the less prominent members of the party were given limited amounts of gin, whiskey, and other stimulants. Similar scenes were taking place in the canoes behind them, and the revelry was the wildest ever seen on any of the eight Hawaiian seas.
“Let us make drunk the water-gods!” exclaimed the king. “Here, Kuula, is a taste for you; and here, Ukanipo, is your share!” And he tossed into the ocean two bottles of liquor.
“Let’s get the water gods drunk!” shouted the king. “Here, Kuula, have a drink; and here, Ukanipo, this is for you!” And he threw two bottles of booze into the ocean.
“Let us hope the gods may not be angered by the unusual sacrifice,” said Laanui, one of the favorite companions of the king. He spoke seriously, and Liholiho’s face wore a troubled expression for a moment as he replied:
“Let’s hope the gods won’t be upset by this strange sacrifice,” said Laanui, one of the king’s favorite companions. He spoke earnestly, and for a moment, Liholiho’s face showed a look of concern as he responded:
“Then you have not yet lost faith in the gods, Laanui?”
“Then you still believe in the gods, Laanui?”
“No,” was the prompt answer of Laanui.
“No,” Laanui replied quickly.
The king did not continue the conversation. Turning and beckoning to a servant, more liquor was brought, after which the revelry was continued all through the day and far into the night. Meanwhile, so little progress had been made that at noon the next day the fleet was off Kiholo.
The king didn’t keep talking. He turned and signaled to a servant, and more drinks were brought. The festivities went on all day and deep into the night. Meanwhile, so little progress was made that by noon the next day, the fleet was off Kiholo.
For another twenty-four hours the feasting, drinking and dancing continued, when the revelers were met by a double [436]canoe sent by Kaahumanu from Kailua in search of the royal party. The messengers of his chief counselor were courteously received by Liholiho, and, hoisting all sail, he was escorted by them to Kailua, where he was warmly welcomed by Kaahumanu and the members of the royal family.
For another twenty-four hours, the feasting, drinking, and dancing went on, until the party was met by a double [__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__] canoe sent by Kaahumanu from Kailua looking for the royal group. Liholiho graciously received the messengers from his chief advisor, and with all sails up, he was escorted by them to Kailua, where Kaahumanu and the royal family warmly welcomed him.
Appearances of dissipation were plainly visible in the language and bearing of the king, and Kaahumanu regarded the moment as auspicious for committing him to some flagrant and public act of hostility to the tabu. Both she and Keopuolani, the queen-mother, had been secretly violating it, since the death of Kamehameha I., by eating of foods interdicted to their sex, and to screen themselves from exposure it was necessary that the religious system should be destroyed of which the tabu was the vital force. This could be accomplished only through the united efforts of the king and high-priest. Hewahewa was prepared to do his part as the religious head of the kingdom, but the young king, notwithstanding the pressure that had been brought to bear upon him by Kaahumanu and a few of the leading chiefs of his court, was still undecided.
Signs of reckless behavior were clearly noticeable in the king's words and actions, and Kaahumanu saw this as the perfect time to push him into a bold and public act against the tabu. Both she and Keopuolani, the queen-mother, had been secretly breaking it since Kamehameha I's death by eating foods that were off-limits to women. To hide their actions, they needed to dismantle the religious system that upheld the tabu. This could only happen with the combined efforts of the king and the high priest. Hewahewa was ready to do his part as the religious leader of the kingdom, but the young king, despite the pressure from Kaahumanu and a few influential chiefs, remained uncertain.
A feast was prepared in honor of the king’s return to Kailua. In accordance with native custom, separate tables for the sexes were spread, and a number of foreigners were present as the invited guests of Kaahumanu. During the afternoon Liholiho, in response to well-devised banters, had been induced to drink and smoke with the female members of his family. This was a favorable beginning, and, farther emboldened by his mother, who deliberately ate a banana in his presence and drank the milk of a cocoanut, he declared that he would openly set the tabu at defiance during the approaching feast.
A feast was arranged to celebrate the king’s return to Kailua. Following local tradition, there were separate tables for men and women, and several foreigners attended as guests of Kaahumanu. In the afternoon, Liholiho, encouraged by some clever jokes, was persuaded to drink and smoke with his female relatives. This was a good start, and, feeling more daring thanks to his mother, who provocatively ate a banana in front of him and drank coconut milk, he announced that he would openly break the tabu during the upcoming feast.
It was feared that his courage would fail, and he was not left to himself for a moment until he led the way to the feast. His step was unsteady, and his face wore a troubled expression as he proceeded to the pavilion, accompanied by Kaahumanu, Keopuolani and other members of the royal household. As they separated to take seats at their respective tables, the queen-mother gave Liholiho a look of encouragement, and Kaahumanu said to him in a low tone:
It was worried that his courage would fade, and he wasn't left alone for a second until he led everyone to the feast. His steps were shaky, and his face had a worried look as he made his way to the pavilion, joined by Kaahumanu, Keopuolani, and other members of the royal family. As they split up to sit at their own tables, the queen mother gave Liholiho a comforting look, and Kaahumanu said to him softly:
“If you have the courage of your father, this will be a great day for Hawaii.”
“If you have your father’s courage, this will be a great day for Hawaii.”
The king made no reply, for at that moment his eyes fell upon [437]wooden images of Ku and Lono, on opposite sides of the entrance, and he stepped briskly past them and seated himself at the head of one of the tables. The sight of the idols almost unnerved him, and some of the guests observed that his hand trembled as he raised to his lips and drained a vessel of what seemed to be strong liquor.
The king didn’t respond because, at that moment, his eyes landed on the [__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]wooden figures of Ku and Lono, positioned on either side of the entrance. He quickly walked past them and took a seat at the head of one of the tables. The sight of the idols almost shook him, and some guests noticed his hand shaking as he brought a cup of what looked like strong alcohol to his lips and drank it down.
The guests were all seated. Hewahewa rose, and, glancing at the troubled face of the king, lifted his hands and said with firmness: “One and all, may we eat in peace, and in our hearts give thanks to the one and only god of all.”
The guests were all seated. Hewahewa stood up, and, noticing the worried expression on the king's face, raised his hands and said firmly: "Together, let's eat in peace and give thanks in our hearts to the one true god of all."
The words of the high-priest restored the sinking courage of the king. He rose from his seat, deliberately walked to one of the tables reserved for the women, and seated himself beside his mother. During the strange proceeding not a word was spoken, not a morsel touched. Some believed him to be intoxicated; others were sure that he was insane. Since the age of Wakea no one had so defied the gods and lived. Many natives rose from the tables, and horror took the place of astonishment when Liholiho, encouraged by his mother, began to freely partake of the food prepared for the women. Interdicted fish, meats and fruits were then brought to the tables of the women by order of the king, who ate from their plates and drank from their vessels.
The high priest's words boosted the king's fading confidence. He stood up, walked over to one of the tables set aside for women, and sat next to his mother. Throughout this unusual scene, not a word was spoken, and no one touched their food. Some thought he was drunk; others were convinced he had lost his mind. No one had challenged the gods and lived since the time of Wakea. Many locals got up from their tables, and fear replaced disbelief when Liholiho, supported by his mother, began to eat freely from the food meant for women. The banned fish, meats, and fruits were then brought to the women's tables on the king's orders as he ate from their plates and drank from their cups.
Now satisfied that the king was acting deliberately and with the approval of the most influential dignitaries of the kingdom, including the supreme high-priest, a majority of the chiefs present promptly followed the example of their sovereign, and an indescribable scene ensued. “The tabu is broken! the tabu is broken!” passed from lip to lip, swelling louder and louder as it went, until it reached beyond the pavilion. There it was taken up in shouts by the multitude, and was soon wafted on the winds to the remotest corners of Kona. Feasts were at once provided, and men and women ate together indiscriminately. The tabu foods of palace and temple were voraciously eaten by the masses, and thousands of women for the first time learned the taste of flesh and fruits which had tempted their mothers for centuries.
Now convinced that the king was acting intentionally and had the backing of the most powerful leaders in the kingdom, including the high priest, most of the chiefs present quickly followed their sovereign's lead, leading to an unforgettable scene. “The tabu is broken! The tabu is broken!” spread from person to person, growing louder as it traveled until it reached beyond the pavilion. There, it was picked up in cheers by the crowd and soon carried on the winds to the farthest reaches of Kona. Feasts were immediately prepared, and men and women shared food together without distinction. The tabu foods from the palace and temple were eagerly consumed by the people, and thousands of women tasted meat and fruits for the first time, which had been a temptation for their mothers for generations.
At the conclusion of the royal feast a still greater surprise bewildered the people. “We have made a bold beginning,” said Hewahewa to the king, thus adroitly assuming a part of the responsibility; “but the gods and heiaus cannot survive the death of the tabu.” [438]
At the end of the royal feast, an even bigger surprise stunned the crowd. “We’ve made a bold start,” Hewahewa told the king, cleverly taking on some of the responsibility; “but the gods and heiaus can’t endure the death of the tabu.” [__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]
“Then let them perish with it!” exclaimed Liholiho, now nerved to desperation at what he had done. “If the gods can punish, we have done too much already to hope for grace. They can but kill, and we will test their powers by inviting the full measure of their wrath.”
“Then let them die with it!” shouted Liholiho, now driven to desperation by his actions. “If the gods can punish, we’ve already done too much to expect mercy. They can only kill, and we will challenge their power by inviting the full extent of their anger.”

Ancient Temple by the Sea-Shore, 1793.
Ancient Temple by the Sea-Shore, 1793.
To this resolution the high-priest gave his ready assent, and orders were issued at once for the destruction of the gods and temples throughout the kingdom. Resigning his office, Hewahewa was the first to apply the torch, and in the smoke of burning heiaus, images and other sacred property, beginning on Hawaii and ending at Niihau, suddenly passed away a religious system which for fifteen hundred years or more had shaped the faith, commanded the respect and received the profoundest reverence of the Hawaiian people. No creed was offered by the iconoclasts in lieu of the system destroyed by royal edict, and until the arrival of the first Christian missionaries, in March of the year following, the people of the archipelago were left without a shadow of religious restraint or guidance.
To this resolution, the high priest quickly agreed, and orders were immediately given for the destruction of the gods and temples across the kingdom. Resigning from his position, Hewahewa was the first to set the fires, and in the smoke of burning heiaus, images, and other sacred items, starting on Hawaii and finishing at Niihau, a religious system that had shaped the faith, earned respect, and received deep reverence from the Hawaiian people for over fifteen hundred years suddenly vanished. The iconoclasts did not offer any new beliefs in place of the system that was destroyed by royal decree, and until the first Christian missionaries arrived in March of the following year, the people of the archipelago were left without any semblance of religious restraint or guidance.
II.
While the abolition of the tabu system received the universal approval of the masses, the destruction of the gods and temples met with very considerable remonstrance and opposition. It was believed by many that the priesthood might be preserved without the tabu, and that the king had transcended his sovereign power in striking down both at a single blow. Hence many gods were saved from the burning temples, and thousands refused to relinquish the faith in which they had been reared. Deprived of their occupations, the priests denounced the destruction of the heiaus, and it was not long before a formidable conspiracy against the government was organized on Hawaii, under the leadership of Kekuaokalani, a chief of rare accomplishments and a cousin of the king. Defection appeared at the court, and several chiefs of distinction gave their support to the revolutionary movement.
While the end of the tabu system was widely accepted by the public, the destruction of the gods and temples faced significant backlash and opposition. Many people believed that the priesthood could survive without the tabu, and they thought the king had overstepped his authority by eliminating both in one go. As a result, many gods were saved from the burning temples, and thousands refused to give up the faith they had been raised in. Without their jobs, the priests condemned the destruction of the heiaus, and it didn’t take long before a strong conspiracy against the government was formed in Hawaii, led by Kekuaokalani, a remarkably talented chief and a cousin of the king. Loyalty wavered at the court, and several prominent chiefs lent their support to the revolutionary movement.
However it may be regarded in the light of its results, on the part of Kekuaokalani the rebellion was a brave and conscientious defence of the religion of his fathers. He raised the standard of revolt within a day’s march of Kailua, and invited to its support all who condemned the action of Liholiho in decreeing the destruction [439]of the national religion. He scorned all compromises and concessions, and but for the firearms of the whites would doubtless have wrested the sceptre from his royal cousin.
However it may be viewed based on its outcomes, Kekuaokalani's rebellion was a courageous and principled defense of his ancestors' religion. He raised the banner of revolt within a day's march of Kailua and called on everyone who opposed Liholiho's decision to destroy [__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__] the national religion to join him. He rejected all compromises and concessions, and if not for the firearms of the white settlers, he likely would have taken the crown from his royal cousin.
It has been asserted that Kekuaokalani was ambitious and availed himself of the discontent created by the anti-religious decrees of Liholiho as a possible means of seizing the reins of government. This assumption is not sustained either by the words or acts of the unfortunate chief. The ambassadors sent to him after the first skirmish of the conflict reported that he declined all terms of peaceful settlement. This, however, was not the case. What he demanded was that Liholiho should withdraw his edicts against the priesthood, permit the rebuilding of the temples, and dismiss Kalaimoku as prime minister and Kaahumanu as chief counselor of the government. These conditions were declined, and the ambassadors returned with the story that they had offered to leave the question of religion entirely with the people, but that Kekuaokalani would have nothing but war. A correct statement of what occurred at the interview would doubtless have weakened the royal cause, and was therefore withheld. After the resignation of Hewahewa as high-priest the position devolved upon Kekuaokalani by right of precedence, and, believing in the sanctity of his gods, as a brave man he could not do less than take up arms in their defence.
It has been said that Kekuaokalani was ambitious and took advantage of the discontent caused by Liholiho's anti-religious decrees as a potential way to take control of the government. However, this assumption is not supported by the words or actions of the unfortunate chief. The envoys sent to him after the first clash of the conflict reported that he rejected all offers for peaceful resolution. This, however, was not accurate. What he wanted was for Liholiho to retract his edicts against the priesthood, allow the temples to be rebuilt, and remove Kalaimoku as prime minister and Kaahumanu as chief advisor to the government. These demands were turned down, and the messengers returned with the claim that they had proposed leaving the matter of religion entirely up to the people, but that Kekuaokalani wanted nothing except war. A true account of what happened during the meeting would likely have weakened the royal cause, so it was kept quiet. After Hewahewa resigned as high priest, the position naturally passed to Kekuaokalani, and, believing in the sanctity of his gods, he felt it was his duty as a brave man to take up arms in their defense.
No characters in Hawaiian history stand forth with a sadder prominence, or add a richer tint to the vanishing chivalry of the race, than Kekuaokalani and his courageous and devoted wife, Manono, the last defenders in arms of the Hawaiian gods. They saw all that the light around them presented, but the only gods known to them were those of their fathers, and they died in a futile effort to protect them. They were brave, noble and conscientious, and the cause in which they perished cannot detract from the grandeur or dim the glory of the sacrifice.
No characters in Hawaiian history stand out with a more tragic prominence or add a deeper hue to the fading nobility of the race than Kekuaokalani and his brave and loyal wife, Manono, the last defenders of the Hawaiian gods. They understood everything that the world around them offered, but the only gods they recognized were those of their ancestors, and they died in a hopeless attempt to protect them. They were courageous, honorable, and dedicated, and the cause for which they perished does not diminish the greatness or tarnish the glory of their sacrifice.
In the veins of Kekuaokalani ran the best blood both of Hawaii and Oahu. He was a nephew of Kamehameha I., and his strain was even superior in rank to that of his distinguished uncle. His great-grandmother was Kamakaimoku, a princess of Oahu, who became the wife of Kalaninuiamamao, one of the sons of Keawe, king of Hawaii, and the mother of Kalaniopuu, grandfather of Keopuolani, mother of Liholiho. One of the full sisters of Kalaniopuu was Manona, the grandmother of Kekuaokalani. [440]
In Kekuaokalani’s veins flowed the finest blood from both Hawaii and Oahu. He was a nephew of Kamehameha I, and his lineage was even more prestigious than that of his famous uncle. His great-grandmother was Kamakaimoku, a princess from Oahu who married Kalaninuiamamao, one of the sons of Keawe, king of Hawaii, and the mother of Kalaniopuu, who was the grandfather of Keopuolani, mother of Liholiho. One of Kalaniopuu's full sisters was Manona, the grandmother of Kekuaokalani. [__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]
One of the early wives of Kamehameha I. was Kalola, a chiefess of Hawaii. She subsequently became the wife of Kekuamanoha, a younger brother of Kahekili, king of Maui, and the mother of Manono, wife of Kekuaokalani. As the mother of Manono was a daughter of Kumukoa, one of the sons of Keawe, king of Hawaii, and her father was a prince of Maui, she was not only of high rank, but was related in blood both to her husband and the reigning family.
One of the early wives of Kamehameha I was Kalola, a chiefess of Hawaii. She later became the wife of Kekuamanoha, a younger brother of Kahekili, king of Maui, and the mother of Manono, who was married to Kekuaokalani. Since Manono's mother was a daughter of Kumukoa, one of the sons of Keawe, king of Hawaii, and her father was a prince of Maui, she was not only of high status but also had blood relations to both her husband and the ruling family.
Kekuaokalani is referred to by tradition as one of the most imposing chiefs of his day. He was more than six and a half feet in height, perfect in form, handsome in feature and noble in bearing. Brave, sagacious and magnetic, he possessed the requirements of a successful military leader; but as war had practically ceased with the conquest of the group by Kamehameha I., and he had little taste for the frivolities of the court, where he might have worn out his life in honored idleness, he turned his attention to the priesthood. Beginning at the bottom, with patient application he passed through the intervening degrees until he stood beside the high-priest, fully his equal in learning, and more than his peer in devotion to his calling. He mastered the chronological meles of the higher priesthood and the esoteric lore and secret symbols of the temple, and with the death of Hewahewa it was the universal expectation that the duties of the high-priesthood would devolve upon him. In disposition he was humane, charitable and unselfish, and, appreciating the nobility of his character, his wife worshipped him almost as a god. In return he bestowed upon her the full measure of his affection, and the waters of their lives flowed peacefully on together until the grave engulfed them both.
Kekuaokalani is traditionally known as one of the most impressive chiefs of his time. Standing over six and a half feet tall, he was perfectly built, handsome, and had a dignified presence. Brave, wise, and charismatic, he had all the qualities of a successful military leader; however, since war largely ended with Kamehameha I's conquest of the islands, and he had little interest in the court's trivialities, where he could have spent his life in honored idleness, he shifted his focus to the priesthood. Starting from the ground up, he diligently worked his way through the ranks until he stood alongside the high priest, matching him in knowledge and surpassing him in dedication to his role. He mastered the chronological meles of the higher priesthood, along with the secret teachings and symbols of the temple, and when Hewahewa passed away, everyone expected him to take on the responsibilities of the high priest. He was compassionate, generous, and selfless, and his wife admired him to the point of nearly worshipping him. In return, he shared his deep love for her, and together, they led a harmonious life until death took them both.
This was the character of the sturdy chief around whom the friends of the dethroned gods of Hawaii began to rally. He counseled peace and submission so long as he could find listeners among the disaffected, but in the end he was forced into the revolt and became the leader of the movement.
This was the nature of the strong leader that the supporters of Hawaii's overthrown gods began to gather around. He promoted peace and acceptance as long as there were people willing to listen among those who were unhappy, but ultimately, he was pushed into rebellion and became the leader of the uprising.
He was present at the royal feast at Kailua when Liholiho publicly violated the tabu and decreed the destruction of the temples. He saw Hewahewa, the venerable high-priest, who had been to an extent his religious guide and instructor, cast the first brand upon the heiau where they had so often worshipped together and sought the counsels of the gods. At first all this [441]seemed to be a horrible dream, but the burning temples and frantic rejoicings of the populace soon convinced him that it was a bewildering reality, and he threw himself to the earth and prayed that his sight might be blasted, that he might witness no farther the sacrilegious acts of the people.
He was there at the royal feast in Kailua when Liholiho publicly broke the taboo and ordered the destruction of the temples. He watched Hewahewa, the respected high priest who had been somewhat his spiritual guide and teacher, throw the first torch onto the heiau where they had often worshipped together and sought guidance from the gods. At first, it all felt like a terrible nightmare, but the burning temples and the wild celebrations of the crowd quickly made him realize it was a shocking reality, and he fell to the ground, praying that he would go blind so he wouldn’t have to witness any more of the people's sacrilegious actions.
“Liholiho’s brain is on fire with strong drink, and he may be urged to do anything,” thought Kekuaokalani; “but Hewahewa—it must be that he is insane, and it is my duty to speak with him.”
“Liholiho’s mind is racing from drinking heavily, and he could be pushed to do anything,” thought Kekuaokalani; “but Hewahewa—it has to be that he’s lost his mind, and I need to talk to him.”
He sought and found the high-priest, and learned to his great grief that Hewahewa was not only sound in mind, but was in thorough accord with the king in his determination to destroy the temples and repudiate the priesthood.
He looked for the high priest and, to his deep sorrow, discovered that Hewahewa was not only sane but also completely aligned with the king's decision to destroy the temples and reject the priesthood.
“And you, a high-priest of the blood of Paao, advise this!” said Kekuaokalani, bitterly.
“And you, a high priest of the blood of Paao, suggest this!” said Kekuaokalani, bitterly.
“I advise it,” was the calm reply of Hewahewa; “but I am no longer the high-priest of Hawaii; the king has been so notified.”
“I recommend it,” was Hewahewa's calm response; “but I’m no longer the high priest of Hawaii; the king has been informed.”
“Then here and now do I assume the vacant place,” returned Kekuaokalani, promptly.
“Then here and now I take the empty spot,” replied Kekuaokalani, promptly.
“By whose appointment?” inquired Hewahewa.
"By whose appointment?" asked Hewahewa.
“By the will of the outraged gods whose temples are turning to ashes around us!” replied Kekuaokalani, with energy. “They will teach me my duty, even should they fail to visit vengeance upon their betrayers!”
“By the will of the angry gods whose temples are turning to ashes around us!” replied Kekuaokalani, passionately. “They will show me my duty, even if they don’t take revenge on those who betrayed them!”
With these words Kekuaokalani turned and walked away. His heart was filled with anguish, and the shouts of the people drove him almost to despair. Reaching the pavilion, he lifted and placed upon his shoulder the prostrate and mutilated image of Lono that had stood beside the entrance, and with the precious burden strode gloomily and defiantly past the palace and disappeared.
With these words, Kekuaokalani turned and walked away. His heart was filled with pain, and the shouts of the crowd pushed him to the edge of despair. When he reached the pavilion, he picked up and put on his shoulder the fallen and damaged statue of Lono that had stood by the entrance, and with the heavy burden, he walked gloomily and defiantly past the palace and vanished.
For a month or more nothing was heard of Kekuaokalani at the court. Meantime, the work of destruction continued, and the smoke of burning temples rose everywhere throughout the group. At length word reached Kailua that some of the priesthood, sustained by a number of influential chiefs, were inciting a revolt in South Kono. Little attention was paid to the report until it was learned that Kekuaokalani had accepted the leadership of the movement. This alarmed the court, and a council of [442]chiefs was called. Discussion developed the prevailing opinion that the threatened uprising was merely a local disturbance that could be quelled without difficulty, and Liholiho’s apprehensions were further relieved by the assurance of one of the chiefs that, with the assistance of forty warriors, he would undertake to bring Kekuaokalani a prisoner to Kailua within three days.
For over a month, there was no news of Kekuaokalani at the court. Meanwhile, the destruction continued, and smoke from burning temples filled the sky throughout the islands. Finally, news reached Kailua that some priests, backed by several powerful chiefs, were stirring up a rebellion in South Kono. Initially, the report received little attention until it was discovered that Kekuaokalani had taken charge of the movement. This alarmed the court, and a council of [__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__] chiefs was convened. During the discussion, the general consensus was that the anticipated uprising was just a local issue that could be easily handled, and Liholiho's concerns were eased by one chief's assurance that, with the help of forty warriors, he would capture Kekuaokalani and bring him back to Kailua within three days.
“Not with forty times forty!” said Hewahewa, earnestly. Better than any one else he understood and appreciated the lofty courage of Kekuaokalani, and was too generous to listen to its disparagement without protest. “No, not with forty times forty!” he continued. “Without Kekuaokalani the revolt will amount to nothing; with him, it means war.”
“Not with forty times forty!” Hewahewa said earnestly. Better than anyone else, he understood and appreciated the noble courage of Kekuaokalani and was too generous to sit back and let it be belittled without saying something. “No, not with forty times forty!” he continued. “Without Kekuaokalani, the revolt will mean nothing; with him, it means war.”
“Then war let it be, since he invites it!” exclaimed Kalaimoku.
“Then let it be war, since he’s asking for it!” shouted Kalaimoku.
“But may he not be persuaded to peace?” inquired the king, addressing the question, apparently, to Hewahewa.
“But can he not be convinced to make peace?” the king asked, seemingly directing his question to Hewahewa.
“Undoubtedly,” replied the latter, “if we are prepared to accept his conditions.”
"Definitely," replied the other, "if we're willing to accept his terms."
“What, think you, would be the conditions?” returned the king.
"What do you think the conditions would be?" asked the king.
“The restoration of the tabu and the rebuilding of the temples,” was the deliberate answer of Hewahewa.
“The restoration of the tabu and the rebuilding of the temples,” was Hewahewa’s intentional response.
The king was silent; but before the council dissolved it was understood that a force would be sent against the rebels at once, and for a week or more preparations for the campaign were in progress, under the supervision of Kalaimoku. Everything at length being in readiness, the royal army, numbering, it is presumed, not less than fifteen hundred warriors, some of them bearing firearms, moved southward from Kailua in the direction of Kaawaloa, where had been established the rebel headquarters.
The king didn't say anything; however, before the council wrapped up, it was clear that a force would be sent to deal with the rebels immediately, and for a week or so, preparations for the campaign were underway, led by Kalaimoku. Once everything was finally ready, the royal army, estimated to have at least fifteen hundred warriors, some with firearms, headed south from Kailua towards Kaawaloa, where the rebel headquarters had been set up.
Having accepted the leadership of the rebellion, and regarding himself as a champion selected by the gods for their defence, Kekuaokalani vitalized the movement with an energy and enthusiasm which soon brought the people to its support in large numbers, and the winter solstice found him in command of an army large enough to inspire him with a reasonable hope of success.
Having taken on the leadership of the rebellion and seeing himself as a champion chosen by the gods for their protection, Kekuaokalani energized the movement with a spirit and enthusiasm that quickly drew significant support from the people. By the winter solstice, he was in command of an army substantial enough to fill him with a realistic hope of success.
The five intercalated days between the winter solstice and the beginning of the new year had from time immemorial been set apart as a season of tabu, dedicated to festivities in honor of [443]Lono, one of the Hawaiian trinity. In the midst of the general religious demoralization Kekuaokalani devoted to the season its customary observances—the last yearly festival ever authoritatively given to Lono in the group.
The five extra days between the winter solstice and the start of the new year have long been recognized as a time of tabu, dedicated to celebrations honoring [__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]Lono, one of the Hawaiian deities. Despite the widespread decline in religious practices, Kekuaokalani committed to maintaining the traditional rituals for this season—the final festival ever formally held for Lono in the group.
The movements of the government were regularly and rapidly reported to Kekuaokalani, and when the royal troops left Kailua he was prepared to meet them. Through his efforts a heiau near Kaawaloa had escaped destruction. Thither he repaired, and, offering sacrifices to the gods, prayed that they would manifest their power by giving him victory.
The government's actions were consistently and quickly communicated to Kekuaokalani, and when the royal troops departed from Kailua, he was ready to confront them. Thanks to his efforts, a heiau near Kaawaloa was saved from destruction. He went there, made sacrifices to the gods, and prayed for their support in achieving victory.
He did not await the assault of the royal forces. Leaving Kaawaloa, he attacked and defeated their advance not far north of that place, throwing the entire army into confusion. Satisfied with the success, he returned to Kaawaloa.
He didn’t wait for the royal forces to attack. Leaving Kaawaloa, he charged at them and defeated their advance not far north of there, throwing the whole army into disarray. Happy with his success, he went back to Kaawaloa.
News of the repulse reaching Kailua, a consultation was called by the king, and Kalaimoku urged the prompt advance of reinforcements by land and sea, and an immediate and overwhelming attack upon the rebels at Kaawaloa, rightly claiming that every day would add to the strength of the insurgents under the inspiration of the slight victory they had achieved.
News of the repulse reached Kailua, and the king called for a consultation. Kalaimoku urged the quick dispatch of reinforcements by land and sea, and an immediate and powerful attack on the rebels at Kaawaloa, rightly pointing out that each day would strengthen the insurgents, fueled by the small victory they had won.
This advice was accepted, and every available force was immediately sent to the front, including a squadron of double canoes under the command of Kaahumanu and Kalakua, one of them carrying a mounted swivel in charge of a foreigner.
This advice was agreed upon, and every available force was quickly sent to the front, including a squadron of double canoes led by Kaahumanu and Kalakua, one of which was carrying a mounted swivel operated by a foreigner.
Uncertain as to the strength of the rebels, and by no means confident of the results of a struggle which had opened in favor of his enemies, Liholiho advised a resort to peaceful negotiations before staking everything on the chances of battle. Hoapili, who stood in the capacity of husband to the queen-mother, and Naihe, hereditary national counselor and orator, were selected as ambassadors to confer with Kekuaokalani, and Keopuolani volunteered to accompany them.
Uncertain about the strength of the rebels and not feeling confident about the outcome of a conflict that had started to favor his enemies, Liholiho suggested seeking peaceful negotiations before risking everything on a battle. Hoapili, who was married to the queen-mother, and Naihe, a hereditary national counselor and speaker, were chosen as ambassadors to meet with Kekuaokalani, and Keopuolani offered to join them.
Reaching the camp of the insurgents, the ambassadors were graciously received by Kekuaokalani, and used every means to effect an amicable settlement of the difficulties that had brought two hostile armies face to face; but nothing satisfactory could be accomplished. They were not authorized to offer such terms as Kekuaokalani felt that he could consistently accept, inasmuch as they failed to embrace either the restoration of the tabu or the rebuilding of the temples. Naihe offered to leave the question [444]of religion optional with the insurgents. To this proposal Kekuaokalani bitterly replied:
Reaching the insurgents' camp, the ambassadors were warmly welcomed by Kekuaokalani and did everything they could to achieve a peaceful resolution to the issues that had brought two opposing armies together. However, nothing satisfactory was achieved. They weren’t authorized to propose terms that Kekuaokalani believed he could accept, as their offers didn’t include the restoration of the tabu or the rebuilding of the temples. Naihe suggested leaving the issue [__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__] of religion up to the insurgents. Kekuaokalani harshly responded to this suggestion:
“You offer the scales of the fish after you have picked the bones. As they are without temples, where would they worship? As they are without altars, where would they sacrifice? As they are without the tabu, what to them would be sacred and acceptable to the gods?”
“You give the fish scales after you’ve taken out the bones. Since they have no temples, where would they worship? Since they have no altars, where would they make sacrifices? Since they have no tabu, what would be sacred and acceptable to the gods for them?”
“Then must we take back the word that Kekuaokalani will have nothing but war?” said Keopuolani, sadly.
“Are we really saying that Kekuaokalani wants nothing but war?” said Keopuolani, sadly.
“No, honored mother of princes,” replied Kekuaokalani, in a tone so solemn and impressive that his listeners stood awed in his presence. “Say, rather, that Kekuaokalani, the last high-priest, it may be, of Hawaii, is prepared to die in defence of the gods to whose service he has devoted his life. If they are omnipotent, as he believes them to be, their temples will rise again; if not, he is more than willing to hide his disappointment in the grave!”
“No, respected mother of princes,” replied Kekuaokalani, in a tone so serious and powerful that his audience was left in awe of him. “Say instead that Kekuaokalani, perhaps the last high priest of Hawaii, is ready to die in defense of the gods to whom he has dedicated his life. If they are all-powerful, as he believes they are, their temples will be rebuilt; if not, he is more than willing to bury his disappointment in the grave!”
Naihe was his uncle; Kamakaimoku was the great-grandmother both of Keopuolani and himself, and the king was his cousin. As a condition of peace he demanded the recall of the edicts against the tabu and the temples. As this could not be conceded, the ambassadors appealed to his relationship with themselves and the royal family; but he could not be moved. “We are proud of our blood,” he said to Keopuolani, “but who but the gods made kings of our ancestors?”
Naihe was his uncle; Kamakaimoku was the great-grandmother of both Keopuolani and him, and the king was his cousin. As a condition for peace, he demanded the repeal of the edicts against the tabu and the temples. Since this couldn't be granted, the ambassadors appealed to his family connections and the royal family; but he couldn't be swayed. “We take pride in our lineage,” he told Keopuolani, “but who but the gods crowned our ancestors as kings?”
Finding that nothing could be effected, the ambassadors withdrew with tokens of mutual regret, and were safely and respectfully escorted beyond the rebel lines. The reports they allowed to be circulated on their return, that Kekuaokalani had refused to consider any terms of peace, and that they had narrowly escaped with their lives, were inventions employed to mislead and exasperate the royal army.
Finding that nothing could be accomplished, the ambassadors left with expressions of mutual regret and were safely and respectfully escorted beyond the rebel lines. The reports they allowed to circulate upon their return—that Kekuaokalani had refused to consider any terms of peace and that they had narrowly escaped with their lives—were fabrications meant to mislead and infuriate the royal army.
With the departure of the ambassadors Manono sought her husband to learn the results of the conference. The information that no agreement had been reached did not surprise her. For weeks past all the auguries had indicated blood, and the night before the alae had screamed in the palms behind her hut.
With the ambassadors gone, Manono looked for her husband to find out the outcome of the conference. She wasn't shocked to hear that no agreement had been made. For weeks, all signs had pointed to violence, and the night before, the alae had screeched in the palms behind her hut.
“Thank the gods for the omen!” said Kekuaokalani.
“Thank the gods for the sign!” said Kekuaokalani.
“But the voice of the alae is a presage of evil,” suggested Manono. [445]
“But the voice of the alae is a warning of trouble,” suggested Manono. [__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]
“Only to those who do evil,” replied the chief. “The fate of the gods, whose battles we fight, is shaped by themselves.”
“Only to those who do evil,” replied the chief. “The fate of the gods, whose battles we fight, is shaped by themselves.”
“Have you no fear of the result?” inquired Manono.
“Don't you fear the outcome?” asked Manono.
“I fear nothing,” was the reply; “but the thought has sometimes come to me of late that the gods are reserving for Liholiho and his advisers a punishment greater than I may be able to inflict. Should that be so, I am obstructing with spears the path of their vengeance, and will be sacrificed.”
"I fear nothing," was the response; "but lately I've wondered if the gods are planning a punishment for Liholiho and his advisers that's beyond what I can impose. If that's true, I might be blocking their vengeance with my own weapons, and I could end up being the one sacrificed."
“The will of the gods be done!” said Manono, devoutly. “But, whatever may be the fate of Kekuaokalani, Manono will share it.”
“The will of the gods be done!” said Manono, reverently. “But no matter what happens to Kekuaokalani, Manono will share in it.”
“Brave Manono!” exclaimed the husband, with emotion. “If the gods so will it we will die together!”
“Brave Manono!” the husband exclaimed, filled with emotion. “If the gods want it that way, we'll die together!”
That night Kekuaokalani took up his line of march for Kailua, determined to give battle to the royal forces wherever he might encounter them. He moved near the coast, and the next morning the hostile armies met at Kuamoo. Arranging his forces in order of battle, Kekuaokalani sent to the front a number of newly-decorated gods in the charge of priests, and, in turn addressing the several divisions, conjured them in impassioned language to defend the gods of their fathers.
That night, Kekuaokalani set out for Kailua, determined to confront the royal forces whenever he encountered them. He moved along the coast, and the next morning, the opposing armies met at Kuamoo. Organizing his troops for battle, Kekuaokalani sent some newly adorned idols to the front line with the priests in charge, and, addressing the various divisions, he passionately urged them to defend the gods of their ancestors.
Kalaimoku commanded the royal army in person. The battle opened in favor of the rebels, and with them would have been the victory but for the great superiority of the royalists in firearms. At a critical juncture a battalion of musketeers, some of whom were foreigners, charged the rebel centre, when the division gave way in something of a panic, and soon the entire rebel forces were in retreat. Retiring to the adjacent seaside, under cover of a stone wall they made a successful resistance for some time; but the squadron of double canoes already referred to, under the command of Kaahumanu and Kalakua, enfiladed the position with musketry and a mounted swivel, and the insurgents abandoned the unequal struggle, the most of them scattering and seeking shelter in the neighboring hills.
Kalaimoku personally led the royal army. The battle started off well for the rebels, and they could have won, but the royalists had a significant advantage in firearms. At a crucial moment, a battalion of musketeers, some of whom were foreigners, charged the rebel center, causing the division to fall back in panic, and soon the entire rebel forces were in retreat. They withdrew to the nearby seaside and took cover behind a stone wall, managing to hold their ground for a while. However, the squadron of double canoes mentioned earlier, led by Kaahumanu and Kalakua, attacked their position with gunfire and a mounted swivel gun. The insurgents eventually gave up the unequal fight, most of them fleeing to seek refuge in the nearby hills.
Although wounded early in the action, Kekuaokalani gallantly kept the field. Everywhere was his tall form seen moving throughout the conflict, rallying and cheering his followers, while at his side fought the brave Manono. He finally fell with a musket-ball through his heart. With a wild scream of despair Manono sprang to his assistance, and the next moment a bullet [446]pierced her temple, and she fell dead across the body of her dying husband. Kalaimoku was the first to approach, and gazing long upon the noble features of Kekuaokalani, grand even in death, turned to his followers and said: “Truly, since the days of Keawe a grander Hawaiian has not lived!”
Although injured early in the fight, Kekuaokalani bravely stayed in the battle. His tall figure was seen everywhere, rallying and encouraging his friends, while the courageous Manono fought by his side. He eventually fell with a bullet through his heart. With a wild scream of despair, Manono rushed to help him, and the next moment a bullet [__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__] struck her in the temple, and she fell dead across the body of her dying husband. Kalaimoku was the first to approach, and gazing long at the noble features of Kekuaokalani, majestic even in death, he turned to his followers and said: “Truly, since the days of Keawe, no greater Hawaiian has lived!”
Thus died the last great defenders of the Hawaiian gods. They died as nobly as they had lived, and were buried together where they fell on the field of Kuamoo.
Thus died the last great defenders of the Hawaiian gods. They died as nobly as they had lived, and were buried together where they fell on the field of Kuamoo.
Small bodies of religious malcontents were subdued at Waimea and one or two other points, but the hopes and struggles of the priesthood virtually ended with the death of Kekuaokalani. [447]
Small groups of dissatisfied religious followers were subdued at Waimea and a couple of other locations, but the hopes and efforts of the priesthood effectively came to an end with the death of Kekuaokalani. [__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]
Puupehe's Tomb.
[448]
[__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]
CHARACTERS.
- Makakehau, a chief of Lanai.
- Puupehe, daughter of a chief of Maui.
[449]
[__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]
THE TOMB OF PUUPEHE.
PUUPEHE'S TOMB.
A LEGEND OF THE ISLAND OF LANAI.
A LEGEND OF THE ISLAND OF LANAI.
Sailing along the lee-shore or southwest coast of Lanai, a huge block of red lava, sixty feet in diameter and eighty or more feet in height, is discerned standing out in the sea, and detached from the mainland some fifty or sixty fathoms. The sides are precipitous, offering no possible means of ascent, and against it the waves dash in fury, and in the niches of its storm-worn angles the birds of ocean build their nests. Observed from the overhanging bluff of the neighboring shore, on the summit of the lonely column is seen a small enclosure formed by a low but well-defined stone wall. This is known as “The tomb of Puupehe”—the last resting-place of one of the most beautiful of the daughters of Maui, whose body was buried there by her distracted husband and lover, Makakehau, a warrior of Lanai. How the summit was reached by the lover with his precious burden is a mystery, but the wall is still there to show that the ascent was made in some manner, and tradition assumes that it was through the agency of supernatural forces.
Sailing along the lee shore or southwest coast of Lanai, you can see a massive block of red lava, about sixty feet wide and over eighty feet tall, standing out in the ocean, about fifty or sixty fathoms away from the mainland. The sides are steep, offering no way to climb up, and the waves crash violently against it, while ocean birds nest in the sheltered spots of its weathered edges. From the high cliff on the neighboring shore, you can spot a small enclosure on top of the lonely column, formed by a low but distinct stone wall. This is known as “The tomb of Puupehe”—the final resting place of one of the most beautiful daughters of Maui, whose body was laid to rest there by her heartbroken husband and lover, Makakehau, a warrior from Lanai. How the lover managed to carry her to the summit remains a mystery, but the wall still stands as proof that the ascent was somehow made, and tradition suggests it involved supernatural forces.
Puupehe was the daughter of Uaua, a petty chief of Maui, and Makakehau won her, it is related without detail, as the joint prize of love and war. How this could have occurred it is difficult to imagine, since Lanai was always a dependency of Maui in the past, and no direct wars between the two islands are mentioned by tradition. It may therefore be inferred that she was the spoil of some private predatory expedition, and that the efforts of the young warrior to jealously seclude her from the gaze of men were prompted not more by the infatuations of her beauty than the fear that she might be recaptured.
Puupehe was the daughter of Uaua, a minor chief of Maui, and Makakehau won her, as the stories say, as a prize of both love and war. It's hard to picture how this happened, since Lanai has always been under Maui's influence, and there are no accounts of direct conflicts between the two islands. It could be suggested that she became the prize of some private raid, and that the young warrior's attempts to keep her away from the eyes of other men were motivated not just by his attraction to her beauty but also by the fear that she might be taken from him again.
However this may have been, they are described in the Kanikau, or “Lamentation of Puupehe,” as mutually captive to each other in the bonds of love. The maiden was a sweet flower of Hawaiian beauty. Her glossy brown and spotless [450]body “shone like the clear sun rising out of Heleakala.” Her flowing hair, bound by wreaths of pikaki blossoms, streamed forth as she ran “like the surf-crests scudding before the wind,” and the starry eyes of the daughter of Uaua so dazzled the youthful brave that he was called Makakehau, or “Misty Eyes.”
However this may have been, they are described in the Kanikau, or “Lamentation of Puupehe,” as being deeply in love with each other. The young woman was a beautiful representation of Hawaiian grace. Her smooth brown and flawless [__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__] skin “shone like the clear sun rising out of Heleakala.” Her long hair, adorned with wreaths of pikaki blossoms, flowed as she ran “like the surf-crests racing before the wind,” and the sparkling eyes of Uaua's daughter dazzled the young warrior so much that he was given the name Makakehau, or “Misty Eyes.”
Fearing that the radiant beauty of his captive might cause her to be coveted by some of the chiefs of the land, he said to her: “We love each other well. Let us go to the clear waters of Kalulu. There we will fish together for the kala and bonita, and there will I spear the turtle. I will hide you, O light of my heart! in the cave of Malauea. Or we will dwell together in the great ravine of Palawai, where we will eat the young of the uwau, and bake them in the ti leaf with the sweet pala root. The ohelo berries of the Kuahiwa will refresh us, and we will drink of the cool waters of Maunalei. I will thatch a hut in the thicket of Kaohai, and we will love on till the stars die.”
Worried that the stunning beauty of his captive might attract the attention of some local chiefs, he said to her: “We love each other deeply. Let's go to the clear waters of Kalulu. There, we can fish for the kala and bonita, and I’ll catch a turtle. I’ll hide you, oh light of my heart! in the cave of Malauea. Or we can live together in the great ravine of Palawai, where we’ll eat the young of the uwau, and bake them in ti leaves with the sweet pala root. The ohelo berries from Kuahiwa will refresh us, and we’ll drink from the cool waters of Maunalei. I’ll build a hut in the thicket of Kaohai, and we’ll love each other until the stars fade away.”
The meles tell of their loves in the Pulou Ravine, where they caught the bright iwi birds and scarlet apapani. How sweet were their joys in the maia groves of Waiakeakua, where the lovers saw naught so beautiful as themselves! But the misty eyes were soon to be made dimmer by weeping, and dimmer till the drowning brine should shut out their light for ever.
The meles share stories of their loves in the Pulou Ravine, where they caught the vibrant iwi birds and bright red apapani. Their joys in the maia groves of Waiakeakua were so sweet, where the lovers saw nothing as beautiful as themselves! But those misty eyes would soon grow dimmer from tears, dimmer until the drowning waves would extinguish their light forever.
Makakehau left his love one day in the cave of Malauea, while he went to the mountain to fill the huawai with sweet water. This cavern yawns at the base of the cliff overlooking the rock of Puupehe. The sea surges far within, but there is an inner space or chamber which the expert swimmer can reach, and where Puupehe had often found seclusion, and baked the honu, or sea-turtle, for her absent lover.
Makakehau left his love one day in the cave of Malauea while he went to the mountain to fill the huawai with fresh water. This cave opens up at the base of the cliff overlooking the rock of Puupehe. The sea rushes in deep, but there’s an inner space or chamber that a skilled swimmer can reach, where Puupehe often found solitude and cooked the honu, or sea turtle, for her missing lover.
This was the season for the kona, the terrific storm that comes up from the equator, and hurls the billows of ocean with increased violence against the southern shores of the Hawaiian Islands.
This was the season for the kona, the powerful storm that comes up from the equator and violently sends ocean waves crashing against the southern shores of the Hawaiian Islands.
Makakehau beheld from the rocky springs of Pulou the vanguard of an approaching kona—scuds of rain and thick mist rushing with a howling wind across the round valley of Palawai. He knew the storm would fill the cave with a wild and sudden rush of waters, and destroy the life of his beautiful Puupehe.
Makakehau watched from the rocky springs of Pulou as the leading edge of an approaching kona storm—sheets of rain and dense mist—swept in with a howling wind across the circular valley of Palawai. He realized that the storm would flood the cave with a wild and sudden surge of water and threaten the life of his beautiful Puupehe.
Every moment was precious. He flung aside his calabashes [451]of water, and at the top of his speed started down the mountain. With mighty and rapid strides he crossed the great valley, where he met the coming storm in its fury. Over the rim he dashed with an agonized heart, and down the ragged slope of the kula to the shore, which the waves were already lashing in a voice of thunder.
Every moment was valuable. He threw aside his water gourds, [__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]and at full speed, he raced down the mountain. With powerful and swift strides, he crossed the vast valley, where he faced the approaching storm in all its rage. He rushed over the edge with a heavy heart and descended the jagged slope of the kula to the shore, where the waves were already crashing with a thunderous roar.
The sea was up, indeed! The yeasty foam of surging, wind-rent billows whitened the cliffs, and the tempest chorussed the mad anthem of the battling waves. Oh! where should Misty Eyes seek for his love in the blinding storm?
The sea was wild, for sure! The frothy foam of the crashing waves splattered against the cliffs, and the storm sang the chaotic song of the fighting surf. Oh! Where was Misty Eyes supposed to look for his love in the fierce storm?
A rushing mountain of sea fills the mouth of the cave of Malauea, and the pent air within hurls back the invading torrent with a stubborn roar, blowing outward great streams of spray. It is a savage war of the elements—a battle of the forces of nature well calculated to thrill with pleasure the hearts of strong men. But a lover looking into the seething gulf of the whirlpool—what would be to him the sublime conflict? what to see amid the boiling brine the upturned face and tender body of the idol of his heart?
A rushing wave of the ocean fills the entrance of the cave of Malauea, and the trapped air inside pushes back against the invading tide with a stubborn roar, sending out huge sprays of water. It’s a fierce battle of nature—a clash of elemental forces sure to excite the hearts of strong men. But for a lover peering into the swirling depths of the whirlpool—what would the grand struggle mean to him? What would it be like to see, amid the churning water, the upturned face and delicate body of the one he adores?
Others might agonize on the brink, but Misty Eyes sprang into the dreadful caldron and snatched his lifeless love from the jaws of an ocean grave.
Others might be tormented on the edge, but Misty Eyes jumped into the terrifying cauldron and rescued his lifeless love from the jaws of an ocean grave.
The next day fishermen heard the lamentation of Makakehau, and the women of the valley came down and wailed over Puupehe. They wrapped her body in bright, new kapa, and covered it with garlands of fragrant nauu. They prepared it for interment, and were about to place it in the burial ground of Manele; but Makakehau prayed that he might be left alone one night more with his lost love, and the request was not refused.
The next day, fishermen heard Makakehau's cries of grief, and the women from the valley came down and mourned for Puupehe. They wrapped her body in vibrant, new kapa and adorned it with garlands of fragrant nauu. They got her ready for burial and were about to lay her in the graveyard at Manele; but Makakehau asked to be left alone with his lost love for one more night, and his request was granted.
When the women returned the morning following they found neither corpse nor wailing lover. At length, looking toward the rock of Puupehe, they discovered Makakehau at work on the lofty apex of the lone sea-tower. The wondering people of the island watched him with amazement from the neighboring cliffs, but, heedless of their observation, he continued his labors. Some sailed around the base of the column in their canoes, but could discover no means of ascent. Every face of the rock was either perpendicular or overhanging.
When the women returned the next morning, they found neither a body nor a grieving lover. Finally, looking toward the rock of Puupehe, they saw Makakehau working at the top of the lonely sea tower. The amazed people of the island watched him from the nearby cliffs, but he focused on his task, ignoring their gaze. Some paddled around the base of the column in their canoes, but they couldn't find a way to climb up. Every side of the rock was either straight up and down or sloped out.
The conviction then became general—since there seemed to be no other possible explanation—that some sympathizing akua, [452]or spirit, had responded to the prayer of Makakehau, and assisted him in reaching the summit of the tower with the body of his dead bride; and in this form has tradition brought down the touching story.
The belief soon spread—since there didn’t seem to be any other explanation—that some sympathetic akua, [__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__] or spirit, had answered Makakehau's prayer and helped him reach the top of the tower with the body of his dead bride; and in this way, the story has been passed down through tradition.
Makakehau finished his labors. He laid his love in a grave prepared by his own hands, placed the last stone upon it, and then stretched out his arms and thus wailed for Puupehe:
Makakehau finished his work. He laid his loved one to rest in a grave he had dug himself, placed the final stone on it, and then stretched out his arms and wailed for Puupehe:
“Where are you, O Puupehe?
“Where are you, Puupehe?”
Are you in the cave of Malauea?
Are you in the cave of Malauea?
Shall I bring you sweet water,
Shall I get you some fresh water,
The water of the fountain?
The fountain water?
Shall I bring the uwau,
Should I bring the uwau,
The pala and ohelo?
The pala and ohelo?
Are you baking the honu?
Are you baking the honu?
And the red, sweet hala?
And the red, sweet hala?
Shall I pound the kalo of Maui?
Shall I mash the kalo of Maui?
Shall we dip in the gourd together?
Shall we drink from the cup together?
The bird and the fish are bitter,
The bird and the fish are bitter,
And the mountain water is sour.
And the mountain water tastes sour.
I shall drink it no more;
I'm done drinking it;
I shall drink with Aipuhi,
I'll drink with Aipuhi,
The great shark of Manele.”
"The big shark of Manele."
Ceasing his sad wail, Makakehau gazed for a moment upon the grave where were buried the light and hope of his life, and then leaped from the rock into the boiling surge at its base. His body was crushed in the breakers. The witnesses of the sacrifice secured the mangled remains of the dead lover, and interred them with respect in the kupapau of Manele.
Ceasing his mournful cry, Makakehau looked for a moment at the grave where the light and hope of his life lay buried, and then jumped from the rock into the crashing waves below. His body was smashed in the surf. The people who witnessed the sacrifice gathered the broken remains of the dead lover and buried them respectfully in the kupapau of Manele.
This is the story told by the old bards of Lanai of the lonely rock of Puupehe, and the still inaccessible summit, with the marks of a grave upon it, attests with reasonable certainty that: the mele has something of a foundation in fact. [453]
This is the tale recounted by the old storytellers of Lanai about the solitary rock of Puupehe, and the remote peak, which bears the signs of a grave, suggests with a good amount of certainty that the mele is based on some truth. [__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]
The Tale of Laieikawai.
[454]
[__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]
CHARACTERS.
- Laieikawai, the heroine, called also Ka wahine o ka liula, “the lady of the twilight,” daughter of a chief of Oahu.
- Laielohelohe, twin-sister of Laieikawai.
- Waka, their grandmother, a powerful sorceress.
- Kapukaihaoa, a priest of Kukaniloko, Oahu.
- Hulumaniani, a prophet of Kauai.
- Aiwohikupua, a chief of Wailua, Kauai, of kupua or supernatural birth, and from a foreign country.
- Moanalihaikawaokele, Aiwohikupua’s father and
- Laukieleula, his mother, both mysterious beings, and inhabitants of the Moon.
- Kaonohiokala, brother of Aiwohikupua, and a demi-god living in the Sun.
-
Maile-Haiwale, sisters of Aiwohikupua. Maile vine, Maile vine, Maile wrap, and Kahalaomapuana the youngest, - Kekalukaluokewa, king of Kauai after Kauakahialii.
- Hauailiki, a petty chief of Mana, Kauai.
- Halaaniani, a petty chief of Puna, Hawaii, and
- Malio, his sister, a sorceress.
- Hinaikamalama, a chiefess of Hana, Maui.
- Poliahu, a goddess of Mauna Kea, Hawaii.
- Kihanuilulumoku, a gigantic moo, or lizard god.
[455]
[__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]
THE STORY OF LAIEIKAWAI.
The Story of Laieikawai.
A SUPERNATURAL FOLK-LORE LEGEND OF THE FOURTEENTH CENTURY.
A SUPERNATURAL FOLKLORE LEGEND FROM THE FOURTEENTH CENTURY.
Introduction.
Early in the spring of 1885 a party of six or eight ladies and gentlemen—the writer being of the number—made a carriage circuit of the island of Oahu. Ample preparations for the little journey had been made by the governor of the island, and the marshal of the kingdom acted in the double capacity of guide and escort. A score of attending natives accompanied the party on horseback, and a delightful week or more was consumed in skirting the breezy beaches of Koolau, in dalliance at Waialua, in visiting historic points of interest, and in completing a journey of something less than one hundred miles.
Early in the spring of 1885, a group of six or eight men and women, including the writer, took a carriage tour around the island of Oahu. The governor of the island made extensive preparations for the trip, and the marshal of the kingdom served as both our guide and escort. About twenty local natives joined us on horseback, and we spent a fantastic week exploring the breezy beaches of Koolau, relaxing at Waialua, visiting historic sites, and completing a journey of just under one hundred miles.
Starting from Honolulu, the empty carriages were carefully lowered down the steep, ragged and narrow Pali road leading to the valleys below, and the first evening found us at rest by the beautiful shores of Kaneohe. Entering the district of Koolauloa the next day, and approaching the coast over a broad stretch of grassy meadow but slightly above the level of the ocean, our party was suddenly brought to a halt beside a pool of clear water, nearly round, and perhaps a hundred feet in diameter. The surface of the pool was ten or twelve feet below the level of the surrounding plain, and its even banks of solid rock dropped almost perpendicularly into water of unknown depth. The volume of the pool is affected neither by rain nor drought, and the native belief is that it is fed by springs at the bottom, and has a subterranean drainage to the ocean, some two or three miles distant.
Starting from Honolulu, the empty carriages were carefully lowered down the steep, rugged, and narrow Pali road leading to the valleys below, and by the first evening, we found ourselves resting by the beautiful shores of Kaneohe. The next day, as we entered the district of Koolauloa and approached the coast over a broad expanse of grassy meadow slightly above sea level, our group was suddenly stopped beside a nearly round pool of clear water, about a hundred feet in diameter. The surface of the pool was ten or twelve feet below the level of the surrounding plain, and its even banks of solid rock dropped almost straight down into water of unknown depth. The volume of the pool is unaffected by rain or drought, and the local belief is that it is fed by springs at the bottom, with a subterranean drainage leading to the ocean, two or three miles away.
This, we learned, was the celebrated pond of Waiapuka, around which so many strange legends have been woven. All of them speak of a cavern somewhere beyond the walls of the pool, [456]and to be reached only by diving into the water and finding the narrow passage leading up into it.
This, we found out, was the famous pond of Waiapuka, surrounded by many strange legends. All of them talk about a cave somewhere beyond the edges of the pool, [__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]that can only be accessed by diving into the water and discovering the narrow passage that leads into it.
While listening to fragments of the story of Laieikawai and of other legends connected with the mysterious cavern, and seriously doubting the existence of the secret chamber so prominently referred to in the early folk-lore of Oahu, an old native, who had joined the party at Kaneohe, quietly and without a word dismounted, divested himself of his upper garments and plunged into the pool. Swimming to the northern wall, he clung for a moment to a slight projection, and then disappeared. It was suggested for the first time that he was in search of the cavern of Laieikawai, and all eyes were turned toward the point where he was last seen above the water.
While listening to parts of the story of Laieikawai and other legends related to the mysterious cave, and seriously questioning whether the secret chamber mentioned in Oahu's early folklore actually existed, an old native, who had joined the group at Kaneohe, quietly got off his horse, took off his upper clothing, and jumped into the pool. He swam to the northern wall, held on for a moment to a small ledge, and then disappeared. It was suggested for the first time that he was looking for the cave of Laieikawai, and everyone’s attention turned to the spot where he was last seen above the water.
Three or four minutes elapsed, and fears for his safety began to be exchanged, when the salutation of “aloha!” greeted us from the opposite wall, and the next moment a pair of black eyes were seen glistening through a small opening into the cavern, not before observed, about four feet above the surface of the water.
Three or four minutes went by, and worries about his safety started to spread, when we heard a cheerful “aloha!” from the opposite wall. The next moment, a pair of dark eyes appeared, shining through a small opening in the cave, which we hadn’t noticed before, about four feet above the water's surface.
The swimmer then returned to the pool by the passage through which he had left it, and we were compelled to admit that the cavern of Laieikawai was a reality, however wild and visionary may have been the stories connected with it. Not a single person present, including the governor, had ever before seen the passage to the cavern attempted, and the natives were overjoyed at what they had witnessed.
The swimmer then went back to the pool through the way he had left it, and we had to acknowledge that the cavern of Laieikawai was real, no matter how fantastical the stories about it might be. Not a single person there, including the governor, had ever seen anyone try to access the cavern, and the locals were thrilled by what they had witnessed.
To the many questions with which he was pressed the old man returned but brief answers on his return, and when importuned to explain the method of his entrance to the cavern, that the secret might not be lost, he pointed significantly to the sea, and declared that there would be found the bodies of those who sought to solve the mystery of the passage and failed.
To the numerous questions he faced, the old man offered only short answers upon his return. When he was urged to clarify how he entered the cave, so that the secret wouldn't be forgotten, he meaningfully pointed to the sea and stated that the bodies of those who tried to uncover the mystery of the passage and failed could be found there.
This rediscovery of the entrance to the cavern of Laieikawai created a renewed interest in the legends associated with it, and thenceforth during our journey many of the old stories were rehearsed. The most interesting related to Laieikawai. It is a recklessly fanciful recital, and gives expression to the extravagant conceits of the early Hawaiian bards. Following is presented a condensation of the legend of Laieikawai, as more elaborately told by Haleole.—Editor. [457]
This rediscovery of the entrance to the cave of Laieikawai sparked a renewed interest in the legends linked to it, and from then on during our journey, many of the old stories were shared. The most captivating ones were about Laieikawai. It’s a wildly imaginative tale that captures the extravagant ideas of the early Hawaiian poets. Below is a summary of the legend of Laieikawai, as told in more detail by Haleole.—Editor. [__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]
I.
The father of Laieikawai was Kahauokapaka, chief of the two Koolau districts, comprising the entire windward side of the island of Oahu, and her mother’s name was Malaekahana. Soon after their marriage he made a vow that if her children should prove to be girls they were to be put to death, at least until a son should be born to them.
The father of Laieikawai was Kahauokapaka, chief of the two Koolau districts, which made up the whole windward side of the island of Oahu, and her mother’s name was Malaekahana. Shortly after their marriage, he pledged that if they had any daughters, they would be killed, at least until a son was born to them.
In accordance with this savage vow the first four of Malaekahana’s children, all being daughters, were slain without mercy. When her time again drew near, by the advice of a priest she sent her husband to the coast to bring her some ohua palemo, a small fish of which she was exceedingly fond.
In line with this brutal vow, the first four of Malaekahana's children, all daughters, were killed without mercy. When her time was approaching again, following the advice of a priest, she sent her husband to the coast to bring her some ohua palemo, a small fish she really loved.
In his absence she was delivered of twin girls, who were named Laieikawai and Laielohelohe. They were surpassingly beautiful children, and, desirous of saving their lives, the mother consigned the first-named to the care of Waka, the child’s grandmother, and the other to Kapukaihaoa, a priest of discretion and sanctity.
In his absence, she gave birth to twin girls, who were named Laieikawai and Laielohelohe. They were incredibly beautiful children, and wanting to protect them, the mother entrusted the first girl to Waka, the child's grandmother, and the other to Kapukaihaoa, a wise and holy priest.
On the return of the husband he was told that the expected child came into the world without life. He knew that a birth in his house had occurred during his absence, for he had heard two distinct claps of thunder.
On the husband's return, he was informed that the expected child was born still. He understood that a birth had taken place in his home while he was away, as he had heard two distinct claps of thunder.
Waka took her foster-child to the cavern which opens into the pond of Waiapuka, and which can be entered only by diving. Laielohelohe was taken by her priestly protector to the sacred enclosure of Kukaniloko, on the western side of the island, and there tenderly cared for.
Waka took her foster child to the cave that leads to the pond of Waiapuka, which can only be accessed by diving. Laielohelohe was brought by her priestly protector to the sacred area of Kukaniloko, on the western side of the island, where she was gently cared for.
The moment Waka entered the cavern of Waiapuka with Laieikawai a rainbow appeared over the place, and was constantly visible so long as the child remained there. Even when the sun was obscured by clouds the rainbow could be seen.
The moment Waka entered the cave of Waiapuka with Laieikawai, a rainbow appeared overhead and stayed visible as long as the child was there. Even when the sun was hidden behind clouds, the rainbow could still be seen.
At length the rainbow was observed by the great prophet Hulumaniani on the distant island of Kauai. For twenty days in succession he saw it, and knew its significance. He secured a canoe and fifteen men from Poloula, the chief of Wailua, provided himself with a black pig, white fowl and red fish for sacrifice, and, when the star Sirius rose, set sail for Oahu.
At last, the great prophet Hulumaniani spotted the rainbow on the faraway island of Kauai. He saw it every day for twenty days and understood its meaning. He got a canoe and fifteen men from Poloula, the chief of Wailua, and brought along a black pig, a white chicken, and a red fish for a sacrifice. When the star Sirius rose, he set out for Oahu.
Reaching that island, he landed at Waianae, and, guided by the rainbow, in due time arrived at the pool of Waiapuka. [458]Waka had just dived into the cave, and he noticed ripples on the water. During the day Waka started to leave the cavern, but caught a glimpse of the prophet sitting on the bank, and quickly returned, again ruffling the water.
Reaching the island, he landed at Waianae and, following the rainbow, eventually arrived at the pool of Waiapuka. [__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__] Waka had just jumped into the cave when he noticed ripples on the water. Throughout the day, Waka began to leave the cavern but caught a sight of the prophet sitting on the shore and quickly returned, stirring the water again.
The prophet remained by the pool all night, and in the morning saw a rainbow over Kukaniloko. Traveling in that direction, he ascended Mount Kaala, when he saw the rainbow over the island of Molokai. Finding a canoe bound thither, he took passage and landed at Haleolono, near the western shore.
The prophet stayed by the pool all night, and in the morning saw a rainbow over Kukaniloko. Heading that way, he climbed Mount Kaala, where he spotted the rainbow over the island of Molokai. He found a canoe heading there, took a ride, and landed at Haleolono, near the western shore.
In a dream Waka had been directed by Kapukaihaoa to remove Laieikawai to some securer place, and had accordingly taken her to Malelewaa, a secluded spot on the north side of Molokai.
In a dream, Waka was guided by Kapukaihaoa to move Laieikawai to a safer location, so he took her to Malelewaa, a quiet place on the north side of Molokai.
Following the rainbow, the prophet arrived in the evening at Waikolu, just below Malelewaa; but that night Waka was again advised in a dream to remove at once to the island of Hawaii and dwell with her ward at Paliuli. They departed at dawn, and at Keawanui met a man getting his canoe ready to sail to Lanai, and engaged passage; but before they could embark Laieikawai accidentally removed the veil which Waka compelled her to wear, and the man was amazed at her beauty.
Following the rainbow, the prophet arrived in the evening at Waikolu, just below Malelewaa; but that night Waka was once again advised in a dream to move immediately to the island of Hawaii and live with her ward at Paliuli. They set out at dawn and, at Keawanui, met a man preparing his canoe to sail to Lanai, and they booked passage. However, before they could board, Laieikawai accidentally removed the veil that Waka had insisted she wear, and the man was amazed by her beauty.
Instead of starting for Lanai, he invited Waka and her ward to remain at his house until he could secure the services of another rower, and then started around the island, proclaiming to every group of people the great beauty of Laieikawai.
Instead of heading to Lanai, he invited Waka and her ward to stay at his house until he could find another rower. Then he set off around the island, telling every group of people about the incredible beauty of Laieikawai.
A great crowd had assembled at Kalaupapa to witness a boxing-match, and there the man extolled the beauty of the girl in the presence of the head chief and the prophet in search of her. Not doubting that the girl described was the one he was in quest of, the prophet proceeded to Kawela and saw the rainbow over Hawanui. That night he arrived at Kaamola, the land adjoining, and went to rest, for he had journeyed far and was weary.
A large crowd had gathered at Kalaupapa to watch a boxing match, and there the man praised the beauty of the girl in front of the head chief and the prophet who was searching for her. Certain that the girl he was talking about was the one he was looking for, the prophet made his way to Kawela and saw the rainbow over Hawanui. That night, he reached Kaamola, the nearby land, and went to rest, as he had traveled a long way and was tired.
Meanwhile Waka, again warned in a dream, obtained a canoe and sailed across the channel to Lanai, landing at Maunalei. Three days of fog and rain followed, and on the fourth the prophet saw the rainbow over Maunalei. It did not remain there, however. Ten days later he discerned something peculiar on the high peak of Haleakala, on the island of Maui. He proceeded thither, but found nothing there but fog and rain.
Meanwhile, Waka, once again warned in a dream, got a canoe and sailed across the channel to Lanai, landing at Maunalei. Three days of fog and rain followed, and on the fourth day, the prophet saw a rainbow over Maunalei. However, it didn’t stay there. Ten days later, he noticed something strange on the high peak of Haleakala, on the island of Maui. He went there, but found nothing but fog and rain.
He next journeyed to Kauwiki, a hill near Hana, and there [459]erected a small heiau, or temple, for the worship of his patron deity. After the dedication, seeing nothing on Hawaii, and receiving no inspiration, he remained for some time at Kauwiki.
He then traveled to Kauwiki, a hill near Hana, and there [__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]built a small heiau, or temple, to worship his patron deity. After the dedication, he didn't see anything on Hawaii and felt uninspired, so he stayed at Kauwiki for a while.
At length, in the early days of the seventh month of the year, he saw faintly with the rising of the sun a rainbow on the windward side of Hawaii. At sunset on the third day of the next month he entered his heiau and prayed fervently, and there appeared before him the wraiths of Waka and Laieikawai. His patron god then informed him that the persons whose shadows he had seen were living in the forest of Puna, in a house thatched with the yellow feathers of the oo.
At last, in the early days of July, he faintly saw a rainbow on the windward side of Hawaii with the rising sun. At sunset on the third day of the following month, he entered his heiau and prayed passionately, and the spirits of Waka and Laieikawai appeared before him. His patron god then told him that the people whose shadows he had seen were living in the forest of Puna, in a house with a thatched roof made from the yellow feathers of the oo.
With this information the prophet set sail for Mahukona, on the island of Hawaii. There he prayed in the temple of Pahauna, and was directed to Waipio, where he offered sacrifices in the famous heiau of Paakalana. He proceeded thence to Kaiwilahilahi, near Laupahoehoe, where he remained for some years, unable to obtain any further information of the persons of whom he was in search.
With this information, the prophet sailed to Mahukona on the island of Hawaii. There, he prayed in the temple of Pahauna and was guided to Waipio, where he made sacrifices at the famous heiau of Paakalana. He then went on to Kaiwilahilahi, near Laupahoehoe, where he stayed for several years, unable to find any more information about the people he was looking for.
II.
It was during the sojourn of Hulumaniani, the prophet, at Kaiwilahilahi, that Kauakahialii, king of Kauai, with his queen, Kailikelauokekoa, returned from a wedding tour of the group. A great assemblage of chiefs and commoners had met to welcome them home with music, dancing and other festivities.
It was during the stay of Hulumaniani, the prophet, at Kaiwilahilahi, that Kauakahialii, king of Kauai, and his queen, Kailikelauokekoa, came back from a wedding tour of the islands. A large gathering of chiefs and commoners had gathered to welcome them home with music, dancing, and other celebrations.
In relating his adventures the king referred to a meeting with the mysterious princess of Paliuli, whose beauty, he declared, was something more than human. The meeting occurred at Keaau, in Puna. The kahu of the king first met the princess and her companion, and, when requested by him to favor his royal master with a visit, the princess informed him that she might possibly comply with his request the night following. “If I come,” she said, “I will give you warning.”
In sharing his adventures, the king talked about a meeting with the mysterious princess of Paliuli, whose beauty, he claimed, was beyond human. The meeting took place in Keaau, in Puna. The kahu of the king first met the princess and her companion, and when he asked her to visit his royal master, the princess told him that she might be able to fulfill his request the following night. “If I come,” she said, “I'll let you know.”
“Now, listen and heed,” she continued. “If you hear the voice of the ao I am not in its notes, and when you hear the caw of the alala I am not in its voice. When the notes of the elepaio are heard I am getting ready to descend. When you hear the song of the apapane I shall have come out of my house. Listen, [460]then, and if you hear the iiwipolena singing I am outside of your house. Come forth and meet me.”
“Now, listen up,” she continued. “If you hear the voice of the ao, I’m not in those notes, and when you hear the caw of the alala, I’m not in that call either. When you hear the notes of the elepaio, I’m getting ready to come down. When you hear the song of the apapane, I will have come out of my house. So, listen, [__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__] and if you hear the iiwipolena singing, I’m outside your house. Come out and meet me.”
And so it came to pass. In the kihi, or first watch of the evening, resounded the cry of the ao, in the second watch the caw of the alala, at midnight the chirruping of the elepaio, in the pili of the morning the song of the apapane, and at daybreak the voice of the iiwipolena. Then a shadow fell on the door, “and we were enveloped,” said the king, “in a thick fog, and when it cleared away the princess was seen in her glorious beauty, borne on the wings of birds.” The name of the divine being, he said, was Laieikawai.
And so it happened. In the kihi, or first watch of the evening, the cry of the ao echoed, in the second watch the caw of the alala, at midnight the chirping of the elepaio, in the pili of the morning the song of the apapane, and at daybreak the voice of the iiwipolena. Then a shadow fell on the door, “and we were surrounded,” said the king, “in a thick fog, and when it cleared away the princess appeared in her radiant beauty, carried on the wings of birds.” The name of the divine being, he said, was Laieikawai.
Among the chiefs who listened to this story of the king was Aiwohikupua, chief of Wailua, who was of foreign birth. He had made a vow that he would not marry a Hawaiian woman, and, expressing the opinion that the princess described by the king was a daughter of other lands, he resolved to make her his wife.
Among the chiefs who listened to this story of the king was Aiwohikupua, chief of Wailua, who was originally from another place. He had promised himself that he wouldn’t marry a Hawaiian woman, and believing that the princess the king described was from a foreign land, he decided to make her his wife.
To this end he sought out the late kahu of the king and made him his confidant and chief officer. They talked of little else than Laieikawai. He had a vision of her in a dream, and drank awa successively for many days, in the hope of inspiring a repetition of the vision. He chanted a mele in praise of the unknown princess, renewed his resolution to possess her, and then prepared to go to Hawaii in search of her.
To achieve this, he reached out to the recently deceased kahu of the king and made him his trusted advisor and chief officer. They discussed almost nothing but Laieikawai. He had a vision of her in a dream and drank awa for several days in hopes of having the vision again. He composed a mele praising the unknown princess, reaffirmed his determination to win her over, and then got ready to travel to Hawaii to find her.
He fitted out two double canoes, with sixteen rowers and two steersmen, and, when the augurs and soothsayers declared the omens favorable, on the rising of Sirius he set sail for Hawaii. On his way thither he stopped at many places, and at length arrived in the harbor of Haneoo, in the district of Hana, Maui.
He equipped two double canoes, with sixteen rowers and two steersmen, and when the augurs and soothsayers said the signs were good, he set sail for Hawaii at the rising of Sirius. On the way, he stopped at several places and finally reached the harbor of Haneoo, in the district of Hana, Maui.
A number of surf-riders were amusing themselves on the beach, among them Hinaikamalama, the famous chiefess of Hana. Aiwohikupua was smitten with her charms, and accepted her invitation to join the bathing party in their sports. In turn she became enamored of him, and invited him to visit her house and play konane—a game resembling draughts—with her.
A group of surfers were having fun on the beach, including Hinaikamalama, the well-known chiefess of Hana. Aiwohikupua was captivated by her beauty and accepted her invitation to join the bathing party in their activities. In return, she developed feelings for him and invited him to her house to play konane—a game similar to checkers—with her.
When about to begin the game she asked him what he was willing to wager on his success, and he pointed to one of his double canoes. She declined the condition, and proposed, instead, that they should stake their persons. To this he agreed, and, playing, lost the game. To avoid paying the forfeit he declared [461]that he had made a vow to give himself in love to no woman until after he had made the circuit of the island of Hawaii, and admonished her to remain faithful to him while he was absent.
When she was about to start the game, she asked him what he wanted to bet on his success, and he pointed to one of his double canoes. She refused that option and instead suggested that they should wager their own freedom. He agreed, and while playing, he lost the game. To avoid facing the consequences, he claimed that he had vowed not to fall in love with any woman until he had traveled all around the island of Hawaii, and he urged her to stay faithful to him during his absence.
The chief and his party left Haneoo, and the next day arrived at Kauhola, in the district of Kohala, Hawaii, where a boxing-match was in progress. Aiwohikupua was challenged to a contest by Ihuanu, the champion of Kohala. The challenge was accepted, and in the struggle Ihuanu was killed.
The chief and his group left Haneoo, and the next day they arrived at Kauhola, in the Kohala district of Hawaii, where a boxing match was taking place. Aiwohikupua was challenged to a fight by Ihuanu, the champion of Kohala. He accepted the challenge, and in the fight, Ihuanu was killed.
They next landed at Paauhau, in Hamakua, to witness another boxing-match. The local champion was Haunaka. He was invited to a contest with Aiwohikupua, but, learning something of the prowess of the chief, he declined the conflict. They then sailed for Laupahoehoe, where the prophet Hulumaniani was still residing.
They next arrived at Paauhau, in Hamakua, to see another boxing match. The local champion was Haunaka. He was invited to compete against Aiwohikupua, but after hearing about the chief’s skills, he decided not to fight. They then sailed to Laupahoehoe, where the prophet Hulumaniani was still living.
That evening the prophet was watching the clouds for omens, and discerned in them that a chief’s double canoe was approaching, bearing nineteen men. The next morning he saw a mist on the sea, and prepared his black pig, white fowl and bunch of awa. Then followed peals of thunder, and Aiwohikupua’s canoes came in sight, with the puloulou insignia of a chief; whereupon the prophet offered sacrifices, and prayed for the chief and himself.
That evening, the prophet was observing the clouds for signs and noticed that a chief’s double canoe was coming, carrying nineteen men. The next morning, he saw a haze over the sea and got ready with his black pig, white chicken, and a bunch of awa. Then there were loud claps of thunder, and Aiwohikupua’s canoes appeared, displaying the puloulou insignia of a chief; so the prophet made sacrifices and prayed for both the chief and himself.
Landing, the chief and prophet embraced, and spent the night together, but Aiwohikupua did not disclose the real object of his voyage. They then sailed for Makahanaloa, from which place could be seen the rainbow over Paliuli. They landed at Keaau, where the people were surf-bathing.
Landing, the chief and prophet embraced and spent the night together, but Aiwohikupua didn’t reveal the true purpose of his journey. They then sailed for Makahanaloa, from where they could see the rainbow over Paliuli. They landed at Keaau, where people were enjoying the surf.
In the evening Aiwohikupua left his men with the canoes, taking with him only his confidant, the kahu, carrying a rich feather mantle as a present to the lady of Paliuli. After a long and wearisome journey through the thick jungle they heard the crowing of a cock, and soon after came to a clearing, at the farther end of which was the house of Laieikawai, all covered with the choice yellow feathers of the oo.
In the evening, Aiwohikupua left his men with the canoes, taking only his trusted companion, the kahu, who was carrying a beautiful feather cloak as a gift for the lady of Paliuli. After a long and exhausting trek through the dense jungle, they heard a rooster crow, and shortly after, they arrived at a clearing. At the far end was the house of Laieikawai, completely covered in the prized yellow feathers of the oo.
Aiwohikupua was amazed and humiliated. Said he: “I brought my royal feather cloak as a present to her, and behold! it is not equal to the thatch of her house!” Then turning to his kahu, he said: “I will stay here no longer. Let us return.”
Aiwohikupua was stunned and embarrassed. He said, “I brought my royal feather cloak as a gift for her, and look! It can't compare to the roof of her house!” Then, turning to his kahu, he said, “I won't stay here any longer. Let’s go back.”
In spite of the remonstrances of his companion, Aiwohikupua returned to Keaau without seeing Laieikawai, and sailed at once [462]for Kauai. They did not stop to visit the prophet at Laulapahoehoe. When off the coast of Hamakua they saw a woman of extraordinary beauty reclining on a cliff by the shore. She was graceful in every movement, and wore a snow-white mantle.
In spite of his friend’s objections, Aiwohikupua went back to Keaau without meeting Laieikawai and immediately set sail for Kauai. They skipped the visit to the prophet at Laulapahoehoe. When they were off the coast of Hamakua, they spotted a woman with stunning beauty lounging on a cliff by the shore. She moved gracefully and wore a pure white cloak.
They landed and made her acquaintance. Her name was Poliahu, of Mauna Kea. As usual, the chief began to talk to her at once of love. In reply she asked him if he had not sworn by the names of his gods not to marry a woman born on the Hawaiian group, and whether he had not engaged himself to Hinaikamalama, of Hana. She informed him that, like himself, she too was of kupua descent and possessed supernatural powers. She promised to marry him, however, so soon as he could be released from his oath and would return to claim her. She accompanied them as far as Kohala, where she exchanged mantles with the chief in pledge of their betrothal, and then took her departure.
They arrived and met her. Her name was Poliahu, from Mauna Kea. As usual, the chief immediately started talking to her about love. In response, she asked him if he hadn't sworn by the names of his gods not to marry a woman from the Hawaiian islands, and whether he wasn't already engaged to Hinaikamalama, from Hana. She informed him that, like him, she was also of kupua descent and had supernatural powers. However, she promised to marry him as soon as he could be released from his oath and returned to claim her. She accompanied them as far as Kohala, where she exchanged cloaks with the chief as a sign of their engagement, and then she left.
Crossing the channel to Maui, the chief put into the harbor of Haneoo, but did not land. Hinaikamalama hailed him from the shore, and demanded the fulfilment of his promise; but he beguiled her by declaring that he had not yet completed the circuit of Hawaii, having sailed only along the windward side of it, and that bad news from home compelled his immediate return to Kauai.
Crossing the channel to Maui, the chief arrived at the harbor of Haneoo but didn’t go ashore. Hinaikamalama called out to him from the beach and insisted that he keep his promise; however, he tricked her by saying he hadn’t finished going around Hawaii, having only sailed along the windward side, and that urgent news from home forced him to return to Kauai right away.
She believed him and was pacified. In the middle of the Oahu channel he enjoined secrecy on his crew, and then hastened to Kauai, fully determined to return to Hawaii and secure an audience with the princess of Paliuli.
She believed him and felt reassured. In the middle of the Oahu channel, he urged his crew to keep quiet, and then quickly made his way to Kauai, fully intent on going back to Hawaii to meet with the princess of Paliuli.
Reaching home, he informed his five sisters of what he had seen at Paliuli, and they agreed to accompany him to Hawaii and assist him in his suit with the beautiful Laieikawai.
Reaching home, he told his five sisters about what he had seen at Paliuli, and they agreed to go with him to Hawaii and help him win over the beautiful Laieikawai.
The next day Aiwohikupua selected a fresh crew of fourteen rowers and two pilots, who, with his sisters and confidential counselor, made a party of twenty-three in all, and set sail for Hawaii. They were detained a month at Honuaula, Maui, by stormy weather, but finally reached Kaelehuluhulu, in the district of Kona, Hawaii. Poliahu saw their canoes there, and was disappointed when they left for Hilo.
The next day, Aiwohikupua picked a new crew of fourteen rowers and two pilots, who, along with his sisters and trusted advisor, made a total of twenty-three people and set sail for Hawaii. They were held up for a month at Honuaula, Maui, because of bad weather, but eventually arrived at Kaelehuluhulu, in the Kona district of Hawaii. Poliahu saw their canoes there and felt disappointed when they left for Hilo.
They arrived at Keaau, in Puna, about the middle of the day, and Aiwohikupua made his arrangements and started inland at once with his five sisters and trusted kahu. At midnight the party reached Paliuli. [463]
They got to Keaau in Puna around midday, and Aiwohikupua made his plans and set off inland right away with his five sisters and trusted kahu. By midnight, the group arrived at Paliuli. [__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]
The chief stationed his eldest sister, Maile-haiwale, at the door of Laieikawai. She sent forth the delicate fragrance of the plant of her name, which awoke Laieikawai.
The chief positioned his oldest sister, Maile-haiwale, at the entrance of Laieikawai. She released the sweet scent of the plant she was named after, which roused Laieikawai.
“Waka! Waka!” exclaimed the princess.
“Waka! Waka!” said the princess.
“Here!” answered Waka. “What wakes you in the night?”
“Here!” Waka replied. “What wakes you up at night?”
“A fragrance, a strange, cool fragrance, which goes to my heart,” returned the girl.
“A scent, a strange, cool scent that reaches my heart,” the girl replied.
“It is not a strange fragrance,” said Waka. “It is certainly Maile-haiwale, the sweet-scented sister of Aiwohikupua, who has come to ask you to be his wife.”
“It’s not a strange smell,” Waka said. “It’s definitely Maile-haiwale, the sweet-scented sister of Aiwohikupua, who has come to ask you to be his wife.”
“Pshaw! I will not marry him,” was the petulant response of Laieikawai.
“Ugh! I’m not marrying him,” was Laieikawai’s sulky reply.
Aiwohikupua heard her refusal, and was so thoroughly disheartened that he proposed to abandon his sisters and return to Keaau, but his trusty kahu intervened and advised another trial. So the next in age, Maile-kaluhea, took a position by the door. Her fragrance was different and more penetrating; but nearly the same exchange of words as before occurred within the house.
Aiwohikupua heard her refusal and was so completely disheartened that he considered leaving his sisters and going back to Keaau, but his loyal kahu stepped in and suggested trying one more time. So the next oldest, Maile-kaluhea, stood by the door. Her scent was different and stronger, but nearly the same conversation as before took place inside the house.
The chief again proposed to leave, but the kahu insisted on trying the powers of Maile-laulii; but no better success followed.
The chief suggested leaving again, but the kahu insisted on testing the powers of Maile-laulii; however, they didn’t have any better luck.
“Try again,” said the counselor, “and if they all fail I myself will undertake to persuade her.”
“Try again,” said the counselor, “and if they all fail, I’ll take it upon myself to convince her.”
So Maile-pakaha was sent to the door, but with no better result, and, speaking loudly enough to be heard without, Laieikawai said: “Whoever may come, I will not consent to marry Aiwohikupua.”
So Maile-pakaha was sent to the door, but with no better result, and, speaking loudly enough to be heard outside, Laieikawai said: “Whoever comes, I will not agree to marry Aiwohikupua.”
Hearing this, and regarding any further attempt as useless, Aiwohikupua ordered his sisters to remain behind in the woods as a punishment for their failure, and started on his return to the coast. The youngest sister, whose powers had not been tried, called after him and touched his heart. He offered to take her and leave the rest behind, but she would not consent to abandon her sisters. One of them chanted a mele to soften his heart, but he remained obdurate.
Hearing this and thinking any further effort was pointless, Aiwohikupua told his sisters to stay behind in the woods as punishment for their failure and began to head back to the coast. The youngest sister, whose abilities had not been tested, called out to him and touched his heart. He offered to take her and leave the others behind, but she refused to abandon her sisters. One of them sang a mele to soften his heart, but he stayed stubborn.
He proceeded to the coast, the sisters following as best they could, and when they saw him and his attendants seated in the canoes and ready for departure, Maile-kaluhea chanted a touching mele; but he heeded it not and put out to sea.
He headed to the coast, with the sisters following as best as they could, and when they saw him and his companions sitting in the canoes and prepared to leave, Maile-kaluhea sang a heartfelt mele; but he ignored it and set out to sea.
The sisters traveled by land and met Aiwohikupua as he was about to go ashore at Punahoa, but he avoided them by again [464]setting sail. They then traveled overland to Honolii, where their brother had stopped for supplies. They watched during the night, and when Aiwohikupua was about to embark in the morning his sisters drew near, and Kahalaomapuana chanted a pathetic song, and with so great effect that her brother invited her into his canoe, placed her on his knee and wept over her.
The sisters traveled by land and encountered Aiwohikupua just as he was about to go ashore at Punahoa, but he avoided them by setting sail again. They then traveled overland to Honolii, where their brother had paused for supplies. They watched throughout the night, and in the morning, as Aiwohikupua was preparing to embark, his sisters approached him. Kahalaomapuana sang a sorrowful song so movingly that her brother invited her into his canoe, placed her on his knee, and cried over her.
Ordering his rowers to pull out to sea with his youngest sister, whom he still held in his embrace, she begged him to return for the others, and when he refused she chanted a farewell song, leaped overboard and swam ashore.
Ordering his rowers to head out to sea with his youngest sister, whom he was still holding close, she pleaded with him to come back for the others. When he refused, she sang a farewell song, jumped overboard, and swam to shore.
The sisters then decided to return to Paliuli, scarcely knowing where else to go on the island of Hawaii, where they were strangers. Arriving there, they found shelter in a clump of hala trees near the house of Laieikawai, the doors of which were kept continually closed. Failing to attract the attention of the inmates, the sisters concluded to keep a fire burning at night and to sing by turns—Maile-haiwale the first night, Maile-kaluhea the second, and so on for four nights; but no notice was taken of them.
The sisters decided to go back to Paliuli, not really knowing where else to go on the island of Hawaii, where they were unfamiliar. When they got there, they found shelter among a group of hala trees near Laieikawai's house, which had its doors kept shut all the time. After failing to get the attention of the people inside, the sisters decided to keep a fire going at night and take turns singing—Maile-haiwale the first night, Maile-kaluhea the second, and so on for four nights; but nobody acknowledged them.
On the fifth night it was the turn of the youngest sister to sing. She lighted the fire, made a musical instrument of a ti leaf and played upon it. She did this in the evening and morning watches for two nights. Laieikawai had never heard the instrument before, and it delighted her. So she sent her kahu, a hunchback, to first spy out the musician, and then bring before her the person who was capable of making such music.
On the fifth night, it was the youngest sister's turn to sing. She lit the fire, made a musical instrument from a ti leaf, and played it. She did this during the evening and morning watches for two nights. Laieikawai had never heard the instrument before, and it thrilled her. So she sent her kahu, a hunchback, to first find the musician and then bring her the person who could make such music.
Following the kahu, Kahalaomapuana found Laieikawai resting on the wings of birds, with two iiwipolenas perched upon her shoulders. She was kindly received, played before her, and told her of her sisters. Touched by the recital, Laieikawai ordered a house to be built for them, and formally adopted them as her companions and guards. They were fed by birds and lived as in an enchanted bower.
Following the kahu, Kahalaomapuana found Laieikawai resting on the wings of birds, with two iiwipolenas perched on her shoulders. She was welcomed warmly, entertained, and informed about her sisters. Moved by the story, Laieikawai ordered a house to be built for them and officially adopted them as her companions and protectors. They were nourished by birds and lived as if in an enchanted garden.
On the return to Kauai of Aiwohikupua from his second voyage he had a great feast prepared, and all the guests were made drunk on awa. Under the influence of the liquor Aiwohikupua divulged the secret of his mission to Hawaii, and told all about his unsuccessful efforts in seeking to secure an interview with the princess of Paliuli.
On Aiwohikupua's return to Kauai from his second voyage, he organized a big feast and got all the guests drunk on awa. Under the influence of the drink, Aiwohikupua revealed the secret of his mission to Hawaii and shared everything about his failed attempts to get an audience with the princess of Paliuli.
Hauailiki, a handsome young chief of Mana, rose to his feet and boasted that he could achieve without difficulty what Aiwohikupua [465]had failed to accomplish; whereupon the latter offered to furnish him with a canoe and men to sail it if he would undertake to make good his boast, and each made a wager of his lands on the result.
Hauailiki, a good-looking young chief of Mana, stood up and claimed that he could easily do what Aiwohikupua [__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]had not managed to achieve; to which Aiwohikupua responded by offering to provide him with a canoe and crew to sail it if he would back up his boast, and they each bet their lands on the outcome.
Hauailiki set sail for Hawaii the next day, and on his arrival at Keaau was greatly admired for his manly beauty. The following morning a dense fog enveloped the place, and when it cleared away he saw seven women sitting by the seaside, one of whom was Laieikawai.
Hauailiki set off for Hawaii the next day, and when he arrived at Keaau, he was greatly admired for his handsome looks. The next morning, a thick fog covered the area, and when it finally lifted, he saw seven women sitting by the shore, one of whom was Laieikawai.
To attract her attention Hauailiki for four successive days appeared before her in the surf, performing many difficult feats of swimming and diving, but she gave him no heed. On the fifth day he exhibited his skill in surf-swimming, and won applause from all but Laieikawai. He then showed himself as a surf-swimmer without a board. His skill was then recognized by Laieikawai, and she beckoned him to approach, and threw around his neck a lei lehua, or garland of lehua blossoms. Immediately the fog settled down, and when it cleared Laieikawai and her party had left for Paliuli.
To get her attention, Hauailiki spent four days in a row showing off in the surf, doing all kinds of challenging swimming and diving tricks, but she didn’t pay him any attention. On the fifth day, he demonstrated his surf-swimming skills and received cheers from everyone except Laieikawai. He then impressed everyone by surfing without a board. Laieikawai finally recognized his talent, signaled for him to come closer, and placed a lei lehua, or garland of lehua blossoms, around his neck. Suddenly, a fog rolled in, and when it lifted, Laieikawai and her group had moved on to Paliuli.
Hauailiki and his guide determined to follow the party at once, and, traveling all night, they reached Paliuli in the morning. Approaching the house, they were met by Maile-haiwale, the first sentinel, who ordered them to retire. But they passed her by force, as they did the second, third and fourth guards, until they met Kahalaomapuana near the door of the house, resting on the wings of birds. She ordered them back, threatening that the birds should pick their bones, and they returned in haste to Keaau.
Hauailiki and his guide decided to follow the group immediately, and after traveling all night, they arrived at Paliuli in the morning. As they approached the house, they were confronted by Maile-haiwale, the first guard, who told them to leave. However, they pushed past her and continued through the second, third, and fourth guards until they encountered Kahalaomapuana near the house's door, resting on the wings of birds. She commanded them to go back, threatening that the birds would pick their bones, and they quickly returned to Keaau.
Undecided what course to pursue, Hauailiki dreamed of meeting Laieikawai several nights in succession, and at last resolved to visit Paliuli again and without an attendant. Reaching the spot, he approached the house by a back path without encountering the sentinels, and found Kahalaomapuana asleep at the door. He pushed aside the feather curtain, entered the room, and found Laieikawai asleep, resting on the wings of birds. He awoke her, and she ordered him away. He pleaded with her and told her of his dreams, but she insisted upon his departure. Kahalaomapuana then came to the assistance of her mistress, and drove the importunate suitor back to Keaau.
Undecided about what path to take, Hauailiki dreamed of meeting Laieikawai several nights in a row, and finally decided to visit Paliuli again without anyone accompanying him. When he arrived, he approached the house using a back path to avoid the guards and found Kahalaomapuana sleeping at the door. He pushed aside the feather curtain, entered the room, and found Laieikawai asleep, resting on soft bird wings. He woke her up, but she told him to leave. He begged her and shared his dreams, but she insisted he go away. Kahalaomapuana then came to help her mistress and drove the persistent suitor back to Keaau.
Abandoning the undertaking as hopeless, Hauailiki returned [466]to Kauai. Arriving at Wailua, he was welcomed by a large gathering of chiefs, and when he had told his story Aiwohikupua generously forgave him his wager.
Abandoning the task as futile, Hauailiki returned [__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]to Kauai. When he arrived at Wailua, a large group of chiefs greeted him, and after he shared his story, Aiwohikupua graciously forgave him for his bet.
Rejoiced to learn that his sisters had become the attendants of Laieikawai, Aiwohikupua resolved to revisit Paliuli. He assembled a fleet of twenty double and thirty single canoes, forty peleleus for his attendants, and a triple canoe for himself and counselor, and set sail for Hawaii.
Rejoiced to learn that his sisters had become the attendants of Laieikawai, Aiwohikupua decided to go back to Paliuli. He gathered a fleet of twenty double canoes and thirty single canoes, forty peleleus for his attendants, and a triple canoe for himself and his counselor, and set sail for Hawaii.
Waka knew of the arrival of the fleet at Keaau, and admonished Laieikawai not to visit the coast. The sisters were put on guard, and Kahalaomapuana summoned to their defence their terrible patron god Kihanuilulumoku, a moo, or gigantic lizard.
Waka was aware of the fleet's arrival at Keaau and warned Laieikawai not to go to the coast. The sisters stayed alert, and Kahalaomapuana called upon their formidable patron god Kihanuilulumoku, a moo, or giant lizard, for protection.
The night following these preparations Aiwohikupua and his guide made their appearance at Paliuli. Five tabu sticks, covered with white kapa, had been set at intervals beyond the house; but the invaders disregarded them and pushed on, until they encountered Maile-haiwale, the first sentinel. She ordered them to retire, and sent a bird to summon the rest of her sisters. The youngest came, borne on the wings of birds, and drove her brother back, telling him that they were no longer sisters of his.
The night after these preparations, Aiwohikupua and his guide arrived at Paliuli. Five tabu sticks, wrapped in white kapa, were set up at intervals outside the house; however, the intruders ignored them and continued until they met Maile-haiwale, the first guard. She told them to leave and sent a bird to call her sisters. The youngest sister arrived, carried by birds, and pushed her brother back, telling him that they were no longer his sisters.
Aiwohikupua returned to Keaau, resolved to secure by force what he had been unable to effect by strategy. He therefore sent up to Paliuli a detachment of ten warriors, but they were promptly slain by the lizard god. After waiting for two days he sent another detachment of twenty warriors, with a competent officer, and all of them shared the same fate. He next sent forty men, and still other forties, until eight forties in all had perished.
Aiwohikupua went back to Keaau, determined to take by force what he couldn't achieve with strategy. He first sent a group of ten warriors to Paliuli, but they were quickly killed by the lizard god. After waiting two days, he sent another group of twenty warriors, led by a capable officer, and they met the same end. He then sent in forty men, and then more groups of forty, until a total of eight groups had been wiped out.
He next despatched his two swift messengers to inquire about the fate of his warriors. They met a bird-catcher above Olaa, who told them of the moo and his dreadful work. Presently they heard the roaring of the wind and the crash of falling trees, and the monster appeared in the path before them. They reassumed their bird forms, however, and escaped by flying.
He then sent his two speedy messengers to find out what happened to his warriors. They encountered a bird-catcher above Olaa, who told them about the moo and its terrifying actions. Soon, they heard the howling wind and the sound of trees crashing down, and the monster appeared in front of them. However, they transformed back into birds and managed to escape by flying away.
Aiwohikupua then summoned Kalahumoku, the man-eating dog from Kahiki, to kill the moo and bring to him Laieikawai; and with the dog he sent his two bird messengers, to bring him early tidings of the result.
Aiwohikupua then called upon Kalahumoku, the man-eating dog from Kahiki, to hunt down the moo and bring Laieikawai to him; along with the dog, he sent his two bird messengers to deliver early news of the outcome.
As the two monsters met, a column of fog rose and drifted toward the sea. This warned Aiwohikupua that the dog had been defeated. Late in the day the animal returned, badly [467]wounded and with ears and tail missing, and the whole party set sail for Kauai.
As the two monsters faced each other, a column of fog rose and floated toward the sea. This alerted Aiwohikupua that the dog had been defeated. Later in the day, the animal came back, severely wounded and missing its ears and tail, and the whole group set sail for Kauai.
Arriving home, Aiwohikupua thought of his engagement with the beautiful Poliahu, and began to perform certain expiatory rites to relieve himself of the oath he had taken not to marry a woman of the Hawaiian Islands. He then sent his two bird messengers to Poliahu, to inform her that he was preparing to fulfil his engagement.
Arriving home, Aiwohikupua thought about his engagement with the beautiful Poliahu and started to perform some rituals to free himself from the vow he had made not to marry a woman from the Hawaiian Islands. He then sent his two bird messengers to Poliahu to let her know that he was getting ready to honor his engagement.
By mistake the birds flew to Hana. They inquired for the betrothed of the Kauai chief, and were directed to Hinaikamalama. They informed her that three months were to be spent in preparation, and that in the fourth month, in the night of kulu, Aiwohikupua would come to claim his bride. These were the words they had been instructed to speak to Poliahu, but by mistake they were told to another, who joyously replied: “He remembers, then, the game of konane which we played together.”
By mistake, the birds flew to Hana. They asked about the Kauai chief’s betrothed and were directed to Hinaikamalama. They told her that three months were to be spent preparing, and in the fourth month, on the night of kulu, Aiwohikupua would come to claim his bride. These were the words they had been meant to share with Poliahu, but by mistake, they delivered them to someone else, who happily responded: “He remembers the game of konane that we played together.”
On the return of the bird messengers the blunder was discovered, and they were banished from the court. Then the koae, or tropic bird, was sent to Poliahu with the same message with which the others had been entrusted.
On the return of the bird messengers, the mistake was found out, and they were expelled from the court. Then the koae, or tropic bird, was sent to Poliahu with the same message the others had been given.
Aiwohikupua, relieved of his oath, waited until the 24th day of the third month, and then set sail in great state, with forty double and eighty single canoes, and twenty peleleus. On the 11th day of the fourth month he arrived at Kawaihae, and despatched the koae to inform Poliahu, who named Waiulaula as the place for the marriage.
Aiwohikupua, freed from his oath, waited until the 24th day of the third month, and then set sail in grand style, with forty double canoes and eighty single canoes, along with twenty peleleus. On the 11th day of the fourth month, he arrived at Kawaihae and sent the koae to inform Poliahu, who designated Waiulaula as the location for the wedding.
To give brilliancy to the ceremony Aiwohikupua dressed his petty chiefs, male and female, in feather cloaks, and many of his female attendants in fine mats. He wore the white mantle given to him by Poliahu, and a red feather helmet. His rowers were clad in fine red kapas. On the platform of the chief’s double canoe was raised an anu, covered with yellow cloaks, and above it stood the tabu puloulou. Around this canoe were ten others, carrying musicians skilled in playing the hula drum and other instruments.
To add brilliance to the ceremony, Aiwohikupua dressed his lesser chiefs, both men and women, in feather cloaks, and many of his female attendants in beautiful mats. He wore the white mantle given to him by Poliahu and a red feather helmet. His rowers were dressed in fine red kapas. On the platform of the chief’s double canoe was raised an anu, covered with yellow cloaks, and above it stood the tabu puloulou. Surrounding this canoe were ten others, carrying musicians skilled in playing the hula drum and other instruments.
On the day of kulu the three great mountains were covered with snow, which was the sign promised by Poliahu. On the arrival of Aiwohikupua and his party at Waiulaula they were met by Poliahu, Lilinoe, Waiau and Kahoupokane, the three latter being mountain goddesses. The men suffered from cold [468]but on being apprised of the fact Poliahu and her friends removed their snow mantles, causing the snow on the mountains to retire to its usual limits.
On the day of kulu, the three great mountains were blanketed in snow, which was the signal promised by Poliahu. When Aiwohikupua and his group arrived at Waiulaula, they were greeted by Poliahu, Lilinoe, Waiau, and Kahoupokane, the last three being mountain goddesses. The men were cold [__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__], but when Poliahu and her friends learned about it, they took off their snow cloaks, making the snow on the mountains retreat to its usual boundaries.
Aiwohikupua and Poliahu were then made man and wife. Feasting and music followed, and the happy pair returned together to Kauai, making their residence above Honopuwai.
Aiwohikupua and Poliahu were then married. There was feasting and music, and the happy couple returned together to Kauai, settling above Honopuwai.
In revenge for their dismissal the banished bird messengers informed Hinaikamalama of the marriage of her betrothed. Angered at his perfidy, she persuaded her parents to make a visit with her to Kauai.
In retaliation for their dismissal, the exiled bird messengers told Hinaikamalama about her fiancé's marriage. Furious at his betrayal, she convinced her parents to take a trip with her to Kauai.
There was a gathering of chiefs at Mana, Kauai, to celebrate the nuptials of Hauailiki and Makaweli. The night was spent in games, dancing and other pastimes. A game of kilu was in progress. At midnight Hinaikamalama entered the kilu shed and sat down among the circle of players. Observing her, Hauailiki requested the mea ume (drawer) to tell Aiwohikupua to stop the hula kaeke and take part in the game of kilu, in order to enable him to make her his prize. Accordingly, when Hauailiki won at the game, the mea ume went around the circle and threw the maile wreath over him. The wreath was then removed and placed over the shoulders of Hinaikamalama. She rose to her feet and requested permission to speak. She asked in whose honor the festival was being given, and, on being informed of the occasion, requested Hauailiki to delay the fulfilment of the ume, and then proceeded to tell her story of the faithlessness of Aiwohikupua.
There was a gathering of chiefs at Mana, Kauai, to celebrate the wedding of Hauailiki and Makaweli. The night was filled with games, dancing, and other fun activities. A game of kilu was currently happening. At midnight, Hinaikamalama entered the kilu shed and sat down among the circle of players. Noticing her, Hauailiki asked the mea ume (drawer) to tell Aiwohikupua to stop the hula kaeke and join the game of kilu, so he could win her as a prize. As Hauailiki won the game, the mea ume went around the circle and placed the maile wreath over him. The wreath was then taken off and put over Hinaikamalama's shoulders. She stood up and asked for permission to speak. She asked in whose honor the festival was being held, and after being told about the occasion, she asked Hauailiki to postpone the fulfillment of the ume and then began to tell her story of Aiwohikupua's betrayal.
The story created a great sensation, and the conduct of Aiwohikupua was universally condemned. Poliahu was enraged and returned to Mauna Kea, and the chief agreed to fulfil his engagement with Hinaikamalama. The night of their marriage Poliahu sent the chill of her snow mantle upon her rival, and she was benumbed with cold. Her teeth chattered, and it was with difficulty that she could be kept from freezing.
The story caused a huge stir, and everyone looked down on Aiwohikupua's actions. Poliahu was furious and went back to Mauna Kea, while the chief decided to go ahead with his commitment to Hinaikamalama. On the night of their wedding, Poliahu unleashed the icy grip of her snow cloak on her rival, leaving her shivering cold. Her teeth were chattering, and it was hard to keep her from freezing.
A second time, when she and Aiwohikupua came together, an intense chill came over her. She was frightened, and inquired the cause. The chief answered: “The cold is sent by your rival. Betake you at once to a fire, that you may not perish.”
A second time, when she and Aiwohikupua met, a strong chill swept over her. She was scared and asked what was happening. The chief replied, “The cold is sent by your rival. You should immediately go to a fire so you don't freeze.”
The next day at noon they met, as had been previously arranged. Poliahu put on her sun mantle, and a scorching heat almost consumed her rival. Again they met, but were unable to [469]remain together, and Hinaikamalama unceremoniously left Kauai, without even touching noses with Aiwohikupua.
The next day at noon they met, as had been previously arranged. Poliahu put on her sun mantle, and a scorching heat nearly overwhelmed her rival. Again they met, but were unable to [__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]stay together, and Hinaikamalama abruptly left Kauai, without even touching noses with Aiwohikupua.
Before she left for Maui, however, a kilu game was arranged at Puuapapai, and Hauailiki, still mindful of his success at Mana, endeavored to secure the fruits of his victory. But Hinaikamalama refused to yield, unless the victor would come to Hana in proper state and formally make her his wife.
Before she left for Maui, however, a kilu game was arranged at Puuapapai, and Hauailiki, still mindful of his success at Mana, tried to secure the rewards of his victory. But Hinaikamalama refused to give in unless the winner came to Hana properly and formally made her his wife.
During the game Poliahu and her companions appeared in glittering robes of snow and chilled the assemblage, and the next morning they returned to Mauna Kea, while Hinaikamalama set sail for Hana.
During the game, Poliahu and her friends showed up in sparkling robes of snow, bringing a chill to the crowd. The next morning, they went back to Mauna Kea, while Hinaikamalama headed out to Hana.
III.
The king and queen of Kauai both dying a short time after the events just before recorded, they left the sovereignty of the island to their son, Kekalukaluokewa. They also left in his charge a magical bamboo (ohe) called Kanikawi, and enjoined upon him a promise to seek out and marry Laieikawai, of whom many reports had reached Kauai.
The king and queen of Kauai both died shortly after the events mentioned earlier, leaving the island's sovereignty to their son, Kekalukaluokewa. They also entrusted him with a magical bamboo (*ohe*) named Kanikawi and made him promise to find and marry Laieikawai, about whom many stories had come to Kauai.
The new king ordered an immense fleet of canoes for his trip to Hawaii, and sailed in the month of Mahoemua, or August. At Makahanaloa he saw the rainbow over Keaau, and sailed thither. Waka foresaw his coming and advised Laieikawai to marry him and become the queen of a whole island.
The new king ordered a huge fleet of canoes for his trip to Hawaii and set sail in the month of Mahoemua, or August. At Makahanaloa, he saw the rainbow over Keaau and sailed there. Waka predicted his arrival and advised Laieikawai to marry him and become the queen of an entire island.
After waiting four days Laieikawai and her kahu, the hunchback, went down to Keaau, and watched the king and his two favorite companions sporting in the surf. They knew the king by his not carrying his own surf-board when he landed. She returned to Paliuli and informed Waka that she would accept him for a husband.
After waiting four days, Laieikawai and her kahu, the hunchback, went down to Keaau and watched the king and his two favorite companions having fun in the waves. They recognized the king by the fact that he didn’t carry his own surfboard when he arrived. She returned to Paliuli and told Waka that she would accept him as her husband.
Waka then arranged that Kekalukaluokewa should go at sunrise the next morning and play in the surf alone; that a dense fog should settle down, under cover of which Laieikawai would join him in the surf; that when the fog raised the two would be seen by all riding in together on the same roller, and then they were to touch noses. A fog would again envelop them, and then birds would bear the pair to Paliuli. She was forbidden to speak to any one after leaving the house.
Waka then planned for Kekalukaluokewa to go out to the beach at sunrise the next morning and play in the waves by himself; that a thick fog would roll in, under which Laieikawai would join him in the water; that when the fog cleared, everyone would see them riding in together on the same wave, and then they would touch noses. A fog would cover them again, and then birds would carry the two to Paliuli. She was not allowed to talk to anyone after leaving the house.
Now, it appears that Halaaniani, a young man of Puna, noted [470]for his debaucheries, had often seen Laieikawai at Keaau, and ardently longed to possess her. Learning that she was about to marry the king of Kauai, he implored his sister, Malio, to exert her magical powers in his behalf. She consented, and by her direction they both went to sleep, and when they awoke related to each other their dreams. She dreamed that she saw a bird building a nest and leaving it in the possession of another, which was a sure omen in favor of Halaaniani. Malio declared that her magic powers would prevail over those of Waka, and gave her brother minute instructions, which he strictly observed, as will appear.
Now, it seems that Halaaniani, a young man from Puna known for his wild lifestyle, had often seen Laieikawai at Keaau and deeply desired to have her. When he learned that she was about to marry the king of Kauai, he begged his sister, Malio, to use her magical abilities to help him. She agreed, and following her guidance, they both went to sleep. When they woke up, they shared their dreams with each other. She dreamt that she saw a bird building a nest and leaving it with another, which was a positive sign for Halaaniani. Malio claimed that her magical powers would triumph over those of Waka and gave her brother detailed instructions, which he followed closely, as will be shown.
They went to the beach and saw Kekalukaluokewa swimming alone in the surf. Soon the fog of Waka settled down on the land. A clap of thunder was heard as Laieikawai reached the surf. A second peal resounded, invoked by Malio. The fog lifted, and three persons instead of two were seen in the surf. This was noted with surprise on shore.
They went to the beach and saw Kekalukaluokewa swimming alone in the waves. Soon, the fog of Waka settled over the land. A clap of thunder echoed as Laieikawai reached the water. A second rumble followed, summoned by Malio. The fog lifted, revealing three people instead of two in the surf. This was noticed with surprise from the shore.
When the first roller came the king said, “Let us go ashore,” and he rode in on the breaker with Laieikawai, while Halaaniani remained behind. At that moment the king and his companion touched noses. Three times they rode in on the waves, while Halaaniani, as directed by his sister, remained outside among the rollers.
When the first wave rolled in, the king said, “Let’s go ashore,” and he rode in on the wave with Laieikawai, while Halaaniani stayed behind. At that moment, the king and his companion touched noses. They rode in on the waves three times, while Halaaniani, following his sister's instructions, remained outside among the rollers.
The fourth time Laieikawai asked the king why he desired to repeat the sport so often. “Because,” said he, “I am not used to the short surf; I prefer to ride on the long rollers.” The fifth was to be the last time for the Kauai king and his promised bride.
The fourth time Laieikawai asked the king why he wanted to repeat the game so many times, he replied, “Because I’m not used to the short waves; I prefer riding the long ones.” The fifth time was going to be the last for the Kauai king and his promised bride.
As soon as the two started for the shore Halaaniani seized Laieikawai by the feet and held her back, so that the surf-board slipped from her grasp, and Kekalukaluokewa was borne to the shore without her. She complained of the loss of her surf-board, and it was restored to her.
As soon as the two set off for the shore, Halaaniani grabbed Laieikawai by the feet and held her back, causing the surfboard to slip from her hands. Kekalukaluokewa was carried to the shore without her. She voiced her disappointment about losing her surfboard, and it was returned to her.
Halaaniani persuaded her to swim farther out to sea with him, telling her not to look back, as he would let her know when they reached his surf. After swimming for some time she remonstrated, but he induced her to continue on with him. At last he told her to look back.
Halaaniani convinced her to swim further out into the ocean with him, telling her not to look back, as he would signal her when they reached his waves. After swimming for a while, she protested, but he encouraged her to keep going with him. Finally, he told her to look back.
“Why,” said she, in amazement, “the land is out of sight, and Kumukahi, the sea-god, has come to stir the waves!” [471]
“Why,” she exclaimed, amazed, “the land is gone, and Kumukahi, the sea-god, has come to stir up the waves!” [__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]
“This is the surf of which I told you,” he replied; “we will wait and go in on the third roller. Do not in any case let go of your surf-board.”
“This is the surf I told you about,” he said; “we’ll wait and go in on the third wave. Whatever you do, don’t let go of your surfboard.”
Then he prayed to his patron deity, and the breakers began to rise. As the third came thundering on, he exclaimed, “Pae kaua!” and, mounting the roller, they started for the shore. Laieikawai was in the overhanging arch of the wave, and, looking up, saw Halaaniani poised with great skill on the crest. At that moment she began to yield to the seductive fascination of Halaaniani.
Then he prayed to his patron deity, and the waves started to grow. As the third one crashed down, he shouted, “Pae kaua!” and, riding the wave, they headed for the shore. Laieikawai was in the arch of the wave, and, looking up, saw Halaaniani skillfully positioned on the crest. At that moment, she began to feel drawn to the captivating charm of Halaaniani.
As they came in, Waka supposed her companion to be Kekalukaluokewa, and she sent down the birds in the fog; and when it cleared away Laieikawai and Halaaniani were occupants of the feather-house at Paliuli, where their union was consummated.
As they arrived, Waka thought her companion was Kekalukaluokewa, so she let the birds fly down into the fog; and when the fog cleared, Laieikawai and Halaaniani were in the feather-house at Paliuli, where their union was completed.
Waka wondered why her granddaughter did not come to her that night or the next day, as had been promised, and the day following she went to the house to learn if anything serious had happened. Laieikawai and her husband were sleeping soundly. Waka was enraged, for the man was not the one she had selected.
Waka was confused about why her granddaughter hadn't come to see her that night or the next day, as promised, so the following day she went to their house to find out if something serious had happened. Laieikawai and her husband were deep asleep. Waka was furious because the man was not the one she had chosen.
Waking her granddaughter and pointing to the man, she exclaimed, “Who is this?”
Waking her granddaughter and pointing to the man, she exclaimed, “Who is this?”
“Kekalukaluokewa,” was the answer.
“Kekalukaluokewa” was the answer.
“No,” returned Waka; “this is Halaaniani, the brother of Malio!”
“No,” Waka replied; “this is Halaaniani, Malio’s brother!”
Angered at the deception, Waka declared that she would deprive Laieikawai of her powers and privileges, and desired never to behold her face again.
Angry at the betrayal, Waka announced that she would take away Laieikawai's powers and privileges and declared that she never wanted to see her face again.
Abandoning Laieikawai, Waka resolved to assume the charge of her twin-sister, Laielohelohe, and wed her to the king of Kauai. She had been left, it will be remembered, with the priest of Kukaniloko, on the island of Oahu. To this end Waka had a new house erected, and, borrowing a double canoe from Kekalukaluokewa, sailed at once for Oahu.
Abandoning Laieikawai, Waka decided to take care of her twin sister, Laielohelohe, and marry her off to the king of Kauai. As a reminder, Laielohelohe had been left with the priest of Kukaniloko on the island of Oahu. To accomplish this, Waka had a new house built and, borrowing a double canoe from Kekalukaluokewa, set sail right away for Oahu.
Arriving at Kukaniloko, she offered a pig as a propitiation, and explained her errand to Kapukaihaoa, who approved her plans and delivered Laielohelohe into her charge.
Arriving at Kukaniloko, she offered a pig as a gift to appease the spirits and explained her purpose to Kapukaihaoa, who approved her plans and entrusted Laielohelohe to her care.
After an absence of thirty-three days Waka returned to Keaau with the sister of Laieikawai. At her command the fog gathered, and they were secretly borne by birds to their new [472]house at Paliuli. Within three days she had a consultation with Kekalukaluokewa in relation to his marriage with Laielohelohe. She directed him to build a large kilu shed, and there assemble the people of the district, that the ceremony might be celebrated with becoming pomp.
After being away for thirty-three days, Waka returned to Keaau with Laieikawai's sister. At her command, the fog rolled in, and they were secretly carried by birds to their new [__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]house in Paliuli. Within three days, she had a meeting with Kekalukaluokewa about his marriage to Laielohelohe. She instructed him to build a large kilu shed and gather the people from the area so they could celebrate the ceremony with proper grandeur.
Meanwhile, Halaaniani had seen Laielohelohe, and determined to secure her for himself. With this object he persuaded Laieikawai to go down to Keaau with him for a few days of sea-bathing, leaving her faithful attendants behind. Arriving there, he told her that he was about to visit his sister, Malio, and if he did not return in two days she might consider him dead.
Meanwhile, Halaaniani had seen Laielohelohe and decided he wanted her for himself. To achieve this, he convinced Laieikawai to accompany him to Keaau for a few days of sea-bathing, leaving her loyal attendants behind. Once they arrived, he informed her that he was going to visit his sister, Malio, and if he didn’t return in two days, she should assume he was dead.
On the twelfth day the five sisters went down to Keaau and joined their mistress in wailing over her husband, whom she believed to be dead. Soon after they all had dreams of Halaaniani with another woman, and concluded to cease their mourning and return to Paliuli.
On the twelfth day, the five sisters went down to Keaau and joined their mistress in mourning for her husband, whom she thought was dead. Shortly after, they all had dreams of Halaaniani with another woman and decided to stop their mourning and go back to Paliuli.
Halaaniani visited his sister and induced her to assist him in his designs concerning Laielohelohe. She advised him to watch her for four days, and report his observations. He did so, and reported that her chief occupation was stringing lehua flowers; and he climbed a tree to observe her, while his sister sounded the pulai, or ti-leaf trumpet, five times, and again five times; but Laielohelohe did not take the slightest notice of it.
Halaaniani visited his sister and convinced her to help him with his plans regarding Laielohelohe. She suggested that he watch her for four days and report what he saw. He did that and reported that her main activity was stringing lehua flowers. He climbed a tree to observe her while his sister blew the pulai, or ti-leaf trumpet, five times, and then five more times; but Laielohelohe didn’t pay any attention at all.
The next morning they went there again, and he climbed a tree with a mass of lehua blossoms, and threw them down before her, while his sister played the hano, a sweet-toned wind instrument. This attracted the attention of Laielohelohe, and, without seeing the musician, she expressed her thanks.
The next morning they went back there, and he climbed a tree full of lehua blossoms, tossing them down in front of her while his sister played the hano, a sweet-sounding wind instrument. This captured the attention of Laielohelohe, and, without seeing the musician, she expressed her gratitude.
The morning following they repeated these manœuvres three times. Then Laielohelohe spoke and said: “If the musician is a woman, let us touch noses.”
The next morning, they went through these actions three times. Then Laielohelohe spoke and said, “If the musician is a woman, let's touch noses.”
With this Malio showed herself, and proposed that she should touch noses with her brother first. This angered her, and she ordered both of them to leave.
With this, Malio revealed herself and suggested that she should touch noses with her brother first. This made her angry, and she ordered both of them to leave.
Malio admitted her failure, but promised to resort to supernatural agencies, and win Laielohelohe for her brother on her wedding-day, as had been done with Laieikawai.
Malio acknowledged her failure but vowed to turn to supernatural forces to win Laielohelohe for her brother on her wedding day, just like it had been done with Laieikawai.
About this time Waka went down to communicate to Kekalukaluokewa her programme for the marriage ceremonies, fixed for the day following. He was to order the people and his court to [473]assemble at the appointed place, and at noon was to retire to his own house. She would then cover the land with a thick mist, and the singing of birds would be heard; first the quack of the alae and the chirruping of ewaewaiki, on hearing which he would step without the house. Next he would hear the singing of the oo, which would indicate that she was about to send to him Laielohelohe. Then would be heard the notes of the iiwipolena, and his bride would be near him. Lastly, he would hear the singing of the ka’huli, and they would meet apart from the assemblage, when thunder would peal, the earth would quake, and the people would tremble. Then the two would be borne upward by birds, the mist would clear away, and they would be seen resting upon the birds in glory.
Around this time, Waka went to tell Kekalukaluokewa his plans for the marriage ceremonies, scheduled for the next day. He was supposed to gather the people and his court to [__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__] meet at the designated place, and then at noon, he would return to his own house. She would then cover the land with a thick mist, and the sounds of birds would fill the air; first, he would hear the quacking of the alae and the chirping of the ewaewaiki, and at that moment, he would step outside. Next, he would hear the song of the oo, which would signal that she was about to send Laielohelohe to him. Then, he would hear the notes of the iiwipolena, indicating that his bride was close. Finally, he would hear the singing of the ka’huli, and they would meet away from the crowd, when thunder would crash, the earth would tremble, and everyone would feel the quake. Then the two would be lifted up by birds, the mist would disperse, and they would be seen resting on the birds in majesty.
Laieikawai and the five sisters were anxious to witness the coming display, of which they had heard, and Kahalaomapuana engaged the moo god, Kihanuilulumoku, to convey them thither at the appointed time.
Laieikawai and the five sisters were eager to see the upcoming event they had heard about, and Kahalaomapuana enlisted the moo god, Kihanuilulumoku, to take them there at the scheduled time.
Malio assured her brother again that her power would prevail over the efforts of Waka, and the preliminaries of the ceremony began. At noon Kekalukaluokewa, dressed as became the occasion, entered his house, as had been arranged. He heard the singing of birds, came forth in the fog, and awaited the coming of his bride. A clap of thunder followed, when the fog lifted, and Laielohelohe and Halaaniani were seen rising in the air on the wings of birds. Laieikawai and her attendants witnessed the ascension, sitting on the tongue of the great moo.
Malio reassured her brother once more that her power would overcome Waka’s efforts, and the ceremony's preliminaries began. At noon, Kekalukaluokewa, dressed appropriately for the occasion, entered his house as planned. He heard the birds singing, stepped out into the fog, and waited for his bride to arrive. A clap of thunder followed, the fog lifted, and Laielohelohe and Halaaniani were seen ascending into the air on the wings of birds. Laieikawai and her attendants watched the scene unfold, sitting on the tongue of the great moo.
Believing that he had again lost his bride, Kekalukaluokewa sought Waka, to chide her for the failure. “She is not his yet,” said Waka, “for she has obeyed my command not to speak to or touch noses with him”; and, to reassure the king, she offered to stake her life that all would yet be well.
Believing he had lost his bride again, Kekalukaluokewa went to Waka to blame her for the failure. “She’s not his yet,” Waka said, “because she followed my order not to talk to him or touch noses with him.” To reassure the king, she promised to bet her life that everything would be okay.
As they approached the place of assembly Waka again enveloped it in fog, and immediately sent Kekalukaluokewa upward in the air on the wings of birds. When the fog cleared away, Kekalukaluokewa and Laielohelohe were beheld sitting together, upborne by birds, and the multitude shouted, “Hoao na ’lii! e!” (“the chiefs are married!”)
As they got closer to the gathering spot, Waka wrapped it in fog again and quickly sent Kekalukaluokewa soaring into the air on bird wings. When the fog lifted, Kekalukaluokewa and Laielohelohe were seen sitting together, lifted by the birds, and the crowd shouted, "Hoao na ’lii! e!” (“the chiefs are married!”)
When Waka heard these acclamations she appeared before the congregation and denounced Laieikawai in the most opprobrious terms. The latter departed in shame and rage, and was [474]carried by the moo, together with the five sisters, to Olaa, where she took up her residence.
When Waka heard the cheers, she stepped in front of the crowd and called out Laieikawai in the harshest terms. Laieikawai left feeling humiliated and furious, and was [__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__] taken by the moo, along with her five sisters, to Olaa, where she settled down.
Halaaniani’s misdemeanors finally brought him into great contempt, and he was despised and condemned by all. The Kauai king returned home with his bride, taking with him Waka. On their way they stopped at Oahu to take on board the priest Kapukaihaoa, who became the prime minister of Kauai.
Halaaniani’s wrongdoings finally led to his disgrace, and he was hated and condemned by everyone. The king of Kauai returned home with his bride, bringing Waka along. On their journey, they paused at Oahu to pick up the priest Kapukaihaoa, who became the prime minister of Kauai.
IV.
The sisters of Aiwohikupua, chagrined at what had befallen their mistress, resolved to send Kahalaomapuana to Kealohilani, in a far-distant land, to bring their brother, Kaonohiokala, to marry Laieikawai, in order that she might triumph over Waka.
The sisters of Aiwohikupua, upset about what happened to their mistress, decided to send Kahalaomapuana to Kealohilani, in a distant land, to bring back their brother, Kaonohiokala, so he could marry Laieikawai, allowing her to prevail over Waka.
Accordingly, she started on her voyage, being carried by the gigantic moo god, Kihanuilulumoku. Meantime, Laieikawai and her train made a pleasure trip around Hawaii, first to Kau, then to Kona, and next to Kohala.
Accordingly, she began her journey, carried by the huge moo god, Kihanuilulumoku. In the meantime, Laieikawai and her entourage went on a fun trip around Hawaii, first to Kau, then to Kona, and finally to Kohala.
Becoming discouraged, the old prophet of Kauai had left Kaiwilahilahi, Hawaii, and started for his native island. Touching at Waimea, he saw the well-known rainbow over Kaiopae, a half-hour’s journey north of Kawaihae, and followed it to Moolau, and then to Puakea, in Kohala, where he finally met and conversed with Laieikawai.
Feeling discouraged, the old prophet of Kauai left Kaiwilahilahi, Hawaii, and headed for his home island. Stopping at Waimea, he saw the familiar rainbow over Kaiopae, a half-hour journey north of Kawaihae, and followed it to Moolau, then to Puakea in Kohala, where he finally met and talked with Laieikawai.
He procured a double canoe for the party, and they sailed together to Laie, Oahu, where he learned the history of Laieikawai. That night his guardian deity informed him in a dream that she was the person he had been seeking for so long, and directed him to take the party to Haena, Kauai. In the morning he offered a pig and fowl before her, and obtained her consent for him to become her guardian. They then sailed for Kauai, and settled at Honopuwaiakua.
He got a double canoe for the group, and they sailed together to Laie, Oahu, where he learned about the history of Laieikawai. That night, his guardian spirit told him in a dream that she was the person he had been searching for all along and instructed him to take the group to Haena, Kauai. In the morning, he offered a pig and a chicken before her and got her approval to become her guardian. They then sailed to Kauai and settled at Honopuwaiakua.
In one of his subsequent tours the prophet found, on arriving at Wailua, that all the virgin daughters of the petty chiefs and courtiers on Kauai had been collected there, in order that Aiwohikupua might select two new wives to take the places of Poliahu and Hinaikamalama.
In one of his later visits, the prophet discovered that upon reaching Wailua, all the unmarried daughters of the local chiefs and nobles on Kauai had been gathered there so that Aiwohikupua could choose two new wives to replace Poliahu and Hinaikamalama.
The prophet spoke so contemptuously of the girls brought there for inspection, and boasted so loudly of the beauty and graces of his adopted daughter, that a quarrel arose and he was [475]thrown into prison. He escaped during the night, however, and it was reported to the chief that he was dead. He had left a banana trunk wrapped in cloth, and it was offered on the altar of the heiau in the place of his body.
The prophet spoke so disdainfully about the girls brought there for inspection and bragged so much about the beauty and talents of his adopted daughter that a fight broke out, and he was [__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]thrown into prison. However, he escaped during the night, and it was reported to the chief that he was dead. He had left a banana trunk wrapped in cloth, which was offered on the altar of the heiau in place of his body.
At the moment when the deception was discovered the prophet made his appearance on the platform of a double canoe at the mouth of the river, with Laieikawai and the five sisters on board. Then Laieikawai stepped upon the platform, surrounded with the insignia of a tabu chief, and the winds ceased, the sea rose, thunders reverberated, lightnings flashed, and the heiau and altar were shaken almost to ruins.
At the moment the deception was uncovered, the prophet appeared on the platform of a double canoe at the river's mouth, with Laieikawai and the five sisters on board. Then Laieikawai stepped onto the platform, adorned with the symbols of a tabu chief, and the winds stopped, the sea surged, thunder boomed, lightning struck, and the heiau and altar were shaken nearly to destruction.
The assembled multitude shouted in admiration of the beauty of Laieikawai, and Aiwohikupua, after recovering from the shock of what he had witnessed, sent a herald to demand her in marriage. But the prophet proudly answered that she was not for such as he, and would marry no one of lower rank than the sovereign of an island. They then returned to Honopuwaiakua.
The crowd cheered in awe of Laieikawai's beauty, and Aiwohikupua, shaken from what he had seen, sent a messenger to propose marriage to her. But the prophet replied with pride that she was not meant for someone like him and would only marry someone of equal rank to the ruler of an island. They then went back to Honopuwaiakua.
We will now return to Kahalaomapuana, who was sent to a far-distant land in search of her brother, in the hope of making him the husband of Laieikawai. For four months the great moo swam with her in his mouth, and they arrived at last at Kealohilani. But the guardian of the place was absent on a visit to the Moon, and they awaited his return for twenty days.
We will now go back to Kahalaomapuana, who was sent to a faraway land to find her brother, hoping to make him Laieikawai's husband. For four months, the great moo carried her in his mouth, and they finally arrived at Kealohilani. However, the guardian of the place was away visiting the Moon, so they waited for his return for twenty days.
On his arrival he was greatly alarmed at the sight of the gigantic reptile, lying with his head in the house and his tail in the sea, and without a word flew to Nuumealani to consult Kaeloikamalama, the powerful kupua, who shut the door of the pea kapu of the Kukulu o Kahiki, where Kaonohiokala was concealed.
On his arrival, he was really startled by the sight of the huge reptile, lying with its head in the house and its tail in the sea. Without saying a word, he rushed to Nuumealani to consult Kaeloikamalama, the powerful kupua, who closed the door of the pea kapu of the Kukulu o Kahiki, where Kaonohiokala was hidden.
They returned together, the kupua armed with a laau palau a hundred paces long with which to slay the moo. Just as he was preparing to strike, the moo stirred his tail in the ocean and sent a tremendous breaker rolling inland, and they both started to retreat. At that moment the moo cast out Kahalaomapuana on the neck of her uncle, Kaeloikamalama. He asked her who she was and the object of her visit, which she explained, and also their relationship. Then both embraced her affectionately, for they were brothers of her mother.
They returned together, the kupua armed with a laau palau a hundred paces long to kill the moo. Just as he was getting ready to strike, the moo swished its tail in the ocean, sending a huge wave rolling inland, and they both began to back off. At that moment, the moo tossed out Kahalaomapuana onto the neck of her uncle, Kaeloikamalama. He asked her who she was and why she was there, which she explained, along with their relationship. Then both embraced her warmly, as they were brothers of her mother.
In furtherance of the purposes of her visit, Kaeloikamalama took his niece with him on a ten days’ journey to the place of [476]ascent, where he called upon Lanalananuiaimakua to let down the ladder. Before long a sort of spider’s web, branching through the air, descended. He then gave his niece full directions, as follows: “Here is your way to ascend until you see a single house standing in the Moon, in the land of Kahakaekaea, where dwells Moanalihaikawaokele, your father, an old man with long hair and bent head. If he is awake do not approach him, lest he see you first, and you die before you have a chance to speak. Wait until he is asleep on his back; then cautiously approach from the leeward, spring on his breast, grasp him tightly by the beard, and chant the mele in which I will instruct you.” Instructing her in the mele, he continued: “Explain to him the object of your visit, and all will be well.” She was about to begin the ascent when he imparted this final information: “In ascending, if fine rain falls and you are chilly, fear not; it is caused by your father. Climb on, and, should you smell fragrance, know that it is caused by your mother and that you are approaching the end of your journey. If the sunbeams pierce you and the heat beats upon your head, do not fear. Persevere, and you will enter the shelter of the Moon and be safe in Kahakaekaea.”
In line with the purpose of her visit, Kaeloikamalama took his niece on a ten-day journey to the place of [__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__] ascent, where he asked Lanalananuiaimakua to lower the ladder. Soon, a kind of spider's web, branching through the air, came down. He then gave his niece clear directions, saying: “Here’s your path to ascend until you see a single house standing in the Moon, in the land of Kahakaekaea, where your father, Moanalihaikawaokele, an old man with long hair and a bent head, lives. If he is awake, do not approach him, or he might see you first, and you could die before you get a chance to speak. Wait until he is asleep on his back; then carefully approach from the leeward, jump onto his chest, hold him tightly by the beard, and chant the mele that I will teach you.” Teaching her the mele, he added: “Explain to him the reason for your visit, and everything will go well.” She was about to start her ascent when he gave her this final piece of advice: “As you ascend, if light rain falls and you feel cold, don’t worry; it's because of your father. Keep climbing, and if you smell a fragrance, know that it's from your mother, and you are nearing the end of your journey. If the sun’s rays hit you and the heat warms your head, don’t be afraid. Keep going, and you will reach the shelter of the Moon and be safe in Kahakaekaea.”
With these instructions she boldly began the ascent. Climbing upward without ceasing, toward evening she encountered fine rain and mist; early next morning she smelt the fragrance of the shrub kiele; at midday she suffered from the heat of the sun, and in the evening entered the cool shade of the Moon, in the land of Kahakaekaea.
With these instructions, she confidently started her climb. Continuously ascending, she faced light rain and fog in the evening; early the next morning, she caught the scent of the shrub kiele; by midday, she struggled with the heat of the sun, and in the evening, she found relief in the cool shade of the Moon, in the land of Kahakaekaea.
Observing a large house standing alone, she proceeded to the lee side, and waited until the old man fell asleep on his back. She then grasped his beard and chanted the mele, as instructed by her uncle. He awoke, but she held him where lay his strength, and his struggles were vain. He asked her who she was, and about her relatives, and her answers were satisfactory. She then let go his beard and he took her on his knee and wailed over her.
Observing a large house standing alone, she went to the sheltered side and waited until the old man fell asleep on his back. She then grabbed his beard and sang the mele, just as her uncle had taught her. He woke up, but she held him where he was strongest, and his attempts to struggle were useless. He asked her who she was and about her family, and her answers were good enough. She then released his beard, and he lifted her onto his knee and wept over her.
He then inquired the object of her visit, and she related the whole story. He informed her that it was not within his power to grant her request, and that she must apply to her mother, who lived with her son, Kaonohiokala, in a sacred, inaccessible place, and only visited Kahakaekaea once every month. [477]
He then asked what brought her there, and she told him the entire story. He let her know that he couldn't grant her request and that she needed to talk to her mother, who lived with her son, Kaonohiokala, in a sacred, hard-to-reach place, and only came to see Kahakaekaea once a month. [__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]
By stratagem she obtained an interview with her mother, Laukieleula, and after great persuasion secured her assistance in advancing the purposes of her visit. The old woman then summoned the bird-god, Haluluikekihiokamalama, to take them up into the pea kapu of the Kukulu o Kahiki. The bird reached down a wing, upon which they both mounted and were carried to Awakea (noon), the god who opens the gate of the Sun, where dwelt Kaonohiokala (the eye-ball of the sun).
By planning carefully, she managed to get a meeting with her mother, Laukieleula, and after a lot of convincing, she got her support for her visit. The old woman then called upon the bird-god, Haluluikekihiokamalama, to take them up into the pea kapu of the Kukulu o Kahiki. The bird extended a wing, and they both climbed on, being carried to Awakea (noon), the god who opens the gate of the Sun, where Kaonohiokala (the eye of the sun) resided.
They found the place shut in by thunder-clouds. They called upon Awakea, who rose with intense heat and dispersed the clouds, disclosing to their view the prince asleep in the very centre of the Sun, where the air was white with heat. He awoke. His eyes were like lightning, and his body gleamed like molten lava.
They found the place surrounded by storm clouds. They called out to Awakea, who rose with intense heat and cleared the clouds, revealing the prince asleep in the center of the Sun, where the air shimmered with heat. He woke up. His eyes flashed like lightning, and his body shone like molten lava.
Laukieleula called to him and said: “Your favorite sister is here.” He looked up, and then summoned the guardians of the shade to appear and stand before him. This they promptly did, and the heat of the sun was mitigated. His resting-place being thus shaded, he called his sister to him and wailed over her, for they had been separated for a long time. He inquired the object of her visit, and about their sisters, and brother Aiwohikupua, and was interested in all that related to them.
Laukieleula called out to him and said, “Your favorite sister is here.” He looked up and then asked the guardians of the shade to come and stand before him. They quickly did, and the heat of the sun became less intense. With his resting place now shaded, he called his sister to him and mourned for her, as they had been apart for a long time. He asked why she had come, inquired about their sisters, and about their brother Aiwohikupua, and was interested in everything that concerned them.
Through the advice of his mother he consented to descend and marry Laieikawai, and the signs of his coming, he explained, would be as follows: First, there would be a heavy rain and high surf before he started. Next, there would be strong wind for ten days, followed by thunder without rain; then he would be in Kahakaekaea. When it thundered again twice he would be at Nuumealani, and when it thundered thrice he would be in Kealohilani. There he would lay aside his tabu supernatural form and assume the human shape as a high chief. After this there would be many portents, such as thunder, lightning, rain, fog, rainbows, high seas and mist on the ocean, and in one month thereafter he would appear on the mountain ridge at dawn. When the sun rose a halo would surround him, and in the evening, when the full moon rose in the night of Mahealani, he would appear and marry Laieikawai. After this he would punish the enemies of his sisters and his bride. As a token he gave to his sister for Laieikawai a rainbow-robe.
With his mother’s advice, he agreed to go down and marry Laieikawai, and he explained that the signs of his arrival would be as follows: First, there would be heavy rain and high waves before he set out. Next, there would be strong winds for ten days, followed by thunder without rain; then he would be in Kahakaekaea. When it thundered twice, he would be at Nuumealani, and when it thundered three times, he would be in Kealohilani. There, he would set aside his supernatural form and take on the human shape of a high chief. After that, there would be many signs, like thunder, lightning, rain, fog, rainbows, rough seas, and mist over the ocean, and within a month, he would appear on the mountain ridge at dawn. When the sun rose, a halo would surround him, and in the evening, when the full moon rose on the night of Mahealani, he would appear and marry Laieikawai. After this, he would take revenge on the enemies of his sisters and his bride. As a token, he gave his sister a rainbow robe for Laieikawai.
Kahalaomapuana was a month in returning to Kealohilani, [478]where she found the moo in waiting for her. He swam with her across the great waters to Hawaii, but, not finding their friends at Olaa, he hunted all through the islands, like a dog scenting for his master, until he found them at Honopuwaiakua, Kauai. The whole trip occupied eleven months and fourteen days.
Kahalaomapuana took a month to return to Kealohilani, [__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]where she discovered the moo waiting for her. He swam with her across the vast ocean to Hawaii, but after not finding their friends in Olaa, he searched the islands like a dog looking for its owner until he found them at Honopuwaiakua, Kauai. The entire journey lasted eleven months and fourteen days.
Kahalaomapuana gave her friends a full history of her extraordinary journey, to the dismay of Laieikawai, who was awed at the thought of her intended husband. The prophet, who knew nothing of the mission of the sister until her return, had predicted the coming of Kaonohiokala a month before; and now he traveled around the island warning the people, and advising Aiwohikupua, in particular, to set up tabu flags all around his place and collect his family within the precinct; but he was repelled with insult. He gave the same advice to Kekalukaluokewa, who obeyed it in spite of the opposition of Waka.
Kahalaomapuana shared the full story of her incredible journey with her friends, much to the surprise of Laieikawai, who was fascinated by the idea of her future husband. The prophet, unaware of the sister's mission until she returned, had predicted Kaonohiokala's arrival a month earlier. Now he was going around the island warning people and specifically advising Aiwohikupua to set up tabu flags all around his property and gather his family within those boundaries, but he was met with disrespect. He offered the same advice to Kekalukaluokewa, who followed it despite Waka's objections.
Ten days after the return of Kahalaomapuana the portents began to appear in the order already named, and in due time Kaonohiokala appeared, surrounded by a halo. Shouts of acclamation and homage were heard throughout the island, and Laieikawai put on her rainbow robe.
Ten days after Kahalaomapuana returned, the signs started to show up in the mentioned order, and soon Kaonohiokala appeared, surrounded by a halo. Cheers and expressions of respect rang out across the island, and Laieikawai donned her rainbow robe.
In the evening, as the full moon rose, the prince descended from the mountain and came within the circle of the prophet, and they all prostrated themselves before him. He spoke graciously to them, and told Laieikawai that he had come to make good the promise made to her through his sister. Then all shouted, “Amana! ua noa, lele wale aku la!”
In the evening, as the full moon rose, the prince came down from the mountain and joined the group of the prophet, and they all bowed down before him. He spoke kindly to them and told Laieikawai that he had come to fulfill the promise made to her through his sister. Then everyone shouted, “Amana! ua noa, lele wale aku la!”
A rainbow appeared, and on it the prince and his bride were suddenly drawn upward to the moon. A few nights after, as the moon was directly overhead, a rainbow was let down like a ladder, on which they descended. Summoning the prophet, the prince directed him to travel around the island and make proclamation for all to assemble at the end of ten days at Pihanakalani. The five sisters, and afterwards the prophet, were taken up to dwell in the coolness of the moon.
A rainbow showed up, and suddenly the prince and his bride were lifted up to the moon. A few nights later, when the moon was directly above, a rainbow came down like a ladder, and they climbed down it. The prince called the prophet and told him to go around the island to announce that everyone should gather at Pihanakalani in ten days. The five sisters, and later the prophet, were taken up to live in the coolness of the moon.
One morning the assemblage at Pihanakalani saw the rainbow again let down from the moon, and standing upon it were the prince and his bride, the five sisters and the prophet.
One morning, the gathering at Pihanakalani saw the rainbow once more reaching down from the moon, and standing on it were the prince and his bride, the five sisters, and the prophet.
Vengeance was executed upon Waka, who was killed by a thunderbolt, and upon Aiwohikupua, who was reduced to poverty and contempt. Laielohelohe and Kekalukaluokewa were retained [479]in favor under Kahalaomapuana, who was designated as the regent of her brother, and the four other sisters were made the governesses of the rest of the islands of the group.
Vengeance was carried out on Waka, who was struck down by a thunderbolt, and on Aiwohikupua, who fell into poverty and disgrace. Laielohelohe and Kekalukaluokewa were kept [__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]in favor under Kahalaomapuana, who was appointed as the regent for her brother, while the four other sisters became the rulers of the remaining islands in the group.
The affairs of state being thus summarily settled, Kaonohiokala again departed with his bride up the rainbow beyond the clouds, to dwell in the pea kapu o Kukulu o Kahiki, above the land called Kahakaekaea.
The state matters were quickly resolved, and Kaonohiokala once again left with his bride up the rainbow beyond the clouds to live in the pea kapu o Kukulu o Kahiki, above the land known as Kahakaekaea.
V.
Kaonohiokala made quarterly visits to his earthly dominions, to see that all went well with their rulers. Laielohelohe had grown more beautiful than her sister, and he became enamored of her.
Kaonohiokala made quarterly visits to his earthly domains to ensure everything was going well with their rulers. Laielohelohe had become more beautiful than her sister, and he fell in love with her.
To promote his designs he made Kahalaomapuana joint regent with Mokukelekahiki in Kealohilani, and appointed Kekalukaluokewa to the regency of the entire group. He then requested the regent to make a tour of the islands, leaving Laielohelohe at Pihanakalani. He next applied to her guardian, Kapukaihaoa, and gained his consent to aid in her seduction.
To promote his designs, he made Kahalaomapuana co-regent with Mokukelekahiki in Kealohilani and appointed Kekalukaluokewa to oversee the entire group. He then asked the regent to tour the islands, leaving Laielohelohe at Pihanakalani. Next, he approached her guardian, Kapukaihaoa, and got his approval to assist in her seduction.
After Kaonohiokala had made two more trips to earth in furtherance of this intrigue, Laielohelohe resolved to seek her husband, and set sail, accordingly, for the windward islands. She found him at Honokalani, Maui, engaged in an amour with Hinaikamalama, the Hana chiefess who had abandoned Aiwohikupua. After unavailing efforts to reclaim him she returned to Kauai.
After Kaonohiokala had made two more trips to Earth to support this plot, Laielohelohe decided to find her husband and set sail for the windward islands. She found him at Honokalani, Maui, involved in a romance with Hinaikamalama, the Hana chiefess who had left Aiwohikupua. After unsuccessful attempts to win him back, she returned to Kauai.
Kaonohiokala then renewed his visits, and at last remained a year with the deserted wife. The forsaken Laieikawai appealed to her father-in-law, who directed her to go to the tabu heiau when old Laukieleula was asleep, and consult the bowl of knowledge. It was a wooden bowl, covered with wicker-work, the edge of the lid being decorated with feathers, and with carved images of birds standing on the rim. She was to remove the lid, insert her face in the bowl, and call “Laukapalili!” to give her the knowledge she required.
Kaonohiokala started visiting again and eventually stayed for a year with the abandoned wife. The neglected Laieikawai asked her father-in-law for advice, and he told her to go to the tabu heiau while old Laukieleula was asleep and consult the bowl of knowledge. It was a wooden bowl covered with wicker, with the lid's edge decorated with feathers and carved images of birds around the rim. She was supposed to lift the lid, put her face in the bowl, and call out “Laukapalili!” to receive the knowledge she needed.
She followed these directions and saw what her husband was doing on earth. His father and mother also looked, and observed for themselves the treachery of their son. Straightway the ladder was let down to the presence of Kaonohiokala. The [480]sky was darkened and filled with uncanny forms, and ghastly voices wailed through the air, “Ua haule ka lani!”—“the heaven has fallen!”
She followed these directions and saw what her husband was doing on Earth. His parents also looked and witnessed their son's betrayal. Immediately, the ladder was lowered to the presence of Kaonohiokala. The [__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]sky darkened and filled with strange shapes, while eerie voices echoed through the air, “Ua haule ka lani!”—“the heaven has fallen!”
Then the three were seen standing together upon the rainbow ladder, and Moanalihaikawaokele proceeded to pronounce judgment on Kaonohiokala. He was never to return to the upper world, and was doomed to become a lapu—a spectre or wandering ghost—and live on butterflies.
Then the three were seen standing together on the rainbow ladder, and Moanalihaikawaokele began to pass judgment on Kaonohiokala. He would never return to the upper world and was condemned to become a lapu—a spirit or wandering ghost—and survive on butterflies.
Kahalaomapuana took his place in the sun. Laieikawai, at her earnest request, was restored to earth to live with her sister, and the government of the group was entrusted to the prophet.
Kahalaomapuana took his place in the sun. Laieikawai, at her sincere request, was brought back to live on earth with her sister, and the leadership of the group was given to the prophet.
Laieikawai had her name changed to Ka wahine o ka liula—“the lady of the twilight”—under which title she was worshipped by certain families after her death. [481]
Laieikawai had her name changed to Ka wahine o ka liula—“the lady of the twilight”—under which title she was honored by certain families after her death. [__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]
Lohiau, the Lover of a Goddess.
[482]
[__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]
CHARACTERS.
- Pelé, the goddess of the volcanoes.
- Hiiaka, one of the sisters of Pele.
- Hopoe, a friend of Hiiaka.
-
Pauo-palae and Hiiaka's travel companions. Omeo, - Lonoikaonolii, one of the brothers of Pele.
- Lohiau, a prince of Kauai.
- Paoa, a chief of Kauai.
- Milu, king of the regions of death.
- Kanemilohai, a god from Kahiki.
-
Kalamainu and Kauai's female demons. Kileoa, - Olepau, king of Maui.
- Waihimano, queen of Maui.
[483]
[__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]
LOHIAU, THE LOVER OF A GODDESS.
LOHIAU, THE LOVER OF A GODDESS.
THE LEGEND OF HIIAKA, THE IMMORTAL, AND THE PRINCE OF KAUAI.
THE LEGEND OF HIIAKA, THE IMMORTAL, AND THE PRINCE OF KAUAI.
I.
Of all the legends of the adventures with mortals of Pele, the dreadful goddess of the volcanoes, the most weird and dramatic is the one relating to her love for Lohiau, a prince of the island of Kauai, whose reign was probably contemporaneous with that of Kealiiokaloa, of Hawaii, during the early part of the sixteenth century. The story is not only a characteristic relic of the recklessly imaginative and highly-colored meles of the early poets, but an instructive reflex as well of the superstitions controlling the popular mind of the Hawaiian group at that period, when the forests abounded in mischievous gnomes and fairies, when the streams were guarded by nymphs and monsters, and when the very air was peopled with the spirits of the departed. But a thin veil then divided the living from the dead, the natural from the supernatural, and mortals were made the sport of the elements and the playthings of the gods.
Of all the legends about Pele, the fearsome goddess of the volcanoes, the most bizarre and dramatic one is about her love for Lohiau, a prince from the island of Kauai, who probably ruled around the same time as Kealiiokaloa from Hawaii in the early sixteenth century. This story not only reflects the wildly imaginative and vividly descriptive style of the early poets but also highlights the superstitions that shaped the beliefs of the Hawaiian people at that time, when the forests were full of mischievous sprites and fairies, when streams were protected by nymphs and monsters, and when the very air was filled with the spirits of the dead. There was only a thin veil separating the living from the dead, the natural from the supernatural, and mortals were playthings of the elements and the gods.
As the mele relates, Pele and her brothers and sisters, to amuse themselves with a taste of mortal enjoyments, one day emerged from their fiery chambers in the crater of Kilauea, and went down to the coast of Puna to bathe, surf-ride, sport in the sands, and gather edible sea-weed, squid, limpets and other delicacies washed by the waves. They assumed human forms for the occasion, and therefore had human appetites.
As the mele describes, Pele and her siblings, looking to have some fun with human pleasures, one day came out from their fiery home in the Kilauea crater and went down to the Puna coast to swim, surf, play in the sand, and collect edible seaweed, squid, limpets, and other treats brought in by the waves. They took on human forms for the day, and as a result, they had human cravings.
While the others were amusing themselves in various ways—eating, laughing and sporting in the waves in the manner of mortals—Pele, in the guise of an old woman, sought repose and sleep in the shade of a hala tree. Her favorite sister was Hiiaka, her full name being Hiiaka-ika-pali-opele. She was younger than Pele, and frequently occupied the same grotto with her under the burning lake of Kilauea. [484]
While the others were having fun in different ways—eating, laughing, and playing in the waves like regular people—Pele, disguised as an old woman, looked for rest and sleep in the shade of a hala tree. Her beloved sister was Hiiaka, whose full name was Hiiaka-ika-pali-opele. She was younger than Pele and often shared the same grotto with her beneath the fiery lake of Kilauea. [__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]
Hiiaka accompanied her sovereign sister to the shade of the hala tree, and, sitting devotedly beside her, kept her cool with a kahili. Her eyelids growing heavy, Pele instructed Hiiaka to allow her under no circumstances to be disturbed, no matter how long she might sleep, whether for hours or days, and then closed her eyes in slumber.
Hiiaka went with her sister, the queen, to the shade of the hala tree, and while sitting loyally next to her, she kept her cool with a kahili. With her eyelids getting heavy, Pele told Hiiaka not to let anyone disturb her, no matter how long she might sleep, whether for hours or days, and then closed her eyes to drift off.
Scarcely had the ears of the sleeper been closed by the fingers of silence before she heard the sound of a drum—distant, but distinct and regular in its beat, as if to the impulse of music. Before leaving the crater she had heard the same sound, but paid little attention to it. Now, however, when hearing it in her dreams, her curiosity was aroused, and, assuming her spiritual form, she resolved to follow it.
Scarcely had the sleeper closed her ears to the silence when she heard the sound of a drum—distant yet clear and steady in its rhythm, almost like it was responding to music. Before she left the crater, she had heard the same sound but didn’t think much of it. Now, though, as she heard it in her dreams, her curiosity was piqued, and taking on her spiritual form, she decided to follow it.
Leaving her slumbering earthly body under the eye and care of her sister, Pele mounted the air and proceeded in the direction whence the sound seemed to come. From place to place she followed it over the island of Hawaii; but it was always before her, and she could not overtake it. At Upolu it came to her from over the sea, and she followed it to the island of Maui. It was still beyond, and she sped to Molokai; still beyond, and she flew to Oahu; still beyond, and she crossed the channel and listened on the shores of Kauai, where it was more distinct than she had heard it before. Now encouraged, she continued the pursuit until she stood upon the mountain peak of Haupu, when she discovered at last that the sound came from the beach at Kaena.
Leaving her sleeping earthly body under the watchful care of her sister, Pele rose into the air and headed towards the source of the sound. She followed it all over the island of Hawaii; but it was always ahead of her, and she couldn't catch it. When she reached Upolu, the sound came to her from across the sea, so she pursued it to the island of Maui. It was still ahead, so she hurried to Molokai; still ahead, she flew to Oahu; still ahead, she crossed the channel and listened on the shores of Kauai, where the sound was clearer than ever before. Now feeling encouraged, she continued her chase until she stood on the mountain peak of Haupu, finally realizing that the sound was coming from the beach at Kaena.
Proceeding thither, and hovering over the place unseen, she observed that the sound she had so long been following was that of a pahu-hula, or hula drum, beaten by Lohiau, the young and comely prince of Kauai, who was noted not only for the splendor of his hula entertainments, participated in by the most beautiful women of the island, but for his personal graces as a dancer and musician. The favorite deity of Lohiau was Lakakane, the god of the hula and similar sports, who in a spirit of mischief had conveyed the sound of the drum to the ears of Pele.
Heading there and staying hidden, she noticed that the sound she had been following for so long was that of a pahu-hula, or hula drum, played by Lohiau, the young and handsome prince of Kauai. He was famous not only for his spectacular hula shows, performed with the most beautiful women of the island, but also for his charm as a dancer and musician. Lohiau's favorite god was Lakakane, the god of the hula and similar activities, who, in a playful mood, had sent the sound of the drum to Pele's ears.
The beach was thronged with dancers, musicians and spectators, all enjoying themselves under the shade of the hala and cocoa trees, with the prince as master of ceremonies and the centre of attraction. Assuming the form of a beautiful woman, Pele suddenly appeared before the festive throng. Attaching to [485]her person every imaginable charm of form and feature, her presence was immediately noted; and, a way being opened for her to the prince, he received her most graciously and invited her to a seat near him, where she could best witness the entertainment.
The beach was packed with dancers, musicians, and onlookers, all having a great time under the shade of the hala and cocoa trees, with the prince as the host and center of attention. Suddenly, Pele appeared before the lively crowd, taking the form of a stunning woman. She carried every conceivable allure of beauty, instantly capturing everyone's attention; and as a path was cleared for her to reach the prince, he welcomed her warmly and invited her to sit beside him, where she could best enjoy the performance.
Glancing at the beautiful stranger from time to time in the midst of his performances, Lohiau at length became so fascinated that he failed to follow the music, when he yielded the instrument to another and seated himself beside the enchantress. In answer to his inquiry she informed the prince that she was a stranger in Kauai, and had come from the direction of the rising sun. Gazing into her face with a devouring passion, Lohiau smilingly said:
Glancing at the beautiful stranger now and then during his performances, Lohiau eventually became so captivated that he lost track of the music. He handed the instrument to someone else and took a seat next to the enchantress. When he asked her about herself, she told the prince that she was a newcomer to Kauai, arriving from the east. Looking into her face with intense desire, Lohiau smiled and said:
“You are most welcome, but I cannot rejoice that you came.”
“You're welcome, but I can't say I'm happy you came.”
“And why, since I do not come as your enemy?” inquired Pele, archly.
“And why, since I'm not here as your enemy?” Pele asked playfully.
“Because, until now,” returned the prince, “my thought has been that there were beautiful women in Kauai; but in looking at yours I find their faces are plain indeed.”
“Because, until now,” the prince replied, “I thought there were beautiful women in Kauai; but looking at yours, I see their faces are actually quite plain.”
“I see you know how to speak flattering words to women,” said Pele, casting a languishing look upon the prince.
“I see you know how to say sweet things to women,” said Pele, throwing a seductive glance at the prince.
“Not better than I know how to love them,” replied Lohiau, with ardor. “Will you be convinced?”
“Not better than I know how to love them,” Lohiau replied passionately. “Will you be convinced?”
“Lohiau is in his own kingdom, and has but to command,” answered Pele, with a play of modesty which completed the enthralment of the prince.
“Lohiau is in his own kingdom and just needs to give the order,” replied Pele, with a touch of modesty that captured the prince completely.
Thus Pele became the wife of Lohiau. He knew nothing of her or her family, and cared not to inquire. He saw only that she was beautiful above all women, and for a few days they lived so happily together that life seemed to be a dream to him. And Pele loved the prince scarcely less than he loved her; but the time had come for her return to Hawaii, and, pledging him to remain true to her, she left him with protestations of affection and the promise of a speedy return, and on the wings of the wind was wafted back to the shores of Puna, where she had left her sister waiting and watching in the shade of the hala.
Thus Pele became Lohiau's wife. He knew nothing about her or her family and didn’t care to ask. He saw only that she was more beautiful than any other woman, and for a few days, they were so happy together that life felt like a dream to him. Pele loved the prince nearly as much as he loved her; however, the time had come for her to return to Hawaii. After promising him that she would remain true to him, she left him with declarations of love and a promise to come back soon, and on the wings of the wind, she was carried back to the shores of Puna, where she had left her sister waiting and watching in the shade of the hala.
Lohiau was inconsolable. Every day he thought she would be with him the next, until more than a month passed, when he refused food and died of grief at her absence. The strange death of the prince occasioned much comment, for he was naturally [486]strong and without disease. Some said he had been prayed to death by his enemies, and others that he had been poisoned; but an old kaula, who had seen Pele at Kaena and noted her actions, advised against further inquiry concerning the cause of Lohiau’s death, offering as a reason the opinion that the strangely beautiful and unknown woman he had taken as a wife was an immortal, who had become attached to her earthly husband and called his spirit to her.
Lohiau was heartbroken. Every day he believed she would be with him the next, until over a month passed, when he stopped eating and died from grief at her absence. The prince's unusual death caused a lot of chatter since he was naturally [__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]strong and healthy. Some claimed his enemies had prayed him to death, while others said he had been poisoned; however, an old kaula who had seen Pele at Kaena and observed her behavior cautioned against digging deeper into the cause of Lohiau’s death, arguing that the mysteriously beautiful and unknown woman he had married was an immortal who had grown fond of her earthly husband and summoned his spirit to her.
The prince was greatly beloved by his people, and his body, carefully wrapped in many folds of kapa, was kept in state for some time in the royal mansion. It was guarded by the high chiefs of the kingdom, and every night funeral hymns were chanted around it, and meles recited of the deeds of the dead sovereign and his ancestors. Thus lying in state we will leave the remains of Lohiau, and follow Pele back to Hawaii.
The prince was deeply loved by his people, and his body, carefully wrapped in multiple layers of kapa, was kept in honor for a while in the royal mansion. It was watched over by the high chiefs of the kingdom, and every night, funeral hymns were sung around it, along with meles recounting the achievements of the deceased ruler and his ancestors. So, with the prince lying in state, we will leave Lohiau's remains and follow Pele back to Hawaii.
II.
During all the time the spirit of Pele was absent the family kept watch over the body left by her under the hala tree, not daring to disturb it, and were overjoyed when it was at last reanimated, for the fires of the crater of Kilauea had nearly died out from neglect. Pele rose to her feet in the form of the old woman she had left asleep under the care of Hiiaka, and, without at the time mentioning her adventures in Kauai or the cause of her protracted slumber, returned with all but one of the family to Kilauea, and with a breath renewed the dying fires of the crater. Hiiaka asked and received the permission of Pele to remain for a few days at the beach with her much-loved friend Hopoe, a young woman of Puna, who had been left an orphan by an irruption from Kilauea, in which both of her parents had perished.
During the whole time Pele’s spirit was gone, the family kept a close watch over the body she had left under the hala tree, not daring to disturb it. They were thrilled when she was finally revived because the fires of the Kilauea crater had almost died out from neglect. Pele stood up in the form of the old woman she'd left resting under Hiiaka's care, and without mentioning her adventures in Kauai or why she had slept for so long, she returned with almost all of her family to Kilauea, and with a breath, she reignited the dying fires of the crater. Hiiaka asked for and received Pele’s permission to stay for a few days at the beach with her beloved friend Hopoe, a young woman from Puna who had been left an orphan after an eruption from Kilauea that claimed both of her parents.
On leaving Kauai it is probable that Pele, notwithstanding her fervent words to the contrary, never expected or particularly desired to see Lohiau again; but he had so endeared himself to her during their brief union that she did not find it easy to forget him, and, after struggling with the feeling for some time, she resolved to send for him. But to whom should she entrust the important mission? One after another she applied to her sisters at the crater, but the way was beset with evil spirits, and they refused to go.
On leaving Kauai, it’s likely that Pele, despite her passionate claims otherwise, didn’t really expect or especially want to see Lohiau again; however, he had become so dear to her during their short time together that forgetting him wasn’t easy. After wrestling with her feelings for a while, she decided to summon him. But whom could she trust with this important task? She approached her sisters at the crater one by one, but the path was filled with evil spirits, and they all refused to go.
In this dilemma Pele sent her favorite brother, Lonoikaonolii, [487]to bring Hiiaka from the beach, well knowing that she would not refuse to undertake the journey, however hazardous. Hiiaka accepted the mission, with the understanding that during her absence her friend Hopoe should be kept under the eye and guardianship of Pele.
In this tough situation, Pele sent her favorite brother, Lonoikaonolii, [__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__] to bring Hiiaka from the beach, knowing she wouldn't say no to the journey, no matter how dangerous it might be. Hiiaka agreed to take on the task, as long as her friend Hopoe would be watched over and protected by Pele while she was away.
Arrangements were made for the immediate departure of Hiiaka. Pele conferred upon her some of her own powers, with an injunction to use them discreetly, and for a companion and servant gave her Pauo-palae, a woman of approved sagacity and prudence.
Arrangements were made for Hiiaka's immediate departure. Pele granted her some of her powers, with instructions to use them wisely, and she provided her with a companion and servant, Pauo-palae, a woman known for her wisdom and good judgment.
With a farewell from her relatives and many an admonition from Pele, Hiiaka took her departure for Kauai, accompanied by Pauo-palae. They traveled as mortals, and were therefore subject to the fatigues and perils of humanity. Proceeding through the forests toward the coast of Hilo, they encountered an old woman, who accosted them politely and expressed a desire to follow them. Her name was Omeo, and she was leading a hog to the volcano as a sacrifice to Pele. No objection being made, she hurried to the crater with her offering, and returned and followed Hiiaka and her companion.
With a goodbye from her family and plenty of warnings from Pele, Hiiaka set off for Kauai, joined by Pauo-palae. They traveled as regular people and thus faced the challenges and dangers of humanity. As they made their way through the forests toward the coast of Hilo, they met an old woman who greeted them politely and expressed her wish to join them. Her name was Omeo, and she was taking a pig to the volcano as a sacrifice to Pele. Since no one objected, she rushed to the crater with her offering, then returned and followed Hiiaka and her companion.
Not long after, their journey was impeded by a demon of hideous proportions, who threw himself across their path in a narrow defile and attempted to destroy them. Pele knew their danger, however, and ordered her brothers to protect them with a rain of fire and thunder, which drove the monster to his den in the hills and enabled them to escape.
Not long after, their journey was blocked by a huge demon, who jumped in front of them in a narrow pass and tried to destroy them. Pele recognized the danger, though, and told her brothers to shield them with a rain of fire and thunder, which drove the monster back to its lair in the hills and allowed them to escape.
After a little time they were joined by another woman, whose name was Papau. She desired to accompany them, and proceeded a short distance on the way, when they were confronted by a ferocious-looking man who was either insane or under the influence of evil spirits. He lacked either the power or the disposition to molest the party, however, and they passed on unharmed; but Papau screamed with fright and hastily returned to her home, where she was turned into a stone as a punishment for her cowardice.
After a while, they were joined by another woman named Papau. She wanted to go with them and walked a little way when they were confronted by a scary-looking man who seemed either crazy or possessed by evil spirits. He didn't have the strength or the intention to harm them, though, and they continued on their way unharmed. But Papau screamed in fear and quickly ran back home, where she was turned into stone as punishment for her cowardice.
Coming to a small stream crossed by their path, they found the waters dammed by a huge moo, or lizard, lying in the bed. He was more than a hundred paces in length, and his eyes were of the size of great calabashes. He glared at the party viciously and opened his mouth as if to devour them; but Hiiaka tossed [488]into it a stone, which became red-hot when it touched his throat, and, with a roar of pain which made the leaves of the trees tremble, he disappeared down the stream.
Coming to a small stream that crossed their path, they found the water blocked by a huge moo, or lizard, lying in the riverbed. He was over a hundred paces long, and his eyes were as big as large gourds. He glared at the group aggressively and opened his mouth as if he were going to eat them; but Hiiaka threw a stone [__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__] into it, which turned red-hot when it hit his throat, and with a roar of pain that made the leaves of the trees shake, he vanished down the stream.
After many other adventures with monsters and evil spirits, which Hiiaka was able to control and sometimes punish, the party reached the coast at a place called Honoipo, where they found a number of men and women engaged in the sport of surf-riding. As they were about to start for another trial, in a spirit of mischief Hiiaka turned their surf-boards into stone, and they fled in terror from the beach, fearing that some sea-god was preparing to devour them.
After many other adventures with monsters and evil spirits, which Hiiaka managed to control and sometimes punish, the group reached the coast at a place called Honoipo, where they found several men and women enjoying surf-riding. As they were about to start another round, in a playful spirit, Hiiaka turned their surfboards into stone, and they ran away in fear from the beach, thinking some sea god was getting ready to eat them.
Observing a fisherman drawing in his line, Hiiaka caused to be fastened to the submerged hook a human head. Raising it to the surface, the man stared at it for a moment with horror, then dropped the line and paddled swiftly away, to the great amusement of Hiiaka and her companions.
Watching a fisherman pulling in his line, Hiiaka had a human head attached to the submerged hook. When he brought it to the surface, the man looked at it in shock for a moment, then dropped the line and quickly paddled away, much to the delight of Hiiaka and her friends.
Embarking in a canoe with two men as assistants, the travelers sailed for the island of Maui, which they reached without delay or accident. Landing at Kaupo, they traveled overland toward Honuaula, near which place, in approaching the palace of the king, whose name was Olepau, and who was lying within at the point of death, Hiiaka observed a human spirit hovering around the outer enclosure. Knowing that it was the half-freed soul or spirit of the moi, she seized and tied it up in a corner of her pau.
Setting out in a canoe with two men as helpers, the travelers sailed to the island of Maui, arriving without any delays or issues. After landing at Kaupo, they traveled overland toward Honuaula. Near the palace of King Olepau, who was on his deathbed, Hiiaka noticed a human spirit hovering around the outer enclosure. Realizing it was the half-freed soul of the moi, she captured it and secured it in a corner of her pau.
Passing on with the soul of the king in her keeping, she met the queen, Waihimano, and told her that her husband had just died. But the queen denied that Olepau was dead, for she was a worshipper of two powerful lizard divinities, and the gods had assured her that morning that her husband would recover.
Passing on with the king's spirit in her care, she encountered the queen, Waihimano, and informed her that her husband had just passed away. However, the queen rejected the news, as she believed in two mighty lizard gods, and the gods had promised her that morning that her husband would recover.
Saying no more, Hiiaka and her companions went on their way, and the queen, returning to the palace, found her husband insensible and apparently dead. Trying in vain to restore him, she hastily consulted a kaula, telling him what the strange woman had said to her. The seer by the description recognized at once the sister of Pele, who had come to heal the king, but had been deterred in her errand of mercy by the queen’s obstinate assurances of his recovery. He therefore advised that she be followed by a messenger with a spotless pig to be placed as an offering in the path before her, when she perchance might return and restore the king to life. But Hiiaka dropped behind her [489]companions and assumed the form of an old woman, and, as the messenger did not recognize her, he returned with the report that the object of his search could not be found.
Saying no more, Hiiaka and her friends continued on their way, while the queen returned to the palace and found her husband unconscious and seemingly dead. Trying unsuccessfully to bring him back, she quickly consulted a kaula, explaining what the strange woman had told her. The seer immediately recognized from her description that it was Pele's sister, who had come to heal the king but had been stopped in her mission of mercy by the queen’s stubborn claims of his recovery. He advised that a messenger should be sent after her with a pure pig to be placed as an offering in her path, in case she might return and bring the king back to life. However, Hiiaka fell behind her [__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]companions and took on the appearance of an old woman, so the messenger didn’t recognize her and returned with the message that he could not find the person he was looking for.
“Did you meet no one?” inquired the seer.
“Did you not meet anyone?” the seer asked.
“No one answering the description,” replied the messenger. “I saw only an old woman, so infirm as to be scarcely able to walk.”
“No one fits the description,” replied the messenger. “I only saw an old woman who was so frail she could barely walk.”
“Fool!” exclaimed the kaula. “That old woman was Hiiaka in disguise. Hasten back to her, if you would save the life of your king!”
“Fool!” exclaimed the kaula. “That old woman was Hiiaka in disguise. Hurry back to her if you want to save your king’s life!”
The messenger again started in pursuit of Hiiaka, but the pig was obstinate and troublesome, and his progress was slow. Seizing the struggling animal in his arms, the messenger ran until he came within sight of the women, who were again traveling together, when Hiiaka struck the fold of her pau against a rock, and that instant the king expired.
The messenger took off again after Hiiaka, but the pig was stubborn and annoying, making it hard for him to move fast. Grabbing the wriggling animal in his arms, the messenger ran until he saw the women, who were walking together again. At that moment, Hiiaka hit the fold of her pau against a rock, and at that instant, the king died.
Reaching the coast and embarking with a fisherman, Hiiaka and her companions sailed for Oahu. Landing at Makapuu, they journeyed overland to Kou—now Honolulu—and from Haena made sail for Kauai. Arriving at Kaena, Hiiaka saw the spirit hand of Lohiau beckoning to her from the mouth of a cave among the cliffs. Turning to her companions, she said:
Reaching the coast and boarding a boat with a fisherman, Hiiaka and her companions sailed to Oahu. After landing at Makapuu, they traveled overland to Kou—now known as Honolulu—and from Haena set sail for Kauai. When they arrived at Kaena, Hiiaka saw the spirit hand of Lohiau waving to her from the entrance of a cave in the cliffs. Turning to her companions, she said:
“We have failed; the lover of Pele is dead! I see his spirit beckoning from the pali! There it is being held and hidden by the lizard-women, Kilioa and Kalamainu.”
“We have failed; the lover of Pele is dead! I see his spirit beckoning from the pali! There it is being held and hidden by the lizard-women, Kilioa and Kalamainu.”
Instructing her companions to proceed to Puoa, where the body of Lohiau was lying in state, Hiiaka started at once for the pali, for the purpose of giving battle to the female demons and rescuing the spirit of the dead prince.
Instructing her friends to head to Puoa, where Lohiau's body was lying in state, Hiiaka immediately set off for the pali to fight the female demons and save the spirit of the deceased prince.
Ascending the cliff and entering the cave, Hiiaka waved her pau, and with angry hisses the demons disappeared. Search was made, and the spirit of Lohiau was found at last in a niche in the rocks, where it had been placed by a moonbeam. Taking it tenderly in her hand, she enclosed it in a fold of her pau, and in an invisible form floated down with it to Puoa.
Ascending the cliff and entering the cave, Hiiaka waved her pau, and with furious hisses, the demons vanished. A search was conducted, and finally, the spirit of Lohiau was discovered in a nook of the rocks, where it had been placed by a moonbeam. Gently taking it in her hand, she wrapped it in a fold of her pau, and in an unseen form, floated down with it to Puoa.
Waiting until after nightfall, Hiiaka entered the chamber of death unseen, and restored the spirit to the body of Lohiau. Recovering his life and consciousness, the prince looked around with amazement. The guards were frightened when he raised his head, and would have fled in alarm had they not been prevented [490]by Hiiaka, who at that instant appeared before them in mortal form. Holding up her hand, as if to command obedience, she said:
Waiting until after dark, Hiiaka entered the death chamber unseen and brought Lohiau's spirit back to his body. As he regained his life and awareness, the prince looked around in shock. The guards were terrified when he lifted his head and would have run away in panic if Hiiaka hadn't stopped them. At that moment, she appeared before them in human form. Raising her hand as if to demand their attention, she said:
“Fear nothing, say nothing of this to any one living, and do nothing except as you may be ordered. The prince has returned to life, and may recover if properly cared for. His body is weak and wasted. Let him be secretly and at once removed to the sea-shore. The night is dark, and it may be done without observation.”
“Don’t be afraid, don’t tell anyone about this, and only do what you’re told. The prince is alive again and could get better if he’s taken care of properly. His body is frail and worn out. He should be quietly moved to the beach right away. It’s dark out, so it can be done without being noticed.”
Not doubting that these instructions were from the gods, the guards obeyed them with so much prudence and alacrity that Lohiau was soon comfortably resting in a hut by the sea-shore, with Hiiaka and her companions ministering to his wants.
Not doubting that these instructions came from the gods, the guards followed them with such care and enthusiasm that Lohiau was soon comfortably resting in a hut by the seaside, with Hiiaka and her friends taking care of his needs.
The return of the prince to health and strength was rapid, and in a few days he reappeared among his friends, to their amazement and great joy. In answer to their inquiries he informed them that he owed to the gods his restoration to life. This did not entirely satisfy them, but no further explanation was offered.
The prince quickly recovered his health and strength, and within a few days, he was back among his friends, who were amazed and overjoyed. When they asked him about it, he told them he owed his revival to the gods. This didn’t completely satisfy them, but he didn’t provide any more details.
After celebrating his recovery with feasts and sacrifices to the gods, Lohiau announced to the chiefs of his kingdom that he was about to visit his wife, whose home was on Hawaii, and that he should leave the government of the island in the hands of his friend, the high-chief Paoa, to whom he enjoined the fealty and respect of all during his absence.
After celebrating his recovery with parties and offerings to the gods, Lohiau told the chiefs of his kingdom that he was going to visit his wife, who lived in Hawaii, and that he would leave the island's government in the hands of his friend, the high chief Paoa, and asked everyone to show him loyalty and respect while he was gone.
In a magnificent double canoe, bearing the royal standard and equipped as became the kaulua of an alii-nui, Lohiau set sail for Hawaii, accompanied by Hiiaka and her companions, and taking with him his high-priest, chief navigator, and the customary staff of personal attendants.
In a beautiful double canoe, flying the royal flag and outfitted like the kaulua of an alii-nui, Lohiau set off for Hawaii, accompanied by Hiiaka and her friends, along with his high priest, chief navigator, and the usual team of personal attendants.
Touching at Oahu, Hiiaka ascended the Kaala mountains, and saw that her beautiful lehua and hala groves near the beach of Puna, on the distant island of Hawaii, had been destroyed by a lava flow. Impatient at the long absence of Hiiaka, and jealous as well, Pele had in a fit of rage destroyed the beautiful sea-shore retreats of her faithful sister. She scarcely doubted that Hiiaka had dared to love Lohiau, and in her chambers of fire chafed for her return.
Touching down on Oahu, Hiiaka climbed the Kaala mountains and saw that her beautiful lehua and hala groves near the beach of Puna, on the faraway island of Hawaii, had been wiped out by a lava flow. Frustrated by Hiiaka's long absence and feeling jealous, Pele had, in a fit of rage, destroyed her sister's lovely seaside getaways. She hardly doubted that Hiiaka had dared to love Lohiau and burned with impatience for her return in her chambers of fire.
After bewailing her loss Hiiaka rejoined her companions, and Lohiau embarked for Hawaii. Landing at Kohala, the prince [491]ordered his attendants to remain there until his return, and started overland for Kilauea with Hiiaka and her two female companions. Before reaching the volcano Hiiaka learned something of the jealous rage of Pele, and finally saw from a distant eminence her dear friend Hopoe undergoing the cruel tortures of volcanic fire, near the beach of Puna, which ended in her being turned into stone.
After mourning her loss, Hiiaka rejoined her friends, and Lohiau set off for Hawaii. Once they landed at Kohala, the prince [__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__] instructed his attendants to wait there for his return and began the journey overland to Kilauea with Hiiaka and her two female friends. Before they reached the volcano, Hiiaka discovered some details about Pele's jealous rage and eventually saw from a distance her dear friend Hopoe suffering the harsh tortures of volcanic fire near the beach of Puna, which ultimately transformed her into stone.
Approaching the crater with apprehensions of further displays of Pele’s fury, Hiiaka sent Omeo and Pauo-palae in advance to announce to the goddess her return with Lohiau. In her wrath she ordered both of the women to be slain at once, and resolved to treat her lover in the same manner.
Approaching the crater with worries about more of Pele’s wrath, Hiiaka sent Omeo and Pauo-palae ahead to inform the goddess of her return with Lohiau. In her anger, she commanded that both women be killed immediately and decided to treat her lover the same way.
Aware of this heartless resolution, and unable to avert the execution of it, on their arrival at the verge of the crater Hiiaka threw her arms around the neck of the prince, whom she had learned to love without wrong to her sister, and, telling him of his impending fate, bade him a tender farewell.
Aware of this cruel decision, and powerless to stop it, upon reaching the edge of the crater, Hiiaka wrapped her arms around the prince's neck, someone she had come to love without betraying her sister. She informed him of his impending fate and said her heartfelt goodbye.
This scene was witnessed by Pele. Enraged beyond measure, she caused a gulf of molten lava to be opened between Hiiaka and the prince, and then ordered the instant destruction of Lohiau by fire.
This scene was seen by Pele. Furious beyond belief, she created a chasm of molten lava between Hiiaka and the prince, and then commanded Lohiau's immediate destruction by fire.
While the sisters of Pele were ascending the walls of the crater to execute her orders, Lohiau chanted a song to the goddess, avowing his innocence and pleading for mercy; but her rage was rekindled at the sound of his voice, and she turned a deaf ear to his entreaties.
While Pele's sisters were climbing the walls of the crater to carry out her orders, Lohiau sang a song to the goddess, declaring his innocence and begging for mercy; but her anger reignited at the sound of his voice, and she ignored his pleas.
Approaching Lohiau, and pitying him, the sisters merely touched the palms of his hands, which turned them into lava, and then retired. Observing this, Pele ordered them to return at once, under the penalty of her displeasure, and consume the body of her lover.
Approaching Lohiau and feeling sorry for him, the sisters just touched the palms of his hands, which turned into lava, and then stepped back. Seeing this, Pele commanded them to come back immediately or face her anger, and to consume the body of her lover.
Lohiau again appealed to Pele, so piteously that the trees around him wept with grief; but her only answer was an impatient signal to her sisters to resume their work of destruction. In his despair he turned to Hiiaka and implored her intercession, but she answered in agony that she could do nothing.
Lohiau begged Pele once more, so heartbreakingly that the trees nearby seemed to cry; but all she did was impatiently gesture to her sisters to continue their destruction. In his despair, he turned to Hiiaka, pleading for her help, but she responded in pain that there was nothing she could do.
The sisters returned to Lohiau, and reluctantly touched his feet, which became stone; then his knees; then his thighs; then his breast. By the power conferred upon her by Pele, and of which she had not yet been deprived, Hiiaka rendered the body [492]of the prince insensible to pain, and it was therefore without suffering that he felt his joints hardening into stone under the touch of his sympathizing executioners.
The sisters went back to Lohiau and, with some hesitation, touched his feet, which turned to stone; then his knees; then his thighs; then his chest. With the power given to her by Pele, which she still possessed, Hiiaka made the prince's body [__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]unable to feel pain, so he experienced no suffering as he felt his joints hardening into stone from the touch of his sympathetic executioners.
As the remainder of his body was about to be turned into lava, Hiiaka said to the prince:
As the rest of his body was about to turn into lava, Hiiaka said to the prince:
“Listen! When you die go to the leeward, and I will find you!”
“Listen! When you die, go to the leeward, and I’ll find you!”
The next moment Lohiau was a lifeless pillar of stone.
The next moment, Lohiau was just a lifeless pillar of stone.
Observing that the cruel work of her sister had been accomplished, and that all that remained of the shapely form of Lohiau was a black mass of lava, Hiiaka caused the earth to be opened at her feet, and started downward at once for the misty realm of Milu to overtake the soul of Lohiau, and, with the consent of the god of death, restore it to its body.
Seeing that her sister's ruthless task was complete, and that all that was left of Lohiau's once graceful form was a dark mass of lava, Hiiaka made the ground open up beneath her and descended immediately into the misty domain of Milu to catch up with Lohiau's soul and, with the god of death's permission, bring it back to his body.
Passing downward through each of the five spheres dividing the surface of the earth from the regions of Po, where Milu sits in state in the gloomy groves of death, Hiiaka finally stood in the presence of the august sovereign of the world of spirits.
Passing downward through each of the five spheres that separate the earth's surface from the regions of Po, where Milu sits in grandeur in the dark groves of the dead, Hiiaka finally stood in the presence of the esteemed ruler of the spirit world.
The king of death welcomed her to his dominions, and, in response to her inquiry, informed her that the soul of Lohiau had not yet reached the abode of spirits. Having no desire to return to earth, Hiiaka accepted the invitation of Milu, and, watching and waiting for the soul of Lohiau, remained for a time in the land of spirits.
The king of death welcomed her to his realm and, in answer to her question, told her that Lohiau's soul hadn't yet arrived in the spirit world. Not wanting to go back to earth, Hiiaka accepted Milu's invitation and stayed in the land of spirits for a while, watching and waiting for Lohiau's soul.
III.
The attendants of Lohiau remained in Kohala until they learned of his fate at the hands of Pele, when they returned to Kauai in the royal kaulua, and horrified the friends of the prince by relating to them the story of his death.
The attendants of Lohiau stayed in Kohala until they found out what happened to him at the hands of Pele. They then returned to Kauai in the royal kaulua and shocked the prince's friends by telling them the story of his death.
Enraged and desperate, Paoa, the faithful and sturdy chief to whom Lohiau had confided the government of his kingdom, started at once for Hawaii with a small party of retainers, determined, even at the sacrifice of his life, to denounce the powers that had slain his royal friend.
Enraged and desperate, Paoa, the loyal and strong chief to whom Lohiau had entrusted the leadership of his kingdom, set off immediately for Hawaii with a small group of followers, determined to expose the forces that had killed his royal friend, even if it meant sacrificing his own life.
Landing on the coast of Puna, he ascended to the crater of Kilauea, and, standing upon the brink of the seething lake of fire, denounced the cruelty of Pele and defied her power. He contemptuously threw to her offerings unfit for sacrifice, and stigmatized [493]all the volcanic deities as evil spirits who had been driven with Kanaloa from the presence of Kane and the society of the gods.
Landing on the coast of Puna, he climbed up to the crater of Kilauea, and, standing on the edge of the bubbling lake of fire, condemned the cruelty of Pele and challenged her power. He scornfully tossed unsuitable offerings to her and labeled all the volcanic deities as evil spirits who had been cast out with Kanaloa from the presence of Kane and the assembly of the gods.
Paoa expected to be destroyed at once, and recklessly courted and awaited death. The brothers and sisters of Pele, with their several agencies of destruction, were momentarily expecting an order from the goddess to consume the audacious mortal in his tracks. Never before had such words of reproach and defiance been uttered by human tongue, and they could not doubt that swift vengeance would be hurled upon the offender.
Paoa expected to be destroyed immediately and boldly welcomed death. Pele's brothers and sisters, each with their own destructive powers, were just waiting for the goddess to give the order to eliminate the audacious mortal right there. Never before had such words of criticism and defiance been spoken by a human, and they knew that swift revenge would come down hard on the offender.
But Pele refused to harm the desperate champion of Lohiau, for circumstances had convinced her of the innocence of Hiiaka and the fidelity of the prince. Therefore, instead of punishing the brave Paoa, Pele and her relatives received him with friendship, gently chided him for his words of insult and defiance, and disarmed his anger by forgiving the offence.
But Pele wouldn’t hurt the desperate champion of Lohiau, because she believed Hiiaka was innocent and the prince was loyal. So instead of punishing the brave Paoa, Pele and her family welcomed him warmly, lightly scolded him for his insults and challenges, and calmed his anger by forgiving the offense.
Satisfied of the great wrong she had done her faithful sister, and longing for her presence again in the chambers of the crater, Pele restored Pauo-palae and Omeo to life, and, endowing the latter with supernatural powers, sent her down to the regions of the dead to induce Hiiaka to return to earth.
Satisfied with the great wrong she had done to her loyal sister, and eager for her presence again in the chambers of the crater, Pele brought Pauo-palae and Omeo back to life. She gave Omeo supernatural powers and sent her down to the underworld to persuade Hiiaka to return to earth.
Descending through the opening made by Hiiaka, Omeo was stopped at the intervening spheres, owing to the aspects of mortality which she unconsciously retained, and encountered many difficulties in reaching the kingdom of Milu. Arriving there and making known the object of her visit, Omeo was neither assisted nor encouraged in her search for Hiiaka. Milu was not anxious to part with his distinguished guest, and attempted to deceive Omeo by intimating that Hiiaka had returned to earth and was then on a visit to some of the relatives of her family in Kahiki.
Descending through the opening made by Hiiaka, Omeo was stopped at the intervening spheres due to the aspects of mortality she unconsciously retained, and she faced many difficulties in reaching the kingdom of Milu. When she arrived and explained the purpose of her visit, Omeo neither received help nor encouragement in her search for Hiiaka. Milu was not eager to let go of his distinguished guest and tried to mislead Omeo by suggesting that Hiiaka had returned to earth and was visiting some of her family relatives in Kahiki.
Omeo was about to return, disappointed, to earth, when she discovered Hiiaka as she was listlessly emerging from a thick grove of trees where she had spent the most of her time since her arrival there in quest of the soul of Lohiau. Their greeting was most friendly, and when Omeo informed her of what had occurred at the volcano since her departure, she consented to leave the land of death and rejoin her relatives at the crater.
Omeo was about to head back to Earth, feeling let down, when she spotted Hiiaka emerging from a dense thicket of trees, where she had been spending most of her time since arriving in search of Lohiau's soul. Their greeting was warm, and when Omeo told her what had happened at the volcano since she left, Hiiaka agreed to leave the land of death and reunite with her family at the crater.
The brothers and sisters of Hiiaka were overjoyed at her return, and Pele welcomed her with assurances of restored affection. [494]Paoa was still there. He was at once recognized by Hiiaka, and the next day she descended from Kilauea and embarked with him for Kauai in search of the soul of Lohiau.
The siblings of Hiiaka were thrilled to see her back, and Pele greeted her with promises of renewed love. [__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]Paoa was still there. Hiiaka recognized him immediately, and the next day she left Kilauea and set off with him for Kauai to look for Lohiau's soul.
The canoe of Paoa had scarcely left the shores of Puna before a strange craft swept in from the ocean, and was beached at the spot from which Hiiaka and her companion had embarked less than half a day before. It was a huge cowrie shell, dazzling in the brilliancy of its colors, and capable of indefinite expansion. Its masts were of ivory, and its sails were mats of the whiteness of milk. Both seemed to be mere ornaments, however, since the shell moved quite as swiftly through the water without wind as with it.
The canoe of Paoa had barely departed from the shores of Puna when a strange boat appeared from the ocean and landed at the same spot where Hiiaka and her companion had set off less than half a day earlier. It was a massive cowrie shell, shining brightly with its vibrant colors, and capable of expanding without limits. Its masts were made of ivory, and its sails were mats as white as milk. Both seemed more like decorations, though, since the shell moved just as quickly through the water with or without wind.
The sole occupant of the little vessel was the god Kanemilohai. He was a relative of the Pele family, and came from Kahiki on a visit to the volcanic deities of Hawaii. Remaining two or three days with Pele, and learning all that had happened to the family since they left Kahiki, the god started for Kauai to extend a greeting to Hiiaka.
The only person on the small boat was the god Kanemilohai. He was related to the Pele family and had come from Kahiki to visit the volcanic deities of Hawaii. After staying for two or three days with Pele and catching up on everything that had happened to the family since they left Kahiki, the god set off for Kauai to say hello to Hiiaka.
Proceeding in a direct route, when about midway between the two islands the god caught the soul of Lohiau, which had misunderstood the final directions of Hiiaka and was on its way to Kauai. Not having gone to the land of spirits, it had been searching everywhere for Hiiaka, and had at last taken flight for Kauai, when it was intercepted by Kanemilohai.
Proceeding directly, when they were about halfway between the two islands, the god captured Lohiau's soul, which had misinterpreted Hiiaka's final instructions and was heading to Kauai. Not having gone to the spirit world, it had been searching everywhere for Hiiaka and had finally taken off for Kauai when it was intercepted by Kanemilohai.
The god returned to the crater with the captured spirit, and, finding the pillar of stone into which Lohiau had been turned, restored the prince to life. As he recovered his consciousness and opened his eyes he recognized Pele standing before him. Apprehensive of further persecution, he was about to appeal to her again for mercy when she said, in a tone as tender as that in which she had first replied to his welcome on the beach at Kaena:
The god came back to the crater with the captured spirit and, seeing the stone pillar that Lohiau had turned into, brought the prince back to life. As he regained consciousness and opened his eyes, he saw Pele standing in front of him. Worried about more trouble, he was about to ask her for mercy again when she spoke in a voice as gentle as when she first responded to his greeting on the beach at Kaena:
“Fear me no longer. I have been unjust to you as well as to Hiiaka. After what I have done I cannot expect your love. Find Hiiaka and give it to her. She loves you, and knows how to be kind to a mortal.”
“Don’t be afraid of me anymore. I’ve been unfair to you and to Hiiaka. After what I’ve done, I can’t expect you to love me. Go find Hiiaka and give her your love. She loves you and knows how to treat a mortal with kindness.”
Lohiau would have thanked the goddess, but when he looked again she was gone, and in her place stood Kanemilohai, who told him to take the shell vessel he would find at the beach below, and proceed to Kauai, where he would probably meet Hiiaka and his friend Paoa. [495]
Lohiau would have thanked the goddess, but when he looked again she was gone, and in her place stood Kanemilohai, who told him to take the shell vessel he would find at the beach below, and head to Kauai, where he would likely meet Hiiaka and his friend Paoa. [__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]
Lohiau hesitated, for there was something in the appearance of Kanemilohai that inspired a feeling of awe.
Lohiau paused, as there was something about Kanemilohai that evoked a sense of awe.
“Go, and fear nothing,” said the god, who knew the thoughts of the prince. “The shell was not made in the sea or by human hands, but it will bear you safely on your journey, no matter how rough the waves or great its burden.”
“Go, and don’t be afraid,” said the god, who understood the prince’s thoughts. “The shell wasn’t created in the sea or by human hands, but it will carry you safely on your journey, no matter how rough the waves or heavy its load.”
“The coast of Puna is a day’s journey in length,” said Lohiau. “Where and how will I be able to find the shell?”
“The coast of Puna is a day's journey long,” said Lohiau. “Where and how will I find the shell?”
“Hasten to the shore at Keauhou,” returned the god, “and you will see me there.”
“Hurry to the shore at Keauhou,” the god replied, “and you’ll find me there.”
Arriving at the beach designated, the prince was surprised to find Kanemilohai already there; but he found something more to excite his wonder when the god took from a crevice in the rocks, where it had been secreted, a shell no larger than the palm of his hand, and passed it to him with the announcement that it was the barge in which he was to sail for Kauai.
Arriving at the designated beach, the prince was surprised to find Kanemilohai already there; but he was even more amazed when the god pulled a shell no larger than the palm of his hand from a crevice in the rocks, where it had been hidden, and handed it to him, saying it would be the boat he would use to sail to Kauai.
Lohiau examined the little toy with something of a feeling of amusement, but more of perplexity, and was about to return it to his strange companion, when the latter instructed him to place the shell in the edge of the waters. The prince obeyed, and instantly found before him the beautiful craft in which the god had made his journey from Kahiki.
Lohiau looked at the little toy with a mix of amusement and confusion, and was about to give it back to his unusual companion when the latter told him to put the shell at the water's edge. The prince followed the instruction and immediately saw the beautiful boat that the god used to travel from Kahiki.
The power being conferred upon him by the god to contract or extend the proportions of the shell at his will, Lohiau entered the enchanted vessel of pink and pearl, and, directing its course by simply pointing his finger, was swiftly borne out into the ocean.
The power given to him by the god to shrink or enlarge the shell whenever he wanted, Lohiau stepped into the enchanted vessel of pink and pearl and, by just pointing his finger, quickly took off into the ocean.
Rounding the southern cape of Hawaii, Lohiau thought of proceeding directly to Kauai; but he pointed too far to the northward, and the next morning sighted Oahu. Passing the headland of Leahi, he turned and entered the harbor of Hou. Landing, he contracted to the dimensions of a limpet, and secreted in a niche in the rocks, his obedient barge, and then proceeded to the village, where, he learned to his great joy, Hiiaka and Paoa were tarrying on a visit. Hou was at that time the scene of great merriment and feasting. It had become the temporary residence of the alii-nui, and high-chiefs, kahunas, adventurers, and noted surf-riders and hula performers had congregated there from all parts of the island.
Rounding the southern tip of Hawaii, Lohiau considered heading straight for Kauai; however, he veered too far north and spotted Oahu the next morning. After passing the headland of Leahi, he changed direction and entered the harbor of Hou. Once he landed, he shrank to the size of a limpet and hid in a crevice in the rocks, stashing his obedient boat there, and then made his way to the village, where he was thrilled to find that Hiiaka and Paoa were visiting. At that time, Hou was filled with joy and festivities. It had become the temporary home of the alii-nui, and high chiefs, kahunas, adventurers, along with famous surf riders and hula dancers, had gathered there from all over the island.
Ascertaining that an entertainment of great magnificence was [496]to be given that evening by a distinguished chiefess in honor of Hiiaka and her companion, Lohiau resolved to be present. Had he made himself known he would have been entitled to the consideration of the highest—would have been, indeed, the guest of the alii-nui, with the right of entrance anywhere; but fancy prompted him to hide his rank and appear in disguise among the revelers.
Realizing that there was going to be a grand entertainment that evening hosted by a notable chiefess in honor of Hiiaka and her companion, Lohiau decided to attend. If he had revealed his identity, he would have received the utmost respect and would have been the guest of the alii-nui, with access to any place. But his imagination led him to conceal his status and blend in among the partygoers.
Early in the evening the grounds of the chiefess were lighted with hundreds of torches, and under a broad pavilion, festooned and scented with fragrant vines and flowers, the favored guests, enwreathed and crowned with leaf and blossom, partook without stint of such delicacies as the land and sea produced. After the feast, song and music filled the air, and bands of gaily-decked dancers kept step among the flaring torches, while around the doors of the mansion white-bearded bards chanted wild legends of the past and sang the mele-inoas of the hostess and her distinguished guests.
Early in the evening, the chiefess's grounds were lit up with hundreds of torches, and under a large pavilion, decorated and filled with fragrant vines and flowers, the honored guests, adorned with leaves and blossoms, enjoyed an abundance of delicious food from both land and sea. After the feast, the air was filled with music and song, as groups of brightly dressed dancers moved in rhythm among the flickering torches, while outside the mansion, elderly bards sang mythical stories from the past and performed the mele-inoas for the hostess and her esteemed guests.
In the midst of this inspiring revelry the guests divided into groups as their several tastes suggested. Some strolled out among the dancers, others listened to the stories of the bards, and one party, including Hiiaka, Paoa and the hostess, entered the mansion to engage in the game of kilu. It was a pastime of which singing or chanting was a part, and the chiefess was noted for her proficiency in the popular amusement.
In the middle of this inspiring celebration, the guests broke into groups based on their individual preferences. Some wandered among the dancers, others enjoyed the tales of the storytellers, and one group, which included Hiiaka, Paoa, and the hostess, went into the mansion to play the game of kilu. It was a pastime that involved singing or chanting, and the chiefess was well-known for her skill in this popular activity.
Lohiau entered the grounds at the close of the feast, and stood watching the festivities when the party of kilu players retired to the mansion. He had turned inward the feathers of his mantle of royal yellow, and, with his long hair falling over his face and shoulders, was readily mistaken for a kahuna.
Lohiau walked onto the grounds at the end of the feast and stood watching the celebrations as the group of kilu players headed back to the mansion. He had tucked in the feathers of his royal yellow cloak, and with his long hair falling over his face and shoulders, he could easily be mistaken for a kahuna.
Quite a number of persons thronged around the kilu players to witness the game, and Lohiau entered the room without hindrance. Approaching the players, he screened himself behind the kapas of two old chiefs who were so intently regarding the performance that they did not observe him.
A crowd of people gathered around the kilu players to watch the game, and Lohiau walked into the room without any trouble. He moved closer to the players, hiding himself behind the kapas of two old chiefs who were so focused on the performance that they didn’t notice him.
The game progressed until the kilu fell to Hiiaka, and as she threw it she chanted a song of her own composing, in which the name of Lohiau was mentioned with tenderness. The song ceased, and from behind the spectators came the answering voice of the prince. As he sang he brushed back the hair from his handsome face and turned outward the yellow feathers of his [497]mantle. The throng divided, the singer advanced, and before the players stood Lohiau, the prince of Kauai.
The game went on until the kilu was thrown to Hiiaka. As she tossed it, she sang a song she had written herself, mentioning the name Lohiau with affection. When the song ended, a voice from the crowd responded—it was the prince. He sang while brushing his hair back from his handsome face and adjusting the yellow feathers of his [__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]mantle. The crowd parted, the singer moved forward, and there stood Lohiau, the prince of Kauai, before the players.
He was recognized at once. Hiiaka threw herself into his arms, and the faithful Paoa wept with joy. Informed of the rank of the distinguished visitor, the guests vied with each other in showing him honor, and the festivities were renewed and carried far into the night.
He was recognized immediately. Hiiaka jumped into his arms, and the loyal Paoa cried tears of joy. Once they learned about the status of the important guest, the attendees competed with one another to honor him, and the celebrations started up again and went late into the night.
Learning the next day of the presence near his court of the sovereign of Kauai, the alii-nui would have entertained him in a manner befitting the high rank of both; but Lohiau was anxious to return to his people, and set sail for Kauai at once in the shell barge of Kanemilohai, expanded to adequate dimensions, taking with him Hiiaka and Paoa.
Learning the next day that the King of Kauai was near his court, the alii-nui would have welcomed him in a way that matched the high status of both. However, Lohiau was eager to return to his people, so he immediately set sail for Kauai in the expanded shell barge of Kanemilohai, bringing along Hiiaka and Paoa.
Although Hiiaka soon after returned to Hawaii and effected a complete reconciliation with her sister, while Lohiau lived she spent much of her time in Kauai. Hopoe was restored to life, and Omeo, or Wahineomeo, was given an immortal form for what she had done, and became thereafter the mediator between the volcanic deities. [499]
Although Hiiaka soon returned to Hawaii and fully reconciled with her sister, she spent much of her time in Kauai while Lohiau was alive. Hopoe was brought back to life, and Omeo, or Wahineomeo, was given an immortal form for her actions, becoming the mediator between the volcanic deities. [__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]
Kahavari, Leader of Puna.
[500]
[__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]
CHARACTERS.
- Pele, goddess of volcanoes.
- Kahavari, chief of Puna.
- Ahua, companion of Kahavari.
-
Kapoho and children of Kahavari. Kaohe,
[501]
[__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]
KAHAVARI, CHIEF OF PUNA.
Kahavari, Chief of Puna.
A STORY OF THE VENGEANCE OF THE GODDESS PELE.
A STORY ABOUT THE REVENGE OF THE GODDESS PELE.
Between Cape Kumakahi, the extreme eastern point of the island of Hawaii, and the great lava flow of 1840, which burst forth apparently from a long subterranean channel connecting with the crater of Kilauea, and went down to the sea at Nanawale over villages and groves of palms, is a small historic district which, notwithstanding the repeated volcanic disturbances with which it has been convulsed in the past, the chasms with which it has been rent, and the smoke and ashes that have shut out the light of the sun and driven its people to the protection of their temples, still possesses many fertile nooks and natural attractions. Within a few miles of each other, not far inland, are a number of extinct craters; but the rains are abundant in Puna, and spring is eternal, and the vegetation grows rank above hidden patches of lava, and is constantly stretching and deepening its mantle of green over the vitreous rivers of Kilauea and the lower and lesser volcanic vents clinging to its base like so many cauterized ulcers.
Between Cape Kumakahi, the farthest eastern point of the island of Hawaii, and the massive lava flow of 1840, which erupted seemingly from a long underground channel linked to the crater of Kilauea and flowed down to the sea at Nanawale over villages and palm groves, lies a small historical district. Despite the ongoing volcanic eruptions that have shaken it in the past, the fractures that have scarred the land, and the smoke and ash that have blocked out sunlight, forcing its people to seek refuge in their temples, it still has many fertile spots and natural attractions. Within just a few miles of each other, not far inland, are several extinct craters; however, Puna enjoys abundant rainfall, and spring is everlasting, allowing the vegetation to thrive above hidden lava patches, continuously spreading its vibrant green cover over the glassy rivers of Kilauea and the smaller volcanic vents clinging to its base like cauterized wounds.
The valleys are green in that part of Puna now, and there the banana and the bread-fruit grow, and the ohia and pineapple scent the air. But so has it not always been, for the mango ripens over fields of buried lava, and the palms grow tall from the refilled chasms of dead streams of fire. The depression of Kapoho, now sweet with tropical odors, marks the site of a sunken mountain, and where to-day sleep the quiet waters of a lake once boiled a sea of liquid lava, in a basin broader, perhaps, than the mighty caldron of Kilauea.
The valleys in that part of Puna are green now, where bananas and breadfruit grow, and the scent of ʻōhiʻa and pineapple fills the air. But it hasn’t always been this way, as mangoes ripen over fields of buried lava, and tall palms rise from the filled-in chasms of extinct lava flows. The depression of Kapoho, now fragrant with tropical scents, marks the spot of a sunken mountain, and where calm lake waters now rest, there once churned a sea of liquid lava, in a basin that might have been wider than the massive caldron of Kilauea.
We are now about to speak of one of the many irruptions which at intervals in the past poured their desolating torrents of fire through the district, alternately loved and hated by Pele, the dreadful goddess of the volcanoes. In connection with it tradition [502]has brought down a tale combining elements of simplicity and grandeur strikingly characteristic of the mythological legends of Polynesia—legends equaling the Norse in audacity, but lacking the motive and connecting causes of the Greek. They are simply legendary epics, beginning in caprice and abruptly ending, in many instances, in grandest tumult. They are like chapters torn from a lost volume—patches of disturbed elements and gigantic forms and energies clandestinely cut from a passing panorama and placed in the foreground of strange and inharmonious conditions. They embrace gods reminding us of Thor, monsters more hideous than Polyphemus, demi-gods mighty as the son of Thetis, and kings with strains reaching back to the loins of gods; but in motive and action they were independent of, and not unfrequently hostile to, each other. No celestial synod shaped their course or moved them to effort, and to no authority higher than their individual wills were they usually responsible. Many of them were created with no reference to the necessity of their being or the maintenance of divine respect or authority, and not a few seem to have been the creations of accident.
We are now about to discuss one of the many eruptions that, at various times in the past, unleashed devastating torrents of fire across the area, loved and hated in equal measure by Pele, the terrifying goddess of the volcanoes. Tradition [__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__] has passed down a story that blends elements of simplicity and grandeur, which is a striking feature of Polynesian mythology—legends that match the Norse in boldness but lack the purpose and connections found in Greek tales. They are essentially legendary epics, starting with whim and often finishing abruptly in great chaos. They resemble chapters ripped from a lost book—snippets of unsettled elements and enormous forms and energies secretly extracted from a fleeting scene and placed against a backdrop of unusual and discordant circumstances. They include gods that remind us of Thor, monsters more grotesque than Polyphemus, demi-gods as powerful as the son of Thetis, and kings with lineages tracing back to the gods; yet in intention and actions, they often acted independently of, and sometimes against, one another. No divine council directed their paths or inspired their actions, and they were typically answerable only to their own individual wills. Many of them were created without consideration for their necessity or the preservation of divine respect or authority, and several appear to have been born from sheer chance.
As an example the demi-god Maui may be mentioned. As told by tradition, his principal abode was Hawaii, although his facilities for visiting the other islands of the group will be considered ample when it is stated that he could step from one to another, even from Oahu to Kauai, a distance of seventy miles. When he bathed—and bathing was one of his greatest delights—his feet trod the deepest basins of the ocean and his hair was moistened with the vapor of the clouds. Neither his creator nor the purpose of his creation is mentioned; but he was blest with a wife with proportions, it is presumed, somewhat in keeping with his own, and as an evidence of their attachment it is related that at one time he reached up and seized the sun, and held it for some hours motionless in the heavens, to enable his industrious spouse to complete the manufacture of a piece of kapa upon which she was engaged.
For example, the demigod Maui is often mentioned. According to tradition, his main home was Hawaii, although he had no trouble visiting the other islands in the group; he could actually step from one to another, even from Oahu to Kauai, a distance of seventy miles. When he bathed—and bathing was one of his favorite pastimes—his feet touched the deepest parts of the ocean, and his hair was dampened by the mist of the clouds. There’s no mention of his creator or why he was created, but he was blessed with a wife who was presumably a good match for him in size, and as a sign of their bond, it’s said that at one point he reached up and grabbed the sun, holding it still in the sky for several hours so his hardworking wife could finish making a piece of kapa that she was working on.
And Kana was another gigantic being of similar proportions. He, too, was partial to Hawaii, and could step from island to island, and frequently stood for his amusement with one foot on Oahu and the other either on Maui or Kauai. Tradition may have confounded these two monsters; but, as Kana was wifeless, [503]we are constrained to regard them as distinct; and, being without the care of a wife, he was enabled to devote his entire attention to himself and the inhabitants of the islands crawling at his feet. Hence, when the king of Kahiki, who was the keeper of the sun, shut its light from the Hawaiians for some trivial offence, Kana waded the ocean to the home of the vindictive monarch, and by threats compelled him to restore the light to the Hawaiian group. This done, he waded back and hung his mantle to dry on Mauna Kea, which was then an active volcano. Another demi-god of the same name is also referred to in some of the early meles of Hawaii. He was the son of Hina, who went with his brother to the rescue of their mother, who had been during their infancy abducted by the son of the king of Molokai. He was endowed by his grandmother, a sorceress from one of the southern islands, with the faculty of so elongating and contracting his person as to be able to pass through the deepest waters with his head at all times above the surface.
And Kana was another enormous being of similar size. He also had a fondness for Hawaii and could hop from island to island, often standing for fun with one foot on Oahu and the other on either Maui or Kauai. Tradition might have mixed up these two giants; however, since Kana didn’t have a wife, [__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__] we have to see them as distinct. Being single allowed him to focus entirely on himself and the islanders below him. So, when the king of Kahiki, who controlled the sun, blocked its light from the Hawaiians over a minor issue, Kana waded across the ocean to confront the angry king and, through threats, forced him to restore the sunlight to the Hawaiian islands. After doing this, he waded back and hung his cloak to dry on Mauna Kea, which was then an active volcano. Another demi-god with the same name is mentioned in some of the early meles of Hawaii. He was the son of Hina, who teamed up with his brother to rescue their mother, who had been kidnapped by the son of the king of Molokai during their childhood. He was gifted by his grandmother, a sorceress from one of the southern islands, with the ability to stretch and shrink his body so he could swim through the deepest waters while keeping his head above the surface at all times.
The shadows of these and other monsters are seen far back in the past; but human beings of gigantic proportions, of natural birth and claiming no connection with the gods, are mentioned in Hawaiian folk-lore as having lived as late as the beginning of the sixteenth century. Thus, during the reign of Umi, king of Hawaii, whose romantic ascent to the throne is the theme of chant and song, and to whom the past and present dynasties of united Hawaii trace their descent, lived the giant Maukaleoleo. He was one of Umi’s warriors, and must have been a mighty host in himself. His measure in feet is not recorded, but he stood upon the ground and plucked cocoanuts from the tallest trees, and once, without wetting his loins, strode out into six fathoms of water and saved the life of his chief. As the traditions relating to Umi are quite elaborate and circumstantial, the existence of Maukaleoleo cannot well be doubted, however greatly we may feel disposed to curtail his proportions.
The shadows of these and other monsters reach far back into the past; however, stories in Hawaiian folklore mention human beings of enormous size, born naturally and not claiming any connection to the gods, who lived as recently as the early sixteenth century. During the reign of Umi, the king of Hawaii—whose romantic rise to power is the subject of chants and songs, and to whom both the past and present ruling families of a united Hawaii trace their lineage—there lived a giant named Maukaleoleo. He was one of Umi’s warriors and must have been a formidable presence on his own. His height isn't recorded, but he could stand on the ground and pick coconuts from the tallest trees, and once, without getting his waist wet, he waded into six fathoms of water to save his chief's life. Since the traditions surrounding Umi are detailed and specific, it’s hard to doubt the existence of Maukaleoleo, no matter how much we might want to downplay his size.
But, in groping among these monsters of the Hawaiian past, we have been led somewhat from the story of the irruption in Puna, to which reference has been made. However, as pertinent to it, and to the goddess whose wrath invoked it, it may be mentioned that many centuries ago a family of gods and goddesses came to Hawaii from Tahiti and took possession of the volcanic mountains of that island. The family consisted of five [504]brothers and nine sisters, of which Pele was the principal deity. The others possessed specific powers and functions, such as controlling the fires, smoke, steam, explosions, etc., of the volcanoes under their supervision. Although they frequently dwelt in other volcanoes, their principal and favorite abode was the crater of Kilauea. Almost without exception they were destructive and merciless. Temples were erected to Pele in every district menaced by volcanic disturbance, and offerings of fruits, animals, and sometimes of human beings were laid upon her altars and thrown into the crater to secure her favor or placate her wrath. In the legend of “The Apotheosis of Pele” a more extended reference is made to the goddess and her family.
But while exploring these terrifying figures from Hawaii's past, we've somewhat strayed from the story of the eruption in Puna, which we mentioned earlier. However, related to it and to the goddess whose anger triggered it, it's worth noting that many centuries ago, a family of gods and goddesses arrived in Hawaii from Tahiti and claimed the volcanic mountains of the island. The family included five [__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]brothers and nine sisters, with Pele being the main deity. The others had specific powers and roles, such as controlling the fires, smoke, steam, explosions, and other volcanic activities. Although they often resided in different volcanoes, their primary and favorite home was the crater of Kilauea. Nearly all of them were destructive and ruthless. Temples were built for Pele in every area threatened by volcanic activity, and offerings of fruits, animals, and sometimes even humans were placed on her altars or thrown into the crater to win her favor or calm her anger. In the legend of “The Apotheosis of Pele,” there is a more detailed account of the goddess and her family.
With this knowledge of the power and disposition of Pele, the reader will be prepared for the story of the exhibition of her wrath in Puna, which will now be related nearly in the language of tradition. The event occurred during the reign of Kahoukapu, who from about 1340 to 1380 was the alii-nui, or governing chief, of Hawaii. The chief of the district of Puna was Kahavari, a young noble distinguished for his strength, courage and manly accomplishments. How he came to be chief or governor of Puna is not stated. As his father and sister lived on Oahu, he was probably a native of that island, and may have been advanced to his position through military service rendered the Hawaiian king, since it was customary in those days, as it was at later periods, for young men of martial tastes to seek adventure and employment at arms with the kings and chiefs of neighboring islands.
With this understanding of Pele's power and temperament, the reader will be ready for the story of her wrath exhibited in Puna, which will now be told mostly in traditional language. This event happened during the reign of Kahoukapu, who was the governing chief of Hawaii from about 1340 to 1380. The chief of the Puna district was Kahavari, a young noble known for his strength, bravery, and skilled achievements. The details of how he became chief or governor of Puna are not mentioned. Since his father and sister lived on Oahu, he was likely from that island and might have been promoted to his position due to military service to the Hawaiian king. It was common back then, as it was in later times, for young men with a taste for adventure to seek opportunities and employment in arms with the kings and chiefs of nearby islands.
The grass-thatched mansion of the young chief was near Kapoho, where his wife lived with their two children, Paupoulu and Kaohe; and at Kukii, no great distance away, dwelt his old mother, then on a visit to her distinguished son. As his taro lands were large and fertile, and he had fish-ponds on the sea-shore, he entertained with prodigality, and the people of Puna thought there was no chief like him in all Hawaii.
The grass-roofed house of the young chief was close to Kapoho, where his wife lived with their two kids, Paupoulu and Kaohe; and nearby in Kukii lived his elderly mother, who was visiting her famous son. Since his taro fields were extensive and fertile, and he had fish ponds by the ocean, he hosted lavishly, and the people of Puna believed there was no chief like him in all of Hawaii.
It was at the time of the monthly festival of Lono. The day was beautiful. The trade-winds were bending the leaves of the palms and scattering the spray from the breakers chasing each other over the reef. A holua contest had been announced between the stalwart young chief and his favorite friend and companion, Ahua, and a large concourse of men, women and children [505]had assembled at the foot of the hill to witness the exciting pastime. They brought with them drums, ohes, ulilis, rattling gourds and other musical instruments, and while they awaited the coming of the contestants all frolicked as if they were children—frolicked as was their way before the white man came to tell them they were nearly naked, and that life was too serious a thing to be frittered away in enjoyment. They ate ohias, cocoanuts and bananas under the palms, and chewed the pith of sugar-cane. They danced, sang and laughed at the hula and other sports of the children, and grew nervous with enthusiasm when their bards chanted the meles of by-gone years.
It was the time of the monthly festival of Lono. The day was beautiful. The trade winds were rustling the palm leaves and sending mist from the waves crashing over the reef. A holua contest had been announced between the strong young chief and his close friend, Ahua, and a large crowd of men, women, and children [__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__] had gathered at the foot of the hill to watch the thrilling event. They brought drums, ohes, ulilis, rattling gourds, and other musical instruments, and while they waited for the contestants, they all played around like children—just as they used to before the white man showed up to tell them they were nearly naked and that life was too serious to be wasted on fun. They ate ohias, coconuts, and bananas under the palms, and chewed on sugar cane. They danced, sang, and laughed at the hula and other games of the kids, growing excited and nervous when their poets recited the meles of past years.
The game of holua consists in sliding down a sometimes long but always steep hill on a narrow sledge from six to twelve feet in length, called a papa. The light and polished runners, bent upward at the front, are bound quite closely together, with cross-bars for the hands and feet. With a run at the top of the sliding track, slightly smoothed and sometimes strewn with rushes, the rider throws himself face downward on the narrow papa and dashes headlong down the hill. As the sledge is not more than six or eight inches in width, with more than as many feet in length, one of the principal difficulties of the descent is in keeping it under the rider; the other, of course, is in guiding it; but long practice is required to master the subtleties of either. Kahavari was an adept with the papa, and so was Ahua. Rare sport was therefore expected, and the people of the neighborhood assembled almost in a body to witness it.
The game of holua involves sliding down a sometimes long but always steep hill on a narrow sled that is six to twelve feet long, called a papa. The light, polished runners, which curve upward at the front, are held tightly together with crossbars for hands and feet. Starting from the top of a slightly smoothed sliding track, often covered with rushes, the rider throws themselves face-down on the narrow papa and speeds down the hill. Since the sled is only six or eight inches wide and much longer, one of the main challenges of the descent is keeping it underneath the rider; the other is steering it. However, mastering either skill takes a lot of practice. Kahavari was skilled with the papa, and so was Ahua. Therefore, a thrilling event was anticipated, and the local people gathered in large numbers to watch.
Finally appearing at the foot of the hill, Kahavari and his companion were heartily cheered by their good-natured auditors. Their papas were carried by attendants. The chief smiled upon the assemblage, and as he struck his tall spear into the ground and divested his broad shoulders of the kihei covering them, the wagers of fruit and pigs were three to one that he would reach the bottom first, although Ahua was expert with the papa, and but a month before had beaten the champion of Kau on his own ground.
Finally reaching the bottom of the hill, Kahavari and his companion were warmly welcomed by their cheerful audience. Their papas were carried by attendants. The chief smiled at the crowd, and as he planted his tall spear into the ground and removed the kihei from his broad shoulders, bets of fruit and pigs were three to one that he would get to the bottom first, even though Ahua was skilled with the papa and had just a month earlier defeated the champion of Kau on his home turf.
Taking their sledges under their arms, the contestants laughingly mounted the hill with firm, strong strides, neither thinking of resting until the top was gained. Stopping for a moment preparatory to the descent, a comely-looking woman stepped out from behind a clump of undergrowth and bowed before them. Little attention was paid to her until she approached still nearer [506]and boldly challenged Kahavari to contest the holua with her instead of Ahua. Exchanging a smile of amusement with his companion, the chief scanned the lithe and shapely figure of the woman for a moment, and then exclaimed, more in astonishment than in anger: “What! with a woman?”
Taking their sledges under their arms, the contestants laughed as they climbed the hill with strong, steady strides, not considering a break until they reached the top. Just before they were about to go down, a good-looking woman stepped out from behind some bushes and bowed to them. They didn’t pay her much attention until she came closer [__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__] and boldly challenged Kahavari to compete in the holua against her instead of Ahua. Exchanging an amused smile with his companion, the chief examined the woman's athletic and attractive figure for a moment and then exclaimed, more in surprise than in anger: “What! A woman?”
“And why not with a woman, if she is your superior and you lack not the courage?” was the calm rejoinder.
“And why not with a woman, if she’s your superior and you have the courage?” was the calm reply.
“You are bold, woman,” returned the chief, with something of a frown. “What know you of the papa?”
“You're pretty bold, woman,” replied the chief, somewhat frowning. “What do you know about the papa?”
“Enough to reach the bottom of the hill in front of the chief of Puna,” was the prompt and defiant answer.
“Enough to reach the bottom of the hill in front of the chief of Puna,” was the quick and challenging response.
“Is it so, indeed? Then take the papa and we will see!” said Kahavari, with an angry look which did not seem to disturb the woman in the least.
“Is that really true? Then grab the papa and we'll find out!” said Kahavari, with an angry expression that didn't seem to bother the woman at all.
At a motion from the chief, Ahua handed his papa to the woman, and the next moment Kahavari, with the strange contestant closely behind him, was dashing down the hill. On, on they went, around and over rocks, at break-neck speed; but for a moment the woman lost her balance, and Kahavari reached the end of the course a dozen paces in advance.
At a signal from the chief, Ahua handed his papa to the woman, and the next moment, Kahavari, with the strange competitor right behind him, was racing down the hill. They continued on, weaving around and over rocks at breakneck speed; however, for a moment, the woman lost her balance, and Kahavari crossed the finish line a dozen steps ahead.
Music and shouting followed the victory of the chief, and, scowling upon the exultant multitude, the woman pointed to the hill, silently challenging the victor to another trial. They mounted the hill without a word, and turned for another start.
Music and cheering erupted after the chief's victory, and, glaring at the celebrating crowd, the woman pointed to the hill, silently daring the winner to another challenge. They climbed the hill without a word and prepared for another go.
“Stop!” said the woman, while a strange light flashed in her eyes. “Your papa is better than mine. If you would act fairly, let us now exchange!”
“Stop!” said the woman, with a strange light flashing in her eyes. “Your dad is better than mine. If you want to be fair, let’s swap now!”
“Why should I exchange?” replied the chief, hastily. “You are neither my wife nor my sister, and I know you not. Come!” And, presuming the woman was following him, Kahavari made a spring and dashed down the hill on his papa.
“Why should I exchange?” replied the chief quickly. “You are neither my wife nor my sister, and I don’t know you. Come!” And, assuming the woman was following him, Kahavari jumped and dashed down the hill on his papa.
With this the woman stamped her foot, and a river of burning lava burst from the hill and began to pour down into the valley beneath. Reaching the bottom, Kahavari rose and looked behind him, and to his horror saw a wide and wild torrent of lava rushing down the hillside toward the spot where he was standing; and riding on the crest of the foremost wave was the woman—now no longer disguised, but Pele, the dreadful goddess of Kilauea—with thunder at her feet and lightning playing with her flaming tresses. [507]
With that, the woman stamped her foot, and a river of burning lava erupted from the hill, pouring down into the valley below. When it reached the bottom, Kahavari turned around and, to his horror, saw a wide, wild torrent of lava rushing down the hillside toward him; riding on the crest of the leading wave was the woman—now no longer disguised, but Pele, the fearsome goddess of Kilauea—with thunder at her feet and lightning dancing through her fiery hair. [__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]
Seizing his spear, Kahavari, accompanied by Ahua, fled for his life to the small eminence of Puukea. He looked behind, and saw the entire assemblage of spectators engulfed in a sea of fire. With terrible rapidity the valleys began to fill, and he knew that his only hope of escape was in reaching the ocean, for it was manifest that Pele was intent upon his destruction. He fled to his house, and, passing it without stopping, said farewell to his mother, wife and children, and to his favorite hog Aloipuaa. Telling them that Pele was in pursuit of him with a river of fire, and to save themselves, if possible, by escaping to the hills, he left them to their fate.
Grabbing his spear, Kahavari, with Ahua by his side, ran for his life to the small hill of Puukea. He glanced back and saw the crowd completely engulfed in flames. The valleys began to fill up with fire at an alarming speed, and he realized that his only chance of escape was to reach the ocean, as it was clear that Pele was set on destroying him. He dashed to his home, passed it without stopping, and said goodbye to his mother, wife, and children, along with his favorite pig, Aloipuaa. He warned them that Pele was chasing him with a river of fire and urged them to save themselves by heading to the hills if they could. He then left them to face their fate.
Coming to a chasm, he saw Pele pouring down it to cut off his retreat. He crossed on his spear, pulling his friend over after him. At length, closely pursued, he reached the ocean. His brother, discovering the danger, had just landed from his fishing canoe and gone to look after the safety of his family. Kahavari leaped into the canoe with his companion, and, using his spear for a paddle, was soon beyond the reach of the pursuing lava. Enraged at his escape, Pele ran some distance into the water and hurled after him huge stones, that hissed as they struck the waves, until an east wind sprang up and carried him far out to sea.
Coming to a chasm, he saw Pele pouring down it to block his escape. He crossed on his spear, pulling his friend over after him. Eventually, closely pursued, he reached the ocean. His brother, realizing the danger, had just landed from his fishing canoe and gone to check on the safety of his family. Kahavari jumped into the canoe with his companion and, using his spear as a paddle, quickly got beyond the reach of the flowing lava. Furious at his escape, Pele ran some distance into the water and threw huge stones after him, which hissed as they hit the waves, until a strong east wind came up and carried him far out to sea.
He first reached the island of Maui, and thence by the way of Lanai found his way to Oahu, where he remained to the end of his days. All of his relatives in Puna perished, with hundreds of others in the neighborhood of Kapoho. But he never ventured back to Puna, the grave of his hopes and his people, for he believed Pele, the unforgiving, would visit the place with another horror if he did.
He first arrived on the island of Maui, and then traveled through Lanai to Oahu, where he stayed for the rest of his life. All of his relatives in Puna died, along with hundreds of others in the Kapoho area. But he never went back to Puna, the grave of his hopes and his family, because he thought Pele, the unrelenting, would unleash another disaster on the place if he did.
Pele had come down from Kilauea in a pleasant mood to witness the holua contest; but Kahavari angered her unwittingly, and what followed has just been described. [509]
Pele had come down from Kilauea in a good mood to watch the holua contest; but Kahavari unintentionally upset her, and what happened next has just been detailed. [__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]
Kahalaopuna, the Princess of Manoa.
[510]
[__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]
CHARACTERS.
-
Kahaukani, male, and children of divine origin. Kauahuahine, female, - Kolowahi, guardian of Kahaukani.
- Pohakukala, guardian of Kauahuahine.
- Kahalaopuna, daughter of Kahaukani and Kauahuahine.
- Kauhi, the betrothed of Kahalaopuna.
-
Keawaawakiihelei and lesser leaders. Kumauna, - Mahana, a young chief.
- Akaaka, father of Kahaukani and Kauahuahine.
- Kaea, a sorcerer.
- Elepaio bird, a bird-god.
[511]
[__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]
KAHALAOPUNA, THE PRINCESS OF MANOA.
Kahalapuna, Princess of Manoa.
A LEGEND OF THE VALLEY OF RAINBOW
A LEGEND OF THE VALLEY OF RAINBOW
I.
Manoa is the most beautiful of all the little valleys leaping abruptly from the mountains back of Honolulu and cooling the streets and byways of the city with their sweet waters. And it is also the most verdant. Gentle rains fall there more frequently than in the valleys on either side of it, and almost every day in the year it is canopied with rainbows. Sometimes it is called, and not inappropriately, the Valley of Rainbows.
Manoa is the most beautiful of all the small valleys that suddenly drop down from the mountains behind Honolulu, refreshing the city’s streets and pathways with their sweet waters. It’s also the greenest. Light rain occurs there more often than in the valleys on either side, and almost every day of the year, it’s topped with rainbows. Sometimes it’s called, quite fittingly, the Valley of Rainbows.
Why is it that Manoa is thus blessed with rains, thus ornamented with rainbows, thus cradled in everlasting green? Were a reason sought among natural causes, it would doubtless be found in a favoring rent or depression in the summit above the valley, and overlooking the eastern coast of Oahu, where wind and rain are abundant. But tradition furnishes another explanation of the exceptionally kind dealings of the elements with Manoa—not as satisfactory, perhaps, as the one suggested, but very much more poetic.
Why is Manoa so blessed with rain, adorned with rainbows, and surrounded by everlasting green? If we were to look for a reason among natural causes, we would likely find it in a resulting gap or dip in the ridge above the valley that faces the eastern coast of Oahu, where wind and rain are plentiful. But tradition offers a different explanation for the unusually favorable conditions in Manoa—not as scientifically satisfying, maybe, but much more poetic.
Far back in the past, as the story relates, the projecting spur of Akaaka, above the head of Manoa Valley, was united in marriage with the neighboring promontory of Nalehuaakaaka. A growth of lehua bushes still crowns the spur in perpetual witness of the union. Of this marriage of mountains twin children were born—a boy named Kahaukani, which signified Manoa wind, and a girl called Kauahuahine, which implied Manoa rain. At their birth they were adopted by a chief and chiefess whose names were Kolowahi and Pohakukala. They were brother and sister, and cousins, also, of Akaaka. The brother took charge of the boy, and the sister assumed the custody and care of the girl. Reared apart from each other, and kept in ignorance of their close relationship, [512]through the management of their foster-parents they were brought together at the proper age and married. The fruit of this union was a daughter, who was given the name of Kahalaopuna, and who became the most beautiful woman of her time. Thus it was that the marriage of the Wind (Kahaukani) and Rain (Kauahuahine) of Manoa brought to the valley as an inheritance the rainbows and showers for which it has since been distinguished.
A long time ago, as the story goes, the jutting peak of Akaaka, rising over Manoa Valley, got married to the nearby promontory of Nalehuaakaaka. A cluster of lehua bushes continues to grow on the spur as a lasting sign of their union. From this marriage of mountains, twin children were born—a boy named Kahaukani, meaning Manoa wind, and a girl called Kauahuahine, meaning Manoa rain. Right after they were born, they were adopted by a chief and chiefess named Kolowahi and Pohakukala. They were siblings and also cousins of Akaaka. The brother looked after the boy, while the sister took care of the girl. Raised separately and unaware of their close connection, [__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]through the guidance of their foster parents, they were brought together when the time was right and got married. The result of their union was a daughter named Kahalaopuna, who became the most beautiful woman of her time. This is how the marriage of Wind (Kahaukani) and Rain (Kauahuahine) of Manoa blessed the valley with the rainbows and showers it's known for today.
To continue the story of the ancient bards of Oahu, Kahalaopuna—or Kaha, as the name will hereafter be written—grew to a surpassingly beautiful womanhood. A house was built for her in a grove of sandal-trees at Kahaiamano, where she lived with a few devoted servants. The house was embowered in vines, and two poloulou, or tabu staves, were kept standing beside the entrance, to indicate that they guarded from intrusion a person of high rank. Her eyes were so bright that their glow penetrated the thatch of her hale, and a luminous glimmer played around its openings. When bathing a roseate halo surrounded her, and a similar light is still visible, it is claimed, whenever her spirit revisits Kahaiamano.
To continue the story of the ancient bards of Oahu, Kahalaopuna—or Kaha, as we'll call her from now on—grew into an incredibly beautiful woman. A house was built for her in a grove of sandalwood trees at Kahaiamano, where she lived with a few loyal servants. The house was covered in vines, and two poloulou, or tabu staves, stood at the entrance to show that it protected someone of high status. Her eyes were so bright that their light shone through the thatch of her hale, creating a glowing aura around its openings. When she bathed, a pink halo surrounded her, and it's said that a similar light is still seen whenever her spirit returns to Kahaiamano.
In infancy Kaha was betrothed to Kauhi, a young chief of Kailua, whose parents were so sensible of the honor of the proposed union that they always provided her table with poi of their own making and choice fish from the ponds of Kawainui. The acceptance of these favors placed her under obligations to the parents of Kauhi and kept her in continual remembrance of her betrothal. Hence she gave no encouragement to the many chiefs of distinction who sought to obtain glimpses of her beauty and annoyed her with proffers of marriage. The chief to whom she was betrothed was, like herself, of something more than human descent, and she felt herself already bound to him by ties too sacred to be broken.
In her early childhood, Kaha was promised to Kauhi, a young chief from Kailua. His parents understood the significance of this union and consistently provided her with homemade poi and choice fish from the Kawainui ponds. Accepting these gifts meant she owed them a debt of gratitude, which reminded her of her engagement. Because of this, she didn’t encourage the many distinguished chiefs who tried to catch a glimpse of her beauty and bothered her with marriage proposals. The chief she was engaged to, like her, had more than just ordinary lineage, and she felt a strong connection to him through bonds that were too sacred to break.
The fame of her beauty spread far and near, and people came from long distances to catch glimpses of her from lands adjoining, as she walked to and from her bathing-pool or strolled in the shelter of the trees surrounding her house. Among those who many times approached her dwelling but failed to see her were Keawaawakiihelei and Kumauna, two inferior chiefs, whose eyes were disfigured by an unnatural distention of the lower lids. In ungenerous revenge, and envious of those who had fared better, [513]they decked themselves with leis of flowers, and, repairing to the bathing-place at Waikiki, boasted that the garlands had been placed around their necks by the beautiful Kaha, with whom they affected the greatest intimacy.
The word of her beauty spread far and wide, and people traveled from far-off places just to catch a glimpse of her as she walked to and from her bathing pool or strolled beneath the trees near her home. Among those who often came close to her house but never got to see her were Keawaawakiihelei and Kumauna, two lesser chiefs, whose eyes were disfigured by an unnatural swelling of the lower lids. Out of spite and jealousy towards those who had better luck, [__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__] they adorned themselves with flower leis and went to the bathing place at Waikiki, bragging that the beautiful Kaha had placed the garlands around their necks and that they were very close to her.
Among the bathers at that popular resort was Kauhi. Although the day fixed for his marriage with Kaha was near at hand, he had never seen her—this being one of the conditions of the betrothal. The stories of the two miscreants were repeated until Kauhi at length gave them credence, and in a fit of jealous fury he resolved to kill the beautiful enchantress who had thus trifled with his love.
Among the bathers at that popular resort was Kauhi. Even though the day set for his marriage to Kaha was approaching, he had never met her—this was one of the terms of the engagement. The tales about the two wrongdoers were recounted so often that Kauhi eventually believed them, and in a fit of jealous rage, he decided to kill the beautiful enchantress who had played with his affections.
Leaving Waikiki in the morning, he reached Kahaiamano about midday. Breaking from a pandanus-tree a heavy cone of nuts with a short limb attached, he presented himself at the house of Kaha. She had just awoke from a nap, and was about to proceed to her bathing-pond, when she was startled at observing a stranger at her door. He did not speak, but from frequent descriptions she at length recognized him as Kauhi, and with some embarrassment invited him to enter. Declining, and admitting his identity, he requested her to step without, and she unhesitatingly complied. His first intention was to kill her at once; but her supreme loveliness and ready obedience unnerved him for the time, and he proposed that she should first bathe and then accompany him in a ramble through the woods.
Leaving Waikiki in the morning, he arrived at Kahaiamano around midday. Breaking off a heavy cluster of nuts from a pandanus tree with a short branch attached, he showed up at Kaha's house. She had just woken up from a nap and was about to head to her bathing pond when she was startled to see a stranger at her door. He didn’t say anything, but after hearing frequent descriptions, she eventually recognized him as Kauhi. Feeling a bit embarrassed, she invited him to come in. He declined and confirmed who he was, asking her to step outside, and she didn’t hesitate to comply. His initial plan was to kill her right away, but her incredible beauty and immediate willingness made him hesitant, so he suggested that she first take a bath and then join him for a walk through the woods.
To this she assented, and while she was absent Kauhi stood by the door, moodily watching the bright light playing above the pond where she was bathing. He was profoundly impressed with her great beauty, and would have given half the years of his life to clasp her in his arms unsullied. The very thought intensified his jealousy; and when his mind reverted to the disgusting objects upon whom he believed she had bestowed her favors, he resolved to show her no mercy, and impatiently awaited her return.
To this she agreed, and while she was away, Kauhi stood by the door, brooding as he watched the bright light dancing on the pond where she was bathing. He was deeply struck by her incredible beauty and would have sacrificed half his life just to hold her in his arms without any shame. The mere thought heightened his jealousy, and when he thought about the repulsive people he believed she had given her attention to, he decided to show her no mercy and impatiently awaited her return.
Finishing her bath and rejoining him at the door, her beauty was so enrapturing that he was afraid to look at her face, lest he might again falter; it was therefore with his back turned to her that he declined to partake of food before they departed, and motioned her to follow him. His actions were so strange that she said to him, half in alarm:
Finishing her bath and rejoining him at the door, her beauty was so captivating that he was afraid to look at her face, fearing he might lose his composure again; so, with his back turned to her, he refused to eat before they left and signaled for her to follow him. His behavior was so odd that she said to him, half in concern:
“Are you, indeed, angered with me? Have I in any way displeased you? Speak, that I may know my fault!” [514]
“Are you really upset with me? Did I do something to upset you? Please tell me, so I can understand what I did wrong!” [__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]
“Why, foolish girl, what could you have done to displease me?” replied Kauhi, evasively.
“Why, silly girl, what could you have done to upset me?” replied Kauhi, avoiding the question.
“Nothing, I hope,” returned Kaha; “yet your look is cold and almost frightens me.”
“Nothing, I hope,” replied Kaha; “but your expression is cold and kind of scares me.”
“It is my mood to-day, perhaps,” answered Kauhi, increasing his pace to give employment to his thoughts; “you will think better of my looks, no doubt, when we are of longer acquaintance.”
“It’s just my mood today, I guess,” replied Kauhi, picking up his pace to occupy his mind. “You'll probably think better of my looks when we get to know each other better.”
They kept on together, he leading and she following, until they reached a large rock in Aihualama, when he turned abruptly, and, seizing the girl by the arm, said:
They continued on together, him leading and her following, until they got to a big rock in Aihualama. Then he suddenly turned, grabbed the girl by the arm, and said:
“You are beautiful—so beautiful that your face almost drives me mad; but you have been false and must die!”
“You're stunning—so stunning that your face almost drives me crazy; but you've been unfaithful and must pay the price!”
Kaha’s first thought was that he was making sport with her; but when she looked up into his face and saw that it was stern and smileless, she replied:
Kaha’s first thought was that he was joking with her; but when she looked up into his face and saw that it was serious and lacking a smile, she replied:
“If you are resolved upon my death, why did you not kill me at home, so that my bones might be buried by my people? If you think me false, tell me with whom, that I may disabuse your mind of the cruel error possessing it.”
“If you’re determined to see me dead, why didn’t you just kill me at home, so my bones could be buried by my people? If you think I’m lying, tell me who you think I’ve lied to, so I can clear your mind of this cruel mistake.”
“Your words are as fair as your face, but neither will deceive me longer!” exclaimed Kauhi; and with a blow on the temple with the cone of hala nuts, which he was still carrying, he laid her dead at his feet. Hastily digging a hole beside the rock, he buried the body and started down the valley toward Waikiki.
“Your words are as beautiful as your face, but neither will fool me anymore!” shouted Kauhi; and with a strike to the temple using the cone of hala nuts that he was still holding, he brought her down at his feet. Quickly digging a hole beside the rock, he buried the body and began heading down the valley toward Waikiki.
He had scarcely left before a large owl—a god in that guise, who was related to Kaha and had followed her—unearthed the body, rubbed his head against the bruised temple, and restored the girl to life. Overtaking Kauhi, Kaha sang behind him a lament at his unkindness. Turning in amazement, he observed the owl flying above her head, and recognized the power that had restored her to life.
He had barely walked away when a large owl— a god in disguise, connected to Kaha and having followed her— uncovered the body, nudged its head against the bruised temple, and brought the girl back to life. Catching up to Kauhi, Kaha sang a lament behind him, expressing her sorrow at his cruelty. Turning in surprise, he noticed the owl flying above her head and recognized the power that had restored her.
Again ordering Kaha to follow him, they ascended the ridge dividing the valleys of Manoa and Nuuanu. The way was beset with sharp rocks and tangled undergrowth, and when Kaha reached the summit her tender feet were bleeding and her pau was in tatters. Seating herself on a stone to regain her breath, with tears in her eyes she implored Kauhi to tell her whither he was leading her and why he had sought to kill her. His only reply was a blow with the hala cone, which again felled her dead [515]to the earth. Burying the body as before he resumed his way toward Waikiki.
Again ordering Kaha to follow him, they climbed the ridge that separated the valleys of Manoa and Nuuanu. The path was filled with sharp rocks and tangled underbrush, and by the time Kaha reached the top, her delicate feet were bleeding and her pau was in shreds. Sitting down on a rock to catch her breath, with tears in her eyes, she begged Kauhi to tell her where he was taking her and why he had tried to kill her. His only response was a blow with the hala cone, which knocked her lifeless [__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__] to the ground. After burying the body like before, he continued on his way to Waikiki.
Again flying to the rescue of his beautiful and sinless relative, the owl-god scratched away the earth above her and restored her once more to life. Following Kauhi, she again chanted a song of lament behind him, and begged him to be merciful to one who had never wronged him, even in thought. Hearing her voice, he turned, and without answer conducted her across the valley of Nuuanu to the ridge of Waolani, where he killed and buried her as he had done twice before, and the owl-god a third time removed the earth from the body and gave it life.
Again coming to the rescue of his beautiful and innocent relative, the owl-god cleared away the earth above her and brought her back to life once more. Following Kauhi, she once again sang a song of sorrow behind him, begging him to be merciful to someone who had never wronged him, even in thought. Hearing her voice, he turned and, without saying anything, led her across the valley of Nuuanu to the ridge of Waolani, where he killed and buried her as he had done twice before, and the owl-god once again removed the earth from her body and gave her life.
She again overtook her merciless companion, and again pleaded for life and forgiveness for her unknown fault. Instead of softening his heart, the words of Kaha enraged him, and he resolved not to be thwarted in his determination to take her life. Leading her to the head of Kalihi valley, where she was for the fourth time killed, buried and resurrected as before, he next conducted her across plains and steep ravines to Pohakea, on the Ewa slope of the Kaala mountains. He hoped the owl-god would not follow them so far, but, looking around, he discovered him among the branches of an ohia tree not far distant.
She caught up with her relentless companion once more and begged for her life and forgiveness for her unknown mistake. Instead of softening his heart, Kaha’s words made him even angrier, and he decided he wouldn't let anything stop him from taking her life. He led her to the top of Kalihi valley, where she was killed, buried, and brought back to life for the fourth time, just like before. After that, he took her across fields and steep ravines to Pohakea, on the Ewa side of the Kaala mountains. He hoped the owl-god wouldn't follow them this far, but when he looked back, he saw him perched in the branches of an ohia tree not too far away.
As Kaha was worn down with fatigue, it required but a slight blow to kill her the fifth time, and when it was dealt to the unresisting girl her body was buried under the roots of a large koa tree, and there left by Kauhi, satisfied that it could not be reached by the owl-god. Repairing to the spot after the departure of Kauhi, the owl put himself to the task of scratching the earth from the body; but his claws became entangled with the roots, which had been left to embarrass his labors, and, after toiling for some time and making little or no progress, he abandoned the undertaking as hopeless, and, reluctantly left the unfortunate girl to her fate, following Kauhi to Waikiki.
As Kaha was completely exhausted, it only took a light hit to take her out for the fifth time. When it was struck against the defenseless girl, her body was hidden under the roots of a large koa tree, and there it was left by Kauhi, confident that it couldn’t be found by the owl-god. After Kauhi left, the owl returned to the spot and tried to dig the earth away from the body; however, his claws got caught in the roots that had been left to complicate his efforts. After struggling for a while with little success, he gave up on the task as pointless, reluctantly leaving the unfortunate girl to her fate and following Kauhi to Waikiki.
But there had been another witness to these many deaths and restorations of Kaha. It was a little green bird that had flitted along unobserved either by Kaha or her companion, and had followed them from Kahaiamano, flying from tree to tree and making no noise. Noting with regret that the owl-god had abandoned the body of Kaha, the little bird, which was a cousin to the girl and a supernatural being, flew with haste to the [516]parents of Kaha, and informed them of all that had happened to their daughter.
But there had been another witness to the many deaths and comebacks of Kaha. It was a small green bird that had flitted by unnoticed by Kaha or her companion, following them from Kahaiamano, flying from tree to tree and making no sound. Noticing with sadness that the owl-god had left Kaha's body, the little bird, which was a cousin to the girl and a supernatural being, quickly flew to the [__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]parents of Kaha and told them everything that had happened to their daughter.
The girl had been missed, but as some of her servants had recognized Kauhi, and had seen her leave the house with him, her absence occasioned no uneasiness; and when the little green bird, whose name was Elepaio, recounted to the parents the story of Kaha’s great suffering and many deaths, they found it difficult to believe that Kauhi could have been guilty of such fiendish cruelty to the radiant being who was about to become his wife. They were convinced of Elepaio’s sincerity, however, and with great grief prepared to visit the spot and remove the remains of Kaha for more fitting interment.
The girl was missed, but since some of her servants had recognized Kauhi and had seen her leave the house with him, her absence didn't cause any worry. When the little green bird, named Elepaio, told the parents about Kaha’s great suffering and many deaths, they found it hard to believe that Kauhi could have been so cruel to the beautiful being who was set to become his wife. Still, they trusted Elepaio's sincerity and, with deep sorrow, got ready to go to the place and retrieve Kaha's remains for a more proper burial.
Meantime the spirit of the murdered girl discovered itself to Mahana, a young chief of good address, who was returning from a visit to Waianae. Directed by the apparition, he proceeded to the koa tree, and, removing the earth and roots, discovered the body of Kaha. He recognized the face at once, notwithstanding the blood and earth stains disfiguring its faultless regularity. He had seen and become enraptured with its beauty at Kahaiamano, and on one occasion, which lived in his memory like a beautiful dream, he had been emboldened by his love to approach sufficiently near to exchange modest words and glances with it.
Meanwhile, the spirit of the murdered girl revealed herself to Mahana, a young chief with good charm, who was heading back from a visit to Waianae. Guided by the apparition, he made his way to the koa tree, and after clearing away the dirt and roots, he uncovered Kaha's body. Despite the blood and dirt smudging her flawless features, he recognized her instantly. He had witnessed and been captivated by her beauty at Kahaiamano, and on one memorable occasion that felt like a lovely dream, his love had given him the courage to come close enough to share shy words and glances with her.
Gently removing the body from the shallow pit in which it had been buried, Mahana found to his great joy that it was still warm. Wrapping it in his kihei, or shoulder scarf, and covering it with maile ferns and ginger, he tenderly bore it in his arms to his home at Kamoiliili. As he walked he chanted his love and scarcely felt his burden. Reaching home, he laid the body upon a kapa-moe, and earnestly implored his elder brother to restore it to life, he being a kahuna and having skill in such matters.
Gently taking the body out of the shallow grave where it had been buried, Mahana was overjoyed to find that it was still warm. He wrapped it in his kihei, or shoulder scarf, and covered it with maile ferns and ginger, carrying it tenderly in his arms to his home in Kamoiliili. As he walked, he sang songs of love and hardly felt the weight of his burden. When he got home, he laid the body on a kapa-moe and earnestly begged his older brother, who was a kahuna and skilled in such things, to bring it back to life.
Examining the body and finding that he could do nothing unaided, the brother called upon their two spirit-sisters for assistance, and through their instrumentality the soul of Kaha was once more restored to its beautiful tenement. But it was some time before she fully recovered from the effects of her cruel treatment—some time, in fact, before she was able to walk without support. In her convalescence Mahana was her considerate and constant companion, and found no greater pleasure than in providing her with the delicacies to which she had been accustomed. [517]She was greatly benefited by the waters of the underground cave of Mauoki, to which she was frequently and secretly taken, and under the watchful care of Mahana she was at length restored to health.
After examining the body and realizing he couldn't do anything alone, the brother called on their two spirit-sisters for help, and with their assistance, Kaha's soul was once again brought back to her beautiful body. However, it took a while for her to fully recover from the trauma she experienced—actually, it was some time before she could walk without help. During her recovery, Mahana was her thoughtful and constant companion, finding joy in bringing her the favorite foods she was used to. [__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]She benefited greatly from the waters of the underground cave of Mauoki, where she was often and secretly taken, and under Mahana's careful watch, she eventually regained her health.
II.
With her recovery, in the home of her new friends at Kamoiliili, Kaha was introduced to a life that was new to her; but it was by no means an unpleasant change from the restraints of her listless and more sumptuous past behind the protecting shadows of her puloulous, where she was jealously watched, and where rank closed her doors to congenial companionship. She repaired to an unfrequented beach, and, unobserved, played with the shifting sands and sang to the waves, and at night went with Mahana to the reef with torch and spear in search of fish and squid.
With her recovery, at the home of her new friends in Kamoiliili, Kaha was introduced to a life that was completely new to her; but it was definitely a welcome change from the restrictions of her dull and more luxurious past behind the protective shadows of her puloulous, where she was carefully watched and where her status kept her from feeling like she belonged with others. She went to a quiet beach and, unnoticed, played with the shifting sands and sang to the waves, and at night went with Mahana to the reef with a torch and spear searching for fish and squid.
Knowing that her restoration to life could not be long kept from her relatives, Mahana told her that his love for her was great, and asked her to become his wife.
Knowing that her return to life couldn’t be hidden from her family for long, Mahana told her that he loved her deeply and asked her to marry him.
“I shall never love any one better than Mahana,” replied Kaha; “but from infancy I have been betrothed to Kauhi; my parents, the Wind and Rain of Manoa, have promised that I shall be his wife, and while he lives I can be the wife of no other.”
“I will never love anyone more than Mahana,” Kaha replied. “But since I was a child, I've been promised to Kauhi; my parents, the Wind and Rain of Manoa, have assured that I will be his wife, and as long as he lives, I can't be the wife of anyone else.”
The argument that Kauhi had forfeited all right to her by his cruelties failed to shake her resolution, and the brother of Mahana advised him to in some manner compass the death of Kauhi. To this end they apprised the parents of Kaha of her restoration to life, and conspired with them to keep secret the information for a time. This they were the more disposed to do because of their uncertainty concerning what Kauhi might again attempt should he find the girl alive.
The argument that Kauhi had lost all rights to her because of his cruelty didn’t weaken her determination, and Mahana's brother suggested that he should find a way to have Kauhi killed. To achieve this, they informed Kaha's parents about her being brought back to life and plotted with them to keep this information secret for a while. They were especially motivated to do this because they were unsure of what Kauhi might try to do if he discovered that the girl was alive.
In pursuance of the plan adopted, Mahana learned from Kaha all the songs she had chanted to mollify the wrath of Kauhi while she was following him through the mountains, and then sought the kilu houses of the king and chiefs in the hope of encountering his rival. It was not long before they met, under just such circumstances as Mahana desired. He discovered Kauhi engaged with others in the game of kilu, and joined the party as a player. The kilu passed from the hand of Kauhi to [518]Mahana, who, on receiving it, began to chant the first of Kaha’s songs.
In line with the plan she had made, Mahana learned from Kaha all the songs she had sung to calm Kauhi's anger while trailing him through the mountains. Then she headed to the kilu houses of the king and chiefs, hoping to run into his rival. It wasn't long before they met under the exact conditions Mahana wanted. She found Kauhi playing kilu with others, and she joined in as a player. The kilu was passed from Kauhi to [__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]Mahana, who, upon receiving it, began to sing the first of Kaha’s songs.
Surprised and embarrassed, Kauhi, in violation of the rules of the game, stopped the player to inquire where he had learned the words of the song he was singing. The answer was that he had learned them from Kaha, the noted beauty of Manoa, who was a friend of his sister, and was then visiting them at their home. Knowing that she had been deserted by the owl-god, and feeling assured that Kaha was no longer living, Kauhi denounced as a falsehood the explanation of the player. Bitter words followed, and but for the interference of friends there would have been bloodshed.
Surprised and embarrassed, Kauhi, breaking the rules of the game, stopped the player to ask where he had learned the words to the song he was singing. The player replied that he had learned them from Kaha, the famous beauty of Manoa, who was a friend of his sister and was visiting them at their home. Knowing that she had been abandoned by the owl-god and believing that Kaha was no longer alive, Kauhi dismissed the player’s explanation as a lie. Harsh words followed, and if it hadn’t been for the intervention of friends, there would have been a fight.
They met the next day at the kilu house, and in the evening following, when similar scenes occurred between Mahana and his rival, Kauhi became so enraged at length that he admitted that he had killed the beautiful Kaha of Manoa, and declared the Kaha of Mahana to be an impostor, who had heard of the death of the real Kaha and audaciously assumed her name and rank. He then challenged Mahana to produce the woman claiming to be Kaha, agreeing to forfeit his life should she prove in flesh and blood to be the one whom he knew to be dead, and subjecting Mahana to a like penalty in the event of the claimant proving to be other than the person he represented her to be.
They met the next day at the kilu house, and the following evening, when similar scenes unfolded between Mahana and his rival, Kauhi became so furious that he confessed to killing the beautiful Kaha of Manoa and declared that the Kaha of Mahana was a fake, who had heard about the real Kaha's death and boldly taken her name and status. He then challenged Mahana to bring forward the woman claiming to be Kaha, agreeing to forfeit his life if she turned out to be the one he believed to be dead, and placing Mahana under the same penalty if the claimant was not who he said she was.
It had been the purpose of Mahana to provoke his rival to a combat with weapons, but the challenge of Kauhi presented itself as a more satisfactory means of accomplishing the object of his aim, and he promptly accepted it; and, that both might be more firmly bound to its conditions, they were repeated and formally ratified in the presence of the king and principal chiefs of the district.
Mahana intended to challenge his rival to a fight with weapons, but the challenge from Kauhi turned out to be a more effective way to achieve his goal, so he quickly accepted it. To make sure both were committed to the terms, they restated and formally agreed to them in front of the king and the main chiefs of the area.
The day fixed for the strange trial arrived. It was to be in the presence of the king and a number of distinguished chiefs, and Akaaka, the grandfather of Kaha, had been selected as one of the judges. Imus had been erected near the sea-shore by the respective friends of the contestants, in which to roast alive the vanquished chief, and dry wood for the heating was piled beside them.
The day set for the unusual trial came. It was to take place in front of the king and several prominent chiefs, and Akaaka, Kaha's grandfather, had been chosen as one of the judges. Imus had been built near the shore by the friends of the contestants, where they intended to roast the defeated chief alive, and a stack of dry wood for the fire was piled next to them.
Fearing that the spirit of the murdered girl might be able to assume a living appearance, and thus impose upon the judges, [519]Kauhi had consulted the priests and sorcerers of his family, and was advised by Kaea to have the large and tender leaves of the ape plant spread upon the ground where Kaha and her attendants before the tribunal were to be seated. “When she enters,” said the kaula, “watch her closely. If she is of flesh her weight will rend the leaves; if she is merely a spirit the leaves where she walks and sits will not be torn.”
Fearing that the spirit of the murdered girl could take on a physical form and deceive the judges, [__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]Kauhi consulted the priests and sorcerers in his family. Kaea advised him to lay the large, soft leaves of the ape plant on the ground where Kaha and her attendants would sit before the tribunal. “When she arrives,” said the kaula, “keep a close eye on her. If she is flesh and blood, her weight will crush the leaves; if she is just a spirit, the leaves where she walks and sits will remain intact.”
On her way to Waikiki, the place designated for the trial, Kaha was accompanied by her parents, friends and servants, and also by the two spirit-sisters of Mahana, who had assumed human forms in order to be better able to advise and assist her, if occasion required. They informed her of Kaea’s proposed test with ape leaves, and advised her to quietly tear and rend them as far as possible for some distance around her, in order that the spirit-friends beside her, who would be unable to do as much for themselves, might thereby escape detection. If discovered, they would be exposed to the risk of being killed by the poe-poi-uhane, or spirit-catchers.
On her way to Waikiki, the location chosen for the trial, Kaha was accompanied by her parents, friends, and servants, as well as the two spirit-sisters of Mahana, who had taken on human forms to better advise and assist her if needed. They informed her about Kaea’s planned test with ape leaves and suggested that she quietly tear and rip them as far as possible in the surrounding area so that her spirit-friends beside her, who couldn't do much for themselves, would remain undetected. If discovered, they would be at risk of being killed by the poe-poi-uhane, or spirit-catchers.
Arriving at Waikiki, Kaha and her companions repaired to the large enclosure in which the trial was to take place. The king, chiefs, judges and advisers of Kauhi were already there, and thousands of spectators were assembled in the grounds adjoining. The ape leaves had been spread, by the consent of the king, as advised by Kaea, and Kaha entered with her friends and advanced to the place reserved for them. Not far from her stood Kauhi. As he bent forward in anxiety and looked into her star-like eyes, with a sinking heart he saw that their reproachful gleam was human, and knew that he had lost the wager of his life.
Arriving at Waikiki, Kaha and her friends made their way to the large area where the trial was set to happen. The king, chiefs, judges, and advisers of Kauhi were already there, and thousands of spectators had gathered in the surrounding grounds. The ape leaves had been spread out with the king's permission, as suggested by Kaea, and Kaha entered with her friends, moving to the spot reserved for them. Not far from her stood Kauhi. As he leaned forward in worry and looked into her star-like eyes, he felt a sinking sensation in his heart as he saw the human-like reproach in her gaze, realizing he had lost the wager of his life.
Observing her instructions, Kaha took pains to quietly rend and rumple the ape leaves under and around her. So far as she was concerned, the test was satisfactory. The evidence of the leaves torn by her feet could not be questioned. Kaea was therefore compelled to admit that Kaha was a being of flesh and bone; but in his disappointment he declared that he saw and felt the presence of spirits in some manner connected with her, and would detect and punish them.
Following her instructions, Kaha carefully shredded and messed up the ape leaves beneath and around her. As far as she was concerned, the test went well. The evidence of the leaves trampled by her feet was undeniable. Kaea was therefore forced to acknowledge that Kaha was a living being; however, in his disappointment, he claimed that he sensed the presence of spirits somehow linked to her and vowed to find and punish them.
Irritated at the malice of the kaula, Akaaka advised him to look for the faces of the spirits in an open calabash of water. Eagerly grasping at the suggestion, Kaea ordered a vessel of [520]clear water to be brought in, and incautiously bent his eyes over it. He saw only the reflection of his own face. Akaaka also caught a glimpse of it, and, knowing it to be the spirit of the seer, he seized and crushed it between his palms, and Kaea fell dead to the earth beside the calabash into which he had been peering.
Irritated by the malice of the kaula, Akaaka advised him to look for the spirits' faces in an open bowl of water. Eagerly taking this advice, Kaea ordered a container of [__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__] clear water to be brought in and recklessly bent over it. He saw only the reflection of his own face. Akaaka also caught a glimpse of it, and recognizing it as the spirit of the seer, he grabbed and crushed it between his palms. Kaea fell dead to the ground beside the bowl he had been looking into.
Akaaka then turned and embraced Kaha, acknowledging that she was his granddaughter, and that her purity and obedience rendered her worthy of the love of the bold upland of Akaaka, and of her parents, the Wind and Rain of Manoa.
Akaaka then turned and hugged Kaha, recognizing that she was his granddaughter, and that her purity and obedience made her deserving of the love of the brave upland of Akaaka, and of her parents, the Wind and Rain of Manoa.
The curiosity of the king was aroused, and he demanded an explanation of the strange proceedings he had just witnessed. Kaha told her simple story, and Kauhi, on being interrogated, could deny no part of it. As an excuse for his barbarous conduct, however, he repeated, and attributed his jealous rage to, the boastful assertions of Kumauna and Keawaawakiihelei. The slanderers were sent for at once, and, on being confronted by Kaha, admitted that they had never seen her before, and that they had boasted of their intimacy with her to make others envious of their good fortune.
The king was curious and demanded an explanation for the strange events he had just witnessed. Kaha shared her simple story, and Kauhi, when questioned, couldn't deny any part of it. However, to justify his brutal behavior, he insisted that his jealous anger was due to the boastful claims of Kumauna and Keawaawakiihelei. The slanderers were summoned immediately, and when confronted by Kaha, they confessed that they had never seen her before and had bragged about knowing her to make others envious of their supposed good luck.
“Well,” replied the king, after listening to the confessions of the miscreants, “as your efforts in exciting the envy of others have brought terrible suffering to an innocent girl, I now promise you something of which no one, I think, will envy you. You will be baked alive with Kauhi! If you have friends among the gods, pray to them that the imus may be hot and your sufferings short!”
“Well,” replied the king, after hearing the confessions of the wrongdoers, “since your actions in stirring up envy in others have caused immense pain to an innocent girl, I now promise you something that, I believe, no one will envy you for. You will be baked alive with Kauhi! If you have any friends among the gods, pray to them that the imus is hot and your suffering is brief!”
The imus were ordered to be heated at once, and Kauhi and the two calumniators were thrown into them alive and roasted. The first went to his death bravely, chanting a song of defiance as he proceeded to the place of execution, but the others vainly struggled and sought to escape. The retainers of Kauhi were so disgusted with his cruelty to Kaha that they transferred their allegiance to her, and the lands and fishing rights that had been his were given to Mahana at once.
The imus were ordered to be heated immediately, and Kauhi and the two accused were thrown into them alive and roasted. The first faced his death bravely, singing a song of defiance as he headed to the execution site, but the others struggled in vain and tried to escape. Kauhi's followers were so disgusted by his cruelty to Kaha that they switched their loyalty to her, and the lands and fishing rights that had belonged to him were immediately granted to Mahana.
“And how do you intend to reward the young chief who hazarded his life for you?” inquired the king, pleasantly addressing Kaha as he rose to depart.
“And how do you plan to reward the young chief who risked his life for you?” the king asked, kindly speaking to Kaha as he got up to leave.
“With my own, O king!” replied the girl, advancing to Mahana and laying her head upon his breast. [521]
“With my own, O king!” replied the girl, stepping toward Mahana and resting her head on his chest. [__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]
“So shall it be, indeed,” returned the king. “I have said it, and you are now the wife of Mahana.”
“So it shall be,” replied the king. “I’ve spoken, and you are now Mahana’s wife.”
In his gratitude the happy young chief threw himself at the feet of the king and said:
In his gratitude, the joyful young chief fell to his knees in front of the king and said:
“I am your slave, great king! Demand of me some great service or sacrifice, that you may know that I am grateful!”
“I am your servant, great king! Ask me for any significant task or sacrifice, so you can see that I am thankful!”
“Even as you desire,” returned the king, “I will put you to a task that will tax to the utmost your patience.”
“Even as you wish,” replied the king, “I will assign you a task that will challenge your patience to the fullest.”
“I listen, O king!” said Mahana, resolutely.
“I hear you, O king!” said Mahana, firmly.
“The sacrifice I ask,” resumed the king, with a merry twinkle in his eye, “is that for full three days from this time you embrace not your bride.”
“The sacrifice I ask,” the king continued, with a cheerful glint in his eye, “is that for a full three days starting now, you don’t embrace your bride.”
“A sacrifice, indeed!” exclaimed Mahana, catching the kindly humor of the request, and slyly glancing at the downcast face of Kaha. “It is—”
“A sacrifice, for sure!” Mahana said, picking up on the lighthearted tone of the request and sneakily looking at Kaha’s sad face. “It is—”
“Too great, I see, for one whose beard is not yet fully grown,” interrupted the king. “Well, I withdraw the request. The girl is yours; take her with you without conditions!”
"Too much, I can see, for someone whose beard isn’t fully grown yet," the king interrupted. "Alright, I take back my request. The girl is yours; take her with you, no strings attached!"
Here the story of the trials of Kaha should end; but it does not. Some time during the night following the death of Kauhi a tidal wave, sent by a powerful shark-god, swept over and destroyed the imus in which the condemned men had been roasted, and their bones were carried into the sea. Through the power of their family gods Kumauna and Keawaawakiihelei were transformed into two peaks in the mountains back of Manoa Valley while Kauhi, who was distantly related to the shark-god, was turned into a shark.
Here the story of Kaha's struggles should come to a close; but it doesn’t. Sometime during the night after Kauhi's death, a tidal wave, sent by a powerful shark god, swept over and destroyed the imus where the condemned men had been roasted, and their bones were carried out to sea. Through the power of their family gods, Kumauna and Keawaawakiihelei, they were transformed into two peaks in the mountains behind Manoa Valley, while Kauhi, who was distantly related to the shark god, was turned into a shark.
For two years Kaha and her husband lived happily together, surrounded by many friends and enjoying every comfort. Her grandfather, Akaaka, visited her frequently, and, knowing of Kauhi’s transformation and vindictive disposition, admonished her to avoid the sea. For two years she heeded the warning; but one day, when her husband was absent and her mother was asleep, she ventured with one of her women to the beach to witness the sports of the bathers and surf-riders. As no harm came to the swimmers, and the water was inviting, she finally borrowed [522]a surf-board, and, throwing herself joyfully into the waves, was carried beyond the reef.
For two years, Kaha and her husband lived happily together, surrounded by many friends and enjoying all the comforts of life. Her grandfather, Akaaka, visited her often and, aware of Kauhi’s transformation and vengeful nature, warned her to stay away from the sea. For two years, she followed this advice; but one day, when her husband was gone and her mother was asleep, she decided to go to the beach with one of her friends to watch the bathers and surfers. Since no harm came to the swimmers and the water looked inviting, she eventually borrowed a surfboard and, joyfully throwing herself into the waves, was swept beyond the reef.
This was the opportunity for which Kauhi had long waited. Seizing Kaha, and biting her body in twain, he swam around with the head and shoulders exposed above the water, that the bathers might note his triumph. The spirit of Kaha at once returned to the sleeping mother and informed her of what had befallen her daughter. Waking and missing Kaha, the mother gave the alarm, and with others immediately proceeded to the beach. The bathers, who had fled from the water on witnessing the fate of Kaha, confirmed the words of the spirit, and canoes were launched in pursuit of the shark, still exhibiting his bloody trophy beyond the reef.
This was the chance Kauhi had been waiting for. Grabbing Kaha, he bit her body in half and swam around with her head and shoulders above the water so the bathers could see his victory. The spirit of Kaha quickly returned to her sleeping mother and told her what had happened to her daughter. When the mother woke up and realized Kaha was missing, she raised the alarm and immediately went to the beach with others. The bathers, who had run from the water after seeing Kaha's fate, confirmed the spirit's words, and canoes were launched to chase the shark, which was still showing off his bloody trophy beyond the reef.
Swimming with the body of Kaha just far enough below the surface to be visible to the occupants of the canoes, the monster was followed to Waianae, where in shallow waters he was seen, with other sharks, to completely devour the remains. This rendered her restoration to life impossible, and the pursuing party returned sadly to Waikiki.
Swimming with Kaha's body just deep enough to be seen by the people in the canoes, the monster was chased to Waianae, where in shallow waters it was seen, along with other sharks, completely devouring the remains. This made her return to life impossible, and the group that had followed her sadly returned to Waikiki.
With the final death of Kaha her parents relinquished their human lives and retired to Manoa Valley. The father is known as Manoa Wind, and his visible form is a small grove of hau trees below Kahaiamano. The mother is recognized as Manoa Rain, and is often met with in the vicinity of the former home of her beloved and beautiful daughter.
With Kaha's final death, her parents gave up their human lives and moved to Manoa Valley. The father is known as Manoa Wind, and he takes the form of a small grove of hau trees below Kahaiamano. The mother is recognized as Manoa Rain and is often seen near the former home of her beloved and beautiful daughter.
The grandparents of Kaha also abandoned their human forms, Akaaka resuming his personation of the mountain spur bearing his name, and his august companion nestling upon his brow in the shape of a thicket of lehua bushes. And there, among the clouds, they still look down upon Kahaiamano and the fair valley of Manoa, and smile at the rains of Kauahuahine, which day by day renew their beauty, and keep green with ferns and sweet with flowers the earthly home of Kahalaopuna. [523]
The grandparents of Kaha also gave up their human forms, with Akaaka taking on the shape of the mountain spur named after him, while his majestic companion rests on his peak as a thicket of lehua bushes. And there, among the clouds, they still look down on Kahaiamano and the beautiful valley of Manoa, smiling at the rains of Kauahuahine, which each day restore their beauty and keep the earthly home of Kahalaopuna lush with ferns and fragrant with flowers. [__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]
[525]
[__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]
APPENDIX.
HAWAIIAN LEGENDS: GLOSSARY.
EXPLANATORY NOTE.
The Hawaiian alphabet proper contains but twelve letters, five vowels and seven consonants, namely: A, E, I, O, U, H, K, L, M, N, P, W. To these are sometimes added R, T and B. No appreciable distinction, however, is observed between the sounds of R and L, T and K, and B and P.
The Hawaiian alphabet consists of only twelve letters: five vowels and seven consonants, which are A, E, I, O, U, H, K, L, M, N, P, and W. Sometimes R, T, and B are included, but there is no significant difference in the sounds between R and L, T and K, or B and P.
The almost invariable sound of A is as pronounced in father; of E as in they; of I as in marine; of O as in mole; of U as in mute. The only general deviation is in giving the vowels long and short sounds. W takes the sound of V in most cases.
The almost constant sound of A is pronounced like in father; E sounds like in they; I is like in marine; O is like in mole; U is like in mute. The only general variation is using the vowels for both long and short sounds. W usually has the sound of V.
Every word and every syllable of the language ends in a vowel, and no two consonants occur without a vowel sound between them.
Every word and every syllable in the language ends with a vowel, and no two consonants appear together without a vowel sound in between them.
The accent of nine-tenths of the words in the language is on the penultimate.
The emphasis of most words in the language is on the second-to-last syllable.
The indefinite article is he; the definite article ka or ke; the plural takes the prefix of na.
The indefinite article is he; the definite article ka or ke; the plural takes the prefix na.
The “O” beginning the metrical lines of chants and meles is not always employed as an interjection. It is used chiefly as a prefix to personal nouns and pronouns in the nominative case.
The "O" that starts the lines of chants and meles isn't always used as an interjection. It's mainly used as a prefix for personal nouns and pronouns in the nominative case.
A.
Aa, the root of any vegetation.
Aa, the foundation of all plants.
Ae, the affirmative; yes.
Yes.
Ao, light.
Ao, brightness.
Aaakoko, a vein or artery.
Aaakoko, a blood vessel.
Auwina la, afternoon.
Auwina la, afternoon.
Akane, an intimate friend.
Akane, a close friend.
Aole, the negative; no.
No.
Ai, food of any kind.
Food of any kind.
Auhau, any tax due to a chief.
Auhau, any tax owed to a chief.
Au, a current; the gale.
Au, a current; the wind.
Auwae, the chin.
Chin.
Aumoe, midnight.
Aumoe, midnight.
Aouli, the sky.
Aouli, the sky.
Aumakua, the spirit of a deceased ancestor.
Aumakua, the spirit of an ancestor who has passed away.
Ailo, chiefs permitted to eat with the king.
Ailo, chiefs allowed to dine with the king.
Ahiahi, evening.
Evening.
Aha-alii, chiefs of accepted and irrevocable rank.
Aha-alii, chiefs of established and permanent rank.
Aha, a sacred tabu prayer, during which any noise was death.
Aha, a sacred tabu prayer, where any noise could mean death.
Ahi, fire.
Ahi, fire.
Ahinahina, the color of gray.
Ahinahina, the color gray.
Aka, a shadow.
Aka, a silhouette.
Akua, a spirit or god.
God, a spirit or deity.
Akepaa, the liver.
Akepaa, the liver.
Akemama, the lungs.
Akemama, the lungs.
Aku, a mythical bird, sacred to the high priesthood.
Aku, a mythical bird, revered by the high priesthood.
Ala, a path, road or way.
Ala, a path, road, or way.
Ala-nui, a great path.
Ala-nui, a great road.
Alaula, the red path; the dawn.
Alaula, the red path; the dawn.
Aho, a breath.
Aho, a breath.
Aha-ula, a feather cape worn by chiefs.
Aha-ula, a feather cape worn by leaders.
Alae, a sacred bird.
Alae, a sacred bird.
Alii-koa, a military leader; a general.
Alii-koa, a military leader; a general.
Aloha, love; love to you; a greeting or salutation.
Aloha, love; love to you; a greeting or hello.
Alii, a chief.
Alii, a leader.
Alii-nui, a great or principal chief.
Alii-nui, a high-ranking or main chief.
Alii-niaupio, Alii-pio, Alii-naha, Alii-wohi and Lo-alii, different grades of chiefs. [526]
Alii-niaupio, Alii-pio, Alii-naha, Alii-wohi and Lo-alii, different grades of chiefs. [__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]
Anu, a receptacle in the inner temple from which issued the oracles.
Anu, a container in the inner temple from which the oracles came.
Anaana, the process of praying another to death.
Anaana, the act of praying someone to death.
Anuenue, a rainbow.
Anuenue, a rainbow.
Ana, a cave or cavern.
Ana, a cave.
Apapani, a little song-bird.
Apapani, a small songbird.
Awa, a plant; an intoxicating drink made of awa; a harbor.
Awa, a plant; a drink that gets you buzzed made from awa; a port.
Awakea, noon.
Awakea, midday.
E.
Ea, breath; air; a fish tabu to women.
Ea, breath; air; a fish tabu for women.
Eleele, black, or dark blue.
Eleele, black or dark blue.
Eha, pain.
Four, pain.
I.
Ia, general name for fish.
Ia, general term for fish.
Ie, a vine for decorating idols.
Ie, a vine used for adorning idols.
Iu, a sacred or tabued place.
Iu, a holy or restricted area.
Ihe, a javelin used in war.
Ihe, a spear designed for combat.
Io, the human flesh.
Io, human flesh.
Ihimanu, a fish tabu to women.
Ihimanu, a fish tabu for women.
Ihu, the nose.
Ihu, the nose.
Iku-nuu, of the royal strain.
Iku-nuu, of royal descent.
Iku-pau, of the priestly or sacred strain.
Iku-pau, of the priestly or sacred lineage.
Ili, the smallest division of land; the bark; the skin.
Ili, the smallest land division; the bark; the skin.
Imu, an oven for cooking.
Imu, a cooking oven.
Ilio, a dog; a stingy person.
Ilio, a dog; a greedy person.
Imu-loa, an oven for baking men.
Imu-loa, an oven for roasting people.
Ipu, a calabash; a vessel; a container.
Ipu, a bowl; a holder; a container.
Iliahi, sandal-wood.
Sandalwood.
Iwi, a small bird with yellow feathers; the bone.
Iwi, a small bird with yellow feathers; the bone.
O.
O, a fork, or pointed implement used in eating.
O, a fork, or a pointed tool used for eating.
Oo, a bird with yellow feathers, used in making royal mantles.
Oo, a bird with yellow feathers, was used to make royal capes.
Oa, the rafters of a house.
Oa, the beams of a house.
Oi-e, a name for the godhead.
Oi-e, a name for the divine.
Oala, a club thrown in battle.
Oala, a club used in combat.
Ohia, a native apple-tree; the fruit of the ohia.
Ohia, a native apple tree; the fruit of the ohia.
Ohia-apane, a species of ohia wood used in making idols.
Ohia-apane is a type of ohia wood used for making idols.
Oho, hair.
Hey, hair.
Ohu, fog.
Ohu, mist.
Oho-kui, a bushy wig sometimes worn in battle.
Oho-kui, a thick wig often worn in combat.
Ola, life.
Ola, life.
Omaomao, green.
Omaomao, green.
One, sand.
One, sand.
Onionio, striped.
Onionio, striped.
Olai, an earthquake.
Olai, an earthquake.
Onini, a surf-board.
Onini, a surfboard.
Omo, a narrow stone adze.
Omo, a slim stone tool.
Oma, a space between two armies where sacrifices were made; the prime minister, or first officer under the king.
Oma, a gap between two armies where offerings were made; the prime minister, or the top official under the king.
Opelu, a fish sacred to the priesthood.
Opelu, a fish revered by the priests.
Opu, the stomach.
Opu, the stomach.
Owili, a surf-board made of wiliwili wood.
Owili, a surfboard made of wiliwili wood.
U.
Ua, a sea-bird; rain.
Ua, a seabird; rain.
Uau, a large marine bird.
Uau, a big sea bird.
Uala, a potato.
Potato.
Uila, lightning.
Uila, lightning.
Uha, the thigh.
Uha, the thigh.
Uhi, a yam.
Uhi, a sweet potato.
Ulu, the bread-fruit.
Ulu, the breadfruit.
Ukeke, an ancient pulsatile musical instrument.
Ukeke, an ancient rhythmic musical instrument.
Ulili, a bamboo flute.
Ulili, a bamboo flute.
Uliuia, a beer made of cane-juice or the ti root.
Uliuia, a beer made from cane juice or the ti root.
Ulu-maika, a game of rolling round stone disks.
Ulu-maika is a game where players roll round stone disks.
Ulaula, red; the sacred color.
Red, the sacred color.
Uliuli, blue.
Uliuli, blue.
Ulunu, a pillow or head-rest.
Ulunu, a pillow or headrest.
Unauna, a tabu mark.
Unauna, a taboo mark.
Unihipili, the spirit of a deceased person.
Unihipili, the spirit of someone who has passed away.
Umiumi, the beard or whiskers.
Umiumi, the beard or facial hair.
H.
Hanai, a foster-child.
Hanai, a foster child.
Haiao, a day sacrifice.
Haiao, a daily offering.
Haole, a foreigner.
Haole, a non-Hawaiian.
Hanuhanu, an ancient pastime.
Hanuhanu, a traditional activity.
Hala, the pandanus-tree.
Hala, the pandanus tree.
Hakaolelo, a chief’s spy; informer; reporter of events.
Hakaolelo, a chief's spy; informant; reporter of events.
Haa, a singing dance.
Haa, a singing dance.
Haipo, a night sacrifice.
Haipo, a nighttime offering.
Haku, a lord; a master.
Haku, a lord; a master.
Hakoko, wrestling, with a variety of holds.
Hakoko, wrestling, using various techniques.
Hailima, the elbow.
Hailima, the elbow.
Hanauna, a relative.
Hanauna, a family member.
Hale, a house or dwelling.
House or dwelling.
Hale-alii, the house of the chief; the royal mansion. [527]
Hale-alii, the chief's house; the royal mansion. [__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]
Hale-lole, a tent or cloth house.
Hale-lole, a tent or fabric house.
Hale-koa, a fort or house of war.
Hale-koa, a military fort or war house.
Hale-lua, a grave or sepulchre.
Hale-lua, a tomb.
Haili, a ghost; a name for a temple.
Haili, a spirit; a name for a place of worship.
Hawane, the cocoa palm.
Hawane, the coconut palm.
Hau, a lascivious dance, or hula.
Hau, a seductive dance, or hula.
Hekili, thunder.
Hekili, thunder.
Heenalu, surf-riding.
Surfing.
Heihei, foot-racing; a large drum.
Heihei, foot race; a big drum.
Heie, the servant of a seer who reported his prophecies.
Heie, the servant of a seer who shared his prophecies.
Heiau, a temple or place of worship.
Heiau, a temple or place to worship.
Hikiee-moe, the stand for a bed.
Hikiee-moe, the support for a bed.
Hia, fire made by friction.
Hia, friction fire.
Hika-po-loa, a name for the godhead.
Hika-po-loa, a term for the divine.
Hiua, a game played on a board with four squares.
Hiua, a game played on a board with four squares.
Hiiaka, a general name for volcanic deities.
Hiiaka, a term used for volcanic gods.
Hikini, sunrise; the east.
Hikini, sunrise; the east.
Hili, a dye, made of barks, for coloring kapa.
Hili, a dye made from tree bark, used for coloring kapa.
Hoa, a companion.
Friend, a companion.
Hoalii, a companion of the chief.
Hoalii, a friend of the chief.
Hoku, a star.
Hoku, a star.
Hoku-paa, the north star.
North Star
Hoku-hele, a planet or “wandering star.”
Hoku-hele, a planet or "wandering star."
Hoku-lele, a meteor.
Hoku-lele, a comet.
Hoku-welowelo, a comet.
Hoku-welowelo, a comet.
Honua, the earth.
Honua, the planet.
Holua, the pastime of sliding down precipitous hills on sledges.
Holua is the activity of sliding down steep hills on sleds.
Hoao, the ancient marriage contract among the chiefs.
Hoao, the old marriage agreement among the chiefs.
Hoalauna, a friendly companion.
Hoalauna, a friendly sidekick.
Hoe, a paddle.
Paddle.
Hoeuli, a rudder or steering-oar.
Hoeuli, a rudder or tiller.
Hoewaa, an oarsman.
Hoewaa, a rower.
Hooilo, the rainy season.
Hooilo, the wet season.
Hookama, an adopted child.
Hookama, an adopted kid.
Hokio, a musical instrument.
Hokio, a musical instrument.
Honu, a turtle.
Honu, a turtle.
Hookupu, gifts to chiefs by their subjects.
Hookupu, gifts given to chiefs by their people.
Hoopalau, a single combat in battle.
Hoopalau, a one-on-one fight in battle.
Hua, an egg.
Hua, an egg.
Hue, a water-calabash or container.
Hue, a water gourd.
Hula, a dance, of which there were many varieties.
Hula is a dance that comes in many different styles.
Hulu, a feather.
Hulu, a feather.
Hulumanu, aids of a chief or king wearing plumes.
Hulumanu, helpers of a chief or king wearing feathers.
K.
Kaai, a girdle put around the loins of a god by a chief.
Kaai, a belt worn around the waist of a god by a chief.
Kao, the star Antares.
Kao, the star Antares.
Kaunoa, a pointed, poisonous shell, making a dangerous wound.
Kaunoa, a sharp, toxic shell, causing a serious injury.
Kapu, or Tabu, a command, or interdict, of which there were several kinds; a prerogative pertaining to chiefs, priests and temples.
Kapu, or Tabu, is a command or restriction that comes in several forms; it was a right associated with chiefs, priests, and temples.
Kane, a husband; the name of one of the godhead.
Kane, a husband; the name of one of the divine beings.
Kauwa, a servant.
Kauwa, a servant.
Kai, the sea.
Sea.
Kaa-i, the neck.
Kaa-i, the neck.
Kanaka, a man; a male.
Kanaka, a guy; a male.
Kanaka-wale, a private citizen.
Kanaka-wale, a private individual.
Kanaka-maoli, an actual slave.
Native Hawaiian, an actual slave.
Kaikamahine, a girl or daughter.
Girl or daughter.
Kaiki-kane, a male child.
Kaiki-kane, a boy.
Kaikunane, a brother.
Brother.
Kaikuahine, a sister.
Sister.
Kaliko, spotted.
Kaliko, seen.
Kaioloa, the ceremony of putting a maro on a god by the women of a chief.
Kaioloa, the ceremony of placing a maro on a god by the chief's women.
Kaumaha, a sacrifice to the gods.
Kaumaha, an offering to the gods.
Kaumihau, a tabu by the high-priest, when a hog was baked, and men were temporarily separated from their wives.
Kaumihau, a tabu by the high priest, when a pig was roasted, and men were briefly kept apart from their wives.
Kakuai, an offering to the gods at daily meals, generally of bananas.
Kakuai, a gift to the gods at everyday meals, usually consisting of bananas.
Kahoaka, the spirit of a living person, claimed to be visible to certain classes of priests.
Kahoaka, the spirit of a living person, claimed to be visible to specific groups of priests.
Kamakini, a tabu worship for the chief alone.
Kamakini, a tabu ritual reserved for the chief only.
Kaula, a prophet.
Kaula, a speaker of God.
Kaula-wahine, a prophetess.
Kaula-wahine, a female prophet.
Kao, a tradition; a dart or javelin.
Kao, a custom; a spear or javelin.
Kaua, war; a battle; an army marching to battle.
Kaua, war; a battle; an army heading into battle.
Kaualau, a plantain.
Kaualau, a type of plantain.
Kakaka, a bow for shooting arrows, not used in war.
Kakaka, a bow for shooting arrows, not used in war.
Kaukaualii, inferior chiefs with titled fathers and untitled mothers.
Kaukaualii, lower-ranking chiefs with titled fathers and untitled mothers.
Kanikau, a funeral dirge; a mournful song.
Kanikau, a funeral song; a sad tune.
Kapa, a native cloth.
Kapa, a traditional fabric.
Kalo, or Taro, a bulbous root from which poi is made.
Kalo, or Taro, is a starchy root used to make poi.
Kahili, a standard of feathers; an emblem of high rank.
Kahili, a feather standard; a symbol of high status.
Kani, music.
Kani, song.
Kahuna, a priest, doctor or sorcerer.
Kahuna, a priest, healer, or magician.
Kahu, a nurse or guardian of a child.
Kahu, a caregiver or protector of a child.
Kahu-alii, chiefs of the lesser nobility acting as personal attendants to the king. [528]
Kahu-alii, chiefs of the lower nobility serving as personal attendants to the king. [__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]
Kapua, a wizard.
Kapua, a sorcerer.
Kaike, a large sacrificial drum.
Kaike, a big ceremonial drum.
Kamaa, sandals.
Kamaa, sandals.
Kapuna, a grandparent.
Kapuna, a grandparent.
Kapuna-kah’ko, ancestors.
Kapuna-kah’ko, ancestors.
Kau, the dry season.
Kau, the dry season.
Keiki, a child.
Kid
Keena, a room or apartment.
Keena, a room or flat.
Keokeo, white.
Keokeo, white.
Kekuielua, a war implement.
Kekuielua, a weapon.
Kino, the body.
Body.
Kilo, a prophet.
Kilo, a seer.
Kihi, the native sweet potato.
Kihi, the native sweet potato.
Kilu, an indoor game of amusement.
Kilu, an indoor game for fun.
Kihei, a cloth worn over the shoulders.
Kihei, a garment draped over the shoulders.
Konane, a game resembling draughts.
Konane, a game like checkers.
Koa, coral; a species of wood; a warrior.
Koa, coral; a type of wood; a fighter.
Koilipi, an axe for cutting stone.
Koilipi, a tool for cutting stone.
Ko, sugar-cane.
Ko, sugarcane.
Koelo, a garden of a chief, cultivated by his people.
Koelo, a chief's garden, tended by his people.
Koheoheo, a poisonous mixture producing speedy death.
Koheoheo, a toxic blend that causes quick death.
Koipohaku, a stone axe.
Koipohaku, a stone ax.
Koloa, a duck.
Koloa, a duck.
Kona, a south wind; the south side of an island.
Kona, a south wind; the southern side of an island.
Koolau, a windward district or division.
Koolau, a district located on the windward side.
Kua, the back of a person.
Kua, the back of a person.
Kuli, the knee.
Knee.
Kuekue, the heel.
Kuekue, the heel.
Kumu, a fish tabu to women.
Kumu, a fish tabu for women.
Kuoha, a prayer to incite sexual love in another.
Kuoha, a prayer to spark sexual attraction in someone else.
Kupua, a sorcerer.
Kupua, a wizard.
Kuai, a war implement.
Kuai, a weapon.
Kuleana, a small landed possession within the boundaries of an estate belonging to another.
Kuleana, a small piece of land within the boundaries of someone else's estate.
Kupee, a string of shells; a bracelet; an ornament.
Kupee, a string of shells; a bracelet; an ornament.
Kuahive, high lands.
Kuahive, highlands.
Kumu, a teacher.
Kumu, a teacher.
Kuahana, a war messenger despatched when a general call to arms was made.
Kuahana, a war messenger sent out when a general call to arms was made.
Kukui, a light; a torch made from the nuts of the kukui tree.
Kukui, a light; a torch made from the nuts of the kukui tree.
L.
Laau, a tree; wood.
Laau, a tree; timber.
Lau, a leaf.
Lau, a leaf.
Lala, a limb.
Lala, an arm.
Lae, the forehead.
Forehead.
La, the sun.
La, the sun.
Lani, the heavens.
Lani, the sky.
Laau-palau, a knife used in husbandry, sometimes in war.
Laau-palau, a knife used for farming, sometimes in battle.
Lanahu, coals.
Lanahu, embers.
Lanai, a veranda, or house with open sides.
Lanai, a porch, or a house with open sides.
Lehelehe, the lips.
Lips.
Lenalena, yellow, the royal color.
Lenalena, yellow, the royal color.
Lei, a wreath of flowers or feathers.
Lei, a garland of flowers or feathers.
Lepa, a flag or ensign.
Lepa, a flag.
Lehua, an aromatic shrub.
Lehua, a fragrant shrub.
Liliha, the fat of hogs.
Liliha, the fat from pigs.
Loko, a lake or pond.
Loko, a lake or pond.
Lima, the hand.
Lima, the hand.
Lou, a hook; a fish-hook.
Lou, a fishing hook.
Loulu, a cocoanut.
Loulu, a coconut.
Luawai, a well.
Luawai, a spring.
Luakina, the house of sacrifice in a temple.
Luakina, the place of offerings in a temple.
Luau, a feast.
Luau, a party.
Lua, an ancient practice of killing by breaking bones.
Lua, an old method of killing by breaking bones.
Luna, an overseer.
Luna, a supervisor.
Lunapai, a war messenger of a king or chief.
Lunapai, a war messenger for a king or chief.
M.
Maa, a sling for throwing stones.
Maa, a sling for throwing stones.
Mahu, steam.
Mahu, steam.
Maiuu, the finger-nails.
Maiuu, the nails.
Mahioli, a feather helmet worn by chiefs.
Mahioli, a feathered helmet used by chiefs.
Maili, a fragrant and greatly esteemed plant.
Maili, a fragrant and highly valued plant.
Mauka, toward the hills or mountains.
Mauka, toward the hills or mountains.
Malama, a month; a purveyor in traveling.
Malama, a month; a provider for those on the move.
Mapuna, a spring.
Spring.
Maka, the eye.
Maka, the eye.
Manamana-lima, a finger.
Manamana-lima, a fingertip.
Manamana-wawae, a toe.
Manamana-wawae, a toe.
Manu, general name for birds.
Manu, general term for birds.
Makuakane, a father or uncle.
Dad, a father or uncle.
Makuahine, a mother or aunt.
Mom or aunt.
Mahini, the moon.
Mahini, the moon.
Mahini-hou, the new moon.
Mahini-hou, the emerging moon.
Mahini-peopeo, the full moon.
Mahini-peopeo, the full moon.
Makani, the wind.
Makani, the breeze.
Makani-ino, a storm.
Makani-ino, a hurricane.
Makalii, the beginning of the Hawaiian new year.
Makalii, the start of the Hawaiian new year.
Maliu, a deified deceased chief.
Maliu, a revered deceased chief.
Maia, a general name for plantains and bananas, tabu to women.
Maia, a common name for plantains and bananas, tabu to women.
Malaolao, evening twilight. [529]
Malaolao, evening twilight. [__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]
Mano, the shark; every species was tabu to women.
Mano, the shark; every species was tabu for women.
Makaainani, the common people.
Makaainani, the everyday people.
Maro, a cloth worn around the loins of males.
Maro is a garment worn around the waist by men.
Mamo, a bird; a royal feather mantle; descendants.
Mamo, a bird; a royal feather cape; descendants.
Manele, a palanquin for chiefs, with four bearers.
Manele, a carriage for chiefs, carried by four bearers.
Mahele, circumcision.
Section, circumcision.
Mahana, chiefs near the throne.
Mahana, chiefs by the throne.
Mele, an historical chant or song.
Mele, a traditional chant or song.
Mele-inoa, a personal chant or song.
Mele-inoa, a personal chant or song.
Moa, a fowl.
Chicken, a bird.
Moo, a lizard.
Moo, a lizard.
Maikai, toward the sea.
Maikai, by the ocean.
Mooolelo, a narrative of past events.
Mooolelo, a story about events that happened in the past.
Mookaao, an historical legend.
Mookaao, a historical legend.
Moko, boxing.
Moko, boxing.
Moko-moko, a boxer.
Moko-moko, a boxer.
Momi, a pearl.
Momi, a pearl.
Moae, the trade winds.
Moae, the trade winds.
Moi, a king, or principal chief.
Moi, a king or main chief.
Mu, the person who procured men for sacrifice.
Mu, the person who arranged for men to be sacrificed.
Muliwai, a stream, or river.
Muliwai, a stream or river.
Mumuku, a violent gust of wind.
Mumuku, a fierce gust of wind.
N.
Naua, a pedigree.
Naua, a purebred.
Nene, a goose.
Nene, a type of goose.
Niu, the cocoanut tree and fruit.
Niu, the coconut tree and fruit.
Ninalo, the fruit of the hala tree.
Ninalo, the fruit of the hala tree.
Noho, a seat.
Noho, a chair.
P.
Pa, a dish or platter; a fence or wall.
Pa, a dish or platter; a fence or wall.
Pau, a short skirt worn by women; completed, finished.
Pau, a short skirt worn by women; done, finished.
Pahale, a lawn or other enclosure.
Pahale, a yard or other enclosed area.
Pahu, a general name for a drum.
Pahu is a general term for a drum.
Papa, a board; a sledge used in the pastime of holua.
Papa, a board; a sled used in the activity of holua.
Papalina, the cheek.
Papalina, the cheeky one.
Paliuli, paradise.
Paliuli, paradise.
Pahi, general term for a knife or cutting instrument.
Pahi, a general term for a knife or cutting tool.
Pakiko, an ancient war implement.
Pakiko, an ancient weapon.
Palala, any tax paid to a chief.
Palala, any tax paid to a leader.
Panalaau, a distant possession of lands.
Panalaau, a far-off territory of land.
Papapaina, a table of any kind.
Papapaina, a table of any kind.
Pahoa, a dagger, generally of wood.
Pahoa, a dagger, usually made of wood.
Palaoa, a carved ivory talisman worn around the neck by chiefs.
Palaoa, a carved ivory necklace charm worn by chiefs.
Pali, a precipice.
Pali, a cliff.
Paiai, pounded taro for making poi.
Paiai, pounded taro for making poi.
Pahoehoe, lava.
Pahoehoe lava.
Pawa, a garden; a small cultivated field.
Pawa, a garden; a small cultivated plot.
Pea, an elevated cross before a heiau, signifying sacred.
Pea, a raised cross in front of a heiau, representing something sacred.
Peleleu, a large double war canoe.
Peleleu is a large double-hulled war canoe.
Pepeiao, the ear.
Pepeiao, the ear.
Pipi, an oyster; clam; shell-fish.
Pipi, an oyster; clam; shellfish.
Poi, the paste of taro.
Taro paste.
Po’i, a cover or lid.
Po’i, a cover or lid.
Poo, the head.
Head honcho.
Poohiwi, the shoulder.
Poohiwi, the shoulder.
Poni, purple.
Poni, purple.
Pokahu, a stone.
Pokahu, a rock.
Pouli ka la, an eclipse.
Pouli ka la, an eclipse.
Po, night; darkness; the realms of death; chaos.
Po, night; darkness; the world of death; chaos.
Pola, a raised platform over double canoes.
Pola, a raised platform on top of two canoes.
Pololu, a long war spear.
Pololu, a long spear.
Pua, a flower.
Pua, a bloom.
Puka, a door.
Puka, a door.
Puuwai, the heart.
Heart.
Puaa, a hog.
Hog.
Puaa-keiki, a pig.
Puaa-keiki, a piglet.
Puahiohio, a whirlwind.
Puahiohio, a tornado.
Puhenehene, an indoor pastime.
Puhenehene, an indoor activity.
Punipeki, a child’s game.
Punipeki, a kid’s game.
Pueo, an owl.
Pueo, a type of owl.
Puana, a leader in meles; a starter of words.
Puana, a leader in meles; a starter of words.
Pukaua, an officer in the army; a captain; a champion.
Pukaua, an army officer; a captain; a champion.
Pule, a prayer.
Prayer
Pulelelua, a butterfly.
Pulelelua, a butterfly.
Punahele, a friend or companion.
Punahele, a close friend.
Puloulou, a tabu staff, crowned with balls of kapa.
Puloulou, a tabu staff, topped with balls of kapa.
Puuku, inferior chiefs, personal attendants of the king.
Puuku, lower-ranking chiefs, personal attendants of the king.
W.
Waa, a general name for canoe.
Waa, a general term for canoe.
Wai, a general name for water.
Wai is a general term for water.
Waiali, the platform from which chiefs addressed the people.
Waiali, the place where chiefs spoke to the people.
Wahine, a woman; females generally.
Woman; generally refers to females.
Wahi-moe, a bed.
Wahi-moe, a mattress.
Wahie, wood for burning.
Wahie, firewood.
Wanaao, the dawn.
Wanaao, the sunrise.
Wawae, a leg or foot.
Wawae, a leg or foot.
Waipuilani, a waterspout.
Waipuilani, a waterspout.
Wauti, the inner bark of a tree from which cloth is made.
Wauti is the inner bark of a tree used to make cloth.
Wahine-hoao, the real wife. [530]
Wahine-hoao, the true wife. [__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]
Wili, lightning.
Wili, lightning.
Wiliwili, a light wood from which surf-boards were made.
Wiliwili is a lightweight wood that was used to make surfboards.
CARDINAL NUMBERS.
- One, Akahi.
- Two, Alua.
- Three, Akolu.
- Four, Aha.
- Five, Alima.
- Six, Aono.
- Seven, Ahiku.
- Eight, Awalu.
- Nine, Aiwa.
- Ten, Umi.
- Eleven, Umikumamakahi.
- Twelve, Umikumamalua.
- Thirteen, Umikumamakolu.
- Fourteen, Umikumamaha.
- Fifteen, Umikumamalima.
- Sixteen, Umikumamaono.
- Seventeen, Umikumamahiku.
- Eighteen, Umikumamawalu.
- Nineteen, Umikumamaiwa.
- Twenty, Iwakalua.
- Twenty-one, Iwakaluakumamakahi.
- Twenty-two, Iwakaluakumamalua.
- Twenty-three, Iwakaluakumamakolo.
- Twenty-four, Iwakaluakumamaha.
- Twenty-five, Iwakaluakumamalima.
- Twenty-six, Iwakaluakumamaono.
- Twenty-seven, Iwakaluakumamahiku.
- Twenty-eight, Iwakaluakumamawalu.
- Twenty-nine, Iwakaluakumamaiwa.
- Thirty, Kanakolu.
- Forty, Kanaha.
- Fifty, Kanalima.
- Sixty, Kanaono.
- Seventy, Kanahiku.
- Eighty, Kanawalu.
- Ninety, Kanaiwa.
- One hundred, Hookahi haneri (modern).
- One thousand, Hookahi tausani (modern).
NAMES OF THE MONTHS.
- January, Makalii.
- February, Kaelo.
- March, Kaulua.
- April, Nana.
- May, Welo.
- June, Ikiiki.
- July, Kaaona.
- August, Hinaieleele.
- September, Hilinehu.
- October, Hilinama.
- November, Ikuwa.
- December, Welehu.
NAMES OF THE DAYS OF THE MONTH.
- 1st, Hilo.
- 2d, Hoaka.
- 3d, Kukahi.
- 4th, Kulua.
- 5th, Kukolo.
- 6th, Kupau.
- 7th, Olekukahi.
- 8th, Olekulua.
- 9th, Olekukolu.
- 10th, Olekupau.
- 11th, Huna.
- 12th, Mohalu.
- 13th, Hua.
- 14th, Akua.
- 15th, Hoku.
- 16th, Mahealani.
- 17th, Kulu.
- 18th, Laaukukahi.
- 19th, Laaukulua.
- 20th, Laaupau.
- 21st, Olekukahi.
- 22d, Olekulua.
- 23d, Olepau.
- 24th, Kaloakukahi.
- 25th, Kaloakulua.
- 26th, Kaloapau.
- 27th, Kane.
- 28th, Lono.
- 29th, Mauli.
- 30th, Muku.
List of Illustrations
- Kalakaua
- MAP of the HAWAIIAN ISLANDS 6
- Feathered War Helmet. 11
- GROUP OF ANCIENT WEAPONS. 14
- Princess Liliuokalani. 22
- Princess Kauilani. 30
- The Puloulou or Taboo Mark. 32
- Ancient deities. 34
- Ku-Kaili-Moku, the War God of Kamehameha I. 40
- Kalaipahoa, War Goddess of Poison, Molokai. 43
- General Dominis, Consort of the Heir-Apparent. 48
- Meeting Place of an Ancient Secret Society. 52
- Palaoa, a talisman worn around the neck. 56
- Surfboard. 57
- Pahu drum. 58
- GROUP OF NATIVE IMPLEMENTS. 59
- Type of Ancient King in State. 72
- Type of Scenery—on the Road to Kilauea, Hawaii. 100
- The Pali, near Honolulu. 118
- Type of Scenery—on the Island of Kauai. 140
- Bird’s-eye View of the Crater of Kilauea. 154
- Type of Scenery. 254
- Small Temple on Kauai, 1793. 294
- Kapiolani 315
- Conveying the Body of Kalaniopuu to Honaunau. 360
- The God “Kumauna,” Four Miles above Hilea, Hawaii. 400
- Interior of an Ancient Temple. 432
- Ancient Temple by the Sea-Shore, 1793. 438
Colophon
Availability
Metadata
Title: | The Legends and Myths of Hawaii: The Fables and Folk-Lore of a Strange People | |
Author: | David Kalakaua (1836–1891) | Info |
Editor: | Rollin Mallory Daggett (1831–1901) | Info |
Language: | English | |
Original publication date: | 1888 | |
Keywords: | Folklore -- Hawaii | |
Legends -- Hawaii | ||
Library of Congress: | 96026245 | |
Open Library (Book): | OL24622358M | |
Open Library (Work): | OL15696462W |
Revision History
- 2018-02-13 Started.
External References
Corrections
The following corrections have been applied to the text:
The following corrections have been made to the text:
Page | Source | Correction | Edit distance |
---|---|---|---|
70 | Figis | Fijis | 1 |
78, 251, 342, 388, 461, 475, 530 | [Not in source] | . | 1 |
256 | darwn | drawn | 2 |
400 | I | [Deleted] | 2 |
404 | determind | determined | 1 |
452 | ‘ | “ | 1 |
454 | Aiwohikupau’s | Aiwohikupua’s | 2 |
473 | ’ | ” | 1 |
506 | ”! | !” | 2 |
526, 527 | . | , | 1 |
530 | Awakaluakumamahiku | Iwakaluakumamahiku | 1 |
530 | Awakaluakumamawalu | Iwakaluakumamawalu | 1 |
530 | Awakaluakumamaiwa | Iwakaluakumamaiwa | 1 |
Download ePUB
If you like this ebook, consider a donation!